mmm 2S1'' n ■(.. •jsmsstS'Ssm^c^issst^siiii^ s CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY FROM Miss Aa.-U-stH •.niM.-^ns and ^'rs, J. P. Tanner Dw«n^» Cornell University Library BV2040 .N529 1856 Cyclopedia of missions. olin 3 1924 029 338 203 Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924029338203 / \ CYCLOPEDIA OF MISSIONS; CONTAINING A COMPREHENSIVE VIEW OF MISSIONARY OPERATIONS THROUGHOUT THE WORLD; WITH GEOGRAPHICAL DESOEIPTIONS, AND ACCOUNTS OF THE SO CIAL, MORAL, AND RELIGIOUS CONDITION OF THE PEOPLE. BT REV. HARVET NEWCOMB SECOND REVISED EDITION. — FIFTH THOUSAND. WITH THE LATEST 00EEECTION8. NEW YOEK: CHARLES SCRIBNER, 37V & 379 BROADWAY, (SECOND FLOOE.) 1856. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1854, by CHARLES SOEIBNBK. In the Clerk's OflBce of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New Torli. RnSSELL & Co., Phinterb Beekman-street. Stereotyped by TJT>r^^T^TT'C^? PREFACE. In presenting to the Christian public the " Cyclopedia of Missions," it becomes me, first of all, to acknowledge the good Providence of God, which has enabled me to accomplish a work of such difBculty and magnitude, in so short a time. The en^ terprise was entered upon with much misgiving ; but every obstacle has been removed out of the way, as the work has proceeded. The preparation of the manuscript was commenced on the 12th of January last. On the 10th of June, we commenced the process of stereotyping, having about half the manuscript in hand. The work of printing has progressed as rapidly as it could conveniently be done ; and we have not been delayed a single day for want of copy, though the manuscripts have often been received by mail the very day they were wanted. The whole will be completed a lit- tle before the first of November, making more than four months occupied in printing. If it be asked how such a work could be thoroughly prepared, in so short a time, we answer, by division of labor. There have beeu more than twenty different persons engaged upon it. It has been a work of immense labor ; but the labor has been so divided that each one has had ample time to do his part thoroughly. At the same time, a general unity of plan and design has been secured, an outline of every article having been furnished by the Editor. And here I would acknowledge my great obli- gations to those gentlemen who have kindly consented, at my request, to aid me in this important undertaking ; as, without such aid, it would have required years to ac- complish it. Their names appear at the close of their several articles, and will afford a sufficient guaranty of thoroughness and accuracy. The articles which appear with- out a name have been prepared, either in whole or in part, by the Editor. The por- tions relating to the missions of the American Baptist Union have been furnished by the author of the valuable and interesting " History of American Baptist Missions ;" and those of the Methodists in this country and England, by a respected clergyman of that denomination, whose name was mentioned to me by the Secretary of the Meth- odist Missionary Society, as the most suitable person to undertake it. The missions of the Presbyterian Board, have been chiefly taken (by permission,) from Rev. J. C. Lowrie's " Manual of Missions." The article on the church of Rome and its missions was prepared by a Roman Catholic layman. We have aimed to make the entire work truly catholic in its character and spirit, giving to every mission the degree of prominence to which it is properly entitled by its age, importance, and success, without respect to the denomination of Christians which supports it ; and nothing can present a brighter or more cheering view- of the essential unity of the different denominations of evangelical Protestants, than their operations on missionary ground, where they are found adopting the same general measures, preaching the same Christ, and receiving the seal of the same Holy Spirit upon their labors. But, while I hold myself responsible for the general character of the work, I would not be understood as adopting every opinion expressed, or of vouch- ing for every statement made by my respected contributors. IV PREFACE. The gentlemen who have furnished these contributions have been induced to under- take the work, from the interest which they have felt in the cause of missions, and their belief of the importance of this enterprise to that cause. They have fulfilled their engagements faithfully, and with great promptness ; and I have the satisfaction of believing that the work is much more valuable than it would have been, if I had done the whole myself. They will accept this public expression of my thanks, as well as of my high appreciation of their labors. I would also, in this place, return my sin- cere thanks to the officers of the several Missionary Societies, for the kind encourage- ment which they have given me, in the prosecution of this work, and especially to the American Board, who have granted me the free use of their extensive and valuable library, and also encouraged the enterprise by subscribing for 100 copies of the work. I return thanks, also, to those numerous friends of the cause, who have given me kind words of encouragement, and subscribed for copies of the work. In the preparation of the matter and in the supervision of the press, no pains have been spared to secure accuracy ; and yet it would be strange, if, in so large a work, consisting, to so great an extent, of statements of facts and numbers, no mistakes should occur. Yet, if an error should be occasionally discovered, we think it should not, in the mind of a reasonable man, impair confidence in the general accuracy of the whole. This volume brings down the history and results of missionary operations to the present time. It contains a large amount of valuable information that is generally inaccessible, and only to be found in a few missionary libraries, spread out in series of volumes, extending through a period of half a century. It is here presented in a convenient form for reading, consultation, and reference. It is, however, not only a book to be consulted for reference, but, a book to be read ; many of the sketches and narratives being of thrilling interest. No future revision or alteration is contemplated in this volume, beyond the correction of errors. It will always be as valuable a record of the past, as it is now. But if anything further shall be called for, to bring up the history of missions and the progress of Christianity, to any future time, other volumes may be added, either periodically or occasionally, ac- cording to the demand. It will readily be perceived that the copyright of this work has cost me no incon- siderable outlay of means, in addition to my own time and labor ; as such contributions as appear in this book could not be expected without compensation. It will require a sale of ten thousand copies to remunerate me. It has, hkewise, been a very expensive work to my publisher ; and the price of the book has been put so low, in order to se- cure a general circulation, that his profits will be very small, and it will require a large sale to repay what he has already advanced. But, knowing the value of the book, and having confidence in the disposition of the Christian public to patronize a good object, we have ventured upon the undertaking, with the confident expectation that we should be sustained by a remunerative sale. Explanations, Sfc. — The sketches of missionary operations are chiefly given under geographical heads. For example, full accounts of the missions of the several societies in India are given under the head of Hindostan. Other geographical articles relate to Christian lands, as Europe, United States, &c., showing the religious condition and resources of the Christian world. There are several articles, however, which derive their title from the people, as Armenians, Nestorians, &c. There are likewise a num- ber of articles relating to the work of affiliated societies, which have an indirect bear- ing upon missionary operations. All the missions to the ancient people of God, are comprised under the head of Jews. The notices of missionary stations are designed chiefly as a guide to finding them on the maps. But, when any interesting informa- tion respecting the places occupied as missionary stations, not contained in the ac- counts of the mission, has come to hand, it has been inserted under the head of the station. From the very nature of the case, however, these notices are incomplete, as new stations are being occupied continually ; and concerning many old ones, it has been impossible to find any information that would be of any value even in finding them on the maps. There are also many articles on miscellaneous topics, connected with mis- PREFACE. y sionary operations, the condition of the heathen, &c., which contain valuable informa- tion. The Missionary Societies are treated under their several titles, giving an account of their origin, the number of their missions, missionaries, converts, amount of receipts, &c. Thus, a greater amount of valuable information, in regard to the movements of the age, is compressed within these pages than was ever before comprised in a single volume, or any one series of volumes. And the matter here given to the public is not a mere compilation, but almost the whole of it has been written anew expressly for this work. As the materials have been collected from a very wide range, and to a great extent from original sources, I have not thought it necessary always to give specific credit, except where the reference might be of advantage, in a more full exa- mination of the subject. Maps. — The various maps, which accompany the work, will be found to cover nearly all the ground occupied by foreign missions. They will generally be placed near the descriptions of missionary operations in the countries which they describe. But, some- times, a place described will be found on a map placed at a distance from the matter which relates to it. For instance, some of the stations of the Baptist Mission in As- sam will be found on the map of Bengal. The following is a list of the maps, arranged according to location: On Africa, 7, viz.: Africa South of the Equator, South- ern Africa, Western Africa, Liberia, Cape Palmas,Sherhro ^ MendiYomha ; On India, 5 : India, Southern India and Ceylon, Western India, Bengal, and Northern India ; Burmah, Siam, ^c. 1 ; China, 1 ; Fuhchuu, 1 ; Sandwich Islands, 1 ; Other Pacific Islei, 2 ; New-Zealand and Van Dieman's Land, 1 ; Australia, 1 ; West Indies, 4, viz. : St. Kitts and Antigua, Jamaica, St. Thomas and St. Croix and Surinam ; In- dian Territory, 1 ; Labrador and Greenland, 1 ; Western Asia, 6, viz. : Armenia, Aintab and vicinity, Nestorians, Constantinople and vicinity, Syria, Thessalonica ; mak- ing 32 in all. These maps are some of them original, having been drawn by mis- sionaries who have been on the ground. Others have been compiled with much labor. They may not contain all the stations ; but where any are lacking, they can easily be located from a description, and with the aid of the scale of miles. Spelling and Pronunciation of Proper Names. — I have been requested to give the accurate spelling and pronunciation of the foreign names, which occur in Mission- ary intelligence ; and at first I designed to do so ; but I soon found that it was utter- ly impracticable. The diversity of spelling is so great that it would be impossible to follow any rule ; and as the missionaries, in spelling, use the Roman letters to express as nearly as possible the sound of a foreign tongue, ij would be presumptuous in me to attempt, by any other combination of the same letters, to express more perfectly sounds that I have never heard. What leads to the diversity of spelling is, the at- tempts of different persons to express, by different combinations of the Roman charac- ters, sounds that have no corresponding utterances in our language. The most that I can do, is to give a few simple rules, and endeavor to be consistent with myself in spelling the same words alike in different parts of the book ; in which last particular, however, I am not confident that, in every instance, I have succeeded. The following systems have been adopted by missionaries in different parts of the world : I. Chinese. — The following system of spelling and pronouncing Chinese names is that adopted by Williams, in his " Middle Kingdom." Powers of the Letters. 1. a as in far ; ■ 11. au as ow ; 2. a as in American ; 12. eu, as in colloquial phrase say'em. 3. e as in mm ; 13. ia as in yard ; e. g. kia, kiang, prose, heii, 4. i as in ifiey; hedng. 5. i as in pin ; 14. rau is made by joining Nos. 5 and 11. 6. i as in machine ; 15. ie as in Siefrra (Spanish.l h. as in Icmg ; 16. iu as in pew, pure, lengthened to a diph- 8. M as in fSl ; thong. 9. ii as in I'une (Pr.) or union ; 17. iu£ is made by adding a short e to tho 10. ai as in aisle, longer than i in pine. The preceding. combination ei is more slender than ai, 18. ui as in Louisiana. though the difference is slight. VI , PREFACE. The consonante are generally sounded as they are in the English alphabet. . II. Hawaiian. — The missionaries at the Sandwich Islands, in reducing the language to wrii> ing, have adopted a portion of the Eoman alphabet, giving the vowels the following sounds : a as in father ; i as in machine, or as long e ; e as in they, or as long a in pale ; o as in no ; m as oo in too. The full accent is usually on the last vowel but one, and a secondary accent two syllables before the full. In the diphthongal combinations, ae, ai, ao, and au, each letter retains its origi- nal sound, but when spoken in quick succession, combine together in a diphthong. Consonants are not doubled, and never end a word or syllable. — Bingham's History of the Sandwich Islands III. Akmenian and Tukkish. — 1. Sounds of Vowels. a as in far. it as in but, e as o in fate. oo as in moon, i as in machine. oi as i in ivy. as in note. eu as the French eu in pete, u as in unit. Note. — Some of the above are but approximations to the vowel sounds designed to be ex- pressed. E and o, for example, are not quite so broad and open as the corresponding English sounds. Ai is strictly a diphthong, the elements of which are indeed the same as our long i, but not so closely united in pronunciation. U in Armenian names is best represented as above ; but in Turkish words it corresponds more exactly with the French u as in une. The sound represented by m is more exactly that of the French e in le, me, &c. 2. Sounds of Consonants. g always hard, as in good, ch as in chain. s as in sun. zh as in pleasure. Gh and kh are guttural sounds, having no corresponding sounds or characters in English or French. The former resembles the modern Greek y, and the latter Xi but both are deeper. C to be used only in connection with h, except in words that have become anglicized with c in them. /, sh, and in general the consonants not mentioned above, to be sounded as in English. The combination tA does not occur ; when, therefore, the letters occur together, they are to be regarded as belonging to diiFerent syllables, and each to have its own proper sound ; e. g. Fethi, pronounced Fet-hi. 3. Accent. — The accent, which is slight, is uniformly on the last syllable in Armenian proper names, and nearly so in Turkish. All the other syllables should be uttered fully, and with equal stress of voice. 4. Anglicized Proper Names. — Names which have been long familiar to English and American readers, and have thus become anglicized, not to be changed. Such are Constanti- nople, Smyrna, Scio, Mitylene, Nicomedia, Philadelphia, &c. In fact, being for the most part Greek names, they do not strictly fall within the rules above given. Monthly Concert. — One object which I have had in view, in the preparation of this work, has been to provide the means of adding interest and value to the Monthly Concert. The practice of appointing committees to report >at this meeting on the va- rious portions of the Missionary Field, is extending in the churches ; and where it is well carried out, it adds greatly to the interest of the meeting, and by engaging the leading minds in the church in the personal examination of the field, it tends greatly to extend and deepen the missionary spirit. But, wlienever this is atteippted, those engaged in it are met with the insurmountable difficulty of not having access to the materials for giving a complete view of scarcely a single mission in the world. This book will obviate this difficulty, not only by giving a complete, though brief historical sketch of almost every existing mission in the world ; but it Will generally point out where further information can be obtained. It also provides the means of examining the localities on the maps. And from these maps, rough ones may be constructed for use in the lecture room, (in addition to Bidwell's large maps,) with very little labor and no other expense than a few sheets of cartridge paper, some India ink, and a little' car- mine. And besides what is strictly missionary, the work contains a great amount of information respecting the resources of Christendom and the religious movements of the age, which may be made the basis of effective remark. With these explanations of the author's views, this work, which has cost him so great an amount of thought, labor, and anxiety, is commended to the kind considera- tion of the Christian public, in the humble yet confident hope that it may be useful. Brooklyn, Nov. 1, 1S54-. CYCLOPEDIA OE MISSIONS. ABBBOKUTA : The capital town of the Torubas, in West Africa, and the principal Btation of the Church Missionary Society in that country. It is situated 100 miles inland North of Badagry in the Bight of Benin, and contains 30,000 inhabitants. (See Yoruba, and Africa West.) ABtlNAQUIS: A tribe of Indians in Lower Canada, among whom the AmerioaD Board support a native missionary. ABYSSINIA : A rich, mountainous dis- trict of Eastern Africa, known to the ancients as Ethiopia. It is bounded on the northwest by Nubia, on the northeast by the Eed Sea, on the south by the country of the Gallas, and on the west by countries almost unknown. Its extent is estimated at about 245,000 geographical miles. The country rises in terraces from the shores of the Eed Sea, till it swells into lofty pyra- mids and abrupt peaks, whose heads are crown- ed with imperishable snowa. Pasture lands almost entirely destitute of trees, though well watered, stretch themselves before the eye in the perspective, through a great part of the more elevated regions, some portions of which are cultivated with care. They are richly stocked with flocks and herds. The country is plentifully supplied with streams. For about 1400 miles from its mouth, the Nile receives no tributary. Here, in latitude 18° N. flows in the Takkazie, from Abyssinia, around whose head-waters is the modern king- dom of Tigre. The Blue Nile unites with this at Khartum, in latitude 15° 37' N. ; and around its sources and to the North, is Am- hara. The country, encircled by ita spiral course, is Gojam. In latitude 9° 35' N., at the verge of the table land, which terminates the water-shed from the East, is Ankobar the capi- tal of the kingdom of Shoa, the most impor- tant and best known of the kingdoms into which modern Abyssinia is divided. There is every variety of climate, from the stifled and in- tense heat of the narrow valleys, to the delicious and exhilarating atmosphere of the elevated ta^ ble lands, and even to the perpetual frosts of the siioiv-capt mo'iiitains. Thp year divides itself ' into two seasons — the one of storms and inun- dations, and the other of drought and burning heat. Every tree and every bush in Abyssinia not only retains its verdure, but bears blossoms and fruit at all seasons of the year. This re- gion is rich in iron and gold, the latter being found in the sands on the shores and in the bed of the streams. The entrance to Abys- sinia for Europeans is the town of Massowah, built on an island in the Eed Sea. The place of greatest note, at present, is Adowa, which contains about 6000 people. Till Abyssinia was overrun by the Gallas, Amhara was the residence of the sovereign, who now makes Gondar his capital. Inhabitants. — The population is estimated at 4,000,000 to 5,000,000. The color of the Abyssinians varies from black to transpar- ent copper color. They are well made and active, and distinguished from the negro by the regularity of their features. They are not deficient in the capacities of the un- derstanding or the affections of the heart. In the southwestern part of the country they are better informed and more civilized than the people of Tigre, who are rude and uncultivated, passionate and violent. The Abyssinians, in their high mountain-home, have been able to maintain their liberty and independence, never having been subdued by the Turks ; but the Gallas have recently made inroads upon their territory. The country is covered with cities and villages, and isolated habitations are here and there seen clinging to the sides of the moun- tains. The houses are mostly composed of mud, straw, and rushes. Caves are also some- times used for human habitations. The dwell- ings of the superior families consist of a num- ber of rooms, arranged around an open court. The clothing of the poorer classes is very sim- ple, consisting of skins or pieces of cotton. Their food is principally milk and bread, but- ter, honey, beef, mutton, and fowls. In Abyssinia the women are charged with the most oppressive and irksome labors, both in the house and in the field. They cultivate the arronnd, ^rather the harvest, 5;riiid the corn, aud 8 ABYSSINIA. procure provisions and water for the families, and that often with their infants in their arms. But the education of the children is better a1> tended to than in most easterrt countries, and they are distinguished for filial affection and obedience, and respect for the aged. The common people generally marry, the sons at 18, and the daughters at 14. When arrived at an advanced age most of them become monks or nuns. If sick, they deliver over their pro- perty to their children, who support them till their death, with much filial piety. About half the young people enter into service at 15 or 16, mostly for the remainder of their lives. The servants are kindly treated. The Chris- tians do not sell their slaves ; but sometimes give them away. Langvage. — The ancient language of Ethio- pia, called the Olieez, was, down to the 14th century, spoken throughout Ethiopia ; and all the ancient records are in this language ; but it has generally fallen into disuse, and the pre- sent spoken language is the Amharic. Government. — The old Abyssinian, or Ethio- pic empire, is now broken into fragments, each constituting a petty kingdom, the governments of which are, so far as our information ex- tends, arbitrary and despotic. Religion. — The fragments of the old empire still profess Christianity, though both Moham- medans and Pagans have broken in and settled among them. Among these, the Gallas are the most remarkable. About the year 1500 they poured into the country in multitudes, and seized many of its fairest portions ; and they have kept up a perpetual and harassing war- fare ; but many of their tribes have been made tributary to the modern kingdom of Shoa, and not a few of them have been reduced to slavery. The best writers consider the conversion of the Abyssinians to Christianity to have taken place about the year 330, when Atha- nasius was Bishop of Alexandria. Meropius, a gentleman of Tyre, a Greek and a Chris- tian, being cast away on the rocks of Abys- sinia, was slain by the barbarous natives. Two young men, Frumentius and Bdesius, his companions, on whom he had bestowed a libe- ral education, being carried to the king, he, on account of their diligence and industry, gave them their liberty. They afterwards rose into favor with the court, and were appointed to imporla:it offices, that of Frumentius being the charge of the young prince's education. And besides instructing him in the learning of the times, he inspired him with a love and venerar tion for the Christian religion. After the king's death, Frumentius, thinking it his duty to take advantage of the position in which Providence had placed him, to propagate the faith among the Abyssinians, procured ordination as Bishop of Ethiopia, from Athanasius, Bishop of Alex- andria, and returning, baptized a great number of the people, ordained a regular clergy, and built churches. Ever since their conversion, the Abyssinians have received their Patriarcha from Alexandria, and their creed has always been the same as that of the Copts. (See Copts.) The first discovery of the existence of this church appears to have been made by some adventurers sent out by John 11., king of Por- tugal. The king was so much interested in the account which they gave of these Christiana that he sent out Pedro Cavilham, to ascertain the state of the people, who entered Abyssinia in 1490. After this, several embassies passed between the two courts, and at length a sort of alliance was entered into between the two countries, which excited the jealousy of their Mohammedan neighbors, and brought upon Abyssinia a ruinous and destructive war. Zag- ba Zaba, the ambassador sent by Abyssinia, in 152'?, having published his creed, was, at the instance of Bermudas, thrown into prison for heresy. The emperor of Abyssinia, finding himself engaged in a war, in consequence of his alliance with Portugal, sent Bermudas, a Portuguese then in Abyssinia, to Rome and Lisbon for succors. But before Bermudas started on his embassy, the Abuna or Patri- arch of Abyssinia, was ordered to consecrate him bishop, and nominate him his successor. Bermudas first went to Rome, and was con- secrated Patriarch of Ethiopia by the Pope, and recommended to the king of Portugal to solicit succors for Ethiopia. In the mean time, the emperor died, and his son Claudius gained some advantages over the Mohammedans before any Portuguese arrived, but was afterwards driven to the mountains. Bermudas, on his return, succeeded in joining the young emperor, with a few Portuguese ; and in an encounter, the Mohammedan chief lost his life, and Clau- dius was put in quiet possession of his throne. The Portuguese now demanded that the em- peror should embrace the Catholic faith, and give up one-third of his kingdom to the Por- tuguese. And this demand was accompanied with a threat of excommunication, and the loss of the service of the Portuguese. The em- peror replied to Bermudas, declaring that he, as Patriarch, had no authority in the empire, and that the Pope himself was a heretic. He also ordered Bermudas to be seized and put in prison, and sent immediately to Alexandria for an Abuna for the Abyssinian church. Soon after this, Ignatius Loyola sent a Pa- triarch, two bishops, and ten Jesuits to convert Abyssinia to Borne. Claudius was by no means pleased with this new arrival. Oviedo, the bishop, soon after his arrival, haughtily de- manded his submission to Rome, which demand was promptly resisted. Tet, Oviedo persevered, growing more insolent in his demands. The matter was submitted to a Council, in which the emperor entered into a public debate with the Jesuit, and afterwards wrote an answer to a tract published by the bishop. Being foiled in this way, Oviedo resorted to the terrors oi excommunication, and meanwhile sent a re- ABYSSmiA, quest to Goa for some Portuguese soldiers to aid in tlie conversion of the Abyssinians. But this wise king was soon after slain in battle, in defending his dominions from the invasion of the Mohammedan king of Adel. Oviedo still plied his arts with the successors of Claudius, but with no better success ; in the midst of which, he was recalled by the Pope, and sent to Japan ; not, however, without assuring the Pope that, " with the assistance of 500 or 600 good Portuguese soldiers, he could at any time reduce the empire of Abyssinia to the obedience of the Pontificate," and intimating that it was a region abounding with the finest gold. But, notwithstanding the failure of these at> tempts, the Jesuits sent another mission to Abyssinia in 1588, one of whom was Peter Pays, who arrived in Ethiopia in 1603. Find- ing Za Dangel, a weak prince, on the throne, these Jesuits succeeded in ingratiating them^ selves into his favor, inducing him not only to embrace the Romish faith, but to order all his subjects to follow his example. In this, the emperor was strongly opposed by the Patriarch, his son-in-law, viceroy of the Tigre, and a ma- jority of the people. Yet, in spite of all en- treaty, and after being warned of the ruin he was bringing upon his country, he persisted in adhering to the policy set on foot by the Jesu- its. The result was, a civil war, which raged with great violence for a number of years ; the emperor, for some time being victorious, and piu-suing the Romish plan of burning heretics, drenched his dominions in blood, his subjects rising in all quarters, and in one instance, 20,000 peasants coming against him from the mountains. At length, he was so far brought to his senses as to proclaim an act of tolera- tion ; and on his death, his son re-established the religion of his fathers, and drove from his dominions those execrable Jesuits, who for more than 25 years had been sowing discord, and stirring up a weak prince to massacre his peo- ple, and even to call in the aid of Moham- medans to butcher his own Christian subjects ! In the beginning of the 18th century, a French Jesuit, Brevedent, attempted a mission to Abyssinia, accompanied by a physician named Poncet ; but the former died on the way. The latter visited Abyssinia, and after- wards published a book containing valuable information respecting the state of the country at that time. In 1714, Pope Clement XI. sent out four German monks as missionaries to Abyssinia, who got in favor with the emperor ; but as soon as the Abyssinian monks got wind of it, they raised a rebellion, dethroned the emperor, and placed a youthful prince on the throne, who condemned the missionaries to be stoned. A reprieve was offered them, if they would abjure the faith of Rome. They recoiled with horror at the suggestion, and the punish- ment was commuted to exile. But the monks urged the execution of the original sentence, and the emperor yielded. This event, though by no means to be palliated, shows how intense was the hatred excited by the intrigues of the Jesuits, against Rome ; and how the persecut- ing spirit, which they introduced, recoiled upon their own heads. Thus it appears that the Abyssinians have preserved their ancient faith, both against the sword of Mohammed and the more insidious and dangerous arts of the Jesuits. Yet, whe- ther there remains any vitality or spiritual life among them, may be questioned. The Edin- burgh Encyclopedia says : " The religion of Abyssinia consists of a motley collection of traditions, tenets, and ceremonies, derived from the Jewish and Christian churches. In their form of worship, Judaism seems to predominate. The rites of Moses are strictly observed. Both sexes are circumcised ; meats prohibited by the Jews are abstained from ; brothers marry the wives of their deceased brothers ; women ob- serve the legal purifications ; Saturday and Sunday are held sacred as sabbaths ; and per- sons under Jewish disqualifications are pro- hibited from entering the church. They have festivals and saints innumerable. One day is consecrated to Balaam's ass ; another to Pon- tius Pilate and his wife, because he washed his hands before pronouncing sentence on Christ,, and because she warned him to have nothing to do with that just person. The Epiphany is celebrated with peculiar festivity, and they have four seasons of lent, in which many abstain even from fish. They so abound in legends and miracles, that the Jesuits were obliged to deny that miracles are a sufficient proof of the truth of a religion. Images they abhor, but have their churches hung round with pictures, to which they pay the highest veneration. Their canon of Scripture is the same as ours. Upon the whole, it may be said that the religion of the Abyssinians is a monstrous heap of super- stitions, giving rise to disputes and persecutions, without producing any salutary effect upon the sCEtiments and conduct of its professors." Bishop Gobat, however, says that, " Al- though the Christian religion in Abyssinia has entirely degenerated into superstition, yet there is still sufficient of it to attach us to the Chris- tians of that country, and to engage us to con- sider them as brethren." He thinks their ro ligion exerts some good effects upon them ; yet he says, " They have no idea of the salutary doctrines of Christianity ; such as justification by faith ; the work of grace ; and the sanctify- ing influences of the Holy Spirit ;" and that " their morals are exceedingly corrupt. But, in the midst of the chaos of corruption, there are some traces of goodness, which, like pre- cious stones, have remained dispersed among the moral ruins of Abyssinia." Mohammedans. — The Mohammedans appear to have lately multiplied in Abyssinia. They live on friendly terms with the Christians. They are engaged principally in trade, and have the exclusive traffic in slaves, the Chris- 10 ABYSSINIA. tians never engaging in it They are ignorant of their own creed, and pay little attention to the rites of Islamism ; and in morals, they are, in every respect, inferior to the Christians. Falashm or Jews. — The Falashm live entirely separate from the Christians, and are much more ignorant. They are chiefly found in the neighborhood of Gondar and Shelga, and to liie northwest of the Lake Tsana. They have the same superstitions, a little modified after the Jewish fashion. The Camaountes are a people few in number, inhabiting the mountains about Gondar, prin- cipally engaged in agriculture. Bishop Gobat regards them as Deists. They, however, have priests, and assemble in private houses, where they have a repast, which they call " Corban," communion or Eucharist. The' Zalantes are a, migratory people, who are said to believe in the existence of one God, but to have no other religion. Church Missionary Society. — The attention of this Society has been, for many years, di- rected to this interesting country. In 1815, the Society's missionaries at Malta learned that a native of Abyssinia had been engaged for some years at Cairo in translating the Scrip- tures into Amharic, the principal vernacular Abyssinian language. This Amharic version of the entire Bible was purchased for the Brit- ish and Foreign Bible Society in 1820, by Bev. W. Jowett. In 1826, Eev. Samuel Go- bat and Kev. Christian Kugler, were sent to Egypt, with the view of entering on a mission to Abyssinia ; and after various hindrances, , they arrived at Massowah on the 28th of De- cember, 1829, where they were received in a friendly manner. They carried with them por- tions of the Amharic Scriptures, which had been printed by the British and Foreign Bible Society, and which the people gladly received. They obtained permission to fix their residence at Adowah ; while Mr. Gobat proceeded fur- ther into the interior, and remained some time at Gondar, the capital, distributing the Scrip- tures and conversing with the people. But war breaking out, and the whole country be- ing thrown into disturbance, he was detained at that place till October, 1830, when he joined Mr. Kugler at Adowah, in the province of Ti- gre. On the 29th of December, Mr. Kugler was called to his rest ; and his peaceful death made a strong impression upon the natives, who said they had never seen a man die in such full confi- dence of the Saviour. Soon after this, the chief ' Sebagdis, who had shown himself very friendly to the mission; and who refused to go out to battle on the Sabbath, was attacked and slain. After his death, each of the chiefs contended for the mastery, and the country was kept in a state of civil war. Mr. Gobat soon after left the country, and arrived at Cairo. In 1833, be visited England, where he publisliud hii^ Journal, containing a full account of his re- sidence in Abyssinia; and several other mis- sionaries were preparing to return with him to that country. On the 20th of Deoember, 1834, Messrs. Gobat and Isenberg arrived at Massowah, in Abyssinia, where they were re- ceived by the governor, with much civility. In 1836, Mr. Gobat was visited with a protracted illness, which obliged him to withdraw from his labors. Eev. J. H. Knox died at Cairo on his way to Abyssinia ; and the mission was re- inforced by the arrival of Eev. C. H. Blum- hardt. Opposition began to manifest itself, on the part of the ecclesiastics, on learning that the missionaries rejected some of the rites of their church, and set up worship of their own ; but the governor refused to listen to their com- plaints. In 1837, Eev. L. Krapf joined the mission, at Adowah; and in March of the following year, a Frenchman and an Italian priest ar- rived at the same place, their object being to revive the Eoman Catholic Mission in Abys- sinia. The people having had enough of Eo- manism, were aroused by their appearance; and this contributed to raise the clamor against the Protestant mission, so that the governor could no longer resist it, and they were obliged to leave the country ; which they did with sor- rowful hearts, reaching Cairo on the 24th of June. But the Papists penetrated to Gondar, and were active in endeavoring to re-establish their mission. Messrs. Isenberg and Krapf, having received an invitation from the king of Shoa to visit his country, determined to at- tempt an entrance into Abyssinia by the way of Zeila, south of the straits of Babel Mandel. Shoa lies to the southward of Amhara, the province where the mission was located. They left Suez on this enterprize January 27, 1839, and after encountering many difficulties, reach- ed Shoa on the 31st of May, and met with a favorable reception from the king. They re- mained there, continually occupied in discus- sion and preaching, till November 6th, when Mr. Isenberg returned to England. Mr. Krapf continued in Shoa, laboring among the Abys- sinian Christians, having secured the confidence of the king of Shoa to a very remarkable de- gree, so that the king assured him of his pro- tection as long as he should live. Mr. Krapf had made an expedition, with the King of Shoa, among the Galla tribes, by whom the slave trade was carried on to a considerable extent; but it was considered a favorable time to labor for its abolition. The Commit- tee were so impressed with the provideuti-il openings, not merely as regarded Abyssinia it- self, but also the heathen Galla tribes that they resolved to form the Abyssinian into a new mission, to be called the East African Mission, and Messrs, Mtillheisen and Mijller were sent out to reinforce it. As this mission will, hereafter, extend beyond the bounds of Abyssinia, it will be treated under the Vicad ot ^JRICA. 11 Africa East, whict see. — Gobat's Abyssinia; Edinburgh Encyclopedia ; Reports and Period- icals of the Church Missionary Society ; African Repositwy for January, 1850. AFAKKxVITU : A station of the London Missionary Society on Einieo, South Sea. AFBIOA : The continent of Africa is a vast peninsula, in the form of an irregular triangle, of which the north is its base. " Africa," says the learned Prof. Guiyot, " is the most singular in its form of all the conti nents. Its mass, nearly round, or ellipsoidal, is concentrated upon itself. It projects into the ocean no important peninsula, nor any- where lets into its bosom the waters of the ocean. It seems to close itself against every influence from without. Thus the extension of the line of coasts is only 14,000 geographical miles, for a surface of 8,720,000 square miles ; so that Africa has only one mile of coast for 623 miles of svfrface." Africa is separated from Europe on the north by the Mediterranean Sea, and from Asia on the east, by the Isthmus of Suez, the Bed Sea, and the Indian Ocean. On the south is the Southern Ocean, and on the west, the Atlantic. The equinoctial line divides it into two parts of nearly equal length. It extends from Cape Blanco, opposite Sicily, in lat. 37° 21' N., to the extreme point of the Cape of Good Hope, (Cape Needles,) in 34° 52' S., being nearly 72 degrees, or 5,000 English miles in length. Its breadth at the Equator is computed at 4,760 English miles. Its super- ficial extent has never been accurately deter- mined. It is estimated in the Encyclopedia Britannica, which is among the latest authori- ties, at 8,550,000 geographical square miles, which does not vary materially from that of Prof Guizot, as above. It is larger than either Europe or Australia, but smaller than Asia and America. Progress of Discovery. — The ancients have transmitted to us very little knowledge of this great continent. We derive the first infor- mation concerning the interior of Northern Africa from the Arabs, who, by means of the camel, were able to penetrate across the great desert to the very centre of the continent, along the two coasts as far as the Senegal and the Gambia on the west, and to Sofala on the east. On this latter coast, they not only ex- plored to an extent far beyond any supposed limits of ancient discovery, but planted colo- nies at Sofala, Mombas, Melinda, and at various other places. But the Portuguese were the first to give any thing like an accu- rate outline of the two coasts, and to complete the circumnavigation of Africa. The dis- covery of America and the West Indies gave rise to the horrid traffic in African slaves ; but this traffic has been the means of a more extended knowledge of the coast between the Senegal and Gameroons, and of the manners und customs of the people. With the English and French settlements in Africa began a systematic sm'vey of the coast, and portions of the interior. In 1788, a society was formed in London for promoting the exploration of Inner Africa. Under its auspices, important additions were made to the geography of Africa by Houghton, Mungo Park, Hornemann and Burckhardt In 1831, this association was merged in the Royal Geographical Society. l)m-ing the last sixty years, more has been done to make us acquainted with the geography of Africa than during the whole of the 1700 years since Ptolemy. Mungo Park com- mences the era of unceasing endeavors to explore the Interior. He proceeded in 1795 from the river Gambia on the west coast to the Joliba, or Niger, traced this river as far as Silla, explored the intervening countries, deter- mined the southern confines of the Sahara, and returned in 1797. In 1805, he embarked on a second journey, with the intention of fol- lowing this river to its mouth. He passed Timbuktu, and reached Bonsee, where he was killed by the natives. Hornemann, in 1799, penetrated from Cairo to Murzuk, and transmitted from that place valuable information respecting the countries to the south, especially Bornu ; but no intel- ligence was received ,from him, and it is sup- posed that he soon after perished. In 1822, Denham, Olapperton, and Oudney crossed the Great Desert, and reached the great Lake Tsad, Feb. 4, 1823. The sur- rounding country was explored as far as Sa- katu in the west, and Mandara in the south. Oudney died in Bornu. Clapperton crossed the Kawara, from the coast of Guinea, and arrived at Sakatu, at which place he also died. His servant, Richard Lander, returned to Eng- land after having explored a part of the ad- joining regions. Major Laing succeeded in reaching Timbuktu from Tripoli, but wils murdered on his return, in the desert. In 1827 and 1828, Oaillie set out from the Eio Nunez on the western coast, reached Timbuktu, and returned from that place through the Great Desert to Marocco. The termination of the Joliba, Kawara, or Niger, remained in obscurity till 1830, when it was ascertained by Lander and his brother, who succeeded in tracing the river from Yaouri down to its mouth. The great Niger expe- dition, consisting of three large steam vessels, was despatched by the British Government in 1845, under Captain Trotter ; but it proved a failure, and resulted in a melancholy loss of life. Mr. Duncan, one of the survivors of the expedition, made some additions to our eeo- graphical knowledge, between the "Kawara and the coast, by his journey to Adafoodiah, in 1845-6 ; but, in a second journey, in attempl> ing to reach Timbuktu, he met with an un- timely death A much greater number of travelers h^\^^ 12 AFKICA. explored the region of the Nile, among the most distinguished of whom are, Bruce, Brown, Burckhardt, Oailliaud, Riippell, Russeger, Beke, and the Egyptian expeditions up the Nile. Though the Dutch settlement in South Africa was founded as early as 1650, not much information concerning the interior of that portion of the continent was gained till the end of the 18th century, when a series of jour- neys was commenced by Sparrmann, and fol- lowed up by Vaillant, Barrow, Trotter, Somer- ville, Lichtenstein, Bruchell, Campbell, Thom- son, Smith, Alexander, and Harris. Within the last five or six years, a number of important discoveries have been made in various parts of Inner Africa, and the present time bids fair to outstrip all previous periods in lifting the veil that has hitherto enveloped Central Africa in impenetrable mystery. Rev. Messrs. Krapf and Rebmann, missionaries of the Church Missionary Society in East Africa, have explored the interior, from that direction; with untiring perseverance, since 1847. (See Africa, Eastern.) At several hundred miles from the coast, they have discovered high mountains, covered with perpetual snow, which is the more interesting from the position being so near the equator. In South Africa, also, missionaries have been pioneers of geographical discovery. (See Africa, Southern.) A caravan of native traders recently made a journey across the whole continent, from the coast of Zanzibar to Benguela, in which they crossed Nyassa, the great lake of South Africa. To the north of the equator, the mission to Lake Tsad, originated by Mr. James Richard- son, promises to exceed in importance all pre- vious expeditions to Central Africa. He left England in 1849, for the purpose of concluding commercial treaties with the chiefs of Northern Africa, as far as Lake Tsad, by which legiti- mate trade might be extended, and the slave trade abolished. Drs. Barth and Overweg ac- companied Mr. Richardson, for the purpose of making scientific observations. The party started from Tripoli, March 23, 1850, after having minutely surveyed the mountainous region to the south of that place. The first year, they successfully crossed the whole of Sahara, in a very circuitous westerly direction, and thus explored a great portion of Northern Africa, which had never before been visited by any European. Their route from Ghat to Kano, leading them through the powerful kingdom of Air, or Asben, was highly inter esting. The second year, they explored a large portion of Sudan, in different directions. Messrs. Barth and Overweg reached Kuka, the capital of Bornu, but Richardson died on the way, in March, 1851. Dr. Barth penetrated 350 miles to the south, as far as Tola, the capital of the kingdom of Adamana; and Overweg navigated Lake Tsad in a boat, which had been conveyed in pieces across the Sahara, on the backs of camels. In September, 1851, they set out together on a journey to Borgu, a mountainous country lying to the northeast of Lake Tsad, about midway be- tween it and Egypt. They went in company with a sheikh of Bornu, with a large army ; but the party were attacked and put to flight, and Barth and Overweg saved their lives by a quick retreat. Retm-ning to Kuka, they set out to the southward, accompanied by about 10,000 horse and the same number of foot sol- diers. They explored the country beyond Mandara, the farthest point of Denham's jour- ney, and found it to be one of great fertility. The third year. Dr. Barth made a journey to Masena, the capital of the kingdom of Bagher- mi, to the southeast of Lake Tsad ; while Overweg traveled in a southwesterly direction, and reached within 150 miles of Yacoba, the great town of the Pellatahs. But on his re- turn to Kuka, he was seized with a fever, of which he died after a short illness. Dr. Barth was about to start for Timbuktu ; and a rein- forcement, consisting of Dr. Vogel and two sappers and miners, was sent to his assistance on the 20th of February, 1852. The latest in- formation obtained by these expeditions is summed up in a valuable article in the new edition of the Encyclopedia Britannica, now in course of publication, of which free use has been made in the preparation of this article. Topography, — The physical configuration of Africa may be considered under two heads : the great Plain of Northern Africa ; and the great Table Lands, with their mountain ranges and groups, of Central and Southern Africa. The great Plain comprises the Sahara, the Lake Tsad region, and the valley of the Lower Nile. The Sahara is by no means a plain throughout, but for the greater part it rises into table-lands, interspersed with mountain groups of 6,000 feet elevation, and probably more ; and the term plain can only be applied to it in a general way, to distinguish it from the more elevated region to the south. The Sahara has often been pictured as an immense and monotonous expanse of sand. But no- thing could be more erroneous, as the greatest variety exists in the physical configuration of its surface, as well as in its geological features. The western half is surrounded by a broad belt of plains and depressions, the central parts being formed by extensive table-lands and mountainous regions, comprising the kingdom of Air or Asben, lately explored by Messrs. Richardson, Barth, and Overweg. The route of Dr. Barth, in his journey to Agadez, the capital of that kingdom, was girded by moun- tain ranges and groups, rising to 3,000 and 4,000 feet ; and Mount Dogem, the culminating point in that region, is even between 4,000 and 5,000 feet high. The eastern portion of Sahara appears for the greater part to be a considerably elevated table-land, comprising AFRICJA. 13 the mountainoxia country of Boi-gu. The nar- row valley of the Nile forms the eastern boun- dary of the Great Desert. To the south of the Desert, Africa may be considered as one connected mass of elevated land, rising more or less above the sea, and comprising the most extensive table-lands, as well as high mountain groups and chains. Commencing at the Cape of Good Hope, and traversing the three terraces which rise one above another from the coast, an almost unin- terrupted table-land has recently been ascer- tained to extend to the north for at least 1,000 geographical miles. The southern portion is formed by the basin of the Orange river, fol- lowed by the desert of Kalihari, which is again succeeded by the basin of the river Sesheke and Lake Ngami, with many other rivers, traversing a region which presents a dead level, its elevation at Lake Ngami being 2,825 feet. That region probably is in con- nection with the basin of Zambezi. Farther north the ground ascends to the line of water- parting with the basins of Congo river and Lake Nyassa. In this region are supposed to be the celebrated Mountains of the Moon, run- ning, not as formerly supposed, east and west, but having a direction from north to south, and running parallel to the eastern coast, forming the southern continuation of the Abys- sinian table-land. It is a remarkable feature that the most elevated peaks rise on the outer edge of this tabl^-land, and even between it and the coast, as isolated cones. One of them, the Abba Tared, rises out of the northern edge of the Abyssinian table-land to the height of 15,000 feet. The system of the Atlas moun- tains is quite distinct from either of these two divisions. It occupies the northwestern region of Africa, consisting of several ranges, and its highest summits are said to reach an allatude of 15,000 feet Rivers. — Africa is emphatically a land of deserts, resulting, of course, in a scarcity of rivers. Many of the smaller rivers and lakes, and not a few of the larger ones, present only dry water-courses during certain periods of the year. Even Lake Tsad is said at times to be nearly dry. With the rains, floods are prevalent all over the country, even in the desert, as«the recent observations made by the expedition under Eichardson testify. That traveler relates that, when on the borders of the kingdom of Air, on the 30th of Sep. 1850, rain had been seen in the south, and black clouds covering the zone in the heavens ; and in an hour afterwards, the cry was heard in the encampment, " The wady is coming !" Going out to look, he saw a white sheet of foam advancing from the south, between the trees of the valley. In ten minutes after, a river of water came pouring along, and spread all around them, converting the place of their encampment into an isle of the valley. The current in its deepest part was powerful, car pable of carrying away sheep and cattle, and uprooting trees. Africa is chiefly drained into the Atlantic ocean and its branch the Mediterranean Sea, the river system of the Indian Ocean being very inconsiderable. The Nile is the oldest of historical rivers, and afforded the only means of subsistence to the earliest civilized people on earth ; but the origin or source of the river it- self remains an enigma to this day. The area drained by this river is at least 2,000,000 English square miles. The river Senegal has a length of 1,100 miles, and has its sources in the same elevated tract of land as those of the Kawara. The Gambia and Eio Grande, south of the Sene- gal, are also considerable rivers. The Ka- wara, or Niger, is, next to the Nile, the largest of the African rivers. Its sources, like that of the Nile, are still unknown. It appears to be the Ahmar, which is said to rise in a high group of mountains east of Sierra Leone. As far as Timbuktu it is called Joliba, and its course is pretty well known ; but from that place to the Taouri, it is as yet unexplored. Thence down to the mouth, it was first traced by Lan- der. It is there called Kawara, in general, though it has several names in the different languages of the tribes which inhabit its shores. The Tshadda is its principal tribu- tary, extending far into the heart of Inner Africa. It was recently explored by Dr. Barth in its upper course, where it flows through the kingdom of Adamana. The length of the Kawara is about 3,000 miles, and it drains about 1,500,000 square miles. South of the equator, the west coast receives many large rivers which are yet unexplored. Such are the Zaire or Congo, the Coanza, and the Nourse, or Cunene. The Swakop has re- cently been explored by Mr. Galton. The Orange river is about 1,000 miles in length. Its head streams are the Ki, Gariep or Vaal, and the New Gariep, consisting of the Cale- don and Cradock. The Orange river drains 350,000 English square miles. Rounding the southern extremity of Africa, and proceeding up its eastern coast, the Lim- popo is the flrst river requiring notice. Its head streams and middle course are known, but whether it empties into the sea at Delagoa Bay, or at Inhambane, is a matter of doubt. The Zambezi is the largest river of the eastern coasts. Its sources are not known but it is probable that its head-streams are the Ses- heke and Chobe, recently discovered by Messrs. Livingston and Oswell. Africa possesses several considerable lakes, of which lake Tsad is probably the largest and most interesting. It contains about 100 islands of large size, scattered over the lake. They are wooded and inhabited by the Biddu- ma, a Pagan tribe, who have remained inde- ' pendent of the Mohammedan nations living around the lake. Dr. Overweg was received u AFRICA. by tLem with great kindness, on his landing upon their islands. Lake Tsad has no connec- tion with the Kawara or the Nile, but forms an inland receptacle receiving the waters of some of the most distant regions of Inner Africa. Lake Pittri forms a distinct hydrographical system between it and the Nile, with which it has no connection. Lake Tsana or Dem- bea is the chief lake within the basin of the Nile, so far as known. It is situated On the table-land of Abyssinia, at an elevation of 6,110 feet. Other lakes on the Abyssinian table-lands are Zuwai, Haik, and Ashangi. In Inner Africa, a number of considerable lakes are reported to exist, but only two are known with any degree of certainty, south of the equator, the Nyassa and Ngami. Nyassa, the great lake or sea in 10° south latitude, is as yet only approximately laid down on the maps, according to native information, and whether it be the feeder of a large river, or merely a recipient lake, is unknown. Another lake in that region has recently been reported by the natives to Dr. Krapf, as being situated west of Mombas, beyond Kilimanjaro, and in the country of Uniamezi. (For a description of Ngami, see South Africa.) These are fresh water lakes ; besides which there are numerous small salt and natron ktkes in various parts of Africa. Climate. — " The general climate of Africa," says Make Brun, " is that of the torrid zone ; more than three-fourths of the continent being situated between the tropics. The great mass of heated air, incumbent in these hot regions, has ready access to its northern and southern parts, situated in the zones called temperate, so 1 that the portions of thein adjoining the tropics are equally torrid with the regions actually inter-tropical. Nothing really moderates the heat and dryness of the African climate, except the annual rains, the sea breezes, and the eleva^ tion of the surface. These three circumstances are sometimes united in a greater degree under the equator than in the temperate zones. It is not impossible that in the centre of Africa, there may be lofty table lands, like those of Quito, or valleys like the valley of Cashmere, where, as in those two happy regions, spring holds an eternal reign." Recent discoveries in the interior of Africa favor this hypothesis. Bev. Dr. Krapf, in his recent missionary tours in north-eastern Africa, has discovered ranges of mountains covered with perpetual snow. The greatest heat is not found under the equator, but to the north of it, in consequence of the northern portion being of greater ex- tent than the southeni, and of less elevation. The highest temperature is found throughout the Sahara, particularly in itseastern portions, toward the Bed Sea. In upper Egypt and Nu- bia, eggs may be baked in the hot sands, and the saying of the Arabs is, " In Nubia the soil is like fire, and the wind like a flame." The regions along the Atlantic and Mediterranean coasts are rendered more temperate by the in- fluence of the sea. To the south of the Great Desert, where the country becomes more ele- vated, the temperature decreases. The inten- sity of radiation, and its influence upon the temperature, are very great in Northern Africa. While in the day time, the soil of the Sahara rapidly absorbs the solar rays, during the night it cools also so rapidly that often ice is formed. Africa is not much under the influence of regu- lar winds, except the monsoons of the Indian ocean. Prom hurricanes, Africa is nearly ex- empt, except its southern extremity, to which at times the Mauritius hurricanes extend. Northern Africa is exposed to the hot winds and storms from the Sahara, which are called in Egypt Khamsin ; in the Mediterranean, Sirocco ; and in the western regions, Harmat- tan. Extreme heat and dryness are the char- acteristics of these winds, which, raising the sand, filling the air with dust, and prodigiously favoring the powers of evaporation, are often fatal to the vegetable and animal creation in the regions visited by them. The People. — Prom the shores of the Medi- terranean to about latitude 20° north, the pop- ulation of Africa consists largely of tribes not originally native to the soil, but Arabs and Turks, planted by conquest, with a consi- derable number of Jews, the children of the dispersion ; and the recently introduced French. The Berbers of the Atlas region, the Tuaricks and Tibbus of the Sahara, and the Copts of Egypt may be viewed as descendants of the primitive stock, while those to whom the general name of Moors is applied are perhaps of mixed descent, native and foreign. Prom the latitude stated, to Cape Colony, tribes commonly classed together under the title of the Ethiopic or negro family are found, though many depart very widely from the physiogno- my of the negro, which is most apparent in the natives of the gold coast. In the Cape Colony, and on its borders, the Hottentots form a distinct variety, closely resembling the Mongolian races of Asia. (See Hottentots.) The Copts, (pron. CIcoobt or Ckibt,) are re- garded as the descendants of the ancient Egyptians. They do not now compose more than one-sixth of the population of Egypt, not exceeding in number 150,000, of which 10,000 reside at Cairo. In some parts of Upper Egypt there are villages exclusively inhabited by Copts. Their complexion is somewhat dark- er than that of the Arabs, their foreheads flat, hail 6oft_ and woolly, nose short but not fiat, mouth wide, lips thick, eyes large, high cheek bones. They are not an unmixed race, their ancestors, in the earlier ages of Christianity, having intermarried with the Greeks, Nubians, and Abyssinians. (See Copts.) The countries above Egypt are inhabited by two tribes of people resembling each other ia their physical characters, but of distinct Ian AFRICA. 15 guage aud origin ; the Eastern Nubians, and Kvibians of the Nile, the latter called Berber- Ines. The country of the Nubians is limited on the west by that of the Tibbus, who are spread over the eastern portions of the Sahara, as far as Ferran and Lake Tsad. Their color is not uniform, some being quite black, and others copper-colored. They are a pastoral people, and live in square villages, a portion of which is devoted to their flocks. " All that is not Arabic in the kingdom of Marocco," says Dr. Latham, " in the French provinces of Algeria, in Tunis, Tripoli, and Ferran, is Berber. The language also of the ancient Cyrenaica, indeed the whole country bordering on the Mediterranean, between Tri- poli and Egypt, is Berber. The extinct lan- guage of the Canary Isles was Berber ; and, finally, the language of Sahara is Berber. The Berber languages are essentially inland lan- guages. As a general rule, the Arabic is the language for the whole of the sea coast, from the Delta of the Nile to the straits, of Gibraltar, and from the straits of Gibraltar to the mouth of the Senegal. The Berber nation is one of great antiquity, and from the times of the ear- liest history, has been spread over the same ex- tent of country as at present. The Moors inhabit large portions of the em- pire of Marocco, and are spread all along the Mediterranean coast. They are a mixed race, grafted upon the ancient Mauritanian stock, ■whence their name. After the conquest of Africa by the Arabs, they became mixed with their conquerors. Having conquered Spain, in their turn, they intermarried with the natives of that country, from which they were after- wards driven back to Mauritania. They are a handsome people, having a resemblance to the European. They are also intellectual and not altogether unlettered ; but they are cruel, bloodthirsty, and revengeful. Their religion is Mohammedan. They generally lead a settled life as merchants, mechanics, or agriculturists, but there are many wandering tribes ; and along the coast of Marocco, they carry on piracy with armed boats. At two different periods, separated from each other by perhaps a thousand years, Africa was invaded by Arabic tribes, which took a lasting possession of the districts they conquered, and whose descendants form no inconsiderable por- tion of the population of North and Central Africa, while their language has superseded all others as that of civilization and religion. The second of these was effected by the first succes- sors of Mohammed, who conquered Egypt, and subsequently the whole north of Africa, as far as the shores of the Atlantic, in the course of the first century of the Hegeira, or the seventh of the Christian era. After the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews spread rapidly over all the Roman pos- Bession& in Africa ; and when Philip II. drove them from Spain, thousands of famines took refuge on the opposite shores of Africa. They are now numerous in all the northern towns. They live in great degradation, except in Al- giers, where the French have given them free- dom and independence. Ever since the conquest of Egypt by Sultan Selim, Turks have settled in the north of Africa, and as they were the rulers of the country, the Turkish became the language of the government ; but they can hardly be con- sidered as permanent settlers. For a description of the Abyssinians, see Abyssinia. The Ethiopian race comprehends by far the greater number of African nations, extending over the whole of the middle and South of Africa, except its southernmost pro- jection towards the Cape of Good Hope. A line drawn from the mouth of the Senegal in the west to Cape Jerdaffur in the east, forms its northern limits ; but this race are not all negroes. The latter are only one of its numer- ous ofishoots. The principal negro nations are the Mandingoes, who are numerous and power- ful, and partially civilized, in Senegambia, and farther inland, around the head waters of the Kawara, where they have established a great many kingdoms and smaller sovereignties. They are black, with a mixture of yellow, and their hair is completely woolly. The Wolofs or Yolofs, whose language is totally different from those of their neighbors, are the handsomest and blackest of all negroes, although they live at a greater distance from the equator than most of the other black tribes, their principal dwelling-places being between the Senegal and the Gambia, along the coast of the Atlantic. The Fovlalis or Fellatahs occupy the central parts of Sudan. Their color is black, with a striking copper hue.. They are one of the most remarkable nations in Africa, very in- dustrious, live in commodious and clean habita- tions, and are mostly Mohammedans. Of the principal nations of Guinea, among whom the negro type is particularly distinct, especially around the Bight of Benin, are the Peloofs, near Oaramanca, very black yet handsome, and the Ashanti, who surpass all their neigh- bors in civilization. In South Guinea we meet with three principal nations, the Con- go, the Abunda, and the Benguela negroes. The next great branch of the Bthiopic race comprehends the Galla, who occupy an im- mense tract in Eastern Africa, from Abyssinia as far as the inland Portuguese possessions in Mozambique, to the south of the equator. An interesting tribe of them, the Somali, have lately been brought to the knowledge of Eu- ropeans, a widely scattered nation, who lead a pastoral life on the uplands, and also nearer to the coast of the Indian Ocean from Cape Jer- daffur southward to a considerable distance. They seem to be of a mild and peaceful dis- position, while the other Galla tribes are a warlike race. The Kaffres, Hottentots, and 16 AFRICA. Bushmen, occupy the greater portion of South- ern Africa. (See Kaffres and Hottentots.) The island of Madagascar is inhabited by a race of Malay origin, exhibiting traces of Negro and Arabic mixture. The total population of Africa is vaguely estimated, according to the most recent re- searches, at 100,000,000. Languages. — The Arabic is the language of the North,, and the Mandingo is used from the Senegal to the Niger. But the languages or dialects of the negroes are as multifarious as the nations. According to Seetzen, the languages of Africa must amount to 100 or l.'iO ; but some trace them to a common origin. Eev. John Leighton Wilson, late missionary of the American Board at the Gaboon, in an article in the Bibliotheca Sacra for November, 1847, says : " Too little is yet known of the numerous and diversified dialects of Africa, to detei-miae with certainty the precise number of families which they form. " In the northern half of the continent, or that portion of it inhabited by the black races, the number of languages is very great, the different families of which show very little, if any, aflSnity for each other ; while in the southern division, one great family prevails over nearly the whole of it, even to the Cape of Good Hope." Government. — Most forms of government may be found in Africa. Despotism, however, in its worst and most offensive shape, is by far the most prevalent ; and, with few exceptions, slavery and anarchy reign triumphant through- out Africa. Industry, in Africa, is at the lowest ebb. The Africans have, of themselves, generally made little progress in the arts. All the more laborious occupations are imposed on the fe- males. In some parts, the wives of kings and petty princes till the land for the support of their lords. The Mandingoes, however, have made considerable advances in civilization, and the Ovas of Madagascar are an industrious people. Commerce. — An extensive intercourse has been carried on, from the remotest antiquity, between very distant parts of the continent, in consequence of the natural adaptation of the products of one part to supply the wants of another. Thus Northern Africa supplies Cen- tral Africa with dates and salt, and receives, in return, gold dust, ivory, gums, palm-oil, feath- ers and staves. Egypt and the towns in the Barbary States have always been the great seats of trade, which is carried on wholly by caravans, numbering from 500 to 2000 camels. Slave Trade. — Slaves have been the staple article of export from the African coast ; and in some years as many as 110,000 or 120,000 have been carried across the Atlantic. In or- der to supply slaves for the market, a whole- sale system of brigandage and robbery has been organized in many extensive districts, the people being hunted down like game by the petty princes, and by the Mohammedans, who affect to believe that they are entitled to cap- ture and sell the " idolators," to serve as beasts of burden in another hemisphere. The sufferings and misery which result from this trafiBc, the merciless waste of human life, and the " horrors of the middle passage," no tongue can tell, no imagination can paint ; yet these are but the lesser evils of this horrid trade. Its deepest wonnd has been inflicted upon the moral and social condition of the country. It has undermined all the deep foun- dations of society, dissolved the bonds of friend- ly alliance between adjoining villages, destroy- ed the peace of families, and extinguished the last remaining spark of parental affection. Even the mother will sell her own child for a few strings of beads or a gallon of rum. It is gratifying, however, to know that the efforts of the British government, together with tho influence of the American colony at Liberia, have nearly extinguished the inhuman traffic upon a large extent of the western and south- eastern coasts, where it has heretofore been car- ried on to the greatest extent. The traffic has also received a considerable check on the eastern coast, in consequence of a treaty for its suppression between the British Government and the Imaum of Muscat. Religion. — Christianity is professed in Abys- sinia, and in Egypt by the Copts, but its doc- trines and precepts are little understood or obeyed. Mohammedanism prevails in all the northern countries ; but the native mind gen- erally is surrendered to superstitions of indefi- nite number and character. The labors of Christian missionaries have, however, especially in South Africa, done much towards turning the benighted Africans from idols to the living God. (See Western and Southern Africa.) The social condition of Africa is, of course, extremely depressed. The lowest form of polyg- amy is diffused all over Africa ; and although forbidden in Abyssinia, the marriage tie is there so slight as hardly to have any sensible influ- ence ; and morals are in a state of almost total dissohition. Cannibalism formerly prevailed to a frightful extent throughout Africa ; and though checked by the motive of providing slaves for market, is still found to exist in some parts. Among some considerable nations, the exposure of children, and the slaughter of those that are deformed or maimed, is not only tolerated but enforced. In some parts human blood is mixed with the mortar used in the construction of temples. McCidloch's Geogra- phy ; Make Brun; McQueen's Geographical Survey ; Coiulor's Dictionary of Geography ; and especially the Encyclopedia Britannica. MIS^ONS. Africa, notwithstanding its terrible climate, bad government and petty wars, forms one of the most interesting missionary fields in 'the AFRICA, EASTEEN. 17 world. Its native inhabitants, thougli deeply degraded, are found peculiarly susceptible to religious influences. And wherever the gospel has been preached long enough to penetrate through their ignorance and superstition, it has generally found a congenial sod. Ko mis- sions in the world have been more successful, in proportion to the means employed, than those of the Moravians and the London Mis- sionary Society, in South Africa, and the Church Missionary Society in West Africa. The way is opening up for the extension of Christian missions into the interior ; and so much preparatory work has already been ac- complished, in reducing the languages to writ- ing and translating the Scriptures, that we may look for rapid changes, and confidently hope that the day is not distant when a large portion of the continent will be Christianized. The results of the missionary work in Africa will be seen by the following TABULAR YIEW. d Western AyRiCA, -4 6.2 Z;3 > a .2 1 3 o II 1 .SI ■i 1 & 53 1 Scholars or Persons un- der Instruc- tion. Oharcli Missionary Society 3 3 1 3 3 1 22 12 3 4 3 1 3 11 11 3 6 15 116 27 15 10 16 6 11 26 10 14 16 13 24 22 10 2 7 22 12 16 13 79 6 6 4 4 2 23 28 4 2 4 11 23 3 6 1 1 1 11 4 2 6 6 22 2 1 1 1 11 2 6 11 2,976 6,608 118 16 22 101 1100 32 114 600 69 48 i 1 6 11 2 7 11 6822 Wesleyan do 3919 German Miss. Societies 58 46 213 200 100 .Anier. Presb. Boai'd 179 400 20 93 279 127 100 104 3 29 56 11,687 162 11,457 SODTHERN AFRXGA. 3 6 6 2 4 1 1 1 1 8 28 44 10 12 12 16 2 8 29 32 46 20 16 38 26 4 13 20 14 29 9 89 8 14 13 16 8 26 8 ]882 4301 4206 109 1283 166 1604 833 60 47 12 11 693a 8883 7877 Free Church of Scotland, and i 310 166 760 170 Total South, Africa 24 139 223 63 « T4 16 41 14,384 83 20,090 1 2 2 2 3 8 6 8 1170 E*."^ A'^TTr-i, — fThiirc.h Mirh Sor- 47 236 513 198 112 173 44 97 27,241 246 31 647 Owing to the manner in which some of the societies make their returns, it was not possi- ble to make the foregoing table perfect in all its parts, as several items are not reported at all, by many of them. But few of the socie- ties give any account of the female members of the missions ; and but few give any distinct intimation whether their laborers are clergy- men or not. But on several points of chief importance they are complete, viz. : the whole number of laborers, communicants, and schol- ars in school. These items will indicate very clearly the state of the work. Deducting the females and native helpers, it appears that there are less than four hundred Euro- pean and American missionary laborers, on the whole continent of Africa ; which will give 270,000 to each laborer. This presents an ap- palling aspect of the destitution of that dark, benighted land. On the other hand we have a most encouraging and cheering view of the 2 success of missionary labor in this portion of the vineyard of the Lord, which fully sustains what we have said of the susceptibility of the African character to religious impression ; for we have but little less than eighty converts to each missionary laborer on the continent and islands of Africa. The missions are gen- erally represented as in a prosperous condition, except that in some portions of South Africa, they have suffered from the Kaffre war, and in Madagascar, the converts still suffer persecu- tion. These statistics can be corrected at any future time on referring to the January and February numbers of the London Missionary Register for the current year. AFRICA, Eastern. East Africa, according to MoOulloch, comprises the region to the north of the Zambezi river, round by the sea coast, to the confines of Abyssinia. The Encyclo- pedia Britannica makes it extend from Natal to the Red Sea, (which would take in a por- 18 AFRICA, EASTERN. tion of the limits we have allotted to Southern Africa,) comprising Sofala, Mozambique, Zan- zibar, and the Somali country. But little is known of that region beyond the coast. The Sofala country, extending from Delagoa Bay to the Zambezi river, is flat, sandy, and marshy, gradually ascending towards the interior. The soil is very fertile a.nd produces chiefly rice. In the interior gold and other metals and pre- cious stones are found. Mozambique extends from the Zambezi to Cape Delgoda, and is similar in its natural fea- tures to the Sofala coast. The country is in- habited by the large and powerful tribe of the Macuas. The principal river is the Zambezi. Zanzibar or Sawahili coast extends from Cape Delgoda to the river Jub, near the equa- tor. The coast is generally low, and has but few bays or harbors. Its northern portion is rendered dangerous by a line of coral reefs. The region possesses a great number of rivers, but none of the first magnitude. The climate is similar to that of other tropical coasts of Africa, hot and unhealthy. In some portions, however, the elevated ground, which is more temperate and healthful, approaches near to the coast. The island of Zanzibar is the residence of the Imaum of Muscat, (whose dominion ex- tends a considerable distance along the coast,) and is the seat of an extensive commerce. Mombas, on a small island close to the main shore, possesses the finest harbor on the coast. The Somali comprises the eastern horn of Africa, from the equator northward to the Bay of Tudjurra, near the Eed Sea. The coast is generally bold and Tocky ; and the extensive region it encloses, presents a slightly ascending plain, traversed by large and fertile valleys. Along the Arabian gulf, the coast is very abrupt, and girded with a range of mountains, ithe highest of which, Jebel Ahl, reaches an elevation of 6,500 feet. The Somali country is famous for its aromatic productions. The inhabitants belong to the Galla tribe. — En- cyclopedia Britannica ; Harris's Highlands of Ethiopia ; Ihe Nile and its Tributaries ; Mc- Culloch's Geography ; African Repository, Jan. 1850. ■Church Missionary Society. — The Abys- sinian Mission, which was commenced in 18'29, was, in 1841, changed into the East African Mission, embracing a much wider range than was originally contemplated by it. (See Abys- sinia.) Mr. Krapf writes from Ankobar, in 1841, that the people of Shoa manifested a great desire for the word of God, and that they besieged his house from morning till even- ing, to procure copies of the Scriptures. He had translated the four Gospels into the Galla language. During the year 1842, the Mission was inter- rupted by various causes ; but a treaty of friendship and commerce was concluded h^ tween the British Government and the King of Shoa, which provides protection for British subjects in the territories of Shoa. Mr. Krapf undertook a difficult and dangerous journey to the capital of Abyssinia, in order to ascertain what encouragement the new Abuna would give to missionary operations in Abyssinia. He afterwards proceeded to Alex- andria to meet Messrs. Isenberg and Miihlie- sen, who were on their way to join him. About this time there arose a fierce dispute between the more enlightened party and the monks, in the Shoa province, respecting some frivolous points of speculation ; and the monks prevailed with the king, by threatening excom- munication, which gave the more ignorant and bigoted party the ascendancy. Mr. Krapf be- fore leaving expressed a fear that their isflu- ence might prove unfavorable to the mis'Sion. And, on his return, with the brethren, he found that the king had prohibited their return, and all efforts to induce the chiefs of the countries lying between the sea and Abyssinia to let them pass were unavailing. Messrs. Isenberg and Muhliesen proceeded to Abyssinia by the way of Massowah, to ascer- tain the disposition of the new Abuna, and see 'whether there might not be an opening for the renewal of the mission at the Capital. But in this they were disappointed. They found the enemies of the mission in the ascen- dancy ; the Abuna gave them no encourage- ment ; and the chief Oubea ordered them to quit Abyssinia. They had no alternative but to return to Cairo. But during their stay in Abyssinia, they were able to dispose of more than two thousand copies of the Scriptures. Dr. Krapf, meantime, visited Aden, in order to concert a plan for reaching the Galla tribes in Eastern Africa, from the Indian Ocean ; and from that place he wrote a letter to the com- mittee, asking their approval of the plan, which he afterwards received ; but while wait- ing for it he went to Massowah, and learning thj difficulties encountered by his associates, he remained on the frontier of Tigre, and em- plcyed himself in the distribution of the Scrip- tures. After receiving the approval of the com- mittee. Dr. and Mrs. Krapf sailed for Zanzibar, bat were driven back and exposed to great danger ; and after a very trying voyage they arrived at Zanzibar, Jan. 7, 1844. There he was kindly received by the Imaum of Muscat, to whom they were introduced by the British Consul. The Imaum wrote a letter to the governors on the coast, after this manner; " This note is given in favor of Dr. Krapf, the German, a good man, who desires to convert the world to God. Behave ye well toward him, and render him services every where." After remaining there about two months, lie proceeded on his way, touching at several places, and arrived at Mombas, a small island APRICA, EASTERN. 19 ai the mouth of the Tuaca river, about 4° south latitude, which he selected as the site of the mission. After his arrival there, Mrs. Krapf was called home, some of her last words being, " Do uot praise me in your account of my last hours ; but tell our friends that the Saviour has pardoned me, a poor miserable sinner." She had endured great hardships, in the tossings to and fro to which they had been subjected for months previous. After this afflictive bereavement, Dr. Krapf devoted himself with energy and zeal to the work of his mission, giving his first attention to the study of the languages spoken in those regions. He, however, made several excur- sions among the Wonica and Wakamba tribes on the continent, declaring to them the blessed gospel, and surveying the ground with refer- ence to future operations. He found the natives extremely degraded, indulging to a fearful ex- tent in habits of intoxication, and frequently selling their children to obtain the means of indulgence. He also applied himself to the work of translation ; and three years after the establishment of the mission, he had translated Genesis, Acts, Romans, Galatians, Peter, and 1 John into the Sooahelee language ; and Luke and John into both Sooahelee and Won- ica. He had also compiled a dictionary of 10,000 words of the Sooahelee, Wonica and Wakamba languages. In 1846, Rev. J. Rebb- man was appointed to this mission. Dr. Krapf had suffered from severe and repeated attacks of fever, which greatly impaired his constitution. He had, however, continued his missionary tours, in which he gathered much valuable information respecting the interior tribes, laboring to preach the gospel every where ; and wherever he could make himself under- stood, the natives would repeat what they heard to others, and thus spread the message of salvation. On the arrival of Mr. Rebbman, immediate arrangements were made for commencing a mission among the Wonicas, and New Rabbai was selected as the location ; which is situated about four miles to the west of the extremity of the bay, at a considerable elevation, com- manding an extensive view. The people, with one mind, cheerfully gave their consent to the establishment of the mission, assuring the mis- sionaries of their friendship and protection. Both Dr. K. and Mr. R. were laid aside some weeks with the fever ; and before they had fully recovered, they set out in great weakness, for the new mission. Dr. K. saying, " The mis- sion MUST be commenced ; and should death or life result to me, I can ncm have no regard to sickness whatever." They found this place more salubrious than Mombas ; and though encountering many difficulties, yet met with some encouragement. Although of a peace- able disposition, the Wonicas are deeply sunk in ignorance, indifference, superstition, and sensuality. In Sept. 1847, after laboring 13 months, they had established a small school and erected a small cottage for worship, which would hold 60 or 80 persons, but only a few had been induced to attend. These indefatigable missionaries continued to make exploring tours in the interior, and in one of their excursions to the north, they came in sight of the Galla country, so long the object of desire on the part of Dr. Krapf Their journeys to the west opened a new country, of which the phys- ical character and the disposition of the in- habitants present facilities for missionary labor of the most encouraging kind. The Wakam- bas, with whom the missionaries are in daily intercourse, carry on a traffic with the main body of their tribe, from 400 to 600 miles dis- tant in the interior. Three groups of moun- tains, 4,000 to 5,000 feet high, enclose the Faita country, whose inhabitants are estimated at 170,000 souls ; and Dr. Krapf thinks there are no insurmountable obstacles in the way of establishing a mission among them. In 1848, Mr. Rebbman explored the country beyond Faita, called Jagga, travelling on foot amidst a thorny jungle, infested by wild beasts, for seven days. But having ascended the second range of mountains, he felt as if walking in the Jura mountains, in the Canton of Basle, so cool was the air, so beautiful the scenery. It will be recollected, that in 1843, thii mis- sionaries were forcibly driven from Abyssinia, through the influence of the emissaries of Rome. Since that time the Jesuits themselves have been obliged to leave the country. In June, 1849, Mr. Lieder writes that the young king of Shoa, Beshaheh Ouered, had written to the Queen of Great Britain, desiring a renew- al of the friendly intercourse that had existed between the British Government and his fa- ther, and to Dr. Krapf, requesting his return. The young king, only 14 years of age, had re- nounced the heterodox notions of his father, and delivered hundreds of persons whom the late king had thrown into prison, because they would not embrace his views. He had also taken the Metropolitan, Amba Salame, (see Abyssinia,) as his spiritual guide. Amba Salame himself, had also written to Mr. Lieder for two good teachers, as he was anxious to open a school of a superior character, in Gon- dar. And the king of Abyssinia and the Abuna had both written to Bishop Gobat, proposing that he should undertake the super- intendance of the Abyssinian Convent at Je- rusalem ; in consequence of which the Com- mittee determined to establish a mission at Je- rusalem, to provide, among other objects, for the instruction of Abyssinian pilgrims. Dr. Krapf and his associates, in their reports for 1849, speak discouragingly of their pros- pects at the new station of Rabbai-I^/np/a, owing to the depths of ignorance and super- stition to which the people were reduced. Their minds are enslaved by sorcery; and many cruel customs, such as putting to death 20 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. all deformed children, prevail among them ; yet the missionaries had been encouraged by the awakening of a poor cripple. This year the mission received a reinforcement ; but one of the newly arrived missionaries was cut off by inflammatory fever soon after their ar- rival. They had continued to prosecute the ex- ploring tours, showing wonderful openings for the entrance of the Gospel into the interior. In the mean time, Dr. Krapf prosecuted the Btady of the languages, and the translation of the Scriptures, with zeal and success. He has come to the conclusion that, from the Galla boundary down to the Cape of Good Hope, there is one family of languages, which he calls the Suaheli stock ; which stock, he thinks, from specimens he has received of West Afri- can languages, commences on the southern bank of the Gaboon Elver. The report of the mission for 1850 is en- couraging. The poor cripple noticed the pre- vious year had been baptized and died in hope ; and two others had made an open profession of their belief in Christianity, one of whom was the father of a family, in independent cir- cumstances, and the other a learned Moham- medan, the Cadi of his village, who gave up his office, and the gains attached to it, for the Gospel's sake, and placed himself under the instruction of the missionaries. , The missionary tours have been continued ; and Dr. Krapf giv&s the following view of the great results to which his discoveries may lead : " When once the time has fully come that the Hamitio race shall be made acquainted with the Gospel, and be received into the fa- mily of God's children on earth, the high roads of Africa will take every observer by surprise. It will then be manifested that the facilities of communication on the African continent, are not inferior to those of Europe, Asia and America. God's Providence has certainly paved the way for the speedy ac- complishment of his sublime designs. The Niger will carry the messengers of peace to the various states of Nigritia, while the Tshadda, together with the Congo, will convey them to the western centre of Africa, toward the northern tribes of Uniamesi. The differ- ent branches of the Nile will lead the mission- aries toward the same centre from the north and north-east, while the Jub and the Dana will bring them in from East Africa ; and the Kiliraani will usher them in from the south. The sources of these great rivers are not so dis- tant from each other as our present gengraph- ical knowledge would lead us to believe. Shall we propose, therefore, and undertake the form- ation of a mission chain, linking together the eastern and western coasts of Africa ? Or, shall we follow up the water-courses of the connnent, by establishing missions at the sources and estuaries of those great rivers ? The Tshadda, the Congo, the Nile and the Kill- mani rivers, take their rise either from the great lake in Uniamesi, or very near it. And if the communication with Central Africa shall be found so simple and so easy, why should we question the speedy spread of Christianity and Christian civilization in Africa?" In these tours, the missionaries obtained much valuable geographical information ; and among other objects of interest, they saw a range of mountains, the tops of which were covered with perpetual snow. After the com- pletion of these tours. Dr. Krapf visited Eng- land, in order to print his translations, and to confer with the Society upon future plans for the East African Mission. He also visited Germany, where he selected three pious me- chanics to accompany him to Africa, and one of the students at Basle, who was ordained by the Bishop of London. Dr. Krapf having fully explained to the Committee his views upon the East African Mission, he returned at the beginning of 1851, with the view of es- tablishing new stations, retaining Rabbai as a starting point on the coast. He returned accordingly, with his new associates ; and, after their arrival at Rabbai, he began preparations for going with Mr. Pfefferle to Usambara, to redeem a pledge given to King Kmeri, of es- tablishing a mission among his people. But Mr. Pfefferle soon after died of nervous fever, the fever of the country, and Dr. K. prosecuted the journey alone, with some native servants, who deserted him in the hour of danger. He was attacked by robbers on the way, and obliged to give up the object, and to return to the coast. But while attempting to reach the river Dana, he was again attacked, and came near losing his life. And, after a fatiguing journey, suffering from hunger and thirst, and amid many perils, he at length reached the sta^ tion. But, with indomitable resolution, he still pursues his object of establishing a chain of missions across the continent ; but thinks tney cannot at once penetrate far into the in- terior, but that they must first occupy a nearer post. Dr. Krapf afterwards visited Usambara, and King Kmeri received him well, and desired that the mission might be established on a mountain thirty or forty miles from the estuary of the river Pangani ; and offered to order a considerable number of his sub- jects to build houses and cultivate the land for him ; and also to afford them protection and give them an opportunity to carry on their labors. A wide door for usefulness here pre- sented itself, but at the latest dates, he had not entered upon the work. AFRICA, SoDTHBKN : The region south of Cape Negro, on the west, and of the river Zambezi, on the east, embracing, within its limits, the English colony of the Cape of Good Hope. Topography.— The country consists of three I successive plateaus, increasing in elevation ac- AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 21 cording to their distance from the sea, and sep- arated from each other by as many chains of mountains. The first of these is called the Lange Kloof, or Long Pass ; and between it and the sea is an irregular belt of fertile land; well watered with small streams and frequent rains, from 20 to 60 miles in breadth. It is well wooded with forest trees, and from its proximity- to the ocean has a mild climate. The ne.xt chain is the Great Black Mountain, (Groote Zwaite Bergen.) It is more lofty and rugged than the first, consisting, in many places, of double and treble ranges, and some- times rising to the height of 4,000 feet. Be- tween these two is a belt of ubout the same area as that outside the first, composed in some parts of barren hills, in others, of naked arid plains of clay, called Karroo, interspersed with fertile and well-watered patches of land. The third chain of mountains, called the Niew- vehlt Gebirgte, unites toward the east, with the Schneeuw-bergen (Snow Mountain,) the high- est in South Africa, its most elevated peak be- ing 10,000 feet above the sea ; and covered with perpetual snow. Between this and the second range is an arid, desert plain, nearly 300 miles in length by 80 to 100 in width, called the Great Karroo. This is not a sandy plain, like the great desert, but a sort of table- land, thinly covered with an argillaceous soil, impregnated with iron, upon a substratum of rook. It is about 3,000 feet above the level of the sea. The beds of numberless rivulets, in which water is rarely to be found, cross it like veins, in a thousand directions. Mr. Moffat says, the entire country, extending in some places hundreds of miles on each side of the Orange river, and from where it empties into the Atlantic to beyond the 24:th degree of east longitude, appears to have the curse of G-ilboa upon it. It is rare that rains to any ex- tent or quantity fall in those regions. Ex- treme drought continues for years together. Tho'ountains are few and precarious, and some of them have dried up altogether. / Prom the west coast the country ascends, in a similar manner towards the interior, by successive plateaus, separated by mountain chains. The Roggeveldt (Rye-field,) the lofti- est of these, rises to more than 5,000 feet above the level of the sea. To the north of all, and near the boundary line of the territory, there is a chain of mountains 9,000 feet in height. The whole tract of country to the north is much more sandy, barren and thinly inhabited than that to the east, which, as it recedes from the Cape, seems to increase in fertility and beauty. The third great chain of mountains forms the watershed, or division between the streams which flow north, iato the country of the Bos- jesmans or Bushmen, and those which run southwest, through the colony. On its northern side, rise the tributaries of the Orange river, and' on its south the Great Doom, (Thorn,) Gamha, Camtoos, Sunday, Great Fish, and other rivers. On the west coast, the principal streams are the Great Berg, (Mountain,) and Olifant or Elephant river. Both are naviga- ble for small craft about twenty miles. On the south coast are the Breede or Broad river, the Gauritz, Camtoos, Sunday and Great Fish. The Broad river is navigable for small craft about 30 miles. Considering the extent of the coast, good harbors are few. Saldanha Bay, Cape Town, is the best. The Great Lake. — On the 1st of June, 1849, Rev. David Livingston, son-in-law of Mr. Ma£fat,of Kolobeng, more than 200 miles N. E. by N. from Kururaan, proceeded on a tour of discovery to Lake Ngami, 300 miles N. W. from Kolobeng. But by the circuitous route which he pursued, he traveled about 600 miles. After proceeding about 300 miles through the desert of Kalihari, the party struck on a magnificent river, the Zouga, and following it to its source, it proved to be the Great Lake. The banks of this river are beau- tiful, covered with gigantic trees, some of them bearing fruit. Two of the Boabob variety measured 70 to 76 feet in circumference. The higher they ascended the broader the river be- came. It has a periodical rise of water, sup- posed to be occasioned by the melting of the snow on the mountains. Its waters are clear and soft, and it is said to be connected with other large rivers, running from the north. Another party visited this lake in 1852, and ascertained its length to be sixty-five, and its average breadth 12 miles. It is at an eleva- tion of 2,825 feet above the sea. Mr. Living- ston found a tribe of natives on the banks of the Zouga, called Bakoba or Bayeiye, in whom he was deeply interested. They are a totally distinct race from the Bechuanas, their com- plexion being darker, and they speaking a dif- ferent language. He admired their frank, manly bearing. They listened to the state- mente which he madd respecting the Divine "Word, and seemed to understand them. They were found dwelling around the lake, and on the banks of all the rivers to the north, which seemed to open a highway capable of being quickly traversed by boats. Thus is the way opening in every direction, for the en- trance of the gospel into that dark region. In 1851, Messrs. Livingston and Orwell again started for the north, but in a more east- erly direction, when they reached the latitude of 17° 25' S., and discovered the Ohobe and Sesheke, deep and constantly flowing rivers, supposed to be the feeders of the Zambezi. The Zouga was ascertained to be absorbed in sands and salt pans. The country through which the former rivers flow, is level and very fertile. Capt. Yardon explored the region north- east of Kolobeng, tracing the Limpopo river to a considerable distance. In 1851, Mr. Gal ton explored a part of South Africa from AFRICA, SOUTHERN. Walfish Bay, on the west coast as far as lat. 17° 58' S. and 21° E. long., accurately deter- mining the whole region. In lb52, a journey was made by Mr. Plant, from Natal to Dolagoa Bay, in which he dis- covered that St. Lucia Bay leads into an ex- tensive inlet, hitherto unknown. Climate. — The climate is in general temper- ate and healthy, but unsteady, disagreeable, and not well suited to agriculture. In the south-western districts, the rains in the cold season are profuse, but of rare occurrence in the summer. In the more northerly districts, sometimes no rain falls for years ; which, how- ever, Mr. Moffat attributes to the universal destruction of the forests. Generally, through- out the colony, the rain, when it does come, pours down in torrents, occasioning great dam- age. Sometimes the southeast wind is a spe- cies of Simoom, excessively hot, and loaded with an impalpable sand. The mean tempera- ture of the (Jape is about 67 1-2° Fahr., the coldest being 57° and the hottest 79°. Yet Mr. Moffat thinks the climate of the colony perhaps the healthiest to be found in any part of the world. With reference to the cli- mate of the whole of Southern Africa, Mr. Moffat says, " It varies from that in which thunder-storms and tornadoes shake the moun- tains, and the scorching rays of an almost ver- tical sun produce the mirage, to that which is salubrious and mild, within the boundaries of the colony along Kaffre-land to the fruitful and well-watered plains of the Zulu country, in the vicinity of Port Natal ; while the more mountainous and elevated regions are visited by keen frosts and heavy falls of snow." Native Population. — When the Cape was first discovered by Bartholomew Diaz, and when it was taken possession of by the Dutch in 1662, the whole of what is now designated as the colony was inhabited by the Hottentots proper. The Kaffres proper live beyond the fish river; on the eastern boundary of the colony. They form one tribe of the great Bechuana family. Their national character is bold and warlike. Their country is bounded by the ocean on the south, and a range of mountains on the north, and beyond them lie the Amopondo and Zulu tribes, belonging to the same family. North of Kaffre-land, between the Winterberg moun- tains and the higher branches of the Yellow river, lies the country inhabited by the Basu- tos, a tribe of Bechuanas. Beyond the Basu- tos to the north of Orange river, lie the other Bechuana tribes, whose numbers and extent are yet unknown. The country from the limits of the desert to the west coast is called Great Namaqualand, and contains a thin population of the Hotten- tot race. To the north of the Namaquas, lie the Damara tribes, of whom comparatively little is known, except that they approximate, in physical appearance and color, to the negroes on the west coast. These tribes inhabit a country extending from the tropic of Capri- corn to the Cape of Good Hope, and from the Atlantic to the shore of the Indian ocean. The tribes which have been mentioned arc those which have been the objects of mission- ary labor. (See Cape Colony, Kaffres, Hot- tentots.) — - McCullock's Geography ; Mojfat^s Labors and Scenes in Southern Africa, Cfuiv. I.; Encmlopedia Britannica. Moravian Mfssion.— Missionary operations were first commenced in South Africa, by the United Brethren. In 1737, George Schmidt arrived at Cape Town, a free passage having been granted him by the Dutch East India Company. His object was to make known the gospel to the Hottentots; and he soon commenced his labors at Bavian's Kloof, after- wards called Genadendal, (Vale of Grace.) Though obliged to preach through an inter- preter, his self-denying efforts were followed by considerable success. The Hottentots regarded him with sentiments of unfeigned love and admiration ; and in the course of a few years a number of them received his message as the truth of God. Finding himself, however, much embarrassed in his operations by the in- terference of the colonial government, he re- paired to Europe in 1744 to obtain a removal of his grievances. But he not only failed to secure this important object ; the Dutch East India Company even refused to sanction his return to the scene of his labors ; and for fifty years the harvest which he had begun to gath- er, was left without a reaper. At length, however, in July, 1792, Marsveld, Schwinn and Kiihnel were permitted to search for the few sheep, who had been left so long without a shepherd at Genadendal. They found a part of the Wall of the old mission-house standing ; and in the garden attached to it were some of the fruit-trees which Schmidt had planted. An aged female whom he had baptized, and who still retained a remem- brance of her beloved teacher, rejoiced exceed- ingly when she was told that the new mission- aries were his brethren. The Hottentots, — some of whom recollected their old pastor, while many had heard of his brief but beneficent ca- reer, — rallied around his si-ccessors ; and before the end of 179.3, seven persons were baptized. Great opposition, however was encountered, from the Dutch farmers, or boers, as they aro called, who, thinking the instruction of the Hottentots likely to prove injurious to their temporal interests, manifested their hostility by poisoning the minds of the natives, and by threatening violence against the missionaries. They also preferred charges against them, to the colonial government, thereby securing or- ders for embarrassing their proceedings. By these means the mission was for a long time kept in a state of constant alarm. In one AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 23 instance, a numerous body of the colonists rose in arms, to obtain a redress of alleged griev- ances, among which was the attempt to evan- gelize the Hottentots ; in consequence of which, the missionaries were, at one time, driven from their post. Mr. Schwinn, while traveling to Cape Town, on one occasion, was refused either lodg- ing or refreshment by the colonists, and was compelled to ride all night, attended by a sin- gle Hottentot, through a desert country infest- ed with runaway slaves. Through all these trials, however, the native converts stood by their teachers, in the greatest extremities. But iu 1795, the colony was taken posses- sion of by the British Government, and the mission at Baviau's-Kloof, was taken under protection by the new government. After this, they enjoyed more quietness and peace, a con- siderable number of new people came to them, and the word of God was owned and blessed to the conversion of souls. A Church was built, and before the close of the year, twenty adult converts were baptized. Still their ene- mies were not quiet. In February, 1796, some of the neighboring farmers assembled a hundred armed men, with the design of murdering the missionaries, and destroying their settlement ; but the plot was discovered by the govern- ment, and prevented. Afterwards the boei-s undertook to starve the missionaries and their people, by refusing them provisions, which oc- casioned much sufiering. But the Lord turned the hearts of some of the worst of their perse- cutors, who acknowledged the utility of their labors, and sent a wagon load of corn to the settlement, at a lower price than it would have been sold elsewhere. The mission now began to be visited by per- sons of influence at Cape Town, who bore hon- orable testimony to its good effects ; and among others, ifr. Borrow, who gives the fol- lowing account of what he saw : " Early on Sunday morning, I was awakened by some of the finest voices I had ever heard, and looking out, saw a group of Hottentot women neatly dressed in calico, sitting on the ground, and chanting their morning hymn. The mission- aries were middle-aged men, plain in their dress, meek and humble in deportment, but in- telligent and lively iu conversation, zealous in their cause, but free from bigotry. Every thing partook of their characteristic neatness and simplicity. Their church was a neat plain building, and their mill the best in the colony. Their garden produced abundance of vege- tables. Almost every thing had been done by the work of their hands, their society requiring every one to understand some trade. They have upwards of six hundred Hottentots, and their numbers are daily increasing. These live in huts dispersed over the valley, to each of which is attached a piece of land, and their houses and gardens are very neat and comfort- able ; and all are engaged in useful trades or occupations. On Sunday they all regularly attended public worehip, and it is astonishing how neat and clean they appear at chm-ch. Their deportment was truly devout. The dis- com-se of the missionary was short, pathetic, and full of good sense. The women sung in a plaintive and affecting style, and their voices were sweet and harmonious." In 1798, a reinforcement arrived from Eu- rope, and the old church was converted into dwellings, and a new one built, capable of holding 1,500 persons, the settlement having increased to 1,230. Eighty-four were baptized during this year. In the summer of 1800, an epidemic fever raged for some months, carrying off sometimes eight or ten a day. To meet the occasion an ar- rangement was made by which each missionar ry and his wife visited a certain district every week, making a circuit of four or five miles, at great peril to their own lives. They found the poor people lying in the greatest misery, upon nothing but a sheep-skin spread on the bare ground, without medical aid, and often with- out food ; the convalescent tormented with hunger, and the poor, naked children crying for food. AVheu they spoke to them, in those circumstances, of the love of Jesus, they were cheered by seeing them listen with eagerness, seeming to forget all their sufferings, and re- signing themselves to the will of the Lord, ex- pressing their confident hope that he would receive them to himself, and extolling his good- ness, in sending them teachers to instruct them in the knowledge of their Redeemer. By this time, (1801,) the fame of Bavian's- Kloof had spread far and wide, and the natives came in companies, some of them the distance of a six weeks' journey. One poor woman came, who said she understood Bavian's-Kloof to be an asylum for poor sinners like herself who had become tired of the service of Satan, and were desirous of finding rest for their souls. Peace being concluded between the English and Dutch, the colony was restored to the latter, and the new governor proved friend- ly to the mission, and one of the missionaries was appointed chaplain to the colony. At the suggestion of Gen. Jansen, fhe Governor, the name of the place was changed to Gnadeiithal, or Genadendal, which means GracevaJe. In January, 1806, the colony was a^ain con quered by the»British ; but the government continued friendly to the mission. In 1807, a new settlement was formed at Groenckloof, or Green-glen, in the high road between Cape Town and Saldanha Bay, and Messrs. Schmitt and Kohrhammer removed there with their wives in 1808. They soon gathered a settle- ment around them, and their labors were blessed by the Holy Spirit, and many were turned to the Lord, giving evidence of repent- ance and faith. The following remarks of one of these converts is a specimen of the feelings generally expressed, giving evidence of the 2i AFRICA, SOUTHERN. gennineness of the work of grace in the heart : " I seem to be surrounded by my sins, lilie a man standing in the midst of the fire, and am ready to be consumed by the anguish of my spirit ; but in this situation, I stretch out my arms toward heaven, and exclaim. Lord Jesus, suffer some drops of thy heavenly grace to quench the flame which threatens to destroy me." ., The mission still continued to enjoy the pro- tection of government and the blessing of God, and the converts made good progress in their knowledge of divine truth. The heathen from a distance were led in a remarkable manner, as by some unseen influence on their minds, to flock to the mission settlements. One woman said that her father one day called his family around him and said, " My dear children, though you are Hottentots and despised by men, yet behave well ; for I believe that God will, at some future time, send us teachers from a distant country. I may not live to see that day, but you will hereafter know that I have told you the truth. As soon as you hear that such persons have arrived, hasten to them, and obey their instructions." Soon after the old man's death, the teachers arrived, and as soon as the daug'hter heard of it, she went to them, was instructed in the way of salvation, and after some time, was received into the church. In 1815, Rev. C. J. Latrobe, Secretary of the United Brethren's Society, visited the mis- sion, accompanied by four male and two female missionaries. This visit was productive of much good ; and while there, he made an ex- pedition into the interior, accompanied by three of the missionaries, and the surveyor of the government, and selected a site for a new station, on the banks of Witte Revier, near the frontiers of Kaflraria, which was afterwards called Shiloh. In December of this year, the inhabitants of Genadendal were suddenly involved in dis- tress, by the descent of a torrent from the mountains, which overwhelmed the greater part of their premises with destructive violence, and occasioned great damage. But when the missionaries spoke to the poor Hottentots of the damage done to their grounds, they replied, that they had cause to thank the Lord for his mercy, that notwithstanding their great de- merit, they had been chastised with so much lenity. • In 1817, the 'Governor of the colony. Lord Somerset, visited the mission at Genadendal, and after expressing the highest gratification at what he saw, presented them with three hundred dollars for the use of the school. On the 7th of April, 1818, Eev. H. Schmitt, and his wife, with three single men and the widow of Kohrhammer, commenced the mis- sion at Shiloh, or Witte Kevier, or White river. Considerable numbers of natives began to a1> tend on their preaching, when they were in volved in the greatest calamities by a predor tory excursion of the Kaffires, which resulted m the loss of their cattle, and the murder of nine of their Hottentots, and compelled the missiona- ries to leave the station. On the 18th of May, Mr. Hoffman visited Witte Revier, and found the mission premises burnt, and everything destroyed. But, in October, peace having been concluded between the KaSres and the colonial government, the mission was resumed, and rapid and interesting improvements were effected at the new settlement. Rev. H. F. Hallbeck says, in 1821 : " On the spot where, two years ago, we knelt in the fresh track of an elephant, and offered up our first prayer for the prosperity of this establishment, I now found a beautiful orange tree, adorned at once with ripe fruit and fragrant blossoms; and short- ly after my arrival, I was invited to tea, under the huge yellow tree, in the shade of which, but lately, there were no assemblies but those of wild buffaloes, elephants, and other dreaded inhabitants of the desert." The Tambookies were a, wild race, on the borders of the Kaffres ; and the missionaries frequently complain of their intractableness, indifference, superstition and insubordination ; yet, from the first, they appear to have regarded ^.he missionaries with esteem and ven- eration, going to them for advice and for the settlement of their difficulties ; and down to the period of the breaking up of the station, during the late Kafire war, they have been gradually improving, and assimilating more and more to the habits and usages of Europe- ans. The gospel appears also to have taken effect upon the hearts of many of them. In July, 1822, the settlements at Genadendal and Groenckloof again suffered severely by flood, involving them almost in complete ruin. The buildings were damaged to the amount of thousands of dollars, and the huts of the Hot- tentots, together with their grounds, very much injured. They also lost a great many cattle. At the same time the settlement at Enon was suffering severely from famine. In 1826, the missionary writes ; " A new dwelling-house is building under the inspection of a Hottentot mason of Genadendal, and I am surprised at the neatness and accuracy with which the work is done. This Hottentot lias not his equal, as a mason, either among the Africans or Europeans, in the neighborhood. He is an excellent character and a pattern of sobriety, industry, and Christian temper :" thus showmg the effect of missions in elevating the general character of the heathen, and qualify- ing them for the arts of civilized We In the year 1822, the Brethren were solicited by government to undertake the religious in- struction of a number of lepers, for whom the Hospital Hemel-en-Aarde had been erected in a romantic situation, at the foot of a mountain called the " Tower of Babel," near the sea. R«v. J. P. Lietner, in obedience to this ra^ quest, removed there with his wife, in Decern- AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 23 ber of that year, and the poor patients were overjoyed at their arrival. iSome of them, who had previously belonged to the church, at the stations, exclaimed, " Now we linow that Jesus has heard our prayers and sent us help ; for we have often entreated him to send our teachers to us." Others who had spent their time in fiddling and dancing, now broke their fiddles and became serious and attentive hearers of the word. This mission has been continued to the present time ; but the hospital was subse- quently removed to Bobbin's Island, that the patients might enjoy the benefits of sea-bath- ing, the missionaries accompanying them. The year 1832 was signalized by an encour- aging work of grace among the neighboring farmers. They had begun to attend public worship at the different stations, and in several families a striking change had taken place. " In view of this work, our churches have been filled with attentive hearers, our schools with crowds of children, and both churches and schools have been filled with the hallowed pre- sence of the Spirit of God, who has wrought a marvelous change in the hearts of many, both old and young. Wonderful indeed has been the revival of religion around us, by which the tone of society has been changed, and the farmers, who in former years opposed the work, are now brethren and fellow labor- ers in Christ, sympathising in our sorrows, and rejoicing in, and praying for our success." The awakening among the farmers contin- ued throughout the years 1833 and 1834, and the converts among them remained steadfast in the faith. One of the brethren called on a woman who was dangerously ill, who grasped his hand and with great fervency exclaimed, " The Lord himself sent you to this land, in order to be the means of saving my soul from perdition : this I wanted to tell you before I die." She informed him that she was awakened by a conversation he had with her in 1829, every word of which she remembered. Her husband also had been awakened, and had es- tablished family prayer. There has continued to be, down to the pre- sent time, a steady increase of numbers at the several settlements, the natives sometimes crowding in, in great numbers. There has, also, been a steady improvement in industry, agriculture, mechanical employments, houses, dress and the arts of civilized life. And gen- erally, every year, there has been evidence of the special presence of the Holy Spirit in the conversion of souls, and sometimes in large numbers. The converts have for the most part, given evidence of gi-owth in grace, and general improvement ; though almost every year it has been necessary to cut off some members for disorderly conduct. The general influence of the gospel in elevating the charac- ter of the natives, has been very marked and striking. The Governor of the colony on visit- ing Genadendal, in 1849, remarked to Rev. Mr. Teutsch, " Tstation of the Griqua Mission, among the young people, as the result of which, ninety were added to tne cnurcn, of whom the mis sionaries say, the following year, " Generally, the new converts give us great satisfaction." In 1851, there was a gracious work at Long Kloof, which continued, with very little inter- mission, to the following year, and fifty of the converts had been received into the church. The effects of the gospel are visible, also, in outward things, at all the stations. The re- port of the Caledon Institution for 1849, says, " the people are gradually and steadily ad- vancing, not only in knowledge, but in civili- zation, which is chiefly seen in their adoption of better clothing, the increase of domestic comforts, and the superior quality of their food. And, as long ago as 1841, Dr. Philip, while on a tour among the missions, writes from Caledon : " This station presents a most gratifying spectacle to those who saw it in former times. In 1823, the people were in rags. Few of them had any covering on, ex- cept the filthy sheep-skin kaross. Their huts were of the most wretched description. They were given to drunkenness, and its kindred AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 33 vices, and the ground on wWoh they resided lay waste. In 1825, and the two following years, their condition was, if possible, still more miserable, and the lands were in the possession of the neighboring boers. The people are now dressed in British manufactures, and make a very respectable appearance in the house of God. The children who formerly went naked, and presented a most disgusting appearance, are decently clothed. Instead of a few wretch- ed huts, resembling pig-styes, we have now a rising and regular village ; and the valley on which it stands, which till lately was unculti- vated, is now laid out in gardens. AVhile re- ligion was low among the people, we could not get them to build decent houses ; but last year the walls of forty houses were raised." Among the Fingoes, who are constant in their attendance on the means of grace, a marked and pleasing change is exhibited in their outward appearance. In 1843, Mr. Pass- more wrote : " The red clay, used for anointing their bodies, has been superseded by the cleans- ing waters of the spring, and the kaross and blanket have given place to garments of Eu- ropean manufacture. Many have made great progress in several branches of knowledge. The desire for instruction is very great. In the summer, many of them come from their work, and remain in school till half-past nine o'clock in the evening, before they go home for refreshment, and they purijjiase with avidity all the books that are published." Mr. Solomon, on arriving at Griquatown, in December, 1843, writes : " I found the great majority of them no longer living in their mat huts, covered with their filthy karosses, subsist- ing on roots and game, but dwelling in Europe- an houses, many of them of stone or brick ; decently clothed in European attire ; cultivat- ing all the ground capable of cultivation ; pos- sessing flocks and herds ; and enjoying many of the comforts of life. I found many of them in- telligent and respectable, in every sense of the term, who would reflect credit on any community." He says, also, that the influence of the mission was not confined to that parti- cular spot, but had extended to some distance in all directions ; and that there were several outposts where churches had been gathered, some of them containing 100 to 200 members, walking as becometh Christians. Testimonies of this kind might be given to an indefinite extent; but we have room 'for but one incident more on this point, which will show that the change is perceived by the heathen, and its cause acknowledged : A Pin- go, traveling through Hankey, where the so ciety have a station, sat down to rest at the door of the place of worship, and looking round on the houses, behind which the gardens were concealed, asked one of the deacons how the people got food in such a place. The deacon told him to look at him, and see if he was not healthy and well clothed. He then called a fine child, and told the man to look at it, and see if it was not well fed. The stranger assented, but seemed perplexed. The deacon then told him if he would attend service the next day, he would see that it was so with them all. The Pingo rose to depart, and lift- ing up his eyes and right hand to heaven, ex- claimed, " It is always so where that God is wor- shipped !" The following incident, which occurred in 1848, at Long Kloof, shows the influence of the schools upon children, even of a tender age, and their reflex influence upon the parents. A man utterly regardless of divine things was induced by a relative to send two children to the school, a boy of eight and a girl of six years. After a few weeks he came for the boy, as he wanted him to herd calves. The boy objected to going, " because," said he, " there is nothing good taught at the place where father lives." " But," said the father, " what can such a thing as you learn here ?" " Father," said the boy, " I have learned some- thing." " Eepeat it, then," said the father. The boy replied, " ' It is a faithful saying, and worthy of all acceptation, that Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners ? ' Does father know who Jesus Christ is ? He is the Son of God. Does father know who are sin- ners? All are sinners." This conversation so afiected the father that he returned home without the boy, and in a few weeks came back, an altered man, having, as he said, " met ■ with the precious word of God." ' P.olygamy has been found to be a great hin- drance to the progress of the gospel The people seemed to have no idea of the sinfulness of the practice. But the missionaries gave no countenance to it, and required the converts to give up all but one wife, and to prefer the first one. Sechele, the chief at Kolobeng, was the chief rain-dootor of his district, and had been reckless of human life. But, from the commencement of the mission, he attended school and all other services. The truth took hold of his heart, and he professed it boldly among his people. But the great sacrifice he had to make was the renunciation of polygamy. His surplus wives were the most amiable women, and the best scholars of any in the town. Soon, the chief sent two of them to their parents, with the message that the word of God had come between him and their daughters. The others were properly disposed of Bach of them carried away all that be- longed to her, and the chief supplied each of them with new clothing. As soon as it was known that he had renounced his wives, a gen- eral consternation seized both old and young. The town was as quiet as if it had been Sun- day. Not a single woman was seen going to her garden. Councils were held during the night, in order to intimidate him. But he remained firm, and after being tried in various ways for two months, he was baptized. AFRICA, SOUTHERN. Many very interesting cases are mentioned, to show the effect of the gospel, in producing a spirit of liberality. At all the stations they have generally shown a disposition to contri- bute according to their ability. A poor woman, a cripple, hired herself out to earn something to give to the missionary cause. When the time for the missionary meeting came, she asked her mistress for five shillings, who, in reply, told her that sober and indus- trious people ought not to give anything, but rather drunkards, who squandered their money. She replied, " Mistress, such persons can do as they choose, but we fed that we m^uM give." At the conclusion of a Sabbath service at Port Elizabeth, the missionary called on a man to offer prayer. He commenced by al- luding to the condition of himself and country- men before they heard the gospel, when they indulged in vice, and when they were ready to murder each other ; but when he came to speak of G-od's goodness in having sent the gospel to them, and in having made them par- takers of its blessings, his voice faltered, and his heart seemed too full for utterance. He said, " How can we ever love thee as we ought to do, for thy love to us ? " He could go no further, but sat down, and continued sobbing all the time of the last hymn. This man, who was a poor Pingo, obtained his living by work- ing on the beach, up to his waist in water, landing goods ; and he brought the missionary eight shillings for the jubilee fund, and a sove- reign as his annual subscription. In 1843, there was extreme scarcity from want of rain in all the villages, yet, that year, the churches in South Africa, out of their deep poverty, contributed £1,600 for the support and exten- sion of the gospel. The society have turned their attention to the raising up of a native agency. In 1844, Mr. Mofi'at writes : " The state of our mission is very promising, with regard to the native agents employed in teaching and addressing the people. Six men are connected with Ku- ruman, and these, from what I know of them, are, through the divine blessing, calculated to do much good. It is truly delightful to ob- serve the fervent zeal of these godly men. In my opinion, this is the only means by which the interior of the country can have a stated ministry." And, again, in 1846 : " At all our stations the simple, but evangelic labors of our native assistants are receiving the divine bless- ing-" In the report of the society for 1847, the directors say, " During the greater part of last year, this field of the society's labors has been the theatre of war, and scenes have daily oc- curred over which the friends of humanity and religion must bitterly mourn. Thousands of lawless Kaffres invaded the colony, destroying the villages, stealing the cattle, and slaughter- ing the inhabitants. During the progress of these events, the four missionary stations of the society in Kaffreland were ruined ; the missionaries and their people were compelled to seek refuge in the colony ; their property fell into the hands of the enemy ; and the sev- eral settlements, with their houses and chapels, were totally destroyed. All the Christian in- stitutions and villages within the colony occu- pied by our brethren suffered in various de- grees, but the flourishing settlement of Kat River most severely." The reports of the mis- sionaries generally speak of the bad effects of the war, in engendering dissipation and vice ; but they bear testimony to the good conduct generally of the church-members, who were called into active service in the army. In the report of the society for 1852, the directors say : " The war has continued through- out the year to spread desolation and death. Alarm and distress have been universally prev- alent throughout the eastern districts, and many valuable lives have been sacrificed. A portion of the Hottentots, who, on all former occa- sions, proved loyal and able defenders of the colony, have been, unhappily, induced to unite with the hostile Kaffres. But it is to be re- gretted that the conduct of the colonists has been calculated to produce, in the minds of the colored people, distrust, estrangement, and en- mity. At the commencement of the contest, the governor, in his proclamation, doomed the Kaffres and their allies to extermination, and the British settlers joined heartily in the design. Extermination w^ the watchword in the field, and the motto inscribed on their banners, — producing, in the minds of the native popula- tion, the impression that it was a war of races. But the only stations of the society at which disaffection to the government has been man- ifested, are those of Kat River and Theopo- lis ; and, from its thirty-five stations, from four only have the missionaries been obliged to re- tire." In the report for 1853, they say : " This deadly conflict has at length terminated, and, as might have been foreseen, by the triumph of the British arms. The principal Kaffre chiefs have been driven, with their people, out of their country, and their lands allotted to British settlers and colonists, and on the widely extended frontier there will be military posts, from which the troops and settlers are to guard the colony against the return of the exiled natives." But th-ey justly complain of a treaty which has been concluded between the British government and the Dutch boers, by which the territory north of the Vaal river has been ceded to the latter, as the Free Dutch Republit, without any provision for the protection and freedom of the British missionaries, some ol whom have been laboring among the abori gines for more than twenty years, or for the numerous and prosperous Christian churches which they have gathered. In this treaty, the boers engage not to subject the natives to slavery, but no security was taken, and the AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 35 directors have no confidence that it will be executed. Already, three of the society's mis- sionaries and the natives among whom they were stationed, have suffered grievous outrage and wrong from the Dutch emigrants. During the month of August, 1852, they attacked the native tribes, among whom Messrs. Livingston, Inglis and Edwards labored ; the men were killed, and the women and children captured ; the property taken as spoil, and their villages destroyed. The house of Mr. Livingston was broken open, his property stolen, and his books torn to pieces and scattered to the winds. And, in the month of October, these three missionaries, after a mock trial, were sentenced to be banished from the country. And, on application by the directors to the home gov- ernment for redi-ess, they were coolly informed that the treaty with the Dutch emigrants had been confirmed by the government, thereby precluding the expectation of future liberty for the British missionaries, or of freedom for the native tribes. Rev. Mr. Helmore writes, Jan. 25, 1853 : " The boers are subjugating the Bechuana tribes to their iron yoke. Ma^ musa is destroyed ; the missionaries of Matebe and Mabotsa are driven out of the country ; Kolobeng is destroyed. Kuruman and Lekat^ long are the only stations of our society that yet exist in the Bechuana country. Alas ! for the tribes beyond us, still enshrouded in the black cloud of heathenism." It may not be out of place here to remark that, according to the statements of Dr. Philip, Mr. Moffat, and others, the missions in South Africa have met with greater hindrances from the opposition of the colonists and the inter- ference of the colonial government, than from all other sources, and that the oppressive policy pursued by the colonial government towards the natives, has been one of the chief obstacles in the way of their success. Much complaint is made of the canteens, or grog-shops, by which the mission settlements have been infested, and, in some instances, suc- cessful attempts have been made to counteract their influence, by introducing the pledge of total abstinence. At Dysaldorp, the Total Abstinence Society, in 1844, numbered 420 members, and was the means of a great moral reformation. Here, as in all parts of the world where mis- sions have been successful, the emissaries of Popery have come in to take possession of the harvest. In 1846, Dr. Philip says there were priests in all the villages, and some of these are represented as men of learning and ability, and they were employing every means that their zeal could dictate to make converts. The native converts, in speaking of their own religious feelings, manifest a simple-hearted piety, a knowledge of their own hearts, and of the gospel, in its adaptedness to their wants, with an implicit faith, truly remarkable ; and the death-beds of the departed have shown that this faith was able to sustain them in that hour which brings nought but terror and wailing to the heathen. The latest intelligence from these missions is encouraging. The report of the society for 1853 states that, "Although the stations throughout the colony have suffered, in conse- quence of the Kaffre war, some diminution in their temporal resources, and the men who en- tered the military levies have been exposed to the influence of the camp and the battle-field ; yet these evils have been far less than might have been dreaded. Even at the Kat River settlement. Rev. James Read has collected the scattered members of the church, and re- commenced the schools ; and at every other station, with the solitary exception of Theopo- lis, the believers have walked together in the fear of the Lord, and in the comfort of the Holy Ghost, and have been multiplied." But beyond the bounds of the colony, it has been otherwise. Tet it is gratifying to learn that the members of the churches, at the stations which have been broken up, have generally sought refuge at other mission settlements, and that their conduct, in these trying circum- stances, has been such as to honor their pro- fession. While the surrounding country has been subjected to the lawless attacks of the emi- grant boers, the station at Kuruman has been unmolested. Mr. Moflat writes, in November, 1852, that he is going on with the work of translation, and that the state of the work is more encouraging than in former times ; the people are more settled in their habits, and better informed ; the grounds at and near the station are becoming more generally cultivated. Mr. Ashton writes, January, 1853, that they had just admitted two young women to the church who were baptized in infancy, thus bringing in the fruits of the second generation. At the station at Long Kloof, within the colony, and at an out-station not far distant, an interesting work of grace commenced in 1852, about the time the men returned from the war. To the missionary it was an over- powering time. Many who had grown old ill sin, as well as the youth of both sexes, were crowding around to speak with him of the con- cerns of their souls. In the report for 1853, the work is noticed as still continuing. Sev- enty-three had been received into the church, as the fruits of the revival, and the church was apparently in a healthy state. The Rev. Dr. Livingston has returned from his third journey into the interior of the country, having penetrated 300 or 400 miles northward beyond the limits of his former travels. He found a country abounding with rivers, some of much greater magnitude than he had hitherto seen in Africa, and an interest- ing population, far more numerous than the native tribes further south. Though speaking different languages, they generally understood 36 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. the Sichuana, in wMcli Dr. L. preached to them the gospel. They received him with kindness, and he purposes, with the sanction which he has received from the directors, to retm'n and establish a mission among them. In 1848, Eev. J. J. Freeman, Home Secre- tary of the London Missionary Society, paid a visit to South Africa, for the purpose of devis- ing means for rendering the missions more effi- cient ; to inquire into the best means of econ- omizing the society's funds ; and to aid in car- rying into effect any new arrangements. He visited all the stations, and gave a highly en- couraging account of their condition ; but he agrees with Mr. Moffat and Dr. Philip, in his views of the oppression exercised towards the natives by the Dutch boers and other colonists, as well as by the impolitic measures of the colonial government ; — by means of which, the cause of missions is greatly embarrassed. And he expresses the fear that the native tribes, though yet numerous,' may be destined to ex- tinction. Slavery among the Dutch emigrants still exists. Mr. Freeman gives an account of a party of them visiting a peaceable settle- ment of natives, and demanding the orphan children ; and, on being refused, they took the children of the people by force, and on resist- ance being made, shot down the men, and car- ried off their children. The following table will exhibit the present condition of the several mission stations : by the Kaffre war and the Dutch boers. I^ ov withstanding the excitement and the unsettled state of things, consequent upon a state oi war, this table presents the churches m a healthy state. The yearly additions have, m some cases, been large; while the average as eleven to a missionary, which is, we tear greater than the average yearly additions to our country churches. The aggregate ol church members shows the number of converts to be equal to 134 to each missionary, ims, taken in connection with all the incidental o-ood accomplished, shows a large return tor the labor bestowed.— Ko/ai's Southern Afnca ; Br Philip's Researches in South Africa ; Ke- ports of the London Missimiary Society; Lmv don Missionary Register; Freeman s Tour m SoiUh Africa. W'esleuan Missionary Socwiu.— The first mis- sionary sent to South Africa by the "Wesleyan Missionary Society was John McKenny of Cole- raine, Ireland. Some pious soldiers in an En- glish regiment, at the Cape of Good Hope, in 1812, requested the English "Wesleyan Confer- ence, to send them a man to preach the gospel. Mr. McKenny offered himself for this service. On his an-ival at Cape Town, in August, 1814, he applied to the Governor, Lord Somer- set, for permission to preach, but this was re- fused ; and after several efforts at usefulness, in some other way, he was ordered to Cetjlon the next year, to join the band of missionaries which had gone out with Dr. Cole. Barnabas Shall', a name which will ever be remembered in connection with South Africa, offered himself for the mission field in 1815. On his way to the Cape of Good Hope, he and his devoted wife buried their only little one in the " deep, deep sea." On their arrival, they applied to the Governor for the usual license to exercise his ministry at Cape Town. " His excellency replied, that considering the high and responsible ofiice which he sustained, to- gether with the adequate supply of clergy- men for both the Dutch and English popular tion, and that several of the slaveholders were opposed to the instruction of the colored classes, he could not grant the sanction required. These restrictions on religious liberty had been imposed by the Dutch government in 1804. But Mr. Shaw believing that the command of the " King of kings," could not be counter- manded by any earthly authority, proceeded to open his commission as God's ambassador, on the following Sabbath day to a congregation composed of soldiers. His heart, however, was set on preaching Christ to the perishing heathen, and he earnestly looked for an oppoi^ ^^'^'^^yj^ ^° so. Just at this juncture. Key. H. &/tcmfei, missionary of the London Missionary Society, arrived in Cape Town with some Namaquas. Mr. Shaw sought an "*''J'^^^ T'*'^ *^™' ^^^ ^^ encouraged by The stations marked * have been broken up | Mr. Schemlen to attempt a mission among the Paarl Caledon Institution Pocaltsdorp Hankey & Kruia Fontein. Port Elizabeth Uitenhage Graliam 's Town Graaf Reinet Colesljerg George Town Someraet Kat River* (before the war in 1860) Cradocli Long Kloof or Avontuur. Fort Beaufort Dyaaldorp Bethelsdorp King William's Town .... Knapp's Hope * (1860) . . Peelton * (I860) Griqua Town Leltatlong Philopolis Kuruman Mamusa* (1850) Mabotsa* (1862) Kolobeng * Matebe * Stations 28 32 104 24.<) 127 230 241 214 67 36 32 177 600 27 199 164 171 91 72 16 40 650 460 324 187 116 5 4,601 104 140 140 604 40 282 130 167 26 60 70 91 85 30 60 360 250 126 40 16 200 120 126 460 160 100 3,483 1,757 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 37 heathen beyond the Orange river. - But the difficulties surrounding him were many and great. He had not yet the sanction of the committee for such an undertaking ; then the expense would be great, and besides, his wife's health was very feeble. But in this emergency this intrepid and devoted woman urged her husband to undertake the arduous enterprise, and pledged her personal property to sustain it, should the committee in London not be willing to bear the expense. This decided him. A wagon and oxen, with other neces- saries, were immediately purchased, and Bar- nabas Shaw and his wife, without knowing where they should find a resting place, or to whom they should go, set off on their journey through the African wilderness. They soon crossed the bounds of civilization ; and with the thermometer sometimes standing 110° in the shade, they plodded on their weary journey, and on the evening of the 27th day, they met a party of Hottentots, accompanied by a chief, who encamped near them. Mr. Shaw entered into conversation with them, and to his sur- prise and delight the chief informed him that having heard of the " Great Word," he was on his way to Cape Town to seek a Christian missionary, to teach him and his people the way of salvation. They had already traveled 200 miles, and there were yet nearly 300 more before they could reach Cape Town. It was certain that they could obtain no missionary there ; and that a peculiar providence arranged this meeting. Had either party started but half an hour earlier on their journey, they must have missed each other, they coming from Little Namaqualand, and Mr. Shaw fac- ing toward Great Namaqualand. The delight of this poor heathen chief may be imagined, when, after listening to his affectionate state- ment, Mr. Shaw informed him that he was a missionary of the Cross looking for a people to whom he might preach Jesus Christ ; and when he agreed to go back with him to his tribe, the chief wept aloud, " and rejoiced as one that had found great spoil." They pur- sued their way through deep forests, and across the most rugged and precipitous mountains, (over which even 14 oxen could hardly draw the wagon,) and when within two or three days' journey of their destination, the chief hurried on to inform his people of his success. On the last day of the journey, between 20 and 30 Namaquas, mounted on young oxen, came hurrying on to meet and welcome the missionaries. They approached at full gallop, their eyes sparkling with delight, and having saluted them, set off again at the top of their speed to announce their approach, when the whole town turned out to meet them. Next day a council was held, which was opened with prayer, and a sermon from, " This is a faithful saying" &c., and before the termination of the discourse, the chief and many of his people wept aloud. After which Mr. Schemlen, on behalf of Mr. Shaw, propounded a series of questions, relating to the establishment of a mission, to all of which most satisfactory an- swers were given. .This devoted German mis- sionary, having seeij them safely at their desti- nation, left them for his own field of labor, dis- tant four weeks' journey. Mr. and Mrs. Shaw found themselves sur- rounded by heathen, far from friends, and scarcely yet able to speak the language, so as to make themselves understood. They took up their abode in a hut, with neither chimney, door, or window, and without furniture, sleep- ing on a mat laid upon the bare ground. The day was devoted to manual labor — building a house and tilling the ground, — and the evenings to communicating religious instruction. With- in one month of his arrival, he was rejoiced to see some fruit of his labor. Soon a chapel was erected, a school commenced, a class formed, and a deep religious feeling extended itself among the people. In the month of June, Mr. Shaw admitted 1*7 adults into the Christian church by the ordinance of baptism ; in July the Lord's Supper was administered for the first time, and in December, the first Love Feast was held. The converts delivered their sentiments with great freedom and simplicity, of which the following are specimens : " Peter Links rose and said, ' I was formerly an enemy to missionaries, and when some wished to have one, I opposed it ; but now I am thankful for the word. I love it. It has taught me that I am a great sinner. When I felt this I wan- dered about eating bitter bushes hoping there- by to make atonement for my sins ; but I never found peace till I heard Jesus came to save the lost. I am thankful for what the book says, ' Come, let us reason together, though your sins be as scarlet,' &c. I have been like a poor little silly lamb, which is only just be- ginning to go. When the ewe goes from it a short distance, it turns aside, first to one bush and then to another. The ewe has her eye upon it, and goes . back again to it, and does all she can to induce it to follow her and will not forsake it. So the Lord has done for me.' The chief followed. His remarks were very brief : 'All the sins I have committed,' said he, ' from my childhood to the present time, seemed to be placed before my mind.' Very soon afterward he found mercy, and told Mr. Shaw, that ' though he had been extreme- ly sorrowful on account of the weight of his sins, the burden had been removed by the grace of God, and his mind was now filled with peace and joy.' Old Trooi rose up and said, ' When I first saw my sins I felt pain in my heart ; and by night, when all the people were sleeping in their huts, 1 could not close my eyes. I got up and went out. I wandered to and fro. I lay down on my hands and knees to pray. When I found one who told me what I should do to be saved, I was so de- lighted that I knew not how to go away. ' " 38 AI'EIOA, SOUTHEKN, In the depths of the African wilderness that same Divine Spirit, which had moved his peo- ple in England to undertake the mission, was enlightening the darkness of this people, and leading them to the enjoyment of a personal salvation through the labors of their solitary missionary. Early in 1818, Rev. E. Edwards arrived at Lily Fountain, (the name of the sta- tion,) to assist Mr. Shaw. His coming was most opportune, and greatly delighted the peo- ple. In gratitude for his arrival, the natives cheered them with " songs in the night." In their state of ignorance they had often danced at midnight to the sound of the kommet-pot, and now, beneath the same bright moon, in the calm stillness of the night, the mission party are startled from their slumbers by the sound of distant music. They rise and listen, and as it comes nearer, they discover it to be a happy band of the redeemed heathen going from hut to hut, and the song that rose on the midnight air was " a new song " — a hymn of praise, in their own language, to their Redeem- er, one verse of which according to their cus- tom was often repeated : "FaitK loves the Saviour and beholds His sufleriDgs, death and pain ; And this shall ne'er be old nor cold, Till we with him shall reign." As they went onward they called on the head of each family to engage in prayer, and thus left in their track the cloud of incense rising up from the domestic altar, acceptable before God. The committee had sent out with Mr. Ed- wards a forge and some iron, with other means of improvement. They set to work, and made ploughshares and other implements of indus- try, and soon agriculture began to show its happy effects around them. Nothing surprized them more than the heated iron, and the sparks from , the anvil. It was to them the day of wonder ; and as the Greeks bemoaned the lot of their ancestors, who had not lived to see Alexander on the throne of Darius, so the Na- maquas seemed to lament the lot of their fath- ers who had died before a forge was set up in their camp. A school-house was built, and with the assistance of Mr. Edwards, education began more rapidly to diflPiise its blessings. As an illustration of the difficulties attend- ing the introduction of letters among a barba- rous people, Mr. Shaw, when in England, about 184:1, stated in the hearing of the wri- ter, that for weeks he had tried in vain to make the Namaquas understand that the large letters he had traced on cards and hung up before them, each stood for a separate sound, and that their combination gave a word or idea. They looked astonished and burst into a loud laugh. He was growing disheartened ; but recollecting they had a name for each bul- lock, he again hung up his letters on a tree, while the Namaquas sat in a circle on the ground, and pointing to the first letter said, "There is bullock A," and to the second, " There is bullock B," and so on. Their eyes brightened ; they had caught the idea, and he had no more trouble. A good chapel and a mission house were erected. Meanwhile the work of God deep- ened in the hearts of the people. An awaken- ing commenced. Even the children held meet- ings for prayer by themselves. Clad in their karosses of sheepskin, they bowed before the Lord, and sung joyful hosannas to the Son of David. The news of this good work spread from tribe to tribe, and soon the cry was heard from distant places, "'Come over and help us." Some of the Lily Fountain people went on a visit to a tribe of Mulattoes, about sixty miles off, car- rying with them two little girls who had been taught to read and sing ; and so eager were those poor heathen to learn something of the way of life, that they kept the two little girls reading, praying, singing and answering ques- tions incessantly, scarcely allowing them any rest day or night. A desire was thus awak- ened in the breasts of many to be " taught the way of God more perfectly." One of the men of the tribe soon arrived at the station, and told the missionaries that the people living near him, who had never heard a sermon or seen a missionary, were longing for the gospel. Mr. Shaw visited the tribe, (in Bushman-land,) and preached there a few days. In February, 1819, a Hottentot from a dis- tant tribe, arrived at the station, and address- ing the missionaries said, " My errand in com- ing here is to request that you will come and teach us, at our place, the good tidings of the gospel. I am now an old man, and have long thought of the world. I now desire to forget the world and seek something for my soul. We have many people — Bastards, (Griquas,) Hottentots, and Bushmen, all of them earnest- ly desiring the gospel. I could not sleep, but rose early in the morning, and went to one of my friends, whose house was a considerable distance from mine, to speak with him. I found him in the very same state of mind with myself, longing to hear the gospel and greatly troubled. I stood amazed, and said this must be from God ; if it be not from him I know not from whence it has come. I will go to the Khamies mountain and hear for myself. He said, if you (the missionary,) will go with me, or come to us, we will send a wagon and oxen for you. If I cannot procure men (though I am now old) I will come myself ; and be as- sured I will never leave you. I will give all my cattle over to the other people, and live free from worldly care ; but you must come soon." Could it be possible that a mind thus drawn by the Spirit of God, (or those anxious ones in the tribes he represented,) would be left to gTope its way in darkness ? No, at the very time these words were being uttered in Africa, the Committee in London were mak- AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 39 iug arrangements to reinforce the mission; and soon the Rev. J. Archbdl, with his excel- lent wife were on their way. They arrived at Lily Fountain in July ; and two weelss after, in company with Mr. Shaw, they proceeded to open the new station in Bushmanland, at a place called Reed Fountain, about two days' journey from Lily Fountain to the east. The old Hot tentot received them with joy ; ground was selected, and a station formed, where the word of life was dispensed and eagerly received by this people. The pious natives of Khamies Berg (or mountain) continued to improve both in tem- poral and spiritual matters ; and were as a city set on a hill. Their light shone in wor- shiping God in their families. Mr. Shaw testifies concerning them :— " Oft have I heard them engaged in family prayer, before the sun had gilded the tops of the mountains, nor were their evening devotions neglected. As I have stood by the mission house, with the curtains of night drawn around us, I could hear them singing their beautiful evening hymn: " Christ eternal, light divine, Who constantly on us doth shine ; Thy presence shaU be with us here, Though neither sun nor moon appear." Then falling on their knees they felt the pre- sence of the Most High, and the fulfilment of the promise, ' The habitation of the just shall be blessed.' " The happy change was thus illustrated by one of their old men : " Myn- heer, before we received the gospel we were like an egg before the chicken is hatched ; we were surrounded with darkness, and could see nothing ; but when the gospel came it broke the shell, and now we see the light of day ! " Religion also led to temporal comfort. When the mission commenced in 1816, the habits of the people were filthy in the extreme, so that the effluvia from a congregation of them was enough to make the missionary sick. But no sooner did they receive the gospel than they washed and clothed themselves. Instead of living on roots, or by the chase, and creeping into a smoky hut, or a hole in the earth to sleep, they built houses and cultivated the soil and received the reward of their labor ; so that of many a spot in South Africa it may now be said, " There he maketh the hungry to dwell, that they may prepare a city for habitation, and sow fields and plant vineyards, which may yield the frijits of increase." Oeo. T/iompson Esq., and also Sir James E. Alexander have both, in their respective volumes of Travels, put on record a most pleasing testimony con- cerning this mission and others establislied by Mr. Shaw and his associates in South Africa. In 1820, Mr. Shaw undertook a journey to some of the tribes beyond the Orange river in order to explore the country and to avail him- self of any opening which might be presented for the further spread of the gospel. His jour- nal contains a record of dangers and toils and efforts, which has few parallels even in missionary history. Besides the burning sun and wind, they were constantly exposed to wild beasts and to savage men ; often in dan- ger of dying by hunger and thirst, or losing their way in the wilderness, or being dashed to pieces over the precipices round which they had to climb. But God preserved them; and after fourteen weeks' absence, they re- turned in safety. He made his report to the committee in London, and applied to the col- onial governor. Sir K. Donkin, who kindly per- mitted and encouraged him to open missions among the chiefs he had visited, many of whom had requested to have Christian teachers sent to them. In 1821, the mission was enlarged by the arrival of three more missionaries. Mr. Arclv- bell and the Hottentot assistant missionary, Jacob Links, being sent to the Great Nama- quas, Messrs. Kay and Broadbent were sent to commence a mission in the Bechuana country, and Mr. Hodgson to remain at the Cape, where permission had at length been obtained to communicate religious instruction to the slave population. The Albany and Kaffi-aria mis- sion had been commenced the year before by Wm. Shaw, (brother of Barnabas,) and two missionaries were also appointed to Madagas- car. The next year the devoted William Threlfall was sent to assist Mr. "William Shaw. Being again reinforced in 1823, Mr. W. Shaw opened a mission among the KafiFres under the protection of the Kaifre monarch, Pato, and Mr. Threlfall and Mr. Whitworth proceeded to open a mission still farther east, in Belagoa Bay. While Mr. Edwards left Khamies Berg to establish a station among the Coranna.%, on the banks of the Orange river, at a place called Moos. This and the station at Maquasse (about three degrees east of the junction of the Cradock, and one day's journey north of Orange river,) were much interfered with by incursions of savage tribes in their vicinity. Mount Coke, on the Buffalo river, was established the foUoiving year. The missionaries were engaged in their great work, learning the languages, building school-houses and places of worship, and preaching the word of life with considerable success when an event transpired which filled them with the deepest sorrow. They were called to resign part of their number to become the first mar- tyrs of the Methodist missions to South Africa. Among the first fruits of Barnabas Shaw's ministry at Khamies Berg, in 1816, was the family of the Links. This converted Hotten- tot family alone furnished three native teachers of such decided piety and suitable knowledge of the truth as to be very useful in the mission. One of these was Jacob Linlcs, who was at first employed as interpreter. But his progress in knowledge and piety was such that he soon be- gan to preach himself, and accompanied Mr. 40 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. Shaw in his various visits to neighboring tribes. He was very useful ; in 1818, tlie con- ference accepted him as an assistant mission- ary,^ and placed his name upon the minutes. Besides his own language, (the Namaqua,) he could preach in the Dutch, and he also learned English, that he might have access to its reli- gious literature. As an instance of his shrewd- ness : One day he and Mr. Shaw encountered a Dutch boer, who stoutly denied that the Bi- ble or the gospel was ever intended for Hot- tentots. Links looked him in the face and replied, " Master, you told me that our names did not stand in the Book. Will you now tell me whether the name of Dutchman or English- man is to be found in it ?" No answer was given, and Jacob continued, " Master, you call us heathens. That is our name. Now I find that the Book says that Jesus came as a light to lighten the heathen, so we read our name in the Book ! " The Dutchman was silenced. On another occasion, Mr. Shaw says, "At the time of our going into Namaqualand, most of the distant (Dutch) farmers not only disap- proved of the heathen being instructed, but gome of them endeavored to turn it all into ridicule. One of them declared to me that he believed the Namaquas were only a species of wild dog, and had no souls. I therefore called Jacob Links, who was with me at the time, and offered to prove that Jacob, though a dog, could both read and write better than the far- mer. I believe the farmer could do neither ; and finding himself in an awkward situation, he called for his horse and rode hastily away." In gratitude for his recognition as an assistant missionary by the committee in London, Jacob Links wrote them the following very interesting letter, which gives additional particulars of his personal history. This letter was written in Dut'ch, in a very good hand. Only three years previous to its date the writer of it was an ig- norant Hottentot ; let the reader bear this in mind, and then answer the question to his own conscience, whether or no the gospel of Christ is adequate to elevate and save the most de- graded of mankind ? The following is a lite- ral translation : "I I.— Th "Ajpmca, Leslie Ponteine, Nov. 19, 1819. "Unknown hut Reverend Oenilemen: — The salutations which you sent, I received from our beloved teachers, and wish you and the So- ciety much peace and prosperity in the name of the Lorcf. I have long been desirous of writing you concerning my former and present state, but on account of weakness in the Dutch language, I have been" hindered. I hope, how- ever, your goodness will excuse and wink at my fault. Before I heard the gospel I was in gross darkness, ignorant of myself as a sinner, and knew not that I had an immortal soul ; nor had I any knowledge of him who is called Jesus. I was so stupid that when a Hottentot came by us who prayed to the Lord, I thought he was asking his teacher* for all these things of which he spoke in his prayer. Sometime after this another Namaqua came upon our place. He spoke much of sin and also of Je- sus. By means of his conversation I was very sorrowful and much atfected, and knew not what to do. My mother having some leaves of an old Dutch psalm book, I thought if I ate them 1 might then find comfort. I ate the leaves up but my sorrow was not lessened. I then got upon thereof of an old house to pray, thinking if I were high the Lord would hear me better ; but I found no deliverance. I then ate all sorts of bitter bushes, for I thought the Lord might possibly have mercy on me. But my heaviness did not then go away. I then heard that I must give my cause over to Jesus, and tried to do so, by which I found much lighter. There was then no one in this coun- try to tell us of Jesus, and I desired to go to the Great river, (the Orange river, near 200 miles off,) to learn from the word. I was now persecuted both by black and white. The [Dutch] farmers said if we were taught by mis- sionaries we should be seized as slaves. Some said I had lost my senses ; and my mother be- lieving this to be the case, wept over me. Af- ter this a missionary on his journey to Pella, remained some weeks with our chief ; but as I was tending cattle in the Bushman-land, I heard nothing. Then our chief and four other persons went to seek one who could teach us. I was at this full of joy ; and when they re- turned, and I saw the teacher (Mr. Shaw) whom the Lord had sent us, it was the happi- est day for me that I ever knew. Through the word that the Lord gave the missionary to speak I learnt that my heart was bad, and that nothing but the precious blood of Christ could cleanse me from my sins. I also found Jesus to be the way of life and the sinner's friend ; and I now feel the most tender pity for all those who are ignorant of God. I often feel sweetness for my soul whilst I speak about the gospel, and my own experience in the Lord. Before our English teacher came we were all sitting in the shadow of death. The farmers around us told us that if we prayed they would flog us, and some of them even threatened to shoot us dead if we attempted to pray. They said we were not men but baboons, and that God was blasphemed by the prayers of Nama^ quas, and would punish us for daring to call upon him. Now, however, we thank the Lord that he has taught us by his servants, and that he hath also given His son to die for us. We hear likewise, that many people in England re- member us in their prayers ; and we hope they * Tills was the late Mr. Albrecht, missionary at Pella. The Hottentot above raentionod held service among the people where he happened to go. Jacoh Links heard him pray, but had no idea of God as a Being to he thus ad- dressed. AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 41 will not forget us. Tlie society oi all praying people are by me saluted. An unworthy Namaqua, JACOB LINKS." This monument of the mercy of God con- tinued to grow in grace and knowledge, and with great acceptance to exercise his abilities in preaching Christ to his own people and to the tribes around them. About this time a deep feeling of commiseration for the perish- ing heathen beyond the Orange river, had ta- ken hold of the church at Lily Fountain. And notwithstanding the distance and the danger, Jacob Links had already offei'ed, if no Euro- pean missionary could be obtained, that he would take one of his Christian brethren with him, and go and live among the Great Nama- quas, and teach them the way of life. Just at this time (early in 1825) the Eev. W. Threl- fall arrived at Lily Fountain. Mr. Threlfall ■was a young man of amial^le spirit and man- ners, of deep piety and of great promise as a Christian missionary. He left a home in Eng- land where the attractions of wealth and so- cial enjoyment presented their charms in vain to detain him from the settled purpose of his heart to preach Christ to the heathen. He was appointed to Africa in 1822. But his de- cided predilection was for Madagascar, and he hoped to be allowed to proceed there from Af- rica. "When on the point of embarking, (in addition to a donation of £100 which he for- warded to the Missionary Society,) he nobly intimated to the committee that if the low state of their funds was the difficulty which prevented their assent to commence a mission in Madagascar, if they would furnish another missionary to go with him, he would himself meet that difficulty. There never went forth a more devoted missionary than W. Threlfall. On landing in Africa and beholding what had been done already by the labors of the mis- sionaries, he was so delighted that he wept for joy. After laboring in Albanij for a time, he proceeded to Delagoa Bay. He made great proficiency in acquiring the language ; but in the midst of his labors and usefulness his health failed and he set sail for Cape Town. On the voyage he and all on board were pros- trated with fever ; eleven of the crew died, in- cluding first and second mates, and the helm of the ship was tied a-lee, for no one had strength to steer, and she drifted in distress, till discovered, when she was run into Table Bay. Believing himself dying, Mr. Threlfall took his pocket book and wrote, " My request to my beloved father is, that whatever proper- ty he intended to give me may be devoted to the missionary cause." The vessel was pro- hibited from entering the harbor, and no com- munication allowed between her and the town. No one would venture to the ship. In this awful emergency the Rev. J. Whitwortli, Wes- leyan missionary, then at the Cape, volunteered to go on board the infected vessel and attend to the sutFerers, and under express stipulation that he was not to return till the quarantine was taken off. Providing himself with medi- cines, &c., he went on board, and God not only preserved him but also made him the instrument of raising up all the rest ; and on the 25th of May, Mr. Threlfall, with the captain and crew landed, praising God for their deliverance. Mr. Threlfall then proceeded to Lily Fountain to join Mr. Shaw, and concert measures with him for extending the cause of Christ among the heathen. Mr. Shaw was delighted with him. His piety and zeal and love for souls was ever apparent. After regaining his health in some good measure, he projected a mission to the Great Namaqnas on the north-west ; and finding " a true yoke-fellow" in Jacob Links, every thing was soon arranged, and he, with Ja- cob Links and Jonas Jager, a native exhorter, left Lily Fountain on their perilous journey in June, 1825. Mr. Shaw heard from the party up to Aug. 6th. They were at that date suffer- ing much from the disturbed state of the coun- tries through which they were passing, and also from deficiency of food ; but still trusting in God. No further information arriving, and several months passing over, fears began to be entertained for their safety, which were soon afterwards confirmed. It appears that a cruel ruffian, well known to the different tribes in Namaqualand as a blood-thirsty savage, who lived by plunder and murder, had with some others like minded, placed himself in Mr. Threlfall's path, and offered to become guide to the party. One night while they were asleep, he and his confederates rose and murdered them. Jonas Jager was shot while asleep. They then turned on Jacob Links and shot him, his last breath being spent in warning and exhorting his murderers and commending his soul to his Redeemer. Mr. Threlfall at- tempted to fly, but a shot struck him and hi? fell, and the cruel assassin came up and pierced him near the heart with his assagay, and killed him. The only motive for this dreadful act was to obtain the few trifling articles which they had taken with them to provide food. Both Jacob and Jonas left wives and families to be- moan their loss, and all of them were under thirty years of age ; cut down thus mysteriously in their bloom, at a time when the Church was expecting great results from their holy and zealous efforts. Information having reached the chief Afri- caner, he pursued and at length arrested the party, and then sent information to the British authorities at the Cape. The murderer was sent to the colony to be executed. On his way he was led through Lily Fountain, and the whole village turned out to see him ; but mark the change Christianity had wrought. The friends of the mm-dered men crowded round him, not to upbraid or torment, but to 42 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. exhort liim to think of his awful condition, and earnestly repent before he left the world ; and with an exemplification of the most ex- alted Christian charity, Martlia, the sister of Jacob Links, said to the unhappy wretch — " Although you have murdered my brother, nevertheless, I am sorry for you, because you are indifferent to the salvation of your soul." The death of Mr. Threlfall produced a deep sensation in England, as well as in Africa ; and the Christian bard, Montgomery, celebrate ed his untimely end in one of his most beautiful and pathetic productions. There was no re- serve in the offering which Mr. Threlfall laid upon the missionary altar ; his life, his blood, his property, his all, were joyfully con- secrated in such a service. And, although, none living know where he sleeps — his devoted life has not been in vain, either to the posterity of Ham, or to the living Church of God. Re- deemed Africa will yet place his name in the calendar of her saints and martyrs ; and when "the Chief Shepherd shall appear," Threlfall shall " be with him in glory." It is but just to add, that the wish he penned in his memorandum book, on board the plague ship, was honored, after his death, by his ex- cellent father, so that, including his own do- nations and his effects, the noble sum of nearly $8,000 was presented, in his behalf, to the missionary cause. Animated by such an example, his brethren followed up his effort. Great Namaqualm\d was entered ; and, in the country where he fell, the society in whose service he sacrificed his life, has now two stations, two missionaries, six local preachers, and twenty-one teachers, with nearly 400 church members, and more than 1800 Great Namaquas under religious in- struction. Barnabas Shaw came home to England, to recruit his health in 1837 ; but he shortly after returned to Africa, to resume his labors, and after 45 years of ministerial toil and suffering, this " Apostle of Wesleyan Missions in South Africa," is still at his post, diligently employed ; while his son, on the spot where he first drew the breath of life, became the successor of his venerable father, in the cai'e of the Khamies Berg Church, till forced from Ms position by failure of health in 1848. W. Shaw, the brother of Barnabas, mean- while, was engaged with his associates in ex- tending the Gospel on the east coast, and in the interior, among the Bechuanas, as far up as Plaatberg in lat. 28. The Albany mission was originally com- menced with the settlers who went out from England, in the hope that it would connect it- self with the Hottentots, and ultimately provide the means for extending itself among the Kaffre tribes. These hopes have been realized; and the brethren occupying them have suo- cessively given way to the new missionaries Bent out from England, and have planted themselves among the savages of Kaffraria. — Prom their labors have resulted 19 stations, besides those of Wesleyville and Coke's Mount, in the Albany and Kaffraria District. In the Part Natal and Amazula District there are five stations; and in the -Caj^e of Good Hope Dis- trict there are nine, all of which with full infor- mation will be found in the tabular view at the end of this article. The peculiar difficulties which our mission- aries have to encounter in their labors among these people, arise from their feudal customs, their wandering life, (being herdsmen,) and the restless and warlike spirit of the Kaffres on the east coast. But, notwithstanding these diffi- culties the Gospel has been planted ; schools and churches gathered ; education and the press have been introduced ; hundreds have been truly converted to God ; the savagism of the unreclaimed, in some measure, softened down ; and a large number are now before the Throne, who have died rejoicing in the faith which the missionaries first carried to them 30 years ago. An Institution for training native teachers is in operation in Kaffraria, and also a printing press, from which, besides Bibles, Hymn Books, &c., there is regularly issued a periodical in the Kaffre language. There is also another press at Grahams Town, and another among the Bechuanas. The languages employ- ed by the missionaries are the English, the Dutch, the Kaffre, the Bassa, the Sesuto, the Grebo, and the Sichuana. The leading authorities for this article are the " Annual Reports," and " Missionary No- tices," of the Wesleyan Missionary Society ; the " Annual Minutes " of the Wesleyan Con- ference ; " The Wesleyan Methodist Magazine ;" " Sliaw's Memorials of South Africa," and " Moffat's South Africa." — Eev. William But- lee. It is especially gratifying to see, in the self- denying labors of all denominations on mis- sionary ground, and the blessed results that follow, the substantial unity of Protestant Christians. The Apostle expressed his earnest desire, that the primitive disciples, to whom he wrote, might all speak the same thing, and be joined together in one mind and one spirit; and this is fulfilled in the foreign missionary field. By whatever diverse names they are called, whether Moravian, Wesleyan, Episco- pal, Presbyterian, or Baptist, they speak the same language of Canaan, and their converts, whether " Parthians, Medes, the dwellers in Mesopotamia," or Hottentots, Kaffres, Hindoos, Chinese, or New Zealanders, all hear in their own tongue, and speak alike the language of penitence and faith. And, in the foregoing sketch, we find the German Presbyterian taking by the hand the English Wesleyan, and going a four months' journey into the wilder- ness, to introduce him into the field ; and soon we hear the " song in the night," rising up from AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 43 the joyous hearts of those who have received the Gospel from his hands. The following tables give a comprehensive and cheering view of the results of the labors of the Wesleyan Missionaries in South Africa. There is a slight discrepancy between these statistics and the table at the end of the article on Africa, that having been made out for the year 1852, and these for 1854. A comparison of the two will show the growth. en jp- CO W h-" ^ p> a. rfi. CO to -. *..COfcOM sis s 1 ^ r ^ !^ Cape-Tow Eondebos Wynberg Simon's 1 Stellenbo Somerset Khamies- Nisbett-B Hoole's F E* g.a. 1 5' r 3 3- ^ 1 m n O C3 3- p o ^_. Number of uo "* *OJtOCOtOMbOlOtO Chapels. No. of other to w *-coeD • 05 *.. M rfi. OJ 00 3) (F" Preacning-Places. ^ Missionaries and lyi Ml-i- ■ • Mh-* M O ^ ^ ^ j_i ^ j_i ,_i.^ j^ Assistant ditto. - 9 s W ^ tl^ '■ t; S OD : M f— M to lO - M Ql *: o,: : : : : - III M w M- ti- IS o Oi ^ SOU-JtOtO- fcO' )-» T fe * ■ O OI to rfi. to w IS) Q Si CO lO M Oj * O to 00 OJ 00(0-100 III l> CO b3 rfi.- • oo •21 ^ • • • CnbSi^O "^ *D SMCOI-'bO' MKltO O S H> t> ■^v^ t) M Numlier of FuU B -I CO tc to *- Oi M O O, tog 4t to *-^ to M to *l&KSSl&gg§ and Accredited ~^ CJ (31 O OCOO) to Hi. Church Members. Oi fcO MW d = s S ^ooQococooooobOta On trial for f CO OJ • COO O bO Membership. !_, d 5 ^— *— ^ ^ ^ Number of Sab- b3 WMlCCOCTi y * M lO M to M M J3 *O)MC0b0Mfc0l-'CO bath-schools. I—* _i No. of Sabbath- M CO 1-' bOOi CO O rfi 30 ^ =S *COJI--OCOCOCatO Scholars of both =■ O OOO OO ^ OOto**>f*.Ocnoi Sexes. S J Number of Day- CO H-hJ. M- Q o to tOl-itO ■O *!■ *ClMfcOtO- to* M Schools. H -1 Number of Day- h-i 1 ... 1-1 to - }f». MbS M* ■ M *ai O) booo* CO* tf^ bO O A^CTi O O) Scholars of both D ^ Sexes. s CntOl-')-' ^ » „ M >-> M )-> to 9 §g.£g ■" ■0 _, ^ Co "isssBsgi ^ ^ps^ ^ "S,gff^ ■o 1-5 M CO kJ ^ ji ifiCOCOtO M *»■ *So*-C0C0OJC0Cn ? iHf CO Jl ^ "^ <=■ OT No. of Attendants on Public ' ■^ ^M J<5 JO g8§§i « ^ « « « « « » » => *1^"o 00 en CO CJ» CO to Sooooooo "Worship, in- cluding Members and Scholfir.^. H3 w a c t> o Q o o u W o u AFRICA, SOUTHERN. •siElonos pnB o o o o o o o o o O o O O O O O O O o o Bjgqoia]^ ^uipn^o c o O O O O 00 o o CO ■O O O O O O O O ^ -m 'diqsao^ CJ o i:- CM lo o ^ CO CO iH cq O O O O O 00 lO o oiiqnj no cs i-H rH I— 1 (M cq lO rH cq CO rH rH ^ Bincp[i3WT JO -0^ So . to CO CO 00 cq cc to GO in CO as o CO o uri CO cq o 00 OS ■if&^ J o ^ C^ O O O CO ?o o 00 lO rH cq -^ CO 00 C^ CO ^ no T-H 1-H CO (M (M 1— 1 cD OS CO »o CO u U-^^ Oj lO a) CO O 05 O 00 CO ITS CO lO i:' r- cq rH o o OS iO r- Ifit9 a -* C<< 1— 1 i-H iH rH rH tH jH rH S ffA ^ lO rH 00 c 1^ ^ CO C^ C<) ,H C^ rH cq tH CO r-( tH rH rH 1- OS -qiig JO asqranij CO CO •siooqog-qjuq CO CO CO C^ CO CO CO CO I— 1 iH CO rH CO rH cq CO rH rH o r-i -qiig JO Jaquin^ ■djusjaqniaj^ o ^ CO to ■ iri cfj o t- ■^ CO ir- o CO rH c:s rH o Joj iBUj no to . iH cq x:' • cq rH CO rH CO CO •SJaqraaH qoJ^qo CO on CO 00 00 t- t- ir- CO Cq OO Ot- Ot-in ^ CD CO CD CJ o (M 00 CO CO ir- CO CO cq lO 00 CS rH OS rH l:- CO urs o ^ QA iH iH rH iH iH rH rH CO nna JO Jaqnmfl cq ^ 1-1 -^ lO • -^ -^ (M ir- iH rH ■^ -^ J:- ,H -^ j:- CO ic -^ -^ "sl ai iH tr' o 1" (5 \^ CO CO CM Cq lO O O CO O ^ OS CO O -^ -* 00 CO -^ OS lO iH (M (M fH iH Cq 1— i iH ^ -4 ^ L— CO S'"& Oi lO ■M CO rH . •X" • CO CO Til CO cq lO J9ii;o JO aequin^' ■ • CO CO tH •Bjad^qo -* CO ■^ Cq (M CO g 3 "S a Lovedale 1 2 1 1 a 2 2 220 1640 ■7700 85 Burnshill 2 2 270 1890 9450 17 EHrrie 1 1 165 1155 6776 Total 6 6 656 4586 22,926 62 In 1852, Mr. Ross and his assistant were compelled, for the fifth time, to leave the stsu- tion at Pirrie, on account of the war. The rest of the brethren were laboring under many difficulties, yet with encouraging success. — There were then 21 candidates for baptism at Lovedale. The foregoing table will show the state of the mission, at the several stations?, in ATRICA, SOUTHERN. 47 1844, before tlae war ; the returns since the resumption of the missions, being very incom- plete. — London Missionary Register. Glasgow African Missionary Society. — The help of -native assistants, in the conduct of meetings, was beginning to be called in requi sition at Ohumie, in 1843. At Iggibigha, in 1842, a man and two women, after being under the closest observation for four years, were baptized, as the first fruits of missionary labor at the stations ; and soon after, another who was a candidate for baptism, died, saying, among his last words, " I love to go to Jesus ; I cast myself upon him. God has taught me to hope in Him who died for me ; I desire to dwell with him for ever. I am going home," The first Ohi-istian marriage was celebrated this year ; the heathen father of the youn;^ woman, after much persuasion, with prayer on the part of the young man, relinquishing the usual present of cattle, which was regarded as a heathenish claim. The operations at Glen- then have been suspended. Our schools are supported, at these stations, and the missionaries itinerate in the villages around, making these preaching places; and they say not a few of their candidates for baptism come from these schools. As an il- lustration of the cruelty of heathenism, they relate that a girl, who was afflicted with epilep- tic fits, was left to fall into the fire, burning herself severely, and was then carried out and left in the field, where, after remaining in this condition a day or two in great distr&s, she was carried off and devoured by the wolves. This mission continued to prosper, till the breaking out of the Kaffre war, in 1846, when the stations at Chumie and Iggibigha were burnt and laid in ruins, the missionaries taking refuge at the Kat Eiver settlement. On the 27th of July, 1847, this society transferred its missionary operations to the care of the United Presbyterian Church. The KaCfre war has been most disastrous to the operations of this society. It has laid waste the mission stations, scattered the mis- sionaries and converts, suspended entirely the work of iiBtruction, and done an amount of evil, which can scarcely be exaggerated. And yet there is no disposition to abandon the field. The following table will show the condition of the stations in 1844, before the war. Whether they have recovered from the disasters of the war, we have no means of knowing. These facts have been gathered from the London Missionary Register. Stations. □ Assistants. Na- |Euro- tives.lpeaQ, i a B a 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 44 13 90 Kirkwood Total 8 i 3 67 90 French Protestant Missions. — ^The " Sociiti des Missions Evangeliques de Paris," which was formed in 1822, sent its first missionaries to South Africa, to labor among their refugee countrymen, together with the Hottentots of Wagonmaker Valley, near Talbagh. But the fanners generally being unfavorable to the in- struction of their slaves, and the colonists being adequately supplied with religious teachers, they, upon the advice of Dr. Philip, determined on the establishment of a mission beyond the bounds of the Colony. Messrs. Lemue & Eol- land, therefore, leaving Mr. Bisseux with the descendants of the French Refugees, set for- ward on the 9th of January, 1830, and were soon after joined by Dr. Philip ; and after vis- iting the various stations of the London Mis- sionary Society, they determined to establish themselves in connection with Lattakoo, among the Bechuanas, where they arrived, July 24, 1830, after a toilsome journey of nearly ten weeks, from Bethelsdorp. They immediately set about the study of the Sichuana language with such ardor, that they suffered in health, and were obliged to relax for some time, for which purpose, they visited Griqua Town. On the first of September, 1831, Mr. Bis- seux writes from Wagonmaker Valley, that he was about to baptize ten slaves, the first fruits of his ministry ; and that the Gospel had wrought an advantageous change in the manners of many. On the 22nd of January, 1832, Mr. PeUissier joined the mission at Lattakoo, and in pursuance of an arrangement, previously made, visited the Chief of the Baharootzes for the purpose of establishing a new station ; but the design was frustrated by the jealousy of the chiefs ; and in this journey he had a narrow escape from two lions, by which he was pursued. On the 21st of March, 1833, another rein- forcement arrived, consisting of one missionary, and one male and one female assistant. On the 17th of February, 1832, the three mission- aries set forward to renew the attempt to es- tablish a mission among the Baharootzes. For three weeks they passed through vast solitudes, which the want of water prevented being cul- tivated ; after which, they traveled many days through an inhabited country, till they reached Mosika, the residence of Mokatla, the chief of the Baharootzes. The town consisted of a great number of huts, scattered at the foot of two high hills, forming a chain of mountains, in- tersected with valleys. The chief received them with apparent cordiality, and on the Sabbath, ordered all work to cease, and the missionaries addressed a congregation of not less than eight hundred persons. But, in consequence of the jealousy of Moselekatsi, king of the Zulus, to whom Mokatla was tributary, they were obliged to leave the country ; and, by, the advice of Dr. Philip, they repaired to Motito, seven or eight miles from Old Lattakoo, Ma- hura, the chief, having desired that missionaries 48 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. should settle there. Moselekatsi, having made war upon the Baharootzes, and driven them out of their country, many of them were hunted out in the desert, by the missionaries, and in- duced to settle at the new station. Motito has a good supply of water, and the land is good for cultivation. At Wagonmaker Valley, in 1833, there was quite an awakening among the people, and there were about forty who gave evidence of piety. The mission at Motito was, at this time, the advanced guard, being eighty-five leagues north of the colony, and no other settlemeut being so far in the interior. But the prospect seemed discouraging. The mission was estab- lished for the special benefit of a tribe of Be- chuanas, called Batlapis, residing at Old Lat- takoo. But, none of them had as yet come to reside at the station ; and when the mis- sionaries, after a fatiguing ride of two hours, inhaling the sand which the wind raised around them, arrived at the miserable dirty village of the chief, they were met with the great> est indifference, except when the chief wished to ask a favor, when the men would be seen retiring to the rocks from all quarters, for prayer ! Tet, the settlement at Motito was greatly improved at the end of the first year. The few people collected there were attentive to the G-ospel ; schools were established, and the chief sent his son and daughter. In 1833, the station called Caledon, a settle- ment at the junction of the Caledon and Or- ange rivers, was ceded to the Society by the London Missionary Society, and taken posses- sion of by Mr. G. P. Pellisier. But, finding that the Bosjesmans, who had been collected there, had abandoned the spot, he turned his attention to the Bechuanas wandering near Philipolis ; and a chief with 1,200 followers was induced to join him. In a short time, the appearance of the station was entirely changed. The people had laid out a great number of gardens ; and the inhabitants at the station amounted to about 1,800, most of them Batlapis. On the 28th of June, 1833, a station was commenced at Morija, 54 leagues east of Cal- edon, near the residence of Moshesh, the chief of the Bechuana Bassoutos ; and the chief quit his mountain, and settled with his people at the station. The plan of a new town was speedily traced, and all hands, old and young, were soon busied in collecting and preparing bamboos, laths, reeds and rushes. They set to the work with vigor, and pursued it with alac- rity, until a new town arose before their eyes. The site of the mission, which was secured by regular purchase, was considered to bo the best in the whole country. In 1834, a house of worship was built at Motito, and the " sound of the church-going bell," was first heard in the valley of Motito ; five adults were baptized, and the inhabitants greatly improved in their condition. Mahura, having offended Moselekatsi, whose power was dreaded, flew from old Lattikoo, taking mpst of his people with him, so that the hope of reaching them by this mission was given up. The inhabitants of Caledon had increased to 2,.500 ; and some of the people gave evidence of being truly awakened. The prompt and unexpected assemblage of so many people there was considered as an event unequaled in the missions in that country. On account of the departure of Mahura from Motito, and Mr. EoUand not being required there, he com- menced a new station in 1835, at Beersheba, 18 leagues from Caledon, within the territory claimed by Moshesh. The missionaries at Mo- rija had just began to preach in the native language. In 1836, a great change was visible at Wagonmaker's Valley, and the hostility of the colonists to the instruction and baptism of slaves was giving way. The departure of Mar hura from Old Lattikoo, had proved advanta- geous to Motito, in opening the way for many natives to settle there without fear. The name of Caledon was changed to Bethulia ; and the station was considered to be in a re- markably prosperous condition, with evidence of the special presence of the Holy Spirit. The first general conference of the missiona- ries, which they have continued to hold annu- ally since, was held on the 5th of July, 1835, at Beersheba. In 1837, a religious awakening occurred among the Bassoutos at Beersheba, and the la- bors of the last six months were blessed to many souls. A new station was formed among the same people at Thaba Bossioii, by Eev. Mr. Gosselin, and another at Mokotlfmg, among the Liglioyas, by Eev. Mr. Daumas, who was very cordially received by the people, the women presenting their children to him, and saying, " Come ! see your father !" In 1838, the station at Motito had increased in population to 1,000 ; but had been visited with sore trial by the severe and protracted illness of Mrs. Lemue, in view of which Mr. Lemue had presented to his mind the alterna- tive of sacrificing his wife or the mission. If he remained, he was persuaded she could not survive another season. If he left, he feared that the people, intimidated by Mahura would be scattered abroad. At Bethulia 28 persons were baptized. The administration of the or- dinance was a scene of deep interest. " The audience, which had kept a profound silence, because they felt the presence of the Lord, at length interrupted it to give free course to tears, which the scene before them called forth." After the baptism of the candidates, they presented their young children, to conse- crate them to the Lord, in the same ordinance. In the afternoon, the Church, with this new addition, making 48 in all, sat down to the ta- ble of the Lord. The converts generally were faithful and steadfast, maintaining family ATEICA, SOUTHERN. 49 prayer, and other religious duties. Fifty-five more professed converts were candidates for baptism, and there was about the same num- ber of inquirers. Civilization also keeps pace with the gospel. All who embrace the gospel adopt, as much as possible, the manners of the civilized. At Morija, Molapo, eldest son of Moshesh, and second chief, was received as a candidate for baptism with ten others. Great progress had been made in the observance of the Sabbath, throughout the whole tribe, and the people were anxious to learn to read. The station was also advancing rapidly in temporal things. The new station at Thaba Bossiou is on an isolated hill of a pentago- nal fol'm, about 400 feet high, on the summit of which are the towns of Moshesh and his father Mokaohane, ft-om which 22 villages are seen. The missionary is greatly encouraged by the appearance of things. Moshesh, on a neighboring chief inviting him to join him in a marauding expedition, sent this reply : " Go tell your master that there is a house of prayer at Thaba Bossiou. I learn there to make power to consist in wisdom, and not in the number of cattle. My children at Morija are got ahead of me ; it is time that I should get instruction." At Beersheba, the following year, after a rigid examination, 42 were ad- mitted to the church by baptism. In this ex- amination, Mr. EoUand availed himself of the assistance of some of the elder members, who, from their knowledge of the persons brought out many things by their questions which he would not have thought of. In 1841, Rev. Mr. Oasalis writes from Thar ba Bossiou, on the eighth year after the estab- lishment of the mission, that in his view, there were three periods in the missionary work : during the first, the natives manifest indiffer- ence and apathy, arising from ignorance of the true object of the missionary. To remove this ignorance, in this instance, required five years. The second era was distinguished by a remark- able effusion of the Holy Spirit, which en- riched the church with many enlightened mem- bers. The third period was that of thought- ful, argumentative opposition ; and this spirit had already begun to manifest itself ; the loss of those who unite with the church giving se- rious offence to those that are wedded to their sins. This was very strong among the villages around, and had manifested itself decidedly at other stations, especially among the polyga- mists, who cannot bear the thought of giv- ing up their wives. The aged chief, Mokar chane was baptized at this station, saying, " I have done so much evil to Moshesh, by my per- nicious counsels and flatteries, that, as long as I live, I shall not cease my endeavors to di-aw him to God by my words and my prayers." Per- secution had manifested itself at some of the stations. A young convert on the Hart river, was subject to the bitter opposition and railing of his lather and wife, and his life was re- peatedly threatened by the people ; but his re- ply was, " you may kill the body, but you have no power to kill the soul." This year a very successful attempt was made at several sta- tions to secure contributions for the support of the gospel, the people, in their poverty exhib- iting great liberality. In August, 1841, a new station was formed among the Corannas at F; icdau, 183 miles east of'Motito, by Rev. J. A. rtrimmer. At Morija, in 1843, an awakening spread far around the station in more than 100 vil- lages. The members of the church continued to make progress in grace. They were simple, affectionate, united and zealous. There were about thirty, who were regarded as having truly received the gospel during the year. In 1851, Mr. Freeman, the missionary, says, " By dividing 280 villages into 28 districts, 12,000 souls are placed under the instruction of the word of God by means of native teachers." The latest intelligence gives the results of missionary labor, at the several stations of this society, as seen in the following table : 1 ■1 P. 2 a Stations. g o d s 1 i 3-3 'a Ji 1 Wagonmaker's Valley, now "Wellington, 1830 1 6000 300 44 6 15 Bethulia, - 1833 1 2500 400 200 100 16 Carmel, . 1846 2 40 Beersheba, ... . 1835 1 600 391 80 106 Bethesda, . 1843 1 1 22 3 Morija, . 1833 2 4000 326 146 Thaba Bossiou, . , 1827 3 250 121 9 Berea, _ 1843 1 23 Mekuatling, - 1837 1 190 16 70 41 Motito, ... . 1833 1 100 60 Priedau, 13 14 1 12,500 1,840 1,183 310 25 317 50 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. _ The Kafire war occasioned so much destruc- tion and confusion among the missions, that for several years no reports were received. Previ- ous to this time the missions were generally in a prosperous state ; evidences of the presence of the Holy Spirit appeared at all the stations, and additions were yearly made to the churches. The church members gave gratifying evidence of piety amidst temptation, and in many in- stances, persecution. Many, even of non-pro- fessors, were abandoning polygamy, and other heathen customs. Civilization was generally advancing, the schools prosperous, many learn- ing to read, and the work of translation and printing the scriptures was going forward. Many also had died in the triumphs of faith. In 1846, a new station was established at Oarmel, between Bethulia and Beersheba, for the training of native schoolmasters. An awakening had taken place among the youth, and sixteen of them were candidates for bap- tism. At Bethesda, in 1851, the brethren say, " Never was our spiritual horizon more encour- aging than at present. Some young persons have been awakened." At Thaba Bossiou the station had been greatly disturbed by politi- cal commotions, and by the conduct of the three sons of Moshesh, who had renounced their profession of the gospeh On some of the points embraced in this ta^ ble, the returns are imperfect ; but enough ap- pears to show that the labors of this society nave been quite successful ; and from the ex- amination we have given the subject, we think the number admitted as communicants may be regarded as giving credible evidence of piety. It has been the practice of the missionaries to keep them standing a long time as candidates, after professing conversion, before admitting them to the church. American Board. — In 1834, the Board re- solved on a mission among the Zulus ; the design being to establish one mission among the maritime tribe, under Dingaan, near Port Natal, and one in the interior, among the tribe of which Moselekatsi was chief. To the former were designated Rev. Messrs. Aldin Grout and George Champion, missionaries, and Newton Adams, M. D., physician, with their wives ; and to the latter, Rev. Messrs. Daniel Lindlay, Alexander E. Wilson, M. D., and Henry I. Venable, missionaries, with their wives. They sailed December 3, 1834, in the Burlington, and arrived at Cape Town on the 5th of February, 1835. The brethren destined for the interior commenced their journey of 1000 miles, on the 19th of March, in three large wagons, drawn by twelve yoke of oxen, accompanied by Rev. Mr. Wright, a mis- sionary of the London Society, residing at Griqua Town, which place they reached May 16, 48 days after leaving Cape Town. Here they were detained five months to recruit their cattle. They were kindly and hospitably en- tertained by the English missionaries ; and they occupied themselves in learning the Si- chuana language, and in preparing a small spelling-book in the Sitibeli. the language spoken by the tribe to which they were going. The brethren destined to the maritime tribe were detained at the Cape, in consequence of a war between the Kaffres and the Colony, as their route lay through Kafiraria. Mean- while, they were employed in missionary labor at the Cape ; and the church under the care of Rev. Dr. Philip presented them with £45 to defray their expenses. In July they sailed for Algoa Bay, near Bethelsdorp ; and leaving their wives at Bethelsdorp and Port Elizabeth, with the missionaries at these places, they sailed from Algoa Bay, December Y, and reached Port Natal on the 20th. About 30 white men then resided at Port Natal, as hunters and traders, by whom they were kindly receiv- ed, and furnished with cattle for their wagon. A fortnight brought them to the residence of Dingaan, about 160 miles from Port Natal. The chief consented that they should come to his country, but proposed that they should first stop at Natal, till he should see the efiect of a school which they might open at his place ; to which they consented. Mr. Cham- pion was left at Natal to make arrangements, and the other two returned to Algoa Bay for their families and effects. On their an-ival, Mrs. Grout was found to be ill beyond hope of recovery. She died of consumption, on the 24th of February following, full of faith, and rejoicing that she had been counted worthy to leave her country and home on such an er- rand. January 22, 1836, Messrs. Lindlay and Ve- nable proceeded from Griqua Town to visit Moselekatsi, and reached his place about the middle of May. The chief gave his consent to their commencing a mission among his people ; but their impressions of his character were unfavorable, and the extent of his terri- tory and number of his people fell short of their expectations. The mission was com- menced at Mosika on the 16th of June, 1836. But having entered their houses before the mud floors were sufficiently dried, all of them but Dr. Wilson were attacked with fever, and Mrs. Wilson died, after being sick eight days. The survivors were afflicted with distressing rheuniatism for three or four months. And they had scarcely recovered, when the Dutch farmers, having been plundered of their cattle by Moselekatsi, invaded his country, destroyed fourteen villages, slaughtered great numbers ° \., ^ Pm?P^'^' '^^^ cwTKi off 6000 head of cattle They threatened to renew the attack, and advised the missionaries to leave the coun- try which they did, taking their course over- land, to join the brethren at Port Natal, where they arrived July 27, 1837, after a journey of ten weeks, in which they traveled not less than 1300 miles, over the worst roads they had seen in Africa. AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 51 Messrs. Grout and Champion and Dr. Adams arrived with their families, at Port Natal, on the 21st of May, 1836. Dingaan gave them a cordial reception, with permission to form a station at his capital. Mr. Champion was destined to the interior station at Ginani, about midway between Natal and the chief's residence ; Dr. Adams to Umlazi, 6 miles from Port Natal ; and Mr. Grout to divide his la- bors between the two. The king sent seven girls and four boys to be taught by the mis- sionaries. At the end of eight or nine months, Mr. Champion had ten boys and twenty fe- males under instruction, with a congregation on the Sabbath of about 200. But the des- potic power of Dingaan, who held his subjects in abject slavery, was a serious obstacle in the way. Dr. Adams had about fifty children in his school, besides a morning class of adults. The Sabbath school for adults contained 250, and that for others, under the care of Mrs. Adams, 250 to 300. She also instructed 30 or 40 females twice a week in sewing. The Sab- bath congregation was about 600, assembled in the shade of a great tree. Pour boys were taken as boarding scholars. The press had been set up at Umlazi, and two or three ele- mentary books printed for the schools. Mr. Lindley commenced a, station at the Hlovo River, 15 miles north-west of Natal, and Messrs. Veuable and Wilson, at Ellangezoa, 30 miles farther from Port Natal. Mr. Grout, with the permission of the committee, returned to the United States, bringing his own mother- less child and that of Dr. Wilson. The Dutch emigrants, after having destroyed the power of Moselekatsi, proceeded toward Port Natal. And, although Dingaan did not claim jurisdiction over the territory, they thought it prudent to gain his consent ; and for tliis purpose, they sent their governor, Mr. Eatief, with >■■ number of attendants, to con- sult him. Just before, some of Dingaan's cat- tle had been carried off by a party of Mantalis, disguised as boers. Dingaan required Eatief to see the cattle returned before he would treat with them ; and he accordingly pursued the party of marauders, and recovered the cat^ tie, without bloodshed, and returned with them to Dingaan's capital, with about 60 of his men, who, three days after their arrival, were all treacherously seized and put to death. At the same time, a party of soldiers were sent to attack the boers at their encampment ; by whom, however, although surprised in the night, they were repulsed. The farmers now rallied their forces, and with the newly arrived emigrants and whites and Hottentots at Port Natal, prepared to attack the treacherous chief. The missionaries were obliged to retire ; and leaving Mr. Lindley at Port Natal to watch the course of events, they sailed, with their families, for Port Elizabeth, on the 30th of March. By this time a righteous Provi- dence had made a vagabond of Moselekatsi. Four times he was attacked and plundered, after the breaking up of the mission. The Zulus were victorious in a pitched bat- tle with the people residing at Natal, and on the 23d of April, they invaded that place, and Mr. Lindley left on board a vessel, and after visiting Delagoa Bay, joined his family and associates at Port Elizabeth, on the 22d of June. The war continuing, Mr. Yenable re- moved with his wife to Cape Town, and de- voted himself to evangelical labors amongst a destitute class of its inhabitants. They after- wards returned to the United States, and Mr. and Mrs Champion soon followed. The for- mer, at their own request, received an honorar ble discharge from the service of the Board. The latter waited, with the hope of being able to return ; but his wife's health had received such a shock from the hardships she had en- dured in Africa as to give little prospect of that cherished hope ever being realized. After laboring several years in the ministry in this country he was attacked with a pulmonary complaint ; and having visited Santa Cruz, in the West Indies, with the hope of being bene- fited, he entered into his rest, at the age of 31. His life was one of rare consecration to the cause of Christ. Possessing an ample fortune, and the esteem of a most respectable circle of friends, he left all and entered on the mission- ary work ; and his fondest desire to the last, was, to resume his missionary labors, and spend his life among the degraded Zulus in South Africa. His wife, after a few years of suffer- ing, followed him to the grave, leaving a son an orphan. Mr. Champion, after providing for his family, left the residue of his estate to the Board. Dr. Wilson returned to this country, and afterwards joined the West African Mission. The Colonial Government resolved to take military possession of Port Natal, and the boers gained a decided victory over Dingaan, and took his capital, and drove him from his dominions. Umpandi, the brother of Din- gaan, to save his life, as was supposed, from the jealous cruelty of his brother, withdrew from the Zulu territory. Being joined by a majority of his people, he was declared king, defeated Dingaan in a bloody battle, and com- pelled him to flee. The Dutch afterwards chased Dingaan to a great distance. Mr. Lindley and Dr. Adams with Mrs. Adams, returned to Port Natal on the 12th of June, 1839. Mrs. Lindley was detained till autumn, by the illness of one of their children. Meanwhile, the English withdrew their mili- tary force, and left the boers and the natives to themselves. Mr. Lindley immediately com- menced his labors for the intellectual and spiritual good of the emigrants. Mr. Grout returned to Port Natal, from the United States, with Mrs. Grout, June 30, 1840. By this time, a congregation of 500 had been collected by Dr. Adams at Umla^i, with a Bible class, and a Sabbath school of '200 chil- 52 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. dren. Mr. Grout accompanied a Dutch dele- gation to the residence of Umpandi, and ob- tained his permission for the settlement of a missionary in the Zulu country. Passing by Ginani, where Messrs. Grout and Champion for- merly resided, they found the buildings burnt, and the place solitary. A station was after- wards formed in the Zulu country, at a place called Inkanyezi, which means a star. Thirty- seven villages were so near this place that their inhabitants could be collected for worship on the Sabbath. The attendance on preaching at Inkanyezi was about 250, and at Umlazi about 800 at two different places. Each sta^ tion had a school of about fifty pupils. Mr. Adams had a school for girls once a week, and a prayer meeting for adult females, both classes being instructed in needlework. One of the women gave evidence of having been born again. The mission, up to this date (1841) had printed 55,380 pages, more than half of it portions of the word of God. Mr. Lindley, at his own request, received a dismission from the service of the Board, in order to accept the appointment of minister of the Keformed Dutch church, with liberty to resume his connection, should unexpected changes render it expedient. At length, the interest and confidence of the people in the mission awakened the jealousy of Umpandi ; and some of the people being accused by those who wished to obtain his favor, of forsaking him and attaching themselves to Mr. Grout, sentence of death was passed upon them, before they knew anything of the matter. At daybreak, on the morning of July 25th 1842, it was announced at Mr. Grout's window that an army was upon the place. Not know- ing whether it was for him, or the people, or for both, he commended himself and his family to God, before leaving his room. An attack was made on the six places nearest the mission house, upon those who had been most friendly to the mission, with orders to put to death every man, woman, and child, in three of them. Mr. Grout immediately left the station, and ar- rived at Umlazi with his family early in Au- gust ; and about a month afterwards, he com- menced a new station on the Umgeni river, six miles north-east of Port Natal, whei-e he imme- diately collected a congregation of 600 to 1000 attentive hearers. Meanwhile, the English, after some conflict with the boers, again took possession of Port Natal. Since the overthrow of Dingaan, the Zulus, weary of his intolerable cruelty, and the scarcely less bloody proceedings of his succes- sor, had been escaping from their country and taking refuge near Natal, until, including the country about 100 miles back, they amounted probably to 24,000. In view of the repeated disasters which the mission had experienced, and the discouraging aspect of things, as well as of the fact that the Wesleyan Methodists were extending their missions nearly to Port Natal, the Prudential Committee decided that it was inexpedient to continue the mission ; and on the 31st 01 August, 1843, a letter was sent, instructing the brethren to bring it to a close. Previous to this, the native settlements about Umlazi and Umgeni had received great accessions of emigrants from the Zulu country. The Colo- nial Government, in creating a new colony at Port Natal, had officially announced that no laws should be allowed, recognizing any dis- tinction on account of color ; that no attack should be made upon any people without^ the colony, by persons not acting under the direc- tion of the Colonial Government ; and that slavery should not be tolerated in any form. A commissioner had also arrived, who declared himself in favor of giving the natives land on which they might form distinct settlements; of having one or more missionaries in each district ; and of employing all the influence of the Government to induce the people to conform to the instructions of the missionaries. Dr. Adams had also visited Umpandi, and a request had been received from him that a colonial agent and a missionary might be sent to reside near him. About the middle of No- vember, Mr. Grout had about 10,000 people around him, within the extent of an ordinary New-England parish, and a congregation of 500 to 1000 on the Sabbath, to whom he preached in the open air, under a scorching African sun. It was in these circumstances that the breth- ren received the decision of the Committee. They at once .began making arrangements for carrying it into effect. Hearing of a vessel to sail from Cape Town for the United States, Mr. Grout immediately proceeded to that place. On his arrival there, a strong desire was manifested by the ministers of the Gospel and others, that the mission shoidd not be given up. A public meeting was called, After hearing Mr. Grout's statement, addresses were made by Dr. Philip, the American con- sul, and others, and a collection of about $800 was raised to defray Mr. Grout's expenses, till he could communicate with the Prudential Committee. Dr. Philip wrote to the commit/ tee, declaring that, rather than have it given up, he would visit America to beg for the mis- sion. A joint letter was also written, to the aime effect, by all the ministers at Cape Town. ■The Committee, therefore, could not hesitate to authorize the missionaries to resume their labors at Natal. Before leaving Cape Town, Mr. Grout re- ceived the most encouraging assurances from the Governor of the Colony, together with the appointment of government missionary, with a salary of £150 a year, with the same ofler to Dr. Adams ; and Mr. Lindley was appointed preacher to the boers. Within the limits of the new Colony there were supposed to be 100,000 Zulus, besides AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 53 20,000 immediately around the two stations occupied by Mr. Grout and Dr. Adams. Dr. Adams was ordained as a minister of tlie Gospel at Cape Town, on tlie 10th of Decem- ber, 1844, the ser-^dces being performed by Drs. Philip and Adamson and Messrs. Faure and Brown, clergymen of that place. On returning to Port Natal, having, by some means, lost the right of resuming his station at Umgeni, Mr. Grout turned his atten- tion to a site on the Umvote river, about forty miles north of Port Natal, which he regarded as a most eligible post, well watered and well wooded, with good arable and pasture grounds. Under date of October 15, Dr. Adams wrote that they had about 100 under instruction in the day schools ; and that there had never been a time before, when the people, young and old, manifested so much interest in learning. On the 18th of April, 1846, Rev. James C. Bryant, who had been for about five years settled as pastor over a united and attached people in Littleton, Mass., sailed for this mis- sion, with his wife, and arrived August 15. About the middle of January following, Mr. and Mrs. Lewis Grout also arrived from the United States. Mr. Alden Grout resigned his appointment from the Government, (which resignation was kindly accepted,) and resumed his connection with the Board, in April, 1845. Dr. Adams had previously declined the ap- pointment. In 1846, five commissioners were appointed by the Colonial Government, for locating the natives, and adjusting their relations to the emigrant farmers, and among them were Messrs. Adams and Lindloy; it being the wish of the Lieutenant-Governor to effect the safe and permanent settlement of all classes ; to secure the country lying between the allot- ments assigned to the natives, so as to impose a restraint upon their migratory habits ; to stimulate them to industry by establishing markets ; and also to make provision for the new villages that would spring up, and for the internal management and defence of the whole district. Iq September, 1846, Mr. Bryant wrote from Umlazi, that, within a few months previous, there had been unusual seriousness among the natives, and that a few gave good evidence of piety. The converts, of their own accord, had established a prayer meeting among. them- selves ; and, in December. Mr. Gront wrote from Umvoti, that the respect and attention with which many listened to preaching, was truly gratifying ; and he was not without a hope that a young married couple had been truly converted. They were married in a Christian way, pledging themselves to abandon polygamy ; and very soon after commencing house-keeping, they set up family prayer. In pursuance of the plans of the Colonial Government, five allotments of land were made to the natives, comprising about 2500 square miles, with a population of about 50,000. The missionaries of the Wesleyan Society agreed to leave their American brethren in the undis- turbed possession c£ the coast between the Umtogela and Umzinkulu rivers, a distance of 160 miles. In 1847, five stations had been commenced, and permanent buildings erected at two of them. Dr. Adams had removed twelve miles south-west, to be nearer the centre of his dis- trict, and the name Umlazi had been transfer- red to his new abode, the place he left being called Umlazi River. Six were admitted to the church at Umlazi, this year, as the result of what seemed clearly to be a gracious visita- tion of the Holy Spirit. There had also been some seriousness at Umvoti, and a native helper had there been admitted to the church. Two or three boys, also, were regarded as hopeful converts. Speaking of an evening school, which he had, of sixteen regular attendants, Mr. Grout says : " They do not confine their study of books to the particular hour appropriated to their instruction, but seize also upon other opportunities. Not unfrequently have I seen them reading or studying at intervals of labor, or reading the Scriptures together, by the light of a wood fire in the evening. I have seen ti.^ same young men and boys, eight or ten in num- ber, singing their morning and evening hymn of praise to God in their own tongue ; and I learn that one of their number is in the habit of leading the rest in prayer at these times." Mr. and Mrs. Ireland arrived at Port Natal on the 13th of February, 1848, and were fol- lowed soon after by Rev. Andrew Abraham, Rev. Hyman A. Wilder, and Rev. Joseph Tyler, with their wives. At this period, free schools had been established at each of the stations. A few of the pupils could read all the books which the mission had printed. Among the pupils were several pious young men, who, it was hoped, would become future helpers in the missionary work. At Umlazi, most of the congregation had committed to memory the Catechism, the Commandments, and many passages of Scripture. The num- bers that assembled at the different stations for public worship varied from 50 to 1000, who listened with great apparent interest, and behaved with decorum during all the services. This disposition to assemble and listen to preaching is an interesting feature of the mis- sion, and one that promises much for its suc- cess. Evidences of the special presence of the Holy Spirit were manifested at all the differ- ent stations, this year, and twenty-four were received into the several churches. Some op- position had been manifested, but it was short- lived. At the close of 1848, which seems to be a later date, 15 members had been added to the church at Umlazi and 16 at Umvoti, Prayer-meetings had been sustained at all the stations, and the native converts took part in 54 AJ'RICA, SOUTHEKJy. them with a good degree of readiness and pro- priety. And Mrs. Grout and Mrs. Adams held weelily prayer-meetings with the females. The monthly concert was sustained at Umvoti and TJmlazi, and was the most spirited meeting of all. All the male members took part in it with delight and to edification. About fifteen dollars had been contributed at Umvoti, to support a native missionary among their des- titute countrymen, and about seventeen dollars at Umlazi. December 23, 1850, Mr. Bryant was called to his rest. He was an excellent missionary, and the close of his course was eminently in keeping with his life. Eev. Jacob Ludwig Dohne, a native of Germany, who went to South Africa in 1836, in connection with the Berlin Missionary Society, was, at his request, and the strong recommendation of the breth- ren of the mission, appointed by the Board ; and in the year 1851, the mission was rein- forced by Eev. Seth B. Stone and Eev. Wil- liam Mellen, with their wives. At the close of 1850, there were churches at nine of the eleven stations, containing 123 members, 36 of whom were received during the year. Ee- gnlar preaching was maintained at 23 places. Three free schools, taught by pious natives, contained 89 pupils. The printing press was in operation, and 377,100 pages had been printed. The average population connected with each station was about 3000. The distance between the extreme stations is about one hundred and fifty miles. The nearest English missionary station is 150 miles from the most southerly station, at Umtwa- lumi. Dr. Adams died on the 16th of September, 1851, in the midst of his usefulness. His end was peace. Evidences of an incipient civilization are making their appearance at the older stations. At Umvoti, for instance, nearly eighty persons, men, women, and children, come decently clad to the Sabbath worship, and some persons are usually clad while at work during the week. Three families live in civilized-looking houses, and some seven or eight natives are erecting similar habitations. These are substituting iron pots for cooking, in place of the old earthen ; and are using spades, axes, saws, and other kindred instruments of husbandry and the arts. One native has procured a cart and oxen, and thus takes produce to the market. House- hold furniture is naturally found in the im- proved houses, and clothing to correspond, and some have procured writing materials, and learned how to use them. The following table will show the state of the mission at the close of the year 1851, and the statistics of the following year, which are not so full, will not materially vary the re- sult : 1 o3 p ^ k4 A i a a M 1 5 •3 & a '^, •^ a & s •g ; o . d a II oj o w ning are his agents, and they never fall upon any one but they have been directed by his machinations. It is not known how this mys- terious power is acquired. By some it is sup- posed to be secm-ed by eating a certain kind of leaf in the woods, and by others to be con- ferred by evil spirits. No very logical prools ai-e required to show that a man has exercised these extraordinary powers. It is known that he once had a pique at one of his fellow men, and because this man happened to die the same day that an elephant was killed, he is suspect- ed of having tm-ned him into that elephant, and so arranged every thing that he should be put to death. A thunder storm passes over a village, a house is struck with lightning, and some one is killed. The whole community is thrown into the most direful agitation. The inquiry is raised, " Who brought the lightning down upon that man ?" the meaning of which is little else than " Who had a grudge against him ?" The friends and family of tlie deceas- ed have the right to single out the person and require him to drink the " redwood draught." This is a sure and infallible test of guilt or in- nocence. No man can hesitate submitting to it, without acknowledging his guilt. This draught is a decoction made from the inner bark of a large forest tree, called by the Gre- bes, gian, and by the Ashantees, adum. The bark is pounded in a mortar, and then thrown into a pot of water until the strength is extracted, when it is drawn off for nse. Its appearance is like the water of a tan vat, and it is both astringent and narcotic, and when taken in large quantities, it acts as an emetic. The accused, before he takes the draught, makes confession of all the evil deeds he has commit- ted in his past life, and then invokes God to make '• redwood draught " kill him if he is guilty of the crime with which he is charged, but if he is innocent to let it pass off without harm. He is required to drink more or less according to circumstances. If he vomits freely, he is declared innocent. But if other- wise, lie is the more strongly suspected, an ad- ditional portion is administered, and if death follows, it seals his guilt. The greatest indig- nities are then heaped upon his body, some- times even before life is extinct. Women and children are summoned, and required to beat, kick, and spit upon it ; and even the friends and relatives of the victim have to join in these outrages, or else they are suspected of partici- pating in his crime. And besides this, the fa- mily are heavily fined, and it is a long time before the stain upon their character is wiped out. On the other hand, if the accused comes off clear it is the occasion of great exultation. He is washed, decked out in his best, and pa- rades the streets with no little pride and com- placency. He receives presente from all his friends, and the party who accused him wrong- fully are mulcted in a large sum. But a man who has drank this portion once, is not entire- ly exempt from it in the future. The use of the " redwood draught" is not en- tirely confined to the case of persons suspected of witchcraft. It is used as a punishment for some other crimes ; and when it is the deter- mination of those who administer it to kill the man, it can be forced upon him in such quan- tities as to insure the result. This mode of punishment appears to have been adopted for the purpose of exonerating the administra^ tors of justice from the responsibility of put- ting men to death in cases of doubtful guilt. They say it was the " redwood " that killed him ; and it is the general impression that the " redwood " has in itself the discrimination to detect guilt; and thus the people exonerate themselves fi-om the tedious process of search- ing out evidence. They never assign any rea- son for the use of this ordeal, except that their fathers did it, and because of the many marvel- ous stories they can tell of the wonderful feats of this mysterious agency. A different article is used in Lower Guinea for this ordeal. It is a small shrub with a red root, from which the decoction is made, called by the Mpongwe people nkazya. This is a diuretic and narcotic ; and if it operates freely as the former, and does not affect the brain to produce delirium, the man is considered inno- cent ; but if it produces vertigo, he is guilty. Small sticks are laid on the ground, a few feet apart, and after having taken the draught, he is required to step over them. If he does this without difficulty, he is innocent ; but, if he fancies they are great logs, and raises his feet high to get over them, he is, of course, guilty. The quantity in this case is not more than half a pint ; but in the other it is half a gallon or a gallon. The natives on the Grain Coast have another, called the " hot oil ordeal," which is used to detect petty thefts, and in cases where women are suspected of infidelity to their husbands. The suspected person is required to plunge the hand into a pot of boiling oil. If it is with- drawn without pain, he is innocent. If he 64 APEICA, WESTERN. suffers pain, he is guilty, and is fined or punished as the case may require. Traditions. — Although the Africans have no knowledge of letters, they have a great deal of what may be called unwritten literature, in the form of legends, traditions, fables, and pro- verbial sayings. Their fables are highly dra- matic, animals being made to act and speak with life and naturalness. They have several traditions, which would seem to have been derived from the Bible. They believe in the common origin of the human race, and have a curious legend to account for the difference between the white and black man, for which see Ashantee and Gold Coast. They have tradi- tions also of a deluge and of the advent of the Saviour, but coupled with much that is extra- vagant and gross. Among all the tribes of both Upper and Lower Guinea, there are many unmistakeable traces of Judaism. The existence of twelve families in most of the large communities on the coast ; the extreme care taken to keep them distinct ; the rigid interdiction of mar- riages between members of the same family ; and various other customs, show that they have views akin to those of the Israelites. On the Gold Coast, they divide time into weeks, have their lucky and unlucky days, and observe the new moons with as much interest as the Israelites. Circumcision is practiced among all the tribes in Western Africa, with the ex- ception of those on the Grain Coast ; and the neglect of it exposes a man to much ridicule. The practice of sprinkling the blood of ani- mals, as they invariably do, on the dooi'-posts of their houses, and about the places where their fetishes are kept, would seem to indicate a Jewish origin. In the house of the chief- priest, there is usually an allar with two horns, and criminals fly to it and lay hold of these horns, as the Jews did of old, and no one can remove them but the chief-priest himself. They have their stated ablutions and their purifica- tions ; they shave their heads and wear , the poorest kind of clothes as marks of mourning. At the funerals, the women are the chief mourners, and the time of mourning corres- ponds with that of the Jews. Funerals. — African funerals are attended with great pomp and display. The corpse is washed, painted, and decked out in the grand- est style. It is then laid on boards, or in a rade coffin, in a conspicuous place, during the funeral ceremonies, which occupy the greater part of the day ; the character depending up- on the standing of the man. At an early hour, the friends and townsmen of the deceased as- semble in a circle, in front of the house. A bullock tied by the fore feet is brought to be slaughtered in honor of the dead. Every visitor is expected to bring some kind of present, to be laid in or beside the coffin. The male relatives and others, to the number sometimes of forty or fifty, get within the circle, and keep up a rapid discharge of muskets for hours. When the cere- monies have been continued long enough, as they suppose, to gratify the dead man, two bearers take the coffin on their heads to carry it to the burying ground. But sometimes the dead refuses to go, and the bearers are whirled round, first one way and then another, and finally run back into the town. Some one then comes and soothes and coaxes the dead man to consent to be carried to the grave yard. The bearers start off again in a trot ; but before they get out of town, they are vio- lently forced against some man's house, which is an accusation that the owner has been acces- sory to his death ; and he is forthwith arrested and subjected to the red-wood ordeal. After some delay, the corpse is deposited at the usual place of burial, and the bearers run and plunge themselves into the water. The female rela- tives assemble morning and evening to mourn for the dead, for one month ; after which they wash themselves, put aside all the badges of mourning, and resume their wonted duties. The wives of the dead man are then divided among the brothers of the deceased ; but before they enter upon this new arrangement they are permitted to go and visit their respective families. Many of the efforts hitherto made to intro duce the gospel into West Africa, it is well known, have been singularly disastrous. The United Brethren directed their attention to the Gold Coast as early as 1736 ; but after repeat- ed attempts to establish themselves at Chris- tiansborg, extending through a period of nearly forty years, and after eleven of their number had fallen by the diseases incident to the cli mate, they relinquished the undertaking as impracticable and hopeless. In 1795 two missionaries were sent to Sierra Leone by the Eng]ish. Baptist 31 issionary Society ; but, owing to the indiscretion of one and the ill-health of the other, the enterprise was abandoned. In the following year three societies, the Scottish Missionary Society, the London Missionary So- ciety, and the Glasgow Missionary Society,-^ made a joint effort to establish a mission among ■ the Foulahs ; but this plan was defeated by the combined agency of disease and dissension ; and the only one of six laborers who promised to accomplish anything, was cruelly murdered. Two years later (1797) the Glasgow Mission- ary Society attempted to introduce the gospel among the Timnetis, and sent out two mission- aries for this purpose ; but they were grievously disappointed in the character of their agents. And even those societies which have been able to maintain their position till the present time, have suffered frequently and severely from the loss of valued missionaries. The hope may be indulged, however, that a better acquaintance with the diseases of West Africa will cause a diminution in the number of deaths. 'I'he oc- AFRICA, WESTERN. 65 casional return of missionaries to their native land is already proving highly beneficial. It may be found also, as many expect, that a resi- dence upon the hills and mountains of the in- terior will be comparatively free from danger. But whatever may be the obstacles, the gospel must be carried to all parts of Africa, in obe- dience to the Saviour's last command ; and we may encourage ourselves with the hope that "Ethiopia shall soon stretch out her hands unto God." CnoKCH MissioNAKY SooiETY. — This society sent missionaries to the Susoo country in 1804 ; but one of them left the service, and the other, Mr. Renner, remained as chaplain at Sierra Leone. In 1806, Messrs. Bretscher and Prasse, with Mr. Renner, went to the Susoo country, and met with a friendly reception from several chiefs ; and a trader named Curtis gave Mr, Renner a house and garden, in a pleasant lo- cation, on condition that he would teach his children. Messrs. Bretscher and Prasse built a house at another town called Pantimania, further up the country. Soon after, Mr. Prasse died. This station was reinforced in 1809, by the arrival of Messrs. Barnett and Wenzel ; but Mr. Barnett soon after died of fever. Supposing that the slave trade had exerted such an influence upon the adults that there was no hope of doing them any good, they did not attempt to preach, but confined their efforts to the children, thus erroneously limiting the power of the gospeL Some of the children they ransomed from slavery, and others they supported. In 1810, Mr. Bretscher had thirty boys in a school-house, which he had built ; and Mrs. Renner had a school of twenty- eight girls, all neatly dressed in frocks and gowns, made with their own hands. But they were often much straitened. At one time, they could not even buy a basket of rice, and they had not provisions for a fortnight. But Pananda, a chief about 40 miles distant, who had been educated in England, being applied to, offered to thresh two tons of rice for them, leaving them to pay when they could, assuring them that he looked more to the good object they had in view than to the money. But they met with much opposition from the slave- traders, who feared the effect of Christianizing the natives, upon their inhuman trafSc, which exerted a most debasing influence on the peo- ple ; thus in effect making gain of the souls as well as the bodies of men. In 1813, Mr. Bretscher visited England, and returning with his wife and seven other per- sons, was shipwrecked with the loss of $13,000 worth of stores. A new station was now com- menced on the Rio Dembia, called Gambler, and one had been recently established on the Bvllom shore. At Canoffee a church had been erected, and on the 7th of August, 1815, 50 children were baptjzed. But by the arrival of a slaver, every thing was thrown into confusion, the mission 5 premises, school-house, and church at Bashia were burnt, and the missionaries compelled to leave, saving nothing but a single trunk and a bed, Mrs. Meisner being taken into the field, from a sick bed, in a blanket. Other indig- nities were heaped upon the missionaries, and they were threatened with death. They, how- ever, escaped to Oanofiee. On the 13th of Pebruary, 1815, Rev. J. 0. Sperrhaoker and wife, and four other persons arrived as a reinforcement ; but Mr. S. wa» removed by death soon after his arrival, and several other missionaries fell victims to the yellow fever. In January, 1816, Rev. Edward Bickersteth, secretary of the society, visited the mission y and in view of the repeated fires, and violent opposition of the people, he directed the station at Bashia to be abandoned. He also brought about a change of policy in the mission ; re- minding the missionaries that their great business was to preach the gospel, and inducing them' to make the attempt. But in conse- quence of the continued hostility of the dealers in human flesh, the stations among the Susoos- and the BuUoms were both broken up, and the missionaries and most of their pupils retired within the colony. ■ After the abolition of the slave trade, a great number of negroes with hundreds of children, were rescued from slave ships, and settled in different parts of the country, and fed and clothed at the expense of the govern- ment. To provide for these children, the Church Missionary Society obtained a grant of land at Leicester Mountain, and erected the necessary buildings for what was called the " Christian Institution." This was afterwards changed into a sort of college, where a su- perior education might be given to the most promising youths, to qualify them to labor as missionaries, or to fill important stations in the Colony. Some years afterwards, the es- tablishment was removed to Regent's Town, and subseq|Uently to Pourah Bay. The mission- - aries also established schools for the children of the recaptured slaves, in their different vil- lages, in which they were countenanced and assisted by the government. The preaching of the gospel was also commenced among the adults, and in many instances crowned with great success. When these people were brought together at Regent's Town, in 1813, they were in a most deplorable condition. In 1816, about llOO congregated at that place, from almost every tribe in that part of the continent. A church had been erected, and much improvement made in their condition. In June, of that year, Mr. Johnson was appointed to the care of Regent's Town ; but the aspect of things appeared dis- couraging. Natives of 22 different nations were collected together, mostly taken from the holds of slave-ships. 'They were in a state of continual hostility, with no means of commu- 66 APRICA, WESTERN. nicating with each other, but a httle broken English. When clothing was given them, they would sell it, or throw it away. None of them lived in the married state, but they herded together like brutes. From ten to twenty of them were crowded together in a single hut. Many of them were ghastly as skeletons, and six or eight of them sometimes died in a day. Only six children were born in a year. Super- stition tyi'annized over their minds, and there was little desire for instruction. Hardly any land was cultivated by them. Some would live by themselves in the woods, and others sub- sisted by thieving and plunder. Many of them would prefer any kind of refuse meat to the rations they received from Government. So many negroes continued to arrive from slave vessels, that Mr. Johnson had to issue rations twice a week for a thousand persons. He was greatly tried with their indifference, when he attempted to preach Christ to them, and was often on the point of giving up in dis- couragement. But he soon began to see that his labors were not in vain. The people were beginning to improve in appearance and man- ners. Their natural indolence began to give place to habits of industry. Those who had lived in the woods came and asked for lots in the town, which was now regularly laid out in streets, and built upon with avidity. The church, which originally contained 500, was five times enlarged, in the course of a few years. In the course of a year from the commence- ment of Mr. Johnson's labors, an astonishing- progress was made. One evening, when he was praying, and was much cast down, a young man followed him and said, " Massa, me want to speak about my heart. For some time my heart bad too much. When I lie down, or get up, or eat or drink, me thinks about sins com- mitted in my own country, and since me came . to Regent's Town ; and me dont know what to do." He was pointed to the " Lamb of God, which taketh away the sin of the world." The next week, several more came on the same errand. And from this time, the work of grace made progress. Young persons were seen retiring to the woods for prayer, and little groups assembled by moonlight to chant the praises of the Bedeemer. Both old and young appeared anxious to be instructed in the way of salvation. Polygamy, greegrees, and the worship of the devil, were universally aban- doned. In April, 1818, when Mr. Johnson sailed for England, the number of communi- cants was 263. All the people were decently clothed, and most of the females had learned to make their own apparel. About 400 couples were married. Their heathen customs were laid aside ; and for a year before Mr. J. left, not an oath had been heard, nor a solitary case of drunkenness witnessed by him. The schools contained upwards of 500 scholars, and an equal number regularly attended church every day, at morning and evening prayers ; while the average attendance at public worship on the Sabbath was from 1200 to 1300. At this time, the town contained 19 streets, made plain and level, with good roads round the town. A large stone church rose in the midst of the habitations ; a government house, parsonage, hospital, school-houses, store-houses, a bridge of several arches, some native houses, and other dwellings, all of stone, were finished or in process of erection. Gardens, fenced, were attached to every dwelling. All the land in the immediate neighborhood was under cul- tivation, producing a profusion of vegetables and fruits, and about 75 of the natives had learned various trades. The parting of the natives with Mr. Johnson was very affecting. Hundreds, of both sexes, followed him five miles to Freetown, and on hia embarkation, said, " Massa, suppose no wa- ter live here, we go with you all the way, till no feet more move ! " After his departure, a mortal sickness broke out in the settlement, which carried off many of the people, as well as several of the devoted friends and agents of the society. Mr. Wil- helm took charge of the station, during Mr. Johnson's absence. On the 31st of January, 1820, Mr. Johnson arrived at Freetown, on his return. The news of his arrival soon reached Regent's Town, and a number of the people came down that night, and many more in the morning, and he says he never in his life shook hands with so many persons in one day. The joy of the people was beyond all bounds. In 1822, his wife returned to England, in a feeble state of health ; and in 1823, he embarked for England to meet her ; but on the way, was seized with a violent fever, of which he died. The society, at this time, had stations at Bathurst, Charlotte, Gloucester, Kent, Leopold, Waterloo, Wilberforce, and York, villages of re- captured Africans ; in several of which, their efforts were crowned with success similar to that at Regent's Town, particularly at Glou- cester, under Rev. Mr. During, where the work of grace and the general improvement were quite as remarkable. The committee of the society attribute the distinguished success of these two missionaries, under God, to their tender, affectionate spirit. They say that the parental spirit is that which is alone likely to infiuenoe a people in the cir- cumstances of the liberated Africans. " The magisterial spirit, which, in its mildest actings, must still tend to coercion and restraint, will repel and shut up the minds of men who have known little of Europeans, but as tyrants and oppressors." Sir Charles McCarthy, who vis- ited them in 1821, states that some of them had " all the appearance and regularity of the neatest village in England, with a church, a school, and a commodious residence for the missionaries and teachers, though in 1817 they had not been more than thought of." APRICA, WESTERN. 67 Having thus given a slietcli of the early his- tory of this mission, instead of following it in detail during the succeeding thirty years, we shall give a topical notice of its general pro- gress, with the most prominent points of inter- est, down to the present time. Reverses, for wait of Laborers. — For a num- ber of years, the mission experienced sad re- verses in the loss of many of its most valued missionaries. By a mortal sickness prevailing in Sierra Leone, and by disasters at sea, in the short space of seven or eight months, in the spring and summer of 1823, the society lost no less than fourteen of its friends and fellow laborers, eleven of whom were missionaries and their wives, and among them. Rev. Mr. Johnson, who died at sea, as before stated, and Rev. Mr. During and Mrs. Diirintj, who per- ished, as was supposed, by shipwreck, the vessel in which they sailed for England never having been heard of. The following year, the mis- sion was reinforced by the addition of seven new laborers ; but before the close of the next year, an equal number was removed by death, and three others returned home. The follow- ing year, six returned home, and three were removed by death. And for several years, the loss of health and the death of missionaries were most discouraging. In some instances, this mortality could be traced to excessive labor, soon after arriving in the country. The society appointed a medical committee, who entered into an examination of the subject, and reported a precautionary plan, which was adopted, with good effect, in succeeding years. They also adopted the rule of allowing all their missionaries to return to England once in six years, in order to recover from the debilitating effects of the climate. In consequence of this loss of laborers, the affairs' of the mission were thrown into great confusion. Regent's Town was, for two or three years after the death of Mr. .Johnson, destitute of a resident clergyman, and the a1> tendance upon public worship on the Sabbath had fallen off to about 250 ; and the Christian Institution, for want of instructors, was quite deserted. In 1826, Mr. Betts gives a deplora^ bte account of the state of things at this sta- tion ; and similar reverses were experienced at other places, most of the stations having been left to the care of native assistants, who had not yet acquired the ability and experience necessary for assuming such responsibilities. There was a general falling off of attendance on public worship, and loss of interest in Di- vine things. Yet, most of the communicants remained steadfast, though suffering some decline of interest. The society made great efforts to supply the deficiency of laborers ; and for a time, there was no lack of self-devo- tion, on the part of missionary candidates, who were willing to enter the breach. But the loss of valuable lives was appalling. At length, however, this frightful mortality in a measure ceased ; and, as soon as the stations were supplied with missionaries, they began to revive, and to advance with a steady progress, which has continued, with slight interruptions, to the present time. Evils of Connection with Government. — As in South Africa, so here, the connection of the missions with the Government, has proved a serious evil. Although the Government were influenced by the kindest intentions, yet the connection proved a constant source of embar- rassment. Its relations to the Church Mission- ary Society were two-fold : first, in regard to the ministry ; and second, in the management of education. In 1823 or 1824, an arrange- ment was made between the Society and the Secretary of State for the Colonial Depart- ment, by which they were to take upon them- selves the preparation and support of all the English clergymen of the colony, subject to the approval of the Secretary ; while the Gov- ernment should provide for the education of the inhabitants, in the country parishes, and erect houses of worship, and provide houses and gardens for the residence of the clei'gy- men and teachers. In 1827, the Governor of the Colony intro- duced some new regulations, considerably af- fecting the Society's proceedings, as well as its relation to the government. The villages of liberated Africans were formed into three divi- sions : The River District, comprising, Kis- sey, Wellington, Allen Town, Hastings, Water- loo and Calmont, all lying to the south-east of B^reetown ; the Central, or Mountain Dis- trict, on the eastern border of the colony, on the Bunco river, and the Timneh country ; the Western or Sea District, comprising York, Kent, and the Bananas. This regulation was approved by the Society. Another regulation, which was also approved, relieved the mission- aries of the civil superintendence of the set- tlements ; this office having been found bur- densome and embarrassing to the mission. In August, 1826, Gov. Campbell, thinking that he could place the education of the libe- rated African children on a more economical footing, and to give them early habits of in- dustry, directed that the boys should not be kept in school beyond the age of ten or twelve years ; after which, they should be distributed among the liberated adults, to be actively em- ployed. The missionaries were released from the charge of the schools, except occasional inspection, and natives were appointed to con- duct them. This arrangement greatly diminished the at- terrdance on the schools ; and the missionaries afterwards finding that they could exert no beneficial influence upon the schools, broke off all connection with them, and established schools of their own. The missionaries at Freetown greatly de- plored the obstacles to the due performance of their spiritual duties, which had arisen out of 68 APRICA, WESTERN. their connection with the Government ; and contrasted their circumstances unfavorably with those of the Wesleyans, who were not hampered with any such connection. The Government not having fulfilled their part of the ai-rangement respecting the sup- port of religion, by which they agreed to fur- nish houses of public worship and dwellings for the clergy, the society applied, in 1846, for a termination of the arrangement, which was agreed to ; and the Committee iielieved the change would facilitate the operations of the Society. Sierra Leone, as a Nursery of Missionaries for the Interior. — The missionaries regard the collection of persons from so many different tribes in the interior, at Sierra Leone, as a pro- vidential arrangement for the supply of labor- ers for the evangelization of Africa ; and, with this in view, they have directed their effoi-ts both to the education of native helpers, and to the acquisition of the languages of the dif- ferent tribes repesented in the colony. The work oi reducing these languages to writing was commenced as early as 1829, and has been steadily prosecuted ever since. The society's report for 1853 says that some pro- gress had been made in this department during the year. A Timneh English Dictionary had been prepared by jNIr. Schlenker ; and the Epistle to the Romans had been translated into that language by Mr. Sohmid. Rev. S. W. Koelle had completed his grammar of the Vei and Bornu languages. He has also pre- pared specimens, consisting of 250 words and short sentences, translated into 200 different languages or dialects, showing that no fewer than 200 different nations, speaking 150 differ- ent languages, besides numerous dialects of the same, have their representatives in Sierra Leone. These tribes or nations lie along 4,000 miles of coast, beginning from beyond the Senegal, in the north, to the Portuguese settle- ments, south of the line. They extend in the interior through the whole course of the Niger, from its sources in the mountains behind Sierra Leone to its estuaries, comprising Timbuctoo, the emporium of African commerce, and the vast provinces subdued by the Mohammedan Foula/is, besides numerous small tribes. And even southern Africa has also its representa- tives. There are those in Sierra Leone who can tell of their native towns in that part of the southern continent which has been hitherto a perfect blank on the maps, which require a day or more to pass from one end to the other. They also tell of broad and deep rivers, of nar tions of tall and strongly-built warriors, of sav- age cannibals, and of peaceable and generous nomadic hunters. " Their breasts heave with emotion when a friendly inquiry is made re- specting their fatherland, and appeal in fervid language and moving eloquence to those who possess the best gift of God to a fallen world." The Africans generally entertain a strong affection for their native land ; and wnen Christianized they manifest an earnest desire that their own countrymen should partake ot the same benefits. The evangelization and ed- ucation of these liberated Africans will, there- fore, furnish the agency required to carry the gospel to the interior. And it has been ascer- tained that the gospel message is readily re- ceived from their lips by their countrymen. In a number of tours to the interior, under- taken by the missionaries, they have discovered a desire for the gospel, and a willingness to listen to it, from their friends, who have learned it in the colony. It appears, also, that the fact of these friends having been liberated, provided for and educated, by the English, has created a favorable impression upon the native tribes, and prepared them to receive the missionaries with open arms. In view of this state of things, much progress has been made in reducing the different languages of the in- terior to writing, and preparing the way for future missionary operations. Education. — Schools have been maintained at all the stations, from the commencement. And the high school, already noticed, has been sustained with various degrees of effi- ciency, until the present time. A few years ago, extensive buildings were erected, and it now holds the relation of a college to the oth- er educational institutions of the colony. Re- ligious instruction is made prominent in all the studies and exercises. The report of the Prin cipal, Rev. B. Jones, for the year 1852, pre- sents an interesting view of the advancing character of the studies prosecuted by the stu- dents, and the increasing importance of tha institution. During the year two of the students were sent to the Toruba mission, and three appointed to labor in the colony. The number remaining at the close of the year, was 17. In 1843, a grammar school was organized, as an intermediate step between the village schools and the Christian Institution. In this school it was intended to give a sound religious and general education to boys and youths who have received some previous training in the lower schools ; and those who give proof of suitable dispositions and qualifications, will be admitted into the Christian, Institution. The report of this school for 18.52, was highly satisfactory. The number of pupils was 73. '■ ^ A high school for females has also been es- tablished, which in 1852 was in a flourishing condition, containing 26 pupils, of whom 15 were boarders, and in their report for that year, the directors of the society say that their village schools present a peculiarly hope- ful character. Native Agency. — It has been a leading ob- ject with the Society, from the first, to train up a native agency. As early as 1820, two young men, while pursuing their studies, visit- AFRICA, WESTERlJl. 69 ed their countrymen evenings and Sundays, to teach them the gospel ; in 1822, both of them had charge of stations, and were doing well. Daring the trying period alluded to, when the Society was deprived of so many of its mis- sionaries by death, many of the stations and even the Christian Institution, were left wholly to the charge of natives. In 1827, the Com- mittee tried the experiment of educating two African youths in England, under the care of a clergyman. But in 1829, the missionaries express their deep concern at the numerous disappointments which they had met with in their expectations of raising up efficient native assistants ; and at one time, a correspondence was opened with the Episcopal church in the United States, with the design of procuring persons of color competent to act as missionaries. Tet in their report for 1838, the Committee present a more cheering aspect of this subject. They say that the native assistants, proceeding generally from the Institution at Fourah Bay, increase in efficiency. In 1844, they say the prospect of reaching the point at which they have all along aimed in this matter was never before so encouraging. Some of them were found qualified to go forth to distant stations in the interior, with the entire confidence of the missionaries. One of them named Samuel Crowther, was torn from his country and kin- dred in early life, and consigned to the hold of a Portuguese slaver ; rescued by a British crai- ser ; and carried into Sierra Leone, where he received Christian training, first in a village school, and afterwards in the Fourah Bay Insti- tution. His course was satisfactory and con- sistent ; and as he appeared to possess qualifica- tions for the ministry, he was sent to England, where he completed his education at the Soci- ety's Institution in Islington, and was after- wards ordained by the Bishop of London, and sent by the Society to Sierra Leone with the intention of his being employed as a missionar ry to the Toruba country, of which he was a native. In 1850, two other native Africans, Messrs. Nicol and Matthews, were ordained by the Bishop of London, and sent out by the Society. In the report for 1852, the Committee say, that many of the stations formerly under the care of European missionaries, have now been placed in charge of natives, with occasional European superintendence. The whole of the Mountain district had been, for the last year, under the superintendence of one European missionary, and had kept up its character for regular attendance upon the means of grace. Mr. Denton writes from Sierra Leone in 1852, that Mr. Crowther had visited and preached iu all the Mountain churches, and that his ser- mons had been deeply interesting and profitable to the people. On any point, where there was the least danger of misapprehension, he had re- course to his native language, and thus render- ed Gospel truth clear and plain to their under- standings. Tramlations. — It is an interesting fact that the work of translation of the Scriptures into the BuUom language, was commenced pre- vious to the year 1818, by a native, Mr. George Caulker, a chief at the Plantain Islands. In 1820, he had completed the book of Genesis, and was proceeding with the Psalms and New Testament. He had also translated the Prayer Book. He belongs to one of the principal families in Sherbro, and was educated in Eng- land. In 1837, arrangements were made for carry- ing on the work of translation with vigor, and portions of Scripture and elementary works have been translated, by different missionaries, into the Timneh, Haussa, Yoruba, and Susa languages, and in some of them the Liturgy. Thus is the way preparing for the more efficient prosecution of the missionary work in the in- terior. Character and Ability of the Natives. — Kev. Mi: During says, " six years' experience has taught me that Africans can learn any thing. I have seen them rise from the chains of the slave dealer, to become industrious men and women, faithful subjects, pious Christians, affectionate husbands and wives, tender fathers and mothers, and peaceable neighbors." But cautions are given against elevating them too suddenly, as in this way they rise so high in their estimation of themselves, that they prove useless in the end. Calls for Instruction. — The calls for instruc tion from every quarter, are beyond the means of the society to supply ; and petitions come in from the inhabitants of the villages, and from distant tribes, pleading earnestly for mis- sionaries. One of the newly arrived missiona- ries relates that, on his way from Freetown to Gloucester, there were many children on the road, who, when they saw him as he passed, said one to another, " New white man — new Mission ! " and all exclaimed, " Thank God ! " Missionary Tours. — The missionaries have been, for a number of years, in the practice of making tours among the neighboring tribes, and into the interior, for the purpose of ex- ploring the country, and ascertaining where openings exist for missionary labor. In most cases, they find the people ready to listen with eagerness to the preaching of the Gospel, and the chiefs desirous of receiving missionaries. Their journals, however, furnish many painful proofs of the sufferings entailed on the interior of Africa, by the foreign slave trade. The petty warfare, which is carried on between the chiefs, with all its attendant cruelties, may almost always be traced to that cause. At the close of 1848, Captain Forbes, of the English ship "Bonetta," informed the missionaries that, near Cape Mount, he had met with individuals of an African tribe, which possessed a written language, and that TO APRICA, WESTERN. he had brought with him some of their boolis, and a man who could read them. This created a lively interest at Sierra Leone, as it had been generally asserted and believed that, among one hundred and fifty languages of Africa, not one had been raised by the natives to a written language. In the hope that this discovery might be improved to the furtherance of the Gospel, Mr. Koelle was immediately sent by the local committee at Sierra Leone, to visit the tribe, and investigate the circum- stances respecting the language. He made the tour in about four months, at the cost of much suffering from privation and illness. He discovered that the art of writing was of re- cent invention, and confined to the single tribe of Vei, on the coast. The writing is syllabic, about two hundred characters representing all the syllables in the language. Mr. K. found the inventor, who lived about twenty miles in the interior. He was a man about forty years of age, of great intelligence and much religious feeling. He had learned the Eoman alphabet, from an American missionary, when a child. He stated that, after he was grown up, and about sixteen years previous to Mr. K.'s visit, he re- ceived the first impulse to express his language in writing from a dream. He told the dream to a few of his companions, who assisted him to invent the characters, and to procure, through the favor of the chief of his tribe, the means of establishing schools, and teaching the peo- ple. Bat war soon broke out, the town was destroyed by fire, the tribe depressed and dis- persed, and they had had no schools since. Yet, in the chief town, all the grown up peo- ple were able to read, and in all the towns, there were some who could read. They had a considerable number of books, on various sub- jects ; but the religion found in them was mainly Mohammedan. In consequence of this report, it was determined, as soon as the way should be opened, to establish a mission among the Vei tribe. General Improvement. — The general improve- ment of the natives, and of the country as a consequence, has, from the beginning, steadily kept pace with the prosperity of the mission. In 1821, Mr. Johnson writes that the gen- tlemen of Freetown were so fully convinced of the good effects produced by the preaching of the gospel, that they publicly confessed that, above all other institutions, the mission had proved the most beneficial to Africa, and acknowledged that the gospel was the only efficient means of civilizing the heathen. The same year, the experiment was tried of calling the natives from the Christian villages to serve on juries at the colonial sessions ; and the re- sult was so satisfactory, that the practice was continued ; and the chief-justice observed that, ten years before, when the population was only 4,000, there were forty cases on the calendar for trial, while at that time, with a population of 10,000, there were only six, and not a single case from any village that was under the superintendence of a missionary or a school- The Work of Grace.— From the time that the truth began to be fairly understood by these people, the work of divine grace on their hearts has been noticed by the missionaries, m their reports, from year to year. Mr. Gerber writes from Kent, in 1826 : " Since the begin- ning of last month, there has arisen among the inhabitants of this settlement not only a long- ing after the bread of life, but also, a contin- ued inquiry after the way of salvation ; and, instead of being annoyed, as formerly, with settling daily palavers, and silencing noisy school children at night, I am now rejoiced with different prayer-meetings in the town, and by the school-children singing at night, and before day-break in the morning." This is but a specimen of the notices, which frequent ly occur in the journals of the missionaries, evincing the special presence of the Holy Spirit, in awakening, convincing, and converting the people, so recently turned from the most do- basmg heathenism. Cliarader of Converts. — The fruits of divine grace are manifest in the character of the con- verts. The committee, speaking of the ac- counts given of them by Mr. Johnson, say that this gracious influence is manifest in their acknowledgment of the hand of , Providence in bringing them from their own country ; in the manner in which convictions of sin are awakened or deepened ; in the conflicts of the Christian mind ; in their sense of the divine forbearance and mercy ; in a watchful jealousy over the state of their hearts ; in their faith and patience under afSiotions ; and in their culti- vation of domestic happiness. And, in regard to their feelings and conduct toward each other, Mrs. Jesty writes, " They dwell in love, and live a life of prayer and praise, to Him who loved them, and gave him- self for them. The hearts of many of them seem to be full of the love of Christ the whole day ; and when merry, they sing Psalms. Such vocal music resounds from all parts of the town. A dispute is seldom known among them. Their benevolence was especially man- ifested, on the arrival of new cargoes of liber- ated Africans, taken from the slave ships. Formerly, their chief interest was, to know whether any of their relatives were among them. But after the love of God entered their hearts, they would rush to the landing, and seizing the poor, famished creatures, bear them off on their shoulders to their own dwellings, and take care of them as tenderly as if they had been their own near relations. They also attended prayer-meetings, took part in the exercises, and generally maintained family worship. Mr. Norman writes fi-om Eegcnt'a Town, in 1821 : " A spirit of prayer is poured out on the people in a remarkable manner ; so that we find, as we pass through the streets, AFRICA, WESTBKN. 71 on returning from evening school, that almost every house is become a house of prayer." And Mr. Johnson says, the same year, " Family prayer is observed by all the communicants, and by some who have not yet been admitted to the Lord's table, in their respective houses." Twenty years, or more, after this, Eev. J. P. Sessing, in speaking of the character of some of these converts who had emigrated to Jamai- ca, in the West Indies, says : " They can read and write, both males and females. They work nine houi-s a day, and are most oonscien- scious in the discharge of their duties. In order to find time to cultivate their own grounds, they commence their labor at 5 A. M. ; and yet, early as they go to work, they never leave home without first collectively singing a hymn, and oflering up a prayer for protection and guidance during the day ; and they never re- tire in the evening, without doing the same." The Sabbath is strictly observed by the native Christians, and to a great extent, by the people generally, who have come under Christian instruction ; though at some places, there is great complaint of a relapse, in this respect. It is stated that, in 1845 two cap- tains of vessels landed at a village of about 500 inhabitants, where no missionary or catechist resided, in order to purchase poultry ; but the people would not sell on the Lord's day. The people of Abbeokuta go a long distance to market, and travel in large parties for protec- tion against kidnappers. An interval of seven- teen days elapses between one market day and another; so that if they lose the day, they must wait for another. And yet, notwithstand- ing these difSoulties, the converts determined not to travel on the Sabbath, though they ran the risk of having to travel in small companies and of losing their market day. The reports of the missionaries abound in accounts of the expression of pious feeling, on the part of the natives, couched in simple lan- guage, yet corresponding with the experience of true Christians in all ages ; also, in a va- riety of personal narratives of thrilling interest, and of peaceful and happy deaths ; which, how- ever, it is impossible for us to give in detail. One of the communicants at Kent, who had been torn from his' kindred and country in childhood, and suffered great hardships on board the slave ships, declared that his com- passion for the man who kidnapped him was so great, and his desire for his salvation so strong, that, when thinking of it, he could not sleep at night. Church Discipline. — Church discipline is strictly maintained in the native churches of the Society in Sierra Leone. Any palpable in- consistency in a professed member of the church is noticed and reproved ; and, if not corrected, the person is removed from the list of mem- bers. This, under God, is often made the means of bringing the careless or disobedient to a better mind. In most congregations, there is a " backsliders' class," who are under instruc. tion and probation, previous to their re-admis- sion. Remaining Superstitions. — With a people so recently raised Trom the lowest depths of super- stition, it is not surprising to find thorn some- times returning to their former habits, or re- taining, in their ignorance, some of their old ideas. Among the things earliest associated with the African mind, is, a disposition to trust in charms, or greegrees, as they call them. One missionary says he believes all the inhabitants of the. colony would press to the baptismal font, if they might be allowed to regard it merely as the best of all greegrees; and com- municants have been found wearing their gree- grees at the communion table. Tet, this is not to be wondered at, when we consider that the same thing is encouraged, in a different form, by the greater portion of nominal Christians, and even by some Protestants. Desire for the Word of God. — Mr. Kissling says, "As soon as the natives can put letters together to form syllables, and syllables to form words, they are anxious to get a Bible ; and, if attending our places of worship, a Prayer Book also. Nor is it from mere curiosity that they desire it. Many, I am sure, use them in private as well as in church ; and when assem- bled around their family altar, and by the side of the sick, and on their visits to their heathen countrymen." During the eight years ending May, 1838, 2860 copies of the Scriptures had been issued, and most of them paid for. In 1846, Mr. Beale writes : " Seven years ago, a large stock of Scriptures was always on hand ; but latterly, as fast as they have arrived, they have been purchased by eager applicants. The last two shipments were hailed by the people with peculiar joy. They completely beset my house, and within a fortnight after each arri- val, nearly the whole of the smaller Bibles, 1500 in number, were exhausted." Missionary Spirit. — ^The native Christians manifest an earnest desire to impart the word of life to their destitute countrymen ; and in order to cultivate this spirit, the missionaries, at an early period, organized missionary asso- ciations at the stations, and took up regular contributions. These societies hold anniver- sary meetings, at which addresses arc made by the natives, as well as by the missionaries. Collections, respectable in amount, have been reported from thpse auxiliaries every year. In 1851, the amount collected at one station was £123 5s. 8d. This amount was given by 134 communicants and fifty candidates, including £30 5s. lid. from 150 children in school. Timneh {or Timmanee) Mission. — In the au- tumn of 1840, an expedition was sent into the Timneh country, and it was ascertained that a favorable opening existed for preaching the Gospel ; and Kev. C. F. Schlenker and Messrs. N. Denton and W. 0. Thompson were set apart for the work, and entered upon their 72 AFRICA, WESTERN. labors. The location fixed upon for the mission ■was Port Lokkoh, [which see.) The missionaries devoted themselves to translations, schools, and preaching the Gospel ; but. at the latest dates nothing of special interest had occurred. The people are Alohammedans ; and " that perni- cious system," says Mr. Schmid, " appears to present a most formidable barrier against the reception of Christian truth." The station is now under the charge of a native teacher, and Mr. Schmid visits it once a quarter, inspects the school, and preaches to the natives. Yoruba Mission. — We have already alluded to the early history and ordination of Eev. Samuel Crowther, a native African. On the 3d of December, 1843, Mr. Crowther preached in English, his first sermon in Africa, in the Mission church, Freetown, which excited great interest. On the 9th of January following, he established a service at the same place in To- rnba, his native language. The novelty of the occasion brought together a large number of people, Torubas, Ibos, Oalabas, &c. The ser- vice was continued, Mr. T. King officiating after Mr. Crowther left. For a considerable time previous, there had been a movement among the liberated Afri- cans of the Toruba tribe, towards their native land. For the purpose of making arrange- ments to enable them to carry the Gospel with them, Mr. Townsend visited their country, arriving in January, 1843, at Abbeokuta, where he met the chief, Sodeke, who appeared friendly, expressed a desire for the return of his people, and for missionaries to accompany them ; and wrote a letter to the Governor of Sierra Leone, expressing his thanks to the British Government for what it had done for his people, and his determination to suppress the slave-trade in his country. Mr. Townsend found many liberated Africans from Sierra Leone, at Abbeokuta ; and he describes some very affecting scenes, on their meeting their friends and relatives. The country he found to be salubrious and fruitful. (See Yoruba.) On hearing Mr. Thompson's report, the de sire of the Torubas to return to their country was greatly increased ; and hundreds imme- diately began preparations for leaving the col- ony. On the 4th of November following, the inhabitants of Hastings addressed a, letter to Mr. Graf, their missionary, expressing their desire to return to their country, and present- ing,, through him, to the Society, a request for a missionary. This was responded to, by the appointment of Andrew " Wilhelm, a native teacher of established character, to accompany them. A farewell meeting was held, and addresses and parting advice given to the emi- grants by Mr. Graf and several of the natives. The Committee decided on occupying Ab- beokuta as a missionary station ; and Mr. Townsend went to England to receive ordina- tion, in order to accompany Mr. Crowther, who had been appointed to the new mission. He returned to the colony in December, 1844 ; and on the 18th of that month, Bev. Messrs. Thompson, Golmer, and Crowther, with then- wives and four native teachers, sailed in an American vessel that happened to be at Free- town, carrying with them a frame house, con- structed for Mr. Townsend in England. They were favored with a prosperous voyage, and arrived safely at Badagry on the nth of Jan- uary, 1845. There they heard that Sodeke, the chief of Abbeokuta, was dead, and were advised not to proceed till after the funeral ceremonies were over. Soon after, the Toru- bas were attacked by the king of Dahomey, and a serious war broke out, the consequence of the slave-trade. Being thus prevented from going immediately into the interior, they com- menced missionary labors at Badagry, among a mixed population. The Gospel was preached under the shade of a tree. Mr. Townsend's frame house was put up, and a native house erected. The service was conducted in the Toruba language, the greater part of the Lit- urgy having been translated by Mr. Crowther. After a detention of eighteen months at Badagry, Eev. Messrs. Townsend, and Crow- ther succeeded in reaching Abbeokuta, leav- ing Mr. Golmer at Badagry ; which was to be maintained as a branch of the mission, to keep open the communication with the coast. As soon as their arrival in the vicinity was an- nounced, the crier was commissioned to give public notice that the heaviest punishment would be visited on any one who should dare to insult or steal from the strangers who were coming. The whole of the Lord's day previ- ous to their arrival was spent by the chiefs in wrangling with each other for the right of re- ceiving the missionaries, in- their respective districts. On their arrival at the ferry of the river Ogun, they were met by a party of Sierra Leone people ; and on the opposite bank, an- other large party, dressed out in their English clothes, were ready to welcome them. After visiting all the chiefs, which it took them four days to accomplish, an assembly of the_ chiefs was convened, to hear from them their intentions, on coming into their country. The meeting was conducted with great deco- rum. Mr. Crowther addressed them, giving a history of the proceedings, and explaining the objects of the mission. He then read a letter from the Governor of the Colony to them. Their answer was highly satisfactory, ex- pressiug their gratitude, and promising their cooperation in carrying out the objects of the mission. They immediately set about the erection of buildings ; but in the mean time, commenced service partly under the shelter of a narrow piazza, and partly in the open air and were listened to attentively by all. They also learned that Andrew Wilhelm, the native teacher who had preceded them, had been faithfully laboring to prepare their way. Under date of August 21, Mr. Crowther AFRICA, WESTERN. Y3 states that Ms mother, from whom he had been torn away about twenty-five years before, came with his brother, in quest of him. Theii: meet- ing was most affecting ; and she readily received the truth from the lips of her son, and became one of the first fruits of the mission. In the beginning of the year 1848, Eev. J. Smith, and Eev. J. C. Miiller, with their wives, arrived at Badagry ; but in the course of three weeks, Mrs. Miller was carried off by the fever, and the alarming illness of Mrs. Townsend, obliged her husband to return with her to England. At Badagry, there was very little that was encouraging. The same friendly feeling continued at Abbeokuta. Eev. Mr. Miiller considered the Yorubas a superior class of Africans ; and their minds were prepared to receive the truth. They were not so dull and corrupt as those on the coast. Already, the blessing of God had attended the labors of the missionaries. On the 6th of Feb., 1848, just before sailing for Europe, Mr. Townsend, after receiving satisfactory evidence of their true conversion, baptized three women, one of whom was Mr. Crowther's mother, and two men. On this occasion, a large number as- sembled in the church. The three women were neatly dressed in white. The candidates re- ceived Christian names at their baptism. Af- ter the service, Mr. Orowther preached an im- pressive sermon, which was listened to with the deepest attention. The number of candidates for baptism, at this time, was about 100. From Badagry, Mr. Marsh, as an instance of the cruel bondage of superstition, writes, April 17, 1849, that there exists, among the Popos, at Badagry, a custom, bearing resem- blance to monastic vows. The people are mostly under vows to some idols, which cannot be violated by themselves or others, with im- punity. Under these vows, they are often shut up for a long time in their idol temples. There were, at that time, about five hundred young men and women, shut up in these temples. When these come out, they are regarded as sacred, and any one who touches their heads or treads on their feet, must pay a large sum of money, or if unable, must be sold or put to death. In crossing from one part of the town to another, Mr. Smith passed a piece of ground where these victims of superstition were put to death, which was literally strewed with human bones ; so truly are the " dark places of the earth full of the habitations of cruelty." Three years after the establishment of the mission at Abbeokuta, so great was the bless- ing of G-od upon it, that there were five hun- dred constant attendants on the means of grace, eighty communicants, and nearly two hundred candidates ; and the religion of Jesus Christ had become a topic of conversation in the war expedition, on the farms, and in the market places. The people pressed eagerly to hear the word, and were deeply moved with it, sometimes speaking out and inquiring what they should do. Those who came to oppose, were convinced. The word, also, exercised a general and pervading influence over the people at large ; and there was a waning of the power of idols and of the ancient superstitions. Yet, the converts were subject to persecution from those who adhered to the old customs. The priests of the national superstition, being nearly deserted, set up a persecution in four or five of the town ships of which the District of Abbeokuta is composed, putting the converts in stocks, cruelly beating them, threatening them with death, and fining them to a heavy amount ; but at length, on the urgent request of the mis- sionaries, the principal chiefs interfered, and put a stop to those cruel proceedings. The attempt to renew persecution was again made, in 1850. The cause was believed to be the close blockade of Lagos, by the British squadron, by means of which no slaves could be shijpped ; which so enraged the head slave trading chief at Abbeo- kuta, that he sought to annoy, defeat, and drive away, if possible, the friends of the mis- sion, even threatening death to those who ven- tured to go to church. But the British Con- sul, Oapt. Beecroft soon arrived at Abbeokuta, and effectually stu-red up the chiefs to protect the converts. The priests are inveterate against Christian- ity, and do what they can to oppose it ; but they and the chiefs seemed to be held under a remarkable restraint. They have a way of consulting their gods, through an oracle, which is their great superstition. This oracle has again and again been consulted by them, in regard to the missionaries, but has never been induced to utter a word against them ; but from first to last, it has said that the welfare of the country was in the hands of the white people, and that they must be permitted to teach what they please. Their oracles are in the hands of the heathen priests, who, by a certain process, arrive at a conclusion as to the will of the god. But, though they are open and avowed persecutors of Christianity, they are unable to make their oracles utter a word against it. Toward the end of the year 1850, it became evident that the various parties interested in the slave trade were preparing for a desperate and combined attempt to crush the rising Christianity of Abbeokuta, and expel the mis- sionaries from the land. At length, an invar sion was attempted by the king of Dahomey. On the hostile army appearing before Badagry, some of the boys at the missionary boarding school were taken away to places of safety ; but Eev. Mr. Gollmer remained at his post. On Sunday evening, March 2, the enemy ap- proached Abbeokuta. Many of the Christian converts went from public worship and from their special prayer meetings, to man the walls, for the whole male population was summoned to the defence. Many of the timid inhabitants fled, but the missionaries remained at theit 74 AFRICA, WESTERN. posts, with a stedfast confidence in God. Masses of well trained warriors, male and fe- male, armed witli muskets, bore down upon the town, defended only with a mud wall. They fought with desperation, but were completely routed, with great loss ; while the loss of the Torubas was small. The missionaries exerted tliemselves to save the lives of the prisoners, and they were at length exchanged for the means of defence against future attaots. The immediate moral ellect upon the inhabitants of Abbeokuta was most striking. The victory was by them unanimously attributed to the goodness of the Christian's God. All persecu- tion ceased. The principal chiefs sent their children to the schools. And it was hoped that great advantage would accrue to the cause of Christ, from this deep and bloody plot against the very existence of the mission at Abbeokuta. It is thus that the Lord makes the wrath of man to praise him. An attack was made on Badagry, and near- ly the whole town reduced to ashes ; but the premises of the mission escaped. At this stage, the British cruisers interfered, and drove away Kosoko, the usurper of Lagos, who made the attack, and the most decisive measures were taken to put down the slave traffic. Treaties were made with Abbeokuta and Lagos, in which protection was secured both to the missionaries and to lawful commerce. In the course of the persecutions which have been alluded to, many instances are mentioned of constancy in the converts, which would have done honor to the early Christian martyrs. The mission is extending its operations on every side, and making exploring expeditions into the interior, and bringing to light con- stantly new fields of labor, to which the way is already prepared, by all these tribes being represented among the liberated Africans in the Colony ; so that they are likely to prove Josephs, lost and recovered again, to save their people, not from temporal, but from eternal death. Present State of the Mssions.— The report of the society, for 1852, represents the work as going forward at the different stations, with a steady progress. The Yoruba country had continued to be the scene of " wars and rumors of wars ;" but from the threatened danger Abbeokuta had been happily preserved. The missionary work has been successfully pros- ecuted, and several new stations commenced. But, in consequence of the war, and other cir- cumstances, Badagry was reduced to a small and unimportant place ; and the mission has been removed to Lagos, about 36 miles east of Badagry. Lagos is a large and populous town, having water communication far into the in- terior, as well as for hundreds of miles along the coast. It has hitherto been a great slave mart ; but the British government have occu- pied the place, and driven out the traffic. Several deaths occurred among the mission- aries in 1852 ; but a considerable reinforce- ment was sent out, and Rev. 0. B. Vidal, D. D., having been consecrated Bishop of Sierra Leone, arrived at Freetown Dec. 27,1852, and preached his first ordination sermon on the admission of Messrs. Maser, Kefer, and Gerst to deacon's orders. The report for 1853, represents the pastoral work within the colony as in a satisfactory state of progress, and the educational establish- ments as in a hopeful condition. Not much progress Was making at the Timneh mission ; but the year has been one of peace to the Yoruba mission. A good beginning had been made at Lagos. The following table will show the state of these missions in 1853 : DISTRICTS AND PRINCIPAL STATIONS. Freetown District . . . River District Mountain District Sea District Timneli Mission Abbeoliuta District.., Coast District Totals 22 1818 1820 1816 1819 1840 1846 1845 Clergy- men. 976 500 335 6 233 2,976 Baptisms during the year. Beminarista and Scholars. 252 481 248 33 1,617 454 209 367 235 7 1,272 166 101 d fl's 429 729 227 6 357 1,981 890 1,677 710 61 512 101 6,822 English Baptist Missimai-y Society. — Allu- sion has already been made to an unsuccessful effort of the Baptist Missionary Society to introduce the Gospel into Sierra Leone in 1795. Prom the failure of that enterprise to 1840, this society appears to have attempted nothing for AVest Africa. At length, how- ever, it was resolved that measures should be taken, having in view the exploration and oc- cupancy of an entirely new field. The Rev, John Clarke and Dr. Prince, who had both resided for some years in Jamaica, were invited to go forth as pioneers, and lay the foundation of the contemplated mission. They arrived at APRICA, WESTERN. 75 the island of Fernando . Po, January 1, 1841 ; and on the following Sabbath public worship was held in Clarence, where they first landed. (See Fernando Po.) They subsequently vis- ited the adjacent coast, to ascertain the feasi- bility of commencing missionary operations. Such was their report to the society at home that the latter soon sent out a number of ad- ditional laborers, a part of whom were station- ed on the island of Fernando Fo, and a part upon the main land. The agency of colored persons from Jamaica is to be employed ex- tensively in this mission ; and a number have already joined their white brethren. The prospects of this enterprise were quite flattering till near the close of 1845. At that time three stations had been commenced upon the main land ; making the whole number of stations four, and the out-stations five. There were also five missionaries, thi-ee male Euro- pean assistant missionaries, and nine male colored teachers. Early in the year 1846, however, all the missionaries on Fernando Po were ordered by the Spanish authorities to desist from their appropriate work, twelve months being allowed them to dispose of the mission property. This year was also one of peculiar trial, in the removal of two of the missionaries, Messrs. Thompson and Sturgeon, by death. The Spanish consul regarding their labors as a great benefit to the people, consented to let them remain, provided they would give up preaching and cease to teach the Bible in their schools. But this proposition they declined, and employed the interval allowed them for removal in their usual labors. Two Catholic priests were left at Clarence, but they have since returned to Spain. Seven persons were baptized, during the year. Meanwhile, the providence of God was opening other doors at Bimbia and Cameroons. The former of these is healthy, and surrounded by 140 vil- lages. The report for 1851 states that cheer- ing information of success had been received from Mr. Johnson at Cameroons. The attend- ance on preaching was good, there were several inquirers, and 14 or 15 gave evidence of piety. This year the mission was again afflicted with the loss by death of two of its missionaries, Messrs. Merrick and Newbegin ; but one addi- tional missionary was sent out, and Mr. Saker, who was on a visit to England, returned to his field of labor. In 1852, Bev. J. Wheeler re- turned home, not being able to endure the climate. In the report for May, 1853, the committee say that, notwithstanding the reduction of mis- sionary strength, the blessing of God evidently rests on the enfeebled labors of the remnant. At all of the three stations there have been conversions, and the labors of the negro teach- ers have been the means of salvation to inany. The care of the churches has of necessity been committed to native helpers, who have shown no small capacity and fitness for the ofHoe. The work of translation has been prosecuted, and several thousand pages of the word of God printed. Tot, the work has met with opposi- tion, and more than once, at the Cameroons, the lives of the people attending Christian wor- ship have been threatened. ^ The latest complete returns from this mis- sion are for the year 1849, as follows : io f6 1 •a o ■s 3 -2 .1 1 i 1 11 a*' -a a & 1 1 Fernando Po, Clar- 1 ence, &c j" 3 3 1 8 2 6 113 Cameroons 1 1 in 6 f\ 350 Bimbia, Jubilee, &c 3 4 2 1 100 Totals 7 3 5 11 2 26 118 7 450 Wesletan Missionaey Society. — I. Sierra Leone. — The Wesleyan Missionary Society commenced a mission at Sierra Leone in the year 1796— (not in 1811, as stated in " The Missionary Guide-Booh," p. 27). During the eleven years preceding, that Society had es- tablished missions in Sova Scotia, Newfound- land, and the West Indies ; and the success which God had vouchsafed to those efforts encouraged the Wesleyan Conference to at- tempt to open a field of missions on the west coast of Africa. Sierra Leone was chosen as the place where to begin these efforts ; and this was the first mission of any kind to that part of Africa. In 1795, the venerable Dr. Coke, the father of Wesleyan missions, united himself with a scheme then on foot, by gentlemen of diSerent denominations, for the civilization of the Fow- lahs, in West Africa. This expedition, which originated in motives so purely benevolent, proved an entire failure, not merely from the want of adaptation in the agents employed, but from a mistake akin to that of the Morar vians, when they thought they could first civ- ilize and then evangelize the Esquimaux. From similar causes, this expedition failed. The persons engaged and sent forth by Doctor Coke on this mission, were a band of mechan- ics, with a surgeon at their head ; and they were directed to teach the Foutahs the arts of civilized life. On arriving in the colony, they became discontented, and were soon dispersed. Some died, and others returned home, without ever having reached the scene of their intended labors in the interior. The enterprise " came to naught," for its fundamental principle was not that ordained by the great head of the Church, for establishing Christian missions among heathen nations. This was the only mistake of the kind, which, in their long expe- rience, the Wesleyans ever fell into, and may 76 APRICA, WESTERN. be excused in view of the immature views en- tertained of tlie missionary enterprise nearly seventy years ago.* The Wesleyan Confer- ence felt the rebuke, and promptly rectified the mistake, so far as it was connected with them, for, in the annual minutes of the Conference held in August of that year, {1196] we find the following entry : " Dr. Coke laid before the Conference an account of the failure of the colony intended to be established in the Fou- lah country in Africa ; and, after prayer and mature consideration, the Conference unani- mously judged, that a trial should be made in that part of Africa, otj the proper missionary plan. The two brethren above-mentioned, Messrs. A. Murdoch and W. Patten, having voluntarily offered themselves for this import- tant work, the Conference solemnly appointed them for it, and earnestly recommended them and their great undertaking to the public and private prayers of the Methodist Society." Little information can now be obtained as to the extent or results of the enterprise thus set on foot by the Conference. No report was published for many years afterwards ; and the only sources from whence to glean our scanty knowledge of this mission, are the " Annual Minutes," and the " Arminian Magazine." We cannot, therefore, tell how many agents were sent out, or what amount of success they continued to have. But, that a commence- ment was made, and considerable good accom- plished, and that, too, very soon, is evident from the following notice, being part of a Narrative of Methodist Missions, first drawn up by a Christian of another denomination for the Edinburgh " Missionary Magazine^" and thence copied into the " Arminian Maga- zine," for February, 1797 : — " There are also in Siei-ra Leone, upon the coast of Africa, 400 persons in connexion with the Methodist Soci- ety, of whom 223 are blacks and mulattoes." The next reference to this mission turns up in 1804, when the preacher, Mr. Brown, appealed earnestly to Dr. Coke for ministerial help. • In explanation of the above we find a note in the Mis- sUmwy Magazine, published in Edinburg in August, 1796, which saya;^"We understand that the mission to the Foulah country, which is said to have failed, was not pro- perly a Methodist mission ; as the famihes that went out with ill. Macaulay, with the design to settle on the bor- ders of that country, were not sent by the Methodist Con ference. They were mechanics, who had been members of the Methodist Societies in England, some of whom had ofBciated as local preachers, and who had been recom- mended by Dr. Colce to Mr. Macaulay. But it seems they had either not riglitly understood the engagements they had entered into, or had not fully counted the cost. We, therefore, insert this note, lest any of our readers, by at- taching the common idea to the phrase Methodist Mission, should be led to conclude that these persons must have been missionaries, sent out by that body of people, for the express purpose of preaching to the heathen : whereas, they were neither so sent, nor was their mission so imme- diately to preach, as to form a Christian colony, and open a friendly Intercourse with the natives of the Foulah country." This explanation will also serve to correct a mistake in Mr. Moist^r's work, *' Memorials of Missiomiry Labors in Western Africa," (London, 1850, p. 31,) where he seems to make Dr. Coke and the Conference responsible for the whole undertaking. Other writers besides Mr. M. hiive fallen into the same mistake. Mr. B. was assisted by Mr. Gordon and though only local preachers, they faithtuUy cared for the little flock that had been gath- ered. They had also the assistance of a coloreQ preacher, a devoted young man. In 1808 we find a communication from this native preacher, Mingo Jordan, to Dr. Adam Clarke, giving an account of his labors as a missionary among the Maroons, from 1805 up to 1808, and stat- ing that, including the Maroons that had been converted, the number of church members m and around Sierra Leone amounted to 100. He earnestly requests in his letter a supply of hymn-books and some wearing apparel for the preachers. Dr. Colje tried to sustain the mis- sion until he could find a suitable man to go and take the general superintendence of it ; and, in 1811, he sent out Eev. George Warren for this purpose, who, on his arrival in Sierra Leone, was received with open arms by the oflcers and members of the church which had been gathered there. Mr. Warren's report to Dr. Coke gives the following as the statistics of the mission, as he found it :— " The society, at our arrival, amounted to 110 ; a great pro- portion of these profess to enjoy a sense of the divine favor ; and the society in general, as far as I can learn, conduct themselves with considerable propriety. I found among them, at my coming, three local preachers, two of whom meet classes, and six class-leaders be- sides. Since this, one brother, who had been in the country for his health, has returned. Seven have been admitted on trial, while sev- eral more appear to be under serious impres- sions.* Sierra Leone had then about 4,000 inhabitants, only about one in forty being Eu- ropean. The rest were Nova-Scotians, Maroons, Timnehs, Bulloms, Kroomen, and recaptured slaves. The places of worship were two Methodist chapels, one Episcopal, and one Baptist church. To do anything like justice to our sketch of this mission, it is necessary that we be allowed to state briefly what was the condition of soci- ety then at Sierra Leone. Even at the present day, after the Gospel (like the disinfecting fluid acting on this mass of moral corruption) has removed so large a proportion of the elementa of death, the population of Sierra Leone is unique, having no parallel in any other part of the world. But what was the state of that anomalous population, as a field for Christian missions, more than fifty years ago ? All the elements of the worst forms of heathenism were here united to the most degrading vices of civilization. And, in the midst of these abom- inations, missionaries were set down to attempt to spread the blessings of a sanctifying Chris- tianity through such " a hell upon earth " as this place then was. At that time the colony was but ten square miles in extent. It was originally settled with the avowed object of the moral * See Methodist Magajdne tor 1807, p. 283 ; for 1808 n 572 ; tor 1812, p. 316, and pp. 63? and 796. ' ATEICA, ■WESTERN, 77 improvement of the natives. But at the close of the war with the United States, the negroes who had served under the British flag, either on land or in the navy, were located in Nova Scotia, or the Bahama Isles. Being dissatis- fied with their situation, numbers of them made their way to London, where they were found, collected together, in the most deplorable state, " subject to every misery, and familiar with every vice." Public attention was called to their condition, chiefly by the efforts of the celebrated Granville Sharpe, and, in 1787, "The African Company" was formed. The committee purchased land from the negro princes at Sierra Leone, on which to locate these pests of London society ; and, a few months after, 400 blacks and about 60 whites erabarked for Sierra Leone. The whites are said to have been chiefly women of the most abandoned character. Such were the materi- als of the first English colony in Western Africa. A company of American refugee slaves and London prostitutes sent out by Brit- ish philanthropy to enlighten and civilize Af- rica I The results may be anticipated. Prom the combined influence of the climate and the vicious habits of the colonists, the mortality was fearful. In a few months, nearly one half of them had either died or escaped from the colony, and, in little more than a year, the whole were dispersed, and the town burnt to ashes by an African chief. In the year 1791, another association was formed, by whose efforts a few of the dispersed colonists were again collected, and about 1200 more negroes were transported from Nova Scotia. About three years after. Sierra Leone was destroyed by a French squadron ; and, in 1808, disappointed and dismayed by the spirit of the colonists, and the various disasters which overtook the colony, the company transferred their whole establishment to the British gov- ernment. Prom this period may be dated the rising prosperity of Sierra Leone. Law and order soon reigned throughout the colony, and provision was made for its defence. The Brit- ish crown had, just the year before, declared the slave trade to be piracy, and it now decreed that all captured slaves, rracued from slave ships by the English cruisers, should be brought into Sierra Leone, as their asylum. Such are the sources whence the population of Sierra Leone has been drawn, numbering 41,735 in the year 1847, and which presents in that place the representatives of about 200 different nations of Africa, each with its own language, superstitions, and abominable wickedness, and, when landed there, possessing no idea of order, discipline, honesty, or morality. Among these wretched outcasts of man- kind, the Wesley an missionaries have been la- boring from the first ; and surely in such a place, whatever good has been achieved must be attributed alone to the hand of God. When to these considerations we add the dead- ly character of the climate, some idea may be formed of the nature of that sphere where the Wesleyan missionaries have been toiling for half a century. It has been the grave of our missionaries, and frequently at a time too when they had just become qualified for usefulness among this polyglot people. Prom 1811 to 1850, there were sent from England, as nearly as can be ascertained, by the Wesleyan Mis- sionary Society, about 123 missionaries, includ- ing their wives ; and of these there were no fewer than 54 who died, while many others re- turned home on account of the failure of their health. Nor was this merely aftei- a length- ened course of labor. In consequence of the unhealthiness of the climate, the Committee, after a short trial of seven years, restricted the period of service first to three, and then to two years ; and it was only in a few instances that this period was exceeded. Many died within the first year, some in a few months, a few weeks, or even a few days, after their landing. Instances were not wanting of husbands and wives lying ill in different rooms of the same house at the same time, and dying within a short time of each other. The frequent sick- ness a.nd death of so many of the missionaries, and the early return of others to England, could not fail to affect materially the progress of the missions. Stations were sometimes left with only one missionary, or without any mission- ary at all. The events and circumstances which we have placed before the reader will, in a great meas- ure, explain why the 400 members connected with the mission in 1797 should have dwindled to 110 in 1811, when Mr. Warren arrived to take charge of the mission. He entered on his work with great zeal, and extensive prospects of usefulness, but fell a victim to the climate the year after he landed there. William Davis then offered himself for the vacant post, and Samuel Brown was sent out to assist him, in the various openings of usefulness which pre- sented themselves. The work soon spread from Pree Town to Wellington, Hastings, Waterloo, Murraytown, &o., on the east, and to York and Plantains Island on, the South. And notwith- standing the occasional checks to which the mission has been subject, among the greatest of which, may be reckoned each fresh cargo of slaves, yet this mission has been crowned with continued prosperity. And some of the most remarkable instances of powerful awakenings and revivals with which the Wesleyan missions have been blest have taken place in Sierra Le- one. Here thousands of the afflicted children of Ham, drawn up from the reeking holds of the slave vessels, have been made the joyful partakers of a richer liberty than British phi- lanthropy could confer upon them. And it is the testimony of gentlemen who resided there for years, that the religious experience of " the converts to Christianity in that country is generally clear and satisfactory, and will 78 AFRICA, WESTEKN. bear a compariaon with that of the professors of religion in more highly favored lands." Schools have also been established for the training of the rising generation, in which over 3,600 children are receiving an evangeli- cal education ; and an Institution for the train- ing of a native ministry is in successful opera- tion. Nor have the labors of the missionaries and their zealous associates, the native preachers, been restricted to the heathen within the col- ony. They have brought the word of life to thousands of idolaters beyond the limits of the colony ; so that the Kossos and the heathen round Murraytown have turned to God from " dumb idols." At the close of the year 1852, one of those remarkable movements took place at Sierra Leone, which occasionally start- les the church and the world, evincing a special omnipotent agency over the minds of men. and indicating to us how vast are those resources of influence which God has in reserve and by which he may yet accelerate the con- version of the world to the faith of Christ. The nature of this movement may be best seen from the communications of the missionaries at Sierra Leone, under date of December 24, 18.52. Rev. Messrs. Fletcher and Gilbert write, " The Committee will be glad to hear that the idolaters of Sierra Leone are casting their idols ' to the moles and the bats.' The kingdom of Satan is falling as lightning to the ground. A few weeks since, Mr. George, our schoolmaster at Murraytown, came to the mis- sion house, and requested that one or two missionaries would come immediately to that place, as the idolaters were giving up their idols. As it was past five on Sunday evening when he came, we postponed it until the next day. On the following morning Mr. Eeay and myself rose at four o'clock, and started off to the village. We arrived just us it was get- ting light, and proceeded at once to the con- stable's house. We were rather surprised to find his piazza full of idols, and other supersti- tious stuff which had been brought to him the day previous. He very kindly took us to the houses of the idolaters. We talked to them about their souls, and exhorted them to look to Christ as their Saviour, Ecdeemer and God. One man who voluntarily gave up his idol to us. said he had been an idolater twenty-five year.s, but now he intended to go to the Chapel. On Sunday I went to Murraytown and preached to those people who had lately given up their idols. The Chapel, which had been lately re- built, was crowded ; and all paid great atten- tion, while I enforced the words, 'Little child- ren, keep yourselves from idols.' On the same day I baptized 28 males and females, 25 of whom were adults ; and I received 5 as mem- bers en trial ; but some of these were back- sliders. As I looked upon these people as they knelt down to be baptized, my feelings over- came me." At Free Town such a number of idol were given up as no one suspected the place tt have contained. The people took the matte into their own hands, and seemed to be simuJ taneously moved by an invisible impulse, be coming such enthusiastic Iconoclasts, that Mi ii'letcher tells us all other work was suspended In crowds, but not tumultuously, they parade* through the streets, carrying the heathen dei ties in procession, to deliver them up to th( magistrates and missionaries. Mr. Fletchei turned his apartments into a museum for the exhibition of these unsightly abominations, and thousands of people came to look at them. The fame of this movement has spread fai along the coast, producing deep impressions among the various tribes, and leading the re- lenting heathen in many instances to say with Ephraim — " What have I to do any more with idols ?" The work is extensive and spreading, and is another of those illustrations which fre- quently occur to show how powerful and effi- cient are the resources of Him in whose hand are the hearts of all men, and before whose Al- mighty Spirit every obstacle mu,st give way. The proximity of Sierra Leone to Liberia, in- vests this great work with an additional inter- est, as both of these colonies bear a relation to the evangelization of Africa, the value of which is incalculable. Events like these give a pow- erful impetus to a mission ; and it is so in this case. The prospects in Sierra Leone, were never so bright as new. The schools are well attended, and the chapels cannot hold all who desire the word of God. The Native Training Institution is also doing well. At a late public examination of the students, held in the presence of the Colonial Sec- retary and other official persons and resi- dents in th£ colony, the students were exam- ined as to their knowledge of Theology, Latin, Greek, Mathemaxics, English Grammar and Geography, and acquitted themselves most sat- isfactorily. One of their number has been just recommended by the district meeting as a can- didate for the holy ministry. Those who remember the struggles and dif- ficulties which marked the early history of this mission, can best appreciate its present encour- aging condition, and see with delight their hopes net only realized, but even far exceeded. In 1811 there was but one missionary, three local preachers, 110 members, and about 100 children in the schools, with two small chapels. Now there are thirty-one chapels, (some of which are very large,) seven missionaries, 107 local preachers, over 6000 church members, 3608 scholars, and more than 11,000 persons in the pastoral care of the missionaries. "Ac- cording to this time," it may well be said, " what hath God wrought ? " For more defi nite information on the present state of the mission, see the Tabviar View near the end of this article. II. The Gambia District.- — This mission was AFRICA, WESTERN. 79 commenced by the Wesleyan Society in the year 1821. It lies further north than any other on the west coast of Africa ; and the field is entirely in the hands of the Wesleyan Society. That portion of Western Africa which is drain- ed by the rivers Senegal and Uambia, is named Senegambia. The tribes inhabiting this district of country are chiefly the Jaloqfs, which lie to the north ; the Mandingoes, who inhabit the sea-board ; and the Foulalis, who are chiefly found deep in the country, to the east. The Jaloofs and Mandingoes are mostly Mohammedans ; but they are very different from each other in their opinions and disposi- tions. One portion of them, called Mara- boots, or "religious people," are excessively superstitious, and put implicit confidence in their " greegrees," (charms,) which they hang about them in great numbers and variety. They also practice witchcraft, of all sorts. Mohammedanism has been carried to the west of Africa by its priests in the capacity of schoolmasters, using the Arabic language ; and, though grossly ignorant themselves, they have acquired a powerful hold over the native mind. The Poulahs, who are a wandering people, are mostly Pagans, and are greatly oppressed by the Mandingoes, who abuse and plunder them without any ceremony. The French, the Portuguese, and the English, have settlements on the coast in these parts, as the rivers Sene- gal and Gambia are exceedingly advantageous for trade. The Gambia, especially, whose source, in the Tenda country is said to be only a few days' journey from the renowned Niger, can be navigated by vessels of large burden for nearly 400 miles, and with small craft for nearly 700 miles. Ships irom Europe supply the whole country on both sides of its banks, on which lie numerous towns and vil- lages, the centres of trade to the country for hundreds of miles inland. The mission schools, which were established by the missionary Dart, about the year 1820, in the island of St. Louis, a French settlement at the mouth of the Senegal, were not kept up ; neither were others that were established in'the island of Goree, near Cape Verd ; and the first standing missions that we meet with are these at the Gambia. Not far from its estu- ary, which is twelve miles broad, is the island of St. Mary, in lat. 30 degs. 30 min. north, and long. 15 degs. 10 min. west, close to the south- ern shore. It is four miles long by one broad. The English have had a settlement here since 1816. The principal town is Bathurst, on the north side, facing the main branch of the river. It contains a number of excellent houses, among which may be noted the government house, the hospital, the Wesleyan chapel, with the dwellings of the merchants, &c. The population in 1846 was 3689, of whom only 50 were white persons ; the rest were Mandin- goes, Jaloofs, and liberated slaves. Several missionaries have died here ; and the schools which were opened here by the Society of Friends, in the year 1823, as also those which they established, at the same time, on the neighboring coast at Birkow, Mahmadi, and Sandani, have sunk under the unhealthiness of the climate. The immediate foundress of these schools was the celebrated Hannah Kil- liam, that spirited lady who, for ten years to- gether, itinerated the west coast of Africa, commenced schools in many places, and in each of them devoted her particular attention to the languages and dialects, of which she printed a number of valuable specimens. She had herself brought up and educated two Afri- can youths in England, and it was with the assistance of these she opened the schools at Birkow. But she fell a victim to the country fever in the year 1832. The Wesleyan mission has stood better, inasmuch as it still continues ; though one Christian messenger after another has sunk into the grave, and almost yearly some such mournful tidings reach us from this station. The Wesleyan mission commenced its labors in 1821, at a place called Mandara- nee, in the territory of the king of Combo, on the south bank of the river, about eight miles from St. Mai-ys. This locality, _ however, proved to be ineligible, and the health of the missionaries, Morgan and Baker, having failed, the mission was removed to Bathurst, where, as also in Melville Town and Soldier Town on the island, and in Berwick Town on the conti- nent, they have new chapels which are very regularly frequented by native converts and the heathen. The Rev. Richard Marshall and his wife were sent out, in 1823, to strengthen and extend the mission at St. Marys. Mr. Morgan and Mr. Hawkins were then laboring there ; but in a short time we find Mr. Marshall laboring alone. He toiled on, however, assisted in the school department by his devoted companion. But in August, 1830, he was laid low, and in five days the malignant fever carried him off. As soon as an opportunity offered, the desolate widow, with her little infant, embarked for England, taking with her an African girl, Sally, to take care of them during the voyage. But great bodily weakness and extreme mental suffering soon prostrated her, and within 48 hours of the ship reaching the port of Bristol, Mrs. Marshall, unable to proceed to her friends in the north of England, died among strangers, though on her native shore, leaving her baby in the hands of his African nurse, both strangers in a strange land. One cold morning in the month of October of that year, several young men, can- didates for the missionary ministry of Method- ism, were passing through the streets of London, on their way to meet the secretaries and com- mittee, to be examined in reference to their qualifications, and the fields of labor to which they should be sent. Just as they arrived at the Old Mission House in Hatton-Garden, they 80 AFRICA, WESTERN. met a negro girl, carrying in her arms a poor, sickly-looking white child. They spoke to her, and while her sable arms were folded aifection- ately round her little charge, and the tears flowed down her face, she told them of her country, and of the missionary and his dear wife, whqm she had so much loved ; how they had toiled and suifered for Africa, and how they were dead, and no one to carry on the work ; and here she stood before the commit- tee, that had sent out the man of God and his wife, bearing back the missionary's orphan boy, and pleading that poor Africa be not given up. The devoted creature's appeal, ut- tered with an energy and a pathos truly affect- ing, produced an immediate and powerful im- pression upon the missionary candidates ; and one of their number, William Moister, imme- diately offered himself to fill the vacated post. In a few weeks he was on his way ; and when he arrived opposite Bathurst, and it became known fhat there was a missionary and his wife on board, the Christian natives gathered to the beach, plunging into the water to meet the boat, out of which they lifted them and carried them ashore. They set them down and then wept aloud for joy, kissing their hands again and again, and, as they bedewed them with their tears, exclaiming, " Tank God, tank God, Mr. Marshall die, but God send us nuder minister ! " They proceeded to the mis- sion house ; but the wild flowers had grown upon the unused steps during the few preced- ing months. Mr. Moister entered upon his work in faith, and his labors were soon owned of God ; and others having been sent to his assistance, he extended the mission to Macar- thy's Island, a most important position for a mission. This move brought them into con- nexion with the Foulah tribe, the very people that were the objects of Dr. Coke's benevolent but unsuccessful enterprise in 1796. Macar- thy's Island is situated in the Gambia river, about 250 miles from its mouth. It is nearly seven miles long and one broad, having the Gambia on both sides. Prom the central situation of this island its trade, in gold, ivory, hides, and beeswax — its being the resort of the shipping, and the facilities which its noble river affords for communication with the coast and the interior — no better position can be found in all Africa for a missionary station. Here, therefore, the Wesleyan committee estab- lished a strong centre of operation, including, as part of their plan, an institution for educa- ting the sons of the neighboring kings and chiefs. The committee were encouraged to engage in this enterprise by the noble munifi- cence of a single individual — Dr. Liiidne, of Southampton — and whose benevolent zeal is the more to be appreciated, inasmuch as he was not connected with the Wesleyan denomina^ tion of Christians. From 1833 to 1848, Dr. Lindoe and his family expended upon the Fovr- hh Mission over $19,000. A tract of 600 acres of land having been given by the Gov- ernment, the wandering and persecuted Faw- lahs were invited to settle upon it. School houses were built, and the Eev. Mr. Macbrair, formerly the Society's missionary in Egypt, was sent out to Macarthy's Island to translate the Scriptures into the language of the Man- dingoes and Foulahs. Several able na"tive missionaries were raised up, upon whom the work has since chiefly devolved, and the society there, with the genuine spirit of a missionary church, are laboring and praying that the nar tions contiguous to them may also be favored with the light of saving truth. The record of mortality in this mission is truly painful. During the past 32 years, out of 24 persona sent out, 15 have left the field disabled, and 12 have fallen into the arms of death ! And yet men are found who, with their lives in their hand, rush forward and offer themselves for these posts as often as they are left unfilled by the ravages of disease and death. The longest term of service was that of Eev. W. Fox, who was enabled to stand his ground for ten years. And next to him was Kev. H. Badger, who, after spending twelve years in the South Afri- can missions, went to the Gambia in 1848, and remained there until the death of his noble wife last year obliged him also to retire. The late Mrs. Badger was one of the most devoted female missionaries that ever was sent out by any Christian society. Twenty years of her life she devoted to the instruction and salva- tion of the African race, in the West Indies, at Sierra Leone, and at the Gambia. The languages employed at the Gambia, beside the English, are the Jaloof, the Mandingo, and the Foulah. For information as to the present state of this mission, the reader is referred to the table near the end of this article. in. The Cape Coast District— With the ex- ception of the German Mission at Akropong and Ussa, the only missions on the Gold Coast are those of the Wesleyan Society. This coast runs from the mouth of the river Adirio or Volta, to Cape Appolina, a distance of about 240 miles. 'The leading power in this district of Africa is the Ashantee nation, the capital of which is Coomassie or Kumasi. The coast of Guinea, of which the Gold Coast is a part, first became known to Europeans in the six- teenth century. At that period the spirit of discovery, which during the middle ages, had been confined to the Arabs, manifested itself in Europe in a most remarkable manner. The Portuguese, who led the way, prosecuted their researches with enthusiastic ardor, and along the western coast of Africa, and from various points penetrated into the interior. The Eng- lish first commenced trading with Guinea m the latter end of the reign of Edward VI.; but the merchants who engaged in such com- merce were exposed to considerable risk, :n consequence of the pretensions of the Portu- guese, who having built the fort of St. George AFRICA, WEBTEKN. 81 del Mina, endeavored to enforce tlieir claim to an exclusive right to trade with the G-old Coast, as well as the other parts of Western Africa. The Dutch deprived the Portuguese of their forts and settlementg, on the G-old Coast ; and their attempt to serve the English in the same way, led to the war between the Dutch and English in 1667. At its conclusion the English company were left in possession of only one fort, that of Cape Coast Castle. But they soon extended themselves on the coast again. At this time the Fantees governed the whole country round Cape Coast— having the powerful and warlike Ashaiitees on the north of them. The eruption of the Ashan- tees into the Fantee country iivst brought them into collision with the British, in the year 1807. The Ashantees desolated the country — and their great military power may be imagined from the fact of the immense and disciplined armies they brought into the field. It is stated that, in some of the wars in which this powerful people engaged, often 30,000 men, and in two instances, as many as 100,000, have been left dead on the field of battle. In the war of 1807 they took the Dutch fort at Cor- mantiae, they then fiercely attacked the Bri- tish fort of Annamaboe, when a negociation ensued, and Chibbu, the author of the war, had to be given up to them. A second and a third invasion followed, until the Fantees were com- pletely subdued, and the British found that, to retain their own possessions they must concili- ate these powerful conquerors. An embassy therefore was sent to Coomassie, a treaty con- cluded, and a resident appointed to represent British interests at the capital. Symptoms of disquietude, followed by another treaty, having occurred, the Home Government resolved to try harsher measures, and appointed Sir Charles McCarthy Governor of Cape Coast." He adopted a warlike policy. Hostilities were commenced between the British and the As- hantees, in which at first the British were suc- cessful, but in the fatalbattle near Assamacow, Sir Charles was defeated and slain, and his army cut to pieces. As an illustration of the spirit and temper of the savage Ashantees, it may be mentioned that they cut the heads of Sir Charles and several of his officers from their bodies, and having seized the Secretary of the General, Mr. Williams, they confined him in a room where the heads were kept. They also tore open Sir Charles' body and took out his heart, and having divided it, it was eaten by the Ashantee Generals, in order that they might, as they imagined, imbibe his bravery. His flesh having been dried, was di- vided, together with his bones, among the captains of the army, who kept their respective shares about their persons, as charms to in- spire them with courage. About two years from this period, in Sep- tember, 1826, another and a decisive battle was fought, in which the British were victo- rious. Among the trophies was a human head, enveloped in a silk handkerchief, and a paper covered with Arabic characters ; and over the whole was thrown a tiger skin, the emblem of royalty. On the supposition that this was the head of the unfortunate General McCarthy, it was afterwards sent to England by Colonel Purdon ; but it was really the head of the old king Osai Tutu Quamina, (a sovereign remarkable for his prowess) which the new king carried about with him as a charm. It is said that on the morning of the battle, he offered it a libation of rum, and invoked it to cause all the heads of the whites to come and lie near it ; and during the day, when intelli- gence was brought to him of the death of ary of his principal officers, he immediately, in the heat of the battle, offered human sacrifices to their shades. But the blow struck by the British was so decisive that the Ashantee monarch had to submit to the terms imposed on him, which were, that he shonld lodge 4000 ounces of gold in the castle at Cape Coast, to be appropriated in purchasing arms and ammunition for the Bri- tish allies, in case the Ashantees should again commence hostilities ; and that two of the royal family of Ashantee should be sent to Cape Coast as hostages. To these terms he was obliged to conform, and in April, 1831, his son Quantimissah, and his nephew Ansah, arrived at the Castle. These princes were kindly treated ; they received a good education, under the direction of the African Committee, by whom the British G-overnment now con- ducts the affairs of the Gold Coast ; and through the faithful ministry of Rev. J. Dun- well, the first Wesleyan missionary to the Gold Coast, they both became convinced of the truth and excellence of the Christian relig- ion, the public profession of which they assumed during their subsequent visit to England, — Quantamissah receiving in baptism the name of William, and Ansah, that of John. They returned to Africa with the Niger Expedition, and were accompanied to Coomassie by the Rev. T. B. Freeman, Wesleyan missionary at Cape Coast Castle. The favorable impression produced on the mind of the Ashantee monarch, by these two princes, as well as by a few na- tive Christians who had returned to Coomassie from Sierra Leone, to which they had been carried as rescued slaves, by the British cruis- ers, were thus the means employed by Provi- dence for opening Ashantee to the labors of the Wesleyan Missioaary Society. Here we leave the narrative for the present, in order to glance at the work which had pre- viously been begun in the regions on the south of the Ashantee kingdom nearer the sea. Between Coomassie and the South Atlantic Ocean there are several kingdoms, as Asin, Aquapim, Akim, Pantee, &c., over which the monarchs of Ashantee formerly claimed supreme sovereignty. And it is humiliating to reflect 82 AFRICA, WESTERN. that though three Protestant powers of Europe —the Danes, the Dutch, and the English — have successively had intercourse with these and other parts of Guinea for three centuries, yet until a comparatively late period, but few at- tempts have been made to communicate to the native population the light and blessings of Christianity. In the year 17S1, a clergyman of the Church of England went out under the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, to the Gold Coast, to see what could be done in establishing a mission there. During the four years of his stay he officiated as chaplain of the troops and residents at Cape Coast Castle, but was much discouraged in his attempts to establish the faith of the Gospel among the natives. His health having failed he returned to England in 1756, and published an account of his efforts. Before leaving, he had sent home three native boys from Cape Coast, who were placed by the society to which he belonged, in a school in Islington, under the care of Mr. Hickman, with whom they are reported as having made considerable proficiency in useful learning, and in the knowl- edge of the Christian religion. One of these youths, of the name of Quaque, was afterward sent to the University of Oxford, and having completed his education there, he received or- dination, and returned to exercise the Christian ministry in his native country. He was chap- lain at Cape Coast Castle for more than fifty years ; but does not appear to have been in- strumental in turning any of his countrymen to Christianity. Nor will this excite surprise, when it is known that on his death-bed he gave evidence that he had at least as much confidence in the iufiuenoe of the Fetish, as in the power of Christianity. The case of this individual furnishes matter for grave consider- ation on the part of those who are anxious to promote the enlightenment and salvation of Africa. It yields no support to the theory of Christianizing heathen lands, primarily or chiefly, by bringing natives to England or the United States, for education, with a view to their being employed as the principal instruc- tors of their countrymen ; and shows that if on their return, they are left to their own re- sources, it is more likely that they will sink down again to the level of their former state, than that they will prove the regenerators of their country. Instructed natives may main- tain their consistency, and act a useful part, where they are placed under the eye and direc- tion of the missionaries ; but if they be thrown back into heathen society without such sup- port, it ought not to excite surprise, should the result prove that the time and care em- ployed upon their culture have been expended in vain. Some English chaplains, who were sent to the Gold Coast after the decease of Quaque, successively died soon after their arri- val at Cape Coast Castle. About twenty-four years since, a mission was commenced by the Bask Missionary Society at Danish Akra, and in the adjoining country of Aquapim ; but this truly philanthropic un- dertaking does not appear to have met with the desired success. The missionaries encoun- tered opposition in quarters where they ought to have found encouragement and support; several of them were removed by death, and the last survivor, Mr. Eiis, returned to Europe in 1840. Such was the state of the Gold Coast about the time that the providence of God directed the attention of the Wesleyan Missionary So- ciety to it. It was in the autumn of 1834 that the committee of this society were induced, by a peculiar train of inviting circumstances, to send a missionary on a visit of observation to the Gold Coast. A few native youths, who had learned to read the English translation of the Bible, in the excellent government school at Cape Coast Castle, became so interested by the contents of the sacred volume, that they agreed to meet at regular times for the pur- pose of reading it together, and of carefully inquiring into the nature and claims of the Christian religion. The formation of this in- teresting society took place in October, 1831 ; and, in the year 1833, William De Graft, one of these native youths, and who himself had begun to read the Scriptures privately in the spirit of prayer and inquiry, received at Dix Cove, where he was then residing, a request from his young friends at Cape Coast Town, that he would engage some suitable person, who might be proceeding to England, to pur- chase for their use a number of copies of the New Testament. Shortly after, the late ex- cellent Captain Potter, master of a merchant vessel from the port of Bristol, arrived at Dix Cove ; to whom De Graft applied as one likely to execute with promptness and care the com- mission for the purchase of the Scriptures. The captain was surprised at receiving such an application from a native young man, and became so greatly interested by the information which his questions elicited, that he was led to ask whether the instructions of a missionary would not be highly appreciated by those native inquirers after the true religion ? De Graft replied in the affirmative, but appeared doubt- ful whether so high a privilege was attainable. Captain Potter next proceeded to Cape Coast, where he saw the other members of the mee1> ing or society, and, having consulted President Maclean, he returned to England, resolved to exert himself, in order that, on his next voy- age, he might, together with copies of the scriptures, take out a Christian missionary who should " preach the word " to those who were already united in seeking the way to eternal salvation, and proclaim the gospel of Christ to other portions of the heathenish na- tive population of the Gold Coast. Immedi- ately after his arrival at Bristol, Capt. Potter communicated to the Wesleyan Missionary AFRICA, WhESTERN. 83 Committee in London his views as to the pro- mising opening for missionary exertion in that part of Africa, and generously offered to false a, missionary with him on the next voyage, who might make personal observation and in- quiry upon the spot ; and, should he conclude that the prospect was not such as to warrant his continuance for the purpose of commencing a mission. Captain Potter engaged that in that case he would bring him back to England without any expense to the missionary society. This noble offer met with acceptance on the part of the missionary committee, and the Rev. Joseph Dunwell was selected for the interesting service. This devoted missionary embarked with Capt. Potter ift Bristol, Oct. 17th, 1834. The entries in his private journal sufficiently indi- cate the views with which he entered upon his arduous undertaking. He landed at Cape Coast Castle on or about January 1, 1835, and immediately wrote to President Maclean informing him of his arrival, and stating the objects contemplated by the Wesleyan Mission- ary Committee, in sending him to that part of Africa. The President gave him a kind recep- tion. By the native young men who formed the society for reading the Holy Scriptures, Mr. DunweU was received " as an angel of Grod." They at once placed Uremselves under his care, and he commenced his ministry at Cape Coast town on the first Sabbath after he lauded. Speaking of the congregation to whom he preached his first sermon, composed of the members of the above mentioned soci- ety and a few others, Mr. D. remarks, " The deepest attention was manifested ; joy beamed on every countenance," aud adds, " Their gra- titude is without bounds, and they say, ' we never did think of the missionaries coming to teach black men.'" One class of persons, however, the fetish men, speedily took the alarm, and used their in- fluence to prevent the people from attending Christian worship, and many of their steadfast votaries employed ridicule and threats for the purpose of deterring their friends and neigh- bors from listening to the truths of the gospel. But in spite of such opposition, the people flocked to the ministry of Mr. D. at Cape Coast Castle, Annamaboe, and other places which he visited. And under the Divine blessing, the great doctrines of Christianity produced their salutary effect on many minds, and the number of those who felt interested in the subject of their personal salvation steadily in- creased. Mr. Dunwell, in his correspondence at the time, mentioned with much satisfaction a striking instance of decision in the case of a woman who brought out her household gods and publicly burned them in the presence of her heathen neighbors. The mission soon assumed a most promising appearance. The large room in which public service was held in Cape Coast town proved too small, and a subscription was commenced among the natives for the erection of a suita- ble place of worship. Mr. Dunwell had se- cured great respect among all classes of society, and was receiving applications from distant places to afford them also the benefit of his labors. But in the midst of the antici- pations which this hopeful state of things in- spired, he was attacked by fever, under which he sunk in a few days ; and left the societies which he had been instrumental in forming " as sheep without a shepherd." He died June 14, 1835. Upon his dying bed no word of discouragement or regret escaped his lips, on account of his having so early sacrificed his life in the missionary enterprise ; but a quenchless zeal for the cause of his Divine Master sustained him to the last, and all the solicitude he manifested was for the infant church formed by his instrumentality. This afflictive dispensation produced the deepest feeling among all who took any inter- est in the mission. On the following morning a native wrote, " Sad news in the town ; the shepherd is taken away ! The poor missionary is dead 1" Great numbers of the native people and the resident English gentlemen attended his funeral, at which his Excellency, the Presi- dent officiated. On the day after the funeral, the church met to take into consideration the painful circumstances of their bereaved state. The artless manner in which a record of this meeting was made in the minute-book of the Society, will best explain the conclusion that was adopted : " I met the class on purpose to know whether they would continue in the pro- fessions they hW recently entered into, or re- turn to their former ways, in consequence of the death of their missionary ? They said, Tliey would remain in the new profession : for though the missionary was dead, God lives." Another appeal was forwarded to London, which was replied to by the Committee in the appointment of Mr. Wrigley and his wife to the vacant station. They arrived in Sept., 1836, and were followed next year by Mr. and Mrs. Harrop ; but in a short time Mrs. Wrig- ley sunk under the hand of death, and both Mr. and Mrs. Harrop, within a few weeks of their arrival on the coast, were attacked by fever and in a few days after were both laid in the grave. Mr. Wrigley was but just recover- ing from an attack of the fever when he was bereaved of Mr.' and Mrs. Harrop. But though left alone he toiled on at the erection of the large new chapel, and preached the gospel till November, when he also was taken ill and died. The arrival of Rev. Thomas B. Freeman and his wife early in January, 1838, once more revived the drooping spirits of the native church. Mr. Freeman had zealously entered upon the duties of his mission when he was attacked with the seasoning fever ; and while watching with solicitude at his sick bed, Mrs. Freeman was seized with a violent inflara- 84 AFRICA, WESTERN. matory complaint, wHoli terminated her valu- able life in a few hours. Mr. Freeman gradu- ally recovered his health ; and from that period to the present, except during his occasional vis- its to England, has been engaged in the exe- cution of plans which have contributed great- ly, under the Divine blessing, to the enlarge- ment of the mission on the Gold Coast. 9 ^ E-i O « H CO o SJaqraapI Smpnp -ai 'c[i"qsJOj\i. oi^qtiij uo ^^ 2 rA ^ m 5 2 ■69X3g ■qi-oq JO siietoqog -Avd JO jaqmn^ •stooqog -J!v(j JO jaqran^ ■B8X3g q^oq JO SJ'Bioqog -q;^qq^ jo -ojs[ ■siuoqos-q'i'Bq -q^g JO Jaqmnjj ■diqsjaqniajii; Joj i^ij^ np ■SJsqmaj^ qoanqg pa^ipajooy pun nni JO Jaqcan^ I. pn-B saij'BaoTSsii^ ■ seo^itj-SuTqo'BaJtj J9q;ojo -ojj JO Jaquinjij i« m rH t-" cf i-T t- 00 «o w i -S .2 -H o o o o o K5 O O O O ^ Ol C- O (M <~> W ^ rt U» 00 m N OlOMOi - ^ eo ^ ^ 3S3"S : IN CO >H OJOCOir- • "^ on CO m i-t ^ CJ r-i (O s:S2ri'* t- fM ^ r-1 UJ ■* lO i-( »* rH M OMiMiM . r-i 6al I MC4 anMei AJ?RICA, WESTERN. 85 Mr. Freeman is a colored mau, and thougli not born in Africa, yet of African parentage. He has received the benefits of a thorough ed- ucation, which added to his great natural abil- ities, aud all sanctified by a zeal for Christ and for Africa which nothing can quench, renders him an agent of preeminent ability. On his arrival at Cape Coast in 1838, he found that, notwithstanding the bereavements which dea,th had made in the missionary ranks, the cause of God was in a state of increasing prosperity, chiefly by the labors of the local preachers and class leaders, so that there were over 450 church members scattered over the district where the missionaries and their devoted assist- ants had itinerated. There were also a few schools, with five or six places of worship, one of which could hold from 6 to 700 persons, and was well filled with attentive hearers. The new chapel at Cape Coast was completed soon after Mr. Freeman's recovery. This is proba- bly the largest place of worship out of Sierra Leone, on the west coast of Africa ; and on the day of dedication it was crowded to its utmost capacity by a deeply interested con- gregation of Africa's sons and daughters. The Gospel had been introduced in Annamaboe by the lamented Mr. Dunwell, and the claims of Christianity were first introduced to the inhab- itants of Winnebah, on the east of Cape Coast Town, by William De Graft, who had now be- come a local preacher and a useful agent of the Society. Mr. Freeman had also the joy of seeing the gospel established and extended in Akra, and at Domonasi, Dix Cove, and sev- eral other places. But it is in connection with his visits to Ashantee (pronounced As-hanti,) that Mr. Freeman's name has come so pro- minently before the public of late years. The territory over which the king of Ashan- tee reigns, including the dependencies of that power, are not much, if at all, inferior in ex- tent to England and Wales united. The pop- ulation is estimated by Mr. Beecham at over 4,000,000 ; while the capital city, Coomassie, (pronounced Kumasi,) is said to contain at least 100,000 persons. They are a powerful race of men, but, to a frightful degree reckless of human life ; and some of their manners and customs are not to be exceeded on earth for blood- thirstiness and brutality. Their monarchy is very powerful — they have a large army, of over 150,000 men, well disciplined, and also great wealth, which they delight to exhibit in truly barbarian magnificence. This remarkable people claim a remote an- tiquity, but from the want of written records among them, little can be known of their early history. The mountains of Kong, on the north of their territory, seem to have opposed a suc- cessful barrier to the desolating tide of Moham- medanism as it swept over the regions through ■tvhich the Niger rolls its course. .During, or about, the thirteenth century, that portion of the pure Negro race which could not brook the Mohammedan rule, took refuge to the south of this great mountain range, and have there maintained their independence td the present day. Among all the negro kingdoms, Ashantee holds the foremost place ; and the conversion of such a people to the faith of Christ, should it take place, would be "life from the dead " to the nations around them. And hence the surpassing interest which at- taches to any opening for the Gospel, however small, among this remarkable people. (See Ashantee and tlie Gold Coast.) Mr. Freeman felt the importance of attempt- ing to introduce Christianity into Ashantee, and at length an opportunity offered ; and leaving the mission at Cape Coast under the care of William De Craft, he made preparation for the arduous undertaking. As an evidence of their desire to spread the Gospel among their countrymen, it may here be mentioned, that the native Christians at Cape Coast not only were willing to relinquish the benefits of their missionary's care for several months, that he might perform this service, but they also contributed of their own little means $600 toward the expenses of his journey. Eefer- ring those who desire more information on this interesting subject than the limits of this arti- cle will allow, to the published Journals of Mr. Freeman, we will merely state a few facts in conclusion. He left Cape Coast on the 29th of January, 1839, accompanied by a few at- tendants, and, after being detained at various towns along his route by the superstitious fears of the Ashantee king, who could not compre- hend why a missionary should want to see him and visit his capital, no stranger ever having gone there, except to trade or conclude a treaty, or for sope secular object ; and yet, under the idea that Mr. Freeman was a pow- erful fetishman, whose wrath it would be im- politic to provoke, the king at length gave consent that he might approach the capital. Mr. Freeman afterward learned, that previous to leave being granted for his approach, a sac- rifice of two human victims had been made with a view to avert any evil that might, without such precaution, result from his visit. Great preparations were made for his recep- tion. At length, on the 1st of April, he entered Coomassie, and was received in the spacious market place, by the king and his officers and army, with others, to the amount of over 40,000 persons. And there he stood, the first herald of the Gospel that had ever entered the dark and blood-stained capital of Ashantee to offer to its monarch and its people the religion of purity and peace. The king, though kind, would not commit himself as to the establishment of schools and a mission station in his capital, but requested time to think of it, and wished Mr. Freeman to return soon again and he should give him an answer. After a delay of fifteen days, in consequence of a " custom " for a deceased 86 AFRICA, WESTERN. relative, to wliosfe shade 42 human beings were sacrificed in two days, while Mr. F. was there, he was allowed to depart ; having striven to communicate to the monarch and his counsel- lors, as far as they were disposed to give him audience, as full an exposition of the Gospel as he posgibly could. He evidently made a good impression at Coomassie, and though the door was not opened, yet, by his being kindly received in his a.vowed character as a mission- ary, its bolts had been drawn, and he hoped a future visit would result in a free access for the Gospel. The publication of Mr. P.'s jour- nal greatly increased the interest already exist- ing on behalf of Ashantee, and a special fund of $25,000 was soon raised to open a mission in that kingdom. Accompanied by the two Ashantee princes, who had just returned from England, the youngest of whom is heir to the throne, Mr. Freeman set out on a second visit to Coomassie in November, 1841. He was kindly received, and succeeded in obtaining ground for a mission-house and permission to establish a school, and have the Gospel preach- ed in the streets and markets of Coomassie without any restraint. And though little has as yet been accomplished in the way of gath- ering a church, yet the fact that ten or twelve hundred persons statedly attend Christian wor- ship in the capital of Ashantee is cause of great encouragement, and we look forward with hope that this citadel of the Powers of Darkness will yet be surrendered to the Cap- tain of our Salvation. In addition to introducing the gospel into Ashantee, Mr. Freeman was enabled the next year to visit Sodeke, the powerful chief of Abbeokuta, and obtained permission to preach the gospel and open a school in the capital, which Mr. F. considers to be larger than even Coomassie ; so that there are now Christian missions in Ashantee, Badagry, and Abbeo- kuta, besides Cape Coast Town, Dix Cove, Annamaboe, Domouasi, Akra and other im- portant places. The queen of Jabin also, has lately applied to Mr. Freeman, very earnestly requesting him to establish a mission in her dominions. Badagry and Abbeokuta have been descri- bed by travelers, particularly by Lander, as the seat of the most sanguinary superstitions, and the scene of the worst atrocities and cruelties of the slave-trade ; and yet even here have the returned and christianized emigrants from Sierra Leone been kindly received by the savage monarch, and the foundation of a Chris- tian church been laid. But for further infor- mation we must refer the reader to the forego- ing tables. An institution for training a native ministry is in operation at British Akra, under the care of Mr. Wharton. All the re- ports for 18.53 from this district speak of the continued prosperity of the work in highly gratifying terms. A recent letter of the gen- eral superintendent says : " Never has, the work of God in this district been known to ass'unie so cheering an aspect. The influence of Chris- tianity is rapidly extending itself into the in- terior. All the out stations, except perhaps Kumasi, are in a healthy, vigorous, and flour- ishing condition — the pastoral visits to the stations in the interior delight us much ; they are means of grace to ourselves." The writer goes on to exemplify this latter statement by the details of a recent journey taken for the double purpose of opening a new native chapel at Abuadi, which has been built by the chief of that town, at his own expense, and presented to the mission, and of laying the foundation of a chapel at Dvnquah, where the Gospel is ex- tending its power among the people.— W^esfeu- an Mtssionary Notues, Annual Repmis, and the Annual Minutes and Magazine; Fox's History oj Missions on the West Coast of Africa ; Moister's Missionary Memorials of Western Africa ; Blum- hardt's Manual of Missionary History and Ge- onraphy ; and Beecham's Ashantee and the Gold Coast. — Rev. W. Bdtlee. AiMEKioAN Baptist Missionaky Union. — This mission is restricted to that part of the coast of Africa known as Liberia, and to the Bassa tribe of its inhabitants, a people occu- pying a strip of the coast, ninety miles in length lying between Junk river and the river Sesters, extending nearly seventy miles in the interior. They are supposed to be about one hundred and twenty-five thousand in number. The first missionaries sent by the Board to Africa were Bev. Lott Carey and Eev. Collin Teage, two colored men, who were ordained at RichmondjVa., in January, 1821, and soon after- wards sailed for Liberia as emigrants of the American Colonization Society. This society had then no colony upon the coast, and Messrs. Carey and Teage went to Freetown, in the English colony of Sierra Leone. In February, 1822, they removed to Monrovia, a settlement planted by colonists from America, and com- menced their labors as missionaries. Dm-ing the following year a church was formed and six persons were added to it by baptism, and in 1824 nine more were baptized, and a house of worship was erected. Of this church Mr. Carey became the pastor, his associate having meanwhile returned to Sierra Leone. He was a man of unusual intelligence and energy of character, and his career was one of great usefulness to the people of his race, with whom he was brought in contact on the shores of Africa. Bariy in 1825 Rev. Calvin Holton was ap pointed to this mission by the Board, and sailed for the American colonies which had been planted on the coast. He had, however, scarce ly arrrived, when he fell a victim to the fevei which in that climate seldom fails to attaolc Europeans from other latitudes. Meanwhile, the mission was sustained by Mr. Carey with the aid of two or three pious assistants whom he found among the emigrants. He provided AERICA, WESTERN. 8T most of the resources by which it was kept alive, for the allowance of the Board was at this time, very small, and gave direction and character to all its operations. These em- braced the emigrant colonists at Monrovia, also the natives dwelling upon the coast, especially those at Grand Mount, where he preached and established schools. In September, 1826, he was elected vice-agent of the colony, and sub- sequently, on the return of Mr. Ashmun to the United States, he was appointed for the interim to the post of governor, the duties of which he was discharging at the time of his death. Serious depredations had been made upon the property of the colony by some na- tives, and Mr. Carey had called out the troops, and was making arrangements for its defense when the accidental explosion of a large mass of gunpoTfder suddenly put an end to his life. At the period of his death the church of which he was pastor contained a hundred members. It was committed to the charge of Mr. Teage, who now returned from Sierra Leone, and of Mr. Waring, one of its members lately ordained a minister. The agencies which had been es- tablished by Mr. Carey, long survived his death, and continued to bless the race for which he had toiled. The church at Monrovia soon numbered two hundred members, and the in- fluences of the gospel were extended to the natives of the coast, of whom nearly a hundred were united with the several churches of the colony. In 1830, Rev. Benjamin Skinner was ap- pointed a missionary to Africa, and arrived at Monrovia with his family in December. Soon after their arrival they were all prostrated with the fever of the coast, and in the course of the following six months they all fell vic- tims to its ravages, Mr. Skinner himself dy- ing at sea on his passage to the United States. After these disastrous issues of the attempts of the managers to employ missionaries in Africa, five years elapsed before any reinforcement was sent to the mission. During the interval the gospel was preached, and public worship and the ordinances of religion were maintained by preachers who were appointed from among the pious emigrants. The most conspicuous of these, in addition to those already named, were Rev. A. W. Anderson, Rev. John Lewis, and Rev. Hilary Teage son of Collin Teage. In the summer of 1834, Dr. Ezekiel Skinner, father of the missionary, went to reside in Li- beria. He had been a physician, and also a minister in Connecticut, and now emigrated to Liberia from motives of philanthropy to- wards the race for whose interests his son had sacrificed his life. This gentleman was sub- sequently chosen governor, and exerted both his personal and official influence in favor of the mission and the spiritual objects it was in- tended to promote. In 1835 Rev. W. G. Crocker and Rev. W. Mylne offered themselves to the Board, and were appointed missionaries to Africa. Their proposal was a noble sacrifice, wjiich the man- agers, though they did not feel at liberty to solicit it, yet were unwilling to decline. They were persons of education and of high qualifi- cations for the service to which they devoted themselves. They sailed from Philadelphia on the nth of July, 1835, and arrived after a brief passage, at Monrovia, and immediately repaired to Millsburg, a town in the vicinity, in order to go through with the process of acclimation. They were soon all attacked with the fever of the coast, which terminated the life of Mrs. Mylne, the only lady of the com- pany. Mr. Mylne and Mr. Crocker, though with reduced strength, were soon able to enter upon their labors as missionaries, and for this purpose they selected, with the advice of Dr. Skinner, Bdiua as the place of their residence. This was a settlement of the Colonization So- cieties of Pennsylvania and New York, at the mouth of the Mecklin river, opposite Bassa Cove, the principal trading place of the Bassa tribe, a numerous people whose language was widely spoken along the coast and in the in- terior. They began to acquire the language with the aid of a young colonist who could speak both Bassa and English. They made themselves acquainted with the people of the country by several excursions into the interior, and at the same time preached and established schools among the emigrant colonists both at Bassa Cove and Edina. At the former place a house of worship was erected by funds which they collected, and during the year 1836 six- teen persons were baptized and added to the church of which Mr. Mylne was temporarily the pastor. During the same period, also, Mr. Crocker was able so far to master the language as to prepare a, spelling-book and small vocabulary of words and phrases ; to which was also ap- pended a brief outline of the facts of divine revelation. These were printed in December, 1836, and contributed very perceptibly to the progress of the schools and to the general intel- ligence of the tribe. It was not till June, 1837, that the mission buildings at Edina were ready to be occupied, and at this time the missiona- ries, who had sufiered repeatedly from attacks of disease, established themselves there and commenced their work more immediately among the native population. They had also frequently visited a district up the river, whose chief manifested so great interest in their labors, that in October, 1837, Mr. Crocker took up his residence at Madebli, the princi- pal village of the district. The chief's name was Sante "Will, and he claimed to be an im- portant patron of the mission, and was the first to entrust his sons to the care of the mis- sionaries. The number of children now sent to the school at Edina was quite as large as could be provided for, and many of them were sons of the principal chiefs among the Bassas j 88 AFRICA, WESTERN. the Bon of king Kober being the most promi- nent, both for intelligence and for excellence cf character. The mission at Edina "was now fully estab- lished, but its heroic conductors, though they appear to have taken a most hopeful view of their condition and prospects, yet found them- selves in the midst of ignorance and stupidity, of degrading superstitions and brutal wrongs, such as could scarcely have been found in any other portion of the world. The colonists in the neighboring settlements often presented an example and exerted an influence most un- friendly to the interests of the mission ; while the natives of the coast were so debased by barbarian passions, and so brutalized by super- stitions, as hardly to be capable of compre- hending spiritual truth. In addition to this, they were near the marts in which the horrid traffic in slaves was constantly carried on, in many instances by the very persons to whom they were engaged in preaching the gospel. They, however, were not disheartened, and even prepared to extend the influence of the mission to other tribes, both on the coast and in the interior. In January, 1838, this mission was strength- ened by the arrival of Eev. Ivory Clarke and his wife, who, so soon as they had recovered from the acclimating fever — which with them was unusually mild — entered upon the study of the language and the performance of such labors as their inexperience would admit. The prospects of the mission were brightened by this accession, but only for a brief season ; for Mr. Mylne, who had suffered from repeated fevers, in the following May was obliged to return to the United States, and with a consti- tution hopelessly shattered, to withdraw from Joseph Fielding offered themselves to the Board as missionaries either to the western coast or to the interior of Africa. An impres- sion at that time prevailed that the climate of the interior might be found less injurious to European constitutions than that of the coast ; and the British government was preparing an expedition to ascend the Niger for the purpose of introducing among the tribes of the country the arts and the commerce of Europe. In ac- cordance with this impression, and the hopes which were inspired by the Niger expedition, the new missionaries were specially designated by the managers to the country lying upon that river. They accordingly sailed with their wives in September, 1840, and reached Edina on the 3d of December ; and here they deter- mined to pass the period of their acclimation, and also to await the results of the expedition that was about to ascend the Niger. The African fever soon seized them with its accustomed violence, and within six weeks of their arrival, both Mr. and Mrs. Fielding be- came its victims. Mr. and Mrs. Constantine, though they survived the fever, were wholly unable to engage in the labors of the mission. They remained at Edina, hoping to regain their health by making excursions along the coast, and in which they were also able to extend their acquaintance with the character of its people. Meanwhile, the British expedi- tion made its disastrous passage up the Niger, late in the summer ,,of 1841. The frightful destruction of human life which attended it, and the reduced and disabled condition in which it returned to the coast, put an end to the hopes with, which it had been undertaken, of finding a more salubrious climate in the interior. The design of establishing a branch the service of the Board. The station at Edina of the mission there was entirely abandoned. was now committed to the care of Mr. Clarke, assisted by two of the emigrant colonists ; while Mr. Crocker still dwelt at Madebli, en- gaged in preaching, teaching in the schools, and translating the Scriptures ; in the latter of which he was assisted by the young prince already mentioned, the son of king Kober, the great chief of the Bassas. In September, 1839, the mission welcomed to Edina, Miss Rizpah "Warren, a lady who had been appointed by the Board a missionary teacher. Early in the following summer she was married to Rev. W. G-. Crocker, and went to reside with him at the village of Madebli, where she was soon attacked by the fierce fever of the climate and died in eight days, on the 28th of August, 1840. Mr. Crocker was fhst attacked, but recovering from the immediate violence of the disease, he was able, after the death of his wife, to escape to Cape Palmas, and thus to prolong his life by a change of climate. Thus enfeebled by disease and depressed by sorrow, he returned to Madebli in October, and again entered upon the labors of the mission. Early in 1840, Messrs. Alfred A. Constantine and Mr. Constantine, no longer able to endure the climate of Africa, returned with his wife to America in June, 1842, and soon after dis- solved his connection with the Board. In July of the preceding year, Mr. Crocker, in consequence of declining health, had re- turned tothe United States. He had left the mission with the utmost reluctance, at what to him was the period of its greatest interest and promise. Much good had been accomplished ; schools had been established, and were largely attended; prejudices and superstitions had been overcome ; and more than all, the power of the gospel had been displayed in the conversion of several of the natives and a large number of the emigrants. The churches connected with the mission were multiplied and enlarged, and their members had begun to appreciate their obli- gations to spread the gospel among those who knew it not. A new station was also estab- lished at Bexley, a little town on the Mecklin SIX miles from Edina; and a printing press had been received, and a printer only was wanted m order to put to press several por- tions of the New Testament, and other volumes AFRICA, WESTERN. 89 which the missionaries had prepared in the Bassa language. Mr. Croclser, in hastening ftway, as he felt obliged to do in order to save the remnant of his enfeebled constitution, was compelled to abandon all these interests and prospects, over which he had long watched with the fondest care. After his departure, the entire charge of the mission devolved upon Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who had under their direction three or four assistants employed either as.teachers or preachers. The press was set in operation in September, 1842, under the superintendence of a printer obtained from the colony, and several books were printed for the schools, and also for circulation among the few who could read. Two schools were maintain- ed, one at Bdina and one at Bexley, contain- ing, together, about 90 pupils, of whom 55 were natives. Companies were also assembled at both the stations on the Sabbath, and often on several evenings during the week, for in- struction in the doctrines of the Bible and of Christian morals. An out-station was estab- lished at Duawi's town, a large village 30 or 40 miles in the interior, at which the chief promised to build a school-house, and to sup- port a teacher, if Mr. Clarke would provide one. The school was begun by a young native; who had for several years been under the in- struction of the missionaries. Mr. Crocker, on reaching the United States, abandoned all hope of ever returning to the mission, so shattered did his constitution ap- pear to have become. He however soon betook himself to the South, and after a residence of several months in a more friendly climate, he found himself so far restored that he again presented himself to the Board and asked to be sent back to his place in the mission which he had loved so well. His proposal was gladly accepted, and he sailed from t5oston, January 1, 1844, in company with Mrs. Crocker, he having been married a, little time before to Miss Mary B. Chadbourne, of Newburyport. He reached the coast on the 24th of February, apparently in excellent health ; but on the sec- ond day after his arrival, while engaged in the services of thfe pulpit at Monrovia, he was fatally seized with a violent hermorrhage of the stomach, and died after an illness of two days. The fall of this rare missionary, in a manner thus unexpected, seemed to blight the prospects of the mission and almost to extin- guish the hopes of its friends. Scarcely had the intelligence of his return been spread along the coast when the tidings of his death carried mourning to every village and almost every dwelling. He was a missionary of truly apos- tolic stamp, and his name deserves to be en- rolled among the foremost of the heroic men who in different ages of the church have braved every peril and at length sacrificed life itself for the benefit of the benighted children of Africa. ^ Mrs. Crocker, thus early widowed on the desolate shore of a distant continent, attached herself to the family of Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, at Ediua, and immediately set about prepar- ing for the labors of the mission, on which she was soon able to enter. In January, 1845, the principal station was removed from Edina to Bexley, a locality deemed more favorable to health and nearer to the Bassa people ; but a subordinate station was still maintained at Edina and new out-stations were commenced at Zuzo and at Little Bassa, the latter under the charge of the young Chief Kong Kober, or as he now chose to style himself Lewis Kong Crocker, in honor of his lamented teach- er. At these several stations the assistants, under the guidance of the missionary and of- ten associated with him, preached the Gospel to the people. The ladies of the mission were engaged in schools, while Mr. Clarke employed himself as much as possible in translating the Scriptures, and preparing books for instructing the natives in useful and religious knowledge. He compiled a dictionary of the Bassa lan- guage, and translated the gospels and some of the epistles of the New Testament, which by the close of 1846 were ready for the press ; but which appear never to have been pub- lished. The health of Mrs. Crocker was rapidly declining, and after one or two unavailing voy- ages along the coast she was obliged to aban- don the mission and return to this country. Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who had generally been blessed with better health than their associates, now began to experience the injurious effects of that pestilential climate. Mr. Clarke had often represented the condition of the mission, and appealed in the most earnest manner for its relief, but none had offered themselves for the perilous service, and the solitary mission- ary, fearing that if he went away, all would be lost, determined to remain at his post until his ability to labor was entirely exhausted. He carried forward the work of translating the Scriptures and preparing books ; he increased the number of the schools, and perfected their organization, and in all the villages of the tribe he preached the gospel and urged the people to repent and be converted. These la- bors were attended with most beneficial results. The morals and manners of the people were greatly improved — all the interests of civiliza- tion were promoted, and many of the natives in the villages where the missionary had preached, embraced the Gospel and were bap- tized in accordance with its requirements. But the life of the missionary was rapidly wearing away ; yet, though repeatedly urged by the Executive Committee to return to the United States, he lingered at his post in the hope that some one would at length come to take his place. The hope was constantly defer- red, and without its being realized he was pros- trated by disease, and compelled to leave the mission, in April, 1848. He died after a few 90 a:feica, western. days, at sea, on his passage to America, on the 26th of the same month. Thus terminated another period of effort and trial, of hope and of disappointment for the Bassa people — a worthy succession of noble- hearted men had laid down their lives in the service of the mission till now none were left to carry forward the plans which had been formed and the labors which had been begun. Mrs. Crocker and Mrs. Clarke of necessity re- mained in the United States, and the interests of the mission were committed wholly to the care of native assistants. The station at Bexley was placed under the charge of Eev. Jacob Vonbrunn, assisted by two teachers, while that at Little Bassa was superintended by Lewis Kong Crocker. The schools at both were main- tained, and were well attended. Public worship was also held on the Sabbath, and each year witnessed some accessions to the native church. The assistants proved themselves to be men of fidelity and discretion, but the mission, as was to be anticipated, was shorn of its energy by the bereavements it had sustained. After many unsuccessful attempts by the Board to revive the mission, Bev. Messrs. J. S. Goodman and H. B. Shermer, were ap- pointed for this purpose, and sailed with their families and Mrs. Crocker, from Norfolk, Va., November 27, 1852. They reached Bexley- on the 15th of the following January, in ex- cellent health, and were welcomed by the na^ tive assistants and the Christian disciples with enthusiastic delight. They found that the pro- perty of the mission had been carefully pre- served by the assistants ; that the schools and the public worship, on the Sabbath, were still well sustained, and that the persons who had represented the Board, during an interval of more than four years, had commanded the con- fidence and respect of their countrymen. Mrs. Crocker immediately put in requisition her previous attainments in the language and knowledge of the people, in reorganizing the mission, and the other members entered upon such labors as their circumstances would per- mit. But the period of prosperity was again des- tined to be short, and as before, so now again, the little missionary band was soon to be in- vaded by death, and to be bereft of more than half its members within a year of their arrival in the country. Mrs. Shermer died at Bexley in September, 1853, and Mrs. Crocker at Mon- rovia, in November of the same year. Mr. Shermer was so reduced by repeated attacks of disease that he was soon obliged to return to the United States. , Mr. and Mrs. Goodman are now the only missionaries remaining to oc- cupy the stations, and prosecute the labors of the mission, and the health even of these has begun to yield beneath the noxious climate that perpetually reigns along that pestilential coast. — See Professor GammeU's Historij of Am. Baptist Missions. — Pbop. W. Gammell. TABULAB VIEW. STATIONS. Bexley little Bassa j Total... 1842 1845 Missionaries and Assistants. Minis- j Lay Teachers, ters. 1 &c. 2 2 21 2 Scholars. 31 12 43 2 |17l 31 I 12 143 American Presbyterian MissioNs.-The mis- sions of the Board of Missions of the General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in the United States, (0. S.) in Africa are found in Liberia, — at Monrovia, Sinoe, Kentucky, and Settra Kroo ; and near the Equator, on the island of Corisco. These are two distinct mis- sionary fields, distant from each other more than a thousand miles. Each has its own fea- tures of interest, and both are highly impor- tant spheres of Christian benevolence. The mission to Liberia was commenced in 1832, but has been repeatedly suspended, on account of the death or the return to this country of the missionaries. The Eev. Messrs. John B. Pinney and Joseph Barr were the brethren first appointed to this field. Mr. Barr was called suddenly to his rest by an attack of cholera in Eichmond, Va., while on his way to embark for Africa. His removal was a se- rious loss, as he was a man qualified by nature and grace for eminent usefulness. Mr. Pinney proceeded alone on his mission, and arrived at Monrovia, in February, 1833. After a few months spent in making the requi- site inquiries and arrangements, he returned on a visit to this country to confer with the Com- mittee concerning the plans of the mission, and to enlist recruits for its service. Previous to his return, two brethren had been accepted as missionaries for this field ; and in Novem- ber the missionary company, consisting of the Eev. Messrs. Pinney, Laird and Cloud, with Mrs. Laird, and Mr. James Temple, a colored young man, who was a candidate for the min- istry, embarked at Norfolk for Liberia. Mr. and Mrs. Laird and Mr. Cloud were called to their rest within a few months after their arri- val at Monrovia, leaving a memorial of piety singularly pure and devoted. Mr. Tem- ple returned to the United States, and Mr. Pinney was again left alone in the mission. For a time he discharged the duties of Gov- ernor of the colony with great benefit to all its interests ; but withdrawing from this post as soon as it was practicable for him to resign its duties, he resumed his missionary labors. Having been joined in September, 1834, by Mr. J. F. C. Finley, Mr. Pinney had a house built for the use of the mission on a small farm, at Millsburgh, a few miles from Monro- APRICA, WESTERN. 91 via. One or two colored assistants were en- gaged as teachers for schools among the natives ; and Mr. E. Tytler, a colored man and a licensed preacher, was employed among tlie Bassas, a native tribe, at a station selected by Mr. Pinney on the St. Johns, eighteen miles from the sea. The health of Messrs. Pinney and Finley having given way, they were compelled to re- turn to this country in 1835. Mr. Tytler con- ducted a small school for two or three years longer among the Bassas, but no very encour- aging results appear to have followed his la- bors. The mission was now virtually sus- pended. Considerable hesitation was felt about re- suming the work of missions in Africa. The loss of several valuable lives, and the failure of the health of other brethren, proved extremely discouraging to many persons. Yet others were clear in their convictions that the Church ought not to abandon this missionary field. The door was open, and all things invited the labors of the servants of Christ, with the exception of the deleterious climate. To guard against this, it was thought that a more healthy station could be found than those pre- viously occupied, and it was considered expe- dient for missionaries to return after a few years to their native country, on a visit for the sake of health. Brethren of approved quali- fications had ofiered themselves specially for this field. It appeared therefore to be the duty of the Board to make another efibrt to establish this mission. Accordingly in 1839, the Eev. Oren K. Canfield and Mr. Jonathan P. Alward, with Mr. Pinney, the pioneer of the mission, made an exploring visit along the coast for nearly a hundred and fifty miles, during which they were led to select a station among the Kroo people, about half-way between Cape Palmas and Monrovia. An interesting account of the Kroos is given in the annual report of the Board for 1840. They are described as the most intelligent and enterprising of the na^ tives on the western coast, having farms in a high state of cultivation, and always opposed to the slave-trade. Their distinctive name is probably derived from the fact that many of them are employed as crews on board of trad- ing-vessels. This leads them to visit various parts of the coast, although they commonly re- turn to their own country after a few years spent in this service. The return of African fever soon forbade Mr. Pinney's attempt to resume his missionary lar bors ; but the other brethren enjoyed good health, and after completing their exploration, they returned home, were married, and Mr. Al- ward was ordained ; and then they proceeded, in February, 1841, to their chosen work, with many hopes of a useful if not a long life. These hopes were destined to be disappointed. Mr. Alward was called to his rest in tlie fol- lowing April, and Mr. Canfield in May of the next year. They were both men of devoted piety,- and were qualified to be eminently use- ful in the missionary work. Their bereaved companions returned to their friends in this country ; and for a month the station was un- der the charge of a colored female teacher, who had accompanied Messrs. Canfield and Alward. The Eev. Eobert W. Sawyer and his wife, who had arrived at Monrovia in Decem- ber, 1841, then succeeded the brethren whom they had hoped to join at Settra Kroo ; but in December, 1843, Mr. Sawyer was called to join them in the Saviour's presence. He was a man worthy to be their associate, both in the church on earth and in heaven. Previous to his death, schools had been established, and at one time thirty boys and six girls were boarded and lodged on the mission premises, enjoying the benefits of Christian instruction and example. In the year 1842, three colored ministers be- came connected with the mission. One of these, the Eev. James Eden, had been for some years at Monrovia, where he was pastor of the Presbyterian church. This station he contin- ued to occupy until his peaceful death, at an advanced age, in 1846. The Eev. Thomas Wilson and the Eev. James M. Priest reached Monrovia in 1842. Mr. Wilson's station was at Sinou, where, however, he was not permit- ted long to labor, having been called to his re- ward in 1846. He was a man of energy, and his talents and piety gave promise of no ordi- nary usefulness. Mr. Priest was at first sta- tioned at Settra Kroo, but removed to the sta- tion at Sinou in 1846, where he has been much encouraged in his work. Mr. Washington McDonough, a colored teacher, was sent out also in 1842, and he has continued to be con- nected with a station among the Kroos until the present time. At Settra Kroo the education of native youth continued to engage the attention of Mrs. Sawyer, who with great devotedness had remained at her post, although she was the only white woman in sixty miles of the star tion. She was assisted by Mr. McDonough^ and by Cecilia Van Tyne, an excellent colored teacher, until the return of the latter for health in 1844. In the same year the Eev. James M. Connelly joined the mission, with whom Mrs. Sawyer was united in marriage in the fol- lowing December. They continued at Settra Kroo, engaged in faithful efforts for the con- version of the people, but meeting with no marked encouragement, until they were com- pelled to return to this country by the failure of health in 1850. Since that time the sta- tion among the Kroos has been under the care of Mr. McDonough ; a small school has been maintained, but no brighter days have been witnessed. In January, 1847, the Eev. Harrison W. Ellis, a colored man, formerly a slave, who 02 AFRICA, WESTERN with his family had been redeemed from bond- age by Christian friends in the South, was sent as a missionary to Monrovia. As he pos- sessed considerable talent and energy, and had acquired more than ordinary learning for a person so unfavorably situated, it was. reasona- ble to expect that his efforts to do good would prove encouraging to those who had taken such a kind and liberal interest in his welfare. He was for some time minister of the church in Monrovia, and gave some attention to a school ; but he is not now connected with either. To the want of grace — more grace — may be ascribed his not fulfilling the expecta- tions of his friends ; but we would hope that he may yet become a useful laborer in the vineyard of the Lord. At Kentucky, a se1> tlement a few miles from Monrovia, Mr. H. W. Erskine, a colored teacher and a licentiate preacher, has been stationed since 1849, and has met with much encouragement in his work. About twenty members are connected with the church at this station. Mr. B. V. E. James, another colored teacher, who had been for some years under the patronage of a society of ladies in New York for promoting edu- cation in Africa, became connected, at the instance of his former patrons, with the mis- sion of the Board at Monrovia in 1849. He has continued to be faithfully and successfully employed in a large school at that place. The Eev. David A. Wilson and his wife arrived at Monrovia in July, 1850. Mr. Wil- son joined this mission with a special view to the work of Christian education, and he has had the charge of the Alexander High School, an academy established by the Board in 1849. The number of scholars has never been large, but their progress in study has evinced capa^ city to make respectable acquirements. This institution, it is hoped, will train up many young men for the Church and the State, It may form the germ of a college in future years. Besides teaching in this academy, Mr. Wilson preaches to the church, at present without a pastor. His work is one of vital importance to Liberia. The repeated bereavements of the mission on the Liberia coast had led to the inquiry whether a more healthy location could not be discovered elsewhere ; and the comparative exemption from fever enjoyed by the mission- aries of the American Board on the Gaboon river, turned the attention of many to the re- gion near the Equator. Accordingly, in 1849, the Eev. Messrs. James L. Mackey and George W. Simpson and their wives went out to form a new mission in this part of the African field. They were greatly aided in their inquiries by the counsels of the brethren connected with the American Board, and particularly of the Eev. J. Leighton Wilson, a respected minister of our body, who had been long a missionary — first at Cape Palmas and afterwards at the Gaboon — and who is now one of the Secreta^ ries of the Board. After making full exami- nation of various places, they were led to select the island of Corisco as their station. This is a small island, four miles long from north to south, and about the same in breadth at the south end, but at the north not exceeding a mile — having a circumference of about fifteen miles, and an irregular surface, diversified with narrow valleys and steep hills of no great height. It is fifty-five miles north of the equator, and from fifteen to twenty miles from the mainland. Its population is about 4,000, and its situation, midway in the sea-line of the Bay of Corisco, affords a ready access to peo- ple of the same language, the Benga, who live on the shores of the bay and on the searcoast. In this part of Africa there are no roads, and journeys can be most conveniently made in boats along the coast or on the rivers, so that the situation of the missionaries on an island is rather an advantage than a hindrance to their intercourse with the natives. The chief inducement, however, for choosing Co- risco as the site of the mission, was the hope that it would prove a healthy place. _ It con- tains few local causes of disease, while' it is removed from the malaria of the coast on the mainland, and enjoys the atmosphere of the sea. Thus far the missionaries have enjoyed remarkable health for foreigners in Africa. Mrs. Maokey was early called to her rest by a disease not connected with her new abode. Mr. and Mrs. Simpson, in the mysterious prov- idence of God, "were lost at sea with all on board the ship except a native sailor, their vessel having been struck by a typhoon. This sad event occurred in April, 1851, causing great sorrow to the friends of this new mis- sion. The other missionaries — Mr. Mackey, and Miss Sweeny, who embarked for Corisco in August, 1851, and was married to Mr. Mackey in 1852, and the Eev. George McQueen, Jr., who joined the mission in the same year — have all enjoyed good health. The Eev. Messrs. Edwin T. Williams and William Clemens and their wives sailed for Corisco in August, 1853. Small schools for boys and girls have been opened, religious worship has been conducted on the Lord's-day, and Mr. Mackey has exerted a happy influence over the natives by his medi- cal skill. Already many of their superstitious practices have been abandoned, the Sabbath is in some degree honored, and the influence of the mission is visible in the improved con- duct of the people. The principal employment of the missionaries, however, has been the acquisition of the native language. Some interesting tours have been made on the main- land, one extending nearly one hundred and fifty miles into the interior, which have tended to confirm the hope that this mission will afford a door of entrance to a very large population. Its location on an island may remind the reader of the celebrated island of lona, on the borders AFKICA, WESTERN 93 of Scotland — the home of a Presbyterian and missionary clergy in the sixth century. May Corisco become to Africa what lona was to Great Britain, Ireland, and many parts of the continent of Europe! — Lowrie's Manual of Missions. TABULAR VIEW. MISSIONS. NAMES OP STA- TIONS. 1 a Missionaries and Assistants. 1 a 1 Scholars. Minis- ters. Lay Teacliers and otliers. i 1 d 1 1 1 American. Boarding. Day. 3 f2 1 n 1 b n i a LIBEKIA, 1842 1850 1847 1841 1860 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 40 33 41 4 12 78 24 # 18 28 6 78 28 18 65 KROO PEOPLE, NEAR THE EQUATOE Total 6 3 6 114 13 12 148 a 179 American Board. — On the Sabbath evening- following the meeting of the Board in 1833, Eev. John Leighton Wilson, their first mission- ary to Western Africa, received his instructions, in the presence of a numerous audience, in the First Presbyterian church in Philadelphia; and on the 24th of November following, he embarked at Baltimore, in company with Mr. Stephen E. Wyncoop, to explore his future field of labor. After examining the coast from Grand Cape Mount to Cape Palmas, a distance of 300 miles, they fixed on Cape Palmas as the site of the mission, and returned to this coun- try, arriving at New Tork, April 13, 1834. In the commencement of this mission, the com- mittee instructed their missionaries to have a primary regard to the preservation of health and life, and to extend their operations gradu- ally, as their knowledge, experience, ability, and the blessing of God should enable them to do so. The object of this mission was, to prepare the way for an extensive system of op- erations among the populous nations of West- ern Africa. Mr. and Mrs. Wilson, with a colored female, embarked from New Tork, Nov. 4, 1834, and arrived at Cape Palmas the following month, where they were received by the native popu- lation with joyful acclamations. The frame house, which Mr. Wilson had carried out with him on his former visit, he found erected on the spot he had selected, and furnished. They were subjected, during their acclimation, to considerable suffering from fever, Mrs. W. hav- ing had two attacks, and Mr. W. three, the last of which brought him to the borders of the grave. After their recovery, they enjoyed good health. Schools were commenced, and by the following year, Mr. W. had prepared a small elementary book in the native language. On the 25th of December, 1836, Eev. David White and his wife, and Mr. James, a colored man, and a printer, arrived, as a reinforcement. In about a month after their arrival, Mr. and Mrs. White both died of fever ; but they ex- pressed no regret, in the prospect of death, that they had devoted themselves to Africa. Mr. and Mrs. Wilson were prosecuting their labors, with good health, comfort, and success. During the year, Mr. W. made three tours of explora- tion in the interior, performing his journeys mostly on foot. Their boarding school num- bered 50, one-fourth of whom were females. One boy gave evidence of piety, and others were inquiring. In April, there were four or five candidates for admission to the church. In 1837, Mr.^ Wilson succeeded, by his judicious interposition and influence, in suppressing a tumultuous rise of the native population against the colonists, before it resulted in bloodshed. And about this time, he commenced preaching to a native congregation of about 600. But this mission, in common with others, sufTered from the crisis, which occasioned a reduction of the appropriations to the missions. Two of the day schools, and one-third of the board- ing scholars in the seminary, were dismissed. The eflect of this was disastrous upon the mis- sion, the natives not being able to appreciate the cause. Dr. A. B. Wilson having left the mission in South Africa, on account of the war between Dingaan and the Dutch boers, arrived with his wife at Cape Palmas, Oct. 4, 1839. Their attacks of fever, in the process of acclimating, were slight, and the mission generally enjoyed good health. Two native youths were admit- ted to the church during the year, and others were in an inquiring state of mind. Early in September, 1840, Dr. and Mrs. Wilson com- menced a new station at Pishtown, ten or twelve miles from Pair Hope, the original and principal station. There were, also, three out- stations, and six preaching places connected with the mission. The church numbered 23, 12 of whom were natives. Eeligious knowl- edge was increasing, and many had discarded their greegrees. Yet, there was great apathy on the subject of religion. On the 13th of October, 1841, Dr. A. E. Wilson died of an epidemic dysentery, meeting death with much cheerfulness and joy. Stephen Williams, also, a native African, employed as an interpreter, died of the same disease, and in a similar state 94 AFRICA, WESTERN. of mind. Mrs. "Wilson removed to Fair Hope, and took charge of the female department of the seminary. On the 3d of February, 1842, Eev. Messrs. Walker and Griswold, with Mrs. Walker, joined the mission at Cape Palmas. Up to this time, the amount of printing in the native language, at this mission, was 2,252,132 pages. Mrs. Walker died of fever. May 2, 1842, her chief concern being lest her death should deter others from coming to the field. But this mission experienced no small em- barrassment, from being situated within the bounds of the colony. The native teachers and pupils, though from distinct tribes, and owing no fealty to the colony, were required to do military duty ; and it became obvious that the leading object of the colony, and that of the mission, in respect to the natives of Africa, were far from being the same. There was also too much reason to believe that the colonists, as a body, regarded the missionaries and their enterprise with jealousy and ill-will. And, as it never entered into the plan of the AVest African mission that its principal oper- ations should long be at Cape Palmas, it was determined to seek a location elsewhere ; and, accordingly, Messrs. AVilson and Griswold, on the 17th of May, commenced a voyage east- ward, with this object in view ; and, after touching at a number of points, fixed on a location at the mouth of the Gaboon River, which seemed decidedly more favorable than any other they had seen. Though so near the equator, the climate at the Gaboon is more salubrious than at Cape Palmas. The chiefs received them in a friendly man- ner, and they selected a site about eight miles from the mouth of the river, and 20 north of the equator. As soon as the necessary arrange- ments could be made, the mission was removed to this place, the stations at Fishtown and Rocktown being transferred to the Episcopal Missionary Society. At the new station, the first school was opened in July, 1842, with 15 pupils ; and in the course of a year, three schools were established, with 50 pupils, and public worship was held at the station, and at three other towns, within the distance of three miles, where the people assembled in good numbers. They appeared friendly, and one head man renounced his greegrees in presence of the people of his town, and had them sunk in the river. They rested from labor on the Sabbath, and such was their regard for the commandment that they refused to furnish wood for a British war steamer on that day. On the 23d of August, 1843, Mr. Griswold and Mrs. M. H. Wilson were united in mar- riage. On the 1st of January, 1844, Rev. Messrs. Campbell and Bushnell sailed from Boston for this mission, and arrived at Cape Palmas on the 9th of March, where they were both taken with the acclimating fever, of which Mr. Campbell died. Near the close of 1843, Mr. Griswold commenced a new station at Oshnnga, Prince Glass's town, where _a boarding-school for girls was opened with six pupils. The people were anxious for schools, and at King Duka's town, had built a school- house and residence for the teacher. This people had made considerable advances in civilization. July 21, 1843, the members of the church who had removed from Cape Palmas, with a few others, met and organized themselves into a church, adopted articles of faith, and elected Mr. Wilson their pastor. On the 30th, B. B. Wisner, a native of Cape Palmas, was admit- ted to the church, and the Lord's Supper ad- ministered for the first time. The church consisted of fifteen members, of whom seven were native Africans. July 14, 1844, Mr. Griswold rested from his labors ; and Mrs. Griswold, whose healcS was suffering from the climate, returned to the United States. In July, 1845, Prince Glass's town was bombarded by a French brig-of-war, and taken possession of by armed men, the natives having fled to "the bush." The missionaries were exposed to great danger, both from cannon balls and musket shot, which were scattered profusely on their premises, and with apparent design. After this, the French admiral spent nearly three months at the Gaboon, without having any intercourse with the mission ; but in February, 1846, the commander expressed his regret that the mission premises had been endangered ; and in the following summer, Commodore Read, of the frigate United States, arrived off the mouth of the river, and during his stay, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson received much kindness from him ; and he left a letter to the French admiral, which was delivered to him in September, and after that, they received the most civil treatment from the French ofiicers and the local authorities. The Roman mis- sionaries brought there by their ships of war, did not appear to be doing much. The Committee have adopted a rule, in re- lation to this mission, similar to the one adopted by the Church Missionary Society, allowing a periodical return of the missionaries to their native land, to recruit their health ; and in ac- cordance with this rule, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson visited this country in 1847. Their visit was highly useful ; and in June of the following year, they returned to their field of labor, with the greatest possible cheerfulness, accompanied by Rev. Messrs. Preston and Wheeler, and Mi-s. Preston, as a reinforcement. April 23, 1848, Mrs. Walker departed this life, two months after the birth of an infant. She never regret- ted having gone to Africa. Early in the mornmg of the day of her death, Mrs. Walker sent for the head men in the towns, and they came, and wept like children ; and' nearly every man, woman, and child came, feeling that they were losing one of their best friends. She was followed, the last of January, 1849, by Mrs. Griswold, who was suddenly called home, AFRICA, WESTERN. 95 speaking sweetly and confidingly of her Savior, in her lucid moments, and manifesting entire submission to His will. February 25, 1850, Mrs. Bushnell entered into peaceful rest, she having returned from her visit to the United States, though in a consumption, that she might finish her course iu the beloved field of her missionary labor. In 1849 and 1850, the mission was reinforced by the arrival of Rev. Mr. Best and Dr. Ford, the former about six months before the latter. Mr. and Mrs. Preston, who had arrived in 1848, had commenced a new station among the Bakali, about 25 miles above Baraka, in August, 1849. Messrs. Wilson and Bushnell preached in Mpongwe, and Mr. Walker in Mpongwe and Bakali ; and in these dialects, the Gospel w.as preached in ninety villages, in 1849. Eleven members were received to the church in that year. But polygamy, in its lowest forms, was found to be a great hindrance to the Gospel, and the evil was greatly aggra^ vated by the introduction of American rum, which was exerting a most pernicious influence along the coast. Eev. Mr. Porter and his wife arrived as a reinforcement, June 6, 1851 ; and early in the following year, Messrs. Walker and Preston returned to their field of labor. The Gospel of St. John, in Mpongwe, translated by Mr. Bushnell, was printed in New York, in 1852, under his superintendance, while on a visit to this country for his health. Mr. Wilson, being on his periodical visit to this country, was de- clared by physicians to be under the influence of a chronic disease, unfitting him for a longer residence at the Gaboon. He accordingly ac- cepted the appointment of a secretaryship in the General Assembly's Board of Missions. The Committee, in their annual report for 1853, bear honorable testimony to his excel- lence as a missionary, and express their deep regret for the loss of his valuable services. Early in 1851, the brethren at Baraka suf- fered from an unusual prevalence of fever. Mr. Porter, who had recently arrived, was called away by means of it on the 6th of July. He died in the full faith and consolation of the Gospel, and Mrs. Porter followed him on the 16th of the same month. Both of them said that they did not regret having joined the mis- sion, and hoped that their early death would not deter others from entering the field. The Committee say, in their report for 1853, that the actual danger to life, as the Gaboon mission is now conducted, is not greater there than in many other missions, which awaken but little apprehension. The labors of this mission are directed to three communities, each probably the repre- sentatives of migrations from the interior : the Mpongwes, Bakales, and Pangwes. _ The last of these have but recently made their ap- hilly and apparently salubrious ; and the way is open for missionary efforts among numerous friendly tribes ; but laborers are wanting, to enter in and reap the harvest. The labors of the mission have been, to a great extent, pre- paratory ; and its direct results are not so clearly seen, as they will probably be a few years hence. The report of the mission for 1853, repre- sents the health of the missionaries to have been generally good throughout the year. And, though a spirit of opposition had begun to manifest itself among those who do not hke the restraints of Christianity, yet, the truth is making progress. The intercourse of the missionaries with the people and with the gov- ernment has been most friendly throughout the year. But, owing to the diminished force of the mission, they have been able to occupy but two stations. Number of stations, ... Missionaries, .... - 3 4 Physician, .... Female helpers, . . . . Native helpers, Church members. Scholars in the schools, - 1 2 4 22 - 70 United Presbyterian Synod of Scotland. — When the converted negroes of Jamaica obtained their freedom, their thoughts were at once directed to their heathen friends in Africa. Many said, " We must carry the gospel to Africa." The missionaries constituting the Jamaica Presbytery, representing the Scottish Missionary Society, the United Secession Church, and the Scotch Free Church, entered fully into the feelings of the colored people around them, and resolved to embody them in action. Old Calabar was selected as their field of labor, the King and chiefs having sent a formal request that a mission might be com- menced among them. The Secession Synod having also sanctioned the movement, Eev. Mr. Waddell was designated to take charge of the enterprise. He accordingly proceeded to Scotland, and was soon followed by five others. One of these was an Englishman, who had lived eighteen years in Jamaica, a printer by trade ; another was his wife, a colored woman ; another was a negro lad, about sixteen years of age ; the remaining two were both persons of color. A merchant of Liverpool granted the free use of a fine schooner, the AVarree, to the mission as long as she should be wanted ; and he also subscribed £100 to keep her in a sailing condition. The mission sailed from Liverpool, January 6, 1846 ; and arrived at Fernando Po, April 3. They proceeded with as little delay as practicable to Old Calabar, and were cordially received by the natives. On the 6th of May peara.nce. The country has been explored to they opened a school in Duke Town, about some distance in the interior, and found to be | fifty miles from the month of Old Calabar 96 AFEICA, WESTERN. Eiver, in a house of King Eyamba. Every thing seemed to be propitious. This mission has been prosecuted with con- siderable success. In 1853, it had three stations, Eoclv Town, Dulse Town, and Old Town. Its prospects are becoming more and more favor- able. A few have applied for baptism, but, at the latest dates, none laad been admitted to the ordinance. The number of scholars in the schools was about 200. There were connected with this mission, in 1852, ten European agents, including females, four of the number being ordained missionaries. Erom the beginning the missionaries have publicly preached the word on the Sabbath, and already several atro- cious customs have fallen before its influence, among which is the use of the poisoned nut, as a test of witchcraft. The missionaries have made several exploring tours into the interior ; and they say that these regions present a wide field for missionary labor ; that they are easy of access, by water communication on the rivers ; and that the country becomes more elevated, and the atmosphere purer and more bracing, in proportion to the distance from the coast. Stations, - - - 3 Missionaries, - - - 4 European male assistants, 1 Do. female, - - - 5 African assistants, - 6 American EnsooPAi Mission. — The For- eign Missionary Society of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States, as early as the year 1822, entertained the design of establishing a mission in Western Africa, and considerable sums were collected for the purpose. But the design was frustrated chiefly through the difficulty of obtaining suit- able men, till 1834, when it was determined to establish a school at Cape Palmas, and Mr. James M. Thompson, secretary to the colonial agent, with his wife, were appointed teachers ; and the Maryland Colonization Society made a grant of land, as a site for the mission, about two miles from the town of Harper, on the main government road leading to the Oa- valla river. The situation is pleasant and sa- lubrious, and well adapted to a manual labor school. The work of preparation was imme- diately commenced, the land was cleared, and suitable buildings erected. In March, 1836, Mr. and Mrs. Thompson commenced a school in a small building, near their residence in the town of Harper, with 20 to 30 scholars. In the summer of this year, Mr. John Paine and Eev. L. B. Minor, of the Theological Seminary at Alexandria, Va., were appointed to this mission. Eev. Thomas S. Savage, M. D., who had the advantage of several years' practice as a physician, preceded them, in .order to become acclimated and pre- pare for their reception before their arrival. Messrs. Minor and Payne, after spending some time in presenting the cause to the churches, and collecting funds, arrived at Cape Palmas, on the 4th of July, 1837. They found that Mr. Thompson had made a good commence- ment, having three acres of land under good cultivation, with a small thatched house on the premises, but still residing at Harper. The Cape itself was at this time mostly oc- cupied with houses belonging to the Agency, and older colonists. Commeticing with the main land was a native town, of about 1,500 inhabitants. The houses or huts were con- structed of narrow strips of boards, four or five feet in height, three or four inches wide, and half an inch thick, placed perpendicularly in the ground, arranged in the form of a cir- cle. On this is placed the roof, made of palm leaves, running high up to a point, iike a sugar- loaf. This town had its gree-gree place, where some sort of religious ceremonies were per- formed, said to be addressed to the Devil. March 4, 1837, Dr. Savage, with the mission family, removed from the Cape, and took pos- session of the mission house at Mount Vaughan, as the station was named, after the foreign secretary of the society. The missionary ope- rations were formally opened on Easter day, which was kept as a day of fasting, humilia- tion and prayer. Mr. and Mrs. Payne, and Mr. Minor, who arrived July 4, passed safely through the acclimating fever. Dr. Savage made several tours among the native tribes, and found them friendly, and de- sirous of instruction. It was supposed that, within 50 miles, there were 70,000 accessible to missionary effort ; all of whom belonged to . one stock, and spoke dialects of the same lan- guage, (Grebo.) The care of the newly arrived missionaries, during their acclimation, together with the re- sponsibilities and labors of the mission, so af- fected the health of Dr. Savage, as to make it necessary for him to return to the United States, which he did in June, 1838. But he expressed the firm belief that, under dif- ferent circumstances, his health would have continued good. He did not regard the cli- mate as fatal to the white man's health. " With a moderate share of prudence," he says, " we can live here, and enjoy good health." In 1838, Mr. E. S. Byron, of Boston, was sent out as a teacher. Dr. Savage having been united in marriage with Mrs. Metcalf, of Fred- ericksburg, Va., returned with his wife and Mr. G-eorge A. Perkins and wife, missionary teachers to Cape Palmas, where they arrived on the 19th of January, 1839. Mrs. Savage was removed by death on the 16th of April following. The mission was embarrassed by the jealous- ies between the natives and the colonists : the missionaries being identified with the lat- ter, found it difficult to gain access to the na- tives. This led them to the conclusion that, in the selection of mission stations, they should AFRICA, WESTERN. 97 disconnect themselves from the colonies, and hold themselves neutral between the natives and colonists. Two unsuccessful attempts had been made to establish a station at Garraway, a native town about 30 miles to the windward of Cape Palmas. It was opposed by the Bushmen, on the ground that the effect of it would be to stop the ti-ade in rum. At the leeward, they succeeded in establishing two outrstations, with teachers in each. Mr. Thompson, the colored teacher, who commenced the mission, died of a protracted and painful illness, which he bore without a murmur, and departed in the exercise of a &m hope and triumphant faith in the Eedeemer. Mr. Minor returned to the United States for his health. On the 23d of January, 1840, he was united in marriage to Miss Mary Stewart, of Baltimore, and on the 15th of February, they sailed for Africa, accompanied by Rev. Joshua Smith, who was sent out by the Board to labor among the colonists. This year, the mission commenced the forma- tion of a native town, near the principal sta- tion, to be composed of such native families as were willing to abandon their superstitious and idolatrous practices, and come under the influ- ence of Christianity and civilization. In this town, those educated at the mission afterwards settled ; and it soon began to assume an ap- pearance of civilization. In 1839, three years from its commence- ment, there were in connection with the mis- sion, nine missionaries and teachers, three stations, 70 native children in schools, a church of 17 members, and a population of 10,000 or 12,000, whom they were reaching with their instructions. Eev. Dr. Savage was rector of the Church at this station, by whom two services were held on the Sabbath. A Sunday school was held in the chapel for the colonists, an(} another for the children and other members of the mission ; and religious services were regularly held at the out-stations and native towns. For some time previous to March, 1840, an unusual seriousness had been observed at the principal station, which continued to increase ; and in April, nineteen appeared to give evi- dence of a saving change. Many were inquir- ing the way of life ; and at the station at Oavalla, unwonted attention to the word was manifested, and there was one case of deep conviction. In 1841, a new station was commenced by Rev. Mr. Minor, at Taboo, on the coast, about 40 miles to the leeward, and beyond the bounds of the colony, where the people expressed a strong desire for a mission. The station at Garraway was abandoned, and the teacher removed to Rockbookah, the capital of the Bahbas, whose chief had two sons in the school. The committee, in their report for 1842, complain of the restrictions put upon the mis- sion, by the colonial government, and of their compulsory laws, requiring military duty of the youth in the schools, as threatening the mission with serious difficulties. The year 1841 was a time of unusual sick- ness, both among missionaries, colonists, and natives, though less fatal than at some other times. During this sickness, Mr. Smith, at Cavalla, was roused early one morning by an unusual noise, and on looking out, saw men. women, and children, running towards the woods, shouting and making various noises, and when they seemed to reach the end of their race, the report of two guns was heard. On inquiry, he was informed that the native doc- tors had directed the people to beat their houses with sticks, and chase away the sick- ness to the bush ! In 1842, death again invaded the missionary circle. Miss Coggeshall, who had recently ar- rived, was stricken down, after a short illness. Rev. Dr. Savage had been united with Miss M. V. Chapin ; who, after entering on h^r duties, and advancing the female department of the high school at Cape Palmas to a h'gb degree of prosperity, was suddenly called to her rest, cheerfully yielding up her spirit to the Saviour whom she served. The following year. Rev. Mr. Minor, whose health had for some time been declining, was removed by death, uttering, with his last breath, prav-r^ for the mission, and exhortations to his breth- ren to " go forward." Mrs. Minor returned o this country. Rev. Dr. Savage visited this country for his health, and returned with a re- inforcement, consisting of Rev. B. W. Hening and wife and two female teachers. The reports of the missionaries this year were decidedly favorable, the divine blessing having followed their labors. The report for 1846, in a review of the mis- sion the 10th year from its commencement, says, " the result of past efforts is beginning to show itself in the growing up of a generation of young persons educated in the nurture and admonition of the Lord, who are already ^(\r^ dering assistance in the mission, and n >m among whom we may expect, at no distant day, to select candidates for the minist ;." There were then 24 persons, including nati/e assistants, engaged in the mission. Relir^ii .as services were regularly held in five differ^t places, and other points were frequently visited. The boarding schools contained about 150 children. More than that number attended the Sunday schools, and about 1500 were regu- lar hearers of the gospel. The number of com- municants was about fifty. Since that time, the mission has been Bi^ead- ily progressing, without many marked inci- dents requiring .notice. In 1846, the mission was again bereaved by the death of Eev. E, J. P. Messenger, of the acclimating fever, soon after his arrival, and also of Mrs. 0. L. Patch. 98 APRICA, ^STERN. The health of every other member of the mis- sion suffered severely, and the senior mission- ary, Rev. Thomas S. Savage, M. D., was so com- pletely prostrated as to be obliged to resign, and return to the United States. The committee this year resolved to give the missionaries leave to return to the United States every fourth year. The year following, Rev. Mr. Hening and wife returned to this country, on account of the loss of his sight, and Mr. and Mrs. Ap- pleby resigned their appointments, in conse- quence of her ill health. To show how much labor can be performed by one man, even in the climate of Africa, the committee state that, during the year 1847, Rev. Mr. Payne preached every Sabbath morn- ing to about 200 natives ; conducted the mis- sion Sunday school every Sabbath afternoon ; preached four times a week in the native towns in the vicinity ; lectured every Thursday even- ing to the pupils and mission family ; conduct- ed daily evening service for the schools ; de- voted two hours each day to the translation of the Scriptures ; made three visits to each of the more remote stations ; and officiated in the colony forty-five times. In 1848, the mission was strengthened by the addition of two ordained missionaries. Rev. Messrs. Jacob Rambo and 0. C. Hoffinan, and a lady of high qualifications as assistant ; and in 1849, Mr. and Mrs. Hening returned to Africa, accompanied by Rev. B. W. Stokes, a colored clergyman, and Miss Williford of Georgia. Dr. Perkins, the missionary physi- cian, was obliged, on account of ill-health, to relinquish his connection with the mission. In the year 1851, Rev. John Payne, senior missionary, was elected by the General Con- vention, Missionary Bishop at Cape Palmas and parts adjacent ; and the vestry of Trinity Church, New York, appropriated $5,000 to- wards the endowment of the Episcopate. On the nth of July following, he was consecrated iu St Paul's church, Alexandria, Va. In 1852, the mission was reinforced by Rev. G. W. Horne and three male and three female assistants ; and it was determined to occupy Monrovia -and Bassa Cove, as stations within the colony. Bishop Payne returned to Africa July '7, 1852 ; and active measures were com- menced by him for vigorous and enlarged oper- ations. He held his first confirmation in the new chiu'ch at St. Mark's, in the colony, on Christmas day, in presence of a large congre- gation. Twenty-five persons were confirmed. In March, 1852, a small newspaper, called " The Cavalla Messenger," was commenced at the mission, printed in Grebo and English by two young native Christians. From Bishop Payne's report, dated Cape Palmas, June 6, 1853, we gather the following summary of the results of the mission : Since its commencement in 1836, there have been connected with the mission 31 white mission- aries, male and female. Four principal star tions have been established, at Fishtown, Roch toivn, Cape Palmas, and Cavalla. At all theso points native boarding schools have been main- tained. Day schools have also been taught, in which many heathen children have learned to read. Sunday schools, also, have been sus- tained. The gospel has been preached to nearly t^ie whole Grebo tribe, numbering about 25,000, and a congregation of colonists has been supplied with stated services. M ore than 100 have been received into the church. Some of these have died in the faith, others have apostatized, and about 80 still remain members of the church. A high school has been es- tablished at Mount Vau^-han, for training col- onist teachers and missionaries. Six youths have been sustained at an annual expense of $75. A female colonist day school is in oper- ation at Mount Vaughan, with 40 to 45 schol- ars. The Grebo native dialect has been reduced to writing, and many portions of Scripture and other books printed in it. A printing press is in operation. A wide-spread conviction of the truth of Christianity has been produced in the native mind, and an expectar tion raised that it must supersede the religion of the country. Two churches were in process of erection, and the means had been raised for a third, and an orphan asylum is being erected at the point of the Cape. There were in the mission two colonist and three native candi- dates for orders. TABULAE VIEW. STATIONS. Fishtown Rocktown Cape Palmas... . Mount Vaughan, Cavalla Taboo Green Hill Sinee Bassa Cove Monrovia Clay-Ashland . . . -d o5 fl s H 1 3 Fi o o 1 'JJ UJ 4 2000 .■) 12 5 1600 1 16 3 3000 9 . B 1 60 5 1900 1500 60 1 20 2 100 10 15 60 Total I 11 |1I| 4| 17 |10,000|101 | 3|213 | 60 Methodist Episcopal Chuijch in the United States — Mission in Liberia. — The Church of Christ has a profound interest in the great experiment now being tried on the West Coast of Africa ; and the Methodist Episcopal Church, feeling that God had thrown a portion of the responsibility upon her, was early on the ground ; and has already expended much treasure and devoted many consecrated lives, to Africa's evangelization, in Liberia. The mortal remains of her sons and daughters are lying in African grave- yards, and she stands pledged by every sacred engagement to carry on this work. This field was her earliest foreign mission. Among the , AFRICA, WESTERN. 09 emigrants wha left the United States, at the comraenoement of tlie Libevian Colony, were several members of the Methodist E. Church, and with them several local preachers. On their arrival in Liberia they at once set up those religious services with which they had been familiar in this country. They built places of worship and held their class and oth- er meetings. But they desired regular minis- terial help, and the church in this country be- came increasingly interested in their case, until at length, in 1832, the Ret). Melmlle B. Cox was appointed and sent forth as the first missionary of the Methodist B. Church to Af- rica. He arrived there 9th March, 1833, and though in feeble health, entered at once upon the duties of his mission. He gathered to- gether all the members and officers of the church then in Monrovia, and organized a branch of the Methodist B. Church, under the authority of the General Conference in Amer- ica. The Swiss mission at Monrovia having been broken up by the sickness and death of most of its agents, the remainder of the missionaries were ordered to Sierra Leone, and Mr. Cox purchased their premises, and was thus furnished with the means of at once enter- ing upon his labors. His love for the heathen soon led him to devise means for preaching the gospel in the regions beyond the colony. The plan of action which he proposed as sketched by himself, was, " (1) To establish a mission at Grand Bassa ; (2) Another at Sego, on the Niger ; (3) To establish a good school at Monrovia, on the model of the Maine Wesley- an Seminary ; and (4) Another mission either in the interior, or at Cape Mount. He held a camp-meeting commencing March 29, the first probably ever held on that continent ; or- ganized Sunday schools ; communicated with the MissionaryBoard at home ; and was pro- ceeding with his projects of usefulness, when he experienced the first attaclc of the African fever on the 12th of April. He rallied, how- ever, but again took cold and was again re- duced, and on the 21st of July, this devoted missionary slept in Jesus. This result, how- ever, had not come upon him unexpectedly. He had contemplated it as probable before he left the United States. But when his own ease or life was weighed against the salvation of Africa, he conferred n it a moment with flesh and blood. He was willing to sacrifice all, if by so doing the great cause in which he en- gaged could thereby be promoted — joyfully willing that Christ should be magnified in his body whether by life or death. On his way south, before leaving the United States, he visited Middletown University, and on taking leave of a young friend there, he said to hira, <,' If I die in Africa, you must come and write ray epitaph." " I will," was the reply ; " but lolmt shall I write ?"■ " Write," replied Mr. Cox, " Let a thousand fall before Africa be GIVEN UP !" These words, so worthy a mis- sionary of the Cross, have become a motto for many who have followed him, even to an early grave in Africa. He had been appointed to superintend the mission, and Eev. Messrs. Spaulding and Wright, with Miss Parrington, were commissioned as his assistants. But they were delayed and did not arrive in Liberia until the 1st of Jan., 1834, nearly six months after the death of Mr. Cox. He had left a request that Bro. Spaulding, on his arrival, should preach his funeral sermon from the text, "Behold, I die ,■ but god shall be with you." His successors entered into his labors, but were soon attacked by the African fever, and only five weeks after her arrival in Liberia the estimable Mrs. Wright was laid beside Mel- ville Cox, and on the 29th of the next month her husband was carried to the same humble resting place. Shortly after, Mr. and Mrs. Spaulding were obliged, by prostration of health, to sail for the United States, and Miss Parrington was thus left alone, resolved, to use her own words, to " offer her soul upon the altar of God, for the salvation of that long- benighted continent." In 1834 the Eev. John Seys was sent out, accompanied by Eev. Pran- cis Burns and Unice Sharp, (both colored,) Mr. B. being a local preacher and Unice a teacher. They found on their arrival, 13 preachers, 6 teachers in the schools, and a membership of 191. This year missions were established at New Georgia, Edina, and at Grand Bassa. Considerable prosperity attended their labors, and at the close of the year they reported an accession to their numbers of 160, of whom 20 were native Africans ; but three of the preachers had been removed by death, and 18 of the colonists had been cruelly massacred at Port Cresson, by king Joe Harris. Arrange- ments were also made for establishing a mission in the Condo country, and another at Bushrod Island. Dr. Goheen, as missionary physician, arrived with two teachers in 1837 ; and at the close of that year the statistics of the mission were reported as follows : 15 missionaries, one physician, "7 school teachers, 221 scholars, and 6 Sabbath schools with 300 scholars, the church members being 418. The work of God was extended by the establishment of four new stations, at Jacks Town, Since, Junk, and Boporo. In 1838 a printing office and a period- ical [Africa's Luminary) were established, and an academy under the charge Of Mr. Barton, of Allegany College, was organized. A manual labor school was established at White Plains, for the purpose of giving instruction in the various agricultural and mechanical branches. The steady light which shone forth to the dark regions around them, in connection with the few missions which they had already estab- lished among the heathen tribes, led to many earnest invitations from chiefs and people to give them also the benefits of the gospel. Deputations would frequently arrive from such tribes as the Dey, the Goulah, the Pessah, the 100 AFRICA, WESTERN. Bassa, tlie Queah, and the Grebo people, ask- ing for missionaries and schools. Mr. Seys visited many of their tribes, as far as 150 miles into the interior, and established as many mis- sions and schools as the means at his disposal would allow. Cape Palmas also was added to the stations in the mission, and a strong in- terest estaUished there. At the close of 1845 there were. 17 mission- aries, about 20 chapels, 83*7 church members, and 16 day schools with 363 pupils, 12 Sab- bath schools and 488 scholars. In December of this year the Rev. Messrs. Benham, Wil- liams, and Hoyt, arrived, to reinforce the mission. A few days afterwards, intelligence was received at Monrovia that Oapt. Bell, of the United States sloop-of-war Yorktoum, had captured a slave-ship, the Pons of Philadelphia, with 756 slaves on board. She had been only three days out from Cabenda, where she had shipped 913 slaves, and during those three days such was the barbarity practiced and the diseases engendered that 20 died ; and during the fourteen days the captors were getting her to Monrovia, 150 more died. Governor Kob- erts, Judge Benedict, and Dr. Lugenbeel, with some of the missionaries, went on board the slaver, and there witnessed a scene of horror which language is inadequate to describe. The suffering and dying creatures were landed, and distributed among the colonists ; and one hun- dred of the children were taken in charge by the mission, to be brought up and educated at the expense of the Missionary Society. Bishop Payne estimates that the jurisdiction of the Liberian Eepublio will eventually ex- tend itself 600 miles along the coast, and 200 into the interior. " Here, then," to use his own words, "a territory containing, besides American colonists, 120,000 square miles, and not far from 5,000,000 of aborigines, is the sphere to which Providence directs American philanthropy and Christianity." Forty years since, in his celebrated speech on the Slave- Trade, before the British Parliament, Mr. Pitt made the following remarks : " We may live," said he, " to behold the natives of Africa en- gaged in the calm occupations of industry, in the pursuits of just and legitimate commerce. We may behold the beams of science and phi- losophy breaking in upon that land, which at some happy period in still later times, may blaze with full lustre, and, joining their influ- ence to that of pure religion, may illuminate and invigorate the most distant extremities of that immense continent." That happy period has dawned upon Africa; for these glowing anticipations are now being realized in the Eepublic of Liberia. The Board of Missions of the Methodist E. Church have evinced a laudable anxiety to meet their part of the great responsibility growing out of such a state of things as this. But the impractica- bility and inutility of depending in any mea- sure upon the labors of white missionaries for its accomplishment, has led them to transfer the duties of the mission entirely to colored ministers. So that, at present, the only white agent of the Board in the Eepublic is Mr. Home, the principal of the Monrovia acad- emy. This decision has been made on the following grounds: They believe that, (1) Whites may not expect sufficient health to enable them to perform sufficient labor, without frequent interruptions of long continuance, even if they escape with their lives ; while, on the contrary, colored men do generally, after their acclimation, enjoy as good health as in Amer- ica. (2) The colored missionaries, by a previous residence in the country, have to some extent become acquainted with native habits, preju- dices, and language. (3) The membership of the Methodist Mission in Liberia has now become so large, and of such a character, that we may confidently look to it as the source from which to obtain our future supply of laborers, in proportion as the necessity for their labor becomes apparent, and the genius of Christianity tends to render the piety and talents of every one in the church available. And, finally. Because the results of this great experiment in Liberia have exhibited to the world the competency of colored men to govern themselves, and to take charge of all matters of importance. With the requisite amount of piety, they are as capable of attend- ing to religions, as to secular, concerns — to the aftairs of the Church as well as to matters of State. Up to 1850, the Missionary Society of the Methodist E. Church had sent to Libe- ria twenty-five white agents : Melville B. Cox, in 1832, who died in six months after his arri- val ; in 1833, Messrs. Wright and Spaulding and their wives, and Miss Farrington. Mr. and Mrs. Wright both died within three months of their arrival, and the others, after a few months, were obliged to return to America, broken down by frequent attacks of African fever. In 1835, John Seys and his wife were sent out, and they also had to return, leaving four of their children in the grave-yard of Monrovia. In 1836, J. B. Barton was sent ; and after a brief residence, he returned to the United States to recruit his health, and then went back to Liberia, where he soon after died. The same year Squire Chase went out, but was forced to return, and though he went back again, he had again to leave, and died from the effects of the African climate, shortly after his second return from that coast. Dr. Q oheen, the missionary physician, went out, with Mr. Jayne, the printer, in 1837, but both were obliged to come back. The next year, Misa Wilkins and Miss Beers were sent ; the latter left ; the former still lives and labors, the de- voted matron of the mission school for native girls at Millsburg, the only one, of all the white missionaries sent out by this Board, now living in Africa. J. Barton and W. Stocker went out in 1839 ; the latter died in seven months : APRICA, WESTERN. 101 the former lived two years, and tlion fell a victim to the fever. Mr. Pingree joined the mission in 1842, and then returned ; and in 1845, Messrs. Benham, Hoyt, and Williams, with their wives, arrived ; but Mr. Williams died in a month after his arrival ; and the rest, enfeebled by disease, returned at different times. Mr. Bastion and his wife next went out ; but Mrs. B. and their child died, and he returned. Now during all this time, but four of the colored preachers have died, though their numbers have been to the whites as ten to one. Nor have they been under the necessity of leaving Liberia to recruit their health. The General Conference of 1852, arranged to send Bishop Scott to visit the mission and preside in the annual Conference there in 1853. He went, and spent more than two months there, and gave the whole work a thorough in- spection, and made such arrangements as it is hoped will tend to the greater efficiency of the mission. Here, in substance, is a descrip- tion of his first Sunday and first sermon in Africa, with other leading points in his report : " Sabbath morning came, and at ' the sound of the church-going bell ' I repaired to the place of worship, and there, to a well-clad, well-be haved, intelligent assembly, preached my first sermon in Africa, from the text, ' For the pro- mise is unto you,' ^c. I said it was an intelli- gent audience. I will describe it. There sat the President of Liberia, and his wife, each having a Bible and Hymn Book, (and this was the case with all present ;) just beyond sat the Vice-President ; in the next pew was the tall and fine-looking figure of Chief-Justice Benedict, and near him the Speaker of the House of Kepresentatives. And there we had our first interview, in God's name, with our colored brethren in Africa. I visited all the settlements, except Marshall, in which churches are established. These are luminous spots, ray- ing out light along the dark coast of that conti- nent. I also visited Bexley, Louisiana, Lexing- ton, Puddington, and Mount Tubman ; all in- teresting places, and concerning which I have many pleasing reminiscences. In my interview with the King of Cape Palmas, the King treats ed me as the father of all America, and said : — ' Merica been here twenty years and yet (al- luding to the colonists and the natives,) we are two people. We want one school for both. I want bring our people (said he, suiting the action to the word,) half round ; by and by, bring them whole round : not do tibis all at once.' The Government of the Republic of Liberia, which is formed on the model of our own, and is wholly in the hands of colored men, seems to be exceedingly well adminis- tered. I never saw so orderly a people. I saw but one intoxicated colonist while in the coun- try, and I heard not one profane word. The Sabbath is kept with singular strictness, and the churches are crowded with attentive and orderly worshipers." The Bishop also gives an account of the meeting of the Conference, and of the value of our African missions. He says, " At length the time of meeting the Conference arrived, and we entered on business. The Conference had its president and secretary, and proceeded to business with as much form and accuracy as we are accustomed to do at home. On Sabbath our religious exercises were held under the shade of two large tamarind trees, at the con- clusion of which I ordained eight to the office of elder. After having surveyed the whole ground, I am well satisfied with the church in Liberia. While there I witnessed some of the clearest, brightest and strongest evidences of religion I ever became acquainted with in my life. The African mission is one of great pro- mise to the church of God ; it is not only des- tined to bless Liberia, but to pour the blessings of light and salvation all over the continent of Africa ; and God designs to awalien and Christianize its millions through the agency of her own sons." The Bishop enumerates the leading difficul- ties with which this mission has had to contend. The first is the want of missionaries who can speak tlw language of the natives, and the conse- quent necessity of still employing interpreters — then there is the custom of dashing (or making presents,) which the natives tenaciously endear vor to keep up ; then there is the difficulty of polygamy whicli keeps hundreds from deciding for God; then their vicious domestic organization which malses the wives the mere slaves of their lazy husbands ; then their superstitions, their greegrees and witches ; and then there is the vice and debasement which the natives con- stantly contract in their intercourse with the ships and traders on the coast. Holding offices under government, and engaging in trade, by the preachers, used formerly to exist — but of late it is discontinued. — Annv/d Reports, and Msssionary Advocate ; National Magazine ; Loiv- don Watckma,n ; Cox's Life ; Hoyt's Land of Hope. — Rev. W. BniLBB. TABULAR VIEW. MEMBERS. Monrovia .. , , , Lower Caldwell Circuit. Upper Caldwell Circuit. Millsburgh and White \ Plains i Heddington and Rob- 1 ertsville J llarRhall Circuit Bassa and Edina Circuit Sinou and Reedsville '( Circuit J Cape Palmas Total 1186 118 115 4 19 $1,643 01 10 00 40 00 135 00 160 00 102 AFRICA, WESTERN. DAT AND SUNDAI SCHOOLS. STATIONS. 1 Si n o A & > i i 1 03 1 1 i a "3 •E p. 3 CQ .9 yr 1 a g eg s 1 1 Ul i 1 iS Monrovia 1 80 84 15,5 90 140 120 T'n 5 10 15 10 10 10 11 8 12 16 20 8 1 2 2 1 ' i 3 1 88 128 36 '44 200 300 300 1 3 2 3 1 '4 2 3 1 20 '2 1 '2 1 1 7 40 84 55 81 10 io3 80 50 10 513 ' '5 '62 10 '10 20 10 10 127 1 3 2 2 '2 3 2 15 1 Lower Caldwell Circuit s Upper Caldwell Circuit ' . 9 Millsburgh and White Plains ^ Heddington and Eobertsville - Marsha 1 Circuit Bassa and Edina Circuit Sinou and Eeadsville Circuit i 1 Lanesborough and Peter Harris's .... Total 15 1 789 50 55 14 1096 Southern Baptist Convention.— The South- ern Baptist Convention have a flourishing mis- sion in Liberia ; and they are commencing one also in the Toruba country. The board say, in their report for 1853, that their mission in Li- beria is exercising an immediately salutary influence ; and that the facilities for beneficial- ly aflecting the heathen are abundant. The missionaries are all colored men, and though none of them have had the advantage of thor- ough mental training, yet they are in advance of the people among whom they labor, in piety, talents, and knowledge. The reports of the diSerent stations indicate a healthy state of the churches, and in several of the churches revivals have been experienced the past year. In the year 1852, the Board sent Eev. Mr. Bowen on an exploring tour to the Toruba country ; and his report was so favorable that they immediately resolved on sending out a missionary force to occupy three stations in that field, and Rev. Messrs. J. S. Dennard, John H. Lacy, and W. H. Clarke were subsequently appointed ; and the intention was to send out three more. Messrs. Lacy, Dennard, and Bowen reached Lagos Aug. 28, 1853. It was determined that they should locate, and for the present, remain together at Ajaye. Mr. Dennard, having gone to the coast on business, writes, Jan. 10, 1854, conveying the sorrowful news of the death of his wife. Mr. Lacy has returned to this country on account of the in- flamed condition of his eyes. At the latest advices, Mr. Dennard was at Lagos, and Mr. Bowen at Ijaye. At the meeting of the Board in April, Mr. Clark was expected to sail in May, and the Board were corresponding with other brethren, with reference to this mission. (See Yoruba mid Map.) The report for 1854 gives a cheering view of the state of the mission at Liberia. The churches have been visited with revivals the past year, an'd some of them have received large accessions. TABULAE VIEW. LmERIA. Cape Palmas Sinou Bassa Cove Bexley Edina Junlc Monrovia New Georgia New Virginia Caldwell Millsbm-g ) Louisiana j" TOHtJBA. Awaye , , "j Ishakki V Igboho J Stations 14 ,i s S ■g si ■a 3 g f p " S tl r^ 3 e 3" 11 A & 1 ,50 4 ^ 2 * 4 1. 23 3 1 * 1 1 * 4 1 * 4 1 * 60 SO * 1 * in 1 * « * 1 1 * * 1 3 13 ~ 163t SOf lit 30t * No returns. t Incomplete. American Missionary Association. — The mission of this society in West Africa, is called the MmAi Mission, and is situated in the Sher-^ bro country. This name is generally given to a section of country lying south and south-east from the colony of Sierra Leone, between 70 and 80° N. latitude, and from the 13th degree of longitude west from Greenwich, eastward into the interior. It embraces not only the Sherbro country proper, but the Mperi country, the BuUoms, Jong, Boom, Timneh, Boompe, and Looboo countries, and sometimes even a portion of the Meudi country. In general that .U?R1CA, WESTERN. 103 piirt of it whioli lies near the coast is low, with namerous rivers ruiming into each other, by which it is really divided into several islands. Ascending the Jong river some 30 or 40 miles from the ocean, we reach the high lands at Wela, or following the line of the Boom for a much greater distance, the highlands are reach- ed as you enter the Boompe country. At the native town Tissana, or the mission station Mo-Tappan, there is a considerable fall of water, as there is also at Wela, on the ^Tong. At these places indian corn, beans, melons and many other kinds of vegetables that are com- mon to the gardens of the United States are easily cultivated. Of some of them three or four successive crops are produced in the same season. Small villages, or African towns, are very frequent all along the numerous rivers. The population of these towns varies from 50 up to 1000, or more, inhabitants. There are also scores of sites of towns destroyed in the numerous wars instigated by the slave trade, that curse of Western Africa, The general condition of the people of that part of Africa, before the establishment of the mission, was that of heathen. Many of the chiefe, however, are Mohammedans some of whom can read the Arabic readily, and pos- sess parts of the Koran. The government of the country is generally in the hands of these men. The last few years has developed the existence of idolatry much more wide spread than the missionaries had previously any idea of. Many of their idols, of the most hideous and revolting form, have been voluntarily given up to the missionaries. The history of this mission properly com- mences with the seizure of the schooner Amis- tad, by Lieut. Gedney, TJ. S. IS ., near the east end of Long Island-, in 1839. He found on board the vessel about forty Africans and two Spaniards, one of whom declared himself the owner of the negroes and claimed the Lieu- tenant's protection. After an examination before a judge of the United States District Court, for Connecticut, the Africans were committed to the jail at New Haven, for trial on a charge of murder on the high seas. When it was ascertained that they were recently from Africa, and had been illegally bought at Havana, to be carried to Principe, to be enslaved, and that they had risen upon their enslavers, and recovered their liber- ty, much interest was excited in their behalf. A few friends of freedom met at New York and appointed a committee to receive donar tions, employ counsel, and act as circumstances might require. Legal counsel were employed, native African interpreters were obtained, and a committee of gentlemen at New Haven un- dertook to secure suitable instruction for those unfortunate and benighted pagans. Hon. John Quincy Adams, at the solicita- tion of the Committee, consented to act as senior counsel, and the cause was finally argued by hin) and Hon. Roger S. Baldwin before the Supreme Court of the United States, at the city of Washington, February and March, 1841. The following letter addressed to a member of the Committee, gives the result : " Washington, 9th March, 1841 " The captives are free ! " The part of the decree of the District Court, which placed them at the disposal of the Pre- sident of the United States, to be sent to Af- rica, is reversed. They are to be discharged from the custody of the Marshal— /rce. " The rest of the decision of the courts below is affirmed. " ' Not unto us — not unto us,' &c. " But thanks— thanks ! in the name of human- ity and of justice, to you. J. Q. Adams." As these Africans had been instructed in the elements of knowledge, as particular care had been taken to enlighten them on the sub- ject of Christianity, and as they all expressed a strong desire that some of their religions teachers should accompany them to their no/- tive land, the Committee deemed it a duty to_ make their return, after such a providential " train of circumstances, the occasion of plant- ing a mission in the heart of Africa. As the funds had been contributed by persons of various denominations, most of whom were of anti-slavery principles, it was thought proper to make the mission anti-slavery and anti-sec- tarian in its character. Accordingly the fol- lowing resolution was adopted : "Resolved, That it would be contrary to the feelings and principles of a large majority of the donors to the Amistad fund, and of the friends of the liberated Africans, to connect their return with any missionary society that solicits or receives donations from slave- holders." A passage was secured for them in a vessel bound for Sierra Leone, and a farewell public meeting held in the Broadway Tabernacle, New Tork, Nov. 27, 1841 ; by the Union Missionary Society ; when the instructions of the Committee were delivered by S. S. Joce- lyn to the missionaries under appointment, viz., Eev. James Steele, Eev. William Ray- mond and Mrs. Raymond ; and parting coun- sels were given to the Mendians, some of whom took part in the exercises. They arrived at Sierra Leone, January 10, 1842, after a passage of fifty days. All their stores, tools and implements of agriculture were admitted free of duty, and even without examination. Governor Ferguson proffered every necessary assistance. Soon after arriv- ing, Messrs. Steele and Raymond became sat- isfied of the impracticability of their reaching the Mendi country, and, ascertaining that part of the Amistads belonged to the Sherbro country, and that all were willing to go there, Mr. Steele, accompanied by Cinque and sev- 104 AFRICA, WESTERN. eral others, risited Sherbro. King Henry Tucker, to whom they went, lived at Kaw- Mendi, (a town of the Sherbro) and seemed willing to receive the people into his territory. The conditions were, however, too hard to be accepted, and Mr. Raymond, with the Afri- cans, spent the next rainy season at York, Sierra Leone. Mr. Steele was compelled by ill health to return to the United States. In November, 1842, a location was selected for the mission about a mile below the village of Kaw-Mendi, and 160 square rods of land were obtained, half a mile on the river, extend- ing a mile back, for which was paid an annual rent of $100. On the arrival of the missionary and the Africans at Kaw-Mendi, the King ordered a swivel to be loaded and fired, as a token of joy. The women and girls began to sing and^iof seven newly appointed missionaries sailed dance. A multitude of men, women and chil dren flocked around to see the white woman, having never seen one before. In the morn- ing, many people were drawn together by their singing and praying at family devotions. On Lord's day, Mr. Raymond held religious servi- .f«s, and preached his first sermon here from John iii. 16 : " For God so loved the world," &c. The king attended, and seemed much The influence of the mission on the slave- trade, on the king, and on the people, quickly became apparent. A flourishing school was soon in operation, and Mr. Raymond felt greatly encouraged. His language was, " This mission is evidently planted by God himself. I am more and more satisfied of it. It will prosper." On the first Lord's day in January, 1845, he organized a church with five members. His cares and labors were great ; but he was per- mitted to see fruits abounding amidst the difii- culties with which the mission was surrounded. A terrible war commenced in the Sherbro country in 1845. Many towns were burned. Hundreds fled from the scenes of war to the inission, as a place of refuge. The persons and property of all connected with it were respect- ed. Its character as a place of freedom, peace, temperance, and Christianity, was kown far and wide. Rev. Henry Badger at that time wrote, " Did you ever hear of a mission being establish- ed in the midst of war ? Here is one, and it has advanced during the war more than previously. A school has been formed, and is dokig well. The Mission Establishment, at first regarded with much suspicion, is now looked upon with great respect. It is a sanctuary. And while other towns and places are consumed by fire, and their inhabitants destroyed by sword, or carried into slavery, this flourishes and im- proves." After the death of Mr. Raymond, in Nov. 1845, the mission, with its school of over sixty children, was for eight months under the care of Thomas Bunyan, a native Mendian, who had previously acted as an interpreter and teacher. Two missionaries sailed from New York for the mission, April 8, 1848. One of them, Mr. Carter, died eight days after his arrival at the mission ; the other, Geo. Thomp- son, labored there alone for two years, suffer- ing much of the time from sickness. During this time, there was much deep religious inter- est manifested by those about the mission, and many were received into the mission church : the first one was Te-me, one of the girls taken in the Amistad. The next reinforcement con- sisted of Mr. and Mrs. Brooks, and Mar-Ch-v-, another one of the girls taken in the schooner, who had been at school in Ohio. Mrs. Brooks died before reaching the mission. They were followed to Africa in Dec. 1850, by a company of eight ; and Deo. 25, 1852, another company from New York for that mission. Since that time, only one missionary has joined the mission. TABULAE VIEW. Kaw-Mendi — Good Hope Mo-Tappan Total 1842 1863 1863 One female assistant not located. the stations which appear in the foregoing table, the missionaries are under instruction to open a station, either at Mo- Bwavi, in the Looboo country, or at Wcla, in the Timneh country. — Rev. George Whipple. Basle Missionary Society. — The Basle Missionary Society turned its attention to the Gold Coast in 1826 ; and four of its agents arrived at Christiansborg, near Akra, in 1828. Three of them soon died ; and the fourth found himself under the necessity of taking the place of the Danish chaplain, who had also deceased, only to follow him, however, in 1831. In ] 832 three other laborers reached Christiansborg ; one of them, a physician, soon fell a victim to the climate ; and another did not long sur- vive. In 1835, Riis, who alone remained, went to Akropong, which is a considerable place in the Aquapim mountains, north-east from Akra. He was kindly received by the king and his people, and he commenced his labors among them. Two fellow-laborers came to his aid in 1836, but both soon deceased. At length, after many disappointments, a new plan was adopt- ed. Riis (accompanied by "Widmann, and a tA wets y w o 'W^^ AFRICA, WESTERN. 105 colored man who had been educated in Swi1> zerland,) conducted twenty-four Olu-istian ne- groes from Jamaica to Akropong, where they arrived in 1843. A chapel was erected at this place in 1844. This mission has been prose- cuted to the present time ; and at the anniver- sary of the Society, held July 6, 1853, its affairs were in a prosperous and hopeful condi- tion. The number of laborers was 16, and the congregations had increased. The station at Christiansborg had been particularly favored. It has stations at Akropong, and at Ussu, (Danish Akra.) TABULAR VIEW OP MISSIONS IN WESTERN ATBICA. |3 S B Church llissionary Society English Baptist AUssion English Wesleyan Mission Basle Missionary Society American Board Scotch Missions Presbyterian Board Episcopal Board Southern Baptist Convention American Methodist Episcopal Church American Baptist Union Totals 2976 118 8021 22 114 101 600 1185 17 80 120 4 42 239 17 6921 450 6343 179 213 SO 640 31 11 13,164 642 164 12,877 It wUl be seen, by the foregoing statements, that a good beginning has been made in the evangelization of AVestern Africa. Many val- uable lives have been sacrificed, in the attempt to plant the gospel on these inhospitable shores. But they have not been sacrificed in vain. If more than 13,000 souls, or a moiety of them, have been saved through the instrumentality of these missions, it would be worth the sacri- fice of every missionary who has landed there. But, the results of these self-sacrificing labors reach far beyond what appears in these statis- tical tables. A large amount of preparatory work has been accomplished; native helpers have been raised up ; communications have been opened into the interior, and the way prepared for establishing missions among a great number of large tribes, inhabiting the more elevated and healthy portions of the con- tinent, who are in a more hopeful condition for missionary labors than those on the coast. And, experience has removed, in a great de- gree, the dangers of acclimation on the coast. A large number of the native languages have been mastered, and a number of them reduced to writing. A good beginning has also been made in the departments of translation and printing. Bev. Dr. Krapf, of the mission of the Church Missionary Society in Eastern Africa, has made to the mission at Gaboon a deeply interesting proposal — the forming of a South African con- tinental mission line, from the Gaboon to the starting point of their mission in the neighbor- hood of Zanzebar. North of the equator, this would be difficult, on account of the variety of languages and the hostility of the different tribes. But it is a remarkable feature of all the dialects south of the equator, spoken by the black man as distinguished from the Hottentots and Kaffres, that these dialects all have a common language for their basis. The people, likewise, are essentially one people in manners and customs. It has been discovered, that, by an intercourse of a few weeks, the nor fives of the eastern coast, and of the Gaboon, converse with each other. This great family of languages seems also to be remarkable for the excellence of its structure. The place of meeting on this continental mission line would be some one of the central mountains, supposed to divide the great basins from which flow the waters of the Nile, and of the Zaire, and of the shorter rivers running into the Indian ocean. These mountains may be 800 or 1000 miles from either coast ; and it is a cheering fact that three or four hundred miles of the eastern portion have already been traversed by Dr. Krapf and his associates. The missionary aspects of the two opposite sides of the conti- nent have some strong points of resemblance. On the east, a healthful upland was found much nearer the coast than was expected ; and moun- tains are seen from more than one of the Ga- boon stations. The shores of the Gaboon are healthful, compared with most rivers of Africa, but will probably not compare with the elevar ted table lands of the interior ; and no more will the coast from the east. A thick jungle covers the plains and valleys on both sides. 106 AMERICAN BOARD. creating the necessity of traveling on foot. But the opening of the rivers to navigation, may, in a measure, obviate this. And the 'ucreasing desire for missionaries among the nterior tribes, shows that Providence is open- ng wide the doors for the entrance of the gospel on every side. AHMEDNUGGUR : The city of Ahmed nuggur is situated on the table land of the Ghauts, in Hindoostan, in a plain 12 or 15 miles in extent each way, and is about 175 miles north-east from Bombay. It contains about 50,000 souls, and the population is in- creasing since it has become a military station. It was once the seat of the Mussulman power in this part of India, and appears, from its palaces, mosques, aqueducts, and numerous ruins, to have been a place of much splendor. It is four or five miles in circuit, and entii-ely surrounded by a high wall of stone and clay. It was occupied as a mission station by the American Board in 1831. AHURIEI: A station of the Ohmxh Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand. AINTAB : A large garrison town on the northern frontier of Syria, in the pashalic of Aleppo. It is 65 miles north of Aleppo, 50 miles east of Scanderoon, and 30 miles west Oj Bir. It has a population of 35,000 to 40,000. It is one of the most interesting stations of the American Board among the Armenians. AITDTAKI : One of the Hervey islands, and a station of the London Missionary So- ciety. AK-HISSAR: An out-station of the American Board among the Armenians ; it is the ancient Thyatira, the seat of one of the Apocalyptic churches ; population 7000. AKRA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- sionary Society in Aft-ica, on the Gold coast, a short distance to the east of Cape Coast Castle. AKEOPUL : An ontstation of the Wes- leyans in West Africa. (See Annamaboe.] AKROPONG : A station of the Basle Mis- sionary Society, on Cape Coast, Africa. AKYAB : The name of a district and a city in Arracan, one of the provinces of British Burmah. The city contains from 16,000 to 20,000 inhabitants. Since 1840 the city has been a station of the American Baptist Mis- sion in Arracan. ALBANY : A district and town in Sierra Leone, West Africa, occupied by the Wesleyan and Church Missionary Societies. ALDERVILLB, in Upper Canada : A sta- tion of the Wesleyan Miss. Society among the Indians ; commenced in '' 817 ; has now two missionaries, several out-&- ations, 80 members, an industrial school with 54 pupils, and over 700 attendants on public worship. ALEPPO : A town of Syria, the capital of a pashalic situated in the vast plain which extends from the Orontes to the Euphrates. It is built on eight hills or eminences, and is three and a half miles in circumference, sur- rounded by an ancient strong stone wall forty feet high. It is a station of the London Jews' Society, and some Protestants are found among the Armenian and Greek popu- lation. ALLAHABAD : A large city at the junc- tion of the Ganges and the Jumna, in Northern India, a station of the Presbyterian Board. ALLEN TOWN : Station of the Church Missionary Society among the liberated Afri- cans in the river district of Sierra Leone, W. Africa, south-east of Freetown. AMALONGUA : Station of the Ameri- can Board among the Zulus, near Port Natal, in South Africa. AMAPURA :■ The ancient capital of the Burman Empire, situated on the Irrawaddy, seven miles below Ava, the present capital. The government was removed in 1824. AMBALA : A station of the Presbyterian Board in Northern India, nearly equi-distant from Lodiana, Saharunpur, and Sabatten. AMBOYNA: One of the Molucca or Spice islands, in lat. 3° 41' south, and long. 128° 10' east. It belongs to the Dutch, and contains a population of 29,660. The Nether- lands Missionary Society have a flourishing mission on this island. (See Indian Archi- pelago.) AMERICA : (See United States, Canada, Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Labrador and Ch'eenland, Indians, Mexico, and South America.) AMERICAN BOARD OP COMMIS- SIONERS FOR FOREIGN MISSIONS : Of all the foreign missionary boards and societies now preeminent among the bene- volent institutions of the United States, the A. B. 0. F. M. was first in the date of its organization. Yet it must not be supposed that the spirit of benevolence — or even what may be regarded as more specifi- cally the missionary spirit — had previously no existence in the American churches. Nor must it be supposed that all the influence on the churches, which led them to enter on the foreign missionary work, was exerted by any one, or any few individuals. The missionary spirit is but the Christian spirit looking upon the unevangelized ; and from the first settle- ment of New England there had been much of this spirit in the churches. Earnest, and by no means unsuccessful, efforts for the evan- gelization of the native Indian tribes, had been made by the Mayhews, Eliot, Sargent, Brain- ard, Wheelock, Kirkland, and many others, extending through a period of more than 160 years, from 1643 to 1808, before Mills or Hall, Judson or Newell, offered themselves as mis- sionaries to the heathen. About the commencement of the present century it began to be obvious that the mis- sionary feeling was rising and extending in AMERICAN BOARD. 107 the United States, and would be likely soon to open for itself new channels of effort ; and " no man was the leader of the movement ; " God was working for his own cause. In 1109, the Massachusetts Missionary Society was formed at Boston. lu 1804 the constitution was modi- fied, and the object of the society was defined to be " to diffuse the gospel among the people of the newly-settled and remote parts of our country — among the Indians of the country, and through more distant regions of the earth, as circumstances shall invite and the ability of the society shall admit." Under this con- stitution this society, had the means been fur- nished it, might have sent missionaries to any of the " distant regions of the earth ; " and some of the sermons preached at the annual meetings of the society, as also sermons before other missionary societies in the earlier years of this century, and especially one by Dr. Griffin before the General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in 1806, urge the claims of the heathen, and the greatness and excel- lency of a universal missionary work, with eloquence and earnestness which have seldom, if ever, been surpassed. Dr. Parish, the preacher before this society, in 1807, alludes to " five societies in Massachusetts for propa- gating the gospel," to " similar societies in all the states of New England," and to " mission- ary societies in the middle states," as then existing. The Connecti-cut Evangelical Maga- zine, commenced in 1800 ; the Massachusetts Missionary Magazine, commenced in 1803 ; the Massachusetts Baptist Missionary Maga- zine, commenced the same year ; the General Assembly's Missionary Magazine or Religious Intelligencer, commenced in 1805 ; diffused among the churches much intelligence in re- gard to missionary operations in foreign lands. Mr. Norris, of Salem, when applied to by Dr. Spring, in 1806, to aid in endowing a Theologi- cal seminary at Andover, found himself em- barrassed by a previous determination as to the use of his means. " My great object," he said, " is the foreign missionary enterprise ; " and he gave §10,000 to the Theological school because convinced that the effort to establish it was one with this enterprise, for " we must raise up ministers if we would have men to go as missionaries." The same year, 1806, Rob- ert Kalston remitted for himself and others of Philadelphia $3,357 to aid the Baptist Mission at Serampore. Dr. Carey, of that mission, acknowledged the receipt of $6,000 from American Christians in 1806 and 1807. There were thus many indications of a mis- sionary spirit in the chuTches of the United States. Still it is true, that as yet, "American Christians had never combined in any great enterprise or plan for spreading the knowledge of Christ, or advancing his kingdom; had never sent, from their shores, a single mis- sionary, with the message of heavenly mercy, to any portion of the widely extended pagan world" abroad. The different efforts which " had been made for the benefit of some of the native tribes of the American forest " had been " scattered and transient," and " without any general union, or any expansive and systematic plan of operations." In 1806, Samuel J. Mills became a member of Williams College. While a child he had heard his mother say, " I have consecrated this child to the service of God as a missionary," and from the time of his conversion, in 1802, he had ardently desired to engage in the mis- sionary work. In college, while laboring faith- fully to promote true piety among the students, he kept this work constantly in mind. In 1807 he invited Gordon Hall and James Rich- ards to a walk, and led them to a retired spot in a meadow, where they spent all day in fast- ing and prayer, and in conversing on the duty of missions to the heathen. He was surprised and gratified to learn that the subject was not new to these brethren, but that their hearts were already set upon engaging in such a work. September 7, 1808, a society was pri- vately formed at Williams College, by these and a few other pious students, the object of which, the constitution says, " shall be to effect, in the persons of its members, a mission or missions to the heathen." The 5th article provided that "no person shall be admitted who is under an engagement of any kind which shall be incompatible with going on a mission to the heathen ; " and the 6th article was, " Each member shall keep absolutely free from every engagement which, after his prayer- ful attention, and after consultation with the brethren, shall be deemed incompatible with the objects of this society, and shall hold him- self in readiness to go on a mission when and where duty may call." Designing now so to operate on the public mind as to lead to the undertaking of a foreign missionary work, and proceeding with great modesty, and great practical wisdom, they re- published and circulated some impressive mis- sionary sermons, and opened a correspondence with some of the eminently wise and good men among the clergy of the country, such as Rev. Messrs. GrifBn, Worcester, Morse, and Dana. With the same end in view, and to influence young men, one of the number transferred his relation to Middlebury College in Vermont. Mills visited Yale College, and some efforts were made at other institutions. In the autumn of 1809 Richards became a member of the Theological Seminary at Ando- ver, and " labored with diligence and success in promoting a spirit of missions among the students." Mills followed him to Andover in the spring of 1810, and Hall soon joined them. At least one other young man was therealso, whose thoughts had been independently direct- ed to the same great subject — Samuel Nott, Jr. " There seemed now to be," says one who was there, " a movement of the Spirit, turning 108 AMERICAN BOARD. the attention and the hearts of the students in the seminary to the condition of the perishing heathen." Several had already come, or soon came to the resolution of spending their lives in pagan lands, among whom were Adoniram Judson, Jr., and Samuel Newell. The faculty of the seminary were consulted and approved the design, and on the 25th of June, 1810, according to previous arrangement, Eev. Dr. 'Spring of Newburyport, and Eev. Samuel Worcester of Salem, met with the professors and a few others, for further consultation^ It was thought the time for action had come, and the young men were advised to present their case to the General Association of Massachu- setts, which was about to meet at Bradford. The next day Rev. Messrs. Spring and Wor- cester rode together in a chaise to Bradford, and during that ride, between those two men, " the first idea of the American Board of Com- missioners for Foreign Missions was suggested ; and the form, the number of members, and the name, were proposed." On Thursday, June 28th, Messrs. Judson, Nott, Newell, and Hall, came before the Association and presented a written paper in which they stated " that their minds had been long impressed with the duty and importance of personally attempting a mission to the heathen ; " and they solicited the opinion and advice of the Association as to their duty, and as to the source to which they might look for support in their contemplated work. The subject was referred to a oommil> tee, who reported the next day, recommending " that there be instituted by this Association a Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, for the purpose of devising ways and means, and adopting and prosecuting measures for promoting the spread of the gospel in heathen lands." The report was adopted, and the fol- lowing persons were chosen to constitute, in the first instance, that Board : His excellency John Treadwell, Esq., Eev. Timothy Dwight, D. D., Gen. Jedediah Huntington, and Eev. Calvin Chapin, of Connecticut ; Eev. Joseph Lyman, D. D., Eev. Samuel Spring, D. D., William Bartlett, Esq., Eev. Samuel Worces- ter, and Dea. Samuel H. Walley, of Massa^ chusetts. The commissioners had their first meeting at Farmington, Connecticut, on the 5th of the following September, five only being present. A constitution was adopted, and officers were chosen. The Prudential Committee appointed consisted of William Bartlett, Esq., and Eev. Messrs. Spring and Worcester. Mr. Worces- ter was chosen Corresponding Secretary, and an address to the Christian public was prepared, accompanied by a form of subscription. A beginning was thus made ; but though the objects of the Board were regarded with favor by some liberal individuals, it was doub1> fnl whether means could be very soon secured in this country to send out and support a dis- tant mission. Yet four young men were ready and waiting to be sent. The eyes of the Pru- dential Committee were turned to the London Missionary Society, which was already in suc- cessful operation, and in Jan., 1811, Mr. Judson was sent to England to confer with the Direc- tors of that society on various points, and to ascertain whether any satisfactory arrangement could be made for prosecuting the work of missions in concert ; so that American mis- sionaries might for a time receive their sup- port in part from the London society without committing themselves wholly to its direction. No such arrangement, however, was made. In June, 1812, an act of incorporation for the Board was obtained from the Legislature of Massachusetts. The second annual meeting was held at Worcester, Mass., Sept. 18, 1811 ; seven members being present. Donations to the amount of $1,400 had been received. Messrs. Judson, Nott, Hall and Newell were appointed as missionaries to labor under the direction of this Board ; and it was resolved, as soon as practicable, to establish a mission in the East, attention being turned specially to the Burman Empire, and another in the West, among the Indians of this continent. Late in January, 1812, Messrs. Newell and Hall, who had been attending to medical studies in Phil- adelphia, returned hastily with the intelligence that a vessel was to sail from that port in about two weeks for Calcutta, and would ac- commodate the missionaries. The Prudential Committee immediately met. It was short notice, and only about 1,200 dollars were at their disposal ; yet, on the 27th of Jan. they resolved to send out the four missionaries. Then another, Mr. Luther Eice, desired to join the mission, and they " dared not reject his re- quest." Measures were at once taken to se- cure, if possible, the requisite funds, and in about three weeks, more than $6,000 was col- lected. The missionaries were ordained on the 6th of Feb., in the Tabernacle at Salem, and after some delay sailed, Messrs. Judson and Newell, with their wives, in the Caravan, from Salem, Feb. 19, and Messrs. Nott, Hall, and Eice, with the w,ife of Mr. Nott, in the Harmony from Philadelphia, about the same time.— See Tracy's History of the A. B. C. F. M. ; Life, of Br. Worcester, Vol. II, Chap. 2 ; Memoir of Dr. Judson, page 39 and on ; and Re- ports of the Board. Prom this small beginning the Board has gone on until now its annual receipts are about $300,000, and it has under its care, in different parts of the world, near 400 missionary la- borers, male and female, sent from this coun- try, and more than 200 native helpers. The annual meetings, which are held in September, from being attended by seven members, as in 1811, or by nine as in 1812, in the parlor of a private dwelling, have corae to be occasions of fully as deep and extensive interest as any annually recurring religious occasion in the United States. They commence usually AMERICAN BOARD. 109 on Tuesday afternoon and close in the forenoon of the next Friday. They are always open to the public, and can be held only in towns of considerable population, that lodgings may be furnished for the many hundreds who come together from every section of the country. The largest houses of worship are not sufficient ly large to accommodate all who wish to hear, and usually on Wednesday and Thurs- day evenings simultaneous meetings, for pop- ular 'address, are held in two and sometimes in three diiferent houses. This is the case also on Thursday afternoon, when the Lord's Supper is celebrated. Organization, Mode of Operation, fyc. — The officers of the Board are chosen annually, by ballot, and are, at present, a President, Vice- President, Recording Secretary, Treasurer, two Auditors, four Corresponding Secretaries, and a Prudential Committee of eight. This com- mittee, whose members receive no compensar tion for their services, meets at the missionary house at least once every week, on Tuesday afternoon, for the transaction of business. There are now about 200 corporate members of the^ Board residing in at least 21 different States of the Union. These alone, by the char- ter, are voting members, forming the body cor- porate ; but the payment of $50, if the person be a clergyman, or $100, if a layman, consti- tutes any one an honorary member, who may share fully in the deUberations of the annual meetings. About 9,000 persons have, since the beginning, been thus constituted honorary members. There is also a small number of corresponding members, residing mostly in foreign lands, and chosen, as are the corporate members, by ballot. This Board is neither an ecclesiastical nor a denominational body, and is not supported by denominations as such, but by individual Christians. The Commissioners wore at first appointed by the General Association of Mass- achusetts, which is Congregational, with pow- er to adopt their own form of organization and their own rules and regulations. By its char- ter, obtained from the Legislature of Massa- chusetts, in 1812, the Board elects its own mem- bers without limitation as to numbers, or resi- dence, or religious denomination ; but not less than one-third of the members must at all times be respectable laymen, and not less than one- third respectable clergymen. In 1812, the Sec- retary, in behalf of the Board, suggested to the General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church, " the expediency of forming an institution simi- lar to theirs, between which and theirs there might be such cooperation as should promote the great object of missions amongst the une- vangolized nations." The Assembly, however, while they urged the churches under their care to aid in this good work, thought " the business of foreign missions might probably be best managed under a single Board," and so decli- ned forming any separate institution. At the very next meeting of the Board, (Sept., 1812) thirteen new members were elected, from seven different states, of whom eight, 4 from New York, 2 from New Jersey, and 2 from Penn- sylvania, were Presbyterians. In 1831, of 62 corporate members, 31 were Presbyterians, 24 Congregationalists, 6 Reformed Dutch, and one Associate Reformed ; and of the 70 or- dained missionaries, 39 were Presbyterians, 29 Congregationalists, and 2 Reformed Dutch. Until the division of the General Assembly in 1837, most of the efforts of Presbyterian churches in the United States for foreign mis- sions were made through this Board ; and this is still true of what are called New School Presbyterian churches, and also of the Reform- ed Dutch and the Associate Reformed churches. Missionaries from these different denominations have always been sent out without distinction, and generally without even considering their ecclesiastical relations in designating them to their fields of labor. The missions thus formed, are not controlled by ecclesiastical bodies ; though they may themselves be considered as in some sense, such bodies. They are organized and governed as communities, the votes of a majority of the missionaries and male assistant missionaries deciding all questions, in their regular meet- ings. Thus the missions provide for the organi- zation, government and care of churches, which they form, and may enter into organizations among themselves, for fraternal or ecclesiasti- cal purposes, as associations or presbyteries, according to circumstances and the views and preference of the majority. So far as any use of the funds of the Board is involved, the ac- tion of the mission is, of course, subject to the revision of the Prudential Committee. By its charter the Board is limited to the work of " propagating the Gospel in heathen lands, by supporting missionaries and diffusing a knowledge of the Holy Scriptures." Its missions are conducted with reference to the ultimate complete evangelization of the nations or communities to which they are sent. They are not regarded as permanent institutions, but are established to plant the institutions of the Gospel, and to prepare the people themselves to support these institutions ; — to gather churches which are expected to be ultimately self-supporting churches, sustaining their own religious teachers, and acting for the still fur- ther propagation of the truth. A leading ob- ject therefore, has ever been, as fast as possible, to educate and train a pious native ministry, who may be fitted to act as pastors of the na- tive churches, and as evangelists in gathering churches. For this purpose not only have schools of a lower order been established, but seminaries, in which native young men of piety and promise might be thoroughly educated, and also boarding-schools for girls, from which educated native preachers and teachers might obtain suitable partners for life. 110 AMERICAN BOARD. _ "With the same end in view, to raise up Chris- tian churches and communities, which shall be independent of all foreign aid and foreign in- struction, much labor has been expended to re- duce unwritten languages to a written form, to prepare faithful translations of the Scrip- tures, and to give a Christian literature to those for whose evangelization the missions have been established. By the missionaries of this Board fifteen different languages have been reduced to writing, and the Scriptures have been translated wholly or in part into more than twenty languages. Still it is ever inculcated npon the missionaries that they are to regard themselves as sent, emphatically, to preach the Gospel, and thus, with Divine assists ance, to turn men individually, and at once, " from darkness to light ; and from the power of Satan unto God ;" and that, in all ordinary cases, every other work is to be subordinate to this in the labors of the missions. In relation to other societies the Board acts strictly upon the principle of non-interference ; in agreement with others considering " certain great centres of human society and marts of commerce, as common ground " to some extent, but in all other cases avoiding fields of labor which are already occupied by others. Results — Statistics, Ifc. — The operations of the Board have been crowned with many tokens of Divine favor. This is not the place to give particular accounts of revivals, with which the missions have been favored ; these accounts will be found in the notices of the several mis- sions ; but simple reference may here be made to revivals at Ceylon in 1819, 1821, 1824, and '25, 1830 and '31, and 1835 ; to the great re- vival at the Sandwich Islands, in 1838, '39 and '40, as the fruits of which more than twenty thousand persons, giving hopeful evidence of piety, were received into the churches ; to revi- vals among the Nestorians in 1846, 1849, 1850, and 1851 ; to repeated revivals among the Choctaws and other tribes of Indians on this continent ; and to the reformation among the Armenians, obviously, a work of Divine grace, and a work of deep interest and great promise, though differing from many of the re- vivals already referred to, which has been in progress for the last ten or twelve years. In all, Irom the beginning, more than forty thous- and hopeful converts have been gathered into churches connected with the different missions. None but those who are thought to give evi- dence of true piety are received to the churches and much care is exercised by the missionaries in receiving members. The receipts and expenditures of the Board, for each year since its organization, and for each period of four years, are presented in the following table. It is a fact of great signiflpanoe, that all missionary societies and boards, after a certain period in their history, begin to receive back their expenditures from the missions which they have planted. The sum thus received by this Board in 1853 was $12,905, which is more than one twenty-fifth part of their whole receipts. And this proportion is much greater in the case of the large London societies, which have been much longer in operation. i .2 Receipts. Penoda of 4 Yeais. Expen- ditures. Periods. fS 1 1811, 1812, $999 52 $999 $9,609 13,611 60 1813, 11,361 18 8,611 1814, 12,266 56 7,078 1815, 9,493 89 6,027 1. $46,732 $30,415 1816, 12,601 03 16,934 1817, 29,948 63 20,485 1818, 34,727 72 30,346 1819, 37,620 63 40,337 2. 114,698 113,102 1820, 39.949 46 67,621 1821, 46,364 96 46,771 1822, 60,087 87 60,474 1823, 65,758 94 66,380 3. 202,161 231,246 1824, 47,483 68 64,157 1826, 66,716 18 41,469 1826, 61,616 25 59,012 1827, 88,341 89 103,430 4. 253,157 268,068 1828, 102,009 64 107,676 1829, 106,928 26 92,633 1830, 83,019 37 84,798 1831, 100,934 09 98,313 5. 392,891 383,320 1832, 130,674 12 120,954 1833, 145,847 77 149,906 1834, 162,386 10 169,779 1835, 163,340 19 163,264 6. 692,148 693,893 1836, 176,232 15 210,407 1837, 252,076 66 254,589 1838, 236,170 98 280,642 1839, 244,169 82 227,491 7. 908,649 023,129 1840, 241,691 04 246,601 1841, 235,189 30 268,914 1842, 318,396 53 261,147 1843, 8. 244,264 43 1,039,631 256,687 1,038,349 1844, 236,394 37 244,371 1846, 255,112 96 216,817 1846, 262,073 66 257,605 1847, 211,402 76 264,783 1848, 9. 964,983 254,066 46 282,330 983,676 1849, 291,705 27 263,418 1850, 261,862 28 264,329 1861, 274,902 21 274,830 1852, 10. 1,072,626 301,732 70 257,727 1,084,907 1853, 314,922 88 616,666 310,607 668,3.34 6,206,120 6,203,339 It will be seen, that with only one exception, in each period of four years there has been an advance upon the receipts of the previous period. But though there has been, on the whole, constant progress, the receipts have oftem fallen below the expenditures, and there have been seasons of great pecuniary embar- rassment in the operations of the society. In 1837 embarrassments of this kind occurred, the sad effects of which were deeply and widely felt. For some years previous to 1836 the AMERICAN BOARD. Ill means provided had been sufBcient ; the Pru- dential Committee felt encouraged to enter upon new and enlarged operations, and the call was specially for men, while the churches supposed there would be no difficulty in regard to means. In the mean time laborers, in an- swer to the call, offered their services in increasing numbers, and within four years, from 1833 to 1836 inclusive, no less than 18.^ new laborers, male and female, were sent abroad. Expenses were thus greatly increas- ed, and the receipts did not increase in pro- portion. At the annual meeting in 1836 it was announced that 64 missionary laborers were then under appointment, who were ex- pecting soon to be sent abroad ; but there was a balance of about $39,000 against the trea^ sury at the close of the financial year, (July 31,) and that balance was increasing. The voice of the meeting, however, and the voice of the churches, still was " let the missionaries be sent ; " and the means seemed likely to be provided. From October, 1836, to February, 1837, the receipts greatly increased, and in the mean time 60 laborers, male and female, had embarked for their respective fields. But now there came a financial crisis in the affairs of the country. Pecuniary difficulties began to press upon the business community with very great severity ; the receipts of the Board rapidly diminished, and the debt rapidly in- creased. The committee felt obliged to stop. Laborers under appointment were detained, and new missionaries were appointed only on condition that they would not be sent out, and must be at no expense to the Board, until the state of the treasury should warrant it. Thus discouraged, many turned from regarding the heathen world and looked for other fields of labor, and never since have there been so many ready to ofifer themselves for the foreign ser- vice. But this was not all. Difficulties still increasing, the committee felt called upon, in June, to curtail the appropriations which had been made in the missions for the year 1838, by $40,000 ; and the missions were informed of the painful necessity, and required to con- tract their operations. With 60 more laborers to be supported, the pecuniary means of the missions were thus reduced $4.'),000 below what had been allowed in 1836. The effect was deeply painful. Every missionary was embarrassed, and every branch of missionary operations crippled. Schools were broken up or greatly reduced, and in Ceylon alone 5,000 children were dismissed from under Christian instruction " to the wilderness of heathenism ; " the facilities for preaching were abridged ; the operations of presses were greatly diminished ; , native teachers and other helpers were de- prived of employment ; native Christians were disheartened, and the opposing heathen tri- umphed. Still the influence of this reverse was not simply evil. The missions, the Christain public at home, and the Prudential Committee all learn- ed some important lessons ; and a new impulse was given to missionary effort, particularly in the rural districts of the country, where the in- telligence of the disastrous influence of such reduced appropriations was received. The financial embarrassments were felt first and most severely in the cities and larger towns ; those in such communities who would have given liberally, found themselves deprived of the means of giving ; the country churches were thus called upon to come with more lib- erality to the support of the missionary work, and in these churches the amount contributed, and doubtless also the number of contributors, greatly increased. Such painful consequences of financial diffi- culty have never since occurred, and it is believed will never again occur in the history of this society. The treasury was not fully relieved until 1842. Indeed, in 1841 the debt had increased to $57,000 ; and for five years again, from 1847 to 1851, there was a constant balance against the treasury. In 1848 this balance was $59,890. But while all proper economy has been used, and the appropriatious to the missions have been limited to the lowest safe amount, the operations have been steadily carried forward, and contributions have been so increased as again to relieve the Board. Until 1838 the Board had no permanent building for the accommodation of its business at Boston, which has ever been the centre of its operations ; and much inconvenience and loss had been experienced from frequent remo- vals. This year an eligible site was purchased in Pemberton Square, and a substantial build- ing erected ; the whole expense being met from permanent funds, which could not be used to sustain the missions or to pay the debts. In addition to this building, the Board now has invested funds, of which the interest only may be used, amounting to $96,000. The missions now under the care of the Board are the following, of each of which a particular notice will be found in its appropriate place : The mission to the Zulus, and the Gaboon mission, in Africa ; the mission to Greece, and the mission to the Jews, in Europe ; the mission to the Armenians, the Syrian mission, the Assyrian mission, and the mission to the Nestorians, in Western Asia ; the Bombay, Ahmednuggur, Satara, Kolapur, Madras, Ar- cot, Madura, and Ceylon missions, in Southern Asia; the Canton, Amoy, and Fuh-chau mis- sions, in China ; missions to the Choctaws, the Cherokees, the Dakotas, the Ojibwas, the Scnecas, the Tuscaroras, and the Abenaquis, among the North American Indians ; and the Micronesian mission in the NorthPacific Ocean. The large and successful Sandwich Islands mis- sion has just passed from under the care of the Board as an organized mission, it being merg- ed in the Christian community of the islands, which have been virtually christianized ; but 112 AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION. necessary aid is still famished for the support of religious and educational institutions. The following table presents the more im- portant statistics of the missions at different periods, separated by intervals ot ten years, commencing with 1823, eleven years after the first missionaries were sent out. 1823... 1833... 1843... 1853... 1,940 20,797 26,714 §=1 ft. 442,066,185 968,132,478 S H ti -H 03 ^ & 03 m a o ■s ce a ■9» 1 U SI fl "o-rt ■p.-S g ■§■■§ M fc " - fc 70 3,000 2 204 1 60 664 66,000 7 6?4 22 699 610 30,778 9 487 23 646 712 21,993 AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONARY UNION : This is the name at present adopt- ed by the Foreign Missionary Association of the regular or Oalvini^ic Baptists of the non-slave- holding States, and with few exceptions, it is entirely dependent on them for its maintenance and direction. Existing, at first, with a different organization, and under the name of the Bap- tist Triennial Convention, it was founded at Philadelphia, in May, 1814, near the date at which the Baptists of the United States entered upon the work of propagating the Gospel among the heathen. It owes its origin to a series of events which have always been deemed extraordinary and providential, and are, on that account, worthy of a brief narration. In the earliest company of missionaries sent to the east, by the American Board of Com- missioners for Foreign Missions, were Eev. Adoniram Judson and Kev. Luther Rice, who in separate ships, sailed from the United States in 1812. During the passage to Calcutta, Mr. and Mrs. Judson found reason to change their sentiments respecting the mode and the subjects of Christian baptism. On their arrival in In- dia they repaired to Seramporo, and on making known their views, were baptized by immersion by Rev. Mr. Ward, one of the missionaries of the English Baptist mission, who were stationed there. A few weeks later Eev. Mr. Rice avowed a similar change in his sentiments, and was also baptized at Serampore. It was this unexpected announcement that these American Missionaries, who had already arrived in the Bast, had become Baptists and had thrown themselves on the Baptist churches of the United States for the means of prosecuting the self-denying and heroic mission they had un- dertaken, that first enlisted the general sym- pathy of that denomination in this country, and led to the formation of their earliest foreign missionary organization. Immediately on tlie receipt of letters from Messrs. Judson and Rice, containing this an- nouncement, a society was formed in Boston, which was styled, " The Baptist Society for R«V. I. B. W0ECE3TEE. Propagating the Gospel in India and other Foreign Parts." The new Society, which was designed to be the parent of numerous auxil- iaries, immediately pledged to Mr. Judson an adequate support in the prosecution of his mis- sion, whenever the Commissioners of the Ameri- can Board should discontinue their patronage ; and at the same time, thinking that such an arrangement might be more acceptable to him as well as more advantageous in its results, they proposed that he should become connected with the English Baptist Mission at Serampore. This proposal was very wisely and fortunately declined by the managers of that mission, who urged upon their American brethren the formar tion of a general missionary society, in the United States. At this juncture, early in the year 1814, Mr. Rice arrived in America from Calcutta, having returned for the special pur- pose of enlisting the Baptist churches of the country in the enterprise of forming missions among the heathen. He was immediately ap- pointed traveling agent of the society already formed, and was directed to visit the churches in the middle and southern states, -and at the same time, an address to the members of the denomination was prepared by the society's managers, setting forth the obligations which God in his providence had imposed on them, in consequence of the secession of Messrs. Judson and Rice from the missions which they had been sent to establish. Through the agency of these causes, numerous local societies for missions were soon formed in nearly all the older states, most of them auxiliai-y to the society originally established at Boston. The appeal which had been made was not disregarded, and as a consequence of the awakened sense of ob- ligation, a general meeting of ministers and laymen, delegates from societies and religious bodies in different parts of the Union, assem- ble'd at Philadelphia, in May, 1814. At this meeting was formed, " The General Missionary Convention of the Baptist Denomination in the United States of America, for Foreign Missions." The Constitution provided that the AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION. 113 Convention should meet once in three years and that it should be composed of persons who should annually contribute one hundred dollars or who should represent societies contributing that sum. The affairs of the Convention were entrusted to a board of managers who were to be elected once in three years, and in whom was vested the appointment of the Secretary, Treasurer, and other officers, and also of all the missionaries.^ By a subsequent alteration in its Constitution, the Convention for a con- siderable period, embraced not only the foreign, but also the home missions of the Baptist de- nomination, and also, for a still longer period, tlie management of the Columbian College, an institution of learning established at Washing- ton, in the District of Columbia. These latter objects, however, were always regarded as se- condary, and were at length entirely laid aside, and the Convention left to its own proper work of founding and directing foreign missions. The Triennial Convention, thus collecting its members from all parts of the country, con- tinued, with the slight exceptions already stated, unchanged in its organization till the year 1845, when, in common with similar associations in other denominations, its councils became dis- tracted and its treasury embarrassed by the sectional feuds generated by the discussion of the institution of slavery. At this time the churches in most of the slaveholding States, becoming dissatisfied with the principles avow- ed by its managers, united in a separate organi- zation, under the name of the " Southern Bap- tist Convention." In November, 1845, at a special meeting of the Triennial Convention, an entire change was effected in its composition and a new Constitution adopted, which declared its single object to be to " diffuse the knowl- edge of the religion of Jesus Christ, by means of missions, throughout the world." According to its new Constitution, the principle of repre- sentative membership is laid aside, and the as- sociation is now composed of life members who are made such by the payment of one hundred dollars. Its name has likewise been changed to the "American Baptist Missionary Union." Its meetings are annual, and its affairs are com- mitted to a board of managers composed of 75 persons, of whom at least one-third must not be ministers of the Gospel, and who appoint from their own number an executive commit- tee of '^nine persons, by whom, in connection with two corresponding secretaries and a trea- surer, missionaries are appointed, missions are established, and all the actual business of the society is transacted. The members of the Union, as has been stated, generally belong to the Baptist churches in the non-slaveholding States, but this results from the influence of common sentiments and not from any provi- sion of its Constitution. It is in reality as comprehensive as was the convention which preceded it, and of which it is the legal and lineul successor. Thus organized aiid composed, the Ameri- can Baptist (Foreign) Missionary Union, from the humble beginnings with which it com- menced, has steadily advanced in its work and has extended its missions from Rangoon in the kingdom of Burmah, where the Brst was estab- lished, to all parts of that kingdom, to Siam, China and Assam, to the Teloogoos in India, to the western coast of Africa, to Greece, Ger- many and Prance, and to the Indians of the American continent. In the number of its missions, in the extent of its resources, and the amount of its annual revenues, it ranks second only to the American Board of Commissioners among the foreign missionary organizations of the United States. Its missionaries have been sent forth for the simple purpose of preaching the Gospel. They have been in all cases instructed to make this their great object and to regard the introduction of science and art, the education of the young and even the translation of the Scriptures as subsidiary to it. The number of those who have been ap- pointed and sent from this country, and who are now in the employment of the managers of the Union, is sixty-six missionaries and sixty- four female assistants, exclusive of two hundred and twenty preachers, teachers, and other as- sistants who have been appointed from among the native converts in the several oountries- where the missions have been established. These missionaries are now engaged in preach- ing the Gospel in the languages of upwards of twenty different divisions of the human race. They have established twenty-one organized missions, embracing 84 stations and five hun- dred and thirty-nine out-stations, and in the churches, 192 in number, which they have planted in the different parts of the world, are embraced about 15,219 persons who have been converted by their labors. Their schools are 88, and contain 1,992 pupils. Of these missions the most interesting and successful are those among the Burmans and Karens in the kingdom of Burmah and the neighboring provinces, and those in several of the states of Germany. The Karens present a singular example of a people for the most part without any form of idolatry, but possessed of singular moral sensibility and unusually dis- posed to receive the doctrines of the Gospel of Jesus Christ. Oppressed and despised by their Burmau masters, they have hailed the advance- ment of English power in the Bast, and have entered with gladness into the freedom and se- curity which it everywhere brings. They have received Christianity from the teaching of the missionaries with an eagerness which has sel- dom been paralleled among any other portion of mankind. After these no other missions of the Union have had u, success equal to that which has been bestowed on the mission in Germany. It was commenced by the baptism of a devoted and liberal minded German, Mr. J. G. Oncken, in the waters of the Elbe at 114 AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION. Hamburg, in 1833, by Rev. Dr. Sears, who at that time was residing in Germany as a student. Since then, by the persevering labors of this earliest convert, a mission has been es- tablished which, without a single missionary sent from the United States, now extends through nearly all the states of Germany and into Denmark and Holland. The following table presents a comprehen- sive view of the missions of the Union, and their results : MISSIONS OF THE UNION, 1863-54. MISSIONS. ■M s i 1 'i -i .1 •i'i I1 li II i •a 1 1 .0 , Be d S la 1 bo 'Sh ■i 1 Si 3 & p. a H IhAsia: 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 19 'is' 20 2 60 32 2 "3' 4 4 132 6 6 4 6 6 2 2 1 4 2 4 6 2 49 6 6 4 3 3 6 2 1 1 6 1 4 7 2 50 10 11 8 5 8 11 4 3 2 9 3 8 13 4 6 19 22 8 66 29 2 2 4 4 2 3 1 3 14 22 1 60 26 'i 1 1 1 1 3 1 6 29 68 2 470 433 ""% 2 1 4 2 J.2 1 170 869 1,046 60 6,000 1,573 "ii 7 36 "ii 79 9 '2 2 'i 1 'i 2 '3 1 44 96 80 180 '7 21 73 13 6 3 16? 1 20? '3 2 6 3 6 1 100 40 300 16 280 "36? 20? 76 36 216 50 6 6 17 1 21 1 '4 4 6 3 8 2 100 84? 396 16 360 180 "43? 41? 76 86 289 63 Tavoy Prome Assam Teloogoo Whole number in Asia 14. . IkAeiuoa: Bassa 1.. In Europe : French 98 169 124 1,027 8,873 13 614 66 1,168 78 1,682 2 2 2 4 4 1 17 1 31 1 12 2 43 8 44 3 65 9 388 397 1 6 8 1 ■3 _ 4 2 6 5 16 31 1 8 44 1 33 681 330 4,618 10 1 4 i "52 1 'i 4 "52 Whole n umber in Europe. . 3. . INDUN Mbsioks : . Qjibwa "... 12 48 63 714 4,968 1 4 1 62 2 66 2 3 6 10 84 2 "% 10 639 2 3 2 7 66 1 5 2 8 64 3 8 4 1 2 6 1 3 10 "ib? 69 21 100 1,260? J 2 1 6 45 85 2 74? 3 2 1 80? 46 86 Clierokee Whole number in America. 3. . Totals 21.. 16 9 14 79 1,371 4 136 2 74 6 210 129 220 192 1,820 16,219 19 685 69 1,306 88 1,992 * Including theological and normal. The oflBcers of the American Baptist Mis- sionary Union chosen at the annual meeting in May, 1854, are as follows, viz. : Hon. George N. Briggs, L.L. D., President ; Rev. Bartholomew T. Welsh, D.D., Rev. Silas Bailey, D.D., Vice-Presidents. Rev. 'Wm. H. Shailer, D.D. Recording Sec- retary. The Board of Managers is composed of 75 members, who are annually elected, and of whom at least one-third are not ministers of the Gospel. Of this Board, the officers in 1854 were as follows : Hon. Ira Harris, Ohairmain. ' Rev. Sewall S. Guttting, Recording Secre- tary. ExECOTivB Officeks : Rev. Solomon Peck, D. D., Corresponding Secretary for the Foreign Department. Rev. Edward Bright, D.D., Corresponding Secretary for the Home Department. Richard E. Eddy, Treasurer. The subjoined table will present a complete view of the financial growth and present re- sources of the " Missionary Union" : Contributions to the American Baptist Missionary Utiion. 1815 ffl3,476 10 1830 21,622 00 1816 not recorded. 1831 15,266 00 1817 11,986 87 1832 16,556 00 1818 10,240 78 1833 27,600 30 1819 8,076 51 1834 23,941 20 1820 12,296 21 1835 30,747 00 1821 7,758 16 1836 40,547 06 1822 3,615 27 1837 45,567 00 1823 4,944 29 1838 34,583 21 1824 9,127 63 1839 51,289 30 1825 5,186 20 1840 57,781 00 1826 9,499 50 1841 52,598 68 1827 9 246 35 1842 50,706 20 1828 10,639 00 1843 45,883 04 1829 9,158 60 1844 62,062 29 AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRISTIAN UNION. 115 1845 71,876 21 1851 97,900. 00 1846 100,150 02 1852 104,755 90 1847 85,009 24 1853 114,697 97 1848 85,894 42 1854 122,757 42 ns4.q 88,902 99 89,818 00 1850 $1,663,763 92 PKOF. W. QAJmELL. AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRIS- TIAN UNION : This Society was organ- ized in tlie city of I>iew-Yorli in the month of May, 1849. It was formed by the union, or fu- sion rather, of three societies whicli had existed for several years. (1) Tliere was The Foreign Evangelical Soclety. The history of this soci- ety is as follows : Shortly after the French Revolution of July, 1830, several Christian brethren in Paris wrote to gentlemen in New- Tork, — some of whom had formerly resided in France, in pursuit of commercial business, and others had visited that country as travelers, — to say that the new constitution to which that Revolution had given existence, granted to Protestants a large amount of religious liberty, and thus opened the door for evangelical effort. The communication of this cheering intelli- gence was accompanied by an earnest entreaty for help, from Christians of this land — a land which had bpen blest by receiving into its bo- som thousands of the excellent but persecuted Huguenots, at the Revocation of the Edict of Nantes, and for whose liberties La Fayette and thousands of other brave Frenchmen had suffered and bled. This appeal was not made in vain. The sum of $2,000 was raised and sent, and the sugges- tion was made that a Home Missionary Socie- ty, or something equivalent, should be formed, to carry forward the work in France. This led to the formation of The Evangelical Society of France in the year 1833. In 1834, at the request of that Society, a small association was formed in New York, called The French Association. This association two years later took the name of Tli£ Evangelical Association. In the month of May, 1834, at the request of that committee, the Rev. Mr. Baird, (now the Rev. Dr.Baird,) a;;Teod to go to France in the spring of 1835, with his family, for three years, and make Paris his home, for the purpose of learning what could be done by the American churches to aid their Protestant brethren in France. This mission was fulfilled, and not only was much information acquired in rela- tion to France, Belgmm, Italy, and other Pa- pal countries on the Continent, but a good deal was done in that period to promote the cause of temperance in the northern portions of it. Besides what Tlie French Association was en- abled to do for the cause of the gospel in France during those three years, the American Home Missionary Society was induced to make grants to the amount of §4,500 ; whilst the Amer- ican Bible and Tract Societies also did much. and reported to two public meetings in New York the state of things in Prance and other parts of Europe. In the month of May, 1839, The Foreign Evangelical Society was organ- ized, for the promotion of the work in Papal countries generally. The gentlemen who form- ed it were members of the Presbyterian, Con- gregational, and Reformed Dutch Churches. This Society existed from 1839 to 1849. Dur- ing this period of ten years the interest which was felt in the evangelization of the Papal world, steadily and perceptibly increased. The Rev. Dr. Baird returned to Europe, and his family made Paris and Geneva their home for four years more, whilst he on the one hand traveled extensively on the Continent in pros- ecution of the work, and on the other, re- turned twice to this country for the same object. At the end of ten years the society had mis- sionaries in France, Belgium, Sweden, Canada, Hayti, and South America, besides having aided the work in Germany, Poland, Russia, and Italy. The receipts of the Society were $10,127 in 1840, $13,725 in 1841, $15,733 in 1842, $9,303 in 1843, $12,392 in 1844, $16,- 037 in 1845, $19,930 in 1846, $14,670 in 1847, $19,214 in 1848, and 23,805 in 1849 : making in all, the sum of $154,345, received during a period of ten years ; all of which sum was ex- pended in the various branches of the Society's operations. The receipts of The French Asso- ciation, and The Evangelical Association, which preceded . The Foreign Evangelical Society, were $19,759. Besides all this, there passed through the hands of Dr. Gurdon Buck, a member of the Board, for the Grande Ligne Mission in Canada from first to last, nearly if not quite, $20,000, not including some $6,000 which were granted to that mission by the For- eign Evangelical Society, and which also passed through Dr. Buck's hands. (2) In the year 1843, The Ameeican Protestant Society was formed. It owed its existence to the fact that the immigra- tion of Roman Catholics from Europe had become very great, and was increasing every year with a fearful rapidity. It was felt that this foreign and un-Protestant element was becom- ing very large, and demanded special and appro- priate effort. Indeed, a similar movement in some respects, had been made some years earlier, when an "American Reformation Society " was formed by the exertions of the Bev. Dr. Browulee and others. And although that So- ciety did not exist long, it prepared the way for The American Protestant Society, of which we are speaking. This Society existed from 1843 to 1849. Its objects were : 1. To enlighten Protestants of this country in regard to the errors of Rome ; 2. To convert and save the votaries of Rome who are among us. In prosecution of these objects, the press was employed and a goodly number of colporteurs and other missionaries mcinfninpfl — InViorlno' nmonff the Irish. 116 AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRISTIAN UNION- German and other foreign Eomanists in the country. The Society interested itself greatly in the winter of 1848-'49 in behalf of the Portuguese exiles from Madeira, who were in Trinidad, and took measures to bring them to this country. The receipts of the Society were about $4,000 in 1844, $6,742 in 1845, $9,014 in 1846, $19,365 in 1847, $24,672 in 1848 and $28,363 in 1849 ; making a total of $92,160, all of which was laid out in prosecu1> ing the good work in our own country. (3) In the year 1843 also, an association was formed, in New-Tork, called The Philo-Italian Society, which afterwards took the name of The Christian Alliance. This society, as well as the American Protestant Society, embraced good men of many if not all the evangelical denominations. It is known that its object was to aid in causing the truth to enter into Italy — a difficult work before the year 1848, as regards all parts of that country, and still a difficult work excepting in the kingdom of Sardinia alone. As this society did not publish its proceedings, we are not able to say anything of them further than that it em- ployed an active agent, a Protestant Italian, for years on the confines of Italy, who lost no opportunity for sending tracts and the Sacred Scriptures into that country. Nor are we able to state the amount of its receipts. It was by the union of these three societies in the month of May, 1849, that Tlie Ameri- can and Foreign Christian Union was formed. The new Board of directors as well as the offi- cers, were chosen from among the boards and officers of the three societies. The new society undertook the work and assumed the responsi- bilities of the three societies, and entered at once upon its appropriate labors. It will be seen, therefore, that the field of this society's operations includes our own country and foreign lands. As to its objects, and the mode by which it aims to accomplish them, the following article (No. II.) of its con- stitution is full and explicit : " The object of this society shall be by missions, colportage, the press, and other appropriate agencies, to diffuse and promote the principles of religious liberty, and a pure and evangelical Chris- tianity, both at home and abroad, wherever a corrupted Christianity exists." The society contemplates imparting, so far as it may be able, a pure Christianity to those who now only know a corrupt form, whether in this land or in foreign countries. It may well deem its field a great and important one. The present Pope says that there are two hun- dred millions of Roman Catholics in the world. The present Emperor of Russia says that there are fifty millions of followers of the Greek Church in his vast empire. These two esti- mates make two hundred and fifty millions, and equal the fourth part of the human race. And although his holiness may make quite too liinh an estimate of the number of his " child- ren," yet if we include all the members of the Oriental Churches, (in the Turkish Empire, Independent Greece, the Ionian Isles, and the Austrian Empire) we shall certainly find that the Church of Rome and the six Oriental Churches embrace not much less than one quarter of the inhabitants of the globe. And how important that these two hundred and fifty millions should have the true gospel I They embrace powerful nations — France, Austria, Russia, to say nothing of the Italian, the Spanish, and the Portuguese races. The society has made a noble beginning. In the year ending in May, 1854, (the //A of its existence,) it employed between 130 and 140 inissionaries of all classes, at home and abroad, (more than half of whom were ordained ministers) belonging to seven different nations and speaking as many languages. Of these, 90 labored among the Romanists in the United States. Besides this, the Society aided the work directly and indirectly in many ways, both at home and abroad. In the two first years of its existence, 1850 and '51, it expend- ed nearly $15,000 for the removal to Illinois of spme 500 or 600 PortugTiese exiles, to whom we have already referred. It publishes a monthly Magazine of 48 pages. The American and Foreign Christian Union, which has a large circulation, and two monthly sheets, one in English and the other in German. It has issued quite a number of excellent books and tracts relating to Romanism, and is constantly publishing more. Its receipts were $57,223 in 1850, $45,707 in 1851, $55,653 in 1852, §67,597 in 1853 and $75,751 in the year end- ing in May, 1854. Making a total of $301,- 931 in five years, all of which, save a balance of $2,706, was expended in the prosecution of the work at home and abroad. This important society, still in its infancy, has indeed a great work on its hands. Be- sides all its other objects, it has the cause of '_' Religious Liberty," the " Protection of Amer- ican citizens when abroad in their rights of conscience and public worship," the " Defence of the public schools," and the proper " Ten- ure of church property" to look after. The great meetings which it held in the city of New-Tork, in behalf of some of these objects, in January, 1853 and 1854, (the Madiai, and religious rights of Americans when abroad) exerted a happy influence, and are an earnest of what it may, with God's blessing, be expected to achieve in the future. — Officee of the Soo. AMERICAN INDIAN MISSION ASSO- CIATION.— This Association is connected with the Baptist churches in the South-west. It was organized in Cincinnati, on the 26th of Oc- tober, 1842, and the Executive Board located at Louisville. At its first annual meeting, the year following, six missionaries were under appoint- ment, four of whom were in the field, and the amount of receipts was $3,000. The nex-t report gives 15 missionaries and assistants : 75 Vmr.. AMERICAN MISSIONARY ASSOCIATION. UT tisms; receipts $8,090. The third, seventeen laborers, two small schools, and about forty baptisms. The report for 1852, shows $15,811, receipts ; four missions, located among the Chootaws, Creeks, Weas, Piankeshaws, Mia^ mies, and Putawatamies ; with six stations and eight out-stations ; 28 missionaries and as- sistants ; 21 churches ; 126 baptisms during the year ; 165 pupils in schools ; and over 1300 communicants. (See Iiulkuts.) AMEEICAjST MISSIONARY ASSOCI- ATION. — This society was formed at Albany, N. T., September 3, 1846, by a convention of friends of missions, who were dissatisfied with what they understood to be the position of ex- isting missionary bodies, relative to slavery, oppressioQ, idolatry, polygamy, caste, &c., &c. Among the declared objects sought to be at tained by the Convention, were the following : To institute arrangements for the propagation of a pure and free Christianity, and for gather- ing and sustaining churches in heathen lands, from which these and other like forms of ini- quity should be excluded by terms of admis- sion, or by disciplinary process ; to unite evan- gelical Christians in an effort to give the Gos- pel to those who were destitute of it, without insisting upon those points on which the best and most enlightened friends of Christ still dif- fer ; and to secure a more direct responsibility in the management of the society, by giving to its evangelical supporters a vote in the con- trol of its operations. In the address issued by the Convention, it was said that the crisis then apparent in the cause of missions, afforded a favorable oppor- ttmity " for the review of existing usages and methods of missionary effort ; of comparing fliem with the New Testament standard ; of discarding whatever might be found wrong or defective, and supplying their place in such manner as might be found to accord with pri- mitive teachings and examples." The Consti- tution of the Association provides that " any person of evangelical sentiments, who professes faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, who is not a slaveholder, or in the practice of other immo- ralities, and who contributes to its funds, may become a member of the society." Its affairs are managed by an Executive Committee of twelve, subject to the revision of the annual meeting. Churches or local missionary bodies, agreeing to the principles of the society, may appoint and sustain missionaries of their own, through the agency of this body. " The so- ciety, in collecting funds, in appointing officers, agents, and missionaries, and in selecting fields of labor, and conducting the missionary work, will endeavor particularly to discountenance slavery, by refusing to receive the known fruits of unrequited labor, or to welcome to its em- ployment those who hold slaves." _ * Soon after the formation of the Association, the Unirni Missioaary Society, the Committee for the West Indian Mission, and the Western Evangelical Missionary Association were merged in it, and their missions were transferred to its care. These missions were in the island of Jamaica ; among the Ojibwa or Ckippeway In- dians of Minnesota ; and in Western Africa. The society has now, in »ddition to these, a mission in the Sandwich Ishmk ; in Siam; among the fugitives in Canada; among the Cliinese and other foreigners in California ; and a number of home missionaries in the destitute parts of the United States ; it has also recently undertaken a mission to the Copts in Egypt. Missionaries and assistant missionaries, male and female, in Africa 13 ; Jamaica 21 ; Siam 6 ; Sandwich Islands 2 ; Canada 2 ; California 2 ; among the Ojibwa Indians 19 ; for the Copta 2: Total, - 90 Native teachers and assistants, 9 Churches in the Foreign field, - 14 Number of Church members, - IICO The following table shows the receipts of the society, for each year since its formation : First year ending Sept. 1, 1847, $13,033 67 Second" " " 1848, 17,095 74 Third " " " 1849, 21,982 96 Fourth " " " 1850, 25,159 56 Fifth " " « 1851, 34,535 47 Sixth " » « 1852, 30,233 54 Seventh, " « 1853, 42,496 20 Total, 184,537 14 It will thus be seen that the aggregate of the society's receipts for the first seven years of its existence, has been $184,537 14, and its average increase about 24 per cent, per annum. The home missionaries of the Association are specially instructed to discourage intempe- rance and slavery, and labor for their removal. The churches to which they minister, as well in the slave states as elsewhere, regard slave- holding as a disciplinable ofience, and exclude those who practice it from their communion. Twelve churches have been formed on these principles in Kentucky and North Carolina, and are reported to be in a prosperous condition. The number of home missionaries aided by the Association, the first year of its existence, was four; in the seventh year, ninety. The number of churches under their care was one hundred and eight. The whole number of church members is not known, a portion of the missionaries having made their reports to an auxiliary society.— Rev. Ceo. Whipple. AMHERST : A town in the province of Maulmain, in British Burmah. It was founded in 1826 by Lord Amherst, at which time it b&- came a station of the American Baptist Mis- sion in Burmah. It is the burial-place of Mrs. Ann H. Judson. AMOY : A city of China, situated on an island of the same name, on the coast north- ward from Canton ; being one of the five ports open to the foreign trade. 118 AKEITEUM— AKMEISTANS. ANEITEUM : An island of New Hebrides, where is a station of the London Missionary Society. ANNAMABOE; On the Gold Coast, West Africa, lat. 5° 10' N. long, lo 5' W. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society, commenced in 1835 : has now 1 missionary, 3 chapels, 5 local preachers, 15 teachers, 237 scholars, 254 members, and 900 attendants on public worship. ANTIGUA : One of the West India Isles, lat. 17° 8' N. long. 61° 52' W. A district of the Wesleyan Missionary Society, commenced in 1786 ; has now 17 missionaries, 8 stations, 44 chapels, 42 local preachers, 508 teachers, 12,000 members, 5,523 scholars, and 33,650 attendants on public worship. AOTEA. (Beeoham-Dale) in New Zea- land. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. Commenced in 1823. Has now one missionary, 10 chapels, 26 local preachers, 315 members, 590 scholars, and 600 attendants on public worship. APIA ; A station of the London Mission- ^■y Society on the Island of Upolu, one of the /Sailioan group. \, ARABIAN COAST : An out^tation of the Wesleyan Missionary Society, in South America. (See Demerara.) ARABKIE, : A station of the American Board among the Armenians, in the Eastern part of Asia Minor, not far from the Euphrar tes. Population 6000 in the town, and 15,000 including the immediately surrounding dis- trict. ARGOT : A city of Eastern Hindoostan, seventy miles S. W. of Madras. It is the centre of. a very populous district, and was occupied by the American Board in 1852. ARMENIANS : Armenia, in the most flourishing period of its history, was divided into fifteen provinces, the central one of which was Ararad, the second cradle of the human race. (Gen. 8 : 4, Jer. 51 : 27, and in Heb., 2 Kings 19 : 37, Is. 37 : 38.) Its situation is at the eastern extremity of Asia Minor, lying at short distances from the Mediterranean on the south-west, the Black sea on the north- west, the Caspian sea on the north-east, and at a much greater distance from the Persian Gulf on the south-east. Its western boundary is not far from six hundred miles east of Con- stantinople. It extends about 430 miles in longitude, and about 300 in latitude ; having on the north the ancient Albania, Iberia, and Colchis ; on the west, Pontus and Cappadocia ; on the south, Mesopotamia and Assyria ; and on the east, Media Atropatane, or the modern Aderbaijan. It is an elevated region, abound- ing in lofty mountains, and having a climate of considerable severity. Several large and celebrated rivers go out from it ; the Euphra- tes and Tigris towards the Persian Gulf; the Jorokh (Akarapsis) to the Black sea ; the Aras (iVraxes) and the Koor (Cyrus) to the Caspian Sea. Some portions of the country, particularly the province of Ararad (Ararat) which in the Bible gives name to the whole of Armenia, are of great fertility. History. — The Armenian race is claimed to be, and probably is, of the highest antiquity. The father of it, according to their own tradi- tion, was Haig, a son of 'Togarmah, the son of Gomer, who was one of the sons of Japhet. Hence to this day, in their own language, they call themselves Haik ; their country, also, they designate by the game name, or by the deriva- tive Haiasdan. The seventh of the dynasty of Haig was the famous hero Aram, from whom the names Armenia and Armenian originated, by which the country and people have been known among foreigners for many ages. That distinguished monarch, after treeing his own territory from invaders, against whom the Ar- menians seem to have had to maintain a con- stant resistance, extended his arms into Cappa- docia, and gave laws and his name successive- ly to the regions called, First, Second, and 'Third Armenia ; which, united under the gen- eral name of Armenia Minor, extended from the Euphrates to Oaasarea, and from the mountains of Pontus to those of Cilicia. Armenia Minor passed early into the hands of the Romans, but deserves even at this day, on account of the number of its Armenian inhabitants, to retain its ancient name. The principal foreign relations of Armenia, during the early part of its history, were doubt- less with the neighboring kingdoms of Assyria, Media, and Babylon. The minute details giv- en by Armenian historians of this traditionary period, are, of course, entitled to little confi- dence, although the occasional intermingling of this portion of their history with that of Scripture, gives us certain stand-points of in- terest and certainty from which to view it. In 328 A. C, Alexander, whose empire absorb- ed so many oriental monarchies, extended his conquests over Armenia, and extinguished the dynasty of Haig, which is said, with a few grafts upon it of foreign stocks, to have held during eighteen centuries uninterrupted pos- session of the throne. After the death of A lex- ander, Armenia was ruled by governors, sometimes of Greek and sometimes of native origin, who derived their authority from S&- leucia and Macedonia, and at times laid claim to entire independence. It was next subdued by the power that overturned the empire of the Seleucidae in the East and formed an im- passable barrier to the ambition of Rome. A. 0. 149, Arshag the Great, (Arsaces, called also Mithridates I.) grandson of the founder of the Parthian Empire, placed his brother Vagharshag (Valarsaoes) upon the throne of Armenia. Thus commenced this branch oi the Arsacidse, under whoso reign of 577 years, the Armenians enjoyed greater prosperity than during any other period of their history. Dik- ran (Tigranes) the fourth of this dynasty, was ARMENIANS. 119 an ally of Mihrtad, (Mithridates) the great king of Pontus, in his wars with Sylla and Luculhis. Thus he became involved in a war with Rome, which Pompey ended by imposing upon him humiliating conditions of peace. New alliances against Rome led to the over- running of his country by Anthony, in his Par- thian wars, 34 A. 0. The part north of the Aras was given to his son, who was soon ex- pelled, and the remainder became permanently tributary to Augustus. With tliis division the reigning family, after the leading members had died in captivity, was also divided. The northern branch, alternately upheld and de- throned by the Romans and Persians, was at length supplanted by Georgian princes, who again yielded to a brother of the liing of Per- sia, and finally after a separation of 8.5 years the whole country was reunited under the southern branch. This branch had its capital at Medzpin, (Nisibis.) From a remote anti- quity the north-west part of Mesopotamia was inhabited by a race resembling the Armenians iu person, manners, and language ; and at the commencement of the Christian era, constitu- ted, according to Armenian report, under the name of Mesopotamia of the Armenians, an integral part of their kingdom, and was the residence of the court for 228 years. Abgar, one of their sovereigns, they say, transferred the seat of government to Oorfa, and was there converted to Christianity. Having believed in Christ from mere report, he corresponded with him, received from him his portrait miracu- lously impressed upon a handkerchief, and was then instructed and baptized, together with many of his people, by Thaddeus, whom the apostle Thomas, in obedience to the command of Christ, sent on this mission, and who extend- ed his labors, vrith success, to other places. But the successors of Abgar apostatized from the faith, and martyred, besides many common Christians, several of the apostles and disciples of our Lord, and nearly exterminated Chris- tianity from the country. The third in suc- cession from Abgar having obtained from Vespasian, A.D. 75, the dominion of the whole of Ai-menia proper, by ceding to the Romans his possessions in Mesopotamia, removed his court to the province of Ararat. In A.D. 302 Durtad (Tiridates) the king and his court were baptized and the nation received Christianity. The instrument of this great work was Gre- gory the Illuminator, since the highest saint in tlie Armenian calendar. Without receiving the stories of his numerous and wonderful mi- racles, we must admit him to have been a re- markable man. Their conversion to Chris- tianity increased their hatred to the Armenian royal house of the Sassanian dynasty of Persia, which inflicted on the country unspeakable misery uutil A. D. 381, Armenia was divided between the king of Persia and the emperor of Constantinople. It was not, however, until A. D. 428 that the Arsaoidae dynasty came to an end and the country was reduced to the condition of a dependent proyince. This brief sketch allows no details of the subsequent conflicts of the Armenians against their Magian persecutors of Persia ; their fall into the hands of the khalifs of Mohammed, A. D. 637 ; the miseries which they suffered from the rival claims of the courts of Damas- cus and Constantinople ; their varying fortunes to the invasion of the Seljookian Turks, from which they suffered terrible massacres, A. D. 1049 ; of the petty independent kingdom in Cilicia with its changing relations to Moghtil, Crusader, Turkish, etc., neighbors, to its over- throw by the sultans of Egypt and its annexar tion to that dominion, A. D. 1375 ; of the awful devastations inflicted by the waves of invasion that rolled over them under the gui- dance, successively in the 13th and 14th cen- turies, of Chingiz Khan and Timurlane ; and the final conquest effected by the Turkmans and Osmanli Turks, the latter of whom still rule over a large part of Armenia ; Russia since the beginning of the present centuCT, having obtained a large portion of it from Turkey and Persia, between whom it was for a long time shared. Few countries have a his- tory more painful than Armenia. TIlb Armenian Church. — Receiving Chris- tianity in the beginning of the fourth century, the Armenians received it in the form which had then become common in the East. Its subsequent development was natm'ally in the same line of direction as in other national churches starting from substantially the same point of departure. While soon separated, on the doctrine relating to the person of Christ, from the Roman and Greek churches, it has never ceased to be much influenced by them. Previous to the invention of the Armenian character by the learned monk Mesrob, A. D. 406, writing was done among them in the Syriac and Greek characters, and the state of letters was very low. This invention intro- duced a new era, the first and most important literary effort being the translation of the Bible into Armenian, A. D. 411, by Mesrob and Isaac the Catholicos. The version was made from the Septuagint, and of course has all the faults of the latter with some serious ones of its own. It is still in u^, and has been a boon of immense value to the nation. It is held in considerable estimation by Biblical scholars. It is the oldest Armenian book extant, the next being the history of the nation by Moses Chorenensis, which was written about half a century later. The Armenians were unaffected by the Arian and Nestorian heresies, but in the year 491 a synod of their bishops rejected the decisions of the council of Chalcedon, while, most inconsistently, it also anathematized Eutyches. Although strenuously contending for the formula of one nature in Christ, and thereby cut ofif as heretical and schismatical by the Greek and Romish Churches, modern 120 ARMENIANS. missionaries are generally disposed to regard the Armenians as differing more in terminology than in idea from the orthodox faith on that point They agree with the Greeks and other oriental Churches in rejecting the " filio-que " from the Nicene creed and maintaining the procession of the Holy Spirit from the Father only. With some difference in forms and modes of worship, the religions opinions of the Armenians are mostly like those of the Greeks. The sign of the cross is used on all occasions ; but made by the Greeks with three fingers, by the Armenians with two, by the Jacobites with one — the Greek usage pointing to the Trinity, the Armenian to the two natures made one in the person of Christ, and the Jacobite to the Divine unity. They profess to hold to the seven sacraments of the Latin church ; but in fact extreme unction exists among them only in name, the prayers so designated being inter- mingled with those of confirmation, which latter rite is performed by the priest at the time of baptism. Infants are baptized, as commonly in the Greek and other oriental churches, by a partial immersion in the fount and three times pouring water on the head. Converted Jews, etc., though adults, are bap- tized in the same manner, for the reason that, according to the tradition of their church, the Saviour was thus baptized in Jordan, They readily admit to their communion Ro- manists and Protestants baptized by sprink- ling, differing in this from the Greeks, who, claiming orthodoxy to their church alone and denying salvation to all others, receive none, however previously baptized, without rebap- tizing them. They believe firmly in transub- stantiation, and adore the host in the mass, which stupendous perversion of the sacrament is followed by the same evils that are witnessed from it in the Eomish Church. The people partake, however, in both kinds, the wafer or broken bread (unleavened) being dipped in undiluted wine, (the Greeks use leavened bread and wine mixed with water,) and laid carefully on the tongue. It must be received fasting. They reject the Latin purgatory, but believing that the souls of the departed may be benefited by the aid of the Church, (which, of course, must be paid for,) they pray for the dead. Saint-worship is carried to an extraor- dinary length, the addresses to saints being often grossly idolatrous, and the mediation of Christ lost sight of in the liturgical services of the Church as it is in the minds of the peo- ple. The cross and pictures of the saints are also objects of worship as possessing inherent efBcacy. The Supreme Being is likewise re- presented under the form of an aged, venerable man, with whom, and the Son under the form of a young man, and 'the Holy Spirit symbol- ized as a dove, the Virgin Mary is associated in the same picture. The perpetual virginity of the latter is held as a point of preeminent importance. Confession to the priesthood, jr. order to absolution, is deemed essential to sal- vation. Penances are imposed ; but absolution is without money, and indulgences are never given. Baptism confers regeneration and cleansing from sin, original and actual ; spirit- ual life is maintained by penances and sacrar ments ; and the priest holds in his hand the passport to heaven. The merit of good works is acknowledged, particularly of asceticism. Monachism, celibacy, fasting, etc., are viewed as in other Eastern and Western churches; the number of fast-days, when no animal food of any kind can be eaten, is 165 in the year. On the fourteen great feasWays the observance of the day is more strict than that of the Sab- bath, which last is as in Eoman Catholic countries. Minor feasts are even more numer- ous than the days in the year. The church services are performed in the ancient tongue, not now understood by the common people, and in a manner altogether perfunctory and painful to an enlightened mind. There are nine different grades of clergy, each receiving a distinct ordination by the laying on of hands. Pour of these are below the order of dea- con, and are called porters, readers, exorcists, and candle-lighters. After these come the sub-deacons, the deacons, the priests, then the bishops, and last of all, the catholicos. The catholicos is ordained by a council of bishops. He is the spiritual head of the church, who alone ordains bishops, and can furnish the mei- ran or sacred oil used by bishops in ordaining the inferior clergy, and in the various ceremo- nies of the church. The priests are obliged to be married men, and can never rise higher than the priesthood, except in case of the death of a wife, when, not being allowed to marry a second time, they may enter among the vmiabeds, an order of celibate priests, who are attached to the churches as preachers, (the married priests do not usually preach,) or live together in mo- nasteries, and from among whom the bishops, etc., on whom the law of celibacy is imposed, are taken. The ecclesiastical polity is modi- fied somewhat according to the political gov- ernments under which, in the countries of their dispersion, the Armenians live. Originally, there was but one head to the church, whose residence was at the seat of the imperial or kingly government. Subsequently, in the dis- tracted condition of civil affairs, rival catholi- coses rose up. At present three are acknowl- edged—one at Aghtamar, in the I^ake Van ; one at Sis, with a small body of followers in the ancient Cilicia and neighboring territory ; and one at Echmiadzin, acknowledged by the Armenians in Europe, Asia Minor, and Armenia proper. There are two patriarchs, one at Constantinople and the other at Jeru- salem ; the latter, however, being of little ac- count compared with the former. This office is not a,-n ecclesiastical, but a civil one, as an eccle- siastic the patriarch being only a bishop, hav- ing properly no spiritual authority above that ARMENIANS. 121 of any other bishop. He receives his appoint- ment from the Sultan, on a nomination of the primates of the nation. His powers are defined by an imperial firman, and he ranks, civilly, with the great pashas of the empire. The Armenian patriarchate of Jerusalem, the juris- diction of which is very limited, dates back to A. D. 1311, and owes its existence to the Sul- tan of Egypt. Mohammed II., on the capture of Constantinople in 1453, finding a patriarch "with spiritual jurisdiction over the whole Greek church, sagaciously continued him at the head of the Greeks that he might govern them through him ; and transferring the Ar- menian bishop of Brusa to the capital, he made him, in like manner, patriarch of the Arme- nians. As this officer is made responsible for the good conduct of his people, he is clothed with such prerogatives as are necessary to ena- ble him to maintain his authority. Important limitations have recently {see article on Turkey) been imposed, but his powers are still great. Heretofore there has been so little check that his power has been almost absolute in respect to the infliction of punishment. A prison exists within his own precincts, over which he has had entire control. A note from him to the Porte (Turkish government) has been, in most cases, sufficient to secure the banishment of any person, ecclesiastic or layman, to a dis- tant part of the empire. If, owing to the rank or influence of the individual, difficulty inter- posed in procuring the order, a bribe was ready and generally settled the question. The patri- arch's sanction being required to such applica- tions, it has been easy to practice the heaviest oppressions by defeating attempts to procure the official passports needed to go from place to place, or licenses for occupying houses or shops, or prosecuting trades, marrying, burying the dead, etc., etc. ; and as our history will show, the power to oppress thus possessed, has been wielded with terrible severity, to prevent the in- troduction of a purer faith and practice among this people. The despotic power of the patri- archs is practically, however, much modified by the power of the primates of the commu- nity, who are chiefly bankers, and all of them men of great wealth. The patriarch is really the creature of the primates, and can do little without their approval. A permanent central- ization of power, like that of Rome, is hindered by the intrigues of rival parties in this body, making and unmaking and controlling the patriarch, who is thus, in general, merely the tool of the party, which, for the time being, by influence derived from its relations to those in high places of the Turkish government, or by its more liberal use ofmoney, happens to be in the ascendant. As circumstances change and parties fluctuate, measures in process, or in prospect, are liable to be interfered with and frustrated ; and it will be seen how perse- cution has often been averted, and quiet secured to missionaries and their native coadjutors in the prosecution of their evangelical labors, by jealousies and party feuds among the spiritual and temporal leaders of the Armenian com- munity. The patriarch enjoys the title of arch- bishop, and has the appointment of bishops to their sees, but, as before stated, does not or- dain to the office. One of the darkest features of the state of the church is the universality of simony in practice, although condemned in its standards, and denounced in words ; but it is notorious that the patriarch has to expend large sums in obtaining aad retaining his office, to reimburse which, and for his own emolument, he sells to the bishops their sees, who again ordain to the priesthood for money. The moral character of the priests (being mar- ried men) is superior to that of the vartabeds and higher clergy, that of the latter being generally confessedly bad. Their acquainta,nce with the scriptures is very limited ; many among them are unable to read them in the ancient tongue. The state of education in general is lamentably low. A gross supersti- tion has taken the place of true religion, and the light of truth and hoHness, recently re- kindled, beginning to shine with more than its pristine splendor among that people, had well nigh gone out in utter darkness. The annals of the Armenian church for the last few cen- turies are a record of corruption, intrigue, and crime, that cannot be contemplated without the deepest sorrow and disgust. There is little, indeed, in its history, from the beginning, to cheer the heart, but the unshrinking fhmness with which it has in successive ages adhered to the profession of its faith and the Christian name, under the dreadful oppression of pagan and Mohammedan conquerors and the strong- est worldly inducements to apostatize ; and it has also resisted wily efforts, repeatedly put forth, and in some instances with sanguine expectation of success, to subject it to the iron rule of Eome. Language and Literature. — Many of the Armenians claim, for their nation, that it has preserved the language of Noah, unaffected by the confusion of tongues at Babel, and therefore, that it has the original speech of our first parents in Paradise; without coqceding this modest claim we are probably safe in allowing their language a very early origin. Its relations with other languages are fewer than those which obtain in the case of most others ; yet it clearly belongs to the Indo-Germanic family. It is enriched very considerably from the San- scrit ; and it has no affinity with the Semitic tongues. As found in its earliest existing, as well as later forms, it abounds in gutturals, and is harsh to the ear of the foreigner ; but it has strength, flexibility, and compass, and is capa- ble of expressing thought by evolving from it- self, without drawing from abroad, new terms for the purpose. The conversion of the nation to Christianity, led naturally to the introduc- tion of certain words from the Greek, and im- 122 AEMENIANS. pressed a new character upon it in several re- spects. It has also received accessions from other languages, and as now spoken, differs very considerably from the ancient tongue pre- served in books. The Ararat, or eastern dia- lect, spoken in Armenia, (excepting the pashar lie of Erzrum,) and to the east of it, has de- parte'd less from the ancient than the Constan- tinopolitan or western dialect. The latter has become moulded in its idioms and construction by the Turkish, and is usually spoken with an infusion of Turkish words. As now cultivated, it is becoming purified from these, and receiv- ing, as needed, added wealth from the ancient or original Armenian. There has been little published in this dialect as yet, by adherents to the Armenian Church, but the publications of convents at Vienna and Venice aiid Komish and Protestant missionaries have ushered in a new era for this form of the Armenian tongue, and the new intellectual life called into action by missionary labors, and the contact of the occidental civilization with that of the Orient, has begun the creation of a valuable literature in it. The modern dialects differ from the an- cient language, chiefly in the disuse of certain words, the introduction of certain words and phrases not known to the ancient, and a change in grammatical forms, collocations of words and idiomatic expressions. The literature of the ancient consists mainly of historical, ecclesias- tical, liturgical, doctrinal, and polemical writ^ ings of the so-called Christian Fathers ; and of these some are well worthy the study of the learned. Amount of Population and where found. — The number of the Armenians is variously esti- mated at' from 2 1-2 to 6 or 7 millions. It is impossible to ascertain it with any degree of accuracy. They have become widely dispersed from their original seat, everywhere, like the Jews, preserving their distinct nationality and characteristics. Multitudes of them were car- ried away captives, by Saracens and Greeks ; Toghrul and Timurlane carried thousands to unknown countries ; the Egyptians removed 60,000 to Egypt ; and it is known that the Persians have always carried their captives into servitude. Multitudes, moreover, have, at various periods, been induced by oppression at home, voluntarily to seek an asylum in distant countries, to say nothing of other multitudes that commerce has enticed away. We are not surprised, therefore, at finding them, not only in almost every part of Turkey and Persia, but also in India, as well as in Russia, Poland, and many other parts of Europe. Character. — A sad depravation of morals pre- vails among all the populations of the East ; but in respect to moral traits the Armenians compare favorably with other races. Physi- cally, thoy are athletic and vigorous : the Ar- menian porters of Smyrna and Constantinople, are men of great strength. In the mountains of Cilicia and in some other localities, we still find traces of the martial spirit, for which once the nation was distinguished ; but in general, ages of subjection have disposed them to quiet submission, and abandoning hope of political restoration as a nation, to seek compensation in the diligent cultivation of the arts of Wace. The Armenians are cultivators of the soil, ar- tizans, and merchants ; in industry, enterprise, shrewdness, and perseverance _ they take pr^ cedence of other populations in the East, and make themselves indispensable to the Turks who rule over them. They build palaces for the Sultan and his ministers, make his powder and cast his cannon, collect and disburse his revenue, and in fine, make themselves every where indispensable to the government, and in the business transactions of society. They have supplanted the Jews in their special pre- rogative of dealers in money. The Armenian bankers of Constantinople, from their wealth and relation, as creditors, to pashas and minis- ters of state, have much consideration and in- fluence, while in demeanor servile to those from whom their wealth is gained, and often made to suffer under the pressure of despotic power. The employment most congenial to the Armenian, and in which he reaps the most sure and richest harvest of success, is that of traffic. Through the agency of the merchants of this class the products of the far Bast and the West are exchanged across the countries of Western and Central Asia, and by means of the constant intercourse thus kept up, a bond of sympathy is maintained between the most distant portions of the race. Sedate and staid, the Armenian is a striking contrast to the vi- vacious and talkative Greek ; but in solid qual- ities of mind and heart is, to say the least, not his inferior. With less of imagination and emotion, the bent of his mind is more to the practical and the real. He learns languages with less facility than many others, but in mathe- matics, in the physical sciences, and in intel- lectual and moral science, he shows an aptitude, and makes proficiency equal to that of any European race. The Armenians show a high degree of reli- gious sentiment, manifesting itself not merely in a zealous and bigoted devotion to a religion of forms, but in an impressibility under' the presentation of the great truths relating to man's spiritual condition and prospects. In this respect they differ greatly from races like the Greek, Persian, and others ; and furnish a ground of hope, which the remarkable progress of an evangelical reformation among them is daily strengthening, that they will receive, and spread throughout the vast regions over which they are scattered, the blessings of a pure and saving Christianity. Preparation for a work of Evangelization. It was a favorable circumstance that the er- rors and corruptions introduced into the Arme- nian Church had never been reduced to sys- tematic form and set forth by authority of AHMBNIANS. 123 Synod or Council, as was done in the Council of Trent for the Eomish Church. No Synod- leal decision had ever rejected the word of God as the ultimate authority to bind the con- science ; and, however practically the tra- ditions of men and authority of the Church were exalted above the Bible, the sentiment has been inwrought into the Armenian mind^ too deeply to be eradicated, that the Scrip- tures, (not including the Apocryphal books, which though sometimes read in the churches, have never been considered canonical) are the court of last resort, against whose decisions nothing can be made to stand. The writings of their own fathers contain abundant testi- mony to the true Protestant doctrine on this point. The Bible was locked up from the mass of the people in the ancient language, but the educated among them could read it, and there was no ecclesiastical rule to forbid the reading on the part of any. The New Testament was even used as a common text- book in commencing the study of the language in the schools. The honor of having made the first attempt in modern days for the refor- mation of the Armenian church, is due to a priest by the name of Debajy Oghlu, about A. D. 1760. He lived in the quarter of Con- stantinople called Psamatia. He appears to have been acquainted with the character of Luther, of whom he speaks in terms of decided approbation, in a book which he wrote on the errors of the Church, and in which he casti- gates both clergy and people with an unspar- ing hand. But while he makes constant re- ference to the Bible, testing every principle and ceremony by that high standard, and severely reproves superstition and vice, he ex- hibits no correct appreciation of the only wear pon that can overthrow error, the doctrine of justification by faith alone through grace. His book was never printed, but copies of it were circulated from hand to hand, and at the beginning of the present reformation in the Church they were brought out from the ob- scurity in which they had been kept, and used with considerable effect. How much influence this book may have had in preparing the way for the reformation now in progress, cannot be known. In the year 1813, the British and Russian Bible societies, becoming interested in the Armenians, undertook to aid them with a sup- ply of the word of God, copies of which were very rare and dear. An edition of the Arme- nian Bible (the version of the 5th century,) was commenced by the latter society at St. Petersburgh, and by the former at Calcutta. In 1815, the former edition, (of 5,000 copies) was completed ; the latter edition (of 2,000 copies) was furnished two years afterwards. "The Russian Society also soon published an edition of 2,000 copies of the ancient Arme- nian New Testament by itself The report of the British Society for 1814, says, " The print- ing of the Armenian Testament nas awakened great attention among the Armenians, parti- cularly in Russia ; and a fervent desire has been manifested on their part to possess that invaluable treasure." The Emperor Alexan- der being at that time a warm promoter of the objects of the Bible Society throughout his dominions, archbishops and bishops, governors and generals, and nearly all the nobility of the empire were among the patrons and supporters of the institution. Among the rest was Bprem (Ephr-aim) the Catholicos of the Ar- menian Church, having his residence in Rus- sian Armenia, who was elected one of the vice- presidents of the society, and strongly favored its efforts in behalf of his own co-religionists. The British Society also put into circulation among the Armenians of Turkey large num- bers of New Testaments previous to 1823 ; and in that year we find it publishing at Constan- tinople an edition of 5000 copies of the New Testament, and of 3,000 copies of the four gospels alone. These were widely distributed through various agencies. The teachers of schools, some of the priests and deacons and all of the higher clergy, having made the ancient language their special study, were prepared to be benefited by .these ; and in the sequel the reformation began among the teachers. But the discovery then made that that language was not understood by the mass of the people, led to the issuing by the Russian Society of the New Testament translated into the Arme- no-Turkish, in 1822, and in the following year by the British Society in the vulgar Armenian tongue. A portion of the Armenians of Tur- key (perhaps one-third, chiefly in the more southern parts of Asia Minor,) have lost en- tirely the use of their vernacular tongue, and speak only Turkish ; and it was for them espe- cially that the first named translation was in- tended, being in the Turkish language written with the Armenian character. These translar tions were very defective, yet were useful. They have since been supplanted by new and greatly improved translations made and pub- lished under the auspices of the British and American Bible Societies by missionaries of the American Board. Up to this period, the Armenian ecclesiastics made no opposition, so far as is known, to the circulation of the Bible among their people, and some of them favored it ; but when Messrs. Lewis and Baker, agents of the Bible Society in 1823, sought the ap- probation of the Patriarch at Constantinople to the printing of a version of the New Tes- tament in the modern Armenian, which the common people could understand, that digni- tary refused his sanction in the most positive terms. He even threatened that if_ such a work were attempted, he would prohibit the perusal of it, and punish such as should be found in the possession of it ; and the clergy generally, so far as they were consulted, unan- imously reprobated the plan of such a transla- 124 ARMENIANS tion. HieraroKism dreads the light of God's word, and must change its nature before it can tolerate any movement towards truly spiritual reform. Mission op the Ambkican Boabd. — Early in 1521, Mr. Parsons, of the mission to Syria and the Holy Land, on his first visit to Jerusa^ lem, found there some Armenian pilgrims, with whom he had an interesting conversation on religious subjects. Deeply interested in their appearance, he ventured to suggest the thought of having a mission from the American churches sent to Armenia itself The sugges- tion was favorably received. Mr. Fisk soon after wrote from Smyrna to Boston, recom- mending this measure. Before any thing had been heard from them on the subject, it had also been thought of in Boston, and subse- quent events decided the adoption of the plan. One of these events was the conversion, at Beirut, of three Armenian ecclesiastics, as the fii-st fruits of the labors of the brethren there. Considering the small number of Armenians in Syria, and that the brethren of that mission were not sent to them, that the first conver- sions' should be from among them is a singular fact. Two of the converts, Dionysius (Sara- bet and Hagop (Tacob or Jacob Agha) were bishops ; the other, Krikor, (Gregory Worta- bet) was a distinguished preacher (vartabed). These persons, by their correspondence with Constantinople and other parts of Turkey, did much towards preparing the minds of their countrymen for the interesting spiritual work which afterwards commenced among them. Another circumstance was also influential. Mr. King, — now Rev. Dr. King, of Athens, — on leaving Syria in 1825, addressed a farewell letter to the Boman Catholics, stating the reasons why he could not be u. Papist. This letter was translated into Armenian by Bishop Dionysius, and a copy in manuscript was sent to some Armenians of distinction in Constan- tinople. An extraordinary effect was pro- duced on those who read it. A meeting, it is said, was called in the patriarchal church, at which the letter was read, and the references to Scripture examined, and, as if by common consent, it was agreed to do something for the improvement of their church. Out of this grew immediately the famous school of Pesh- timaljian. This individual was, in many re- spects, an extraordinary man. He was a crit- ical and accurate scholar in the ancient Arme- nian tongue ; deeply versed in all the lore of his own nation ; familiar with the theology of the Eastern and Eomish churches, — the doings of their councils, and the general history of the Church ; — and, withal, a diligent student of the Bible. Disgusted with the superstitions around him and the character of the clergy, he was easily led, by the writings of certain French infidels, for a time to regard all reli- gion as a delusion and a lie ; but afterwards was brought back to the ground that the Bible is the true word of God, and the only standard of faith. It is a remarkable circum- stance that such a man should have Deen placed at the head of a school established within the precincts of the Patriarchate, and had committed to Mm the training of the can- didates for the priesthood, the completion ot the regular course of study in this institution being required as a condition to ordination. Cautious although he was, in speaking ot the errors of the Church,— and even timid and sometimes time-serving in the presence of the bigoted,— in a silent, unostentatious manner, he gradually led his pupils into new paths of inquiry, and, almost before they were aware Qf it themselves, they came to believe that the church may err, and actually does err, in many of her teachings. Afterwards, when the Gos- pel began to take effect, and he saw some of his former pupils boldly advocating the doc- trines of evangelical religion, he became alarmed, and tried to keep them back ; but, subsequently convinced that they were right, and, in fact, only carrying into practice what they had learned of himself, he ever after strongly, though still privately, encouraged them in their endeavors for the spiritual re- generation of their countrymen. Never, till the day of his death, in the year 1838, did he so far overcome his native timidity, as openly to avow himself an evangelical man ; but it is impossible to calculate the amount of influence exerted by him, in preparing the minds of men to experience the power of the gospel, as taught by foreign laborers when they came into that field of evangelization. All the first converts under the labors of the missionaries of the Board in Constantinople, and many of the later ones, were from among the alumni of Peshtimaljean's school. The establishment of a mission among the Armenians of Turkey was resolved upon by the Prudential Committee of the Board in the year 1829. As a preparatory step, Rev. Eli Smith and Rev. H. G. O. Dwight were sent to explore the field. The tour was commenced in the spring of 1830, and occupied somewhat more than a year ; and a mass of new informar tion was obtained, Voth in regard to the Ar- menians and the Nestorians, which has since been of essential service in prosecuting mission- ary operations in that part of the world. Early in the year 1831, the Rev. W. Gooddl, then at Malta, was instructed to proceed to Constan- tinople with his family. They arrived on the 9th of June of the same year ; and shortly after, he called upon the Armenian patriarch, and sought his cooperation in establishing schools on an improved plan among the people. The patriarch received him with true oriental politeness, and promised to furnish some school- masters, or priests, to learn the new system of instruction, so as to be able to open schools ; but the promise was all he did in the matter On the 5th of June, 1832, Rev. H. G. AIIMENIANS. 125 Dwight took up his permanent residence at Constantinople, with his family, having been appointed to labor among the Armenians. Bev. W. G. Schanffler joined the Constantino- ple station the last of July of the same year, ' his labors being confined chiefly to the Jews. [ The number of Armenian visitore at the' mission gradually increased ; and early in thei year 1833, Hohannes Sahakyan, a pupil in the school of Peshtimaljian, became a deeply inte- rested inquirer, and an earnest student of the Scriptures, in which he found sympathy and aid from his beloved preceptor. The follow- ing year he found a friend to whom he com- municated his views, and who, after some opposition, embraced them. Mr. Sahakyan soon became a most eflBcient instrument in promoting the truth, as he has continued to be up to the present time ; and never, from that moment, has the mission been without the most satisfactory evidence of the special presence of the Holy Spirit among the Armenian peo- ple. On the 18th of July, 1833, Mr. Sahakyan and his companion, in a very solemn manner, committed themselves to the instruction and guidance of the missionaries. One»of them wa? employed as a translator of the mission, and the other as teacher of a school for Arme- nUiu youth. They were soon brought into the clear light of the gospel, and led to trust, with a ciilra and joyful confidence, in Jesus Christ a; the only and all-suffioient Saviour. But opposition now began to manifest itself By socret clerical interference, both Armenian and Komish, the school was broken up. An Armenian jeweler of great respectability and inflaence, and strongly attached to the doc- trines and rites of his church, had his mind wrought up into a state of great alarm, in reference to the course of these two young men, by the secret insinuations of a Roman priest. They were represented as being the hired tools of certain foreigners, employed to seduce the people, and lead them into danger- ous heresy. The jeweler prevailed upon Pesh- timaljian to summon the delinquents before him, in order to examine them as to the alleged heresy. He himself was present, and began the examination with great sternness and se- verity ; charging them with violating their obligations to the church, and dishonoring G-od. They were proceeding to vindicate themselves, when Peshtimaljian took the busi- ness wholly out of their hands, and poured upon the astonished jeweler such a flood of light, from history as well as Scripture, to show that their church is wrong, and in many things idolatrous, that even the young men themselves were amazed. They afterwards had an oppor- tunity of speaking for themselves, Peshtimal- jian aiding them in their references to the Scriptures whenever their own memories failed; and the result was, that the jeweler was not only entirely satisfied that they were in the right, but immediately became himself an open and powerful advocate of the evangelical doctrines The circumstance of the closing of the school became a subject of some notoriety, and some minds were by this means put upon a new train of thought. Mr. Sarkis Yarjabed, teacher of grammar in the school of Peshtimaljian, became a convert at this time, and was after- wards highly useful to the mission as a trans- lator. In the autumn of 1833, the missionaries were invited to witness the ordination of fifteen Armenian priests at the Patriarchal church in Constantinople. None had been ordained for many years, in consequence of the new rulo which required that only such as had received a regular education at the school of Peshtimal- jian should be eligible for ordination. Nearly all the candidates on the present occasion were comparatively well educated men ; and one of them had a high reputation for learning. He had a peculiarly serious and devout appear- ance, and when, some days afterwards, the missionaries called upon him in one of the cloisters of the patriarchate, he seemed deeply impressed by the remarks made to him on tho solemn responsibilities resting upon the office- bearers of the church of Christ, and feelingly begged an interest in their prayers. This was Der Kevork, a man whose subsequent influence in promoting the reformation was highly im- portant. Up to this period, the missionary press had remained in Malta, and had been chiefly em-" ployed in printing in Greek and Italian. On the 23d of December, 1833, the Eev. Dmnr] Temple, and Mr. Homan Hallock, missiunavy printer, arrived in Smyrna with the press, accompanied by bishop Dionysius, as Arme- nian translator. But a combination of Arme- nian and Romish influences induced tlie i'a^^a peremptorily to order Mr. Temple's departni-e from Smyrna with only ten days' notice. Tlie Pasha, however, who had acted hastily and under a misapprehension of the facts in the case, revoked his order, on hearing the expla- nations of the American consul ; but it was thought best that the bishop should return to Beirut, where he had formerly resided ; the Armenians being incensed against him on account of his having married and become a Protestant. The indications of the special presence of the Holy Spirit became more numerous and deci- sive. The meetings at Mr. Goodell's residence had been gradually increasing in solemnity and interest. On the first Monday of Jan. 1834, the monthly concert was observed, for the fii'st time, in the Turkish language. Intelligence was communicated from the missions, and every heart seemed deeply interested, and many eyes were sufliised with tears. The native brethren there received a new impulse to go on with their labors for the salvation of their own countrymen. The number stea^ dily increased of those who frequented the 12C ARMENIANS. houses of the missionaries, and the mani topics of inquiry were deeply practical and spiritual, relating directly to the salvation ot the soul. In the course of the year, two or three priests in Constantinople were awakened, and tho- roughly convinced of the truth of the evan- gelical system. The Bible was much sought for and read ; many eyes were opened to see the folly of their own superstitions ; and a few, it is believed, were added to the number of sincere believers in Jesus Christ. The two young men whose interesting history has been briefly given, and who became native assist- ants, were active in spreading the truth, and exerted no small amount of instrumentality in bringing about the results that followed. Every effort made to induce the Armenian ecclesiastical authorities to take the lead_ in enlarging and improving their schools having proved a failure, the mission at length deter- mined to establish, independently, a high school in Pera, the objects being to educate promising boys and young men in useful branches, to stimulate the Armenians to efforts in this department, and to furnish a model school for them to imitate. The school was opened, October 27, 1834, under the superin- tendence of Mr. Paspati, a native of Scio, who had been educated in America, and who, by his religious character, as well as his intel- lectual training, proved himself to be well fitted for this post. Eev. John B. Adger joined the Smyrna station in the month of October, 1834. Two new stations were occupied, one at Brusa and the otiier at Trebizond. Eev. B. Schneider arrived at BrCisa with his family on the 15th of July, 1834. The Greek bishop forbade his people furnishing the missionary with a house, although one had previously been pledged to him by a prominent member of the Greek community. But the independence of the owner enabled Mr. Schneider to secure a resi- dence in spite of the bishop. And, after some opposition, he was enabled to open a school of 70 children, his labors at first being divided between the Armenians and Greeks. Rev. T. P. Johnson first visited Trebizond in Novem- ber, 1834. Through priestly interference, he was foiled in three successive attempts to pro- cure a, house, and at last he only secured a contract for one, on condition that he should obtain a firman or imperial order, from Con- stantinople, which he succeeded in doing, through the kind interposition of Commodore Porter, the United States Minister at the Porte ; and he removed there with his family in the spring of 1835. The breaking out of the plague, however, prevented him from having much intercourse with the people for some months. At the capital, the number of those who declared themselves Protestants rapidly increased. Not only in the city proper, but throughout the suburbs and the villages on the Bosphorus, wherever Armenians were found, there was fin increasing disposition to talk on religious subjects. The missionaries avoided controversy about forms and ceremo- nies ; and instead of attacking directly the superstitions of the church, determined to " know nothing but Christ and him crucified." Cases of true conversion were every now and then occurring, among whom was Der Kevork, before alluded to. He had charge of a school of about 400 boys, supported by the Arme- nians themselves, and in no way connected with the missionaries. He soon introduced the custom of reading the Scriptures daily, and explaining them to the whole school ; and he also formed a class of twenty of his most promising scholars, for the critical study of the New Testament under his immediate direction. One room in Mr. Goodell's house was always open for Armenians to come together for prayer ; and in some instances family prayer was established by the new converts, and a prayer-meeting was maintained by a few pupils in the high school, which had now increased to thirty pupils, and had also grown greatly in favor with the people. The English, French, Italian, Armenian, Turkish, Greek, and He- brew languages were taught, as well as the mathematics, geography, &c., and lectures were given, illustrated by experiments on various branches of the natural sciences. Mr. Paspati having left for Paris, Mr. Hobannes Sahakyan was appointed to the snperintendency of the school, assisted by several other teachers. Vis- itors of all classes wei-o numerous, and the lec- tures were attended by many deeply-interested spectators. Externally, friendly relations were still preserved with the ecclesiastical authori- ties of the Armenian church ; but they already began to manifest their uneasiness at the cir- culation of the Bible, and the popularity and success of the school established by the mis- sion. Matteos, the newly appointed bishop of Brusa, was one of the earliest friends of the mission, having imbibed many enlightened views of the truth. Even after his removal to Brusa, he expressed, by letter, the most friendly sentiments; and when Mr. Schneider called upon him, soon after his arrival, he avowed, in very decided terms, his approbation of the school recently established by the mission in Brusa. Not many months elapsed, however, before this school was entirely broken up, through the influence of this same prelate, who also endeavored, in other ways, to circum- scribe the operations of the missionaries. He afterwards made himself notorious as Matteos Patkiarch, the pee^cutor of the Protest- ants IN Turkey. This fact shows how little dependence could be placed upon professions of friendship made by the high ecclesiastics, who, though often convinced of the truth, yet having no fixed principles, are ready to do any thing to please the rich and influential among their people. The Brusa station was strengthened by the ARMENIANS. 127 arriial of the Rev. P. 0. Powers and wife, in February, 1835, who took up their abode in the Armenian quarter of the town. The preparation of books and tracts in Armeno-Turkish and the modern Armenian language, became more and more an object of attention, and Mr. Hallock, the missionary printer, visited the United States to superintend the manufacture, at New York, of punches for making Armenian type for the press in Smyrna; and the liberal sum of $5000 was appropriated to this object, and for the purchase of materials for a foundry and printing office, by the Pru- dential Committee. Mr. Sarkis, one of the pious Armenians in Constantinople, and an eminent scholar in his own language and liter- ature, removed to Smyrna, to be employed as translator, in connection with the press, under the superintendence of Mr. Adger. Early in 1836, two weekly meetings were established in Constantinople, one of which was conducted by Mr. Goodell, and the other by Mr. Schanffler, in the Turkish language, which afforded constant evidence of the pro- gress of the work. The houses of the mission- aries were frequented by ecclesiastics, as well as laymen, some four of the former, chiefly from among the parochial clergy, appearing to be sincere inquirers after the truth. One of these, attached to the Patriarchal Church, pro- posed, of his own accord, that the missionaries should publish a new and revised edition of the modern Armenian New Testament, so that all the people might have access to the Word of God in an intelligible language. Hs offered to subscribe 500 piastres, (about $23) himself, to- wards the object, and to procure more from others. Some of the most influential vartabeds at the patriarchate were disposed to encourage, rather than hinder educational efforts. It was now not an uncommon thing, to hear of one and another of the bishops and vartabeds, preaching what were called evangelical ser- mons. Subsequent facts, however, have shown, in regard to most of them, that public opinion, at that time somewhat clamorous for reform, more than personal conviction and interest in the subject, led to this new style of address. One of the converts, who was rather promi- nent as a reformer, was publicly accused of in- fidelity by a priest ; and on the following Sab- bath, one of the vartabeds of the Church de- nounced him before the people, as a heretic and an infidel, whose case was soon to be tried by a council of ecclesiastics and laymen. The council was afterwards held, and although the accused declared plainly that he had no confi- dence whatever in the mediation of the saints, and that he received the Gospel as his only and all-sufficient guide ; — yet he was fully acquitted. The most diligent and persevering efforts were made, by certain adherents of the Romish Church, to stir up the Armenians against the missionaries. No direct means had been used by them, to enlighten that portion of the Ar- menian race, who acknowledge the supremacy of the Pope. They may amount, perhaps, to 15,000 or 20,000, having a Patriarch of their own. In July, 1836, this functionary came out with a public denunciation of all the books cir- culated by the missionaries, including the New Testament, and he expressly prohibited his people from purchasing or procuring from them copies of an edition of the Armenian Scriptures which had been printed at their own press in Venice. Indications now began more and more to manifest themselves, that the Word of God was operating like silent leaven, especially in the schools where it was daily read as a text book ; and many interesting incidents are mentioned in the journals of the missionaries, to illustrate the influence that was operating upon the minds of the people ; which Mr. Goorlell cha- racterized as a simple and entire yielding up of the heart and life to the sole direction of God's Word and Spirit." The gospel had now been proclaimed to mul- titudes of people by conversation in private circles, both in the Turkish and Armenian languages, and a formal expository service had been held in Turkish, by Mr. Goodell, for some time. The first regular sermon in the Arme- nian tongue, was preached by Mr. Dwight, on the 9th of September, 1836, to a small select company in his own house. The monthly con- cert of prayer increased in interest. Female education, which had been almost entirely nog. lected, was beginning to attract attention. At Constantinople parents were beginning to provide instruction for their daughters, and one of the evangelical brethren had a class of Armenian girls who were learning to read. In Smyrna, a school of 40 Armenian girls was established by the mission, in the summer of 1836, with the express approbation of a num- ber of influential men in the community. Owing to one or two jealous spirits, however, a meeting of the community was soon called, and it was agreed to take the new enterprise into their own hands ; and it was Cheerfully relinquished to them by the missionaries. In Brusa, there were many who professed to be friendly to the missionaries ; but in general, the silence and insensibility of death reigned among them. Bishop Matteos showed more openly a hostile disposition. The station at Trebizond was reinforced in August, 1836, by the arrival of the Rev. W. C. Jackson and wife. The principal bankers in the country, at that time, belonged to the Armenian commu- nity. According to the system then prevail- ing, the Pashas and governors of the empire derived their support, not by a salary from the government, but by taxes, levied by them- selves, on the produce of the territory over which they had jurisdiction, and by extortion. Every Pasha had his banker, who furnished him with money on interest, when out of office, 128 ARMENIANS. or wlien newly appointed to office, receiving his pay by participating in tlio spoils filched afterwards from the poor people. This ar- rangement gave great power to these capital- ists ; and nearly all the important appointments of the government were in their hands. With- in their own community their word was law. Patriarchs, as we have shown, were elect- ed and deposed by them ; and through them, bishops and vartabeds received their appointments to dioceses and churches. A few of the richest and most powerful of these men decided nearly every question of any importance pertaining to the civil or ecclesi- astical affairs of the Armenian nation. As a class, they were ignorant and bigoted, and, therefore, quite ready to believe any misrepre- sentations of Protestantism which their own religious guides should give them. In this state of things, any office-bearer in the church, high or low, might be deterred from acting, in his official capacity, according to the policy dictated by his own mind. Some rival in the holy orders, even much lower than himself in rank, might, through his superior influence with one or more of these bankers, procure the removal from office of the obnoxious individ- ual. In the year 1837, it was resolved in the counsels of the Armenian community, that is, by a few bankers, as a first step, to break up the High School. In preparation for this, a large college had been founded some months before, at ScCitary ; and the public school, su- perintended by Der Kevork, in the quarter of Hass Keuy, had been committed to the gene- ral supervision of one of the great bankers re- siding there, a truly noble-spirited man, that it might be remodeled according to his own wishes, so as to make it a first-rate school. As learn- ing was now becoming popular, these were necessary steps in order to reconcile the people to the shutting up of the Armenian High School. In January, 1837, the parents of the scholars of the missionary school were sum- moned before the Vicar, and peremptorily or- dered to withdraw their sons from the school. Sorrow was depicted on every face, as the pupils came back to get their books, and say their farewells. The plan of the opposing party in this case, was, after breaking up the school, to procure from the Turkish government, the banishment of Mr. Sahakyan, its principal, and several oth- ers who were considered most influential among the evangelical brethren. Great was their astonishment when they heard that, no sooner was this hated individual released, by their act, from his connection with the mission, than he was engaged by the banker of Hass Keuy, to take the superintendence of the great national school, which had been placed by them in his hands ! Every effort was made by the anti-evangelical party to persuade him to change his purpose ; but he remained firm, and declared that if they did not allow him to manage the school in his own way, he would leave the Armenian community altogether. They were obliged to yield, and soon a school of 600, instead of 40, as before, was in suc- cessful operation, under the superintendence of Mr. Hohannes Sahakyan ; having Der Kevork, the pious priest, for one of his principal teachers ! The Hass Keuy school was formally adopted as the school of the nation, and Mr. Sahakyan received a regular appointment from the Arme- nian Synod as its principal. He had there- fore, more liberty of action, and could give religious instruction officially. He devoted an hour a day to this special purpose, in a select class of sixty of the most advanced pupils, be- sides more general instruction, and the daily good influence exerted by himself and Der Kevork. There was a liberal course of study adopted, and the school was arranged, throughout, af- ter the model of the mission school. Lectures were given in the natural sciences, the whole of the philosophical apparatus of the mission having been pm'chased and paid foi-, by the directors. This institution became deservedly popular ; there was now much more boldness, on the part of the enlightened Armenians, in spreading the truth ; and the light of truth and piety seemed to be kindled in every part of the city. Inquiry was extending, also, at the interior stations, and the spirit of opposition was like- wise awakened. In September, 1837, a convention of mis- sionaries was held in Smyrna, the chief object of which was, to ascertain, jjy prayerful in- quiry, the mistakes and deficiencies of the past, both in regard to personal qualifications for the work, and the means and measures adopted for bringing the claims of the gospel in con- tact with the hearts of the people. Recent afflictive dispensations in the mission had pro- duced a mellowed tone of Christian feeling, wliich greatly prepared the minds of the breth- ren for a profitable discussion of these subjects. The Lord was felt to be indeed present, and it is believed that each one returned to the toils of missionary life, with a, more prayerful and confiding spirit, and a more fixed purpose of heart, to make the salvation of the soul the immediate and all-absorbing object of labor, and the preaching of " Jesus Christ, and him crucified," the grand means. Mr. Adger was enabled to commence an ex- pository service in Smyrna, in the Armenian language, at which some five or six were usually present. His translator, Mr. Sarkis, from Constantinople, had increasing intercourse with the people ; and Armenian mothers began to be eloquent in their lamentations over the neglected education of their daughters. Up to_ the first of January, 1638, there were printed, at the Smyima press, about two and a half million pages in the Armenian language. ARMENIANS. 129 A pocket edition of the New Testament, in ancient Armenian, was completed on the last day of the yeai- 1837. The plague, that scourge of Turkey, was permitted this year to enter the family of Mr. Dwight, and a beloved wife and child became its victims. This afflictive dispensation called forth the tenderest expression of sympathy from the native brethren and other friends of the missionaries ; and, in various ways, it was truly a sanctified, though most sorrowful event. This terrible disease, in its annual visitations to the capital, and other parts of the Turkish empire, has proved a far more serious obsta- cle to missionary labor, than can well be imagined in America. The season of the plague was a season of non-intercourse, to a very great extent. Schools must be closed ; public worship suspended ; and the giving and receiving of visits, in a great measure inter- rupted. This has happened, again and again, at all the stations. Sometimes, when the mis- sionaries had made a successful and promising beginning of some new plan of usefulness, this dreadful scourge would come down upon them with all its violence, and suddenly arrest the enterprise, and frustrate all their hopes. And in such a country as Turkey, when a school is closed, or public worship suspended for several months, more ground may be lost than can be gained in a whole year. But for 16 years past, since quarantines have been established, Constantinople has not been visited with the plague, showing that it did not originate there. As the doctrines of the gospel gained a hold on the hearts of the people, superstitions gave way ; and, as error became eradicated from the mind, the external symbols of that error were naturally removed from use and from sight. The progress of correct religious opin- ion was evinced, especially, by the gradual dis- appearance of pictures from the Armenian churches. In one instance, near the beginning of the year 1838, the vartabed and leading men in the large village of Orta Keuy, on the Bosphorus, went together to the church, and carefully removed every picture, except the altar pieces, which were so situated that they could not be approached for worship. This is the village in which the missionaries resided, when they first began to get access to the Ar- menians. The patriarch Stepan remarked to one of the native brethren, that many of the observances in their church were not prescribed by the gospel, and that probably they would not exist ten years longer. The reformation was daily gaining strength. The converted Armenians were active and prayerful. They delighted in the communion of saints ; and they also sought and found fre- quent opportunities for religious conversation with their fellow-countrymen, who, as yet, had not felt the power of the gospel. Mr. Sahak- yan continued his connection with the High School at Hass Keuy, and his opportunities 9 for usefulness were many and great. But, such was the opposition of the leading Armenians to Mr. Sahakyan, that its distinguished patron determined to abandon it altogether ; and, before the close of the year 1838, most of the teachers were dismissed, and the school reduced to its former footing. Many of the people were strongly in favor of its continuance, and particularly the leading men of the village where it was located ; and they sent a delegor tion to the patriarch, to implore his aid, to prevent the approaching disaster. All they obtained from him was fair promises, that were never fulfilled. Mr. Sahakyan, being thrown out of em- ployment, was very gladly taken up by the mission. The necessity had for some time been felt, of having a man to superintend the distribution of books, which were rapidly in- creasing in number. To this post Mr. Sahak- yan was appointed, with the confident expec- tation that it would prove a station of great usefulness. The kingdom of Christ now began to make evident inroads on the kingdom of Satan, in the interior of the country. Two Armenian priests, in Nicomedia, who had never seen a missionary, had been converted to the truth. One of them afterwards came to Constantino- ple, and visited the missionaries. He appeared to be a man of a most devout and humble spirit, who had inward experience of the grace of God. The doctrine of salvation, by grace alone, was quite familiar and very precious to him ; and he readily discriminated between a living and a dead faith. In 1832, Mr. Goodell left with an old priest at Nicomedia, as he was passing, a copy of the Armeno-Turkish New Testament, and gave to some Armenian boys several tracts in the same language. One of these tracts — a translation of the Dairyman's Daughter — fell into the hands of another priest, whom Mr. Goodell did not see. The perusal of it was the means of his awaken- ing and conversion ; and, through his influ- ence, another priest was brought to the know- ledge of the truth, and their united prayers and efforts were now directed to the enlighten- ment and conversion of their flock. The spirit of inquiry began to spread among the people. In the spring of 1838, Mr. Dwight visited the place and found 16 men, who appeared to be truly enlightened and converted. He was received by them with the greatest cordiality, and they seemed to hang on his lips like men hungering for the bread of life. The two priests, Der Vertaness, and Der Harutun, removed, of their own accord, to Constantinople ; and were subsequently placed together, as the only priests in a village church on the Bosphorus. Here they could act with a good degree of independence, and many op- portunities of doing good were presented During the summer of 1838, the Patriarch Stepan, being an old acquaintance, spent sev- 130 ARMENIANS. eral weeks with them ; and they had free con- versations together on religious subjects, the Patriarch generally assenting to their views. Both at Brusa and Trebizond every possible obstacle was thrown in the way of the progress of the truth ; and yet the Word of God could not be bound. In both places there were in- creasing friendliness on the part of the people, more extended intercourse, and the special presence of the Holy Spirit. Among those whose minds seemed to be especially opened to religious impressions at Trebizond, were the vartabed himself, or acting bishop, and also a priest of the Church. At Brusa, the two teachers, Mr. Serope, and Mr. Hohannes, seemed to be growing in grace and in the knowledge of Christ. An influential and dis- tinguished man became a serious inquirer for the way of salvation, and opposition thus far, was overruled for good. In October, 1838, Mr. Schneider began a regular preaching service at his own house, every Sabbath, in the Turkish language, for the benefit of both Armenians and Greeks. I'he Eev. E. Eiggs joined the station at Smyrna, with his family, on the 2d of November, 1838. By a series of intrigues, commenced near the beginning of the year 1839, the leading bankers were gradually dispossessed of much of their former power ; and three or four men from the artisan classes, stood before the nation as its guides and dictators, and especially as defenders of its ancient faith, and the zealous extirpators of heresy. One of these was the Sultan's chief architect, and another was his second. An- other was superintendent of the government powder works. The first two were employed at the time, in erecting the most splendid of all the imperial palaces ; and this brought them into closer contact with the Sultan than wa*; enjoyed by any of the bankers ; and he was so much delighted with their work, that he seemed ready to grant them any request they might make. The expulsion of Protestantism fi-om the land was an object that lay near their hearts ; and they now resolved to make use of the strong arm of the Sultan to efiect it. Ac- cusations were presented against the evangeli- cal brethren, and the most false and scandalous representations were made, as to the character and tendencies of Protestantism, calculated not only to prejudice the minds of the Turkish cabinet, but to excite the feelings of the popu- lace. The Sultan was easily persuaded, and the architects and powder-maker were fully authorized to call upon the civil power, to aid them in extirpating this dangerous heresy. But the Patriarch Stepan, was altogether too mild a man for their purpose ; and it was reported and believed that his sympathies were with the evangelical party. They procured from the interior of the country, Hagopos, a man who had once been Vicar of the Patri- archate of Constantinople, and who was noto- rious for his bigotry and sternness of charac- ter, to be associated with Stepan, as assistant Patriarch. He soon had the whole power virtually put into his hands, and Stepan sunk to a mere cypher. On the 19th of Pebrnary, Mr. Sahakyan was arrested, and thrown into the Patriarch's prison, without even the form of an examination, and without being informed of the charges alleged against him. He was a mild, amiable, inoffensive man ; of unblem- ished character, and against whom, as a subject and a citizen, not the slightest imputation could be brought. And yet, while the same so called Christian Patriarchate would use all possible means to protect felons of every de- scription, who belonged to the Armenian com- munity, even to the murderer himself, from the regular action of the Turkish law, it could rudely seize an innocent man, and deliver him over to the civil authorities, to be punished for daring to think and act for himself, in matters pertaining only to his own soul and God ! The Armenian Patriarchal power at Con- stantinople has always been a persecuting power, but more especially within the last one hundred and fifty years, during which, much blood even has been shed by it, in the endeavor to prevent proselytism from that Church to the Church of Eome. In the present instance, therefore, the ecclesiastical authorities of the Church were only acting out the true spirit of the establishment. Mr. Boghos Pizika was also arrested and put into the same prison with Mr. Sahakyan. Four days afterwards, these two individuals were put under charge of a Turkish police officer, who was armed with pistols and sword, and, without the least show of trial or expressed accusation, they were sent into banishment by an imperial fir- man, to a monastery near Kaisery, (the an- cient Csesarea of Cappadocia,) about 400 miles east of Constantinople. The Patriarch Stepan took leave of them with tears. He did not participate in the act of his compeers, and knew well its deep injustice. The police offi- cer, a Turk, stopped at his mother's house in Scutary, and sent back word that Mr. Pizika was too feeble to bear the fatigues of the jour- ney ; but the most positive orders were returned to carry him to Kaisery, either alive or dead. At Nicomedia, he was refreshed with an in- terview with the evangelical brethren ; and having recruited his health, he went on his way. But the Turkish officer who conducted him, finding they had friends there, treated Mr. Sahakyan with the greatest cruelty, for the purpose of extorting money, till he was com- pelled to give an order for $100 to secure relief. On their arrival at Kaisery, the Arme- nians, on being informed that they had been banished merely because they received the Bible as the only infallible guide, replied that the Patriarch might as well banish them all, for they were all of the same opinion. •rhe greatest efforts were now made at the capital to frighten the brethren into submis- ARMENIANS. 131 sion. Very few dared to visit the mission- aries, aud those only under cover of the dark- ness. On the 3d of March, a Patriarchal bull was issued by Hagopos, adjunct Patriarch, forbidding the reading of all books printed or circulated by the missionaries ; and all who had such books in their possession were re- quired to deliver them, without delay, to their bishop or confessor. The brethren, though appalled by such violent proceedings, still ex- hibited great constancy ; and seemed ready to suffer joyfully the spoiling of their goods, and, if need be, imprisonment, banishment, and the bastinado, for their j\[aster's sake. On the 14th of Murch, Der Kevork, the pious priest of Hass Keuy, was arrested and thrown into prison. Eight days after, the Patriarch Stepan was deposed from office, and permitted to retire to his convent at Armash, near Nicomedia ; and on the following day, his assistant, Hagopos, was installed in his place. During the same week, the Greek Patriarch issued a bull, excommunicating all who should buy, sell, or read the books of the Lutherans or Calvinists, as the missionaries were called ; and an imperial firman was also published, requiring all the patriarchs to look well to their flocks, and guard them against foreign influence and infidelity. It was now quite evident that the Sultan himself was an interested party in these transactions. After lying in prison for more than a month, Der Kevork was banished into the interior ; and two vartabeds, who had presided over dioceses as bishops, one more teacher, and several other persons, were sent into exile about the same time. As there was no examination of any case, some who were made the victims of this cruel fanaticism, had never in any way been associated with the evangelical men, but were made to participate in their punishment by a mere mistake. April 28, the Patriarch issued a new bull, more violent than the former, threatening ter- rible anathemas, in the name 'of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, against all who should be found having any intercourse with the mis- sionaries, or reading their books ; and also against all who neglected to inform, when made acquainted with offenders. Within two or three days, a rich banker, who had been for years on friendly terms with the missionaries, and who was especially the patron of Mr. Boghos Pizika, was arrested and imprisoned in the hospital, as an insane person : this is a method of persecution not unfrequently resorted to in this country. The banker was released after about a week's confinement, on paying a large sum towards the coUeo-e at Scutary, to atone for the mischief he had done by his insanity ! The list of suspected persons had now swell- ed to a very large number ; and a strong cflbrt was being made to procure the expulsion of the missionaries themselves from the country. Mul- titudes of persons of diverse characters, were active, from diverse motives, in keeping alive the spirit of fanaticism. The native brethren were at their wits' end, and even the missionar ries could not see how God was going to deliver his people. Providence solved the problem, however, with the greatest imagina- ble ease. The persecuting powers were sud- denly thrown into the deepest consternation, by a demand from the Sultan to all the Patri- archs, that each should furnish him with seve- ral thousand men, to recruit his broken army, and enable him to prosecute his war with Mo- hammed Ali of Egypt. Though an unprece- dented demand, it must be promptly obeyed. Public attention was now entirely absorbed in this subject, and the doomed Protestants were for the moment forgotten. The army was raised, and marched to the field. It was estimated to consist of 80,000 men ; and on the plains of Nezib, near Aleppo, it encoun- tered an Egyptian force of about the same number. The battle was fought on the 24th of June, 1839, and the Turkish troops were utterly defeated, and scattered in all directions. Tidings of this disaster, however, never reached the ears of the Sultan Mahmud. He died in his own palace, on the Bosphorus, on the first day of July. His son, Abdul Mejid, was girded with the imperial sword, on the 11th ; and a few days after, the news reached the capital that the Capudan Pasha had treacher- ously surrendered up the whole Turkish fleet to Mohammed Ali. Thus, both the army and navy were gone, and a mere boy of seventeen was upon the throne, in the place of the great Mahmud ; and the entire dissolution of the empire seemed inevitable. Nothing but the intervention of the great powers of Europe prevented this catastrophe. By this rapid succession of remarkable events, God rebuked the perseottors of his people, and effectually removed from them the power of carrying into effect their unholy de- signs. Judgment succeeded judginent. A fire broke out in Pera, which consumed between three and four thousand houses, destroying an immense amount of property and several fives. Immediately after, a meeting of the Armenian Synod was called, and, after much violent debating, it was resolved that a part of the exiles should be recalled. Mr. Sahakyan, be- ing considered a " ring-leader," was to be left in perpetual banishment. All the others re- turned to their homes before winter set in. Some of them were restored to their former stations. The converted brethren, generally, soon took courage. They cautiously resumed their intercourse with the missionaries, and gradually became bolder than ever in their efforts to spread the knowledge of the truth. In the mean time, at the suggestion of others, Mr. Sahakyan wrote two or three letters, suc- cessively, to the Patriarch, petitioiiing for his own release. They were couched in terms of 133 ARMENIANS. great respect, but as they contained no confes- sion of error, and no promise of future submis- sion, Ms request was denied. Tlie bishop of Kaisery also wrote to the Patriarch in his behalf, saying that he had watched Mr. S. very closely, and had " found no fault in him ; " but this application also failed. But, through the intervention of an English gentleman, who was one of the physicians of the palace, the Patriarch, by request of the Sultan, after many delays, and sorely against his will, sent an order for the release of Mr. S. on the 10th of Feb- ruary, 1840. Steps were taken to make this persecution general ; and similar measures of oppression and cruelty were resorted to at Brusa, Trebi- zond, and other places. But, while these violent measures imposed an outward check upon the work, it was evi- dent that the truth was spreading ; even the measures taken to check the reformation, be- ing in many instances the means of awakening inquiry ; and at the very time when the storm was raging at the capital, and at different points on the sea-coast of the empire, the mis- sion was pushing its advanced posts into the very heart of the enemy's country. In April, Mr. Jackson, from Trebizond, visited Erzrum, almost in the centre of ancient Armenia, in order to make arrangements for commencing operations in that town. While he was there, a letter was publicly read in the church from the Patriarch, warning tlie people against in- tercourse with the Americans, and against patronizing their schools and reading their books ; and ordering them to seize such books, wherever they could be found, and to commit them to the flames. This did not prevent Mr. Jackson from procuring a dwelling house, which he accomplished through the kind as- sistance of the British consul, and on the 11th of September, 1839, he removed there with his family. In February of the same year, the station at Constantinople was strengthened by the arrival of the Rev. 0. Hamlin and wife, he being designated to open a seminary for Armenian boys. The first Monday in January, of the year 1840, was observed as a day of special fasting, humiliation and prayer, throughout all the mission stations of the Board in Turkey. The events of the preceding year, and the existing state of things in the country, rendered it a season of deep interest. It became more and more evident that the persecuting power had received a check from which it would not im- mediately recover. The efforts of the persecu- tors to destroy the truth had only made it more extensively known ; while the injustice, violence and cruelty of the clergy had brought them into contempt. At the commencement of the year 1840, in- tercourse was resumed with most of those whom the persecution had temporarily repell- ed from the missionaries, and there was evi- dently no diminution of interest in religious inquiry. One striking providence after an- other occurred, calculated to lead the hearts of the faithful to repose in God, and to be " nothing terrified by their adversaries." In several instances, signal judgments followed the persecutor, so that even the enemies them- selves were constrained to acknowledge that God himself was uttering his reproving voice. The sudden manner in which the late Sultan was cut off, and his forces by land and sea de- stroyed, at the very time when he was aiding by his authority to vex the church, has already been noticed. The chief instrument in induc- ing him to use his mighty power for such a purpose, was, by the Sultan's death, deprived of his influence ; and shortly after, his wife was removed by death, and he himself brought down to the grave's mouth. Another powei> ful man, who had actively opposed and perse- cuted the evangelical brethren, within a short space of time lost two daughters by sudden death ; a third daughter became deranged, and also a daughter-in-law ; his wife was deformed by sickness, and also made nearly blind, and he himself became a miserable invalid. And soon after the young Sultan camfr upon the throne, a, charter of rights was granted to the people, without their asking for it, providing for some fundamental changes in the internal administration of the government. In the presence of all the foreign ambassadors, the sovereign solemnly pledged himself to guard, as far as in him lay, the liberty, property, and honor of every individual subject, without re- ference to his religious creed. No one was to be condemned, in any case, without an impar- tial trial, and no one was to suffer the penalty of death, without the sanction of the Sultan himself. Under this charter changes the most momentous, particularly for the Christian and Jewish population, have already taken place in Turkey ; and everything now indicates, that according to the honest intention and policy of the present government, there is ultimately to be a complete carrying out of its provisions, in every part of the empire. Under the old system, bankers were needed to furnish capital to the pashas, until they should procure their supplies from the op- pressed people. An important part of the new system, however, was, that thenceforward the ruling pashas and governors throughout the country, should each receive a fixed salary from the government ; and in no case meddle with the collection of taxes. Accordingly, near the beginning of the year 1840, all the bankers of the government received orders to settle up their accounts, as they were to be no longer needed iu the capacity in which they had heretofore served the state. This threw many of them into great distress, and some it completely ruined. One was driven, in his desperation, to the crime of suicide. Thus did God put another obstacle out of the way, ARMENIANS. 133 ■whicli Ijitherto liacl seriously obstructed the progress of his liiugdom. In the spring of 1840 the Greek Patriarch, ■who had joined hands with the Armenian Pa- triarch in persecuting the people of God, was suddenly deposed from office, by order of the Turkish government ; and it was not long be- fore the Armenian Patriarch followed him into retirement. He became so odious, on account of his overbearing, violent spirit, as well as his follies, that he was obliged to resign to save him- self from being deposed ; and Stepan, who had been ejected for his mildness and his forbear- ance towards Protestants, was reelected to the Patriarchate, first by vote of the principal bankers, and afterwards by acclamation, in an immense popular assembly. On the 24th of May, 1840, Mr. Sahakyan returned from his banishment, and his presence tended greatly to strengthen the native breth- ren. He soon commenced a series of active labors for the good of his countrymen. Priest Vertaness also, not being able conscientiously to perform all the duties required . of him as priest, quietly and unostentatiously withdrew and resolved to devote his whole time in labor- ing for the spread of the truth among his countrymen. He thus abandoned, voluntarily, a situation in which he was honored and sup- ported, for one in which he was exposed to constant suspicion, reproach and persecution, and, at the same time, with very uncertain means of subsistence. Priest Kevork seemed to be " full of faith and of the Holy Ghost," preaching more boldly than before his banish- ment, that there is but " one name given under heaven among men whereby we must be saved ;" and ready to suffer again, if need be, for his beloved Lord and Master. The doc- trinal views of the converted Armenians seemed, in general, wonderfully clear ; which was the more surprising, considering the im- mense rubbish of superstition and error that originally encumbered their minds. The stan- dard doctrine of the reformation in Europe — salvation by grace alone, without the deeds of the law, was usually the great central truth, Srst apprehended by their awakened and inquir- '-ng minds, and made the ground of satisfactory repose. Thfi number of inquirers steadily increased, and indeed nearly all who called upon the mis- sionaries, came for the avowed purpose of reli- gious conversation. The story had been very industriously circulated, especially during the persecution, that the Americans were a nation of infidels, without even the form of religion ; and that the missionaries were aiming to con- vert all the Armenians to infidelity, and only pretended at first to believe the Bible, so as the more easily to draw people into their snares ; and in more than one instance, their visitors showed at first no little anxiety to know ex- actly what was the truth of the matter ; and whether we have any churches in America, and whether any number of people ever assem- ble for worship on the Sabbath ! Before the end of the year 1840, a room in the business quarter of the city, for receiving visitors, and for conference on religious sub- jects, was procured and kept open on two stated days of each week, and gradually be- came a place of much resort for religious inquiry. About the same time, the book depository was removed to the heart of the city ; and in the most public manner the products of the press, so lately anathematized by the Patri- arch, were daily sold by an agent, who was himself an Armenian. More than three hun- dred dollars' worth of books, in the different languages, were sold at Constantinople during the year 1840. A weekly meeting in the Armenian lan- guage, commenced by Mr. Dwight in the autumn of 1839, with only three individuals, and that privately, for fear of the persecutors, gradually increased, and before the end of 1840, it was held twice a week, publicly, and more than 25 different individuals had at- tended. November 24, 1840, a boarding-school for Armenian boys and young men was opened at Bebek, on the Bosphorus, under the superin- tendence of Mr. Hamlin, with three pupils, and within about a week, applications had been made for 15 boarding scholars, though their means, at first, would allow them to re- ceive only 12. An effort was soon made to crush the infant seminary, though it proved entirely futile, and was in itself not a little ludicrous. A deputation from the village of Bebek itself, consisting of the Armenian priest, two Greek priests, one of the village rulers, and several of the inhabitants, called upon the Armenian Patriarch, and expressed to him their deep regret that such a danger- ous man as Mr. Hamlin should be allowed to reside in their quarter. ' They accused him of eating meat, eggs, butter, milk, &c., both in Lent and also on Wednesdays and Fridays, the days of their weekly fast ! He also taught his scholars that it is no more wicked to eat butter than oil ; or meat than bread ; or eggs than olives ! Another grievous offence was, that neither Mr. H. nor his scholars made the sign of the cross ; nor worshiped the Virgin Mary, or the saints ! Of course, they said, he must be a confirmed infidel, and he can teach nothing better in his school than the works of Voltaire! The Patriarch was too well informed, and too well disposed, to be moved by such an application ; and the petitionera had leave to withdraw. During the month of June, 1840, Mr. Ham- lin and Mr. Dwight visited Nicomedia. The brethren there were sorely threatened, during the reign of violence at the capital, but no serious persecution was actually attempted. They had had little spiritual aid or comfort 13i ARMENIANS. from abroad. They had been thrown upon their Bibles for religious teaching, and upon the Holy Spirit for their expounder of reli- gious truth, and upon God as their only protector ; and they had grown rapidly in knowledge and grace. The missionaries sat with them, on the Sabbath, conversing of the things of God, for ten hours, and so intense was their interest that they would have sat for ten hours more. While they were there, a stranger from a neighboring town, a merchant, being in Nico- media on business, had the curiosity to call upon them. He said that the report of them had reached his place through the Patriarch's letter of warning, and that he, in common with many of his brethren, was very anxious to know what this new way was. They explained to him their views, and gave him a copy of the New Testament in the modern Armenian, and also several tracts, and he took his leave, ex- pressing his high gratification with the inter- view. In this way was the knowledge of the gospel first carried to Adabazar, the residence of this individual. It is situated about 27 miles directly east of Nioomedia. The reaction after the persecution, was not confined to the capital. In Brusa and Trebi- zond the demand for books increased, and there were some who gave evidence of being truly converted ; and even at the new station at Brzriim there were signs of promise. The Rev. H. J. Van Lennep was connected with the Smyrna station during April, 1840. The labors of the missionaries here were chiefly through the press, and during the year 1840 more than six millions of pages were printed in the Armenian and Armeno-Turkish lan- guages alone. The most important work in the latter was the Pentateuch, translated under Mr. Goodell's supervision. Its publication was hailed with joy by multitudes. The Armenians of Smyrna also established a press, and pub- lished a newspaper. The year 1841 opened with many indica- tions that a thorough reformation was going forward in the Armenian community. A very marked difference was observed in the general style of preaching in the Armenian churches at the capital. There was a growing desire to study the scriptures, and a disposition to compare every doctrine and practice with the written word ; and this could not, with safety, be disregarded. It was not an uncommon thing to hear of sermons on repentance, on the Sabbath, on the Judgment day, &o., altogether based upon the Bible ; and, in some instances, the preachers borrowed largely from the publi- cations of the missionaries for their materials ; and they had repeated applications to furnish matter directly for sermons, for one of the most respectable vartabeds in Constantinople. Another of the vartabeds went so far even as to combat the prevailing error of substituting Mary and tha sa'uts as mediators for Christ, declaring that the name of Christ is the only one given under heaven, among men, whereby we can be saved. As the reformation advanced, instances of pungent conviction of sin, and a strong and deep apprehension of spiritual things became more common than had before been noticed. Some persons of infamous character became the subjects of an entire change, so that many of those who were without, were constrained to speak of the change as most wonderfnL The converted brethren also, with scarcely an exception, appeared to be growing in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ, and in an active zeal for the salvation of others. Priest Vertaness was full of activity and hope. Almost every day he brought word of some new and interesting case of inquiry in some part of the city. His whole time was occupied in going from house to house. In the spring of 1841, a report came to Constan- tinople that a number of Armenians in Nico- media were about going over to the Jesuits ; and the Patriarch commissioned this same priest Vertaness to go there with all speed, and endeavor to bring them back to their mother church. Thus fortified by a commis- sion from the highest power, he had perfectly free access to every family in the Armenian community in that town. He was quite suc- cessful in the object of his mission, and while he heartily and faithfully obeyed the Patriarch, and endeavored to persuade men not to suffer themselves to fall into the clutches of Pome, he also labored still more zealously to bring them to a sense of their sins against God, and to a hearty reception of Christ alone, as the Saviour of their souls. His visit was a great comfort to the brethren in Nicomedia, as well as an advantage to the cause at large. In Adabazar regular meetings for prayer and reading the Scriptures, were held every Sab- bath, and from 25 to 50 were usually present. One of the priests seemed to have become obe- dient to the faith. A handbill tract, contain- ing simply the ten commandments, in the modern tongue, without note or comment, was the means of opening many eyes to see the folly and sin of picture worship. One year previously there could not probably have been found a single soul, among the 4,000 Arme- nian inhabitants of Adabazar, who was not groping in the deepest spiritual darkness. Now two scores or more were convinced of the er- rors of their Church, and ready to take the Bible as their only religious guide, and several appeared to be truly converted men, and were willing even to lay down their lives for Christ. All this took place before any missionary had visited them. In the autumn of 1841, Mr. Schneider, in compliance with their oft-repeat- ed invitations for a missionary to visit them, went to Adabazar, and returned from the visit with the most cheering impressions, that what had been done was truly the work of ARMENIANS. 135 God's Spirit. A spirit of inquiry was found to be extending itself tlirough many of tlie neigliboring villages. In Constantinople a most singular state of things existed. The Patriarch was personally well-disposed towards the evangelical party, but still, by no means a decided friend, and easily influenced by the bankers. His Vicar, or rather colleague, for such he became, though by no means bigoted, probably not much of a believer in anything, was time-serving and somewhat cunning. A strong portion of the tradesmen were in favor of a change of Pa- triarch, and as a most ready means of accom- plishing their object, they spread the story everywhere, that Stepan, the occupant of the see, was a Protestant, and was playing into the hands of the missionaries. As an evidence of this, they pointed triumphantly to the Sem- inary at Bebek, consisting altogether of Ar menian boys, and yet their parents were not ordered to keep them at home. It was neces- sary for the poor Patriarch to do something. The Vicar summoned before him a priest and two laymen, who had children there, and privately told them to remove their boys ; but charged them not to speak about it in public. The priest obeyed, but after a few days, brought his boy back. The Vicar again ordered him to remove his child. He again obeyed, but soon returned him as before. This was repeatr ed four or five times. At length the school was voluntarily suspended for a few weeks ; and then went on more prosperously than ever. A fierce quarrel soon broke out between the bankers and the tradesmen, in reference chiefiy to the alleged mismanagement of the pecuniary affairs of their college at Scutary, which kept the whole community in a state of intense excitement and agitation for many months ; and, in the mean time, the mission- aries and the native brethren were left to pros- ecute their labors unmolested. The real cause of this rupture is to be traced to the domineer- ing spirit of some of the bankers, to whose irresponsible rule, the increasing intelligence of the tradesmen was teaching them no longer quietly to submit. The latter succeeded in procuring the appointment, by the people, of a committee of counsellors, consisting of 24 persons, to whom every question of importance, pertaining to the business matters of the Ar- menian community, was to be referred. After a, brief interval of repose, a list of charges, which had been made out by the united efforts of some of the bankers, and some of the clergy, was presented by the Patriarch to the Porte, against these 24 men ; one of which was, that they had formed the plan of placing themselves and the people under the protection of Russia, and thus bidding defiance to the Turks ! The whole 24 were immediately thrown into prison. As soon as the people heard of it, theyrushed to the Sublime Porte, to the number of from 4 to 6,000, and called upon the Grand Vizir either, to release their representatives, or im- prison them all. This officer replied that their own bankers and Patriarch were their accusers. The people exclaimed, " "We do not acknowl- edge the authority of our bankers or clergy ; we are subjects of the Sultan." It soon be- came evident that the true policy of the gov- ernment was to yield, and the prisoners were accordingly released. The people then de- manded the immediate removal of the Patri- arch. Upon this the bishops and vartabeds were all summoned to the Porte, and the tradesmen were called upon to select from among them the one they would prefer as Pa- triarch. The reply was, " We will have none of these men ; they are all alike bad men ; men who live by extorting money from the poor people. We want none of them. We will take time to consider the matter." The assembly was then dismissed, and the clergy went away in disgrace. As they passed through the crowd, remarks like the following were heard from the lips of the people : " There go our oppressors !" " Whoever goes with them goes to destruction 1" " Let no man step his foot again in the Armenian Church, on the peril of his salvation, so long as these men are there !" " Behold the deceivers and robbers of the people!" For some days afterwards, the wickedness of the clergy was a subject of universal remark. Many said, " We thought that Stepan, our present Patriarch, was one of the best of them ; and we called him a dove, but he has proved to be a raven. He has be- trayed his people into the hands of the Mo- hammedans ! If he is the best, what must the others be ?" This struggle continued for several months, each party alternately triumphing, and suc- cumbing, until at last a peremptory order was issued by the Sultan, that the belligerents should forthwith make peace, and that a cer- tain number of men should be regularly chosen, to be associated with the Patriarch in adminis- tering the affairs of the community. Subse- quently it was arranged that two committees should be appointed, one for ecclesiastical, and the other for secular matters, and the Patri- arch be the chairman of each ; and this order of things still prevails. The Patriarch, Stepan, was soon removed from office, and as the people and bankers could not agree upon any of the prominent candidates, they selected an obscure old bishop, by the name of AsdCiadzadur, who had always been an eccentric character, and was now in his dotage. This also was so overruled as to work mightily for the spread of the truth in the land. Such was the peculiar oddity and capriciousness of this man, that nobody wished to go to the Patriarchate for any purpose, ex- cept through dire necessity. Everybody seem- ed to feel that the less they had to do with their Patriarch the better. And when any thing 136 ARMENIANS. was said about the need of adopting rigorous measures to check the spread of Protestantism, the reply usually was, " What does that con- cern us ? Let every man do as he likes." The Vicar of the new Patriarch was one of those exiled for Protestantism, in the year 1839. He was formerly acting bishop at Tre- bizond, and there became pretty thoroughly enlightened as to the errors of his Church. His exaltation to the office of Patriarch's Vi- car, was as unexpected to him as it was to the missionaries and to the evangelical brethren generally ; and that also was of God. Only a short time previous he had applied to the mission for employment in the book-making department. The brethren were still exempt from perse- cution, though they did not rest from prayer and labor. They walked " in the fear of the Lord and in the comfort of the Holy Ghost," and " were multiplied." It was a period of quiet and steady increase to the church. There was among the native brethren, a very delight- ful increase of spirituality of mind, and an extraordinary spirit of prayer. They often as- sembled in small circles to ask for God's bless- ing on the means of grace ; and often, after sermon on the Sabbath, would several of them remain, in order to have a season of social prayer. If they found any individual in the congregation giving indications of special se- riousness, they did not fail to stop, and con- verse and pray with him. The year 1842 was distinguished for the special presence of the Holy Spirit. The whole city of Constantinople was filled with rumors of " the new doctrines," and they form- ed the topics of discussion in almost all assem- blies of Armenians. The minds of some were wonderfully wrought upon. The thoughtless and gay became sober and prayerful ; the worldly became spiritually minded ; the proud became meek and lowly ; opposers and perse- cutors were disarmed, and a few were trans- formed into decided friends and helpers. Priests and vartabeds, and even monks, were obedient to the faith; of which the mission- aries give in detail some most interesting in- stances. The zeal of the Armenian Christian breth- ren, in endeavoring to enlighten and reclaim their own countrymen, whether far or near, was one of their most striking characteristics. In the summer of 1842, several of them met in a retired spot among the hills that surround the capital, and after uniting in prayer for the guidance and blessing of the Holy Spirit, they resolved to send ibrth one of their number, at their own expense, on a missionary tour among the Armenians in the interior of Asia Minor. The individual selected for this service was priest Vertaness, who readily accepted the call, and soon proceeded on his way. It was a tour attended with many good results. Nor did they forget the claims of other races around them, who were living in ignorance of the Gospel. With the Jews especially, they had almost daily conversation in reference to the one only Saviour, Jesus Christ ; and this was the more remarkable, since there could scarcely be found among the other classes of people in Turkey, any other feeling than that of contempt for the outcast children of Abra- ham. There was also a very marked increase of interest and religious inquiry among feinales. Hitherto the important element of female influ- ence had been in a great measure wanting in the reformation. The cause of this was two-fold ; first, the extreme ignorance and consequent bigotry of the female portion of the population, there never having been the least provision for their education ; and, secondly, the difficulty of access to them, and of their availing themselves, even when disposed, of the privileges of the gospel, owing to the peculiar customs of society in the East respecting the seclusion of women. The priests, from their official character as con- fessors, have free access to the females of the community. The pious priests were not back- ward in availing themselves of this privilege, and chiefly through their instrumentality, in the years 1842 and 1843, several of the Arme- nian females became deeply interested in relig- ious concerns, and some few gave evidence of being truly converted. From that time they began to form a part of the regular visitors, and some few became regular attendants at the preaching service in the Seminary. About the same time Mr. Dwight opened a week-day preaching service in Armenia, exclusively for females. The distribution of the publications of the press became an important branch of labor, and quite sufficient to occupy the best part of one man's time. Mr. Homes was designated to this particular work, and he soon found that in connection with his other labors, he was fully and most usefully employed. There was a constantly increasing demand for books, so that by the spring of 1843, it was impossible to procure a supply from the press and bindery in Smyrna, with the limited funds they had, to meet seasonably all the orders that came in. Eight or ten booksellers at the capital were kept constantly supplied, and the products of the press were also sent to almost every part of the interior, even into Russia, Georgia, and Persia. An Armenian archbishop near Odessa, on receiving some of these, expressed the grea1> est joy ; and remarked that they ought to be grateful towards those who were engaged in preparing such excellent books for their coun- trymen. More than 40,000 volumes and tracts were issued from the Smyrna depot to the dif- ferent stations, during the year 1842. The, translation of the whole Old Testament into the Armeno-Turkish language, to which Mr. Goodell had devoted his undivided attention and strength for many years, was happily completed AEMENIANS. 137 on the 6tli of November, 1841, and was pub- lished at Smyrna, in the spring of 1842 ; and before the end of the following winter, the re- vision of the New Testament in the same lan- guage was also finished by Mr. Goodell, and the translation published. And by its side may be placed an edition of the New Testament in the modern Armenian, published about the same time in Smyrna, as revised by Mr. Adger. The expense of the latter work was defrayed by the British and Foreign Bible Society, while that of the former came from the Ameri- can Bible Society. One of the most striking traits of the re- formed ArmeniaQS is, their reverence and love of the Word of God. Some have been known to ait up all night to read and study the Bible, when it was first furnished to them in an intelligible language ; and the prevailing desire of all seemed to be, to understand what God teaches through his Word, and to conform their belief and practice wholly to his teach- ings. A distinguished Armenian having pub- lished a book against Protestantism, under the direction and at the expense of the Jesuits, the Vicar of the Patriarch condemned the proce- dure, admitted that there were errors in their church, and said that this book would call forth a reply from the missionaries, which would ex- pose these errors to the people. The seminary still survived all the shocks it received from the jealousy and hatred of its enemies. Por several months the most vigorous efibrts were made by bankers, priests, vartar beds, and bishops, especially those who were endeavoring to uphold the Sciltary College, to crush this institution ; when lo ! the Scutary College was closed in spite of all their efforts, and the mission Seminary still lived and flour- ished ! The Rev. G. W. Wood, who arrived at Con- stantinople with his wife, in the summer of 1842, was associated with Mr. Hamlin in the instruction of the seminary, the number of scholars being 25, all of whom boarded in the establishment. Besides the incalculably important bearing of such an institution on the cause of evangelical religion in Turkey, it proved itself to be highly useful also as an ob- ject of attraction to visitors, drawing them within the sound of the gospel, and those, too, often of a class that could not be induced to go for instruction to the private house of a missionary. Two of those who were numbered with the converted brethren, in the autumn of 1842, became disaffected, and left, the occasion being a paragraph or two in the Missionary Herald, respecting the probability and desirableness, in certain circumstances, of a separation of the evangelical brethren from the Armenian Church. Mr. Southgate, (afterwards bishop) of the American Protestant Episcopal Church, first directed their attention to the article, and translated the paragraphs alluded to for them, neither of them being acquainted with the English language. The work progressed also at the interior stations. But success, as usual, awakened opposition ; and an enlightened priest, at Erz- rum, who had begun to preach the truth to his people, was suspended from ofBce, and basti- nadoed by the bishop with his own hands. The sufferer, after counting 25 blows, swooned away, and in this condition was bound with a chain, and thrown into prison, where he re- mained till the next morning. After being released, he told the bishop, in the presence of witnesses, that he should continue to read and teach the gospel. This same bishop was once a serious inquirer, and even suffered persecution for Protestantism. He was one Of the exiles in 1839 ; but, since his restoration to power, he has been a bitter and violent persecutor. The Providence of God wonderfully favored the brethren in Adabazar. In the spring of 1842, the vartabed gave them formal permis- sion to meet every Sabbath day in a private house, for prayer and reading the Scriptures ; and there were usually from 25 to 50 present. Enemies they still had, however, who were always watchful for opportunities of thwarting and distressing them. A visit from the bishop of the diocese, — the ex-patriarch Stepan, — in the spring of 1843, seemed to offer such an opportunity. It was represented to him that a new sect had sprung up among them, which had embraced very strange and heretical no- tions, and was spreading its poison in all direc- tions. He took down the names of the lead- ing men of this so-called sect, whom he after- wards summoned before him, and asked them to give an account of themselves. They re- plied that they had not separated themselves from the Armenian Church, but that they re- ceived the Scriptures as the only rule of faith and practice ; that they tried to keep holy the Sabbath day ; that they endeavored to refrain from lying, swearing, and blasphemy, and in all things to follow strictly the rules of Christ. The bishop, after questioning them still fur- ther, for his own satisfaction, decided that there was no fault in them at all in this ma1> ter, and, expressing the wish that all the Ar- menians would do the same, dismissed them. At Nicomedia, the work received a new im- pulse in 1842, when the attendance on a weekly prayer-meeting was suddenly increased from six or eight to 40 or 50. Many minds were in an inquiring state. Opposition was made, but the bishop gave a decision similar to that he had given at Adabazar, and pub- licly charged his people to abstain from med- dling with these men. The awakening influ- ences of the Holy Spirit were also felt in Smyrna to some extent, as in almost every part of the Armenian field. In 1843, a young Armenian, who had, in an unguarded moment, embraced Mohammedan- ism, and afterwards returned to his former 138 ARMENIANS. profession, was publicly beheaded in tne streets of Constantinople, in opposition to the remon- strances of Sir Stratford Canninff, the British minister ; in consequence of which, that gen- tleman, in behalf of his government, and backed by the French, Prussian, and Kussiau ambassa- dors, demanded from the Sultan a written pledge that no person who had embraced the Moham- medan religion, and afterwards returned to Christianity, should, on that account, be put to death. The Turks yielded, through necessity, after holding out for several weeks, and the pledge required was given, signed by the Sultan himself, the conceded interpretation of which is, that henceforth, no peeson should be pek- SECDTED FOft HIS RELIGIOUS OPINIONS IN TUK- KEY. So plainly was the finger of Grod mani- fest in this whole transaction, that His Excel- lency, Sir Stratford Canning, afterwards dis- tinctly acknowledged that God alone had done it, and added, that to him it seemed lit^ tie less than a miracle. No reference was made, in these proceedings, to the persecuted people of God in Turkey ; yet, in this indirect way, the foundation was laid for their full en- joyment of religious liberty. During the winter of 1843-4, the stations in Turkey were favored with a visit from the Eev. Rufus Anderson, D.D., Secretary of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, and the Rev. Joel Hawes, D.D., a corporate member of the Board. An oppor- tunity was thus afforded for full consultations on various subjects, having a practical bearing on the missionary work, the results of which clearly attested the expediency of the measure. An important change followed in reference to one department of labor. The mission to the Greeks in Turkey was abandoned. Mr. Eiggs, of Smyrna, and Mr. Ladd, of Brusa, hitherto laboring exclusively in this department, now gave themselves up to the work among the Armenians. Mr. Benjamin, of Athens, joined the station at Trebizond, with a view to the same field. Mr. Calhoun removed from Smyrna to Syria, and Mr. Temple, much to the regret of all who knew him, returned to America, as, at the age of fifty-four, it would not have been wise for him to attempt the acquisition of a new and diflicult language. From 1843 to 1846, there was no long period of exemption from persecution, though, throughout the whole field, the spirit of inquiry and discussion wonderfully spread, and believ- ers were multiplied. On the whole, there was a very decided increase in the size of the con- gregations on the Sabbath, though, both at Trebizond and Erzrum, it became necessary, during a portion of the time, to suspend pub- lic worship, on account of the hostility of the hierarchy. There was, indeed, such a hunger- ing for the Word, as has probably been rarely witnessed in this world. Family worship — consisting of reading the Scriptures and prayer in the vulgar tongue, was established in many households ; and often did the request come from females, living in different quarters of the city, that meetings might be opened in their neighborhood expressly for the women. To meet the wants of the times, and in obe- dience to what seemed plainly to be a provi- dential intimation, a female seminary was opened at Pera in the autumn of 1845. It was kept in the house of Mr. Goodell, in whose family the pupils boarded, and Miss Lo- vell, who had arrived from America for the purpose the preceding spring, took charge of the educational department. The school opened with eight scholars, which were as many as could then be sustained by the fundi, though many parents were sadly disappointed when they were told no more could be re- ceived. In the autumn of 1844, the Patriarch As- duadzadur, resigned his office, and Matteos, formerly bishop of Brusa, but then of Smyrna, was appointed in his place. The former, be- fore his resignation, became more and more openly intolerant towards Protestantism. By his orders, priest Vertaness was again subjected to persecution, being divested of his office, cast into prison, and afterwards rudely banished. The new Patriarch wag a vacillating man ; well convinced of the errors of his Church, and sometimes appearing to favor reform, but ex- tremely afraid of offending the party that was strongest for the time being. Peshtimaljian represented him as a man of enlightened views, but without principle, and always governed by what he considered the prevailing opinions and wishes of those whom he desired to please. " In short," said the teacher, " he is just like an empty cistern. If you put your head to its mouth and say boo, the cistern says boo ; if you say bah, the cistern answers bah." Matteos is a man of more than common ability and shrewdness, and withal exceedingly plausible in his manner, and deep in his schemes. Soon after he came into power, many of the evangelical brethren called upon him ; some in obedience to custom, and others by special invitation. To all he manifested a friendly spirit ; and professed to be in favor of educar tion and even of reform, and opposed to perse- cution. He was, however, exceedingly anx- ious that both the missionaries, and the " Bible- men" in the Armenian community should " keep still," and avoid all " agitation." The position of the Patriarch was a most difficult one. The enemies of the truth were clamorous for some decisive measures which should effectually check the alarming tendency to Protestantism. They would neither allow their Patriarch to let the matter rest, nor to make any compromise. Already had the re- port gone abroad that Matteos himself was a Protestant. And in sober truth he knew and doubtless acknowledged to his own soul, that the Protestants were right and his own Church wrong. But he knew weU, that the greai ARMENIANS. 139 mass of wealth and influence in the Armenian community was on the other side. He was ambitious ; and now that he had attained to the highest post in his nation, he was resolved to keep it. He found the evangelical breth- ren much less disposed to yield in matters of faith and conscience, than his own indifferentism had led him to expect. As the only means of saving himself, he firmly resolved to sacriiice the Protestants. Prom that moment, all his powers, personal and official, were employed in the effort to eradicate Protestantism from the land. And, in the persecution that fol- lowed, Rev. Mr. D wight {Christianity revived in llie East, pp. 211, 213,) states that the Et. Eev. Horatio Southgate, missionary Bishop of the American Episcopal Church to the Otto- man Empire, appeared before the public as a sympathiser and counsellor with the Patriarch ; which Mr. D. substantiates by extracts from published documents, bearing the bishop's sig- nature. It is but just, however, to state that the church to which Bishop S. belonged, has since utterly repudiated his favorite policy, in the conduct of Eastern missions. (See Orien- tal Christians.) Almost every shopkeeper and artisan in Turkey depends for the chief profits of his bu- siness, upon the patronage of some wealthy and influential individuals ; and young men es- pecially, have very little prospect of advanc- ing in the world, without -the assistance of some such friend. The Patriarch, by a skill- ful manoeuvre, threw a large number of the ad- herents to the gospel, into the greatest distress. He secretly directed aE the faithful among his own flock, who stood in the relation of patrons, or regular customers to any of the evangelical brethren, silently to withdraw their patronage. The consequence was, that many who supposed they were in a fair way of obtaining a compe- tent support, found themselves suddenly with- out any business. Some of these had friends depending on them for daily food ; when all at once, it appeared that they had not the ability to provide for their own wants. And they soon found, also, that all appeals and remon- strances were useless, unless accompanied by a pledge to withdraw from the preaching of the missionaries and cease to open their mouths in favor of evangelical views. Another, and still more threatening measure of opposition was, that all the priests were ordered to hand over to the Patriarch the names of those who did not come to confession and receive absolution, and partake of the communion in their respec- tive churches. Those whose consciences were fully enlightened (and they were specially aimed at in the measure,) were not able to conform to these rites, because of the supersti- tion and idolatry involved. Now, excommu- nication was threatened to disobedience, the consequences of which, in a temporal point of view, must necessarily, in a community organ- ized as this was, be very serious. There was a delay, however, in following up this part of the plan, perhaps in order to see what would be the result of the other. The experiment was to be made throughout the country, as well as in the metropolis, and orders similar to the above were sent to the bishops in the inte- rior, wherever Protestants were found. In the mean time, some few of the ecclesias- tics themselves were showing strong inclinar tions towards the evangelical side of the ques- tion. Two or three vartabeds, as well as some of the priests, had gone so far as to per- severe, from Sabbath to Sabbath, in attending the public preaching of the missionaries. Others were known to be friendly. Something must be done at once to check this tendency to Protestantism among the spiritual guides of the people. Bedros, vartabed, was the first selected to be made an example of. It was known through the whole city that he had em- braced evangelical views, and the Patriarch, as a test of his opinions, had already ordered him to perform mass on a certain occasion, which Bedros had declined on conscientious grounds. The Patriarch now instructed him to proceed forthwith to a town on the Russian frontier, ostensibly to take charge of a diocese. The real object, however, was, plainly to get him into a position, from whence he might easily be conveyed as a prisoner to the monas- tery of Echmiadzin. The vartabed very po- litely declined the honor of this appointment, and the Patriarch was not then prepared to resort to force. After some little delay, it was arranged that Bedros should proceed to the monastery at Jerusalem. The Patriarch drew up a paper for him to sign, in which he was required to promise that he would perform all the rites of the Church, and, in all re- spects, be obedient to his superiors. This he resolutely persisted in refusing, on the ground that there were many things in the ceremo- nies of his Church, which he could not con- scientiously perform. He never got nearer Jerusalem than Beirut ; from whence he pro- ceeded to Aleppo and Aintab. Por several years he labored in these towns and their vicinity, with great zeal and fidelity for the spiritual good of his countrymen, though in the midst of many persecutions, trials and dangers. He distributed large numbers of evangelical books, and preached the gospel successfully to many people. He was suddenly cut off by the cholera in the autumn of 1849 ; but his end was peace. But Priest Vertaness was fairly in the Pa- triarch's hands, being already a prisoner at the monastery of Armash, whither he had been sent by the preceding Patriarch. And this priest had been adding sin to sin, by preaching to the monks, most zealously and faithfully, salvation through the blood of Christ alone, without the deeds of the law. Several of them were awakened and convinced, and some, it was hoped, really believed; and word was 140 ARMENIANS. brought io Constantinople that if the Protes- tant priest was not removed, all the inmates of the monastery would soon become corrupt- ed. An imperial firman was forthwith pro- cured (February, 1845,) by Matteos Patriarch, for the further banishment of priest Vertaness to Kaisery (Caesarea,) where Mr. Sahakyan had been confined six years before, for a like offence. While on his way to that place, in charge of a Turkish officer, he everywhere preached the Gospel, for which he was_ " in bonds ;" nor could he, in the place of his se- cond banishment, cease to make known " Christ and him crucified," to all unto whom he had access. In July of the same year, the Sultan, on the occasion of a great feast, gave orders to have all the exiles in the country set at liber- ty ; and Vertaness returned to Constantinople on the 4th of August. Letters afterwards came to the Patriarch from Kaisery, saying that Vertaness had seduced many, and that if he had remained there much longer, all would have gone after him. Before this, a highly respectable inhabitant of Trebizond, Tateos by name, who had been a member of the Armenian municipal council, became much interested in the study of the Bible. Being a man of some property, he went on a tour to Constantinople, Smyrna, Brusa, Nicomedia, and Adabazar, solely for the purpose of becoming acquainted with the mi.ssionaries and native brethren in those places, and learning more of the work of God's Spirit, as well as of the truths of his Word. He returned to Trebizond, very much strength- ened in his faith, and quickened in his zeal for the truth. Just before his arrival, the most stringent measures had been adopted to com- pel the evangelical brethren to submit to the Church, in obedience to a very urgent denun- ciatory letter from the Patriarch Matteos. Nearly one-half of the reputed Protestants had been induced to recant, and the persecuting party, fearing, with good reason, that the in- fluence of such a man might turn the scale, resolved to put him out of the way, with all possible despatch. Accordingly, just as the steamer was leaving for Constantinople, he was decoyed on board by stratagem, and immediate- ly thrust down into the hold, and there confined, by order of the Turkish pasha, who acted at the instigation of the Armenian vartabed. Arrived at Constantinople, he was conducted first to the Patriarchate, and from thence to the Armenian hospital, to be confined in the mad-house, in a sitting posture, and fastened with two chains, one from his neck to the wall, and the other from his feet to the floor. On the Sabbath, the eighth day of his imprison- ment, while the Armenian congregation were engaged in singing in the chapel in Pora, he entered the room — a free man ! Much suppli- cation had been made for him, and his sndden appearance among them, without their know- ing how he had been liberated, strongly re- minded them of the case of Peter. They uni- ted in special thanksgiving to God for his deliverance, and took courage. His case had been made known to Sir Stratford Canning, and there is no reason to doubt that his re- monstrances caused the Patriarch to loosen his grasp upon this innocent victim of his oppres- sion. The Patriarch labored with the most un- wearied diligence to overthrow the Seminary at Bebek ; but his opposition only increased its prosperity. Another method adopted by the Patriarch and his party, was to engage the Protestants in public discussions ; but in this, also, they were signally defeated, the Protestants mani- festly having the best of the argument, till as a last resort, they were treated with brow- beating and abuse. About this time, a censorship of the press was established, which threatened to be a se- rious obstacle in the way of the distribution of evangelical books ; but the object of the law being to shut out inflammatory political works, the character of the missionaries with the Turkish officers afforded a sufficient protec- tion to the books circulated by them. Among the evangelical brethren, a tempe- rance society was formed, which was the first one of the kind that ever existed in Turkey. This movement was rendered the more inter- esting from its being entirely self-prompted. It has been since carried out to the extent that the principle of total abstinence is of al- most universal adoption by the Protestants, wherever found. The missionary circle was invaded by the hand of death. Mrs. Van Lennep died, Sept. 27, 1844, less than a year from the time of her embarkation from America. Mr. and Mrs. Van Lennep had been removed from Smyrna to Constantinople during the preceding spring, for the express purpose of taking charge of the female seminary then in prospect, and her early removal was on this account an uncom- monly grievous affliction to the mission. The persecution which had broken out anew at Constantinople, extended its fury to other parts of the empire, and was prosecuted with the same bitter spirit. Instances of cruelty and suffering, shocking to humanity, occurred, the details of which we are obliged to omit It raged with the greatest violence and fury at Trebizond, where the evangelical party were harassed, turned out of their houses, imprisoned and banished, or " compelled to blaspheme," till scarcely one of them was left, and even the house of the missionary, Mr. Bliss, was attack- ed and pelted with stones till all the windows were broken in. But in most cases, these violent measures only tended to confirm the individuals in their new views, as they more clearly developed the true spirit of _ the ruling authorities in the Church ; and, in some instances, the persecu- ARMENIANS. 141 tors tliemselves were convinced and con- verted. A young man of superior mind and attain- ments, belonging to the Papal Armenian denomination, who had, for some time, given the most satisfactory evidence of piety, was called to his rest in the spring of 1844. He had been greatly troubled by his priest, who made every effort to reclaim him, even to the very last moment of his life. Mugurdioh, for that was his name, was very decided, and a few days before his death he made a formal renun- ciation of his Church, in writing ; and peace- fully committed his all to Christ. His body was not permitted burial in the graveyard, or with the usual religious ceremonies, but at a late hour of a very dark and stormy night, it was carried out by common street porters, un- der the direction of a Turkish police ofBcer, and placed under the ground, in the midst of a waste place about a mile from the city. They had previously attempted to frighten him back to his Church by threatening to bury him like a dog, and faithfully did they execute the threat ; though, as he told them at the time, they could do him no real harm, for they could not reach his soul. Aji attempt was made to reclaim a husband and sons, by refusing Christian burial to the wife and mother, although she had remained faithful to the Church to the very last. They would not yield, however, and after the great- est trouble, and being obliged to keep the body an unwonted time, they were at length compelled to carry it out, amid the jeers and spittings of the crowd, and bury it at a distance from the city, in the corner of a Mussulman's farm. Hitherto, the Evangelical Armenians had remained members of the ecclesiastico-civil community in which they were born. They lived in different degrees of conformity with the requisitions of the Church, according to the amount of light they had, and their readi- ness to endure reproach and suffering for Christ's sake. Some absented themselves en- tirely from the public services in their church- es, feeling that to be present where there was so much of superstition and idolatry, was vir- tually to sanction what their consciences con- demned. Others were occasionally present to hear a sermon, though they made it a point to retire from the other parts of the service. Others still, chiefly those who were only intel- lectually convinced of the truth, were as regu- lar in the external observance of the forms of the Armenian religion as custom required ; and, it should be mentioned, that previous to the Protestant movement, a great diversity had existed in this respect, in the practice of difi'erent individuals, and there had never been in the Armenian Church any of that rigor in enforcing ecclesiastical rules and obser- vances, which so characterises the Church of Rome. According to the fundamental laws of the Turkish empire, every individual of its Chris- tian subjects must be enrolled in some one of the existing communities, having a Patriarch at his head. To secede from one body, in or- der to join another, had repeatedly been for- bidden by the Sultan, and was always attended with danger ; although Papal diplomacy and Papal gold had often atoned for the offence, where the secession was to the Papal faith. To detach oneself from one community with- ' out coming into connection with another, was equivalent to a renunciation of every civil right and privilege, and necessarily exposed the individual to all the evil consequences of complete outlawry. To make this fully under- stood, it will be necessary to enter somewhat into detail. In the city of Constantinople, as well as in other large towns in Turkey, each trade is in- corporated, and its affairs are regulated by a committee, consisting of a small number of the most weaUhy and powerful individuals in the business ; and no person is permitted to open a shop, without a license from this committee. Frequently, a single individual, who may be called the presiding officer, has, in practice, if not in form, the whole matter of granting and withholding licenses, in his own hands. A Turkish officer presides over all the trades, whose official sanction is necessary to give force and effect to the doings of the trade committees. Every journeyman, and appren- tice even, must be furnished with a permit, to show to the Turkish police officers, whenever he is challenged in the streets, and if he fails to produce one, he is liable to be thrown into prison, as a disorderly man and a vagrant. On taking out these licenses, each individual is required to give two or more sureties for good conduct, and the "Patriarch is held as general surety for the whole community. If the evangelical Armenians had declared that they no longer acknowledged the authority of the Patriarch, it would have been tantamount to civil rebellion, and they would have been dealt with as outlaws. In spiritual matters, those who were decided among them, carefully abstained — as they were taught by the mis- sionaries, and had learned from the Word of God to do — from all participation in supersti- tion and idolatry. They attended regularly upon the ministry of the missionaries, and sat down at the table of the Lord with them, as guests ; because they could neither profitably nor conscientiously unite in this service at the Armenian Church. They retained connection, however, with their own people, and generally cherished the hope, amounting in some cases to a strong expectation that, by degrees, the great body of the Armenians would come 'over to the evangelical faith, and thus a serious 'rupture be avoided. The Patriarch Matteos .effectually cut off this hope. In the beginning of the year 1846, he re- 142 ARMENIANS. solved to enter upon more coercive measures. The first subject selected for the new experi- ment, was Priest Vertaness, whose zealous and persevering labors for the spread of pure Christianity, were doubly odious on account of his being a member of the priesthood, and who had already been twice banished for his religion. One of the Patriarch's beadles was sent to his lodgings, together with the chief municipal officer of the Armenians in that quarter, in order to arrest him. The owner of the house, who was friendly to his lodger, though not himself a Protestant, did not scru- ple to tell a falsehood, declaring that Verta- ness was absent, and thus sent the officers away. The priest made his escape the same night to another part of the city, where he re- mained for several weeks, concealed in the house of a friend. On Sunday, Jan. 25, after the usual morning services in the patriarchal church were finished, the house was darkened by extinguishing the candles, and the great veil was drawn in front of the main altar, and a bull of excision and anathema was solemnly read against Priest Yertaness, including all the followers of the " modern sectaries." He was styled by the Patriarch " a contemptible wretch," who, " following his carnal lusts," had forsaken the Church and was going about as a " vaga^ bond," " babbling out errors," and being an " occasion of stumbling to many." Pie was said to be " a traitor, and murderer of Christ, a child of the devil, and an offspring of Anti- christ, worse than an infidel or a heathen," for teaching " the impieties and seductions of modern sectaries, (Protestants)." "Where- fore," says the Patriarch, " we expel him and forbid him as a devil, and a child of the devil, to enter into the company of believers. We cut him off from the priesthood, as an ampu- tated member of the spiritual body of Christ, and as a branch cut off from the vine, -which is good for nothing but to be cast into the fire. By this admonitory bull, I therefore command and warn my beloved in every city, far and near, not to look upon his face — regarding it as the face of Belial ; not to receive him into your holy d-n-ellings ; for he is a house-destroy- ing and ravening wolf ; not to receive his sal- utation, but as a soul-destroying and deadly poison ; and to beware, with all your house- holds, of the seducing and impious followers of the false doctrine of the modern sectaries (Protestants) ; and to pray for them to the God who remembereth not iniquity, if per- chance they may repent and turn from their wicked paths, and secure the salvation of their souls, through the grace of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, who is blessed for ever. Anion." This bull of excision and anathema was fol- lowed by a violent denunciatory discourse from the Patriarch, against all the Protestants in general, and the priest in particular, whiich called forth many loud " amens " from the in- flamed people. . . On the following day the greatest activity prevailed among the priests, in every part ot the city and suburbs. All moved like the dif- ferent parts of a machine, as if by one impulse, and it was not difficult to trace the direction from which that impulse had come. The reso- lute Patriarch was determiued not to trust merely to the impression made upon the people by the anathema, and his accompanying de- nunciations on the preceding day. lie, there- fore, issued orders to his clergy to see that the temporal penalties threatened in that instru- ment were immediately inflicted to the very letter. The priests went forth simultaneously to their work, — most of them apparently with good-will, but some reluctantly, their sympar thies being with the innocent victims of op- pression, rather than with the oppressor. The Armenian heads of all the trade corporations in the city were commanded to withdraw their countenance from all Protestants who would not recant. The keepers of khans and the owners of houses were ordered to eject all lodgers and tenants who would not comply with this condition. Families were also visited by the priests, wherever any one lived who was suspected of heresy, and it was en- joined upon them to expel the offending mem- ber, or separate from it, even though it were a son or daughter, brother or sister, husband or wife. The Protestant brethren were sum- moned to repair immediately to the Patriarch- ate in order publicly to recant and become reconciled to the Church. To give force to the whole, the threat was issued that all who refused to aid in carrying out these measures against the " new sectaries," should themselves be anathematized. A wild spirit of fanaticism now reigned. Before it, all sense of right, all regard to truth and justice, all " bowels of mercies " vanished away. Even the strong and tender affection subsisting between husbands and wives, bro- thers and sisters, parents and children, was, in some instances, exchanged for the cruel and relentless hate of the persecutor. The very constancy of the people of God provoked still more the wrath of their enemies. Their readi- ness to suffer joyfully the spoiling of their goods was considered as a proof that large temporal rewards had been offered them by the missionaries ; and their unwavering fldel- -ity to Christ was interpreted into obstinacy. Some on the side of the Church, who at first were signally wanting in zeal, in furthering the Patriarch's violent measures, were stimu- lated into active persecutors, by what appeared to them, in their religious indifferentism, as mere stubbornness on the part of the Protests ants. -* The leading men in the different trade cor- porations, showed more resoluteness than any 1 other class, in attempting to force the evan- -ARMENIANS. 143 E;elical brethren to a compliance with the Patriarch's demands ; and they could urge motives more potent than almost any other of a worldly nature. Whatever method of coer- cion was resorted to, whether by priests or people, it was everywhere publicly declared to be by the express command of the Patriarch Matteos. During the week after the first anathema was read, although many were forcibly driven from their houses and shops, and prevented from doing business to support themselves and families, and some were expelled from the paternal roof, and otherwise afflicted, yet not one was induced to recant. On the following Sabbath, the passions of an ignorant and su- perstitious people were still more inflamed by a second anathema, which, like the first, was read in all the churches, and accompanied by the most violent denunciations from the Patri- arch, the bishops, and the vartabeds. In this bull it was declared that not only the " cursed nonentity, Vertaness," " falsely called priest," was anathematized by the " holy Church," but likewise " all that were of his senti- ments." They were together pronounced to be " accursed, and excommunicated, and anar thematized, by God, and by all his saints, and by us," that is, Matteos Patriarch. " Wherefore," he says, " whoever has a son that is such an one, or a brother, or a partner, (in business] and gives him bread, or assists him in making money, or has intercourse with him as a friend, or does business with him, let such persons know that they are nourishing a venomous serpent in their houses, which will one day injure them with its deadly poison, and they will lose their souls. Such persons give bread to Judas. Such persons are ene- mies of the Holy faith of Christianity, and destroyers of the holy orthodox Church of the Armenians, and a disgrace to the whole nation. Wherefore, their houses and shops also are accursed ; and whoever goes to visit them, we shall learn, and publish them to the Holy Church, by terrible anathemas." The spirit of exasperation knew no bounds. One after another, the brethren were summoned before the Patriarch, or the local ecclesiastical authorities of their particular quarter of the city, and required to sign a paper of recanta^ tion, on penalty of being " terribly anathemar tized," which involved their being deprived of all business and treated as outlaws. The first paper presented for their signature was, in substance, a confession that under " the wicked enticements of Satan" they had " separated from the spotless bosom of the Holy Church," and joined the " impious sect" of the Protest- ants ; which now they saw to be " nothing else but an invention of arrogance, a snare of Sa- tan, a sect of confusion, a broad road which leadeth to destruction." Wherefore repenting of their " impious deeds," they fled for pardon " to the bosom of the holy and immaculate Armenian Church," and confessed that " her faith is spotless, her sacraments divine, her rites of apostolic origin, her ritual pious ;" and promised to receive " whatever this same holy Church receiveth, whether it be a matter of faith or ceremony," and " to reject with anar theraas," " whatever doctrines she rejects." This first paper not being snfBciently expli- cit to suit some of the persecuting party, an- other was drawn up in the form of a creed, to which all were required to subscribe, as the only condition of being restored to the favor of the Patriarch, that is to their civil privileges. This creed contained substantially all the er- rors of Popery. It acknowledged that good works justify a man as well as faith ; that the Church is infallible ; that there are seven sa- craments ; that baptism by water, and private confession to a priest are essential to salvation ; that the soul of one dying without full pen- ance for his sins, is after death, purified by the prayers of the church, by the bloodless sacri- fice of the mass, and by the alms-giving of his friends ; that the bread and wine of commun- ion are the true body and blood of Christ ; that ^lary is the mother of God ; that " the holy anointed" material crosses are worthy of adoration, as also relics and pictures ; that the intercession of the saints is acceptable to God ; and that the Patriarchs rule the Church as Christ's vicegerents. It also required tliose who subscribed it to join in anathematizing all who call the worship of the holy cross, and of relics and pictures, idolatry, and who reject the ceremonies of the church as superstitious. These two papers, the first having been com- monly called. The Paper of Recantation, and the second, The Patriarch Matteos's New Creed, were issued under the high authority of the Patriarch himself, and sent by him through- out the country for the signature of the Pro- testants. In Smyrna, in Nicomedia, in Ada- bazar, in Trebizond, and in Brzrum, the evan gelical brethren were summoned before their respective ecclesiastical rulers, and presented with identically the same creed, which, they were told, had been received from the Patri- arch, and which they were required, by his command, to sign. One individual, a very respectable merchant who was in partnership with his father-in-law, was driven from his shop, and separated also from his wife and children, and defrauded of his property for refusing to yield to these re- quisitions of the Patriarch. Another, who was in the silk business, was summoned before the Patriarch, who, when he found no signs of repentance, so far forgot himself, as to address this brother with rude and angry profaneness ; and, declaring that he and all like minded with him are accursed, he drove him away. The individual returned to his shop, but was soon followed by a beadle from the Patriarch, who summoned his partner before this digni- tary. The partner was required forthwith to 144 ARMENIANS dissolve all connection witt the heretic, which fear led him to do without delay. Since the shop and most of the capital belonged to the partner, the brother was at once reduced to circumstances of the deepest distress. As a still further act of coercion, the Patriarch sent for his father, and enjoined it upon him to drive his own son from home, and deprive him of his inheritance. This command, in sub- stance, was afterwards committed to writing, and addressed to a priest, under the Patriarch's own seal, two other sons being now included in it. The following is a literal translation of the original, which the writer of this article has seen, with the Patriarch's own signature and seal attached : " Mt beloved Priest. — This Khachadur, a penitent, has said ' I have sinned,' and pro- mised to confess to you, and to commune in the bosom of our church. But his three sons, (one of whom was the silk merchant) are im- penitent and hardened in iniquity. If they come to the house of their father, he is not to re- ceive them, and he is not to retain them as his heirs ; but let them be stripped of their inheritance, if they do not turn from their wickedness. Farewell." January 18, (0. S.) 1846, At the Patriarchate of the Ar- menians, Constantinople. (Sealed) Matteos Patriarch. Many other cases of like cruelty and oppres- sion are related by the missionaries as speci- mens of the cruelties practiced upon the peo- ple of God, by their enraged persecutors. Nearly forty individuals in Constantinople had their shops closed and their licenses to trade taken away, and were thereby prevented from laboring for an honest livelihood. Nearly seventy were obliged to leave father, mother, brother, sister, husband, wife, or child, for Christ's sake ; and were forced by the Patri- arch's orders from their own hired houses, and sometimes even from houses owned by them- selves. In order to increase their distress, bakers were repeatedly and stringently order- ed not to furnish them with bread, and water- carriers to cut off their supply of water. As multitudes of families in the metropolis depend entirely upon the latter for all the water they use, and the greater part of the water-carriers are bigoted Armenians, this measure operated with great severity. Many, who were thrown out of business, were compelled to dissolve partnerships, and to bring their accounts to a forced settlement, which involved their entire ruin. And the greatest activity prevailed among the Patriarch's agents, to ascertain where debts were due from any of the anathe- matized to a faithful son of the Church ; and the latter, however reluctant he might be per- sonally to distress his friend, was compelled to urge an immediate settlement. In short, there was displayed the greatest ingenuity m invent- ing various refined methods of afflicting the people of God, so aa if possible to " compel them to blaspheme." Large numbers of sus- pected Protestants were carried before the Patriarch, and urged to submit to the Church and sign the creed ; but only four or five of those who were previously known to the mi* sionaries as decidedly evangelical in sentiment, were led to give in their adhesion to the Par triarch ; and they almost immediately renounc- ed the forced confession they had made, and, returning to the Protestants, were anathema- tized with the rest. Attempts were also made, but without success, to persuade them by mild- er means, and even by offers of pecuniary ad- vantage, to return to their mother church. Nothing could be more evident than that the suffering brethren had special grace given them from above, to enable them to bear as they did these severe trials. Driven from their houses and shops, their families and friends, and having no certain dwelling-place ; and many of them reduced to penury ; subject to constant insult in the streets, and sometimes to personal injury ; and having every reason to apprehend persecution in still more violent forms, they yet exhibited a calm and quiet spirit of endurance, a readiness to suffer the loss of all for Christ, and a peace and joy in the midst of their sufferings, which could be accounted for only on the supposition, that God was with them in very deed. One, who in fact spoke the feelings of many, said one day to a missionary, " My daily prayer to God is, that even if there should not be left a single person except myself to witness for the truth, He would still give me faith to stand firm for the doctrine of salvation by grace in Christ alone. I know that all the resistance we now make to error, we are mak- ing for coming generations. We may never reap the fruits ourselves, but our exercise of firmness and faith now, will enable thousands, and perhaps millions, in after days to enjoy the rights of conscience in pure and holy wor- ship." Another brother, to whom an offer of up- wards of 20,000 piastres (about $1,000) was made by a rich friend, op condition that he would conform to the Church, replied : " If you knew anything of the value of the Gospel, or the preciousness of faith in Christ, you would not have thought to influence me either by a thousand, or a hundred thousand dollars." Many of whom the missionaries had known but little, were led by these violent measures to take a decided stand for the truth ; and in the midst of the most violent ragings of the enemy, the missionaries' houses and the room in the Khan, in the heart of the city, kept for the reception of visitors, were more than ever thronged. The persecuted brethren wrote letr ters to the Patriarch and to the primates of the Armenian community, setting forth their ARMENIANS. 145 doctrinal views, declaring their attachment to their nation, and expressing their desire to be further enlightened, yet declaring that they could do nothing against their consciences. But they found no relief; and at length, they presented a petition to Eeshid Pasha, Turk- ish Minister of Foreign Affairs, containing a plain, dignified statement of their grievances. This petition was treated with respect ; but, owing to the influence of some of the Arme nian primates, it procured no relief Subse- quently, a letter was addressed by the persecu- ted brethren to the English, Prussian, and American Ministers, asking for the influence of these high public functionaries to procure their release from present suffering, and the guarantee of their civil rights. The kindest interest was taken in their case by the liberal- minded and humane gentlemen who occupied these posts, and repeated efforts were made to procure for them exemption from suffering ; but the persecution still went on. There was evidently a connivance of some of the Turkish authorities in this thing, and the Patriarch was so much encouraged by his sucpess, thus far, that he sent to the Porte the names of thirteen leading men among the Protestants, requesting their banishment. The reply of the Porte was fatal to his plans. The sub- stance of it was, that having adopted the prin- ciple of freedom of conscience, they could not banish men for imputed religious errors. The English Ambassador, Sir Stratford Canning, had already been urging upon the attention of the Turkish ministry, the pledge given three years before by the Sultan, and, in accordance with the true spirit of this pledge, it was now decided that the persecution of the evangelical Armenians could not be allowed. The humane endeavors of the American charge, Mr. Brown, and subsequently of the American minister, Mr. Carr, and also of the Prussian minister, Mr. Le Coq, contributed essentially to bring about this happy issue. A petition from the suffering brethren, directly to the Sultan him- self, no doubt, had its share of influence. By the agency of Sir Stratford, Eeshid Pasha summoned before him the Patriarch, and charged him to desist from his persecuting course. The persecution began the last week in Jan- uary, and it was now past the middle of March, and during the whole of this interval, the Protestants had struggled in vain, until this moment, to procure their civil and social rights. As regularly as the Sabbath came round, the Armenian churches, in and around the capital, rung with anathemas against all the followers of the " new sect." None were more violent in their public addresses than the Patriarch himself, who seemed determined that the exci- ted passions of an uninformed and bigoted populace against the so called " infidels " and " atheists," should not subside, so long as he oculd find fuel to feed the flame. The most 10 foolish calumnies in regard to the religious views and practices of the Protestants, were uttered from all the pnlpits, and even publish- ed in books under the Patriarchal sanction. In one of the latter, having the imprimatur of the Patriarch upon the title page, it was cool- ly asserted of the whole Protestant Church, that it formally approves of polygamy, adultery, and theft, and sanctions rebellion against the civil powers ! With such examples, and such untiring effort on the part of their spiritual lead- ers, in the use of means like these, to stimulate the fanatical feelings of the people, it was not strange that the brethren could not pass through the streets without being abused by the most filthy language, and even spit upon and stoned. Great care was taken, particu- larly after it was known that the foreign am- bassadors were keeping an eye on all these proceedings, not to exceed, if possible, the bounds of the law ; so that when even as many as threescore and ten men, women, and chil- dren, who had refused to bow the knee in idol- atry, had been sent to wander houseless in the streets, it was still declared that there was no persecution ! To the missionaries, however, it was known that, for the faith of Christ, they were driven out, and for the love of Christ they could not refuse to take them in. Very providentially, the Eev. Mr. Allan, missionary to the Jews,, from the Free Church of Scotland, had, a short time previously, secured a large house, with reference to a preaching place, as well as a dwelling for his family ; and, with true Chris- tian sympathy and generosity, he opened his doors for the oppressed. Twenty individuals of the persecuted, found a comfortable lodging- place there. For the rest, the missionaries hired such tenements as could be found, at the same time providing the starving with bread, while they were cut off from all means of procuring their own subsistence. A statement was drawn up of the grievous things that had befallen the brethren in Turkey, accompanied by an appeal to evangelical Christians throughout the world for sympathy and aid ; and the generous contributions that flowed in from all quarters of the globe, wherever the story had gone, and pious hearts were found, showed how strong a bond of union is the love of Christ. Letters of the tenderest Christian sympathy were received, accompanied, by donar tions for the sufferers, from every Protestant country in Europe, from England, Malta, and India, as well as from the United States ; and in this spontaneous movement in behalf of the persecuted people of God, denominational dis- tinctions were forgotten. Nearly or quite five hundred dollars were contributed by foreign Protestant residents upon the ground, who naturally felt the more deeply, because they were personal spectators of the sufferings they were called upon to relieve. By these means the brethren who were scat- 146 ARMENIANS. tered oyer an area of 8 or 10 miles were brought together, and had opportunity to meet for prayer, to become acquainted and sympathise with each other ; thus forming a bond of union, which remains to this day. The Patriarch had now received such lessons from high quarters, as greatly to modify his expectations of putting down Protestantism by force ; and he was even compelled, reluct- antly, to issue public orders to his clergy, in certain cases, against persecution ; though it is known that secret instructions were, at the same time, given of a contrary nature. Printed copies of the Patriarch's two ana- themas were sent to every part of Turkey, to be read in all the churches ; and similar scenes followed in Nicomedia, Adabazar, Trebizond, Erzrum, Brusa, Smyrna, and other places ; and in some of them, scenes of a still more revolt ing character were enacted. Sir Stratford Canning, whose noble efforts for religious liberty in Turkey are worthy of all praise, did not cease to urge upon the Turkish government the necessity of securing to its Protestant subjects the right of pursuing their lawful callings without molestation. Be- tween thirty and forty in Constantinople alone, were still excluded from their shops and their business, on the plea that they were without sureties. The Ambassador represented that the demands of the law might be met, by their becoming sureties for one another. This im- portant concession was at length made by the government, and Eeshid Pasha, the Minister of Foreign Affairs, or Grand Vizer, as he soon after became, gave orders that the Protestants be permitted to resume their business on this condition. This decision, which, with a limited application, had already released four imprison- ed watchmakers, being now made general, vir- tually settled the question of religious liberty for the Protestants in Turkey. The immediate relief afforded was important, though far from being entire. The brethren were still tried in various ways. Many, from the very circum- stances of the case, could not hope to regain the situations from which they had been thrust: Others were still subject to secret persecution, which was the harder to bear, because it could not easily be traced to its proper source, and brought in a tangible form ivnder the cogni- zance of the civil courts. The Patriarch, seeing which way the current was turning, very adroitly attempted to set himself forth before the world as a friend of religious liberty, and a sympathizer with the suffering ; although, at ,lie same time, he was repeating his ana- tlicmas in his own church every Sabbath-day, and exciting the people, by his appeals to their fanaticism, as before. This kept alive the spirit of persecution, and various arts were practiced, often successfully, to prevent the brethren who had opened their shops, from doing any business. Numberless vexations were practiced from time to time, and there was often a great want of promptness in the Turkish courts in relieving the innocent suf- ferers of their oppressions, even when they had tangible ground of complaint. These irregu- larities, however, were to be expected in such a country, and under such circumstances. There was still satisfactory proof that the Turkish government was disposed to be sincere and consistent in its declarations in favor of re- ligious liberty. A vizirial letter, dated early in June, 1846, commanding the Pasha of Erzrum to see that the civil rights of the Protestants were not infringed, so long as they were faithful subjects of the Sultan, is worthy of mention, as the first imperial document ever issued by the Turkish government, for the pro- tection of its Protestant subjects. In the course of the persecutions that have now been described the Patriarch was incessant in his efforts to break up the Mission Seminary at Bebek. He succeeded at different times, in getting away seventeen, in all, out of twenty- seven students ; but five of these soon returned, and ten others joined the institution, several of whom were pious and promising young men, who having been driven by persecution from their business, were led to consecrate them- selves to the service of God in the ministry, and to seek from the Mission Seminary the in- tellectual and moral discipline they needed for this work. Mr. and Mrs. Everett, who had been connected with the Smyrna station since April, 1845, removed to Constantinople in the summer of 1846, and Mrs. Everett was asso- ciated with Miss Lovell in the instruction of the Female Seminary. For nearly six months continuously, the ana- thema had been publicly repeated every Sab- bath in the Patriarchal Church, as well as in other churches, until many of the people be- gan to grow weary of the sound ; and the changes were so frequently rung on the various forms of denunciation, which had been contrived to give force to the bull, that their efficiency seemed rapidly wasting away. And yet, up to the middle of the year 1846, through the influence of the Church authorities, bread and water were still withheld from many Protest- ant families, by the regular dealers in those articles, and everything was done, that could with safety be attempted, to vex those who re- mained steadfast in the truth. The sufferers had again and again petitioned to their Patri- arch, and to the primates for relief, but they were uniformly repulsed with the declaration that there was no hope of any melioration of their condition, except by unconditional s ib- mission to the Church. Hitherto, no one had voluntarily separated himself from the Arme- nian community. Those who were called schismatics, had become such by the exscind- ing act of the Patriarch himself, who was the sole author of the schism, and who seemed to try every method in his power to render the separation perpetual. ARMENIANS U1 On the '21st of Juna, 1846, he gave the finishing blow to this work, by a public official act, which resulted, through necessity, in the organization of the Evangelical Protestant Churches in Turkey. On that day, it being the day of a solemn festival for the Church, he issued a new bull of excommunication and ana- thema against all who remained firm to their evangelical principles, decreeing that it should be publicly read at each annual return of this festival, in all the Armenian Churches through- out the Ottoman Empire. Thus were the Protestants cut off and cast out forever. And although they had no power to organize them- selves into a civil community, yet nothing could be plainer than their duty, immediately to secure to themselves and their children, as far as they were able, the full possession of all the spiritual privileges of the Gospel. They made a written request to the mission- aries, for aid in a matter in which they them- selves had had no experience. Accordingly, a meeting was held in Constantinople, of dele- gates from the different stations of the mission to Turkey. The Rev. Messrs. Allan and Eoenig, missionaries of the Free Church of Scotland to the Jews of Constantinople, and the Rev. Dr. Pomroy, then pastor of a Congre- gational Church in Bangor, Maine, and now one of the Secretaries of the Board, who was providentially on a visit to the Levant at that time, were also present by invitation, and took part in the deliberations. All felt that God was there ; and the overwhelming importance of the business on which they were convened, and their sense of their own ignorance and im- potence, seemed to compel them to throw them- selves directly upon him. Much prayer was offered, both by the members of the convention and the native brethren, and to this it must be ascribed that although there were representa^ fives of four different denominations of Chris- tians among them, yet the most entire harmony of feeling pervaded their deliberations, and the result was attained by a unanimous vote. On the 1st day of July, 1846, the Evangeli- cal Armenians in Constantinople, to the num- ber of forty, three of whom were females, came together for the purpose of organizing themselves into a Church. The plan of organ- ization, as drawn up at the above mentioned meeting, w;ts read and explained, article by article, and those present gave their solemn assent to the whole, and with perfect unanimity, adopted it as theirs, and were thus constituted into The Pikst Evangelical Armenian Church of Constantinople. After the names of the church members had been recorded, a pastor was chosen by ballot, and without pre- vious consultation, the choice fell unanimously on ilr. Apisoghom Khachad Aryan. The other church officers were then elected, and the mee1> ing was adjourned. Although the whole had occupied from four to five hours, the deepest in- terest was maintained throughout; much ten- derness of feeling was manifested, and many eyes were suffused with tears. The articles of church organization here adopted, provide for the trial of offenders by a standing committee, or church session, chosen for a limited time, and consisting of deacons and " helpers," who, after conducting a case to its close, report their proceedings with the evi- dence, to the male members of the Church, and a vote is taken of assent or dissent. In the event of dissent, the case goes up to the pastors and delegates of the associated churches, whose decision in all cases, is final. Provision is made for appeal to this body, before which the trial of ministers accused of offences is to be had. The Confession of Faith is similar to those of the orthodo.x Calvinistic churches in this coun- try. ( For these documents in full, see " Chris- tianity Revived in the East," Appendix P.) In one week from the organization of the church, the pereon chosen was pubUcly ordained to the work of the Gospel ministry, as pastor of the newly formed Church. Under the cir cumstances it was necessary to perform the ordination by an ecclesiastical council invited by the Church, and which consisted of the missionaries of the board resident at Constan- tinople, and the Rev. Mr. Allan of the mission of the Free Church of Scotland to the Jews of the capital. A scene so new as a Protestant ordination in the capital of the Turkish Empire drew forth a crowd to the chapel, several of whom were of the Patriarch's party. The strictest silence, how- ever, prevailed, and the most fixed and solemn attention was given to every part of the service. As an act of justice to themselves, the mem- bers of this new church lost no time in setting forth before the world the declaration of their faith, and their reasons for the step they had taken. This document will be found in the ap- pendix of " Christianity Revived in the East." In the course of the same summer, churches were formed on the same basis, in Nicomedia, Adabazar, and Trebizond ; with the most evi- dent good results, although the original num- ber of members was, in each case, small. It is not known that the least objection was ever made to these organizations, by the Turkish government, or any of its officers. Indeed, the sympathies of the Mohammedans were with the persecuted, rather than with their enemies. The use of pictures in worship ; the im-oca- tion of saints ; and the doctrine of transub- stantiation and priestly absolution, are as ab- horrent to the Koran as they are to the Bible. The government of the Sultan had ordered that the Protestants be no longer molested in their civil rights, on account of their religious sentiments. Their shops were reopened, but it was comparatively easy for their busy ene- mies to prevent traffic with them, without open- ly infringing the law, and this was repeatedly done. They could not be imprisoned or ban- ished merely for their religious sentiments ; 14:8 ARMENIANS. but false claims of debt could and did imprison them ; and false charges of vicious conduct, established by perjury, could and did secure their banishment. In Constantinople consider- able sums of money were paid by different indi- viduals to avoid imprisonment for pretended debts ; and more than a score of Protestants, at different times, were shut up with felons for alleged crimes which false witnesses had proved against them, and which they, from the very organization of the Turkish courts, could not disprove. As an example of the length to which the Patriarch could even now go in his persecuting measures, the following story is related : A place of Protestant worship was opened in the city proper, for the accommoda- tion of many families who, on account of the distance, could not often be present at the chapel in Pera. The house hired for this pur- pose was built by a former Patriarch, though now owned by his brother, who was a worthy member of the Protestant community and Church. It was situated near the Patriarchate, which no doubt was an additional cause of vexation to this dignitary. At that time no other house could be obtained in all Constanti- nople, for such a purpose. By a cunning de- vice, the Patriarch procured the imprisonment of Stepan, the owner of the house, by the Tur- kish police, on charge of flogging one of his priests ! The priest had been sent by his su- perior to Stepan's house, in his absence, to endeavor to persuade his wife to separate from him ; and the injured husband merely called at the priest's door, and warned him not to en- ter his house again, on pain of civil prosecu- tion. This was a sufficient ground for a pre- text, the futility of which was transparent on the trial, the whole object and aim of the charges being to prevent the holding of Pro- testant worship in the house in question. The Patriarch first claimed the house as the pro- perty of the Church, having been built by a Patriarch. And when tliis was decided against him, he begged that Stepan might be removed from the house, since all his neigh- bors were complaining against him as a dis- turber of the peace. This also was set aside. After several other vain shifts on the part of the Patriarch to accomplish his object, the Judge at length took up the same side, and said to Stepan, " The government gives you no permission to hold meetings in that house." " Sir," said Stepan, with solemn earnestness, " I beg that you will not fatigue yourselves with efforts to prevent us from meeting ; for I declare that not only I, but all the Protestant Armenians also, are ready to shed our blood for this thing. Consult together, if you please, as to the best method of getting rid of us, whether by exiling, drowning, or by cutting off our heads ; but it is useless to try to prevent us from meeting. The Holy Gospel commands us to meet ; it is a matter of conscience and duty with us ; and we can never cease to meet for the worship of God." The Judge had no reply to make to this noble answer, but merely directed his clerk to record that " the Protes- tants say it is a matter of faith and conscience with them to hold meetings." Stepan was soon liberated. In interior places, where the new order ot things was not so well understood, and where the local governors were more completely the creatures and the tools of rich and influen- tial Armenians, it was still more easy to afflict the Protestants with impunity. In Nicome- dia, after religious liberty had been proclaimed to the Protestants, the brethren were often abused in the streets, and their houses stoned. In Adabazar, a Protestant teacher was put in chains and sent to prison, on the general charge of disturbing the peace, though no one in the town was really more peaceable than he. At Trebizond, a mob of women attacked with heavy stones, two females who were re- turning from the preaching of the missionaries, and because their husbands endeavored to shield them from harm, these husbands were thrown into prison, and there stretched out, with their faces downwards, upon the cold, damp ground, and their feet confined in the stocks ! In this painful position they were feft for a whole day, without food, so that one became insensible, and was more dead than alive when he was removed. The other waa carried to Constantinople, and there kept in close confinement for several months, his per- secutors, who were influential, insisting upon it that he was a disturber of the peace and a dangerous man. In the same place, on the oc- casion of the death of a Protestant brother, the house where the body lay was assailed by stones from a furious mob, and every effort was made to prevent the burial. This neces- sary duty could only be performed, at last, un- der shelter of the night, and by paying twenty- one dollars for permission to dig a grave in the public highway ! At Erzrum an infuriated mob forced its way into the house of Dr. Smith, and bore away a priest of the church, who had escaped thither to avoid persecution, he being a Protestant in sentiment. They afterwards returned with renewed fury, broke Into the house a second time, felled to the ground a native assistant and also a patient of the doctor, and destroyed seven or eight hun- dred dollars' worth of books and furniture. Even in the capital itself, at the burial of the first Protestant adult after the separation, the procession, in returning from the grave, was followed by a mob of Armenians, who first began to shout in a highly insulting and disgraceful manner, using the most filthy lan- guage ; and afterwards to hurl stones, some of which were of an enormous size. The mob thus followed the procession for a quarter of a mile or more, when they amounted to at least a thousand persons. Several of the Armenian brethren, and one at least of the mis.sionaries ARMENIANS. 149 were struck with the atones, though providen- ^ tially no one was seriously injured. In all those oases, and numberless others of a similar kind, the Turkish tribunals were immediately appealed to for redress ; and this was, sooner or later, almost sure to be obtained, though not always to the full extent that was due. At Nicomedia the governor ordered the civil and ecclesiastiflal leaders of the Armenian community to desist from their oppressions, saying, " The Protestants no longer belong to you, and you have no right to interfere with their religion." A file of soldiers, even, was sent on one occasion to disperse the mob. At Ti-ebizond, police officers were regularly sta- tioned at the entrance of the Protestant place of worship, as long as such a step was consid- ered necessary. By the prompt and decisive intervention of the United States Minister at the Porte, the damages sustained at Brzrum by Dr. Smith were repaid, and four of the leaders in the mob were imprisoned. And in Constantinople, the police took effectual meas- ures to prevent the recurrence of such dis- graceful scenes as those described in connec- tion with the first funeral. The position of the Protestants was still an anomalous one in Turkey. They were separ ated from the Armenian community, but not united with any other. The Turkish govern- ment was determined they should not be mo- lested by the Patriarch or his ministers, but exactly what to do with them was not so easily decided. According to the municipal regula- tions of Constantinople, neither marriage, baptism, nor burial can be performed without the cognizance of the civil power. A certifi- cate from the Patriarch must be presented to the head of the police, to procure a permit for marriage. The name of every child baptized must be communicated by the Patriarch to the same officer, for enrolment ; and previous per- mission must be obtaiued, through the Patri- arch, from the Board of Health, for every burial. Besides this, no person can travel in the conn- try without a passport, and no passport can be obtained without the Patriarch's voucher for the honesty of the man. At first it seemed to be the plan of the government, that while the Protestants should be entirely separated from the Patriarch, so far as religious matters were concerned, he might still be left to act for them as their civil representative at the Porte. This was soon foimd to be utterly impractical ble. There seemed to be two principal ob- jections to organizing them regularly into a separate civil community ; namely, the fewness of their numbers, and the strong objections of certain parties having great influence with the government. They were consequently left for ■ more than a year and a half with their rights acknowledged, and yet without any regular provision for securing those rights from inva- sion ; and subject, in the interval, to frequent grievances and even oppressions, such as have been described. And it is always to be under- stood, that Protestants in the interior were exposed to greater trials of this sort in pro- portion to the remoteness of their situation from the capital. But though the patience of the evangelical Armenians was long tried in various ways, through their imperfect acknowledgment by the government, still there was a gradual melioration of their condition evidently going on, which, to such as were watching with reasonable expectations, the signs of the times, was highly encouraging. It is impossible for those who have never been in like circumstan- ces, to conceive of the degree of satisfaction and encouragement felt by the Protestants when they were for the first time permitted to bury their dead in peace, under the protection of the civil power, and to procure a permit for marriage, and a passport for traveling, without the mediation of the Patriarch. The second adult funeral among them was in strik- ing contrast with the first. It occurred on the Sabbath, and in the procession were from 100 to 1.50 native Protestants, with their pas- tor at their head, carrying a copy of the Scrip- tures in his hand.- All marched silently and solemnly, at mid-day, through the most public street of Pera, to the Protestant burying- ground, under the protection of a body of the police. It was a new and wonderful spectacle for Turkey ; and shop-keepers and artisans along the way turned aside from business for the moment, and inquired, What new thing is this? Hitherto the funeral processions of native Christians had been accompanied with gilded crosses elevated in the air, and candles, and priestly robes, and chantings. It was whispered from mouth to mouth, " These are the Protestants. See how the government protects them !" Some of the Mussulmans said, " Look ! There are no crosses ! no sing- ing ! This is as it should be." Several hundreds of people of different classes gathered around the grave, where a hymn was sung, and a short but earnest and appropriate address was delivered Dy the pas- tor. Many went home from that burial with new and more correct impressions of what Protestantism really is. The moral influence of the whole spectacle was highly salutary, and it was felt by all that an important point had been gained to the Protestant cause. The internal growth of the community was ever in advance of the external. No week passed without furnishing evidence of the special pre- sence of God's Spirit. But in eight short months a heavy affliction befell the church in the capital in the death of its beloved and useful pastor. His labors, and cares, and anxieties had been abundant, and he was the object of many a shaft from the enemy. He was sometimes thrown into very exciting scenes, in the midst of mobs, raised in the streets to vex the Protestants. Only a 150 ARMENIANS. short time previous to his death, he visited Nicomedia ; and while there, was called to attend the funeral of a Protestant brother. As the procession passed along the street, thousands of hostile Armenians were assem- bled, to meet it with insults and abuse. Ar- rived at the place of burial, this rabble gath- ered around the grave, and Mr. Khachaduryan took the opportunity of preaching to them the Gospel of Christ. They listened in perfect silence, and then went quietly to their homes. The pastor returned to Constantinople, over- come by exertion and excitement. Within a week, he was exposed to the worrying influence of a similar outrage, at the funeral of a Pro- testant child, in the capital. His last disease immediately developed itself, which was pro- nounced by a judicious physician to be a dis- ease of the brain, induced by excessive mental effort and excitement, a disease in this form, scarcely known in the country. During most of his illness he was delirious, but his ruling passion was constantly showing itself. Scarce- ly anything else was heard to proceed from his lips but the name of the beloved Saviour, or what pertained to his kingdom and glory. The report went abroad among his superstitious enemies that G-od had smitten him with raving madness and despair, in consequence of the anathemas of the Church, which rested upon him ; and great would have been their glory- ing, had his sun thus set under a cloud. But the earnest supplications of his Church were heard ; the cloud was lifted up ; the laboring mind was unshackled ; ard the departing saint was permitted to magnify the grace of Christ, by declaring how abundantly he was sustained in that solemn hour. A short time before he died, in answer to inquiries, he said, that his heart was " full of sin, but Jesus Christ was his righteousness, his sanctifioation, and his redemption ;" and that his hope was " not at all in his own merits ; but only in the free and infinite grace of God." A brother of the deceased, Mr. Simon Kha- chaduryan, was shortly after elected, and or- dained pastor in his place. He had been educated at the Bebek Seminary, and possess- ed rare qualities for the ofSce to which he was called, and which he still continues to adorn. I'wo other pupils of the same seminary, Mr. Avedis, and Mr. Mugurdich, were licensed to preach the Gospel. The latter was subse- quently ordained as pastor of the Evangelical Church in Trebizond, and the former as co-pas- tor in Constantinople. Another pastor was ordained in Nicomedia in the latter part of November, 1847. This was Mr. HarCitun Mi- iMsian. His ordination was attended by circum- stances of peculiar interest. His little flock had been for many years exposed to almost constant persecution. Oftentimes they were driven from the abodes of men, and compelled to hold their worship in the distant fields ; and even there, they were never sure of being left un- molested. Now they had a place for, public worship in the very heart of the city ; ana there, at mid-day, on the Sabbath, the ordina- tion services were performed — no one daring to " molest them or make them afraid. Missionary tours performed through various parts in the interior of the country, brought to light many encouraging facts in regard to the extent of the work of reform. In no place was there a more remarkable movement than at Aintab, a town situated about three days' ride north-east from Aleppo. Some copies of the Scriptures, and other books from the mis- sion press, had found their way to this town, chiefly through the agency of Bedros vartabed, who labored as a colporteur in those parts ; and a few individuals, by the blessing of God on the simple reading of the word, had their eyes opened to see the errors of their Church. Soon after, the Patriarchal bull against priest Vertaness and the other evangelical brethren, was received from Constantinople, and publicly read in the Church. Those who had been con- vinced of the truth now learned, for the first time, that there existed in the Armenian com- munity a body of men who take the Bible as their only guide. This greatly encouraged and strengthened them. Soon after, a vartabed came to Aintab, and began to preach the evangelical doctrines in the Armenian Church, in the most bold and zealous manner. He was interesting in his appearance, and eloquent in his speech ; and with great fearlessness did he expose the errors of his Church, and with great power set forth the peculiar doctrines of the Gospel. Very many were convinced by him of the truth, and were led to renounce their previous errors, and openly avow them- selves as Protestants. It seemed as though the whole fabric of superstition in Aintab must speedily fall. It was soon discovered that this new and zealous preacher of the evan- gelical doctrines, was himself evangelical only in name. His moral character proved to be infamous, and he was sent away in disgrace. The fruits of his preaching, however, remained, although he proved so unworthy an instrument. The evangelical brethren immediately prepared a letter, signed by eighty-two heads of families, requesting that a missionary might forthwith be sent to them. Mr. Van Lennep, of Con- stantinople, went in obedience to the call, though not to remain permanently, as they had hoped. His visit was timely and useful. The place was afterwards visited by Mr. Johnston, by Dr. Smith, and by Mr. Schneider ; and a flourishing church was gathered, and one of the largest congregations of Protestants in the Turkish empire ! The condition of the Ar- menians in all that section of the country was highly encouraging. In the latter part of the summer of 1847 Rev. Isaac G. Bliss and wife arrived in the country from America, and proceeded to join Mr. Peabody in his labor in Erzrfim. An ARMENIANS. evangelical Armenian Church had been organ- iz.;d there in April, and another was formed in Brusa in Julj', making seven in all. In the year 1 847 Sir Stratford Canning re- turned for a season to his native land, and Lord Cowley was appointed to occupy, tempo- rarily, his place. He proved himself to be as warm and firm a friend of religious freedom as his predecessor. He exerted himself with the most unremitting zeal to secure to the Pro- testant Armenians a distinct recognition on the part of the Porte, and a formal organization, which should place them on the same footing with all other Christian communities in the empire ; and his noble efforts were crowned with complete success. On the 15th of No- vember, 1847, he procured from the Turkish Government an imperial decree, recognizing native Protestants as constituting a separate and independent community in Turkey. In this high official paper it was declared that " no interference whatever should be permitted in their temporal or spiritual concerns, on the part of the patriarchs, monks, or priests of other sects." This decree was immediately sent to all the Pashas in the interior, under whose jurisdiction Protestants were known to exist. An individual elected by the new com- munity was formally recognized by the gov- ernment as the agent and representative of the Protestants at the Porte. The evangelical brethren in Constantinople immediately appointed a day for special thanksgiving and prayer. Great was the joy of the Protestants in every part of the land, though still it was, in many cases, rejoicing with trembling. At the different missionary stations greater boldness in attending the preaching of the Gospel was noticed, and a new impulse seemed to be given to the spirit of inquiry. The special influences of the Spirit were extensively enjoyed, though in no case, except at the Female Seminary in Con- stantinople, was the movement general enough to be designated as a revival of religion. In the district of Geghi, south-west of Erzrum, containing from twelve to fifteen thousand souls, Mr. Peabody found very promising indi- cations of an extensive religious awakening. The vartabed himself was the most decided evangelical man in the community. For per- sonal security, he was obliged to flee to Erzrum, where, after a sufficient trial, he was received into the Evangelical Church. At Aintab, the development was more rapid, perhaps, than any- where else. Mr. Schneider, of the Brusa station, spent the summer of 1848 in labors there, during which time the congregation . steadily increased, and many were affected to tears, un- der the preaching of the Word. A very intel- ligent priest became obedient to the faith, and his sincerity was called, more than once, to the severe test of persecution. At a communion season in October, 1848, seventeen persons were added to the Church, five of whom were females. During the same month, Dr. Smith returned to Aintab, whgre he took up his resi- dence as a missionary of the Board, together with his wife. The importance of the station was such, that it was determined that Mr. and Mrs. Schneider, of Brusa, should become per^ manently connected with it ; the same steamer which brought away Mr. Schneider from Ghemlik, the port of Brusa, carried back thither to occupy his place, the Eev. Oliver Crane and wife, who had just arrived from America. Among the evangelical Christians at Ain- tab a most commendable zeal had shown itself for the spread of the gospel in the towns and villages around. Several attempts had been made by individuals to labor as colporteurs, but they were never suffered to remain long in a place. The Armenian primates easily suc- ceeded in persuading the Turkish authorities to order them away as vagabonds. A novel experiment was made, early in the year 1849, to accomplish the object in view without sub- jecting themselves to the charge of being mere idlers, and " busy bodies in other men's matters." Five individuals who had trades, went forth to different towns, with their tools in one hand, and the sword of the Spirit in the other. Wherever they went they worked at their trades, while, at the same time, they labored for the spiritual good of the people. The experiment succeeded to admiration. The spirit of religious inquiry was spreading from Am tab in almost all direc- tions. The congregation in the town itself had become so large, that two places were opened for worship at the same time. And from various towns and villages throughout the country, the most urgent appeals came from souls hungering for the bread of life. In November, 1848, Mr. Hohannes Sahak- yan, having spent several years in study in America, was licensed at Constantinople to preach the gospel ; and in the following spring, he was ordained as pastor of the evangelical Armenian Chm'ch in Adabazar, where he has been since labormg with great diligence and success. Mr. Khachadur, a pupil of the Be- bek Seminary, was licensed as a preacher in February, 1849. In Trebizond, formal permission was given by the governor to the Protestants, to use as a burying-ground a piece of land purchased for this purpose three years previously. As long ago as January, 1848, a vizirial letter had been procured, through the generous efforts of Mr. Carr, the United States Minister at the Porte, ordering the authorities in Trebizond to see that the Protestants be permitted to have a cemetery of their own, but various dif- ficulties had prevented an earlier accomplish- ment of the design. The following table presents a compreheit- sive view of the present state of the mission. The figure at the left of each gi-oup of out- stations, indicates the station under whose su- pervision they respectively are. 152 ARMENIANS. 0t^COb3J-'pi»Q07^pC:nft^WlOJ- £; > W fj^ w W ^ CO ^ g w t) >. o I OS «> >f*- w • 1-1 1 2 p CO CO 00 00 00 GO CO *» CO CT" CJ Oi W CO CO O CO i4i. bO W 1-1 CO to ba to to to -J CO to to bO to to o O) to to bO CO to - M M to CO CO to tOtOtObOt003tOI-'l- h-" i-i oa ip. (P' CO When Commenced. Preachers. Females. Total. r a O Places of Stated Preaching. Average Sabbath Congregations, Pupils in Sem- inaries. High Schools. Pupils in High Schools. Female Boarding Schools. Pupils in Female Board 'g Schools. Male Pupils in Free Schools. Female Pupils in Free Schools. O O (O o Total of all Pupils. Teachers, Church Members, Pupils, Church Members. Number of Churches. Mfmlici'S re- ceived. Excommunica- tions. -^ w Lci *.. Number of Members. 00 CO 63-^-. Whole Do. from beginning. " O Vt )t^ t^ o^ Number of Enrolled Protestants. ARMENIANS. Ibo The year 1848 was remarkable lor the num- ber and extent of its conflagrations in the city of Constantinople ; and among the providen- tial interpositions in behalf of the Protestant cause, must be mentioned the fact, that in five or six different instances the devouring element approached so near to the chapel and Female Seminary in Pcra, as to leave but a faint hope that they could escape ; and once even they actually began to burn, but the flames were speedily extinguished. Again and again was it shouted in the camp of the enemy, " The Protestant Chapel is consumed ;" but in each case, an unseen hand was stretched out to ar- rest the destroyer, and save the Protestant cause from so great a disaster. The Patriarch Matteos' plans for the over- throw of Protestantism in the country, had met with a most signal failure. His own re- moval from office wound up the scene. He was found guilty of various frauds upon the public treasury, and according to the official announcement of the case in the French jour- nal of Constantinople, " of acts of injustice inconsistent with patriarchal dignity." He was accordingly degraded, and sentenced to banishment. A friendly banker, however, be- came surety for him, and procured his release from this part of the punishment. He has since been living in retirement on the shores of the Bosphorus. Our limits will not permit us even in the brief manner in which that of the previous years has been given, to continue the sketch of this interesting portion of missionary history. We can only add a few words. In 1850 the posi- tion of the Armenian Protestants was improv- ed and its permanency secured by a firman of the Sultan, obtained through the interposition of Sir Stratford Canning, now Lord Stratford de Eedcliffe, as the completion of his noble ef- forts in behalf of the rights of conscience in Turkey, which gives to the Protestants all the privileges granted to the other Christian communities. What had before been done was liable to be reversed by a change of ad- ministration, or of the policy of the govern- ment. This is beyond recall ; and the firman given in 1853, in answer to the demands of Russia for another object, to the Protestants as to the other rayah (non-mussulman) com- munities, carries forward the cause of religious liberty another step by declaring these com- munities on an equality before the law with the Mohammedan population. What is to be the issue of the fearful conflict, which while we write, Turkey is waging for national exist- ence, is unknown to us ; but the analogy of the past, and the continued progress of the work of enlightenment and spiritual regenera- tion within her borders, encourage the hope that it will be auspicious to the interests of the Saviour's kingdom. A mighty social, moral, and religious revolution is in progress ; and this political changes may favor, but cannot defeat. We may confidently expect that the religious freedom granted to others will soon be secured equally to the Mohammedans, so as to allow the profession of Christianity by them ; and when that shall come, the work accomplished among the Armenians will be a noble preparation for another and still more glorious one among those heretofore excluded from the direct efforts of the Church for their salvation. The progress for the last six years of the mission under review can easily be learned from the reports and other publications of the Board. The cost at which Protestantism is still professed, keeps the increase of the Pro- testant civil community, as yet, healthfully low ; while evidence of the spread of evangel- ical sentiments and the leavening influence of the Gospel is multiplying on every hand. In some places the outward development is more rapid than in others. The greatest is in Cili- cia and on the borders of Mesopotamia. Dur- ing the year embraced in the report for 1853, five new churches were organized ; one in Eo- dosto, on the European shore of the Marmora ; one in Smyrna ; one in Marsovan ; one in Killis ; and one in Kessab. Ten others pre- viously existed : viz., three in Constantinople, and one each in Nicomedia, Adabazar, Brusa, Trebizond, Erzrum, Sivas, and Aintab. The increase of members in their communion dur- ing the year was 90 '; making the total to be 351 ; which at the end of 1853 was increased to 395. The number in the Protestant civil community was about 2,000 ; of whom about 160 were in Kessab, a village of the Aintab district, in which two years before not an avowed Protestant was to be found. Brusa has ceased to be a station of the mission ; the missionaries having been transferred to other places, and this left to the care, under the over- sight of the Constantinople station, of the na- tive pastor, Mr. Stepan Khachaduryan, bro- ther to the two brothers who succeeded one the other in the pastorate at the capital. The press, formerly at Smyrna, has been removed to the capital. The Female Boarding School, now having 25 pupils, has become established in the suburb of Hasskeuy. The seminary at Bebek has enlarged its numbers to 50, and is yearly sending forth educated young men to preach the Gospel, and occupy other posts of importance in connection with the woi-k of the mission. On both these schools the Holy Spirit has descended and wrought a work of conversion and sanctification in the hearts of their pupils. The churches maintain discipline with great strictness, and exhibit a gratifying spectacle of Christian consistency and activity. The converted Armenians are indeed a zealous and effective body of evangelists, whose labors are not confined to any one class or place. In all the divisions of society the influence of the Gosjiel is becoming more extended and power- ful A most encouraging feature of the re- 134 ARRAH— ASHANTEE. formation is the wide extent of its influence geograpliically considered. Mr. Layard, of the Church of England, who has gained so deserv- ed a celebrity by his discoveries at Nineveh, in his recent publication, gives incidents pleasing- ly illustrating this ; and in a passage, too long for quotation, in which he eulogizes the Amer- ican missionaries for their "judicious, earnest, and zealous exertions," and speaks of the changes for the better which they are effect- ing in the Armenian Church and on its cler- gy, he says that " there is now scarcely a town of any importance in Turkey without a Pro- testant community." (Nineveh and Babylon, p. 405.) In the reports of the Board for 1852 and 1853, lists of towns containing considera- bly more than 100 names are introduced, in/ which there is so decided a development of a spirit of inquiry, in connection with the fact of the presence in each of truly enlightened, and one or more of whom hope is entertained that they are truly regenerated, individuals, as to impose an urgent necessity for evangelical instruction to be extended to them. " From every part of the land," says Mr. Dwight, " comes to us one appeal, ' Send us preachers,' ' Send us preachers.' " And, says Mr. Schnei- der of the Aintab station, " We are constantly receiving calls for some one to preach the gos- pel. These calls wax more loud and more earnest every month. Sometimes I almost fear to have the post arrive, lest some such appeal, to which we cannot respond, come to increase our perplexity." The mission in connection with the mission of the Board to the Jews in Turkey, has ten fonts of type in the Armenian, Greek, Bulgarian, and Hebrew languages. There are enrolled Protestants in places where the mission has no laborers, and who, therefore, are not inclu- ded in the tabular view : viz., Divrik, 23 ; Mashgerd, 10, etc. The whole number iu the country is not known. PKINTINQ. Whole number of vols, printed in the year. . 19 000 " " " tracts " " " .. 13^000 " " " pages of Scripture " .. 1,672,000 " " " " tracts and ioolis " .. 3,596,600 Whole No. of copies printed during the year 32 000 " " pages " " " " 6,268^600 copies from the beginning 1,043,210 Tjaires " " " 121,78o!o60 During the present year (1854) at least eight missionaries, with their wives, are expected to be added to the mission, and the following places to be speedily occupied as stations, viz., Tooat, Kaisery, Sivas, and perhaps Oorfa, Ma- rash, and Kharpoot. In the preparation of the foregoing article, free use has been made of Smith and Dwight's Researches in Armenia, and Dwight's Christian- ity Revived in the East. — Rbv. G. W. Wood. AEEAH : A town in Bahar, 35 miles W. by S. from Patna, in Cochin, India ; a station of Gosner's Missionary Society. AEOEANGAI : A station of the London Missionary Society on the Island of Earotoo- ga, one of the Hervey Islands. AEEACAN : A province of the Burman Empire ceded to the English East India Com- pany, in 1826. It lies on the eastern shore of the Bay of Bengal, and embraces 16,600 square miles, and contains a population of about 250,000. It is divided into four dis- tricts, Akyab, Sandoway, Aeng and Eamso. It is the seat of a flourishing mission of the American Baptist Missionary Union, which was begun in 1835. ASCENSION ISLAND: An island in Micronesia, three hundred miles from Strong's Island, a station of the Amerioaa Board. AS-HAN' TEE : Ashantee is included in that general division of Western Africa which has been denominated Guinea. The empire of Ashantee is not so much one state, as an assem- blage of states, owing a kind of feudal obedience to the sovereign of Ashantee. The empire, ac- cording to Dupuis, extends westward from the river Volta, about four degrees, and about four degrees inland from the Gold coast, comprising an area of about 60,000 square miles. It embraces, also, several provinces east of the Volta. Over the whole of this territory the king of Ashantee exercises absolute sway, all the kings, viceroys, or caboceers, being his absolute and unconditional vassals. But the power of the king is somewhat limited, by the iprinciple of the ancient Modes and Persians, that a law once passed can never be changed ; and the .caboceers and captains claim to be heard on all questions relating to war and for- eign politics, which are considered in a general assembly. The king employs a number of boys, trained for the purpose, who are placed as spies on the great men, and report to the king all they see and hear ; thus verifying the words of Solomon : " Curse not the king, for a bird of the air shall carry the voice, and that which hath wings shall tell the matter." Speaking against the king is punished as trea- son. The king has the property as well as the lives of his people in his power. He is the legal heir of all his people, and can claim all their gold at their death. The produce of the gold mines is the property of the king. The gold contained in the soil of the market place of Kumasi also belongs to the king ; and on two occasions, the washings of this soil yielded 1600 ounces of gold. Frequently, after a rain, lumps of gold are laid bare ; but they are covered up again, for any one picking them up would lose his head. On the public recep- tion of visitors at the capital, the king is mag- nificently attired in sUk, with necklaces, brace- lets, knee-bands and ankle-strings of gold and beads, with various other ornaments, some of which are of massive gold. The throne is covered with plates of gold; and all hie at- tendants are decked in a corresponding style, each bearing the emblems Of his office : a'lta. ASHANTEE. 155 getlier presenting a very imposing appearance. On these occasions, tlie market place, wliich ia» about a mile in circumference, is generally crowded. When Mr. Freeman was received, he estimated the number present at 40,000, half of whom were soldiers. The Ashantee monarchy is hereditary ; but instead of de- scending from father to son, it passes from brother to brother. A female cannot ascend the throne ; but if, when the last of the line of brothers dies, his sister has a son, the crown descends to him. Domestic slavery exists in Ashantee, and the lives and services of the slaves are at the dis- posal of their masters. Yet the treatment of the slaves is not uniformly harsh and severe ; and sometimes a slave becomes heir to his mas- ter ; and in many instances, they rise to power and office. The foreign slave-trade, says Bee- cham, is vajued by the native princes, not only for its profit, but as an outlet for a redundant slave population, which often becomes so great by reason of captives taken in war, as to be feared. Polygamy prevails in Ashantee to a fright- ful extent. It is said that the law allows the king to have 3333 wives ; about half a dozen of whom are kept at the palace at a time, and the rest live on his plantation, or at the capi- tal, where two streets are devoted to their use, into which no one is permitted to enter ; and when they go abroad, no one is allowed to look upon them. The chief men of the nation have as many wives as they are able to procure. Mar- riages are contracted without consulting the woman, and often in infancy and childhood. In Ashantee and the neighboring countries, where polygamy prevails, the husband lives separate from his wives, who dwell in houses or sheds, contiguous to each other, in the form of a square. In some cases, they remain with their mothers after marriage. They cook and carry food to their husband, but are not al- lowed to eat with him. Sometimes his child- ren eat with him, but more frequently, he eats alone. The children are left chiefly to the care of their mothers, and grow up without correction, till, when the perverseness of the boy can be no longer endured, the father pun- ishes him by cutting off an ear. Unfaithful- ness on the part of a wife, is punished with severity ; both parties being sometimes pun- ished with death, but more frequently with a fine from her parents and her paramour, in de- fault of which, her husband cuts off her nose. If she is found listening to his private conversa- tion, she loses an ear. In Ashantee one of the king's sisters is made governor of all the women in the kingdom. The women of As- hantee, as in most heathen lands, are made the drudges of the men, the heaviest work being put upon them. I?,oads have been made from Kumasi, or Coomassie, the capital of Ashantee, to the moat distant parts of the empire, and these are intersected by numerous cross-roads. The population of the capital has been estimated at 100,000, and of the whole kingdom, at 4,000,000. Bouses. — The Ashantees, and other natives contiguous to the coast, build their houses of mud and sticks, with a verandah in front, from which the door opens into an open court, around which are built huts or sheds, for the different members of the household. All the houses in the capital of Ashantee are of this sort, except the castle of the king, which is of stone. Arts. — The Ashantees are ingenious artists in the precious metals which their country pro- duces. Iron is manufactured to a considerablo extent. They carve and work in wood with no little skill. The art of tanning leather is understood. They have made considerable pro- gress in weaving, and have done something at pottery. Trade. — The spirit of trade does not prevail as much with the Ashantees as with some of the adjoining countries, and the trade is mostly confined to the king and his chiefs, who carry on a considerable traffic with the interior. Religion. — The notion of a Supreme Being lies at the foundation of their religious system. He is called Yankumpon, from yanku, friend, and pon, great. Another name used by the Panteea, Yehmi, ft-om yeh, to make, and emi, me, recognizes him as the Creator. The As- hantees also give him a title which signifies eter- nal existence. They have a curious tradi- tion of the creation, which represents God as having created three white men and three black, with as many women of each color, and allowing them to fix ,their destiny, by the choice of good and evil. A box or calabash, and a sealed paper were placed on the ground. The black men, who had the first choice, took the box, in which they found only a piece of gold, some iron, and other metals, which they did not know how to use. The white men opened the paper, and it taught them every thing. The blacks were left in Afri- ca, under the care of inferior deities, while the whites were conducted to the water-side, where Grod communicated with them every day, and taught them to build a vessel, which carried them to another country, &c. To this tradi- tion, it is supposed their polytheism may be traced ; which is very similar to that of the Yorubas. (See Yoruba.) To the innumerable objects of worship in nature is added images of the same. But they do not profess to wor- ship the objects themselves but the spirits, which make their abode in them. To these they make offerings, having such crude notions of spiritual beings as to suppose that they re- quire food. The notion of a future state universally pre- vails. It is believed that, at death, the soul passes into another world, where it exists in a state of consciousness and activity. They be- 156 ASIA. lieve that the spirits of their departed relatives exercise a guardian care over them, and hence prayers are offered to them. They have, how- ever, no correct ideas of the immateriality of separate spirits ; nor do they appear to have any just idea of the immortality of the soul. They believe in the existence of the devil, an evil being supposed to be ever at hand for purposes of mischief ; but he does not appear to be an object of worship with the Ashan- tees. Traces of the Sabbath are found in this part of Africa, the year being divided into moons, and the moons into weeks, the seventh day of which is regarded as sacred. Along the coast, the sacred day is Tuesday ; on which the peo- ple rest from labor, dress in white, and mark themselves with white clay. They have also their " lucky " and " unlucky days." The priests or " fetish-men," are a numerous order, and employ a variety of stratagems and impostures to keep up their influence. The word "fetish," seems to be employed as a gene- ral term for things sacred ; thus, the deities themselves are called fetishes, as well as the religious rites, and the offerings presented. These acts of worship are daily performed by the people, and they consult their deities by various superstitious practices, answering to the lot, to ascertain what course of conduct to pursue ; a practice which necessarily leads to the subjection of judgment and reason to blind superstition. It would be tedious to describe all the ceremonies by which this worship is carried on. It is by consulting the deities by means of oracles, that the priests hold their sway over the minds of the people ; and on great occasions, when the questions to be de- termined are of public importance, human sar orifices are offered, sometimes to the number of many hundreds. This consulting of the fetish is also connected with witchcraft. Oaths are administered by it ; and accused persons are tried by what is called the " oath-draught," which is the drinking of a poisonous draught as a test of guilt or innocency, in which it is supposed that the spirit or fetish goes down with it, and searches the heart of the accused, and if it finds him innocent, returns with it, as he vomits it up ; but if guilty the fetish re- mains to destroy him. It will readily be per- ceived that such a system, in the hands of wily priests and powerful chiefs, is capable of being made an engine of immense oppression and cruelty. To obtain a supply of victims for their altars, is the principal end for which the national deities are supposed to promote war ; and the sacrifice of their prisoners becomes a religious obligation. Hence, dreadful are the scenes of barbarity exhibited after a victorious campaign. — Beecham's Asliantee and the Gold Coast. The English Wesleyans have a mission to Ashantee and the Gold Coast, for which see Western Africa. ASIA : An immense continent, presenting every possible variety of climate, from the dreary confines of the polar world, to the heart of the tropical regions. Every thing in Asia is on a vast scale : its mountains, its table-lands, its deserts. The grandest feature, and one which' makes a complete section of the continent, is a chain of moun- tains, which, at various heights, and under various names, but with very little, if any, in- terruption, crosses Asia from the Mediterra^ nean sea to the Eastern ocean. Taurus, Cau- casus, and the Himalaya, are the best known portions of this chain. On the one side it has Southern Asia, the finest and most extensive plain in the world, covered with the richest tropical products, and watered by magnificent rivers proceeding from this great store-house, and filled with populous nations and great em- pires. On the other side, this chain serves as a bulwark to the wide table-land of Thibet, which, though under the latitude of the south of Europe, has many of the characteristics of a northern region. To the north, the recent observations of Humboldt exhibit three par- allel chains, the Eientim or Moor Tagh, the Thiunchan or Celestial Mountains, and the Altaian, which also support table-lands. But these do not exceed 4,000 to 5,000 feet, accord- ing to Humboldt, and in many places enjoy a mild and temperate climate, yielding not only grain, but wine and silk. Elsewhere, they are covered with rich pastures, and tenanted with numerous wandering races, at once pastoral and warlike, whose victorious bands have over- run and subjugated the empires of the South. The Altaian chain separates Middle Asia from Siberia : a long range of the bleakest land on the face of the earth. Some of the southern districts have been found, by the Eussians, ca- pable of supporting numerous herds of cattle ; but the rest is abandoned to wild animals, not generally of a ferocious character, but covered with rich and precious furs, which afford a grand object for hunting and trade. Asia has been the scene of the most remarkable events in the history of the human race. In Asia, man was created, and fell. In Asia, his re- demption was accomplished by the incarna- tion, sufferings, and death of the Son of God : and from thence proceeded the mfessengers of the Saviour, the heralds of His gospel, who published those tidings of Divine mercy, which are now proclaimed on every continent, and on many of the remotest islands of the sea. Asia was the nursery of learning, and of the arts, in their earliest infancy. It has been the school, and also the victim of the successive forms of false philosophy, and of idol worship. In Asia have existed some of the greatest empires, through which have originated the most ex- traordinary revolutions in the affairs of the world. This immense continent, moreover, teems with nations, and contains, on the most moderate estimate, 500,000,000 of mankind. — Hook's Year Book of Missions. ASIA. 157 Races of People. — Not only the majority of the human race, in number, but also the greatest variety of the species, is found within xhe limits of Asia. The first family, the Caucasian, comprises all the original in- habitants of the mountainous region lying between the Black Sea and the Caspian, from about the 38th to the 42d degree of N. lati- tude. It includes the mountaineers of the val- leys of the Caucasus, such as the Abasians, Ossetes, Lesghians, and Kisti ; and in the more level country, the Georgians, Mingrelians, and Armenians. In personal form, this family may be described as European, but in mind, Asi- atic. The face is of an oval form ; the fore- head high and expanded ; the nose elevated, with a slight convexity ; the lips moderate in size, and the chin full and round. The com- plexion is fair, but without the clearness of the European. The eyes are generally dark, and the hair black. The stature is nearly equal to the European, and the form symmet- rical and handsome. 2. The second is the Arabian, called Semitic, on the hypothesis that they are descended from Shem. It embraces all the aboriginal inhab- itants of Palestine, Asia Minor, Syria, and Arabia, from the east coast of the Mediterra- nean and Red Sea, up to the west coast of the Persian G-ulf. A brunette complexion ; black or dark brown eyes ; long, lank, black hair ; large bushy heads ; an oval face, in bold, dis- tinct relief, with a nose always elevated, and not unfrequently aquiline ; high forehead — are among the most prominent characteristics of the family. Prom the condition of the country they inhabit, they have naturally be- come divided into two opposite and hostile classes, the roving and predatory, and the settled and industrious. 3. Between the Caspian Sea and the Per- sian G-ulf, to the west, the ocean to the south, India to the east, and an indefinite line to the north, there are several races which have much resemblance, but which difier enough in person, mind, and language, to be classed as sep- arate families. The first of these, beginning at the west, is the Persian : complexion fair, without transparency ; hair long, straight, and almost jet black ; beard abundant and bushy ; features regular and handsome ; stature little short of the European standard, but less ro- bust. The present inhabitants of Persia, how- ever, are much mixed with the blood of Ara^ bian and Turkish settlers. The next of these families is the Turkish or Scythian. The parent country of this family lies between the 35th and 60th degrees of lat- itude, from the Hindoo coast to the Belar Tagh, and from the Caspian Sea to the west- ern boundary of the desert of Gobi, where they are mixed with the Mongols. The complexion of this family is a light brunette ; hair gene- rally black, strong and long ; eye, light brown, somewhat contracted ; skull remarkably glob- ular I proportions of the face symmetrical ; body stout, but shorter than the European. They have made little progress in civilization. In the south-east angle of what is commonly considered Persia, are three races of men, the Beloohees, Brahoos and Dehwars. The first of these have dark brown complexion, black hair, loug visage, elevated features, with tall, active, but not robust persons. The Brahoos, have thick, short bones, and are a squah instead of a tall people. The Dehwars have blunt fea- tures, high cheek-bones, bluff cheeks, short per- sons, and are an ill-favored race. To the north of these is the Afghan race, marked by a brown complexion, black hair, sometimes brown, a profusion of beard, high noses, high cheek-bones, long faces, a robust person, and a stature short of the European. Among the high mountains and narrow ele- vated valleys, east of the Afghans, exists a people called Kaffres or infidels, by their Mo- hammedan neighbors. They are described as remarkable for fairness, possessing occasionally light hair, blue eyes, and great personal beauty. They speak many languages unknown to Eu- ropeans. 4. Proceeding eastward, we come to the great and numerous Hindoo family, spread from the 7th to the 35th degree of N. latitude, and from the 68th to the 95th of B. longitude. Correctly speaking, this is, perhaps, not one family, but an aggregate of races, bearing such a general resemblance to each other as the European varieties do among themselves. The color is commonly black, or at least a deep brown ; and hence the name of Hindoo, applied to them by their Tartar and Persian invaders ; for that word, in Persian, is equiva- lent to negro in ours. The hair is long, coarse and black ; beard of the same color ; the eye black or deep brown ; the face oval, and the features handsome ; except some defect in the lower limbs, the person is well formed. The stature is short of the European, and the body spare and deficient in strength. Clearness and subtlety, rather than depth and vigor, charac- terize their intellectual capacities. But this race is subdivided into several others, having distinct peculiarities, as the Cashmerians, the Bengallees, the Oriyas, the Telingas, the Mah- rattas, and the Hindoo-Chinese, inhabiting a country from the 7th to the 36th degrees of N. latitude, from the eastern limits of the Hindoo country, to the western limits of China, and consisting of several different varieties, viz., the semi-barbarous people of Cassay, Cachar and Assam, and to the south and east of these, the Arracanese, Burmese, Peguans, Laos ot Shans, Siamese and Cambojans _; and east of thorn, the Anam race, comprising the Cochin-Chi- nese and Tonquinese. 5. The Chinese. (See China.) 6. Near the Chinese is another great fam- ily, bearing it some resemblance, and yet a distinct class, the Japanese. They occupy a 158 ASIA. country of great extent and fine temperature, extending from 30° to 45° N. Their color is tawny, stature short but robust, nose flat- tish, eyelids thick and puffed, eyes dark, lower limbs large and thick. North-east of China are the Coreans, occu- pying a peninsula equal in extent with Great JBritain. They are superior in strength to the Chinese and Japanese, but inferior in mental capacity. 7. The inhabitants of two-thirds of the superficies of Asia, from the seats of the fam- ilies already specified, to the frozen ocean, re- main to be described. These have a common resemblance, in some important features ; but it is only such a resemblance as exists in all the families already mentioned, from the east- ern shore of the Atlantic to the eastern con- fines of Hindoostan. The first of these races comprises the inhabitants of Bootan, a stout, active race, their stature rising occasionally to six feet. They are a long settled agricultural race, having a peculiar language of their own. West of these is the Yorklia family, a short, robust people, of an olive complexion. North of these, on the terrace of the Himalaya, at an elevation of 12,000 to l.S,000 feet above the sea, are the Tibeiian family, having a Tartar countenance, angular face, broad across the cheek-bones, small black eyes, and very little head. They are short. Squat, broad-shoulder- ed, and sluggish both in mind and body. We come now to the Mongolian family, inhabiting the vast plateau and extensive as- cents between the Himalaya and Altai ranges, as far as the 140th degree of longitude, and then between the former and the right bank of the Amur. Their general features are, forehead low and slanting ; head square, broad cheek-bones, chin prominent ; body short, broad, square, and robust. Hair black, long, and lank, beard scant. There are two great divisions of this family, the Eastern and West- ern Tartars, the former being the present lords of China. The true Mongols extend westward from 116° longitude to the sea of Aral, a sweep of at least 3,000 miles, and embrace the communities known as Mongols, Kalkas, Eluths, Ogurs, Kokonors, Kami, and Kalumes. These were the instruments of the conquests of Jenghis Khan and his sons. They have firm and robust bodies, lean and pallid coun- tenances, high and broad shoulders, short and distorted noses, pointed and prominent chins, a low and deep upper jaw, long teeth, distant from each other, eyelids stretched out from the temple to the nose, eyes black and un- steady, an expression oblique and stern, ex- tremities bony and nervous, large and muscu- lar thighs, short legs, and stature equal to the European'. The country of the Mongols is cold, elevated and dry, few parts of it being fit for culture, and a great portion of it con- sisting of deserts or seas of sand. It abounds, however, in game and wild animals. With the exception of a very small number, they live exclusively on animal food ; and their clothing and dwellings are for the most^ part made of animal tegument or fibre. Their employment consists in tending cattle, the chase, and war. The native capacity of this family is sufficiently attested by the production of such men as Attila, Jenghis, Timur, Rabe, and Kublay Khan ; as well as in the conquest, retention, and government of China for 200 years. Between the Altai range and river Amur, tribes exist almost as numerous as in any equal extent of the American continent, and far more distinct in physical form. And near to, and on the banks of the Amur are four nations, called Soloni, Kertching, Dagnri, and Natkis, all of which have languages wholly different from their immediate neighbors, the Manchoos ; rude, dull, without the knowledge of letters, living on fish. Sherbani, the grandson of Jenghis Khan, led a colony of Mongols into Siberia, amount- ing to 15,000 families, and his descendants reigned there for 300 years, till conquered by the Russians ; so that the Mongols, though originally foreigners, now form a considerable part of the population of Siberia. Besides these, there are a number of families, distinct from each other, inhabiting these regions. Among all the native races to the north of the Altai mountains, letters are wholly unknown, agriculture is scarcely practic3d, and to obtain food and clothing nearly the whole time of the people is consumed in fishing and the chase. — Abridged froni McCulloch. Religion. — Maltebrun gives the following mournful, but just picture of the moral and re- ligious condition of the immense population of this vast continent : " The mental torpor sub- sisting in combination with ■ some virtuous, mild, and hospitable feelings, keeps alive the empire of religious superstition, under the yoke of which we find all the eastern and central parts of Asia languishing ; while the Christi- anity of the Greek Church slowly penetrates by the north, and Mohammedanism still flour- ishes in the western regions. Polygamy, sup- ported by the same spirit throughout Asia, with the single exception of Japan, debases family connections, and deprives life of its en- •dearments, by taking from the female all con- sideration and influence ; at the same time, being averse to the laws of nature, it diminishes the population, and deteriorates the human race." Population. — We have no means of ascertain- ing with any degree of certainty the extent and population of this vast continent. The following estimate, which we find in Harpei-'s new Universal Gazeteer, is probably somewhat above the mark : ASIA. 159 area in sq. milas Turkey in Asia, Arabia, Persia, Hindoos tan, Furtlier India, Ciiina Proper, Cliinese dependencies Turkestan, Russia, Islands, Total 516,000 834,000 900,000 1,665,090 917,575 1,300,000 3,810,000 700,000 5,200,000 1,075,400 Population. 13,700,000 10 000,000 16,700,000 168,697,277 25,182,540 367,000,000 76,800,000 12,000,000 7,400,000 55,326,676 16,918,065 752,806,493 Pop. according to Religious Profession. Budhists, . . - . 360,000,000 Braliminists, - - - 150,000,000 Mussulmans, - - 130,000,000 Shamans, - 9,000,000 Sikhs, .... 5,000,000 Sect of Lao Kiun in China, 2,500,000 Sect of Confucius, - 1,500,000 Sect of Sinto in Japan, - 1,300,000 Ghebirs, . - , . 500,000 Jews, . - . . 800,000 Christians of all denominiations, - 50,000,000 TABULAE VIEW OF MISSIONS IN ASIA. India, including Ceylon, Burmah, and Siam. Church Missionary Society, London Missionary Society, Gospel Propagation Society, General Baptist Missionary Society, (Eng.) . . . Baptist Missionary Society, (Eng.) English Wesleyan Society, American Board, American Baptist Miss. Union, including China, American Presbyterian Board, Irish Presbyterians, Scotch Presbyterians, German Missionary Societies, Free- Will Baptists, , . American Missionary Association, China. American Board, Church Missionary Society, American Episcopal Church Southern Baptist Board, German Societies, Methodists, North and South Wesleyans, American Presbyterian Board, English Presbyterians, Asiatic Islands. Gospel Propagation Society in Borneo, . . . . Rhenish Society in Borneoy Gosner's Society in Jara, Netherlands Society, Amboyna, Celebas, Java, "Westbrn Asia. Church Missionary Society, American Board, in Syria, Assyria, and Persia, Among the Jews In Syria, Totals, i i 3 1 i ■s i 1 6 6 i 1 C/J 53 83 6,182 625 24,036 21 47 23 1,024 44 8,919 48 4,629 5,500 5 225 40 35 1,6.56 81 3,492 37 2,137 4,936 30 35 24 926 215 8,042 19 49 124 8,873 78 1,682 13 25 5 25 226 2,932 9,405 60 2,179 3,274 3 3 5 47 151 3 10 1 26 6 130 3 6 2 3 62 1 3 24 8 200 2 5 4 90 80 2 8 1 3 2 12 23 146 1 2 3 5 68 550 3 19 10,000 3 3 6 2 77 9 24 5 4 29 22 554 206 577 176 28,372 1,084 84,168 160 ASSAM. Owing to the imperfect reports of the mis- sions, it is impossible to malie such a table as this complete ; and it is possible that some slight errors may be discovered in the statis- tics ; but it is an approximation sufficiently near to give a fair view of the present state of the missionary work on the continent of Asia, as compared with its vast population. De- ducting the 50,000,000 nominal Christians from the estimate of the population, we have left about 700,000,000 of Mohammedans, Jews, and heathens in Asia, which would give more than 1,000,000 to each missionary. But then it is to be considered that the modern missionary enterprise commenced but a little more than fifty years ago ; and besides these missionaries, there are now probably not less than 2,000 native assistants laboring for the evangelization of their countrymen on the same field. More than 1600 have been re- ported ; some of the societies make no reports of native assistants ; and most of the reports are very deficient on this head. And then, a vast amount of preparatory work has been done in the way of education and the printing and circulation of books. The 20,000 con- verts from heathenism, and the 80,000 pupils in the mission schools, and the millions of pages of Bible truth in circulation, must be now exerting a powerful influence in sapping the foundations of heathenism. ASSAM : The country known as Assam, lies on the north-western frontier of Burmah, and from that frontier stretches across the plains of the Brahmaputra, from 70 to 100 miles in breadth towards the Himmalaya mountains. On the north-east it reaches to the borders of China. Its inhabitants are of many different races, though they are known by the common name of Shyans or Sltans, a term which has given rise to the English name' Assam. It was formerly an independent state, but in 1822 it was incorporated with the Em- pire of Burmah and in 1826 it was ceded to the English. The tribes that inhabit the coun- try are numerous, and differ widely from each other, the most important being the Assamese, the Kliamtis, the SingpJws and the Nagas. Mission — American Baptist Union. — The attention of the Board was first directed to the inhabitants of this country lay Captain Francis Jenkins, Commissioner of the Gover- nor-General of India for Assam. This gentle- man feeling a lively interest in the singular people whom he had been appointed to govern, in 1834 addressed a letter to some of his friends in Calcutta, requesting thetn to invite some of the missionaries of the American Baptists to come and settle in the country. Captain Jenkins also promised to contribute 1000 rupees for the establishment of a mission on the arrival of the first missionary, and 1000 more on the arrival of a printing-press. This proposal was communicated to the Board of managers and was favorably received by tliem, being recommended by several special conside- rations. The language of the people was similar to the Burman, and the characters used in print- ing were essentially the same. The proposed mission also appeared to open a nearer access to China, which was at that time barred to all missionary effort by the exclusive policy pui^ sued by its government. It was imagined that while the Imperial officers were carefully ex- cluding foreigners from the ports, the mission- aries from Assam might join the caravans that traded to the interior of China, and thus bear the Gospel to the very centre of the empire. With views like these, the Board determined to comply with the request of Captain Jcvy- kins, and immediately referred the matter to the missionaries at Maulmain to carry their plan into execution. It was at the time when Rev. Mr. Brown and Mr. Cutter, a printer, had just been obliged to leave Rangoon, and they were immediately selected to commence the proposed mission at Sadiya — the place deemed most eligible for the purpose. These gentlemen with their families reached Calcut- ta in September, 1835, where they provided themselves with a printing-press, a standing- press, and a suitable supply of paper and oth- er materials for their work ; securing at the same time from the Board the assurance of an additional press and a complete apparatus for printing to be sent from this country. Thus provided, they embarked at Calcutta, in boats, on the Brahmaputra, and after a passage of four months they reached Sadiya on the 23d of March, 1836. They were kindly received by Captain Jenkins, who immediately fulfilled his promise to the mission, and continued for many years its liberal benefactor and constant friend. Sadiya is the principal town of a district, bearing the same name. It is beautifully sit- uated in the north-eastern portion of Assam, about 400 miles north of Ava, and half that distance from the Chinese frontier. It con- tains a large population, composed of the sev- eral races that occupy the country. Among these people the missionaries immediately pre- pared to commence their labors. So soon as a suitable building could be erected, the ladies of the mission established schools, Mrs. Brown for boys and Mrs. Cutter for girls, both of which were well attended. Meanwhile Mr.. Brown and Mr. Cutter employed themselves in learning the condition of the people, in per- fecting their acquaintance with the language, in the printing of which they decided to adopt the Roman instead of the Burman or other oriental alphabet.* Mr. Cutter soon printed * The idea of using the Roman alphabet in the printing of books in the languages of India, was first commended to the missionaries in 1834, by Mr. E. T, Trerelyan, a gen- tleman connected with the government in Bengal, a dis- tinguished oriental scholar and an intelligent and devoted friend of missions. The method was for a time adopted by the missionaries of several denominations in India, bill has been wholly abandoned. It is often referred to in the missionary correspondence of the time as Trevel- yanism. ASSAM. 161 a spelling-book for the schools, and Mr. Brown began to prepare works for the press, both in the Assamese and Shyan languages, Jn April, 1837, Eev. Miles Bronson, and Rev. Jacob Thomas, with their wives, arrived at Calcutta as missionaries to Assam. They had sailed from Boston in the preceding Oc- tober, having with them an additional printing press, and a full supply of all the materials for printing. They soon again embarked at Cal- cutta on the Brahmaputra, for the distant place of their destination. They had been several weeks on their passage against the ra- pid current of the river, and had nearly reached Sadiya, when Mr. Bronson having become dan- gerously ill of the jungle fever, Mr. Thomas was hastening forward in a small boat to pro- cure. medical assistance for his associate. He had already come within sight of the town of Sadiya, and even of the mission premises, when two trees, whose roots were united, suddenly fell from the loosened bank of the river, direct- ly upon the boat in which he was seated, crushing the boat and causing Mr. Thomas to drown. A calamity so unexpected could not but darken the prospects of the mission. A few days afterwards, Mrs. Thomas and her as- sociates reached Sadiya, where they were wel- comed by the mission families. So soon as the newly-arrived missionaries were prepared to enter upon their appropriate labors, it was found expedient to distribute their labors among the several races of the province. Mr. Brown gave his attention prin- cipally to the Assamese and the Khamtis ; Mr. Bronson to the Singphos ; while Mr. Cut- ter was constantly occupied at the two presses and in the supervision of the schools of the mission. It should also be remarked that a leading object had in view by the Board in establishing the mission in Assam was, if pos- sible, to penetrate the northern parts of Bur- mah and Siam, and also the upper provinces of China. In accordance with this general design, Mr. Kincaid, of the Burman mission, attempted a journey from Ava to Sadiya, in 1837. He was. able only to reach Mo-gaung, whence he returned to Ava, through the many perils of a general insurrection of the provin- ces of the north. For the same purpose, also, the missionaries at Sadiya made several excur- sions eastward, and proceeded almost to the con- fines of China. These excursions led to no other result than to make them acquainted with now multitudes of heathen, who were already accessible to the preaching of the gospel. The entrance to Burmah proper and to China, however, continued to be controlling objects of inquiry and aspiration both to the missionaries and the Board, till the barriers that so long shut them out of these countries were finally broken down. In May, 1838, Mr. Bronson and his family removed to Jaipur, an important post of the East India Company, on the river Dihing, 11 three or four days' journey south-east from Sbp diya. It was in this region that the Sing- phos, the people to whom he was particularly sent, were the most numerous. It was also in the immediate vicinity of the Nagas, a people living among the hills, who had been visited by the missionaries, and had awakened the interest of the English residents. Mr Bronson was warmly welcomed to Jaipur by Mr. Bruce, a friend of the mission, who waa then residing there as the Company's agent for promoting the culture of the tearplant. Other British officers and residents then at Jaipur contributed liberally towards the estab- lishment of the new station, and the personal comfort of the missionary and his family ; and several of the ladies of the post joined with Mrs. Bronson in opening schools and teaching the heathen children who attended them. At about the same period. Captain Jenkins, in addition to his previous benefactions, also con- tributed 500 rupees for replenishing the fonts of type, and offered 500 more towards the support of a superintendent of the schools, in case one was appointed by the Board. The interest which this gentleman manifested in the plans and operations of the mission is a high testimonial to the beneficent results which it was producing among the people over whom he ruled. Not only was he the constant ad- viser of the missionaries in all their enterprises, but he often addressed communications direct- ly to the Board, suggesting such measures as he deemed important to its growth and pros- perity, and coupling with his suggestions the most liberal offers of aid in carrying them into execution. In 1839, the labors of the mission at both its stations were for a time interrupted by an insurrection among the Khamtis, who had unitr ed portions of other tribes in a league against the power of the English. They began with an attack upon Sadiya, and a large number of the English soldiers and residents were slain in the fury of the onset. The missionaries at this station fled to the cantonments of the troops, where they remained in safety till the insurrection was quelled, when they removed to Jaipur. At the time of the insurrection, Mr. Bronson was absent on a tour among the Nagas, among whom he was preparing to es- tablish a station. He immediately hastened back to Jaipur, where he found the schools broken up, and the whole population distract- ed with alarms. The whole body of the mis- sionaries being now at Jaipur, it was deemed best to remove thither also the entire property of the mission, and abandon altogether the station at Sadiya. The expenses of the re- moval were generously defrayed by Mr. Bruce ; but in consequence of the agitation and alarm produced among the people by the insurrec- tion, it was several months before the mission fully recovered from the shock it had su» tained. Sadiya was soon afterwards aban 162 ASSAM. doned by the government officers and English residents, most of whom also removed to Jai- pur. Meanwhile the missionaries, in the sus- pension of their external labors, devoted themselves with the more assiduity to the study of the language, the preparation of tracts and books, and the translation of the Scriptures. In the spring of 1839, the Gospel of Maitthew, translated by Mr. Brown, was printed at the mission press. In January, 1840, Mr. Bronson made a second visit to the Nagas among the ' hills around Jaipur. Finding them now in a quiet condition, and apparently eager for instruction, he determined immediately to settle among them, and establish a branch of the mission. He was greatly encouraged in this undertak- ing by several English officers and residents, of whom Mr. Bruce contributed 500 rupees and Capt. Hannay 250 for the establishment of schools. In the following March Mr. Bronson, having made the necessary preparur tions, removed his family to the country of the Nagas, and commenced his labors among the people. In May. Rev. Cyrus Barker and his wife, and Miss Ehoda Bronson, sister of Rev. Mr. Bronson, were added to the mission. They had sailed from the United States with an ap- pointment specially to the Nagas ; but finding that Mr. Bronson had already begun the sta- tion among the hills, Mr. Barker decided to devote himself to the Assamese, while Miss Bronson soon went to join her brother at his new residence. But the several departments of the mission were scarcely organized when changes and afflictions began to fall upon them. Mr. and Mrs. Brown were obliged temporarily to leave the mission to recruit their health. Mr. Bronson soon found the climate of the hills exceedingly unhealthy ; and on account of the severe illness of mem- bers of his family, he was soon obliged to re- turn to Jaipur, where Miss Bronson died of .fever in December, 1840, before she had Bcarcely begun her work as a missionary. Mr. Barker, after acquiring the language at Jai- pur, selected as the place of his residence Stb- sagor, a flourishing post of the East India Company on the Brahmaputra, about three days' journey below Jaipur. He settled here with his family in May, 1841, and in the fol- lowing July was followed by Mr. and Mrs. Brown. This place proved to be particularly favorable to the culture of the tea-plant, and soon withdrew most of the English residents from Jaipur, — from which, without entirely abandoning it as a station, the missionaries at length also removed to Sibsagor. Mr. Bron- son, however, went to Nowgong, a flourishing town in Central Assam, to which he was spe- cially invited by Captain G. T. Gordon, an English officer who had long been a friend and benefactor of the mission. The missionaries, too, at all the stations, finding the other races jomparatively inaccessible to the gospel, de- termined to restrict their labors to the Assam- ese population. At Nowgong, Mrs. Bronson, with the aid of Captain Gordon, soon opened a large mission school, in which she employed as assistants two native converts from Calcut- ta. This school still continued to flourish, and has been productive of much religious benefit to its members. Meanwhile Mr. Cutter still continued at Jaipur, conducting the presses belonging to the mission. The Gospels of Matthew and John, and also the Acts of the Apostles, had been translated by Mr. Brown, and, together with school books prepared in various lan- guages, were now printed for the use of the numerous schools. In the winter of 1842-3, the insurrectionary spirit began again to show itself among the people, and Jaipur was for several weeks exposed to attacks from parties of insurgents. During this time Mr. Cutter was obhged to take down the presses, and con- ceal them with the other property belonging to the mission. On the restoration of tranquil- lity they were again set up and put in opera^ tion ; but the events which had occurred, and the exposed condition of the mission property decided the missionaries on the total abandon- ment of Jaipur, and the removal of the sta- tion to Sibsagor. This was accomplished with the approbation of the Board in Novem- ber, 1843. At about the same time, in order to prevent a concentration of the mission at too few points, Mr. Barker removed into Cen- tral Assam, first to Tezpur, and then to Gow- ahatti, the residence of Major Jenkins^for this was now his military rank,— and the most important town in the province. Here a star tion was begun, and Jaipur was wholly aban- doned. The three stations of Sibsagor, Nowgong, and Gowahatti, into which the mission was now divided, still continue to be the centres of its operation, which have been for some time past entirely restricted to the Assamese popu- lation, instead of embracing the Khamtis, the Singphos, and the Nagas, as was originally designed. A church was constituted at each of the stations soon after its establishment, and these churches have gone gradually for- ward in winning converts to the gospel from the heathen population of the country. At each of these stations, also, the work of preach- ing, translating, and teaching has been con- stantly prosecuted by 'the missionaries, with only such hindrances as usually attend the dis- semination of the gospel among men. In ad- dition to the strictly religious schools which are directly supported by the mission, there are also others which are sustained in a great degree by English residents; and though taught generally by native assistants, either belonging to the country or brought from Cal- cutta, are yet under the general care of the mission, and are to be numbered among its ASSAM. 163 fruiU. These schools have become very nu- merous, and are widely scattered among the villages of the country. But the school to which the missionaries attach the most imports ance, and which has been productive of the best results, is the OrphaA Institution at Now- gong. It aims to collect from all parts of the province destitute orphan children, and train them to useful occupations and to a knowledge of the gospel. It went into operation in 1844, and for several years past it has numbered from fifty to seventy members. Its expenses for several years were wholly defrayed, and are still very much lightened, by the generous contributions of the philanthropic English residents in Assam. Many of its pupils have become Christians, and several have been employed as assistants in the mission. Prior to 1846, only here and there a native convert had been baptized, but in the course of that year seven of the elder pupils of the Nowgong institution, and several other persons at the same station, were admitted to the church. At the close of the year 1847, the church at Gowahatti numbered twenty-seven members, and those of the three stations contained to- gether upwai'ds of sixty native disciples. In 1846, Mrs. Brown visited the United States, and awakened an increased interest in behalf of the mission among the churches and the members of the Board, and early in the fol lowing year, two missionaries, Rev. A. H. Danforth, and Rev. Ira J. Stoddard, offered their services to the managers, and were ap- pointed to Assam — the former to join the sta- tion at Gowahatti ; the latter to relieve Mr, Brouson in the charge of the orphan institu- tion at Nowgong. They arrived at the places of their destination early in the spring of 1848 In the following year, Mr. and Mrs. Brown, and Mrs. Cutter, were obliged, by ill health, to come for a season to the United States. They remained here until the summer of 1850, when they returned to their stations, accompanied by Rev. Messrs. Whiting and "Ward, and their wives, and Miss Shaw, a teacher, all of whom were appointed to the mission. They reached Assam in the following June. Mr. G. Dauble, a gentleman who had been employed as a teacher at Dacca, in Bengal, by the Basle Mis- sionary Society, came to Assam in 1850, and having become a Baptist, was temporarily con- nected with the Nowgong institution. He was afterwards ordained as a missionary, and in 1851, married to Miss Shaw. He died at Nowgong in March, 1853. Bev. Cyrus Barker, also, after a long period of declining health, em- barked for the United States, and died at sea, in January, 1850. His family now live in this country. Mr. Cutter, the printer, was also dismissed from the mission in the autumn of 1852. The translation of the New Testament in Assamese, was completed by Mr. Brown, and printed at Sibsagar in 1849. Since then it has passed through other editions ; and several books of the Old Testament have also been printed, together with a long list of books to be used in the schools. The English officers and residents in the province, still continue to evince their wonted mterest in the prosperity of the mission, and in the results which it aims to accomplish for the people. The religion of the Brahmins has, for some time, been losing its hold on the popular mind, and the impres- sion is widely prevailing, not only in Assam, but in other parts of India, that it must give place to the religion which is taught by the English. This however is only a negative and comparatively unimportant result. The mis- sionaries have still before them their great work of persuading the people to embrace the gospel — a work for which, thus far, a prepara- tion only has been made, but which has of itself scarcely begun to be accomplished. — See Professor Gammdl's History of Am. Baptist Missions, and recent Reports of Managers of Missionary Union. — Prof. W. Gammbll. , TABDIAB VIEW. 1 Missionaries and Assistants. i a $ 1 S 1 Minis- ters. Lay Teach- ers. &c. Scholars. o American. > 1 1 i s i z n 10 48 15 Day Scli'is i Sibsagor. . . Nowgong. . Gowahatti 1841 1841 184.1 2 2 2 a 1 1 T 2 3 2 7 1 ch. Ij 216 Totals.. 79 8 Sch'L. 289 ATHENS : See Greece. AUCKLAND : Capital of New Zealand, in lat. 36° 51' S. long. 174° 45' B. A station of the Wesleyan Slissionary Society com- menced in 1823. Population 1800, has now 4 missionaries, 5 chapels, 26 local preachers, 53 teachers, 291 members, 492 scholars, and 810 attendants on public worship. Auckland con- tains besides a college and seminary for the education of the sons of the Wesleyan Mis- sionaries in Australia and Polynesia, having now 70 students ; and there is also a native in- stitution, giving the benefit of an education in the English and Maori languages to native young men, to fit them for future usefulness. Also, a station of the Church Missionary So- ciety. AUSTRAL ISLANDS : A group of five islands in the Southern Pacific, between 22^ 27' and 27° 36' S. lat., and 144° 11' and 150° 47' W. long. The names of the islands are, Raivavai, Tubuai, Rurutu, Rimatara, and AUSTRALASIA : The Encyclopedia 164: AUSTRALIA. Britannica gives the following as the bounda- ries of Australasia : " Take the equator as the northern line, from 132° to 175° B. long. ; continue a line on the meridian to the 55th parallel, (bending a little to take in New Zea- land,) for the eastern ; a line on the same par- allel to 65° E. long, for the southern ; and a slanting point on the equator, so as to include Kerguelands Land, and pass on the eastern side of Timorlant, Ceram, Mysol, and Sal- walty, for the western boundary ; those lines will embrace the whole of the Australasian Islands, viz., Australia or New Holland, Van Dieman's land or Tasmania, New Guinea, and the Louiscade Archipelago, New Britain, New Ireland and neighboring islands, Solo- mon's Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, New Zealand and isles to the southward, Ker- gueland Islands, St. Paul and Amsterdam, and numerous coral reefs and islets. AUSTRALIA, or NEW HOLLAND lies between 10° 30' and 39° S. lat. and between 112° 20' and 153° 40' E. long. Its extreme length is about 2603 miles, and its average width 1200, making about 2,690,810 square miles ; the continent of Europe embracing 3,684,841, which will give the reader a comparative idea of the sLae of this new continent. The prevailing features of the country are barren and wooded plains, traversed by long ridges of precipitous, but not very lofty mountains, and rivers which often spread into marshes, and do not continue their course to any great distance in proportion to the extent of the country. There are few deep bays ; nor does the sea, so far as yet discovered, receive any river, whose magnitude corresponds to that of the land. Great portions of that part which has been explored are unfit for cultivation, or even for traveling. There are, however, fine meadow tracts, on a grand scale, where the richest herbage grows spontaneously, and where industry may raise the most plentiful crops. In its geographical features and in some of its productions, Australia differs wide- ly from all other portions of the known world. The discovery of gold has recently attracted considerable attention, and drawn great num- bers of emigrants from Great Britain to that far off land. Inhabitants. — We have no definite and reliar ble information as to the number of tie abo- riginal population ; but it is supposed to be about 15,000. Major T. S. Mitchell, however, who has made three tours into the interior, thinks there are less than 6,000. This gentle- man expresses a high opinion of their charac- ter. He says that, in manners and general intelligence, they appear superior to any class of white rustics he had seen. The tribes of the northern Coast of Australia possess a peculiar interest, on account of their proximity to the Indian Archipelago. Here, within a circle of 500 miles, may be found a large num- ber of distinct tribes, varying in color from the black of the negro to the freckled-yellow of the Polynesian mountaineer, and differing in social condition as much as in person. The British colony of New South Wa,les was originally a penal settlement, to which criminals were transported from Great Britain. After this, it was opened to independent and bounty emigrants. And, within a few years past, the discovery of gold has caused a great rush of emigration. In 1810, the population was but 8,923. In 1851, it was 264,000. MISSIONS. United Bkeihbbn. — The Moravians estab- lished a mission to the aborigines of Austra- lia in 1849, and have one missionary laboring at Lake Boga ; but no specific results are yet reported. SOCIEIT FOB PeOPAGATING THE GoSPEL IN PoEEiGN Parts. — New South Wales having been occupied by the British Government as a penal settlement, chaplains were ap- pointed as their services were required. In 1795 the Society began, on the recommenda- tion of the local chaplain, to pay two school- masters in the settlement. In 1798, Eev. C. Haddock became the Society's first mission- ary in Norfolk Island. In 1825, when the population of Australia was 31,133, there were only 10 chaplains maintained by the Govern- ment, and but 14 in 1837, when the population had more than doubled. In 1836, Eev. Wil- liam G. Boughton was consecrated bishop, and £2,000 were granted by the Society for Pro- moting Christian Knowledge, and il,000 by the Society for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign Parts, to aid the work ; and sooa after 10 missionaries were sent out by the lat- ter Society. Year after year, more clergymen were sent out, and considerable grants of money were placed by the Society at the Bishop's disposal. In 1843 the Society was assisting to maintain 40 clergymen in Austrar lia, and 10 in Van Dieman's Land ; and in 1851, the number aided was about 50. In 1847, the Diocese was divided, and three new sees, Newcastle, Adelaide, and Melbourne were con- stituted. The increase of clergy since that time will be seen by the following table : 1847 I860 Newcastle .... 17 27 Adelaide .... 11 22 Melbourne . 1851 20 A meeting has been held, attended by the four bishops of Australia, and the bishops of New Zealand and Van Dieman's Land, and a Board of Missions constituted, for the propa- gation of the Gospel among the aboriginal inhabitants of the Austrahan continent and the islands of the Western Pacific. Wesleyan Missionaey Society. — The Wes- leyan Society opened a mission in New South Wales, in 1815 ; in South Australia in 1838 ; and the following year they began their operiv tions in Western Australia, at a place called AUSTRALIA. 16: I'ertli. Fifty years ago, New South Wales was a penal settlement. There were a few thousand settlers, also, scattered over the coun- try, engaged chiefly in rearing sheep and in agricultural pursuits. The rest of the popula- tion were aborigines. A few of the settlers who had been Methodists in England, and had gone to Australia either as farmers or as school teachers, finding themselves without religious services, and being surrounded by criminals on the one hand, and by heathens on the other, dreaded the consequences to themselves and their children ; and in the year 1812 one of these settlers addressed a letter to the Mis- sionary Committee imploring help. The state of society was frightful in the extreme. The most debasing crimes were openly perpetrated ; and when any one remonstrated, the reply was, " It is the custom of the country ! " The writer of the letter alluded to, pleads most earnestly, for himself, and in behalf of the little com- pany associated with him, and also for the aborigines ; and intimates that light might yet break forth from that place to the thous- ands of isles by which Australia is surrounded. Such was the foundation of the "Wesleyan Mis- sions to Australia. What finite mind can grasp the results of those labors which were then so earnestly invited ! A day is coming when the great Southern Commonwealth, Duilt up by Gold, and Commerce, and Agri- •ulture, and Manufactures, may stand almost peerless among the nations of the earth, repos- ing upon freedom and evangelical faith, and looking back with meek adoration upon the humility of her origin ! The first class meeting ever held in Austra- lia was on the evening of March 6, 1812 ; and by July, a division of that little band had formed three such small companies, united to pray and exhort one another to " work out their own salvation," two at Sydney, and one at Windsor. " We have here," says the writer of the letter, " in society, the following persons: in Sydney, Mr. John H., who leads a class in his own house, consisting of Mrs. H., Mrs. B., and Mrs. T., and three of the senior girls in the school. Mr. B. has also a class in his house, on a Friday evening, consisting of Mr. H^ J. P., T. J., and a soldier or two of the /oth Regi- ment. Our meetings are generally very com- fortable and profitable. At Windsor we have a class under the care of Mr. E., consisting of six Mr E is a pious, sensible young man. Bent here from Ireland, where he was converted while under sentence of death for forgery He Vas bred to the bar. Being of an_ humble, af- fectionate disposition, and zea ous in the cause of God I doubt not, (especially could his re- Tiroach be wiped away,) he would make a useful man among us. He has been employed for some months past in teaching school, and he goes some miles into the country on the Sunday, where he reads the Church Liturgy, and ex- nounds, or preaches, to the settlers, several of whom are thankful for his labors." Such was the first class, and such was the first preacher of Methodism in Australia I This little band of 20 Christians assembled at Windsor, on the 3rd of April, to hold their first Love Feast. They enjoyed a season of great blessing, and at the close of the service, they resolved them- selves into a Committee of Consultation, to see what could be done to obtain the ordinances of the Gospel for themselves, and the blessings of an itinerant ministry for Australia. They appointed one of their number to address the Missionary Committee in London, on their be- half, and to plead for the sake of the perishing thousands of settlers, convicts, and savages around them, to send them a missionary ; at the same time engaging to meet his support. The communication bears date July 20, 1812. And thus originated that action, which, un- der the blessing of God, has resulted, (Is^ In the establishment of one of the largest or the British Colonial Churches, having had an inde- pendent Conference, and nearly 100,000 persons under its pastoral care ; which (2d) has also rescued from sin and a sinner's doom, hundreds of those whose crimes had driven them from their native land ; for the Missionaries have sought out the unhappy, branded exiles ; and in many a delightful instance have those " banished ones," in " the land of their captivi- ty," repented beneath the influence of Chris- tian admonition, and found mercy at the hand of God ; and the morning of eternity alone will tell how many of those children of crime and punishment shall be welcomed in Heaven, by the parents and friends, who in shame and despair had seldom dared to mention their names on earth ; and, (3) such was the agency from which originated the Australian and Polynesian Wesleyan Missions, to the abori- ginies of the southern hemisphere, and which this day yields (including members, scholars, and regular hearers,) a result of more than 25,000 christianized heathens, to the pastoral care of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. " What hath God wrought !" To Him alone be all the glory I In answer to their request, the Missionary Committee sought out a suitable man, in the person of Mr. Leigh, who arrived at Australia in August, 1815. He was joyfully received, and was favored with great and increasing prosperity. Soon three chapels were erected, at Sydney, Winsdor 35 miles, and Castlereagh, 50 miles from Sydney, and four Sunday-schools were commenced, a circuit was formed, em- bracing 15 preaching stations, extending over 150 miles of the colony. Mr. Lawry was sent to help Mr. Leigh, in the following year. The Committee say in the report, " As many of the aboriginal natives of the country are occa- sionally met with by l^x. Leigh on his excur- sions, it is hoped that, on the arrival of Mr Lawry, not only will the calls of the settlers for religious help be met, but something effeo. 166 AUSTRALIA. tual be done by the brethren for the civiliza- tion and Christian instruction of the natives themselves. Mr. Lawry was encouraged by the Committee to make the attempt, and to consider this one of the objects of his mission." In 1817, the missionaries had the pleasure of entertaining eight missionary brethren, (among whom was that devoted man who twenty-two years afterwards became " The Martyr of Br- romanga,") sent out by the London Missionary Society, to what was then called, Otaheite. During their visit to the Wesleyan mission stations in Australia, they zealously engaged in preaching the Gospel, and conducted them- selves toward the Missionaries, and the work in which they were employed, in such a manner as to leave behind them " a sweet savor of Christ." The Eev. Walter Lawry arrived in Sydney, May 1, 1818, and was joyfully met by Mr. Leigh. The population of the colony was then about 20,000, of whom not one in five had any opportunity of attending public wor- ship ; and in some districts the runaway con- victs, who prowled around the homes of the settlers, made it dangerous to leave their resi- dences to go any distance to the house of God, even had there been places of worship provided. The itinerancy, therefore, was the only mode of searching out these destitute people. There were at this time only four chaplains in all the colony ; and it is due to truth and charity to state that these clerical gentlemen welcomed the Methodist itinerants to their adopted coun- try with hearty good will, and showed them- selves ready on all occasions to assist them. The missionaries had great trials to pass through. The roads were few, fce rides long, and the lodgings often very indifferent. Fre- quently had they to lie on boards or on the ground, with their saddle-bags for a pillow, their only covering being their top-coat. But the cause of God was triumphing, and this reconciled them to every privation. In such circumstances and with such encouragement, "Labor was rest, and pain was sweet." The cause of God gained strength. Chapels were erected, churches and congregations gath- ered, and missionaries multiplied to meet the f rowing necessities of this great work. But ere we must leave the delightful record of prosperity, as the great object of this publica- tion is to trace the rise and progress of the Christian religion among the heathen. The providence of God overruled the mis- sions in Australia so as to accomplish this great end ; for while the Gospel was gaining its triumphs among the Anglo-Saxon settlers and the convicts, and thus turning a colony which was once literally " a den of thieves," into a peaceful Christian community, the at- tention of these renewed and enlightened peo- ple was turned in pity toward the degraded aborigines around them, as well as to those heathen in the isles of the South Seas, with which they now began to have commercial relations. Accordingly in 1820, a fourth mis- sionary was appointed for New South Wales, whose labors were to be devoted exclusively to the aboriginal population, and whose civil- ization and moral improvement were then considered by many to be utterly hopeless An institution for the children of the aborigi nal natives had been established at Paramatta, under the Governor's auspices ; allotments of ground for cultivation were made ; and an annual general friendly meeting was estab- lished by proclamation. This meeting was well attended by most of the tribes in the col- ony. They were kindly treated, and good im- pressions were made upon their minds ; but it was found that unless Christian missionaries were obtained, to reside among them, who " would have compassion on the ignorant, and on them that are out of the way," and teach them "the path of life," little good could otherwise be accomplished. The Governor nobly offered to bear the expense for two years out of his private purse, and the Wesleyan Missionary Society supplied the man. Mr. Walker commenced with a tribe who understood English, and through whom he endeavored to acquire the native language. The commencement of the mission was very encouraging. The fact of a missionary being appointed expressly for their benefit and in- struction, impressed them with surprise and conciliated their regard. The only object of worship to which Mr. Walker found them dis- posed to pay any adoration was the waxing moon. They were also much influenced by fear of the evil spirit, and had a terror of darkness. But the missionary had hard work to make any impression whatever upon them. Nevertheless, though they had sunk so low, they so much the more needed the application of that only power which could awaken the torpor of their minds, and conquer their savage habits. As a sample of some of the difficul- ties which our missionary had to encounter with his flock of wild Papoos, take the follow- ing : Mr. Walker says, " They are very idle and vagrant ; and the colonists often encour- age their vices. For instance, if they cut wood, or do any other trifling work for them, they are rewarded by the colonists with what they call bull ; sometimes this is composed of a mixture of spirituous liquors, and at others it is the washing of liquor puncheons. When they are permitted, they take a bucket of boil- ing water, put it into the puncheon, when they agitate it until it has drawn out the strength of the liquor. They then surround the pun- cheon and drink till they are intoxicated. Quarreling of course ensues. I was lately re- turning from Paramatta to Sydney, having visited the Native Institution, when I fell in with a tribe of these revelers. Some were not at all intoxicated, others were fearfully so ; AUSTKALIA. 167 out both the drunken and the sober knew me. I asked them to go into the woods, knowing if the convicts met them they would be ex- cited to fight, and probably to murder one another ; all followed me. But such n noise I never heard before ; and so much wanton bar- barity I never witnessed. The men would take their waddies, which are made of hard wood, about three feet long, and four or five inches in circumference at the end, and strike the heads of their women with such violence that I expected nothing less than the death of some of them, as the husbands stood up to defend their wives. When one man lifted up his waddy to strike another, I stepped in be- tween them. I then turned round and found another bleeding most profusely. Before I had wiped away the blood from the head of one, another would be in danger. At last I declared I would not live with so quarrelsome a people. This produced a clamor which made the woods ring, and all vociferated, " Parson, do stay," a hundred times repeated. This threat of leaving them, acted like oil on the angry waters. It ended the row ; and all proceeded peaceably to their' homes. Though degraded to such an extent, yet they were not willing to lose their best earthly friend. They had become conscious of his value. Mr. Walk- er employed all his strength in visiting them at their temporary settlements, gaining their confidence, and giving them elements of in- struction. He established preaching, and class and prayer meetings among them. He also kept a school, where he taught the children. Some fruit of his labor was given him. One youth in particular, of the name of Thomas, became truly converted to God, and soon learn- ed to read the Bible, and began to be useful in holding meetings. But he sickened and died, as did also another equally pious, though not so efficient as Thomas. Both of these youths died well — " the first^fraits " of the Aus- tralian aborigines to Christ. But here a new difficulty arose. They are so superstitious that they believe the place where one has died to be equally fatal to themselves. They therefore fled from the mission house, lest they also should die. This dispersion, and the ill-health of the missionary, together with the unsettled habits of this tribe, and the vices they had ac- quired by their intercourse with the lower classes of the colonists, all proved unfriendly to this enterprise, and the committee resolved to try what could be done among those tribes which were located in the interior and more distant parts of the country, and which, by their position, were more out of the reach of many of those counteracting causes to which allusion has been made. They therefore open- ed a mission at Wellington Bay, where there were six tribas, the Bathurst, the Mfirrylong, the Nilry, the Bendjanz, the Mudjee, and the Myawl. Ajnong these tribes the agents of the So- ciety labored for a time, but with small suc- cess, owing chiefly to their migratory hab- its, joined to their want of appreciation of those means which were adopted for their benefit. Had the committee been able to have incurred the expense of adopting gome vigorous and extensive plan of localizing the tribes, and thus bringing them under constant and regular instruction, success, on a large scale, might have been realized. But they were unable to do this, and the mission to these people was therefore suspended in 1828. But the committee, finding themselves in a better position in 1836, again renewed their eflforts among the Australian aborigines, and three missionaries were sent out. They loca- ted themselves, two at Port Philip, in South Australia, and the other at Perth, on Swan River, in Western Australia. These missions have been blest with considerable success, and have been strengthened from time to time by an increase of agents. In 1838 a mission among the aborigines was commenced at a place called Buntingdcde, (now called Geelong) in Australia Felix, and two missionaries were placed there. The gov- ernment kindly donated a tract of land for the use of the natives brought under Christian in- struction. From that time, to the present, considerable prosperity, mingled with many trials, has attended their labors. The mission- aries have mastered the languages of the na- tives ; schools have been opened at each sta- tion ; the printing-press has also been brought into requisition ; and school-books, with Cat- echisms and the Holy Scriptures, printed for their benefit. An institution for training na^ tive young men for usefulness among their own tribes, is in operation at Perth, in Western Australia. It has now been open for about eight years, and has from twenty to thirty students. Farms have been attached to each of these three missions, and also sheep-raising, by which, not only is a large part of the expense of the missions provided for, but the tribes which have, in each case, settled on the mission reserve, are thereby trained to remain in a settled home, where they are stimulated to industry, and en- joy those comforts of life, which, in their hea^ then state, they never knew. At each station, delightful instances of the saving power of the Gospel are constantly witnessed among these once degraded people, who, 30 years ago, were regarded as almost, if not altogether, beyond the reach of civilization or renewal. They are now beginning to repay the labor and sufler- ings endured on their behalf, and have been thus brought into connection with that Christi- anity which stands as the only barrier between them and utter destruction. The statistics of the mission to the aborigines are not separated, in the following table, from those which have reference to the English population. 168 AUSTRALIA. paB siaquigjii Stnpnpm 'diqs o o o o o O O O lO o C5 00 O O O o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o oogg iH lO to t-^ <0 iO">*r-fC0O O 00« iH CO -^ i-( 0> to Ol^t- >O03 -^ W « i-l -^ O O O O) t- o O >« C^ OO i-H rH CQ t*i iH CN i-H H O O W3 OJ (M W3 ^ rH iQ CO (Dt* o o in o vo o M T-l C^i-H rH ■q^oq JO sJ^rpqag -jC-bj jo jaqninjj CO vO o o •siooqog [ JO jaqmnfj •saxag qq.oq JO SJisioqos-^^'Bq -q^ JO J9qninf^ t-iOi-ICOO O iH O to O 00 ing two papers each stroke of the press. A demand has arisen for the " Child's Paper" in G-reat Britain, and several thousand copies are sent monthly to Edinburgh, Scotland. Since these enterprises commenced, there have been printed of the American Messenger, 16,125,600 copies ; of the Botschafter, 1,36<),000 ; and of the Child's Paper, 6,611,000 ; total, 24,102,- 600. Publications. — The publications of the soci- ety printed in this country, now number about 2,000, including more than 400 books. Of these 65 volumes and 186 tracts and children's tracts are in the German language ; 21 books and 102 tracts in the French; 13 books and 65 tracts in the Spanish ; 22 books and tracts in the Portuguese; 16 in the Italian; 35 in the Welsh ; 27 in the Dutch; 44 in the Danish; 28 in the Swedish; and 4 in the Hungarian; the remainder being in English. They em- brace as rich and varied a collection of stand- ard works in practical theology as exists in any language. The style of printing and illus- tration in which they are issued does credit to American art. In cheapness they are believed to be unrivaled. The circulation of some of the tracts has exceeded half a million copies ; and of particular volumes, 200,000 or 300,000. Baxter's Call has had a circulation of 400,000 copies ; the Pictorial Tract Primer, 300,000 ; and D'Aubigne's History of the Reformation, 82,000, sets of 4 or 5 volumes. The aggregate circulation of tracts has been about 140,000,000, and of volumes about 10,000,000, embracing, 15,000 libraries; making a total, including 24,102,600 copies of periodicals, of about one HUNDKED AND SEVENTY-FIVE MILLIONS OF PUB- LICATIONS. If to this be added the publications distributed in foreign lands by the society's friends, estimated to average 20 pages each, 21,115,200 copies, it will make a grand total of about TWO HUNDRED MILLIONS OF PUBLICA- TIONS, or an average of more than one for each family of the human race. Tract House. — The Tract Society's House is a spacious edifice near the City Hall, New- York, about 80 feet on Nassau street, and 100 feet on Spruce street, and is five stories high in front and six stories in the rear, with a cen- tral court for light and air. It was built in 1825 on the site previously occupied by a small tavern or grocery, and rebuilt in 1846 to pro- vide for new machinery, and to meet the in- creasing necessities of the Society's business. Its fifty apartments are heated throughout by steam. Besides the two stores and offices now rented to others, it furnishes accommodations for nearly thirty printing and hydraulic press- es, propelled by steam, and for nearly 300 persons engaged in the executive, commercial and manufacturing departments of the Soci- ety's service. A debt of about $40,000 still incumbers the estate of the Society. The first building was the scene of the extensive revivals of religion, connected with the labors of Harlan Page ; and a daily prayer-meeting of the employees in the Tract House, now hallows all its influences for good. The meet> ings of every committee are uniformly opened with prayer. Executive Officers of the American Tract So- ciety. — Hon. Thomas S. Williams, President ; Bev. Wm. A. Hallock, D.D., Rev. 0. Eastman and Bev. R. S. Cook, Corresponding Secretar ries ; Rev. Charles G. Sommers, Recording Secretary, O. B. Kingsbury, Assistant Secre- tary ; Moses Allen, Esq. Treasurer and Isaac W. Briuckerhofif, Depositary. 182 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES THE AMERICAN TKACT SOCIETY'S EEOEIPTS, ISSUES, GEANTS, ETC., DUKIITO TWENTT-NINE TEAKS. EECEiraS. PRIKTra). cmouiATED. GlUjraS. Foreign 3 c Grants in Cash. Cm o Donations. Sales. Total. Pages. Pages. Pages. 1 $6,925 66 S3, 233 22 $10,158 78 18,063,500 8,611,500 148,000 216 2 8,666 96 21,843 06 *30,413 01 86,114,600 24,768,232 1,648,056 22 3 12,464 38 32,670 20 45,134 58 63,667,000 46,321,784 3,805,704 103 4 25,173 18 34,980 80 60,163 98 68,816,000 48,896,262 2,992,881 ""$660 92 6 11,756 65 48,454 69 60,210 24 63,429,930 62,860,444 6,086,261 300 67 6 8,784 82 34,137 77 42,922 59 68,786,000 68,622,704 4,168,800 300 73 7 24,474 78 37,430 29 61,906 07 88.647,000 66,160,467 4,788,110 6,044 46 8 31,229 26 31,117 68 62,346 83 39,700,808 48,400,607 7,480,607 10,000 36 9 36,212 26 31,169 26 66,381 51 61,634,624 67,638,070 9,956,829 20,000 46 10 60,727 42 31,680 39 92,307 81 63,804,652 63,916,368 8,636,267 30,000 56 11 66,638 ,04 47,673 37 104,211 41 101,293,584 72,480,229 9,839,760 +36,500 ■|-36,000 65 12 71,932 36 69,088 92 130,991 28 126,682,000 96,861,174 10,867,616 41 13 37,173 74 54,558 36 91,732 10 48,377,100 86,479,621 8,893,743 10,000 46 14 66,862 81 76,226 96 131,079 77 124,744,000 119,733,366 10,681,676 80,000 33 15 41,476 49 76,120 67 117,506 16 117,970,000 123,687,707 16,978,446 20,000 34 16 41,751 61 67,210 98 98,962 69 95,958,500 80,581,566 11,908,265 26,000 26 17 34,941 03 66,214 11 91,155 14 100,108,000 94,329,046 16,604,610 15,000 32 18 42,433 98 49,904 13 *96,240 63 78,844,000 80,806,460 18,682,456 15,000 54 1« 56,680 31 61,804 13 108,484 44 96,118,000 91,471,466 24,316,121 20,000 41 20 62,306 38 86,296 01 *162,376 78 157,018,000 1.52,727,229 26,749,445 6.000 68 21 71,132 16 82,784 00 153,916 16 116,173,000 123,642,693 30,706,246 16;000 73 22 67,770 88 92,360 24 160,131 12 150,013,696 163,676,624 35,926,208 10,000 48 23 105,915 15 129,744 31 236,669 46 217,499,000 211,730,285 40,948,459 11,000 68 24 94,081 43 164,218 73 258,300 16 298,264,000 234,409,300 47,890,225 14,000 145 26 105,894 80 202,371 92 308,266 72 307,636,200 280,697,600 68,138,820 15,000 73 26 109,897 76 200,720 33 810,618 09 285,914,500 269,984,615 66,638,643 20,000 78 27 116,406 41 226,343 50 342,749 91 816,618,500 283,296,568 65,164,181 2o;ooo 28 147,374 64 237,252 21 384,626 85 287,479,600 268,902,316 72,224,841 20,000 167 29 156,033 48 259,125 12 415,168 00 803,851,000 315,100,857 73,2^824 20,000 76 $1,700,996 71 $2,515,606 16 $4,224,191 67 3,861,416,594 3,621,076,917 682,932,900 $428,794 * Including receipts from rents, 2d year, $13 ; ISth year, $8,902 42 ; 20tll year, $3,774 39. + Inolndlng grants for ttie blind, 11th year, S600 ; 12tll year, $1,000. The Pkesbyterian Boakd of Publication wivs organized by the General Assembly in 1840. Its great design was to cooperate with the Christian ministry in publishing divine truth. One of the speciiic objects of the Board is, to counteract the influence of licentious lit> eratiure. Another is, " to furnish a thoroughly sound Calvinistic literature." It does not, however, attempt to furnish exclusively doc- trinal works, but also such as are practical and devotional. A large portion of its issues arc of the latter description, and such as may be read without offence by all evangelical denominations. Publishing Department. — During the year ending March 31, IS.li, the Board have pub- lished 16 new books, one of which is iu the German language. Of these books, there have been printed 38,250 copies. They have also added to their Catalogue 9 tracts in 12mo, and 1 in 18mo, of which have been printed 26,000 copies. They have also printed 25,000 copies of the Presbyterian Family Almanac. Total copies of new books and tracts, 89,250. The reprints of former publications during the year, amount to 506,500 copies. Total amount of copies published during the year, 595,750. The aggregate number of volumes published by the Board, from their organization in 1840, to March 31, 1853, has amounted to 2,020,450. The aggregate number of tracts published dur- ing the same period has amounted to 2,131,450. The total number of volumes and tracts pub- lished by the Board, from 1840, to March 31, 1853, has amounted to 4,151,900. Besides this, the Board printed and circu- lated, the last year, 15,000 copies of the Home and Foreign Record, and of the Sabbath- School Visitor, 41,000. Receipts. — The receipts of the past year have been, for books and tracts sold, $7*7,648 ; dona- tions for salaries and expenses of colporteurs, «15,866 ; for Sabbath-School Visitor, $6,111; for distribution of books and tracts, $1,413 ; for stereotyping certain books, $1,175. The aggregate amount of sales, from the 1st of April, 1841, to April 1, 1853, is $466,573 75. The aggregate receipts fo^ colportage, from April 1, 1847,^to April 1, 1853, have amounted to $47,677 10. The aggregate receipts for distri- bution, from April 1, 1848, to April 1, 1853, have amounted to $6,085 19. Total amount of receipts for colportage and distribution, during the periods above mentioned, being $53,762 29. The total increase of receipts from all sources, the year past, amounts to $12,- 052 35, which is nearly 14 per cent, compared with the receipts of 1844. It appears that the income of the Board has been trebled in ten years, and, indeed, compared with that of 1848, the year in which the colporteur enter- prise commenced, the increase has been nearly as great, presenting $103,544 46, instead of $38,213 92, or $65,330 54 increase. BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 1S3 The Colporteur Enterprise. — " This branch of service is every year increasing in interest, and opening before the Church most pleasing pros- pects of great and permanently beneficial re- sults." The foUovpinff summary will show what has been done the past year : 1. Whole number of Colporteurs, 151 ; of whom one was in India, six in the British Pro- vinces, three in Maine, two in New Hampshire, twenty-two in New York, /our in New Jersey, siodeen in Pennsylvania, one in Maryland, two in Virginia, twelve in North Carolina, six in South Carolina, //Cecn in Georgia, two in Flo- rida, one in Alabama, one in Mississippi, one in Louisiana, five in Texas, one in Arkansas, two in Kentucky, one in Michigan, six in Ten- nessee, nine in Ohio, three in Iowa, fourteen in Indiana, ten in Illinois, four in Missouri, and one in Wisconsin ; or 144 distributed in 25 States of the Union. 2. Distribution of Books. — Sales 91,885 vol- umes. Gifts, 9,581 volumes. To which add 28,000 volumes distributed by the Synods of Pittsburgh (23,000) and Virginia (5,000), and 6,517 included in the report of donations ; the total is 135,983 volumes. Distribution of Tracts. — By the colporteurs, , 871,547 pages ; by the Synods of Pittsburgh (25,000) and Virginia (23,000)^8,000, and included in the report of donations 381,000 ; making a total of 1,300,547 pages. 4. Families visited, 65,734 ; and 2,451 in Sy- nod of Pittsburgh ; total, 68,185. 5. Presbyterian families without the Con- fession of Faith, 2,340. 6. Families without any religious book ex- cept the Bible, 1,603. 7. Time spent by colporteurs, 41 years and a few days. Of the practical results of this enterprise, the Board say, in their report : — " By the testimo- nies of clergymen of our own and other church- es, as well as those of colporteurs, and by the opinions of others, well qualified to judge, we are satisfied that the books of this Board are exert ing a most potent and salutary influence on the religious character of our nation. This is done, as well by a positive effect in informing men's minds and moving their hearts, as by the indi- rect, but no less valuable operation of convert- ing wrong tastes and moulding religious think- ing to some definite shape. The historical, biographical, and practical works are extend- ing and deepening the impressions of a com- mon Christianity and a common Protestantism, and aiding' other influences in fixing upon the hearts of our people the great principle, that the Christianity of the Bible is the strong de- fence, as it is the true source, of our civil and religious liberty. Of actual conversions through the instrumentality of books and tracts, our colporteurs relate numerous pleasing accounts." Gratuitous Distribution. — The Board have made donations of books and tracts the past year, exclusive of those given away by colpor- teurs, to the amount of $2,358, viz. : to Sab- bath-schools, 2,535 volumes ; to naval and military stations and ships-of-war, 142 ; to humane institutions, 60 ; to literary and theo- logical institutions, 226 ; to ministers, 850 ; to feeble churches, 1376 ; to individuals for gratuitous distribution, 1328 ; total volumes, 6,517, and 381,032 pages of tracts ; 9,581 vols, and 871,547 pages of tracts have been given away by colporteurs. The aggregate number of volumes given away, independent of the donations made by colporteurs, from 1847, when the Board com- menced making donations, to 1854, is 32,285. The aggregate number of pages of tracts given away during the same period, is 1,467,300. The "Methodist Book Conceen," New York, is the extensive and enterprising pub- lishing agency of the Methodist Episcopal Church, North. By a recent decision of the Courts a pro rata portion of its accumulated funds have been or are to be paid over to the Methodist Church, South ; and the latter or- ganization formed an establishment in 1854, for publishing at the South. From the im- perfect data available, we can only give the facts of 1853-4, as follows : the number of volumes of general catalogue books printed, 680,500 ; number of Sunday-school books, 1,128,000 ; number of tract books, 110,000, making the issues of a single year, of larger or smaller books, not far from 2,000,000. The " Sunday-School Advocate," has a circulation of about 115,000, semi-monthly. The '• Mis- sionary Advocate" has a monthly circulation of 50,000. The Christian Advocate and Journal, weekly, a circulation of 33,000. T'he statistics of the " Concern" at Cincinnati, 0., are not included, for the most part, in the above. The American Baptist Publication So- ciety was formed in 1824. Its publications, denominational and general, now number 450, of which 208 are volumes. Of the tracts, 218 are in English, 15 in German and 3 in French. The receipts for 1853-4 were 149,612, of which $35,218 were for sales of publications. The number of colporteurs employed was 62, including 13 students for short periods, who sold 18,866 books ; granted 609 books and 236,308 pages of tracts ; visited 32,690 fami- lies and 3,758 vessels and canal boats ; held 1,081 meetings ; preached 1,558 sermons, and organized 10 churches, and 7 Sunday-schools. The Society has a building fund of $25,000. Congregational Board op Publication. — The Doctrinal Tract Society was formed in 1829. For about 20 years its operations were confined to the publication of Doctrinal Tracts, setting forth and defending the doc- trinal views, which have from the beginning, distinguished the leading divines among the orthodox Congregationalists of New England. In 1850, its constitution was revised, so as to embrace the publication of books ; Kev. Sew- 184 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. all Harding, was appointed Secretary and General Agent ; and an act of incorporation was obtained. The object of the Society is thus stated in the second article of its consti- tution : " It is the object of this Society to procure and circulate such tracts and books, as are adapted to explain, prove, vindicate and illus- trate the peculiar and essential doctrines of the gospel, and to discriminate between genuine and spurious religious affections and experience." In their report for 18.52, the Executive Com- mittee say : " In pursuance of this object, the Society first published a series of tracts, forty- five in number, on important subjects of Chris- tian doctrine and practice. More recently they have given their attention to the publication of books ; and they design to make this Soci- ety, for the Congregational churches of our land, what the Presbyterian Board of Publi- cation is for the Presbyterian churches. And it might be appropriately called, as it is in fact, the Congregational Board of Publication. We have commenced the work of publishing the writings of the most distinguished New England theologians ; and we hope to be able to continue this, until we have issued editions of the works of that class of men, so distin- guished for their theological acumen, and whose writings and labors have been so highly appreciated, and so signally blessed, in the formation and prosperity of our religious char- acter and institutions." IJST OF PRINOIPAI, BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. TITLES. ^1 TOTAl aRCUMTION. 1826 1814 1844 1816 1823 1839 1826 1848 1820 1836 1837 1820 1847 1830 1808 1835 1820 1799 1760 1853 1864 1840 1824 1854 220,000,000 " Boston *4,217,000 * 5,783,000 2,000,000 " Miscellaneous 2,000,000 Calcutta and others, India Evangelical Society, Brussels . . . 26,000,000 2,000,000 8,600,000 Italian Committee, Geneva Lower Saxony, Hamburg 1,000,000 7,500,000 1,733,476 2,000,000 Paris 11,604,676 StirlinK, Scotl'nd (Peter Drum- 1 mond) J St. PeterHburgh, Russia 10,000,000 4,396,000 6 000 000 1 000 000 Rel. Tract Society, London See. for Proraofing Rel. Knowl. \ England } Metb. Epis. Tract Society 600,000,000 20,000,000 f for 1863-4, \ 2,000,000 books. r vols. 202,946, \ tracts, 2,131,460 " " " (South) Prea. Board of Publication Evang. Knowl. S?oc. Prot. Epis. . * Previous to For Sunday-School Publicatio Schools. L825. 1 So ieties, see Sunday- General Increase 0¥ EsLiGions Books.— The foregoing statements show the most grat- ifying results of the Christian press, in furnish- ing to the masses a truly Christian literature. But vast and beyond calculation as they a,ppear, they by no means present a complete view of the immense diffusion of religious truth, by this instrumentality, for the last half century. The improvements in the art of printing, the more general dift'usion of wealth, the enterprise of Christian societies, and the progress of reli- gion, have greatly stimulated the production and circulation of books, and especially good books. In England, a century ago, the sales of books and periodicals amounted to less than $500,000 per annum. Now, they exceed $10,- 500,000. In 1471, Sweynheim and Pannartz, printers at Rome, whose entire stock of books was 12,000 volumes, tell the Pope, in a, peti- tion, "Ton will admire how and where we could procure a sufficient quantity of paper, or even rags, for such a number of volumes," which 1,000 reams of paper would have pro- duced I Isaiah Thomas, in his History of the Art of Printing, says, " The paper manufac- tured and used for book printing (in 1810) may be calculated at about 70,000 reams, (probably equal in weight and size to 30,000 reams of the style now used,) a considerable part of which is used for spelling and other small school-books. The price, at $3 50 a ream, amounts to $245,000, and it may weigh about 630 tons." Such was the book-trade in this country less than forty years ago. In 1848. the sum of $142,122 was paid for paper alone by the American Bible, Tract, and Sunday- school societies — $67,000 by the Tract Society — an amount exceeding one-half the amount paid in the whole country in 1810. Probably a single private publishing house pay as much as all these societies together — possibly as much as all publishers in 1810. As late as 1825, publishers of religious books often resorted to subscriptions to secure them selves from loss. Such works as are now abun- dant, at the lowest prices, could hardly be procured at bookstores ; and bookstores were few in number, and of doubtful success. An examination of the files of the New Tork Ob- server shows that the whole number of reli- gious books noticed in any way in its columns in 1826, was seventeen. For months together, there was no advertisement of a religious book. Scott's Commentary was offered for $24. In 1835, the " new publication " list had twenty- four new books by the trade. At this period commenced the vigorous prosecution of the " volume circulation " by the American Tract Society, and other institutions were stimulated to effort, or brought into being. The issues of the book-trade rapidly increased, and, in 1841, the Observer's " new publication " list noticed one hundred and twentyfive religious works by the trade — exclusive of all by pub- lishing societies — or fiue times as many as in BRAHMINS. 185 1835. In 1841, colportage, or the systematic circulation of good books, especially among the destitute, commenced, and it has been con- stantly increasing since. Other institutions have greatly extended their eflbrts for the dis- tribution of good books. But the book-trade has also stretched forward its successful enter- prises simultaneously ; and one hundred and sixty-eight religious books issued by the trade, are noticed in the Observer of 1848, or an ad- vance of seven hundred per cent, on the issues of 1835. Publishers now issue editions of 3,000 or 5,000 copies of such books, as in 1826, they would have regarded it hazardous to pub- lish, except by subscription. The bookselling business was never so safe, lucrative, and pros- perous as now. Several extensive houses are engaged exclusively in the publication of reli- gious books ; and it is probable that one of them issues more practical religious works an- nually, than' were sold by the whole corps of booksellers in the United States twenty-five years ago. Thus showing that the production and circulation of cheap religious books by benevolent societies, while it may deprive the trade of a certain class of books, far more than compensates for this loss by the taste which it creates for solid and religious reading. The foregoing statements respecting the operations of benevolent institutions, including the Christian press, show that they are the right arm of the missionary enterprise, in all lauds. The domestic missionary who wisely avails himself of the aid he may derive from Sabbath-school publications, tracts, books and periodicals, either as a means of edification and salvation for the people of his charge, or as an instrumentality for extending his influence be- yond the boundaries of his congregation, may multiply his power for good indefinitely. And, by calling in the help of a faithful colporteur, to penetrate the ' regions beyond,' and convey the knowledge of Christ to the destitute and erring whom he may not personally reach, the leaven of the Gospel may be made to pervade the masses of the people, and a demand be crea- ted for pulpit ministrations, such as might not exist in long years, were these auxiliary in- fluences neglected or overlooked. And so of the Foreign Missionary. If succeeding gener- ations of missionaries are to profit by the ex- perience of their predecessors, the results of that experience must be committed to the press. If the schools on heathen ground are to be made the source of abiding good, there must be a Christian literature provided for the generations of readers thus trained. If the G os- pel is to be proclaimed beyond the restricted precincts of the several missions, and any considerable portion of the existing generation of heathen are to have the word of life, it must be conveyed to them by the printed page. If the mountains of superstition and error and isrnorance are to be lifted ofl' from the heathen mind, the lever of the press must be applied. If the advances made from year to year in the acquisition of languages and in the adaptation of truth to simple minds, are to be perpetuated, the missionaries must employ their pens, and the printing-press must embody and multiply the results of missionary toil. The stupendous undertaking of printing a Oiristian literaturefor the world must be prosecuted with steady zeal and enlarged liberality. The improvements constantly making in all that relates to the printing art must be potent to the missionary cause ; and the religious literature of standard worth in the English language must be made the heritage of the reading world. The sys- tems of aggressive Christian effort nuw asso- ciated with the press in America, should be- come a part of the machinery of missions uni- versally ; so that native piety may find active employment, and the unevangelized hordes be approached with adapted agencies for their elevation and salvation. Way-side, fire-side preaching, oral and printed, should attend and complement the more formal proclamations of divine truth, until the time comes when none need say to his brother, " know the Lord, for all shall know him from the least even unto the greatest." BOODALOOR : A station of the Gospel Propagation Society in India. BOOTAN : A village in the district of Maulmain in. Bnrmah — also, a district in Koordistan. BOEABOEA : One of the Society Islands and a station of the London Missionary So- ciety. _ BOENEO : See Indian Archipelago. BOSJESMANS : The same as Biishmeii, which see. BEAHMA : The supreme god of the Hindoos. In Hindustani, the word is a neuter noun, derived by grammarians from the verb brih to grow, and the suffix man, and thus means that which grows, or the Supreme Being regarded under the aspect of development, and revealed by the creation of worlds. The word, however, is used in a secondary sense, also, and means the Supreme Absolute Spirit, not regarded as a creative force, but shut up in himself without external manifestations of any kind. BEAHMINS : The name employed to designate that body or order of priests, who have always been the sole guardians, precep tors and ministers of the Hindoo religion. This order is of extreme antiquity, and they and their followers are universally acknowl- edged as a tribe sprung from the Caucasian variety of the human species. Their sacred books or vedas represent them as invading In- dia from the north-west, through Afghanistan and the Punjaub, at a very early period, when they seem to have made more considerable pro- gress in literature, philosophy, mathematics and medicine, than their cotemporaries in other regions of the world. 186 BRAIIJIIXISII. BEAHMINISM : The religion of the Brdi- niins, which is the prevailing religion of Hin- cloostan, and professed by about "150,000,000 of people, is one of the grossest impositions ever made upon an, ignorant and degraded people, by a cori'upt and avaricious priesthood, bear- ing, in many particulars, a striking resem- blance to Popery. Ideas of God. — The Hindoos, in general, en- tertain vague, incongruous, and unworthy no- tions of the Deity. Some call him the invisi- ble and ever blessed ; others ascribe to him a form ; others suppose he exists like an incon eeivably small atom ; sometimes he is repre- sented as male, and at other times, as female sometimes both male and female, producing a world by conjugal union ; sometimes the ele- ments assume his placej and at other times he is a deified hero. According to the Hindoo theology, Brahme, the great Being, is the supreme, eternal, uncreated Being. Bramha, the first created being, by whom he made and governs the world, is the prince of good spir- its. — Veeshnu, or Vishnoo, is the great pre- server of men. He is said to have appeared on earth nine times, in so many incarnations. Seeva, or Siva, is the destroyer. This three- fold divinity, armed with almighty power, has under him no less than 333,000,000 of inferior deities. These are represented in innumerable forms, by dumb idols of wood and stone. The Hindoos also worship men, cows, monkeys, ti- gers, serpents, trees, stones, rivers, and even Satan Tiimself. Character of their gods. — The Hindoo gods are represented as practising without restraint every species of wickedness that can be im- agined ; and their sacred books are filled with details of these disgusting abominations, too polluting to be recited. In obscenity, nothing can be compared with one of these sacred books, called Bhagawata. Tet it is the de- light of the Hindoos, and the first book they put in the hands of their children ; as if they deliberately intended to form them to dissolute habits. The most frightful images are made as representations of their gods. Doorga, the wife of Siva or Seeva, the Destroyer, is repre- sented with a frowning countenance and naked breast. Her right foot treads on a lion. She has four hands, in one of which she holds an infant by the hair of the head, while its body is piercted through with a trident she holds in the second hand. The other two hands are filled with weapons of destruction ; and she is ornamented with a necklace of human skulls. Siva, also, is represented in a most terrific form, ornamented with serpents, covered with the ashes of a funeral pile, alighting in cemeter- ies, and accompanied by a train of ghosts and goblins. In this character, human victims, or the blood of beasts, is necessary to appease their wrath. Character of their Priesthood. — The Brah- mins are the legal priests of Hindoostan ; and from them it is called Brahminism. They ex- alt themselves above every other class of their countrymen. They are arrogant, subtle, ava- ricious, deceitful, selfish, and vicious. They make great pretensions to learning a,nd sanc- tity ; while they are really ignorant and ex- ceedingly dissolute and destitute of principle. Hindooism, from the foundation to the top- stone, is one cold system of selfishness. Its ultimate object is the aggrandizement of the priesthood ; and to accomplish this, they keep the people in darkness and ignorance. Their sacred books are kept in a language unknown and forbidden to the people, and can be ex- plained only by the Brahmins. All learning is monopolized by them ; and the people are discouraged from any attempts to elevate their intellectual condition. In their domestic and social capacity, nothing can be done without a Brahmin ; and a Brahmin cannot work with- out a fee or a feast. All offerings made to the gods, go to these avaricious priests ; and the giving of presents and distribution of money to Brahmins is the most effectual way of gain- ing the favor of the gods, and obtaining the pardon of sin. TTie Brahmin is revered as a god, and addressed and worshiped as a god. The people fall down before him, and lick the very dust of his feet. They believe that the Brahmin can, by his enchantments and right- eousness, control both the gods and men ; and this gives him a wonderful preeminence. In all things he domineers over the multitude; works on their fears ; turns every superstition to his own account ; and takes every advan- tage of their ignorance, superstition, and cre- dulity, to enrich himself and increase his power. The pride and dissimulation, and the intrigue and dishonesty of a Brahmin, are proverbial. Religious Mendicants. — Monkery is a very necessary appendage to every system of priest- craft ; and, of course, might be expected to find a place in Brahminism. The monks of Brahminism, like those of Popery, are divided into numerous classes ; and several of the highest of these classes are only open to the Brahmins. Some persons become ascetics by inheritance, and in consequence, enjoy certain revenues ; others become such from necessity ; others, on account of their pretended sanctity and abstraction from the world ; others, on account of a vow, devote themselves to what they call a religious life. Most of them pre- tend to be religious teachers. The Hindoos entertain the idea that religion is sonje wild vagary, attainable only by priests and devo- tees, but not practicable for people in common life. These Religious Orders are beggars by profession ; and it is esteemed meritorious to give to them. They are a great scourge to the country, contributing greatly not only to im- poverish it, but also to corrupt and debase the morals of the people. These idle and pretend- ed devotees assemble sometimes in armies o1' BEAHMINISM. 187 ten or twelve thousand, and, under pretense of making pilgrimages to certain temples, lay whole countries under contribution. They are generally robust and stout. They wear no clothes, and commit all manner of excesses. These men inflict voluntary penances upon themselves, of an extraordinary character. They sometimes hold up one ai-m, in a fixed position, till it becomes stiff, and remains in that situation during the rest of their lives. Some clench their fists very hard, and keep them so till their nails grow into their palms, and appear through the back of their hands. Others turn their faces over their shoulders, and _ keep them so, till they fix their heads looking backwards. By such means they in- crease their celebrity, and become objects of greater veneration. The supposed Iwliness of these men seems to sanctify, iu the minds of the people, all their licentiousness and abomi- nations. Character of their Worship. — From what wo have seen of the character of their gods, it may be readily perceived what kind of wor- s'dp would be supposed to be pleasing to them. The most unbridled and disgusting licentious- ness is made a part of the public worship of these false gods ; and every temple has a com- pany of dancing girls, who are married to the fads, and are kept for purposes of impurity, n the presence of some of the most celebrated idols, among which is Juggernaut, all distinc- tions of sex and caste are abolished, so that men may gratify their evil desires with impu- jjty. Hindoo notiorns of sin. — The notions of sin, inculcated in the Hindoo sacred books, like pvery other part of the system, are calculated w exalt the priesthood. Even the Brahmins, their religious teachers, show the most stupid deficiency in distinguishing between good and e\-il. They call good evil, and evil good ; light darkness, and darkness light. Lying is good, if it result in immediate benefit ; to speak the truth is evil, if it terminate in im- mediate loss. Meats and drinks, divers wash- ings and corporeal inflictions, make up their righteousness, while sin is really but a trans- gression of the laws of caste. To lie, steal, cheat, deceive, commit adultery, and wallow like swine in moral turpitude, is too trifling a thing to be named ; it is only what their gods did before them. But to eat with a man of another caste, however respectable he may be, or to drink out of the same cup, is a sin only pardonable by a large sum of money. He who breaks his word with a Brahmin, or occasions him any detriment, directly or indirectly, in his temporal concerns, will, according to the Hindoo scriptures, be condemned, in his second birth, to become a devil. He will not be per- mitted to dwell on the earth or live in the air ; but will be obliged to make his abode in a thick forest, among the branches of a bushy tree, where he sha,ll never cease to groan by night and day, cursing his unhappy lot, and deprived of all food but toddy, mixed with the slaver of a dog, which he shall drink out of the skull of a death's head. It is in this way that ofiences, imaginary or of small account, are menaced with endless punishment ; while adulterers, perjurers, robbers, and other real ottenders, are absolved by the Brahmins of their actual crimes, for, selfish objects, and as- sured of a recompense after death. Hindoo ideas of Atonement. — The fact that all false systems of religion contain devices of atonement for sin, is a strong testimony that an atonement is necessary ; while the Gospel of Jesus Christ alone reveals the only true and rational method of reconciliation between of- fending man and offended Deity. But, the blind heathen, conscious of his guilt, resorts to vain and foplish e.xpedieuts for taking away sin. Brahminism abounds in atonements. Holy bathing, reading the shastras, pilgrimage, fasting, giving to the Brahmins, feeding devo- tees or religious beggars, building temples, with the endless routine of sacrifices, penances, and religious austerities, which make up a very im- portant part of Hindooism, constitute their atonements for sin. Some -of these penances are very expensive, and most of them attended with great bodily mortifications ; while others are disgusting, filthy, and degrading. Among these are, drinking the water in which a Brah- min has washed his foot, and taking atonement pills, which are composed of the milks, cm-ds, clarified butter, and excrement of a cow. A man in Bombay had been performing a penance of a very painful character for sixteen years. He sat in a miserable shed, holding on his left hand a vessel of about ten pounds weight, which contains the sacred shrub. His whole arm was withered, and the finger nails had shot out like ram's horns, five or six inches in length. Another man sat in the open air, for three months, during the coldest part of the year, almost naked ; confining himself to a spot about eight feet in diameter. Passing a rod of iron through the tongue ; hanging suspended by the legs from a tree, over a slow burning fire, inhaling the smoke and sparks ; leaping on a plank set full of sharpened plates of iron; lying on a bed made of a plank set with iron spikes ; looking at the meridian sun for whole days in succession ; falling on the face, mark- ing the place of the head, rising and falling again from the marks, and repeating this, till a specified distance has been measured ; swing- ing through the air, suspended from a hook in- serted in the back ; and other penances, too numerous and too foolish to be mentioned, are resorted to as expedients for taking away sin, and accumulating righteousness. And their sacred books prescribe even the most indecent crimes, as atonements for sin. Fate— Accountability.— The Hindoos are the most cold-blooded fatalists in the world. Every occurrence in life is, according to then- notions, 188 BRAHMINISM. the result of dire necessity. If they are pros- perous, it is fate. If they are in distress, it is fate. To lie, cheat, or steal, is/a(e. To be idle, dissipated, poor, and imprisoned, is fate. The poor sufferer apparently feels no remorse that his own sin has brought misery on him. He only curses his hard fate. When the cri- minal is detected and condemned, he seems never to regard himself as suffering the just penalty of the law : it is all fate. The Hindoo writiugs teach, that it is the Great Spirit which is difiiised through every form of ani- mated matter ; that actions of every kind are his. By this doctrine, all accountability is de- stroyed, and liability to punishment rendered preposterous. Notions of Futurity. — The Hindoo scriptures teach that the soul must pass, in certain circumstances, into eight million four hundred thousand different animal bodies, after it leaves the human. Yet, the people are wholly in the darii on the subject of futurity. They say they can know nothing about it. Beyond the present life, all is impenetrable darkness to the Hindoos. Different Ages of the World. — The Hindoos hold that there are four ages of the world, the &st three of which are already past. The first was the golden age, of 1,728,000 years duration ; the second, the silver age of 1,296,000 years ; the third, the brazen age, of 864,000 years ; and the fourth, which is the present, the iron age, of 432,000 years. They believe that in the first age, men were as tall as trees, and lived many thousand years : but as every age became worse and worse, the people dimin- ished in size, and their lives were shortened ; that even the Brahmins themselves, the gods of the people, have lost their holiness, and are now filled with covetousness and many vices. Thus they account for the prevailing vice and degradation, instead of tracing it to the depra^ vity of their own hearts. Caste. — There is no part of the Hindoo sys- tem, which exerts such despotic sway, and so effectually prevents all improvement, as caste. They were originally divided into four castes or tribes, viz., the Brahmiiis, the Ksliatriyas or Ketras, the Vaisyas or Bices, and the Sudres or Sooders, each of which is again subdivided into a large number of branches. Every indivi- dual remains invariably in the caste in which he was born, practices its duties, and is debar- red from ever aspiring to a higher, whatever may be his merit or his genius. The members of each tribe must adhere invariably to the profession of their ancestors, and continue from generation to generation, to pursue one uni- form walk of life. In consequence of this un- natural distinction of caste, all motives to ex- ertion, inquiry, or improvement, are completely extinguished among the Hindoos ; for the most honorable actions, the most beneficial discov- eries, the most virtuous conduct, secure no re- spect or pdvantage to a person of inferior caste. None of the high castes will eat with any of the low castes. The fourth and most numerous castes are the Sudres or Sooders. Their business is servile labor ; and whenever the original spirit of the institution has not been infringed on, their degradation is inhu- man. They are compelled to work for the Brahmins, being considered as created solely for their use. They are not allowed to collect property because such a spectacle would give pain to the Brahmins. To them, the Vedas, or sacred books, must never be read. There is also a race of the most degraded and uni- versally insulted outcasts, called Parayas. In many places, their very approach is sufficient to pollute a whole neighborhood. They must not enter a street where the Brahmins live. When they transgress, the higher classes will not assault them, for it is pollution even to touch them with a long pole ; but through the medium of others, they often beat them at pleasure, and sometimes put them to death, without dispute or inquiry. Tor every species of labor, there is a distinct class of men. This division of labor is regulated according to caste. The divisions of the former, however, are so much more extensive than the nominal grades of the latter, that difierent individuals of the same caste are engaged in different oc- cupations. Still, whatever be a man's capaci- ties, he can never rise above the calling of his father. He will perform only that kind of labor to which his own subdivision of caste are accustomed. One man of low caste may be a dobee or washerman, and another of the same caste, a coolie or carrier of burdens, and a third, a palanquin bearer. But a dobee would scorn to act as a coolie. Even the foot pedlar will not carry his own pack of goods ; nor will the Hindoo servant, who provides for his master's table, bring from the market a piece of meat, or a basket of vegetables. He must employ a coolie. The coolie in his turn can do nothing that does not come within the sphere of his business. The fii-st missionaries in Southern India undertook to accommodate Christianity to the prevailing prejudices of the people. The Rev. HoUis Read, who has tra- veled extensively among the Hindoos, regards caste as one of the most exceptionable features of Hindooism ; and the Bishop of Calcutta has become so well convinced of its utter incon- sistency with Christianity, that he has address- ed two charges to the missionaries of the Church of England, requiring them no longer to tolerate the distinction of caste in the nar five churches. " The main barrier to all per- manent improvement," says he, " is the heathen usages of caste, in the Christian churches." He says, " the different castes sat on different mats, on different sides of the church, to which they entered by different doors. They ap- proached the Lord's table at different times, and had once different cups, or managed to get the catechists to change the cup, before the BRAHMINISM. 189 lower castea began to communicate; they would allow no persons at baptism, of an in- ferior caste ; and they had separate divisions in the burial grounds." The usages of caste enter so deeply into the social constitution of the Hindoos, that every thing is affected by it. It creates great inconvenience, and constitutes the greatest barrier against improvement either of the social or religious condition of the peo- ple. There can be nothing more at variance with the spirit of the Gospel than the spirit of caste. Rev. Dr. Allen, late missionary at Bombay, makes the following statements respecting the bearing of Caste upon the missionary work : " The missionaries of the American Board, in India and Ceylon, have always required a renunciation of Caste, just as much as of idol- atry, and other parts of heathenism, of all con- verts before they were baptised. No arrange- ments, nor accommodations, nor changes have ever been made in the seats, or in the sitting in the churches, or in the administration of the ordinances on account of the Caste. Caste was in no respect recognized. All were treated as of one class, as much as Christians in this country are so treated. " It would naturally he expected that such a public renunciation of Caste, and such sub- sequent treatment of it, would be sufficient to extinguish it in the church. But experience has shown that it was not sufficient. Caste has been found to be surprisingly insidious in its influence ; and to be capable of assuming a.lmost any complexion and shape, suited to the native character and their circumstances. In some places, as in the north part of Ceylod, Caste, though religious in its origin, yet retains now but little of its religious character. It has now become chiefly a social distinction, and is valued as conferring personal and fam- ily respectability. In proportion as it loses its religious character, it becomes easy for those who have abandoned it to be restored to their former state. This state of feeling in the com- munity presents a constant motive for those native Christians who were originally of high Caste, to abstain from those things in their habits, and from those persons in their social intercourse, which affect their personal or fam- ily respectability. In such circumstances. Caste becomes analogous to the civil distinc- tions of society, and resembles those antipa- thies and aversions which exist between differ- ent classes and races of people. " The lower castes are also very unclean in their food, drink, &c. In some districts where I have been, their food consisted chiefly of cattle and other creatures, that died of them- selves in the adjacent cities and villages. They appeared almost to live on carrion, and their roads and houses are exceedingly offensive, dis- gusting and filthy. Now the Brahmins never eat any kind of meat ; and the Hindoos of all respectable castes hold the eating of beef In the greatest abhorrence. With what feelings, then, must all such castes regard the Pariars'or Parayas and Mahars ; and what must be their involuntary shrinking from contact, or close personal intimacy with them ? The Brahmins and other high castes naturally and necessarily feel far more aversion to associate intimately with Mahars and Pariars, and to have personal contact with them, than the most refined and delicate people in this country would feel in associating intimately with the most degraded and filthy. " It should not appear strange, then, in view of these things, if persons recently converted from the darkness and ignorance of heathen- ism, should yield to the influeace and motives which continually surround them, and exhibit the feelings, and perform, or refuse to perform the actions which are ascribed to Caste ; espe- cially when they know what respect was for- merly shown to such feelings and actions by some of the best men, (as Schwartz, and his fellow-laborers,) ever engaged in the mission- ary cause ; and know also, how such feelings and actions are still regarded in some native churches, and by some missionaries. Feelings of this character are sometimes developed un- expectedly and in much strength, where none were supposed to exist. These facts show the importance of continually watching such a hydra^headed monster as Caste. Various ways and means have been tried to develop these feelings, and so to extinguish, as far as possible, the spirit in which they originate. " The Madras Missionary Conference ' re- commend a love feast, at which all the mem- bers of the church, including the pastor and teachers, shall partake of a simple and suitable repast.' This custom has been observed in the missions of the American Board, and with very good effect. "When the spirit of Caste at these meetings, or on any other occasions, has appeared, it has been made the subject of admonition, or suspension, or exclusion from the church, according to the nature of the offence. " During a residence of more than a quarter of a century in India, I had opportunities of seeing missionary operations and mission churches in Bengal, in Madras, in Ceylon, and in Bombay ; and I can fully concur in the sen- timent of the Madras Missionary Conference, that ' Caste is one of the greatest obstacles to the progress of the Gospel in India. It meets and thwarts the missionary, not only in bear- ing the unsearchable riches of Christ to the unconverted Hindoos, but also in building up the native church in faith and love ; and to tolerate it in any form, is to oppose the law of Christ.' And again, in a communication of a subsequent date, they say, ' We have long regarded Caste as a most formidable opponent to genuine Christianity, and a deadlier enemy, in some respects, to the souls of this people, than even idolatry. We are called to unecas- 190 BRAHMINISM. ing effort to extingtiisli its spirit and power in native Christians wlio have openly renounced it.' ' Caste is a deadlier enemy to the souls of the Hindoos than idolatry,' on account of its assuming, as experience shows, almost any complexion — adapting itself to circumstances and exigencies, and then again assuming its positive character. In the system of Hindoo- ism, it is decidedly religious in its nature— and yet, in connection with the Danish and Ger- man missions, it became so far divested of its religious character that it was admitted into the church, and there tolerated for a long time, as containing only civil and social distinctions not inconsistent with the principle and spirit of Clu'istianity. After it had gained admis- sion into the native Christian community, it again assumed a religious character, and those of high Caste became as much attached to it, and as reluctant to abandon its usages, as the heathen around them. And considering how little was known of the nature of this peculiar feature of Hindooism, when the first mission- aries of the Board went to India and Ceylon, and the state of the Protestant churches in India, in connection with the high character and great veneration of Schwartz and his fel- low-laborers, who formed these churches and presided over them, there is cause for gratitude and thankfulness, that Caste has never been knowingly admitted into any of our mission churches ; has never been recognized by any arrangements to favor it ; and when its spirit has been manifested in any manner which has called for the consideration of the missionaries and their churches, discipline has been admin- istered in the way of admonition, suspension, and excommunication, according to the nature of the offence. Thus, while in looking back we see reason to thank God, the present state of this cause is such, that in looking forward we see reason to take courage." Superstitions. — Like the votaries of all false religions, the Plindoos are very superstitious. And, in proportion to their ignorance and de- gradation, their absurd superstitions have do- minion over them. There is scarce an occur- rence in life, which, to the superstitious Hindoo, is not ominous of good or evil ; and scarcely an hour of the day when he is not bound to the performance of some ceremony, or not made a slave to some superstition. He leaves his house in the morning ; but if he sees a bird fly in a wrong direction, or meets an animal of ill-omen, or first sees a person of a certain caste, or any object betokening ill, he must re- turn, and relinquish his enterprise, and perhaps may not go out of his house again that day. These superstitions are of endless variety ; and only a few will bo specified here. The cholera is regarded as a malignant goddess, whom they worship, in order to deprecate her anger. They believe that this goddess walks to and fro, up aud down the earth, afflicting the people in one place, and then moving off to another. where she commences the same work without mercy or compassion. In order to propitiate this malignant demon, they make offerings of rice, ghee, flowers, fruits, and the like, and sa- crifice to her sheep, goats, buffaloes, and fowls. Consistently with their belief, they cannot take medicine for the cholera. The only way is to exorcise the demon. This, they pretend, may be done by the numtra, which is the grand charm of the Brahmins. This beai'S a very prominent place in the Hindoo religion. It is a mystic verse or incantation, the repetition of which is declared to be attended with the most wonderful effects. None but Brahmins and the higher order of Hindoos, are allowed to repeat it. The lower castes are forbidden to repeat or even hear it, on pain of eternal tor- ment. All things are subservient to the num- tra. The gods themselves cannot resist it. It is the essence of the Vedas, or sacred books ; it is the united power of Bramha, Vishnoo, and Siva. By its magic power, it confers all sanctity ; pardons all sin ; secures all good, temporal and spiritual, and procures everlast- ing blessedness in the world to come. It pos- sesses the wonderful charm of interchanging good for evil, truth for falsehood, light for darkness, and of confirming such perversions by the most holy sanctions. There is nothing so difficult; so silly, or so absurd, that it may not be achieved by this extraordinary numtra. As might be expected, it is employed very ex- tensively for removing pains, for the curing of diseases, the bite of venomous snakes, &c., &c. But the cholera is by no means the only disease which is suppossd to be the effect of an evil spirit ; or of some animal or other object in the part affected. Every disease is represent- ed as possessed of a bodily form. A liver complaint is said to be caused by a crab, who is eating the liver ; a cough, by a large cater- pillar in the throat ; the tooth-ache, from the gnawings of a little worm in the decayed tooth. The Hindoos believe that if they look at the moon on a certain day, they shall be instantly struck dead. Nothing will induce a man to raise his eyes to the moon on that day. The Hindoo sacred books abound with di- rections about such frivolous things as cleaning the teeth, bathing and washing, cooking and eating, washing or drying clothes, &c., there beuig some lucky or unlucky onien connected with the particular manner in which every thing is done. Of these, only a very few spe- cimens can be given. Eating with the face to the east, ensures long life; with it to the south, celebrity ; to the west; wealth ; to the north, pecuniary embarrassment. If, before eating, they do not make a circular mark, with water, around where they set the dish, it is said the demons will devoiu- the food. On the first day of the moon, he who eats a pumpkin be- comes indigent. Ignorance follows eating the cocoa-nut on the eighth. It is said to be sinful to eat beans on the eleventh; and so on, throuoh BRAHMINISM. 191 the -whole month. He who puts on new apparel on Sunday, becomes poor ; on Monday, ia afflicted with boils ; on Tuesday, is subject to much trouble ; on Wednesday, will have means of purchasing new clothes ; on Thursday, will become learned and happy ; on Saturday, will be involved iu trouble and disputes. He who shaves on Sunday, becomes miserable ; on Monday, happy ; on Tuesday, hastens his own death ; on Wednesday, accumulates wealth ; on Thursday, becomes dishonorable ; on Fri- day, childless ; on Saturday, brings on his head every misfortune. And, so on, to every action of life. To sneeze, when one is about to sit down, or lie down, or eat, or is dressing, or be- stowing gifts, is highly inauspicious. These are but a few, among a vast multitude of such ridiculous notions, by which the minds of the people are held in bondage. Their notions of ceremonial impurity are also equally burden- some and inconvenient. The Hindoos believe that a person about to be executed, imparts an extraordinary sanctity to every thing he touches. For this reason, he throws flowers, fruits, and spices, to the crowd about the gibbet, who eagerly catch them, and preserve them as a sort of charm. In one in- stance, they actually worshiped the dead car- cass of a man who had been executed, while hanging on the gibbet, in consequence of a re- port that miraculous cures ha.d been experienc- ed by touching his body. Amulets are almost universally worn by the Hindoos, for prevent- ing or curing diseases and the bite of serpents. The Hindoos suffer exceedingly, on account of their superstitions in reference to sickness and disease. Many a wretched creature spends all his living for the prescriptions of some quack, or drags out a miserable existence, and dies in the midst of the charms and the enchantments of the Brahmin. The number of the blind, lame, maimed, leprous, and diseased in India, is astonishingly great ; and no doubt one prin- cipal reason for this is the bad treatment, or the want of good treatment, in the original complaint. They have a singular superstition respecting the eclipse of the sun. They sup- pose that a kind of corporeal divinity, very malignant and mischievous, very black, foul, and impure, seizes on the sun, blackens it as with ink, and thus infects and obscures it. The sun, which they suppose to be a similar divinity, but of a benevolent and perfect order, is put into extreme pain and terrible anguish, at thus seeing himself seized and tortured by the monster ; and in order to relieve him of this distress, they make use of many prayers and foolish ceremonies. There is no slavery so grievous as the slavery of superstition ; and none which so much exposes an ignorant peo- ple to the cupidity of an avaricious priesthood. Cruelties of Brahminum. — A superstitious religion is invariably a religion of cruelty. Such, then, we may expect Hindooism to be. And, in no respect is this cruelty more conspi- cuous than in the treatment of females ; but especially widows and female children. The Suttee, or burning of widows on the funeral piles of their husbands, arose from their op- pressive customs in relation to widows. Reli- gion and custom have rendered widowhood so wretched and disgraceful, that the Hindoo wife, on the demise of her husband, chooses death rather than so miserable a life. The widow is stripped of her ornaments, compelled to wear white clothing, have her head shaven, and submit to many other tokens of degrada- tion. She is excluded from all ceremonies of joy ; forbidden to marry, and shut out from re- spectable society. This is no doubt the cause of the burning of widows, and burying them alive with their deceased husbands. The for mer of these practices, has, however, been abolished by the British government. When the aged become burdensome, they are often dragged to the borders of some sacred river, by their own children, their mouths filled with mud, and thus abandoned to die. There is no benevolence, no disinterestedness, no mercy, in the Hindoo character. In times of prevailing disease, this is perspicuously manifest. People are left to expire unattended, and their bodies to consume in their own houses. Women, in performance of some vow, oast theh- children, in cold blood, into the sacred rivers, and coolly look on, and see them devoured by the sharks. And, in some sections of the country, a large portion of the female children are murdered by their parents as soon as they are born. Surely, the Hindoos are " Without natural affection." The various tortures resorted to for penance, also indicate the cruelty of Hindooism. Holy Days. — These are among the most fruitful sources of poverty, covetousness, and depravity, among the Hindoos. Of these, they have no less than one hundred and forty-five ; ten of which occur monthly, and twenty-five are anniversaries. When it is considered that, on these days, they abandon all their employ- ments, and give themselves up to all manner of licentiousness, the effect upon society may readily be imagined. We see the demoraliz- ing effects of two or three of these holy-days in a year, in our own country ; what then may we suppose them to be, where they embrace nearly one half the days of the year, on which all manner of restraint is thrown off. A descrip- tion of the ceremonies of these holy-days would be both tedious and disgusting. The festival of the dewalee is perhaps the worst of the whole. It continues three days, during which, gambling revelry, debauchery, lying, roguery, and dissipation of every description, are not only tolerated, but esteemed praiseworthy and religious acts. And to these may be added a multitude of private observances, on account of births, marriages, deaths, &c. From the first existence of the child, to his death, there is probably not a month, perhaps not a week, iu which it is not required that some ceremony 192 BRAHMINISM. be performed, when a Brahmin must be called, and presents given ; and when he is dead, he must be feasted through a, Brahmin's mouth, and offerings must be made for his benefit through a Brahmin's hand. Holy Places. — Another fruitful source of poverty and vice among the people, and of ag- grandizement on the part of the Brahmins, is the multitude of Holy Places, celebrated for their sanctity, to which pilgrimages are made, as means of accumulating merit. To an igno- rant and self-righteous people, the idea of pil- grimage is extremely fascinating, and the subtle priest IS not slow to turn this principle of hu^ man nature to his own account. Various ex- pedients are resorted to by the Brahmins, to keep up the reputation of these Holy Places. The principal ones are Benares, Jugunath, and Eameshwur ; but there are a great number of other places which are held in high estimation ; and to all of them, crowds of pilgrims are con- tinually flocking : persons who have left their homes, and sacrificed their all, with the vain expectation of laying up a stock of merit, by visiting a sacred place. They are soon, by the wiles of old pilgrims and covetous Brahmins, stripped of every thing, and plunged into all manner of excesses. Those who have read the disgusting accounts of pilgrimages to Jugu- nath, " of the roads for fifty miles being marked by the skulls of those who have perished on the way ; " and of the thousands who are left to die on the banks of the Ganges ; and those who will take the pains to calculate what must be the probable consequences of a com- pany of people, both poor and unprincipled, leaving their houses for nearly a year, travel- ing across the country, and visiting the cen- tral places of iniquity in India, may form some idea of the effects of these pilgrimages. Degradation of Females. — There is no fea- ture of Brahminism more revolting to the be- nevolent heart, and the ingenuous mind, than the condition of Hindoo females. The genius of Hindooism saps in the heart of man the rery foundation of all those tender and noble affections of his soul, which capacitate him to appreciate and admire those excellencies which are peculiar to the other sex. Hindooism must make its votaries selfish, distrustful, and brutish. Love, tenderness, sympathy, weakness, modesty and dependence, which we accord to the female as her appropriate virtues, are ridiculed, if not despised, by the Hindoo. He marries, or rather buys a wife, as he would a beast of burden, and afterwards regards her in very much the same light. All those civilities and attentions which females receive in a Christian country are unknown in India. Were a Hindoo to in- quire after the health of his neighbor's wife or daughter, the husband and father would deem himself insulted. A Hindoo is never seen to treat his wife with familiarity or fond- ness. All this is in accordance with the prin- ciples of the Hindoo scriptures. According to them, " the supreme duty of the wife is to obey the husband. Let the wife, who wishes to per- form sacred ablution, wash the feet of her lord, and drink the water ; for the husband is to a wife greater than Shunura or Vishnoo. Her husband is her god and gooroo, (teacher,) and religion and its services ; wherefore, aban- doning every thing else, she ought chiefly to worship her husband." This implicit obedience of the wife extends to any thing which the husband may choose to command. His will and authority are paramount to any law, hu- man or divine. If he command his wife to lie, steal, or commit adultery, she must obey. Such is the language of the Hindoo scriptures. To become the father of a son is regarded the greatest honor and happiness ; but the birth of a daughter is a calamity. Thus the girl, from her infancy, is made to feel her inferiority. She is regarded as incapable of mental im- provement, and is doomed to a servile life. Ignorant and indolent, she becomes a wife, without any choice of her own, and often sadly against her wishes. If she be of high birth she is little more than the prisoner of her hus- band. He immures her within the walls of a gloomy mansion, and watches over her with a jealous eye. But if of low caste, she becomes the wife and the drudge at the same time ; carrying burdens, laboring in the field, bring- ing water, gathering cow-dung, kneading into cakes, and drying it for fuel, are her appro- priate departments of labor. Nearly every occupation which nature points out as the sphere of the hardier sex, is, in this country, assigned to the woman ; while her appropriate labors are performed by men. Her washing is done by the washerman ; her sewing, by the tailor ; her milk and butter, and all articles of food, which require but little cookery, are pur- chased in the bazar. She has no furniture to clean, no floors to sweep or scrub. A coat of cow dung and water, once a week, settles that long account, which the industrious housewife in this country, has with her floors. Indolence and dirt at home, and drudgery and disgrace abroad, seem the only alternatives of Hindoo women. Such is the condition of females in Hindoostan ; and for this there is no remedy but Christianity. Wherever this has prevailed, the rights of women have been acknowledged, and their character and condition elevated. Character of the People. — After what has been already said, little need be added under this head. It can hardly be expected that the character of any people will be better than that of their gods, their priests, and their moth- ers. And when to these sources of corruption, are added the demoralizing influence of igno- rance, superstition, the doctrine oi fate, and heathen festivals and pilgrimages, we are pro- pared to contemplate a people reduced to the lowest state of moral degradation. To pro- vide for the daily wants of the body, seems to absorb the whole soul of the Hindoo. His BKAHMINISM. 193 immortal mind is permitted to remain envelop- ed in all its ignorance, without making any proper efforts for its illumination. The great mass of the people are content to do as their fathers did, and to worship what their fathers worshiped, and whether that object he a god or a devil, it matters not, provided it be the cus- tom of the people to do so. Custom with them is law, to which reason and conscience must submissively bow. Moral principle and benevolent feeling seem to be entirely obliter- ated in tlie heart of the Hindoo ; and he knows no higher motive of action than selfish- ness. He will lie, cheat, steal, and commit all manner of licentiousness, whenever it will serve his turn, without the least compunction. Although exceedingly zealous in their religion, scrupulously maintaining, in their way, their daily devotions, and having temples in every village ; yet, all their holiness is ceremonial, having no respect whatever to the state of the heart, or the character of the actions. Brahminism and Fopery compared. — Thesimi- larity of Popery and Brahminism, is so strik- ing, that it is worth while to occupy a small space in drawing a comparison between the two systems ; especially as this resemblance has fallen under the eyes of the missionaries, who see them both in operation, side by side ; there being many Eoman Catholic convents and churches in India. The following comparison, somewhat abridged, was drawn upon the spot, by Eev. Mr. Kamsay, missionary in India. The Hindoos acknowledge one supreme god, with many subordinate deities, entitled to wor- ship. The Brahmins are held to be the repre- sentatives of God, possessing the keys of life and death, heaven and hell, and therefore they are worshiped by bowing down before them, and kissing their great toe. The Pope, in like manner, considers himself the vicar of Christ, and every priest is his representative. He too holds the keys of heaven and hell, and his toe has been favored with many a kiss. By the Hindoo laws, none but their priests are per- mitted to read their sacred books ; and to se- cure this end, the priests oppose education, and labor to keep the people in ignorance. The Eomish priests will not allow the people to read the Scriptures ; and to secure their own ascendancy, they strive to keep the people in ignorance. The Hindoos have a multitude of idols, which they daily worship. Some of them consider the idol as the representative of God, and others worship the thing itself, and go no "further. Besides temple deities, they have household gods, which they worship daily. The Romanists in India have also images of saints in their chapels, and in their houses, to which they bow down daily. In the streets, cresses are set up ; and in the evenings, lamps are placed at the feet of them, after the Hin- doos' mode of placing lamps before their idols. As they pass these crosses, the Romanists take ofif their hats and bow down to them, or pros- 13 trate themselves before them. The worship of images is sanctioned by the church in India, as it is also by the second council of Nice. The Hindoos have many millions of inferior deities, corresponding to which the Romanists have multitudes of angels. The Hindoos have their Gooroos to intercede for them ; and the Roman- ists have their saints, for the same purpose. The Hindoos hold that a man may obtain righteousness by his own works, and more than he needs for himself, the surplus of which he may sell. The Romanists also have their works of supererogation, which lead to the sale of indulgences. The Hindoos observe a ceremony, in which they offer up prayers for the dead, and for which they feed and fee the Brahmins ; the Romanists also fee the priests to say mass for the benefit of the souls of their de- ceased relatives. The Hindoos say prayers and count their beads, and undergo severe penances to obtain righteousness. The Romanists do the same. -They both alike have their fasts, in which they eat no meat. They both have their festivals, in honor of their saints. They both have their holy places and their pilgrimages. They both have their holy water. The Hin- doos divide their sins into two classes, inward and outward ; the Romanists, into venial and mortal. They both have their monks and her- mits, and religious mendicants, of equally de- based character. The Hindoos have their fe- males married to the gods ; and the Roman- ists have their nuns, who are formally married to Christ. Both are devoted to the same pur- pose. Both carry out their images in solemn procession, in great display. Both have their small bells, to jingle during their religious ser- vices in their temples. They both use rosaries, and carry images about their persons. Many more marks of resemblance might be named : but these are sufficient to show that both sys- tems have a common origin. The Remedy. — The Gospel of the Lord Jesus Christ is the only remedy for heathenism. This, with the power of the Holy Ghost, can raise them from the lowest depths of filth and degradation. It has done it, and it can do it again. But, when we look at the state of things in Hindoostan, we must despair of help from man, and look to the power of God, which alone is able to accomplish so great a work. The labors of the missionary alone surely cannot accomplish such a change. The power of God alone can produce it. — The Christian Brahmin ; Ramsay's Journal ; Ward's India and the. Hindoos ; Hooker's Plea for the Heathen. BRIDGETOWN : Capital of the Island of Barbadoes ; one of the gayest and hand- somest towns in the West Indies. A station of the United Brethren. BRITISH AKRA : See Akra. BRITISH GUIANA includes Bssequibo, Demerara and Borbice, or all the maritime tract between the river Corenteu, the western 194 BUDHISM. limit of Surinam, and the frontier of Spanish Guiana, at Cape Nassau, in lat. 70° 40', a space of about 300 miles, including the sinu- osities of the coast. See West Indies. BRDSA . An out-station of the American Board among the Armenians ; once the capi- tal of the Turkish empire — is famed for its silk manufactures. Population from 80,000 to 100,000, of which the Turks are by far the largest part. It is at the base of the Bythin- ian Mt. Olympus, about 60 miles south from Constantinople. _ BROWN'S TOWN : A Wesleyan sta. tion in Jamaica, W. I. BRUNSWICK : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society in Berbice. BUDHISM : The religious system, called Budhism, is exceedingly complicated, being made up of legends, superstitions, and absurdi- ties so numerous and strange that to give a condensed and intelligible view of them is al- most impossible. Volumes have been written on the subject by missionaries, distinguished travelers, and English gentlemen of learning and research, resident in India, and from this mass of materials the summary here given is derived. The work of R. Spence Hardy, member of the Royal Asiatic Society, has been found especially serviceable on account of its systematic arrangement of topics, al- though it devotes nearly 450 octavo pages to a consideration of the subject. The substantial agreement of authors in regard to the origin and character of Budhism leads to the belief that they have attained to a great degree of accuracy, and the following view, though it omits numerous details, will, it is hoped, be found to be a correct presentation of the lead- ing facts of the system. Origin of Budhism. — The founder of the sect of Budhists was Gotama Budha, born B. C. 624. At the moment of his birth, (so says the legend) he stepped upon the ground, and after looking around towards the four quarters and the four half quarters, above and below, without seeing any one in those ten direc- tions who was equal to himself, he exclaimed, " I am the most exalted in the world ; I am chief in the world ; I am the most excellent in the world ; this is my last birth ; hereafter there is to me no other existence." He had however previously existed through a vast number of ages, and exercised all the virtues which were necessary to his future office, and taking his position in the sixth of the divine worlds, the gods and brahmas, after the appro- priate period had passed, went to his dwelling and begged his appearance in this human world. Thereupon he was born, and proclaimed his own greatness as above. He then passed twenty-nine years in worldly wealth and gran- deur, and six more in mortification and pen- ance ; and then sitting down under a bo-tree, de- clared he would not rise up till he became Bud- ha, Lord of the Universe. Upon this a great number of chiefs, brahmas, and gods, made their appearance as his retinue, and then his adversary, Maraya, came with a great army to try to hinder his becoming lord of the world. Upon this, panic-struck, the gods and brahmas all fled and hid themselves. Maraya theu brought on thick darkness, bat the body of Budh was light as a thousand suns. He then attempted to strike him, and asked hira, " Who is your witness that you have done works of merit, for which you should deserve this seat ?" Then Budh exclaimed, " I have no rational witness here," and called upon the earth to proclaim his actions in the course of his en- deavors to become Budh. Upon this the earth rumbled 100,000 times, and began to turn round. Whereupon Maraya was dismayed and defeated, and acknowledging the superior- ity of Budh, fled ashamed, and all the gods and brahmas of the universe came and ministered to Budh triumphant ; thus completely extin- guishing evil, and acquiring omniscience, he became perfect Budha. The places near which he exercised his min- istry were Benares, and other parts of northern India, and he is said to have proceeded as far south as Ceylon. He died at the age of eighty, or as some say eighty-five, having previously foretold that his religion, after extending over the world, would become extinguished, and be renewed by his successor, Maitra Budha, who is now in a divine state, and after the appro- priate age will become Budha. The Budhas are beings who appear after in- tervals of time inconceivably vast. Previous to their reception of the Budhaship, they pass through countless phases of being, and in the birth in which they become Budha, they are of woman born. At their death they cease to exist. They do not continue to be Budhas, nor do they enter upon any other state of being. Doctrines of Budha. — According to the doc- trines propounded or rather ascribed to Gotama Budha, there are innumerable systems of worlds, called Sakwalas, which attain their prime, and then decay and are destroyed, at periods regularly recurring, and by agents that are as regularly recurring. Budhism teaches that there is no Creator, no being that is self- existent and eternal. All sentient beings are homogeneous. The difference between one being and another is only temporary, and re- sults from the difference in their degrees of merit. Any being whatever may be a candi- date for the Budhaship ; but it is only by the uniform pursuit of this object through innu- merable ages that it can be obtained. The power that controls the universe is kar- ma, literally action ; consisting of kusala and akusala, or merit and demerit. There is no such thing as an immaterial spirit, but at the death of any being, the aggregate of his merit and demerit is transferred to some other being, which new being is caused by the karma, of BUDHISM. 195 tlie previous being, and receives from that karma all the circumstances of its existence. Thus, if the karma be good, the circumstances are favorable, producing happiness ; but if it be bad, they are unfavorable, producing misery. The manner in which being commenced, according to Budhism, cannot now be ascer- tained. The cause of continuance of existence is ignorance, from which merit and demerit are produced, whence comes consciousness, then body and mind, and afterwards the six organs of sense. Again, from the organs of sense comes contact ; from contact desire ; from de- sire sensation ; from sensation the cleaving to existing objects ; from this cleaving, reproduc- tion ; and from reproduction disease, decay, and death. Thus, like the revolutions of a wheel, there is a regular succession of death and birth, the moral cause of which is the cleaving to existing objects, whilst the instru- mental cause is karma. It is therefore the great object of all beings who would be releas- ed from the sorrow of successive birth, to seek the destruction of the moral cause of contin- ued existence, that is to say, the cleaving to existmg objects, or evil desire. It is possible to accomplish this destruction, by attending to a prescribed course of discipline, which results in an entrance to one of the four paths, with their fruition, that lead, by different modes, to the attainment of nirwana, or annihilation. They in whom evil desire is entirely destroyed are called raJiats. The freedom from evil de- sire ensures the possession of miraculous ener- gy. At his death the rahat invariably attains nirwana, or ceases to exist. TJlc Sacred Books. — The sacred books of the Budhists are called Dharma, which means, emphatically, the truth. They contain the incidents of Gotama Budha's life, his discour- ses, and the voluminous commentaries that have been added. From the moment that Gotama obtained the state of a supreme Budha, to the time of his dissolution, an inter- val of forty-five years, in all that he uttered, to whatever order of intelligence, he had only one design, which was, to assist sentient beings in the reception of nirwana. The discourses of Budha are divided into 84,000, and include all that was spoken by him. These discourses are divided into 275,250, as to the stanzas of the original text, and into 361,550 as to the stanzas of the commentary. All the discour- ses, including those of Budha and those of the commentator, are divided into 2,547 vana- waras, resembling the sidarim into which the books of the Old Testament were divided by the Jews, being the portion read in the syna- gogue upon one Sabbath day ; and these con- tain 737,000 stanzas, and 29,368,000 letters. The system propounded by Gotama Budha, was not committed to writing either by him- self or his immediate disciples. It is asserted that his discourses were preserved in the mem- ory of his followers during the space of 450 years, after which they were reduced to writ- ing in the Island of Ceylon. The documents themselves are an evidence that a considerable period must have elapsed between the death of Budha and the compilation of the Pitakas in their present form. They contain the record of numerous events that never could possibly have happened ; they are distorted by fictions and legends which it must have taken a long time to invent and impose upon the people ; and they abound in the grave recital of mira/- culous events and supernatural interferences, that any inhabitant of earth would have known to be false ; and 400 years would be no more than a sufficient period for all these per- versions. For the establishment of the text of the Pitakas, or sacred Jaooks, it is said that three several convocations were held ; but it is im- possible in so short a space, to go into the his- tory of these' convocations and the rules by which they were governed, so unintelligible is much of the language, and so numerous and senseless the repetitions. In size the Pitakas surpass all western com- positions, and are only exceeded by the sacred books of the Brahmins. Josephus mentions that his own antiquities contain 60,000 lines ; but the sacred books of the Budhists, it is esti- mated, contain 2,000,000 of fines. These books were written in tha Pcfli language, which was the vernacular tongue in the time of Gotama Budha. It was carried to a high state of cultivation, as is evident from the fact that in Ceylon a modern writer found as many as thirty works on Pali grammar, some of them of considerable extent. The sacred books are literally worshiped, and benefits are expected to result from this adoration as from the worship of an intelligent being. The books are usually wrapped in cloth, and they are often placed upon a rude altar near the roadside, after the manner of images in Roman Catholic countries, that those who pass by may place money upon them and obtain merit. The praises of the bana, or word, are a favorite subject with the . native authors. Whenever an opportunity is presented they launch out into a strain of com- mendation, heaping epithet upon epithet with untiring zeal, as in the following instance: "The discourses of Budha are as a divine charm to cure the poison of evil desire ; a divine medicine to heal the disease of anger ; a lamp in the midst of the darkness of ignorance ; a fire like that which burns at the end of a kal- pa, to destroy the evils of repeated existence ; a meridian sun to dry up the mud of covetous- ness ; a great rain to quench the flame of sensuality ; a thicket to block up the road that leads to the narakas ; a ship in which to sail to the opposite shore of the ocean of existence ; a coUyrium for taking away the eye-film of heresy ; a moon_ to bring out the nightrblowing lotus of merit ; a sur- BUDEISM. cession of trees bearing immortal fruit, placed here aud there, by which the traveler may be enabled to cross the desert of existence ; a straight highway by which to pass to the in- comparable wisdom ; a door of entrance to the eternal city of Nirwana ; a talismanio tree to give whatever is requested ; a flavor more exquisite than any in the three worlds ; a treasury of the best things it is possible to obtain, and a power by which may be appeased the sorrow of every sentient being." The advantages to be derived from listen- ing to the bana are represented by the native authors as being immensely great. In the early ages of Budhism, when the bana was in the vernacular language of the people, it is evident that great effects were produced by its recitation, and by the discourses that were given in explanation of* its doctrines and duties ; but its rehearsal has now degenerated into an unmeaning form, and is attended with very little power. Modes of Worship. — The Budhists of the present age are iiiiage-worshipers ; but it is not known at what period they adopted this custom, nor indeed at what period it was intro- duced into India. The Budhists of Ceylon have a legend that in the lifetime of Gotama Budha, an image of the founder of their reli- gion was made by order of the king of Ko- sala, and the Chinese have a similar story ; but it is rejected by the more intelligent of the priests, who regard it as an invention to af^ tract worshipers tothe temples. The images are sometimes recumbent, at other times up- right, or in a sitting posture, either in the act of contemplation, or with the hand uplifted in the act of giving instruction. At Cotta, near Colombo, in Ceylon, there is a recumbent im- age 42 feet in length. Upon the altar, in ad- dition to flowers, there are frequently smaller images, either of marble or metal, the former being brought from Burmah and the latter frorh Siam. In the shape of the images each nation appears to have adopted its own ideas of beauty ; those of Ceylon resembling a well proportioned native of the island, while those of Biam are of a more attenuated figure, and in Nepaul they often have three heads and six or ten arms. The idol manufactories pre- sent strange sights to the eye of a Christian, such as sign boards with the inscription, " Precious Budhas manufactured or repaired ;" "The Golden Budha Shop ;" and these shops containing groups of images, some black with age aad sent thither for gilding, and others gaudily painted and fresh from the hand of the artist. The Budhists have numerous temples, pago- das, and sacred places, to which the people resort to hear the bana read and to perform their religious rites. From the ruins which appear in various places it is evident that these temples were anciently very costly and beautiful, much more so than any of mod- ern construction ; but a particular description of them must be omitted. The bo-tree, under which Gotama attained the Budhaship, was an object of worship at a very early period. Near this tree the city of Sudfia-Gaya was afterwards built, which, from the vast extent of its ruins, must have had, at one time, a numerous popu- lation ; but it declined rapidly, and in the fifth century was entirely deserted. A bo-tree flourishes at present on the same spot, and is believed by the Budhists to be the very tree under which Gotama sat. This place is situ- ated in British India, in the Presidency of Bengal, about 40 miles S. W. of Bahar. It is a good deal resorted to by pilgrims, and is supposed to have once been the centre of Budhism, but now no Budhists reside at or near it. In the court-yard of nearly every wilmra (temple) in Ceylon there is a bo-tree, said to be taken from the original tree. Nu- merous forms of relic-worship are observed by the Budhists, and many of them, for extreme folly and absurdity, will compare with any- thing ever invented by Eome herself. They have, for example, the left canine tooth of their sage, and it is regarded by the Kandians of Ceylon as the palladium of their country. The impressions of Gotama's foot are also worship- ed. There are believed to be many of these impressions in various parts of India, but the most important one is on the top of Adam's Peak, in Ceylon, 7,420 feet above the level of the sea, and the summit of this peak is visited by great numbers of pilgrims. The soles of Budha's foot are represented as being divided into 108 compartments, like a pictorial alpha^ bet, each of which contains a figure. One of the titles of the monarch of Siam is, " The pre-eminently merciful and munificent, the soles of whose feet resemble those of Budia." It was an ordinance of Budha, that the priests, who were then supposed to dwell most commonly in the wilderness, should reside dur- ing the three months of the rainy season in a fixed habitation. This season is called wass, and it is at this period that the priests read bana to the people. The place of reading, called the bana-maduwa, is usually a temporary erection in the form of a pagoda. In the centre of the interior is an elevated platform for the convenience of the priests, and the people sit around it upon mats spread on the ground. No part of the rough material of the mar duwa is seen, as the pillars and the roof are covered with white cloth, upon which mosses, flowers, and the tender leaf of the cocoa nut are worked up into various devices. Lamps and lanterns are suspended in great profusion and variety, and the impression produced by the scene in some localities is most striking, and forms the most magnificent sight ever seen by many of the worshipers. The females are arrayed in their gayest attire, and flags and streamers and figured handkerchiefs float from every convenient point. At uitervals ifODHISM. lor tomioms are beat, the rude trumpet sends forth its screams, musketry and jinjalls add their roar, and with the help of glaring lamps, floral disj)lays, and the noise of the people, a most exciting and bewildering effect is produced. 'J'he copies of the sacred books now used are beautifully written in large characters, upon the best talipot leaves that can be pro- cured, with marks to point out the conclusion of the sentences. Upon some occasions one priest reads the original Pali, while another interprets what is read in the vernacular tongue ; but generally the Pali alone is read, so that the people understand not a word of it ; and even when the word is explained, most of them fall asleep, or idly chew their favorite beetle, regardless of what is said. The folly of the priests, in confining their public minis- trations to the simple reading of the bana, has caused a class of persons, called upasakas, in some districts, to go about from house to house, after the manner of the Scripture read- ers, reading works that are written in the ver- nacular tongue, accompanied with familiar expositions. It is by this means that Budhism in many places is principally supported. The Modern Priesthood. — The number of Budhist priests in Oeylon is estimated at 2500, which is about one in 400 of the popu- lation. In Burmah the proportion of priests is much larger, and in Siam it is larger still. The priests of Ceylon trace their origin from a remote period, as, according to the native legends, Budhism has there been professed more than 2000 years. But different sects have arisen, and the doctrines and ministra- tions of Budhism are not everywhere identical. There appears to be a general similarity be- tween the Budhism of Ceylon, Burmah, Siam, and China ; but in Nepanl, Thibet, and Japan it is essentially different. In Thibet the supe- rior priests are called lamas, and are regarded as incarnations of Budha ; and they possess so large a share of political authority that they can depose the sovereign of the country and substitute another in his stead. The dress of the grand lama is yellow, that of other lamas of superior rank red ; and as these dignitaries wear broad-brimmed hats, their costume closely resembles that of the cardinals of Eome. The Budhism of Thibet and of Japan resemble each other, in having a visible representative of Gotama, possessed of unlimited power. The Burmans, Siamese, Nepaulese, Chinese, Japanese, and Thibetans, are the principal na^ tions, in addition to the Ceylonese, who now profess Budhism, once the predominant religion throughout Hindoostan ; it is now nearly un- known in that vast region, where it has been superseded by other forms of superstition. It has already been intimated that the sys- tem of Budhism includes two leading and fatal elements — atheism and annihilation. When Gotama Budha died, he did not enter upon a future state of being ; his existence was not renewed in another world ; he forever ceased to be, as truly as the light of a lamp ceases to be when its flame is extinguished. Budha can, therefore, in no sense, be an object of trust or confidence ; his guidance and blessing can- not be sought, and when his name is invoked, it is under the vague supposition that by some latent, unknown process, the prayer will be answered, without the agency of an intelligent cause. And as Budha ceased to exist, so does every other being. There is no such thing as an immortal soul. The attainment of nir- wana, or extinction, is the only hope to which the Budhist can aspire ; though this extinc- tion necessarily produces another being to whom are transferred all the merit and de- merit that have been accumulated during ^n unknown period and by an almost endless suc- cession of similar beings, all distinct from each other, but all bound by this singular law of production to every individual in the preceding link of the chain. With such withering skepticism at its foun- dation, it is impossible that Budhism should be productive of any good fruits. There are indeed some good moral precepts in the sacred books ; but as explained in the commentaries and received by the people, they are wholly inoperative. Man has no Maker, is responsible to no superior being, and has before him no future. If he has enjoyment, it is the result of merit acquired in other ages and by other births ; and the sense of gratitude, obligation, and dependence, is unknown to him. Little motive can exist therefore for the restraint of the passions or for purity of life, and the de- based and corrupt state of Budhist communi- ties is the natural fruit of their religious belief. As to what Budha himself taught, little can be known, for he left nothing in writing ; and those who have most thoroughly studied this intricate system, are of the opinion that the works which profess to record his discourses have little if any foundation in truth ; that he never laid claim to the miracles with which his name is connected, and which have been for ages one of the principal supports of the sys- tem ; and that the accounts given of Budha's life, except the mere outlines relating to his birth, family, and death, are the merest fictions. Those who wish more thoroughly to explore the depths of the system of Budhism — the in- volved and endless definitions, rules and rites contained in the sacred books ; the history of mosques, temples, pagodas, and sacred places ; the disgusting legends relating to miracles, relics, and images ; the celibacy, mendicancy, diet, and dress of the priests ; and numerous minor points connected with these, are referred to the extended and elaborate works of E. Spence Hardy, D. J. Gogerly, Rev. Howard Malcom, and others. — Eev. E." D. Moore. BUFFALO : A Karen village in Arra- can and an out-station of the Arracan mis- sion of the Am. Baptist Missionary Union. Iii8 BUEMAH. BUNAAUAI : A station of the London Missionary Society, on Tahiti, South Sea. BUNTINGDALE: A station of the Wesleyans in Australia, 90 miles west of Melbourne. EUNTINGVILLB : A station of the Wesleyans in Kafiraria, S. A. BUNGALOW : The name given in India to a house or villa of a single floor. Bak Bun- galows are thatched houses, constructed at the public expense, and placed at intervals, in many parts of India, for the accommodation of tra- velers. BURDWAJf : A town in the province of Bengal, the capital of a district of the same name, 60 miles N. N. W. of Calcutta. Pop- ulation about 54,000. The population of the whole district is estimated at 1,444,000. BURISAL : The principal town in the district of Bahargany, India, about 185 miles north-east from Calcutta. It stands on the point of an oblong island, formed by the broad branches of the great Ganges, which here pre- sent an immense expanse of water, and a very great facility of inland navigation. It, is a station of the English Baptist Missionary So- ciety. BUEMAH : A country situated in south- eastern Asia, in the region beyond the river Brahmapootra. It is possessed by the Bur- mese, the limits of whose dominions have been greatly contracted by British conquests. On the west, where it is conterminous with British territories in India, Burmah is bounded by the province of Arracan, surrendered to the Bri- tish by the treaty concluded with the Burmese in 1826, and by the petty states of Tipperah, Munnepore, and Assam, from which countries it is separated by lofty ridges of mountains ; on the south, by the newly acquired British province of Pegu ; on the north by Assam and Thibet ; and on the east by China. Its limits extend from lat. 19° 25' to 28° 15', and from long. 93° 2' to 100° 40' ; comprising a territory 540 miles in length,, from north to south, and 420 in breadth, with an area of 96,000 square miles. Topography. — That portion of Asia in which Burmah is situated slopes from the central mountains towards the south ; and as it ap- proaches the Indian Ocean, it subsides into an extensive champaign country, which is over- flowed in the rainy season, by the swelling of the rivers. The Burmese territory is watered by three great streams, the Irrawaddy, the Salwen, and the Kyen-dwen, a tributary of the Irrawaddy. These rivers have their sour- ces in the northern chain of mountains in the interior, some of which are covered with per- petual snow ; and they run in a southerly course to the Indian Ocean. The Irrawaddy and the Salwen are large rivers, which over- flow the flat country on their banks, during the season of the raius. Burmah, having been despoiled of Pegu, contains neither maritime districts nor alluvial plains, but is altogether an upland territory, bounded at its southern extremity bv a frontier line at the distance of about 200 miles from the mouth of the Irra- waddy. From this point, the country begins to rise, and thence for about 300 miles farther it may be considered hilly and elevated. Be- yond this, it is wild and mountainous. To the W. and N. W., it is divided from Arracan, Munnepore, and Assam, by mountainous ridges, often of great elevation. Population. — From their resemblance in fea- tures and form, the Burmese appear to be of the same race as the inhabitants of the coun- tries that lie between Hindoostan and China. They may be generally described as of a stout, short, active, but well-proportioned form ; of a brown, but never of an intensely dark com- plexion ; with black, coarse, lank, and abun- dant hair, and a little more beard than the Siamese. The population has been variously estimated and exaggerated from seventeen to thirty-three millions ; but Mr. Crawford, from the best data that he could procure, estimated the population so as to give the present limits of Burmah 2,112,000. Social and Political Institutions, Arts, Ifc. — The Burmese appear to be inferior to the Hindoos, and still more to the Chinese, in arts, manu- factures, industry, and all the institutions of civil life. Their government is a pure des- potism, the king dispensing torture, imprison- ment, or death, according to his sovereign discretion. The chief object of the govern- ment appears to be the personal honor and aggrandizement of the monarch ; and the only restraint on the exercise of his prerogative is the fear of insurrection. He is assisted by a public and privy council, but may punish any of his high officers at his pleasure. The country at large is ruled by provincial governors, and is divided into provinces, townships, districts, and hamlets. In all the townships and vil- lages there are judges of subordinate jurisdic- tion ; but as no officer receives a fixed salary, the people are subject to the most shameful extortion. The criminal code is barbarous and severe, and the punishments shocking to hu- manity. The Burmese are divided into seven classes, viz. : the royal family ; the public offi- cers ; the priesthood ; the rich men ; the culti- vators and laborers ; and the slaves and out- casts ; each of which have their badges of distinction. But any subject, except slaves and outcasts, may aspire to the highest offices. In the useful arts, the Burmese have not made any great advances ; and their currency is of the rudest description, being composed of uncoined lead, silver, and gold, valued by weight. The Burmese are entirely ignorant of literature and science. Morality is at a low ebb among them, and their rulers have no con- ception of either the excellence or utility of good faith. Religion. — Budhism is the religion of Bur- oor Tinn. ThaungU. JCaffffo}' / \J\IjrgjteeMyi ^) •SaltnKA 1 UtmnaiJuin ' %-ninfjfo I {z,„u,cc,j,,2cn B T7 R M A H SIAM f 23: X :nr jv p S?luiF0t so 'ySajJutJfi- Bassi H ^HopO'SO ? ^(j QuJcE-3 iuia. f' " ^;- >i^-\!\ -2'<»«n-A<'e -/ ^repar _j isl-' ^r :5.t>f »( X^*zcA I ( IP.Comw aUs \ HarrenT.', LAjidiouajaL" C. / i Aj-e/iytela^ & JiuUanRTs, \Xir:Ajulajna n Jt&scos7s^\ J^m/OyFugoda rn^a i^ge] I'ak Tui^y^QXlwka. ■arln IBaiibom. r plfa7iicfusta- tions, or places of preaching and instruction, which became at length the seats of Christian churches and congregations. In Burmah Pro- per, a little church was still maintained at Kangoon, under the charge of a native pastor, and the missionaries from Maulmain, in 1830; resided several montlis in this part of the coun- try — Mr. Wade at Rangoon, and Mr. Judson at Prome, a large town on the Irrawaddy, about midway between Eangoon and Ava. The main operations of the mission, however, were of necessity still confined to those portions of Burmah which were under the government of Great Britain. It was during Mr. Judson's residence in Burmah Proper, and especially at Eangoon, that he was able to hasten forward the translation of the Scriptures, which he had previously commenced. He also took advan- tage of the great assemblages of merchants and others, who came from all parts of the empire to Eangoon, at the great festivals of their re- ligion, to scatter as widely as possible the tracts and books which he had printed, as well as to preach the doctrines of the Gospel. During one of these festivals, which was cele- brated with unusual pomp, he was frequently visited by persons from a great distance in the interior, who came to him with the inquiries : " Are you Jesus Christ's man ? Give us a writing that tells about Jesus Christ." Others would say to him, " Sir, we hear there is an eternal hell. Pray give us a writing that will tell us how to escape it;" and others still would say, " "We have seen a writing that tells about an eternal God. Are you the man that gives away such writings, for we want to know the truth." He estimated the number who visited the mission-house on this occasion alone, with inquiries like these, at not less than six thou- sand. These inquiries were gratifying fruits of the labors of the mission, which had now been in progress many years, and evidently spread their influence to the remotest portions of the Burman territories. In the summer of 1831, Mr. Judson returned to Maulmain, where he found that part of the mission greatly advanced during the thirteen months of his absence. It had been strength- ened by the arrival of Eev. Messrs. Ma.son, Kincaid, and Jones, with their wives. The church had been enlarged by numerous bap- tisms, and the missionaries had extended tleir labors to distant villages in the jungle, at seve- ral of which converts had been baptized. In the annual report of the mission for the year 1831, it is stated that the number who had been baptized during the year was in all two hundred and seventeen. Of these eighty-nine were Europeans, the rest being natives of the country. During the eighteen years which had elapsed since Mr. Judson first landed at Ean- goon, the growth of the mission had been glow but constant and healthy. Besides its original seat it now had stations at Maulmain, Tavoy, and Mcrgui, three of the principal cities on that part of the coast which had been ceded to the English. The missionaries were now fourteen in number — seven males and seven females, and the number whohad been baptized and admitted to the churches was three hun- dred and ninety-three of whom two hundred and eighty were natives, the others being chiefly soldiers of British regiments stationed in the country. The press had printed not less than two hundred thousand tracts and books, among which were the New Testament and several books of the Old Testament. Schools were also established and in successful operation at all the stations in British Burmah, and the mission, in all its departments, was just enter- ing on that career of eminent usefulness and success, which it has since pursued. For many years after the commencement of the mission in Burmah, the missionaries directs ed their entire efforts to the conversion of the Burman race, without having much intercourse, or becoming much acquainted with the other races that inhabit the country. When, how- ever, Mr. Boardman went to reside in Tavoy, there was living in his family a man of middle age, who had been a slave, but whose freedom had been purchased by the missionaries. His name was Ko-Thah-byu, one of the race of Karens, or Karians, who are found in great numbers in all parts of Burmah and the neigh- boring kingdom of Siam. He had already been converted to the Christian faith while at Maulmain, and was baptized soon after his re- moval to Tavoy. This man's conversion, and his subsequent character, were the means of attracting the particular attention of the mis- sionaries to the singular race to which he belonged, and of establishing among them a mission, whose growth and success have scarce- ly been equaled by any other of modern times. This interesting people are widely scattered over the Burman empire, but are entirely dis- tinct from the Burmans, by whom they are regarded as inferiors and slaves. They have adopted many of the customs and modes of life of the Burmans ; they are generally indus- trious, and, with the exception of intemperance, are but.Iittle addicted to the vices of barbarian tribes. Their condition is a degraded one, being everywhere oppressed by their Burman masters, and compelled to perform every kind of servile labor. Hence they lead a wander- ing life, and dwell in temporary villages plant- ed in remote places, in order to escape the exactions of their oppressors. With few ex- 202 BUEMAH. ceptions they reject Budliism, and present the extraordinary phenomenon of a people without any form of religion or established priesthood, but believing in the existence of God and in a state of future retribution, and cherishing a set of religious traditions resembling the truths of revelation, which they transmit from age to age in the poetic legends of their race. Blend- ing with these traditions are some singular prophecies asserting their future elevation as a race, and that white strangers from across the sea would come to bring them " the word of God." It was on this account that when the missionaries first became acquainted with them, they evinced unusual interest in the truths of the Gospel, and regarded them as the fulfilment of the predictions which had been delivered to them by the " Elders" of a former age. These traditions of their race, acting on a people long crushed by oppression, but possessed of unusual moral sensibility, unquestionably gave the mis- sionaries great advantages in their early labors among the Karens. Mr. Boardman, on his removal toTavoy, im- mediately found himself in intimate relations with these people, many of whom were first brought to him by the converted slave, Ko- Thah-byu. The tidings of the arrival of a " White Teacher" soon spread beyond the city into the distant jungle, and brought the Karens in great numbers to the houSe of the missionary to listen to his instructions. As an illustra- tion of their moral sensibility, the story of the deified hook is often mentioned. It had been left in one of their villages some twelve years before by a traveling Mussulman, who was understood to have told the people it was to be worshiped as sacred. Though entirely ignorant of its contents, the person with whom it was left carefully preserved it, and in virtue of possessing it became a kind of sorcerer, of great importance among the people. It was brought one day to Mr. Boardman, and on being unrolled from the coverings in which it was enveloped, it proved to be the " Book of Common Prayer and the Psalms," printed at Oxford. From this period Mr. Boardman devoted the remnant of his too brief life almost exclusively to labors among the Karens. Early in 1829, he made an excursion to the jungle and mountains where their villages were most numerous, and saw much of their condition and modes of life in their native wilds. He also conferred with the British Commissioner for the district, and formed liberal plans for schools, and other agencies of civilization, while he gave a large part of every day to preaching and conversation among the people. In the summer of 1 830, however, his strength had become exceedingly reduced by repeated attacks of hemorrhage of the lungs, and he sailed for Maulmain. Here he regained a temporary strength, and after a few months returned to Tavoy, where he found many con- Torts waiting to be baptized, and still many more daily visiting the zayat for religious inquiry and instruction. A large number were baptized by Moung-Ing, one of the native Burmau preachers, under the direction of Mr. Boardman. Just at this time Mr. and Mrs. Mason arrived at Tavoy as auxiliaries to the mission, and in their company and that of Mrs. Boardmaoj this excellent missionary made an excursion into the country for the purpose of meeting and baptizing a large number of con- verts, who had often visited him in the city. The journey of three days was accomplished, and the baptism of thirty-four persons was per- formed in his presence by Eev. Mr. Mason. But ere he could reach his home in Tavoy he sunk beneath the exhausting malady which had long pressed upon his constitution. His tomb is at Tavoy, and the marble slab which covers it is inscribed with a simple epitaph, which records his heroic services for the Karens of the neighboring forests and mountains.* The labors thus nobly begun by Mr. Board- man were continued by Mr. Mason, his suc- cessor in the mission at Tavoy, which has been ever since that period almost entirely devoted to the benefit of the Karens. They have, both here and in other parts of Burmah, received the Gospel with far greater readiness than the Burmans themselves. The mission, from its very beginning, was marked by unusual pros- perity and success. So rapid was the spread of Christian truth, and the ennobling influence which it exerts, that when, in 1832, Mr. Mason visited the Karen villages, to the south of Tavoy, which had been under the superin- tendence established by Mr. Boardman, he was surprised at their condition of neatness and order, their regular industry, and their well- ordered worship. In a letter written on the spot, he gives utterance to his feelings in these strpng expressions : " I no longer date from a hfeathen land. Heathenism has fled these banks. I eat the rice and fruits cultivated by Christian hands, look on the fields of Chris- tians, see no dwellings but those of Christian families. I am seated in the midst of a Chris- tian village, surrounded by a people that love as Christians, converse as Christians, act like Christians, and, in my eyes, look like Chris- tians." The Karens, though they are usually, in some imperfect degree, acquainted with the Burman language, yet have a language of their own, which, however, at this time, had not been reduced to writing. This deficiency not only presented an obstacle to the labors of the mis- sionaries, but it also opposed an effectual barrier to the progress of the people in re- ligious knowledge. Accordingly, in 1832, Mr. Wade, who had been longest acquainted with their spoken tongue, with such aid as he could derive from the Christian Karens, made an alphabet of its elemental sounds, compiled a * life of Mr. Boardman, by Eev. Alonzo King. BDRMAH. 203 Bpelling-book of its most common words, and translated two or three of the tracts ah-eady printed in Burman. This was the beginning of a most useful and important worlt. It has since been carried onward to its completion and perfection ; and the Karens now rejoice in a written language taught in their schools, and containing alrep,dy the rudiments of a Chris- tian literature. The interval which elapsed between the years 1832 and 1835 was marked by the arri- val of large reinforcements of missionaries, and also by the adoption of arrangements for the more systematic prosecution of their diver- silied labors. At the beginning of this period the number of missionaries, both male and female, at all the stations in Burmah, was four- teen. On the first of January, 1833, were added Rev. Thomas Simons, Mr. Hancock, a printer, and his wife, and Miss Cummiugs, a teacher ; and in the following June, Rev. Messrs. Brown and Webb, with their wives, aud Miss Harrington, afterwards Mrs. Simons, the latter company repairing almost immedi- ately to Rangoon. In connection with the former of these missionary companies were also received two additional printing-presses, a large font of types, and the materials for a type foundry, by means of which tracts and portions of the Scriptures were soon printed at Maulmain in the Burman, the Karen, and the Taling or Peguan languages. These mis- sionary companies were followed by a third company, who landed at Amherst on the 6th of December, 1834, consisting of Rev. Messrs. Howard, Vinton, Dean, and Comstock, and Mr. Osgood, a printer, with their wives, and Miss Gardner, who was to be employed as a teacher. Mr. Dean was destined for a new mission just at that time established in the kingdom of Siam. Thus within the space of two years there arrived in Burmah reinforce- ments numbering in all not less than eighteen missionaries, both male and female, with other important accessions to the apparatus of the mission. During the period in question, also, Mr. Judson brought to its completion his translation of the Bible into the Burman tongue. It had been his daily task amid the vicissitudes of many years. It had been his solace in grief, his companion in solitude, his support in weariness and depression. It was completed on the 31st of January, 1834, and on its completion the heroic and faithful mis- sionary " retires alone, and with the last leaf of his imperishable work in his hand, he pra,ys for the forgiveness of Heaven on all the sins that have mingled with his labors, and de- voutly commends it to the mercy and the grace of God, to be used as an instrument in converting the heathen to Himself" Mr. Kin- caid, who was attached to the department of the mission in Burmah Proper, in April, 1833, ascended the Irrawaddy from Rangoon, and, after landing at a multitude of villages on the banks of the river, reached Ava, the Burman capital, on the 30th of May, where he main- tained a branch of the mission for a period of more than four years. Early in 1836 he was ' joined by Mr. Cutter, the printer, from Ran- goon, who also brought one of the printing- presses ; but the mission was jealously watched by the Budhist priests and the officers of gov- ernment, and though Mr. Kincaid had an op- portunity of studying Burman character in favorable circumstances, and also of exploring' the country beyond Ava, he was able to ac- complish but few results that have contributed to the advancement of the mission in that portion of the empire. He, however, lingered at Ava, with several of his associates of the mission, until the summer of 1837, when, in consequence of a civil war and the accession of a new king, who threatened again to com- mence hostihties with the English, they aban- doned the station, and soon afterwards, with the missionaries at Rangoon, repaired to Maul- main or to other portions of British Burmah. They left at Ava a church of twenty-seven members, which had been gathered by their labors. One of the most important undertakings belonging to this period of the mission was the attempt to unite the Christian Karens, who were scattered over the jungle, in compact villages, where they might pursue the avoca- tions of regular industry, and be united in Christian churches, supplied with ministers and the ordinances of the Gospel. In this manner a number of Christian villages were formed under the auspices of the missionaries, and adopted as out>-stations of the mission. The principal of these villages were within a dis- trict sixty miles around Maulmain and Tavoy, and among them were Wadesville, Newville, Chummerah, Dong-Tahn, and Matah. They were composed principally of Karens, but their formation belongs to a period prior to any separate organization of the Karen and Burman missions. As a step in the civiliza- tion of the people, and their progress in the social virtues which Christianity enjoins, it was exceedingly important, and, it is believed, has been productive of many beneficial results. In April, 1835, the American Baptist Tri- ennial Convention— the name which the mis- sionary organization of the Baptists of the United States then bore — held its eighth tri- ennial session at Richmond, Va. Twenty- three years had now elapsed since, in poverty and weakness, in misgiving and doubt, this association had been formed for the spread of the Gospel among the heathen. The number of missionaries who were now in the field, and the results which they had been enabled to accomplish, filled its members with new energy and hope. Large and liberal plans were de- vised, and assurances were given of more effec- tive aid from the churches in all parts of the country. The Board of the Convention de- 2u4 BUEMAH. termined to send one of their number, Rev. Howard Malcom, D. D., to visit the stations and advise with the missionaries respecting the best mode of conducting their labors. This service was performed by Dr. Malcom, who sailed from the United States in the year 1835, and returned in 1838, during which period he visited the missions of the Board in Burmah and other countries of Asia.* The early periods of a Christian mission planted in a heathen land are necessarily periods of experiment. This was particularly true in the infancy of modern Protestant missions. They were undertaken without ex- perience, and the best mode of conducting them was but imperfectly apprehended. Even now, after the lapse of more than forty years, many questions are still unsettled and many principles yet remain to be adequately tested and established. This remark finds frequent illustration in the operations of the Burman mission at the period of which we now write. In this outline, however, it is impossible to do more than refer to the leading featares of the general plan in accordance with which those operations were conducted. The general organization of the mission for some years subsequent to 1835, was but an expansion and development of that which had been established on the settlement of the mis- sionaries in British Burmah. The three great stations of the mission were at the three cap- ital cities of the provinces ceded to the English, Maulmain, Tavoy and Mergui. Besides these, a station, as we have already seen, was main- tained, not without several interruptions, at Eangoon, in the kingdom of Burmah, and also for short intervals at Ava and at Prome. In the districts around each of these central star tions, there were numerous villages designated as out-stations, at which Zayats for preaching were maintained and in some of which schools were established and churches were organized. At some of these villages missionaries and teachers resided during as much of the year as the climate would allow, while to others they made only occasional visits, the preaching being performed principally by the ordained native assistants, who had now become quite numerous both among Burmans and Karens. The labors of the missionaries were exceed- ingly varied, and amid the inequahties of an eastern climate and the imperfect physical com- forts with which they were obliged to be con- tent, often proved exceedingly injurious to the constitution. At the principal stations of the mission they were engaged in frequent public preaching, in daily conversation with all who would come to inquire, in the study of the language^in the writing of tracts and the translation of the Scriptures, and in super- intending the operations of the several presses, of which they were now in possession. Dur- * See Maloom's TraTelfl in South-Eastem Asia ing the rainy season they were for' the most part restricted to the large towns and fully occupied in the employments above indicated. So soon, however, as the rains had ceased, they went forth from their homes to visit the villages and out-stations that were scattered over the jungle within the field of their operar tions. Traveling in litters over the mountains or embarking in boats upon the rivers, they made their way once or twice each year to all the out-stations of the mission — preaching and distributing books as they went, instructing the churches and their pastors, inspecting the schools — baptizing new converts, forming new churches, planting new stations .according to the wants of the rural population whom they met. The incidents of their excursions to the jungle are often recorded in the journals of the missionaries, and they furnish the best illus- tration which can be given of the modes of life in the mission. The schools were for the most part under the direction of the ladies who were attached to the several stations, and it sometimes happened that a solitary female teacher would spend the entire dry season at one of these distant vil- lages, engaged in the work of instructing the rude people around her. This was especially true of the villages of Dong-Tahn and Chum- merah, the former thirty-five and the latter some sixty miles from Maulmain. At these places schools were maintained for several years by Miss Macomber at one and Miss Cummings at the other, which were brought to a close only by the early death of these in- defatigable and heroic ladies. Separate schools were usually maintained for the Burmans and Karens, and in some places for other races of the country, and those in Maulmain and Tavoy were in part supported by allowances from the British East India Company, and embraced in- struction in English and in the rudiments of general education as well as of religious knowledge. This arrangement, however, was not permanent, as it proved to impair the con- trol which it was necessary that the mission- aries should exercise over the schools. In ad- dition to these a higher seminary was estab- lished at Tavoy in 1836, for instructing native converts of suitable qualifications in the doc- trines of Christianity, in order to prepare them to preach the Gospel to their country- men. It was opened in May of that year with eighteen pupils, of whom twelve were Karens, —five were Burmans and Peguans, and one was a Hindoo. It was at first placed under the charge of Mr. Wade, but on the failure of his health, at the close of 1837, the school at Tavoy was suspended and another especially for Burmans was immediately opened at Maulmain, to which the Burman pupils were removed. This was placed under the charge of Rev. Edward A Stevens, who has ever since devoted himself largely to this department of labor. BUEMAH. 205 In 1835 a branch of the mission was com- menced by Rev. Mr. Oomstock and Mrs. Corn- stock at Kyouk-Phyoo, in Arracan, one of the provinces whicli had been ceded to the English by the treaty of Tandaboo in 1826, containing a population of about two hundred and fifty thousand souls of the same races as the people of Burmah. This part of the mission however, was but imperfectly sustained for several years, in consequence of the feeble health of Mr. and Mrs. Oomstock, and the early death of Rev. Levi Hall and M!rs. Hall, who arrived in Arra- can in 1837, but died before their labors be- gan. After a year's absence Mr. and Mrs. Oomstock, in 1839, returned to Arracan bring- ing with them Rev. Lyman Stilson and his wife, but they now settled in Ramree, where they hoped to find a climate more favorable to health than that of Kyouk-Phyoo. They were accompanied by four or five native assistants, by whose aid they immediately established schools and the other agencies usually employ- e'd in a mission. This was the condition of affairs in Arracan when Messrs. Kincaid and Abbott arrived in the province in 1840, on finding themselves obliged to abandon their stations in Burmah Proper. Their object in going to Arracan was to be in a situation as favorable as possible for keeping up a commu- nication with the native churches and pastors, and the numerous inquirers whom they had left under the cruel sway of the Burman king. For this purpose Mr. Kincaid went to Akyab, where he established a mission for the Arra^ canese, and Mr. Abbott repaired to Sandoway, near the Burman frontier, in order to be as near as possible to the Karens in the districts of Bassein and Rangoon. He soon contrived to send information of his residence, to the people on the other side of the mountain ridge which separates the two countries, and though the passes were constantly guarded by jealous Burman officers, the eager Karens found their way in great numbers across the mountains to Mr. Abbott, some asking for baptism, others seeking books for their countrymen at home, and others still desiring to remain and study with the missionary. They came from the districts of Maubee and Pantanau, and even from the vicinity of Rangoon, telling him of the progress of the Gospel among their coun- trymen. Through a wide extent of country, village after village received the Gospel, and within the first year of his residence at San- doway Mr. Abbott baptized nearly two hun- dred of those simple-hearted and interesting people. He made occasional visits to the Bur- man frontier and entered the territory of the king, always finding scores of converts awaits ing his coming, and desiring to be baptized. In one of these excursions in which he was absent thirty-one days, he visited all the church- es along the frontier, received reports from all the native pastors and preachers, and ad- ministered the ordinance of baptism to two hundred and seventy-nine persons who professed their faith in Christ. During the year 1844 the number of persons baptized by M r. Abbott and his native assistants through the regions here referred to was upwards of two thousand, and the whole number thus baptized within five years after his arrival at Sandoway was considerably more than three thousand, a num- ber larger than had at that time been baptized in all the other missions of the American Bap- tist Board taken together. Bat these num- bers but imperfectly indicate the extent to which the Gospel began to exert its influence on the Karens of that district. Multitudes more were instructed in its doctrines, and be- came obedient to its precepts, though they never presented themselves to the missionary for baptism. An entire change came over the population of the district. They assumed an aspect of higher civilization. They became honest and industrious ; the vices common to their race disappeared, and they were eager for knowledge, and every kind of personal and social improvement. In 1843 the persecution of the Christian Karens, which for a time had been intermitted, was renewed with increased violence, and these poor people were subjected to cruel and venge- ful sufferings inflicted on them by their Bur- man oppressors. Large numbers of them were seized and cliained together, and marched away in companies to distant prisons, from which they were liberated only by the payment of a ransom which exhausted their entire wealth. They bore these persecutions with heroic Chris- tian fortitude. They refused to abandon the faith which they had embraced, and maintain- ed it with a firmness which commanded the respect even of their persecutors, and com- mended the Gospel still more widely to the people around them. So frequent and violent were these persecutions that the Karens, in large companies, abandoned their homes and their country and fled across the mountains to Arracan. In the course of a single season Mr. Abbott received upwards of two hundred fam- ilies at Sandoway. Many others went to other regions, and many perished by the way from the ravages of the cholera ; but the emigration of these humble martyrs for conscience sake, still went on till the districts to which they belonged were well nigh depopulated. They awakened the sympathy not only of the mission- aries, but also of the resident English, who made contributions for their comfort and support. The pages of missionary history do not record a more signal display of divine grace than was seen among these simple dwellers among the mountains of Arracan. With but little instruc- tion from human lips, they seem to have beon largely taught of the Holy Ghost. With no outward aids or encouragements, they clung to their faith with a tenacity that nothing could subdue, and in the day of frightful perseoutioQ they literally gave np all for Christ. 206 BURMAH. Sucli were the labors of Mr. Abbott at San- doway, during this interesting period of Karen awakening and persecution. He was to them not merely their religious teacher, but protector and friend. He provided for the necessities of the emigrant families, found them places of settle- ment and productive occupation, and enlisted in their behalf the sympathies and active charities of the humane Europeans who were residing in the country. These varied cares and labors, however, combining with the heaviest of do- mestic afflictions, soon made serious inroads up- on his strong constitution, and in 1845 he was compelled to seek a change of climate by a brief return to the United States. Meanwhile Messrs. Kincaid and Stilson re- mained for two or three years at Akyab, where they found a small native church, which had been planted many years before by some Eng- lish missionaries. Their arrival immediately gave new life to the Christian disciples, and in a little time they were surrounded by a large congregation, among whom several appeared to be sincere inquirers respecting the new religion. This indication of interest, however, soon awak- ened the jealousy of the Budhist priests and other persons of influence, but the church still increased in spite of the opposition, and another was now planted at an out-station called Cru- da, five days' journey from Akyab. In the course of the year 1841, the missionaries were visited by several persons belonging to a tribe dwelling among the mountains, and known as the Kemees. They were, in many respects, es- pecially in their docility atid moral sensibility, very similar to the Karens. These people soon sent to Mr. Kiucaid a formal invitation, signed by their chief and several of his sub- ordinates, urging him to visit them in their mountains, and promising to send their children to school, if he would establish one in their vil- lage. The invitation was soon followed by a visit from the chief himself, who came in per- son, to urge his request. Both the missionaries soon afterwards visited these interesting people and in several subsequent visits and frequent intercourse with them at Akyab, Mr. Stilson mastered the peculiarities of their dialect, and prepared to reduce it to writing, in order that a branch of the mission might soon be estab- lished among them. But Mr. Kiucaid was soon obliged, by ill-health, to leave the pro- vince ; and the absence of Mr. Abbott and the lamented death of both Mr. and Mrs. Comstock, left Mr. and Mrs. Stilson the soli- tary conductors of the entire mission in Arra- can. The plans which had been formed for the Kemees were, in consequence, of necessity abandoned, and they have since been but im- perfectly carried into execution. While these changes, both joyous and sad, were in progress in Arracan, the branches of the mission established in the other provinces of British Burmah, or Tenasserim, as it was now called, were still prosecuted with varying suc- cess. Their principal stations, as has been mentioned, were at Maulmaiu, Tavoy and Mer- gui, the two former of which had become so extensive as to be organi7;ed into separate mis- sions, and to be designated as such. At Maul- main there were residing in 1840, Messrs. Jud- son, Howard, Stevens, Osgood and Simons, in connection with the Burman department, and Mr. Vinton, in coiinection with the Karen de- partment of the mission. At Amherst, also, was a secondary station, where Mr. Haswell was engaged iii preaching to the Talings or Peguans, and in translating the New Testa- ment into their language. The ladies of the mission, at both these stations, were usually employed in the schools, some for Burmans and others for Karens. Around Maulmain were now seven other tributary stations, all for Karens, which were generally under the charge of native assistants, but were visited by the missionaries at least once during every dry sea- son. The number of churches thus connected with what was called the Maulmain mission was seven, containing in all, four hundred and fifty-four members. The mission at Tavoy, though embracing a single Burman church, was devoted almost ex- clusively to the Karen population of the city and district. There were dwelling there in 1840, only Messrs. Wade and Mason, with their wives, Messrs. Bennett and Hancock being at the time absent on account of ill- health. Around Tavoy were eight ouf>stations, all having churches, now numbering four hun- dred and seventy-three members. Mergui was a tributary station of this mission, and was the residence of Mr. Ingalls, a preacher in Burman, and Mr. Brayton, a preacher in Karen. In the vicinity of Mergui, and under the care of its missionaries, were also eight out-stations, with six churches, numbering in all, one hun- dred and thirty-one members. Under the di- rection of the missionaries at Maulmain were thirty native assistants and seven schools of different grades, for a population of several dif- ferent races, while at Tavoy there were sixteen schools, nearly all for Karens, and twenty na- tive assistants. The schools and the native as- sistants, both at Tavoy and Maulmain, however, were supported in part by contributions of be- nevolent individuals residing in those cities. Mr. Judson, though usually preaching on the Sabbath to the Bnrman congregation at Maul- main, devoted his largest labor to the work of revising his translation of the Burman Bible, a work which he prosecuted with the utmost care, and which he found to cost him even more time and labor than the translation itself. It was committed to press in October, 1840, twenty-seven years after his first attempt at learning the language. It has been often ex- amined by critics and philologists acquainted with the Burman tongue, and has been, we be- lieve, invariably pronounced to bean excellent translation. It will for ever remain in the lit- BURMLA.H. 207 erature of the country, the noblest memorial of the illustrious missionary who first intro- duced the Gospel to the Burman people. Soon after its completion Mr. Judson began the pre- paration of a Dictionary in English and Bur- mese, a work to which he had been repeatedly urged by missionaries, and which he now un- dertook at the special request of the Board, as an important and much needed aid in prosecut- ing the mission. The Burman Theological School at Maulmain, was continued by Mr. Stevens till 1841, when, in consequence of the small number of pupils, it was suspended till 1844, and then reopened, though with only eight members. The Burman race, though that to which the missionaries were origmally sent, at this time had received tlie Gospel with far less readiness than the Karens, whom they everywhere despised and oppressed. Superior in intelligence and in social position, tlicy yet clung to their ancient superstitious, and turned away from the revelation of God which had been given to them. The Karens, on the con- trary, though furnished with more limited means of instruction, presented one of the most remarkable instances on record, of a peo- ple readily accepting the Gospel of Christ. Its infiuence was now perceptible wherever their villages were scattered throughout the pro- vinces of Tenasserim, in the elevation of indi- vidual and social character and the growth of all the kindly charities and domestic virtues of civilized life. The entire New Testament was not translated into their language till 1843, but loug before that time, the churches and schools which had sprung up among them were so numerous as to far transcend the ability of the missionaries to give them adequate su- pervision and instruction. The officers of the Bast India Company, in these provinces, co- operated with the missionaries in promoting their improvement, and protecting them from Burman oppression, and though of necessity left, in a great degree, to the care of native assistants, who were but imperfectly instructed tliemselves, they yet exhibited a striking illus- tration of the power of Christian truth over the characters and manners of a rude and bar- barous people. In order to supply these ob- vious deficiencies in the Karen department of the mission, it was decided by the Board of managers, to establish, without delay, a school for the instruction of Karen preachers, and Rev. J. G. Binney, pastor of the First Baptist Church in Savannah, Ga., was appointed to assume the charge of it. He sailed from Bos- ton, in November, 1843, in company with Eev. 5. B. BuUard, and Mr. T. S. Eanney, a prin- ter, with their wives, and Miss Julia Lathrop, all appointed to the mission at Tavoy, with the exception of Mr. and Mrs. Binney, who were to be stationed at Maulmain. They were fol- lowed in the succeeding year by Rev. E. B. Cross and his wife, and also a teacher for the K;ir(.i:s. The missionaries at Mergui, at this period, became acquainted with a singular people in- habiting the islands on the coast and known by the general name of Salcmgs. They evinced much interest in the teachings that were im- parted to them, and a large number of them professed their faith in Christ and were bap- tized. Their language was reduced to writing by Mr. Stevens, and schools were established for their instruction, for the support of which a thousand rupees were contributed by Major Broadfoot, the liberal-minded and generous Commissioner for the district of Mergui. In April, 1834, Dr. Judson had married Mrs. Sarah 11. Boardman, who since the death of Mr. Boardman, had been connected .with the mission at Tavoy, as one of the most effi- cient and devoted of its members. From the date of her marriage to Dr. Judson she had been residing at Maulmain, and had shared in all the vicissitudes of labor and patience through which her husband had been called to pass. But her health liad now become seriously and it was apprehended fatally impaired, and her physi- cians prescribed a voyage beyond the tropica as the only means of prolonging her valuable life. Accordingly, in April, 1845, Dr. Judson and Mrs. Judson embarked at Maulmain on a voyage to the United States. He took with him his two Burman interpreters, thinking thus to hasten forward the preparation of the Burman and English Dictionary to which he was then devoting liis constant labors. On his arrival at the Isle of France, however, he sent back the interpreters, hoping from the apparent im- provement of Mrs. Judson's health, that he might soon return himself. But in tliis he was doomed to be disappointed. The health of Mrs. Judson soon began again to decline, and she died on her arrival at St. Helena, Sept. 1, 1845. The now solitary missionary, with his three eldest children, who had accompanied their parents, proceeded on his voyage and ar- rived at Boston on the 15th of the following October. He remained in the United States till the following July, a period of nearly nine months, when he took his final leave of his na- tive land, and returned to his station in the mission. The circumstances and results of this visit of Dr. Judson to the. land of his birth were marked with unusual interest, and are worthy of a brief mention in this narrative. He had been absent thirty-three years, during which he had been living in the midst of oriental hea- thenism, associating with races of inferior civilization and spealsing languages of strange and uncouth structure. From the honored Board of Commissioners under whose auspi- ces he had first become a missionary, he had withdrawn, and for many years had been acting under the direction and depending upon the support of those whom he had never seen. The country too, which he had left thirty-three years before, had entirely changed in nearly 208 BURMAH. every pliase of its social and religious life. Art and commerce and Christianity had mul- tiplied their wondrous triumphs ou every hand. The missionary was bewildered at the amazing contrast, between all that he had left and all that he had now gazed upon. The homes of his boyhood — the places of his edu- cation — the large cities and the humble vil- lages were alike changed, till the land seemed no longer to be the laud of his nativity. He was everywhere received with an honor and respect for which nothing could have prepared him. He was publicly welcomed at Boston by the ofiBcers of the Board, and in every city which he visited throughout the land he was received with an interest and attention such as are seldom accorded to any private individual. Members of every Christian denomination and citizens of every rank were eager to do honor to a man who had proved himself, by a lifelong service, to be a benefactor of mankind. In November, 1845, a month after his arrival, he was present at the meeting of the American Baptist Missionary Union, and for the first time became acquainted with the brethren and friends under whose guidance and support the noble labors of his missionary life had been performed. His presence everywhere awakened the liveliest interest and entlmsiasm. The history of American missions seemed to be embodied in him, and the cause in which he had so long toiled and suffered touched new sensibilities in the hearts of the people. Dur- ing his visit in the United States, he married Miss Emily Chubbuok, of Hamilton, New York, with whom he embarked for Maulmaiu on the 11th July, 1846. The same ship also bore to the missions Bev. Messrs. Harris and Beecher and their wives, and Miss Lydia Lillybridge ; Mr. and Mrs. Harris being appointed to the Karen department of the mission at Maulmain, and Mr. and Mrs. Beecher to Arracan, while Miss Lillybridge was to' remain with Dr. and Mrs. Judson in the Burman department of the mission. They reached the port of their destination in the following December, and soon afterwards en- tered their several spheres of labor. During the absence of Dr. Judson, Mrs. Mason and Mrs. Ingalls had been removed by death, Mr. Simons had returned to the United States and Mr. and Mrs. Osgood had with- drawn from the mission in consequence of ill health. The brutal and tyrannical Burman king Thara-wadi, who usurped the throne in 1837, had been overthrown, and a regency had been formed which it was hoped would prove less unfriendly to the labors of the mission- aries. In this new state of affairs. Dr. Judson, a few weeks after his arrival, repaired to Ean- goon in order to ascertain the disposition of the new government with respect to the mis- sion. He continued to reside there for several months, but received neither encouragment nor prohibition from either the local or the imperial government. Few ventured to visit him for religious instruction, and though he was gradually gathering the scattered mem- bers of the Rangoon church, he at length learned that an order had been issued to watch the missionary's house, and apprehend any who might visit him to inquire about the new religion.* Dr. Judson at first thought of proceeding to Ava, again to solicit tolera- tion from the imperialgovernment, but in the limited resources of the treasury of the mis^ sion, he was compelled to abandon the attempt and soon afterwards returned^ to Maulmain, where he continued to reside and to work upon his Dictionary with but little interruption to the end of his life. In August, 1847, Mr. Abbott left the United States on his return to Arracan. He went by the way of England, and hastening by the overland route to Calcutta, reached Sandoway early in December. By journeying thus rap- idly he was able to fulfil an engagement which he had made with his native assistants, that if his life should be spared he would meet them in January, 1848, at Ong-kyoung, where he had given them his parting instructions three years before. He immediately announced his arrival among the scattered villages of the Ka^ reus, both in Arracan and across the mountains in Burmah Proper. The assistants came to- gether at Ong-kyoung according to their ap- pointment, early in January, and reported the condition of their several flocks and the labors in which they had been engaged ; and most encouraging was the report which they made. Of the two ordained ministers, Tway-poh, who was at the head of the churches in Arracan, had baptized six hundred converts ; and Myat- Kyan, who, though living in Arracan, had preached principally among the Karens of Burmah, had baptized five hundred and fifty. The period of the missionary's absence had been one of remarkable progress in the inter- ests of the mission. Mr. Abbott had left twenty native assistants, who were preachers but not ordained to the ministry. Of them two had died, and one had been suspended by his associates, while sixteen others had been added to the number, and the thirty-three na- tive preachers now reported not less than twelve hundred converts in their several dis- tricts, who were waiting to be baptized and received into the churches. _ In the autumn of 1847, Eev. W. Moore and his wife, and in the following summer, Eev. Messrs. Van Meter, C. 0. Moore, and Judson Benjamin, and their wives, were appointed missionaries to Burmah, and sailed for the scene of their future labors ; one of them beinn- designated to the Burmese department of the mission at Arracan, and the other three to * For a full account of the ctTect of tbis onler. Bee ]>ie- .sident Wayland's Memoir of Dr. Jurtson, Vol. II. Chap vii. The same work is also filled with iDteresliug paasazea relating to the progress of the Burman misBions. BURMAH. 209 the Karen missions at Maulmain, Sandoway, and Tavoy. Early in 1849, the Burman and the Karen departments of the mission at Maulmain were separated from each other, and for the purpose of greater economy and efficiency were organ- ized as separate missions, the Karen mission having already been established in a separate part of the city, which had received the name of Newton. In the same manner and at about the same time, the Karen department of the mission in Arracan was erected into a separ- ate mission of which the principal seat was San- doway. Thus organized in independent bodies, these missions greatly extended the sphere of their influence, and by a judicious division of their labors and endeavors, entered upon an era of enlarged prosperity and usefulness. From the -report of the managers in 1850, just after the new organization of these missions, it appears that there were attached to the Maulmain Burman Mission, Rev. Messrs. Jud- Bon, Stevens, and Stilson, Mr. Ranney, a print- er, and their wives. Rev. Mr. Simons, and Miss Lillybridge, a teacher, all of whom resided in Maulmain, while Rev. Messrs. Wade, Haswell, and Howard with their families, were members of the mission, but absent on account of ill- health. In addition to these there were thir- teen native assistants, three of whom were sta^ tionod at Amherst. Attached to the Maul- main Karen Mission at this period, were Rev. Messrs. Binney, Harris, and W. Moore, with their wives, and Miss "Vinton and Miss Wright, teachers, Rev. Mr. Vinton and his wife being absent in the United States. In addition to these Were thirty-four native assistants, of whom five were ordained preachers, and thi'ee were teachers, at Maulmain and the numerous out- stations of the mission. Connected with the nine churches of these two missions were up- wards of nineteen hundred members, of whom more than seventeen hundred were Karens. There were also at Maulmain, a theological school for Karen preachers, and a normal school for teachers, together with a number of other schools, both for the Karen and the Bur- man population. In the mission at Tavoy, of which Mergui had now become a station, were Rev. Messrs. Mason, Bennett, Cross, Benjamin, and Brayton, with their wives, Mr. Brayton re- siding at Mergui. This mission has been al- most exclusively for the Karens, and around its two stations were fourteen outstations at the Karen villages which are scattered over the jungle, where were also employed under the direction of the missionaries, nineteen na- tive assistants of various orders. In its twenty- seven churches were also about eighteen hun- dred members. The Arracan Mission was now established at two stations, Akyab and Ramree, the former embracing Rev. Messrs. C. C. Moore and L. Ingalls ; the latter Rev. Messrs. Knapp and Campbell, with their wives, who had been appointed but had not arrived 14 at the station. Near Akyab was the single out-station of Orud«, and the number of native assistants attached to the mission was six. The Sandoway mission, which was designed for the Karens in its immediate vicinity, and also for those beyond the mountains in Burmah Proper, where the Gospel could not be preach- ed, comprised at this time Rev. Messrs. Abbott, Beecher, and Van Meter, with their wives. It embraced one station and thirty-six out^stations, and in addition to its missionaries, gave em- ployment to forty-four native preachers and assistants. The number of churches was thirty- six, and the whole number of church members about four thousand five hundred. Of these several missions, that at Sandoway probably extended its labors over the widest sphere, for it was designed for the persecuted Karens who dwelt in the neighboring districts of Burmah Proper, and who, beneath the se- vere oppressions of a cruel government, evinced the most extraordinary readiness to receive the Gospel of Christ. Though each of the missions was to some extent supported by contribu- tions gathered from its own churches, yet this was true of the Sandoway mission more fully than of any other. The efforts and sacrifices of these humble Christians to- secure the bless- ings of the Gospel and to maintain its institur tions in their villages, afford the noblest proof of the sincerity of their faith and the fervor of their piety. Several churches erected chapels at their own expense ; others supported their native pastors, while all contributed in some way or other to the pecuniary maintenance of the mission. Mr. Abbott repeatedly attempt- ed to obtain a permanent footing for the mis- sion in Burmah Proper, where so many of its converts were found, but though he occasionally visited Bassein and the neighboring districts he was wholly unsuccessful in securing the toleration of the government or even a per- mission for permanent residence. He, how- ever, was accustomed as frequently as practi- cable to meet the native pastors and preachers of these districts for the purpose of becoming familiar with their labors, and advising in their prosecution ; and at these interviews he would often administer the rite of baptism to large numbers of converts whom the assistants brought to him for the purpose. At these and other similar meetings in all the missions, the missionaries were accustomed to impart in- struction and give advice to the assistants and the converts, on all subjects which might re- quire their attention, whether relating to the doctrines and duties of the Gospel, or their own interests and prosperity as a people. Associated with the mission at Tavoy were the labors which were undertaken among the Salongs, - rude and oppressed people, about 10,000 in number, scattered among the islands on the coast ; and with the mission in Arracan was connected a department for the Kemees, an interesting people, among the mountains of 210 BURMAH. that province, whose character and condition, as has already been stated, have enlisted the sympathias of the missionaries. The return of Dr. Judson to Burmah, and his settlement at Maulmain, after an attempt to establish himself at Rangoon, or at Ava, have already been mentioned. Here he continued to reside, constantly occupied vrith the pre- paration of the Barman and English Diction- ary, to which the closing years of his life were principally devoted. He was excluded from the kingdom of Burmah ; but at Maulmain, under the protection of the British govern- ment, and with many facilities for the prose- cution of his work, he gave himself to the com- pletion of a task, whose accomplishment he fondly hoped would confer immeasurable ad- vantages on all future missionaries, and thus greatly promote the progress of the Gospel wherever the Burman language is spoken. The English-Burmese portion had already been completed and nearly printed ; and the Bur- mese and English portion was well advanced when the venerable compiler was obliged to lay down the pen with which he was com- pleting his noble work. In the autumn of 1849, his enfeebled constitution began to give signs of decay, and in a few weeks he was com- pelled to abandon his labors, and seek such means of recruiting his strength as the coun- try and the climate would allow. He made a trip to Mergui, and repaired to Amherst for sea-bathing ; but his strength continued to decline the more rapidly in consequence of an attack of fever, and his physicians pronounced a protracted voyage the only prescription with which they could associate any hope of benefit. In accordance with their directions, he took passage early in April, on board a French ship bound to the Isle of France. It was several days before the vessel was fairly at sea but the ocean airs brought no invigoration to his worn and fevered frame. The pilot left the vessel on the 8th of April, and on the 12th of the same month Dr. Judson breathed his latest breath, and on the same day his remains were buried at sea. His life had been wholly devoted to the mission, which, in solitude and persecution, he had planted on the shores of Burmah ; and the tidings of his death awaken- ed a profound sense of bereavement and sorrow among its members. As the intelligence spread from land to land, it carried grief to Christian hearts in every part of the world ; while in the country of his birth, and among the churches with which he was particularly connected, it called forth the sincerest demonstrations of respect for his memory, and of gratitude for the good he had wrought. Mrs. Judson, her- self in declining health.and those of his children who were in Burmah, returned to the United States in the autumn of 1851, and retired to the home of her parents, at Hamilton, N. Y. Here she has employed the hours which could be spared from the care of her family, in en- riching the literature of Christian missions with the productions of her own beautiful ge- nius, and especially in contributing many a pas- sage of touching reminiscence and life-like de- lineation to the memoirs of her departed hus- band — passages without which, in the absence of other materials, that admirable work must have been divested of many of its most attrac- tive features. As we write these closing pages of this rapid sketch of the missions in Bur- mah, the beautiful and heroic life of Mrs. Judson has been brought to a peaceful close, in June, 1854, at her home in Hamilton. The works which she contributed to the literature of the age, are a fitting illustration of her rare genius, while the brief records of her mission- ary career will transmit to other ages the memorials of her piety, and the sentiments of duty, faith and love which ever dwelt in the depth of her woman's heart. la October, 1849, there sailed from the United States, under appointment for the several missions in Burmah, Eev. Messrs. Har- vey E. Knapp, Harvey B. Campbell, and their wives, and Miss Elizabeth T. Wright. In the course of the year 1850, they were followed by Rev. Eugenio Kinoaid and Mrs. Kincaid, who had formerly been connected with the mis- sions, and also by Dr. John Dawson, a physi- cian, and Eev. Benjamin C.Thomas, and their wives ; Mr. Thomas being appointed especially to Mergui, or the Tavoy mission, while Mr. Kincaid and Dr. Dawson were commissioned to repair, if possible, to Ava, or to some other leading place in the kingdom of Burmah, and there to commence a mission. They arrived at Maulmain early in 1851, and repaired to Rangoon in the following March, where, hav- ing established their families, they commenced their labors, designing, as soon as the rainy season ceased, to ascend the Irrawaddy to Ava. They soon found themselves jealously and closely watched by the Burman governor of Rangoon. They were forbidden to distribute boolis or to associate with the people, and those who visited them were punished with fines, scourging and imprisonment. At length, early in May, a message came from the king, that " the American teachers were to be treat- ed with all possible favor," and an entire change was immediately wrought in the man- ner and bearing of the governor. Public wor- ship, and the various operations of a mission were commenced. A medical dispensary was opened, and multitudes of Burmans and Ka^ rens, many of them from a great distance in the interior, both converts and inquirers, flocked to the residence of the missionaries. The scriptures were widely circulated ; four Burmans and five Karens soon received the rite of Christian baptism, and the Christian converts of former years were gathered from their wide dispersion to the instructions of the missionaries and the ordinances of the Gospel. But in the midst of these scenes of tempo- BURMAH. rary encouragement -which marked the sum- mer and autumn of 1851, a\ as preparing an event that was destined to alter the entire condition of the Burman people, and to pre- pare the way for the universal dissemination of the Gospel over a thickly peopled country, in which the missionaries had sought, in vain, for nearly forty years, to obtain a permanent footing. This event was the war between Burmah and Great Britain — a war which was wantonly provoked by the faithlessness of the Burman government and its reckless encroach- ments on the interests and rights of the Bri- tish Kaat India Company. Hostilities were commenced, in November, 1851, by the un- expected firing of the Bm-man stockades, on some British war steamers which were ascend- ing the river. Negotiations were attempted, in order to settle difficulties which had been of long standing, but with no other effect than to delay a war which had now become inevitable. The relations of the two parties became daily more and more disturbed, and after several col- lisions between the forces, war was formally declared on February 15th, 1852. The mis- sionaries, and other foreign residents at Kan- goon, took refuge on board the English ships, in the preceding December, and soon after- ward sailed to Maulmain, where they remained till Rangoon, Martaban, and Bassein had fallen belore the advance of the British arms. So soon as hostilities ceased, they returned to what was formerly Rangoon, but they found the ancient city almost entirely destroyed, and a new city already rising from the ruins — laid out according to English ideas of order and regularity, and rapidly filling up with a popu- lation gathered from all parts of India. They immediately established themselves in a part of the town well suited to their purpose, in a large Kyoung or Burman monastery, and re- sumed tlieir labors as missionaries among all classes of the heterogeneous population. Un- usual .success soon crowned their labors. British soldiers were converted to Christ ; and Burmans and Karens, no longer deterred by the jealous tyranny of priests or rulers, eagerly embraced the Gospel. They were soon after- wards joined by other missionaries from Maul- main and Sandoway, who came to preach the Gospel in a region from which they had hith- erto been Excluded, but where they found multitudes, especially of Karens, already in- structed in its doctrines and clinging to its hopes. Meanwhile British arms were every- where triumphant, and on the 2Uth of Decem- ber, 1852, the entire southern portion of the kingdom of Burmah, including the ancient province of Pegu, was incorporated with the territories of British India. This district em- braces the whole of Burmah, lying between the Salwen river on the east, the Yoma mountains on the west, and the Bay of Ben- gal on the south, and esteuding north to the 19th parallel of north latitude, about fifty miles above the city of Prome. It embraces dn area of about 45,000 square miles, and a population of 2,500,000 : Burmans, Karens, Peguans, and the other races common in Bur- mah. The portion of this territory around Marta^ ban is annexed to the Amherst district, of which Maulmain is the capital, while the re- maining part is divided for the purposes of civil government into five separate districts, each of which is placed under the charge of an Assistan1>Commissioner, who is accountable to the Commissioner of the territory, and through him to the Governor-General of India. These districts are Pegu — which includes Rangoon, Toungoo, Henthada, Prcme, and Bassein. Such is the region which, as the result of the late war, has been liberated forever from Bur- man oppression, and incorporated with the British possessions in the East. It embraces districts in which, in spite of intolerance and persecution, the Gospel has already won some of its most remarkable triumphs among the Karens, and it is now placed under the general rule of a liberal-minded and pious Commis- sioner,* who, during his long residence in the East, has proved himself the active and unfail- ing friend of Christian missions, and the moral improvement of the people. In anticipation of this altered condition of the missions in Burmah, and the new fields which the progress of British power might open for their occupancy, the Executive Com- mittee of the Board of Managers requested the missionaries in Bvu-mah to assemble in convention in Maulmain in the spring of 1853, to consider what changes shoidd be made iu the organization and modes of prosecuting the missions. They also appointed Rev. Solomon Peck, D.D., the Senior Corresponding Secre- tary of the Board, and Rev. James N. Granger, Pastor of the First Baptist Church in Provi- dence, R. I., as a deputation to visit these, and the other missions of the Board in Asia, clothed with full discretionary authority to decide questions which might require immedi- ate decision, and to act for the Committee in all matters which could not be referred to the Committee for consideration. Receiving in- structions according to the nature of the pow- ers with which they were clothed, the members of the deputation embarked on their distant embassy. They met with the convention, which assembled at Maulmain, according tc appointment, April 4th, 1853, and continued its sessions for six weeks, to tlie 17th of May, The convention was attended by all the mis- sionaries in Burmah, except those who were detained by causes not within their control^ and all the leading subjects connected with the organization and conduct of the missions were thoroughly scrutinized and discussed, and. * Captain Arthur P. Phayre, who is intimately acquaint- ed with the miBBions in Burmah, and extends all proper facilities for their pr-jsecution. 212 BUKMAH. at the same time, mucli information was ob- tained respecting the portions of the recently conquered provinces which were deemed favor- able for missionary operations. The principal questions on which the deputation were called to act related to the following : 1. The selection of points at which new missions were to be established in the conquer- ed territory, and the designation of mission- aries to commence them. 2. The manner in which the missions should be conducted ; what should be embraced in their work, and by whom and in what proportions that work should be performed, together with the agen- cy of the native preachers and pastors, and their relations to the missionaries. 3. The true uses of mission schools, and the proper limits to the operations of the mission press. In relation to all these subjects, certain gen- eral conclusions were furnished by the con- vention as the result of the experience of the missionaries ; and these conclusions, to- gether with the general precepts and examples contained in the New Testament, touching the ' propagation of the tiospel, were made the basis of the action of the deputation. This action was also understood to be in accordance with the views of the missionaries themselves, and though involving many important changes and some personal sacrifices, it has by them been cheerfully adopted and carried into execution, to the larger extension and the increased effi- ciency an'd usefulness of the missions. Of these changes, the plan of this sketch re- quires that we notice only those which relate to the reorganization of the missions in order to secure the diffusion of the Gospel with the greatest success through the territory recently annexed to British India. For the purpose of accomplishing this, several important mod- ifications were made in the missions already existing, and five new missions were established or are contemplated : one in each of the sev- eral districts into which the territory has been divided ; and to carry these changes into effect, the missionaries in JBurmah, instead of being stationed at five or six of the principal citiesj are now widely scattered in nine or ten, and are brought in contact with a vastly larger proportion of the population of the country. Schools in some instances have been discon- tinued or their operations restricted ; and the printing establishments have been brought together in one, and that one at Maulmain, in order to liberate the missionaries from other cares, that they may give themselves more fully to preaching the Gospel to the heathen. In that portion of the country which is still subject to the Burman king, no mission has been established, or is at present contemplated. The war with the British East India Company has wrought no change in his exclusive and despotic policy, and the teachers of Christiani- ty are still shut out from all access to the peo- ple. Indeed, though the war has ceased, it can not be said that a permanent peace has been established, no treaty has been concluded, and no concessions have been made. The barbai'ian king has yielded up his territory only to the superior force . of the civilized enemy, whose hostilities he had provoked, and the time can- not be distant, when the same necessity again recurring, will compel him to surrender the last vestige of independent jui'isdiction, and to be- come a tributary of Great Britain. Mean- while, the mission at Ava, which had been con- templated, and to which missionaries had been appointed, is, for the present, abandoned, and the new missions have been established only in those portions of Burmah which have been placed under British jurisdiction, and where the missionaries may prosecute their work in secu- rity beneath the protection of British power. These new missions are, 1, at Eangoon, in the district of Pegu ; 2, at Bassein, in the district of Bassein ; 3, at iShwaygyeen, in the district of Amherst ; 4, at Prome in the district of Prome ; 5, at Toungoo, in the district of Touu- goo. A mission is also contemplated at Hen- thada, in the district of the same name, and ultimately at Tounghoop on the coast of Arra- can, the terminus of the great road to Prome. The missions which have been established all lie within the valleys of the three great rivers, along which are scattered the most thickly- peopled cities and villages of both Burmana and Karens. Throughout these districts, the uninterrupted progress of British arms, and the quiet establishment of British rule, have been attended with results of great importance in their bearing on the interests of the missions and the progress of the Gospel. The reign of intolerance and persecution is ended. The despotism beneath which the people had groan- ed for ages has been broken up for ever, and has given place to a government of justice and right, and more than all, the religious system of the country has lost its hold on the minds of men, in part, no doubt, from its being iden tified with the defeated cause, while Christian- ity has assumed a higher authority, from its being the religion of the conquerors and rulers of the East. While it has been embraced, and is now professed by whole villages of Karens, it is also making its way in the most encouraging manner among the Burmana at each of the several stations where it is regularly preached, alike in the old and the new provinces of British Burmah. At some of these sta- tions it is already planted in the faith and wrought into the daily lives of the people, so that if the missionaries wfere all withdrawn it would still be perpetuated to future genera- tions, and at all of them it finds as inviting a field as is now presented in any part of the world. The prayers of the earliest mission- aries have been answered and their fondest hope has been fully realized. During the year 1852, Rev. Messrs. M. H. Bixby and J. L. Douglas, both of whom had BURMAH. 213 been pastors of churches in this country, and Eev. Messrs. 0. Hibbard, D. Whitaker, J. R. Nisbet, T. Allen and A. T. Rose, were ap- pointed missionaries in Biirmah, and soon after- Tsards repaired to their several stations; and dur- ing the year 1853, Rev. A. R. Orawley was also added to the number. The missionaries of the American Baptist Missionary Union who are stationed in the several provinces of Burmah, are thirty-one ; several of whom are now on temporary visits to the United States. With these are associated about the same number of female assistants and one hundred and forty- five native assistants, of whom some fifteen or twenty are ordained preachers. These mis- sionaries and their assistants, according to the latest report of the Managers of the Mission- ary Union, are distributed among the follow- ing missions, which are now in operation in the several districts of Burmah, viz. : I. Maulmain Burman Mission.— It com- prises Rev. Messrs. Haswell, Howard, Stillson, Bixby and Mr. Ranney a printer, with their wives and five native preachers and assist- ants. The Burman church at Maulmain numbers 138 members and that at Amherst, which is also included in this mission, numbers 28 members. At Maulmain the printing operations both in the Burman and Karen lan- guages for all the Burman missions are at pre- sent concentrated. This mission has (1854) 2 stations, 5 missionaries, 5 female assistants, 5 native preachers and assistants, 3 churches, 170 members, 6 day-schools, 100 pupils. II. Maulmain Karen Mission. — This is es- tablished in a distinct portion of the city, which among the missionaries is styled, New- ton. It comprises Rev. Messrs. Wade, Ben- nett, Hibbard, W. Moore and Whitaker with their wives and nineteen native assistants. It is the seat of a theological school for training native preachers and of a normal school for the education of teachers. Around Maulmain ■which is the central station, are fifteen out-star tions, and the entire mission embraces fourteen churches, numbering about 900 members. Its operations are designed for the Karen race in the district of Amherst, which includes the adjoining and newly organized province of Martaban, whose seat of government is also at Maulmain. This mission has (1854) 1 sta^ tion, 15 out-stations, 5 missionaries, 6 female assistants, 19 native preachers and assistants, 14 churches 869 members, 2 boarding schools, 44 pupils, 3 day schools, 40 pupils — total 5 schools, 84 pupils. III. Tavoy Mission. — This is a mission both for Burmans and Karens, though its operations have hitherto been principally among the lat^ ter. It embraces Rev. Messrs. Gross, Thomas, Benjamin, and Allen, with their wives, and two Burman and twenty Karen native assist ants. The operations of the mission are de- signed to comprise the provinces both of Ta- voy and Mergui ; though at present the mis- sionaries all reside at Tavoy. In 1854, 1 station, 20 out-stations, 4 mission- aries, 4 female assistants, 22 native preachers and assistants, 22 churches, 1,046 members, 2 boarding-schools, 96 pupils, 15 day schools, 300 pupils ; total, 17 schools, 396 pupils. rV. Arracan Mission. — This mission, both Burman and Karen, is designed to embrace the whole province of Arracan. It has now two stations, Akyab and Sandoway, with out- stations at Oheduba and Ramree, Kyouk-Phyoo having been abandoned as a station by the advice of the deputation in 1853. At Ak- yab the missionaries are stationed. They are Rev. Messrs. 0. 0. Moore and Mrs. Moore, Rev. A. T. Rose, and Mrs. B. H. Knapp, Mrs. 0. 0. Campbell ; Mr. Knapp having died in 1853, and with them are associated eight native as- sistants. In 1854, 2 stations, 2 oui>station3, 2 mission- aries, 3 female assistants, 8 native preachers and assistants, 1 church, 60 members, 1 day- school, 15 pupils. V. Bassein Mission. — This is in the new ter- ritory, and embraces many of the churches and Christian villages in Barmah, formerly con- nected with the mission at Sandoway in Arra- can. It is designed hereafter to be both Karen and Burman, though the Gospel has thus far been embraced principally by the Ka- rens of the Bassein district. The mission em- braces in the Karen department, Eev. J. S. Beeoher, and Rev. J. R. Nisbet, Rev. H. L. Van Meter, and Mrs. Van Meter, Mrs. Beech- er having died in March, 1854, while on a voyage to the United States ; in the Burman department, Rev. J. L. Douglass and Mrs. Douglass. Rev. B. L. Abbott is also attached to this mission, but he is now in the United States. Bassein is on a river of the same name, one of the outlets of the Irrawaddy, about 60 miles from its mouth ; and around this principal station are fifty out-stations, among which are scattered fifty-six native preachers and assistants. The region is filled with Karen converts, who, under the Burman despotism, were obliged to cross the Toma mountains to Sandoway, to receive instructions and be baptized by the missionary, and these churches are now very numerous. The Bur- mans, since the Gospel has had access to them, are evincing a most encouraging interest in its truths. In 1854, 1 station, 50 ou1>stations, 5 mission- aries, 3 female assistants, 56 native preachers and assistants, 50 churches, 5,000 members, 1 boarding-school, 80 pupils, 20 day-schools, 280 pupils — total, 21 schools, 360 pupils. VI. Rangoon Mission. — This mission, like the others which have been mentioned, has both a Burman and a Karen department, and though established where the original mission in Burmah was first planted, is yet, in its pre- sent organization, to be regarded as a new 21i BUEMAH. mission. In the Burman department it em- braces Rev. Messrs. Stevens, Ingalls, Dawson, and Crawley, with their wives, and six native preachers and assistants ; and in the Karen department Bev. J. H. Vinton, Mrs. Vinton and Miss Vinton, with twenty-nine native preachers and assistants. The Karen depart- ment of the mission is established at Kemmen- dine, a town about three miles north-west of Rangoon. There are two Burman churches in tne mission, one at Eangoon, and one at Kambet, an out-station in the vicinity, and they together number 106 members. The Kar ren churches are twenty-three in number, most of them having been formed by missionaries from Maulmain, in the occasional visits which they made during the period in which the country was closed to the G-ospel by the des- potism of the government. They contain 1476 members. In 1854, 2 stations, 32 outstations, 5 mission- aries, 6 female assistants, 29 native preachers and assistants, 25 churches, 15*73 members, 1 boarding-school, 180 pupils. VII. Prome Mission. — This is a new mission, exclusively Burman, established near the city of Prome, on the Irrawaddy, the centre of the district of the same name, the most northerly of the districts comprised in the territory re- cently annexed. The mission is established at Shwaydouug, a chief seat of Burman education, eight miles distant from Prome. It was com- menced in January, 1854, according to the recommendation of the recent deputation, by Rev. Messrs. Kincaid and Simons, who about that time removed thither with their families and native assistants. As in almost all the large towns of Burmah, there were residing there several Christian converts, who welcomed the missionaries with the utmost eagerness. As the kingdom of Burmah is still closed to the labors of the missionaries, the design of establishing a mission at Ava, is for the pre- sent abandoned, and Messrs. Kincaid and Daw- son, who were appointed for that purpose, have been assigned — the former to the Prome and the latter to the Rangoon mission. The mis- sion at Prome or Shwaydoung has been com- menced with two missionaries, and two female assistants, (Messrs. Kincaid and Simons, and their wives) and two native assistants. It has one station and two out-stations. In 1854, 1 station, 2 outrstations, 2 mission- aries, 2 female assistants, 2 native preachers and assistants ; no church has yet been formed, and no schools have been established. VIII. Skwaygueen Mission. — This is both a Burman and a Karen mission, established in 1853, at Shwaygyeen, a large town at the junction of the Shwaygyeen and the Sitang rivers, about 100 miles northward from Ran- goon. It is one of the chief places in Marta- bau which now is in the district of Amherst. The mission has been commenced by Rev. Messrs. Harris and Brayton, both of whom are missionaries for the Karens, whose villages are exceedingly numerous and populous in the re- gion. They have with them two native assist- ants, and the auspices of the mission are most encouraging. In 1854, 1 station, 2 missionaries, 1 female assistant, 2 native preachers, 1 church, 11 mem- bers ; no schools have yet been established. IX. Toungoo Mission. — Toungoo is a large walled city, the chief town of the district of the same name, on the Sitang river, about one hundred miles above Shwaygyeen. It is one of the places fixed on by the deputation as the seat of a new mission in the conquered territory. The mission was commenced by Rev. Dr. Mason, who, with two or three assistants, reached the city in October, 1853. It is the centre of a large population of Burmans, Shy- ans and Karens, and the mission is designed for all these races. The Karens of the region regarded the arrival of a missionary, — bring- ing his sacred books printed in their own lan- guage, as a fulfilment of the ancient prophetic traditions of their race, and evinced even more than their wonted readiness to hear and be- lieve the G-ospel. A little church was soon organized, and the native assistants appointed to their respective labors, when Dr. Mason, whose health was already greatly impaired, was obliged to leave the mission for a time and return to the United States. The care of the mission has been committed to Tau Quala, an experienced Karen preacher from Tavoy. He has with him one Burmese assistant. In 1854, 1 station, 3 out-stations, 1 mission- ary, 1 female assistant, 2 native preachers and assistants, 1 church, 7 members, 1 boarding- school, 7 pupils, 3 day-schools, 36 pupils ; total, 4 schools and 43 pupils. X. Henthada Mission. — Henthada is the capi- tal of the district of the same name, and is situ- ated on the Irrawaddy, at the point where that stream branches into the Bassein and Rangoon rivers. The district embraces the very fertile and populous delta lying between these rivers. A mission has been appointed for Henthada, but no missionaries have yet actually arrived to establish it. — Prof. W. Gammell. TABLE OF MISSIONS IN BDEMAH FOB 1854. i -2 1 1 11 i 1 1 hi) 1 1 % § V. B ■S i a, ■3 S o s & d d & & a s. s 12 124 31 31 u& 117 8,136 1 407 48 771 66 1,178 BURNSHILL: A station of the Free Church of Scotland in South Africa, about 18 miles east of Lovedale. BUSHMEN ; A nomadic race of Hottea- BUSHMEN— CALPENTYTSr. 215 tots in South Africa, who hve a wandering life, remote from towns, in a condition of ex- treme degradation. They have, says Mr. Mof- fat, neither house nor shed, neither flocks nor herds. Their most dehghtful home is afar off in the desert, the unfrequented mountain pass, or the sechided recesses of a cave or ravine. They remove from place to place, as conveni- ence or necessity requires. The man takes his spear, and suspends his bow and quiver on his shoulder ; while the woman frequently, in ad- dition to the burden of a helpless infant, car- ries a mat, an earthen pot, a number of ostrich egg-shells, and a few ragged skins, bundled on her head or shoulders. Hunger compels them to feed on everything edible. Ixias, wild gar- lic, the core of aloes, gum of acacias, and sev- eral other plants and berries, some of which are extremely unwholesome, constitute their fruits of the field ; while almost every kind of living creature is eagerly devoured, lizards, locusts and grasshoppers not excepted. The poisonous, as well as innoxious serpents, they roast and eat, extr&ting first the venom of the former, with which they poison the points of their arrows. Their dwellings are hardly fit abodes for the beasts of the field. In a bushy country, they will form a hollow in a central position, and bring the branches together over- head. Here the man and his wife, with per- haps a child or two, lie huddled in a heap, on a little grass, in a hollow spot not. larger than an ostrich's nest. Where bushes are scarce, they form a hollow under the edge of a rock, covering it partially with reeds or grass, and they are often found in fissures and caves of the mountains. In these places, they lie close together, like pigs in a sty. They are ex- tremely lazy, so that nothing will rouse them to action but excessive hunger. They are total strangers to domestic happiness. The men have several wives, but conjugal affection is little known. They take no great care of their children, and never correct them, except in a fit of rage, when they almost kill them with severity. In a quarrel between father and mother, or between the several wives of a husband, the defeated party wreaks vengeance on the child of the conqueror, which, in gene- ral, loses its life. Bushmen will kill their children without remorse, when they are ill- shaped, when in want of food, when the father of a child has forsaken its mother, or when obliged to flee from pursuers. They will even throw them to the hungry lion, which stands roaring before their cavern, refusing to depart till some peace-offering is made to him. In general, the children cease to be the objects of a mother's care, as soon as they are able to crawl about the field. In some few instances, however, we meet with a spark of natural af- fection, which places them on a level with the brute creation. The Bushman knows no God, no eternity, yet dreads death. He worships at no shrine — has no religion. "We can scarcely conceive of human beings descending lower in the scale of ignorance and vice. Yet they can be kind and grateful, and faithful to their charge. And it is their habitual practice, when they receive food, to share it with their friends, re- serving the smallest portion for themselves ; and the hungry mother will give food to her emaciated children without tasting it herself. (For attempts to Christianize the Bushmen, see South Africa). — Moffat's Southern Africa, pp. 16-21 ; 46-50. BUSSORAH : A great city to the south- east of Bagdad, 7 miles in circumference, a part of which is laid out in gardens, intersected with canals. Pop. 60,000 ; Ai-abs, Turks, Jews, Hindoos and Persians. A station of the London Jews' Society. BUTTBEWOETH : A station of the Wp^ leyans in Kaffraria, on the Buffalo river, S. A. CABALIST : A Jewish doctor, who pro- fesses the study of the Cabala, or the mysteries of Jewish traditions. CAIEO : The capital city of Egypt, the residence of the viceroy, and the seat of gov- ernment, near the right bank of the Nile, and five miles from the origin of its delta. Popu- lation, including the suburbs of Boulac and Old Cairo, about 250,000, comprising about 125,000 Mohammedans, 60,000 Copts, 3,000 to 4,000 Jews, and numerous foreigners. Cli- mate, healthy and little variable. The Church Missionary Society have here a mission to the Copts. See Egypt. CALCUTTA : The chief of the British Presidencies in India — the seat of the first Pro- testant Bishop's See, the diocese extending over all the territories of the company. Pop- ulation, as estimated in 1849, 250,000 within the " ditch," and 500,000 in the immediate suburbs. "Within a circumference of twenty miles, the population is generally supposed to be two millions. The city contains a mixed population of Chinese, English, Portuguese, French, Armenians, Jews, Monghols, Par- sees, Arabs, &c., the great mass consisting of Hindoos and Mohammedans. The Hindoos alone number about 200,000. Calcutta is the seat of missionary operations for various CALEDON : Station of the London Mis- sionary Society in South Africa, 120 miles east of Cape Town, near a branch of the Cradock river, Caledon district. CALIF, Caliph, or Kalip : A represent- ative of Mohammed, bearing the same relation to him that the Pope pretends to bear to St. Peter. CALOTERS or Calooeki : Monks of the Greek Church, of three orders. CALPENT"S"N : A peninsula, extending about 60 miles along the west coast of Ceylon, a station of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. CALTURA . A station of the Wesleyan 216 CALICUT— CANADA. Missionary Society, in Ceylon, 26 miles from Colombo. CALICUT : A town in the province of Malabar, India, 10.3 miles south west of Sering- apatam. In 1800, it contained 5,000 houses. The inhabitants are chiefly Mapillas, who are of Arabian extraction. It is a station of the German Missionary Society. C ALMONT : Station of the Church Mis- sionary Society, in the River District, Sierra Leone, to the S. E. of Freetown. OAMBROONS : A region of country bor- dering on the river and mountains of that name, in Upper Guinea, Africa, occupied by the Baptist Missionary Society. CANADA : This extensive country, lying on the northern border of the States of Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York and Ohio, and the eastern border of Michi- gan, was discovered by the French navi- gator, Jacques Cartier, in the middle of the sixteenth century, but was not entered upon as a place of European settlement, until the beginning of the seventeenth. At about the game period the Pilgrim Fathers of New England landed there, with an open and loved Bible, an evangelical faith, and a manly attacjiment to freedom, both civil and reli- gious, — and the French adventurers landed at Stadacona (Quebec) and at Hochelaga, (Montreal), accompanied by ecclesiastics, to take possession of the land in the name of the French monarch and of the Papacy. Both parties brought with them as a most cher- ished object, their religion, designing to stamp the country which they respectively came to occupy, with that great element of a people's greatness. They founded their respective Colonies on a religious basis, and amid acts of homage to God, they set up their banners. Yet was there a mighty dif- ference between these two events, — a differ- ence lying mainly in the character of the religion they brought with them. The founders of New England were Protestants — the founders of Canada were Romanists. The former were enlightened and free, — the latter were superstitious and spiritually en- slaved. And although the Protestants land- ed upon barren rocks, and the Romanists in the midst of fertile valleys, the respective history of the lands they came to people, proclaims trumpet-tongued, the superiority of a free Bible Christianity, over superstition and priestism, in moulding the character and influencing the destinies of a nation. The first missions to Canada were those of Rome, which were immediately and muni- ficently endowed by the French monarch. The Jesuits were early in the field. They founded a coUgge at Quebec and stretched their dependent missions to the small settle- ments on the river. They established, more- over, a chain of posts, westward, many of which belong rather to the history of the United States than to that of Canada. In the year 1641, they erected their first church in the city of Montreal, which with accus- tomed mariolatry, they dedicated to the Vir- gin. It would not comport with the design of this work to narrate the conflicts which occurred between the several orders of ec- clesiastics for the possession of this fair and promising field of missions. Suffice it to state, that at length the Jesuits obtained the preeminence at Quebec and at St. Francis, while the St. Sulpicians had possession of Montreal. There were also orders of friars and nuns who formed an important part of the ecclesiastical machinery of the country. Ample endowments were secured to all these parties, — which the progress of events and the development of the country commercially and otherwise, by a different race and Pro- testant in religion, have rendered of vast value. The Jesuits became the seigneurs of Quebec. By gift and purchase they acquired lands in various places between that city and Montreal ; so that the estates which bear their name, have now a money value of not far from one million of pounds currency, or four millions of dollars. At the cession of the country to Great Britain, this Order was declared illegal, and their estates were confiscated to the Crown on the death of the last of them. They are now in the hands of the colonial government, administered in an unprofitable manner, and their avails, which it is presumed might be easily doubled in amount, are mainly assigned to the support of Roman Catholic schools and colleges. The Seminary of St. Sulpice received the seigniory of the city and island of Montreal, the seigniory of the Lake of the Two Mount- ains, and some other property from which it is estimated they derive an income of at least one hundred and twenty thousand per annum. They have retained this property under the British government, and have been incor- porated by the local Legislature, for the pur- pose of holding it as an endowment for their churches, missions to the Indians, and schools. But as they are never called effect- ually to account for their use of the money they receive, it can be, without fear of com- plaint, assigned to any object that would bid fair to advance the interests of the Church of Rome on this continent. The ancient nunneries of Quebec, Three Rivers, and Montreal, were also richly en dowed. The writer has not the means at hand of ascertaining the wealth of those at Quebec and Three Rivers, but the two in Montreal have large and increasing revenues. Some of their most valuable estates have been placed in enterprising hands at long leases, which now yield to their holders a large return, and will ultimately give to the revered sisterhood a vast accessional income. It is to be understood that these acquisitions CANADA. 217 by gift and purchase were made by the cor- porate bodies indicated, during the French colonial history of Canada. At that period the country west of ^Montreal, afterwards made a distinct province under the name of Upper Canada, and subsequently reunited with its eastern sister bearing the name of Canada West, was not inhabited except by tribes of Indians and wandering traders in furs. Canada was ceded to Great Britain in 1763 : the conquerors dealing with the people in the most lenient and liberal manner — confirming their laws, language and religion, their tithes to the clergy, and their ecclesias- tical endowments. But speedily a Protestant and Anglo-Saxon element was introduced, which has steadily increased until it is now, in respect of the whole of Canada, the pre- dominant element. At the above date the population of the country did not exceed 70,000. In 1783, it had increased in Lower Canada to about 112,000, but at this time Up- per Canada had about 10,000 inhabitants, of whom the dwellers at the numerous frontier forts and the garrisons constituted by far the greater part. After this period, the number of settlers was augmented by a great accession of United Empire loyalists and disbanded soldiers, and by immigrants from the United States and from Great Britain, so that in the year 1814, the inhabitants of Upper Canada had increased to 95,000, and in 1824 to 152,000 ; while at the latter date. Lower Canada contained a population of 450,000. United Canada now contains a population of two millions, of whom not more than 700,000 are the descendants of the original French set- tlers ; moreover, Canada West now slightly exceeds the Eastern section of the province in population, — a circumstance which must necessarily become more prominent in the future history of the country, seeing that there is a constant tide of immigration into the country, no part of which comes from France. Whenever the number of Protestants be- came such as to invite the attention of their co-religionists in England, the venerable Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, sent out a few Episcopalian ministers and sustained them ; there came also on to the field a few Scottish Presby- terian ministers, and from the United States, Episcopal Methodist missionaries. Later, namely, in 1829, the American Home Mission- ary Society had several Congregational and Presbyterian missionaries introduced to the country, and continued for about ten years to do something for Canada. The Wesleyan Methodists of England, sent out several mis- sionaries earlier than the above date, and assisted not only in their support, but also in training promising young men for their itinerant ministry, la 1836, the Congrega- tionalists of England entered the Canadian field, and have had ever since a growing mis- sion in the country. The United Presby- terian Church of Scotland, and later the Free Church of Scotland, have done good mission- ary service in the land. These hints will suffice to show that up to this hour Canada is missionary ground, and that all the leading Protestant denominations have entered upon its cultivation. There are now in the cities numerous self-sustaining churches, but by far the largest portion of those in the rural dis- tricts are partly dependent on missionary funds for the support of their pastors. It must be obvious that in estimating the religious con- dition of Canada as represented by the num- ber of churches, ministers, and other Chris- tian agencies found within its precincts, it will be needful to define the stand-point from which the character of the several religious bodies are viewed. It must, alas ! be acknowledged by all observing disciples of Christ, that there exist throughout Chris- tendom many organizations bearing the name of churches, which have little in them of the spirit and character of our Divine Master. There are individuals in them all " probably more or less numerous, who love the truth as it is in Jesus, but the character of the whole body is the reverse of evangeli- cal. This definition need not be given in respect to the Church of Rome, as her char- acter for Christian illumination and influence wiU be readily estimated by the readers of this work. They will find her describad 2 Thess. ii. 3 — 12. But in relation to the other bodies to be noted, it may be well to say that their measure of evangelical influ- ence is estimated from a stand-point such as that occupied by , the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, by its Secretaries, Committee, and principal sup- porters. Viewing the Episcopalian Church, called " the United Church of England and Ireland," from that point, it cannot, as ex- hibited in Canada, be termed as a whole, or even mainly evangelical. Its communion is usually without restriction as to the piety or want of piety of its members. Its clergy, with some bright and delightful exceptions, are, so far as can be judged, ignorant of sav- ing truth ; and as a consequence, its ministry is not effective in the conversion of sinners. There are in each of the three Dioceses of Canada bright exceptions to this descrip- tion : men of God who love the Lord Jesua Christ in sincerity, and seek by all means in their power to promote the advancement of our Lord's Kingdom. There are also lay- men of remarkable excellence connected with this church whose influence is most decided in the cause of evangelical religion. But the writer has no doubt that these excellent men would endorse as true, the general represen- tation given above. It should be borne in 218 CANADA. mind, througliout, howeyer, that the regular servicea of the Church, bring before the minds of the people a large portion of Scrip- tare, and consequently of saving truth. These few men hope much from this. Before proceeding with an estimate of other bodie.5, some statistical facts regarding the foregoing, may be placed on record. The Roman Catholic Church in Canada is divided into seven dioceses, namely: Quebec, Three Rivers, Montreal, and St. Hyaointhe, in East- ern Canada, and Bytown, Kingston, and Toronto, in Western Canada. That of Que- bec contains 111 parishes, exclusive of those of the city. There are an archbishop, a coadjutor bishop, and 184 clergy, including chaplains of nunneries, officers of colleges, &c. That of Three Rivers contains, includ- ing the town, 38 parishes. It has a bisliop and a body of clergy in all the offices num- bering 51. That of Montreal contains 108 parishes. It has a bishop and a coadjutor, and including the ecclesiastics of the Semi- nary of St. Sulpice, the professors in colleges, (the Jesuits among them) and other clerical officials, the body of clergy numbers 209. This does not include brotherhoods and sis- terhoods in convents. That of St. Hyacinthe contains 36 parishes, but some of these are rather stations amid Protestant communities. It has a bishop and 55 clergymen. "Western Canada being Protestant ground, there are no Roman Catholic parishes, but there are three bishops and 112 priests laboring there, chiefly among the Irish Roman Catholic settlers. The entire people to whom these bishops and clergy minister, nearly as much need the circulation of the Bible among them, and the mission of evan- gelical agencies, as heathendom itself. The Church of England in Canada, has three dioceses, namely, Quebec, Montreal, and Toronto ; the latter more extensive than the two former put together. There are three bishops, and including arch-deacons, and other officials gathered around the three bishops, there are of clergy in the diocese of Quebec, 42, in that of Montreal, 53, and 4 retired missionaries ; and in that of Toronto, 148. It is estimated that in the diocese of Montreal there are about 30,000 nominal adherents, but the number of com- municants is only about 3,000. Of the other dioceses the writer has not the particulars on these points. The Presbyterians in Canada are divided into three principal sections, namely: the Synod which retains its connection with the EstabUshed Church of Scotland — the Synod which without formal ecclesiastical connec- tion, yet represents the Free Church of Scotland — and the Synod of the United Presbyterian Church, a branch of that Church in Scotland, but without formal ecclesiastical connection with it. The first of these is very similar in thu character of its pastorate and its membership to the Established Church of Scotland. The discourses of the pulpit are sound and evangelical, but not usually pointed. The clergy are well educated and respecta- ble. The membership contains many of God's saints, but like that of all established churches, it is mixed in its character. The second of these bodies possesses a large amount of energy ; it is one of the youngest of the denominations in Canada, but it has already done an extensive and good work. Coming out from the churches connected with the establishment, its pastorate and membership will be without difficulty esti- mated by all who are aware of the religious history of Scotland during the last ten years. The third of these bodies, though the small- est, is highly respectable as to character and influence. They are eminently sound in the faith, and preach the Word of the Lord with boldness. There are seventy-three ministers and three retired, in connection with tlie first mentioned sections of Presbyterianism, and forty-three vacant charges are reported ; but it is to be presumed that some of these are little more than nominal. The full sta- tistics of this body are not in the hands of the writer. The following facts relating to the second of these three sections of Presbyterianism are given in the words of a thoroughly furnished officer of Synod, and have relation to the pre- sent year, (June, 1854.) "I may mention generally, that ten years ago, when our Church was organized, there were twenty-five min- isters ; now we have on our roll 92 names of ordained ministers, embraced in eight Pres- byteries, seven in Canada West, and one in in Canada East. During the past year, nearly £12,000 ($48,000), has been raised within the church for the support of our Theologicallnstitution ; about £430 ($1,720) for the French Canadian Missionary Society and nearly £400 ($1,600), for foreign mis- sions. The church also supports a mission- ary in the Buxton settlement, among the colored population. In our various presby- teries there are at least 50 vacant congrega- tions and mission stations, which (the latter) are multiplying every year. Knox's College is attended by about 40 students, and has been the means of sending forth upwards of 30 of the ministers now on the roll of the Synod." The third section of Presbyterians report, in 1853, forty-nine ordained ministers and three probationers ; but the names of 73 con- gregations appear upon the tables, of which eighteen are vacant. The " average attend- ance" throughout the church amounts to 12,845, showing an increase of 2,287 upon the returns of the previous year. The total in- come has been £6,425 ($24,500) ; of which $16,000 were expended on stipend and CAKADA— CANNIBALS. 219 S8,000 on 'Church property." For mis- sions, including Theological Fund Chair, the church raised $2,200. Compared with pre- vious returns, increase is observable in most of these items. Of the remaining Christian organizations in Canada, it is not needful to do more than to record statistics, inasmuch as their char- acter in ^-espect to the pastorate and mem- bership is similar to that of the bodies of the same name in the United States. The Methodist body is divided into four sections, as follows : The "Wesleyan Methodist Church in Canada raises about $21,000 for domestic and In- dian missions, of which it has 81 in number, supplied by 91 ministers. The total minis- terial force of this body, including the above mentioned missionaries, is 216. The sister church in Eastern Canada, numbers 20 min- isters. The congregations raised last year $2,800 for missions, but more than this amount was expended on the Canadian sta- tions. In future, the East and West will be united in one organization. The Methodist New Connection Church has flfty-two ministers. The Methodist Episcopal Church has 91 ministers, includ- ing the supernumeraries, but excluding those who are superannuated. The Primitive Methodist Church numbers thirty-two min- isters. The remaining denominations of any im- portance are the Congregational and the Baptist. Eighteen years since there were only nine Congregational churches in the country ; there are now sixty-two, having 12.3 principal sta- tions. The number of ministers is fifty-nine, having about 10,000 hearers, and a member- ship of 2,750. There are 60 Sabbath Schools with nearly 400 teachers and 3000 pupils. This body contributed for the support of the pastorate and of worship during the year Governor, Sir Edward Barnes, gave notice through his secretary, that the government would not allow any increase of American missionaries in Ceylon, and that 22G CETLON. Mr. Garrett coukl not be permitted to remain on the island. Memorials to the Lieutenant- Governor were unavailing, and Mr. Garrett embarked for Bombay. Soon after the arrival of the reinforcement, Messrs. Winslow and Spaulding commenced their labors at Oodooville. Dr. Scudder took np his residence at Panditeripo, and Mr. Woodward joined Mr. Poor at Tillipally. In 1821, five years from the commencement of the mission, five stations were occupied, and the missionaries, besides the labor of preach- ing and visiting, were superintending 24 schools, containing 1,150 children, and educat- ing eighty-seven heathen children in their own families. Nine young men had given evidence of true conversion, and had been gathered into the church, and three of them had been licensed to preach the Gospel. Mrs. Poor, the wife of Rev. Daniel Poor, died on the 7th of May, 1821, after a short illness, and Eev. Mr. Richards, who had long since been compelled to relinquish his labors, died in August of the same year, at Tillipally. In 1822, the missionaries drew up a pros- pectus of a college or high school for Tamil and other youth, setting forth with great par- ticularity its plan and course of study, its ob- jects, and its contemplated benefits. Some of the more prominent of these were, the inculca- tion of true science in connection with Chris- tianity, a higher standard of education among the people, the raising up of native preachers, translators, teachers, &c., and the influence of such an institution on the primary schools. This subject was laid before the Board in an elaborate and urgent form, and the proposed college, or higher seminary, was subsequently established. The scenes and events of 1824 were of very marked and peculiar interest to this mission. In Januai-y of that year, indications of unusual seriousness were observed at TiUipally, and in a little time, proofs of the presence of the Holy Spirit appeared at all the other stations. A revival of religion, of undoubted genuine- ness and great power, had commenced, and, within a few months, changes of a most sur- prising and affecting character were witnessed. At Panditeripo, Dr. Scudder's station, the re- ligious interest increased till, on the 12th of February, the convictions of sin and of the need of salvation, became as deep and earnest as ever marked a revival in a Christian land. The boys of the school were so deeply im- pressed, that, on retiring to their rooms in the evening, they could not sleep. Between 30 and 40 of them went out into the garden, where they were heard in supplication, weep- ing and asking, " "What shall I do to be saved?" and "Lord, send thy Spirit." Of this company more than 20 soon gave evidence of a saving change. Similar scenes were wi1> nessed in all the boarding-schools, and, as a result, fifty-si.^; native convcrt.-i were admitted to the church. Most of them continued to give evidence of true conversion. The contemplated high school at Batticotta having been established, a class of the best scholars was received into it from the school at Tillipally, making room for others at the latter place, and more than one hundred ap- plied for admission at a single examination — a great change from the time when the mis- sionaries could not persuade nor hire a single child to live on their premises. During the year 1826 several seasons of special religious interest were enjoyed by the mission, attended with the same results, though not as extensive, as during the first revival. These wonderful changes were wrought by no such means as were employed by the Por- tuguese and Dutch missions. A totally differ- ent policy had been pursued. The mission- aries simply preached, prayed, conversed, and distributed Bibles and traote among the adults, and established schools among the children, till more than 2000 had been taught the rudi- ments of learning and the simple truths of Christianity. This, without external pomp or force, or the enticing words of man's wisdom, became the wisdom and the power of God among a people who, just before, were involved in the ignorance, degradation and idolatry of paganism. It was a demonstration of the fact, — too little understood by many at that day, — that the regeneration of the heathen was to be effected, not by might nor by power, but by the Spirit of the Lord. In reviewing their work in August, 1827, after eleven years of toil, the missionaries were enabled to speak of large accessions to the church ; the abandonment of idolatry by many of the natives who had rot embraced Chrlg- tianity ; a general spirit of inquiry among the people ; a press in operation, and a better supply of the Scriptures, which were read with avidity ; more than 80 schools in successful operation ; and about 30 native assistants in various departments of the work. One year later, August, 1828, the missionaries say, " The attachment of the people to their gods is de- creasing, and there is a great stir among the Roman Catholics, in consequence of a tract recently addressed to their priests, who had commanded the people to burn our books." In April, 1829, they allude with special inter- est to the qualification of a number of pious youths to make known the Gospel, an increas- ing spirit of inquiry among the natives, and the^ distrust they were beginning to feel in their systems of geography, astronomy and philosophy, long held by them to be divine. Particularly had the confidence of learned natives in their systems been shaken, by a seri- ous error in their calculations of an eclipse, which was pointed out to them by the mission- aries, and proved by the event. The circum- stance did much to destroy the authority ol their sacred books. In October, 1830, the CEYLON. 227 mission was favored with anotlicr season of awaliening, during wliich many were con- verted, and the church and the missionaries were quickened and encouraged. In March, 1831, a disastrous fire occurred, in which the house, church, study, and large school bungalow at Manepy were destroyed, together with the furniture, library, clothing, &c., of Mr. and Mrs. Woodward. In this ca- lamity many of the natives rejoiced, believing it to be an evidence that the anger of the gods rested upon the missionary. On the 21st of the same month 34 persons were received to the church at Oodooville. On the 24th of July of this year, Mr. and Mrs. Meigs were called to bury an amiable and beloved daughter, Harriet, aged 11 years. She had dedicated herself to the Saviour ten months before, and had given decided evidence of piety. At the close of this year it was said, in regard to the female boarding school at Oodooville, that none had been long members of it without be- coming hopeful subjects of converting grace, and that none had dishonored their profession, All who had left the school were married to Christian husbands, and were training up far milies in a Christian manner. During this year, also, twenty-eight from the seminary at Batticotto,, were added to the church. On the 15th of January, 1832, thirteen na- tives from Tillipally and Oodooville, were add- ed to the church, and on the 4th of March, ten more were received. At this period the missionaries commenced the plan of sending out the most intelligent and pious young men of the seminary, to visit the people regularly from house to house, carrying tracts, and a cir- cular letter from the missionaries to the peo- ple. The result was highly favorable. At the close of this year a theological class was formed in the seminary at Catticotta, consist- ing of about thirty students, who had comple- ted their course in the seminary. This was viewed by the missionaries as a most important step ; for they considered, that while European and American missionaries must be pioneers in this work, it could not be carried on and completed without the aid of a native ministry. In January, 1833, the mission was afflicted by the sudden death of Mrs. Winslow. She departed in great joy and triumph, and her memoir, as well as that of Mrs. Newell, will live to quicken the zeal of the church and sti- mulate the hopes and labors of other mission- aries, till the heathen are all converted to God. On the 24th of this month, at the quar- terly church meeting at Oodooville, twelve new members were admitted, one of them a daughter of Mr. Spaulding. In July of this year, a reinforcement, consisting of Rev. Messrs. Todd, Hutchins, Hoisington, and Apthorp, and Dr. Nathan Ward, embarked at Boston, taking with them a printing press. In June, Mr. Winslow baptized the interpreter of the court of Mallagum, a man of sterling charac- ter and of high respectability among the nar fives. He had embraced Christianity amid much opposition. During this month several buildings belonging to the mission at Tillipally were destroyed by fire, and in the following August the church was set on fire, and nearly all the Tamil books and tracts were destroyed. On the 28th of October the missionaries who embarked at Boston in July, arrived in Ceylon. Dr. Ward being now on the ground. Dr. Scudder commenced a new station at Chava- gachery, a parish containing a numerous popu- lation. Mr. Winslow, after the death of his wife, embarked for America, taking with him his three children, and seven belonging to other families in the mission. Near the close of the year 1834, the mission experienced another signal visitation of mercy. Two of the most pleasing features attending this work, say the missionaries, were its quick- ness and depth. Conversion almost immedi- ately foUovved conviction, and the depth of feeling was manifested by uninterrupted prayer and praise, in their general meetings, social circles, and private rooms. This revival was carried on in connection with protracted meet^ ings, at nearly all the stations. At the quar- terly communion of the seven local churches of the mission, in March, 1835, forty-seven na- tives, male and female, were publicly received into the church, and a daughter of Mr. Meigs was received at the same time. In the latter partof the year 1835, the seminary at Batticotta was again visited with the influences of the Holy Spirit; and in September,1836,thefemalesem- inary at Oodooville received a like visitation. In May, 1837, there was another revival in the seminary at Batticotta. During this year there were 49 admissions to the church, and 24 excommunications, many of them for marry- ing heathen wives. The mission this year ex- perienced a most painful reverse, in being obliged, through a deficiency of the funds of the Board, to dismiss 45 students from the seminary at Batticotta, and 8 from the female seminary at Oodooville. They were compelled also, from the same cause, to relinquish nearly all the village schools, to curtail their printing operations, and to reduce their own expenses below the demands of health and comlbrt. By the dispersion of the schools, the Sabbath congregations were nearly broken up, and in every direction efficient missionary labor was made nearly impossible. " We could have wished," say the missionaries, " that Christians in America could have turned aside for a day, from buying, and selling, and getting gain, to see these 45 boys, as they left the seminary to go back to their heathen homes." It was to the mission, a sudden, unforeseen blow, coming, as they said, like a thunderbolt, and breaking up plans and operations whose success, under God. depended very much upon their permanency. In the aggregate, not less than 171 schools were disbanded, and the number of pupils dio 228 CEYLON. missed exceeded 5000. One of the older mis- sionaries, in dismissing the schools from his sta- tion, says, in fit and most affecting language, " I told them the reason, exhorted them to read the Bible, and not to enter into temptation, to keep the Sabbath holy, — prayed with them, commending them to tltie Friend of little chil dren, and then sent them away — from me, from the Bible class, from the Sabbath-school, from the house of prayer, — to feed on the mountains of heathenism, with the idols under the green trees ; a prey to the roaring lion, to evil demons, and to a people more ignorant than they, even to their blind, deluded and de- luding guides, — and when I looked after them as they went out, my heart failed me. what an offering to Swamy \^ive thousand children .'" These events, on becoming known, moved the deepest sympathies of the Board and of the churches, and with the least possible delay the Prudential Committee removed the restrictions which they had imposed, not willingly, but be- cause they could not disburse what was not in their treasury. The receipts of the Board had been cut short by the extreme pecuniary pressure which, at that time, prevailed in this country. This information from the Committee, reliev- ing the mission of its embarrassments, was re- ceived in November 1838, upon which joyful occasion a day of special thanksgiving was kept. Though the injury could not be repaired at once, schools enough were soon resumed to give a degree of efficiency to the system. At this date four presses were in operation, giving employment to 70 natives, and issuing a much larger amount of missionary and other publi- cations, than any other establishment of the kind in Southern India. Thirty-seven native converts were received to the church in 1839. The number in the female seminary at Oodooville at this date was 95 — within five of the number in 1837, before the calamity above referred to. A view of the domestic habits of the pupils of this school is thus given : " When they take their food they sit in rows, facing each other, each with a brass plate or dish to receive her portion of rice and curry, or congee. When all are served, one implores a blessing on the food, after which they begin to- eat. They eat with the hand, if it be rice, or with a leaf instead of a spoon if it be congee. Their dress is of white cotton cloth, consisting of a short loose jacket, and a cloth varying in length from two to five yards, according to their size, wrapped about them and flowing down to their feet. Both in food and dress it is thought best for them to follow the usages of native society. The girls of the school, of whatever caste or family, all eat together without complaint." In the year 1840 there were 9,520,000 pages of Scripture, and 1,788,000 pages of tracts printed, making a total of more than eleven millions of pages. A very full and elaborate report was made by the mission this year, on the importance of giving instruction through the English language. They represent the native language as so much a part and parcel of heathenism, so deficient in scientific and theo- logical terms, and so unwieldy, that it cannot be made the vehicle of correct ideas, and espe- cially not of doctrinal truths and the senti- ments of a pure Christian morality. Two important regulations were adopted in 1841. The first was, that the pupils then be- longing to the seminary at Batticotta should be required in future to furnish their own clothing ; and the second was, that every youth, on entering the seminary, should be re- quired to give security for the payment of his board during the whole seminary course. These measures were well received by the com- munity, and a new class was admitted on this plan. In 1842 a small paper was published in Tamil, with about 700 subscribers, its columns being open to communications from native Christians, and from heathens. In a report to the Board this year, mention is made of the temporal advantages which the natives derived from Christianity : " When I arrived in Jaffna twenty-six years ago," says Mr. Meigs, " there were but five bullock carts in the whole dis- trict ; now there are more than 500. The temporal condition of the people has also greatly improved during that period, in many other ways. ' They have more learning, more wealth, more enterprise, and fewer taxes." From the very outset, the missionaries had taken special care not to admit any to baptism and to the church who did not give evidence of having been regenerated by the Spirit of God, and who were not thus prepared for the trials they must meet with on leaving the seminaries. Never were instructions more faithful and searching, and yet heathenism could not be at once and entirely eradica- ted from the hearts of the natives, and pain- ful defections were often witnessed. The most disheartfening instance of the kind that ever occurred in connection with this mission was in the spring of 1843, when it was discov- ered that a system of deception, lying, and other gross forms of corruption, had crept into the Batticotta seminary. A thorough investi- gation was made, and 61 scholars, including the whole of the select class, were immediately ex- pelled from the school. Several of the native teachers were at the same time dismissed, and those that remained were divested of much of their responsibility, the missionaries themselves assuming their duties. Trying as such a pro- cess was, there was no alternative, and the result showed its wisdom. It illustrated to the peo- ple of the whole district the high requisitions of the Bible, the purity and sacredness of the church, and the utter repugnance of Christian- ity to the vices of heathenism. It inspired confidence in the missionaries also, as beino- unselfish, and concerned for nothing but the morals and welfare of the youth under their CEYLON. 229 care. Accordingly but a few weeks had elaps- ed before heathen parents were beseeching the missionaries to take their sons back into the school, promising to watch over them, pay for their books, &c. One year later the semi- nary at Batticotta was found in a more flour- ishing condition than ever before, the qualifi- cations for admission having been raised, and the pupils paying more largely and freely for tuition, board, and books. In 1845 heathenism began to develop itself in new forms of opposition. So far had the mission progressed, so high were the demands of Christianity, and so steady and resistless was its pressure upon the surrounding idolatry, that the missionaries were led to remark, " We are now made to feel that we have come into closer contact than ever with the benight- ed and benumbed mind and iron-hearted soul of Hindooism ; and that nothing but the sword of the Spirit, wielded by God himself, can cause one of the enemy to fall before us." In November, 1846, Mr. Spaulding, who had been spending a little season in his native country, sailed from Boston, with his wife, to rejoin the mission at Ceylon. He was accom- panied by Rev. William Scudder, a sou of Dr. Scudder, and by Rev. B. P. Hastings. At no period was the importance of schools and a high standard of education in connection with the mission, more manifest, than in 1847, when it was remarked by the missionaries that the Brahmins, the highest caste, who had uni- formly refused the education proffered them, were sinking in influence, while the lower, but better educated classes, were rising above them and filling the places of ofBce and trust under the government. Brahminical influence had ever been one of the strongest holds of heathen- ism in the northern portion of Oeylon, and it was thus coming into disgrace and losing its power. It was in this year that Sir J. Emer- son Tenuent, the British Colonial Secretary in Ceylon, published his testimony respecting the mission. In a letter to one of the secretaries of the Board, he says : " Having at length vis- ited in person all your stations, however un- usual a spontaneous communication of this kind may be, I cannot resist the impulse to convey to you my strong sense of the sustained exertions of your missionaries, and of their un- exampled success in this colony. Much as I had heard of their usefulness and its results, I was not prepared to witness such evidences of it as I have seen ; not in their school rooms only, or in the attainments and conduct of their pupils, but in the aspect of the whole community, amongst whom they have been toiling, and the obvious effect which their care and instructions have been producing on the industrial, social, and moral character of the surrounding population. The whole appear- ance of this district bespeaks the efficacy of your system. Its domestic character is chang- ing, and its social aspect presents a contrast to any other portion of Ceylon, as distinct and remarkable as it is delightful and encouraging. Civilization and secular knowledge are rapidly opening the eyes of the heathen community to a conviction of the superiority of the external characteristics of Christianity, and thereby creating a wish to know something of the in- ward principles which lead to an outward de- velopment so attractive." In 1849, the Governor of Ceylon visited the mission stations, and on his return to Colombo he published a notice of his observations, in which he said, " His excellency cannot omit to dwell with peculiar satisfaction on the pleas- ure afforded him by his personal inspection of the great educational establishments, which are the distinguishing characteristics of the northern province. To those noble volunteers in the cause of Christianity and education, the gentlemen of the American mission, who by their generous self-devotion in a foreign and distant land, have produced so marked an im- provement in the scene of their labors, his excellency feels that he should pay a special tribute of grateful acknowledgement. He is glad to hail, in this dedication of American enterprise and American charity to the work of civilizing and enlightening a distant depen- dency of the British crown, one more tie of kindred with the great nation that sends them forth — one more pledge that between the Old and the New England, there can henceforth be only a generous rivalry in the cause of knowl- edge and truth." In 1849, a new version of the whole Bible into Tamil was completed, with great labor and care, by committees, both in Jaffna and Ma- dras, and beautifully printed in one royal oc- tavo volume. Of this translation Mr. Meigs says, " I find it very exactly conformed to the Hebrew, as well as to our English version, while it is also pure and idiomatic Tamil. It will, I have no doubt, prove a great blessing to the whole Tamil people, and many thousands will bless God for the labors of those who have prepared it." A summary of the mission of the American Board in Ceylon, from its commencement to the close of 1852, a period of thirty-six years, presents very important and gratifying results. Missionaries and Helpers. — The whole num- ber of persons who have been connected with the mission, is 60 ; 28 males and 32 females. Of these 18 have died, and an equal number have been obliged, for various reasons, to re- linquish the missionary work. Eleven left after a service of from 9 to 17 years ; 10 have been in the field from 16 to 36 years. Of 85 children born to these missionary families in Ceylon, only 12 have died in the island, and but three or four after leaving for America. Churdies. — The following table presents the statistics of the churches, for the year 1852 and 1853: 230 CEYLON. TABULAR VTETW. TUlipally Batticotta Oodooville Mauepy Panditeripo. ... Cbayagacherry. Varany Oodoopitty Total. . In regular standing. P3 £ s. d. 6 9 9 46 7 5 10 4 10 85 2 6 11 9 3 16 8 14 14 6 112 19 H Members reported, 1852 Reooived by profession in 1853. . " on certifioate " 418 Dismissed on certificate 10 Deaths 5 Excommunicated 1 Error in statistics of 1852 7 23 Present number. 395 The whole number received to the churches from the commencement, is about 800 ; and not far from 120 have been excommunicated. Over 300 of the cliurch members were educa- ted in the Batticotta seminary, and about 150 at the female boarding-school at Oodooville. Schools. — The statistics of the two classes of schools, the vernacular and the English, for 1853, are as follows : TABULAR VIEW. TiUipally Batticotta . . . GodoOTiUe . . . Manepy Panditeripo . . Cbavagacb'y. Varany Oodoopitty . . Total.... Vernacular Scbools. Pupils. 678 208 680 251 229! 207 116 303 391 102 493 326 96 422 «« 21 199 361 116 467 2669 1304 3963 419 114 210 149 26 180 English Schools. In view of the vast number of children and youth who, from year to year have been taught in these schools, and the 4,000 now in a course of training, the missionaries are led to the cheering observation, that the old generation, whose minds were steeped in heathenism, and to whom it was difficult to communicate a Christian idea, are fast disappearing from the stage, and giving place to a generation who understand Scripture language, and have some knowledge of Scripture doctrine. JSative Helpers.— The following table gives a classified view of the native helpers : Native Preachers Catechi-sts School Superintendents Secular Agents Christian Teachers Printing-office workmen Writers Total Native Assistants.. . Nominal Christian Teachers. . Heathen Teachers Nominal Christian and Hea- 1 then Teachers, total.. . j 1 19 6 8 11 15j 1 3 i: 3 4 2 28 4 3 65 15 4 121 8 24 32 Of the catechists four are physicians, two of whom spend most of their time in catecheti- cal work. Printing. — This department has been con- ducted with great efficiency, printing some years 7 or 8,000,000 of pages of Scripture and of tracts. The whole number of pages printed since the mission press went into ope- ration, in 1834, is estimated at 166,000,000 ; " The Morning Star," a semi-monthly paper, is still continued. Medical Department. — The dispensary, under the care of Dr. Greene, besides its physical benefits, has served as an important aid in preaching the Gospel. The number of pa- tients treated during the year 1852, was 1,881. Medical classes are constantly under instruc- tion. Dr. Greene has been recently preparing a Tamil nomenclature for anatomy, physi- ology, and hygiene, and hopes soon to publish some elementary works on these subjects, in the native language. Besides their medical benefits, such works would help to undermine the gross superstition with which the practice of native physicians is connected, and prepare the way for the reception of Christianity. Female education. — In no department has progress been more marked in Jaffna than in that of female education, especially among the higher classes. The number who have been educated in the female boarding school at Oodooville, from the first, is 288. Of these 204 have left the school, 136 of them beino^ members of the church at the time of leaving, and 13 having joined since leaving. Of the whole number who have left the school, 126 have been married to Christians, and only 16 to heathens. Temperance. — Vigorous efforts have been made by the missionaries to arrest the pro- gress of intemperance, which prevails ex- CEYLON. 231 tensively in Ceylon. Temperance societies Lave been formed, lectures delivered, and pledges of total abstinence signed by a large number of the people. It is easy to gather from 500 to 1000 people to hear addresses on this subject. On one of these occasions, in 1852, 200 signed the pledge. These meetings are conducted in a strictly religious manner, being opened and closed with prayer ; and in connection with the addresses, much instruc- tion is given in regard to other prevailing vices. The people learn, by this very means, that the missionaries are their best friends, and are thus led in great numbers to hear the Gos- pel preached. It should be added that the temperance movement originated chiefly with the young men educated at the Batticotta se- minary, and is carried on by them, with the cooperation of the missionaries. Natwe Contributions. — For several years there has been a "Native Evangelical So- ciety " in Jaffna, designed to call into acti- vity the Christian benevolence of the native converts. Some of them manifest a very strong desire to spread the knowledge of Christ. This society, besides contributing frequently to the funds of the American Board, supports a catechist at Varany, and has also the entire care of the Island of Delft, sustaining there a Christian family and a large school. This island is within the field of the Ueylon mission, and contains an ignorant and degraded population of about three thou- sand. Present state of Heathenism and prospects of the Mission. — After thirty-six years of unwea^ ried Christian effort in this field, the mission- aries and the Christian world are permitted to contemplate a degree of progress as surprising as it is gratifying ; and to the question : " Watchman, what of the night ? " is confi- dently answered, " The morning cometh." " It may be true," say the missionaries, " that some forms of wickedness increase ; that ido- latry even may assume a bolder and more offensive front ; but this is only the natural effect of the increase of light. There is no doubt that heathenism is disturbed. While the mass of the people are losing their confi- dence in the rites and ceremonies of their an- cestors, there are many who are roused by this very fact, to greater efforts to sustain them ; but they only thereby publish their own shame, and hasten the destruction of their cause. That the people are extensively hypocritical in their idol worship, is abundantly evident. This is remarkably true throughout our field, and is a fact full of encouragement. We need not, as in former years, spend our time in attacking idolatry, but can directly preach Christ, and iim crucified." Chuech Missionabt Sooiety.— The Church Missionary Society commenced its labors in Ceylon, in 1818, establishing missions simul- .aueously among the Hindoos of the northern province, and among the Budhists of Colombo and Point De Galle, and of the Kandiau hills in the central portion of the island. Two energetic men, Mr. Mayor and Mr. Lambrick, stationed themselves at once in Kandy, about 90 miles N. E. from Colombo. It is sur- rounded by woody hills and mountains, and was anciently the capital of an independent kingdom of the same name. The town itself has ouly about 3,000 people, but in the neigh- boring highlands, to which the labors of these missionaries extended, there is a population of 200,000. In no part of Ceylon has progress been so difficult and slow as among the Kandians. It was four years after the arrival of the mission- aries before there was encouragement to build a school-house, even in the capital of the pro- vince ; and after the lapse of ten years the number of pupils was small. The number of conversions was still more limited. These discouragements arose in part from the se- cluded and solitary condition of the province, for the boundaries of the Kandian territory were defended by dense forests, and every opening was guarded by a species of palm, covered with knobs, from the points of which protruded spikes as sharp as the beak of a hawk. Besides the natural fortifications, watches were stationed at every pass from the low country, beside gates of thorns, which were only opened for the passage of the king's people. Within these gloomy confines, Euro- peans seldom entered ; and when the mission was commenced, in 1818, the British govern- ment discouraged the attempt, as it could not assure them of any adequate protection in such a region. The priesthood of Budhism thus secluded, exerted undisputed sway, and the Kandians preserved a rigid conformity to all its teachings. On the arrival of the mission- aries they could conceive of no possible advan- tages to be derived from having their children educated, and it was impossible to assemble a class. After a perseverance of five years, how- ever, five schools had been established, num- bering 127 pupils, and so indefatigable were the labors of these men, that in 1839 the number of schools had increased to thirteen, and the number of scholars to 400. To attempt the education of females seemed for a long time utterly hopeless ; for even the little instruction that was given to the boys in the temples of the Budhist priests, was with- held from the girls, who were regarded as unfit for tuition of any kind. It was there- fore ten years before a school for the instruc- tion of girls could be opened in Kandy. The Church missionaries, with an intimate knowl- edge of the native language, have sought to explain the doctrines of Christianity to the Kandians, in their secluded villages, and they have secured, to a great degree, the confidence of the native peasantry ; but owing to the as- cendancy of the priesthood, very few have 232 CEYLON. avowed their belief in the truth of Chris- tianity. During the last ten or twelve years, Europeans have settled among the Kandian hills, causing some irritation to the peasants, but affording protection to the mission, which is still continued. It is stated, however, in a recent Report of the Church Missionary Soci- ety, that the labors of the missionaries are confined in a great measure to sojourners from the maratime provinces, who reside at Kandy and other places in the interior, and who are nominal Christians, and that the native Kan- dians have received comparatively little atten- tion. There are now at the Kandy station five schools : one English, three Singalese, and one for girls. The number of boys is 117, girls 10. There are five regular congregar tions, with an average attendance of one hundred. The mission station of the Church of Eng- land, at Baddagame, in the low country, ten miles north of Point De Galle, although com- menced as early as that at Kandy, has been even less successful, though not without some important results. Schools have been estab- lished, printed books have been circulated and read, and many have been made acquainted with the principles of Christianity. Still there have been but few conversions, and after the labor of nearly forty years, the missionaries have very little to cheer them. In the annual report for 1852, Rev. Mr. Parsons, one of the missionaries, says : " At this place the church is built (it was dedicated by Bishop Heber,) and here are the mission residences, seminary, and girls' school ; but here, alas, is the grea1> est indifference to the good news of salvation. It seems as if the people were hardened to the sound of the church bell and the missionary's voice, and accustomed to treat both with silent contempt. Last year I established an early service for the heathen, who objected to come to the ordinary service. Like everything else at Baddagame, it succeeded for a time, but within three months fell to nothing." By far the most important of the stations of the Church of England mission in Ceylon, is that at Cotta, a populous district within a few miles of Colombo. The situation of Cotta. is peculiarly beautiful, being on the verge of vast gardens of cinnamon, and surrounded by nor tural forests, and interspersed with plantations of spices and groves of cocoa nut and palm. Here the mission commenced its labors in 1823, by the opening of schools and the preach- ing of the Gospel to the natives throughout their hamlets. In connection with this mis- sion, a collegiate institution was founded in 1827, for the training of native teachers and assistants destined for the ministry. It com- menced with ten pupils, and has continued to the present time with remarkable success. 'To this institution have resorted the Tamils of Jaffna, the Kandians from the hills, and the Singalese from the low country. In this " oriental college " there are at present 22 students, extending their studies to Greek and Latin, Euclid, Scripture history, &c. There are also at Cotta 28 vernacular schools for boys and 38 for girls, containing in all 750 children, besides English schools for boys and girls. There are at present two missionaries at Cotta, Rev. Messrs. Gordon and Wood, and the number of services held on the Sabbath is 15. The average attendance is about 1000, more than half of them being adults. A printing-press has been for some years in ope- ration at this station, and from this was Issued a translation of the scriptures, known as the " Cotta version." TABULAR VIEW FOK 1853. ■g J -S i z. STATIONS. 1 1 i 1 1 1 6 1 i < B o g S S-a ^ "o ■a 02 .i 55 I !a 1^ C 1 3 3 p "i Cotta 1852 5 il 45 19 21 41 831 448 20 1,299 Kandy, 1818 1 3 11 2 35 10 166 64 V2 252 Baddagame, .... 1819 1 4 17 2 47 20 534 58 21 613 Nellore 1818 2 18 1 49 14 608 119 6,1'>7 Chundicully, .... 1847 2 19 3 89 13 447 69 38 549 Copay Totals, . . 1842 10 2 J 23 12 122 1 21 10 355 77 432 28 362 108 2,941 835 101 i).L72 In the Jaffna district the Church Missionary Society has three mission stations, viz. : at Nellore, Chundicully, and Copay. These are all in the neighborhood of the town of Jaffna, Chundicully being a suburb, Nellore about two miles distant, and Copay five miles distant. There is a missionary and a church at each place, but the attendance is small, the total CEYLON. 233 number of adults at the three stations being 200, and of children 400. They have also 37 schools, in some of which only Tamil is taught, in others only English. In Nellore a girls' boarding-school has been established, similar to that of the American mission at Oodooville. It has 42 pupils, most of them the children of heathen parents. The principal of this school is a superior native young woman, who was brought up in the school, and who speaks and writes English with remarkable accuracy. There is also a high school for boys at Chundi- cully, with 29 pupils. — Rev. E. D. Moore. Wesleyan Missionaky Society. — The Wes- leyan mission to Ceylon was undertaken at the suggestion of Sir Alexander Johnston, Chief- Justice of that island. He had attentively studied the character and results of the Wes- leyan missions in the West Indies, and most earnestly urged upon the Wesleyan Conference the importance of extending their operations to Ceylon. Some temporary difficulties pre- vented the immediate adoption of the sugges- tion ; but the impression produced upon the Methodist Conference by his appeals, led to the establishment of their Eastern Missions. Dr. Coke had set his heart upon sending or carrying the Gospel to India ; and as soon as it was agreed to undertake the mission, he, though advanced in years, determined to embark in it. Being possessed of considerable property, he proposed not only to introduce and estab- lish the present mission, but also to advance whatever money might be required for the outfit and settlement of the missionaries ; a rare instance of individual generosity and de- votion to the cause of missions. After some discussion, it was finally agreed that six mis- sionaries for Ceylon, and one for the Cape of Good Hope, should sail with Dr. Coke. Those for Ceylon were, Messrs. William Ault, James Lynch, George Erskine, William Martin Har- vard, Thomas Hall Squance, and Benjamin Clough. Two of the party, Harvard and Squance, were acquainted with the manage- ment of the printing-press, which subsequently proved of great service to the mission. Dr. Coke, accompanied by six missionaries, set sail from Portsmouth on the 30th of December, 1813. On the passage, Mrs. Ault, wife of one of the missionaries, died, happy in God, and was committed to the great deep, in joyful hope of a resurrection to eternal life. This was a great affliction ; but one still greater soon followed. On the 3d of May following. Dr. Coke was suddenljf called to his eternal re- ward. He had been indisposed a few days be- fore, but there was no apprehension of danger ; and on the day previous to his death, he ap- peared considerably better. It was supposed that he died of apoplexy, as no noise was heard in the adjoining cabins, and he was found dead. Deep and mysterious are the ways of Provi- dence ! The Doctor believed he had a call to the East ; he had devoted himself to the work ; and, to use his own language, " Only lived for India ; " yet before he could reach his destina- tion, he died alcme, in his cabin, and was com- mitted to a watery grave. The missionaries wore thro-(vn by this sad calamity into a state of painful apprehension ; they had not only lost their counsellor and guide ; but they were left also, without immediate pecuniai^ support The whole enterprise had rested so entirely on their departed friend, that they did not know whether any provision had been made for the event which they had to deplore. But the loss, however, of the human arm, on which they had leaned, led them, by the grace of God, to a more entire dependence on Him. They arrived at Bombay, May 21, and the letters of introduction which they had brought to several persons of distinction, obtained for them a kind reception. Among them was one to W. T. Money, Esq., a principal agent at Bom- bay, from Dr. Buchanan ; and he relieved their anxiety by assuring them he should be happy to advance them any funds they might iieed, on the credit of their Society at home. The Governor, Sir Evan Nepean, to whom likewise they had letters, showed them all the kindness which their circumstances required, and had a house of his own prepared for their accommo- dation. On the 20th of June, the mission family, with the exception of Mr. and Mrs. Harvard,, sailed from Bombay, and landed at Point de Gaile, after a voyage of nine days. Their generous friend, Mr. Money, had written to Mr. Gibson, the Master Attendant of Galle, informing him of the probable time of their arrival, and do- scribing the signal which the captain would mq,ke on coming in sight of land. In conse- quence, he had been looking out for the ship, and paid them all the attention they required. This proof of the lively interest which Mr. Money took in their affairs, filled them with gratitude to him and to God ; but what were their emotions of surprise and thankfulness, when they learned that Sir Evan Nepean also had taken the trouble of writing favorably concerning them, to the Governor of Ceylon, Sir Robert Brownrigg, who had in conse- quence immediately written to Lord Moles- worth, commandant of Galle, directing that the Government House in the fort should be prepared for their reception ! Lord Moles- worth executed these instructions, not with mere official punctuality, but, though an entire stranger to them, with all the feelings of per- sonal friendship. These favors were rendered to the missionaries for the sake of the cause in which they were embarked ; and they serve to mark the rapid transition now going on in the public mind. The Rev. George Bisset, episco- pal chaplain at Colombo, as well as the Gov- ernor and other gentlemen, showed them every brotherly kindness, and wished them all success. The Governor offered to allow them fifty-six dol- lars a month for each school that they might 234: CEYLON. establish. After mature deliberation and fei- vent prayer, it appeared to them advisable to occupy only four stations for the present ; namely, Jaffna and Batticaloa, for tht; Tamil di%-ision of the island, Galle and Matura for the Singalese ; and it was agreed that Messrs. Lynch and Squance should go to Jaffna, Mr. Ault to Batticaloa, Mr. Erskine to Matura, and that Mr. Clough should remain at Galle. In a few days, after celebrating the Lord's Supper together, in which Lord Molesworth requested permission to join them, Messrs. Lynch and Squance set out for Jaffna. On their arrival at Colombo they were hospitably entertained by Mr. Twistleton, and much re- freshed in spirit by their intercourse with other friends. Sir Robert and Lady Brownrigg, Sir Alexander and Lady Johnston, gave them a cordial welcome, and encouraged them to pro- ceed. Mr. Armour received them as brethren, and Mr. Chater, the Baptist missionary, was no less kind, and invited them to preach in his chapel, where the military of the garrison at- tended. Their attention was called to the case of a convert from Mohammedanism, who had been baptized in the fort church by the name of Daniel Theophilus, said to be the first con- version from Islamism which had been known in Ceylon. He was a man of strong mind and considerable learning ; and hopes were enter- tained that his public renunciation of his for- mer faith, and his open acknowledgement of Christianity, would have an extensive effect on others of the same faith. The change in his religious profession had called down upon him the indignation of his relatives and former connexions, some of whom were fully bent upon his destruction. But he was taken under the protection of the government, and by them committed to the care of Messrs. Lynch and Squance, that he might accompany them to Jaffhapatam, and there be further instructed in the doctrines and duties of Christianity. On the first of August they set out with this interesting companion : and on their arrival at Jaffna, the sub-collector, Mr. Mooyart, re- ceived them with great kindness. Here they were also welcomed by Christian David, the Tamil preacher from Tranquebar, who presided over the Tamil Christians in that province. He told Mr. Lynch that he had for more than ten years prayed that some missionaries might be sent to Ceylon, and that he regarded their arrival as an answer to his prayers. While he was able to afford them considerable aid in furthering the objects of their mission, they in their turn greatly assisted him in the way of religious instruction. They had now a gratifying proof of the liberal intentions of the government towards them in the pro- posal for the endowment of English schools to be placed under their care. Since Jaffna was to be the residence of two missionaries, they found that the stipulated allowance for each school was, in their case, doubled. I At the request of the European residents, who were without the means of public in- struction, they held Divine service in English, alternately reading the church prayers and preaching; and they were much encouraged by the apparent effects of their ministrations. The other missionaries joined their stations about the same time, and met with similar aid in the prosecution of their work. Matura, to which Mr. Erskine was appointed, was about thirty miles from Galle. The civil authorities afforded him every facility he required in the opening of the promised English school, which the children of the highest classes of natives attended with manifest pleasure. He soon commenced his English ministration, also, in the Dutch church in the fort ; but his con- gregation was small, the European garrison consisting of few trooj^s. The native popula- tion was considerable, and the district was found to be one of tlie strongholds of their su- perstition : he lost no time, therefore, in begio- ning the study of Singalese, that he might at- tack the enemy in his quarters. Batticaloa, Mr. Ault's station, was above 150 miles beyond Matura. It is a small is- land, containing a fort, with a few houses ; but it is the central point of an important district of the same name, which carries on a constant trade with the interior, and contains a large population. Mr. Ault proceeded to Batticaloa, in a native dhoney, a kind of sailing barge, which was expected to make the passage in three days ; but it took more than eight to reach the destined port. As ho had not pro- vided for so long a passage, his sufferings and privations by the way, added to his affliction from the recent loss of his wife, so shook his constitution, that he was ill-suited to enter upon his arduous duties. There was no habitation vacant for him ; but the Collector, Mr. Sawers, and the Magistrate, Mr. Atkinson, received him into their houses, and showed him every atten- tion, and he was soon sufficiently recovered to open the English school. On Sunday mornings he performed divine service for the civilians and military, when his congregation was sel- dom less than 150, the soldiers being marched to church. He had an evening service also, at which their attendance was optional ; and the numbers that came were sufficient to show a desire to hear the Word, while a few applied to him under serious concern. The station was crowded with the sick ; they saw their com- rades dying daily ; and the missionary sought to improve the solemn season to their soul& He did not, however, suffer these labors to di- vert him from the natives. He labored hard at the Tamil language, and soon began to itin- erate among the huts in the ncighborins country. ° At Galle, Mr. Clough performed the English service, in the Dutch church, every Sunday • and a private house in the fort was fitted up] by some of his hearers, for preaching on an CEYLON. 235 eveaiug during the week, aud for religious con- versation with those under serious impressions. The marlced attention of Lord Molesworth not only encouraged him, but exerted a good influence among the officers and troops. His Lordship often appeared in company with the humble missionary on public occasions, and was seldom absent from the cottage in which their religious meetings were held. The good effect produced upon the European inhabitants and the military was soon very apparent. But, though encouraged by these things, Mr. Clough could not permit himself to be detained from his missionary work. Besides the numerous Europeans and the inhabitants of Dutch and Portuguese extraction in the fort, at Galle, the Mohammedans resided there in great numbers, and had a mosque in the garrison, the only one in the whole island. There was a very large population of Singalese in the adjacent coun- try, whose docility and gentleness of disposi- tion were not surpassed by the natives of any other district in the British territories ; but they were heathen. To these, Mr. Clough's attention was anxiously directed ; and he wish- ed to live among them, to study their language, and to exert himself for their spiritual welfare ; and it was not long before Providence opened the way for him to do so. He received a visit at the Government-house, from Don Abraham Dias Abeyesinhe Amavasekara, the Maha or great iloodeliar of Galle, a flne-looking man, of good understanding, and of a liberal mind, and who, from his rank, was possessed of un- bounded influence throughout the district. After the usual compliments, he addressed Mr. Clough in English, stating that he was come to place his own children under his protection and instructions ; that, having heard that he was desirous to establish a school for the sons of native head-men, he was glad to offer him a good house, ready furnished for the purpose, near his own residence, which, if it suited him, was at his service j adding, that he should think it an honor to have such a reverend gen- tleman living near him, and that he would as-j sist him in all things in his power. Mr. Clough having accepted the offer, was thus, without any expense to the mission fund, placed at once in a situation of comfort and respectabihty, in which he could prosecute the study of the language, and commence his labors among the natives. His school was soon opened, and attended by some of the most in- telligent boys upon the island. The Moodeliar manifested great anxiety for his comfort, fur- nished him with a horse, and afforded him as- sistance whenever he required it. The patron- age and friendship of this person had great in- fluence on the surrounding natives. Curiosity was powerfully excited, and in his new residence Mr. Clough was visited by learned priests, and persons of various classes who came to inquire respecting the religion he professed. With the help of an interpreter, he had frequent op- portunities to converse with these visitors cmir cerning the faith tliat is in Christ, and had the , pleasure, in some instances, of seeing them de- part, apparently impressed with the results of their inquiries. By the Moodeliar's assistance he obtained a competent Singalese teacher, un- der whose instruction he applied himself dili- gently to the study of that language. He soon had reason to trace the providence of God in these arrangements, which were ordered so en- tirely in accordance with his design, and yet so independently of himself. He began im- mediately to hold intercourse with the Singar lese, and especially with the priests ; and Pro- vidence cast him in the way of one of the most influential in the island, who was well known both in the Kandiau and British domin- ions. This high-priest was everywhere extolled for his extensive knowledge, both of the relig- ion aud literature of Ceylon, as well as of the Oriental languages, and several marks of dis- tinction had been conferred upon him. He had resided for a considerable time at the Court of Kandy ; and at his inauguration as a priest he had the honor of riding on the king's own elephant. Mr. Clough, desirous of becoming acquainted with the native superstitions, that he might be the better prepared to expose their absurdity and impiety, took every oppor- tunity to be present at their religious services, and endeavored, on such occasions, to engage the priests in conversation, in the hearing of their followers. A celebrated festival, called Banna maddua, at which the priest was carried in great pomp on the shoulders of his disciples, furnished the first opportunity of conversing with the high-priest, who appeared to be deep- ly impressed with what he heard, and visited Mr. Clough in private, for further informar tion. Mr. Clough gave him a copy of the Gos- pels at his own heathen temple, in presence of some of his pupils, educating for the Budhist priesthood, who were not a little surprised at the joy which he expressed, and the care with which he wrapped up the book. He read it with diligence, and it furnished him with topics of inquiry, which led to the gradual develop- ment of the whole system of human redemp- tion. After about two months, the priest avowed an entire revolution of sentiment, pro- fessed his firm conviction of the Divine origin of Christianity, and expressed a wish openly to renounce Budhism, and to make a public pro- fession of his faith in Christ. He now became anxious for baptism, declaring that he regarded it as the characteristic mark of those who were not worshipers of idols. But as' this step would inevitably subject him to the pri- vations of poverty, and perhaps to the attacks of infuriated idolaters upon his life, Mr. Clough made the Governor acquainted with all the circumstances of the case, and received an im- mediate answer from his Excellency, that if the priest, from conviction, embraced the Chris- tian religion, protection should be afforded him. 2" 6 CETLON. },[ ;'anwhile, every effort wss 'tried by his friends and the priests to shalie his resolution ; but threats and persuasions were alilie unavailing, he had '■ counted the cost." On the 25th of December. 1814, he put off the yellow robes of his profession, and was publicly admitted into the visible Church of Christ, in the presence of a crowded congregation, by the ordinance of Baptism, receiving the name of Feterus Panditta Sekarras. Thus did he give up rank, affluence, connexions, family, and all that the world holds dear, to embrace the religion of Jesus, in obedience to the dictates of consci- ence. Through the interposition of Sir Eobert Brownrigg, he was placed in a situation to maintain himself. His literary qualifications obtained for him the office of Singalese trans- lator to the government, at a fixed salary. His studies were directed with a view to his becoming, at a future period, a preacher of the Gospel among his own countrymen. Many of the priests were so shaken by this conduct of their leader, that they, also, were desirous of embracing Christianity ; but there was this difBculty in the way : when they cast off their robes, they lost all, even their freehold estates, if they had any. Not long after the arrival of the missionaries they had to mourn the loss of one of their companions, Mr. Ault, who sank under a sevei'e disease with which he had for some time been afflicted. He died at Batticaha, and was in- terred with every mark of respect from all classes of inhabitants. His career was short, but not without effect. In the article which appeared in the Government Gazette announc- ing his death, after bearing testimony to his piety and zeal, it is added — " Possessing rare qualifications for the meritorious and useful work which he had undertaken, his ' success in the short space of eight months, in raising at that place, a respect for, and a decent obser- vance of, at least the external form of religion, was truly remarkable. And although it could not be said that he made any converts from either the heathen or Mohammedan faith to that of Christianity ; yet, by the establishment of eight schools for the education of Hindoo children, and by his talents and address having so far overcome the scruples and prejudices of their parents, as to introduce the reading of the New Testament as the only school-book to the more advanced scholars, he has laid the foundation for a most extensive propagation of our faith." About this time It was proposed to establish a system of village preaching on the Lord's day, in the vicinity of Colombo, where Mr. Harvard was then stationed, by means of in- terpreters. For this purpose they were provi- ded with Singalese youths from the govern- ment seminary, who were deemed competent to interpret the missionaries' discourses. Two or three of the government interpreters were associated with them, and Sir A. Johnston di- rected that the principal Singalese interpreter of the Supreme Court should accompany Mr. Har- vard whenever required. The persons so em- ployed were previously instructed what to do ; the native congregations were assembled in the government schools; the meetings were always opened and closed with prayer, and were productive of considerable benefit to those who attended them. Thus, under the immediate superintendence of the missionaries, from twelve to fifteen villages were regularly supplied with public religious instruction every Sabbath. While, however, we admire the spirit that prompted these proceedings, we must not omit to record the personal inconvenience which they suffered from them, as a warning to others. Mr. Harvard confesses that " zeal, undisciplined by prudence, impelled us to exer- tions, in these itinerating labors, which were too violent to be lasting. In company with my interpreter, I have frequently traveled twelve or fifteen miles in one day, addressing three congregations, and returning in the evening to preach in English, in the Pettah. Mr. Clough was no less regardless of himself The leading of the singing also devolved on us, which was even more laborious than preaching. The abundance of the harvest and the paucity of laborers, is the only apology to be made for efforts which cannot be wholly justified ; and which at length inflicted injuries upon my constitution from which probably it will never wholly recover." An English service, for natives understand- ing the English language, was also opened at this time in Colombo ; and their place of wor ship having become too small, a larger build- ing was commenced. A Sabbath-school of over 200 children was also organized. The printing-press was put in operation, under the direction of Mr. Harvard, and soon spelling- books, hymn-books, and religious books, or tracts of different kinds were printed in the Singalese, Tamil, and Portuguese languages. The mission house being situated on the main road from the country to the fort, the mission- aries had frequent opportunities to converse with the natives, on their way to and from the town. The results of these interviews were often encouraging ; and in one instance were productive of the happiest effects. A Budhist priest, known by the title of the Ava Pkiest, was introduced to them by a note from the Rev. G. Bisset. This man possessed much acuteness of intellect enriched by scientific and literary research ; he was highly respected by his disciples, and had attained the honora- ble distinction of Maha Maiaka. He avowed himself an atheist in principle ; but after much discussion his unbelief and prejudice were over- come, and he became a sincere inquirer after truth. In proof of his sincerity, he consented to Mr. Harvard's preaching in the temple of which he was the chief-priest. His pride was renounced, and he became a docile scholar CEYLON. 23T receiving with meekness instruction in the first principles of the doctrine of Christ, with a view to his baptism, which he earnestly desired. After some time, Mr. Harvard preached in his temple, through an interpreter, in front of the great image, to a large congregation of priests and people, from 1 Cor. 8:4: " We know that an idol is nothing in the world, and there is none other God but one." On their return to Colombo the Ava Priest publicly renounced his former notions and was baptized in the fort church, by the name of Geokge Nado- BIS DB SiLVA. In their visits to the native Christiana in the villages, the missionaries were occasionally met or accompanied by Sir. A. Johnston, Mr Twistleton, and even the Governor with his lady and suite, who attended divine service, with the Singalese Christians, in churches of the humblest structure. This countenance of the highest official authorities in the island tended to obviate difficulties which they would other- wise have found it hard to remove. There was one prejudice, however, which they could not immediately overcome. The native Chris- tians had a strong objection to their women appearing in a place of worship, except at the administration of baptism, and the celebration of marriage. This was so prejudicial to the domestic character of the people that the mis- sionaries resolved to persevere until they should see the mothers and daughters of the Chris- tians taking their proper place in the church ; in which, after much effort, they were success- ful. The converted Ava Priest, George Nadoris, manifested a strong desire for the conversion of his idolatrous countrymen. It appeared that half the priests and temples in the island had been under his control. He accompanied the missionaries in their preaching excursions round the country, when he addressed large companies of people, from 800 to 1,000 at a time, in the most lively and eloquent manner ; and his character as a priest was so well known before hia conversion, that wherever he went the people recognized him, and the effects produced by his public discourses were re- markable. The priests came from almost every part of the country, even from the inte- rior, to contend with him. Great numbers of the superior order of priests avowed themselves convinced of the truth of Christianity ; but they were not willing, like George Nadoris, to deny themselves and take up the cross. There was, however, one exception. Nadoris had a friend among them, who possessed considerable property, good natural abilities, and an ex- tensive acquaintance with foreign languages. His disposition was meek, and his manners prepossessing. When introduced to the mis- sionaries by his friend and instructor, he pro- fessed to be dissatisfied with the pagan super- stitions; offered himself for baptism, and beg- ged to be instructed in the principles of I Christianity. The knowledge which the brethren had by this time acquired of the de- ceptive character of the natives, made them cautious in the admission of candidates. In the present instance their examination of the man's motives was more than usually severe ; but they could detect no sinister design. His replies to their questions were given with the greatest apparent sincerity ; and, after putting him off for a considerable time, they felt so well satisfied with him, that they could no longer resist his importunity to be received into the Christian church. He was baptized by the name of Benjamin Parks. " It wa'J most gratifying," observed Sir Alexander Johnston on the occasion, "to see the very men who had been devoted to a heathen priest- hood, surmounting every prejudice of education and profession, and convinced of the delusion of that idolatry which they had been taught to preach." He also further remarked " that it was one of many proofs of the good effect produced among the natives by the cir- culation of the Scriptures." In the month of June, 1815, Rev. Jnhn Mc- Kenny arrived from the Cape of Good Hope, and was followed, early in 1816, by four more, Messrs. Callaway, Carver, Broadber.t, and Jack- son, as a reinforcement ; and a young man, named Salmon, was appointed as an assistant missionary. He was the first preacher they had obtained from among the inhabitants of the island. His acquaintance with several languages rendered him a valuable acquisition as an interpreter, and he was received on trial, and appointed to the Matura station, with Mr. Callaway, to whom he proved a useful col- league. Not long after, a second young man, named John Anthoniez, also born in the coun- try, was employed as a local preacher at Galle. The building commenced at Colombo was finished and opened for public worship on Sunday, December 23d, 1816. An appro- priate discourse was preached by Mr. Clough from Ps. 122 : 6. It was provided with an organ, purchased at Galle. In the evening a second service was held, which was crowded, the Governor and his lady, and most of the civilians! and military officers of the station being present, together with a number of re- spectable natives. It was now agreed to have service in Eng- lish every Sabbath at 7 A. M., and at the same hour in the evening ; also a Singalese service at half-past ten in the forenoon. The missionaries now began to hold annu.iI conferences for the regulation of the concerns of the mission. It is said of thorn in the So ciety's Report, " By preaching, catechizing, conducting native schools, and printing the Scriptures and useful books, they are lay- ing the foundation of a work, which, if zealously supported, promises, under the blessing of God, to re-erect the temples of Christ now in ruins, through the neglect of 238 CEYLON. Christians ; to arrest the devastating progress of Paganism and Mohammedanism, now almost triumphant over the feeble remains of Christ^ ianity ; to reassert the honor and victories of the cross ; and convey the knowledge of God and salvation through an island, the essential principle of whose religion is, to deny God, and whose almost universal practice is, to wor-. ship devils." The concerns of the mission were daily gathering strength, and the missionaries, hoping to occupy Caltura the ensuing year, asked for four additional missionaries, to en- able them to occupy all the coast to Galle ; and two more to go northward. In pursu- ance of this arrangement, they established themselves among the Tamil population of Jaffna, Trincomalee, and Batticaloa ; and so early as 1819, they had opened schools in the principal villages along the western coast, from Negombo to Galle. For twenty years the Wesleyan missionaries carried on the work of general education in the maritime provin- ces, which was afterwards taken up by the Government in 1834. They did not aspire to the communication of the higher branches of learning, which had already been provided for in the seminary of Colombo — an institution maintained by the Government for the educa- tion of the sons of the chiefs and higher order of the natives ; but in the principal villages, to which they extended their operations, the children of the peasantry were instructed by the Wesleyans in the principles of Christianity, and the essentials of general elementary know- ledge. The usual objection was at first urged to fe- males learning to read; but this was soon overcome ; and at a very early period the at- tention of the missionaries was directed strongly to an object which has since been kept steadily in view : the education of the Singalese, through the medium of their own vernacular tongue. Until taken up by the Wesleyans, this important department had been exclusively in the handj of the priest- hood, who occupied themselves in every paw- sela and temple, in teaching to write upon olas, and read from the legendary books of the Budhists. In their hands education was of the lowest description, and the priests themselves were but a stage in advance of their pupils. Science formed no feature in their own educa- tion ; history is coniined to the events con- nected with religion and its movements ; me- dicine is culled from the imperfect notices of their ajicieut Sanskrit authorities ; and astro- nomy, degraded into the mere dreams of astrology, is affected to be studied by the priests, who, by a singular anomaly, share its cultivation with the tom-tom beatei-s, or berra- wagos, one of the lowest and least respected ciistes in Ceylon. Vernacular education was begun by the Wesleyans in 1817, in the hope of superceding the Budhist priesthood in this department; and so successful was the effort, that before the close of the year, upwards of 1000 scholars were in attendance ; twelve months after the number increased to 4000 ; and during thirty years that the system has been in operation, upwards of 21,000 pupils, females as well as males, have from time to time been instructed in the numerous schools of the mission. No religious test is required for admission, and no compulsion is exerted to enforce participation in the Christian services of the schools. The objections of parents are at once respected, if advanced ; but the instances have been rare in which any scruples have ever been urged, either by the priesthood or by the people, to any portion of the system. But laborious and extended as have been these efforts of the Wesleyans, the tenor of their observation and experience has pro- duced a conviction that however eSicient edu- cation may have proved among the Budhists as a pioneer and precursor for the introduction of Christianity, its value is but secondary as compared with preaching to adults, and awaking the native mind through the instru- mentality of the pulpit and printing-press. " Under this conviction," says Sir E. Tennant, " the Methodists have been the closest investi- gators of Budhism, the most profound students of its sacred books in the original, and the most accomplished scholars both in the classi- cal and vernacular languages of Ceylon." The information thus acquired has been sedu- lously employed by them in the preparation of works in Singalese, demonstrative of the errors of Budhism, and illustrative of the evidences and institutions of Christianity. To the value of these publications and the influence exer- cised by their promulgation througlnut Cey- lon, the missionaries of other churches who labor in the same field with the Methodists, have borne their cordial and concurrent attes- tation. Of the converts made from paganism to Christianity, by the instrumentalicy of our missionaries in Ceylon, we have the following testimony from Mr. Harvard, in answer to the inquiry of the committee : " As it respects the nature of the change which our converts have undergone, I have no hesitation in say- ing, that in every case it has been real, accord ing to its degree. There has been a real con- viction of the falsehood of their previous faith, and a real persuasion of the truth and excel- lence of the Gospel. I have had every oppor^ tunity of being satisfied on this point. As in each case of conversion from heatlienipm the change has been real, so it has been operative. In none of them have there been any linger- ings after their former idolatry. They have renounced their former practices ; and, so far as my knowledge has gone, their cooduct has been a constant conformity to Christian practice. To a verv e-ratifViriB- Q-vtpnt +i,„ CEYLON. 239 ctatige in our converts lias been experimental. It is scarcely to be expected that a man com- ing out of the darkness of heathenism, under the ordinary influence of the Spirit, should very rapidly apprehend the things of God. However, in all we have been satisfied of a conviction of sin, and an earnest desire to be saved. In some cases we have had professions of religious enjoyment that we dare not call in question, and which have been justified by a corresponding faithfulness and consistency of life." " I have heard," says Mr. Fox, writing in 1823, " in this country, both in the Singalese and Portuguese languages, as art- less and satisfactory sentiments of Christian experience as I ever heard in the English lan- guage ; and I have seen the colored face beaming with smiles, while the last ■audible sound, ' Yaws, Wahansey,' Jesus, my Saviour, passed the dying lips." In the years 1826 and 1827, several other priests of the highest class were converted to the Christian faith, and have become active agents in the mission. An institution for .the instruction of young native converts, with a view to the Christian ministry, has been in successful operation since 1826. Kandy, the capital of the interior of the island, was occupied as a mission station in 1840. This mission, besides its immediate benefit to the people, led to an investigation of the subject of government support of idola- try. This exposure roused the astonishment and indignation of the Christian world, which ■was followed by the issuing of those instruc- tions which led to the disseverance of the guilty and mischievous connexion between the government and the idolatrous and supersti- tious practices of their Budhist, Hindoo, and Mohammedan subjects. In 1 842 a mission was established among that wild and barbarous people, called the Veddahs, who, in a state of savage indepen- dence, inhabit the jungle in the interior of the island, a few days' journey from Batticaloa. God has crowned the enterprize with his bless- ing, and granted his servants great success. Under the direction of the learned and devoted missionaries with which God has favored the Ceylon niission, the press, in the different Ian guages spoken there, has done a noble work. It has not only presented them with the Holy Scrip- tures, in a language which they can read, but has also furnished them with school-books, and works on history, biography, science, and the^ ology, besides a periodical literature. The Ceylon native ministry are a class of very able, devoted, and zealous men, continually growing in number and efficiency. The manner in which the missionaries have to meet and combat the Budhism and devil- worship in Ceylon, is well exhibited in the fol lowing communication from the Eev. Joseph Eippon, of Point de Galle, addressed to the secretaries of the society in 18.'5l : " On my arrival here, I found Mr. Dickson doing the full work of this large and important circuit, and laboring among the people with great acceptability and success, preaching in three different languages weekly, and taking long, fatiguing journeys, but so worn down by dis- ease and incessant labors, that it was painful to see him or hear him speak. I was thankful that I came out by the quickest route, or otherwise the life of a valuable missionary must have been sacrificed, and this important station left unoccupied. He much needed the rest which he is now taking on the continent, and I sincerely pray that it may be blessed to his complete restoration to health, though there is too much reason to fear that his disease is too far advanced to be arrested. I relieved him at once of the English work, and, in a month, had so far acquired the Ceylon-Portu- guese, as to be able to preach in it. I found it a miserably corrupt, and, in a literary point of view, worthless dialect, but still valuable to a missionary, as the only means by which he can communicate the Gospel to many thou- sands of perishing souls. My Singalese work is assuming an intensely interesting character. Though I am diligently studying the language, I am afraid it will be a month or two before I can reach the people through this medium as effectually as I wish ; and I am, therefore, for the present, using an interpreter. The head master of the government mixed school kindly offered his service gratuitously, and, as be pos- sessed peculiar qualifications for the work, wc spend many evenings in the surrounding vil- lages, preaching to a deeply interesting, but fearfully deluded people, the unsearchable riches of Christ. The difficulties in the way of their conversion are stupendous. My cir- cuit embraces about half of the southern pro- vinces, — the whole island being divided into five provinces for government purposes, — and extends along a densely populated sea-coast for thirty-five miles, and as far into the jungle as the imagination can reach, for, unfortu- nately, this is the only means I have at present of penetrating there. The people are in theory all Budhists ; but in practice, all devil-wor- shipers. " Within four miles of my house there are six- teen Budhist temples. In one of these alone there are thirty priests 1 The whole number of priests in this circuit is perhaps .'iOO. It is not by human might, nor by power, that we can prevail against such a host as this ! Fre- quently, in the dead of the night, I hear the music from the devil dances in the neighbor- hood. I have attended these midnight orgies, and it is only by doing so that any person can form an idea of the strength with which this superstition binds down an otherwise acute, ingenious and intelligent people. Never did a Christian congregation in England listen with more unbroken silence, nor an audience in Exeter Hall hang with more complete ab- 2i0 CEYLON. sorption of soul on the lips of its inost chosen speakers, than these people do on the frantic gestures, and hideous yellings, and senseless incantations of the devil priest. To their con- ceptions, he is penetrating the invisible world., and communing with spirits. His ascendancy over their minds is complete. He is the great intercessor between devils and men, for the removal of all evil, and bestowment of all good. Without the priest, nothing can be done. If a house is to be built, if a journey is to be taken, if a child is to be born, devils must be propitiated, and their favor secured ; but, especially, in cases of sickness where all ordinary methods of cure have failed, devil dances and incantations are the last resort, the poor deluded wretches often dying in the midst of the ceremonies, although the priest has per- haps offered a fowl in sacrifice, dug open graves and slept in them, and fried eggs in human skulls, in order to obtain the necessary influence to perform the cure ! An evil so wide-spread and so deep-rooted will not be easily de- stroyed ; and a conviction of its magnitude, and of the necessity of resorting to some extra- ordinary means for its extinction, has grown upon me daily. " The whole system received a severe shock last autumn at Matura, its great stronghold. The priests there are considered the cleverest in the island ; and Mr. Murdock, the Secretary of the Singalese Tract Society, being at that place on business, challenged the priests pub- licly, and offered them a large reward if they would cause any of their incantations to take effect upon him, by causing him to fall down dead ; for these priests profess to be the dis- pensers of death to the living, as well as of life to the dying. They used all the methods of preparation I have already mentioned, sleep- ing in graves for many nights, and met Mr. Murdock, in the presence of many hundreds of Singalese, who had gathered together to wit- ness the experiment on the day appointed. Their first effort was to evade the challenge. They excused themselves on the ground that they should be tried for murder if they killed him. Application was therefore made to the government authorities, and an imdesired per- mission obtained for them to do their worst. Their next attempt was to intimidate. Their incantations never failed ; his death was cer- tain if he tried them ; and he had better spare himself at once and run no risk. When they failed, they were driven lastly to the test, and a miserable failure it was. They stood reading their incantations, burning resin, and blowing its fumes upon him, for more than ■ an hour, ' and the people looked when he should have swollen or fallen down dead suddenly, but after they had looked a great while, and saw no harm come to him, they changed their minds,' if not with reference to him, at least with reference to the power of these charms. A derisive cry was raised throughout the crowd. and the devil priests have since been hooted through the streets of Matura. I have tried the same plan with great success in the neigh- borhood of Galle ; and, even to-night, I have just returned from a village where I had been undergoing o test, in some respects similar. I challenged the priests some weeks ago, when they refused to meet me, assigning various rea- sons why they could ' do me no hurt,' as, that I was of a different nation, &c. I have spent several evenings in replying to their excuses publicly, to the people of the village ; and, being driven to extremity, they resolved to make a grand effort to-night to put me down, as they term it, which means, to make me fall senseless to the ground, and to cause blood to gush from my nose, ears, and mouth. The spirit which can conceive snch a thing is dior bolical ; but the cool determination that can resolve to accomplish it, shows to what a degree these men can imbibe the evil spirit of their master. " They brought priests twenty-seven miles from Matura to help them, and spent manydays in preparation by digging open graves, &c. They have also had two devil dances in the village to-day, but whether to gain power for the experiment or not, I cannot say. The news reached Galle ; and six coaches full of people, with about thirty on foot, flocked to the village, where a number of Singalese peo- ple were gathered to receive me. ' I preached to them for nearly an hour, while two different parties of priests, who did not dare to face me, were reading their incantations against me in the immediate neighborhood, and the people were watching with intense interest, not knowing what moment I should fall to the ground. When all was over, and they saw I was uninjured, their astonished looks showed that to their minds at least I had passed through a perilous ordeal, however ridiculous it was to me. My chief difficulty is to con- vince the spectators that they are as safe from these influences as I am. To make this point quite sure, I have promised to take a little Sin- galese boy, next Tuesday night, and have offered a reward of ten rupees to any priest who will cause incantation to take effect upon him, on condition that the child shall not know what they are attempting, and that no effort shall be made to frighten him. Failures such as that of to-night, go like an electric shock through the whole population, and the effect will be seen after many days. I find this the most effectual method of arousing the people and gaining their attention, r.nd can ever after raise a good congregation in the villages where the experiments have been tried. I have one last blow to strike at this system, by a challenge to all the priests in the province, to meet me publicly before the face of the people ; and th^n, with this kind of opposition to them I shall have done. " Our prospects with reference to the over CEYLON. 241 throw of BadMsm were never so cheering as they are at present. Our excellent chairman, the Eev. Daniel J. Gogerly, has published a series of pamphlets, entitled The Institutes of Christianity, in which the errors of Budhism, geographical, philosophical, and theological, are pointed out with unanswerable force. The system reels under the blow. There is perhaps not a more profound Budhist scholar in the island than he, not even among the priests themselves. The priests are reading them and comparing the extracts with the works of Budha ; and if a priest be asked, why none of them attempt an answer, his reply general- ly is, ' Who is able ?' and his rueful counte- nance is a sufficient attestation of his sincerity. I am making arrangements to furnish every priest in my circuit with a complete set. "One of the mightiest agencies which is now at work for the evangelization of South Ceylon, is a Singalese Religious Tract Society. It is entirely unsectarian in its character, and is supported by Christians of all denomina- tions. Its income is above £500 a year, with an annual grant of 150 reams of paper from the London Tract Society. It has already printed and put into active circulation 397,600 Singalese tracts ; 140,600 of which were print- ed during the last year. It has also a widely circulated monthly periodical, and has issued a Singalese hymn book, and a history of the patriarchs. It is conducted with great energy and efficiency by its secretary, Mr. Murdoch, who was mainly instrumental in its establish- ment, and who relinquished a highly lucrative government situation that he might give his undivided attention to these and kindred ob- jects. " On the whole, therefore, our prospects are hopeful ; our movements against Budhism and devil worship are on a comprehensive scale, and we have manifest tokens of the presence and blessing of God upon our labors. Impres- sions are widely scattered ; the Gospel seed is sown in many hearts to grow in secret for a time ; convictions are produced, and souls are saved. " The most available portion of the circuit for missionary effort is within a circle of four miles around my dwelling ; but even this con- tains one hundred and seventy villages, and there are jungle districts where I fear the foot of a, missionary must not tread for years to come. The extent of population may be esti- mated from the fact that though my residence is a mile from the fort and town of Galle, on the Matura high road, 600 persons pass it every hour throughout the day." The mission in South Ceylon is the oldest "Wesleyan mission among a heathen population in the eastern world ; it is now in its forty-first y*r, having been commenced in the year 1814. In this quarter of the world, the missionaries have had to encounter the most formidable systems of pagan idolatry ; systems consecra- 16 ted by immemorial antiquity, wrapped in all the subtilties of metaphysical sophistry ; em bodied in books of poetry and philosophy, venerable in the eyes of the people for talent and age ; inculcated by a numerous and learned priesthood, and intimately associated with every circumstance of civil and domestic life ; systems too, which avowedly encourage the vilest passions of the human heart, promote an utter dereliction of sacred principle, and reduce the glorious privilege of immortality to an imaginary state of unimpassioned repose, in which no joy shall gladden, and no pain afflict, no activity arouse, and no desire ruffle ; but in which the human mind of " large discourse," and lofty presage, shall sink into eternal qui- escence and annihilation. Yet truth is pre- vailing over these forms of error. Several of the "priests have become obedient to the faith," and many thousands of the people have joyfully renounced the boasted advantages of their former worship for " The unsearchable riches of Christ." It is possible that the So- ciety's mission in South Ceylon is undervalued. The mission has, however, an interest of its own, both present and prospective. Budhism is the most gigantic form of error with which the Christian church has to contend. But the southern district of Ceylon is at once its crar die and its strength. Strike it here, and the wound will be felt to its very centre. Budhism is a connected system ; its doings in other lands are reported here, and occurrences in this land are told in the courts of kings in Siam and Burmah, and travel wherever its connecting machinery is found. The progress and trium23h of Christianity here would tell in every part of the system, and be a prelude to its entire downfall. Prospectively also this mission has a peculiar interest ; it is the first fruits of all the future missions of the society in Budhist lands. The Budhism of China is only a reflection of that of Ceylon, which was its source. Even locally it is situated in the di- rect route to the other strongholds of this form of error. And therefore the destinies of the future only confirm the demand which the duties of the present enforce that existing mis- sions to the Budhists should be well sustained in all the means that are necessary to secure their greatest present and permanent effi- ciency. In his late visitation journal, the Bishop of Colombo gives an account of the great success which the head of the church has conferred upon the labors of the Wesleyan missionaries in Ceylon ; we had intended to present a por- tion of that report to the reader, but the space alloted to this article is already exhausted, and we can only in conclusion direct attention for more particular information to the annexed iaUe.— Wesleyan Missionary Notices, Annual Reports and Methodist Magazine; Hough's Chriaianity in India; Sir. J. E. Tennent's Christianity in Ceylon.— R^-^ ■ W. Bdtler. 242 CEYLON. •saxag q;oq JO sJ'EXoqag -X-eq JO Jaqtnn^ -if'E0 JO jgqranjij ■ssxag qjoq JO sii3ioqDs-q^Bq •yiooqog-qjcq -q-GS JO jaqnjTi^ ■diqsjgqoiaK ■BJaquiaji\[ nojnitQ nni( JO jaqnin^ IP o cj d CO •sin-BjSTssy pn'E sau-BnoTssijii ■eao-Bij-SarqoBSjj jaqjo JO jaqomjij JO jaqran^ C^ !N r-l tH 03 #0)(OMholes. The towers on each side of the gateways are connected in front by a semi-circular fort, which is entered on the Bide. Canton is the largest of the five ports open to foreign commerce. It is the capital of Kwangtung, situated on the north bank of the Pearl river, in lat. 23° 7' N., and 113° 14' E. long. It was for a long period, the principal foreign emporium, but is now rivaled by Shan- hai. The city proper is about 6 miles in cir- cumference, being divided into two unequal parts, by a wall running east and west ; but the entire city, including the suburbs, is about 10 miles in circuit. In magnitude it is regard- ed as the third city in the empire, containing a population probably of 1,000,000. In wealth it may be next to Peking. The foreign fac- tories are the best buildings in the city, and an honor to the distinguished nations to whose enterprising merchants they belong. The promenade grounds, between the mercantile hongs and the river are beautiful, and when, morning and evening, enlivened by merchants and strangers, seeking exercise and diversion, they are a pleasant resort. The contrast be- tween the enlightened and polished citizens of the west, and the surrounding Chinese is strik- ingly apparent. The English Episcopal church on these grounds is a tasteful edifice. The city proper is yet closed against the entrance of strangers. The populace of Canton have heretofore been peculiarly unfriendly to for- eigners, and their treatment of them in lan- guage and demeanor uncommonly reproachful ; but of late there has been a great change for the better, at least so far as Christian mission- aries are concerned. The immense amount ond variety of native craft in the river oppo- site Canton, is not among the least interesting and surprising objects to the traveler. They constitute a vast floating city. Whampoa, the " Ycdow Anchorage," ia about 14 miles below Canton, and is the an- chorage ground of the foreign shipping. Above this point large vessels cannot safely venture. There are two floating chapels for seamen, the one Protestant, the other Eoraan Catholic.' The first is furnished with a chaplain by the American Seamans' Friend Society, and con- tains apartments for the chaplain, and a reading- room for sailors. On the south side of the an- chorage are two islands, called French and Danes Islands, on which foreigners are allowed to bury their dead, and ramble at pleasure. In this neighborhood is a dense population, and the lands are rich and highly cultivated, and large herds of cattle are raised for the use of the shipping, the Chinese eating little beef. Macao is a Portuguese settlement, about 8 miles in circuit, on a small peninsula at the north-western extremity of the large island called Hingshan, between 60 and 70 miles south-east of Canton. It was occupied by the Portuguese early in the 16th century, and was formerly a place of much trade ; but in a com- mercial aspect, it is not now of much impor- tance. It is, however, a very pleasant and healthful locality. The population of the pen- insula is about 30,000, of whom upwards of 5,000 are Portuguese and other foreigners, subject to Portuguese officers ; but the Chinese are governed by their own magistrates. This place is the head-quarters of the Catholic mis- sions in China, and the seat of a college, in which many Chinese youth have been educated to become preachers of that faith in different parts of China. The town is protected by three forts, on commanding eminences, and others outside of its walls defend its waters. Hong-Kong is a flourishing English settle- ment, about 40 miles eastward of Macao. Vic- toria, its chief city, is in lat. 22° 16' .north, and long. 114° 8' east. The island, which is nine miles long, eight broad, and 26 in circuit, was ceded by the Chinese to the English in 1842, at the treaty of Nanking. It is mountainous, with little productive soil, but on its northern side, where stands the long and beautiful town of Victoria, is a spacious and safe harbor. The town contains many elegant buildings, beautiful roads, and a mixed population, of whom, probably more than two-thirds are Chi- nese, whose families for the most part reside on the main land. The governor of this colony is also superintendent of British trade at the Five Ports. Here is stationed a considerable military force for the protection of the British interests in China. It is now regarded as a healthy place. It is the residence of a bishop of the Church of England, having the oversight of her Chinese missions. The Catholics are numerous. The amount of money expended in buildings in this colony, since its session, is 250 CHINA. thouglit to exceed 2,000,000 of dollars. It is a place of much trade, aud a large opium de- pot. Several newspapers are published here. Amoy is situated on the coast northward of Canton, in latitude 24° 40' N., and long. 118° 20' E. having an excellent harbor, a large native and an increasing foreign trade. It stands on the south-western corner of the island after which it is called, at the mouth of the Dragon river, which leads to Chiang- chaa-foo. 'Ihis island is about 40 miles in circumference, and besides the city it is dotted with numerous large villages. The scenery in aud around the bay is quite picturesque. Across the channel from Amoy is the island of Koolungsoo, on which is the missionary burial ground, and a place of interment for other foreigners. The city and its suburbs is about 8 miles in circuit, with a population, probably, of upwards of 200,000 ; while that of the remaining part of the island may be 100.000. This city was captured by the English in 1841, and restored again to the Chinese in 1845. The surrounding country is densely populated, and in a high state of culti- vation. FM/ic/mM.-Euhchau-foOjthat is, happy district, is in latitude 26° 5' N., aud longitude 119° 20' B. It stands on the north bank of the Min, about 34 miles from its mouth. The walled part of the city is about three miles from the river, the intervening space on the south being a beautiful plain, under the high- est cultivation, with moderate elevations, suffi- cient to give a pleasing variety to the land- scape. On the north, the city walls are near the base of the mountains, which bound the valley of the Min, from a long distance above the city, to its mouth. Some miles to the west is also a mountain range of moderate eleva- tion, and the mountains on the south bank of the river also reach from above the city to its mouth. These two mountain ranges con- verge 8 or 10 miles below the city, thus plac- ing Fuhchau in a vast natural amphitheatre, through which the Min winds majestically, diffusing beauty- and fertility throughout the extensive valley through which it flows. The British consulate stands on a hilly eminence in the southern borders of the city, from which is an extensive view of grand and beautiful scenery. From the southern and eastern bor- ders of the city proper, the suburbs extend for about three miles south-east to the northern bank of the river. At Tougchiu, a small islet amid the stream, the river is spanned by a stone bridge, 420 paces long, on the north side, resting on 40 stone piers, and on the south side of the island by another, resting on 90 abutments, extending to the south shore. These bridges are ancient structures, and on one side are lined with shops. The intervening island is about an eighth of a mile in diam- eter, and a quarter of a mile long, and dense- ly inhabited. On the south bank of the river is a large suburb of about 3 miles in length. The whole city within and without the walla is supposed to contain a population of not less than 600,000 souls. The foreign trade at this port has hitherto been small, owing in part to the difficult entrance to the river, though navi- gable for large vessels to within 12 miles of the city. The native trade is large, and the float- ing population vast. To perform the circuit of the walls on foot requires about two and a half hours, and the entire circuit is probably about eight miles. This city is the residence during a part of the year of the viceroy of Puhkien and Chekiang, and of other high officers ; among whom are the lieutenant-governor and the commander of the Tartar troops. The Manchus occupy the eastern section of the city, between whom and the Chinese there is little intercourse. Outside of the south gate is a handsome Catholic church, in which a Spanish priest officiates. Timber and paper are among the most considerable exports from Fuhchau. Within a circuit of 20 miles in either direction fi'om this city, there is a large number of towns and villages, all speaking one dialect, which, including the city, may be the abode of 2,000,- 000. In a political and missionary aspect, Puhohau is among the most important of the Five Ports, and in view of its commercial ad vantages may yet become a place of much trade. The opium trade is here vigorously prosecuted, and its destructive and demoraliz- ing influence is widely felt. Ningpo is the only important city on the coast, northward from Fuhchau. It is situated in 29° 55' N. lat,, and 121° 22' E. long., near the head of navigable water, about 12 miles from the sea. Like Fuhchau, its native commerce is large, but its foreign trade has hitherto been small, excepting the opium trade, which is there also vigorously prosecuted by two or three receiving ships, stationed a little off the mouth of the river leading to the city. Its walls are about five miles in circuit, and the city and suburbs are thought to contain a population of near 300,000. It is one of the neatest and best built cities on the coast, con- taining some streets respectable for width, and many large and well furnished shops. Many of its dwellings are of two stories. It stands in the midst of a large and fertile plain, densely peopled, and skirted by mountains on one side, about 18 miles distant. During the late war it was captured by the English troops, and held by them till the termination of hostilities. At Cliinghai, below Ningpo, near the river's mouth, there was a bloody engagement, and great carnage among the Chinese forces. Shanghai, in lat. 31° 10' N., and long. 121° 30' E., is now the rival of Canton, in the foreign trade, and bids fair to become the largest foreign emporium in China. It is the princi- pal seaport of Kiangsu, and lies on the north shore of the Wusung, about 14 miles from its mouth, and near its junction with the Hwang- CHINA. 251 "pee. By means of this river, it communicate? with Sachau, Sang-Iiiang, and other cities on the Grand Canal ; while by the Tangtszkiang, it receives produce from the south-western pro- vinces of the empire. It hence enjoys the greatest advantages for an extensive commerce. The city lying within the walls is three miles in circuit, and the entire city is estimated to contain a population of 22.5,000. It has, for some time, been in the hands of the insurgents. After an unsuccessful attack, the imperial troops burnt the eastern quarter of the city, which is now a desolation. The section occu- pied by the foreign merchants, in its streets and tasteful buildings, much resembles a west- ern city, presenting a strong contrast to the neighboring dwellings of the poor Chinese. This city also stands on a large and fertile plain, and the whole surrounding country is occasionally overflowed, causing great mor- tality, by the generation of noxious miasma. Such was the case in 1849. The native trade of Shanghai is said to be larger than at any other city in the empire. Nevertheless, Shang- hai is a poorly built and dirty place, with nar- row and densely crowded streets, almost block- ed up with articles of traffic. A large fleet of opium receiving-ships are stationed outside the river Wusung. Among its heaviest exports are tea and silks. This city is now occupied by a larger number of Protestant missionaries than any other in the empire, and three or four tasteful and commodious Christian churches have been built within the walls, in which large congregations have convened to hear the word of God. A large Catholic church stands just outside the walls, on the banks of the Wusung. Nanking. — Kiangningfoo, or Nanking, the capital of the Kiangsuprovince, stands on the southern bank of the Tangtszkiang, in about 32° N. lat. and 119° B. long. Next to Pe- king, it is, perhaps, the most celebrated city in China, though now shorn of its former glory, and apparently greatly abridged in its limits, and diminished in population. It was the ca- pital of the empire only about 50 years, in- cluding the earlier part of the Ming dynas- ty, the court having been transferred to Peking in 1411, by the emperor Yungloch. It was here that the Chinese were compelled to sub- mit to humiliating terms of peace with Eng- land, in 1842. It has recently become cele- brated, as the theatre of conflict between the imperial troops and the insurgents, and by the latter is still held. At the taking of this city by the insurgents, the Manchu troops made but a feeble resistance, and were indiscrimin- ately put to the sword. The walls are still very extensive, making its defence difficult. The ancient palaces have disappeared, and few monuments of ancient royalty now remain, ex- cept the mementos of the princely dead. Nanking is celebrated for its porcelain tower completed in 1430, after the lapse of 19 years from its commencement, and at a total cost of $3,313,978. It is celebrated also for its manu- factures, including satin, crape, nankeen, paper, ink, and artificial flowers of pith paper. It is also renowned for its scholars, and was, till taken by the insurgents, the residence of a gov- ernor-general of these provinces, and the abode of a host of officials and literary men, anxious for promotion. Its population is estimated at 400,000. Only a part of the area within the walls is covered with dwellings. The surround- ing country is beautified by hills, valleys, vil- lages, and fruitful fields. T/ie Arts. — ^The productions of the Chinese in the department of the fine arts, have little comparative merit, though a few centuries ago, China was in advance of Europe. Her land- scape and other paintings, though excellent as regards their coloring, generally fail in per- spective, and their portraits want expression. Some of their paintings on rice paper, how- ever, are very pretty, and their delineations of the persons and costume of their own country- men, are many of thorn quite accurate. Their music is harsh, nasal, sonorous, and wanting both in harmony and melody, though admired by themselves. Their statuary, even the best of it, cannot compare with the Grecian and the Eoman, and with that of western artists of the present day. Though, in the mechanic arts, the Chinese excel in some things, yet in general, they are far behind the Western world. Their imple- ments are few and simple, though well suited to their use ; but they are totally ignorant of the multifarious and powerful machinery by which Christian nations can so rapidly and so taste- fully perform the most delicate work, and exe- cute the most magnificent undertakings. They however in some degree make up in numbers, and the cheapness of labor, what they lack in machinery and in mechanical skill. Works have been executed in China, which in magni- tude may compare with the pyramids of Egypt, and far exceed the proudest monuments of human labor in the Western world. The art of printing from blocks, which is a species of stereotyping, the manufacture of paper, of gunpowder, of the most beautiful porcelain, and the discovery and use of the compass, all originated among the Chinese ; besides their exquisite workmanship in cotton, silk, wood, stone, ivory, and the precious me- tals. Of what they know in the arts, they have borrowed next to nothing from other nations. In this respect we have learned more from the Chinese than they from us. While we were in comparative barbarism, they in me- chanical knowledge and skill, were equal, if not superior to their descendants of the present day. Consequently for the improvements which the Chinese have made, they, under God, have been mainly indebted to their own genius and researches. Agriculture, Productions, Ifc. — Next to offi- cial promotion and literary eminence, agrioul- 252 CHINA. ture is ren:arded by the Chinese as the most honorable, as well as the most useful profes- sion. It is encouraged by the example of their emperor, who, at the capital, annually holds the plough in the presence of his high officers and thousands of the people ; and a like cere- mony is performed in the chief cities of the provinces, by his high officers, as his vice- gerents. It is thus honored because it is the main support of the state. Though their agricultural implements are few, simple, and rude, yet practically, agriculture has been made very effective, as evinced by the unex- ampled density of the population. Though for thousands of years the same lands have been under culture, producing annually two, and sometimes three crops, yet so far from becom- ing sterile, they appear to be increasing in fer- tility ; not only are the alluvial plains on the margins of the great rivers carefully culti- vated, but lofty hills are in many cases ter- raced from the base to summit. For fertiliz- ing their lands, the Chinese depend much on night soil, which they obtain from the cities and villages. The manure is collected for future use in pits, on the margins of their fields. The rice is first thickly sown in a small patch, and the shoots, when nearly a foot high, are trans- planted ia rows in the soft mud, and by and by between these rows the shoots for a second crop are planted, which rapidly matures after the first is gathered. For their crops of rice, especially, the Chinese, like the ancient Egyp- tians, are greatly dependent upon diligent arti- ficial irrigation. To overflow their fields, they resort to a great variety of ingenious expe- dients ; sometimes diverting the mountain streams from their regular channels, watering first the highest plots of ground, made level and bounded by low embankmeula, and from thence descending, as the proprietor wills, into the lower grounds. In other cases, water is raised from canals, rivers, and ponds, by wheels propelled by water power, by buffaloes, or by a species of treadmill, worked by two persons. The water is forced upwards through a box trough by a chain of paddles which re- volves over two axles, one at each end of the trough. It reminds one of the Israelites, who, while in Egypt, are said to have watered their lands with the foot. The Chinese gardener is assiduous in irrigating his plants. Chinese agriculture in general is much like gardening, each family at the most, ordinarily owning and cultivating but a few acres. Oxen and buffa- loes are much employed in plowing, furrow- ing, and rolling the ground. Women labor in the fields in common with the men. The land, theoretically, belongs to the emperor ; yet it descends to the eldest son, so long as the taxes are promptly paid. The younger brothers, however, with their families, being joint laljorers, have a, perpetual right to a support from the proceeds of the land. Daugh- ters cannot inherit. The Chinese beat out their grain in the field on a board, one end of which rests in the bottom of » tub that re- ceives the grain. The straw is carried home on the shoulders of men. Carts are little used, man, to a great extent, performing the labor, which here is devolved upon the beast. The agricultural classes do not generally live upon their lands, but in villages located upon the more elevated grounds. Fences are very rare, the lands being divided by ridges of earth, or embankments, which serve as footpaths. In the neighborhood of the cities, they are paved with flat stones, lying transversely. Some of these walks are many miles long. The rich plains on the rivers are minutely traversed by creeks and canals. Over these streams on the main routes, are thrown strong stone bridges. Productions. — In the northern and eastern provinces, rice is the most important agricul- tural product, grown mostly on the plains. Wheat may rank next. Sweet potatoes are produced on the hill sides, as also tobacco, peas, beans, and a great variety of vegetables. In the southern provinces, sugar is made from the cane in considerable quantity. Cotton, upon which the Chinese mainly depend for clothing, is raised in large quantities on the Great IPlain. The fruits of China are much the same as in other countries in the same latitude; but they are not -distinguished for their excellence. The Chinese are fond of flowers, which are extensively cultivated in the neighborhood of the large cities. And not content with these, artificial flowers of great beauty are manufactured and worn by females of all classes and ages. Money may procure in China almost any article of food, clothing, or furniture that may be desired, and at mo- derate prices. Foreign merchandise may be obtained for about the same prices as in this country. Compared with the price of food, the relative value of the dollar in China is several times greater than in this country. But the lot of the poor man in China, who must labor for a mere pittance, is a difficult and trying one. Commerce. — The Chinese may be called a commercial people. They have an extensive internal trade, and make large exports in tea, silks, camphor' cinnamon, fans, fire-crackers, porcelain, and other products of the soil and of the shop. A vast amount of native ship- ping may be found in all the principal cities situated on navigable waters. The merchants are found in the most distant nations of her wide colonial possessions, in the cold regions of Manchuria and xMongolia, far west in the broad territory of Hi, and in the remotest bounds of I'hibet. Her ships find their way to Japan, and throughout the ports of the In- dian Archipelago, Cochin-china Camboja, and Siam, and some few have reached Burmah and British India. Multitudes of Chinese adven turers are found in the Sandwich Islands, and on the western shores of the American conti- CHINA. 253 nent. The commercial enterprise is the more remarkable, ia view of the little protection afforded it by the imperial government, and the vexatious duties imposed on internal trade. Chinese merchantmen, trading at the different ports between Shanghai and Canton, have been obliged, at great cost, to hire foreign armed vessels as convoys to protect them from the pirates which swarm along the coast. When once at sea, Chinese vessels have little or no protection from government vessels, and if they venture into foreign ports, they are by their own laws regarded as aliens. But such is the commercial spirit of the Chinese, that in spite of these obstacles, their trade is of great extent. Necessity makes them a trad- ing as well as an agricultural people ; and they are skilful managers of trade. Placed side by side with western merchants in Singa- pore, Batavia, Siam, and China, they do not fall behind them in the acquisition of wealth. Some of the richest men in Singapore and Batavia are said to be Chinese. Fishing. — Multitudes of the Chinese depend upon fishing for a livelihood. Large fleets of fishing craft swarm at the mouths of the prin- cipal rivere, and in the neighborhood of the large cities on the coast, sometimes numbering from one to two hundred sail. Vessels often fish two and two, for mutual aid in dragging their nets. The rivers and lakes of China also abound with fishing craft, and great quantities of fish are raised in artificial ponds. The number of large fish sometimes taken from a small pond, is surprising. Birds are trained to catch fish, and other ingenious modes of fishing are adopted in which the Chinese excel. Sharks, some- times of large size, are common in the Chi- nese fish markets. Fish, both fresh and salted, forms an important part of the food of the people, which they eat with rice and vegetables. The fishermen are generally poor and illiterate, and when reduced to straits, sometimes turn pirates. Literary Examinations. — Literary attain- ment is greatly prized in China, as being a passport to office, and to distinction and influ- ence in society. In the chief cities of the pro- vinces, the lower literary degrees are conferred on those whose essays are adjudged to possess the highest merit. The themes are assigned by imperial ofiicers to all alike. The candi- dates, while composing their assays, are shut up in a large hall, and allowed nothing but im- plements of writing ; and every avenue to the premises is guarded to prevent communication from without. The names of the competitors are not known to the judges till after their decision. Only a fixed number of degrees, bearing a small proportion to the number of aspirants, can be conferred at one time. The first degree is called the siu-tsai, answering im- perfectly to our A. B. The second is hurjin, indicating a higher grade of literary attain- ment, and makes the possessor eligible to office. The third degree, called tsin-sz, (entered scholars or doctors,) is triennially conferred at Peking, only those of the ku-jin, who have not been appointed to office, being eligible, as candidates. The fourth and highest degree, called Jumlin, entitles to enrolment, as mem- bers of the Imperial Academy, with fixed sa- laries. The triennial examination for this de- gree is held in the palace. In the conferring of degrees, great impartiality is professed. The meritorious scholar, however poor, has legally the same chance for success, with the sons of the rich and influential. Yet, it is gen- erally thought that there is much of favorit- ism and bribery. But very few among the tens of thousands of annual competitors reach even the lowest degree, a,nd of the successful ones but few secure the second degree, though many struggle for it from youth to hoary age. The government makes no provision for the support of primary schools, nor does it com- pel the people to provide instruction for their children. But the making of distinguished scholarship a passport to office and honor, ex- erts a mighty influence upon the youth of China, in stimulating them to the pursuit of knowledge. Character and influence of the Chinese Clas- sics. — With regard to physical, social, and moral education, Chinese authors give many excellent rules. But while they give direc- tions as to the best methods of study, and the means of preserving health, and enforce the social duties of man to man, they make no allusion to the higher and more solemn duties of man to his Creator. The ceremonies to be observed in the mutual intercourse of parents and children, husbands and wives, brothers and sisters, rulers and subjects, &c. are mi- nutely described, and strenuously enforced ; and their works on morals are not without allu- sions to a future recompense of the evil and the good. Honesty, truth, benevolence, and even purity of heart, in their sense of the term, are inculcated. But their views of inter- nal purity and of virtuous conduct are radically different from the Bible standard. Truth is in- culcated, but falsehood is practiced ; even Con- fucius, their idolized sage, setting the example. But the consciences of the Chinese are in favor of viitue. The classical writings of the Chinese are chiefly political in their bearing, designed to instruct and admonish the ruler in the good gov- ernment of himself and of the people. Their influence over prince and people is very pow- erful; and the writings and instructions of Con- fucius, as reported and explained by hiti disci- ples, have, doubtless, been the main support of the Chinese government, since his day. (This illustrious man was born 551 B. C.) He says little on religious subjects ; but besides con- niving at the popular superstitions of his day, he gave his influence in support of ancestral 254 CHESTA. worship, by inculcating the religious venera- tion of both the dead and the living. Dr. Bridgman says of him : " Through a long life, of threescore and twelve years, Confucius busied himself exclusively with the things of this world. He not only wrapped himself up with the tissues and tatters of his pagan an- cestors, but all his energies were exerted, from first to last, in dissuading his fellow mortals from all thought of a world to come. He neither searched himself, nor would he allow others to inquire, after the wisdom and attri- butes, or even the existence, of heaven and earth. Creator, Divinity, and divine things had few if any charms for him. Time and sense, and things present and visible, alone en- grossed all his time and all his thoughts. In ther arduous labors of collecting and ar- ranging the fragmentary records of the an- cients, and in repeated endeavors to reform the men who were his contemporaries, almost his whole life was occupied. He seems to have felt that the gods of his nation were vain ; and yet it does not appear that he ever was conscious of man's insufficiency. Thus he was " without God in the world." On the part of his disciples, he is a principal object of reli- gious veneration. The Chinese classics are decidedly superior in moral purity, to the Grecian and Roman authors ; but they teach the perfectibility of human nature. They maintain that, however corrupt a man may become through the influ- ence of evil example, he may, by his own un- aided efforts, restore himself to primeval purity. Such a doctrine is hostile to the humbling truths of the Gospel, fostering the pride of the human heart. Confucius seems to have had no very distinct idea of an intelligent Great First Cause, and his followers are regarded as atheistical in their sentiments. So true it is, that " the world by wisdom knew not God." Chinese Schools. — The Chinese schools ori- ginate in the private enterprise of the teach- ers, whose wages depend on the number of their pupils. They seldom number over 20. Three or four dollars a month would be thought good wages. Sometimes several families unite in hiring a teacher by the year. Children usually enter school between the ages of six and seven. Each morning on entering the school-room, the children are required to bow, first to the tablet of Confucius, before which incense is burning, and then to salute the teacher. He then reads the lesson, and the boys repeat after hiib the characters, until they can do so independently. Then each one reads them by himself, till he can repeat them from memory. Chinese education is a constant exercise of the memory, until the classics can be rehearsed verbatim. These em- brace the writings of Confucius and Mencius, with copious commentaries, by distinguished scholars. Each day's lesson is rehearsed by the pupil, in the presence of his teacher. and writing is a daily exercise. During the first two or three years of study, they do little, except to learn the forms and sounds of the characters in their particular dialect, which in most cases widely differ from the vulgar tongue. Consequently the books which they have me- morized are not understood. After three or four years of hard study, they begin to be ini- tiated into the meaning of the characters, the teacher daily, explaining a few of them marked with red ink, and requiring his pupils to repeat the explanations after him. The number thus explained is gradually increased, until simple sentences are explained, and ultimately the en- tire, text. The constant use of the pencil, first in copying the characters, and afterwards in composing, gives the Chinese student great skill and celerity in writing. The Chinese Language. — The Chinese chai^ acters were originally symbols, not of sounds, but of ideas ; but most of them now bear not the remotest resemblance to the things signi- fied. In the imperial dictionary there are about 80,000 characters, composed of 214 radicals, or elements, according to which they are arranged. Thousands of these characters are now nearly obsolete, and not above 8,000 or 10,000 of the remainder are in common use. But the thorough mastery of these — in their forms, sounds, and significations — is a herculean work, especially including the ready and felicitous use of them in composition. But such is the attachment of the Chinese to their system of writing, that it would be no easy matter to induce them to relinquish it, and adopt an alphabetic system. The Chinese character serves them as a universal medium of communication, which no alphabetic system could do, in view of the multiplicity and diver- sity of dialects spoken within the eighteen provinces. In Pokien alone are eleven princi- pal dialects. The Chinese written character has, without doubt, powerfully contributed to the integrity of the empire, amid its frequent change of dynasties. It has likewise availed to maintain identity of manners, customs, sen- timents and feelings. The empire, in its grand characteristics, has thereby become stereo- typed, and new modes of thought and action are difficult to be introduced. In this lan- guage, free, bold, eloquent and pathetic ad- dress is next to impossible. As a medium of thought, it has great advantages and marked defects. The Chinese system of education, though it supplies valuable mental discipline, yet rather cramps the mental e'nergies, and impedes ex- pansive, vigorous, independent thought. The memory is sorely tasked, while the re.isoning powers are but partially exercised. It imparts little knowledge. One may hold the iirst rank among the Chinese literati, and yet be igno- rant of the most common branches of educar tion in our common schools. Many respect- able Chinese scholars are not acquainted with CHINA. 255 the geography even of their own country. There are men who are familiar with the geo- graphy, and civil and political condition of the principal Christian nations, but this knowledge they did not acquire at school. Ability to Read. — There is a diversity of opinion as to the proportion of intelligent readers in China, according to the locality of the observer. Among farmers, fishermen, boat- men, small mechanics, and petty tradesmen, there are comparatively few intelligent read- ers, though some of them are familiar with the few characters used in their particular vocar tions. As the result of somewhat extensive inquiry, the writer has come to the conclusion that scarcely one in ten of the adult popula- tion of China can understand books written in the simplest and most popular style. Many read the characters fluently, who do not under- stand their meaning. Temale education is not appreciated in China, and few females can read. Industry and Frugality. — Compared with ther eastern nations, the Chinese are an in- strious people, though among them are found ultitudes of idle vagabonds. The mass of le people are frugal from necessity. By their kill in cooking, they secure considerable vari- ty of food with very limited means. Multi- udes feed themselves for less than four cents . day. Salt fish, rice and vegetables, with a 9W simple condiments, constitute a large part ' their food ; though a variety of other arti- es may be had in the cities by those who are ,ble to buy. Marriage. — Children are often very early Betrothed by their parents, sometimes even in infancy. This is done through a class of per- sons who make a regular profession of match- making. And, however unsuitable the match, when once made, it is inviolable. In many cases, they never see each other until the period of their marriage. Instances have been known of betrothed damsels committing suicide, to escape union with the persons to whom they had been betrothed. Before the consummation of the marriage, a stipulated sum must be paid to the parents of the bride, generally from 20 to 100 dollars, according to the circumstances of the parties. Their marriages are pompous and expensive. The bride, locked up in a red quilt sedan, borne by four men, and sometimes followed by an immense train gaily dressed, with music, banners, and other parapharnalia, is carried by night to the house of the bride- groom, where the parties pledge each other in a cup of wine, and the joint worship of the ancestral tablets, sometimes joined with pro- stration to the parents of the bridegroom. At the marriage feast, spirituous liquors are freely nsed. The sexes eat and drink separately, when the young wife is subjected to many severe jokes. Condition of Females. — The Chinese females are very rigidly confined to the house, and en- joy limited opportunities of social ir.tercourse, even with their own sex. Brothers and sisters are in a great degree isolated from each other. When a visitor enters the house, the betrothed girl must retire into a private apartment. Almost from the cradle to the grave, the Chinese females lead a life of painful degrada- tion and toil : at home, imprisoned, and after marriage subjected to the tyrannical rule of an unfeeling husband and a cruel mother-in-law, until she in turn is allowed to domineer over the unhappy wives of her sons. How enviable the lot of daughters born and educated in Christian lands 1 Fu7wals and Burying Grounds. — On the decease of parents, their remains are enclosed in air-tight coffins, and for 7 weeks retained in the house, and every fourth day is devoted to special funeral rites. Pood is offered them, the essence of which they are supposed to eat, and prayers are offered by Budhists and Tauist priests for the happiness of their spirits. In these ceremonies there appears a striking resemblance to the tenets and practices of the Romish Church. Much importance is attach- ed by the Chinese to the circumstances and place of interment of their dead, as affecting the peace and prosperity of survivors. Wo- men are their principal mourners. To see them kneeling and howling in lonely burial grounds, as the writer has seen them, by the graves of their husbands and children, is in- deed heart-rending. Into their dark minds, their religion sheds no ray of light to illumi- nate the gloomy regions of the dead. The barren hills and the mountain sides are the chosen places of sepulture, but necessity, in some parts, compels them to bury on the plains. Vaults are not uncommon. Great numbers of the dead are placed in plank cof- fins and retained above ground for many years. They are arranged sometimes in open sheds, often to the number of 15 or 20, side by side, being the deceased members of the same fami- ly. Within the city walls, interments are seldom allowed. The Budhist priests burn the bodies of their dead and place the ashes in common vaults. Government. — The Chinese government is supposed to have existed under different dy- nasties, nearly 4000 years. It is a system ven- erable for its antiquity, and wonderful for its unity and official responsibility, from the low- est to the highest of its officers ; the emperor, however, being theoretically responsible to none, unless to heaven, whose vicegerent he professes to be. There are nine orders of civil and military mandarins, distinguished by the color and material of the buttons on their caps, by the ornaments on their girdles, and some other insignia on their robes. Civil and military officers are on nearly an equal footing ; and as the highest of the latter are commonly held by Manchus, they operate as checks-and spies upon each other. Every officer through- 256 CHINA. out the provinces, is obliged to render an ac- count of his administration to the emperor, through the officer next in rank above him ; so that the relative merits of all may be known and awarded. A general council, composed of the most distinguished personages in the Empire, assembles daily, at the palace in Peking, in the imperial presence. This coun- cil is of recent origin, and is thought to corres- pond practically with the ministry of western nations. It consists of both Chinese and Manchus, and includes the chancellors of the cabinet, the presidents and vice-presidents of the Six Boards, and the chief officers of all the other courts in the capital, all being se- lected by the emperor. Its business is to write the imperial edicts, and to aid the empe- ror by its joint consultations. The imperial cabinet is a still more select council, composed of the four high chancellors, and two assistant chancellors, consisting equally of Chinese and Manchus. Subordinate to the cabinet is a large body of officers, of six different grades, a majority of whom are Manchus. The first on the list of the chancellors, is regarded as the premier. Their business is to deliberate on the government of the empire, proclaim the imperial will, and aid in all matters affecting the peace and well-being of the empire ; all concerns, from the highest official appoint- ments, down to the lowest police court of crime, being through this cabinet, brought before the imperial court. Other minor duties also devolve on this body. The opinions of these ministers on the numerous documents which come before them, are expressed in writing, on slips of paper appended to the same, which, early on the following morning are submitted to the emperor, being read by the prime minister, usually a Manchu, and the decision of the sovereign is immediately written by one of the Chinese chancellors. Business is thus rapidly expedited. Subor- dinate to these two councils, are the Six Boards, the Colonial Office, the Censorate, Courts of Representation and Appeal, and the Imperial Academy, making in all, thirteen de- partments. The Peking Gazette is compiled from the doc- uments of the General Council, and is to the people the main source of information touch- ing the affairs of the empire. Copies of this paper are transmitted to the high provincial officers, and without change or comment are allowed to be reprinted and widely circulated. The Six Boards are the Board of Civil Office, of Revenue, of Bites, of War, of Public Worh, and of Punishments. At the head of each of these Boards are two presidents and four vice- presidents, in which the Chinese and Manchus are equally represented ; and subordinate to each of these is a large retinue of officers of different grades. The Censorate is, in its influ- ence, one of the most important of the Courts ; and examples have, not been wanting of great fidelity in the reproof even of empfirors them- selves, by courageous ministers. Its powers are extensive in connection with the adminis- tration of the courts, the provincial officers, and the criminal jurisprudence. Ordinarily, how- ever, no great reliance can be placed upon tha fidelity of these public censors. The whole number holding civil offices m the empire, is estimated at about 14,000 ; but the dependents on the government are much more numerous. In the empire are eight vice- roys and 15 lieutenant>governors, each viceroy having the government of two provinces, or two high offices in one province. The lieuten- ant-governors are sometimes subordinate to the viceroys ; but, in other cases, they govern independently. Every important position, both in the civil and military departments, is pro- vided with its appropriate officer, down to the lowest rank. In theory, the Chinese govern- ment would seem to be the most perfect gov- ernment on earth ; but in practice, it is far otherwise, owing chiefly to a want of integrity in its officers. They look for gain, and are sel- dom very scrupulous as to the means of secur- ing it. The Edinburgh Review, speaking of Sir George Stanton's translation of the Chinese Code of Law, says, " When we turn from the ravings of the Zendavesta or the Puranas, to the tone of sense and business in this Chinese collection, it is like passing from darkness to light, and from the drivelings of dotage to the exercise of an improved understanding ; and redundant and minute as these laws are, in many particulars, we scarcely know a Euro- pean code, that is at once so copious and so consistent, or so free from intricacy, bigotry, and fiction." But, whatever may be the excel- lency of the Chinese laws, the government is oppressive and corrupt in its practice, often illegal in its exactions, and, frequently, for a bribe, screening the guilty and oppressing the innocent. Woe to him who, whether innocent or guilty, falls into the hands of the Chinese officials, for he is not likely to escape without being fleeced, if nothing worse. It is jjrobabie that as many perish in the wretched prisons of China, from want and cruel treatment, as by the hands of the executioner. The nominal salaries of Chinese officials are thought to form but a small part of their actual receipts, a vast amount being the fruit of bribery and illegal exaction. Their retain- ers also are greedy dogs, which can hardly be satisfied. Pity has little place in their hearts, and the prisoner, whether innocent or guilty, is severely taxed for his scanty privileges. Chinese legislation is defective, neither defining nor acknowledging the rights of the subject. A watchful and rapacious police swarm in every city and hamlet, as spies on the people, and no one knows when he is safe and in whom he may confide : and he prefers suffering heavy exactions to resistance or complaint,' lest lie should expose himself to ten-fold worse evils. CHINA. 25r But wten large bodies of the people are jointly subjected to heavy exactions, they do sometimes resist, and inflict sore retribution on their oppressors. Tliere is nothing like popular representation in the government, and appeals from iniquitous judicial decisions are, in most cases, impossible. The judges report to their superiors as suits their own conveni- ence. The peaceable disposition of the Chi- nese is mainly the result of slavish fear, gene- rated by constant surveillance and the absence of mutual confidence and legal responsibility. Every neighborhood has its local overseers, who are responsible for the good conduct of their charge, and no member of a family or clan can offend the government without in- volving his relatives in suffering. This system of fear and espionage extends from the hum- blest of the people, through all ranks upwards, to the highest minister of the realm. In the Chinese civil polity, there is much resemblance to the regulations of the camp. The fact, however, that this system of government has continued for thousands of years, securing to so many millions such an amount of peace and prosperity, speaks much in its favor. Both the Monguls and Manchus, though originally barbarians, were obliged to. conform to the maxims, usages and laws of the ancient Chi- nese sovereigns, as detailed by Confucius and his disciples. In theory, the Chinese govern- ment is patriarchal, the emperor being re- garded as the father of his people ; and as, in China, the father has, under certain regular tions, the power of life and death over his children, so the emperor, according to his pleasure, though not irrespective of law, in- flicts upon his erring children his fatherly cor- rections, even to death itself, through his con- stituted ofBcial agents. As deceased parents and ancestors are the objects of religious ven- eration, so the emperors are worshiped both before and after their decease. This worship is required of the high officers when they con- vene in the palace. The emperor is theoreti- cally Heaven's vicegerent, and the ceremonies and objects of worship of the state religion are not allowed to the people. He only and the high officers to whom he delegates the right, must sacrifice to high Heaven. For others to do it would be rebellion. No one can be an official in China, without being an idolater, the officers being required on certain occasions to honor the local deities. In the ceremonies of the state religion, the emperor is the chief-priest. Like the Pope of Rome, he sits in the temple of God, showing himself, that he is God. The grand objects of imperial worship are heaven, earth, the temple of imperial ancestors, and the gods of the land and of grain. Sta.uling Army. — The army of the present dynasty is numerically large, being estimated at 1,200,000 ; but, in the late war with Eng- land, as well as in the conflict with the insur- gents, it has proved inefficient. The Tartar 17 soldiers are the most reliable part of the army, but they have become enervated by idleness and vice. But the greater part of the army consists of a sort of militia, who are main- tained in part by a small stipend from the government, and in part by their own labors. Several times a year they meet to be drilled, presenting, on such occasions, a truly grotesque appearance. Chinese forts are manned with rudely-constructed ordnance, wanting in some oases even a clumsy gun-carriage. Their port holes are of immoderate size. Their navy, though numerous, is furnished with inexpe- rienced officers and seamen, and is despised even by its own people. The admirals know little of the sea, and when called to meet the enemy, are said sometimes to depute their sub- alterns to the command. They cannot even cope with the pirates that infest the coast, having, at times, been obliged to buy their friendship with silver. Revenue and Disbursements. — The annual revenue of China has been variously estimated at from $120,000,000 to $200,000,000. Aside from the maintenance of the palace, the sup- port of the Manchu nobility, who are related to the throne, and the presents sent to the Jilongul and Mohammedan tribes in the colo- nies, the main expenditures are for the support of the army and navy, and for the mainten- ance of the civil officers. The nominal sala^ ries of the latter are small, compared with that of western civilians. The salary of a viceroy or governor-general, who rules over more than 50,000,000, is only about $27,000 ; that of a lieutenauf>governor, $21,333 ; that of a treasurer, $12,000 ; and from thence the salaries gradually decrease, according to rank, to about $170. As regards legal taxation, both direct and indirect, for the support of government, China is favored above every principal country in Europe. And, as there is no powerful aristocracy in China, the money that is squeezed out of the people by the offi- cers, returns back among the masses. Physical, Social, and Morai, Condition. — The mass of the Chinese, according to our stand- ard of competency, are miserably poor ; and yet such is their great simplicity as to style of living, and skill in making the most of their little, that their actual suffering from want is not great. Their system of clanship, though the source of many and great evils, yet inclines them to afford relief to their kindred. Living as they do, in large families, often including parents, children, grand-children, and even great-grand-children, numbering, in some cases, sixty or more individuals, there is something like equality of condition. But in seasons of general scarcity the suffer- ing must be very great and general ; and notwithstanding all that the government, out of its storehouses, can impart to the poor, mul- titudes die of famine, and others are driven to robbery and piracy. Granaries are provided • 258 CHINA. by the government in the walled towns,, to be | P-P[-,y^;\^,^^rfn Te Ut" aece^? opened in seasons of scarcity, from which food is either sold at a reduced price, or gratui- tously distributed, according to the circum- stances of the applicant. It is a politic and be- nevolent provision, reminding us of the plan ot Joseph, in anticipation of the Egyptian famine. According to our ideas of comtort, the dweUings of the mass of the Chinese are mise- rable in the extreme. They are low damp, dark, and ill-ventilated, and abounding m filth. Their furniture is meagre, often con- sisting of only a few rude stools and a board platform for a bedstead, on which is spread a mat, with sometimes a block of wood for a pillow. The houses of the wealthy are com' paratively spacious, and well-furnished with chairs, bedsteads, light-stands, tables, cnp- boirds, and other articles, both tasteful and convenient ; but even tkeir dwellings are wantr ing in clemdmess and com/br(, yet they are much more comfortable than we should be in the same circumstances. Knowing nothing better, they think their condition an enviable one, and would not willingly exchange circumstances with any people. Among the lower orders the separation of the sexes is not rigidly maintained ; and the cruel practice of bind- ing the feet of female children does not exist to much extent among the farming classes, nor among boatwomen — servants are often free from it. Fashion, however, still binds and shrivels the feet of the daughters of civilians, merchants, mechanics, and humble artizans and when poverty is conjoined with disability for active labor, the wretched female becomes the subject of e.xtreme suifering and degrada^ tion. Small feet are necessary to complete a Chinaman's idea of beauty ; and consequently daughters can seldom be respectably married without being thus tqrtured and fettered. The daughters of the Manchu are never subjected to this practice. The present Chinese custom of shaving the head, and allowing the hair on the crown to grow to an indefinite length, was forced upon them by the present dynasty, as a badge of sub- jection. _ What was then their shame is now their pride. The Chinese possess much corpo- real vigor, can endure much toil, and a good proportion of them attain to old age. Though among the more respectable classes there is an excessive and favorite attention to ceremony, yet in general their minds and manners are gross, and their conversation indecent. Their Bacchanalian revels are frequent and noisy, accompanied with ingenious devices to excite them to the excessive use of intoxicating drinks. The refining influence of intelligent and virtuous female society is greatly needed. Moral Condition. — Most of those vices which are known to exist among other heathen na- tions, prevail among the Chinese. The lan- guage of the Apostle in the 1st of Romans, is a faithful description of their character as a They are also given to gambling, trom the highest to the lowest. A great amount ol Sihrituous liquor is drank in connection with their food, and on other occasions, but beastly intoxication is not common in open day. Notwithstanding the rigid seclusion of the daughters ot the Chinese, there are probably few countries in which prostitution is more common and public, or attended with less dis- grace ; to say nothing of the system of legaliz- ed concubinage. I'he Opium Trade and Opium Smoking. — Of all the vices prevailing among the Chinese, the smoking of opium is the most destructive to property, health, and life. It appears to have been first brought to China by the Por- tuguese, as early as 1767. That year 1,000 chests were sold at Macao. The English East India Company commenced the importation of opium in 1673. In 1780, two receiving ships were stationed a little south of Macao, at Lark's Bay. As early as the year 1800, an Imperial edict was issued against its sale and use in China, in consequence of the disastrous effects of its use. In 1809, the Hong merchants were, by the government, compelled to give bonds that opium should be discharged from no vessel at Whampoa. But though steadily opposed by the supreme government of China, its subordinate agents, at the principal points on the coast, have' never been proof against the seductive power of gold, and their own love of this poisonous drug ; and with slight interruptions, this iniquitous and contraband trade has, till the present time, continued steadily to increase. The opium is chiefly of two kinds, Benares and Patna. produced with compulsory labor, by the East India Com- pany, and sold at Calcutta ; and the Malwa produced in a province in the western part of India, under the government of native princes, and sold at Boml)ay. It pays the Company a transit .duty of 400 rupees per chest, the number of chests in 1846 being 25,000, and furnishing the government a net income of £1,000,000. In the same year, the income from the opium sold at Calcutta was £2,000,000, making a gross amount of income from this article of £3,000,000. In 1847, at Ca cutta alone, the revenue from Opium, amounting to upwards of 31,000 chests, was £3,000,000. Most of the opium sold at these two ports, is exported to China, at an estimated profit of about 15 per cent, to the merchant. About 50 armed vessels are constantly employed in this trade, including the large number of r^ ceiving ships stationed at Lintin, below Can- ton, and at the mouths of most of the princi- pal rivers, and in the vicinity of the most im- portant cities along the coast to Shanghai in. eluding ^omoa, Amoy, Chin-Chin, Puhchai, and Ningpo. These receiving ships are an abundantly supplied with opium, and attended CHINA. 259 with clippers constantly passing np and down the coast. Including the irregular craft, the number of foreign vessels employed in the opium trade must be much larger than has been mentioned. It is stated by Dr. Kathan Allen, in his valuable Essay on the Opium Trade, that Mr. Jardine, of the firm of Jar- dine, Matheson & Co., being about to return to England a few years since, divided with his partners £3,000,000, almost $15,000,000 of profit in trade, the greater portion of which had been accumulated in the space of ten years. Thus both the production and sale of opium are powerfully stimulated by the love of gain, regardless of the ruinous consequences of this trade. Notwithstanding the cupidity of all ranks of the imperial officers in the provinces, manifested in their readiness to receive bribes to allow the introduction and use of this drug, the government at Peking has been uni- formly opposed to the trade. In 1839, just before the commencement of hostilities be- tween England and China, upwards of 20,000 chests, valued at $12,000,000, having been de- livered up to Commissioner Lin, at Canton, through his compulsory measures, were de- stroyed by command of the emperor. This remarkable act, committed as it was in the face of a threatened invasion, which soon actu- ally followed, is sufficient evidence of the sin- cere opposition of the Chinese government to the opium trade. It has been computed that not less than 4,000,000 of the Chinese are ha- bitual opium smokers, and that the average length of the lives of these wretched men, after becoming addicted to this habit, is not above ten years. On this calculation, 400,000 of the Chinese, in consequence of the use of opium, are annually hurried into the grave. On whose souls nmst the blood of these slaughtered multitudes rest I In the light of God's word, what a weight of criminal re.sponsibiIity must press upon that company whose coffers are annually filled with the price of so much blood ? And no less guilty are those who aid and abet it for the sake of gain. The emperor of China, when urged to increase his revenue, by legalizing the opium trade, re- plied : " It is true, I cannot prevent the intro- duction of the flowing poison ; gain-seeking and corrupt men will, for profit and sensuality, defeat m.y wishes ; but nothing will induce me to derive a revenue from the vice and misery of my people." A noble sentiment, worthy of a Christian mind ! What a contrast to the practice of the East India Company, and its multitudes of nominally Christian coadjutors, in the sale of opium ! Very naturally may the Chinese regard with abhorrence that reli- gion which in their view tolerates, if not en- courages, such iniquity. The use of it rapidly enervates, emaciates, and destroys the body, often speedily reducing the infatuated smoker to the appearance of a walking skeleton, and its cfiects upon the immortal mind are even more to be deplored, wasting its vigor and in- capacitating it for powerful and continuous effort. The bodily and mental sufferings of the confirmed smoker are too great to be described. His state may be called one of liv- ing death. While he has the means of pro- curing wholesome food, the injurious effects of his indulgence are less powerful ; but when, as a consequence of his excessive vice, he can no longer procure healthful aliment, and opium likewise fails him, then diarrhea comes, and often amid his own filth, and by the way side, the wretched man dies like a brute. On this subject the writer can speak from personal ob- servation. The use of this drug turns out a numerous, miserable, and abandoned class of men, who subsist, while they have strength to move, by begging in the streets, a mere pit- tance, from shop to shop, and finally, in many cases, perish by the way side, without an eye to pity them or a hand to help. Numbers by the use of opium suddenly terminate their wretched lives, and rush, uncalled, into a mise- rable eternity. Multitudes of unhappy fe- males in the same way wilfully destroy them- selves, often as a consequence of the vices of their husbands. The misery w,hich this drug introduces into families and communities, and the vice and crime of which it is the occasion, cannot be told. In the opinion of the Chinese there is little or no hope of the reformation of the opium smoker ; and he himself, while he groans beneath his chains, and hates, with pe- culiar malignity, the instruments of his ruin, despairingly surrenders himself to his fate, having neither the physical nor the moral re- solution to abandon the drug. Such is the almost hopeless condition of millions of the Chinese. The evil is constantly and rapidly increasing, and threatens, like a resistless flood, to overwhelm the empire. At a mode- rate calculation the first cost of opium to the Chinese is about $40,000,000 annually, most of which is paid in silver, though of late Chi- nese products have, to some extent, been takeu in exchange. Opium and the implements used in smoking it are publicly sold, and the dens in which its victims congregate now need little concealment. 'I'he higher classes are much addicted to this vice. From careful and repeated inquiries of intelligent individuals, the writer is of the opinion that opium is used by more than one-half of the adult male popu- lation of Fuhchau. Probably the proportion is about the same at the other ports. IBut the first cost of opium to the Chinese is only a part of its actual expense. The officers must be bribed to wink at its sale ; the native mer- chants must fill their coffers ; and the prepar- ers and retailers of the drug must all live by their iniquitous business. But the pecuniary loss, though enormous, weighs but a feather in comparison with the physical, social, and moral evils which result from the traffic. 1 he exam- ple of Christian nations in obstinately perse- 260 CHINA. vering in this trade, in opposition to national law, and in the face of these terrible evils, tends most powerfully to prejudice the Chi- nese against the glorious Gospeh The writer has had ample evidence of this fact in his ex- perience as a missionary. Next to the deep corruption of the heart, the sale by foreigners and use by the Chinese of this drug, consti- tute the most formidable obstacle to the suc- cess of the Gospel in China. And yet there seems little hope of their emancipation from this evil, except through the power of Divine truth, accompanied by the Holy Spirit, recti- fying public sentiment and purifying the heart. But if professedly Christian nations would arrest the sale, there would be much hope for the salvation of China. Such a course would, in the end, be an incalculable advantage to lawful commerce. Trade with China must ultimately be extensive and pro- fitable, in proportion to the wealth and pros- perity of the people, to which the use of opium is terribly ruinous. Commerce, humanity, re- ligion, the good of the undying soul, all re- quire its immediate suppression. Female Infanticide in China. — Another of the crimes more or less prevailing among the Chinese is the unnatural one of female in- fanticide. This crime is known to a great ex- tent to prevail in sections of the Fokien and Kwangtung provinces. The degree and extent of its prevalence in other parts of the empire is unknown ; but considering the small degree of criminality which public opinion, in China, at- taches to this practice, it may be expected to prevail elsewhere, under similar external circum- stances. Eev. David Abeel made particular in- quiries on this subject in the vicinity of Amoy. In 40 towns and villages in the department of Tsienchau, he learned that on an average, about 40 per cent, of the girls born there, were mur- dered by their parents in infancy, and about one-fourth of those born in 1*7 towns in the de- partment of Chiangchau. It is known to pre- vail in Puhchau and vicinity. A country woman a few miles below the city, of her own accord, informed the writer and other friends that she had destroyed four daughters, as if the thing were common and innocent. Intelligent Chi- nese residing in Puhchau, represent the prac- tice as being very common in the neighboring villages. The unfeeling manner in which the matter is spoken of, gives us reason to suppose that the custom is general. It is probably more common aniong the poor than among the rich. Their sons they do not destroy, be- cause they regard them as profitable to their parents. Poverty, the difficulty of rearing them, and the expenses of their marriage, are the more common reasons assigned for the destruction of their female infants. Mothers seem no less ready to strangle or drown their infant daughters, than fathers, perhaps antici- pating their sufferings and future degradation if spared to live. Religions Sects. — The principal religious sects in China are the Budhists, the Tauists, and the Confucianists. The latter, however, hardly merits the name of a religious association. Budhism does not exist in China in its purest form, as in Siam and Burmah ; but among the people it is combined with the early supersti- tions of the Chinese. It was introduced in the year of our Lord 66, through an imperial em- bassy sent westward in search of a, sage, who had appeared or was expected soon to appear. In Hindostan they met with the Budhists, and returned to the emperor with several priests, and with some of the books and relics of that sect, and from that time Budhism spread rapidly in China, through the means of its books and the conformity of its priests to the popular idolatry. The opinions of this sect are widely prevalent in China, and their temples and monasteries abound ; although few of the people are its professed devotees. Their priests are employed at funerals, and in seasons of public calamity, and have much influence over the popular mind. They derive their main- tenance partly from presents and partly from the cultivation of the lands appropriated to their monasteries, many of which are liberally endowed. Tauists. — The sect of the Tauists, or Ration alists of China, claim as their founder, Lautsz, or Laukiun, born b. c. 604, in the province of Hupeh, and is believed by his followers to have been carried in the womb 80 years, and to have been born with white hair and white eye-brows. He is represented to have been of humble parentage, a diligent and successful student in historical and sacred lore and to have traveled through Central Asia. His Me- moir on Reason and Virtue is his only philo- sojjhical work. In his doctrines, he is said to resemble Zeno, recommending retirement and meditation as the principal means for the puri- fication of the soul, and restoring it to the bosom of the supreme Reason, from which all material, visible forms are said, by him, to be emanations. In one section he says, " All the visible parts of the universe, all beings com- posing it, the heavens and all the stellar sys- tems, all have been formed of the first elemen- tary matter ; before the birth of heaven and earth, there existed only an immense silence in illimitable space, an immeasureable void in endless silence. Reason alone circulated in this infinite void and silence." He regards all good beings as emanating from, and returning again into the bosom of Reason, there to dwell forever : but the bad are to be subjected to successive births, with their accompanying mis- eries. Mixed with these ideas, there is much confused speculation. In his language there is somewhat to remind us of the actual creation of the world by the eternal Word, but neither he nor any of the pagan philosophers by their reasonings attained to clear ideas of the Great First Cause. He lived an ascetic life, and en CHINA. 261 joined contemplation united with good deeds. la his writings are many excellent sayings. Laukiun's followers believe him to have been an impersonation of Tau or Reason, the last of three incarnations having been a. d. 628. The Tanist sect is made up of priests, who with their families, live in the temples, and are sup- ported by the cultivation of the grounds be- longing to these establishments, the sale of charms and nostrums, and by presents received from the people on funeral and other occasions. They shave the sides of their heads, and coil the remainder of the hair on the crown, and wear slate-colored robes. They study astrolo- gy, profess to deal with spirits, pretend to have found a liquor, the drinking of which will in- swe immortality. Some of the emperors are reported to have tried it to their cost. By some of the emperors this sect has been much honored. A splendid temple was erected to Laukian containing his statue, and in a. d. 674 literary examinations were ordered to be held in his Memoir on Eeason. The Tauists are now extensively regarded as cheats and jug- glers. The ceremony of running through the fire is still observed by them and by their de- luded followers, both of whom are at times severely burned. They worship a great num- ber of idols, and are very superstitious. Pro- bably Pantheism is the prolific mother of their idols. Confucianism. — The Confueianists are the literary men of China. They have no distinct religious system, except such as is comprehend- ed in the worship of Confucius, and the rever- ence of his doctrines. Confucius said little on religious subjects ; his instructions being polit- ical in their bearing, attaching great impor tance to ceremonies in social and official inter- course, and in conjunction with the worship of the dead. There is much reason to doubt whether Confucius had any distinct idea of an almighty, spiritual Intelligence, distinct from the material universe. An intelligent agency is however allowed by him and his followers to exist in the persons of the sages, who, from time to time, have risen up to expound the will of heaven and earth, the male and female powers of nature ; and with them they form a trinity. They sometimes seem to be placed on an equality with heaven itself. The most renown- ed of these sages are Yau and Shun, two an- cient emperors, and Confucius, the instructor of 10,000 ages, to whom, according to the Chi- nese Repository, there are, in connection with the examination halls, 1560 temples dedicated. In these temples are offered tens of thousands of pigs, rabbits, sheep, and deer, and 27,000 pieces of silk ; all of which are appropriated by the worshipers. His followers are regarded as materialists or atheists; yet they conform to the popular idolatry, and probably, in fact, differ not much from the multitude, in their religious sympathies. In the Confucian system, a holy life is not enforced by future sanctions, and the duty of man to his Maker is entirely unnoticed. Dr. Bridgman expresses the opinion decidedly that the Chinese pay divine honors to Confucius. He says : " In their moral codes and in their religious systems, the Chinese place Confucius in the highest rank, and give to him the high- est honors. There is in each one, of all the fifteen hundred and odd districts of the Empire, a temple dedicated to him. There twice an- nually, once in spring, and once in autumn, the local magistrates, as priests, must enter and offer to him, to the sage Confucius, prayers and sacrifices. On one of those occasions, in the city of Shanghai, I was, with other mission- aries, an eye-witness of these solemnities. A bullock, pigs and goats, and many other offer- ings were all duly prepared and laid before the altar ; and then the magistrates, in their robes of state, officiated as priests, kneeling, prostrat- ing themselves, and offering prayers. Thus, in their official stations, clothed with authority, they go forth in public and lead on these devo- tions ; offering to a mortal man that worship which is due only to Jehovah. The Emperor, his ministers of highest rank, and all his rep- resentatives, " the shepherds of the whole flock in all the Empire," engage in these acts of devotion, doing honor to Confucius, not as a mere man, but as a god. As they honor Heav- en and Earth, so they honor this man ! " The ancient popular idolatry of China. — Be- fore Confucius's day, there prevailed a popular idolatry in which ancestral worship was prom- inent. To no other form of idolatry are the Chinese more attached at the present day, and in no other worship are they more serious. How much of the nature of divinity they at> tach to the deified spirits of their progenitors, it is difficult to decide ; but on the pantheistic principle, so prevalent in the eastern world, they may legitimately regard the authors of their existence as constituting a part of the divine essence, and worship them as such. This principle lays an indefinitely broad foundation for polytheism. Everything mysterious and spiritual seems in their view to partake of the divine, and hence, shin, not a very uncommon term for spirit, is the generic name of all their objects of religious worship, and as corrcs-, ponding to theos and theoi, the Greek terms for God and gods, in English, has been preferred by the majority of Protestant missionaries in China, as the word to be used in the transla- tion of the Scriptures, for both the true God and for false gods. In the worship of ances- tors, all the pagan sects unite, and it was tolerated by the Jesuits in their Chinese con- verts. Besides the worship of ancestors, the Chi- nese have innumerable other objects of reli- gions reverence, as the god of wealth, the pat- ron deities of the various professions, and the gods and goddesses of the sea, hills, rivers, and other localities. From the common practice 262 CHINA. among the people of appealing to heaven in their oaths, they would seem to have an idea, though doubtless a confused one, of some supe- rior power, more to be feared than their com- njon objects of worship ; but how much the different deities or powers of nature, on the pantheistic principle, are in their minds asso- ciated and blended, it is difficult to determine. The (jrod in whose hand their breath is, they do not honor. Their motives to religious wor- ship seem to be chiefly to avoid temporal calam- ities, and procure temporal blessings ; and to this end they offer theii'' prayers and sacrifices to their innumerable local deitien. With regard to the destiny of their souls, they seem to allow themselves no great anxiety, except so far as they imagine their future happiness to be de- pendent upon the worship to be rendered them by their descendants after their decease. The Chinese regard it as among the greatest of calamities to die without any sons to perpetu- ate their name and make offerings to their spirits, at their graves. Their fears are to a great extent imaginary, and their hopes are shrouded in the gloom of a dark and doubtful futurity. Like the ancient heathen, they are led away by dumb idols, ar>d yield themselves to the guidance of the prince of the power oi the air, the Spii-it that worketh in the children of disobedience. MISSIONS. Nestoeian Missions. — The Nestorians, at an early period, appear to have established Christian missions in China, though few or no traces of their labors are now known to re- main. Arnobius, in the third century, men- tions the Ceres, as Christians, whom Mosheim regards as Chinese. The Nestorian patriarchs are said in the fifth century to have sent me- tropolitans into China, thus indicating the long existence of Christian churches in the empire. Between a. d. 636 and 181, no less than seventy Nestorian missionaries, whose names are preserved, labored in that empire, among whom Olopun, the earliest of the num- ber, was especially distinguished. The record discovered by the Jesuit missionaries, in 1625, in Singanfoo, in Shensi, is the most celebrated monument of the zeal of the Nestorians in China. This record is engraven on a stone tablet, and Mosheim regards it as genuine. It purports to have been erected in a. d.'781, in the second year of Kienchung, the ninth em- peror of the Tang dynasty ; Kingtsing, a priest from the church in Tatsing (India) being the author of the preface to the procla- mation issued by the emperor Taitsung, in favor of Christianity. This proclamation is dated in the 12th year of his reign, corres- ponding to the year of our Lord 639. The preface gives the history of the Nestorian missions in China, for 14S years, from a. d. 636 to 781. It eulogizes the emperors who reigned during this period, and recounts their efforts in favor of Christianity, in the building' of churches in numerous cities ; honoring the ministers of religion, among whom Oio- pun, who arrived in 696, was raised to the rank of high-priest and national protector. Some of the emperors of this period, however, seem not to have patronised Christianity. One or more persecutions were raised by the Budhists and literati, and the churches were allowed to go to decay. But in the mean time among the priests there were able defenders of the Gospel. IMaking all due allowance lor the inflated language of this document, it seems probable that there were at this time, Chris- tian churches in the chief cities of the empire. A translation of the Scriptures is said to have been in the library of the palace, 'i'he state- ments contained in this inscription respecting India are glaringly incorrect. The Nestorians, moreover, are represented as using images and praying for the dead — whereas they abhor image worship ; and Christ is spoken of as having succored the confined spirits. It ia [joesible. however, that the word translated images, may have some other signification. But, however this may be, it is evident, from other sources, that there were Nestorian churches in China at this time. 'J'he patri- arch Salibazacha is reported to have sent a metropolitan to China, in 714. Timotheus, who appears to have been the Nestorian patri- arch upwards of forty years, was zealously de- voted to Christian missions. Puring his patri- archate, Sabchaljune, a learned monk, from the convent of Beth-oben, after having been ordained bishop, and successfully preaching the Gospel on the eastern shores of the Cas- pian sea, penetrated China, and there exten- sively published the word. On his return to Syria he was murdered by barbarians. Others soon followed him to the Chinese. Oiristians were found in Southern China in the ninth century, by two Arabian travelers, and many Jews, Mohammedans, Persians, and Christ. arts, in A. D. 877, are said to have been massacred in Canton by one Baichu, who bad revolted from the emperor. In a. d. 845, Wutsuiig or- dered 3,000 priests from Ta-tsin, to retire to private life. Marco Polo, a distinguished Ve- netian, who visited China about the middle of the thirteenth century, and there spent more than twenty years, for a time holding a high office in Chih-Kiang, under Ivublai Khan, often speaks of meeting with the Nestorian Christians in Tai tary and China. In the ele- venth century tlie missionary zeal of the Nes- torians was stimulated by the remarkable con- version of a Mogul prince, called after his Ijaptisra Prester John, whose subjects, 200,000 in number, became nominal Christians. His domains are supposed to have been/ on the northern borders of China Proper. His de- scendants, for several generations, were re- nowned for their military achievements, and the third in succession as conqueror on the CHINA. 263 fields of Transoxonia and Persia. The last of this race of Cnristian kings was slain by Giiigis Klian, about 1202. The victorious arms of the MjhamiBjdaa princes, about the beginning of the fifteenth century, overran the raj;ioQ3 in wliich Nestorian missions had bjen planted, to the coast of the Caspian sea, and thi expulsion of the Mongols from China, in 13j9, by tlie Ming dynasty, probably nearly extirpated the surviving Nestorians in this land. Assyria and Persia have, since the tenth cen- tary, been ruled by the followers of Moham- mjd. C.iristians in those countries have been bitterly harrassed ; and the Nestorians, from being a numerous and powerful community, are now few and despised. Their missions are no more. No Nestorian churches, and no copies of the Scriptures translated by them into Chinese, or any books of theirs, are known to exist in Cnina. Yet it is to be hoped that many souls may have been saved, by means of their missions. There may have been much admixture of error in their teachings ; but we have reason to believe that the flickering flame of true piety lingered macli longer with them than with any other of the ancient Christian sects. (See historians.) Papal MI33^o^fs.— The Eoman Catholic Missions in China began in the 13th century. An interesting account of them is given in Williams's Mid ile Kingdom, to which we are chiefly inlebted for the following facts. John de Monte Corvino went to China by the way of India, an! was kindly received by the emperor Kublai Khan. At Cambalu, the present Pl^ king, he built a church, and in eleven years is Siid to have baptized nearly 6000 persons, and parcha-ijd 150 children, whom he taught Greek and Latin, and for whom he comp3sed devotional works. His success procured, him the OjHea of archbishop from Clement V. in 1307, with seven assistant suffragan bishops. He died in 1330. In 1336 he was succeeded by Nicholas de Bentra, with 26 assistant mission ary laborers. Corvino in one of his letters speaks of having translated the New Testa- mint and the Psalms into the Tartar language. Tnese missionaries appear to have labored chiefly among the Monguls, and their subse- quent e.xpulsion from China by the Ming Dy- nasty, was accompanied by the annihilation of Christianity am )ng them. For upwards of 200 years between the rise of the Ming Dy- nasty, in 1368, and the arrival of Riooi, in Canton, in 1S81, we hear little respectinar either the Nestorians or Catholics. Prom the commencement of Ricci's labors to the death of Tunching, in 173S, is a highly interesting period of Papal missionary history in China. Eicci and his associate Ruggiero were much opposed by the government, and attempted the concealment of their real intention, by afiirming that their only wish was the acquisi- tion of the Chinese language, arts, and sciences of the country. Eicci was finally allowed to reside at Shanchau-foo, where, habited as a Bud- hist priest, he remained for some years, ingra- tiating himself by his courtesy, presents, and scientific attainments, though his doctrines were opposed by the Confucianists and suspi- cious magistrates. He and his associates sub- sequently adopted the dress of the literati, left Snauchau, and after temporary residences in Nauchang, Suchau, and Nanking, he was admitted into Peking in 1601, and courteously treated by the emperor Wauleigh. Other Jesuits joined him, and under his direction successfully prosecuted their work. Ricci's manners, acquirements, and liberal presents, gained him tue favor of men in authority, some of wliom he ere long numbered as converts. Among these, Siu, baptized Paul, a native of Shangnai, was an early, and very eiflcient cooperator. His dauguter, named Candida, was an illustrious and able coadjutor in the missionary work. But among the imperial otficers tnere were powerful opposers, and in 1617 the missionaries were ordered to leave the country. Tney, however, maintained their position, and by tue year 1636, had published 340 treatises, some religious, but mostly scienti- fic. Ricci, the superior of all the missions, among his published rules, allowed to the converts the practice of ancestral worship, regarding these rites as merely civil in their nature. This subject subsequently became a bone of con- tention between the Jesuits and the Francis- cans, and the source of much alarm to the Cninese. Ricci died in 1610, at the age of 80 years. By the Jesuits, he has been greatly extolled for his virtues ; and by others ma- ligned. A Catholic author thus speaks of him, " I'ne kings found in tiim a man full of com- plaisance ; the pagans, a minister who accom- modated himself to their superstitions ; the mandarins, a polite courtier, skilled in all the trickery of courts ; and the devil a faithful servant, who, far from destroying, established uis reigu among the people, and even extended it to the Christians." After his death, the work prospered under the patronage of Paul din, who in 1622, obtained the repeal of the edict of expulsion, and arrested the persecution. Schaal, a German Jesuit, recommended to the emperor Siu in 1628, by his great attain- ments, secured imperial honor and authority among his brethren. During the bloody com- m >tions intervening between the decline of the Ming dynasty, and flie firm establishment of the Manchus on the throne, lasting about 30 years, the missions suffered much. In this contest the northern missionaries sided with the Manchus, while the Romish missionaries at the south favored Tunglieh, the surviving claim- ant to the throne of the fallen Ming Dynasty, in whose family were some distinguished con- verts, and whose troops were led by two Chris- tian Chinese officers, Thomas Kiu, and Luke Chin. During the reign of Shunchi, Schaid and his coadjutors were honored, and couverta 264: CHINA. were multiplied in the provinces ; but the re- gents into whose hands the government fell at his death in 1661, issued a decree that Schaal and his associates merited the punishment of seducers, who announce to the people false and pernicious doctrines. Schaal, though tutor to the young emperor Kanghe, was proscribed and degraded, and in the following year died of grief, aged 78 years. Verbiest, the next most distinguished of the missionaries, was with others imprisoned, and numbers were banished from the country. On Kanghe's as- suming the reins of government in 1671, then bnt 8 years of age, he released Verbiest, to ap- point him his astronomer in place of Schaal, and allowed the missionaries to return to their stations, though he forbade his sub' jeots embracing Christianity. The missionaries requited the kindness of the emperor, not only by their scientific labors, but by casting cannon for his army. In 1636 Schaal cast some for Shemchi, and Oubiest cast the total number of 450 pieces, more than 300 of which he blessed and called after the names of different saints. On the arrival in China while Ricci was yet living, of the Franciscan and Domi' nican orders, a violent dispute arose between them and the Jesuits, regarding ancestral wor- ship, and the proper term in Chinese for G-od, wliich continued into the reign of the successor of Kanghe, and was referred to the emperor himself and to the decision of Popes Innocent X., Alexander VII., and Clement XI., whose successive decrees nullified each other. The final decision, however, was adverse to the Jesuits, establishing Thien Chu, as the term for G-od, and forbidding the practice of the ancestral rites to the Chinese converts. The spirit with which these disputes were conducted, the pomp and arrogance of the priests, and the interference of the popes with the laws of the realm regarding its rites and ceremonies, at length aroused the jealousy of the govern- ment, and awakened a determined and bitter opposition, manifesting itself in a succession of persecuting edicts. Kanghe would not allow the Pope the right to legislate over his subjects, and in 1706 decreed to countenance only those missionaries who preached the doctrines of Kicci. In 1718, he decreed that no missionary should remain in the country without his per- mission, given only after the promise to follow the rules of Ricci ; and yet no missionary could leave for China without the most solemn promise to follow the instructions of Clement XI., respecting these ceremonies. Kanghe's policy was to restrain the missionaries, and keep them about him at court, while he allow- ed the work of persecution in the provinces. After the death of Kanghe, in 1723, the hos- tility of the government to the missionaries in- creased, and the Catholic faith was strictly prohibited, except the few wanted at Peking for scientific purposes. Tlie missionaries were all ordered to leave the country, and more than 300,000 converts were left without teachers. Some missionaries secreted themselves, and others, after reaching Canton, contrived to re- turn to their flocks, who were every where subjected to severe persecutions. Since that time they have seldom been free from persecu- tion. , ... The character of the Catholic missionaries may be seen from the following remarks of Ripa, one of their missionaries at Peking : — " The diffusion of our holy religion in these parts, has been almost entirely owing to the catechists, who are in their service, to other Christians, or to the distribution of books in the Chinese language. There is scarcely a single missionary who can boast of having made a convert by his own preaching ; for they merely baptize those who have been al- ready converted by others. He even adds, that up to his time, in 1714, none of the mis- sionaries had been able to surmount the lan- guage, so as to make themselves understood by the people at large." Between 1580 and 1724, about 500 mission- aries had been sent out. The empire is parti- tioned into Bishoprics, and Vicariates, divided between the Portuguese, the Spanish Domini- cans, the Lazarists, the French Society, whose missionaries are mostly Jesuits, and the Pro- paganda, .whose missionaries are principally Italians. The .summary for 1846 gives 12 bishops, and 7 or 8 coadjutors, about' 80 foreign missionaries, 90 native priests, and about 400,000 converts. The schools are not given. There are six colleges for educating native priests, including that at Naples. The above statistics are the latest we have found. Undoubtedly the number of Catholic mission- aries has greatly increased in China since 1846. In the report of the Lazarist missions in the empire in 1849, found in the Annals of the Faith, including Macao, the Vicariates of Honan, Kiangsi, Chihkiang, Mongul Tar- tary, Eastern Thibet, and the diocese of Peking, there are stated to be 33 European priests, 45 auxiliary priests, 6 nunneries for the education of native clergy, 50 schools for both sexes, and a total of about 50,000 neophytes. If the other bishoprics have increased in the same rar tio as the Lazarists, within the last few years, the estimate for 1846 must be much below the present numbers. The Catholic church requires no evidence of spiritual regeneration, as a condition of bap- tism ; but this ordinance is itself regarded as producing this great change. They attach the greatest importance to the baptism of the dying children of the heathen, and make this a distinct department of their missionary work. Statements are annually made to their societies of the number of dying and other infants of the pagans baptized. " The agents in this work," says Verolles, " are usually elderly women, who have experience in infantile diseases. Fur- CHINA. 265 nislied with innocent pills, and a bottle of holy ■water, whose virtues they extol, they introduce themselves into the houses where there are sick infants, and discover whether they are in danger of death, and in this case, they inform the parents, and tell them that before adminis- tering other remedies, they must wash their hands with the purifying waters of their bottle. The parents, not suspecting this pious ruse, readily consent, and by these innocent frauds, we procure in our mission the baptism of 7 or 8,000 infants every year." One missionary speaks of the employment of the sponge for this purpose, to whose use the Chinese were led to attach peculiar medicinal virtue, and con- sequently were much delighted to have their sick children washed, that is, baptized with it. The preaching of the G-ospel is regarded as a secon- dary matter, their work being, to a large ex- tent, ceremonial. We hear little of them as preachers, this work being entrusted to their native assistants. The word of life is never distributed ; for its influence is feared. Pkotestant Missions. — The first efforts of the Protestant churches for the salvation of the Chinese were chiefly directed to the Chi- nese emigrants in the Indian Archipelago and Siam, with a view to the ultimate spiritual regeneration of China itself. It was hoped that laborers might thus be raised up who should become the ministers of mercy to their own people. To some extent these hopes were realized. And when China was opened par- tially to the Gospel, some who had been labor- ing and praying for China's perishing millions, were prepared to enter into this great field ; but others had already entered into their rest. London Missionary Society. — The opera- tions of this society in China were commenced in 1807. The subject had been under consid- eration for a considerable time previous their first object being to secure a faithful translation of the Scriptures into Chinese. Their first missionary was Bev. Eobert Mor- rison, who may be regarded under God as the father of Protestant missions in China. By talent, education, and piety, he was peculiarly fitted for the post. Having been engaged for some time previous in the study of Chinese, under the instruction of a learned native then in England, he embarked in January, 1807, going by the way of New York, and while in the United States, he received from Mr. Madi- son, then Secretary of State, a letter of intro- duction to our consul at Canton, from which he subsequently derived much advantage. On his arrival in Canton, he devoted himself t« study, at first occupying a retired room, eating and dressing like the Chinese, and having lit- tle intercourse, except with the natives in his service, with whom he held a religious service in private. He subsequently deemed it wise to throw ofi' the Chinese costume. He hired apartments in a factory, and through Sir George Stanton, formed an advantageous ac- quaintance with Mr. Eoberts, the chief of the Company's factory at Canton. Near the close of 1808, he was married to Miss Morton, daughter of John Morton, Esq., and on the day of his marriage, was appointed translator to the Company's factory at Canton, with a salary which rendered him independent of the society's funds. This appointment greatly aided him in his great object of translating the Scriptures, and preparing a dictionary and elementary books in Chinese. In this work, he was much assisted by a manuscript Latin and Chinese Dictionary, furnished him by the Eoyal Asiatic Society, a Harmony of the Gospels, and the Pauline Epistles in Chi- nese, the work of some unknown hand, and a, copy of the Acts of the Apostles in Chinese, which he brought out with him. He also ac- knowledges valuable aid from an Exposition of the Decalogue, in three volumes, furnished him by a native Boman Catholic convert. Sam Tok, the Chinese with whom he studied in London, continued to be a valuable assistant. At the close of 1808, he writes to the direc- tors : — " The grammar is prepared for the press, and the dictionary is filling up. The manuscript of the New Testament is in part fit to be printed." His revision of the Acts of the Apostles was printed in 1810, being the first portion of the Scriptures in Chinese printed by any Protestant missionary. His Chinese grammar was printed at Serampore in 1815, at the expense of the Bast India Company. The Gospel of Luke was published in 1812. About this time, an edict was issued by the Chinese government, prohibiting the printing of religious books, and the preaching of the Gospel, followed with acts of persecution ; but Mr. Morrison unobtrusively continued his work, and in the same year the directors sent out Mr. Milne, as his fellow-laborer. In July, 1813, he reached Macao, but was allowed to remain there only 10 days. The following five months he spent at Canton, in the study of the language. In February, 1814, he left for a tour in the Indian Archipelago, taking with him 2,000 Testaments, 10,000 tracts, and 5,000 catechisms. In his letter of January 11, 1814, communi- cating to the Society the fact of the comple- tion of the New Testament, Mr. Morrison re- marks, " I give this to the world, not as a per- fect translation. I have done my best ; it only remains, that I commit it by prayer to Divine blessing. The Gospels, the closing Epistles, and the Book of Eevelation are entirely my own translating." For the middle part of the volume he acknowledges his obligations to the labors of some unknown individual. During this year the Company testified their value of Mr. Morrison's Dictionary by furnishing an experienced printer, Mr. P. P. Thorns, with the necessary apparatus for printing the work. In 1814 Mr. Morrison baptized the first Chi- 266 CHINA. nese convert to Protestant Christianity, Tsae A-KO, aged 27, after much instruction, long trial, and a lull confession of his faith in the Lord Jesus. This was done, to use Mr. Mor- rison's own words, " at a spring of water issu- ing from the foot of a loity hill, by the sea^ side, away from human observation." He continued stedfast in his Christian profession till his death, in 1818. Mr. Milne rejoined Mr. Morrison September 27, alter his return from his tour in the Archipelago. In one year, after entering the missionary field, he publish- ed a farewell address to the Chinese in the Archipelago, a singular instance of linguistic proficiency. In January, 1816, Mr. Milne went to Penang, and while there obtained from the government land for a missionary establish- ment at Malacca, which latter place beiame the permanent field of his missionary labors, ■where he afterwards became the head of an Anglo-Chinese college, founded in part by the liberality of Dr. Morrison. On the 7th of July, 1816, Mr. Morrison and Lord Amherst visited Peking ; which visit fur- nished a good opportunity of obtaining in- formation respecting the country and its dif- ferent dialects. In 1817, he was honored by the University of Glasgow with the title of D. D. ; and during this year he published his" View of China for Philological Purposes," and a " Chinese translation of the Morning and Evening Prayers of the Church of England." In the translation of the Old Testament he chose the Pentateuch, the Psalms, and the Pro- phetical books, and Dr. Milne the remainder. In November. 1818, the entire Bible was completed, and published, by the joint labors of Morrison and Milne, a glorious work, which the Catholic missionaries in China have not yet executed, notwithstanding they boast of about 400,000 converts. Dr. Morrison also published other smaller works. The British and Foreign Bible Society, during his lifetime gave at different times the aggregate sum of £5000 for the printing of the Chinese Scrip- tures, and £4(10 were for the same object collected in the United States. In his trans- lation of the Scriptures, he did not adopt an elevated and recondite style, intelligible only to the highly educated ; but he chose language plain and simple, suited to the comprehension of the common people. He says, " In my translation I huve studied fideliti/, perspicuity, and simpticity. I have preferred common words to classical ones ; and would rather be deemed inelegant, than hard to be understood. To the task I have brought patient endurance of labor and seclusion from society, a calm and unprejudiced judgment, and, I hope, an accu- rate mode of thinking. With a reverential sense of the awful responsibility of misrepre- senting God's word, I have made no departure in any sensible degree from the sense of the English Version ; and have not affected to make a new translation, or an improved ver- sion, immediately and solely from the origi nal." Those who have thoroughly tested Morn- son's translation, as the writer has done, by reading it extensively with Chinese of different degrees of literary attainment, can hardly deny its general perspicuity ; and as to its fiilel.ty, it has not probably been surpassed by any succeeding Chinese version of the Scrip- tures. His style is not pleasing to Chinese scholars, preferring, as thiy do, the terse and recondite, unintelligible to ordinary readers. His principal fault consisted in the use of too many connective particles, giving to his com- position an unnecessary verbosity. Fewer words might have been used, and the meaning of the Spirit have been made equally clear. In 1821, Dr. Morrison was bereaved of his wife, who died of the cholera in the sweet hope of heaven. This year his valuable Dictionary was completed. As a Chinese lexicographer he performed an invaluable service to com- merce and Christian missions ; and his name deserves to be held in grateful and honored remembrance. His Dictionary was published by the East India Company at the expense of £15,000. In 1824, Dr. Morrison returned to England, after 17 years of severe missionary toil, and was there received with distinguished honor. After his marriage to Miss Armstrong of lyiverpool, they embarked in May, 1826, and arrived at Macao on the 19th of Sept. following. Leang Afa, a distinguished Chinese con- vert, baptized by Dr. Milne, and ordained by Dr. Morrison before he sailed for England, de- serves a brief notice. He is the author of sev- eral valuable tracts, and has distinguished him- self by his usefulness to individuals, several of whom he has baptized, and likewise by his zeal and boldness in the preaching of the Gospel and in the distribution of books at the literary examinations. In Aug. 18.S4, the rage of the mandarins was excited against him. Two of his friends were seized, and one of them was cruelly beaten because he refused to betray Afa's concealment ; and he himself, with great diffi- culty escaped to Macao, and was taken on board one of the English ships at Lintin. One of the tracts distributed on this occa- sion fell into the hands of the distinguished leader of the insurgents, and was the foundar tion of his earliest Christian impressions. Afa has ever remained steadfast in his Christian profession, and continued to be a diligent preacher of the word. _ Dr. Morrison's health was not vigorous after his return to China ; yet he conducted religious services on the Sabbath, often both in English and Chinese, and prepared tracfs for distribu- tion. About this time, he had the satisfaction to baptize Clwn-Tsing, a Chinese teacher once employed at the Malacca college. In 1832 he writes, " I have been 25 years in China, and am now beginning to see the work prosper. CHINA. 267 By the press, we have been able to scatter kllo^vledge far and wide." The foUowhig year he and liis assistants, Ala and Agaug, were diligent in scattering the word of life ; 60,000 sheet tracts, and 10,000 copies of prayers and hymns having been printed, and most of them distributed, partly among the students at the literary examinations. Though feeble, he con- tinued his work in the absence of his family, wiio had sailed for England. On the 1st of Aug., 1834, this devoted missionary was sud- denly called from his eai-thly labors to his home in heaven, having continued his Chinese ser- vices with his domestics to the close of his life. His last service was characterized by much holy ardor. His remains were taken to Ma- cao for interment. China shall yet rise up and call him blessed. By his decease, the mis- sion was left without any one to look after the few who had been brought under Christian instruction, and who were dispersed by the persecution which broke out shortly after his death. In 1835, Rev. AV. H. Medhurst ard Bev. Edwin Stevens arrived in China, but nothing permanent was done by this Society, in Canton, for 14 years after the death of Dr. Morrison. In Feb. 1848, Benjamin Hobson, 1). D., a missionary of the Society, secured an eligible position some distance above the for- eign factories, on the margin of the river. He met with a kind reception in the neighborhood, and the patients who visited him three times a week, numbered from 100 to 150, and were attentive to the preaching of the word by Afa, followed by remarks from himself. 'J'he Sab- bath was reserved for special religious services, in which Afa was a bold and faithful preach- er. The reports of this mission, from year to year, down to 1853, represent it as continuing a steady and encouraging course of Christian effort in the way of medical and surgical aid to the sick, accompanied with the teaching and preaching of the word of life by the vener- able Afa and Dr. Hobson, assisted by Lau Ting Shen, agent of the Religious Tract So- ciety. The number of hospital patients for 1852 and 1853 was 44,366. Four weekly ser- vices were held with the patients. Between "70 and 80 usually attended the public services, conducted alternately by Afa and Dr. Hobson. In 1853, there were 11 church members, and 5 native agents. Dr. Hobson remarks, "With respect to any visible eflects upon the heart and conscience of our hearers and readers, in- ducing them to seek salvation from the wrath to come, we are still very much in the same position as when the missionary hospital was opened here five years ago." Yet he believes that favorable impressions, with regard to the Gospel, are manifesting themselves. Syste- matic opposition to its truths is decidedly di- minishing, and its teachers are treated with more respect by the rude and turbulent sur- rounding population. In 1852 he published a valuable work on the Elements Df Physiologi- cal Science and Aiatomy,which has been read with interest by the Chinese. Hang-Kong. — Soon after the termination of hostilities between England and China, the Directors of the London Missionary Society decided on the relinquishment of their mis- sions in the Archipelago, and concentrating their efforts for the Chinese in China itself. Instructions were accordingly given to their Chinese missionaries to meet in Hong-Kong, to consider the plan of future operations. This meeting was held in August, 1843, at which were present Messrs. Medhurst, Legge, Milne, Hobson, J. and A. Stronach, S. Dyer, and Ihe Hon. J. R. Morrison. Agreeably to the recommendation of this committee, the society resolved on converting the Anglo-Chinese College in Malacca into a Theological Semin- ary, for the training of a native ministry for China, selected Hong-Kong for the seat of this Institution, and appointed Rev. James Legge as its superintendent. Rev. Dr. Legge and family arrived in Hong-Kong on the 10th of August, accompanied by three promising native Chinese Christians from Malacca. The printing apparatus, and other moveable property at Malacca, were soon transferred to Hong-Kong. A medical establishment was also opened in connection with the mission, by Dr. Benjamin Hobson, who, since 1848, has been assisted by the Canton Medical Missionary Society. Agong and Chin Seen, who came with Dr. Legge from Malacca, and Leang Afa, preach- ed in the hospital, and in other f«rts of the settlement with much encouragement. The report for May, 1845, gives a cheering view of the mission. During the year, the native evangelists had been diligent in preaching the Gospel to large and attentive congregations in the Chinese part of the settlement. Rev. William Gillespie arrived there July, 1844. Ground for a missionary establishment had been obtained, convenient to the Chinese po- pulation, and the requisite buildings erected thereon, and the foreign residents in Hong- Kong had liberally responded to an appeal for the erection of a chapel for English and Chi- nese worship, called the Union Chapel. In June, 1 846, two aged Chinese were received into the Mission Church, and on that occasion seven Chinese surrounded the table of the Lord. Chin Seen, who had long enjoyed the care and instructions of Dr. Legge, was ordain- ed to the Gospel ministry. Vt. Hobson had previously been obliged to leave for England on account of the health of his wife. She ex- pired on the borders other native land. Dur- ing his absence he was married to a daughter of the Rev. Dr. Morrison, and on the 10th of March, 1847, embarked the second time for the East, together with J. H. Herschberg, M. D., subsequently medical missionary at Hong- Kong. Rev. Dr. Legge, by reason of ill-liealth, returned home in 1846, accompanied by three intelligent Chinese youth, who, during their 26S CHINA. stay in England, were th'ere baptized by him in the presence of the great congregation. These young men were natives of Malacca, and were baptized in the chm-ch in which Dr. Milne, the President of the Malacca College, used to worship. It was a thrilling scene. After Dr. Legge's return to Hong-Kong, he mentions, under date of November, 1848, the reception of an aged Chinese, and three young men of much promise, into the church. The latter were members of his seminary. Their names were A-ohiong, Ach'heong and A-King. Thirteen others, including three seminarists, were also applicants for baptism. In 1850, he had four candidates for the ministry under his instruction, besides the oversight of a male boarding school of 30 pupils, and the stated preaching of the Gospel in the Union Chapel. The native church, under the pastoral care of Chin Seen, then numbered upwards of 20 members, and the Bazar Chapel, in which he preached, was filled with attentive hearers. During the year, six members had been added to the native church, one of whom was a man of talent and highly educated. It is remarked, that for one candidate received, the missiona- ries were compelled to decjine many. The Ma^ gazine and Chronicle for June, 1850, contains an extract of a letter from Dr. Herschberg, giving a cheering account of the influence of his hospital, from which it appears to have been the birth-place of some precious souls. His average daily patients were between 50 and 60, and in oormection with the medical practice, about 100 daily heard the Gos- pel. In their annual view of their Chinese Mis- sions for 1851, the directors remark : " It is therefore with peculiar satisfaction that the directors report that the New Testament tho- roughly and carefully revised, principally by our missionaries at Shanghai, has been printed in that city, and also at Hong-Kong." By the introduction of metal type of reduced size, and of beautiful form, for which we are iudebt ed mainly to the patient labors of Mr. Biohard Cole, the Scriptures in Chinese can now be printed in a small volume, and at a greatly reduced price. According to this re- port, there were then in the school at Hong- Kong, under the superintendence of Dr. and Mrs. Legge, 40 boys and 20 girls, all domesti- cated amidst the habits and enjoyments of a Christian family, and carefully instructed in the several- branches, both of useful and Christian knowledge. In the theological class were five young men. Since the opening of Dr. Hcrschberg's Hospital, in September, 1849, 3,066 patients had been relieved. The report of 1853, represents the missionary operations at Hong-Kong, as being in a prosperous state, though, in October, 1852, the mission was af- flicted by the sudden death of Mrs. Legge, leaving three children and an afliicted husband, to mourn her departure. The number of church members was then 24, male pupils m ttie boarding school, 45, and 10 girls. In this mission is one of the most valuable printmg establishments in China. . The London Society's mission at Shanghai was commenced by Messrs. Medhurst and Lockhart in December, 1843, with encouraging prospects. It was the earliest Protestant mis- sion in that city. Dr. Lockhart, under date of Feb. 1, 1845, states the number of his patients, since the preceding February, to have been 10,600, to whom Mr. Medhurst preached three times a week, and distributed tracts to readers. At his house he had attentive con- gregations. In the surrounding villages, as far distant as 15 miles from the city, they had preached and distributed tracts, and had been invited to large towns 25 miles distant. In March of the same year, two interesting in- quirers are mentioned, and subscriptions to the amount of $1,000 for a Union Chapel by the foreign residents in the city, designed for Eng- lish and Chinese worship. An English ser- vice on Sabbath morning was held in the Consulate, and there was weekly preaching in a Chinese temple. Mr. Medhurst's valuable printing establishment at Batavia was brought to Shanghai, and now began to be employed in the printing of weekly sermons, and other publications. Opposition from the numerous Catholics at Shanghai began to appear. A later communication remarks, " Our sanctuary was opened on the 24th of August, (1846,) when every part of it was crowded with hear- ers, who listened attentively to the preached word. Since that time, divine service has been continued therein every Sunday after- noon, attended by crowded congregations, who come regularly and sit quietly to the end." At the meeting of the Society in May, 1847, it was reported that three Chinese had already been baptized, one of whom was a literary graduate. During the year ending May, 1847, 34,400 copies of different works were printed, and about 500 tracts had been given weekly to the attendants on the religious ser- vices, besides those distributed in the hospital, in the neighboring villages, and on the junks trading to Peking and other cities. The medical department was flourishing. Nov. 26, 1846, Eev. Mr. Milne and his wife arrived at Shanghai, and April 1, 1847, Eev. Messrs. Mun-head and Southwell, and Mr. A. Wylie, superintendent of the press, sailed for that city. In June, 1847, delegates from several star tions convened in Shanghai, for the revision of the New Testament in Chinese. After a long discussion on the proper term for God and gods to be employed in a Chinese translation of the_ Holy Scriptures, not being able to agree in opinion, they concluded to proceed in the work of revision, and leave the terms for God and the Holy Spirit, for future settle- ment. Canton, Amoy and Ningpo, were rep- CHINA. 269 resented by Rev. Messrs. E. 0. Bridgman, J. Stronach, and W. 0. Milne ; and Shanghai, by Eev. Messrs. Boone and Medhurst. Rev. Messrs. Johnson and White were chosen to represent Puhchau, but circumstances did not allow of their acting on the committee. The ill-health of Bishop Boone prevented him from taking much part in the revision. The Report for 1847 mentions the forma- tion of a church of nine members. In the following year, ending May, 1848, the labors of the mission continued much as usual, and the attendance on the preached word was en- couraging. The printing amounted to 71,400 copies of various works. In 1849, besides the English service in the chapel, conducted in rotation by brethren of different missions on Sabbath mornings, there were held on other hours of the day, three native services, and one in the hospital, besides two weekly services in the former, and two daily exercises in the latter place for the patients and others employed on the premises. In most of these services there was a good attendance. The colporteur Wang Show-yih was a zealous laborer in Shanghai and the neighboring vil- lages. In September of this year, the writer visited Shanghai, and there spent some weeks in the hospitable family of Rev. Dr. Bridg- man. It was a season of severe sickness, es- pecially in this mission, two of whose mem- bers. Rev. Mr. Southwell and Mrs. Mary Wylie, were there called to their heavenly rest. Rev. Mr. Southwell had recently entered the field, and Mrs. Wylie was called home, after having long toiled for Christ among the Kaf- fres in South Africa, then known as Miss Mary Hanson, Agent of the Ladies' Society in London for the Instruction of Females in the East. A letter from Eev. Mr. Muirhead in 18.50, remarks, " In the chapel we have on the Sabbath six services, from half-an-lfour to an hour each, and during the week we have service once every morning, and in the even- ings twice. Every week, there are not less, on the average, than from 800 to 1,000 indi- viduals within the walls of the chapel, hear- ing the words of eternal life." This comprised only a part of the weekly labors of these brethren in the preaching of the G-ospel. In ths following year, the labors of the mission were unremitted, and health prevailed among them. The missionaries remark that, though many are willing to hear the word, they have no personal convictions, and like not the exolusiveness of the Gospel, however much they affect to admire the excellency of its moral precepts. The hopeful conversion and baptism of 8 Pokien men, through the labors of Rev. J. Stronach, during less than a year, deserves grateful mention. While engaged in the revision of the Scriptures, he statedly preached to the Pokien residents in Shanghai, with blessed results. Between April and October, 1850, there were printed at the Shanghai mission press, 50,000 copies of evangelical publications. The revision of the New Testament had been completed, and that of the Old Testament had been commenced. Soon after the completion of the revision of the New Testament, Rev. Messrs. Medhurst, Milne, and Stronach, in compliance with the instructions of the direc- tors of the society, withdrew from the general committee for Scripture revision, and prose- cuted their work on the Old Testament alone. Dr. Bridgman being a minority of the com- mittee, on the revision of the New Testament, does not regard himself responsible for .the style of the revision, or its principles of trans- lation. This work is essentially the produc- tion of Messrs. Medhurst, Milne, and Stronach. A letter from Rev. J. Stronach, in July, 1851, gives the gratifying intelligence of the recep- tion to church membership of eight other Po- kien Chinese, making in all sixteen within the space of twelve months. The latest intelli- gence from this mission, preceding the report for 1852, represents the various services at the chapels, as being well sustained, though for the most part, as usual, consisting of transient visitors. Preaching in the temples and by the wayside was continued, favored with a listen- ing ear among the people. The hospital was sustained, and the press was kept in vigorous operation. During the year there were printed 5,000 copies of the Q-ospels and Acts ; 10,000 of a condensed statement of Christianity ; 10,000 of the Three Character Classic ; 10,000 catechisms ; 3,000 of Sabbath calendar ; 5,500 copies of the New Testament, and 2,000 copies of Two Priends, making together, 45,500 copies. The preaching of the Gospel has been the main instrumentality used for the salvation of souls, for which purpose, besides the hospi- tal and temporary halls, in 1853, the mission had, in tlie centre of the city, two chapels, jointly accommodating 800 hearers. This year the revision of the Old Testament, by Rev. Messrs. Medhurst, Milne and Stronach, was completed. The whole number of Dr. Lockhart's patients, since the commencement of the mission, in 1843, is stated at 100,000, and the entire amount of printing by the mis- sion, during about ten years, including fly sheets, tracts, books, and Testaments in the Chinese language, was estimated at about 500,000 distinct copies. A boarding-school of eighteen male pupils had, as early as 1853, been opened by Mr. Muirhead, designed to teach various branches of useful knowledge, solely through the medium of the Chinese. The native church then numbered twenty-one members, sixteen of whom were Pokien resi- dents, and three Shanghai Chinese. The bre- thren, while not discouraged by their limited success and the obstacles to the triumph of the Gospel, yet deplore the extreme religious apa- thy of the people. They remark, " All around us, we find proofs of civilization and 2T0 CHINA. refl.neraent. Increased intercourse, however, with this world of souls, has greatly unfolded its moral aiid religious characteristics, and we see that the masses are either the dupes of an atheistical philosophy, or the slaves of despi- cably puerile superstitions. Though several systems of idolatry obtain among tliem, each with its numerous temples and cumbersome rites, yet the religious apathy spread over all the people is woeful. ' Like priest, like peo- ple,' all seem utterly devoid of serious thought and concern." Amoy. — This city and its vicinity is one of the most promising missionary fields in China, owing in part to the frank and friendly dispo- sition of its inhabitants towards strangers. This society's missioa in Amoy aas commenc- ed by Rev. Messrs. J. Strouach and William Young, in July, 1844 ; Rev. Dr. Abeel, of the American Board, having already been in this field upwards of two years. On the 1st of De- cember they commenced Christian worship in a large hong, in a populous part of the city, which they had previously fitted up for a cha- pel, and here, daily, morning and evening, preaching in Chinese was sustained, with au- diences varying from 100 to 150. A letter, written in July, 1845, speaks of increasing de- corum during religious services, and of the wide diffusion of the Gospel, through preach- ing and tract distribution. Under date of June 29, 1846, Messrs. Stronach and Young speak of having, during the last three or four months, visited upwards of twenty towns and villages in the neighborhood of the city, some of which contained 10,000 inhabitants. In all these places they met with a friendly recep- tion, and preached the word. Owing to the small proportion of readers, they were deeply convinced of the importance of the living preacher, and were shocked by the extensive prevalence of infanticide. In May, 1847, the meeting for Chinese women is described as in- creasing in attendance, and the truth seemed to be producing a powerful impression upon the hearts of the people. By reason of ill- health, Rev. Mr. Toung and wife, in tne sum- mer of this year, left Amoy for England. Rev. A. Stronach, under date of March 10, 1848, gratefully announces the hopeful conversion and baptism of a father and his son, the latter aged 28, being the first fruits of this mission. Rev. Mr. Pohlman was present, and assisted in the solemn services. Another letter of De- cember 6, 1848, describes the conversion of a Chinese soldier, called Tan Tai, an intelligent and courageous man, and who subsequently signalized his devotion to Christ amid perse- cution from his military associates, but who, notwithstanding his Christian principles, was subsequently promoted to office in the army. Mrs. William Young's female boarding school, which commenced before their depar- ture for England, in July, 1846, was resumed soon after their return, in the fall of 1848. On the 1st of November, 1849, it contained six boarders and nine day scholars, and funds only were wanting, indefinitely to increase the number of pupils. Besides studying the Chi- nese character, they were then learning to read their mother tongue, through the medium of the Roman letters. In 1851, this school had thirteen boarders and seven day scholars. The Chinese boys' boarding school, under the care of Rev. A. Stronach, then contained eight pupils, whose studies included the Chinese classics, the English language, and the careful reading of the Holy Scriptures. Rev. T. Gil- flllan joined this mission in March, 1850, but within about two years returned to England. On the first Sabbath in January, 1852, two other Chinese were added to the church. Two of the church members were employ- ed, as colporteurs. A joint prayer-meeting of the mission churches of the L. M. S. and of the American Board had been established by a voluntary movement of the native Chris- tians. • In 1853, a spirit of active piety per- vaded the native church, and ten individuals were candidates for baptism, three of whom were expected soon to be admitted into the church. TABULAR VIEW. i i ho .a Co £ a STATIONS. 1 a a 6 II a 3 ^ s s ■f w a 1 4 6 h CO 8 a i 1^ 1 ■5? 1 1" Canton . . . . 1807 2 1 1 1 1 11 Hong Kong . . 1843 4 3 1 1 2 I 45 1 10 24 Shanghai . . . 1843 3 I i I 2 1 18 21 Amoy .... 1844 2 1 10 1 15 5 8 Totals . . . 9 4 3 3 1 7 3 73 2 25 5 64 CHIKA. 271 Ambeioan Board. — The following account of the origin of American Missions in China has been kindly furnished us by Rev. Joshua Leavitt, who was, at the time, Correspond- ing Secretary of the American Seamen's Friend Society : After the lamented decease of Dr. Milne, Dr. Morrison was left for several years to labor alone, and without the solace of any Christian society that would sympathize in his wort. At length, a kind Providence sent to Canton a true brother, in the person of the late excellent David AV. C. Olyphant, Esq., who went to China in a mercantile capacity, in connection first with the house of Thomas H. Smith & Co., and afterwards with that of Talbot & (Jn. Mr. Olyphant entered deeply into the situation and plans of Dr. Morrison. Together they es- tablished the monthly concert of prayer — the first on the eastern coast of Asia. As the London Missionary Society delayed year after year, the sending of additional helpers, Mr. Olyphant suggested that an appeal should be made to the American churches to enter into the work. A joint letter was actually forward- ed to Dr. Spring, and some publications were made through the New York Observer ; but up to the year 1829, nothing effectual had been done in the matter. In the summer of 1828, the American Sea- men's Friend Society went into operation. Shortly afterwards, the acting, secretary came into possession of communications, and a small collection of publications, which had been for- warded by Mr. Olyphant to his friend Mr. George Douglass of New York, who was also, like himself a Baltimorean. Among the pub- lications were some accounts, by Dr. Milne, of his explorations among the ancient Dutch churches in the island of Java, as well as his- torical sketches of the movements in China. The perusal of all these documents produced a strong desire to see the American church en- listed in the evangelization of China. A labor- ed article on the subject was published in the Christian Spectator. One of the plans suggest- ed was, that the Seamen's Friend Society should make a beginning, by sending out a chaplain for the numerous body of American and Kng- lish sailors in the port of Canton, who might after a while become qualified to preach to the Chinese. Another suggestion was, that by a mission to Java, the Eetbrmed Dutch churches in this country, who were then doing but little for missions, might be aroused to a zealous co- operation in the work. In February, 1829, the executive committee of the A. S. F. S., formally resolved to estab- lish a mission at Canton, as soon as the proper man could be found. In September, of that year, Mr. Olyphant wrote to the Society at NewY'ork, and simultaneously to the Ameri- can Board at Boston, that the good ship Ro- man, Captain Lavender, belonging to him. would sail for Canton early in October, and if a missionary could be sent out in her, the pas- sage should be free. Mr. Evarts went at once to Andover, and there found Elijah C Bridg- man, a young man who had just finished hit theological studies, and was still undecided as to his future field of labor. Mr. Bridgman waa so much impressed by the providential aspect of the call, that he at once resolved to respond to it and devote his life to China, and he there- upon went to his native place, Belchertown, Mass., and was ordaiued as a missionary to the heathen. On the same day that Mr. Evarts went to Andover, the Seamen's Secretary was led, through a suggestion from John Nitchie, Esq., to make a proposition to the Rev. David Abeel, a zealous young clergyman of the Reformed Dutch Church, who had just returned to his father's house in New Brunswick, N. J., hav- ing resigned his parochial charge at Athens, N. Y., on account of the delicate state of his health. He also gave a favorable response, and in less than two weeks from the day the application was made, both the missionaries arrived in New York on the same day, and prepared to embark for China. Mr. Abeel re- mained about a year in the service of the Sea- men's Friend Society, and then, as had been at first proposed, transferred his services to the American Board, under whom he visited Java and other eastern countries. He was succeeded as Seamen's Chaplain by Rev. Edwin Stevens, a tutor in Yale College, whose inter- est in behalf of China originated from the perusal of the article in the Christian Specta^ tor. Dr. Bridgman still remains in China, and is acknowledged to be the most accomplished and learned Chinese scholar of the age. — J. L. Canton. — Mr. Abeel, having connected him- self with the Board as their missionary, made exploring tours to Java, Singapore, and Siam. Mr. Bridgman entered at once on the study of the Chinese. He also became editor of the Chinese Repository, which was established m May, 1831, a post which he continued to hold for 16 years. Preaching to foreign residents, also, continued for many years to form a prom- inent part of his work. He had under instruc- tion a number of Chinese youth, among whom was a son of Leang Afa ; and part of his time was devoted to the distribution of books, and personal conversation with the natives. A printing-press, types, and office furniture, were presented to this mission by the Bleecker street Church and Society, New York, and called the " Bruin press," in memory of their former pastor. The mission was reinforced by the arri- val of Rev. Ira Tracy, and Mr. S. Wells Wil- liams, October 26, 1833, and of Rev. Peter Parker, M. D., Oct. 28, 1834. Mr. Williams took charge of the printing-press, giving him- self also to the study of the (lanton dialect. Rev. Mr. Tracy soon left to eslablish a mis- sion at Singapore. Rev. Edwin Stevens, who 272 CHINA. had been employed as Seamen's Chaplain, while acquiring the language, was now a missionary of the Board, and in 1834, he accompanied Eev. C. Gutzlaif, and a gentleman from Ben- gal, on a tour, with the intention of visiting the tea plantations in Fuhkein. On the 6th of May they reached the mouth of the Min, which leads to Fuhchau. After proceeding up the river, unmolested, four days, they were suddenly tired upon, on the morning of the 5th, by the soldiers on both sides of the river. Two of their men were slightly wounded, and they were compelled to return. This was the first visit of any Protestant missionary in this re- gion. In August, 1835, Messrs. Medhurst and Stroms proceeded northward to Shantung, in the American brig Huron, with a cargo, con- sisting of a few bags of rice, and 20,000 vo- lumes of Christian books. They visited Shanghai, and a number of villages on the coast, and distributed many thousand books to eager multitudes. They returned in safety, after an absence of two months. This vessel carried no opium. Mr. Williams was at Macao, in 1836, prints ing Mr. Medhurst's dictionary. Dr. Parker, having visited Singapore, returned in Sep- tember to Canton, and opened a dispen- sary, to which great numbers of ophthalmic and other patients resorted. Mr. Stevens, being on a missionary voyage in the Indian Archi- pelago, was suddenly called away by death at Singapore, January 5, 1837. In 1838, Mr. Williams was still at Macao, studying the Chinese and Japanese languages. This year, Messrs. King, Parker, Gutzlaff and Williams undertook a voyage to Yeddo, in the ship Morrison, to return to their country seven shipwrecked Japanese, and also to ascertain whether there was any opening for Christian intercourse with Japan. But the shipwrecked Japanese were not permitted to land, and the vessel was subjected to a brisk cannonade, both at Yeddo and Kagosima Bay, and with difBculty escaped. They embarked on this voyage July 3, and retui'ned to Macao Au- gust 29. Eev. Mr. Abeel, who had returned to the Uni- ted States in 1833, on account of his health, rejoined the mission in Feb. 1839 ; and Wm. B. Diver, M. D., arrived in September following. It was during this year that the Chinese go- vernment took those vigorous measures at Canton to suppress the opium traffic, which re- sulted in the war with England. The disturb- ances at Canton interrupted the operations of the mission, and the hospital was temporarily closed, having, previous to this time, given aid to 6,540 patients. A revised edition of the New Testament, prepared in part by Mr. Bridgman, had already been printed in Sing- apore, and, to some extent, distributed in Can- ton. Dr. Parker took this opportunity to visit the United States and England, and plea4 the cause of Christian philanthropy. He return- ed again to his work in 1842. Bev. Dyer Ball, M. D., having been obliged to leave om- gapore on account of the health of his wile, re- moved to China. He remained at Macao ^ till the close of the war ; after which, he joined Dr. Bridgman, at Hong-Kong, which had been ceded to England by the treaty of Nan- king, in 1842. Here mission premises were erected on land purchased for the purpose of the government, and missionary operation* were steadily prosecuted in the several depart- ments of preaching, printing, and tract distri- bution, and the healing art for about three years. Here Mrs. Ball died in 1844. In the summer of 1845, the, brethren . left Hong-Kong, and resumed the partially sus- pended missionary operations at Canton. In 1844, Mr. James G. Bridgman arrived in China, and some time in the year 184S became an assistant missionary of the Board, and was subsequently ordained at Canton. In June, 1846, Dr. Bridgman was married to Miss Eliza Gillett, a member of the American Episcopal Mission ; and Dr. Ball was subse- quently married to Miss Eobertson from Scot- land. On the return of the missionaries to Canton, a strong prejudice against foreign teachers was found to exist ; but in the hos- pital there was an encouraging field of labor, where the word might be sometimes addressed to 100 souls. The missionaries, however, were much restricted, being obliged mostly to live within the limits of the foreign factories. In 1846, a party, consisting of Messrs. Bridgman, Pohlman, and Bonney, with Mrs. Bridgman, while passing under a bridge in a boat, nar- rowly escaped with their lives from a shower of stones thrown upon them from the bridge, by an infuriated mob. Mr. Bonney had for- merly been a teacher in the Morrison School ; but in 1846, he became an assistant mission- ary of the Board, and has since been a devoted laborer, in preaching, teaching, and distribut- ing books. Dr. Ball superinterfded the Chinese printing, dispensed medicine statedly to the sick, kept a boarding-school of eleven pupils, and conduct- ed a Chinese service in his own house on the Sabbath, where an interesting audience con- vened. Dr. Bridgman's time was divided be- tween the Eepository, the revision of the Scriptures, the preaching of the Word at the hospital, and occasionally to Dr. Ball's con- gregation, and the instruction of an interest- ing Bible class, two of whom gave increasing evidence of piety, and five of whom desired to profess Christianity. Mrs. Bridgman had a promising school of Chinese youth under her tuition. Eev. Dr. Parker having accepted the appointment of Secretary of Legation to the United States Embassy, his connection with the Board was consequently dissolved in 1847. Almost from the first the Hospital had been sustained independently of the Board. His labors continue much as heretofore. CHINA. 273 Dr. Bridgman thus speaks of the moral char- acter of the people, after 16 years continuous residence in China : " The longer I live in this country the more do I see of the wickedness of this people ; the more do I see the necessity of great efforts to bring them to a knowledge of the truth. The great bulk of the people know not God nor his truth. They are the willing servants of sin ; they love unrighteous- ness, and there is no wickedness which they will not commit. All that Paul said of the ancient heathen is true of the Chinese, and true to an extent that is dreadful. Their in- most soul, their very conscience seems to be seared, dead, so insensible, that they are, as re- gards a future life, like the beasts that per- ish. It often fills my heart with inexpressi- ble sorrow to see what I see, to hear what I hear. It is truly a great valley of death, of putrefaction, of living death. No painting, no imagination can portray, and lay open be- fore the Christian world, the awful sins, the horrible abominations which fill the land." The writer's experience of about 18 years among them confirms his description. With the approval of the Committee, Mr. Williams returned to this country in 1844, and while here published his " Middle King- dom," one of the most valuable works that have been issued upon that country. He re- turned to his post in 1848. In March, 1 847, Dr. Ball secured a house by the river side, about a mile and a half below the factory, and there soon after opened pub- lic worship in Chinese, with an audience of from 60 to 100. In July a meeting for females was commenced by Mrs. Ball and her daugh- ter, now Mrs. Happer, which was at times attended by 30 or 40. This movement was an important advance in regard to missionary liberty. The Report for 1848 acknowledges the print- ing of 10,000 copies of tracts by Milne, Abeel, and Afa, at the expense of Rev. Dr. Parker. The word of life was everywhere dispensed among the people. One member of Dr. Bridg- man's Bible-class had been baptized, and ano- ther gave much evidence of piety. On the 1st of June, 1847, he removed to Shanghai, to aid in the revision of the New Testament. Since that time the general course of missionary labor has been essentially the same from yea,r to year. The missionaries in that field have been enabled to maintain their ground, and gradually, by private teaching, by the diligent preaching of the Gospel in stated places and by the wayside, by the healing of the sick, and the manifestation of a uniform spirit of love to the people, to dissipate their bitter prejudices, and win their confidence and respect. For a time Mr. Bonney labored with much encouragement at Whampoa, and widely preached and dis- persed among the numerous villages the word of salvation. Dr. Ball's school, in 1849, num- bered 14 boys, who, in addition to the study 18 of their own classics, were instructed in geo- graphy, astronomy, natural philosophy, and the truths of the Bible, through the medium of the Chinese. The Chinese Repository waa suspended at the close of 1850, after having reached its 20th volume. In December, 1850, tliis mission was afflicted by the death of Eev. James G. Bridgman, occasioned by a wound inflicted upon himself in a fit of temporary in- sanity, connected with greatly impaired health. He survived the wound but a few days. In 1850 Mrs. Bridgman had an interesting girls' school of 20 scholars at Shanghai, 12 of whom were boarders. In 1852 two Chinese at Can- ton are reported as furnishing good evidence of piety, and Dr. Ball's school had amounted to 20 pupils. On the 15th of March, 1852, the mission waa reinforced by the arrival of Rev. Daniel Vroo- man and wife. Rev. Frederick Brewster and wife arrived at Canton, January, 1853, and on the 27 th of the same month our beloved bro- ther died of the small pox. His last worda were, " Trusting in Jesus." The afflicted widow remains in the field. Early in 1852, Dr. Bridg- man visited this country on account of his health, after an absence of about 23 years ; and on the 11th of October, he re-embarked at New Tork for China. Dr. Bridgman ia still at Shanghai, engaged in the revision of the Old Testament. On the 12th of September, 1853, the native helper, Tien Tsai, died in the hopes of the Gospel. Lai Sun, the other native helper, has left the mission. Mr. Wil- liams, besides his other duties, has performed a .valuable service to the cause in the prepara- tion of the Easy Lessons in Chinese, and a Chinese and English Vocabulary of the Can- ton dialect. In May, 1853, with the concur- rence of the mission, he left for Japan, as interpreter to Commodore Perry, and returned in August. Dr. Ball's health was feeble, but he was still engaged in the way of tours for tract distribution, trying to regain his strength, and to extend the savor of Christ's name ; and Messrs. Bonney and Vrooman had made a tour up the river, 36 miles, for tract distribu- tion, and were well received. Since 1846, 14,257,690 pages of tracts and scriptures, be- sides 225,120 volumes of religious matter, are reported as printed by this mission ; and this probably falls much short of the entire amount of printing done by it during the past eight years. How much printed matter has been scattered far and near by the mission since its commencement in 1830, we have no means of determining. It must have been very great In the religious movement connected with the present revolution, we are probably now seeing the effects both of the preaching of the Gospel at Canton, and the distribution of the printed page. By the grace of God this mission, in the midst of great difBculties and discourage- ments, has labored and has not fainted. A brighter day shall yet dawn on it from on high. 274 CHINA. Amoy. — This mission began with the arrival at Amoy of Eev. David Abeel, in February, 1842, while the place was yet occupied by the English troops. Soon after his arrival he was joined by Dr. Gumming, a self-supporting mis- sionary from this country, who continued in that field, devoting himself to hospital practice, combined with religious instruction, until his return to the United States, February 10th, 1847. In January, 1844, two hongs were rented in Amoy, one of which was used as a chapel, and the other for the in-door patients. The apartments above the chapel were occu- pied by Dr. Gumming. Mr. Abeel writes : Sabbath, January 28th, the first religious ser- vices were held in the new chapel, and about 70 united with us in worshiping the true God. On Mr. Pohlman's arrival in June following, from 60 to 100 daily attended the preaching of the Gospel in the hospital. On the 21st of March, a, Bible class was commenced with 12 attendants. Mr. Abeel, besides his English services, labored assiduously and successfully among the Chinese in the way of preaching and tract distribution ; and he is still remem- bered by the people in Amoy with affection. He exerted a salutary influence among the high officers. The governor of the province of Fukkien makes grateful mention of him as an assistant in the preparation of his valuar ble Geography. On the 22d of June, 1844, Eev. Messrs. Doty and Pohlman, from I?orneo, joined the mission with their families, being obliged to reside for a time on the island of Koolongsoo, opposite Amoy. Their families suffered much from sickness, and a promising son of Mr. Doty, aged 6 years, was committed to the grave. Rev. Dr. Abeel visited Hong- Kong in August, 1844, for the benefit of his health. In September following, Dr. Abeel returned to Amoy still feeble, and after a series of boat excursions in the vicinity of the city, for the double object of publishing the Gospel, and improving his health, he finally, as the only means of prolonging his life, embarked for the United States, and arrived at New York on the 3d of April, 1845, about 15 years from his original embarkation for the heathen world. He closed his valuable and eventful life at Albany, N. T., September 4th, 1846. His remains repose in Greenwood Cemetery, beneath a tasteful monument, in a locality commanding a 'fine view of the sea, on whose bosom he had, for Christ's sake, so extensively journeyed. His works do follow him. Mrs. Pohlman died on the 30th of September, 1845, and Mrs. Doty, on the 5th of the following month. Both were faithful to Christ in lite, happy in death, and each left behind her an afflicted husband and two children. Eev. Mr. Doty, with these motherless children, left Amoy, Kovember 12th, 1845, and arrived at New Tork on the 6th of March, 1846. December 16th, 1845, the first meeting for Chinese females was held at Bev. William Young's, when upwards of 40 adults were pre- sent, 'the missionaries were treated with marked politeness by the government. In December, 1845, a new chapel was opened for daily meetings, and on the 5th of January fol- lowing the first Chinese monthly concert was held, being a union meeting of the Amoy Pro- testant missionaries. The morning of the day was devoted to prayer, and the afternoon to communicating missionary intelligence in Chi- nese. In April, 1846, two aged men were baptized by Mr. Pohlman, being the first fruits of this mission. They received their first religious impressions from the preaching of Mr. Abeel. During the absence of Mr. Doty, Mr. Pohlman enjoyed the co-operating labors of brethren of the American Presbyterian Board, and of the London Missionary Society. Near the close of 1846, he and Bev. Mr. Brown visited 32 out of 136 villages situated on the island of Amoy. They were well received, and preached the word to large and attentive audiences, and distributed books and tracts to the old men, schoolmasters, and other influential persons. Bev. Mr. Doty and wife, and Eev. John Van- nest Talmage reached Amoy on the 19th of August, 1847. In March, 1848, Mr. Doty writes, " On the 5th instant, our regular com- munion season occurred, when two more from among this people, father and son, were ad- mitted to the table of the Lord. It is about a year since the father first heard the truth from our evangelist. His attention seems soon to have been arrested, and what he learned he communicated to his son. The evangelist here mentioned was originally from the KM'angtung province, and about 1841 emigrated to Siam. There he was long employed by the writer as a teacher, and with him in social prayer, he learned to bow the knee to our Lord Jesus Christ, and by him was there baptized. After his conversion, he was employed by myself as an assistant in publishing among the Chinese the glorious Gospel. In August, 1846, he left with me for China, and at the desire of Eev. Mr. Pohlman, and in accordance with my own advice, he became connected with the Amoy mission, in March, 1847. He was commonly called U Sim, or the teacher TJ. Many other cheering facts are mentioned as to the state of feehng among the attendants on Christian worship, indicating the presence of the Holy Spirit. In June, 1847, a promising day-school was opened_ by Rev. Mr. Peet, formerly with the writer in Siam, and subsequently his mission- ary associate in Fuhchau. Eev. Mr. Pohlman gives an interesting account of two excur- sions, of two days each, made in March and September, 1847, to Chiang-chau, where he was politely received, his preaching listened t» by large and attentive assemblies, and books received with eagerness. Bundles of selected CHINA. 275 books were sent to the officers and literary men of the city. The walls of Chiang-chau are about 5 miles in circuit, and in good pre- servation, and this city, together with the val- ley, 10 miles wide and 15 long, in which it is situated, is supposed to contain about 1,000,000 of souls. Mr. Pohlman regarded it as a pro- mising and inviting field. Bible class instruc- tion, begun in Amoy in March, 1844, still con- tinued. In July, 1847, the class in the New Testament numbered about 25. In 1846 a second Bible class was formed for the study of the Old Testament. On Tuesday afternoon •was a meeting for Chinese women, which was punctually attended by many of the same per- sons. The church members, in thei];^eek-day meetings, were active in exhorting their be- nighted countrymen. A daily meeting was held by the teacher U, iu a house standing on the site of the intended new place of worship. At times the room was crowded to overflow- ing, and a lively attention was given to his exhortations. On Thursday evening is a na- tive prayer meeting ; and a prayer-meeting preparatory to their monthly communion is held on the preceding Saturday. On the 19th of December, 1848, Rev. Mr. Pohlman left Amoy to accompany his sister, then in feeble health, to Hong-Kong. His object having been accomplished, he embarked for Amoy, Jan. 2d, 1849, in the schooner Omega. On the morning of Jan. 5th, about 2 o'clock, she struck on Breaker's Point, about half way to Amoy. The sea rolled over her, and Mr. Pohlman and several others were drowned by the capsizing of the boat in which they hoped to reach shore. This is the first instance of the loss of life by shipwreck of any missionary of the Board. His death was an unexpected and heavy affliction to the mission, and the missionary cause. The health of Miss Pohlman, which had received a severe shock from her brother's sudden death, required the return of Mr. Talmage with her to America. They left Amoy, March 25, 1849, and arrived at Nc^\• Tork on the 23d of August. The mission chapel, the site for which had been secured by Mr. Pohlman, and in the building of which he had been active, was dedicated on Sabbath, Feb. 11, 1849. It is a neat brick edifice, one story high, with a flat roof, 36 feet wide and 68 long, including a verandah 10 feet wide, and will seat from 350 to 400 persons. On each side of the pulpit are apartments for females, where they may hear the Gospel without the violation of Chi- nese custom. Its completion was followed by a large increase of attendants upon the preached word. July 29, 1849, a mother and her two sons, who, amid deep trials, had manifested great Christian steadfastness, were baptized and ad- mitted to church-fellowship. The occasion was one of deep interest to God's people. Of the church members, Mr. Doty writes : " They appear to be praying, growing Christians, walking in the ways of the Lord, and ex- periencing the joy of the Holy Spirit's presence. Rev. Mr. Talmage, with Mrs. Talmage, ar- rived at Amoy, on his return, July 16, 1850. On the 22d of December following, he preach- ed his first regular sermon at the opening of a place of worship connected with his own house. The room, which will seat about 100, was crowded. The regular attendance here and in the chapel on the Sabbath, is from 150 to 200. May 19, 1850, Mr. Doty baptized his infant son, and three children of native converts, being the first instance of the baptism of a child of a native Christian in connection with this mis- sion. Two men and three women were receiv- ed into the church on the last Sabbath of July, 1850, and on the last Sabbath of March, 1851, three others, a man and two women. The na- tive evangelist was daily occupied in convers- ing with inquirers in the chapel, in holding meetings, and in occasional tours to other places. Another church member was acting as colporteur in the city, under the direction of Dr. Toung, of the Free Church of Scotland. Early in 1850, the day-school was transferred by Mr. Doty to Dr. Toung, owing to the press- ure of more important duties. The Roman letters had begun to be used in preparing books for the native Christian females. The attendance at the chapel was from 150 to perhaps 300. Weekly female prayer-meet- ings were held both by Mrs. Doty and Mrs. Talmage, with encouraging results. Including the three baptized in March, ten were add- ed to the church in 1851, making with the native evangelist, 19 church members, one having died in May. The trials of the native Christians from poverty and other causes ha,ve been great ; but they appear to be growing in grace. In 1852 two young men were admit- ted into the church, who were called to suflTer for Christ's sake. 'Two others selected from a large number of inquirers, who had been exam- ined during the preceding month, were received into the church. There was unusual evidence of the presence of the Holy Spirit. At the close of that year, the number of communicants was 21 ; and from the beginning, the whole number of admissions to the church had been thirty- three. During the year, 12 children of church members had been baptized and two Christian marriages celebrated. A monthly collection, originating among themselves, is taken up for the assistance of needy church members, amounts ing to about $40 a year. " The first we knew of it," says Jlr. Doty, " was from being asked if we would not 'join in giving something.'" The mission pleads for additional laborers. In May, 1853, the mission suffered a great loss in the death of U Sien, the native evaugel- ist. He had, been sent with a Christian col- porteur to Chiang-chau to commence a new station. Arriving just before the insurrection 276 CHINA. broke out in that city, he was suspected of being associated with the insurgents, and was taken by the imperialists and beheaded. The colporteur narrowly escaped with his life. The writer saw U Sien for the last time in Dec. 1852. He trusts that one, in whose conversion he was an humble instrument, is now in heav- en. He was much esteemed for his piety, good judgment, and Christian activity. Early in June, during one of those days when the blood of civil war profusely flowed in the neighbor- hood of the chapel, four young men were bap- tized and added to the little flock, making six added during the flrst half of 1853, and 26 the total number of surviving church members. Fvhchau. — The mission at Puhchau was commenced in 1847. In accordance with the earnest wishes and advice of the Canton mis- sion. Rev. Stephen Johnson, formerly stationed in Siam, left Canton, Nov. 23, 1846, and pro- ceeded by the way of Hong-kong and Amoy to Fuhchau, where he arrived January 2, 1847. His first work was the study of the lo- cal dialect. After about six months he com- menced religious services in his own house, on the Sabbath, beside daily worship ' with his domestics, making the study of the Puhchau dialect his main business. At his house he had frequent Chinese visitors, to whom he dis- tributed tracts, and made known Christ cruoi fled for sinners. In September, 1847, he was joined by Eev. Lyman B. Feet and wife, with whom it was his privilege to be associated in Siam. On the 7th of May, 1848, the mission was further reinforced by the arrival of Messrs. Seneca Oummings and Caleb C. Baldwin, and their wives, and Eev. William Bichards, son of the distinguished missionary of that name, at the Sandwich Islands. For the first two brethren, houses in eligible situations were soon erected. For the first two years of their resi- dence in Puhchau, the study of the Chinese was necessarily the main business of the newly arrived brethren. The first three houses of the mission were on Tong-chieu, a small island in the Min, about three miles from the south gate of the city proper ; and the fourth was on the south bank of the river, about a quar- ter of a mile from the island, on the main thoroughfare, with a commanding view. This is occupied by Mr. Cummings. In June, 1848, besides stated Sabbath worship in his house, with an intelligent audience of about thirty, Mr. Johnson opened a school and com- menced preaching and tract distribution in a hired house, which he had fitted up for the purpose, standing in the midst of a dense po- pulation, on the south bank of the river, and about two miles from his residence. The au- diences were at first so tumultuous, that the attempt to open or close the meetings with prayer was not deemed prudent. Gradually the people were more orderly and respectful, and the audiences numbered about sixty souls. For the accommodation of the laboring classes, Evening meetings were frequently held, with apparently good effect. Mr. Feet secured a commodious chapel near the island and on the great thoroughfare, a part of which he appro- priated to a Chinese school, which has gene- rally numbered about twenty scholars. In the summer of 1849, Mr. Johnson's health com- pelled him to visit the northern ports. At Ningpo, on the 17th of September, he was married to Miss Caroline Silmer of Stock- holm, Sweden. She was then an agent of the London Ladies' Society for the Education of Females in the East, and had been for about two years a teacher in Miss Mary Aldersey's Female Seminary, in that city. After visiting Shanghai, he returned with Mrs. J. to Fuh- chau, on the 8th December, 1849. On the 31st of May, 1850, the mission Was furthei- re- inforced by the arrival of Rev. Justus Doo- little and wife. Mr. Jolinson, soon after his return, resumed his usual labors. His chapel was about a mile from his residence, on the way to the scene of his former labors. Messrs. Cummings, Baldwin and Richards were now making some efforts in the preaching of the word and the distribution of tracts. In Sep- tember, 1850, Eev. Mr. Richards was attacked with hemorrhage of the lungs, and by advice of his brethren and physician, he soon after embarked for Canton. Physicians there re- commending a long voyage, he embarked for the United States early in March, but was not allowed to reach this country. He calmly and cheerfully breathed out his life on the 5th of June, and his remains were committed to the deep, south of St. Helena. Mr. Richards had made great progress in the Chinese, con- sidering the short time he had been in the field, and his prospects of future usefulness were bright. His heart was in his work, and he labored perhaps beyond his strength. Just before he was laid aside, he performed a valu- able service to the mission in securing, after much labor, trial and patience, the building lot at Fo-na-Sang, now occupied by Messrs. Baldwin and Doolittle. There the writer erect- ed the house now occupied by Mr. Baldwin, and moved into it early in 1851. Mr. Doolit- tle preceded him. It is near the great tho- roughfare leading from the island to the city, and nearly midway between the two places. In November, 1850, Mr. Baldwin opened a school and chapel on the island, and with some interruption from ill-health, this continued to be the central point of his labors, till near the close of 1851. In April of that year, Mr. Cummings commenced public worship in Chi- nese, in the court of his house, with an encou- raging attendance, and in May opened a day school for girls, which has since continued. Mr. Feet long had a Chinese service in the court of his residence, on Sabbath morning which, with his Chinese school, has been trans-' ferred to the house on the island, once occu pied by the writer. Some months after Mr CHINA. 277 Johnson's removal to Po-na^Sanff, he secured an eligible site for a chapel near his house, and on the main street, and built a small and sim- ple place of worship, large enough for about 180 hearers. There he opened a school, and continued the preaching of the Gospel, both in season and out of season, as his health would allow, up to the time of his return to this coun- try, December 8, 1852. His school was not permanent. After its suspension, the school room was for a time occupied by a flourishing school, gathered by Mr. Doolittle, which also was dispersed by the alarm caused by the seiz- ure and imprisonment of the Rev. Mr. Wel- ton's school teachers, in April, 1852. In the spring of that year, Mr. Doolittle procured a site, and soon after erected a chapel on the main street, about a quarter of a mile nearer the city than that built by Mr. Johnson. These chapels need only to be opened and or- dinarily there is a good number of hearers, sometimes more that a hundred. On the 2'7th of May, Mr. Doolittle commenced religious exercises in Chinese, in his chapel. During the first half of 1852, Mr. Cummings erected a cnapel near his house, on the main street, and commenced Chinese services in it, with en- couraging prospects. Mr. Baldwin occupies the chapel in which Mr. Johnson formerly ministered. Eev. Charles Hartwell and wife arrived at Puhchau on the 19th of June, 1853. The four elder brethren now in this field, have each chapels in eligible positions for securing hearers, and without hindrance from the go- vernment or people, can give themselves on the Sabbath, and during the week, to the preaching of the Gospel, and the judicious dis- tribution of books. By their exemplary lives and pure doctrines, a general and happy im- pression, favorable to Christianity, has been produced upon the popular mind. It is hoped that some knowledge of the fundamental truths of the Gospel has been extensively diffused, though none have yet come out decidedly on the Lord's side. 'Their religious meetings are becoming more orderly and solemn, and many of the youth have been carefully instructed in the Scriptures. Truth is operating like Itaven, quietly among the masses, yet we trust power- fully. The brethren here have, during the in- surrection, remained at their posts, and stead- ily prosecuted their work ; and the missionar- ies are generally recognized as the teachers of a holy religion, blameless and harmless in their lives. The mission has four day schools, containing about 100 scholars. Books are ex- tensively prepared in the vulgar language, using the Chinese characters, as symbols of its sounds, when necessary. In Fuhchau from the first, there has been great harmony and love among the missionaries of the different boards, being united in their English preaching on the Sabbath, in their communion services, the monthly concert, and in a weekly prayer mee1> ing. To the writer, the recollection of these precious seasons is sweet, and he would rejoice again to participate in them, and in the work of preachmg Christ to dying souls in Puhchau, should Providence please to grant him this bles- sed privilege. May this mission, which he in weakness was permitted to commence, be abundantly blest as the instrument of salvation to the perishing. TABULAE VIEW. Canton Amoy, . . Fuhchau, Totals . 1830 1842 184J 10 1 IS 1 9 1 26 2 30 4 100 2 Southern Baptist Convention — Canton. — This mission, which has been subject to great changes, was commenced by Rev. I. J. Roberts, in May, 1844. Between his arrival in China in 1836, and the commencement of his labors in Canton, his efforts were mainly directed to the spiritual good of the Chinese in Macao and Hong-kong. Shortly after entering Can- ton, he gathered a church of 6 or 7 members, two or three of whom were afterwards useful, as assistants in publishing the Gospel. Parly in 1845, Messrs. Shuck and Devan came to Canton. Mr. Shuck shortly after left with hia children for home, and Mrs. Devan died in that city, Oct. 18, 1846, and Dr. Devan, after a temporary sojourn in Hong-kong, returned to America. Messrs. Pearcy and Clopton, with their wives, arrived at Canton, in Oct. 1846, and Mr. Clopton died July 1, 1847, and his widow, with her infant, soon after returned. Rev. Prancis Johnson arrived July, 1847, but his health failing, he returned, and reached New York in December, 1849. Rev. B. AV. Whilden and wife arrived at Canton early in 1849, where Mrs. Whilden died, Feb. 20, 1850, and Mr. Whilden the same year embarked for the United States. Rev. Mr. Pearcy and wife, by reason of ill-health, left this station for Shanghai in 1848. Thus, among all the missionaries of this society, with the exception of Mr. Roberts, none have been long enough in Canton to become able preachers in the local dialect. He has been a diligent laborer, and in his correspondence, eight persons are named as having received Christian baptism. In 1849, he visited the United States, where he was married ; and in 1850, he resumed his 278 CHINA. work in Canton. In the Society's Ecport for 1853, his dismission is announced. He, how- ever, remains in Canton, prosecuting his work as usual. The insurgent chief is understood to have been for a time under his religious instruction, and to have recently desired a visit from him, which he attempted to make, but without success. Eev. Briiyfield W Whilden resumed his missionary labors in the city of Canton, in November, 1852, and returned finally to the United States in NO' vember, 185J:. A Chinese school, containing 20 pupils, is mentioned, and Yong, a native, vfho was long employed by Il«v. Mr. Slmok, was then laboring as an evangelist in Canton The Report for 1854, speaks of serious em- barrassments in this mission; but the mis- sionaries speak hopefully of future prospects. Shanghai. — Eev. J. L. Shuck ana wife em- barked for China in 1835, and Macao and Hong-kong became the scenes of his subse- quent labovs. In this latter settlement, Mrs. Shuck, a highly esteemed missionary, died Nov. 27, 1844, and Mr. Shuck, with his chil- dren, soon after returned home. He reached Shanghai, on his return to China with his second wife and younger daughter, in October, 1847, where they were welcomed by Eev. Messrs. Tates and Tobey, who had a little pre- ceded them. From the arrival of these breth- ren dates the commencement of this mission. Dr. T. S. L. James and wife destined to Shang- hai, were drowned in Hong-kong harbor, April 15, 1848, by the capsizing of the schooner Paradox, in which they had taken passage at Canton. Eev. Geo. Pearcy and wife, formerly at Canton, arrived at Shanghai Nov. 18, 1848, where they have since con- tinued to labor. Like the brethren of other societies who had preceded them, they found Shanghai a promising field for Christian effort, and, with a knowledge of the local dialect, they found no difficulty in obtaining hearers. Besides the frequent ministry of the word in a smaller chapel within the walls, the brethren early made arrangements for the erection, within the city proper, of a substantial and spacious Christian edifice. This church was opened for worship on the 3d of March, 1850. The house is a brick edifice, with a belfry, and will accommodate upwards of 700 persons. Occasionally, it has been well filled, and usually some hundreds are present. In 1853, 6 schools are reported as under the care of the mission, containing between 70 and 80 scholars. There is one out-station, having a small chapel and a school-house. While the brethren much value Scripture and tract distribution, they devote themselves chiefly to the preaching of the Gospel in the city, and in the large and numerous villages in the surrounding country. On the 2d of September, 1849, three Chi- nese were baptized. A recent letter' states the interesting fact of the baptism of the son of an insurgent chief, a youth of 18, who was considered as giving uncommon evidence of piety. Mr. Tobey has returned to this couQ. try on account of ill-health. He arrived at New York, May 29, 1850. Eev. Mr. Shuck, having been suddenly bereaved of his wife, late in 1852, returned with his family to the United States. G. W. Burton, M.D., sailed from New York, Dec. 12, 1853, on his return to Shanghai, accompanied by Mrs. Burton. By the last accounts, the missionaries were much encouraged, though living amid the rav- ages of war. The report for 1854 says, with reference to this mission, " At no time in its former history, has the encouragement to per- severe been stronger. The church at Shang- hai have been permitted to receive into their fellowship an interesting young man, by the name of Asou, who gives satisfactory evidence of a change of heart. This young man was nearly related to the southern king, one of the insurgent chiefs, and was on his way to Nan- king to join the army. Having found protec- tion in the families of the missionaries, it was soon ascertained that he was a regular reader of the Scriptures, and daily worshiped God. He was more particularly instructed by them ; and having professed faith in Christ, and a readiness to obey him, he was baptized and received into the church. Eev. Mr. Shuck has taken a dismission, in order to enter into the service of the domestic Board, among the Chinese in California. Church Missionary Society. — Bong-kong. — This Society commenced operations in China in 1844, Eev. Messrs. Geo. Smith and T. McClatchie having arrived at Hong-kong on the 25th of Sept. of that year. In 1846, Mr. Smith returned to England ; and having been appointed Bishop of Victoria, with the super- vision of the missions in China, he again sailed for Hong-kong, Nov. 1849, accompanied by Eev. T. P. Gough, Wm. Welton, E. T. E. Mon- criefi", L. L. D., and E. D. Jackson. The par- ty arrived March 29, 1850. April 21, Mr. Jackson was ordained in the cathedral at Hong- kong, and soon after proceeded with Mr. Welton to Fuhchau. Eev. Mr. Gough joined Eev. Messrs. Cobbold and Eussell at Ningpo. Eev. Dr. MoncriefiF entered upon his duties in what is now called St. Paul's College. It then con- tained 30 pupils, three of whom had been members of the Morrison school. Chinese is the medium of instruction. At the end of the year there were only 17 students. As early as Jan., 1852, the new buildings at St. Paul's college were completed, in which were the residences of the bishop, the warden of the college, and a full staff of tutors and students. This institution originated in the missionary zeal of the Eev. Vincent Stanton, former chap- lain at Hong-kong. About 60 persons reside m the college building. The number of Chi- nese pupils was about 30, between the ages of 12 and 18. In 1852, Dr. Moncrieff returned to England, and resigned his connection with CHINA. 279 the college. At the close of that year a new college building was opened. The number of the pupils was fluctuating. Shanghai. — This statioQ was commenced by Rev. T. McOlatohie on his arrival, April 15, 1845. By diligent application to the study of the dialect, he was soon able to make himself understood by the people. Shortly after his arrival he secured a house within the city walls, la less than a year he commenced a Chinese service, and soon after was much en- couraged by the interest manifested by his crowded audiences. As early as May 29, 1847, he had translated the Moruing Service and the Collects into the Shanghai dialect, through the aid of Gutzlaff's translation of the Church Liturgy. On the 17th of April, 1848 he was joined by Rev. W. Farmer and his wife. Mr. Parmer was, however, soon obliged to quit the field, on account of his health, and he did not survive to reach his native country. Early in 1850, the mission church, situated in the city proper, was completed. It will accommodate 300 persons. lu the course of 1851, three members of Mr. McOlatchie's blind class were baptized, having long been the subjects of Christian instruction. Rev. J. Hobson arrived in 1849, expecting to join this mission, but the sudden death by drowning of Rev. J. Lowder, the English chaplain, while bathing in the sea, led to his appointment to that office, in which his society concurred. Mr. McOlatchie's residence is now near that of the American Episcopal establishment, about 3 miles below the city, on the river's bank. In the Report of the China mission for 1853, it is stated that, through the efforts of Rev. John Hobson, a commodious educational establishment, costing $5,416, contributed by the English congregation, had been erected and made over to the society. The school was opened in December, 1852, numbering 20 pupils, who had been some time under Mr. Hobson's instruction. Two ordained students have been appointed to this station, one of whom takes charge of the school. In July, 1852, two other members of the blind class had been baptized, one of them a woman. The class numbered 18 members. This class has been aided by Mr. McClatchie to the weekly amount of about 7 cents each. He gives them stated religious instruction. Ningpo. — This station was commenced by Rev. Messrs. R. H. Cobbold and W. A. Rus- sell on their arrival in May, 1848. After a short time, they obtained a house within the walls, the basement of which they fitted up as a temporary place of worship. On the first Sabbath in 1849, they commenced worship in Chinese. In the course of the year, a small chapel, with school-room and teaohers'-room, • was opened in a densely-populated portion of the city. The congregations were fluctuating at the new chapel, averaging about 80. Rev. T. F. Gough joined the mission in 1850. In April, 1851, two persons of hopeful piety re- ceived Christian baptism. The Roman letters were employed in writing the vulgar tongue with apparent advantage. Early in 1852, Rev. Mr. Jackson, formerly at Puhchau, was associated with this mission. This year was one of unusual religious interest among the people. Religious services were held at four places, the average attendance at the two chapels being about 200. The meetings were more orderly and solemn, and the Gospel and its teachers were treated with more respect. During the last half of 1852, five adults, of apparent piety, were baptized. This station was visited by Rt. Rev. Bishop Smith, in May, 1852, who speaks in the highest terms of the missionaries. Fuhchau. — Rev. Messrs.William Welton and R. D. Jackson arrived in Puhchau early in 1850, and through the assistance of the British Vice- Consul obtained a lease of a temple within the walls, near the consulate. The op- position of the literati constrained them soon after to exchange this place for another, also in the city. Mr. Welton has maintained his position amid much opposition from the local authorities. In the spring of 1852, two Chi- nese school teachers, with whom he had made an agreement, were seized, imprisoned, and treated with great inhumanity. A house which he had originally rented for a chapel and dis- pensary was pulled down. His humane and Christian efforts have been mostly restrict- ed to his own house. Tract distribution and preaching are allowed in the city proper ; but no premises can be rented for such purposes. Mr. Welton has made some efforts in prepai> ing portions of the Scriptures in the local dia- lect, using the Chinese character as a symbol of its sounds. The opposition, it has been thought, is abating. TABm-AR VIEW. -d a s i fl STATIONS. a .2 i Sg 6 a o i S5 11 s 6 IS 5 ■i "o 1850 1848 1 1 1 9 5 ■\ 62 1845 1 1 2 Totals 6 1 2 7 3 62 American Seventh-Day Baptist Society. Shanghai. — This mission was begun in 1847, by Rev. Messrs. S. Carpenter and N. Ward- ner, who with their families occupy a native house within the walls of the city, situated among family residences, near the small south gate. A large room on the mission premises has been fitted up as a chapel, which was opened for worship in January, 1849. 280 CHINA. English General Baptist Mission aky SooiETY. — Ningpo. — This mission was com- menced in 1845, by Rev. Messrs. T. H. Hud- son and William Jarrom. It lias been active in the preaching of the Gospel and the distri- bution of Christian books ; and considerable has been done in the department of schools. Mr. Hudson has prepared a number of Chris- tian tracts. He was early permitted to bap- tize his Chinese teacher on the profession of his faith in Christ. Mrs. Jarrom died in Ningpo, in February, 1848. Mr. Jarrom re- turned to England late in 1850. Mr. Hudson has suffered much from ill-health, but conti- nues in the diligent prosecution of his work. His son, Mr. Joseph Hudson, who is a ready Chinese scholar, was for some time a valuable assistant in publishing the Gospel ; but he was subsequently persuaded to connect himself with a mercantile house in Ningpo. Miss Aldbrsey's Female Seminary, Ning- po. — This energetic and devoted Christian lady, though ediioated amid ease and affluence, has rejoiced, for Christ's sake, in the endur- ance of peculiar hardships and privations. At her own charge, near twenty years since, she entered on the missionary work, first toiling alone for some years in Sourabaya, several hundred miles east of Batavia. Since she left that place, a blessed work of grace has been wrought among the natives, several hundreds of whom have been hopefully converted, without the aid of any foreign missionary. During the war between China and England, she went to Ohusan, and there commenced her labors for Chinese females. After the close of the war, she opened a female boarding-school at Ningpo, which has continued in operation to the present time. It has usually numbered about fifty girls, and her entire household about seventy persons. Several of her family have become hopefully pious. Her school is now within the city proper. Out of her school she has labored much for the spiritual good of Chinese females, by visiting and con- versation. Swedish Mission, Fuhchau. — Though in the mysterious providence of God this interesting mission was early broken up, yet it deserves a brief notice. It was commenced early in 1850, by Rev. 0. J. Fast, joined soon after by Rev. A. Elgquist. Both were young men of talent and piety, and during their brief so- journ in Fuhchau, made rapid progress in the Chinese. After much trouble they obtained the promise of a permanent residence, and in October, 1850, they visited a vessel at the mouth of the river to procure the funds neces- sary to fulfil the bargain, amoupting to about 8200. On entering the main river, on their return, they were waylaid by a piratical boat, and during the encounter, Mr. Fast was mor- tally wounded, and fell into the river, and Mr. Elgquist narrowly escaped to the shore with his life, with some slight wounds. One of the pi- rates, perhaps their leader, was mortally wounded by a pistol-shot from Mr. l^ost. Their village was subsequently destroyed by the government. Mr. Elgquist's health suffer- ed a severe shock from this disaster and previous robberies which they had endured while residing in a Budhist temple ; and early in 1851 he was advised to visit Hong- kong. His health not improving, in 1852 he embarked for Sweden. This was the first effort of the society to establish a Christian mission. Free Church op Scotland, Amoy. — This mission was commenced in 1850, by James H. Young, M.D., who had previously spent several years in Hong-kong, as a medical practitioner. Rev. W. C. Burns, a devoted and successful minister of Christ, in his native land, offered himself to the Church as a missionary to China, and arrived in Hong-kong in Novem- ber, 1847. After having spent three years and seven months in study and missionary la- bor in Hong-kong and Canton, he sailed for Amoy on the 26th of June, 1851. He soon so far mastered this new dialect as to be able to speak it with ease and correctness. June 6th, 1853, he announced the completion of the translation of the Pilgrim's Progress, which was published at a cost of about ten cents per copy. Dr. Toung, soon after his arrival, opened a dispensary, and likewise took charge of a Chinese day school of 30 pupils, originally connected with the mission of the American Board in that city. Under his direction two pious Chinese were employed, as colporteurs. Upwards of twenty opium smokers were thought to have been cured of this vice. Another school of thirty pupils is superin- tended by Mr. Burns. He has been diligent in the preaching of the Gospel in Amoy, and in neighboring cities and villages. The mis- sion was expected soon to be reinforced. The preceding portion, together with the concluding part of this article was prepared by Rev. Stephen Johnson, late missionary of the A.B. C P. M., at Fuhchau. American Episcopal BoAKo.^The Board of Missions of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States resolved, on the 13th of May, 1834, to establish a mission in China as Soon as a suitable missionary could be found. On the 14th of July, Rev. Henry Lockwood was appointed ; and in February following, Rev. Francis E. Hanson, Rector of Christ Church, Prince George's County, Md., offered himself, and was accepted. The mission excited so deep an interest, that the necessary funds were raised in a few weeks, in New York alone, and a free passage was given by a mercantile house in that city. The mis- sionaries embarked June 2, and arrived at Canton October 29, 1835, and afterwards pro- ceeded to Batavia. February 17, 1836, Mr. Lockwood was married to a daughter of Rev' W. H. Medhurst, and on the 9th of Auo-ust CHINA. 281 following, Mrs. Lockwood was remoYed by death. On July 8, 1837, Eev. W. J. Boone, who had received a medical as well as a theological education, with reference to the missionary work, sailed from Boston, with his wife, and reached Batavia on the 22d of October. Mr. Hanson's health had become so impaired, that he was compelled to return home. The missionaries applied themselves to the study of the Chinese language, and in the mean time, endeavored to make themselves useful in holding an English service, distribut- ing tracts, and establishing schools. Mr. Boone found his medical knowledge of great use to him. But the climate proved detri- mental to their health, and Mr. Lockwood was compelled to return to the United States. During their residence at Batavia, a boys' school was commenced ; and finding it diffi- cult to retain them long enough to accomplish much good, the expedient was resorted to of having them bound by writing by the parents for five years, the missionaries assuming all the expense ; and the plan being found to work well, was continued after the removal of the mission to China. In August, 1839, Mr. Boone had received 16 boys on these terms, and scarce a week passed but he had to reject ap- plications. Their improvement, in every re- spect, was highly gratifying. They were do- cile, studious, and affectionate. In September, 1840, Mr. and Mrs. Boone visited Macao, on account of impaired health ; and in February following, the mission was re- moved to that place. On the 20th of August, 1842, Mrs. Boone was attacked with a bilious remittant fever, and on the 30th, she died (at Amoy), with the dying declaration : " If there is a mercy in life for which I feel thankful, it is, that God has condescended to call me to be a missionary." In consequence of her death, Dr. Boone returned to this country with his children, hoping also to be able to secure a reinforcement to the mission. In 1842, and before Dr. Boone's return to this country, the mission was removed from Macao to Koolongsoo, a smail island half a mile from Amoy, which, in the opinion of Dr. Boone, presented a most inviting field for mis- sionary labor. He had frequent opportuni- ties of preaching on Sundays to stated congre- gations of Chinese, averaging from 60 to 70, besides an English service for the troops. The chief magistrate of Amoy interchanged visits with Dr. Boone, and invited him to reside at that place, where he would have an opportu- nity to preach to many more people, and where he (the magistratej would have more frequent intercourse with him. He listened, to Dr. B.'s declaration of the Gospel, and accepted a New Testament. Dr. Boone's visit to this country was the means of exciting a greatly increased interest in the China mission ; and in October, 1844, he was consecrated Missionary Bishop. On the 14th of December following, he embarked for Canton, accompanied by EiCV. Messrs. Henry W. Woods, and Richardson Graham, and Mrs. Boone, Mrs. Woods, Mrs. Graham, and Misses Gillett, Jones, and Morse, mission- ary teachers. Eev. Mr. Sylo and wife em- barked on the 24th of May following. Bishop Boone and his associates reached Hong-kong on the 24th of April, 1845 ; and after much inquiry and consultation, Shanghai was fixed upon as offering a most favorable prospect for missionary labor ; and, as soon as suitable arrangements could be made, the mis- sion famihes proceeded to that place, and es- tablished the mission there. The demeanor of the people towards the missionaries was highly encouraging. The magistrates were courteous, and the people exhibited none of the arrogance and dislike manifested by the inhabitants of Canton, but showed much kind- ness and good will. A school for boys was immediately opened, with ten pupils, on the same plan as that pursued first at IJatavia, and the new missionaries applied themselves diligently to the study of the language. Pub- lic service was established by the Bishop, in a hall fitted up in the building occupied for a school, capable of holding 250 people, which was filled with an attentive audience. In 1846, one young man was baptized, who was looking forward to the ministry. The failure of Eev. Mr. Graham's health rendered it necessary for him to return to this country, and Eev. Phineas D. Spalding was sent out to take his place. Bishop Boone, in his report, gives a high testimonial to the character and usefulness of the ladies attached to the mission. In 1847, the Bishop began to be afflicted with serious illness, which has since followed him, in a greater or less degree, and proved a great hindrance to his labors. This year he succeeded in raising about $6000, and secured a lot outside of the city, for the purpose of erect- ing a suitable building for his schools. One of the earliest pupils of the school died, giving satisfactory evidence of'piety. Previous to his death he was received into the church. The controversy in regard to the proper word to be used for rendering God in Chinese, to which allusion has been made in a former part of this article, attracted the earliest atten- tion of Bishop Boone, who expressed his firm conviction that Shin was the true word ; and that it would be in vain to fight against poly- theism, if they chose the term used by the Chi- nese as the proper name for their chief god. To this subject he devoted several months, and wrote and published a treatise upon it. Funds were collected for the erection of a mission chapel ($1000 of which was received from a member of the Episcopal Church in the United States), and also a suitable dwelling for the missionaries. 282 CHINA. In 1849, the mission was afflicted with the .vtSS of Eev. Mr. Spalding, whose indefatigable diligence had given him a sufficient command of the language to enable him to preach to the Chinese in their own tongue. Over exertion, connected with a cold, brought on him a con- sumption ; urged by his physicians, he em- barked for his native land on board'the ship Coquette, which was never heard of after- wards ; and it is supposed that she foundered in the Chinese sea during a terrible gale, soon after his embarkation. Bishop Boone and Eev. Mr. Syle, were con- tributing their share of labor to the work of a revision of a translation of the Scriptures into Chinese ; and in connection with the Eev. Mr. McOlatchie, of the Church Missionary Society, they had nearly completed the whole order for " Morning Prayer," in the local dia^ lect of Shanghai. On Easter, 1850, the Bishop baptized six persons ; and, after witnessing the administra- tion of the ordinance, the teacher of the day school came to Mr. Syle, and applied to be re- ceived as a candidate for baptism. The greatest vigilance is exercised by the missionaries in the examination of candidates for baptism, none being admitted to the ordi- nance without a knowledge of Christian truth, and evidence of its gracious effects on their hearts and in their lives. The following fact, related by Mr. Syle, will show the difficulty attending the translation of the Bible into Chinese : " After reading some chapters in the Gospel of Mark, which had been translated in the very concise, ' highly concentrated ' style, which is sometimes called ' classical,' my old man, Soo-dong, made this remark : ' A lad who has been to school two or three years can read and understand the Scriptures written in the Foo^ah (common dialect) ; if he has read books for six or seven years, he can understand and explain the mean- ing of what is written in the style of Mr. Gutz- laff's version (which might be called the easy Mandarin;) but before he could extract the meaning out of this (referring to what he had just perused), he must have studied the books at least ten years !' And yet this is what he prefers, and would choose for translating the word of God." The following fact, stated by the same mis- sionary, and which he says is no unusual occur- rence, shows that there must be much suffer- ing from want among the Chinese : " As I stepped from the boat on the quay this morn- ing, I saw some old mats spread over the bodies of such as had died of destitution during the night. I lifted one corner of tie matting, and counted nine distinctly. I was told there were eleven, all killed with cold and hunger in one night in one place 1" Mr. Syle relates the case of a poor boy, thir- teen years of age, whom they had taken in, who died in consequence of the habit he had acquired of smoking opium. Mr. S. thinks this drug is undermining the constitutions of one-third of the people of China. In 1850, Bishop Boone published a defence of his former treatise on the translation of the word God, which had been reviewed by Dr. Medhurst, Sir George Stanton, and Dr. Legge. As an illustration of the danger of employing the term Shang-te, he relates that they had been teaching a catechism on the creed, in which this word was used. A man of some intelli- gence, who understood his own language well, applied for instruction, and was furnished with a copy of this catechism. He came regularly for ten days, and showed great interest. He read over with the missionary all the attributes of Shang-te, which we are accustomed to predi- cate of God, and appeared to understand thoroughly what he read. But when asked if lie prayed to Shang-te every day, he replied that he visited Ms temple twice a day for this purpose. This was the name he had been accustomed to apply to the idol in the temple ; and it is not to be wondered at that he understood the mis- sionaries, as teaching the worship of the same idol, since they used the same name. The word was immediately erased from their cate- chism. There is an idol, the chief among the Taouists, called Neok Wong Shang-te, and, if you say Shang-te to them, they understand you as speaking of this idol. The interesting event of the ordination of Chi-Wong, the first Chinese deacon, took place in Christ Church, Shanghai, on the "Jth of September, 1851. He was questioned fully on the books of Scripture, and on the 39 articles, and answered very satisfactorily. He also read two sermons, written out in the diar lect of his region. He gives promise of much usefulness. There were, at this time, three more candidates for orders : Mr. John F. Points, a member of the mission, and two natives, Soodong and Chu-kiung. This year, a new building was erected for the female school, under the instruction of Miss Jones. Bishop Boone having made arrangements for as efficient conduct of missionary operar tions as circumstances would admit, embarked for the United States, and arrived in New Tork, Jan. 30, 1853. Mr. Syle, who had been eight years in China, found it necessary this year also to return to this country. The obstacle which the acquisition of the Chinese language has been supposed to present to the missionary work there, appears far less formidable than it once was. After seven months' study, the newly-arrived missionaries were able to read the service, and address the natives intelligibly in Chinese. And one of the ladies connected with the mission com- menced the study of the language in August and on the 31st of the following January, she had read through the Gospel of Matthew in Chi- nese characters, correctly and understandingly. CHINA. 283 The mission, at the latest dates, was in a prosperous condition. The following table will show its present strength and the progress that has been made in the several depart- ments : Ordained American Missionaries, including the Bishop.. 3 American Calechist and Candidate for Orders 1 Ordained Native 1 Native Catechists and Candidates for Orders 2 Female Teachers (single ladies) 6 Pupils in Boys' School (on mission premises) 60 " " Girls' " " " " 40 In sis other Schools 100 Whole Number of Baptisms 29 Number of Communicants 24 Under Suspension 7 During the year a mission chapel has been built, 60 feet by 30, at a cost of $2,000, $600 of which was subscribed by members of the foreign community. — Revised by one of the Sec- retaries. Presbyteeian Boaed. — The missions of the S American) Presbyterian Board among the Chinese were commenced at Singapore, in 1838. At that time their jealousy of foreign- ers prevented a station being formed in China itself. Merchants and other foreigners were permitted to live only at Canton, and were there restricted within the limits of a few warehouses on the river. The first mission- aries of the Board were the Bev. Messrs. Eo- bert W. Orr and John A. Mitchell, and Mrs. Orr, who arrived at their station in April, 1838. In October following, Mr. Mitchell, whose health was delicate when he left this country, was called to his rest. With Mr. Orr, he had visited Malacca and Penang, and Mr. Orr afterwards visited Bangkok, to ob- tain information concerning the most eligible places for missionary work. In the next year the Chinese teacher employed by Mr. Orr was baptized by him. In July, 1840, the Rev. Thomas L. McBryde and his wife arrived at Singapore, and in December Mr. and Mrs. Orr were compelled to leave their work by the failure of Mr. Orr's health. In July, 1841, James C. Hepburn, M.D., and his wife, reach- ed Singapore, under appointment to the mis- sion in Siam, but with permission to join the China mission — a measure which the return of Mr. Orr and other reasons made expedient. Towards the end of this year Mr. and Mrs. McBryde went up to Macao for the benefit of a colder climate. In May, 1842, the Eev. Walter M. Lowrie arrived at Macao, and sailed about a month afterwards for Singapore. This voyage was undertaken with reference to the question of removing the mission from that place to China. The war between the British and the 'Chinese was drawing to a close, and it was a deeply important matter to decide wisely on the line of efforts which should be followed under the new aspects of this great field of labor. Mr. Lowrie's voy- age, however, ended in the shipwreck of the vessel, and the almost miraculous escape of himself and most of the ship's company. After sailing four hundred miles in open boats, and encountering a severe gale at sea, they reached Luban, a small island near Manila, and Mr. Lowrie returned to Macao in Octo- ber. The termination of the war between the British and the Chinese in this year changed the whole question as to the stations to be oc- cupied. These were not required to be hence- forth at places many hundreds of miles distant from China ; five of the principal cities on the coast of the country were now open to the re- sidence of missionaries, as well as of other foreigners. Accordingly it was deemed expe- dient for Mr. McBryde to occupy a station on Koolongsoo, a small islandoppositethe city of Amoy. To this island, in 1833, Dr. Hepburn removed from Singapore, after spending a few months at Macao while the question of his sta- tion was under consideration. In October, Mr. McBryde and his family returned to this country, on account of the failure of his health. In February, 1844, D. B. McCartee, M.D., and Mr. Richard Cole, a printer, and his wife, arrived at Macao ; in July the Rev. Richard O. Way and wife, first appointed to Siam ; in October, the Rev. Mr. M. Simp- son Culbertson and Augustus W. Loomis, and their wives, and the Rev. Messrs. John Lloyd and Andrew P. Happer, M. D. ; and in May, 1845, the Eev. Hugh A. Brown. The number of brethren thus arriving in China showed that the churches were willing to re- spond to th^ call of Providence for enlarged missionary operations in this country. It was now practicable to form plans of missionary work on a wider scale, and after much consi- deration it was determined to form three mis- sions — at Canton, Amoy, andNingpo. Messrs. Happer and Cole were connected with the Caniin mission ; Messrs. Lloyd, Brown, and Hepburn with the mission at Amoy ; and Messrs. Lowrie, Way, Loomis, Culbertson, and McCartee with the Ningpo mission. An important auxiliary to these missions is the printing-press. A brief account of this deserves a place in these pages. Preliminary to this notice it should be stated, that in no other heathen country are there so many read- ers as in China, and that there the process of printing has long been in use. The Chinese method of printing, however, is" a very im- perfect one ; the types are blocks of wood, on which each letter or character has been en- graved by the hand of the artist, and the im- pressions are taken by means of a brush for the ink and a block for the press ; the whole being an operation so slow, that only the patience of a Chinaman is equal to its de- mands. Our admiration, however, is due to the invention itself, and to the neatness and economy of the printing thus executed ; but in this day of finished machinery, and of large stereotype editions of the Scriptures and other 28i CHINA. books, this imperfect process does not suit the exigencies of the Church in her missionary worls:. On the other hand, a serious and appa- rently insuperable difficulty in the way of printing, either by machinery or by the use of metallic types, was found in the large number of Chinese letters or characters. This num- ber is estimated at 30,000 ; a common print ing-office case contains but 56. For a satisfactory statement of the " dis- covery," as it may well be called, of the me- thod of printing this multitude of Chinese characters with a small number of metallic types, the reader may consult the Annual Re- port of the Western Foreign Missionary Soci- ety, May, 1837. It turns on the distinction between the formatives and primitives in the Chinese language, and between the divisible and indivisible characters. The divisible are reduced to their simplest elements, and being struck off as types, can be re-composed in dif- ferent characters, so that a comparatively small number of types will serve to express most of the characters in common use. At the instance of the Corresponding Secretary of the Board, whose previous study of this language had prepared him to take a deep in- terest in this matter, the committee agreed in 1836, to order a set of the matrices for this new mode of printing Chinese. These matri- ces were made in Paris, at a cost of over $5,000. Types were cast from them in New York, by Mr. Cole ; and at Macao both he and Mr. Lowrie gave much time and labor to perfecting the types, arranging the cases, and other things requisite to the practical applica- tion of this new invention. Many fears and some predictions of failure were happily dis- appointed, and its success may be regarded as an era in the history of this people. For seve- ral years this mode of printing has been in operation. Large editions of works are print- ed, from stereotype plates, on improved presses, such as are in use in our own country, which will be driven by steam-power when the Chi- nese become a Christian people. It is of inte- rest to add, that but for the order given by the committee in 1836 for a set of these matrices, this great invention would probably not have been brought into use. So little confidence was felt in its practicability, that no other missionary institution would give it their pa- tronage. Only one other order was received by the artist, and without at least two orders he could not proceed with the work. ' In 1845 the printing-press was removed from Macao to Ningpo, and upwards of 3,500,000 pages were printed. A station was occupied at Chusan, an island not far distant from Ning- po, which was then in the possession of the Bri- tish. This was an experiment to determine whether other places besides the cities opened under the treaty could be occupied by mission- aries ; but it was found that the authorities civilly but firmly opposed their permanent res- idence there, although the people of the island were friendly ; and the station was relinquish- ed soon after the island was restored by the British to the Chinese. In 1846, Dr. and Mrs. Hepburn reached this country, being compelled to return by the state of Mrs. Hepburn's health. In December, the Rev. Messrs. William Speer and John B. French, and Mrs. Speer, arrived at Canton, and the Rev. John W. Quarterman joined the Ningpo mission. A church was organized at Ningpo in May ; boarding-schools were open- ed at Canton and Ning-po ; and most of the missionaries were now sufRciently acquainted with the Chinese language to conduct religious services in chapels, and to make known the Gospel by the way-side. The year 1847 was marked by the death of Mrs. Speer on the 16th of April, and of Mr. Lowrie on the 19th of August — the latter under most afflicting circumstances, by the hands of Chinese pirates.* Mr. Cole's connec- tion with the mission ceased, and Mr. Happer was married to a daughter of Dr. Ball, an American missionary at Canton. In 1848, the Rev. Messrs. Joseph K. Wight and Henry V. Eaukin, and their wives, arrived in China, to join the Ningpo mission. Mr. Brown was compelled to return to this country, by the state of his health, and on the 6th of December Mr. Lloyd was called to his rest. The station at Amoy has not since been occu- pied by the Board. In 1849, Mr. Moses S. Coulter and his wife arrived in China — Mr. Coulter having been appointed to take charge of the press at Ning- po, while continuing his studies for the work of the ministry. In 1850, the Rev. Messrs. Samuel N. and William P. Martin, and their wives, arrived at Ningpo. Mr. Loomis and his wife and Mr. Speer returned to this country, on account of their health. A new mission was formed at Shanghai, to which Mr. Wight and Mr. Culbert- son were appointed — the latter with a special view to the work of translating the Scriptures. In 1851, Mr. French was married to the second daughter of Dr. Ball, the sister of Mrs. Happer ; and in 1852, the Rev. John Byers and his wife and Miss Juana M. Knight arriv- ed in China, the latter to be associated with her sister, Mrs. Rankin in the female boarding- school at Ningpo, and Mr. Byers to be station- ed at Shanghai. Mr. Coulter was called to his rest, on the 12th of December, and the health of Mr. Byers having given way shortly after reaching his station, he and his wife starts ed on their voyage homewards, but he was also taken to his rest on the 8th of April, 1853. In August, the Rev. John Nevius and his wife lotn „!""'" °f *'^^ !'«■<'■ Walter M»Lowrie : New- York 1849. Robert Carter & BrqtherB. Ho was a member of a Convention of Jlissionaries at Shanghai, engaged in the translalion of the Scriptures, and was returning to his sta- tion at Ningpo, when he was taken, as by a martyr's death ' to ma rest. » CHINA. 285 sailed for Ningpo, and in November the fieV. Charles F. Preston, and J. G. Kerr, M.D., and his wife, for Canton. In this year also, Dr. MeCartee was married to Miss Knight. In April, 1854, the Eev. Reuben Lowrie ai^d his wife embarked for China, to be connected with the Shanghai mission. This is but a slight sketch of the missions of the Board in China, yet it shows that an Important work is in steady progress. Twelve ministers and two physicians, nearly all of whom are married men, are stationed at the cities of Canton, Shanghai, and Ningpo. The boarding-schools contain about sixty boys and thirty girls, and the day-schools about sixty boys. The church at Ningpo numbers twenty- three communicants. The printing-press at that city has sent forth upwards of 24,000,000 of pages of the Sacred Scriptures and other Christian publications, and is still in effective operation. The medico-missionary labors of Mr. Happer and Dr. MeCartee have exerted a wide-spread influence in favor of the Christian religion, which is perceived to inspire its fol- lowers with benevolence, and to confer evident blessings on the poor and needy. Dr. McCar- tee's influence, as a Christian physician, is such as might well be envied by the most favored of his professional brethren in any of our own cities. Numerous chapels, most of them rooms hired for the purpose, are open for religious services, and at Ningpo a large and convenient church has been erected, in which public wor- ship is regularly conducted. • The Gospel has been frequently proclaimed, also, at the tem- ples and other places of public concourse, and in the villages in the vicinity of Ningpo. By means of these various labors, the leaven of divine truth has been extensively diffused, and is producing its ^.ppropriate influence. A signal example of this occurred during the last year, in connection with the Ningpo mission. A part of the sacred volume, received from a missionary, was carried by a Chinaman to his own village, at some distance in the in- terior of the country. It seems to have made no impression on the mind of him who first received it, but it fell into the hands of an aged man, who for fourscore years had been a wor- shiper of idols. His attention was awakened to consider this new religion, and he concluded to go in search of the giver of this strange book. He came to Ningpo, took up his abode on the premises of one of the missionaries, and spent his time in reading the sacred volume and attending to the instructions of his kind teacher,- — often coming with the Bible in his hand to ask for explanations of difficult passages, and manifesting a teachable spirit. After some mtaths thus employed, he gave pleasing evidence of being a subject of divine grace, and was received into the church of Christ by baptism, in the presence of a large congregation of his heathen countrymen. Could anything more clearly attest that the Gospel is the power of God unto salvation? Commonly we indulge little hope of the con- version of very aged persons, even in Christian lands ; but here, in the adorable exercise of God's sovereignty in grace, we see an aged idolator, living far distant from the ministra- tions of the sanctuary, brought into the com- munion of the saints ! Such an example shows that nothing is too hard for the Almighty. The Mission to the Chinese in Califoenia properly follows the missions in China itself. The fame of the gold mines has drawn some thousands of this gain-seeking people to our shores. Thus far, they have nearly all come from the province of Canton, and speak the dialect of that province. The Eev. William Speer and his wife commenced their labors amongst them at San Francisco, in the autumn of 1852. Having been stationed at Canton in former years, his health being now restored, Mr. Speer could at once speak to them in their tongue, the wonderful works of God. Their civil relations to each other were now rnversed ; they are the foreigners, and their missionary could bid them welcome to his native land ; accordingly, his visits were well received by them. He found several Chinese patients in the hospital, who were grateful for his instruc- tions and aid ; a school was opened, but the attendance was not regular. After some time, an eligible place of worship was secured for a few months, where services were conducted in the Chinese language, with a varying au- dience. Eventually the liberality of residents of San Francisco provided a suitable building for the use of the mission, in which it is de- signed to have a school and a chapel, with convenient apartments for the family of the missionary. Many of the Chinese gave hand- some donations towards the purchase of this property. Among the favorable incidents in the brief history of this mission, it may be noted that some of the former pupils in the mission schools in China were found in California. They were predisposed to give a hearty reception to one whose character and motives were at once un- derstood by them. Another favorable provi- dence was the return to China of an influential man, whose influence would have been strongly arrayed against the mission, and the choice^as his successor, to be the head of a company or association of Chinese, of a man who looked with a friendly eye upon these efforts for the benefit of his people. Afterwards a few Chris- tians were found, who had been received into the church by missionaries in their native land. Their conduct appears to have been worthy of their profession ; they rested from work on the Sabbath, even at the mines, and met together for religious worship ; but their wandering life prevented their forming a regular congre- gation. In the early part of the year 1854, Mr. Speer was permitted to organize a church 286 CHINA. at San Francisco, with four Chinese commu- nicants, one of whom was ordained as a ruling elder. Thus an auspicious beginning has been made. The future influence of this mission will of course depend to a considerable extent on the number of Chinese who may seek a temporary or a permanent home in our land. There are causes which render it not unlikely that large numbers of them will come to this country. Some of these have been already referred to ; others need not be here specified. On the other hand, their emigration may be checked, as indeed it was for a time, by the harsh and un-American treatment which they met with from some of our countrymen — or more likely from some of the reprobate foreigners. The impositions to which they are subject at the mines will go far to deter them from remaining, and to prevent others from coming. These oppressions are disgraceful to those who are guilty of them ; but with a better tone of morals at the mines, every thing of this kind must cease. It seems quite clear that our country- men should encourage and not repel the immi- gration of the Chinese. They will form a most valuable class of laborers, being industrious, peaceable, and frugal. It may easily come to pass that the Chinese will to a large extent sup- plant the Negroes, in the cultivation of rice, cot- ton, and sugar-cane. They will be found to be a superior class of laborers, and every way less expensive. Their employment in this country, not merely in the mines of California, nor in the slave States of the South, but in many avocations in all the States, may become obvi- ously desirable and quite expedient to our own citizens, while it will afford a comfortable sub- sistence to myriads of our now half-starving fellow-creatures in China. Above all, it will bring them within the reach of Christian in- struction and example, and result in the salva- tion of multitudes of them in our own day and in ages to come. The wonderful ordering of Providence that has already brought so many of them to our shores should awaken attention to their condition, and to the claims on the missionary efforts of the churches of the great nation whom they represent. — Lowrie's Manual of Missions. TABULAE VIEW. MISSIONS. stations. 1 a 6 Missionaries and Assistant Missionaries. i 'S B a e Scholars. Ministers. Lay Teachers and others. Boarding. Day. 103 78 s 1 1 American. 1 m 30 26 1 . 1 67 23 90 - S fa Canton, NiNOPO, Shanghai, .... Chinese in Cal- j rroKNiA,. . . j Canton, .... Ningpo, . . . Shanghai, . . San Francisco, Totals, . 1846 1844 1850 1852 3 6 3 1 1 1 3 7 3 1 1 1 2 30 4 34 6 29 13 2 14 56 35 181 Ameeican Baptist Missionary Union. — The earliest missionaries appointed by this Society for the Chinese were settled at Bang- kok, in Siam, and also at Macao. Their labors are given in full in the sketch of the Baptist Mission in that country. These labors were undertaken at a period when China itself was comparatively inaccessible to the missionary or to any foreign residents, and were estab- lished at Bangkok and Macao on account of the multitudes of Chinese who are found either permanently residing or frequently visiting those cities. They remained there until the close of the late war between Great Britain and China, when by the treaty, which ter- minated the war in 1842, the island of Hong- kong, having been ceded to the British Gov- ernment, the five ports of Canton, Amoy, Fuh- ohau, Ningpo, and Shanghai, having been opened to British commerce. Rev, Issaohar T. Roberts, Rev. J. L. Shuck, and Rev. Win. Dean, removed to Hong-kong, the two former from Macao, the latter fronj. Bangkok. Messrs. Dean and Shuck, with their families, establish- ed themselves at Victoria, the capital of the island, and Mr. Johnson at Ohek-chu, a smaller town on its southern shore. These missionaries had already acquired the language of China, and were familiar with the character and man- ners of its people. They were fully p.-cjiarej to commence the work on whicli thjy were sent. They were received in Hong-kong with kindness and favor from the Briti.-^b olTictrs and residents, especially from Sir Henry Pol linger, the English ambassador, who had negotiated the treaty. With their assistance, a int. too„ CHINA. 287 obtained from the government on wMch a mission-house was erected, and two commodi- ous chapels were also built to be used alike for public worship and for schools. A church of five native members was organized, and placed under the care of Mr. Shuck, to which four others were added by baptism during the year 1842. At Chek-chu a chapel was also erect- ed, in which Mr. Roberts conducted service both in Chinese and English. He also estab- lished a school, which was taught principally by one of the Chinese converts, who had come up from Siam. In this manner, in the summer of 1842 were commenced the fii-st missions of the American Baptists in China. The three mis- sionaries by whom they were planted, had long been waiting at their distant outposts, but they were now for the first time established in China. They were indebted to the protec- tion of the English flag for the opportunities they enjoyed ; but they saw the whole empire, with its almost numberless population, open- ing, as it were, before them. The barriers of ages had at length begun to give way. The day was evidently at hand when the Gospel was to be preached to the millions of China. In 1843, the mission was bereft of Mrs. Dean, an English lady, who had come to the Bast, under the auspices of a society of her countrywomen, for " Promoting Female Edu- cation." She had married Mr. Dean during his residence in Siam, and both there and in Hong-kong had proved herself a faithful and efficient missionary. At about the same time also Mr. Dean was obliged by ill-health to suspend his labors and for a time to change the climate. In the spring of the same year the mission was reinforced by the arrival of Dr. D. J. Macgowan. He, however, soon repaired to Canton, for the purpose of consulting with Dr. Parker, one of the missionary physicians of the American Board, and at length decided to se1> tie at Ningpo, and there to commence a new mission. In connection with Dr. Macartee, of the American Presbyterian mission, he founded a missionary hospital. The mission had from the beginning been regarded with special favor by many of the English officers, residents in Hong-kong, who had given it their counte- nance, and contributed liberally to its support. It began with the most gratifying auspices, and a second church was soon established at Victoria. The people heard the Gospel preach- ed by the missionaries in the several dialects of their own tongue. In the summer of 1844 a treaty was concluded between Mr. Cushing, Commissioner of the United States, and an imperial commissioner of China, by the terms of which all the advantages hitherto granted to the English by the treaty of 1842 were guaranteed to citizens of this country, and. in addition, provision was made for the erection of chap'jls, hospitals, and cemeteries, at each one of the five ports. From this time Ameri- can missionaries and other American residents began to enjoy many privileges which before they had procured only in consequence of their connection with the English. This provision in the treaty has distinctly recognized the missions as among the national interests in China which the American government de signs to protect. But these prospects of the mission were soon to be shaded by afflicting events, which for a time retarded its progress. In November, 1844, Mrs. Shuck died at Victoria, after a brief illness. She was a native of Virginia, and had sailed from the United States with her husband in 1835. They had resided at Macao until the opening of China to the Eng- lish in 1842, and she was now out off at the most interesting epoch in the history of the mission. Mr. Dean, also, at nearly the same time, was obliged to sail for the United States, in order to recruit his health ; and was thus withdrawn from his appropriate labors for upwards of two years. In the autumn of 1844, Dr. Devan, a missionary physician, with his wife, arrived at Hong-kong. They subsequently removed to Canton, where a mission-house was purchased and several assistants were employed. But their connection with the mission was of short duration. Mrs. Devan died, much lamented, at Canton, in October, 1846, and her husband, finding himself unable to reside permanently within the tropics, returned to the United States. Mr. Shuck had already returned in 1845, and on the organization of the Southern Baptist Convention, he was transferred to the service of that body, by whom the mission buildings at Canton were purchased. These changes, however, did not entirely suppress the energies of the missionaries, who remained behind, or prevent the progress and growth of the mission. Hong-kong seemed at that time to offer many advantages, in con- sequence of the presence of the English, but more especially on account of the superior cha- racter of the people who inhabit the island ; and many sanguine hopes were then indulged, which have been but imperfectly realized, in the years that have since elapsed. In 1847, Rev. E. C. Lord and his wife were added to the mission at Ningpo, and in 1848, Rev. John Johnson and his wife were added to that at Hong-kong, though Mrs. Johnson was al- most immediately removed by death. About the same period, Mr. Goddard removed from Bangkok, where he had, for several years, been engaged in the Chinese department of the mis- sion, and established himself at Ningpo, where, with occasional interruptions, he has since con- tinued to reside. His health had not admitted of regular preaching, and though not without frequent preaching, he has been for the most part engaged in the translation of the Scrip- tures. This work, at all times, and in all cir- cumstances, is sufficiently difficult and respon- sible ; but the translation into Chinese is at- tended with peculiar difficulties and embarrass- 288 CHINA. ments. In 1843, a plan was formed among the missionaries then in China, of the various denominations from England and America, designed to establish a standard by which the translation of the Scriptures should be regu- lated and determined. The American Baptist Missionaries appear at first to have thought favorably of the plan ; but they afterwards, with the approbation of the Board of Mana- gers, decided not to adopt it, but to complete the translation of their own, which had already been begun. To this work Bev. Messrs. Dean and Goddard have since been devoting their almost constant labors. The New Testament is now nearly all translated ; the translation is undergoing the careful revision of both these missionaries, while each one has made a be- ginning with certain books of the Old Testa- ment. In 1851, Mr. and Mrs. Lord returned to the United States, in consequence of the declining health of the latter — she has since ceased from her labors. The two stations of the original mission, in Hong-kong and in Ningpo, have been organized as separate missions, though the number of missionaries attached to each remains the same. On the island of Hong- kong, in addition to the principal station at Victoria, there are also four out-stations at which schools and preaching are maintained by as many native assistants and teachers, who are under the immediate supervision of the missionaries. The church connected with this mission numbers, at the present time, about 30 members, who make annual contributions for the support of the native assistants, and for the promotion of the Gospel among their country- men. The missionaries at Hong-kong are Bev. Messrs Dean and Johnson, who also em- ploy four assistants and three school teachers. The mission at Ningpo has no outstations. It has had from the beginning a medical es- tablishment, which has given to Dr. Mac- gowan unusual facilities in becoming ac- quainted with the people, and presenting to them the claims of the Gospel. The church here contains ten members. The missionaries now belonging to the mission are, Bev. Messrs. Lord, Goddard, and Knowlton, and Dr. Mac- gowan. At both these missions, the agencies hitherto employed are substantially the same. They consist in preaching the Gospel and con- versation with the people, the circulation of the Scriptures, and of religious books, and the teaching of schools. The results of these agencies, which have now been sustained for upwards of ten years, do not, it is true, re- alize the hopes with which the missionaries first entered China, on the opening of the five ports in 1842. But these hopes were undoubt- edly the offspring of inexperience, It has since been found that it is one thing to have access to the people of a country, and quite another .'o convert them to the Gospel of Christ. The missionaries, instructed by experience, are still at work, with hopes chastened by the lapse of time. Great changes are taking place in the manners and policy of the people among whom they are dwelling ; but still greater changes are preparing through the agencies which Christian missions have established, and will develope themselves in the ages of the fu- ture. Two Missions in China — Statistics in 1854. — Hong-kong mission, 1 station, 4 outstations, 2 missionaries, 1 female assistant, 4 native preachers and assistants, 1 church, six day schools, 75 pupils. Ningpo mission, 1 station, 4 missionaries, 4 female assistants, 2 native assistants, 1 church, 14 members, 3 day schools, 36 pupils. — Pkof, W. Gammell. Methodist Episcopal Chukch. — It is now eight years since the Methodist Episcopal Church in the United States commenced the missionary work in China. The first mission- aries were the Eev. Messrs. Moses C. White and Judson D. Collins, the latter of whom, with the wife of the former, have died in the work. This mission has suffered much in com- mon with all other missions in China, from the agitations growing out of the progress of the revolution going on in that empire. Pre- vious to 1846, the idea of founding a mission in the Empire of China, was often discussed in the periodicals of the Methodist Episcopal Church ; and many generous contributions were offered for the object. In conjunction with the General Missionary Committee, the Board in 1847 resolved on its establishment, and the Providence of God soon supplied the men to undertake it, They arrived in Hong-kong in August, 1847, and were kindly received by missionary brethren of all the other denomi- nations. After remaining at Hong-kong a few days, they sailed .for their destination, at Puhchau. Here they soon obtained a resi- dence and gave themselves up to the study of the language, Mr. White, meanwhile, practic- ing medicine ; and by the distribution of books and tracts, they endeavored to make themselves useful among the half-million of people com- posing the population of the city. The Eev. H. Hickok and Eev. Eobcrt 0. Maclay were sent out in October, 1847, but Mr. Hickok was soon obliged, by failure of his health, to return to the United States. The three brethren who remained went daily into the crowded streets and preached, as well as they were able, " Jesus Christ and him cru- cified," to the groups who stopped to listen to their voice. They distributed tracts, and the scriptures printed under their own supervision, and found the people eager to receive them. One of the brethren having had the advan- tage of a partial course of medical study, opened a dispensary, in which he was enabled to treat many cases of disease, giving at the same time, to the patients and their friends religious instruction and Christian books' CHINA. 289 Bach of the missionaries had under his per- sonal supervision a day school, taught by a Chinese master. In the three schools, they had in 1849, 64 scholars, with an average at^ tendance of 50. Though the labors devoted to this mission tlms far, chiefly contemplated prospective results, yet the laborers employed were not without some measure of present en- couragement. They perceived a yielding of inveterate prejudices, and a willingness to allow them to occupy portions of the city, in which at first they could get no foothold. And as they became more familiar with the language and customs of the people, they saw greater openings for usefulness. They long and earnestly in treated for reinforcements, and for means to establish a boarding school for the youth of both sexes. The report of the Superintendent of the mission for 1851, gives the following account of their mode of labor : " The only mission chapel we occupy at pre- sent, is on the street, not far from the mission residences south of the river. It is small, having 'in fact been rented rather as a room for the distribution of tracts, than as a regular preaching place. It will seat perhaps fifty persons ; and as it is not upon a thronged street it answers very well for addressing such con- gregations as come in. The preacher, when he goes into the desk here, finds himself in cir- cumstances very different from those which surround him at home. Here come in street passengers, few or many, as the case may be; some will have the poles on which they carry burdens ; some packages which they have been buying, or are going to sell ; some will be empty handed. They stand or sit, gazing list- lessly about, noticing the room and its inmates, especially the stranger. It may be the speaker is going on with his remarks. The incomer expresses aloud to his neighbor, his surprise and delight, that the stranger can speak their language — wonders aloud how long the man has been in the country, or how old he is. Those who are listening to the missionary, pro- bably repeat the words as they fall from his lips — look to those about them, and express their approbation of the truths declared. They may be the most solemn teachings of God's word he thus endorses ; and perhaps the next sentence will be to inquire how many thick- nesses of clothes the preacher wears, or what viands he eats with his rice. Thus it is, a sense of the solemnity of eternal truths is to be inculcated as well as those truths them- selves. Some seem more serious. We are glad of a hearing — are encouraged by a little attention. We scatter the seed, and look for- ward to the time when he that soweth and he that reapeth shall rejoice together. " We have distributed a great many traxts. At certain times and in certain places, the people seem beside themselves, in their anxiety to get possession of them. They crowd around, they call out, they push each other, and abuse 19 each other, in order to come at the books. They take without asking, they grasp them and will not let go their hold. Books are sel- dom destroyed by the Chinese ; if not read at once, they are carefully laid aside, and may be read at another time. Sometimes we may go gently on with the distribution ; at the same time making remarks. Books distributed from shop to shop are thankfully received, and al- most invariably read. Printing is very cheap here, and at a small cost we have published and circulated more than half a million of pages. We have not at present any copies of the Scriptures on hand ; we need them, and hope that ere long the questions in regard to the different versions will be so far settled as to allow us to publish an edition." In 1852, Dr. and Mrs. Wiley, Mr. and Mrs. Colder, and Miss Seely arrived at Puhchau. Their entrance upon their field of labor was very favorable. Messrs. White and Maclay had each a small chapel erected, when the at- tendance was good, and an increased attention to the preached word was quite perceptible. Wayside preaching and the distribution of the Scriptures and tracts were prosecuted with diligence : thus sowing the seed of divine truth beside all waters, and humbly looking up to God to give the increase. In their efforts for printing and circulating the Word of God, the missionaries make grateful mention of the kind help they received from the American Bible Society. They are endeavoring to prepare to do their part in the work to which it would seem that God will call the Protestant Church in China, when all the results of the strange revolution now in progress there shall have been developed. Nov. 3d 1853, Mrs. Wiley, wife of Bev. Dr. Wiley, departed this life in the triumphs of faith. She was cut down in the midst of her years and usefulness, far from the land of her birth, and buried among the tombs of idolaters ; but the cause in which she rendered up her life will never die, but move onward till it covers the wide domains of the Celestial Empire. The fruits of the mission to China, as the fruits of all missions in old and consolidated heathen states, appear slowly. Perhaps the most valuable and extensive results of such missions do not appear for ages. Confidence in the old religion must be destroyed ; convic- tion in favor of the new must be produced ; and when this is done, old habits, as well as the native enmity of the human heart, must be overcome and changed, and new forms of thought and feeling are to be introduced and incorporated into society. It will require cen- turies to obtain these results. — Annual Reports and Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. Butler. Methodist Episcopal Church, South. — The missionary Society of the Methodist Epis- copal Church South, began its operations in Chi- na, in 1848. The first missionaries sent out were the Eev. Charles Taylor, M.D., aud Bev. Bcuj. 290 CHINA. Jenkins, D.D., who, with their families, sailed from Boston for Shanghai, April 24, 1848. Dr. Taylor's medical knowledge fitted him for usefulness in that respect also, and his colleague. Dr. Jenkins, possessed extra advantages, being one of the best linguists in the country. To a knowledge of Hebrew, Greek, and Latin, he added an acquaintance with the French, Ger- man, and Spanish languages. He is besides, a practical printer, and will be able on that account also, to enlarge his field of usefulness in the Celestial Empire. Both of these breth- ren engaged to remain in China at least ten years ; and, being in the vigor of life, are not so young as to be novices, nor too old to acquire a difficult language, and adapt themselves to the peculiar habits and manners of the Chinese people. On their arrival they devoted them- selves to the acquisition of the Chinese lan- guage, and meanwhile made themselves useful through the medium of interpreters. The church at home nobly and liberally sustained the mission, and sent the Eev. G. W. E. Cun- ningham to their help, in 18.52. They turned part of their house into a chapel, and soon had an attentive and interesting congregation, and a few souls became deeply concerned for their salvation ; one of whom, in particular, has be- gun to be useful. Accompanied by this native preacher, Liew-seen-sang, they also establish- ed regular preaching in the open air, at the principal place of resort in the city. Their school had 34 names on its roll. But the breth- ren earnestly desire the establishment of two boarding-schools, one for boys, and another for girls. Mea-sures were also in operation for building a church, and setting up a printing- press. But the health of Mrs. Taylor became feeble, and she, with her children, returned to the United States. Shortly after, Mrs. Jen- kins's health became prostrate ; and in the hope of saving her life. Dr. J. left with her for America. But she continued to sink, and was taken to her eternal rest before she could reach her native land, leaving a bereaved husband and six little ones. Soon after Dr. Jenkins left, and before Shanghai had fallen into the hands of the insurgents. Dr. Taylor set his heart upon penetrating as far as the insurgent camp at Chirirkiang-foo, in order to ascertain what were the real sentiments of the invaders in reference to Christianity, and what would be the result, as to Christian missions, of their triumph. This was a bold and dangerous pro- ject, as the city was then besieged by the imperialists, both by land and water ; and should he even succeed in evading their vigi- lance, he knew not what reception he might expect at the hands of the insurgents. But he resolved to make the attempt notwithstanding, and God preserved him in safety. Some ac- count of this expedition will be found under the head of, the Chinese Revolution, near the close of this article. The health of Mrs. Taylor having failed. she was under the necessity of returning to the United States, in the hope of recruiting it. Dr. Taylor, several months afterward, fol- lowed her ; and he, with Dr. Jenkins, itine- rated through the Southern church for some time, bringing the cause of China before them, and arousing a deeper sympathy on its behalf. Shortly after Mr. Taylor left Shanghai (in Oc- tober, 1853), the city^ was- taken, and for some time the only remaining missionary, Mr. Cun- ningham, was very much circumscribed in his efforts to do good. But notwithstanding the blockade by the Imperialists, matters have become more settled, and he, with the native local preacher, Liew, is again at his regular work. The Board of Missions of the Methodist B. Church South feel an increased interest in this field of Christian activity, and at their late an- nual meeting the sum of $30,000 was appro- priated for the support of this mission, the purchase of a printing-press, the erection of a church and a building for a school. They have also strongly reinforced its stafifof'agents, and by the time these sheets are before our readers, the Eev. Drs. Taylor and Jenkins, ac- companied by the Kev. Messrs. Kelly, Belton, and Lambeth, will be on their way to China, or perhaps actually arrived there. — Anmud Re- ports and Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. Boi- ler. Wesleyan Missionary Society. — Just about the tinie that China was thrown open to missionary effort, this society had been making extraordinary exertions for Africa, the West Indies, and the South Seas. After the eman- cipation of the slaves, the missionaries were largely increased in the West Indies ; the new and costly 'mission to the Gold Coast and Ashantee was established, and the cry from Peejee was responded to ; with, at the same time, considerable extension in New Zealand, South Africa, Australia, and India. In 1844, the society had increased the number of its missionaries within ten years, by 123. This rapid extension caused a corresponding out- lay, which greatly exceeded the additional in- come, and debts accumulated upon the com- mittee, which, notwithstanding many instances of truly Christian liberality, have, up to the present time, hindered extension beyond the necessity of keeping what had already been gained ; yet the missionaries of the so- ciety are this year one hundred and one more than m 1844. Many felt that the call of the society was rather to reinforce missions already, begun, than to enter upon a new undertaking, so formidable as China. Yet many yearned for that land. One and another made offer- ings for the enterprize ; one valued branch so- ciety held a meeting and raised a considerable sum. Tot with their existing burdens the com- mittee could not proceed ; but a, sub-commit- teewiis appointed, with a view to obtain all desirable information, and make such arrange- CHINA. 291 ments as miglit facilitate a movement when the way seemed to open. But in the autumn of 1850, Grod selected his own instrument for the commencement of this work. Oeorge Piercy, a simple-hearted but interesting youug man, in Yorkshire, having been truly convert- ed to Grod, felt his soul yearning for the salva^ tion of the heathen world. The Spirit of God found him, like Elisha, at the plough, and threw over him the commission of Heaven for the evangelization of China. Without any hesitation he sacrificed the secular pursuits of life, and proceeded to seek direction how he should find his way to that field of labor to which God had called him. About thirty miles from his residence there was a Christian friend of his, Mr. Henry Eeed, whom he con- sulted in reference to his impression that it was his duty to go and labor in China. Mr. Reed did all he could to dissuade him, urging the great difficulty of acquiring the language and the obstacles that he would have to encounter on his arrival, and tried to direct his attention to some other missionary field, that presented less difficulties. But to every argument his reply was : " I believe, sir, that God has call- ed me to labor in China, but I have no such impression that I have a call to any other part of the mission field." At length, however, the young man was persuaded for the time to abandon the idea. But, in about six months he waited upon Mr. Reed again, and stated that the impression upon his mind not only continued, but increased in strength. His friend, satisfied that he was determined to fol- low up what he believed to be a religious con- viction, gave him a letter of introduction to Rev. William Arthur, one of the general se- cretaries of the society. For reasons already stated, he was not recognized by the commit- tee ; but nothing discouraged by their inabi- lity to employ him, from his own limited means he paid his passage, and the next in- formation which his friend received was a letter, in which he stated that he was then on his way to that great empire. On his ar- rival there, the facility with which he acquired the language was amazins, and the openings that he found for labor were equally remark- able. Mr. Piercy arrived at Hong-kong, January 30, 1851, expecting to find a pious sergeant at the head of a small class of soldiers. The following is his own account of his entrance upon the field, in a letter to the Secretaries of the Society : " Stepping ashore, a stranger in a strange land, with my heart beating hard in my bosom — for I hoped speedily to find Ser- geant Ross, and with him and his praying few to tell 5f the goodness of our common Lord, I Walked on towards the barracks. The first I met I addressed, inquiring whore I might find ^ Boss. ' He is dead,' was the startling reply, i I felt, I knew not how, for a few moments — the loneliness, the utter loneliness of my situation seemed almost to unnerve me. With a falter- ing tongue, I inquired further, and the particu- lars of his death were told in tones solemn as my own. The young man evidently felt much as he told of his comrade's sickness and death. I soon inquired as to his circumstances and name. Corporal, now Sergeant D , was the individual . with whom I was conversing. This was most providential, and soon, in a great measure, relieved the feelings which had thus suddenly come into my soul. I soon learn- ed all about Ross and Methodism in Hong- kong. He, to use D 's words, was a young man, but an old Christian, and had been the centre of a little band, who sought to save their souls, six or seven in number. They had often met in his room ; but he fell, and they fell, some with him, a prey to death, and others into the indifference of the world ; and D ■ stood lonely as I had been myself,' upon the deep. He had oft, he said, longed and prayed for a companion, and he thanked God for thus giving him one. In a few minutes we were brothers beloved, thanks be to a God of provi- dence for this direction of his hand ! " Having thus experienced the goodness of a guiding Providence, he soon received a proof of the catholicity of missionai-y affection, hon- orable both to Dr. Legge and the London Missionary Society. Mr. Piercy says : " We thought it best to go to Dr. Legge, as he has a good name for a catholic spirit. He was not at home ; but we soon found him in the Chinese Chapel, and I heard the Gospel in a strange tongue, utterly strange ; though I had tried to learn all the way as I came, a word now and then was all that I could make out. After the service, the young corporal intro- duced me to the Doctor, and he most kindly offered me a bed in his house for the night, say- ing, the morning would bring leisure to consider further. I found Dr. Legge a man of God, and soon disclosed all my heart to him. He advised me to do nothing rashly, but look around, and make inquiries, and watch prayer- fully for the moving of the cloud of Provi- dence. ' After ten or twelve days, perhaps you will see your way ; in the mean time you are welcome to a bed, and the room you have been in, in this house.' This was kind. I thanked God, and took courage." After residing about three weeks under the hospitable roof of Dr. Legge, Mr. Piercy hired rooms, one of which, capable of containing about sixty persons, he turned into a preach- ing-place for the English soldiery. He, at the same time, commenced visiting the sick sol- diers in the hospital ; and, under the kind di- rection of Dr. Herschborg, of the London Mis- sionary Society, applied himself to the acqui- sition of some knowledge of medicine, with a view to using it for missionary purposes. The Lord blessed his labors among the soldiers and their wives, and about twenty were soon for- med into a society, of whose sincerity he had 292 CHINA. good hope. Those among whom he had la^ bored showed a disposition to contribute to his support ; and, though his own funds were expended much sooner than he expected, what they raised, coupled with small sums sent by friends in England, enabled him to devote all his time to mission work, without taking any secular employment, as, when going out, he had anticipated that he might be obliged to do. From the first, he looked upon his stay in Hong-kong as but temporary, and was making inquiries, with a view to select a station on the Chinese mainland. After months of useful labor among the soldiery at Hong-konpg, he decided on placing himself at Canton, and there he received from Dr. Hobson, also of the London Missionary Society, the same brother- ly kindness which he had previously received from Dr. Legge. He gives this account of the prospects : " As to the field before me, I need not say that it is large. I am a tempo- rary resident in a house not far from the fac- tories, close to the river, and to a ferry which 9,000 persons frequently pass in a day. It is a little way into the western suburbs, over which, from a lofty veranda, I have an exten- sive view. I can look two miles to the west, and two and a half to the north, and in this small space are crowded the abodes and per- sons of 400,000, if not 500,000 human beings. Through every street of this given space I can pass unmolested, in many places enter shops, and leave a tract or speak a few min- utes with the people. I think I perceive a difference in the treatment of foreigners since November last. The free intercourse of the missionary families with the people has had a very beneficial effect. Freedom of movement in the streets and lanes of this suburb is now a settled point. As to the people themselves, there is a moral and mental apathy respecting the truth, which is a great discouragement to the missionary. This must be stated. Yet still, numbers are willing and some desirous, to receive Christian books and tracts. They come into the preaching-rooms, and, in many instances, pay close attention to the speaker. Spiritual apathy and death are stamped deep in the soul. Few ask questions, unless you enter into conversation with them ; and a sin- cere inquirer after God is seldom met with. Their thoughts seem to be : ' This doctrine is good for foreigners, but it is of no use to us : we have our own sages, whose wisdom is un- doubted. Jesus is a sage of the West ; let the foreigners follow him.' The idolatry and temple rites have no hold of their hearts, but as seasons of show and mirth, of amusement and relaxation from business. In this field are found rich and poor, learned and unlearned in vast numbers. If a Chinese is of equal value with any other human being, what a number of islands and large tracts of territory else- where will oven this city outweigh ! " After a short residence in Canton, Mr. Piercy offered himself to this society as an agent; and, taking from " Grindrod's Com- pendium " the questions usually put to a can- didate for the ministry at a district meeting, gave written answers ; asking that, under the peculiarities of the case, this should be ac- cepted as an examination. The following is his account of his mode of labor : " As to what I am doing here, I wish I could say I am able to do much, but not so ; my work is nearly all preparatory, yet I will give you an idea of my daily engagements. Eising early, the first hour is spent in prayer and reading the Scriptures ; then, till eight o'clock, I read or write in English, and answer a letter, if pressing. The forenoon is mainly spent in the study of the Chinese colloquial dialect. At twelve service is held in a room below this. Here, though I have not yet commenced to deliver consecutive addresses, I seek to be use- ful, after an address by the native teacher, who labors here. I try to engage some of the peo- ple on the subject of discourse, and make in- quiries as to the various statements the preacher has made. Our congregations are not very large. Tet, day by day, they are en- couraging and attentive. Tracts are given to all that desire them. After service, I gener- ally return to my room, and study the book language, the classics, &c., and get new words. Part of the afternoon I spend in itinerating through the city. From six to seven, Dr. Hobson's teacher assists me. Then I spend an hour till eight in instructing my boy, and talking with my old teacher on the practical truths of God's word. Afterward, for another hour, I read some spirit-stirring book in Eng- lish ; then self-examination, review of my labors, and prayer to God for mercy to par- don aijd grace to keep me, close the duties of the day. Often I have found this quiet hour, when all the bustle of this great city is hushed, a season of hallowed enjoyment. Such is the general routihe. Nothing breaks it except a visit to a temple, or to see an idolatrous proces- sion, which is a good opportunity to distribute some tracts ; perhaps a visit to one of the mis- sionary families. Dr. Hobson has kindly lent me the second part of Dr. Morrison's Diction- ary, which is a great help. He, together with Mrs. Hobson, manifests a most afi'ectionate interest towards me, and they are even anxious that my personal piety should not droop." "While these communications were on their way from China, a friend in England was also urging the Committee on. One missionary student at Richmond was so desirous of going out to join Mr. Piercy, that he would gladly have done so, without promise of sustenance, m the hope of finding some situation whereby to support himself Another young minister had for years his heart set upon China Just before the time Mr. Piercy's communications reached the Secretaries, urgent requests tn hn CHINA. 293 sent came from both these brethren. At the same time, also, the Treasurer of the Society, Mr. Farmer, who had previously offered a thousand pounds for this mission in ten annual instalments, when six had been paid, said that the day two missionaries sailed to join Mr. Piercy, he would complete the payment of the whole sum, and would thenceforth give one hundred per annum for the Chinese mis- sion. Other no less praiseworthy instances of Christian liberality, helped to show the Com- mittee that, in undertaking the responsibility of a mission to China, they would have with them a large amount of practical sympathy from the lovers of the souls of men. The Committee felt that a providential call was now plainly made upon them, and though deeply regretting their inability to do justice to other needy fields, saw that to withhold aid any longer from China would not increase their ability to strengthen old missions. They therefore resolved, in dependence on the bounty of God, to place China on the list of their stations, adopting Mi'. Piercy as a mis- sionary, and sending out two brethren, Messrs, William R. Beach and Josiah Cox, with Miss Wannop, a trained teacher from the Wcst> minster Normal Institution. They sailed on the 20th of January, 1852, and arrived safely at Canton, and have entered upon the duties of the mission. For the present, they are mainly occupied in learning the Chinese lan- guage. They relieve their arduous toil by the distri- bution of tracts, and seek, in all such ways as may open to them, to spread the knowledge and influence of divine truth. Mr. Piercy has commenced preaching in a room in his own house, which was opened as a chapel in June last, and the continual kindness of Dr. Hob- son has allowed him the occasional service of Leang Afa, the first convert of Protestant mis- sionaries in China. This venerable man, who was baptized by Dr. Milne, in 1816, preaches once on the Lord's day in the Methodist Chapel. Mr. Piercy takes the other service. A school for boys has also been commenced during the past year, and Mrs. Piercy will probably do something on behalf of the females when she is better acquainted with the collo- quial dialect of Canton. Mr. Piercy has translated the first catechism and part of the second, for the use of the mission schools ; and some portions of the Scripture narratives have been printed under his direction, to be used as tracts. The missionaries have engaged to distribute ten thousand copies each of the New Testament, to be supplied by the " Mil- lion Testament Fund," if spared, during the coming year. The instrumentality by which this great work was commenced was humble, and to the eye of human wisdom unpromising. The brethren to whom the solemn charge is com- mitted, are young, and the measure of support that can be bestowed upon the enterprize is but small ; but in all these points of natural weakness, we see cause for both seeking and expecting the strength that is above nature. Their labors, if they receive grace to be faith- ful, will do something toward the conversion of the most populous country in existence. The strength of the Wesleyan mission in China, at the close of 1853, was three missionaries, ono catechist, one preaching- place, and sixteen church members. — Annual Reports, Mission- ary Notices, mid London Waidiman. — Eev. "W. BOTLEK. Rhenish Missionary Society. — This soci- ety sent out Mr. GutzlafiF, about the year 1830, who displayed extraordinary activity, soon be- came perfectly master of the language, and then made frequent journeys through the coast countries of China, sometimes several leagues up the rivers. The Christian Scrip- tures, which he was most intent on circulating, were everywhere received with the most in- tense eagerness. He availed himself of every method, even during the war, for putting or conveying copies of the Christian Scrip- tures into the hands of the Chinese. The Chinese plenipotentiaries themselves, who had to treat with the English, received, after the war, copies of the Scriptures from his hands. This society now have a mission in the Quang-tung province, which has about eighty converts, and occupies five preaching places, — six native evangelists being employed. It is stated that the brethren at this post have access to about a million and a half of people. Another German missionary in the same pro- vince states, that he has access to about ninety TOWNS AND VILLAGES, somc of which Contain ten thousand souls. Canton Baptist Missionaky Society. — This society was composed chiefly of native Christians, and supported Rev. Mr. Ro- berts, who first went out by himself in 1835, and was subsequently supported by the Baptist Board, but has since been separated from it. He had a number of native assist ants. Two small chapels were opened in 1845, where preaching was kept up on the Sabl^ath. In another hired house, about two miles below the foreign factories, a room was fitted up, to accommodate 80 or 90, where preaching was also maintained. Here the missionary and his principal assistant resided Jan. 19, 1845, Wun, a Chinaman, was baptized, after several months' instruction, and a theological class of eight or ten was maintained. This society, however, never was of much account. Baslb Missionary Society.— This society have a mission at Hong-kong, with three mis- sionaries, five native catechists, and ninety communicants ; but we have not been able to obtain any particular history of its opera- tions. 294 CHINA. GENEKAL TABULAR VIEW. SOCIETIES. 1 P 1 i 1 1 .'2 < ll ■1.2 |a 1 S 1 9 1 6 1 1 1 bo 1 & Q 1 1 a S 1 < London Miss. See 1807 4 9 3 1 7 b4 5 93 5 4 American Board ' . 1830 3 11 1 13 1 9 J 26 2 30 4 100 2 Am. Episcopal Church 1835 1 3 1 6 J 24 2 100 6 100 3 Am. Bap. Union 1842 2 6 5 2 14 9 ill 6 South. Bap. Conv 1844 1 4 Church Miss. See 1845 3 6 2 3 62 i Gen. Bap. Miss. Soo 1845 1 1 1 1 Meth. Bpis. Ch. North and South. 1846 '2 6 2 Presbyterian Board 1844 4 13 2 14 34 91 90 •2 English Wesleyans Seventh Day Baptists Free Ch. Scotland 1850 1847 1850 1 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 16 1 30 Rhenish Miss. Soo 18.30 5 80 6 Canton Bap. Miss. Soc. . . 1845 1 1 2 Basle Miss. Soc 1 3 90 5 Totals 26 69 9 40 2 24 5 351 12 376 20 436 29 The Chinese Revolution. — One of the most -wonderful political and moral move- ments in national history is the revolution now in progress in China. It is wonderful both in its origin and in its progress. The leader of the insurgents, known as Tien- TEH, Tae Ping Wong, and Hung Sow Chuen, according to the accounts that have been pub- lished, received his first ideas of Christianity from a tract handed him by Leang-Afa, at the triennial examination at Canton, in 1834. About fourteen years later he placed himself under the religious instruction of Kev. I. J. Boberts, missionary at Canton, and at one time desired baptism, but subsequently he ta- citly withdrew his request for reasons un- known. Mr. Roberts regarded him as vision- ary in his religious views. Prom Canton he returned into the Kwang-si province, and there proclaimed his views of Christianity. There he met with those who sympathized with him in abhorrence of the popular idolatry and a,t- tachment to Christianity, and he and his friends soon became the objects of persecution by the government. They were imprisoned and subjected to such cruelties that one or more of them died. The survivors were driven to arms in self-defence. They issued a procla^ mation exposing the corruptions of the govern- ment, and calling on the people to unite with them in defence of their rights. The op- pressed flocked to their standard, and Provi- dence crowned their arms with success. Army after army was sent to crush the infant rebel- lion, but under God the infant was too strong for the Imperial legions. The Im- perialists were frequently routed, not only in Kwang-si, but by the advancing insurgents in Hupoh and Honan ; and ultimately Nanking, Ching kiang-foo, and other important cities, fell into their hands. No mercy is shown to the Tartars, but men, women and children are indiscriminately slaughtered. By the last accounts they were advancing upon Peking. Though we cannot as yet predict the final re- sult, yet judging from the past, and from their rigid discipline, and the great self-denials to which the revolutionary soldiers cheerfully sub- mit, it would seem probable that victory must ultimately crown their efforts, and that the present idolatrous dynasty must soon fall. If the primary object of this movement had been of a political nature, it seems hardly probable that the insurgents would have ven- tured on attacking the popular superstitions by the destruction of the idols. They appear, the rather, to have been impelled to this bold and fearless measure by strong religious feel- ing. They seem to have partaken of the genuine Puritan spirit. At all events, they are true Icoiwchsts, the legitimate successors of the renowned aaii& of Turin. Their religious views could not have been received from the Romanists. They are of a decidedly Protestant type. Nor can we reason- ably suppose that the religious element of this revolution was derived from any one individual or body of men ; it is rather the consequence otthe joint influence of the various Protestant missions in China, and on its borders. The leaven of Christianity has been difFusini>- itself for years in the popular mind, preparing the CHINA. 295 way for the revolution which now threatens the very existence of the present corrupt, idol- atrous and oppressive dynasty, and promises to open the door to the preaching of the true Gospel throughout China. It is not strange that amid this moral fermentation much of error in opinion and irregularity in practice should be evolved, especially considering the state of the popular mind. It is rather a won- der that in the principles and practice of the insurgents there should be so much to admire and heartily approve. The One Living and true God is their only object of religious wor- ship, and to his aid they attribute all their success, looking to Him for victory. God is daily and unitedly worshiped in the camp and the Sabbath is strictly observed. The ten commandments they regard as their rule of life ; and the Christian Trinity, the vi- carious atonement of Christ, repentance, and faith in Him, are prominent articles of their faith. Opium and tobacco are rigorously pro- hibited. They have begun to print the Word of God, and to publish religious tracts. Eev. Dr. Taylor, whose name has been men- tioned in connection with the mission of the Methodist Episcopal Church South, visited tjie camp of the revolutionists, while he was at Shanghai. He succeeded,, after great expo- sures, in reaching the city of Ohing-kiang-foo, which was then their head-quarters. He threw himself at once upon the mercy of the in- surgents, who demanded of him the object of his visit. This he refused to disclose till he was conducted into the presence of the chief " On my way," he says, " as I passed along, I frequently heard the sound of people chanting ; and inquiring of my attendants what was the meaning of these sounds, I was told that the people were worshiping God, and that it was the hour of morning worehip. I saw idols thrown down in aU directions as I passed through the streets, and I was frequently sa^ luted by the term ' brother.' This was per- fectly new, for at Canton the appellation is ' foreign devil ; ' and while walking in the BuDurbs of Canton, you will hear this perhaps a hundred times. I at last arrived at the head-quarters, and after passing through a num- ber of gateways, on either side of which were curtains of yellow silk, and a great deal of em- broidered drapery of various kinds, for a dis- tance of upwards of 300 or 400 yards from the street, I came at last to the inner recess, and there I was requested to sit. Again I was in- terrogated as to my object, but I said I must communicate with the chief He presently made his appearance, but, owing to the sim- plicity of his dress, I for some time doubted whether he was the chief In order to remove my doubts, he took his seat in the middle of the hall, and his attendants arrayed him in his robes. And when I was persuaded he was the man, I opened my carpetrbag, spread before him the Gospels, the Acts, and the Tracts, and told him the object of my visit, whicn was to give him a complete knowledge of the doc- trines of Christianity. He seemed grateful for the books, and entertained me hospitably. The hour of breakfast was approaching, and they had morning prayer before breakfast. He and his attendants wore seated in this large hall, on cushioned chairs ; one individual read a portion of Scripture, and then they chanted some hymns, which the leader probably had composed. At the close of these hymns, I noticed that they chanted a literal translation of the Doxology. After this they all took their cushions, placed them on the pavement, kneel- ed on them, closing their eyes, and lifting up their faces towards heaven, while the secretary of the chief (I think it was,) read a prayer. At the close of this we proceeded to breakfast in the adjoining hall. As a guest it would have been etiquette to have commenced with my " chop sticks " first ; but I waited, thinking they would ask a blessing. This I told them, when they informed me it was their custom, but it had been included in the previous prayer. I explained to them that it was not exactly our course, and asked to be allowed to do so ; which they requested me to do, and I did it accordingly in Chinese." Mr. Taylor became fully acquainted with the military resources and ability of the insur- gent army, and entertains a strong conviction of their ultimate success. He says : " I ascertained that these people were sin- cere worshipers of the one true God ; that they had sworn the extermination of idolatry in every form ; that they were exceedingly friend- ly to foreigners, and expressed themselves de- sirous of becoming more instructed in Chris- tianity, only the difficulties at present were so great, that they thought I had better wait for some months. This movement has for its ob- ject the overthrow of the Tartar dynasty, and the establishment of the old Chinese Govern- ment. Therefore it is strictly a patriotic move- ment ; and we are in the habit, in China, rather of calling them ' patriots ' than ' insurgents.' " As Christians, we cannot but regard this re- markable movement with the deepest interest ; and in view of its developments hitherto, we are compelled to acknowledge that it is the finger of God. We hope and pray that China's r9- demption from the thraldom of sin and gataa is near at hand. The Lord will hasten hia work in his time. CoNCLUDiNo Remarks. — In view of the few conversions connected with the labors of Pro- testant missionaries inChina, it may seem as if little had yet been accomplished. But such would not be a fair conclusion, considering the short time that has elapsed since China was opened to Christian missions. With the ex- ception of that at Canton, no Protestant mis- sion was commenced in China previous to 1842. In such a field as China, where idola- try is very strongly fortified, and where cus- 29C CHINA. toms and opinions are sanctified and made venerable by antiquity, much preparatory ■work must be performed before any very per- ceptible results appear. Much preparatory work has been performed, and some fruit has already appeared. They have sown in tears, others shall reap in joy, and ultimately both sower and reaper shall rejoice together. It is no small thing that already several translations of the Scriptures have been made, generally intelligible and faithful : a work which the Catholics have not done after centuries of mis- sionary labor, and the professed conversion of hundreds of thousands of souls. The prepa- ration and wide circulation of a great number of valuable works, religious and scientific, is a work not to be despised, to say nothing of the helps to the acquisition of the Chinese which have been furnished. It is something that valuable missionary locations at the several posts have been secured, and numerous cha- pels built in these cities, in which the Gospel is statedly preached to many thousands of souls. It is impossible to calculate the influ- ence which has already gone out from these humble Christian sanctuaries. The name of Christ, the Christian Sabbath, and the essen- tial doctrines of the Gospel are already some- what extensively known, if not reverenced, where a few years since, no ray of Gospel light had penetrated. Many children have learned to lisp the name of Jesus ; and besides living native Christians, some pious Chinese are now, as we hope, wii;h Christ in heaven. We might point to the present revolution, as in its religious character the fruit of Protes- tant missionary labor, the ultimate influence of which, no finite mind can predict. But if not an individual soul had been converted nor any perceptible influence exerted upon the public mind by all the eflbrts of missionaries in China and its neighborhood, we should be under no less obligation to pray and labor and suffer for the salvation of its benighted and perishing millions. The command is to preach the Gospel to every creature, and the greater the obstacles to the accomplishment of this work, tlie greater should be our efforts till this dark land shall be illumined with its pre- cious light. Upon it a few saving drops of mercy have already fallen, which may be re- garded as an earnest of the rich and abun- dant spiritual blessings yet to be poured upon the land of Sinim. CHINESE EVANGELICAL SOCIETY : The principal object of this society is to send out Christian medical men to China. Eev. W. Lobscheid and wife have sailed during the past year ; and they are expected to labor at Sai- heong. Two young men are in training for the missionary work ; and the society has agreed to support three Chinese boys and a young Malay in the school of the Rev. J. G. Bausun, at Pinang, with a view to their becoming evan- gelists. Christians of different denominations unite in sustaining this missionary organiza- tion. It is located in London. CHINESE EVANGELIZATION SOCI- ETY : In addition to European agents, six colporteurs are employed in distributing the Scriptures and tracts ; and in many places they have been kindly received. The society has also assisted the Rev. I. J. Roberts to prose- cute his labors. Before the end of the year, the society hopes to be able to print the entire Scriptures in Chinese. (London.) CHINESE SOCIETY for FuHhering the Promulgation of the Gospel in China and the Adjacent Countries, hij means of Native Evan- gelists. — This society was formed recently at London, during the visit of Dr. Gutzlaff to England. Its object is to incite to prayer for China, to diffuse information in regard-to the evangelization of that great empire, and to aid those who enter that field. It is altogether " unsectarian." CHINTADREPETTAH : a station of the American Board, belonging to the Madras mission, in eastern Hindostan. CHINSURAH : A town in the province of Bengal, on the west side of the Hoogly river, eighteen miles north of Calcutta. Po- pulation about 30,000. It became a station of the London Missionary Society in 1813. CHITTAGONG : Capital of a district of the same name, at the southern extremity of Bengal, with the Burman empire on the east, and the sea on the west. It is 340 miles east of Calcutta, and is much resorted to by Eu- ropeans in Bengal, on account of the benefi- cial effects of the climate, seas, and salt-water bathing. Here the two idolatrous systems of Brahma and Budha come in contact, and the influence of caste is feeble. CHUMMORAH : A Karen village in Bri- tish Burmah, 60 miles from Maulmain, and an out-station of the Maulmain mission of the American Baptist Missionary Union. CHUNAR: In the north of Hindostan, near Benares, and a station of the Church of England Mission. CHUPRA: a station of Gosner's Missionary Society, in India, 30 miles W. N. W". of Patna, in the province of Bahar, on the north side of the Ganges. CHUNDICULLY: A station of the Church Missionary Society in the Jaffiia district, Cey- lon, being a suburb of the town of Jaffna. CHUMIE : Station of the United Scotch Presbyterian Church in Kaffraria, South Af- rica, one missionary. CHURCH OP ROME : The Roman Cath- olic Church, or that which recognises the pri- macy of the Bishop of Rome, at one time em- braced all, or nearly all, Christendom. Several of the eastern churches, at various times, adopt- ed ideas which were condemned as heretical or sChismatical, by the bishop of Rome, and those I who embraced them were cut of from the Eo I man communion. These formed the mass of CHURCH OF EOME. 297 those who followed the Greek, Armenian, Chal- daic, and Syrian rites. A portion, however, of each rite never broke off their connection with Eome, or soon returned to it, and are called by Catholic writers " United." In the West, the greatest secession, that of the Refor- mation, took place in the 15th century, and in several countries of northern Europe new sym- bols were introduced, and the belief and prac- tices of the Church of Rome proscribed by se- vere penalties ; under this state of things many, either voluntarily or involuntarily, embraced the doctrines of the various Reformed Churches. At present the Roman Catholic Church is considered as embracing thff Latin, Sclavonic, Greek, Armenian, Syro-Chaldaio, and Coptic rites, which differ only in the language and incidentals of their liturgy, and in some points of discipline : the greatest difference being the celibacy of the clergy and communion under one kind, which are almost exclusively confined to the followers of the Latin rite, never having obtained in the East. These various rites are jealously guarded as ancient forms, in many cases of apostolical origin, and persons are not without great diffi- culty allowed to pass from one to another or even communicate, although they may worship in churches of other rites. It accordingly hap- pens in some parts that there will be bishops of different rites in the same city, and in Lem- berg, in Austrian Poland, there are three, the Latin, United Greek, and United Armenian. The doctrines held by all these churches are the same, and their form of church government is identical. The superior clergy consists of priests, bishops, and archbishops, some few of the latter being styled Patriarchs. The inferior clergy, or those in minor orders, consist of the deacons, and some subordinate grades, which differ in number and name in the different rites, and have apparently differed at times in the same rite. In most churches these orders are merely used as steps to the priesthood, and are no longer real offices in practice. The Bishop of Rome, commonly called the Pope, is Patriarch of the Latins, and as suc- cessor of St. Peter, Primate or Supreme Pon- tiff of the various rites. In the government of the church, his immediate Council is the Col- lege of Cardinals, whose number is limited to seventy, and in whom resides the elective power on the demise of a Pope. The statistics of the Church of Eome are not easily estimated. The following will perhaps be not far from the truth : Latin JJife.— Western Europe and Colonies 164,000,000 Greek iiite.— United Greeks in Greece, Turkey, "l Busaia, and Poland Sclavonic Bite.— Illj'ria, Dalmatia, Poland 1 6,000,000 Armenian iJite.— United Armenians in Turkey, Poland, India, Persia J eyro-Chaldaic iJite.—Maronites, dialdees, Uni- ted Copts,&o 6,000,000 184,000,000 The Latin Catholics are by far the most numerous. In Italy, Austria, Bavaria, Bel- gium, Prance, Spain, and Portugal, as well as Spanish and Portuguese America, the Roman Catholic is the religion of the people, in some places established by law, and supported by the government, in others, as Spain, Prance, Sardinia, Austria, New Grenada, Hayti, more or less fettered by civil laws, which hamper the freedom of the clergy in the exercise of their functions. In the British Isles, Holland, the Protestant states in Germany, Switzerland, Norway, Swe- den, Denmark, and the Russian Dominions, members of the Church of Rome are subject to disabilities more or less severe, and the pre- sence of their clergy rather connived at than recognized by the state. In all, the church is regularly organized, and governed by bishops, sometimes titular, and thus forming a regular hierarchy, as in Ireland, England, Switzerland, and Germany, at others simply vicars apostolic missionary bishops, commonly called bishops in partibus infiddium, as the see of which they bear the title is now in some Mohammedan or heathen country. In the United States, mem- bers of the Romav Catholic Church are in some states deprived of certain rights, but the exercise of their religion is not fettered by any law. TABULAE VIEW OF THE U.TIN EITE. Country Arbps.Bps. Clergy. Population. Italy Spain Portugal Germany Prance Belgium Britisli Empire Holland Denmark Norway and Sweden Russia Greece Turkey Turkey in Asia India and Further India, Chinese Empire Other parts Africa (variouB parts) . Oceanica AMERICA. British Possessions . . . United States Mexico Guatiraala New Granada Venezuela Ecuador Peru Bolivia Chili Buenos Ayres Brazil Paraguay Spanish West Indies. , Total, , 44 'lie. 8 47 S 20 1.1 70 15 65 40,000 1 6 6 44 4,000 1 4 3 10 S 18 3 9 1 12 1 8 34 18 220 6 n 10 2 23 7 32 1,600 1 10 .2 6 1 1 .1 1 4 2 a 4 7 1 1 3 110 691 17,000,000 20,000,000 9,000,000 400,000 1,000,000 8,000,000 164,000,000 Support of the Clergy. — Prior to the Refor- mation, the Catholic clergy possessed large estates and received tithes in all parts of Eii. 298 CEUECH OF EOME. rope. In the reign of Edward VI. the Regents seized much of the church property in England, and in the reign of Elizabeth, the residue, with the tithes, was transferred to the now estab- lished church. Since then, the Catholic clergy in England and Ireland, as well as in Scot- land, depend on the voluntary contributions of their flocks. The same is the case in Holland, Protestant Germany, and the Scandinavian kingdoms, in the last of which the Catholic religion has been most carefully watched and crushed. In Prance the revolution of 1789 swept from the Catholic clergy all their property and tithes ; and, on the re-establishment of Chris- tianity by Napoleon, a regular pay was estab- lished for all clergy, whether Catholic, Pro- testant, or Jewish, which still subsists. In 1834 a similar step was taken in Spain, and all church property was seized by the State, which professes to give a salary to each cler- gyman. In Italy, Canada, and parts of Ger- many, the tithe system still prevails, but will, in all probability, soon be set aside, and other provision made. The clergy are commonly spoken of as secular or regular. By secular are meant those living in the world (sfficulo) , the parish priests, chaplains, &c. : by regulars, those who live according to a certain rule (regula), — that is, members of the various religious orders. These orders consist of men who bind themselves (religare) by the three vows of poverty, chas- tity and obedience, to the rules of the partic- ular institute which they enter. These vows are called vows of religion, themselves reli- gious, and their state of life religion. These associations have in view, first, the sanotifica- tion of the members by retirement, mortifica- tion and prayer ; secondly, the service of their neighbor, spiritually or corporally. The houses of religious are governed by superiors, some- times elected by the members, at others ap- pointed by the head of the order, who is gen- erally elected for life. The members of the orders are generally divided into choir religious, being priests or persons intended for the priesthood, and lay brothers, who never become priests. The reli- gious orders may be divided into the following classes, viz. : Monks li-ring in Monasteries governed by Abbots, Priors, &c. Friars living in Convents, governed by Provincials, Com- missaries, Wardens, &c. Regular Clerks living in Colleges, bouses, and governed by Provincials, Superiors, &c. Besides these orders, and analogous to them, are certain Congregations, the members of which are sometimes bound by vows, but which have never been recognized as religious orders by the head of the church. The num- ber and variety of these orders and congrega- tions is very great, and many no longer exist, having been created to meet exigencies that have passed. In the Greek Church, the Basil- ian Monks are almost the only order, as that of St. Nerses among the Armenians. In the Latin Church the most wide-spread and best known are : Monastic Oeders. — Purely Cordemplative. — Carthusian, Cistercian, including Trappists, Vallumbrosa. Contemplative Mixed. — Benedic- tine, Camaldulensian, devoted to education, literature, &c. Feiaes. — Franciscan or Greyfriars, (includ- ing Eecollects, Observantines, Capuchins, Con- ventuals) , Dominicans or Black Friars, Augns- tinians.or White Friars, Carmelites, Servites, Minims, all devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. Trinitarians, Mercedarians, devoted originally to the redemption of captives from the Turks. BiEQULAE Cleeks. — Society of Jesus, Bar- nabites, devoted to education, home and foreign missions, Eegular Clerks of the-Piou,s Schools, and the Ministers of the Sick. OoNGEEaATIONS. Lazarists or Priests of the Mission, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. Priests of the Foreign Missions, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. Oblates, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. Marists, or Society of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary, devoted to Negro Missions. Picpusians, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. Priests of the Holy Cross, devoted to Instruction. Sulpihans and Eudists, devoted to Theological Semi- naries. Redemptorists, Passionists, Order of Charity, Oratoriana, Pretrosissimi Sanguinis, devoted to Home Missions. Beotheehoods (not pkiests). Brothers of the Christian Schools, devoted to Instruction. Brothers of St. Joseph, devoted to Instruction. Brothers of the Society of Mary, devoted to Instruction. Brothers of St. John, of God, and of CamiUus, devoted to Hospitals. Besides these orders of men, which embracs many in priests' orders, there are religions or- ders and congregations of women, bound by the three vows of religion, and living under particular rules. There are Benedictine, Do- minican, Franciscan, and Carmelite nuns, all of whom are contemplative. Augustinian nuns, devoted to the sick as the Hospital nuns, or to education as the Ursulines, the Presenta- tion, Yisitation, and others, devoted to educa- tion. The Congregations are more extended, and the vows are generally made for a single year, or some definite period, after which the member is free to retire. Among them are The Ladies of the Sacred Heart, and the Sisters of the Congregation, devoted to education. Sisters of Charity, devoted to education, hospitals, asy lums, &c. Sisters of Mercy, devoted to education, the poor and sick. Sisters of the Good Shepherd, devoted to the care of Magdalen Asylums. The Little Sisters of the Poor, devoted to the care of the poor and infirm. The Sisters of Providence, (black), devoted to the educa- tion of colored girls. John G. Shea, Esq CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF. 299 CHUECH OP ROME, MISSIONS OP : The principlea on which the missions of the Church of Rome are founded, lie in her claim to apostolic succession, and an unbroken chain of title in her clergy to preach the G-ospel and administer the sacraments. The missionaries whom she sends out bear the liturgy of their church, its dogmas and practices, which have left their impression on the language and cus- toms of nations. Before the separation of the Eastern Churches from Rome, the Chaldeans had extended their labors to India and Tar- tary, and continued their missions long after embracing the doctrines of Nestorius. The Greeks evangelized much of Poland and Rus- sia ; and on the final rapture between the Greeks and Latins, the churches in those coun- tries generally adhered to the patriarch of Constantinople. The missions of the Latin church were far more varied and extensive. Under the Roman empire, all Italy, Spain, Prance, and Britain, were converted, and em- braced the Latin rite. When these countries were overrun by the barbarians, Rome again sent her missionaries gradually from country to country, the Celts in Ireland and Scotland, the Pranks in Prance, Goths in Spain and Italy, all embraced her forms. The Saxons in England were converted by Augustine and other Benedictine monks from Italy ; then Irish and English monks carried the faith to Germany, Scandinavia, and Iceland, founding churches, which, in their development, extended to Greenland and the coast of North America. By the twelfth century the mass was chanted in Latin from Narraganset Bay to the Baltic and Adriatic. This was chiefly the work of missionaries of the orders of St. Columbanus and St. Benedict. The Crusades and the es- tablishment of the orders of Priars gave a new impulse to the missions. Prancisoans and Dominicans carried the faith to India, Tartary, and China, in the 13th century, and throughout Asia planted their convents beside the Nestorian churches. Undeterred by the fanaticism of Islam, they entered the various Mohammedan countries in Asia and Africa, hoping to restore religion on a soil where it had once flourished ; and at the same time struggled successfully with Paganism, which still lingered near the shores of the Baltic. The last missions soon triumphed ; those in central Asia gradually sunk, as wars made it impossible to keep up communication with Europe. In Mohammedan countries the mis- sionaries have, down to the present time, labored almost in vain, no considerable number of the followers of the prophet having ever been at any one period won to the truth. The close of the fifteenth century opened to the view of Europe a new world, and a new and free path to India. Spain and Portugal began their career of conquest in both Indies ; missionary zeal was excited, and apostolic men from the various orders, and from the ranks of the secular clergy, hastened to attempt the con- version of the natives of the newly discovered regions. In the East, missions were founded in Hindostan, the East India Islands, Japan, China, Tonquin, Abyssinia ; in America, the half civilized natives of Peru and Mexico were converted, and their descendants now form the mass of the people, and the Church of Rome has enrolled two of Indian blood among her canonized saints. The nomadic tribes from Labrador to Cape Horn were visited ; many were completely gained, in other parts redac- tions were formed, and such as could be per- suaded to enter were instructed alike in the truths of Christianity and the usages of civil- ized life. Close on these discoveries came the religious feuds of the sixteenth century and the defection of nearly every prince in North- ern Europe from the Roman See. State churches were formed in many of the Ger- man States, the Scandinavian kingdoms, Hol- land, England, and Scotland, based on the doctrines of Luther and Calvin. To compel conformity to these, severe laws were passed, and all who adhered to the See of Rome sub- jected to heavy penalties. The Catholic clergy were outlawed, and every attempt made to prevent any educational establishments which might continue the Catholic feeling or a suc- cession of clergy. This led to a new species of mission : colleges were established in Catho- lic countries for the education of their fellow believers in the northern countries, and the training of such as wished to enter the priest- hood ; and from these seminaries, missionaries proceeded to their native country to minister to their brethren, and to gain back such as seemed to repent the late change. Many suffered the pe- nalty of death, but this, as usually happens, only raised up others to fill their places. From this period the Catholic missions are either Home missions for instructing the ignorant and neg- lected in Catholic countries, or those in which the exercise of religion is permitted: Missions in Protestant countries to supply clergy for the Catholic portion : Missions among schismatics to reunite them to Rome : Missions to Pagan nations. There are no missions intended to ope- rate directly on Protestants of any denomina- tion or Mohammedans, from the fact that any such attempt jeopardized the Catholic body in those countries where penal laws prevail. These missions became at last so important a part of the church government, that Gregory XV. (1621 — 23) instituted the Congregation De Propaganda Pide, which gave a new impulse to the zeal and fervor of missionaries and all interested in the missionary cause. This con- gregation or department consisted of thirteen cardinals, two priests, a religious, and a secre- tary ; and to it exclusively was committed the direction of missions and church matters in mission countries. Considerable sums were bestowed by public and private munificence on this department, and under Urban VIII. 300 CHURCH OP ROME, MISSIONS OF. the active reformer, a college, usually styled the Urban college, or the Propaganda, was erected and richly endowed. Here candidates for the priesthood and the missions, are re- ceiyed from all quarters of the globe, and a printing-press issues devotional works in a great number of languages. Besides this college, there soon rose the Ar- menian College at Venice, the Germanic, Eng- lish, Irish, and Scotph colleges at Rome, the English college at Eheims and Douay, the Irish and Scotch at Paris, the Irish college at Lou- vain and Valladolid, and some others, all in- tended to train the missionaries for their own countries ; and at a later date, the Chinese college at Naples was founded in the same view, and of late years, a missionary college has arisen at Drumcondra. Convents and re- ligious houses of various orders were also found- ed on the continent for natives of the British Isles, and from these also missionaries annually set out for the missions in the English domin- ions. Most of these latter have, however, since disappeared, swept away by the French revo- lution, or transferred to England or the United II. Missionary Societies. — There are, properly speaking, no missionary societies in the Catho- lic church similar to those among Protestants. Three societies, of quite recent origin, the Society for the Propagation of the Faith, center- ing at Lyons, the Leopoldine Society at Vienna, and the Society of the Holy Childhood in Prance, raise funds by a small weekly contribution, which the directors distribute to various mis- sions, as they think proper, but over the mis- sionaries and stations they exercise no control. The various missions are conducted entirely in- dependent of this aid, relying, in default of it, on other resources. The last named society is made up of children, and has a special object, the raising of money to save and baptize chil- dren exposed to death by their unnatural parents in China and Annam. Besides the aid thus given, some missions have funds es- tablished before the present century, and for- merly French, Spanish, and Portuguese mis- sionaries received a regular stipend from the government. The great mass of the missions at present are individual efforts, supported by the zeal and sacrifices of the bishops and clergy employad on them. lU. Receipts. — The amount raised in 1852 by Society for the Propagation of the Faith, . . . $950,000 Society of the Holy Childhood . 117,000 $1,067,000 MISSIONARY STATIONS. BuEOPE. — 1. Among the Protestant States of Europe, the only countries where the Catho- lic church is still a mere mission, are Denmark, Norway, and Sweden. Here the number of Catholics is very small, and no details are published, as many severe civil penalties are still enforced against members, and especially converts of the Roman church. The whole number does not probably exceed 150,000. 2. Turkey. — The United Armenians have an archbishop at Constantinople ; the Latins several bishops and vicars apostolic ; the dis- tinct missions are those of the Franciscans in Moldavia, Jesuits in Herzegovine, and Lazarists at Constantinople and Salouica, the latter aided in their labors by the Sisters of Charity. The whole number of Latin Christians is esti- mated at 613,000, and is constantly on the in- crease. 3. Greece. — In this kingdom there are con- stant accessions to the Latin and United Greek Churches, especially at Athens, Piraeus, Patras, Nauplia, Navarino, and Heraclia. There are, in this kingdom, and the Ionian republic flourishing missions of the Capuchins and Jesuits. Asia — 1. Turkey in Asia. — The Francis- cans have had missions in the Holy Land since the Crusades, which, more or less active at times, are now pushed with energy. The Je- suits have since their origin had missions among the eastern Christians, won many back to Rome, established schools, and raised the standard of clerical instruction. At Antioch, there are Maronite, United Greek, and Sy- rian patriarchs, and elsewhere an Armenian and a Chaldean patriarch, all in communion with Rome ; and the number of Christians who acknowledge the supremacy of Pins IX., is about a million. _ 2. Persia. — In this country there is a mis- sion directed by the Lazarists, and protected by France, as well as a United Armenian church well established and tolerated. 3. India. — The Hindoo mission dates back to the conquest of Goa, by the Portuguese, in 1510, and was at first conducted by the Fran- ciscans, Dominicans, and zealous secular priests. Its progress was, however, slow, till the arri- val of St. Francis Xavier, in 1542. By his labors, and those of other Fathers of the So- ciety of Jesus, numbers were converted on the Fishery coast, the Islands of Manar and Cey- lon, and Travancore, while the former mis- sionaries renewed their efforts in other parts, and gained to Rome all the Chaldaic Chris- tians who had fallen into Nestorianism. The Jesuit mission is, however, the most celebra- ted, and after Xavier, owed its chief progress to Robert de Nobili nephew to Pope Marcel- lus II., who originated the plan of having mis- sionaries for each caste, adopting the life of each. He himself became a Brahmin-samassi. The Blessed John de Brito, converted the Mara- vas,_Aquaviva, at Delhi, won Akbar to the Christian religion, and Goes traversed Thibet and Tartary to Peking. These missions were affected by the overthrow of the Portu- guese and French power in India, by the per- CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF. 301 secution oftlie Danes, by the disputes as to the Malabar rites, by the suppression of the Jesu- its, and by the troubles of the French revo- lution. A large number of converts had, however, been made, and their descendants re- mained faithful. During the Dutch rule in Ceylon, Catholicity was maintained there by the labors of the Portuguese Oratorians. All Hindostan is now divided into Vicariates apostolic, for European and native Christians ; the most extensive Hindoo missions being those of Madura, conducted by the Jesuits ; of My- sore, conducted by the priests of the Foreign Missions ; and of Ceylon, by the priests of the Oratory ; all of which are rapidly gaining the ground lost in darker days. Hindostan contains 15 vicariates, 16 bishops, a large number of priests, including 500 native clergymen, and nearly four million of Latin and Chaldee Christians. Ceylon contains 2 vicar- iates, 3 bishops, 150,000 Catholics. 4. Farther India. — The Tonquin mission was founded by the Jesuit Alexander Rhodes, who labored in that field from about 1624 to 1648, and gathered a church of 30,000 Christians. Driven at last from the country, he originated at Paris the Seminary of the Foreign Missions, founded in 1663, and induced the Holy See to appoint bishops to Tonquin. Since then, the priests of the Foreign Missions have had the chief direction of the mission in Annam and the neighboring province of Su Tohuen, in China. The Jesuits also continued their mission, and by the labors of both, many native clergy were formed. The Cochin China mission was foun- ded about the same time by F. Kossi, and pass- ed also to the Foreign Missions. Both churches have undergone terrible persecutions, even of late years, under the Emperor Minh-Menh, but have steadily increased. Tonquin con- tains six vicariates apostolic, governed by 12 bishops. One of these vicariates (Retord's,) in 1847, contained 10 European, 91 native priests, 200 catechists, and about 200,000 Christians. Another (Gauthier's), 2 bishops, 3 European, 43 native priests, 60 catechists, 70,000 Chris- tians. Cochin China contains 3 vicariates apostolic, all directed by clergy of the Semin- ary of the Foreign Missions and native priests. Siam, Laos, and Cambodia. — These missions are also directed by the priests of the Foreign Missions and native clergymen. They have been subjected to repeated persecutions, but are now at peace. Ava, Pegu, and Malacca are vicariates, with two bishops and about 10,000 Catholics. 5. China. — The Chinese mission was attempt ed in the thirteenth century, by John de Monte- corvino, who founded a metropolitan See at Peking, which subsisted for over a century. Xavier attempted to restore it in 1552, but died near Canton. After several other at- tempts, the Jesuits Ruggieri and Pazio, founded a mission, which, under the great Matthew Ricci (1584^1610), obtained a per- manent footing in the empire. The early Je- suits adopted the dress of literati, and thus se- cured the esteem of the Emperors, and would probably have gained them to Christ, but for the Tartar invasion. After that change, per- secutions began, and as differences arose be- tween the Jesuits on the one side, and the Dominicans in Fokien, and the priests of For- eign Missions in Suchuen on the other, as to the use of certain ceremonies, these dissensions formed a pretext for very severe edicts. For many years the blood of the Chinese Chris- tians and their missionaries flowed in torrents. At present the church enjoys peace, although the insurgents are decidedly hostile to the Chi- nese Catholics, and treat them with great se- verity. Among the celebrated Chinese missionaries, may be named Ricci, Schall, and Verbiest, mathematicians ; Marin, an American, who at- tempted a mission in 1556 ; Lopez, a native Chinese priest and bishop ; Denis de la Cruz, another Chinese, who died at Carthagena, in South America ; Navarrette, Amiot, Sanz, Perboyre, a recent martyr. The suppression of the Jesuits, and the French revolution, se- riously affected these missions, by cutting off a supply of learned and adventurous missions^ ries. Since the restoration of peace in Europe, and especially since the establishment of the Society for the Propagation of the Faith, the mission has recovered much of its former extent. At the present time, China contains 15 sees or vicariates, 16 bishops, 84 European priests, 135 native priests, many convents and houses of religious women, and a population of 400,000 Catholics. The great mass of the old Jesuit missions are directed by the French Lazarists ; the missions in Suchuen, Yunnan, Quaychoo, and Leaotong, by the priests of the Foreign Missions ; those in Chansi, Chensi, and Houquang, by Italian Franciscans ; those in Fokien, by Spanish Dominicans ; and those in Chantong and Kiangnan, by French Je- suits, who have recently returned. 6. Corea. — Christianity was introduced here from China about 1632, and has since grown amid persecution of the severest kind. The history of the Corean Church is written in blood. Her first neophyte was a martyr ; her first Chinese apostle, a martyr ; her first native priest, a martyr ; her first European mission- aries, all martyrs. The number of Catholics is about 12,000, directed by a bishop, two Eu- ropean priests, if still alive, and some native clergy. This mission is entrusted to the Se- minary of the Foreign Missions. 7. Mongol Tartary.—TUs is a Lazarist mis- sion, directed by a bishop, 3 European, 10 native priests, a college seminary, 8 schools, and 5,000 Christians. 8. Manchuria.— A mission under the priests of the Foreign Missions, with a bishop and some European clergymen. 9. Thibet. — Missions wore attempted here in 30-2 CHURCH OF RO-ME, MISSIONS OF. tie 13th and 14th centuries, by St. Hyacinth, of Poland, and Oderic of Fruili ; in the 17th century, by the Jesuits and Capnchins ; but in the interval Budhism had grown up and ex- pelled all but the traces of Christianity. The mission was restored in 1846, by the Lazarists, Hue and (xabet. Others have followed, and a bishop has lately been appointed. Ea-?t India Islands. — Missions exist on some of these of ancient date, but the data are not very full or recent. 10. Japan. — Christianity was introduced into this empire in 1.549, by St. Francis Xavier, who had converted a Japanese at Goa. During a stay of two years he visited several king- doms, and founded missions which he confided to zealous priests of his order. The faith spread rapidly. In 1562, the Prince of Omura and soon after the Kings of Bungo and Arima, embraced Christianity, and sent a splendid embassy to Pope Gregory XHI. Soon after Taycosoma, a powerful general, usurped the throne, and in 1586 issued a law against Christianity, which his predecessor, Nabunanga, had greatly favored. The num- ber of Christians increased with the persecu- tion, and in 1638, they rose in arms, in Arima, but were crushed by Dutch aid. Since then the faith has been almost entirely extinguished. The number of Christians put to death has been estimated at nearly two millions, and the annals of the Jesuits, Franciscans, and Domi- nicans are filled with narratives of the deaths of members of their orders, in Japan. Be- sides Xavier, the greatest missionaries were "Valignani, Father John Baptist, a Spanish Franciscan, Philip of Jesus, a Mexican Fran- ciscan, both crucified at Nangasaeki, Father Charles Spinola, &c. The last Catholic priest who entered Japan was M. Sedotti, who, in 1709, found means to land, but he was never again heard of Within a few years great efforts have been made to reach the forsaken Christians, still said to exist in Japan ; and a bishop appointed to the mis- sion has already founded stations on the Lew- Chew islands. Africa. — 1. Congo. — The earliest missions were those of Congo, begun by the Dominicans, Franciscans, and Jesuits. Prom 1500 to about 1560 the success was great ; the king and many of his people were converted, native priests or- dained, and one raised to the episcopacy. Ca- tholicity flourished here for many years, but insensibly declined for want of priests. The Carmelites established missions in Guinea, the Jesuits in Angola and Loango ; and on thesf chiefly the Catholics of Congo depended, as late as 1622. In 1645, the Capuchins under- took the mission, headed by Fray Francisco de Pampeluna, onoe a military officer of high, rank. This body and their successors con- tinued the mission till about 1700, when Cis tercians took their place. About the middle of the last century, the priests of the Foreign Missions established stations in Loango, and converted many. These missions still exist in several parts. 2. Barbary. — Missions have from the earliest times been conducted here by Franciscans, Dominicans, Trinitarians, and Mercedarians, still later by the Jesuits and Lazarists. The number of Christians is, however, very small, and the clergy do not number a score. 3. Egypt. — The Latin mission here is due chiefly to the Jesuits, of whom Father Sicard was the leader. Many Copts were recalled to the Latin Church, and are now directed by La- zarist missionaries, aided by Brothers of the Christian School. 4. Abyssinia. — The Portuguese, about 1530, attempted to convert the schismatics of Abys- sinia, and revive morality and learning ; but the efforts and the zeal of the Jesuits failed ; the missionaries were excluded, after a long perse- cution. In 1839, the mission was revived by the Lazarists, and a bishop appointed, while the Galla country was allotted to the Capuchins, in 1846. (See Abyssinia.) 5. Madagascar: — The first missions among the Malagasies, was begun by the Lazarists, in 1648, and continued till 1674, when Louis XIV. forbid French vessels to stop at the is- land. The mission was revived in 1837, by Mr. Dalmond, who founded the station of Nossibe, in 1840. Since 1845, this mission has been confided to the Jesuits, who have made rapid progress. 6. Other parts. — Missions have been founded at dilferent spots on the eastern and western coast, which have been discontinued, or are not yet firmly established. That of Guinea, is the most thriving. A bishop was at first selected for it from among the Catholic clergy in the United States ; but on the failure of his health, the mission was transferred to the Society of the Sacred Heart of Jesus and Mary, who still administer it. OcBANiOA. — The first Catholic mission in Oceaniea was that of Messrs. Bachelot, Ar- mand, and Short, of the " Congregation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary," at the Sandwich Islands. They began it in 1826, and continued it till their expulsion by the government in 1832. In the following year Vicars apostolic were appointed, and missions begun at Gambler, Tahiti, and for a second time at the Sandwich Islands. These missions are chiefly directed by priests of the society of Picpry and the IMarists. Other stiitions were begun in New Zealand, at Futuna, in the Marquesas, Nukahwa, and elsewhere. These missions extended so rapidly that several new vicariates were formed, and in spite of martyr- dom, disease and shipwreck, they are still ad- vancing. Oceaniea now contains 8 bishops, 10 vicariates, and 300 missionaries. America. 1. Spanish Missions. — Missions were established in all Spanish America, and great numbers were converted, espe- CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 303 cially in Mexico and Peru, where their de- scendants are still, the majority mingled with the Spanish race. Even in Cuba the Spanish blood is much mixed with Indian blood. The missions among the wild tribes were of a different character. The most celebrated are those of the Jesuits in Paraguay and Cal- ifornia, the missions among- the Moxos, Abi- pones, in Chili and New Grenada. Pew of these are now properly missions, and are mat- ter for a history rather than a gazetteer. 2. Portiigitese Missions. — The missions of Brazil were chiefly conducted by Portuguese Jesuits, who converted several tribes, although their numbers were diminished by the cruelty of the savages on land and pirates at sea. Se- veral of these missions still subsist, but details are not easily accessible as to their numbers and extent. 3. United States and Canada. — The early Catholic Missions in New Mexico, Florida, and California, were Spanish. The natives of New Mexico were converted, and being now Christians, are not considered a mission. In Florida, while a Spanish province, the Indians were converted by Franciscans, and formed villages on the Apalachicola and around the city of St. Augustine. The English drove these Indians from their villages, and their descendants, now called Seminoles or wander- ers, have lost all traces of Christianity. The Upper California missions were conducted by Franciscans, and till a recent period were in a very flourishing state, but are now destroyed. The Canada missions were be- gun by French Jesuits, in Nova Scotia and Maine, about 1612. The Recollects followed, succeeded again by the Jesuits. This mission converted the Abeuaquis of Maine, now form- ing two villages in the state of Maine and two in Canada; the Hurons of Upper Canada, a part of whom are Catholics, still at Lorette, near Quebec ; a part of the Iroquois or Five nations, who form the three Catholic villages at Caughnawaga, St. Eegis and the Lake of the two Mountains ; the Algonquins, who form a mission village, with the last-named band of Iroquois ; the Micmacs of Nova Scotia, now at^ tended by the secular clergy; the Montagnais, at Chicoutimi and Red River, under a bishop and missionaries ; the Ottawas of Lake Superior, who with the Ojibwas and Menomonees are now under the care of Canadian clergy on the north, and on the south, of Bishop Baraga, a philologist, whose talents have been ac- knowledged by government ; the HJinois and Miamis, whose descendants are now on Indian Territory and in Louisiana ; the Arkansas, whose descendants, under the name of Kappas, are also there. The Catholics of Maryland began missions among the neighboring tribes, but tribe and mission have 'ong since disappeared. Since the revolutioc md the establishment of a Ca- tholic hierarchy in the United States, atten- tion has been gradually turned to the Indian missions ; two vicariates are devoted to them alone. That of Upper Michigan contains one bishop, five priests, five schools, and a large number of Catholic Ottawas and Ojibwas ; that of Indian territory with a bishop, eight clergymen, four schools, 5,300 Catholics of the Pottawotamies, Osages, Miamis, Illinois, Kan- sas, and Kappas. Besides these, there are in the diocese of Milwaukee a Menomonee and an Ojibwa mission ; in that of St. Paul's, Min- nesota, a Sioux, a Winnebago, and three Ojibwa missions ; and in Oregon there are missions among the Waskos, Cayusus, Pointed Hearts and Flatheads, — the Indian Catholics of the territory numbering 3,400. Besides these, a few hundred converted Indians are to be found in California. Among the celebrated missionaries in Ameri- ca may be named Anchieta, Bareze, Las Casas, Bertrand, Solano, Gaud, Motolinia, Brebeuf, Druilletes, Chaumonot, Jogues, and in later times Marcoux, De Smet, Point, Belcour. This is an outline of the widely-extended and much diversified Catholic missions. As to their history, the recent work of Henrion, " Histoire Generate des Missions Catholiques," and the Annals of the Society for the Propaga- tion of the Faith will give a general idea ; but the sources are the accounts of the various re- ligious bodies engaged on the several missions, voluminous works which would alone form a library. — John G. Shj;a, Esq. CHURCH HILL : A station of the Church Missionary Society, on the Island of Jamaica, W. I. CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY : This Society was formed in the year 1800. The Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, and that for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, had long existed, and received the benefactions from the Church of England. But as they both confined themselves chiefly to foreign parts, where Christianity was already embraced, there was, in the view of the friends of Foreign Missions, still room left for a Soci- ety which should consider the heathen as its principal care. This Society was organized on the principle of making a specified contribution the condi- tion of membership. Seven governors and a treasurer are elected by the members ; also a general committee, consisting of these officers and twenty-five other members, for the general direction of its affairs. The constitution and practice of this Society are regarded by its members and managers as in strict conformity with ecclesiastical princi- ples, as they are recognized in the constitution and practice of the Church of England. It exercises no spiritual or ecclesiastical fanc- tions ; but is an " institution for ' discharg- ing the temporal and lay offices necessary 304: CHUECH MISSIONARY SOCIETY. for the preaching of the G-ospel among the heathen. The Society was originally designed to ope- rate in Africa and the East, and this is in- corporated in its name, " The Church Mission- ary Society for Africa and the East." But it has extended its operations beyond these bounds. It now has missions in Africa, India, the Mediterranean, theWest Indies, Australasia, and North-west America. The missions of this Society, particularly in Africa, India, and New Zealand, have been among the most successful of Protestant missions. Its missionaries have generally been devoted men of God ; and the Holy Spirit has been poured out in a wonder- ful manner upon several of its missions, pro- ducing the most surprising changes in a brief period of time. The state of the mis- sions of this Society in the year 1852 will ap- pear from the following TABULAE VIEW. 3 i Clergymen. Lay teachers and others. 3 t3 1 V 1 to 4 European. Country- Native. MISSIONS. a i a 1 o a 1 a .2 a 1 3 ft -<1 a '3 1 i 3 i "3 < a 1 1 S a 6 6 1 1 a West Africa.. 181S 16 13 1 3 68 7 261 2743 49 1061 SCO 1034 2514 5409 Yoruba 184!) •-; 4 1 1 13 6S 203 9 26 12 463 22 512 Mediterranean 18^8 4 6 2 1 4 fi East Africa.. 1846 1 '2 i AVestern India IS'^ll 6 8 ') 1 1 66 11 55 ai 1621 North India . . 1816 T^ 30 b 6 1 i 248 28 94 1087 116 6716 678 664 6858 Soath India.. J.8L6 W 23 1 2 11 4 6 6 2 644 93 794 4180 364 67.=;4 3093 9827 Ceylon 1817 e 10 3 1 124 26 21 371 101 2S20 779 in 3710 Ciiina 1846 3 e 6 2 36 35 New Zealand 1814 •n 21 6 86S 30 661 6749 West Indies.. 1S31 2 3 3 ■i 430 N. W. Amer. 18-.!2 7 6 1 4 1 1 8 38 454 28 295 275 76 92 738 ToTAia 109 131 7 2 21 26 16 13 S 1428 189 1834 16 306 684 25,710 This table is condensed from the Eeport of 1 852. The following summary, from the Eeport of 1854, shows considerable progress in several particulars : Stations 118 European missionaries 152 East Indian and native missionaries 24 European lay assistants . 30 European female teachers 14 Country-born teachers . 14 Native teachers . 1681 Communicants - . . . 17,224 Baptisms during the year, adults and children ..... 5444 Estimated attendants on public wor- ship 107,000 Ditto scholars under instruction . 40,000 Income. — The following table shows the re- ceipts of the Society, from its commencement, in periods of four years, with the average an- nual receipts of each period ; from which it appears that the average annual receipts have been regularly and steadily advancing, with occasional slight depressions, from £321 to £123,000, which may be regarded as a fair index of the missionary spirit in the Church of England. And, it is to be especially no- ticed here, as in other societies, that, beyond a certain point, they begin to receive back a revenue from the churches they have planted, In 1853, the Church Missionary Society re ceived from its missions £10,783, being aboi one-tenth of its whole income. Years. Amount. Average. 1799 to 1802, £1,284 £321 1803 " 1806, 7,096 1,774 1807 " 1810, 11,699 2,924 1811 " 1814, 18,666 4,664 1815 " 1818, 78,074 19,518 1819 " 1822, 121,753 80,488 1823 " 1826, 152,608 38,162 1827 " 1830, 188,467 47,114 1831 " 1834, 187,576 46,893 1835, 68,432 68,432 1836 " 1839, 382,424 83,106 1840 " 1843, 431,018 107,754 1844 " 1847, 430,628 107,456 1848 " 1861, 411,970 102,992 }13 118,674 118,674 ]l?.' 120,932 120,932 1854, 123,915 128,915 Total £2,805,205 CISTEECIAN : A reformed Benedictine monk. CLAEKSON: Station of the United Brethren, on the Zitzekamma rivers, in South Africa, among the Eingoes. CLEAE-WATEE— CONSTANTINOPLB. aod CLEAR-WATEE : Once a station of tlie Methodist Episcopal Church in Oregon. CLOUDY-BAY : A station of the Wes- leyan Missionary Society in New Zealand, on the north-eastern side of the middle island. CLOISTER : A monastery or nunnery ; a house where monks or nuns reside. CO CHIN : The chief city of a principality of the same name, extending along the western coast of Southern India, between Malabar and Travancore, and under the nominal govern- ment of a native rajah. A station of the Church of Scotland Mission to the Jews. COIMBATOOR: The capital of a dis- trict of the same name, in the Madras presi- dency. South India, 270 miles south-west of Madras. The London Missionary Society commenced operations here in 1830. COLOMBO : A seaport town of Ceylon, the modern capital of the island and seat of government, situated on the west coast. The fort contains the residences of the governor and most of the British inhabitants. The pettah, or inner town, has a mixed population of Dutch, Portuguese, and their descendants. The native Geylonese reside chiefly in the sub- urbs. The town within the walls is regularly laid out, and built very much in the European style. Colombo is situated in the centre of the cinnamon country, and is the depot for nearly all the foreign trade of the island, and has a somewhat extensive trade by means of internal navigation. Its climate is healthy, though destructive of books, clothing, &c. This is the residence of the Bishop of the Church of England for the Bishopric of Cey- lon, and the missionaries of the Church Mis- sionary Society and of the Society for the Pro- pagation of the Gospel, are under his jurisdic- tion. The Baptists and Wesleyans have each their missionary stations at Colombo. COLESBEBG : Station of the London and Wesleyan Missionary Societies, in South Afri- ca, in the district of Oolesberg, near the Orar dock river. COMBACONUM : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society, on the eastern coast of southern Hindostan, 25 miles from Tanjore. It was formerly the capital of the Cholas, one of the most ancient Hindoo dynasties in the south of India of which any traces have been discovered, and who gave their name to the whole coast of Cholamundul, or Coromandel. The population is about 40,000. CONSTANTINOPLE: The first and largest station of the American Board among the Armenians and Jews of Turkey, and where the Free Church of Scotland and London Jews' Society have missions to the Jews. Lat. 41° N., long. 29° E. This magnificent city, the capital of the Turkish empire, has a population according to the best estimates, of about 500,- 000 in the city proper, and of about as much more in the suburbs on the north side of the harbor, and on the Bosphorus. Taking the 20 whole together, it may be divided as follows : Turks and other Mohammedans, 500,000 ; Greeks, (including all of the Greek church) 200,000 ; Armenians, 160,000 ; Jews, 80,000 ; Franks (foreigners not subject to the Porte, and who wear the hat instead of other head- dresses,) 40,000 ; and 20,000 not included under the other heads. (See Armenians and Oriental Christians.) COPTS : A name given to the descendants of the ancient Egyptians, who profess the Christian faith according to the sect of the Jacobites or Eutychians, called Monophysites, from their distinguishing tenet. They differ in many points of doctrine and practice from the Greeks and Latins ; but the principal ground of their separation from other Chris- tians lies in their belief in relation to the nar ture of Christ. They maintain that the divine and human natures so coalesce as to become one, and therefore they reject the council of Chalcedon and the epistle of Leo the Great. Their government is episcopal ; and they have a patriarch or metropolitan, at Alexandria, who is head of the whole church, and is said to have 140 bishoprics in Egypt, Syria, Nubia, and other countries, besides the Abuna of Abyssinia, who is also nominated and consecratr ed by him. Eutychius, Patriarch of Alexandria, was the first who maintained the Monophysite doctrine, for which he was excommunicated, and died in exile. But his party, with Dioscorus at their head, shortly after, called a council at Ephesus, in opposition to that of Chalcedon, which had condemned Eutychius, and in their turn excom- municated the Pope and all the bishops who adhered to him. This is the origin of the breach between the Latin and Alexandrian churches, which all the efforts of Home, for centuries, have failed to heal. Dioscorus was, however, anathematized and banished ; but hie successor, who was nominated by the court at Constantinople, was assassinated by the Mono- physites. After this, there were two patri- archs ; and the Greek party being favored by the government, obtained the ascendancy. But on the invasion by the Turks, the Mono- physites joined the invaders, and thus obtained the confirmation of all their privileges, and ascendancy over their rivals. They practice both circumcision and baptism. Confession is observed, but instead of being private and particular, it is public and general. They arc strict in their fasts, and loose in their morals. Divorce is allowed on easy terms. The Patriarch of Alexandria is chosen by the bishops of the Coptic church. He is obliged to preach once a year to his clergy, while their province is, on set days, to read homilies and legends to the laity. The priests and inferior ministei-s are allowed to marry before ordination. None but the lowest classes become ecclesiastics, who are excessively igno- rant, yet held in reverence by the people. Mo S06 COPAY— DELAWARE. nastic life is held in high esteem, those who devote themselves to it living in great auster- ity, in deserts, sleeping in their clothes on the ground, and every evening prostrating them- selves 150 times with their face and breast on the ground. But they are all of the lowest class of people, and live on alms. The present condition of the Copts may be learned from the following extract of a letter written in 1840, to the Christian Knowledge Society, by Kev. H. Tattam : " I have just returned from visiting the Coptic Christians in every part of Egypt ; and during my stay in the country, I entered most of their convents. They are in a very low state, as regards pure Christianity, hav- ing only its name and form, without the influ- ence of Christian principle upon the heart and life. The Christian religion is now fully toler- ated, and all its professors, of every denomina- tion, receive protection, and enjoy equal privi- leges with the Mohammedans. Although learn- ing is at a low ebb among the Copts, yet they recognize the right of the people to possess the Scriptures. They are accessible, and will read any publications presented them by English Christians. They have a poor translation of the Old Testament, in Arabic manuscript, and a better one of the New." — Edinburgh Ency- clopedia; MosJieim; Buck; Missionary Guide Book. For missions see Egypt and Abyssinia. COPAY : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society, five miles from the town of Jaffna, Ceylon. coins GO : A small island on the western coast of Africa, 55 miles north of the equator, and 15 to 20 miles from the mainland, in the Bay of Corisco, having a population of about 4,000. The Presbyterian Board have a station here. CORFU : One of the Ionian islands, and capital of the Ionian Eepublic, for some time the principal residence of the American Bap- tist missionaries in Greece, and still the seat of the only school in their mission. COTTAYAM : A station of the Church Missionary Society in Southern India. COTTA . A populous district in Ceylon, within a few miles of Colombo, a principal station of the Church Missionary Society. Its situation is peculiarly beautiful, being on the verge of vast gardens of cinnamon, and sur- rounded with natural forests, interspersed with gardens of spices, and groves of cocoanut and ,palm. CEADOCE : Station of the London and "Wesleyafl Missionary Societies in South Af- rica, in the district of Cradock, north-east of Graaf-Eeinet. CEUDA : A village in Arracan, and an out- gtation of the Arracan Mission of the Ame- rican Baptist Missionary Union. CUDDALOEE : A maritime town in the Carnatic, India, extensive and populous. One of the early stations of the Christian Knowledge Society, and now a station of the Gospel Pro- pagation Society. CUDDAPAH : A station of the London Missionary Society, directly west of Nellore, and some 50 miles north-west of Madras. The province of Cuddapah is about 170 by 120 miles in extent, and contains a population of over a million. CUMBEELAND PEESBYTEEIAN CHUECH, Board of Missions : The General Assembly of the Cumberland Presbyterian Church have a Board of Foreign and Domestic Missions, which resolved at its annual meeting in 1853, to establish two foreign missions in the course of the year. Previous to that, for several years they had cultivated the spirit of domestic missions, by calling on the churches to aid in establishing new churches and sus- taining preachers at Philadelphia, Cincinnati, Louisville, St. Louis, and Alton ; and also in Keokuk, la. Several brethren were sent out to Oregon, California, and Texas. The Board of Missions, have employed special agents to travel through the churches, and take up collections, besides using their numerous papers and the pulpit, to wake a deep and lasting missionary spirit throughout the 100,000 mem- bers now composing their church. They have a great amount of wealth among their people, and with their new Theological Seminary, and more than half a dozen colleges, containing a large number looking forward to the ministry, what may we not expect when the fact is known, that the destitute thousands of a new country, just reclaimed from the savages, called their body into existence? — Eev. S. AVells. CUTTACK: A town in Eastern Hindostan, on the coast of the Bay of Bengal, 250 miles S. W. from Calcutta, and 770 miles north-east from Madras. The population of the town is supposed to be about 40,000. There are 7000 houses, built mostly of mud walls, thatched with a long coarse grass. A few are built of stone and brick. The town contains a number of idol temples, but none of them much celebrated. The English General Bap- tists established a mission at Cuttack m 1822. DACCA : A large town in Bengal, 190 miles N.E. from Calcutta. Population about 300,000. Occupied by the English Baptists in 1816. DAMARA COUNTRY : The country of the Damara, Namaqualand, South Africa, oc- cupied by the Wesleyans. DANISH AKRA: See .^fo-a. DARJEELING : A station of Gossner's Missionary Society in Hindostan. DARLISTON : A station of the Gospel Propagation Society in Jamaica, W. I. DAVYTON : A station of the London Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. DEDGAUM : A station of the Am. Board in Hindostan, belonging to the Ahmednuggur Mission. DELAWARE : The chief town of the De- laware tribe, in the Indian territory, and the DELHI— EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 807 seat of the Delaware niission of the American Baptist Missionary Union. DELHI : A celebrated city in the presi- dency of Bengal, capital of a province of the same name, and the ancient metropolis of the Palan and Mogul empires. It is sit> uated on the Jumna, 830 miles N. W. of Cal- cutta—traveling distance, 960. Population about 200,000. In its period of splendor, Delhi was a city of vast extent, as is evinced by its ruins, which are supposed to cover nearly as large a surface as London, West- minster, and Southwark. The present city is about seven miles in circuit, and, although it bears no comparison with the ancient city, which is said to have contained two millions of inhabitants ; yet there are few, if any, of the ancient cities of Hindostan, which, at the pre- sent time, will be found to rival modern Delhi in the wealth of its bazars, or in the activity and enterprize of its population. The ruins of old Delhi cover the plains for an extent of nearly eight miles to the south of the modern city, and connect it with the village of Cuttuh, ex- hibiting, throughout this vast tract, one of the most striking scenes of desolation to be met with in the whole world. It has not been the scene of much important missionary labor, ex- cept by the English Baptists, who commenced their operations here in 1818. DEMARARA : See West Indes. ^ DHARWAR .A fortified town in the pro- vince of Bejapoor, India, and capital of a dis- trict of the same name. Population of the district, 600,000. A station of the German Missionary Society. DIEP RIVER : A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society in Little Namaqualand, South Africa. DINDIGUL : A station of the American Board in Southern Hindostan, connected with the Madura Mission. DIXAJPOOR : Capital of a district of the same name in India, about 260 miles north of Calcutta. Population, 20,000. A station of the Baptist Missionary Society. DOIIN AVOOR : A station of the Church Missionary Society, in the Tinnevelly district, Hindostan. DOMINICA : See West Indies. DONG-TAHN : A Karen village, ,S3 miles from Maulmain, in Burmah, and an out-sta^ tion of the Maulmain Mission of the American Baptist Missionary Union. DRY HARBOR : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society in Jamaica, W I. DRY RIVER : A station of the Wesley- ans in Trinidad, W. I. DUKE T0W2Sf : Station of the United Presbyterian Synod of Scotland, about 50 ihiles from the mouth of the Old Calabar river, in West Africa. DURBAN : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- sionary Society among the Fingoes, in Kaf- fraria, S. A. Also, a station of the same So- ciety in the Natal district, same as Port Natal. DAVIGHT : A station of the American Board among the Cherokee Indians. DY^SALSDORP : Station of the London Missionary Society in South Africa, 45 miles north of Pocaltsdorp, commenced in 1838. This station presents a very extensive field for missionary operations. In the neighborhood, there is a tract of country, the Congo, very densely populated. EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS: Christianity is essentially missionary. Its Great Author announced it to the world as the only true religion ; and it has ever been aggressive in its character. The missionary enterprize is but Christianity in action, carry- ing out the design of its Founder, to subdue the whole world to himself This was the spirit that animated the apostles after the wonderful impulse which they received on the d.ay of Pentecost, as they went everywhere, in obedience to Christ's last command, to preach the Gospel to every creature. Paul, wlio re- ceived his commission directly from Christ, after His ascension, was the first foreign mis- sionary, having been appointed as the apostle to the Gentiles ; and the graphic record of his labors and successes, contained in the Acts of the Apostles, shows how well he fulfilled his commission, and presents him, for all time to come, as the Model Missionary. Respect- ing the labors of the other apostles, we pos- sess but slender information. A few brief no- tices in the Acts, and some vague and uncer- tain accounts from ecclesiastical history, are all that have reached us. Tet these, taken in connection with the established fact, that in the course of a single generation, the Gospel was propagated throughout the then known world, are sufficient to show that their lives must have been devoted to the missionary work. Peter appears to have directed his labors chiefly to the dispersed Jews, to whom his epistles are directed. Christian antiquity ascribes to him a settlement in Antioch, and afterwards in Parthia ; but he appears to have extended his missionary tours as far as Baby- lon, where his first epistle is dated, and which is supposed by some to have been the metro- polis of the eastern dispersion of the Jews. Eusebius states that he was brought to Rome by the providence of God, to oppose the here- tical schemes of Simon Magus ; and this statement seems to be confirmed by the re- cently discovered work of Hippolytus. And tradition makes him to have suSered crucifix- ion at that place, being placed on the cross at his own request, with his head downwards, deeming himself unworthy to suffer after the manner of his Master. But the whole state- ment as to his over iaving been at Rome is of questionable authority. James, the son of Zebedee, is represented as having labored among the Jews who were 308 EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. scattered abroad in Asia Minor, and the neighboring countries ; but as he resided seve- ral years at Jerusalem, and finally fell a sacri- fice to the cruelty of Herod, it is not probable that his travels were either fi-equent or ex- tensive. Andrew seems to have chosen Scy- thia and the adjacent countries as the scene of his missionary exertions. He passed along the shore of the Buxine Sea, and returned to Byzantium, now called Constantinople, where he labored in word and doctrine with consider- able success. He afterwards traveled through Thrace, Macedonia, Thessaly, Achaia, and Epirus, preaching repentance and forgiveness of sins in the name of Jesus Christ. Philip is considered as the apostle of Upper Asia, and is supposed, in conjunction with Andrew, to have sown the seed of Divine truth among the inhabitants of Scythia. In the latter part of his life he preached at Hierapolis, in Phry- gia, where he sealed his mission with his blood. Baktholomew, who is supposed to be the same with Nathaniel, extended his travels as far as India, on this side the Ganges, where he instructed the inhabitants in the revelation of Divine truth, and at his departure presented them a copy of the Gospel of Matthew. He is also said to have preached in Lycaonia. Thomas, according to the testimony of Je- rome, was a very active and useful missionary, ■who labored among the Medes, Persians, Par- thians, Baotrians, CarmaniaCs, Hyrcanians, and Magians. The Portuguese, when they visited India in the sixteenth century, discov- ered traditions and ancient monuments, which they regarded as evidence that this apostle had preached there. The Chaldean Christians throughout all Asia regard Thomas as their apostle ; and the Syrian Christians of India, on the Coromandel and Malabar coasts, to the number of 200,000, hold, with a constant and uniform tradition, that this apostle was the founder of their churches. He is said also to have visited Ceylon. These ex- isting traditions are corroborated by ancient writers. Matthew, or Levi, the son of Alpheus, is said to have remained for some time in Judtea, declaring the glad tidings of salvation ; and there to have written his Gospel, about the time that the apostles Peter and Paul suffered martyrdom at Rome. He then went as a mis- sionary into Ethiopia, Persia, Parthia, and India ; and, either in the latter of these places, or in Abyssinia, he suffered martyrdom. Simon, called Zelotes, appears to have traveled through Egypt, Cyrene, Asia, Libya, and Mau- ritania. Nicephorus asserts that he introduced the Gospel to Britain, where he preached, apd ■wrought many miracles. Others, however, are of opinion that he directed his route toward Persia, where he labored till he received the crown of martyrdom. John, the beloved disciple, called John the Divine, shared, for some time, with Peter, in preaching, working miracles, and enduring se- vere persecution at Jerusalem ; and in Samaria the Holy Ghost was given by imposition of their hands. About A. D. 52, this apostle continued as " a pillar " of the Christian Church in Judaa ; and, after that period, he is said to have carried the word of life to the inhabit- ants of Parthia and India ; but it is more evi- dent that he labored for some time in Asia Mmm: In the persecution which raged under Domitian, about a. d. 95, he was banished to the isle of Patmos, where he was providentially preserved, and favored with a series of the most important visions. Under the reignof the emperor Nerva, he was recalled from exile, and returned to Ephesus, where he continued to preach the Gospel of Christ, till, at length, he peacefully breathed out his soul into the hands of his Eedeemer, in the ninety-ninth year of his age. JuDB, or Judas, not Iscariot, commenced his missionary labors in Judcea, Galilee, Samaria, and Idumea ; and afterwards extended his travels to Mesopotamia, Persja, Armenia, and Libya ; and, either in the latter place or in Persia, the faithfulness of his preaching was rewarded by a cruel death. James the Less does not seem to have extended his labors beyond the Jewish metropolis, where he met his death at the hands of the Jews. For a fuller account of the labors of each of the apostles, see a summary in Fabrioius Lux Evang. cap. 5, pp. 95-114 ; Lardner XYII. p. 239; Prof. Burton's Ecdes. Hist. 1. 281. Prom highly respectable authorities, it would appear that the Gospel was preached in Britain in- the first century. Bishop Stil- lingfleet is decidedly of opinion that a Chris- tian church was planted in this island, in the time of the apostles ; as Busebius distinctly states that some of them had " passed over the ocean, and preached in the British isles : " and Theodoret mentions the Britons among the nations whom the " fishermen, publicans, and tentmakers," as he styles them, had in- duced to embrace the religion of the crucified Jesus. Gildas, the earliest of our British his- torians, speaking of the memorable revolt and overthrow of the Britons under Boadicea, about A. D. 60, gives us to understand that the Gospel then began to be successfully published in the country ; and the correctness of his statement is supported by those ancient Cam- brian records, called the Friades. In these it is stated that the celebrated Caractacus, who, after a war of nine years, was betrayed to the Romans, was, together with his father, Bren- nius, and the whole family, carried prisoners to Rome, about the year 53, where they remained for a period of seven years. At this time thfe word of life was preached in the imperial city ; and Brennius, with others of his family, became professed members of the Christian church. At the expiration of seven years they were permitted -to return, and were thus furnished EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 309 ■with a favorable opportunity of introducing the GJ-ospel into their own country. It is also said that three Christians, one an Israelite, and the other two G-entiles, with whom they had been in the habit of associating, accom- panied them from Rome, and became instru- mental, as preachers, in reclaiming many of the Britons from their ancient superstitions, and instructing them in " the truth, as it is in Jesus." It does not appear that Caractacus himself embraced the faith of Christ at Rome ; but his son Cyllin, and his daughter Eigar, are both ranked among the British saints. That son is represented as the grandfather of King Lucius, who made great exertions for the pro- motion of Christianity in Siluria, the country of his ancestors ; and even the celebrated King Arthur seems to have been a descendant of this family. Eigar, the daughter of Carac- tacus, is said to have bestowed her hand on a British chieftain, whose domain, called Caer Sarllog, is now known by the name of Old Saram ; and Claudia, one of her sisters, is supposed to have become the wife of a Roman senator, named Pudens. Withia little more than one hundred years from our Saviour's passion, Jiistin Martyr places Christians in every country known to the Romans, which must have included Britain. Irenasus also asserts, that our holy religion was propagated to earth's utmost bounds by the Apostles and their disciples. Again he mentions the Celts among the nations then enlightened, the Celtic race being then seated in the British Isles. Tertullian speaks of British districts inaccessible to Roman arms, but sub- dued by Christ. Dr. Adam Clarke sums up at length the evidence relating to this subject ; and to his argument the curious reader is re- ferred. It appears evident, however, not only that there was Christianity in Britain at a very early period, but that there weis a regu- lated Church, with its bishops, who were sum- moned to foreign councils, where matters of vital importance were discussed and deter- mined, long before Augustine was sent by Gregory the Great, to convert the British Isles to Rome. Most faithfully did the first preachers of Christianity fulfil their commission ; for by them the "Gospel was preached, not only to Jews, Greeks, and Romans, but also to Bri- tons, Gauls, Spaniards, Hindoos, Arabians, Persians, and Scythians. Others were sent out by them who emulated their fidelity. An oriental writer relates that all Persia, all parts of Assyria, Armenia, and Media, the regions about Babylon, Huz, and Gala, to the borders of India, received the Gospel and its institu- tions, from the hands of Agheus, the silk- weaver, the disciple of the Apostle Haddeus or Thaddeus. This took place about fifteen years after the ascension of our Lord. — See Yeates's Indian Church, Hiftm-y, pp. 27, 29. Cbntuey II. — In the second century, the march of divine truth was steady and trium- phant. Eusebius informs us that the followers of the Apostles imitated their example, in distributing their worldly goods among the necessitous believers ; and quitting their owq country, went forth into distant lands to pro- pagate the Gospel. Among them were An- dronicus, Aristarchus, Crescens, Marcus, Sylva- nus, and Trophimus ; and to these were after- wards added Pantanus, who traveled into India ; and Irenccus and Pothinus, who came from Smyrna and settled in France. Tradition relates that Irenasus was sent by Polycarp into Oavl, (circ. a.d. 160.) It is added also, that Pothinus received a similar commission. (Greg. Turon. History France, I. p. 27 ; and Cave's Lives Fathers, p. 162.) Pantaanus, master of a school of philosophy, in Alex- andria, was sent by Demetrius, bishop of that city, to India, where he remained several years ; and on his return, is said to have brought with him a copy of the Gospel of Matthew in Hebrew, which had been left by Bartho- lomew. Atlienagoras, who, towards the end of this century wrote an apology for the Chris- tian religion, says, " The Christians made small account of the present life, but were intent only on contemplating God, and the divine Word, who is from him ; what union the Son has with the Father ; what communion the Par ther has with the Son ; what the Spirit is ; and what are the union and distinction subsisting between the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit." Bardasones, of Mesopotamia, in allu- ding to the influence of the Gospel on its pro- fessors, says, " In Parthia, polygamy is allowed and practiced ; but the Christians of that country practice it not. In Persia, the same may be said with regard to incest. And in Bactria and Gaul, where the rites of matri- mony are defiled with impunity, the Christians act not thus. In fact wherever they reside, their practice triumphs over the worst of cus- toms, and the worst of laws." While the doc- trines of the cross were progressively spread- ing, through the labors of devoted mission- aries ; while the lives and deportment of the converts illustrated the divine origin and beneficial effects of those doctrines ; the great work of translating the Holy Scriptures occu- pied the hearts and hands of many others. Latin versions of the oracles of truth were multiplied. That which was styled the Italic version was considered decidedly the best. The Syriac, Ethiopian, and Egyptian versions appeared at no great distance of time ; but their dates cannot now be ascertained with precision. The blessed truths, however, which they contained, were so powerfully owned and blessed of God, that wherever they circulated, like a fertilizing stream, they transformed the moral desert into the garden of the Lord. — Smith, 1. p. 26. Centuky III.— In the third century, the 310 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. progress of Christianity in the world was very considerable, though, with respect to the par- ticular countries into which it was introduced, the same degree of uncertainty prevails, as was noticed in the second. Origen having been invited from Alexandria by an Arabian prince, succeeded in converting a tribe of wandering Arabs to the Christian faith. The fierce and war-like nation of the Goths, who, inhabiting the countries of Moesia and Thrace, made per- petual incursions into the neighboring pro- vinces, and some likewise of the adjoining tribes of Sarmatia, received the knowledge of the G-ospel by means of several bishops, who were either sent thither from Asia or had become their captives. These vener- able teachers, by the power of their doctrine, and the sanctity of their lives, became the in- struments of converting great numbers, and in time, of softening and civilizing this rude and barbarous people. Fabian, Bishop of Rome, sent Dionysius and six other missionaries into Gaul ; and during the reign of the Emperor Decius (A. D. 250), and in the midst of his persecutions, the Christian churches, which had hitherto been chiefly confined to the neigh- borhood of Lyons and Vienne, were consider- ably increased. By the labors of many pious and zealous men, among whom was Saturninus, the first bishop of Toulouse, churches were founded at Paris, Tours, Aries, Narbonne, and several other places. From these sources, the knowledge of the Gospel spread, in a short time, through the whole country. In the course of this century Christianity flourished in Germany, particularly in those parts which border upon Prance. Maternus, Clemens, and others, founded, in particular, the churches Cologne, Treves, and Mentz. No positive account has been transmitted respect- ing the progress of Christianity in the British Isles during the third century. The historians of Scotland contended, indeed, that the Gospel then first visited that country ; and there is reason to believe that their account may be true. (See Usher and Stillingfleet Antiq. et Orig. Eceil. Britt.) In this century, the clemency and mildness of several of the Roman Pmperors, and the encouragement which some of them gave to Christianity, tended materially to augment its influence. The piety and charity of the Chris- tian disciples continued to excite the notice and admiration of the heathen, and the zeal- ous labors of Origen and others in the trans- lation and dispersion of the New Testament, and in the composition of different works in the defence and illustration of Christianity, contri- buted to increase the number of Christians, and to extend the boundaries of the church. (Pearson's Historic View of the Progress of the Gospel, p. 15.) Origen observes, " that so de- sirous were the Christians of propagating their religion throughout the world, that some of them had undertaken to travel, not only to cities, but to towns and villages, to convert the Heathen." In the third centiiry, Christianity had be- come so extensive, that, about the year 245, the emperor Philip, though evidently a world- ly-minded character, and but little influenced by the spirit of the Gospel, was induced to make a profession of the new religion, and openly to patronize its friends and adherents. About the same time, the light of divine truth was greatly extended both in Prance and Ger- many. And (though the power of religion seemed to decline both among the pastors and professors in Africa and Asia, which, from the inroads of barbarians, became a scene of miser- able confusion,) yet the wisdom and power of God so over-ruled events, that the invaders, by carrying away with them several Christian ministers, forced these persons to become mis- sionaries, contrary to their own intentions, and rendered them instrumental in the conversion of many. Centuky rV. — The first Christian missiona- ries to Ireland were Kieran, Aibe, Declan, and Ibar, all from the British Churches in Scot- land and "Wales, faithful and self-denying missionaries of the Christian Paith, and but little sullied from its original lustre. The period of their arrival is very likely to have been the early part of this century, when British Christians may have sought refuge in Ireland from the fury of the Diocletian perse- cution, then raging throughout all the provin ces of the Roman empire ; for, as Ireland was beyond the boundary of the emperor's domin- ions, it was almost the only place that could aflbrd an asylum to the Christians, until the return of peace and security. Christianity was for a long time confined to the southern portion of the island ; but even here its pro- gress was slow. A few families and solitary hermits constituted the infant Church. Kieran is commonly regarded as the first bishop of Ossory. In the fourth century Chrijsostom, archbishop of Constantinople, maintained many presby- ters and others in Phanicia, partly at his own charge, and partly by the assistance of pious and well disposed persons, whose only work it was to instruct the inhabitants in the truths of Christianity. During the same century, Comtantine, surnamed the great, was raised to the imperial sceptre ; and, in his per- son, Christianity ascended the throne of the Cassars. Unfortunately, Constantino preferred coercive measures for the establishment of re- ligion, and deemed the sword a more efficient instrument in the destruction of idolatry, than the milder endeavors of missionary instruction. But the order issued by him for the transcrib- ing of fifty copies of the Sacred Scriptures, to be placed in the different churches of the empire, was a more legitimate missionary work. It was about the same period that the Gospel, taviug been carried to the Goths, by EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 311 some Christian prisoners, Ulphilas, who had been appointed their pastor or bisliop, under- took to form an alphabet, and to translate the Scriptures into the Gothic language. Frag- ments of this version are still in existence,^ from which transcripts have been made and published by Dr. Barrett, of Dublin, and M. Maio, of Rome. Christianity was introduced into Georgia by Nino, a pious female who was carried captive into that country, and by her exhortations and prayers, prevailed upon the Cyarmerian to embrace the religion she professed ; but some suppose she voluntarily left Rome to visit Je- rusalem, and from thence proceeded into the ancient Ibcrm, accompanied by Sidonia and Abrata, and succeeded in establishing the Chris- tian religion. (Lettere from the Caucasus and Georgia ; translated from the French, p. 107. Lend., 1823, 8vo.) (For the introduction of the Gospel into Abyssinia, in this century, see Abyssmia.) " Many of the monks, at this early period, are said to have engaged in the missionary work, and to have been very instrumental in extend- ing the Christian faith, particularly among the Persians and Saracens. A. monk named Abra^ ham labored with success among the idolatrous inhabitants in the vicinity of Edessa, until a church was formed, and pastors from among themselves placed over them. (See Smith, Vol. I. page 32 ; and JowetVs Christian Re- senrrJies. Vol. I. p. 171.) In this century, Armenia, into which Chris- tianity had before been introduced, was com- pletely Christianized, through the labors of Oregory " the Enlightener." The Gospel was also further propagated, during this century, in Persia. During the reign of the emperor Valens, a large body of the Gotlis, who had remained at- tached to their ancient superstitions, were per mitted by that prince to pass the Danube and to inhabit Dacia, Mcesia, and Thrace, on con- dition of living subject to the Roman laws, and of embracing Christianity, which condition was accepted by their king, Fritigem. And Ulphilas, bishop of those Goths, who dwelt in MoBsia, translated the four Gospels into the Gothic langTjage. Notwithstanding the utmost efforts of the Christian bishops in the European provinces of the empire, great numbers of Pagans still remained. In Gaul, however, the labors of the venerable Martin of Tours were so successful in the destruction of idolatry and superstition, and the propagation of Christianity, that he justly acquired the title of the Apostle of the Gauls. In respect to the rapidity and extent of the propagation of Christianity in these early ages, besides the evidence furnished by the brief narrative of Luke, and the incidental allusions of the Epistles, the Christian Fathers have left abundant testimony. Clement, who was a co- temporary with Paul, says of the labors of that Apostle, " He preached both in the East and in the West, leaving behind him the gloriouis report of his faith ; and so, having taught the whole world righteousness, and for that end, traveled even unto the utmost bounds of ths West, he at last suffered martyrdom," &c. {Clem. Ad. Cm. C. V. VI.) Justin Martyr, who wrote about one hundred and six years after the ascension, has these re- markable words : " There is not a nation, either of Greek or barbarian, or of any other name, even those who wander in tribes, and live in tents, amongst whom prayers and thanks- givings are not offered to the Father and Cre- ator of the universe, by the name of the cruci- fied Jesus." Irenaus, who died A. D. 202, speaks of the Christians of his time living in the Court of Rome : " But how is it those who are in the regal halls are faithful ? Does not each one of those who have charge of Csesar's utensils, and those who have not, stand forth preeminent according to his merit ?" TertuUian, who comes about fifty years after Justin Martyr, refers very frequently to the success of the first missionaries of the cross. He says, " We, so great a multitude of men, almost a majority of every state, pass our lives in serenity and quietude." {TertuUian to Sca- pulus.) " If we desired to deal with open ene- mies and not with hidden foes, we should not lack the power of numbers, and the influence o( ample resources. Doubtless the Moors, and the Germanic race, and the Parthians themselves, or any nations, however great, are more nu- merous, yet dwelling in one locality, and cir- cumscribed by their own limits, rather than diffused through the whole world. But we, though of yesterday, have filled every sphere of life : cities, castles, islands, towns, the exchange, the very camps, the plebeian populace, the seats of judges, the imperial palace, the senate and the forum. They (the heathen adversaries of Christianity) lament that every sex, age, and condition, and persons of every rank also, are converts to that name." " We have been able, though unarmed and not seditious, but only differing in opinion, to contend against you by the odium of separation only ; for if we, such a vast company of men, should withdraw from you and retire to some remote corner of the world, assuredly the loss of so many citi- zens irrespective of their character, would over- spread your dominion, and at last would bring upon you the retribution of desertation itself. Without doubt you would be greatly terrified at your solitude, the stillness of things, and a species of stupor as of a dead city. You would search for subjects in those places in which you might have held the sceptre." {Ter- tullian's Apology, Chap. 37.) Chrysostom, who wrote towards the close of the fourth century, attests, that at that time, the Christian faith had become almost upiver- 512 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. sally diffiised ; he says : " But consider and think within yourself, in how short a time the whole world became filled with so many churches, and such populous nations converted to the faith ; people persuaded to abrog:ate their country's laws, rooting out their old habits and customs, and everywhere overturning the heathen altars in the regions of the Eomans, Persians, Scythians, Maurians, and the Hin- doos, to the world's end." And to these may be added the testimony of ancient Pagan writers. Tacitus, in giving an account of the fire which happened at Eome about thirty years after the ascension, asserts that Nero, in order to suppress the rumors of having been himself the author of the mischief, had the Christians accused of the crime. Speak- ing of this event, he writes : " They only were apprehended who confessed themselves of that sect ; afterwards a vast multitude were discov- ered by them." This was about six years after Paul wrote his Epistle to the Eomans, and something more than two after his arrival in Eome himself. Pliny the younger, the gover- nor of Pontus and Bithynia, on applying to the emperor Trajan for directions as to the treatment of Christians, says : " Suspending all judicial proceedings, I have recourse to yon for advice ; for it has appeared to me a matter highly deserving, especially on account of the great numbers of persons wlw are in danger of suffering : for many of all ages, and of every rank, of both sexes, lilcewise, are accused and will be accused. Nor has the contagion of this super- stition seized cities only, but the lesser towns also, and the open country. Nevertheless it seemed to me that it might be restrained and corrected. It is certain that the temples, which were almost forsaken, begin to be more frequent- ed ; and the sacred solemnities, after a long in- termission, are revived. Victims, likewise, are everywhere bought up ; whereas, for some time there were few to purchase them. Whence it is easy to imagine that numbers of men might be reclaimed, if pardon were granted to those that shall repent." We need not pursue these testimonies farther. Nothing can be more satisfactory as evidence of the progress which Christianity achieved in the hands of its first missionaries. Centuky V. — At the beginning of the fifth century the Eoman empire was divided into two distinct sovereignties, under the dominion of Arcadius in the East, and of Honorius in the West. The confusions and calamities which about .this period attended the incursions of the Goths, the temporary possession of Italy by Odoacer, and the subsequent establishment of the Ostrogoths, were prejudicial to the pro- gress of Christianity. The zeal of the Chris- tian emperors, more especially of. those who reigned in the east, was, notwithstanding, suc- cessfully exerted in extirpating the remains of the Gentile superstitions, and the Church con- tinued daily to gain ground on the idolatrous nations in the empire. In the East, the inha- bitants of Mount Libanus and Antilibaous were induced by the persuasions of Simeon the Stylite, to embrace the Christian religion. By his influence also, it was introduced into a cer- tain district of Arabia. In the West, the Ger- man nations, who had destroyed that division of the empire, gradually embraced the religion of the conquered people. Some of them had been converted to the Christian faith before their incursions upon the empire ; and such, among others, was the case of the Goths. It is uncertain, however, at what time and by whose labors the Vandals, Sueves, and Alans were evangelized. The Burgundians, who inhabited the banks of the Ehine, and passed from thence into Gaul, received the Gospel, hoping to be preserved by its Divine Author from the ravages of the Huns. But in general these fierce and barbarous nations were induced to embrace Christianity, by the desire of living in greater security amidst a people who, for the most part professed it, and from a persua-ft sion that the doctrines of the majority must be best. This conformity, of course, must have been chiefly outward and formal. — [Pear- son's brief Historic View of the Progress of the Gospel, p. 19.) Pope Celestine the First sent Palladius to Ireland, where he arrived A. D. 431. The mis- sion was uuattended with success, which gave rise to a proverb among the Irish, that " Not to Palladius but to Patrick did the Lord grant the conversion of Ireland." St. Patrick, whose original name was Succath, was next ap- pointed. The place of his birth was Bonna- ven, which lay between the Scottish towns Dumbarton and Glasgow, and was then reck- oned to the province of Britain. This vil- lage, in memory of Patricus, received the name of Kil-Patrick, or Kirk-Patrick. His father, a deacon in the village church, gave him a careful education ; he was instructed indeed in the doctrines of Christianity, but he did not come to know what he possessed in this knowledge until the experience of great trials brought him to the consciousness of it. At the age of sixteen he was carried off, with many others of his countrymen, by Scottish pirates, to the northern part of the island Hi- bernia (Ireland). — (Neander's History of tlie Christian Religion, Vol. II. p. 122.) He was sold to a chieftain of the people, who made him the overseer of his flocks. Here he re- mained six years, during which time he receiv- ' the renewing grace of God. At length he recovered his liberty, but was again recaptured. But in a short time, however, he was allowed to return home, and not long after he gave himself up to the work of the ministry. After his ordination in Gaul he was sent in company with several others, as a missionary to Iretatid. The party landed at the place now occupied by the town of Wicklow, either m the year 432 0- ■'" *""- ^'- — =- ■•■"■' EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 313 parts of the country, St. Patrick visited Tara, or Temora, the royal residence of the mon- archs ; and here, notwithstanding the oppo- sition of the pagan priests, his preaching was most successful. He gained over to the Gos- pel several zealous converts. In an epistle ad- dressed to Oaradoc, or Ooroticus, prince of certain districts in Wales, after stating that he had been seized by a predatory band, and carried captive to Ireland, he notices the suc- cess which had attended his endeavors to bring over the natives " to the obedience of the faith." He thus offers his reason for subse- quently becoming a missionary : " Dwelling among barbarians, a, Christian and an ex- ile, urged by my love and zeal for God and the truth of Christ, I wished, although rudely and in an unpolished manner, to declare those things from my mouth ; for the love of my neighbors and my children in the Lord aroused me, and compelled me to give up my country, my parents, and even my life also, if I should be thought worthy to teach the truth to the nations." — (See Sir William Betham's Irish An- tiquarian Researches, Vol. 11. p. 433.) In the course of St. Patrick's missionary journey- ings he visited also the south of Ireland, ^ngus, the king of Cashel, received him courteously, listened to his preaching, and be- came a convert ; but the earlier Christians of the country, especially the bishops Ailbe, De- clan, Kearan, and Ibar, did not give him so glad a welcome ; they either had not been ac- quainted "with the extent of his labors among their pagan countrymen, or they had some fears lest the object of his visit might be to claim supremacy over them. It is expressly stated that Ibar would on no account submit to him, because he did not wish a foreigner to be the patron of Ireland. At length, however, their differences were made up, and they were persuaded to cooperate with each other in a more cordial spirit. St. •Patrick, after this, returned to the north, where we next find him engaged in the foundation of the See of Ar- magh, the date of which event is assigned to the year 455. Prom this time he appears to have ceased in a measure from more arduous labors, and to have employed himself in hold- ing synods for the settlement of the church. Several of the canons enacted in these coun- cils are still in existence, and they serve to elu- cidate many of the doctrines and customs of the early Irish church. Whatever time St. Patrick could spare from these important avo- cations, was passed in retirement at Saul, where, in prayer and meditation he ended his days. He lived to an advanced age, and was buried near the site of the present cathedral of Down.-( Todd's Ancient Church in IrelaM, p. 14.) The efforts to evangelize the world, were not, however, restricted to individual attempts. In the fifth and several succeeding . centuries, the Nestorians became the most missionary body at that time existing, aa well as the most numerous. (For an account of the origm and missions of this body, see Nestorians and China.) Most writera agree that the Christian reli- gion was early planted in Arabia, from the great number of Jews dispersed among those tribes, who claim their descent from Abraham and Ishmael. Some have main- tained that several tribes among the Arabians had received the Christian religion long be- fore the time of Mohammed. An able writer mentions one Pkylarchus, and a whole tribe of Arabians, who in the fifth century made profession of the Christian religion. " Even the Arabians themselves own that the Chris- tians were very numerous in Arabia, long be- fore the time of Mohammed, as appears from numerous passages in the Koran, where both Christians and Jews are mentioned, as well as in their own common histories, cited by Pocook and other Orientalists. The principal tribes that embraced Christianity were Hamger, and, according to others, the whole kingdom of the Homerites, Ghassan, Rabia, Taghlah, Bah-ra, Tonuch, part of the tribes of Tay and Kodda, the inhabitants of Najaram and the Arabs of Hira." [See Mr. Sale's Prelim. X)iScow)'ses,p.'29.) It does not appear, however, that the Holy Scriptures had been translated into their tongue, which will account for the subsequent extinction of their churches. All nations that have had the Scriptures in their own lan- guage have stood, either in whole or in part, against the seductions of Mohammedanism ; such are the Greeks, Syrians, Armenians, Abys- sinians, Coptics, and some others. [See Yeates's Indian Church, p. 41.) In the same century, the conversion of the southern or lowland Picts is said to have been effected through the instrumentality of a British bishop named Ninias; and though they were soon after reduced by the northern Picts, their heathen conquerors permitted them to retain the profession of Christianity. The baptism of Clevis, king of the Franks, took place about the year 496 ; and it has been justly remark- ed, that, " nothwithstanding he was an ungodly man, he became an instrument in the hand of Providence to promote a cause of which he knew not the value." Through the influence of his queen Clotilda, who was a zealous Chris- tian, he was induced to profess the faith of the Gospel, and was baptized at Rheims, together with his sister, and three thousand of his troops. (See Smith's Origin of Missionary So- cieties, Vol. I. p. 23.) In Britain, Christianity was almost extin- guished by the predatory incursions of the Scots and Picts, and, afterwards, by the per- secutions of the Saxons. Cemtory VI. — This century was distinguish- ed by some further advances of Christianity, both in the East and West. The bishops of Constantinople, under the influence and pro- tecti )n of the Grecian emperors, succeeded ia 314 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. converting some barbarous nations, inhabiting the coast of the Euxiue Sea, among whom were the Abasgi, wliose country lay between the shores of that sea and Mount Caucasus ; the Heruli, who dwelt beyond the Danube ; the Alani, Lani, and Zani, together with other uncivilized nations, whose precise situation cannot now be accurately ascertained, were converted about the same time, during the reign of Justinian. In the West, Remigius, bishop of Rheims, was remarkably successful in Gaul, where the example of Clovis continued to be followed by great numbers of his sub- jects. Britain was abandoned by the Romans in the fifth century, and then became subject to the Saxons, who forthwith established their pagan religion. The Roman language, cus- toms, and manners, with all the Christianity that existed, were at once swept away from the largest and finest portions of the island, by the Saxon invasion. The Britons were divi- ded into a great number of petty kingdoms, and their princes animated with as much hostility against each other as against the in- vaders. But they were generally too high- minded to brook that foreed and ignominious incorporation to which the Gauls, and Span- iards, and Italians had submitted, and gradu- ally retiring to the western peninsula, to the land of lakes, and to the highlands of Scot- land, their language ceased to be spoken in that great division of the island, which now obtained the name of England, from its An- glican conquerors. It is, however, to Wales and Cornwall that we are to look for the progress of Christianity in Britain during this period. Fuller says : " The entire body of the British Church at this tim« was in Wales, where Bangor on the north, and Oaerleon (on the Usk, in Mon- mouthsliire,) on the south, were the two eyes thereof for learning and religion. The latter had in it the court of King Arthur, the see of an archbishop, a college of 200 philosophers, who therein studied astronomy ; and was a populous place of great extent." There is reason to believe that Bangor, near Chester, was of equal eminence with Caerleon for men of learning and piety. It is said that the monastery at this place contained 2,100 monks, divided into seven courses, of 300 each. The Anglo-Saxon people sprang from three piratical tribes of Gothic origin. Two of these were seated in what is now called Jut- land, and in three adjacent islands. The emi- gration of the Jutes does not seem to have been extensive, its British settlements being confined to Kent, the Isle of Wight, and the southern part of Hampshire. The A.ngles, whose home lay in Sleswick and Holstein, as now called, emigrated entirely, and spreading over the north-eastern, midland, and northern counties of south Britain, eventually gave name to the whole country. The Saxons, nearest neighbors of these, found new abodes in Essex, Middlesex, and those counties west of Kent which lie between the Thames and the Chan- nel. The earlier years of their settlement in Britain were little favorable to their reception of the Christian religion. The people, indeed, whose fair possessions had lured then! from their Scandinavian abodes, had risen into im- portance and wealth under an abandonment of paganism. The Britons, aroused into a long course of sanguinary conflict witli their treach- erous invaders, were little likely to think of their conversion. It is therefore probable that the native clergy made no attempt to humanize these ferocious pagans, by communicating to them a knowledge of the Gospel. The pagan warriors, moreover, were likely to derive new prejudices against Christianity, from the suc- cess which usually waited upon their own arms. Britain's trust in the cross had not secured her fortunes from constant declension. Reliance upon Woden had been encouraged unceasingly by victory. A people unacquainted with true religion would naturally infer that its own deities were more powerful than those of its opponents. A considerable change must be wrought in the whole frame of a society like this before it could be gained over to calm reflection upon the religion of a people pros- trate under its assaults. Providence, however, effected such a change. England's principal monarch then was Ethelbert, King of Kent. He appears to have ascended his father's throne about the year 560 ; and, probably, ten years afterwards he mai-ried Bertha, daughter of Cherebert, King of Paris. This princess coming of a Christian family, was not allowed to pass over into Kent until ample stipulations had been made for the free profession of her religion. She came accordingly, attended by Luidhard, a Prank bishop, and for her accom- modation a British church was erected, in honor of St. Martin, on the eastern side of Canterbury. A Christian congregation was formed in the principal seat of Anglo-Saxon power. As its leading member was the most illustrious female in the island, we may reason- ably suppose that it did not long fail of mak- ing converts. Hence it became understood at Rome, that among Englishmen an anxious desire prevailed for admission to the church. Gregory the Great, as he is termed. Bishop of Rome, intimated to Bertha by letter that she ought early to have inclined her husband fa- vorably towards her own religion. The vener- able Bede gives the following account of the manner in which Gregory's attention was first directed to Britain as a missionary field, which, Dr. Clarice says, is taken from the Saxon Homily of ^Ifrio, written more than nine hun- dred years ago : " While yet a private clergy- man, Gregory, passing through a slave market in his native city, found his eyes forcibly ar- rested by some light-haired, fair-complexioned youths, who stood exposed for sale. ' Whence EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 315 come these lads ? ' he asked. ' Prom Britain,' was the aaswer. ' Are the people Christians there ? ' he then inquired. 'No, pagans,' he was told. ' Alas ! ' he said, ' how grievous it is that faces fair as these should own subjection to the swarthy devil ! ' His next question was, ' What do you call the tribe from which these young people spring ? ' ' Angles,' said the dealer. • Ah ! that is well,' Gregory rejoined ; ' Angels they are in countenance, and choirs of angels they ought to be. Where in Britain do their kindred live ? ' 'In Deiira,' was the reply. ' Well again,' Gregory said ; ' it is our duty to deliver them from G-od's ire. Pray, who is king of the land so significantly named ? ' ' Ella,' replied the slave-merchant. ' Ah ! ' the pious inquirer added, ' Hallelvjah must be sung in that man's country.' " Gregory resolved upon uudertaking a mission into Anglia. Nor did the Pope discourage his intention, but the Eoman people would not allow him to enter upon a labor so remote and perilous. How- ever, after Gregory's elevation to the See of Borne, A. D. 592, he selected Austin, or Augus- tiiw. Prior of the Monastery of St. Martin, in Eome, to lead a devoted band upon the mis- sion. Austin, having engaged several monks as partners in his toil, left Rome, but halting among the monastic recluses of Lerins, these devotees, to whom the difficulties of his under- taking were necessarily better known than they could have been at Eome, utterly dis- couraged him from the attempt. He applied for Gregory's leave to withdraw from the en- terprize. But the pontiff would hear nothing of despondence ; he rebuked the missionary's pusillanimity, refused to cancel his obligation, and commanded him to lose no time in reach- ing Britain. Austin now rallied his spirits, proceeded northwards, and providing himself with interpreters in Gaul, set sail for the chalky cliffs of Kent. He landed in the island of Thanet, and thence dispatched a messenger to Ethelbert, informing him of his arrival, and declaring that he had come thus far in hope of showing him the way to heaven. By the Kentish prince, however well the message might have pleased him, it was cautiously re- ceived. He gave no permission to his Eoman guests for a further advance into the country, until he had gone himself and made observa- tions. Austin and his companions met him in procession, one of them bearing a silver cross, another a picture of the Saviour, while the re- mainder chanted litanies. The prior dis- claimed any other object than to guide the king and all his people to everlasting joys above. ' Fair words and promises,' Ethelbert replied, ' but still, new and uncertain. I can- not relinquish for them what my countrymen ^ave long and universally professed. Your distant pilgrimage, however, and charitable purpose of offering us a boon so highly valued by yourselves, justly claim our hospitahty. I fihall, therefore, provide you with a residence and means of living. Nor do I restrain yon from endeavors to spread your opinions among my people.' The residence provided was at Canterbury, and the missionaries entered that city to take possession of it, with imposing solemnities. Austin's views were now directed to the consolidation and extension of his authority ; and he repaired to the confines of Wales, and sought an' interview with the native prelacy of Britain. The place rendered memorable by this meeting seems to have been under the shade of some noble tree, afterwards known as Augustine's Oak, situated, probably within the modern county of Worcester. The prelates and monks in Wales, wishing to retain their independence of the See of Eome, and the inte- grity of their own doctrines, naturally resisted the claims of Augustine. Violent altercations ensued ; the Kentish prince was engaged in the quarrel ; and the unfortunate Cambrians, whose only crime consisted in their conscien- tious resistance to a foreign yoke, were doomed to suffer the invasion of their territories, and in some instances, the loss of their lives. And there is reason to believe, that the supremacy of the Pope had as much to do with the origin of this mission as the love of souls. But from whatever motive it was undertaken, it was the point of the papal wedge which, first insinuated into the ecclesiastical hierarchy of England, by Gregory I., was speedily driven deeper ; until, by the authority of Innocent HI. it completely destroyed the independence of the British Church, and laid her. prostrate at the feet of the Pope. It was, therefore, the policy of Augustine to undermine the simplicity of religious worship among the Britons, and to operate upon the imagination and superstition of the Saxons, by means of sensual doctrines, and a gaudy ritual, which he had imported from Italy. Image worship, purgatorial inflic- tions, the efficacy of good works, and the virtue of old bones, designated relics, were all ready and at hand. " The wily monk," says a modern writer, " assumed such austerity of manner, and sanctity of deportment, that he effectually secured the veneration of the delu- ded multitude ; and by his pretended miracles, which any juggler of the present day could surpass, very easily imposed on their credulity." Gregory was transported with joy, on hearing the continued prosperity of the mission; and in a letter to Ethelbert, exhorted him " to assist Au- gustine in the good work by all the expedients of exAorta^/on, TEEBOR, and COEEBCTION!" The whole of this affair is highly monitory. Eng- land had once more become the land of pa- ganism ; but by the labors of foreign mission- aries, Christianity was again established. The process was precisely the reverse of that by which the Eoman empire had been brought under the influence of the Christian faith. There it had begun with the poor, and had made its way up, unassisted by any human 316 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. power, or any worldly or interested motives But here the missionaries came with the im- posing ranlt of ambassadors on a religious errand ; they addressed themselves to the kings of those petty states into which England was divided ; and having succeeded with them, the nominal conversion of their subjects followed as a matter of obedience. The kings had an obvious political motive for professing a reli- gion, which enabled them to connect them- selves by intermarriages with the princes of the Continent ; prepared a refuge for them in case of expulsion from their own dominions ; and placed them in communication with the more civilized parts of the world. — Fuller's Church History of Britain; Smith's Religion of Ancient Britain, p. 277 ; Dr. Southey an/l Kingsmill. To Augustine's mission, as well as many other missionary efforts of that period, the judicious remarks of Dr. Mosheim will apply. " The conversions and sacred exploits of this age will lose much of their importance in the esteem of such as examine with attention the accounts which have been given of them by writers of this and the succeeding ages ; for by these accounts, it appears that the converted nations retained a great part of their former impiety, superstition, and licentiousness ; and that, attached to Christ by a mere outward and nominal profession, they, in effect, re- nounced the purity of his doctrine, and the authority of his Gospel, by their flagitious lives, and the superstitious and idolatrous rites and institutions which they continued to ob- serve. If credit is to be given to the writers of this century, the conversion of these uncivil- ized nations to Christianity was principally effected by the prodigies and miracles which the heralds of the Gospel were enabled to work in its behalf But, in abandoning their ancient superstition, the greatest part of these people were more influenced by the example and au- thority of their princes, than by force of argu- ment, or the power of a rational conviction. The missionaries required nothing of these barbarous people that was difficult to be per- formed, or that laid any remarkable restraint upon their appetites and passions. The prin- cipal injunctions they imposed upon these rude proselytes were, that they should commit to memory certain summaries of doctrine, and pay to the image of Christ and the saints, the same religious service which they had formerly offered to the statues of the gods. Kor were they at all delicate or scrupulous in choosing the means of establishing their credit; for they deemed it lawful, and even meritorious, to deceive an ignorant and inattentive multi- tude, by representing as prodigies, things that were merely natural events, as we learn from the most authentic records of these times." It was in this century that Columba, or Co- lombanus, passed over into the western parts of Scotland, and promulgated the Gospel among northern Fids. The Scots of Argyle, ^mong whom he resided, embraced Christianity in Ireland, when the hostilities of their neighbors compelled them to seek a temporary refuge in that country. The little island named I-colm- kill, after this missionary, was the seat of a mission seminary, which he conducted for a period of more than thirty years, besides retain- ing the charge of several other institutions, which he had founded in Ireland. Columba had the happiness of baptizing the British sovereign ; and the neighboring Soots and Bri- tons held his character and person in such high estimation, that it was no uncommon thing for them to refer to him as the final umpire in the adjustment of their differences. Of royal ex- traction; superior talents and accomplishments ; fervent in spirit ; indefatigable in his exer- tions ; unbounded in his beneficence ; unmoved by injuries, and undaunted by danger ; he literally " overcame evil with good," and was made the honored instrument of subduing the prejudices, and winning the affections of the most violent enemies of the Gospel. He expired in the act of transcribing the Holy Scriptures. The monastery of lona, in the Hebrides, founded by Columba, might justly be called a missionary college, as the great object of the institution was to prepare the residents for mis- sionary enterprize, by previous discipline, and transcription of the Scriptures. Prom thence went forth several of those blessed men, by whom many parts of Germany, and the Low Countries, were first brought to the knowledge of the truth. Three ancient manuscripts, in the Irish character, probably written in this monfistery or college, are still preserved. (See Sir William Betham's Irish Antiquities.) Such was the missionary zeal of the monks of lona, that they are said to have frequently undertaken expeditions, the object of which was to discover any land which the Gospel had not yet reached, that they might preach to its inhabitants the glad tidings of salvation. The Norwegians found Irish monks in Iceland, when they first discovered it, about the year 900. The followers of Columba obtained the name of Culdees, from certain terms implying, " The family or servants of God," and are dis- tinguished by it, from those societies, or mo- nastic institutions, founded by Papal authority. " Prom this nest of Columba," says one of his biographers, speaking of lona, " these sacred doves took their flight to all quarters. Where- ever they went they disseminated learning and true religion, and seem to have done more tow- ards the revival of both, than any other society at that time in Europe. In fact, lona, or I-colm- kill, was, in the early ages, a seminary of all kinds of learning, and a nursery of divines for planting churches." (See Smith's Life of Co- lumba.) His disciples were remarkable for the exemplary holiness of their lives, and through the medium of their missionary labors, the EARLY CHRISTIAN IHSSIONS. 3ir northern Picts, the Anglo-Saxcms of Mercia and Northumberland, and several of the northern nations of Europe, were converted, at Ifeast to the name and profession of Christianity. (See Life of Colomba, published by the Mass. Sab. School Society.) To the sixth century have also been referred the conversion of the Abasgi, a people of Soythia, and the Hevuli, who resided on the banlis of the Danube ; together with that of Zathvs, a prince of the Oolohians ; and Almundurus, a prince of the Saracens. About the same period the Paidicans arose in the East, and were so denominated from their making Paul's Epis- tles the chief rule of their lives. They were proverbial for theii- endeavors to spread the Gospel, in opposition to the errors of the Greek and Romish churches ; and such was the rapid multiplication of this people, and so numerous were they become in the reign of the Greek Empress Theodora, in the ninth century, that 100,000 lost their lives during the persecution of that Empress, by fire, sword, the gibbet, impalement, and other cruelties. Oentukt VII. — Cheerless, indeed, was the commencement of the seventh century, and gloomy the scene on which the first Gregory closed his eyes, the barbarous hosts still press- ing the Roman empire on the north, and the Arabian impostor breaking forth from his sul- try sands, as the avenger of the Lord, scatter- ing the flock from field to field, and oblitera1> ing the once flourishing churches in the East, and along the African coast. But it does not appear that any of those nations who possessed the written word of God relapsed into the Mo- hammedan imposture. According to Teates, there were no early translations of the Bible into Arabic. During this century the spirit of missionary enterprize arose chiefly from the North. Prom the monasteries of Great Britain and Ireland, men went forth glowing with the desire of bringing the Gothic tribes within the fold of Christ. Along the banks of the Rhine, in the Black Forest, in Bavaria, and Tliuringia, the church extended itself by the labors of men thus devoted, among whom shine the names of Fridolin, Gall, Rupert, Eustasius, Willi- brod, and above all, Boniface, as apostles of the German nations. Century VIII. — At the commencement of tlu eighth century, when a considerable part of Germany was buried in the darkness of pagan superstition, Winfred, a Benedictine monk, born in England of illustrious parents, and afterwards known by the name of Boniface, a,t- tended by two companions, went over into Friesland, to water the churches which Willi- orod had planted. He afterwards removed to Bavaria and Thuringia; and throughout the greater part of Hesse, even to the frontiers of Saxony, he published the word ; and in the year 719 Gregory the second made him bishop of the new German churches. In his mission from England, he obtained several assistants, who dispersed themselves in the villages ; and in a circular letter which he addressed to the British prelates and people, he earnestly soli- cited their prayers for his success. Ho con- tinued his missionary labors with unabated ardor till the uge of seventy-five ; when going to confirm some converts in the plain of Dock- um, he was attacked and killed, with the whole of his company, amounting to fifty-two persons, by a troop of ferocious Pagans armed with shields and lances. The German Christians who had considered Boniface as the apostle of their counti'y, immediately raised an army, and conquered the Pagans, whose lives were spared only on condition of their submitting to bo instructed in the truths of Christianity. Siefuvyn, another Englishman, was particu- larly distinguished among those who labored as missionaries in Germany. On one occasion he ventured to appear before an assembly of Saxons, while they were sacrificing to their idols, and with a loud voice exhorted them to turn from such vanities and to serve the living. God. This interference exasperated the idol- aters to such a degree that the zealous mission- ary would probably have been immolated on the spot, had it not been for the remonstrances of a Saxon chief, named Buto, who contended that an ambassador of Heaven ought not to be treated with less respect than if he had come from the king of some neighboring na- tion. Siefuvyn was, therefore, permitted to retire without molestation, and he continued 3 useful and active laborer in Germany until hij death. Villehad, a native of Northumberland, is also said to have been very successftil among tha Saxons, whose ferocious spirits were softened by his meekness, whose minds were illuminated by his instructions, and some of whom, it is hoped, were eternally saved through his in- strumentality. He became bishop of Bremen, and died in Friesland, after he had preached the Gospel thirty-five years with unwearied perseverance and unabated zeal. During this century a war broke out be- tween Charlemagne and the Saxons, which contributed materially to the extension of the nominal Church. After a long and obstinate struggle the Saxons were subdued ; and when gentle means proved unavailing to induce them to embrace the Gospel, coercive methods were adopted, and they were then baptized by thousands. ' Wliat sort of converts these were, may easily be conceived. However, as schools and monasteries were founded, and ministers were appointed to reside among them, some general knowledge of Divine truth must hava been progressively diffused, though wretchedly intermingled with the superstitions of the age. During the seventh and eighth centuriej the zeal of British, Scotch, and Irish Chris- tians, induced many devoted individuals to undertake extensive and laborious missions in 318 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. Germany, Belgium, France, and the unevan- gelized parts of England, Scotland, and Ire- land. These benevolent toils were not unfre- quently shared by princes and nobles, when converted from paganism to Christianity. As instances of this, it is recorded that when Aidan, a monk of Ireland, and a zealous and success- ful missionary in tlie north of BnglaBd, under- took his missionary tours, Oswald, a British prince, who had been baptized and educated m Ireland, acted as his interpreter. About this period, Corbmkm, a, French Benedictine monk, labored assiduously among the Bavar rians. Firmin, a Gaul by birth, preached in Alsace, Bavaria, and Switzerland. Century IX. — Rumold, a native of England or Ireland, had long been an example of piety at home, when, animated by a desire for the conversion of the heathen nations, he visited Rome, and earnestly solicited an appointment as a missionary. His request was granted, and he not only received the Papal benedic- tion, but was also " ordained a reigionary, or missionary bishop, without any fixed see." Anasdi-a.rnis, or Ajtasgar, preached the Gospel to the Danes and Swedes, and other northern nations, and so extraordinary were his labors and success, as to cause him to be termed " The Ajjosde of the North." The missionaries who accompanied him, or whom he sent out, were directed by him to the apostle Paul, as an example of missiorjfxry zeal. To these and other Christian worthies who lived at this period, we may justly add the name of Adalard or Alard, the cousin-german of Charlemagne. He appears to have been tru-ly pious from early years ; and though obliged to fill several important offices by the emperor's order at court, he retained his love of privacy and retirement. He founded seve- ral monasteries, in which he promoted learning and science. His favorite institution, how- ever, was a missionary college, as it might be justly called, founded by him at New Corbie, or Cosway, nine leagues from Paderborn, upon the Weser, expressly instituted to be a nursery of evangelical laborers in the instruction and conversion of the northern nations. Anascha- rius, mentioned above, was one of its greatest ornaments. This period has been emphati- cally called " The Age of Missions." The ninth century was likewise rendered re- markable by the attempts of Constantine, (or Cyr-il) and Methodius, two Greek monks, to evangelize several Sclavonian tribes. They were the sons of Leo, a Greek nobleman, of Thessalonica. Cyril, the younger brother, was the most distinguished for his literary ac- quirements and knowledge of the Holy Scrip- tures. In his youth he had enjoyed the best education as a companion to the young Prince Michael ; but on the proposal to him of what was deemed a highly important matrimonial alliance, but which he disapproved, he with- drew from court, and retired for some time into a monastery. In 857 he visited Constan- tinople, and shortly afterwards proceeded on a mission to the country of the Khazars ; and proved successful in prevaiUng with the prince, some of his nobles, and many of his people, to embrace the profession of Christi- anity. He then visited the Bulgarians, with the same design, and succeeded in baptizing many of them. Methodiiis, the other brother, filled the office of governor on the Sclavonian frontiers for ten years, affording a most favor- able opportunity of acquiring a knowledge of the Sclavonian language. He afterwards ac- companied his brother in his mission to the Khazars, and other nations. An application being made to the Greek emperor, by certain MoravoSclavonian princes, for teachers to instruct their people in the truths of the Holy Scriptures, the two brothers were at once named as the fittest persons for the undertak- ing. Being appointed to the charge, they en- gaged in the translation of the Scriptures, on which they are said to have employed four years and a half, at the same time instructing the inhabitants of Moravia. Afterwards they visited Rome, where Cyril became a monk, and died there, ,in the year 871. To effect the object of translation, Cyril, with the assistance, as some think, of his brother, Methodius, in- vented an alphabet, adapted to the language of the Sclavonic tribes, to whom they were sent. Whether they translated the whole of the Old and New Testaments, or the New Testament principally, is uncertain. Such, however, has been the attachment to this an- cient Sclavonic version, that no other is per- mitted to be read in the churches ; and there existed no version in the modern Russ prior to the year 1816, when the Emperor Alexander ordered a translation to be made, that his own subjects might be favored, like other nations, with the Scriptures, in their vernacular tongue, the Sclavonian lang-uage having been for cen- turies obsolete, and nearly as difficult to a, modern Russ as the Anglo-Saxon to an En- glishman. — (See Report of British and Foreign Bible Society.) This order of the emperor having been partially carried into execution, the whole of the New Testament was printed in 1823. Since that time the printing of the Scriptures in modern Russ has been sus- pended principally by the intrigues of the Jesu- its and flie opposition of the Emperor Nicho- las. — (Henderson's Biblical Researches, p. 132.) About the year 867, under the reign of the Emperor Basilius, the Macedonian, the Sela- vonians, Arentani, and others, inhabitants of Dalmatia, .sent an embassy to Constantinople, declaring their resolution of submitting to the Grecian empire, and of embracing the Chris- tian religion, and requesting to be supplied with suitable teachers. Their request was granted, and those provinces were included within the pale of the church. The fierce and barbarous nation of the Russians, inhabitants EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 319 of the Ukraine, embraced the Gospel under the reign of the same emperor. Bat what has already been said as to the nature of such conversions, must be borne in mind. In the case of individuals, the profession of Chris- tianity may have been sincere ; but as to the great body of the people, it was probably merely formal. In the course of this century, Christianity began to be preached in the fro- zen regions of Scandinavia, and on the shores of the Baltic, which had hitherto been involv- ed in the grossest pagan darkness. In the year 826, Harold, king of Jutland, being ex- pelled from his dominions, implored the pro- tection of the Emperor Louis, the son and successor of Charlemagne. That prince pro- mised him his assistance on condition that he would embrace Christianity, and permit the ministers of that religion to preach in his do- minions, to which he consented. He was ac- cordingly baptized, and returned to his own country, attended by two ecclesiastics, Ansca- rius and Aubert, monks of Corbri. These ven- erable missionaries labored with remarkable success during two years in converting the rude inhabitants of Cimbria and Jutland. On the death of his companion, the zealous and indefatigable Aitscariiis went into Sweden, a. d. 828, where his exertions were also crowned with success. After having been raised in the year 831, to the archbishopric of Hamburgh, and of the whole north, to which charge the superintendence of the church of Bremen was afterwards added, this missionary spent the re- mainder of his life in traveling frequently amongst the Danes, Cimbriaas, and Swedes, to form new churches, to confirm and establish those which had been already planted, and otherwise to promote the cause of Christianity. He continued in the midst of these arduous and dangerous enterprises till his death, in the year 865. Rembert, his successor in the super- intendence of the church of Bremen, began, towards the close of this century, to preach to the inhabitants of Brandenhurgh, and made some progress towards their conversion. — (Peakson's Brief Historic View of the Progress ef the Gospel, page 29.) About the middle of this century, the standard of the cross began to be unfurled among the Bulgarians, a Scla^ vonic people of extraordinary fierceness, who had long proved extremely troublesome, by their contiguity to the Greek emperors. The sister of their king Bogoris having been taken prisoner in a military excursion, was carried to Oonstaatinople, where she heard and em- braced the Gospel. After some time she was ransomed, and on her return home she was so deeply affected by her brother's idolatrous practices, that she earnestly sought to convince him of the absurdity of his worship. The king listened attentively to her arguments, but did not appear inclined to change his religion, till, on the appearance of a pestilence in his dominions, he was persuaded to pray to the God of the Christians, and the plague wjis al- most immediately removed. This circum- stance convinced him of the omnipotent pow- er of Jesus, and he took an early opportunity of sending to Constantinople for missionaries, from whom he and many of his subjects re- ceived baptism. Moshiem remarks, that " the missionaries of this period were superior, both in their principles and conduct, to those of preceding ages, as they were more anxious to inform the minds of men than to extend the domination of the Pope, and they made no attempts to add to the number of their con- verts by rigid and coercive measures, altoge- ther inconsistent with the spirit of the Gospel." — (Smith's History and Origin of Missionary Societies, Vol. I. pp. 49, 50.) Centuhy X. — In the tenth century, the Christian church presented a deplorable scene of ignorance, superstition, and immorality. Amidst the darkness, however, which universal- ly prevailed, some rays of light occasionally ap- pear. The Nestorians continued their missionary labors. The Hungarians and Avari had re- ceived some imperfect ideas of Christianity during the reign of Charlemagne ; but, on his decease, they relapsed into idolatry, and the Christian religion was almost extinguished among them. Towards the middle of this century, two Turkish chiefs, Bolngndes and Gylas, whose territories lay on the banks of the Danube, made a public profession of Chris- tianity, and were baptized at Constantinople. Of these, the former soon apostatised ; the other steadily persevered, received instruction from Hierotheiis, a bishop who had accompa- nied him from Constantinople, and encouraged his labors among his subjects. Yarolta, the daughter of Gylas, being afterwards married to Geysa, the chief of the Hungarian nation, he was by her persuaded to embrace Christi- anity. Geysa, however, still retained a predi- lection for his ancient superstitions, and was only prevented from apostatising by the zeal and authority of Adalbert, archbishop of Prague, who visited Hungary towards the con- clusion of this century. But however imper- fect might be the conversion of the King, the most salutary consequences followed the recep- tion of the Gospel by his subjects. Humanity, peace, and civilization, began to flourish among a fierce and barbarous people. — The inhabitants of Poland were, during this cen- tury, blessed with the knowledge of Christi- anity. Some Poles, traveling into Bohemia and Moravia, were struck with the preaching of the Gospel, and on their return, earnestly recommended it to the att^ention of their countrymen. The report at length reaching the ears of Micislaus, the Duke of Poland, he was induced to divorce his seven wives, and married Dambronca, the daughter of Boleslaus, Duke of Bohemia. He was baptized in the year 965, and, by the zealous eftorts of the Duke and Duchess, their subjects were either 320 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. persuaded or obliged, by degrees, to abandon their idolatry, and profess the religion of Christ. The conversions -which had taken place in Russia during the preceding century, were neither sincere nor permanent. But in the year 961, Wolodomir having married Anne, sister of the Greek Emperor Basilius the Second, was prevailed upon by that princess to receive the Christian faith. He was ac- cordingly baptized in the year 987. The Rus- sians followed, without compulsion or reluc- tance, the example of their prince ; and from that time Russia received a Christian estab- lishment, and considered herself as a daughter of the Greek Church. In Scandinavia Chris- tianity, which had been so successfully intro- duced during the preceding century, had met with a severe check in Denmark, under the reign of Gormo the Third, who labored to ex- tirpate it entirely. At length, however, he was compelled by Henry the First, called the Fowler, the predecessor of Otlio the Great, to permit the profession and propagation of Christianity in his dominions ; and under the protection of the emperor, JJnni, then Archbishop of Ham- burgh, with some other ecclesiastics, (Same into Denmark, and formed many Christian churches in that kingdom. On the death of Gormo, his successor Harold, being defeated by Otho the Great, A. D. 94-9, by the command of his con- queror, though not unwillingly, embraced the Gospel, and zealously supported and propaga^ ted it amongst his subjects during his reign. Suen-Otho, however, his son and successor, en- tirely renounced the Christian name, and per- secuted his Christian subjects in the most cruel manner. At length, being driven from his- throne, and forced into exile among the Scots, he was led to reflect on his Christian education, and to repent of his apostasy ; and being restored to his Tiingdom, spent the re- mainder of his life in the most sincere and earnest endeavors to promote the cause of Christianity in his dominions. In Sweden, an almost entire extinction of the Gospel had taken place. Unni, animated by his success in Denmark, determined, therefore, on a1> tempting a revival of it in that country. His pious exertions were rendered prosperous, and he had the happiness of confirming the Gospel in Sweden, and of planting it even in the re meter parts of that northern region. It was during this century that Norway first received the Christian faith. Several attempts were previously made in the early part of it, which were altogether unsuccessful. The barbarous Norwegians resisted both the exhortations of the English missionaries, and the more forci- ble endeavors of their princes, to convert them from their idolatry,, till the year 945, when Haco, King of Norway, who had been driven from his throne, was restored by Harold, King of Denmark ; and having been converted by that prince during his exile, publicly recom- mended Christianity to his subjects. The im- pression, however, which was then made upon their minds, was but slight ; nor were they en- tirely persuaded to become Christians till the reign of his successor Olaus. At length Swein, King of Denmark, having conquered Norway, obliged his subjects universally to renounce idolatry, and to profess the Gospel. Among the missionaries whose labors were render- ed successful in this work, Guthebald, an English priest, was the most eminent, both in merit and authority. From Norway, Chris- tianity spread into the Orkney Islands, which were then subject to that country, and pene- trated in some degree, even into the remote region of Iceland. So that in this century the triumph of Christianity was complete through- out Scandinaivia. (Pearson's Jirief Historic View of the Progress of the Gospel, p. 30-33.) Though this century was proverbially an age of darkness, yet the Gospel continued to spread. And it has been well remarked that although " the efforts of the missionaries at this period, had their defects, yet they form the principal glory of those times, and appear to have been attended by the power of the Holy Spirit, to the genuine conversion of numbers, and the improvement of human society." (Buedek's Miss. Anec, p. 129.) From the end of the sixth to the ninth cen- tury, the progress of the Gospel continued with varied success, among the Gothic tribes. After that period, in the tenth century, the field of missionary labor extended itself still further towards the Bast. Beyond the limits already named, amid the barren table lands of Scla- vonia and Sarmartia, shut in by the Elbe and the Oural mountains, were gathered the wandering tribes distinguished by the name of Sclaves, who presented a still more hopeless task to Christian zeal. Uncontrolled by any govern- ment or law, deeming even the formation of villages an infringement of liberty, guided only by traditionary custom, they dispersed through- out the forests and plains of that wide district, clustered in family groups, with no unity, either of national existence, or of habit, or even of re- ligion. A vague superstition, consisting of a rude worship of nature's powers, with stated sacrifices, and the dualistic notion of the East, derived from contact with the Scythian tribes, possessed their minds with a sense of religious awe ; but, throughout the whole race, even the idea of the immortality of the soul had become extinct. One social virtue had the force of law amongst them ; and the obligation to hospi- tality aflbrded an opening for the strangers of the West to gain an entrance among them. Partly, and in the first instance, from the Greek Church, by the two apostles of Poland and Prussia, Cyril and Methodius ; afterwards, and more perfectly, by emissaries from the Latin Church, in various ways, and at varioua intervals, the prevailing form of Christianity was propagated in these countries from the tenth to the sixteenth centuries ; and dm'ing EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 321 the same period, by missionaries chiefly from the monastery of Neuf Corbie, on the banks of the Weser, and from the British Isles. And thus, by the end of the thirteenth century, pa- ganism may be said to have been well nigh banished from the limits of'Europe. (Geant's Bampton Lecture, p. 112.) Anschar, the apostle of Denmark and Swe- den, A.D. 826, and Giselmar, who followed him to Denmark, were sent from Neuf Corbie. Missionaries were brought by Hakon, king of Norway, into his dominions, (938.) Chris- tianity was not, however, permanently intro- duced before the reign of Ulaf I., who was ac- companied from England by John Sigard, (993.) Olaf II. afterwards requested mission- aries of Canute, upon which, Sigfrid, first bishop of Wexia, Gomkill, and others, were sent into Norway, (1019.) — (History Ecdes. of Adam Bremensis.) In Germany, the exertions of the Emperor Otho contributed, in a signal manner, to pro- mote the interests of Christianity, and to estab- lish it on the most firm foundation throughout the empira At the earnest request of the Rugi, a remarkably barbarous people, who in- habited the country of Pomerania, between the Oder and the Wipper, and the Isles of Rugen in the Baltic, that zealous prince sent Ada'oert among them, to revive the know- ledge of Christianity which had formerly ex- isted, but was then extinguished. The mission, however, was unsuccessful ; but Adalbert, who was appointed the first Archbishop of Mag- deburgh, was successful in converting great numbers of Sdavonians. Throughout this century, the Saracens in Asia and Africa, successfully propagated the doctrines of Mohammed ; and multitudes, even of Christians, were the victims of their delu- sions. The Turks also received the religion of the Arabian impostors ; and, turning their arms against the Saracens, began to lay the foundations of that powerful empire which they afterwards established. (Peakson's Brief Historic View, p. 34.) Adalbert, archbishop of Prague, visited Hun- gary, and afterwards traveled as missionary to Poland, and planted the Gospel in Dantzic ; and was at length, like many of the mission- aries already named, murdered by the Pagans. Otho the Great, emperor of Germany, distin- guished himself in this age, by his zeal for religion, by erecting and endowing churches, and promoting the propagation of the Gospel among barbarous nations. Nor was his em- press, Adelaide, less remarkable for her piety and liberality. English missionaries, particu- larly Bernard, were the active instruments in planting the standard of the Cross in the Orkney Islands and Greenland. The conversion of the Normans is likewise said to have taken place in this century, on the occasion of the marriage of Rollo, Duke of Normandy, to Giesla, daughter of Charles the Simple, king of France; 21 but, such matrimonial conversions may be justly doubted : they might assume the name without the change to Christianity. Hungary, which had . previously received some iaint dawnings of the Christian faith, became, toward the .end of this century, more enlightened. Among those tribes of uncer- tain origin, who assailed Europe at the time of the dissolution of the Carolingan empire, were the Magyars, who emerged from Asia, and established themselves near the Bon. Being expelled from those regions, they penetrated into Ukraine, from whence they were driven away by the Eussians, and then arrived in Dacia, under the name of Hungarians, (889.) At the head of the Magyar hordes was the princely race of Arpud. The tribes were seven in number, each being commanded by a chief, almost independent. Christianity, as we have seen, penetrated among them under the reign of Geysa I., who was converted from heathen- ism, by the exertions of his wife Sarolta ; and was baptized towards 980. But the general conversion of the Hungarians to Christianity took place under the reign of their son Stephen, one of the most celebrated kings of that na- tion, who was at once the apostle and legis- lator of Hungary, and the true founder of that monarchy. In his reign churches were erected, bishoprics established, and the profession of Christianity became general in all parts of the country. The tenth century has been emphatically styled " an iron age, barren of all goodness ;. a leaden age, abounding in all wickedness; and a dark age, remarkable above all others for the scarcity of writers and men of learning." In this deplorable state of the church, however, some rays of light, as shown in these previous records, passed across the gloomy scene, and some pleasing occurrences evinced that God had not yet " forgotten to be gracious " to his humble worshipers. Several of the churches still possessed the oracles of divine truth in the vulgar tongue ; the supremacy of the Bo- man pontifif was In some places opposed with heroic firmness, and the doctrine of transub- stantiation was denied by many to whom the Holy Spirit had revealed " the truth as it -is in Jesus." (SmdA, Vol. I. p. 51.) In the dark- est ages of Christianity, the few rays of light yet unextinguished, appear in connection with the efforts of missionaries to evangelize the heathen. Centoey XI. — In the early part of this cen- tury the Christian religion was further ex- tended in the kingdoms of Srveden, Norway, and Denmark, and also in Germany, by the assistance of English missionaries. The con- ductors of the mission were Sigefrid, Archdea^ con of Tork, Eschil, Gunechild, Eudolf, and Bernard. The names of others are likewise mentioned, as laborious and useful messengers of truth among the barbarous European tribes : thus, it is related of William, an English priest. 322 EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. who attended Canute in one of his voyages to Denmark, that he was so affected with the idolatry of the Danes, that he desired to be left among them as a missionary, and had the happiness of finding his labors not in vain in the Lord. The zeal of the Nestorian Christians con- tinued to be conspicuous in this century. In Tartary and the adjacent countries they suc- ceeded in converting great numbers to the profession of Christianity. The Hght which had been diffused during the preceding centuries among the Hungari- ans, Danes, Poles, and Eussians, was consider- ably increased and extended by the zealous en- deavors of their princes, and of the mission- aries who labored among them. Century XII. — The twelfth century was noted for attempts to spread the Gospel bythe sword. Waldemir I., King of Denmark, in particular, distinguished himself by his endeav- ors to propagate Christianity by force of arms, especially among the Sdavonians, Venedi, Van- dals, and other northern tribes. In these war- like methods of forcing his subjects .to listen to evangelical instructions, he was zealously encouraged and aided by Asalom, Archbishop of Lunden. The inhabitants of the island of Rugen, a fierce and savage people, were num- bered among his conquests. The Finlanders were driven to accept of peace on similar terms by Erick IX., King of Sweden, who was ac- companied in his bloody campaign by Henry, Archbishop of Upsal. The Livonians, on re- jecting the missionary instructions of Main- hard, a monk of Segeberg, were, on an appeal made by Mainhard to the Eoman Pontiff, Innocent III., subjected to the horrors of war. An equestrian military order, of " Knights Sword Bearers," instituted for the express pur- pose of converting pagans, was sent against them. During the Livonian war, they exer- cised the greatest cruelty and injustice, not merely by the slaughter of numbers of the in- habitants, but by the confiscation of their pro- perty. These forced conversions, however, as might have been expected, effected but little more than a profession of obedience to the See of Rome, and a constrained attention to cer- tain forms and ceremonies, substituted for idol ■worship, while the profoundest ignorance re- mained of the true nature of the Gospel. This, indeed, appears to have been an age peculiarly distinguished by the institution of religious military orders, such as the Knights of Si. John of Jerusalem, now called the " Knights of Malta," originally instituted for the care of the sick, and the protection of pil- grims in the Holy Land ; the Knights Templars, so called from their occupying on their first establishment a house in Jerusalem, near the site of the temple, and designed to guard pil- grims from the violence of the infidels, when visiting Jerusalem ; The Order of Montjoye, instituted to fight against infidels, especially the Moors of Spain ; fte Toiiuguese Order cf Avis, established for the same purpose ; the Order of St. Lazarus, who received pilgrims, in Jerusalem, in houses founded purposely for them, and then conducted them on their way, and defended them against the Mohammedans ; the Order of Knights of St. James, united for the protection of pilgrims visiting the relics of St. James of Compostella from the ill-treat- ment of the Moors ; and the Order of Teutonic Knights, founded originally by some Germans, who built a hospital at Jerusalem for the pil- grims of their nation, and approved by Pope Celestine III. After the loss of the Holy Land, these knights returned to Germany, and, by their warlike prowess, made themselves masters of Prussia, Livonia, Courland, and Semigallia. To these may be added the order of Christ's Militia, instituted by Dominic for the extirpation of the Albigenses. An emi- nent Romish theologian attempts the defence of the warlike character of these institutions, by the following specious reasoning : " Two very different things," he says, " are confounded by the Protestants, the object and the inten- tion, the conduct of the knights, and that of the missionaries. The knights were never constituted preachers, and the missionaries were never armed. The barbarians were wild beasts ; it was necessary to make them men first, and to reduce them by force, before it could be expected to make them Christians. The first of these exploits belonged to the knights ; the rest was reserved for the mission- aries. When the warriors had done their part, they remained to protect the mission- aries, in order to the peaceful performance of their labors." — (Beegier's Did. Theologique, Ordres Mihtaires, tome VI.) Most of these military orders owed their institution to the Crusades of this century, un- dertaken by the Eoman Catholic princes of Europe for the recovery of Jerusalem from the Mohammedans; an outburst of religious fanaticism, by which all Europe and Western Asia wore convulsed. They were the legiti- mate offepring of ignorance, superstition, and fanaticism combined, guided by the amlii- tious designs of the Church of Rome. They deserve no notice in this connection, except so far as their influence upon Europe and the rest of the world, may have tended to prepare the way for the Protestant Eeformation, and ulti- mately for the universal diffusion of the Gos- pel. They broke the slumber of ages like an earthquake at miduight. They roused the minds of Europe, long besotted in ignorance and barbarism ; and thus prepared it to grasp the great and soul-stirring truths of the Ee- formation. They quickened the energies of nations, to provide for vast armies, and awaken- ed their enterprise to fit out fleets ; and thus navigation received a new impulse, opening the way for commerce, which, in its turn, opened a door for Christian missions. Its ex- EARLY CHRISTIAN MSSIONS. 323 peditions also promoted geograpliical discov- eries, and acquainted the mind of Christendom somewhat with the extent of heathenism. It is thus that the overruling providence of God brings good out of evil, and order out of confu- sion, and makes the wildest fanaticism and the most horrible scenes of war and bloodshed con- tribute to the extension of his kingdom. For the further examination of this subject see Gibbon's Decline and Fall, ch. Lxi. ; Mosheim Cent. XI. Part I. ch. i. ; Robeiison's Charles v.; Channing on Associations; Guizot's His- tory of Civilization, sec. 8 ; Encyclopedia Brit- annica, Art.Crusades ; Campbell's Maritime Dis- covery and Christian Missions. The propagation of the Gospel was success- fully continued in this century, chiefly in the north of Europe. Boleslaus, cluke of Poland, having taken Stetin, the capital of Pomerania, by storm, and laid waste the surrounding coun- try, compelled the vanquished inhabitants to submit at discretion, and imposed upon them, as a condition of peace, their reception of Christianity. The conqueror sent Otlm, bishop of Bamberg, in the year 1124, to instruct his new subjects. Many of them, among whom were the duke and duchess, and their attend- ants, were brought over ; but great numbers of the idolatrous Pomeranians, as might have been expected, resisted appeals made at the point of the sword, and adliered to the superstitions of their ancestors. In a second visit, in the year 1126, the bishop was more successful, and the prevailing form of Christianity was estab- lished in Pomerania. In the year 1168, Waldemar, king of Den- mark, who was foremost among the northern princes of this century, by his zeal in the pro- pagation of Christianity, having subdued the island of Rugen, which lies in the neighbor- hood of Pomerania, obliged its rude and pirar tical inhabitants to listen to the instructions of the missionaries who accompanied his array. Among these Absalom, archbishop of Lunden, was distinguished ; and, by his exertions, Christianity was introduced into this island, which had hitherto bafiied every attempt. The Finlanders, whose character resembled that of the inhabitants of Hugen, and who in- fested Sweden with their predatory incursions, received Christianity in a similar manner. Eric, king of Sweden, having totally defeated these barbarians, sent Henry, archbishop of Upsal, to evangelize them. His success was so great, that he is called Tlie Apostle of tlie Finlanders ; yet he was at length assassinated by some of these refractory people on account of a heavy penance which he had imposed on a person of great authority. In L'vonia, the labors of Mainard, the first missionary who attempted the conversion of that barbarous people, having proved unsuc- cessful, the Roman pontiff, Urban the Third, who had consecrated him bishop of the Livo- nians, declared a crusade against them, which was zealously carried on by that ecclesiastic, and by his successors, Berthold and Albert. These warlike apostles, at the head of great bodies of troops raised in Saxony, successively entered Livonia, and compelled the wretched inhabitants to receive baptism. Century XIII. — The thirteenth century af- fords few records of missionary labor. It was however, distinguished by the institution of the Order of the Franciscans, or of friar mis- sions, and the endeavors of James I. of Arra^on to communicate Christian instruction to his Moorish subjects by the establishment of Arab- ic schools and the translation of books into the Arabic language. These schools were chioiiy at Majorca and Barcelona, in which a consid- erable number of youths were educated for preachers ; but these efforts proving ineffectual, he listened to the advice of the Romish Pon- tiff, Clement TV., who exhorted him to drive the Mohammedans out of Spain by force, in- stead of missionary efforts. Francis of Assisi, the founder of the Fran- ciscans, undertook a mission to Palestine him- self, and sent several monks of his order as missionaries into Germany, Greece, France, England, and to the Moors in Spain. Johan- nes a Mcmte Corvino, a monk of this order, was sent into Tartary, by Pope Nicholas IV., resided there for many years, and translated the Psalms of David, and the New Testament, into the Tartar language. The Dominicans of Spain applied themselves to the oriental languages and rabbinical liter- ature, and were employed by the king of Spain in the instruction of the numerous Jews and Saracens, who resided in his dominions. Both the Franciscans and the Dominicans sent out many persons as missionaries to various coun- tries ; but the most of them were more solici- tous to make proselytes to the Boraish Church than to teach their converts the scriptural way of salvation. The Wcddenses and Albigenses, in this cen- tury, were distinguished witnesses for the truth — the martyrs of the age ; and though com- pelled to maintain a defensive, rather than ag- gressive position, yet they did much to prepare the way for the reformation, by the secret dif- fusion of the Gospel among the nominal Chris- tians of Europe. But the records of their labors are scanty, and they do not come pro- perly under the denomination of missions to the heathen. And this century furnishes little more, in the way of missions to the heathen, than details of military conquests, by which heathen nations were compelled to yield a nominal conformity to the Church of Rome. Century XIY.— Wickliffe, "the Morning Star of the Reformation," rendered the four- teenth century a remarkable epoch in the histo- ry of the Church, by the intrepidity and success with which he contended against the errors and the corruptions of the Church of Rome, and by his translation of the Scriptures into 324 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. what was, at that time, the vernacular tongue of England, though now utterly obsolete. The followers of Wickliffe, generally called Lollards, among whom was Sir John Oldcastle, other- wise called Lord Cobham, were anxious to diffuse as extensively as possible, the doctrines promulgated by their learned anti-papal chief. They expended considerable sums in collecting and transcribing (printing not having been in- vented,) and dispersing the works of Wicklifle, and in maintaining a number of itinerant preachers, who preached in churchyards and market-places, particularly in the dioceses of Canterbury, London, Rochester, and Hereford. Bale says that Lord Cobham caused all the works of Wicklifle to be copied by the desire of John Huss, and to be sent into France, Spain, Bohemia, and other foreign countries. Queen Anne of Bohemia favored the adherents of Wickliffe; possessing and constantly reading the G-ospels in four languages, Bohemian, Ger- man, Latin, and English. Many of her atten- dants imbibed the same opinions, and on their return to Bohemia, after her decease in 1394, carried with them the writings of Wickliffe and his disciples ; by which means they were widely dispersed, and produced a powerful anti- papal influence, not only in Bohemia, but also in other neighboring states. Oentdey XV.— The fifteenth century was rendered remarkable by many important events, which, though not strictly missionary, yet, in their influence, have in some cases so greatly forwarded, and in others so greatly re- tarded, the progress of the Gospel, that we may just glance at their occurrence and char- acter. One of these was the discovery of Amer- ica by Christopher Columbus, in 1492, and the subsequent landing of the Portuguese Ameri- cus Vespucius, in Brazil ; a second was the dis- covery of tlie passage to India by sea, by Vasco de Gama, in 1497 ; and another was the ruin of the Gi-eek empire, in the taking of Constan- tinople by the Turks, in 1453. By the first of these events, an immense extent of country was eventually placed under the control of the Boman Catholic princes of Spain and Portu- gal ; and hence these kingdoms were induced to make extraordinary and ultimately success- ful efforts, to introduce and establish Popery, in its most superstitious and degrading forms, throughout the continent of South America, and the kingdom of Mexico. By the discov- ery of a passage to India, by doubling the Cape of Good Hope, the intercourse between England and the East Indies was greatly facil- itated ; the previous routes having been through Egypt and Persia ; and, by the over- throw of the Greek empire, many learned men fled for security into various European states, and, by the diffusion of literature and science, prepared the way for the Reformation of the following century. But, probably, no occur- rence of this age proved of greater interest than the Invention of Printing, by Guttmberg and his associates and successors, about the middle of this century ; the slow and expen- sive mode of transcription being the only way previously known of multiplying copies of books, however valuable. But, by the inven- tion of this most useful art, and the improve- ments of later years, copies of valuable works can be rapidly and cheaply multiplied ; and millions of persons have by this means been furnished with the Holy Scriptures, who, otherwise, must have remained destitute. The military expeditions of the Papists con- tinued during this century, and some of them, among which were those of Don Henry, Duke of Viseo, (Portugal,) and Grand Master of the Order of Christ, were productive of im- portant results, in the way of maritime discov- eries, &c. ; but the events of this century, of a purely missionary character, were few and comparatively ineffectual. In the East, the Nestorian Patriarch, who resided in Chaldea, sent missionaries into Cathay and China, who , were empowered to exercise episcopal author- ity over the Christian assemblies, which lay concealed in the remote provinces of those great empires, affording a demonstrative proof, that notwithstanding the dreadful persecutions that had been exercised by the dominant au- thorities against the Nestorian Christians, there were still some churches existing in those regions of darkness. There were also individuals, whose consis- tency of conduct and zeal for the dissemina- tion of Christianity in this dark age, entitle them to our notice and admiration. Such, for instance, were the two brothers, Vincent and Boniface Ferrer, Tliomas a Kempis and John Wesselus. Vincent Ferrer was a Spaniard by birth ; at his own earnest request he was ap- pointed apostolical missionary, by Pope Bene- dict XIII., and for many years preached with indefatigable ardor in different parts of Eu- rope. He visited Spain, France, the Nether- lands, Germany, and at the request of Henry rv., England, Scotland, and Ireland. The usual subjects of his sermons were death, judg- ment, and eternity. Milner says, that " though bred in the midst of darkness, and connected with the worst of ecclesiastical characters, he was a shining model of piety." He died in 1419, at the age of sixty-two. Boniface Fer- rer, the brother of Vincent, was a zealous preacher of the word of God, and having em- braced the monastic life, he successively rose to high official situations, and died prior of the Carthusian monastery of Pontaleli, in Valen- cia, in 1417, after having translated the Scrip- tures into the Valencian or Oatalonian dialect of Spain. — (See McOrie's History of the Re- formation in Spain, p. 191.) Thomas a Kem- pis, whose piety has received a perpetual mon- ument in his " Christian's Pattern," was born at Chempis or Kempis, in Cologne, in 1380, and became one of the most illustrious members of the society of the " Brethren of EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 325 the Common Life;" a society founded by Gerard de Groot, who, having retired into a monastery, devoted himself to prayer and the reformation of immoral characters, and insti- tuted a fraternity, having one common pro- perty, and earning their livelihood by their pens. Kempis died in 1471, in the ninety-first year of his age. His excellent work, " The Christian's Pattern," has been translated into most of the European languages, and even into Chinese. A beautiful copy of the Bible transcribed by him, is preserved in the library of the regular canons, at Cologne. — (Town- ley's Blustrations of Biblical Literatwre, V ol. I. p. 328.) John de Capistrano may be added as an instance of the activity and energy of the pious, though mistaken, missionary agents of the Bomish church. He was a Franciscan friar, of a wealthy Neapolitan family, and was sent to convert the Bohemians, and to preach in Saxony, Misnia, and Moravia, and is said to have been everywhere received with banners, crosses, and processions, like a sovereign prince. He is said to have preached at Erfurd to 60,000 persons, the men being arranged on one side and the women on the other. When ignorant of the language, he was assisted by an inter- preter, who explained what he delivered to the people. His sermons were accompanied with violent action, so that he is said to have " preached with his hands and his feet as well as with his voice," which corresponds with the accounts given of him by an English historian, who relates that " he itinerated through the cities and towns, addressing sermons to the people, in the highways and market places, against the enemies of the Eomish Church. Among the Germans and those that were ig- norant of the Italian, he is said to have affecl^ ed the minds of his audience in a wonderful manner, by using gesticulations instead of words." — (See Tcener's Modern History of England, V ol. II. p. 9.) His death occurred October 23, 1456, being seventy-one years of age. Centuet XVI. — The happy reformation from Popery illustriously signalized the com- mencement of the sixteenth century ; the year 1517 being regarded as its commencement, when Luther first publicly opposed the monk Tetzel, in his sale of papal indulgences. The adherents of the Reformation were called Pro- testants, from their protesting against an intol- erant decree of the Diet of Spires, in 1529. As the Eeformation proceeded, those who had embraced the views of its advocates became increasingly desirous of emancipating the in- habitants of their native lands, and of other adjacent countries, from the errors of the Ko- mish church. This object they pursued with indefatigable zeal ; and in order to accom- plish it, translations of the Holy Scriptures were made into the vernacular tongues, and widely dispersed ; while plain and homely rhymes, embodying the opinions of the re- formers, were composed, and put into the hands of poor people, who made a livelihood by singing them through the country. It is related, that on one occasion a poor man, who had received the printed copies of some of these rhymes, repaired to Wittemberg, and, in the course of his progrees through the town, sung them under Luther's windows. The at^ tention of Luther was caught by the subject, and when on inquiry he learned the name of the author, he is said to have burst into tears, and rendered thanks to God for making such humble expedients conducive to the propaga- tion of truth. In pursuance of the same great object, missionaries were sent into Boman Ca- tholic States to preach the distinguishing doc- trines of the Eeformation, especially that of justification by faith, and tracts, often denomi- nated libels, or little books, were composed and extensively dispersed, containing defences of the Protestant tenets, detached books of Scripture, or exposures of Papal errors or practices. An expedition was fitted out in the year 1555, by Villegagnon, a, knight of Malta, un- der the patronage of Henry 11. of Fra,nce, with the view to establish a French colony in the new world. The approbation of the mo- narch was secured by the medium of the excel- lent Admiral de Coligny, whose favor Villegag- non propitiated by the secret understanding that the projected colony should protect the reformed religion. Accordingly Calvin, the reformer of Geneva, was applied to, in order to obtain ministers to embark with the expe- dition. After consultation with the other pastors of Geneva, he sent two, Guillaume CJiartier and Pierre Richier, who were after- wards joined by sevei-al others. Their object was at once to labor among the colonists, and to evangelize the heathen aborigines. This was the_^rsi! attempt at a foreign mission, by the Protestant churches. The expedition reached Fort Coligny, as it was named, on the Eio de Janeiro, in Brazil, in March, 1556. On their arrival the Genevan ministers proceed- ed to constitute a church, according to the forms and rites of the reformed churches, and celebrated the Lord's Supper. But Villegag- non soon betrayed his true character, and after cruelly maltreating the missionaries, forced them to reembark, and return to France. The next attempt to send the Gospel to heathen countries was made by the celebrated re- former and king of Sweden, Gustavus Vasa. About the year 1559, a missionary was sent by that monarch to Lapland. The natives were at the same time commanded to congre- gate at a certain season of the year to pay their tribute and receive religious instruction from this missionary. — (Baikd's Christian Re- trospect, p. 296.J Internal strifes and gainsayings, hostilities from without fomented by Bome, and perplex- ities from within, exhausted the energies of 326 EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. Christian men in England, during the reigns of Elizabeth and James ; and for 150 years nothing was undertaken for propagating the Gospel in other lands. A scheme to rival the Eoman propaganda was devised by Cromwell, but never realized. Burnet says that Crom- well resolved to set up a council for the Pro- testant religion, in opposition to the congcgra- tion De Propaganda Fide at Eome. He in- tended it should consist of several counsellors, and four secretaries for different provinces. These were, the first — France, Switzerland, and the valleys ; the Palatine and other Calvin- ists were the second ; Germany, the North, and Turkey were the third ; and the East and West Indies were the fourth. The secre- taries were to have £500 salary arpiece, and to keep a correspondence everywhere, to know the state of religion all over the world, that so all good designs might be, by their means, pro- tected and assisted. Stmqje was to have the first provinces. They were to have a fund of £10,000 a-year at their disposal for ordinary emergencies, but to be farther supplied as occasion should require it. Chelsea College was to be made up for them, which was then an old decayed building, that had been at first raised to be a college for wi'iters of contro- versy.". — Burnet's History of his own Times, Vol. I. p. 132.) (For any further notices of Eoman Catho- lic missions, see " Church of Eome, Missions of.") Under the impression of duty, and that of feeling and benevolence towards others, cre- ated by the enjoyment of experimental Chris- tianity, many of the laity who had felt the power of Divine grace in their own hearts, by the preaching of the doctrines of the reforma- tion, became exceedingly anxious that others should partake of their happiness, and gladly seized the opportunities presented to them by mercantile intercourse to disseminate the truths which they themselves had embraced. France, Spain, Italy, and other countries thus received the rays of Divine light for a season, though partially or entirely extinguished by the cruelties and industrious eflTorts of the in- quisitors of those ill-fated regions. Br. McCrie, speaking of the eastern part of Spain, says: "The inhabitants of Beam were generally Protestants, and many of them crossing the Pyrenees spread themselves over Arragon, and at the same time carrying on trade, found the opportunity of circulating their religious books and tenets among the people." — (McCrie's Hist, of the Reformation in Spain, p. 234.) The Waldensian pastors (barbes) who were so numerous at this time, that 140 were present at a meeting of the Synod, were not neglect- ful of opportunities for disseminating the truth. An Italian manuscript, preserved in the Uni- versity of Cambridge, bearing date 1587, states, that " some of these barbes traveled into distant countries to preach the Gospel, and to visit the Waldensian churches establish- ed in France, Germany, Lombardy, Calabria, &c., while in 1535, an edition of the French Bible had been printed at Neufchatel, by Robert Olivetan, a native VaudoJs." — (Gilly's Excursions, Ifc, Appendix, No. XI.) Towards the close of this century missions were sent by the Swedish Protestants into Lap- land, but as they did not understand the Lap- panese tongue, an interpreter stood under the pulpit and explained their discourses to the people. But so little success followed this mode of preaching, that Gustavus Adolphus founded schools for the instruction of youth in a more correct knowledge of the doctrines of the Gospel. The first school was establish- ed at Pithen, prior to the year 1619, and com- mitted to the care of Nicholaus Andraa, the minister of the place, who had translated the ritual, and dedicated it to the king. Gustavus also committed to the same person the trans- lation of necessary and useful books into the Laplaiidish language; the Laplanders being previously altogether ignorant of letters, and without a book in their own language. For the further encouragement of the schools, Gus- tavus Adolphus allowed money for the diet and clothes of the children who attended them, besides a stipend for the schoolmaster. By these schools and the elementary and scriptu- ral books compiled by Nicholaus Andra^a, the youth of Lapland were so greatly benefited, that some of them became students at the University of Upsal, and v/ere afterwards en- trusted with the Christian ministry. — (Schaf- fer's History of Laplajid, p. 27.) The Protestants at length awoke to more active efforts for the extension of the Gos- pel, and attempts were made to form mission- ary societies. Ernest, a zealous Lutheran and a baron, sought to form a society for a Pro- testant mission, but a variety of impediments disappointed his purposes, so that no efiectual benefit resulted from his efforts. The learned Anthmy Walceus, of Leyden, recommended a seminary to be founded for the education of young men of known piety, prudence, zeal, and diligence, to be employed as missionaries espe- cially to India. This object he proposed to the Dutch East India Company, who appear so far to have countenanced the plan as to have placed several persons under the instruc- tions of M'^alaius himself, about the year 1622. A brief exposition of his views was published in the third volume of his works, printed in 1643, under the title of " Necessitas ac Forma erigendi CoUegii sen Seminarii Indici." The Dutch East India Company, indeed, with a praiseworthy attention to the religious inte- rests of the colonists in their foreign posses- sions, supported ministers in most of them. Millar, in his " Propagation of Christianity," mentions Ceylon, Sumatra, Java, Anibayiia, Hereswia, Isles of Banda, Coast of Coromaiv- EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 327 dd, Swat, _ China, Formosa, Tri/wan, Sincan and Japan, in all of which churches had beeu erected. In several of these stations the preaching of the Gospel appears to have beeu greatly blessed. In Ceylon, Harvard {Narra- live, ^c. Introduction, p. 69,) states, that " un- der the Dutch government there were in the province of Jaffna alone, thirty-four churches appropriated to the use of the Malabar Chris- tians, attended by nearly 63,000 auditors, ex- clusive of more than 2,000 baptized slaves and the government schools belonging to them included upwards of 16,000 native child- ren, who were under regular tuition." Since that period there has been a most lamentable neglect of religions instruction by the govern- ment authority, and an awful relapse of im- mense nnmbei-s into idolatry, who, it is to be feared, were more swayed by political motives than by a love of the Gospel. — (See Art. Cey- lon.) The zeal of the British Christians was at length aroused, and more active measures were adopted, not only to recover the nominal Christianity which had been lost, but to dif- fuse true religion throughout tlie island. In Formosa, Mr. RobeH Junius of Delft, who had been sent by the Senate of the United Provinces of Holland, as a missionary to the pagan inhabitants, was eminently successful. He is said to have baptized 5,900 converts, " on professing their faith, and giving proper answers to questions propounded out of the word of God," and to have planted twenty- three churches, besides appointing school- masters, by whom about six hundred children were taught to read and write. He is said also to have composed certain prayers, collects ed the chief articles of religion, and translated various psalms into the Formosan language. Being at length grown infirm, and Having set pastors over various congregations, he became desirous of seeing his aged mother, and of vis- iting his native land ; he therefore returned to Holland, and was succeeded by Daniel Gravius, and others. The Dutch were driven from their principal fort in 1659 or 1661, and the island afterwards became subject to the Chinese. In the American provinces, which were taken from the Portuguese by the Dutch, under command of Count Maurice of Nassau, zealous efforts were made for the conversion of the natives by their new masters, and with much success ; but the recovery of these terri- tories by the Portuguese, in the year 1644, ob- scured the pleasing prospect that was begin- ning to open upon them. Among the objects contemplated by the planting of the Plymouth and Massachusetts Colonies, as avowed by their founders, and set forth in their charter, the conversion of savages to Christianity was prominent. Their first purpose was to provide an asylum, where, free from the restraints imposed by the civil and ecclesiastical policy of England, the Christian Church might be organized in a form, as they believed, more consonant with the primitive model, and the doctrines of Christianity, as they deduced them from Scripture, preached without the forced admixture of dogmas and rites imposed by act of parliament. Their second was to make the aboriginal races par- ticipators of these blessings. The first prompted a jealous resistance to the introduction of any adverse opinions or customs, which was carried, in some instances, to excess. The second, though its execution was delayed by the cares incident to a new plantation, commenced in circumstances of such peculiar hardship aa tried the endurance of the pilgrims, prompted very early action. Individuals made some ex- ertion to recommend the Gospel to the natives with satisfactory, though limited results; and in 1636, the colony of Plymouth enacted a law to provide for preaching among the Indians. A similar act was passed in 1646, by the legisla- ture of Massachusetts. By these movements, a missionary spirit was awakened in England. A society was organized for the propagation of Christianity in North America, and raised a fund yielding £500, which was applied to the circulation of the Bible, and the support of mis- sionaries. The formation of the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, by members of the Church of England, in 1698, is as- cribed by Bishop Burnet, to a spirit of emu- lation aroused by the example of the Non- conformists. [Early Missionary Enterprises, by Smith, p. 39.) In the year 1620, a considerable number of Non-conformists emigrated to America, having obtained a patent for the establishment of a colony and the free exorcise of religion. These were followed by a more numerous com- pany in 1629. This new colony received the designation of New England. Rev. John Eliot, a holy and zealous young minister, joined the emigrants in 1632. For fifteen years he was the faithful and laborious pastor of a congregation at Roxbury, near Boston. During this period he was deeply affected by the miserable and destitute state of the North American Indians. He studied their difficult language, and occasionally itinerated and preached among them ; and he had the hap- piness of seeing, not only an increase of civil- ization in some of the Indian tribes, but also of witnessing the influence of the Gospel upon the hearts of some of the people. In 1646, he devoted himself to a mission among the native tribes, having accomplished the difficult task of a translation of the Scriptures into the Mohegan dialect. Two editions of this ver- sion were afterwada printed ; the first at Cam- bridge, in New England, in 1661-4, in quarto. Of this edition. Dr. Cotton Mather states as two curious facts, that this was tlie first Bible ever printed in America, and that the whole of the translation was written with one pen. The second edition was published in 1685, in quarto. Towards this impression and the mission gene- 328 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. rally, the Hon. Robert Boyle gave £500. Eliot was afterwards assisted by other zealous and able missionaries, among whom John Cot- ton and the Mayhewa, are worthy of special notice. The former possessed such skill and dexterity in the Indian tongue, as to have the correction and emendation of the second edi- tion of the Bible committed to him. The family of the Mayhews was eminent for its missionary spirit. , Tlie Eev. Thomas Mayhew was an excellent evangelist to the neighboring heathen. In a few years, two hundred and eighty-two Indians renounced their false gods, and turned to the Lord. After the death of tliis excellent man, his father, the governor of Martha's Vineyard, felt so much concern for the poor Indians, that, seeing no probability of a regular minister to succeed his son, he applied himself with great diligence to the at- tainment of the language, and then preached to them with acceptance and success. He continued to labor among them to the age of ninety-three, and had the pleasure of a pious grandson associated with him. Hiaconmes, who afterward became a preacher of the Gospel, was the first fruits of the mis- sion. This convert, though opposed and de- rided by his brethren, manifested so much boldness and intrepidity in the cause of Christ, that many were induced to renounce their former idolatrous practices, and embrace the Gospel. In 1650, such was the anxiety of a considerable part of the Indians to hear the word of life, that Mr. Mayhew, to accommo- date them, preached weekly at different parts of the island. About this time, schools were established among them. In 1674, there were supposed to be 2 or 3,000 Indians on this and a neighboring island, of whom, 1,500 were praying Indians ; 50 were regular church members. Soon after this, the number of Indians be- gan to decrease, so that, in 1792, the whole number amounted only to about 440. While the Indians were fast verging toward annihi- lation, the zeal of the Mayhew family in bring- ing them to a knowledge of the truth, did not abate. Five successive generations have been indefatigable laborers on this and the neigh- boring islands. Centuky XVIII. — The eighteenth century opened by the institution of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, for a particular account of which see the arti- cle under that head. The Danish mission to India was undertaken early in this century, in consequence of representations to the king, Frederick IV., by one of his chaplains. Appli- cation having been made to the professors of divinity at Halle, for suitable persons to en- gage in such a mission, Messrs. Ziegenbalg and Piulscho were recommended and appointed. In 1705 they sailed for Tranquebar, on the Coro- mandel coast, and arrived there on the 9th of July, 1706. These missionaries were followed by three others, who arrived at the Cape of (Jood Hope in 1709. This mission was early assisted by the English Society for the Propa- gation of the Gospel, which sent out'a print- ing-press, with the requisite apparatus of type, &c., and one hundred reams of paper, accom- panied by Mr. Jonas Pinck, a native of Sile- sia, as a printer. By this means the mission- aries were enabled to print a nuihber of books for the use of the Malabar school, which they had commenced, besides various tracts, but especially a translation of the Scriptures into Tamil, begun by B. Zeigenbalg, and completed by B. Schultze. In 1714, B. Zeigenbalg re- turned to Europe for a short time, and on that occasion was honored with an audience by the king, George I. who took much interest in the success of the mission. He was also patronized by the " Society for the Promotion of Chris- tian Knowledge." The king and the Society encouraged the Oriental missionary to proceed in his translation of the Scriptures into the Tamil tongue, which they designated " the grand work ;" the former addressing them let- ters of commendation and encouragement, signed with his own hand. After the first missionary Ziegenbalg had finished his course, he was followed by other learned and pious men, upwards of fifty in number in the period of a hundred years — among whom were Schultze, Joenicke, Gericke, and Swartz, whose ministry has been continued in succession for many years ; until the missions became ab- sorbed in the Indian Missions of the Church of England. — {See Buchanan's Researches, p. 65 ; and Morrison's Fathers and Founders, Vol.1, p. 159.) In 1714, the King of Denmark established the Royal College of Missions at Copenhagen, for the instruction and preparation of mission- aries. In connection with this college, the celebrated University of Halle, in Saxony, may very justly be noticed, not only on account of its general objects, but more especially from its having provided the Danish mission with its first missionaries, and several others, pro- foundly learned and most able men. This ex- traordinary institution was begnin by the pious Dr. Herman Augustus Francke, as an orphan house, erected by voluntary donations, and continued increasing in other departments ol an important nature until it became deserv- ing of royal patronage, and the designation of a university. Connected with the institution are an oriental and theological college, for the study of eastern languages, and the instruction of missionary candidates ; a medical school ; a seminary for catechists ; and an extensive printing-office, chiefly for the purpose of print- ing and circulating the Scriptures in different languages. At one period this university had more than 3,000 students from different parts of Europe. The Oanstein and Jewish institu- tions are also intimately associated with thu other benevolent establishments of Halle. The EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 329 Canstein, or Bible Institution, was established in 1710 by Charles Hildebrand, Baron de Cau- stein, for the purpose of printing and selling Bibles and Testaments at a moderate price, in order to secure a more general circulation of the Scriptures. In 1805, above three millions of copies of the entire Bible or Testament had beeii distributed. The founder of the Jewish Institution, formed professedly for the conver sion of Jews and Mohammedans, was Dr John Henry CalUnheig, one of the pupils of Professor l^rancke, and afterwards Professor of Divinity in the University of Halle. One of his most eminent coadjutors was Mr. Stephm Schultz, who was many years engaged in the East in missionary labors, and returned from Turkey to Halle in 1756. In reverting to the Danish missionaries, it will be satisfactory to learn, from the follow- ing questions, propounded to their mission- aries, that their instructions were Scriptural and sound : " Have you discovered some true working of grace in the souls of the catechu- mens ? Are you sure there is more in their conversion than a bare external compliance with, and verbal confession of the Christian doctrine ? What proofs and indications have you of an inward work of grace ? " The venerable Schwartz was one of the missionaries sent out by the Danish College, though after ward supported by the English Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, which has uniformly aided the Danish Missions, by the entire or partial maintenance of many of its valuable missionaries. The Danish mission to Greenland was com- menced in 1721, by Rev. Hans Egede. This devoted man had for thirteen years felt a desire to convey the Gospel to that inhospitable country, and made repeated but ineffectual at- tempts to carry it into execution. At length he succeeded in raising a subscription of 8,000 rix dollars, and purchased a ship to convey himself and several settlers, who proposed to winter in Greenland. The king sanctioned and aided the enterprise, and settled upon Mr. Egede a salary of $300 a year. On their arrival they proceeded to erect a habita- tion, much to the displeasure of the natives, who called on their conjurors to destroy them. Mr. Egede attempted to convey to the people a knowledge of the most important facts of revealed religion by pictures, but the following year he gained some familiarity with the lan- guage, and was able to undertake oral instruc- tion. The arrival of a colleague in the suc- ceeding year, strengthened his hands, but though the people listened attentively to what was told them, they showed no personal inter- est in his preaching. Some of them, indeed, seemed pleased with the doctrine of the im- mortality of the soul, but the impression pro- duced was faint, and their curiosity soon satis- fied. In 1728, the King of Denmark resolved on prosecuting the work with increased ener- gy, and a large colony, with additional mis- sionaries, was sent out, and established a new settlement 200 miles northward of Good Hope, the station founded by Mr. Egede. But the severity of the winter and the ravages of a malignant disease made them discontented, and the accession of Christian VI. to the Dan- ish throne put an end to the enterprise. The colonists were ordered home ; Mr. Egede's salary was stopped ; and, he was offered the alternative of returning with the rest, or re- maining on his own responsibility, with such persons as he could induce to stay with him. He obtained a, supply of provisions for one year, and ten men to remain during the win- ter, and with a heavy heart bade adieu to his two colleagues, who returned with the colony. A vessel arrived the next year with provisions, and having a. valuable return cargo, the king was encouraged to renew the trade, and made a generous donation to the mission. This intelligence gave fresh strength to the lonely missionary, but his faith was doomed to a severer trial. A young Green- lander who had visited Denmark came back, and shortly after died of a disease that proved to be the small-pox. The contagion spread rapidly, and raged for twelve months with such fatal effect, that for thirty leagues north of the settlement, the country was almost wholly depopulated. Such was the alarm and con- sternation of the natives at this visitation, that many committed suicide. Mr. Egede, in conjunction with the Moravian missionaries, who had recently arrived in the country, did all that untiring benevolence could do to alle- viate the physical sufferings and comfort the hearts of the unhappy Greenlanders ; they were ^uch affected by their kindness, and manifested the liveliest gratitude. The mis- sion was reinforced in 1734, by the arrival of three assistants, one of them a son of Mr. Egede. The venerable pioneer, r^egarding the number as wholly inadequate, returned to Den- mark. His representations led to the estab- lishment of several new colonies, and the send- ing of additional missionaries. But the efB- ciency and interest of the Danish mission shortly declined. It had not been wholly in vain, but its fruits were scanty, and the chief agency in imparting Christianity to Greenland was now manifestly committed to the United Brethren, or Moravians. — [Hist. View of Earlier Missions, by L. E. Smith, p. 31.) While attending the coronation of Christian VI., king of Denmark, at Copenhagen, in 1731, Count Zinzendorf was brought into intercourse with two Greenlanders, who had been baptized by Hans Egede, and from them he learned with regi-et that the Danish government had determined on abandoning their mission to that forlorn race. On the same occasion he met with a West Indian negro, of the name of Anthony, who told him that while in the island of St. Thomas, when sitting alone on the sea- 380 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. shore, he had frequently and earnestly sighed for a revelation from heaven. By a remarka- ble providence (jf God he had been brought to Copenhag-en, where he had received instruction in Christianity, and was baptized. Having enlarged in a touching manner, on the deplor- able state of the negro slaves of St. Thomas, and referred with anguish of heart to the mis- eries endured by a beloved sister, who, like himself, had sighed for the light of truth ; he added that if God were to send teachers to in- struct the negroes in the way of salvation, he had no doubt that his sister, and many others similarly affected, would gladly embrace Chris- tianity. These accounts of the poor Greenlanders, and of the West Indian slaves, greatly affected the benevolent mind of Zinzendorf, and on his return to Herrnhut in July, he communicated his impressions to the congregation. So pow- erful was the effect of his narrative that several of the brethren immediately offered themselves for missionary service to the West Indies and Greenland. This extraordinary band of Christian disci- ples, the feeble remnant of a once numerous body, that for a, century and a half, against powerful enemies, maintained the doctrines of revealed truth in Bohemia and Poland, found a refuge from persecution on the estate of Count Zinzendorf, at Bethelsdorp, in U-pper Lusutia. Thousands had been driven into banishment, and in their scattered condition, they and their descendants had either been absorbed into other communions, or had lost in a great measure the power of that faith which had been sealed with the blood of so many martyrs and confessors. It is now, (October, 1854,) 122 years since the Moravians entered the great field of mis- sionary enterprise ; and though their congre- gation at the time they commenced their efforts in 1732 consisted of little more than six hun- dred persons, most of them poor and despised exiles, such was their zeal and disinterestedness in their Master's service, that in less than nine years after, they had sent missionaries to Green- land, to St. Thomas, to St. Croix, to Surinam, and to Berbice, to the North American Indians, to the negroes of South Carolina, to Lapland, to Tartar y, to Guiana, to the Cape of Good Hope, and to the island of Ceylon. The success- es that crowned these enterprises, thus so hum- bly begun, will be found narrated in their pro- per places in this work. The mission at Stockbridge among the Mohe- can Indians, was commenced in 1734 by the Rev. John Sergeant, then tutor in Tale College. He was succeeded by Rev. Mr. Woodhridge, at whose death Reu. Jonatlmn Edwards took charge of the mission for six years. In 1735 John Wesley arrived in Georgia, to instruct the Indians of that state, where he remained till 1738. The founder of Methodism thus began his career as a foreign missionary. In 1743 the devoted David Brainard began his labors among the Indians under the pat- ronage of the Scottish Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, and after four years of successful labor he expired in the home of President Edwards, in Northampton, on the ninth of October, 1747. The record of his life by Edwards, held up his career to the ad- miration of the Christian world ; and it is interesting to note that the missionary devotion of William Carey and Henry Martyn, was nourished, if not kindled, by the contemplation of his brief but triumphant course. A com- plete view of Indian missions in North Amer- ica would not fail to include at least a passing notice of Dr. Wheelock's Seminary for the edu- cation of Indians and missionaries, founded in 1748, at Lebanon, Ct.,and afterwards removed to Hanover, N. H. ; of the life and usefulness of Rev. Samson Occum, distinguished as an effective Indian preacher ; of the forty years' ministry of Kirkland among the Indians of New York ; of the labors and sufferings of the Moravians ; and of others who did their part toward the rescue of the aboriginal tribes from the fate which uniformly overtakes sav- ages when brought into conflict with civiliza- tion, unless it is arrested by the conservative force of Christianity. The proper effect of these benevolent efforts was greatly impaired by the vices and rapacity of the European set- tlers, and by the wars in which European pol- icy involved the colonies. But that any rem- nants of the once powerful tribes formerly inhabiting the country east of the Alleghanies have been preserved, is to be attributed to the elevating influences of Christianity, imparted by those devoted men whose labors have been reviewed, sustained by active charity in Europe and America. — (Smith, p. 47 ; Prince's Chris- tian History, and Brainard' s Life, p. 47 .) The ardent zeal of Wesley and Whitefield and their associates, now began to develop itself. Their plans of operation both in England and America, were practically missionary; and contributed in a high degree to restore the spirit of an evangelical Christianity. To this fact the grateful testimony of Christians of various denominations has been willingly ren- dered, and in the energetic words of Mr. Doug- lass of Cavers, we may remark : " The Wesley- ans, after Christianizing the abandoned dis- tricts of England, and encountering the rage of their own savage countrymen, often backed by their own civil or religious guides — the neighboring magistrate or clergyman — have carried the same zeal, dexterity and success to the slaves of the West Indies, more docile than their masters ; and to the savages of the re- motest countries and islands, less infuriated and dangerous than the rude agricultural pop- ulation of England." — {Encyclopedia Britan- nica. Article "Religious Missions." Vol. XIX., Part I.) No doubt these labors for the revi- val of pure religion tended to evoke that spirit EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 331 of devotion from -wLicli the missionary zeal of the churches bodied itself forth in the organi- zations which characterized the close of the eighteenth and the commencement of the nine- teenth century. In 1750, the Rev. Christian Frederick Swartz arrived at Tranquebar, and entered upon those apostolic labors which have linked his name imperishably with the establishment and pro- gress of Christianity in India. He had gained some knowledge of the Tamil while at the university, to aid in examining the proofs of a version of the Scriptures in that language, an incident which is supposed to have suggested to him the design of devoting himself to mis- sionary life. Oa his arrival he pui-sued his studies with such ardor and success, that in four months he commenced preaching. His labors were indefatigable, in public and in private, in Tranquebar, Trichinopoly, Tanjore, and throughout the Oarnatic, for the space of fifty years. His purity, sincerity, and disinter- estedness won the confidence of all classes, and those even who rejected his doctrine gave him the tribute of their unaffected veneration. In the distracting wars that marked that portion of the history of British India, his active be- nevolence was exerted to relieve misery which he could not prevent, and more than once he was sent to negotiate treaties, as the only Eu- ropean who could be trusted by the natives. When a garrison was threatened with famine, and the people could not be induced to furnish provisions, through fear that the supplies would be seized without compensation, they accepted the security of the venerated missionary for the whole amount needed. He rendered im- portant services both to the British and to the native princes, yet scrupulously avoided receiv- ing any gifts or emoluments that might taint him with the suspicion of mercenary motives, and sedulously guarded himself from being in- volved in any transactions that might impair his influence as a Christian and a preacher of the Gospel. With all the humility of a child and the wisdom of mature experience, the harm- leasness of the dove and the wisdom of the ser- pent, he was enabled to testify to the truth in every place and among all grades of society. At his death he was mourned as a father, and the Rajah of Tanjore erected a monument to his memory, with an inscription which is re- markable as the only specimen of English verse attempted by an Indian prince. Swartz had in his life time acquired considerable pro- perty, through the kindness of the English government and the native princes. When he was dying, he said : " Let the cause of Christ be my heir." When his colleague, the pious Gericke, was departing, he also bequeath- ed his property to the mission. And afterwards, another of the missionaries, Mr. Kohloff gave, from his private funds, upwards of a thousand pagodas a year. — (See Greenfield's Sketches of tlie Danish Mission, p. 145.) At the death of Swartz the native Christians connectea with the mission were counted by thousands. The fruit of his toils was gathered rapidly by his successors. Bishop Heber, writing in 1826, says, " There are in the south of India about 200 Protestant congregations ; " and he esti- mated their number at about 15,000. Many were undoubtedly merely nominal Christians, as the Lutheran missionaries were much less exacting in the qualifications they demanded for admission to the sacraments, than later missionaries have been ; yet, considering the purity of their preaching and the devout spirit in which their labors were conducted, a large measure of piety must have been the result. These missions have since come under the pat- ronage of the London Society for the Propaga- tion of the Gospel, and the superintendence of the Anglican Bishop of Calcutta.— {Smith, p. 310 In 1769, the English Wesleyan MeOwdists began to send forth their missionaries. Eleven were commissioned for America, whose labors laid the foundation of the Methodist Episcopal Church. They next sent missionaries to the West Indies, and to the East Indies ; but their missionary operations were not regularly organ- ized until 1816. We now approach the commencement of that period which has, by way of preeminence, been designated the Missionary Age, when the various churches of Christ began to wake up to life and activity on behalf of the heathen world ; and the isolated efforts of individuals and churches were succeeded by the great or- ganized agencies of the present day ; a list of which, with the time of their organization, we give in the following table. For a more par- ticular history of the origin and progress of these societies and their operations, the reader is referred to other parts of this work. All the more prominent societies are noticed under their respective names, in their places in the alphabet : — - Great Britain. Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, 1701. Baptist Missionary Society, 1792. London Missionary Society, 1795. Scottish Missionary Society, 1796. Glasgow Missionary Society, 1796. Church Missionary Society, 1800. General Baptist Missionary Society, 1816. Wesleyan Missionary Society, 1817. Methodist New Connection Missionary Soci- ety, 1819. Foreign Mission Scheme of the Church of Scotland, 1824. Primitive Methodist Missionary Society, 1830. Foreign Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian Church in Ireland, 1840. Welsh Foreign Missionary Society, 1842. Lew-chew Naval Mission, 1843. 332 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. Foreign Mission Scheme of the Free Church of Scotland, 1843. Associate Belief Presbyterian Church of Scot- land, 1843. Foreign Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian Church in England, 1844. Board of Missions of the United Presbyterian Synod, united in 1 847. Borneo Church Mission, 1846. Chinese Society for Furthering the Promulgar tion of the Gospel in China, and the Adja- cent Countries, 1850. London Society for Promoting Christianity among the Jews, 1808. British Society for the Propagation of the Gospel among the Jews, 1841. Germany. Missions of the United Brethren, 1732. Society for the Promotion of Evangelical Mis- sions among the Heathen, at Berlin, 1824. Khenish Missionary Society, 1828. Jforth German Missionary Society, 1836. Evangelical Lutheran Missionary Society, at Leipsic (formerly at Dresden,) 1836. Evangelical Union for the Spread of Christi- anity among the Heathen, (Gossner's) 1836. Berlin Missionary Union for China, 1850. Society for the Promotion of Christianity among the Jews at Berlin, 1822. Union of the Friends of Israel in Bremerlehe and Vicinity, 1839. Ehenish-Westphalia Union for Israel, 1843. Hamburg- Altona Union for Israel, 1844. Evangelical Union of the Friends of Israel in Hesse Cassel, 1845. Union of the Friends of Israel in Hesse Darm- stadt, 1845. Holland. Netherlands Missionary Society, 1797. Netherlands Union for cooperating in the Spread of Christianity among the Jews. United States. American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1810. American Baptist Missionary Union, 1814. Methodist Missionary Society, 1819. Free-will Baptist li'oreign Mission Society, 1833. Board of Missions of the Protestant Episco- pal Church, 1835. . Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyte- rian Church, 1837. Foreign Missionary Society of the Lutheran Church, 1837. Seventh-day Baptist Missionary Society, 1842. American Indian Mission Association, 1842. Baptist Free Mission Society, 1843. Board of Foreign Missions of the Associate Eeformed Presbyteri?.n Church, 1844. Board of Foreign Missions of the Southern Baptist Convention, 1845. Missionary Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church South, 1845. American Missionary Association, 1846. American and Foreign Christian Union, 1849. American Society for Meliorating the Condi- tion of the Jews, 1823. SWITZBKLAND. Evangelical Missionary Society at Basle, 1816' Society of the Friends of Israel, at Basle. France. Paris Society of Evangelical Missions, 1822. 'Union of the Friends of Israel at Strassburg, Sweden. Swedish Missionary Society, 1835. Missionary Society at Lund, 1846. NOEWAT. Norwegian Missionary Society, 1842. British America. Board of Foreign Missions of the Synod jf the Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia. As an approximation to an estimate of what this missionary Christianity has done for the world during the eighteen centuries we have sketched, in establishing the institutions of the Gospel, and bringing men into that re- lation to its agencies, from which their enlight- enment and salvation may spring, — we shall here insert a quotation from a writer of ac- knowledged ability. Mr. Turner, in his " His- tory of the Anglo-Saxons," gives the following tabular statement, " as a conjectural, but prob- able, representation of the progressive increase of the number of Christians in the world :" 1st Cent. 2nd „ 3rd „ 4th „ 5th „ 6th „ 7th „ 8th „ 9th „ 500,000 2,000,000 5,000,000 10,000,000 15,000,000 20,000,000 25,000,000 30,000,000 40,000,000 10th Cent, 11th „ 12th „ 13th „ 14th „ 15th „ 16th „ 17th 18th . 50,000,000 70,000,000 80,000,000 75,600,000 80,000,000 100,000,000 125,000,000 155,000,000 200,000,000 4, Jan. — (Ferussac. Bdll, Univers. Geog. p, 1827.) " But I think," he adds, " in this nineteenth century, the real number of the Christian po- pulation of the world is nearer to three hun- dred millions, and is visibly much increasing, from the missionary spirit and exertions vrhich are now distinguishing the chief Protestant nations in the world." — (Vol. HI. p. 484, note, 6th edition.) We have thus endeavored to trace the con- necting links in that chain of Christian labors which unites the missionary exertions of the Apostolic Church, down through the evangeli- cal efforts of subsequent centuries, to the com- mencement of its present glorious development in our own day ; and have at the same time glanced at the workings of that all-wise and gracious Providence, which in every age has been operating, not only in the religions, but also in the politics, the arts, the sciences, and EGYPT. 333 the literature of our race, to prepare the world for the full millennial glory of the latter days. — Condensed from an original miide prepared by Rev. W. Sutler. EAST CAPE : A station of the Church Missionary Society in New Zealand, in the beautiful valley of Waiapu, through the centre of which runs the river of that name. BBENBZER : A station and a colony of the Ehenish Missionary Society in South Africa, at the mouth of the Elephant river. BBENBZEE CHAPEL : A station of the London Missionary Society in Demerara, W. I. EDIN A : A settlement at the mouth of the Mechlin river, in Western Africa, formerly a station of the American Baptist mission. EGYPT is so well knowii, and the descrip- tions of travelers are so generally accessible, that it is not necessary to the purposes of this work, to say much of its geography, topogra- phy, or history. It is bounded on the east by the Isthmus of Suez and the Red Sea, south by Nubia, west by Lybia, and north by the Mediterranean Sea, being ^bout 500 miles in length, and some parts of it 250 in breadth. The principal parts of the country are the Delta, or lower part of Egypt, and the narrow valley of the Nile in the higher parts, which is bounded on both sides by high hills and abrupt banks. The mountains on the east of the Nile extend to the Arabian Gulf, and are only inhabited by Bedouins. The principal towns and villages are on the eastern side of the Nile. The whole area of arable soil has been estimated at from 10,000 to 16,000 • square miles, or equal to nearly half the sur- face of Ireland. This country, once the cradle of the arts and sciences, has been for centuries trodden be- neath the iron hoof of Moslem and Turkish despotism. It is now, however, in a kind of transition state, in which the feelings, opinions, and habits of the people are undergoing a great and rapid change. Fanaticism is every day becoming less powerful in Egypt; and the ancient Asiatic manners and customs are fast giving way to the European. The political revolutions to which Egypt has been subject from time immemorial, have given its population a mixed character. The following estimate of the different races of its present population, made by Mr. Lane, is, we believe, the most recent : Arab Egyptians . . 1,750,000 Christian Egyptians (Copts) . 150,000 Turks 10,000 Syrians 5000 Greeks .... 5000 Armenians . . . . . 2000 Jews .... 5000 1,927,000 Egypt presents grea,t facilities for the intro- duction of the Gospel into the north-eastern por- tions of Africa. Independent of the Chris- tians, who, though ignorant and degraded, still keep alive the name and profession of Chris- tianity, there is a perpetual concourse of strangers from all parts of the interior. Carar vans from Sennaar, Darfnr, and Timbuctoo, are, at the proper seasons, in constant ac- tivity. MISSIONS. Chukoh Missionaby Society. — Several Ger- man missionaries, with their wives, sent out by this society, arrived at Alexandria, Sept. 6, 1826, and employed themselves, at first, in the study of Arabic, preaching in English, French, and German, and in making tours, distributing the Scriptures and tracts, which were received with great readiness by the Copts. Their arrival occasioned a great sensation, especially among the Franks, who considered it a hope- less undertaking. The location of this mission was at length fixed at Cairo, where, in 1830, they had two schools, with 51 boys and 21 girls, consisting of Greeks, Copts, Armenians, and Roman, Catholics. They found it impracticable to preach the Gospel to congregations of the native Christians, who would not assemble for fear of their priests ; but they made known the Gospel in religious conversations, from house to house, and with those who visited them. The Mohammedans were inaccessible, as it was death to them to change their reli- gion ; but some Mohammedan boys were ad- mitted into their school. In 1833, a board- ing-school was commenced, with ten boys ; designed for training teachers and catechists. In 1834, a chapel was erected, by subscrip- tions obtained on the spot. In 1835, the mission was interrupted by a terrible visitation of the plague, which, for some time, carried off 1,500 daily. In 1840, it was reported by the mis- sionaries, that in the different quarters of the town, no less than six religious meetings had been established by the native Copts, for the purpose of reading the Scriptures ; and that the'Patriarch had sanctioned them, remarking that it was better to meet to read the word of God, than to drink brandy and commit sin. He had also been induced to sanction a plan for the establishment of an institution in Egpyt for the education of the Coptic clergy. In 1841,Mr. Lieder writes, "Notwithstand- ing all the various vexations arising from political, civil, and religious causes, we are able to say, that not only have the education of the young, and the general civilization ot the people, advanced beyond all expectation, but that a pleasing religious movement has also been observed among the Christians within this city." In consequence of the distracted state of Abyssinia, the church in that country had been for a number of years without an Abuna, or Patriarch. In 1841, u deputation applied 334 EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIONS. to the Patriarch of Alexandria for one, and he appointed a young man named Andraus, who had been partly educal-ed in the society's school at Cairo. Although but 21 years of age, he received the appointment on account of his learning and religious character. He took with him 1,000 copies of Testaments, and other portions of Scripture ; and it was hoped the event might prove favorable to the pro- gress of the (jospel in Abyssinia. In 1846, eleven Eoman Catholic nuns ar- rived at Cairo, with large means, and pur- chased the extensive house of the former prime minister of Egypt, for purposes of education. In 1849, two Eoman Catholic priests in Egypt, one of them Secretary of the Bishop, and the other, Superior of the Convent at Cairo, renounced the errors of Romanism, and made a profession of Protestantism, which created a great stir among the Catho- lics. In October, 1849, Bishop Gobat visited this mission ; and, in a letter dated Jerusalem, Jan. 9, 1850, he. gives the following views re- specting the policy and results of the mission : " The missionaries seem to follow almost too strictly the plan on which the mission was be- gun 24 years ago : to seek the friendship of the clergy, especially of the high clergy of the Eastern churches, with the view of influencing them gently, in the hope that by slow degrees they would become convinced of the errors, and themselves reform their respective churches. But this system has failed ; and I am convinced that it will ever fail, with the several Eastern churches, as well as with the Church of Eome. Individual conversion must be the aim, as the only means of prosecuting reformation." — " Besides the dissemination of the Word of God and other good books, in all parts of Egypt, and the scriptural, though imperfect education of hundreds of youth, the results of the mission are, the conversion of a few individuals, some of whom have died in the faith ; a few enlighten- ed youth dispersed through Egypt ; and many members of the different communities have been led to doubt the truth of their supersti- tions and traditions, and to respect Protestant- ism." This last, he represents as a great change from what it was when they first began to preach the Gospel in Egypt. " Yet," he says, " upon the whole, it must be confessed that the Egyptian mission has not had the success which might have been expected." He recommends a change in the policy of the mis- sion, in accordance with these views. At a missionary conference, held in Jerusalem, May 12, 1851, it was determined to continue this nission on a reduced scale. It stands thus in .ie report for 1852 : Stations 1 Missionaries 2 Female Teacher 1 Male do 1 EIMEO : An island of the Georgian group in the South Seas, about 2° west of Tahiti. ELEUTHERA : A station of the Wes- leyan Missionary Society in the Bahamas, W. I. BLIM : A station of the United Brethren in South Africa, on New- Year's river, 60 miles from Genadendal, near Cape Aiguilla. ELIOT : The first place occupied by the missionaries of the American Board among the Choctaw Indians. It is within the limits of the State of Mississippi; about 120 miles from the north line of that State, and nearly equidistant from its eastern and western bor- ders. It is about 400 miles W. S. W. of the Brainerd station, in the Cherokee nation. Messrs. Kiiigsbury and Williams commenced their labors there in June, 1818. EMMAUS : A station of the United Bre- thren, in St. Thomas, W. L ENGKATOO : A village near Maulraain, in Burmah, and an ontstation of the Maul- main Baptist mission. ENON : A station of the United Brethren in South Africa, on the White river, near Algoa Bay. EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIONS : The Domestic and Foreign Missionary Society of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States, was organized by the General Convention, in 1820. By the constitution, the meetings of the Society were to be held at the time and place of the Triennial General Convention. The business of the Society was conducted by a Board, of which the bishops of the Church and patrons of the Society- were members ex-ofScio, and the remainder were chosen at each regular meeting of the Society. The seat of operations was Phila- delphia, and there were auxiliary societies in almost every state in the Union. Under this organization, the society went on prosperously for fifteen years. At the meeting of the General Convention, in 1835, an entire change was made in the Board, the Church undertaking, in her char- acter as a Church, to carry on the work of Christian Missions. At each meeting of the Convention, a Board of 80 mem.bers is elected, of which the bishops and the patrons who be- came such prior to 1829, are ex-ofiBcio mem- bers, called " The Board of Missions of the Pro- testant Episcopal Church in the United States of America." This board appoints, not necessarily and not usually, from its own number, two com- mittees, of eight members each, four clergymen and four laymen, exclusive of a secretary and treasurer for each, and of which the bishop of the diocese of New York is ex-officio chairman, one to direct the Foreign, and the other the Domestic Missions. As thus organized, the society embraces as members, all the members of the Episcopal Church. The constitution provides that " no clergy- man s^"" """ :"i-J - ™:-„: i — xu. ERROMANGA— EUROPE. 335 Board, or by either of the committees, without the recommendation of the ecclesiastical au- thority of the diocese to which he belongs ; nor shall any missionary be sent to officiate in any diocese without the consent of the ec- clesiastical authority of the same ; and no clergyman shall be appointed a missionary, who is not at the time a minister of the Pro- testant Episcopal Church, of regular standing ; and the appointment of a missionary may be annulled at any time by the written direction or order of a majority of the bishops of the Church." TABULAR VIEW. MISSIONS. Africa West. China Greece 18S4 1835 1830 The following table shows the aggregate re- ceipts of both the Foreign and Domestic Com- mittees, from their organization to the change in the constitution in 1835, and, since that time, of every year, with the grand totals. Years. Domestic. Foreign. Id20 to 1835 876,338 $50,683 1836 18,783 18,050 1837 31,563 26,012 1838 25,566 27,194 1839 29,660 26,347 1840 19,609 23,853 1841 28,317 22,918 1842 27,517 29,279 1843 35,913 33,746 1844 27,899 31,032 1845 28,870 38,514 1846 36,444 34,127 1847 23,300 30,691 1848 28,635 40,019 1849 27,263 41,453 1850 36,194 34,800 1851 34,302 37,702 1852 30,395 41,048 1853 23,856 42,050 Totals, $590,424 $629,968 The Board now have missions in Western Africa and China, which they are prosecuting vigorously and successfully. They have, also, an efficient mission in Greece, but chiefly de- voted to educational interests. Their mis- sions to Kastern Christians, for a time, ab- sorbed no small share of their means and efforts; but not being as successful as was anticipated, they have been withdrawn in the form in which they were originally undertaken; but the field, we believe, is not abandoned, the committee being authorized, whenever they shall think proper, to resume the work in such form as they may judge to be wise and expedient. They had, also, for some time, a mission among the North American Indians ; but this field has been transferred to the Domestic Com- mittee, and as yet, but little progress has been made therein. EEROMAFGA : An island of New He- brides, where is a station of the London Mis- sionary Society. This is the place where tha lamented Williams was murdered by the na- tives. EEZRUM : A station of the American Board among the Armenians, situated almost in the centre of ancient Armenia. Popular tion 36.000, of whom 10,000 are Armenians. EUROPE ; Area.— 3,816,936 square miles. (Ungewitter's Europe.) The continent docs not quite equal in superficial contents, the combined areas of the United States and Mexico. JPopulatimi.— 262,300,000 (U.) The propor- tion is nearly that of seventy persons to a square mile. The United States and Terri- tories would contain, if as densely occupied as Europe, 226,000,000 inhabitants. Languages. — The principal languages are thirteen, derived from three great fountains ; the Latin, the Teutonic, and the Sclavonic. Independent States. — Sixty-three. Of these eight are Republics ; twenty-two, Empires or Kingdoms ; eighteen. Duchies ; fifteen, Prin- cipalities, Electorates, &c. Of these govern- ments, seventeen are absolute ; forty-six con- stitutional ; sovereigns, nineteen, of whom nine are Catholics ; eight, Protestants ; one, Greek Churchman ; one Mussulman. The vitality of the Grecian and Roman form of civilization was already exhausted, at the opening of the Christian era. The sceptre was still held in the feeble grasp of the Csesars, long after all religious faith and national feel- ing had perished in Rome ; a phenomenon re- peated, in our day, on that magical soil. An effete civilization, a corrupt society, and a wild combination of refinement and barbarism, pre- sented a rather discouraging field of invasion to the heaven-descended kingdom of Christ, yet in the vigor of its youth. Its entrance into Europe was silent, and almost unnoticed, in the persons of Jewish converts returning to their western homes from Jerusalem and the celebrated feast of Pentecost. But the first formal invasion of Paganism, and the first organization of the spiritual king- dom, in Christian institutions, was made by 336 EUROi'Jil. the Apostle Paul, about a. d. 51, at Philippi a provincial Eoman city in Maoedou. Amid weariness, watchings, fastings, stonings, soourgings, imprisonments, and martyrdoms ; amid the fiercest opposition of philosophers, priests, and magistrates ; with all the powers of Judaism and Paganism, arrayed against a few feeble soldiers of Christ, was his kingdom established in Europe. Paganism as a religious system, was then so completely routed from the field, that, at this day there are left only a few thousand wander- ing tribes, and a few savages in Southern Russia and the northern regions, to profess its principles. But, as we shall see, history confirming and illustrating the language of projshecy, presents to our view " the deadly wound of the beast healed, and all the world wondering after the beast." The organic body of paganism was killed. The spirit of it went out, seeking rest, but found it not ; and re- turned, finding the Eoman empire and society, " empty, swept, and garnished " by Chris- tianity ; and entering into it, brought " seven other spirits worse than the first." But at pre- sent we only notice the fact that paganism, as an institution, was almost demolished. Judaism, too, fell before the victorious arms of the church. So that though it has thousands of votaries, it retains no fortress, but every where, simply craves permission to exist, and to trafBo. Mohammedanism, in the 8th century, was master of Spain ; and in the 15th century, when it lost Iberia, it ascended the Byzantine throne, which it still feebly retains. But this false religion need scarcely be mentioned when we are enumerating the forces actively con- tending against Christ. Having no mission- aries, and having long since laid aside the policy of propagating its faith by the sword, it now chiefiy interests us ^ one of the for- tresses in which Satan defends his subjects against the weapons of Christ. The Greek and Armenian churches may be regarded in the same light, unless the present measures and war policy of the Czar must be considered as a form of missionary enterprise. Among the victories of the early mission- aries, must be enumerated the questionable conversion of Constantine, probably the most costly triumph Christianity ever made, as it immediately brought about the reconciliation of piety with worldliness, and of the Christian name with the Pagan spirit, the desecration of the Gospel to be merely an arm of the civil power. From that period the fatal re-action, which had before manifested itself at the ex- tremities, reached the heart. Paganism re- vived under Christian names and forms ; and Satan turned the very arms and armies of Christianity against Christ. And to this day, nearly three-fourths of the inhabitants of Eu- rope still worship pagan gods in pagan temples, with pagan riles, and pagan festivals, all of them bearing Christian titles. The war cry of this occidental paganism is now, Christ and the Church ; while it has abated in no degree ' its original hostility to both. I. Religious Classitioation of the Peo- ple OF Europe. — The great apostasy from truth and from spiritual worship, which began to manifest itself openly as Christianity be- came popular, was subjected to many modify ing influences, political intrigues, military ad- ventures ; and the curious tides of immigration resulted in producing those distinctive phases of religious sentiment and ecclesiastical organ- izatipn, which now characterize respectively the three principal divisions of the European family. The Sclavonic tribes, taking posses- sion of north-eastern and eastern Europe, assimilated with the Greek Church. The Ro- manic races, occupying southern Europe, never really abandoned the distinguishing spirit of the old empire ; a spirit of gross super- stition, servile subjection to authority ■, conso- lidated social organization under rigid law ; and the ambition of universal dominion. They still retain all the spirit of pagan hos- tility to Christ, unchanged. They uphold the anti-Christian power prominently portrayed in prophecy : the beast, to whom Satan gives energy to make war on the saints. Protes- tantism has been engrafted on the old trunk of the Germanic race ; a people controlled by the spirit of personal independence, and of loyal and intelligent submission to rulers chosen by the ruled. With them originated the r&- formation in the 16th century, which made a radical change in the intellectual, social, and religious condition of the entire middle and north-western sections of the continent. And in fact, it had, at one period, thoroughly pene- trated Italy, France, Belgium, Austria, and Poland. But, by dragoons and Jesuits, by massacres and banishments, those states were restored to the Roman pontifF. So that the present religious condition of Europe may be thus roughly sketched in numbers : A. T/ie Unevangelical Sects. — Roman Ca- tholic, 133,000,000, (U.) Jews, 3,000,000, (U.) * Greek Chuich, 59,000,000, (U.) Pagans, 750,000, t Mohammedans, "7,000,000 (U.l other sects, 1,000,000 ; inhabiting the several states thus : Roman Catholics and Jews, every state of Europe ; Greek Christians, Greece, Ionian Isles, Russia, Turkey, Austria ; Mohammedans, Turkey and Austria ; Pagans, Russia. B. The Evangelical Sects. — They are computed to embrace about 58,750,000 per- sons, J whom we may conjecturally state to be thus apportioned to the several denominar tions : Episcopalians, 13,000,000; Independents, 3,980,000; Methodists, 4,000,000; Presbyteri- * BaM's Retrospect, p. 190. f A writer in the Boston Courier, (April, 1854,) asserts that the professors of the Byzantine creed are not only a majority in Free Greece, but also half the population of Austria, Scrvia, &c.; and two-thirds of the population of Turliey. J Baird's Eetrospcct, p . 196. EUROPE. 331 ans, 6,973,000; Baptists, 1,912,000; Moravians, 45,000 ; Lutheran, German Beforraad, and United Churches, 28,840,000. The Episcopa- lians reside chiefly in Great Britain, Ireland, Guernsey, Jersey, Gibraltar, and Malta. Yet so many of them are constantly abroad ; and the national feeling of the English is so iden- tlBed with their religious sentiments, that they have chapels in most of the great cities of the Continent. The Presbyterians are found in Ireland, Scotland, England, Holland, Prance, Switzerland, and Piedmont. The Lutherans Inhabit Denmark, Sweden, Norway, Germany, and Prance chiefly. The German Eeformed are mostly in Germany. The Baptists are in Great Britain and Ireland, and a few on the Continent. The Independents or Oongrega- tionalists, are in Great Britain, Ireland, France, and Russia. The Moravians are found in England, Ireland, Lusatia, Silesia, Gosna, &o. Separate organization is not so much their aim, as quickening existing churches. The distinctions of doctrine, government, and rites, which separate the evangelical churches of Europe into different denomina^ tions, are so generally known, as to need no explanation here. Perhaps the division of the German churches is less understood in this country. It may therefore be remarked that the difference between Luther and Calvin, as men and Christians, has extensively perpetuated itself in the Continental churches. This difference has been thus expressed by Herzog and Lange, (as quoted by Professor Smith, Christian Review, xvi. 596,) " while it was the special office of Lutheranism to protest against all Judaism in the Church, it has been the special office of the Reformed Church to protest against all Paganism." " The Catholic Church is the church of priests ; the Lutheran of theologians ; and the Reformed Church is the church of the believing congregation. The first talks most of the church ; the second, of the speculative aspects of religion ; the Reformed Church dwells most fondly upon the plan of Redemption." Calvin had a clearer intellect, and a purer logic than Luther ; less superstition as a catholic, and a less preponder- ating imagination. Hence the Reformed Church has swept away more of the rubbish of popery, and come to a greater degree of simplicity in ecclesiastical organization ; while it has, at the same time, cast away the vague concep- tions of the Eucharist, which make the twi- light where Romanism most effectually does its work of proselyting. They differ, then, in origin, the one being German, the otherPrench ; in doctrinal bias, the one tending to Armini- anism, the other being purely Calvinistic; in government, the one being episcopal, the other Presbyterian. They have now been amalgamated in some states, as Prussia, Baden, &c. It was, however, a forced union, ab extra, not voluntary, and so not vital. And yet it was working well in Prussia ; too well, indeed, 22 to meet the government's desire for a firmer attachment to dogmas and distinctive stand- ards ; as ensuring a more legal and less demo- cratic spirit than the fervent union of real believers. II. Estimate of the Spiritcai. oonditiok OP EuKOPB. — God alone knows the heart ; and man is, at best, an imperfect judge of his own, much more of his brother's spiritual state before the Omniscient eye. And while an in- accurate judgment is worse than useless, an arrogant judging of man is hurtful to him who practices it. A judgment is arrogant, either when it is volunteered for a selfish end, or when it is formed without adequate light, and a conscientious care. But on the other hand it is very important for us, both to judge the religious systems under which our fellow men are passing their brief probation, and also to form a general estimate of their spiritual con- dition, as individuals and as bodies. We must therefore in justice say, that we experi- ence more sadness than joy, in counting the numbers in the evangelical ranks in Europe. We fear, and for the most" cogent reasons, that the vast majority of them are in the con- dition of the church of Sardis : having a name to live, they are dead. And with every true believer, such a conviction will incite to prayer for the Spirit of life to come down and breathe on the " valley of dry bones." We shall now refer to some indications of the' present spiritual condition of the European churches : — 1. The condition of the Clergy. — The intellec- tual cultivation of the evangelical clergymen is generally of the highest order. And there is extensively a return to the more direct study of the Bible itself, which has always distin- guished the ministry in the best ages of the church. Pifty years ago there was left a small remnant of godly men in the European minis- try ; but great changes have taken place in. England, Scotland, Germany, France, and Switzerland, within that period. In 1815 there was probably not one spiritual, faithful preacher of Christ's Gospel in the Protestant Church of France — now there are nearly 300. In England the clergymen of the established church were generally far from possessing the spirit of their office; now there are thousands of godly, earnest men in the ministry of that church. The same might be said of the kirk of Scotlaijd, and particularly of that large body called the Free Church. Even the Inde- pendents in Great Britain, thirty years ago, had fallen far below the type of Owen, Baxter, and Howe. The change in that body of min- isters is very cheering. The same may be said of the German clergy, who had sunk deep into the abominations of neology. About half the Protestant clergy in Germany are evangelical in opinion and feeling, the rest embrace every shade of opinion — moderate ra- tionalism, deism, pantheism, &c. The evan- 338 EUROPE. gelicd clergy surpass in learning the clergy of any other nation. They are generally devout men. The pulpit is disproportionately weak when compared with the chairs of theological science. The number of firsWate exegetes, historiaus, theologians, is very great, in pro- portion to the number of eSective preachers. There is too much reflection and too little action. i 2. Estimate of the Sabbath. — It is essential to the spiritual prosperity of the church, that she recognize two features of this institution : its divine authority and its entirely spiritual charac- ter. But the general declension of the European churches has sadly manifested itself in this di- rection. Yet it is cheering to witness the many signs of a healthful sentiment reappear- ing. Among other indications of this we may notice the following facts. The Evangelical Alliance has called the attention of the con- tinental churches to this subject. At Metz, Amiens, Agen, and Lille, in France, industrial men and members of liberal professions have engaged, by regular contracts, to abstain from all work and commercial operations on Sun- day. A central council for promoting the voluntary observance of the Scbbath has been formed in Paris. And the King of Prussia has issued military orders requiring his army to observe it as sacred time. The labors of our brethren in the British parliament are fa- miliarly known. They have led, as is always the case with any important suiiject brought before that practical body of men, to a thorough investigation of facts, as to the amount of outward desecration of the Divine institution. The result is, an accumulation of powerful testimony in favor of at least so much legislation as shall throw the influence of the government on the side of the Sabbath. In Protestant Germany, however, the Sabbath is a religious and social holiday. The people follow the reformers in their loose estimate of the Sabbath, and know nothing of the advan- tages of a Puritan Sunday. The continental reformers never reached the light attained by those of Scotland and England. In Switzer- land the infidel party, ascendant in the govern- ment, have labored to put the Sabbath where the leaders of the revolution in France placed it, in the height of their frenzy. 3. Religious Reading is another test of ad- vancing or declining piety. In this light the vast circulation of books by the British, French, and other tract societies is very full of promise. The British, French, and (Jerman presses are pouring forth continually a stream of religioas truth surpassing the productions of any preceding age. Religious devotional books are said, by an intelligent observer, to be more read in Germany than in any other country. 4. Family Worship. — With Christians in America the neglect of at least daily domestic worship is regarded as inconsistent with the healthy condition of a church ; and yet, out of the small circle of the evangelical churches of Switzerland and France, Holland and Swe- den, there is evidence of a very general want ot family worship among the evangelical churches of the continent. 5. Discipline is another pillar of a trne church, extending its cognizance of church- members to the following points : moral- ity ; soundness of belief ; outward fellowship ; and habitual attendance on ordinances. We know not an established church in which such a thing as discipline, in the Puritan sense, is recognized. 6. Social Religious Meetings are an efficient means of promoting piety. But these are gen- erally discountenanced in the established churches, though not universally neglected. The dissenters, and the most evangelical mem- bers of the established churches generally de- light in adding to the more general and for- mal, the more social and simple exercises of prayer-meetings and conferences. 7. Revivals and Conversions. — We do not in- sist upon one specific form of manifesting the work of the Holy Spirit in the human heart. Men must, however, be converted ; and if we are to judge from the entire course of the Church's history, conversions will be some- times solitary, and at others, in great numbers at a time. But it is certain that the superna- tural operations of the regenerating Spirit are so much modified in their manifestations by the outward influences which affect their sub- jects, that it is difficult to judge the degree of spiritual influences a people enjoy, except by the more uniform and universal tests of their living " soberly, righteously, and godly." Yet there are many social movements in European churches, resembling the phenomena known among us as revivals of religion. In Prance, Sweden, Norway, and many parts of Germany, they have appeared, especially in Prance, un- der the labors of faithful evangelists and col- porteurs, and particularly in connection with the meetings of the Evangelical Alliance. 8. Religious Education is also intimately connected with the existence and advancement of true godliness among a people. By no people has more fidelity been manifested in the religions education of families and in pub- lic religious instruction, than by the Scotch. The pious and patriotic exertions of Knox to secure a common religious instruction for the children of his countrymen, have produced re- sults of immeasurable value to that people, in the formation of personal character, and con- sequently in their national history. The re- cent struggles of the dissenters in Great Britain to prevent the monopoly of religious education in public schools by the Church of England, have led the dissenters to more vigorous exer- tions to provide such education for the poor, under their own direction. The Congregation- alists have commenced not only their own col- EUROPE. 339 leges, but what we should call a normal school, or a school for trainiug religious teach- ers of public schools. It is called the Homer- ton College, in which were recently 21 male and 28 female pupils. The necessities of the case have driven the governments of Europe, for centuries, to provide for the poor orphans within their dominions. And private philan- thropy has done much in this respect. In the seventeenth century, Francke instituted at Halle his celebrated orphan-house, which has trained nearly 5000 children under the influ- ence of the Gospel. It has grown into an im- portant institution, having several branches, among which is the Oanstein press, that has ah-eady issued two million Bibles, and one mil- lion New Testaments, at a low price. There are in London 150 ragged schools, which are accomplishing a work of immeasurable im- portance for the long neglected pauper children of the metropolis. In Horn, near Hamburg, is a very interesting institution for reforming depraved children. It refuses to bring together more than one hundred. The Evangelical Society of France has a valuable school in the city of Paris, for educating the children of Roman Catholic parents, which has been crowned with great success. Sunday schools originated in England, and are gradu- ally introduced in France^Sweden, Denmark, and other portions of the Continent. 9. Ckristian Union is another sign of the Church's spiritual state. The divisions of the church are a sign of weakness. They awaken zeal, indeed ; but its strength is the convulsive action of disease, not the vigorous movement of health And Rome has obtained an i vantage by presenting the false appearance of unity in contrast with this manifest diversity, and often even animosity of the different branches of the evangelical church. But we may notice many indications of a brighter day approaching. Among these we place, first, the organization of the Evangelical Alliance. All the friends of Christian Union are not yet convinced of its value. It must, in fact, be admitted that in England, where it origi- nated, there was an outward pressure, which might as fully account for the movement as the simple attraction of brotherly love. In Prance, however, it appears to exist in a purer spirit ; yet it must be said for the British Al- liance, that it has nobly carried out the spirit of brotherly love in its valuable efforts to liberate the Madiai, and to defend the Baptists in Prussia. It is slowly gaining favor in Hol- land, Sweden, and Germany. In the latter country there are two institutions already ex- isting, which, to some extent, embody the same principles — the Kirchen-Tag and the Gusta- vus Adolphus Society. The first of these grew out of the movement in London, and is promoting brotherly love in the German churches. Having to contend with a very high church feeling in the Lutheran clergy, it is not yet prepared for an affirmation of un- qualified religious liberty as the normal state of man and churches. It is engaged in dis- tributing Bibles and tracts, and at its last meeting thoroughly discassed the questions of Union, Schism, and Separation. In all such discussions we may hope that truth and char- ity will gain ground. The Gustavus Adolphus Society was formed in 1832, on the second centenary of the Protestant hero's death from whom it was named. It was organized " to afford assistance to the dispersed and scattered members of the Protestant Church, especially to any who may suffer oppression ; to supply their spiritual wants, and to aid in the erection of chapels, in which the evangelical doctrines may be preached." At first it was not dis- criminating in the seleiition of its objects ; but now stands on the Word of God as its platform. Among other good deeds, it has saved from utter extinction a church of 1900 members at Santomysl, by reconstructing its ruined church edifice. It expended last year more than ^30,000, mostly on churches sufi'er- ing from Romanist oppression. And not leakt among the signs of Christian union is the growth of Young Men's Olu-istian Associ- ations, which are entirely catholic in their character, and are now increasing in number in different states of Europe. 10. Tfi£ Missionary Labors of the Church. — Here we see one of the brightest spots in the horizon, the harbinger of a new day for Europe and the world. When we consider what has been done in Europe and by European Chris- tians since the days of the Countess of Hun- tington and, the Wesleys, to spread abroad Bibles, religious tracts, and missionaries, we feel assured that so much seed sown in so much faith and prayer, must be growing, now in the unnoticed blade, soon to show the ear, and the full corn in the ear. Other portions of this Cyclopedia will show what the Euro- pean churches are doing in the great field of Paganism. We shall here merely exhibit a sketch of the missions conducted on their own territory, and a table of their foreign opera- tions. The Gustavus Adolphus Society, al- ready referred to, is a Home Mission Society. They have turned their attention recently to the wretched condition of their countrymen in the different capitals of Europe. In London are 25,000 German Protestants, of whom not 1000 attend worship. In Paris 60,000 Ger- mans are found, exceedingly degraded, for the most part, having only 5 churches and 7 preach- ers. In Lyons there are 12,000. They re- solved, at their recent meeting in Berlin, to collect information concerning the spiritual condition of their expatriated countrymen, and report to the several states, requesting that measures might be taken to discourage emi- gration, and to provide churches and schools for those who are deprived of them. Besides this institution, the German churches have 340 EUROPE. organized the Inner or Home Missionary So- ciety. The Episcopal and the dissenting churches of Britain have organized very effi- cient societies to labor in Ireland. To those Irish mission churches alone which are sus- tained by the Congregational Society of Eng- land, more than 400 members were admitted last year. Its labors extend to nearly half a million of people, and it has 13,000 children in its Sunday-schools. ' The following table presents an approxima- tive view of the contributions of the European evangelical churches to the missionary work ; and yet it is far from being complete. MEANS AND MEN OP THE EUROPEAN EVANGELICAL MISSIONARY SOCIETIES. SOCIHTUSS. Years. Contributed in one year. Aggregate m Years. 1 i. ,3 !2i i 1 1 1 1 1 "6 1 ! -a a 1853 1850 1863 1863c 1860 1862 1847 1849 1851 1849 (( 1850 1852 1863 (t 1863 1854 1853 $302,000 a 620,000 444,700 129,610 1,083,300 674,430 21,900 8,760 128,625 249,976 162,237 345,120/ 26,630 64,000 63,640 25,600 10,100 26,160 16,110 6,634 130,420 7,000 66,700 87, 000 j 2,610,700 167,000 180,000 18,360 26,240 89,406,000 10,730,646 7,408,630 2,636,306 17,789,468 38 54 84 61 171 138 4911) 64 427 507 e 50 133 289 e 10 22 95 3004 1,000 )b 18 650 1,634 334 4 188 82 16,000 15,306 6,138 1,400 1,186 460 30,000 25,710 4,390 360 1,035 ml 6,000 70,0003 12,600 6,615 Society for Propagation of Gospel. . . British and Foreign Bible Society. . . 847,969,948. (aggregate of re- ceipts of five societies.) London Moravian Association Soc. for Promotion of Clir. Knowl., London Religions Tract Society Francke Evangelical Mission Irish Evangelical Society Colonial Mission (Congregational)... Evangelical Contin. Soc. (London) . , Citv Missions in London (two) English Monthly Tract Society i Home MLssion (Congregational) Gustavus Adolphns Society Irish Chnrch Mission Hibernian Bible Society , Total $7,481,361 n n a About $35j000 in addition were contributed by the mission churches. 6 Colonial Missionaries. ' c Report for 1863, in "News of the Churches." d Issued from beginning 28,671,103 Bibles, in 150 languages or dialects. Other societies on the continent have dis- tributed 2,937,273 copies, e Laborers of all kinds. / Has issued from beginning 547,807,184 publications, in 110 languages. g See Uniiea Brethren. % More than 2,000 visitors. % To send tracts by mail to the higher classes. 204,000 tracts issued in 1863. ;■ Supported 288 churches. jfe Agents in Catholic districts of Ireland. I TeacTiers. m Theological School. n Supposed 4,000 laborers in pagan field. tion in money-making, in the middle stratum ; and sheer scepticism, in the upper class, gives the portrait of every Catholic country. The interesting inquiry here meets us : Is the present tendency of Europe toward Pro- testantism, Atheism, or Popery? So far as England is concerned, we may speak with con- fidence. Even the astute Wiseman was de- ceived by the tractarian movement. The Ox- ford apostasy and the tendency Homeward have probably reached their climax. And it is now manifest to all that the Cardinal has unmasked his battery prematurely. The Pro- testant spirit of England has been outraged, and W^" TAVrtKoVilTT Tirvf olnmV»oi» QfTQin onciQ/IilTT All intelligent observers agree in affirming that the Roman Catholic and G-reek churches present a spectacle of the most revolting for- malism and hypocrisy on the one side, and superstition, equally disgusting, on the other. The absurd credulity of the people, and the villainy of the priesthood, who palm upon them not only lying legends of the past, but present miracles, characterizes even the most highly cultivated Catholic people. High dignitaries in the church give their sanction to these false- hoods ; and even the Pope shows his favor to the monarch of a mighty nation, by sending him a tooth or the toe of a saint 1 Material- ism in the lower stratum of society ; absorp- EUROPE. 341 The London Times asserts that, from 1780 to 1853, the Papists have increased only from 70,000 to somewhat less than 200,000. In Scot- land the increase has been much greater ; but in Germany, as in England, the semi-Eoman de- velopment has only the more effectually arous- ed the Protestant spirit. And we have varied and accumulating testimony to the falling away of thousands from the Eoman church, besides a vast growth of Protestant populations in Catholic towns and districts on the continent. Coblentz, for example, had, in 1824, 23 fami- lies or 60 persons in the evangelical church. Now there are about 4000. Mayence, 50 years ago, had 60 members ; now more than 6000. Cologne in the same time has advanced from 1000 to nearly 10,000. In Ireland the change has been very great ; though the mmbcr of conversions is variously estimated. In West Galway ten years ago there were but 500 Protestants ; there are now more than 5000. Rev. W. Marable says that within two years, 30,000 have been converted to the evangelical faith. In the diocese of Tuam, out of about 20,000 Protestants, nearly bOOO were born papists. At the beginning of the present cen- tury the King of Bavaria married a Protestant princess, who brought a Protestant chaplain to her court. But he could not find a person in Munich who would consent to rent him a house. He was the first avowed Protestant settling there. Now there are 12,000 Protes- tants in the city ; mostly however, immigrants. In France and Italy we have growing evidence of changes of conviction, which are abiding their time, but which must, ere long, be openly manifested. The Ultramontanists in France now dare to unmask their policy ; and are misinterpreting the silence of the nation at the avowal of their monstrous notions and pretensions. They are certainly completing the alienation of the French heart from the Roman church. After the events of 1830, honest men looked to the priests as the only defence against socialism. But the conviction is steadily growing, that Rome is the enemy of a rational freedom. The people are beginning to make that comparison which is so fatal to Rome, between the influ- ence of Romanism and Protestantism respec1> ively, on human society. Protestant England, they see, advancing ; but gradually, healthfully, peacefully adopting various improvements in her government, while within sixty years Cath- olic Prance, with violence and blood, has pass- ed successively from monarchy to republic ; from that to the consulship ; then, to the em- pire; then to legitimist monarchy; then to constitutional monarchy ; then to the republic ; then to absolute monarchy again ; and she is resting there only to recover breath for another somerset. Even Catholic writers, as for in- stance, Eugene Pelletan and Michel Chevalier, (Profession defoi du XlXe Steele, 1 vol. 8vo. — Journal des Debuts, 17 Juin, 1853,) have con- fessed that Protestant, or at least, non-Catholio nations alone are advancing in all respects ; and that they are moving on to the conquest of the world, whilst Catholic nations are gradually dropping from their hands the sceptre of pow- er and influence. Within twenty years, the Protestant pastors of the French national church have increased from 250 to 500 ; and all other Protestant in- terests have been advancing in the same ratio. Atheism has made some progress in Great Britain, in connection with the movements toward social reformation. But these indica- tions have drawn forth corresponding efforts _ on the part of Christians, which are attended with very encouraging results. The change in the tone of some leading journals indicates a favorable change among the educated classes. In Germany there is a manifest reaction among the clergy. The cold and barren regions of atheistical speculation are not as popular as they were a few years ago. Believing men are adopting a bolder policy ; and in fact, en- tertaining less respect than formerly for ration- alistic theories. In Prussia there have been some manifestar tions of favor to Popery in high places. And this has certainly led to a formidable increase of Roman priests and churches in that king- dom. But the people have at length become so sensitive on the subject, that the king will probably act hereafter with more reserve in this direction, and pay more regard to the wishes of his Protestant subjects than to the feelings of his Catholic wife. It is then difficult to give a well founded reply to the inquiry whether the European people are tending most to Protestantism or to Popery. The Catholics appear to be san- guine. You may find recorded in the Dublin Registry the very names of their converts from the Protestant- ranks, with special stress laid upon the rank of the pervert or the standing of his father. Thus they give the statistics of conversions in England, (1845-1852.) "Clergy 142. Ladies, 76. Their children, 87. Noble ladies, 26. Noblemen, 30. Gentlemen, all of hige station, 148. Total 509. Mem. The addition^ of 1853 will greatly swell this list." In so brief a space as we can give to this field, it is impossible to show all the encouraging in- dications of reviving religious principle and feeling, which the present state of Europe pre- sents. The French Protestants are aiming in every way to revive a love for the memory of their ancestry of confessors and martyrs. Among other measures they have organized a society for publishing the history of French Protest antism. The British press is issuing a higher style of exegetical works than we have been accustomed to receive from that quarter. And religions periodicals of great value are now issued in every part of Protestant Europe. And if it were necessary to reply to the false assertions of a distinguished Roman prelate. 342 EUROPE. under the title, "The Decline of Protestantism," we should merely contrast the missionary en terprises of the True with those of the False Church. Did we count our missionaries as they count theirs, amounting to 6,076, ours would be 20,000, or 4000 ordained mission- aries, and 16,000 assistants, controlling some 40 presses in heathen lands. We should point to more than 17,000,000 spent in one year by the evangelical churches of Europe alone to propagate a pure Christianity ; to 2,200,000 Bibles, which one society distributed in one year, making a total of more than 26,500,000 ; and to 34,700,000 religious publications ; mak- ing a total of nearly 550,000,000 by one so- ciety. III. The agencies employed to dissemi- nate THE Gospel in Eukope. — We are not at liberty to consider here any agency that does not immediately affect the religious in- terests of the people. Tet, Christianity re- quires so imperiously the aid of jDOpular instruc- tion, to secure her highest ends, that we cannot entirely omit a reference to it. The brutal ignorance of the majority of Catholics who mi- grate to this country from Ireland, is painful to every philanthropic mind. In Eussia not more than one in eight hundred can read. So that we must strictly regard the majority of the people of Europe as really pagans, intel- lectually as well as religiously. 1. Common Schools. — Scotland took the lead in popular education. And to that and the character of her pulpit instruction, she is in- debted for her distinguished position. England moves slowly in this work, because Dissent is jealous of the Established Church ; and yet the government wishes to place the schools under the control of the pet-church. Prussia has introduced a very efficient system of com- mon schools, which is now extended to all Germany. Yet it should be remembered that, while the children of Prussia are so exten- sively instructed, we must not judge the re- sults of this instruction by what we witness in this country. With the peasantry it does not form the basis of higher cultivation, nor the guarantee of further improvement. Ireland, Holland, Denmark, Protestant Switzerland, Austria, Italy, Belgium, and Sardinia, have adopted a system of primary instruction. Eus- sia, Sweden, and Turkey, are taking some steps in the matter. Much has been done in Germany, France, and England to reclaim vicious boys. Miss Callandrini, a lady of a truly missionary spirit, more than twenty years ago introduced religious infant schools into Northern Italy. But the Eoman Pontiff, with earnest vigilance, has guardecl his little wretch- ed dominions from the intrusion of infant schools, railroads, and Bibles. 2. Temperance. — The northern portions of the Continent present the same melancholy spectacle of intemperance, which was so common in this country, before the organization of Temperance Eeform ; and until very recently no very manifest impression has been made any where, unless it be in Sweden. Within a few years, however, the British people are be- ginning to appreciate the immense advantages which would result from a universal cessation from the use of intoxicating beverages. But we now look mainly to — 3. Preaching and the distribution of Bibles and Religious Tracts, for the salvation of the perish- ing. There are several organizations in this country, and in England and Scotland, which act on the people of Europe, mostly through native institutions and laborers. In America is the American and Foreign Christian Union, which supplies the principal Continental soci- eties with funds, and employs a few laborers under its own immediate direction. In an ap- pendix will be found a very full statement of the missionary labors of the Methodist Church in Europe. The Presbyterian Church (0. S.) also contributes liberally to this object. The Bap- tist Church has labored long and faithfully to support American missionaries in France ; thus far, with very discouraging results, from the opposition of the priests, which has been the more effectual, as directed against foreign- ers. They have likewise sustained missions in Germany and northern Europe, and with much better success. Their churches now spread through Germany, Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, and into Switzerland, embracing about 5000 members. More than fifty Bible Socie- ties, and the Tract and Sunday-school Societies of Europe and America, are distributing their valuable publications over the whole European field ; perhaps less extensively in Spain and Portugal, however, than in any other countries. The native Missionary Societies in Prance, Belgium, Switzerland, and the Germa., o Dates, laboring among their own population, are yet feeble ; and mostly much restricted by the civil power of the priesthood. The Belgian Evangelical Society has 16 preachers and 45 stations. The French Wesleyans have 26 chapels, 79 stations, 19 ministers and candi- dates, five evangelists and catechists, 32 local preachers, 830 members, 122 candidates, and 1462 pupils in their Sunday-schools. The Eeligious Tract Society of France has dis- tributed more than one million publications. The two French Bible Societies have distri- buted more than 18,000 Bibles and 67,000 New Testaments. Besides these are the Evangelical Society of the dissenters ; the Central Society, sustained by the evangelical members of the French National Church, both accomplishing a work of inestimable importance, employing hundreds of laborers, and with constantly en- couraging results. I'he Church of Lyons is itself a vigorous missionary society. In Ger- many there are various important Home Mis- sionary institutions, which are working with encouraging success. In Sardinia, complete toleration is now opening a \^ ide door for evan- EUROPE. 343 gelical efforts. In Central and Southern Italy, as in Austria, much greater obstructions exist. Several very interesting establishments, almost or quite unknown in America, exist among the Protestants of Europe. One is the Deaconess Houses, designed to train religious women for usefulness among the poor and sick. They exist in France, Germany, Switzerland, and Russia. Another is a Retreat for ladies of high families in Germany, not requiring celi- bacy ; but, in case of marriage, the member of the sisterhood forfeits her admission-fee. This, and several others^ are adapted to the peculiar circumstances created by the institu- tions and customs of the country. The Rough House, of Horn, near Hamburg, has great celebrity as a model institution for reclaiming children. We now inquire — lY. What may be done to evangelize Europe? — Wide and effectual doors are open for a tenfold increase of evangelical labors. And there is much reason to believe that He who is so wonderfully bringing India and China within the reach of his Church, will soon bring eastern and southern, if not north- eastern Europe before her, as an accessible missionary-field. But at present our brethren in France, Belgium, and Germany are con- tinually pointing out to us labor to be done, and laborers ready to perform it, while the lack of pecuniary resources restricts their operations. V. The Hindk^nces to Evangelizing Europe. — They are many and mighty ; such as only faith in God has a right to despise. Most prominent among them are : 1. Tlie Union of the Church with the civil government ; or, rather, the subjection of the Church to civil rulers. The Roman Catholic Church is thus united with the governments of France, Belgium, Spain, Portugal, the Italian States, Austria, and other German states, and several Swiss cantons. The Episcopal Church is thus united with the Government of Great Britain in England, Ireland, Malta and Gib- raltar. The Lutheran Church is united with the governments of Prussia, France, Denmark, Sweden, Saxony, and other German states. The Presbyterian Church is united with those of Holland, France, Great Britain (in Soot- land,) and several Swiss cantons. Tne Greek Church is united with those of Russia, Greece, and the Ionian Isles. The Mohammedan Church is united with that of Turkey. France also supports the Jewish Church. The vital question in regard to this relation be- tween the Church and the State, is : Has either a right to interfere with the self-govern- ment of the other ? It is a broad question, demanding a profounder discussion than would be appropriate here. Yet we cannot dismiss it with a dry statistical statement. Even popes have advocated the complete independ- ence of each of these powers. Their testi- mony, however, loses even its appropriate weight, because it is always given for an occar sion, and frequently on the opposite sides of the same question. Some writers pretend to discover great advantages to the Church and to society in this connexion, especially in the periods when the forms of society were dis- solved ; and also its adaptedness to the old forms of civilization. To us, even this is very questionable ; while, in our age, it presents gross and enormous evils, with scarcely a miti- gating feature. The injustice now perpe- trated under the forms, and in the name of jus- tice, by the most civilized governments of Europe, is a constant appeal to the vengeance of Heaven. We mean not to deny that good men may approve of the system ; nor to cen- sure those who, in their circumstances, think it best to labor within the various established churches. Every man stands or falls to his own Master, and not to his brethren, on that point. Take the case of a civil government throwing the whole of its power into the cause of a lie ; abetting, sustaining, enforcing on the consciences of its subjects, be they thou- sands or millions, to reject Christ's Gospel, and embrace an invention of Satan ! How great the responsibility ; how enormous the injury ; how dreadful the account of such a steward- ship I It is much for a man to judge for him- self what is truth, and to stake his eternal well-being on it. It is more to give himself to instructing and persuading others to do the same. But what will at last be thought of worldly princes or godless statesmen choosing for themselves a false religion, and then, under pains and penalties, enforcing it on their fel- low-creatures 1 They hinder Christ's faithful servants from proclaiming his Gospel. They are the kings of the earth that set themselves against the Lord and his anointed. They hin- der the people from coming to the light. No one, for instance, can tell what would become of the Roman Catholic Church in ten years, if the civil and military power of France and Austria did not uphold it. We have reason to believe that multitudes of the people of Italy and France would at once proclaim themselves Protestants of some form ; and that the zeal of some of its most fervent pre- lates would take some other object, and now in some other channel. We might refer, in confirmation, to the changes which have taken place in Turin, in Genoa, and in Nice, within six years. Nice is said to have become almost as Protestant as Geneva. And, were it in place here to cite facts from America, we could show that Romanism melts away like dew, where it is left to a fair competition with Christianity. Maryland was settled by Catho- lics, just as New England was settled by Puri- tans. Puritans retain their ascendancy there, and have moulded the character of all the land westward to the Pacific ocean. But Mary- land presents at this day 65 Catholics to 800 Protestants. Florida was Spanish. The 344 EUROPE. ■whole country west of the Mississippi was first settled by Spanish Catholics or French Jesu- its. And yet, with all the influx of Irish and German Catholics, — enough, it might reason- ably be thought, to have given the Eoman Church a majority, — the census shows in Floi-- ida 5 Catholics to 147 Protestants ; in Louisi- ana, 55 Catholics to 223 Protestants ; and in similar proportions in the other states.* It is difficult for Christians in America to conceive of the enormous evils resulting from this vio- lent conjunction of these two institutions. What man can judge for the conscience of his fellow-man ? Think of such sovereigns as Henry VIII. of England, and his daughter Elizabeth, determining for godly men what they must believe, and how they must worship ! No Protestant country more clearly deter- mined, at the time of the Keformation, the true relations of the Church and State, than Scotland ; and, at the same time, none em- braced more errors than England. The only difi'erence between the supremacy of Henry, however, and that of Victoria is, in omitting the title of headship. Thus stands the 37th article of the Church of England : " The Queen's majesty hath the chief power in this realm of England, and other her dominions, unto whom the government of all estates of this realm, whether they be ecclesiastical or civil, in all causes, doth appertain." The 2d canon of 1603 stands thus :f "Whosoever shall affirm that the king's majesty hath not the same authority in cases ecclesiastical, that the godly kings had among the Jews, let him be excommunicated." Dr. Lucius, of Hesse Darmstadt, speaking of his country, says : J " The present lords paramount of the soil are, at the same time, archbishops, born of the Protestant national church. — bishops in military array, with sword and shield ; would that they also always bore the sword of the Spirit, and girded on the whole armor of God ! Even Eoman Catholic princes assume the arch-episcopal office, and exercise its authority in the German Protest ant church." Thus, ungodly men enact eccle- siastical laws, and appoint to ecclesiastical offices. Do we avoid this evil wholly by our system ? Alas ! no. But when worldly men get power in the Church here, it is not by the consent of the Church, by birth, nor by the operation of a system which avows that piety is not necessary in an officer of Christ's Church. The Hessian Constitution for 1803 runs thus : " To the Minister of the Interior " (he may be an infidel, avowedly ; it would not hinder his appointment to this civil office,) " belong matters of police, in the widest signification of the term : the promotion of popular education, and, consequently, ecclesiastical and scholastic « Missions-Blatt, 3 Jahrgaug, No. 10. + Norih BritlBh Review, XV. p. 269. , „ , . i Evangelical Cliristendom, VI. p. 212. We shall desig- nate this work by E. C. affairs ! " Thus, the law makers, judges, rulers and teachers of Christ's Church, are more likely to be men without piety, than to be regenerated men. Look, then, at these facts, selected from thousands. They show both the indifference of the higher clergy to the real worth and wants of the poorer citizens, and the violence done to the Church of Christ in depriving her of one of her most valuable and cherished rights, the choice of teachers. Of 547,112 in- habitants of Sardinia, 512,381 can neither read nor write. And yet there are in that state 11 bishops, 693 canons, 391 cures, 88 monasteries, 15 nunneries, and 2600 priests! or less than 160 souls to a teacher of religion. The Church of England is possessed of im- mense wealth, and yet the Earl of Winchelsea asserted in Parliament she had left two mil- lions of the people without church accommo- dations ; and then, out of 10,891 Episcopal churches in England, only 64 choose their own pastors ! And not among the least pernicious results of the system is that a false standard is brought into Christ's kingdom, and the canon law takes the place of Scripture. Errors that ought to be vanquished by instruction and conviction, are suppressed by physical force, and thought itself is stifled in the conforming and the non- conforming ; and as light penetrates these countries, and the minds of men ai-e aroused to a consciousness of those inalienable rights which these systems destroy, there arises a growing confusion. Civil and canon law are coming constantly into collision with each other, as now in the governments of France and Bavaria, which undertake to support Catholic and Protestant churches alike. In Westphalia the absurd spectacle has been pre- sented of a pastor (Heicrich) seized and im- prisoned, his whole edition of a sermon de- stroyed ; and yet the offence of the sermon was, that in a Lutheran church, under a Lu- theran king, he defended the doctrines of the Lutheran Church against Roman heresies. But in the case of the state supporting a true church, while the immediate evil is not so great, yet the principle is equally false, and many hurtful results remain. There is an in- justice to other sects, and an injury to the de- nomination chosen. For instance, we may cite the fact that in Prussia every person is born into the church, and entitled to the " seal- ing ordinances." Go into one of the princi- pal prisons of Prussian Saxony, containing more than 300 prisoners, and yiDu may regu- lariy see the chaplain administering to them the Lord's Supper indiscriminately. An eye- witness reports : " Several months ago I saw in Marysburg the Lord's Supper administered to a company of several hundred soldiers."-^ (Letters of Prof. Fisher, in Covgregationalist.) Religious liberty is now, on the whole, gain- ing ground. Although the French sovereign EUROPE. 345 deems it his policy to favor the priesthood, yet there is a public sentiment gradually maturing in France, founded on more correct views than have heretofore prevailed. The Protestants of the national church boldly demand their rights under the constitution. And the labors of British Christians on the continent have not been fruitless. The Protestant Conference of Prance and the Kirchentag of Germany have appointed a commission to take charge of this subject. The "Belgic Coustitution guar- antees religious liberty to all, although the Roman Catholic Church is supported by the government. Holland has a moderate degree of religious liberty ; so have Turkey, Den- mark, and Norway; but in Switzerland infi- dels now play the tyrant, especially in Neuf- chatel and Vand. Eussia tolerates other re- ligions than the Greek ; but is very severe on some poor churches, who come reluctantly within the favored fold. Spain, Portugal, Sweden, Italy (except Sardinia,) and Greece have now the unenviable superiority to the Turkish government in the exercise of intol- erance and bigotry. Englishmen dying in Spain are subjected to the most brutal indignities. As one remarks : " The gloomy intolerance of Spain pursues the British Protestant, should he die on Spanish soil, even to his grave." Portugal exhibits some shades of improvement upon Spain ; but even in that country, though it is far more open to British influence than Spain is, relig- ious liberty does little more than breathe. Dr. Gomez, under the article of the Constitu- tion which permits the exercise of the Pro- testant religion to foreigners, and under British protection, continues to preach the doctrines of the Reformation in Lisbon, yet no Portu- guese is allowed to become a member of a Protestant church ; and the Jesuits are incite ing the mob against him, as they did in regard to Dr. Kalley in Madeira. It would require too much expansion of this article to enter into details concerning the state of religious liberty in the several states of Germany. The violence involved in the system, and the immeasurable wrong it inflicts on an intelligent people, may be seen in a re- mark made by one of the most distinguished theologians of Prussia. An American inquired of him, if the Church should be separated from the State, how many of the existing churches of Prussia would adhere to their pre- sent pastors ? The reply was. Not three. The British government has manifested a shameful indifference to the rights of its own subjects traveling or dwelling in papal countries. Her statesmen have boasted of dictating treaties and constitutions to the continental powers ; but, to their disgrace, they have looked with indifference upon the sacred rights of con- science, whjch it was thus in their power to advance. In some states foreign dissenters are hardly tolerated ; and in a large number, native dis- sent is prohibited ; and, of course, all proselyt- ing efforts are crushed by the power of the government. Even among the Protestant governments the spirit of intolerance is mani- festing itself Great Britain has gradually abandoned the narrow policy of former days, under which our fathers suffered to death and exile. But in Sweden persecution is now car- ried on against those who, wearied with the formality of the established churches, are as- sembling to worship God in spirit and in truth. Yet it is cheering to see the symptoms of a change even there. The archbishop of Up- sala, primate of Sweden, has recently held a convocation of his clergy, in which it was de- cided that laymen ought to participate in the spiritual management of the parish ; that, ab- stractly considered, religious liberty is desira- ble ; and that conventicles are allowable. The Baptists have peculiarly suffered in (Jermany, the arm of clerical oppression masked by the toga of the magistrate. Another hindrance to the progress of the Gospel is, 2. The Social penalties attached to a change of religion. — This operates with peculiar power over superstitious and affectionate people, like the Irish and Germans. 3. The Literature of the day is deeply im- bued with a worldly spirit, and to some extent, with infidel opinions and an aversion to the Gospel. 4. 27(6 Philosophy of Europe has been a mighty hindrance to the success of evangelical labors. In Scotland, Hume has had few fol- lowers. In England, Locke has exerted a less injurious influence than in Prance. But be- tween the materialism of one school of German philosophers, and the pantheistic transcendents alism of another, the higher and the lower classes of the continent have been strongly fortified against the influence of the Gospel. But a visible and powerful reaction is taking place in France and Germany, in favor both of a more evangelical faith and of a more spiritual philosophy. Another hi^jdrance to the labors of evangel- ical men is, 5. The debasing effects of Popery on the masses of the People. — It promotes ignorance, superstition, and sensuality. It is, in fact, one of the most demoralizing institutions in the world. The Rev. Mr. Seymour has recently brought out some comparisons between the immorality of several countries of Europe, which are very instructive and painful. The more thoroughly popish a country is, the worse it is. Murder and licentiousness stalk hand in hand among Gothic cathedrals, gorgeous rites, and mumbling priests. Take, for instance, the crime of murder. The standard assumed is one million inhabitants. For every million, there are murdered annually in England, 4; Ireland, 19 ; France, 31 ; Austria, 36 ; Lom- 346 EUROPE. bardy, 45 ; Sicily, 90 ; the Pope's kingdom, 100 ; Naples, 200. All these causes combined have resulted in counteracting, to a great extent, the influence of the few faithful heralds who have been en- deavoring to proclaim the Gospel to the mis- guided 'millions of Europe. VI. The present condition of the Eo- MAN Hiekarchy, considered as an aggressive power. — In forming an estimate of the religi- ous condition and prospects of Europe, a pro- minent place must be assigned to this formida- ble power. We consider, I. Tlt£ir Home Missionary Societies.— The mightiest of these, and yet the most suicidal, is the Order of Jesuits. They were not or- ganized to spread the Gospel in heathen lands, but to defend the Papacy in civilized nations. In a Jesuit's eye, schism is worse than heresy, heathenism, irreligion, or immorality. And, although they have been distinguished as mis- sionaries, their main work was to arrest the Eeformation. Loyola organized them as a religious military police, for the Church of Eome ; but Lainez, the second general of the order, gave it its permanent form of a politi- cal order, whose main instruments are shrewd, unscrupulous intrigue, educating youth, and "confessing princes and nobles. One of their early movements was the planting of two powerful colleges in Eome ; that of the Jesuits for general purposes, and a German college, in which the course of instruction prepared men to control the German mind. Belgium had be- come half Protestant ; but, by education chiefly, the Jesuits recovered it to Eome. The college of Douai was founded for the conversion of England. Poland had become almost Pro- testant. But the colleges of Cracow, Grodno, and Pultusk, crushed the Eeformation there: in the same way they saved Austria to the Pope. The order has made itself, in turn, indis- pensable to every despotic government of Eu- rope, and then has rendered itself intolerable' to them all. To the best classes of every civilized community, sooner or later, the pres- ence of this body must be found insufferable to men of probity and virtue, to true patriots, to rulers, and to men of science and learning. Society is against them ; for she is pressing to the future ; they would anchor her to the past. Even the other orders of the Eoman hierar- chy can barely tolerate their arrogance. Their barbarous opposition to science, genuine his- tory, and classical literature, unites the educated classes against them. They make unrelenting war on the universities and educators of any country that will tolerate them. Three hun- dred and twenty-six of their authors have been condemned by the tribunals of Europe as en- couraging crime. The Parliament of Prance burned their books by the hands of the hangman in 1762. The archbishop of Malines, in his work, Du Jesuitisme, Ancien el Moclerne, says, " that of these 326 works approved by these Jesuit theo- logians, 17 encouraged immodesty, 28 perjury, 33 robbery, 36 homicide," &o. In 1773 Clem- ent XIV., in compliance with the feelings of the civilized world, suppressed the order. At that time it had 22,787 members ; of whom 11,010 were priests. But the suppression was only in appearance. Catharine of Eussia saved them as an order. But, authorized or unauthorized, they have insinuated themselves into every part of Europe. In 1814, Pius VII. restored their order. But when the Em- perpr of Eussia found them not only opposing the Bible Society he had formed, but also in- ierfering with the Eussian mission in Peking, which was purely scientific, he adopted still more rigid measures against them. This is the official verdict of the government : ' Every act of the Jesuits is founded in selfishness, and directed solely to the unlimited extension of their power : adepts in excusing each of their unlawful proceedings by some rule of their company, they have a conscience as vast as it is docile.' In 1845 they had 1390 priests in Europe, 1184 scholars, and 1041 lay brothers. They have lost the prestige of their fame as educators and as leaders of human thought. They have not, at this day, one commanding preacher, to reach the masses of mankind. Immense wealth and untiring industry are powerful instruments. But when these are employed against the whole current of human thought and the mighty movements of human society, their possessors toil like Samson shorn of his locks. They are at present recognized only in some of the Italian States, and toler- ated in Prance, where they hold immense pos- sessions, under false names ; having about one thousand members, so far as can be ascertain- ed. Their paper in Paris, L'Univers, is bold to impudence, and uncompromising in its claims for Popery. It is said to be in the pay of the Court of Eome. And it is a striking fact that the Department of Worship in the general government — that is, the superintendence and care of all the churches of Prance, Catholic, Protestant, and Jewish, is in the hands of a Jesuit layman. Beside this renowned corps, there is a great number of orders and institutions, embracing persons of both sexes, designed for educating Protestant children, and for the care of or- phans and invalids. They are resorting again, in self-defence, to preaching " out of season," if not out of consecrated places. Series of meetings are now held by the Jesuits, Ee- demptonsts, Capuchins, Franciscans, Ligo- rians, &c., sustained by various societies— St. Vmcentius, Borromeo, Childhood of Jesus Eo- sary Catholic, Sisters of Education, &c. ' A society has been organized to pray for the conversion of Prance. It counts 40 000 members in St. Brience alone. Then there are fraternities attached to particular churches Almost every church in Paris has one. The EUROPE. 347 most important is that of the Sacred Heart : it has had 50,000 members. They have great varieties of schools for children, and asylums for the aged. They have also retreats, not so rigid as monasteries. The Society of St. Vin- cent de Paul, in Paris, composed of young- people, has auxiliaries throughout the king- dom. It labors indefatigably to reclaim chil- dren, paupers, and apprentices, to the Catholic faith. Its receipts from lotteries, oharity ser- mons, &c., were ^40,812 in one year. As a specimen of the home missionary operations of the Roman Catholic church, we may select those established in Belgium. Twenty monas- teries exist there. The majority of them are of recent foundation, and have abandoned the old notions of meditation, fasting, and inac- tivity ; for all which they have substituted an intense activity. Ths Ignorantins have up- wards of twenty houses, and are increasing in number, as being peculiarly efficient in reach- ing the mass of the people. The Freres de la Charite have houses, scattered through the five dioceses. The Josephites have seven houses, divided into three classes ; priests, seminarists, and artisans. The Freres de Renaix have four houses : ihey take care of the aged, promote free schools for the poor, and work- shops for needy tradesmen. The Freres de la Misericorde have three houses ; attending to the sicTi and to prisoners. The Freres Xive- riens devote themselves to instructing and to nursing in families, and in houses of detention and correction. But female missions are still more numerous. The diocese of Mechlin alone contains 33 orders of nuns ; comprising 109 communities, only eight of which are devoted to a contemplative life. The whole corps of archbishops and bishops in Europe is about 400. 2. Their Foreign Missionary operations are increasing. — The missionary college in Eome, called the Collegium de Propaganda Fide, insti- tuted by Urban VIII., in 1627, still continues to educate men of different nations as mission- aries to their own people. And the Congre- gatio de Propaganda Fide, founded- by Gregory XV., in 1622, still continues its missionary labors. There are five Foreign Mission Soci- eties established in Paris. The Society for Propagating the Faith, founded recently in Lyons, is a remarkable in- stitution. It collects one cent a week from each of its members, scattered throughout Eu- rope, Asia, and America. In 1850 its receipts were $620,370 ; (some say $950,000,) of which $357,734 were from Prance. The congregar tion of St. Lazarus has increased its mission- aries from 13 to 200, within thirty years. The Jesuits, Dominicans, and Franciscans have taken up the work of missions afresh, and new orders are entering the field, Eedemptorists, Passionists, Oblatists, Priests of Mary's Holy Heart, the Maryists, and the Monks ofPicpus. The united incomes of three of their missionary societies amount to nearly $1,300,000 per an- num. The Dublin Catholic Eegistry reports their foreign mission operations, but furnishes basis for no other statistical statements than these : the number of Catholics in India is 822,000 ; the number of priests in Africa is 150. — (See Church of Rome, Missions of.) 3. Present internal strength of Popery. — Judged by the true standard, the papal religion is a failure, even on its own chosen ground. The present political, social, financial, moral, intel- lectual, and religious condition of the imperial city is its standing condemnation : the verdict of a righteous Providence, which mankind may read and understand, if they have eyes to see and ears to hear. The city of Rome, for instance, has 137,866 lay citizens, and to teach them how to be holy and happy, they have the Pope himself, a large portion of the cardinals, 34 bishops, 1314 secular priests ; 1548 monks, aiid 1686 nuns. But immorality, scepticism and discontent, with a profound contempt of the Pope and his reverend counsellors, charac- terize the city of seven hills. A leaden atmos- phere seems to oppress the respiration in that doomed city ; the blasphemous corrupter of the kings and nations of the earth. No man is competent to judge the real condition of that church. It is constructed with a cunning adaptedness to conceal, even from Catholics, its faults and falsehoods ; and yet more energe- tically to prevent the exposure of them to the world, when discovered ; and therefore even the Pope himself is incompetent to determine anything beyond the external show of things. But results cannot be concealed, and we may get some definite view of a system com- prising such varied and conflicting pretensions, and blended ambiguously with so many civil governments, by separately considering these points : The temporal supremacy of the Pope ; the boasted unity of the infallible church ; the state of the controversy with Protestantism ; and the result of the attempt to convert Great Britain. How stand then A. The pretensions of the Pope to be tlie Empe- ror of the World ? — It should never be lost sight of, that while Roman Catholics are divided in- to two parties. Catholics and papists, the Popes and Cardinals are always papists. They be- lieve, or profess to believe, that mankind will never be happy ; error and sin will never cease; commerce and agriculture, education, and above all, religion will never thrive ; nor, in a word, Christ reign universally until the Pope has reigned as a tempopal despot, over every kindred and people, and tribe and man. All however who believe the dogmas of the church, do not believe in these pretensions of the Pope. After the toighty Charlemagne had called on the bishop of Rome to crown him, the idea of universal supremacy seems to have taken root in the papal brain. But it never was fully matured until the ambitious Hildebrand gave 348 EUROPE. it form and utterance. Among the doctrines he promulgated are these : (Baronius, Didatus Papce.) "The Pope is one universal bishop, with all power to depose, restore, translate, and alter the sees of other bishops. No book is canonical without his sanction. No council can be called general without his precept. He can depose emperors ; he can absolve subjects from their allegiance. He is the judge of all men, and no man can judge him. All priuces must kiss his feet. There is only one name in the world, that of the Pope ; and by the me- rits of the blessed Peter, he is endowed with personal sanctity." But how far has Gregory V II. convinced the world of the truth of these tremendous dogmas ? The world has discov- ered that the Roman Church stands upon two failsehoods — two base and acknowledged for- geries. We say acknowledged : for since the day in which the Magdeburg centuriators showed to the world that they were forgeries, her ablest writers have abandoned them. And yet, if these are not her ground, she has no other for claiming to be more than a simple Christian church, upheld, (if she stands at all, like all other churches,) simply by the power of the Holy GJ-host. Her claim of supremacy over all other churches is founded, not to say upon the strange construction of a promise to an apostle to the Jews, by which a church of gentiles is made supreme over all others, but upon the ' Decretals of Isidore.' Her claim for temporal authority stands upon the ' Do- nation of Constantine,' both of them base forgeries. The question then before us is, how the gov- ernments and churches regard these two claims ? The Protestant churches and govern- ments probably acquiesce unanimously in re- garding the pretension as arrogant and ab- surd, to the last degree. A recent writer, (J. B. Shephard, A.M., " History of the Church of Rome to the end of the Episcopate of Damasus, A.D. 384, 1851,") says, that he undertook to in- vestigate the facts on this subject, as establish- ed by documents ; this is his conclusion : " What is recorded of the Boman church within that period, is almost nothing ; and that those a'cts of interference with other churches, which ap- pear in the histories and some other writings, are forgeries of a much later date, manifestly written to create a belief in a supremacy which had never existed, but which, at the time they were made, the Boman church was endeavoring to introduce." He finds the gross- est anachronisms in these records, for exam- ple : Constantine is said to give Sylvester supremacy, even over Constantinople, when Constantinople has not yet an existence. Gregory VII. proposed to himself to subju- gate the world by means of the clergy. He therefore exempted the monasteries from epis- copal jurisdiction, and so obtained the exclu- sive services of a disciplined ecclesiastical mil- itia. But even the Catholic sovereigns of Europe choose to keep their sceptres m their own hands, and employ the Catholic clergy as a police. And the most intelligent Catholic laymen throughout Europe, we believe, are of the same opinion with the late Abbe Lamme- nais, that if the Pope is a sincere Christian, and seeks the spiritual welfare of mankind, he will lay aside his triple crown, and retain only the Bishop's Croisier. There is not a prince in Europe who does not despise the civil au- thority of the Pope, at least as much as that of the Sultan. Both those characters are re- tained in the list of sovereigns by suffrance, and by the help of other peoples' soldiers. B. Tlie Unity of the Catholic Church. — This is another false pretension and hypocritical profession. Neither Popes, Councils, Clergy, nor Laymen are any more united than the members of Protestant churches. Opinions and decisions of Fathers, Councils, and Popes recorded and published, are not harmonious. Two Popes contended for the crown ; and a council without a Pope appointed a third. The old Jesuit and Jansenist tendencies re- main, while the Jansenist party is broken up. The Galilean and Ultramontane battle is as severely fought to this day in Paris, as in any former period. The church has adopted two self-destroying fundamental theories ; on the one side, infallibility, and consequent immuta- bility ; on the other, the developement theory of Newman. She insists on absolute authority, and then reasons with private judgment to prove that there can be no legitimate exercise of private judgment. The questions to-day discussed in Catholic Prance go to the bottom of Papal claims and pretensions. They affect the union of civil and temporal power in the Pope ; the agreement or antagonism of Popery and modern society ; the rights of the inferior clergy. And when Frenchmen take up such questions, they investigate them thoroughly. C. The State of the Doctrinal Controversy. — The only real and legitimate controversy Eome can maintain, is on the question of her infallibil- ity. And it is striking, that when Mr. Seymour in his discussions with the Jesuits, (Mornings at Rome,) affirmed that Borne had never dogmat- ically asserted her infallibility, and challenged them to produce such affirmation, they were thrown into utter confusion. The fact is, that on these fundamental points, What is the Church? and. When are her utterances infal- lible? she never speaks positively ; but al- ways assures that she is infallible, when it suits her purpose so to do. Her present doc- trinal discussion makes a meagre portion of theological literature. D. Tlie Papal Movements in England.~On& of the most striking events of the 19th cen- tury has been the struggle of Eome, accom- panied with premature shouts of rictorv to recover England to the Pope. Appearances were certainly encouraging for them There were in 1838, in England, 11 dukes, 2 earls EUROPE. 349 7 lords, 18 of the richest baronets, and more than 50 of the wealthiest families, members of the Catholic church. And within a few years 10 Episcopal clergymen, and 120 of the nobil- ity and gentry have joined them. In 1792 there were not 30 chapels in Great Britain ; now there are 616, (800, Dr. Cummings says,) with more than 300,000 attendants, and 875 priests. Within seven years sixty of the larg- est churches have been built by them. They had not then one college. Kow they have 10.* They have one Quarterly Eeview, two or three monthlies and one able weekly paper. In Ire- land the principal high ofBces of state were in the hancfe of Catholics. Oxford University education partook so much of the medieval spirit, as to furnish good instruments for de- stroying the work of the Reformation. There was great formality and indifference in the Episcopal ranks that had rejected the " Meth- odism " of Simeon and the Clapham school. So far then as these gentlemen were sincere in attachment to the Protestant principles they professed, they aimed to prevent the Episcopal church from being latitudinarian and worldly. But their remedy was worse than the disease. They substituted traditions of men for the Word of God ; apostolical succession for minis- terial godliness ; sacramental regeneration for the work of the Holy Spirit ; the visible unity of the church for the spiritual union of free men ; justification by ceremonies for justifica- tion by faith. Many of the most intelligent men in England, however, give them no credit for sincerity. The honest Arnold bitterly complained of their want of honesty. Mr. Eose affirms that the movement originated in an anticipation that the established Church was to be separated from the state, and then these clergymen would be denuded of those claims of superiority and of transcendental dignity, which they have never sacrificed, and be placed on a level with the ministers of other denominations. They must, therefore, have something to fall back upon. And they hit npon the assumption that they are the Church, and that all churches or communions, extrinsic to theirs, are heathen men and publicans. So that about twenty years ago they commenced their operations, and conducted them with consummate skill. Three fundamental princi- ples were laid down : the participation of the body and blood of Christ in the Eucharist is a reality ; the mystery of his body and blood has been confided only to the hands of the succes- sors of the Apostles, and their delegates ; since the Apostles, those who derived their succes- sion from them in an unbroken lice, by the imposition of the hands of the bishops, are the only priests to give this body and blood unto the people. Dr. Newman saw that their effort to transfer the Nicene Church of the fourth * Living Age, New Series, HI. p. 469. Cummings on Apoc. X. 390, (Am. edit.) century to the nineteenth was inadmissible. He therefore resorted to the doctrine of devel- opement, which is directly destructive of the famous claim of Bome to infallibility. By means of tracts, reviews, novels, and poetry, this leaven was spread through England, ft has logically resulted, in seventy instances only, in taking its abettors from the ministry of the Episcopal to that of the Roman Church. But the movement has reached its climax, and is silently sinking into the oblivion it merits. Our picture will not be complete, without adding to this general view of the Continent, a more specific description of the several States. VII. Review of the Bueopean States. — ^ 1. England, Scotland, and Ireland. — Popular tion (including Guernsey) 28,500,000 (U). — The English Reformation, we have already re- marked, was deeply defective in many respects. The king was made the Pope of England ; all religious interests being put under his control, even to the appointment of all the bishops ; and, to complete the anomalous condition of the church, her bishops became a portion of the civil aristocracy, and members of the gov- ernment. Liberty in matters of conscience was not permitted, on the penalty of an utter exclusion from all civil offices, and from the privileges of the universities. After passing through various phases, the Church of Eng- land is now divided into -three parties. They are familiarly denominated the Low, High, and Broad Church. The Low Church takes the Calvinistic view of theArticles ; and is earnest in moral reforms, in promoting spiritual reli- gion, and missions to the heathen. Their or- gan is the Record. The High Church has for its watch-words — Judgment by works ; Bap- tismal regeneration ; Church authority ; and Apostolical succession. The Guardian is its organ. The Broad Church is well represented by the lamented Arnold. It makes much of the visible church ; of symbols ; of the unity of the Church under different names. The fol- lowing classification has been made of the 18,000 episcopal clergymen in England : — High Church — Anglican, 3500 ; Tractarian, 1000 ; High and Dry, 2500. Low Church— Evangelical, 3300; Recordite, 2500; Low and Slow, 700. Broad Church — Theoretical, 1000 ; Anti-theoretical, 2500. About 1000 of the peasant clergy are to be ranked apart from these. Of the bishops, 13 are High ; 10 Broad ; 5 Evangelical. To the student of British history, this state of things is encouraging, as it is an evidence of progress. Indeed, the distinguishing feature of all British history is the steady progress oi truth and righteousness, as seen in her Consti- tution, her legislation, and her ecclesiastical history. Britain is moving with a slow, undo viating march, onward toward a brighter age A great principle once secured there, is never lost to the British race, nor to the world. Re 350 EUROPE. forms do not move as rapidly as we desire ; but they are advancing;. We have seen those two instruments of tyranny — the act of Uni- formity and the Conventicle act, give place to the act of Toleration ; which has been con- tinually maintained inviolate, and even en- larged. It was an immense progress from the days of Laud and Jeffrey to the day when Lord Chatham, addressing his peers,, said, " The Dissenters are represented as men of close ambition. They are so, my lords. And their ambition is, to keep close to the college of fishermen, and not of cardinals ; to the doc- trine of inspired apostles, not to the decrees of interested and aspiring bishops. They con- tend for a spiritual creed and a spiritual wor- ship." Prom the days of Magna Charta to the present parliamentary investigation of O.Kford affairs, resulting in the admission of dissenters to the University, there has been a steady pro- gress ; while the other European nations have either remained stationary or receded. The dissenters have become more discerning of their rights and more courageous in advoca1> iug them. They have also become more pow- erful in the House of Commons, which is the real seat of civil power in the nation. The recent papal maneuvre was premature, and has made England more intelligently anti- papal, more firmly Protestant than she has been of late years. There is also an increase of spirituality in the national and the dissent- ing churches. The renowned universities of the kingdom provide for the ministry a major- ity of its incumbents. The prominent defect of these venerable institutions is their conser- vative lethargy. They do not keep pace with the necessities of society, only as tar as it has interests in the past. The present and the future are not to be learned in O.xford or Cam- bridge, as they may be in the colleges of the dissenters. CHURCHES AND ATTENDANCE IN ENGLAND, SCOTLAND, AND WjiiBS. Denominations. Episcopal Inilepenilent Baptist Methodist (Wesleyan) . . , Jlclhodist (Primitive)... Presbyterian (English).. PresbyteriaQ (Scotch) , . . UiiitariaD Lady Huntington Con. . . Otlier Evan;;el deaom. . , Roman Catholic Je\7s Quakers Jlormons Undefined 13,718 3,443 2,066 6,649 (\-A)* 83 2,628 (6) (117) i (ao) (67 Sittings. 6,!47,93.5 1,189,478 576,561 1,467,631 (2,490) 41,a82 1,760,149 (2,437) (52,776) (67 (2,16^ (3,182) Attend- ance. 2,568 310 818,634 480,491 915,722 620,617 28,212 851,584 37,863 21,686 81,000 349,878 4,178 (1P6) (1,304) 33,304 * The numbers enclo.sed in parenthesis belong to Scot- land alone. The preceding table presents the results of some recent efforts to ascertain the provisions made in England, Wales and Scotland, for the religious culture of the people, and the actual attendance on divine worship. Prom these statistics it is manifest that unless the room provided in churches exceeds the num- ber needed, (which is highly improbable,) there is still a sad indifference to God's insti- tutions of grace, even in a country so Chris- tianized as England. Of the 17,297,000 in- habitants of England and Wales, only 6,000,000 or about one-third attend worship. So that as many as seven and a half millions either neglect public worship, or attend on the min- istry of error. Dr. Cummings, in his able and interesting Lectures on the Apocalypse, has given a fear- ful exhibition of the moral and religious con- dition of London. (Vol. I. p. 382.) He re- marks : " If all the churches and chapels were as full as they could hold, not one-fourth of the population would be within them. There are never in church on one Sunday, in all denomi- nations, more than 200,000 people out of 2,000,000. And how many, do you think, of that number are communicants? Startling fact ! Awful stain upon the missionary zeal of the metropolis ! There are scarcely 60,000 communicants in all the chapels and churches of this vast city put together ! The steam boats and railways alone carry from the me- tropolis every Sunday morning a greater pop- ulation than are that day in all the chapels and churches together. There are in London 12,000 children trained professionally to pick pockets and plunder houses. There are 1 0,000 gamblers, 20,000 beggars, 30,000 regular thieves, 150,000 habitual gin drinkers, and 150,000 of both se.xes habitually leading a life of debauchery !" In the report of the late imperfect investi- gations of attendance on worship in Scotland, it is stated, that on the census day, March 30, 1851, of the 2,888,742 people in Scotland, only 9-13,951 persons attended the fullest, or morn- ing service ; and of these about 46,000 attend- ed on the ministration of error. And there is also a want of provision ; there being in every kind of church only 1,834,805 sittings, and Of course many of these remote from the people. The Catholics have 14 colleges in England, and 3 English colleges on the Continent. In Great Britain 812 churches. 1126 priests, 101 nunneries, &c. The Sunday-school is less efficiently sustain- ed in Scotland than in England. There may be so much more faithful parental instruction and p\iblic religious instruction there, as to diminish the necessity for this form of relio-ious influence. Popery has made progress in Scotland. In 1831 there were 54 priests ; in 1852 they had increased to 135— having 100 churches and chapels, one college, and several schools and EUROPE. 351 convents. But the most interesting' feature in ■ the modern history of Scotland is what is there termed " the Disruption." It was a new Pro- test against the usurpation of ecclesiastical power by the state. In 1843 nearly 500 pas- tors, 200 licentiates, and 200 students, followed by a million of the inhabitants, abandoned the State Church in one day, and formed the Free Church. At their annual Ueneral Assembly in 1854, they reported 31,347,780 as rajsed by their churches for the sustentation, building, congregational, missions, e^^uoation and miscel- laneous funds. They sustain two theological schools, one in Edinburgh and one in Aber- deen. They have about 40 Scottish foreign missionaries, mostly in India, and 57 native missionary assistants. On no foreign country do we look with such interest in reference to the world's conversion to holiness, as on Great Britain. Her politi- cal power is ascendant ; her Constitution is liberal ; her national interests are less exposed to the control of demagogues than those of our republic ; her religion is Protestant ; her in- tellectual culture is high ; her colonial posses- sions stretched as a zone of Protestant con- stitutional power around the globe, contain 131,000,000 souls. A recent writer justly re- marks : " With all England's defects, it would not be an easy task rightly to estimate the vast instrumentalities whioti she contains for the moral and spiritual melioration of her own population and tha world at large." It requires six weeks to enable the various reli- gious societies to hold their annual meetings in London. In the city of London millions of dollars are annually expended for the benefit, temporal and spiritual, of the poor and the careless. Its City Mission has become a mag- nificent instrument of good, solving most satis- factorily the difiicult question for London and all large towns, " What can be done for the poor ?" The Young Men's Association is opening a new prospect to another class, here- tofore so neglected. By tracts, lectures, Bible classes, meetings for prayer, conference meet^ ings and libraries immeasurable good has been done. Similar organizations are now spread- ing throughout the kingdom, and introduced into Germany, Holland, France, Switzerland, and Sardinia. In regard to Ireland, we may be sure that the Roman Church has lost great numbers by famine, emigration and conversion within six years. The estimates vary from half a million to two millions. Many who remain in the Roman Church have at heart renounced its errors. All the Protestant bodies in Ireland are actively engaged in opening the eyes of their blinded countrymen. In 1841 half the Irish natives had houses of only one room, 'three-fourths of these being made of mud. Two-thirds of them lived on the potato ; one- third were without any employment ; one- eighth were beggars ; one-half neither wrote nor read.* The Protestants numbered in 1834 1,517,228 ; the Catholics, at the same time, 6,427,712. So that Ireland was eminently a Catholic country, and a specimen of what the Roman Church does to elevate and bless a people. The Irish Society has 667 schools, con- taining 29,000 pupils and 250 laborers. The Irish Evangelical Society has 20 missionaries, and 30 readers. One Methodist Society has 400 stations. The Irish Church Mission has 425 agents in the field, and the industrial schools are working very successfully. The Catholics have 21 colleges in Ireland, one mis- sionary seminary and three high schools, be- sides two colleges for the Irish on the continent. J 2. iibWantZ.— Population, 3,208,400. (U.) Holland must be had in grateful remembrance for its brave defence of the Gospel in the sev- enteenth century, and for furnishing a Protest- ant sovereign to England, as well as a refuge to our persecuted Puritan fathers. An enu- meration of the sects has been made by a learned Hollander, which, if designed to pre- sent the whole population under these religious divisions, would make the number some 204,000 less than Ungewetter states it. His enumeration is, 9,000 separate Lutherans, 54,000 Lutherans, 38,000 Baptists, 58,000 Jews, 5,000 Armenians, 1,670,000 Dutch Re- formed, 1,170,000 Catholics, of whom 5500 are Janseniste. An utter declension in religion had taken place after the close of the last century. Libe- ralism and Neology occupied the chairs of the three universities, Leyden, Groningen, and Utretoht. There was a conservative Dort orthodox party ; and the young, liberal party, equally dead, though differing in doctrine. The Lord then raised up the great poet Bil- derdyk, by whose energetic exhibitions of the Gospel two learned young Jews were converted. Da Costa, a barrister, and Cappadoce, a physi- cian. In 1834, 80,000 persons separated from the national church, and organized a " true re- formed church." They have encountered great difficulties from persecution, and from " false brethren." The Groningen party professed great attachment to the person of Christ ; and exalted love above doctrine. But it turned out in the end that their Christ was a mere man, a divine man, but not Jehovah Jesus. The friends of pure religion are, moreover, not agreed about the means of reviving religion. One party look to the restoration of the I)ort Constitution ; at the head of them stands Mr. Van Prinsterer, Secret Counsellor of State. The others resort to colportage, private mis- sions, and social meetings, to revive the spirit of the Church, and lead men to Christ. There has been a struggle on the question of religion in the public schools. The evans-elical party has triumphed. The mission *^ the colony in Java is prosperous. Missionary tradesmen are » Dr. Edgar's statement in E. C. VI. p. 305. 352 EUROPE. sent, out, and important results are traced to the measure. § 3, Scandinavia. — Population, 6,965,000. (U.) In Sweden the civil and religious con- ditions of the citizens are confounded together. Every Swede must receive baptism, and com- mune in the established Church, to retain citi- zenship. No subject is allowed to clmnge his religion. A Protestant may not become a Catholic ; nor a Baptist a Pedo-baptist, &c. Laymen are not permitted to preside in reli- gious meetings ; and all conventicles are for- bidden. In fact Sweden has retained the in- tolerant spirit longer than any other Protest- ant country in the world. Of the 1800 Lu- theran clergymen, it ij supposed one-tenth may be truly spiritual men ; and the number of such is increasing. The Danes are among the most highly civilized people in Europe ; but the higher classes in the church are very worldly. The clergy are well educated ; the Danish at Copenhagen ; the German, some at Kiel, where the professors are sound in the faith, and some in the German universities. The government has long sustained missions to the heathen ; but the missionary spirit has much declined in the national church. There is no home missionary institution. Toleration is complete, although the clergy are very jealous of any movements which threaten to disturb the general apathy. Bibles and tracts are circulated to some extent by the native and foreign societies. Denmark has small colonies in Asia, Africa, and America, containing about 110,000 souls. The Lap- landers are about 5000, very low in their phy- sical and moral life. The Swedish mission among them is quite prosperous, having en- joyed a revival of great interest in 1851, under the labors of the zealous Teelstrom. The re- vival in Sweden was promoted both by preach- ing and books. And an intelligent observer remarks, that the converts made through read- ing are better instructed than those converted by preaching, but are narrower lin their views. The revival was most powerful at a distance from the capital, and yet it extended to the students of theology in the University of Up- {i. Se?g-mm.— Population, 4,350,500 (TJ.), of which 4,304,000 are Roman Catholics, 16,000 Protestants, 30,000 Jews. (E. C, III 234.) By a happy combination ot skill and firmness the politicians availed themselves of the zeal of the Roman clergy in 1830, to throw off the Protestant yoke of Holland, and secured a Constitution guaranteeing complete religious toleration. An efficient missionary society, established at Brussels, is laboring earnestly, but with too little sympathy and support from foreign churches, to extend the kingdom of Christ among that people, once so blindly sub- missive to the Papal yoke. There are 7 Eng- lish Episcopal chupches ; 8 Union Evangelical churches ; 12 Protestant French churches, and 15 churches of converted Catholics. §5 i-Vance.— Population, 35,401,000. _(U.) Prance is one of the great historical nations. Its life embodies principles of profound impor- tance, and presents features altogether peculiar. Its political position is at least second in Eu- rope. Its social and intellectual power is great, and its colonial possessions contain 4,060,000 inhabitants. But we are now spe- cially interested in the history of religion in Prance. And there is no church whose annals make a stronger appeal to the sympathies of the universal church than those of the Hugue- nots. Piedmont, Scotland, and France are made sacred by the toils and blood of men of whom the world was not worthy. The French mind is in a peculiar state, differing from that of any other Roman Catholic country. In Germany the privilege of intellectual specu- lation and research, and an unobstructed exer- cise of the social feelings is generally an abun- dant compensation for any privation of a par- ticipation in questions of policy, and of any share in governing society. The Spanish type of civilization and society is worn out, as com- pletely as are those of ancient Egypt, Greece, or Rome. In modern Italy this is true also, to a great extent. But in France there are yet vast intellectual resources, as fertile a vein, perhaps, as in the Anglo-Norman race, and far more social, propagandist, and missionary in its tendencies. Ranke observes that " the French have ever attentively meditated the great problems of the church and the state, and communicated them to all other nations, with that talent of expression which is peculiar to them." Prance is the most important mis- sionary country for the Roman Church. Of three hundred foreign missionaries she employs, more than half are Frenchmen. But the pre- sent state of the French mind in regard to all the higher interests of man and society is dis- couraging. They accept an absolute, one-will government, because just now they are in a, period of painful waiting, perhaps transition. They accept the Emperor and absolute autho- rity as an iron band around society, painful in its pressure, but indispensable to hold together its heterogeneous and conflicting elements. Perhaps many of the best of her people are dis- couraged, regarding themselves as in the posi- tion of Rome when liberty had perished in her streets. But we know that Christ, who by his word and his Church penetrated that decaying mass, can introduce the leaven of life into un happy France. She must see that the Roman type of Christianity is as much worn out as was the Roman type of civilization. There is outside of Romanism, and proscribed by the Latin Church, a pure Christianity, the same which regenerated Roman Gaul ; and it can now regenerate Christian Roman Prance. (Rev. Ohret. Introd. I. 1.) The Revolution had overthrown Romanism and Christianity together ; for the French peo- ple had believed that they were identical. But EUROPE. 353 a retarning religious feeling manifested itself in Catholics, Protestants, and Jews. And while Napoleon in the Concordate* of 1801 placed the Roman Church on a new footing, the three religious systems were placed at the same time on the same level before the law, and a theological school for French Protestants at Montauban was adopted by the government, as also a German theological school in Alsace, for the German Lutheran population of that portion of France. So that the government supports 507 Presbyterian pastors, 249 Luther- an, and 114 Jewish teachers. There are 956 Protestant churches under the care of the gov- ernment, of which 660 are French, 296 Ger- man, costing $250,000, about equally divided between the evangelical and rationalist clergy. The Roman Church has 15 Archbishops, 65 Bishops, 175 Vicegerents, 661 Canons, 3,388 Cures, 29,537 incumbents of chapels of ease, 6 Chaplainsof cemeteries, 7,190 Vicars, making a total of 41,037, costing the government less than before the Revolution, but still an enor- mous sum. Before the Revolution the reve- nue of the Catholic clergy in France was $30,000,000. It is now about 920,000,000, not derived from direct tax, but from the pub- lic treasury. Neither instruction, eloquence, or piety is to be witnessed in many of this vast body of successors to Fenelon, Massilon, Bos- suet, and Bridaine. More than forty societies are laboring to give the Gospel to France. Although the government favors the priesthood, yet it is jealous of them, and will not come under their control. There are unmistakable marks of the wane of Romanism in Prance. The vio- lent measures of the Revolution would natu- rally cause a reaction. But now the minds of men are receiving light gradually and health- fully. We see marks of the waning power of the Roman Church in the contest between the Archbishop of Paris and a lay-editor, in which the Pope gives his verdict against an arch- bishop in favor of a layman. This weakens the clerical arm. We see it also in her failure to secure a change in the marriage law, and in the change of feeling towards the clergy. From 1830 to 1840, honest men looked to them as a barrier against socialism. But it is now seen that their love of liberty was hypo- critical. And when the people get the power again, there will probably be no door of return, perhaps of escape, for the priests. § 6. Switzerland.— Po]>\i]a,tion, 2,424,400. Of these, 971,820 are Roman Catholics ; 1,417,474 Protestants; 3,146 Jews. The thir- teen republics constitute one confederation. The Reformation left that country divided on the great religious question. The two com- munions, however, lived in amity until Carlo Borromeo arose, who, though only an aroh- * The Concordafps are conventions between the Pope and BCcular Eovereigns. 23 bishop, governed the Roman world. He in- vaded Switzerland, by founding a Swiss col- lege at Milan, opening for the Swiss the Ger- man college at Rome, in which they were the most numerous ; for, while 21 of the pupils were Hanoverian, 25 Prussian, and 40 Bava- rian, 48 were Swiss. He likewise sent the Jesuits to Switzerland, who established them- selves at Lucerne and Pribourg. He also procured that a nuncio should be sent from Rome to reside among them. These efforts succeeded in alienating the Catholic Swiss from their Protestant fellow-citizens ; and " thus was gained to the Holy See the proud and free country of primitive Switzerland, its nationality sacrificed, the gates of the Alps opened to the powerful house of Spain." {Prof. VuUiemin, of Lausanne, m&B. C, v. p. 358.) About the time of Napoleon's abdicst- tion, three facts signalized the reappearance- of the Pope in Switzerland : the inscription- of an article in a new federal pact, conse- crating the inviolability of the property of the convents ; the organization of the episcopal circumspection, in favor of Rome ; and the return of the Jesuits. The ultimate result of this was, that the Jesuits became insufferable, and the Sunderbund Was organized, which tri- umphed over them. The political organization of the country was then changed ; and the confederation of states became one state. This threw the political power into the hands of the majority, who are Protestant. The Jesuits were expelled ; liberty of worship was guaranteed every where ; ultramontane gov- ernments were overthrown ; and convent pro- perty was confiscated. Five Roman Catholic cantons then met together, and voted to main- tain their entire sovereignty. They are now patiently and confidently awaiting the day when their church will again be ascendant. The policy of the powerful European gov- ernmente has placed this little mountainous territory out of the great whirlpool of the " balance of power " system. Or, we should rather go back to a higher purpose, and admire the goodness of God in guaranteeing to that people their civil rights, although surrounded by ambitious and grasping potentates. But the infidel democracy which expelled the Jesuits, has been to the cantons De Vaud and Neufchatel as great a scourge as a pope or an emperor would have been. They threw ofi the bands of the Jesuit, only to play the tyrant themselves. Geneva and Vaud are recovering some of the spirit of the Reformation ; and the theo- logical schools of Lausanne and Geneva have furnished a race of well-qualified ministers for their churches, and for the foreign service. A band of faithful disciples at Geneva have taken advantage of their central position, and lar bored with great success to disseminate the truth in Prance and in Italy. The free church of the Canton of Vaud has passed through a 354 EUROPE. fiery furnace ; but the arm of the Lord is with his people. 2 7. Italy. Population, 24,573,100. (U.) The traveler from the new world to Eome and Naples is forced to exclaim : " O Italy, land of beauty ; home of art, of priests, and of beg- gars ! " God has blessed it with his gifts ; man has cursed it with hypocrisy and tyranny. In the Roman States there is one priest to every 51 persons ; which, together with 1,400 receptacles of indolence and fanaticism, called monasteries and nunneries, consume the moral and financial strength of the country. Until recently, it has been difficult to make the light penetrate any section of this spiritually be- nighted part of Europe. But great changes have taken place within seven years. Large numbers of Bibles have been distributed ; many conversions have taken place ; and faith- ful Italian preachers are proclaiming the pure Gospel of Christ to their countrymen. Sardinia has now become the object of pe- culiar interest to the friends of religion and religious liberty. The sovereign, though a Eoman Catholic, is following out the liberal policy of his father and predecessor ; and thus, both the Waldenses are freed from the yoke, which, for centuries, has oppressed, if not dis- couraged them, and the field is open for the cultivation of every one who wishes to enter it. The Waldenses number 23,000 ; with 16 pastors, and 3 Italian missionaries, recently ordained for the Eoman Catholic people. Their college has 8 professors and 84 students. They have a religious newspaper, Buona Novella, and an anti-papal secular paper. La Gazetta del Popolo. There are in Italy four religious parties that seriously threaten popery : the Giobertists, the Infidel Catholico-politicians, the Socialist- Pantheists, the Evangelicals. The Giobertists are followers of the distinguished priest who served the King of Sardinia as prime minister. Piedmont is the stronghold of his followers, who still believe that the Roman Church can be brought to the pure belief and practice of Christianity. The followers of Giovini declare ithenaselves Catholics, but are really infidels. They cling to religious expressions only to de- ceive the people. The followers of Ansonio Franchi ,are Socialists and Pantheists. The fourth, party includes the Waldenses. ~§ S. Germany. — Population : Austria 12,-. 700,000 ; Prussia, 12,200,000 ; German States'. 17,100,000; total, 42,000,000 (U.)* Of these nMinre than 20,000,000 are Roman Catholic ; many millions belong to the Greelc Church ; and 18,000,000 are of the various Protestant churches ; with less than 1,000,000 Jews. There are thirty-four sovereign states in Ger- many, each having its own church, ecclesiasti- cal constitution, and liturgy. The clergy of one state are often not recognized in another. Austria is the most heterogeneous in its struc- ture, having a population of 18,000,000 (in- cluding Lombardy and Venice,) _ immensely varied in race, language, and religion. _ More than ten millions are Germans ; about eighteen millions of the Sclavonic tribes ; five millions Italians ; four millions Magyars ; and less than a million Jews. The best thing that distinguishes any of the German states is popular education. In Prus- sia 77 per cent, of the children between the ages of 6 and 14, or more than 15 per cent, of the people, are in the public schools ; while in England and Wales only 11 1-2 per cent, are in them. Protestants and Catholics being so nearly equal in numbers, intolerance is not carried so far as in the purely Catholic coun- tries, or as in Sweden. Austria is compelled even to support Protestant interests. The government supports a Protestant Theologica/1 Seminary in Vienna ; but one of the examin- ers of every candidate for the ministry is a Catholic. In Vienna are three Protestant pastors over 20,000 souls. There are in Up- per Austria twelve Protestant congregations, containing upwards of 16,000 members. But the Protestant portion of Hungary has felt the rigor of Austrian bigotry. In a popula- tion of nearly 13,000,000 (B. C, V. 494), nearly 3,000,000 are Protestants ; but they are kept in most degrading and painful sub- jection. No feature of the German churches, however, has so much affected the Christiana of other nations as their sad declension from the simple and fervent faith which character- ized the period of the Reformation, to the blas- phemous neology and rationalism of the last fifty years. That people seem literally to have undertaken to find God, a Saviour, and salva- tion in their own personal existence and con- sciousness. When the venerable Krummacher was called on to describe the infidelity of his country, he commenced by remarking: "I feel as if I had to describe a new fall of man." He traces the declension (B. C, V. 328), back to the very age after Luther's death. For- malism and an intellectual apprehension of the Gospel were substituted for the life and earnest- ness ot the first period. Discipline also de- * Dr. Marriott (E. C, I., IV., V.) makes a widely different estimate from tMs. He renort, ^anrt ,•„ „i a iBoe Mith the Gothaiscbes Taschcnbuchr) : "° reports (and m closer accord- Catholics. Greeks. Austria (without Lombardy) 11,118,842 3,178 Prussia 6,820,123 1,879 Other States 6,732,369 127 Protestants. 24'l,538 9,428,911 14,180,624 Jews. 110,044 206,629 238,296 Add Ixjmbardy and Venice., Total. 11,471.402 16,467,442 20,161,305 47,080,149 . 6,068,000 62,148,149 EUROPE. 355 dined; and when John Arndt appeared and preached the necessity of regeneration, he was leproached as a fanatic. The same experience Spener had, a century later. Then the " Pie- tists " themselves prepared the way of the ap- proaching apostasy by their opposition to doc- trine. Naturalism was imported from Eng- land, and Deism from France, and both found a ready soil in hearts declined from God. Frederic the Great contributed mightily to the spread of infidelity. Kant, in a measure, checked the destructive tide, though he left a heathen philosophy as his legacy to his poor country. Fichte and Schelling began the work of philosophical reverence for the dog- mas of Scripture and church theology. The overthrow of Napoleon touched the heart of the oppressed German natioi\s, and they began to return to the God of their fathers. Still, indifierence, rationalism, and radicalism greats ly prevail. In Berlin, out of 400,000 persons, not more than 20,000 visit the house of God. " A literature diabolically insipid, and sneak- ing about in darkness, does not cease to nui-se and fructify these principles (of scepticism.) Little more is necessary than that a mighty and gifted personality should appear, who should set himself up as the centre of infidel- ity, and represent it with energetic pathos and strong decision, and the reign of 'the Man of Sin ' would be among us in more than a state of embryo." The artizan clubs have given most favorable opportunities for spreading atheism among the working classes. In the smaller Saxon Principalities, the consistories are rationalistic ; while in Baden, Rhenish Ba^ varia, and Hesse Darmstadt they are of the lamer oiler school. It is said that in these countries there are ten unbelievers in the min- istry to one believer. There are towns in Ehenish Bavaria where not more than ten or twenty persons are found in church on Sunday morning, and where not a smgle individual is found to attend the sacrament on the great fes- tival days. (E. C, III. 362.) Many of the universities and gymnasia are yet wholly rar tionalistic. But there are brighter features in the picture. There is a manifest returning from this apostasy. The evangelical portion of the church is laboring in many ways, and with the most encouraging success, to restore a pure faith to the land of the Reformation. Much has been done, and systematically too, in some of the universities, to arrest the pro- gress of rationalism, by literary efforts, and likewise for the advancement of practical god- liness. The Inner Mission is doing an excel- lent work in Eastern Prussia, Pomerania, Ber- h'n, Silesia, Saxony, Hamburg, &c. It is of recent date that German Christians should send out missionaries to the poor, and to pro- mote the observance of the Sabbath.' In Hermansburg, Hanover, there is a college for Home Missionaries, and a very efficient pastor is over the church there In fact, an Ameri- can, for some time resident there, observes : " In general, the cause of evangelical piety is steadily advancing in Germany ; and the re- turn of that great nation to the principles of the Reformation can be safely predicted. The change from the state of things twenty-five years ago, when rationalism reigned, to the present state, is wonderful." i 9. /Jw^ira.— Population, 62,000,000 (U.) Of these we may conjecturally make the fol- lowing distributions : Greek Church, 50,650,- 000 ; Catholics (Roman and Armenian), 2,790,- 000 ; Protestants, 3,770,000 ; Mohammedans, 2,262,000 ; Jews, 1,138,000 ; Armenians, 640,- 000 ; Pagans, 750,000. The Greek Church resembles the Church of Rome in ceremonial rites ; but holds in common with her only those opinions which they held alike previ- ously to the Nicene Council. The Greek Church accords more nearly with the Protests ant on these points : the source of all religions doctrine ; the corruption of human nature ; the Mediator ; divine grace ; the sacraments ; the church ; and the future state. This may be seen more fully drawn out in Dr. Pinker- ton's work on Russia, in his translation of a work by Philaret, Archimandite, written in 1815 to counteract the influence of the Jesuits over the Russian nobility. There is much ignorance and superstition. It is true, as Dr. Pinkerton remarks : " A church in which the people are permitted to read the Scriptures in a language which they understand, and which acknowledges this Word as the highest tribu- nal in matters of faith, is still possessed of the best reformer of all superstition." Tet our missionaries thus far have found the Greeks more impenetrable than the Catholics. The Czar is the head of the national church, which accordingly has no patriarch. And the pres- ent sovereign has acted up to his convictions of the duties of his office in prosecuting the work of proselytizing with great activity. The Gazette of St. Petersburg at one time boasted of 45,000 Protestants brought over to the Na- tional Church in one year. These labors have been put forth chiefly in the Baltic provinces, and in a way not very creditable to a mighty sovereign. All religions are tolerated ; but no one may proselyte from the Greek Church. An able writer has divided the sects into three classes, one of which includes native dissenters of a very remarkable stamp. They are the most active and spiritual Christians in the empire, probably amounting to two million souls. They may not always keep within due limits, but they are a kind of unlearned Puri- tans in the dead Greek Church. They are called Molakai. In another class appear .<^ome of the most deluded fanatics ; even rivaling in fierceness the pagans of India. Some of them are called self-mutilators ; others, self-immolators. Of the latter, as many as one hundred have burned themselves to death to- ijether. 356 EUEOPE. On the 23d of January, 1813, the Eussian Bible Society was formed, by permission of the Emperor Alexander. Great zeal was mani- fested, and in a few years, more than 800,000 copies of the Scriptures, in whole or in part, were distributed. An anecdote is told, show- ing how this zeal reached the humbler classes. A chimney-sweeper presented himself at a meeting of the society to make his subscrip- tion. Every person was surprised at his appear- ing there for that object, and still more so when he set down his name for seven dollars. The Secretary delicately remonstrated against his subscribing so much. He replied : " I intend to subscribe this sum yearly. And if I might ask a favor of the society, I should like to have the honor of sweeping the chimneys of the Bible House for nothing." Affected to tears by the scene, says the narrator, they granted his request. The house, being a present from the Emperor, was very large ; so that the sweeper's donation really amounted to nearly thirty dollars. The clergy extensively shared this zeal. But Nicholas, whose policy is to make the Christian idea subordinate to the Eussian, in 1820 ordered the suppression of the whole movement. There is still, however, some circulation of the Scriptures in Finland and the Baltic provinces, and among the exiles as they are leaving Moscow to go to Siberia. And it is an interesting fact for a Protestant to record, that Dr. Haas, chairman of the prison discipline committee of Moscow, takes a lively interest in supplying the exiles and prisoners with the New Testament ; and he is n Eoman Catholic. In 1812 the Princess So- phia Meschessky translated an English tract, " an address to the afflicted." This was pecu- liarly appropriate to the circumstances of the nation ; the French just then retreating from Moscow. She distributed it among the ruined and scattered inhabitants of that city. The favorable reception it met encouraged her to continue her labors ; and she had written or translated, and published at least one hundred different tracts, when the Emperor Alexander came to her help. The work then expanded ; and it has gone forward with little interruption, covering an immense field with the seeds of a glorious harvest. There is a censorship that extends to every tract published. But it seems to be candid and liberal. The Eussian news- papers often speak in high commendation of the tracts. A peculiarly favorable opportu- nity for the sale of evangelical books occurs at the annual fair of Nizney Novogorod. Here arc to be met representatives from China, India, Tartary, Bucharia, Persia, Turkey, Greece, Italy, France, Germany, and England. An American merchant disposed, at one fair, of 160,000 tracts and books. The Siberian exiles, on departing from Moscow, likewise re- ceive them. § 10. Spain and Poi'togaZ.— Population .— Spain, 12,000,000 ; Portugal, 3,725,000 (U.) This people are almost universally within the pale of the Eoman Church ; though the edu- cated class, as in other Catholic countries, is almost, without exception, infidel. T^^re re- main out of the Church in Spam, some 500,000 basques, 60,000 Moors, and 45,000 gipsies. (U.) Toleration by the governments is complete for foreigners, so far as their own worship is con- cerned. But the law was evideotly construct- ed on the presumption that no native would ever desire to abandon the Catholic forms, and then the influence of the clergy is so powerful as to greatly obstruct the action of evangeli- cal missions. Spain can be approached on the side of France, and from Gibraltar. The faithful church at Nisnies has organized a->mis- sion for the French Protestants in Spain, and conducted it with encouraging success. A Protestant pastor is about to be settled over the little French church in Barcelona. Be- sides the evangelical school at Gibraltar, con- taining 330 children and 89 adults, the Eev. Mr. Eule, a Wesleyan missionary, believes that missions could be established in Madrid, Ca- diz, and other large towns. And it certainly was a large concession for a Catholic magis- tracy in Spain to grant the Protestants of Madrid permission to purchase a cemetery for their dead, and conduct the funeral ceremonies in their own way. In Portugal there is less hindrance to evan- gelical labor than in Spain ; there being no other hindrance to introducing the Scriptures than a heavy duty. Protestant worship is al- lowed, if the place of worship does not assume the appearance of one. Gomez, who was once a Spanish priest, converted and naturalized as a Portuguese subject, is a faithful laborer in Lisbon. He reported, in 1849, as many as four thousand enlightened by his labors. Among these were several priests, but who dared not avow the change openly. The igno- rance of the people is deplorable. In all Por- tugal only 31,280 pupils in their schools, and the splendid University of Salamanca, once the glory of Spain, has utterly declined from the position it held in the sixteenth century. The feeble government of Spain yet holds sway over nearly 5,000,000 colonists in Africa, America, the Philippine and Ladrone islands. i 11. Greece and the Ionian Isles.- — Popula- tion 1,220,000. The educated Greeks are infi- dels ; the people generally ignorant and super- stitious. There seems to be no improvement in the Church ; but the literary men are mak- ing most praise-wortiy efforts to restore the former intellectual glory of their country: and their success in restoring the classic as a sub- stitute for the modern language, is very re- markable. The labors of our missionaries are described under the article Greece. Perhaps we may see one fruit of them in the recent work of Professor Pharmakides, Professor of Theology in the University of Athens. He has written a book in answer to a Decree of EUROPE. 357 the Church of Constantinople, which affects to govern Greece ecclesiastically* The mother church censured the church in Greece for as- serting her independence. The professor re- plied to it, but in replying, he has attacked the history, doctrines and rites of his church, in a most efficient manner. Greece has taken a high educational position since the recovery of her political independence. In the capital of each of her twelve states is planted a college (three in Athens), a high school and a com- mon school. In every country town is a high and a common school. In every village of 400 houses is a common school, which is at- tended from September to April ; and the Minister of Instruction has issued an order requiring aU common school- masters to hold a school on Sunday, for instruction in the Scriptures. George Eijari, a wealthy Greek merchant, bequeathed a large portion of his property for the founding a theological school in Athens, which furnishes a very good five years' course to the candidates for the priesthood. The uni- versity of Otho has advanced greatly in the numbers of pupils, having, in 1839, 52 ; in 1853, 590. There are but few avowed dis- senters ia Greece. The Protestants are gene- rally foreigners. Of these, about one hundred are Lutherans, who attend worship with the (jueen, in the palace. The chapel in the palace is used by both the king and the queen, alter- nately for Roman Catholic and for Lutheran worship. The English Episcopalians have a chapel, with a few worshipers, for the most part English and Americans, connected with the British embassy and the American episco- pal mission. The Baptists have' met with little succe.s='-. There are many Catholics in the island of Syra, Tenos and Naxas. They have a small church in Athens, and are building another quite large. They have also a church at the Piraeus, and several at the islands. The missionaries stationed in Greece are two Bap- tists and one Congregational, one Episcopalian from America, one English Episcopalian, and several Roman Catholics. The results of the Roman Catholic missionary labors are, a mul- tiplication of little crosses, beads, and wonder- working medals of the Virgin Mary ; devotion to her ; subjection to the Pope of Rome ; re- jection of the Word of God ; the prohibition of independent thought and investigation. Two daughters of the Rev. Mr. S., for a long time agent of the British Bible Society, have gone to the Roman church, and refuse to read the Book their father labored to circulate, and are now in a nunnery in Syra, and treat their mother in a manner to be justified only by those who say, that if a man say to his father * The Patriarcli of Constantinople is chief of the synod, embracing Turkey, Austria, and the Ionian Isles. Independ- ent Greece has three bishops, independent of the Patriarch of Constantinople, yet they acknowledge his supremacy in matters of faith. or mother, " Corban," he is free. (Mark vii. 11, 12.) The labors of the Episcopal mission in Athens and Syra have been directed chiefly to the establishment of schools and the instruc- tion of children. The American Episcopal missionaries have disclaimed all intention to draw any one from the Greek church, and a large portion of those whom they have in- structed are devoted to the Greek church, and conform to all its ceremonies. They have all employed the New Testament in their schools, and this, it is to be hoped, will produce some salutary effect. The Greeks are proverbially deceitful, and some of the professed converts have betrayed their unworthy motives. " Of those," says Mr. King, " who have come to me ■ at various times, and professed to believe the doctrines I preach, and offered to become, as they said, my followers, while some were intelligent and sincere, many were deceived, and many deceiv- ing." The labors of the missionary formerly employed at Mani, by the American Board of Foreign Missions, produced very happy re- sults. Some hundred young men, who were taught in the missionary schools there, now hold important stations, civil or military. And many who were taught, more or less in the schools, under the care of Mr. King, in Athens, hold important stations under the Greek gov- ernment. Several are teachers of Hellenic schools ; some are military officers ; one is at the head of a gymnasium ; some are in situar tions in which they can exert an influence far vorable to religious liberty. The sacred Scrip- tures have been introduced into all the schools of Greece, and among the common people, and thousands have heard the truth, who, but for the missionaries, would never have heard it. A great degree of religions liberty has been secured. I 12. Turkey (European). — Population, 12,500,000 (U.) ; 12,080,000 (D.*) : asfollows : Mohammedan Osmanlees 700,000 " Albanians & SclaTonians 3,000,000 Greeks, true Hellenic 1,180,000 " Wallachians, ^^ol- > „ -. kq qqq davlans, &c j ' ' 3,700,000 7,330,000 Native Roman Catholics and Europeans 550,000 ArmenmiiH 100,000 Jews 200,000 Gipsies 200,000 12,080,000 The American Board have in this and Asi- atic Turkey, a mission to each of the following peoples : to the Armenians ; to the Greeks ; the Jews ; the Syrians ; the Jacobites and Chaldeans ; and the Nestorians. These mis- sions consist of forty-three American mission- * D. represents Eev. H. G. 0. Dwight, American mission- ary to Turkey, to whom we are indebted for this view of Turkey. 358 EUROPE. aries and their wives, with one hundred and nine native assistants. For fuller statements, see Armenians, Nestoriana, Syria, and Mosid. The Free Church of Scotland have an in- teresting mission to the Jews at Constantino- ple. The London Jews' Society has another to the same people. Connected with the American Missions are schools of various grades, presses, &c. From the beginning, the American missionaries alone have printed more than 120,000,000 pages. The whole Bible has been translated, under the super- vision of the missionaries, into Hebrew-Span- ish, Armeno-Turkish, modern Armenian ; and portions of it into other dialects. The Pil- grim's Progress, Rise and Progress, Saints' Best, Butler's Analogy, D'Aubigne's Reforma- tion, and similar works, have been translated and distributed. The labors of the American missionaries among the Armenians, and of the Scottish missionaries among the Jews of Con- stantinople, have been accompanied by the most visible results. Among the Turks there is as yet no such national movement toward reformation, and the reception of spiritual Christianity, as among the Armenians. Be- sides the instances of an open renunciation of the old church, there are many manifest results of missionary labor in those who still remain in the church. The opinions and practices of the people in regard to several of their ancient superstitions are changing : for example, the use of pictures in churches is in many cases discontinued ; confession to priests is less prac- ticed* the fasts are more neglected. There are now ten schools where one formerly ex- isted. Discussion on the main points in con- troversy between evangelical religion and the multiform errors of formalism is now quite common throughout the whole Armenian race in 1'urkey. Many, still remaining in the Ar- menian Church, are fully convinced of its errors, and laboring to hasten the day when they shall be fully and openly renounced. Fifteen evangelical churches have already been formed among the Armenians in different parts of European and Asiatic Turkey, and more will soon be formed. Probably 2,500 have already been enrolled as Protestants ; and the number is increasing. Protestantism is now protected by the government as fully as any other form of religion. The hindrances to the coming of Christ's kingdom in this country are, however, still quite formidable. The Greeks have a pride of ancestry and church antiquity, a blind su- perstition and submission to a priesthood very jealous of their prerogatives, and vigilant against the invasion of their darkness by any beam of light. The Romanists are here, as every where, either bigots or infidels, and vigi- lantly guarded by the Pope's emissaries. The Armenians are embarrassed in their inquiries by the social penalties of deserting their church. The Jews have a low, deceitful, mercenary spirit, and seem, for the most part, incapable of appreciating an appeal to any lofty sentiment. No missionaries are designated directly to the Mohammedans. Probably, most, if not all the missionaries in Turkey have, however, more or less intercourse with this class ; and, in some instances, there is opportunity to preach to them the Gospel. The chief hin- drance to its success among them is the unre- pealed law, that an apostate from Mohamme- danism must be put to death. Some years ago, it is true, the English ambassador forced from the Sultan a pledge that this sentence should not be executed in the ease of a man who, from being a Christian, embraced Mo- hammedanism, and then retimed to the Chris- tian faith. But for all true Turks this cruel law is still in force ; and has, in one instance, been executed even since the British fleet en- tered those waters to protect the Turks against the Russians ! Let this law once be repealed, and liberty given to all Mohammedans to em- brace what religion they please, and we have the best reasons for believing that Protestant Christianity would very soon spread among them. Romanism they never will adopt. Several large bodies of men exist in Tur- key, among whom no missionaries are yet laboring, — and some of these may be said to be fairly open for such labors ; such as the Bul- garians, — professing the Greek faith, — who, for several years past, have eagerly sought for the word of God ; the Wallachians, (of the same faith,) who, though more worldly in their views, are yet, it is said, in a great measure free from the shackles of priestcraft ; and the Hellenic Greeks themselves, in the Turkish empire, numbering probably 2,000,000, pre- sent a field, if not yet wholly open, still not by any means devoid of promise, and one which hitherto has been but very imperfectly sup- plied with laborers. The openings in the Armenian field are the most remarkable, and, though the urgent call for more laborers has not yet been fully re- sponded to, we consider this field as occupied by the American Board, and it may be hoped that the promised reinforcement will soon be sent by that efficient body to occupy it fully. Rev. B. N. Kiek. Methodist Missions in Edbope. — I. The several sections of Methodism engaged in this work (in the order in which they entered upon their labors) are — the (English) Wesley- an Methodists ; the (Irish) Wesleyan Metho- dists ; the (Irish) Primitive Wesleyan Metho- dists ; the Methodist New Connexion ; the (English) Primitive Methodists ; the Wesleyan Methodist Association ; and the Methodist Episcopal Church in the United States. n. The Comxtries of Europe where these several bodies are operating are as follows : besides destitute parts of England, Methodist missioas have been established in the Norman EUROPK 359 Isles, Ireland, Wales, Spain, France, Shetland Isles, Switzerland, Germany, Sweden, Norway, Corsica, and the Sardinian States. III. TIte mode of operation in the manage- ment of these missions. — With the exception of the Continental missions, which are paid direct from the General Mission Fund, the Home missions of English Methodism are managed in connexion with a fund designated the Con- tingent Fund. This fund is made up from the Yearly collection and the July collection. The former is made annually in the classes at the time of the March quarterly visitation. The ministers meet every class ; and, after hearing the religious experience of each member, hand them their ticket (a certificate of continued membership,) on the receipt of which each member is expected to name the amount which he will give to the yearly collection. This sum is then entered by the leader in the class- book, and collected by him. It is expected that the average contribution to this fund is not to fall short in any circuit of about 12X cents for each member in society. And the Board of Stewards is expected to do their best to see this carried out in ea^ih case. The July collection is publicly made in all their chapels and preaching stations in the month of July. The Contingent Fund also receives occasional donations and legacies ; and out of this fund are paid the contingent expenses of the Conference ; and the remainder is employ- ed in assisting the poorer circuits in maintain- ing the ordinances of the Gospel, and to pro- vide means of sending and sustaining addi- tional preachers in destitute localities. This is the oldest charity of the Methodist Connec- tion, having been established by the venerable Wesley himself, at the Thirteenth Annual Con- ference, in 1756. It has thus been 98 years in successful operation, and has done much for the extension of Methodism in the British Isles. This fund is distributed by a mixed committee, consisting of the president and secretary of the Conference, fifteen ministers appointed by that body, and fifteen lay gentlemen, annually chosen by the stewards exclusively, at the dis- trict meetings most contiguous to the place where the Conference is held. The annual amount of this fund of late years varies from $50,000 to over $73,000. There is no dis- tinction made between the preachers who re- ceive aid from this fund and their other brethren. But they are practically " Home Missionaries," and this fund is " The Home Mission Fund " of Methodism. After the Gos- pel has been established by means of this fund in any new place, it is expected of those who receive the Gospel through this instruments ality, that they shall, as soon as possible, be- gin to help themselves. Unless in extreme poverty, the minimum of Methodist contribu- tion for the support of the ministry, " a penny a week, and a shilling a quarter," is expected to be contributed by each member ; and the amount which their united payments fall short of the Home missionary's allowance, is made up from the Contingent Fund. So that each year, as the Gospel gains adherents, the circuit finances increase, and, in the same proportion, the grant from the fund becomes less and less, until ultimately the self-supporting position is reached, and the fund is entirely relieved of the burden ; while, for the service rendered, this circuit is considered for ever afterward bound in honor to contribute to both the sources from whence this fund draws its supplies, in order that a similar service may be rendered for other places still destitute. And thus to this simple, but efficient plan of Home Missionary fijiance do more than one half of the circuits in British Methodism owe their origin. IV. Tlie Success which lias attended their Efforts. — As already stated, the English Wes- leyan Home Missions commenced when Mr. Wesley instituted the Contingent Fund in 1756 ; and the results are seen only in the general diffusion of Methodism, because, in proportion as they were successful, they ceased to be mis- sionary. In 1786, Mr. Wesley sent Adam Clarke as a missionary to the Norman Isles, near the coast of Normandy, whose labors were blessed ; and these isles now form a dis- trict under the direction of the English Wes- leyan Conference, with 11 ministers and 3161 members. Ireland was first included as a home mission by the Wesleyans in 1799. But these missions are held under the control of the Irish Wesleyan Conference. Wales was taken up in the year 1800. The first missionaries being Owen Davis and John Hughes (since known as the learned author of Hone Britannicce), and the result, with the blessing of God, is now seen in 49 Welsh preachers and 12,203 mem- bers in society. The Shetland Isles, to the north of Scotland, the natives of which are said to be of Norwegian descent, were first oc- cupied as a mission in 1821. For several years they were under the special care of Dr. A. Clarke. There are now six ministers there, and 1265 members. The English Wesleyans established a mission at Gibraltar in 1808. The Gospel is now preached there in both English and Spanish, and of the 250 children in the schools, 224 are Spaniards- — a hope of better days to come for their noble and beautiful, but spiritually oppressed country. France. — During the revolutionary war be- tween France and England, Methodist mission- aries were regularly supplied to the French prisoners at Chatham, Plymouth, and Staple- ton. Soon after the peace of 1815 these efforts opened a way into France itself, where the Wesleyans have now a strong and interesting mission, which has lately been erected into a separate organization, with independent action, but continues to receive pecuniary aid from the English Wesleyans, and also from the Me- thodist Episcopal Church in the United States. SCO EUROPE. Switzerhnd.~Thk is an off-shoot of the French mission. Into Switzerland, the val- leys of Piedmont, the hamlets of the Upper Alps, and even Nice, within the confines of Italy, Methodist preachers have found their way, and gathered little churches. The socie- ties here, aud in the south of France, are now enjoying a revival of religion such as never was experienced by them before. The Na- tional Eeformed Church, the Free Church, and the Disseniers have also begun to share largely.iu its blessings. The missionary in the Upper Alps, Mr. Eostan, is a convert of the great and good Felix Neff, whose field of labor he here cultivates as a Wesleyan missionary. Germany. — In VVinnenden, in the kingdom of Wirtemberg, the Wesleyan Missionary So- ciety have a most precious work going forward, conducted, under very peculiar circumstances, by the venerable Mr. Miillcr, assisted by 20 local preachers, with 1100 church mem- bers. Sweden. — Here they have a chapel, and many members in Stockholm, begun in 1826, but the intolerant laws put in force against all ministers not of the Establishment, obliged the missionary, Mr. Scott, to quit the field. But a work has been done there which intolerant laws cannot extinguish — and which may yet break forth on the right hand and on the left. Tlte Irish Wesleyan Metlwdist Home Missicms were commenced in 1799. These missions are scattered over different parts of Ireland ; and by the preaching of a pure Gospel and the main- teuance of schools where the Holy Scriptures are taught daily, they are instrumental in pre- serving and extending the saving power of Protestant truth in distant and necessitous localities, which would otherwise be almost, if not entirely destitute of its enlightening and regenerating influences. Some remarliable men have risen up in connection with these missions, " whose praise is in the churches," among whom are the honored names of Charles Graham, Thomas Walsh, and Gideon Ousley. These men in the streets, and fairs, and mar- kets of Ireland, in Ireland's own tongue, have sown broadcast over the country those seeds of evangelical truth, the fruits of which others are now reaping, in the present reformations from Popery in that land. Perhaps few fields of Christian activity have yielded richer results for the labor bestowed upon them. Besides conserving the interests of Protestantism in many places in Ireland, where Popish error would otherwise have rooted up the last vestige of truth, and also during the past thirty or forty yeS,rs sending thousands of evangelical Methodist Christians to Canada, Australia, and the United States, where they have helped to spread the Gospel, this mission has given McKenney, Lynch, Home, W. Arthur, and othere to the foreign missionary enterprize, and has furnished the Methodist Episcopal Church with a noble addition to her ministry, among whom stand James Caughey and Charles Elliott. The Irish Primitive Wesleyan Methodists arose in 1816, on the question ot the administration of the sacraments by the Methodist preachers in Ireland. They wished to adhere as closely as possible to the practice of Mr. Wesley's early preachers, and to consider themselves merely as preachers of the Gospel, without full ministerial responsibilty. They have for sev- eral years sustained a missionary agency, chief- ly in the destitute Protestant portions of the country, under the shelter of the Church Estab- lishment, among the members of which they have done much good. Tlie Methodist New Connection in England, which originated in 1797, has a home mission occupying England, the north of Ireland, and Canada. The Primitive Methodists, vulgarly called "Ranters," are a devoted and laborious body of Christians, which rose in Staffordshire in 1810. God has greatly owned and blessed the labors of these humble and faithful men. Besides England, the home missions of the Primitives are found in the north and east ol Ireland, and in Canada. ' The" rapid increase of this hard-working body of Christians,- and the efliciency of their domestic mission may be seen from the fact that while in 1830 they had but420 chapels, 240 ministers, and 35,733 mem- bers; in 1853, they had 1789 chapels, 568 ministers, and 108,926 members ; making an increase, in 23 years, of 1369 chapels, 328 min- isters, and 72,193 members. This increase has been realized, under God, not by any aggres- sion upon other men's labors, for they have never built " upon another man's foundation," but they have gone forthi " into the highways and hedges," and have reclaimed the outcasts and the wanderers, for whose souls no one else has cared. Their prosperity is a matter of re- joicing to all who pray for the coming of the Redeemer's kingdom. The Wesleyan Association, which rose in 1834, under the auspices of Dr. Warren, has domes- tic missions in England, Wales, Ireland, and Hamburgh. But these efforts are only lately originated, and, as yet, have not enjoyed any large measure of prosperity. The Methodist Episcopal Church, in the Uni- ted States, has several missions of a domestic character in Europe, and some of which, wheth- er from the localities where they operate, or from the rich grace which God has granted upon their labors, are of the most interesting character. They are conducted on the same general plan as their home missions in this country, for which see Home Missions. Ger- many, the land of Luther, the home of the Re- formation, now so gievously fallen from its evangelical standards, is the principal post occupied by this branch of the Methodist church ; and the wonderful providence which EUROPE. 861 led her there is thus traced by Dr. McOlintook ; "In 1821, two young men entered the Uni- versity of Tubingen in Germany, from the gym- nasium, to complete their education. Tiiey were both well trained according to the Ger- man plan ; both of promise and talent ; both were to be theologians. They formed a friend- ship at the university, and for six years lived, studied, and formed their plans of life together ; and they supposed that their lines of life would be parallel ; that they would both be theolo- gians — ministers probably, with the usual am- bition of an enterprising and talented Ger- man student. In 1827 they both finished their studies at the university. The name of one of them is no less a name than that of David Frederick Strauss, the author of the " Life of Jesus ; " the name of the other was William Nasi. In eight years from the time he left the university, Strauss had written that famous book in comparison with which all that infi- delity had done before was as nothing. During those eight years William Nast had come to America, with blasted hopes and fainting heart, with no. sure Christianity, with no hope in this life, and with no hope and hardly any belief in the life to come ; and in eight years he had been led by Providence through many a lane of sorrow and darkness, up to the hour when the memorable awakening occurred which re- sulted in his conversion. Thus Providence raised up William Nast to counteract the evil work of his fellow-student, and to be the instrument of converting thou- sands of his fellow-countrymen here, and then to be a most powerful agency to convert his fatherland. It is now about nineteen years since Dr. Nast's conversion. After laboring here with great success among the Germans — (See Home Missions,) — he sailed for Germany in 1848. He found 'the door of access wide open, and having marked out a plan of action, he returned and reported to the Board. The Eev. L. S. Jacoby (one of Dr. Nast's own children in the Lord) was accordingly appoinfr ed, and sailed in 1849, with instructions to establish the head-quarters of the mission in the free city of Bremen. The word of the Lord immediately began to take efiect, and to spread, so that it was necessary to send out ad- ditional missionaries. These were readily sup- plied from the German converts which God had given to Dr. Nast in the United States. The mission has extended itself to Hamburgh, on the north, and Frankfort on the south, and its influence has to some extent pervaded all the surrounding states. It is also establish- ed in the kingdom of Wurtemburg. Helpers have' been raised up to preach the Gospel in the places where they have been converted. Persecutions have followed, and some of the 'brethren have been imprisoned and fined, but they still persist in preaching the Gospel. Some of the ministers of the state churches oppose and persecute, but a few give their in- fluence and favor to these brethren. The mis- sion in Germany is working among the people and upon the state churches, just as Mr. Wes- ley's mission did in his early labors in England ; and if it could have freedom and protection in all the states of Germany, £is it has in the city and state of Bremen, and as Mr. Wesley and his mission and helpers had in England, the work in Germany would probably equal that of early Methodism in England. Already the fruits are great. In the state of Bremen they are formed into churches ; in other states, where this is not allowed, they are formed into societies, and are met in class and prayer meet- ings by the prominent persons whom God has raised up among them, as in the early days of Methodism. And where they may not enjoy this privilege, they fly by scores to the United States, bringing their certificates and joining the German churches here. There are now, besides five colporteurs, eleven missionaries iti- nerating through various parts of Germany. The localities where they preach and form so- cieties and Sunday-schools, and other means of evangelical instruction, are as follows : — ■ In Bremen they have three chapels : in Bre- merhaven, Hastedt, Vegesack. In the king- dom of Hanover they operate in Achim, Scharmbeok, and a few other minor places. In the duchy of Oldenburg, in Hasbergen, Dwo- bergen, and six other places ; also in the possessions of the princes of ScMeuss-Reuss and Greitz-Rems, and in the kingdom of Saxony, where on account of persecution, they are obliged to have their preaching and class- meetings at the midnight hour ; they also have circuits in Frankfort-on-the-Main, and in the kingdom of Wurtemberg, where they have twelve appointments; and they have also established a mission in Hamburgh. Iij many of these places the missionaries have been invited to come and labor, because the friends of the persons inviting them, who emigrated to the United States in past years, have been converted, and have written home to their families in Germany, explaining the nature and the joys of personal religion, and urging it upon their acceptance. 'These let- ters have spread light, and excited the desire to know more of this good way. The mission- aries have established a printing-press and a monthly periodical, and have also opened a book concern for the sale and distributioli of evangelical publications. France, Italy and Corsica. — The French Methodist Conference having become inde- pendent, and having peeuliar means of ex- tending the Gospel in that empire, the Board of Missions of the Methodist B. Church have voted appropriations to assist the brethren there to extend their interesting work. The appropriation this year is $5,000. By this means, additional ministers have been called out into the work, whose labors are under the special patronage of the Board. Access to 362 EUROPE. the Waldensian valleys, in the direction of Turin, having been much enlarged, Mr. Eas- tau has been stationed there, and another pro- mised to help him. A wide and remarkable door was opened in the city of Nice, in Sar- dinia, which is the gateway on the Mediterra^ nean, between Prance and Italy. Besides the inhabitants, there are great numbers of stran- gers, who resort here to spend the winter, for the benefit of their health. There has also occurred a remarkable open- ing in the island of Corsica, in the Mediterra- nean, which is under the government of France. Occupying, as it does, a central posi- tion between France, Italy, Spain, Sardinia, and Algeria, it is the best position in the south of Europe for a central evangelical Pro- testant mission. The Methodist missionary is the only Protestant minister in the whole island, containing a population of about 250,000 Eomanists. The missionary, Mr. Oatlienne, is assisted by a zealous Christian, a convert from Popery, of the name of Dominique Rimaihie. They circulate the Scriptures and tracts, both in the French and Italian languages. They have also obtained a chapel and opened Pro- testant services, and God is giving them favor in the eyes of the people. In Norway the Methodist B. Church has lately estabhshed a mission. Some time ago, a sailor was converted under the ministry of Eev. 0. C. Hedstroom, of the Bethel ship, John Wesley, New York. He soon became eminent for his piety, and was known among his ship-mates as " Holy Peter." His anxiety for the salvation of his kindred induced him to leave his profession, and return to his native country, Norway, that he might " tell them how great things the Lord had done for him." His simple, earnest exhortations were accom- panied with the unction of the Holy Spirit, and many were awakened and converted, so that it was with difficulty he could tear him- self from the people, that he might return to the United States. On his arrival here he was sent off to preach among his Scandinavian brethren in the State of Iowa. But the con- verted souls in Norway earnestly entreated that he might be sent back to them for their sake, and for the sake of spreading the good work among the perishing sinners around them. After the usual instructions and exam- inations, he was accordingly ordained, and, in October, 1853, accompanied by two other con- verted Norwegian sailors, as his assistants, he sailed for Norway ; and, when heard from, they had hired a place to preach in, and had begun their work with prospects of acceptance and usefulness. Mr. Peterson, the missionary, in a communication, dated March 1st, 1854, " rejoices in God to be able to say that he believes that twelve or fourteen persons have been truly converted since they arrived in Norway." — Eev. W. Butler. oo oooooo o -pnpui 'di^sjoAV o onqoj no s^TiB -pnswv JO raqninn ifs ^ J -*os . oooooo US'! (MOO -iNiOOCOfNi-H 1-1 O lOeo (O Is^5 H 'tm^ fe,Nt (D* .#«»nOJOO a W rnc>) * Numb cting end b Week & fl'SS'S a CO * ^ ■S3X8g Hjoq JO slTJloqog : : : : :S : : : w -^BCI JO jaqratiM ■siooqog ■iH ■ . . -/Bd JO loqtun^ •saxag moq ■*0) .iraooooo M JO SJUtoqog-q^^q a r-1 lO lOCO k ll 1 tf ■< s,< j-2 w 1-1 t3 §, III I ■°g :'°"£-'SIS s M ig"S -A 1 1 H H 1 ^U ft (M . . ■ N ■s'^ . ^& a ^, fH Ill ^ g „ 1 -IS h 6 tH ; ■ ;rH ; ; ; (N ■B^uBjsissv put; saijuaoissiK NrHrHiMr-liO EUROPK 363 S # o> c» t- : S s * * _ M s o _ _ i- — a m 1-1 ID - - - - - t- » : to CO - - - — CD - * CO 1 « □0 eo - - - — •* - iO * O) 00 to « tt) . o OS CO 'S^ S i eo o c w CI i i w 1 1? o C <1 1 i CO - 1 izi a 1 -* § -< i co i 5?; S ; g T-1 w Q CO i 1 la M s o — o s s "" o - g g IS - g 1 3 - S — ( > P5 s » s u — s to u3 ^ H E s O (D : ^ s 0. - a — § - 1 s ~ n> o IN « 5 *c> s ~ fp lO SO 1^ 3 i-l « _ S a S - s - CD s ~ s f! .& & 1 q ^ I-* 1? o 1 1 1 _ ^ 1 b 1 1 n: 1 c T-\ c 1 a i i .3 J 36i FAIRFIELD— FREETOWN. FAIRFIELD : A station of the Moravians in Jamaica, W. I. FAKIR or FAQUIR : A monk in India. The fakirs sabject themselves to severe aus- terities and mortifications. Some of them condemn themselves to a standing posture all their lives, supported only by a stick or rope under their armpits. Some mangle their bodies with scourges or knives. Others wander about in companies, telling fortunes, and these are said to be arrant villains. FALMOUTH : A station of the Wesley- ans, in Jamaica, "W. I. FALEALILI : A station of the London Missionary Society on the Island of Upolu, one of the Samoan group. FAIR HARBOUR: A station of the London Missionary Society in the Society Islands. FARMERFIELD : A station of the Wes- leyans in Great Namaqualand, S. Africa. FASITOOTAI : A station of the London Missionary Society on the Island of Upolu, one of the Samoan group. FAT£ : One of the New Hebrides Islands, having a station of the London Missionary Society. _ FEARN : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society in Berbice, S. America. FEE JEE ISLANDS : See South Sea Is- lands. FERNANDO PO: An Island in the Bight of Biafra, on the western coast of Africa, 20 miles from the continent, 40 miles in length, 20 in breadth, and 120 in circumfer- ence. Like the adjacent parts of the main land, it is very mountainous, Clarence Peak being 10,700 feet high. The southern ex- tremity is also intersected with steep moun- tains, from 1,000 to 3,000 feet high ; which, with the intervening valleys, are covered with dense forests of large and valuable tim- ber, and watered by numerous rivulets. The dry season commences the latter end of May, and continues till the end of Novem- ber. The sea breeze is regular, but the land breeze .generally deficient, being intercepted by the high range of mountains on the main land. Clarence, the principal settlement, is on the north side of the Island, in latitude 3° 53' N. and longitude 7° 40' E.and is built close to the sea, upon an elevated plain, em- bracing two small peninsulas, Point William and Point Adelaide, with a semi-circular space, forming a cove, well adapted for ship- ping. The soil is fertile, and the water of the best quality, and there are no marshes in the vicinity. The English Baptist Mis- sionary Society have a mission here. (See Africa, Western.) FETISH : See Africa, Western. FIRST-HILL: A station of the London Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. FISHTOWN : Station of the American Episcopal Missionary Society in South Afri- ca, situated to the south-west of Cape Pal- mas. FIVE ISLANDS : A station of the Mora- vians in Antigua. W. I. FLINT : A Cherokee town in the Indian territory and an out-station of the American Baptist Mission. FORT BEAUFORT : Station of the Lon- don Missionary Society in South Africa, in Beaufort district, near the head waters ot the Keiskamma river. FOUR-PATHS : A station of the London Miasionarv Society in Jamaica, W. I. FREDERIOKSTHAL : A station of the Moravians in Greenland. FREEDOM CHAPEL: A station of the London Missionary Society in British Gui- ana. FREEMANTLE : A station of the Gospel Propagation Society in Australia, situated at the entrance of Swan river. FREETOWN : Chief town of the colony of Sierra Leone, situated near the mouth of the Sierra Leone river. It is well situated for commerce. The Church and Wesleyan Societies both have stations at this place. (See Africa, Western.) FREE OHUEOH OF SCOTLAND MIS- SIONS: The Free Church supports exten- sive Home and Colonial Missionary opera- tions ; tugetlier with missions to the Jews, and Foreign Missions in Hindostan and S. Africa, notices of which appear under those heads. The income for Missions and Educa- tion in 1854, was £46,232, and for all objects, £287,574. FREEWILL BAPTIST FOREIGN MIS- SION SOCIETY : The members of the Free Will Baptist denomination did not generally engage in the Foreign Mission enterprise till about twenty years ago. The founders of the connection were zealous and pious men, who made great sacrifices to preach the Gos- pel in the destitute parts of the country. But unfortunately for the cause of religion and the interests of the denomination, they, with those who sympathized with them, suffered their prejudices against what they called the " hireling " system to drive them into strong opposition to the regular support of the ministry. Hence, the appointment of missionaries with the appropriation of defi- nite sums of money for their support was discarded. Yet there were some who ar- dently desired the conversion of the world, and wished to see the denomination engage in the great work of sending the Gospel to the heathen. Being unknown to each other, hearing but little to encourage them to en- gage in the missionary enterprise, and being scattered among those who were either op- posed or indifferent to the c.".use, no effort was made in the churches to send the lamp of life to the benighted heathen for some years after other denominations had com- FREEWILL BAPTIST FOREIGN MISSION SOCIETY. 365 Dienced their labors for the conversion of idolators. Rev. Amos Sutton, of the Eng- lish General Baptist Mission in Orissa, was, under God, enabled to arouse many of the ministers and members from their inaction, and induce them to engage in efforts for the conversion of Orissa. Early in 1832 he wrote to Elder John Buzzell of Parsons- field, Me., who was one of the oldest and most influential ministers of the Free-will Baptist connection. The letter was an earn- est and pathetic appeal for aid ; and as it was published in the Morning Star, the or- gan of the denomination, was heartily sec- onded by Elder Buzzell, and was written by a missionary of sentiments similar to those of the Free-will Baptists, a good impression was made. In 1833 !Mr. Sutton visited the United States, having been compelled to leave Orissa for a season on account of ill health. He came by the permission of the English General Baptist Missionary Society, who generously defrayed the expense of his visit. His presence and earnest and perse- vering labors deepened the favorable im- pression previously made, and nflich of the prejudice that had existed against the cause of missions was removed. During his stay the Free-will Baptist Foreign Mission Soci- ety was formed. The organization was to a considerable extent effected through his means, and his services were of great value as the work was new to all who were asso- ciated with him in forming the Society. Soon after this he went to England, but re- turned in 1834, and engaged in the duties of Corresponding Secretary of the Society, the Directors having chosen him to that office while he was in England. His health was in a good degree restored, which enabled him to travel and lecture in many of the churches, and take collections in aid of the cause. He was very cordially received not only among the Free-wUl Baptists, but by Christians of other denominations. His ar- duous labors were continued for one year, during which time two brethren were ap- pointed as missionaries to Orissa. These brethren were Rev. Eli Noyes of Jefferson, Me., who was a Free-will Baptist, and Rev. Jeremiah Phillips of Plainfield, N. Y., who belonged to the Open Communion Baptists, a sect that subsequently united with the Free-will Baptist connection. These two missionaries, with their wives, sailed for Orissa, September 22, 1835, and were the first sent out by this Society. Mr. Sutton was one of their fellow passengers, and was of great service to them during the voy- age, and after their arrival in India. The Society has but one mission. It has Bent out six male and nine female mission- aries from this country, and the services of one female have been secured in Orissa. Rev. John Buzzell was the first President of the Society, and retained the office about fifteen years. Rev. Amos Sutton was its first Corresponding Secretary, and Mr. Isaac N. Sanborn of North Parsonsfield, Me., its first Treasurer. He died in 1835 or 1836. Wm. Burr, Esq., editor of the Morning Star and Treasurer of two other benevolent soci- eties, succeeded Mr. Sanborn as Treasurer of this Society, and has ever since retained the office, rendering his services gratuitous- ly. It has had three Corresponding Secre taries since Mr. Sutton resigned, and their services have been mostly gratuitous. The affairs of the Society are conducted by an Executive Committee. Its officers were formerly chosen by a Board of Direc- tors ; but this Board has been dispensed with, and all the officers are now chosen by the Society at its annual meetings. A few years after the organization of this body, Miss Sarah Chapin of Rumford, N. H., made it a bequest of some four thousand dol- lars, which sum was paid in annual instal- ments. She had previously willed the pro- perty to the missionary society of another denomination of which she was a member. On learning the anti-slavery character of the Free-will Baptists, she revoked her will and disposed of her property as stated above. "While the denomination held an informal connection with a body of slaveholding Bap- tists at the South, which union has since been dissolved, the Executive Committee passed a resolution not to receive the contri- butions of slaveholders. The following are the Society's annual re- ceipts. From its origin to 1835, a period of about three years, the amount received was. ,S2.(353 37. In 1836, it was, $915 43 In 1837, §1,459 79 In 1838, $2,504 36 In 1839, $2,336 71 In 1840, g;2J77 00 In 1841, $3,137 32 In 1842, $3,556 42 In 1843, $2,720 74 In 1844, $2,388 04 In 1845, $3,160 66 In 1846, $3,219 21 In 1847, $3,544 00 In 1848. $5,618 63 In 1849, $2,992 20 In 1850,' $4;215 31 In 1851, $4,958 14 In 1852, $4,475 98 In 1853, $6,245 93. Total since the organ- ization of the Society, $62,885 24. Considerable irregularity is seen in the re- ceipts, as the amount of one year is com- pared with that of another. This is caused mostly by the irregularity of the time of holding the annual meetings when the ac- counts are made up. Dividing twenty of the twenty-one years of the Society's exist- ence into two equal parts, giving to each its respective receipts, the increase of funds in the last period over the first, is $17,958 51. This gain was not made by an increase of the numerical strength of the denomination, for there was a decrease of its numbers while the funds were increasing. It was caused by the increasing light on the subject of missions, and the formation of churches 366 FRIEDENSBEKG— GABOON. better taught than some of those previously organized. As the denomination was weak in numbers and resources, and most of the churches were small, poor, and not trained to benevolent efforts, the missionary enter- prise was commenced with fears of failure, and there were some apprehensions of em- barrassment when Miss Chapin's bequest should be expended. But former anxieties and disquietudes have been happily succeed- ed by the pleasing hope that, under God, the Society has become permanently established, though its operations are limited. However small it may be " among the thousands of Judah," it has something to do in the great work of spreading the Gospel among all na- tions, and there are indications that the churches will become more active in the holy enterprise. Most of the funds of the Society have been collected by subscriptions, the circula- tion of missionary cards, and by contribu- tions. This course, though it saves the ex- pense of agents, yet lacks the efficiency of the agency system. Rev. 0. R. Bachelor, a returned missionary, has been on an agency among the churches more than a year pa§t, and is still in the field. The amount of re- ceipts for 1853 was considerably greater than that of any previous year, and his efficient labors were among the means that brought the additional sum into the treasury. Many, however, think that in most cases the ser- vices of agents are not necessary, and that all the funds that can be appropriated directly to missionary purposes may be obtained with- out their aid. The denomination consists of 28 yearly meetings, 129 quarterly meet- ings, 1146 churches, 1069 preachers, and about 50,000 communicants. Each quarter- ly meeting is composed of delegates from a convenient number of churches, and the yearly meetings are made of delegates sent from the quarterly meetings. Each quar- terly meeting assembles four times a year with such churches in its limits as are wil- ling to entertain the meetings. As there are some five hundred of these sessions an- nually held, with about the same number of churches scattered throughout the denomi- nation, each meeting usually attended by several ministers and often by large num- bers of people, great facilities are afforded in this way for obtaining funds for the cause of missions. It is hoped that these facilities will at no very distant period be so far im- proved as to dispense with agents. The small amount of receipts shows that the Society has done but little in the work of converting the heathen. The connection took its rise in the then new settlements of the country, and up to some ten years ago it numbered scarcely a dozen churches in large villages and cities. At the commence- ment of the missionary enterprise among Free-will Baptists, their churches were mostly small, poor, scattered, and many of them without pastors, and most of the min- isters were uneducated and had no regular support. The mass, which was then in al- most a chaotic state, is now assuming form and vitality. There are not many wealthy men in the churches, and not one of the few that are rich has yet made a large donation to the Foreign Mission Society. — Rev. E. HuTCHINS. FRIBDENSBERG: A station of the Moravians on the Island of St. Thomas, West Indies. FRIEDENSFIELD : A station of the United Brethren in St. Thomas, W. I. FRIEDENSTHAL: A station of the Moravians, on the Island of St. Thomas. FRIENDLY ISLANDS: A group of islands situated between 16* 21', south lati- tude, and 176° 186', west Icngitude. Some of them are barren and desert spots. Others are of considerable size, Tonga containing a population of 10,000. FRIEDAy: A station of the French Protestants m South Africa, 183 miles east of Motito. FUH-OHAU : One of the five ports of China, opened to foreigners, situated in lati- tude 26'= 5', N., and longitude 119° 20', E., on the north b;mk of the Min river. FURRAOKABAD : A city in the pro- vince of Agra, in Hindostan, situated near the south bank of the Ganges, 82 E. N. E. of Agra, 156 N. W. of Allahabad. Popula- tion, 70,000. It is the chief commercial city of the ceded and conquered provinces, and is said to be the common resort of needy and dissolute characters from other parts of Hindostan. It is a station of the American Presbyterian Board. FUTTEHGURH: A station of the Presbyterian Board in Northern India, on the Ganges, 200 miles above Allahabad. GABOON: A river in West Africa, entering the ocean about twenty miles north of the equator, in longitude 9' 18' east from Greenwich, on which is situated the mission of the American Board to West Africa. Its width for 40 miles from its mouth, varies from 8 to 14 miles. For the last 30 miles of its course, this river is fully equal in size to the Senegal, Niger, and Congo, and much superior in grandeur and beauty. Its general course is westerly. Many rivers flow into it, the banks of which are interspersed with numerous villages. Forty miles from the ocean it divides into the Rembwe, which is a mile wide at its mouth, and navigable some dis- tance for small vessels, and the big Orombo, or the Olombo-mpolo, which has a width of more than two miles at its junction with the Rembwe, and is navigable to where it divide ' ' " "" ' - "-■ -~ ■ GABOON. 367 branches the B^kwe, which is a quarter of a mile wide where it unites with the Ktobft, is said to have a boat navigation of 40 or 50 miles ; and the Khvak, which is twice its size, would allow the passage of vessels of a moderate burden a still greater distance, were it not for a sand-bar at its mouth. Face of the Cmmtry, Climate^ ''>"l i ..'^AT. Anj anweeL/'v,;,;^ .«il) lliul I .j^ATAltA. ■^ ''^ I'oornyui'Ufe r i c'„^-^„ "rH'l'fauju- "Eittour IIINDOSTAN. 385 was also afflicted by the death of Mrs. Stone, in August, 1833, after an illness of twelve days. About this time it was re- marked by the Board, that of the nine adults, missionaries and assistant missionaries, from this country, who had died in India, only two had died of the peculiar diseases of the climate. A reinforcement of five missionaries and assistants reached Bombay in September, 1834. A charity school for native orphan girls was opened at Bombay this year, thus affording another illustration of the spirit and iniiuence of Christianity in its relation to the woes even of this life. Itinerating was found to be not only one of the most important means of access to the heathen, but favorable also to the health of the missionaries. They therefore pur- sued it very extensively. Mr. Read alone traveled not less than 1,100 miles in his ex- cursions into the country around Ahmed- nuggur, between October, 1833, and August, 1834. It is remarked also that he traveled without arms or a guard, the mode of travel- ing best becoming missionaries of the Gos- pel of peace, and that he never met with either insult or harm. After all, but a small proportion of the population could be reached, even by the tracts and portions of Scripture that were scattered by tens of thousands ; for the missionaries had before them the appalling and affecting fact that they were almost the only laborers in a field 800 by 1,000 miles in extent, containing not less than 2,000 towns and villages, and a population of 40,000,000. Malcolm Peih, on the Mahaburlishwur Hills, was occupied as a temporary health station in 1835. In 1836, Alibag was also made a centre of operations. It is in the Concan, the maritime portion'of the Mah- ratta country, and mission schools had for some time been supported there. About the same time a missionary was placed at Jalna, in the dominions of the Nizam, or native Prince, 120 miles north-west of Ahmednug gur. Rev. Messrs. Ebenezer Burgess, Ozro French, and R. W. Hume, with their wives, and Miss Cynthia Farrar, sailed for Bombay in April, 1838, and arrived there in the fol- lowing August. In 1839 a boarding school had been established at Jalna, containing 19 boys; and one at Malcolm Peth for girls, containing 30 pupils. The year 1839 was one of extraordinary interest to the Bombay mission, not so much on account of any remarkable progress made, as for the opposition awakened in the minds of the natives. The immediate occa- sion of the opposition was, the public pro- fession of Christianity made by two Parsee young men named Narayan and Harripunt. They were baptized by Dr. Wilson, of the Church of Scotland's mission at Bombay, 25 and were supposed to be the first proselytes from the religion of Zoroaster in modem times. Their Parsee friends became much enraged, and would have laid violent hands on them, but they had taken refuge with the missionaries. A legal process was instituted against the missionaries, but in vain. They then attempted to break up the schools by threats against the parents, and succeeded to some extent. They published a tract in defence of Hindooism, petitioned the Gov- ernment for protection against the influence of the missionaries, &c., but all with very little effect, except to show that the progress of the Gospel had begun to be such as to disturb the native conscience, and awaken their fears for the safety of their ancient system of idolatry. One year later the missionaries say, " The events of the last year have done much, we think, to spread the knowledge of the Gospel in Ahmednug- gur and the villages around. People now understand that there is something in the Christian religion which is powerful to the conversion of men, and they are afraid to- come into contact with it. Formerly very few in this place knew the object for which we came here. Now the great mass know that it is our aim to lead men from the wor- ship of idols to the worship of the one living and true God, and to a belief in his Son Jesus Christ. Formerly the people here were not afraid to enter into argument with us, thinking that their religion rested on a sure foundation ; now they are un- willing to argue when the subject is pro- posed." Narayan and Harripunt now ap- peared among the people with entire safety, the natives simply telling them it was wrong for any one to forsake his religion. At this period the Prudential Committee of the Board in their annual report say, "Those who have attended to the history of this first mission of the Board, — this earliest of the foreign missions of the American churches, from the beginning, must perceive that the Mahrattas, as a people, stand related to the Christian religion very differently from what they did in 1814. Much un- avoidable, preliminary ground has been gono over, and the truth is nearer the great mass of the native intellect and heart." In 1841, the Bombay and Ahmednuggur stations, comprising what was called the mission to the Mahrattas, were divided into two, to be known henceforth as the Bombay and Ahmednuggur missions. These places were so far apart that it became incon- venient and expensive for the missionaries to meet for business, and hence the division. The two missions date their separate exist- ence from the 1st of January, 1842, and from this period will receive a separate notice. The station at Malcolm Peth belonged to Bombay. Mr. Graves, of this station, died 386 HINDOSTAN. in December, 1843. He embarked on his mission in 1817, and had been 25 years in the service of the Board. The opposition to Christianity took quite a new turn at Bombay in 1843, when the more wealthy Hindoos commenced printing by subscription, a series of their most popular religious books in monthly numbers. None of these books had ever before been printed, and the manuscripts were scarce and costly, but in the printed form they were afforded at little cost. A Hindoo at Bombay ex- pended nearly $1,800 in printing and circu- lating one of the sacred books of his reli- gion. Thus, a nejv and extraordinary effort to sustain idolatry, showed that the presence and power of Christianity were beginning to be felt. This was still further manifested a year later, when the periodical press was for the first time brought to the aid of the tottering system of Hindooisra. Three weekly newspapers and one monthly maga- zine, all in the Mahratta language, and bit- terly opposed to Christianity, were published at Bombay. A paper was also issued at Poona, a little to the south-east of Bombay, and a monthly journal and three weeklies in the Goozerattee language, spoken by seven or eight millions in the region north i>f Bombay, besides two papers printed in the Persian language. The Goozerattee papers especially attempted to refute Chris- tianity by quotations from the writings of Paine, Voltaire, and other infidels. Thus ten newspapers and magazines in and around Bombay, armed not only with all that heathen learning coultj. furnish, but with the most approved weapons of infidelity, were brought to bear against the religion taught by the missionaries, and of course the tendency was most injurious. But meanwhile the mission press at Bombay was never *ore efBoient. It had the means of issuing periodicals, tracts, and portions of Scripture, in English, Sanscrit, Mahratta, Goozerattee, Hindostanee, Persian, Arabic, &c., and thus the issues of the idolatrous and infidel presses were met face to face, and their influence in great measure counter- acted. It was with great joy and thankful- ness that the missionaries at Bombay were able to say, in 1845, " Thirty-three years ago the doctrine of Christ crucified was unknown to the people of the Mahratta country. No portion of the Sacred Scriptures had been given to them in their own language. Not a single tract from which they could learn the way of salvation, was in existence. Un- broken unmixed darkness covered the land. Now the sound of the Gospel has gone out into all the land. The people of the most distant villages have heard, at least, that " there is none ofher name under heaven given among men whereby we can be saved, but the name of Jesus." The year 1847 was marked by an event of great importance, viz ; the translation of the entire Scriptures into the Mahratta language, thus rendering the whole volume of inspira- • tion accessible to a numerous people in western India. In noticing this fact, the Prudential Committee say, " It may be stated as a fact of some interest to the friends of missions in this country, that all the Scrip- tures which have been printed in Mahratta, except one of the Gospels, have issued from the mission press." For a history of this great work they refer to the following state- ment, by one of the missionaries, Mr. Allen : "The Gospel of Matthew was printed in 1817. The translation of the New Testa- ment was not completed and printed till 182G ; though, meanwhile, some of the Gos- pels and the Acts of the Apostles had been printed several times. In 1830 a second and revised edition of the New Testament was printed. The original translation and the revised edition were both made by our mission. Since then all the New Testament has been printed once, and some parts of it several times, by the Bible Society, as altered and revised by its translation com- mittee. Of this committee I have been a member for nearly fifteen years." Mr. Allen proceeds to explain the reasons which had delayed the translation and pub- lication of the Old Testament till the above date, and adds that the whole Bible has been published, not only in the Mahratta, but also in the Goozerattee language, the two princi- pal languages spoken on the western side of India. Amid some discouragements, especially the fact that the number of converts was comparatively small, the missionaries had ground for saying, in 1848, "Truth is gradually making an impression upon the public mind, and gradually changing the views prevalent in the communit}'. Hindoo- ism is losing its hold upon the people, and the Hindooism of the rising generation will be a very different thing from that of their fathers. Christian ideas, and Christian doc- trines, are quietly gaining an influence over the minds of many. There is a Christian- izing, so to speak, of the ideas and even the . language of the people." Satara was occupied as a missionary station in 1848. It is about 170 miles south- east of Bombay, and is situated in a very populous and fertile district. The size of the place, which is about equal to Ahmed- nuggur, and the numerous villages around it, seemed to point it out as a very important station, as it has proved to be. The custom recently adopted by the mis- sionaries of selling tracts and books, instead of distributing them gratuitously, was found to work admirably, and it strikingly illus- trated the increasing desire of the natives to HINDOSTAN. 5S7 reaJ and learn. " The readiness to parchaso Christian tracts and books," says one of the missionaries in 1849, " is without a parallel in any part of the heathen world. The fact that we have, in a single year, sold 9,000 of these publications, is full of encouragement." A further proof of the waking up of the heathen mind was found in .the fact, that the paper issued from the mission press called the Dnyanadaya, was widely circulated and much read by the natives. In 1849 two prize essays on the Holce, a shameful feast observed among the Hindoos, were pub- lished in this paper, and read by great num- bers of the Mahrattas, and one of them was copied into the native papers, and translated into the languages of upper India. About the same date the missionaries speak of very interesting discussions with the Parsees. The scene of debate was the sea-side, where the Parsees assembled to worship the sea or the setting sun ; and the disputants were accustomed to sit down on the sand, the auditors, to the number of several hundreds, standing around. The fact that these dis- cussions lasted sometimes till two hours after dark, and that the crowds listened with untiring interest to the end, indicated a spirit of inquiry, and a deep solicitude among the people to know the difference be- tween heathenism and Christianity. In these debates the works of Paine, Voltaire, and other infidels, were brought forward with great skill and familiarity by the Par- sees. An event of deep interest to the missions and to the cause of Christianity in India, in 1849, was the passage of a law b}' the gov- ernment, giving equal rights to all its sub- jects. Up to this time, in western and southern India, there had been no special law for the protection of converts to Chris- tianity, who were tried by heathen laws and subjected to every indignity, with confisca- tion of goods. After various efforts of Christians in India, they at length succeeded in getting a repeal of the old laws, and the passage of an act protecting converts against all civil disabilities and forfeiture of rights. Thus one of the most serious obstacles in the way of the progress of Christianity in India was removed. The influence of Christianity and its mis- sions in the education and elevation of females, has ever been regarded as one of its most interesting features ; and on this point the missionaries at Bombay are very explicit and satisfactory in their report for 1850. At first there was an extreme jealousy on this subject, but a gradual change was wrought, the wealthiest natives began to send their daughters to the mission schools, and at the above date thousands of females in various parts of India, of all castes, were acquiring the rudiments of an education. It had been proved, the missionaries say, that native females were not wanting in capacity, and the way had been prepared for the establish- ment of female schools by the natives them- selves, and by the government. The Gov- ernor-General of India, this year, issued a very important declaration, requesting that the Council of Education would consider its functions as comprising the superinten- dence of native female education ; and that wherever any disposition was shown by the natives to establish female schools, said Council would give them all possible encour- agement. During the years 1850 and 1851, Mr. Allen had devoted himself to the work of revising the Mahratta Scriptures. A complete trans- lation had been made, as before noticed, but different hooks had been issued at different times, in differing type and style, and the effort now was to correct the translation, give uniformity to the style, and put the whole into one octavo volume. This work would not be completed, Mr. Allen thought, till the spring of 1855. While the press was thus at work, doing more, it was believed, in various ways, to make known Christ among the people than ten men could do faithfully preaching daily in the streets and bazaars of the city, the direct business of preaching was by no means neglected. At the close of 1851 there were three stated places for preaching in the city of Bombay, besides which "touring among the villages" occu- pied a considerable portion of each year. Among the interesting events of 1852, was a series of public lectures in the mission chapel, followed by a free discussion, in which the natives present were allowed to make inquiries and to state objections. The discussions were in the Mahratta language, but were reported in the religious paper of the mission in both Mahratta and English, and their influence was very extensive. The Native Missionary Society also held meet- ings on the first Monday of each month, for the communication of intelligence, prayer, &c., and they were among the most interest- ing of the Mahratta meetings. About ^70 was collected, and appropriated to the erec- tion of another place of preaching in a na- tive city. Another occurrence of special in- terest this year, was the publication of a work entitled " Principles of Hindooism." written by an educated Brahmin, to explain and defend his religion. lie admits that the missionaries have turned the minds of many from Ilindooism to Christianity, that a large portion of those educated in the schools abandon and seek to destroy their ancestral faith, that they deny the divine appointment of caste, &c., and adds : " The ancient and noble, edifice of Hindoo- ism is now on all sides stoutly assailed by the adherents of a hostile faith, and we are 388 HINDOSTAN. filled with dismay at finding that there is also treason within. No wonder that the vener- able structure is already nodding to its fall. I, by means of this little book, seek to prop up the building ; but when its size and its ruinous state are considered, what hope is there that such a feeble prop can prevent its falling?" The year 1853 was marked by no peculiar changes in the mission, yet an event oc- curred that will be celebrated in the annals of Hlndostan, and so nearly related to the cause of Christianity as to be entitled to a notice here. It was the opening, on the 16th of April of that year, of the first Asiatic railway connecting Bombay and Tannah, a distance of twenty-four miles. One of the missionaries, Mr. Hume, in de- scribing this event says, " Great was the in- tei'est excited in the minds of assembled thousands, as the first train of ponderous cars, with 400 passengers, hasted away, moved by some mysterious agency. From the neighboring heights, at the various cross- ings, and for a considerable distance along the line of the road, multitudes gazed with astonishment and delight at this triumph of science and skill. New and more vivid im- pressions regarding the immense superiority of the Christian nations of the "West, were unconsciously received by those living masses. Many of them must have felt, as they never felt before, that Hindooism is in conflict with the spirit of the age, and that its days must ere long be numbered." Dating the commencement of the Bombay mission in 1812, the whole period thus briefly reviewed is forty-one years. The general view taken is sufficient to show that during this period changes of immense importance have been wrought, and an incalculable amount of good accomplished. For general remarks and statistics the reader is referred to the close of the article on missions in Hindostan. Also for a more particular account of Bombay — its various classes, religions, commercial importance, &c., see article under that head. Ahmednuggur. — Previous to 1831, Ah- mednuggur was simply a station of the Bom- bay mission, and was noticed in that con- nection. In December of that year it be- came a distinct mission, and from that date the present account commences. At this period there were three missionaries here, viz; Messrs. Graves, Ilervey, and Read. Mr. Hervey died very suddenly, of cholera, in the following May. The mission church at Ahmednuggur was formed in March, 1833, with 14 members, and public worship and preaching were regularly maintained, with from forty to sixty hearers, though they had no chapel, and were obliged to meet in a temporary building, "a sort of shed." Preaching tours in the surrounding villages were also extensively maintained. The sys- tem of education was nearly the same as that at Bombay, and at the close of 1835 there were 9 schools and 422 scholars. The es- tablishment of free schools in the neighbor- ing villages, twenty or thirty miles around Ahmednuggur, was also a favorite and suc- cessful method of doing good. In 1837 a sub- stantial house had been erected for the sem- inary, which contained fifty boys, all taken from respectable castes, and the same house was used also for a chapel. A boarding school for girls was also in successful opera- tion. Seroor, 28 miles from Ahmednuggur, was occupied as a station in 1841. At this pe- riod the missionaries, after describing a preaching excursion, say : " We hope to be able to adopt this plan more than we have done, — to occupy a village for some days, having as much intercourse with the people of the village as possible, and making excur- sions to the small villages in its vicinity as may be convenient." The plan thus pro- posed was carried out very successfully. In their labors in and around Ahmednuggur, the missionaries came much in contact with a class of Hindoos called Mahars, who, they say, " are thought to be the original inhabit- ants of the country." They are a low caste, and the more intelligent of them discard idolatry, and maintain the doctrine of one invisible God. They adhere but slightly to the rules of caste, are free from bigotry, manifest a desire to know the truth, and ex- hibit none of that wrangling, and angry dis- putation which are so common among the Brahmins." It was among them that the missionaries, in 1842, found a remarkable spirit of inquiry into the-Ohristian religion, and in their excursions through not less than a hundred villages, they had access to crowds . of eager listeners. During this year seven- teen natives were received to the Ahmed- nuggur church, one of whom had been a rob- ber and murderer by profession. The num- ber of church members was thus more than doubled. In 1843 twelve more were added, and five in the beginning of the year 1844, making the whole number of members 48. The importance of this field, and the in- creasing interest felt in it, may be gathered from the fact, stated in 1844, that " within a distance of fifteen miles around Ahmednug- gur there are more than one hundred vil- lages, the population of which, including Ahmednuggur itself, amounts to more than one hundred thousand souls. The distinc- tions of caste are numerous, amounting to 60 in Ahmednuggur, and varying from ten to thirty in the villages." It was to such a people that the missioriaries were carrying the Gospel as they went out from their re- spective stations. In their report for 1844 they say : " These excursions are becoming HINDOSTAN. 389 more and more interesting in consequence jripunt, the native cateohist at Wudalej'jVho of the increased knowledge of Christianity which we find among the people, and of their increased acquaintance with us and our native converts, and also in consequence of the confidence which many of them have learnt to place in us, and in the doctrines which we preach." In the same report they say: '' Women of all castes had the oppor- tunity of learning the way of salvation through Jesus Christ. In some places which we visited, nearly all the women of the vil- lage came out to see us and to hoar the mes- sage of mercy." This work was prosecuted during 1845 with increasing interest. In 1846 this mission was strengthened by the arrival of two new missionaries, and the return of Mr. Bui-gess, whose health had been improved by a short residence in this country. At this period a new station was formed at Bhingar, a large town of 4,000 in- habitants, two miles east of Ahmednuggur. Early in this year peculiar religious interest began to be manifested in the seminary for boys, and a little band were in the habit of meeting together for prayer, and of visiting the house of their teacher for religious con- versation and worship. At length one of the company, named Kama, the most ad- vanced boy in the seminary, determined to coafess Christ, and to request baptism. This he did in spite of the opposition and entrea- ties of his mother and brothers. At the same time another boy in the seminary, named Sudoo, professed his faith in Christ. This seminary, under the care of Mr. Bur- gess, was considered of very great import- ance to the missionary work. Two out-stations were formed in 1845, one at Wudaley, about forty miles north of Ahmednuggur; and the other at Wadagaum, a village about 30 miles south of Ahmed- nuggur. At the former place the Mahars were favorable to Christianity and ver^' de- sirous of a station among them, and one of them gave land for a chapel, with a written guaranty that it should remain the property of the mission. This chapel was opened in February, 1846, at which time ten adults were admitted to Christian fellowship. Others were admitted subsequently, so that the whole number of church members con- nected with this out-station in January, 1847, was twenty-one. Not long after ele- ven children were baptized, and one adult was examined for admission to the church. These fruits were the more remarkable, as this station did not enjoy the labors of a missionary, but was under the care of a na- tive catechist, Dajeeba. An interesting ac- count of the opposition he met with, and the numerous obstacles overcome in erecting a chapel at that station, will be found in the annua) report of the Board for 1847. In the same report will be found an account of Ha- was forcibly ejected from a temple, in conse- quence of which the important decision was obtained from a magistrate, tliat native Christians were entitled to the same privi- leges at the temples and rest houses, as are conceded to Mohammedans. This decision indicated the determination of the govern- ment that no one should be deprived of his rights merely because he professed his faith in Christ. The toilsome and ceaseless efforts of the missionaries in this field, so noticeable at every step, are indicated again by the fact, that in 1848 one of them made a preach- ing circuit of 122 days, traveling 912 miles and visiting 509 towns. In many places he was heard gladly, crowds, especially of the working people, flocking to his tent and lis- tening attentively till late hours at night. Ten persons, three males and seven females, were received to the Ahmednuggur church this year. Four were also added to the church at Seroor. In 1849 a new station was established at Newasse. In accomplishing this object great opposition and even danger were encountered, an account of which will be found in the Missionary Herald for August, 1850. The effort was successful, however, and in 1852 there was a school in Newasse of fifty schol- ars. In the report of the Board for 1853, the interesting fact is stated, that the num- ber of baptized children was 159, and it is added, " The families of the church members form a most interesting field of labor, and one which promises the richest fruits.' As the children of our converts grow up, they exhibit an interest in religious things which encourages us much ; and the number of those of this class who have been already received into the church, or are now candi- dates for church membership, shows that God is faithful to his covenant, and willing to bless the instructions and prayers of pa- rents to the conversion of their offspring, as well as our efforts in their behalf" In the same report a preaching tour of Mr. Munger is described, in which he traveled over a thousand miles in 135 days, and preached in 400 towns and villages. He found every where "an open door," and an increasing conviction in many minds, that they were the dupes of Brahmin cupidity and selfishness. In the city of Ahmednuggur there was at this period, a growing disposition among an interesting and increasing class of young men, to inquire into the truth of Christianit}'. Some of them were teachers in government schools, and writers in the public offices. They held the absurd superstitious of Hin- dooism in utter contempt, but inclined to deistical opinions, and were not prepared to receive Christianity, though they approved of some of its doctrines. This class of young 390 HINDOSTAN. men had formed a society, the object of which was to discuss subjects connected with morals and religion, and in these dis- cussions the truths of Christianity were ably maintained by two native converts, members of the mission church. (See Her- ald for June, 1853.) The printing for this station is done at Bombay, and is included in the report of that mission. A condensed view of the churches and schools will be found in the table at the close of this article. From what has been presented, it is apparent that Ahmednuggur and the country around it, afford an exten- sive and most important field of missionary labor, and that It has been cultivated with great diligence and most encouraging suc- cess, affording reasonable ground for the hope, that still greater and more rapid changes will ere long be witnessed. Satara. — This was a station of the Bom- bay mission until 1851, when, in connection with Mahabulishwar, it became a distinct mission, and was occupied by Messrs. Bur- gess and Wood. Schools were already es- tablished there, and also a church, with nine native members. In 1852 this mission ex- perienced a severe bereavement, in the death of both Mrs. Wood and Mrs. Burgess. The first native who embraced Christian- ity at Satara, was Krishana Row, a Brah- min, and his case excited extraordinary in- terest in the minds of the people. " For some days after his baptism hundreds came to see him and his wife. Some even came from distant villages to behold the great wonder of a Brahmin become a Christian." The excitement was attended with an un- usual degree of calm inquiry. ■ Another event of interest at this time,was the discovery of a secret society among the educated Hindoos, the object of which was to make war upon some of the more flagrant absurdities of their religious system, such as the distinction of caste, and the prejudice against the remarrying of widows and female education. This society numbered nearly one hundred, and had several branches. Its members were educated in the missionary and government schools, chiefly the latter, and while many of them only sought to re- form Hindooism, others exposed its utter worthlessness, and advocated the peculiar claims of Christianity. A small chapel was completed by this mission in 1852, and regular preaching exer- cises were commenced. The exercises took the form of a discussion generally, and Mr. Burgess, alluding to this fact, says : " I doubt if any other mission in India can present such well maintained religious discussions, attended with Continued interest on the part of the people. Certainly I never had such opportunities for preaching to the masses of the people as I enjoy at Satara. At the latest dates from this mission a larger chapel was about to be erected, and the villages around presented an inviting field of labor. Two boys' schools and two girls' schools were in successful operation, and there was also what was called a " parochial school," with from fifteen to twenty pupils, taught ia the yard of the mission house by a son of a native Christian. About 5,000 books, tracts and portions of Scripture were sold by the mission during the year 1852. A reinforce- ment has sailed for this mission, but no re- turns have beeii received. Kolapoor. — The mission at this place is of quite recent date, having been commenced in 1852. It is about 130 miles distant from Ahmednuggur, nearly south, and contains a population of some 44,000. No missionary labor had ever been performed here before, and the people were entirely unacquainted with the Gospel. On the arrival of the mis- sionary, Mr. Wilder, the people sent a re- monstrance to the King and to the political superintendent, against his being allowed to remain ; but they soon became acquainted with him, and the opposition died away. Kolapoor is the centre of a population of 550,000 souls, and presents an immense field for missionary operations. Madura. — The mission at Madura was commenced in July, 1834. A tour of obser- vation was previously made by Mr. Spauld- ing, of the Ceylon mission, accompanied by three native helpers, and after visiting vari- ous places, this was decided upon as the most desirable and important in that part of India for a missionary station. Madura is in the southern part of Hindos- tan, and is the city of the ancient Tamil kings and the seat of Brahminical pride in that quarter. It has a population of about 50,000, and the district bearing the same name contains 1,300,000 souls. Several large villages lie within fifteen or twenty miles of the city. As the result of their observa- tions concerning the country itself, the mis- sionaries say : " Southern India has no vast alluvial plains, like the deltas of the Ganges, the Jumna, and the Burrampootur, nor is its coast marshy, like those of Cuttack, Bengal, and Arracan. Beheld from the sea, it ap- pears mountainous down to the beach. But along the eastern shore for more than 500 miles from Cape Comoriu, there is a strip of sandy waste extending three or four miles from the sea ; when the land rises into de- tached hills, and farther back into moun- tains, till at length the scenery combines the magnificent with the beautiful. The moun-, tains assume every varied form, and are clothed with extensive forests, while tho smaller hills, which skirt the plain, are here and there graced with temples and choultries, exhibiting exquisite specimens of architecture. Winding streams flow f oux niNDOSTAN. 391 every hill, and the soft and lovely valleys are in striking contrast with the dark and mighty forests which overcap them." Among these hills and valleys dwell that portion of the Tamil people on the continent, for whose immediate benefit the mission was com- menced. In July, 1834, Messrs. Todd and Hoising- ton removed from Ceylon to Madura, accom- panied by three interesting young natives who had been connected with the boarding school and seminary at Ceylon almost from their commencement. It will be seen, there- fore, that a vcrj^ intimate relation subsisted between the Ceylon and JIadura missions ; and this will be still better understood by quoting the preamble and resolutions adopt- ed by the brethren at Ceylon. They were as follows : '' "Whereas, it is considered very desirable that the missionaries from America stationed in Jaffna and on the neighboring continent, be on the most intimate terms, not only be- cause they are connected with the same Board, are situated among a people of the same language and religion, and are depend- ent, at least for the present, on the produc- tions of the same press ; but because a mu- tual exchange of counsel and help, and some- times an exchange of labors either for the promotion of health, or for the advancement of the cause generally, may be most salu- tary ; therefore resolved, " 1. That the American mission in .Jaffna and that about to be established on the con- tinent of India, be associated missions. "2. That the mission on the continenthave equal power with the mission in JalTria in all secular and ecclesiastical concerns ; such as the erection of all necessary buildings for themselves and families ; the establishment of schools ; the mode and extent of church discipline ; the employment of such native helpers as they may consider nesessary and expedient lor the furtherance of the cause of Christ in that place ; and the general management of the mission in all its bear- ings. " 3. That each mission exchange copies of all its ofBcial communications to the Board, journals excepted. " 4. That in case of any serious diiHculty in either mission, either the majority or the minority may apply to the other mission for advice." In Feb., 1835, Mr. Eckard and his wife left Jaffnapatam to connect themselves with the Madura mission; and in the May fol- lowing he makes some statements which are important, as showing the nature of the field into which he and his brethren had en- tered. He speaks of Madura as a city where idolatry has pecfuliar power, an in- tense sanctity, a numerous priesthood ; and a place into which, at certain seasons of the year, tens of thousands of votaries crowd to worship, they know not what. " Ileathenibh abominations reign here," he sa3's, " in full malignity ; and the people are generally cap- tious and careless respecting any religion other than their own." Their principal temple, that of Menn Aatche, he describes as of vast dimensions, there being no build- ing in the United States that can compare with it in size. This temple ii almost com- pletely covered over with images of human and superhuman beings, executed in planter. Most of the lioiises in Madura are of mud, one story high, covered with leaves and straw ; but there are a few really good dwellings, in oriental style. In planning the Madura mission the de- sign was to make it a large central statioE, while single families and schools should be established in each of the surrounding vil- lages, so that the whole mass of the commu nity should he brought under the influence of Christian truth, and united and concen- trated action secured. Soon after entering upon the mission, Mr. Eckard commenced a school upon the Lancasterian plan, similar to the one in Calcutta, which had been con- ducted with eminent success. Instruction was given chiefly in English, and Mr. E. himself assumed the duties of teacher, be- lieving, as he said, that " no English school taught by a native could compare with one taught by an educated missionary." He began with eighteen boys, some of them of high caste, and all were required to attend public worship on the Sabbath. Preaching was added to teaching, and besides these labors in the city, an elibrt was soon made to reach the surrounding villages. " There are two of us," said Mr. Eckard, '' and our immediate circle of influence sweeps in about 100,000 souls. I mean by this, that if our bodily strength did not fail we might reside at Madura and be sensibly felt by one hundred thousand people in the city and ad- joining villages." Mr. and Mrs. Poor left Ceylon and joined the Madura mission in 1836. At the close of this year there were in connection with the mission thirty-five schools, containing 1,149 boys and 65 girls. Nine of these schools were in the city, and the others in the neighboring villages. Books and tracts were also freely distributed. In general the most intimate and reliable knowledge of heathen countries is derived from the missionaries, and comes to us after they have been upon the field a sufBcient time to make investigations. Hence the ne- cessity of interrupting the missionary nar- rative by the introduction of important his- torical facts illustrative of the character of the field, and essential to a correct under- standing of the responsibilities and trials of the missionary. In regard to that section 39:a HINDOSTAN. of Hindostan now under review, the mis- sionaries say, in 1836, "The region inhabited by those who speak Tamil on the continent, is bounded on the north by a Ime which we may suppose to be drawn from Madras towards the west. It extends from this limit to Cape Comorin, at the extreme south of Hindostan, from the sea shore on the east to the western branches of the southern Ghaut mountains on the west. This space comprises an area of from 75,000 to 100,000 square miles. The population has been variously estimated at from 3,000,000 to 10,000,000. Perhaps 6,000,000 or 8,000,000 approximates most nearly to the truth. Comparatively few of the Tamil people dwell among the mountains on the west. They reside chiefly in the wide plains which extend to the sea, and which are known as the Carnatic. There are more than twenty cities within the limits above described, in- habited in whole or in part by Tamil people ; and there are probably 500 towns of from 50 to 1,000 people each." Passing on to 1838, vi'e find four stations around Madura, viz. : Dindigul, 40 miles north-west of Madura ; Sevagunga, 25 miles east, Teroopoovanum, 12 miles south-east, and Teroomungalum, 12 miles north-west. At each of these places there was a mis- sionary, and in some instances two, with schools, and other means of systematic effort. The whole number of schools con- nected with the mission at this period was 66, and of scholars 1866. In 1840 the work had progressed so that there were in all the schools of the mission a total of 3,316 scholars. About 1,000 of the pupils in the native free schools could read, and nearly the whole number had com- mitted to memory the ten commandments, the Lord's prayer, and a small catechism. There were 12 additions during the year to the four native churches. Mr. Spaulding made a second visit to the Tamil district this year, it being just seven years since his first exploring tour, previous to the estab- lishment of the mission. Of the changes which had occurred he speaks in very strong terms. The roads had been improved, bridges had been constructed, numerous shade trees had been planted, the tanks, from which the cultivated lands were irri- gated, had been repaired, and the revenue in some parts of the district had been more than doubled. " When I went over before, our boat was blown out of its course by the strong wind, and Mr. Harrington and myself were obliged to walk about 70 miles in the sun by day, and ,with no rest house by night. Now we had good conveyances and good rest houses and mission houses and pleasant gardens through our whole tour. Then there was no missionary station nor Christian teacher within the district. Now there are five stations and nine mis- sionaries, who have under their care about eighty native free schools and four EnglisH boarding schools, all of which are in » y^^y interesting and flourishing state, and titteen or twenty native assistants of very good promise." -• i,- c ij The increasing importance of this held, and the opportunities offered for enlarging the operations of the mission, induced the brethren in 1841 to make an urgent appeal to the Board for twenty additional mission- aries. But instead of such a reinforcement, or even one additional missionary, the mis- sion was weakened and severely tried by the removal of Mr. Poor to Ceylon, a change which his health rendered indispensable. The appropriations for the schools also fell short this year, and there appeared to be a painful necessity of disbanding some of them, but on submitting the matter to the native teachers they said, " You must not discharge us ; we will take what you have to give." In another instance, after a consul- tation among the teachers, one of them re- ported to the missionary in behalf of the others, "If a father have ten sons, and un- fortunately loses half his property, will his sons allow him to turn away five of their number to starve, while the rest are sup- ported in comfort ? No ! These sons will consent to live on less and to have the parent divide the amount equally among them. This is our decision. We are each of us willing to live on rice congee rather than to have any of our number dismissed." The schools were accordingly continued as usual. An event of great importance, about this time, was an act dissolving all connection between idolatry and the government of British India. This act threw upon the heathen themselves the whole expense of building and repairing their temples. By another act, passed the same j^ear, simple aflBrmation in the name of the living and true God was made binding on all as an oath, instead of the former swearing on the sacred waters of the Ganges and on the Koran. In this also the missionaries had occasion greatly to rejoice, as the land would no longer mourn because of the swearing by false gods and a he. These great changes resulted in no small degree from the steady operation of Christian missions upon the public conscience, and the value and power of such missions as reformatory agencies are thus placed in a very strong light. In 1843 the mission was called to a severe trial. Mr. Poor had already been removed to Ceylon, and Dr. Steele had died in 1842 and this year Mr. Ward was transferred to Madras, besides which, the cholera made its appearance, mowing down great numbers of the native inhabitants, and not entirely ex- KjS^i'fiTol HINDOSTAN, 393 empting the mission families. Rev. Mr. Dwight, Mrs. North, and Mrs. Cherry, with- in eleven days of each other, were carried from one house to the silent tomb. Other missionaries however soon arrived, and the work suffered but a temporary interruption. It is recorded as a fact worthy of special notice during this year, that the Papists re- siding in three distant villages, amounting to twenty-iive families, and numbering 106 in- dividuals, were received under the spiritual care and instruction of the mission. And further, whole communities, villages, and hamlets, applied to be acknowledged as no longer pagans or Roman Catholics, but as Christians and Protestants. In one village three families, in another four, and in an- other forty families, entered into an agree- ment, either by their head men or over their own signatures, to renounce idolatry and re- ceive the Gospel, or else refund the expense the missionaries should incur to meet their wishes. For copies of some of these agree- ments, see annual report of the Board for 1844. Many interesting features in the pro- gress of the Madura mission during the years 1844 and 1845 must be passed over. In 1846 the native churches received an acces- sion of ninety-seven members. At this date the villages are spoken of as not only all open, but more than open, as they not only would receive the missionaries, but come to them. Fifteen or twenty companies, from villages thirty and forty mUes distant, and where the missionaries had never been, visit- ed them for tracts and instruction, and some of them manifested great anxiety for the sal- vation of their souls. Dr. Scudder removed to Madura with his family, in 1847, thus supplying the want of a physician, which had been deeply felt. It was in the year 1847 that the mission entered upon a formal and uncompromising conflict with caste, which, the missionaries at this date say, " has existed to the present time, with various degrees of strength in the churches established by Schwartz and his devoted fellow laborers, as well as in those of more modern date." The missionaries of the Board were at length determined to free the Church of Christ from " a foe most insidious as well as powerful," and seventy- two were suspended from church fellowship on account of their adherence to this sin. At the same time many left the seminary on account of the encroachments made upon the rules of caste. The results, however, showed the wisdom of the measure, and proved that the time had fully come for so decisive a st-ep. It should be stated, however, that caste has never been tolerated in the churches planted by the missionaries of the Board. Rev. Dr. Allen, who has been for more than a quarter of a century a missionary of the Board in India, says : " The Missionaries of the American Board in India and Ceylon have always required a renunciation of caste, just as much as of idolatry, and other parts of heathenism, of all converts before they were baptized. No arrangements, nor accommodations, nor changes have ever been made m the seats, or in the sitting in the churches, or in the ad- ministration of the ordinances on account of caste. Caste was in no respect recognized. All were treated as of one class, as much as Christians in this country are so treated. " It would naturally be expected that such a public renunciation of caste, and such sub- sequent treatment of it, would be sufBcient to extinguish it in the church. But experi- ence has shown that it was not sufficient. Caste has been found to be surprisingly insi- dious in its influence; and to be capable of assuming almost any complexion and shape, suited to the native character and their cir- cumstances." Passing on to 1851,we find the Committee of the Board drawing a new and more mod- ern sketch of this great field, and one which sets in a striking light both the astonishing changes which had been wrought and the immense labors devolved upon the mission- aries. After alluding to the fact that in 1836 this mission had only one station at Madu- ra, and that all the schools were in its im- mediate vicinity, they proceed to say that now they have extended their operations till they have ten stations, one of which is more than thirty miles south, and another about the same distance north ; one about twenty- five miles east and another forty north-west from Madura ; with families under their care associated in the form of village congrega- tions in about 100 villages, scattered singly or in clusters through a populous region, ex- tending in length more than 100 miles from south-east to north-west, and more than sixty miles in breadth. This field, thus in some measure taken possession of by our missionaries, has been almost wholly left to them by the missionaries of other societies laboring in adjoining districts in India, and it seems fitting that it should be fully occu- pied by this Board. It is larger than the State of Massachusetts, and has a popula- tion, as is supposed, of 1,500,000. It has become one of great interest and great prom- ise, and the labor demanded in it has obvi- ously increased much beyond the ability of the present band of laborers. Hitherto the natural growth of the mission has been one of expansion, but there is now a call for more thorough culture." The year 1852 was one of great favor to this mission, 72 having been received to the churches at the different stations, fifty-six of wliom were adults. There were now nine churches in all, and 335 members in good standing. The system of education had been 394 HINDOSTAN. gradually changed, and, say the missionaries at this period, "We can have but little to do hereafter with the general desire of the hea- then to have their children receive from us an Enghsh and Tamil education. The Lord in his providence has given us a people to educate for him. Among the members of our congregations we have 1,588 children, of whom 647 are studying in our free schools. From these it is easy to make a selection for our own boarding schools." It is the main design of the boarding schools and of the seminary to raise up an educated and effi- cient class of helpers for the missionary work, and it is considered a great advantage that the pupils can now be taken from fami- lies connected with the mission and nomin- ally Christians. Madras. — The mission at Madras was commenced in 1836, with a special view to forming there a printing establishment for printing the Scriptures and religious tracts in the Tamil language. But in order to the successful execution of this plan, it was deemed necessary to establish there a dis- tinct, efficient, and responsible mission ; and with this view, Mr. Winslow and Dr. Scud- der removed to this new field. Madras is on the eastern side of Southern India, and the population of the city and suburbs is estimated at 416,000. It was intended to establish the press at Chintadrepettah, a suburb southwesterly of the walled town, and at this place Dr. Scudder took up his. residence, while Mr. Winslow resided at Royapoorum, a little north of the town. They immediately found the demand for Tamil books and tracts to be very great, and expressed the wish that they had 25,OO0 copies of the New Testament to distribute within a year. Schools and preaching sta- tions were immediately established, and a mission church was formed in 1837, and one native was admitted on profession of his faith in Christ. In 1838 the mission came into possession of a large printing establishment which had belonged to the Church Missionary Society. It comprised eighteen printing presses, be- sides a lithographic and hydraulic press, fifteen fonts of type, English, Tamil, and Teloogoo, together with a type foundry and book bindery. This enabled the mission to enter vigorously upon the work for which it was chiefly commenced. In one year from this date there had been printed 3,500,000 octavo pages of Scripture, and 2,500,000 duodecimo pages of tracts, making 6,000,000 pages in all. In 1840 the printing in Tamil amounted to 11,660,700 pages, over nine mil lions of which were octavo pages of Scrip ture. At this period there were also in ex istence sixteen Bchools, comprising 485 scholars. Important tours for preaching and dis- tributing books were made by Messrs. Scud- der and Winslow in 1840. One of these tours was to Conjevezam, a sacred place 46 miles south-west of Madras, during which they preached the Gospel to numerous small companies of people, and distributed over 4,000 books and tracts. Dr. Scudder also journeyed 200 miles south, into the Cudda- lore and Tanjore districts, taking with him 6,000 copies of one of the Gospels, and 11,500 tracts. Mr. Winslow, for the special benefit of his wife and child, went west 200 miles, into the Mysore district, which he de- scribes as an immense terrace of table land, elevated about 3,000 feet above the level of the sea, and altogether a splendid country, well watered, fertile, populous, and promis- ing as a field of missionary labor. In all their visits to the sacred places, Messrs. Scudder and Winslow found a great falling off in the number of attendants upon idola- trous festivals. In 1841 the mission had four places of stated preaching, and the aggregate of the congregations was 550. A piece of land was bought this year at Royapooram for a chapel, and §1,500 subscribed for its erec- tion. At this place Mr. Winslow estab- lished an evening meeting, in a bungalow on the premises of a very respectable native merchant, and upon this a persecution arose, in describing which Sir. Winslow says, " The Romanists immediately began to annoy us, and to send letters threatening our lives. They threw stones, both in times of meeting and at other times, at the family, set up a noisy meeting in the adjoining house, and disturbed us by offensive smell- ing lights and fire works, as well as by the noise of bells and various instruments ; and when this was stopped by the authorities, they burnt the bungalow with the furniture it contained." The native merchant how- ever, remained firm, and the persecution failed entirely of its object. In their report in 1843 the Board take oc- casion to remark, that the Madras, Madura, and Ceylon missions are all to a people alike in religion, language, manners, and customs. The station at Madras being intended to do the principal part of the printing for all these missions, it was not mtended to en- large it beyond what was necessary for this purpose. The Madura mission has never had a printing press within its bounds, and that at Jaffna has done much less work than the one at Madras. In 1845 the missionaries found that caste was exerting an undue control over the minds of the native church members, and wishing to see how far this unchristian feel- ing would be carried, they took measures to test it. The result was that five were sus- pended J but their Christian principles pre- vailed, and in a few months they all came HINDOSTAN. S9S back, made a full and humble confession, and promised to conform to the rules of the church respecting caste. A prospectus for a railroad from Madras to Arcot, sixty miles, issued in 1846, gives the population of Madras in 1842, as up- wards of 900,000, an increase of more than 200,000 since 1822. This increase was sup- posed to be owing chiefly to political causes, tending to centralize the pbpulation in the cities of the coast. This vast community is distinctly spoken of in 1846, as showing signs of the wide spread and powerful working of the truth, and the organized opposition made to the Gospel was one evidence of this fact. An anti-missionary society existed among the natives of Madras, which employed a press in printing small tracts and a newspaper, and the same society established several op- position free schools, employed tract dis- tributors and declaimors against Christian- ity, and sent out agents into the country for similar purposes. The people were thus mightily stirred up, and on one occasion 8,000 people assembled to see if measures could not be devised to prevent the spread of Christianity. Say the missionaries, "Now, light and truth have so far gone forth that the bearings of missionary operations on caste, custom, and idolatry, begin to bo manifest. The Brahmins and head men begin to feel that their craft is in danger. They are therefore bestirring themselves." They proceeded even so far as to seize and forcibly carry off several hopeful converts, and one of them was put in irons aiid threatened with death. All this however, while it showed that the pillars of supersti- tion bad been shaken, occasioned no perma- nent interruption to the mission. In the autumn of this year Dr. Scudder, who had been spending a few years in his native country, greatly to the edification and quick- ening of the churches, returned to his chosen field of labor. Instead, however, of re- maining at Madras, he was persuaded, by the urgent want of a physician at Madura, to resume his labors at that place. The opposition continued to be very bitter and violent in 1847, and on one occasion Mr. Scudder, son of Dr. Scudder, was openly as- sailed in the streets. In defiance of the popular rage however, the women came, at a communion season, and sat down with the men at the table, with their husbands, a thing which they had never done before. The most serious troubles were occasioned by the spirit of caste, and Mr. Scudder is led to remark, " If I were asked to tell in one breath what I thought the mightiest present obstacle to the onward course of the G ospel in India, I should unhesitatingly say, caste. It is a monster that defies description. Idolatry in no way compares with it, as to its «rasp on the people." Dr. Scudder returned to Madras in 1848, and in the following year he was called to mourn the death of his wife, Mrs. Harriet M. Scudder. Shci commenced her labors in connection with the Ceylon mission in 1819. In November, 1850, Mr. Winslow announced that the printing of the new version of the Tamil Bible was completed. It had been in hand three years, and for two years the united labors of Messrs Percival and Spaulding of Jaffna, Brotherton of the Church of England, and Winslow in Madras, had been devoted to it, most of tUe time daily except on the Sabbath. In point of accuracy, conciseness, elegance, and idiom- atic correctness, it was thought to be far in advance of any previous work of the kind. Another interesting event of this year was the meeting of all the members of the church except four, with the mission families, on the evening preceding the ^nual meeting, which was held in connection with the Board.. It is described as an interesting sight. " Husbands and wives, little accus- tomed to eat together, high caste and low caste, and no caste, brethren and sisters in Christ, thus acknowledging their unity in him as members of the same bod}'." During the years 1851 and 1852, the press at Madras continued its operations, and the mission moved on without any very marked changes. The whole amount of printing at this place since the establishment of the press, is 219,408,221 pages. Arcot. — This city is seventy miles from Madras, on the road to Bangalore, and is the centre of a very populous and destitute dis- trict. At this place Mr. H. M. Scudder com- menced a mission in March, 1850. Having already become quite distinguished for his medical and surgical skill, his services were in immediate demand, from forty to fifty visiting him daily. His custom was to meet his patients in the mornmg, read and explain a passage of Scripture, and pray with them, after which he attended to their maladies. Through his medical labors he gained access to many Hindoo women, who could not have been reached in any other way. A regular dispensary was established, and Mrs. Scud- der, who could speak Tamil fluently, visited it daily to converse with the patients. In 1852, Henry M. Scudder, William Scudder, and Joscjjh Scudder, all sons of the venerable Dr. Scudder, and all born in India, were laboring as missionaries at the Arcot station. In the report of the Board for 1853, will be found a very interesting account of the conversion of a Teloogoo Brahmin, at Arcot. In addition to the labors of the dispensary, the Gospel was preached " in towns and villages, in streets and by- ways, in choultries and under green trees." The mission however is of too recent a dalje to exhibit any very marked results, or to require an extended notice. 396 HINCOSTAN. The statistics of the missions of the Am. Board in Hindostan are given below, as far as it was practicable to arrange them in a tabular form : MISSIONS. 9 B 3 a i E o' g o' D 2. 1. 3 o 3' 1 3 on 3- o o .» 5^ Bombay, Ahmednugg'r Satara, Kolapar, Madura, Madras, Arcot, 1812 1831 1861 1862 1834 1838 1862 1 6 1 1 10 3 22 4 5 1 1 11 4 26 2 16 2 2 77 7 m 1 3 1 9 2 16 20 136 8 336 42 641 14 9 4 89 11 127 456 939 100 1626 679 124,880,963 219,408,221 3800 344,289,174 In the above table, assistant missionaries and native helpers are all included under the head of assistants. The summary of schools also embraces those of every description. The printing for the Mahratta people, it will be seen, has all been done at Bombay, and for the Tamil people at Madras and Ceylon. Church Missionary Society. — The Church Missionary Society commenced its labors in Hindostan in 1815. Beginning at Madras and South India, they subsequently extended their labors to Calcutta, and to Bombay, and at each of these places they have now a diocese embracing many towns and villages within its sphere of effort. Adopting the chronological order, we begin with Madras. — The first missionaries of tho Society to this field were Rev. Messrs. Schnarre and Rhenius. At the end of their first year, they reported themselves as com- fortably settled in Madras, as having ac- quired the Tamil language sufficiently to compose, converse, and publicly read in it, and also as having formed a Missionary Committee, and raised a small missionary fund. It should be observed here, that although this society had no regular station in India previous to 1815, they had promoted mis- sions in various places much earlier, through English chaplains, and in connection with what is termed the oldest Protestant mis- sion in India, the Danish mission. Thus, Messrs. Schnarre and Rhenius had been la- boring for some time in Tranquebar, more than a hundred miles south of Madras, part- ly in aid of the schools established there by the Royal Danish Mission College, and part- ly for the acquisition of the Tamil language. About this time the Danish mission was obliged to withdraw its patronage from these school establishments, and the care of them was assumed by the Church Mission- ary Society. To Tranquebar and its schools frequent allusion will be made. In the early journals of this society much is also said of Abdool Messech, a Christian reader. He was a Mohammedan by birth, named Shekh Salih, bom in Delhi, and re- ceived his first Christian instruction from that devoted missionary, Henry Martyn. He was baptized in the " Old Church," Cal- cutta, in 1811, by the name Abdool Messech, which signifies "Servant of Christ." At the close of 1812 he left Calcutta and pro- ceeded to Agra, 800 miles north-west of Cal- cutta, in company with Mr. Corrie, chaplain of the East India Company at that station. There he sustained the office of reader and catechist with wonderful fidelity and success, and his journals fill a large space in the Church Missionary Society's publications. To return to Madras, we find at an early date the reasons stated for choosing this as the seat of the mission in Southern India ; and they may be noticed with the more pro- priety because, although the American Board preceded the Church Missionary Society by several years in India, they were twenty-one years later than that society at Madras. Consequently many facts of interest belong to a period over which the mission of the Board does not extend. The choice of the Corresponding Commit- tee fell upon Madras for the following rea- sons : " Its high consideration as head of the whole peninsula, the desire for Christian knowledge which appeared to prevail therein, the frequent demands for the Scriptures in three or four languages, the existence of a Malabar congregation — a secession from the Roman Catholics, and a translated liturgy of the Church of England just completed for this congregation, by Rev. Dr. Rottler, chap- lain of the E. I. Company." To enter into these labors, keep open the Tamil Chapel, provide against the failure of the venerable Dr. Rottler, and build upon his foundations, though limited, seemed very important ; and further, the society would thus commence its career in the South of India, at the seat and within the eye of the English govern- ment. Attention was early given to schools, and the distribution of tracts. The latter, how- ever, were difficult to obtain, as the mission had at this period no means of printing. To supply this deficiency as well as they could, one of the best school boys was employed at certain hours in writing, and thus two books were prepared for the English Tamil school, with a dictionary affixed appropriate to them. These books consisted of small portions of the Scriptures. At the close of one year there were two schools in Madras, but the want of funds and of teachers prevented an immediate enlargement of the system of edu- cation. A seminary for the education of na- tive missionaries was a favorite idea from the first ; but it was encumbered with many difficulties, and the project could not be en- tered upon at once. Much interest was awakened, near the HINDOSTAN. 397 close of the first year, by the conversion of a native, who called himself a Christian, and who, without any suggestion from the mis- sionaries, entered at once upon the business of reading from house to house. His book was the New Testament. He began by the request of a single heathen neighbor, who saw him much devoted to this book, and by this his own soul was stirred up to read the word of God daily to the perishing around him. It is worthy of note, that the missionaries of the Church Society at Madras, from the very start, excluded caste from their schools. No little surprise and opposition were awak- ened, but the truly scriptural and sensible answer was, that " the- caste of the natives is not at all compatible with true Chris- tianity ; because a man cannot be meek, humble, and loving, in the manner in which our Lord Jesus has set us an example, and as the Holy Spirit works within the heart, and, at the same time keep up his notions of caste ; in which the station, or rank, or esteem of any or every person is determined by birth alone, and not by intrinsic worth and dignity of mind." Such were the labors of the first year, two missionaries able to preach the Gospel in Tamil ; two schools in successful opera- tion, without the least encouragement of caste ; a native Christian reader, sufBcient- ly informed to be listened to with attention by respectable natives ; and a general spirit of inquiry awakened among the people. In 1816, the mission received a reinforce- ment, and at the same time Mr. Schnarre returned to Tranquebar to take the entire care of the school establishments in that place. On the first of January 1817, Mr. Rhenius formed a regular congregation in Madras, consisting of the mission servants and their families, and a few converts re- ceived the previous year. That more were not received from the heathen, is accounted for in a manner most creditable to the char- acter and principles of this mission, when Mr. Ehenius says, " If I had thought it any advantage to the Christian church, or any honor to our Lord Jesus Christ, to pay per- sons for becoming Christians, I should have had already the pleasure of reporting hun- dreds, yea, thousands, that would have em- braced Christianity." During this year, schools were established at Vadadelli, about 30 miles north-west of Madras, through the agency of the native Christian Sandappen, residing at that place. Other native con- verts were employed in a similar manner, in different directions. In the autumn of 1818, the cholera broke out with great violence in this part of Hin- dostan, and the natives in their consterna- tion attributed it to the anger of an idol, which for forty years had been locked up by public authority, on account of the dissen- sions which occurred at one of her festivals. The idol was therefore brought out, and a human sacrifice — an idiot boy, was offered to appease her rage. Only one member of the mission — a catechist — died of the epi- demic. But the mission property was much damaged by a whirlwind which occurred about the same time — all the school-houses, and many other buildings, having been com- pletely prostrated. An important branch of this mission, was that among the Syrian Christians, in Tra- vancore, at the southern extremity of Hin- dostan, on the Malabar coast. The history of these Syrians, and the manner in which they came to be residents in this quarter, are fully stated in the Report of the Mis- sionary Society for 1818. There were then not less than 50,000 of these Christians, with churches, a ministry (exceedingly li- centious) and a form of worship resembling that of the Roman Catholics. So deep was the interest felt in this particular depart- ment, that in 1820 a three-fold division was made of the work, the instruction of the Syrian clergy being assigned to one mission- ary, the college and higher schools to an- other, while a third took charge of the schools intended for the great body of the people. The clergy were regarded as the first and most important branch of this mis- sion. They are described at this period as a numerous body, and deplorably degraded. A total disregard of the Sabbath, profana- tion of the name of God, drunkenness, and adultery, were their prevailing crimes. Yet, in this degenerated condition they were con- siderably above the other castes. They did not justify their crimes, but tried to conceal them, and exhibited considerable moral sense. They accepted most gratefully the services of the missionaries, and concurred in all their plans. The metropolitan even remarked, that he did not expect much im- provement among his people '■ till the Bible was circulated." The college, at Cotym, had, in 1820, forty- two students. Some of them could read English well, understood the simple rules of arithmetic, and had considerable knowledge of the Malay and Sanscrit languages. The method of teaching the Syriac was found very defective, and a more thorough system was entered upon. The third object of at- tention, that of schools, embraced tlie estab- lishment of a school for the preparation of native schoolmasters, the gradual promotion of schools for general instruction, the super- intendence of these schools by personal vis- its, and the compiling of small tracts for their use. The establishment of parochial schools to be attached to every church un- der the jurisdiction of the metropolitan, was an object much desired, and at the above 398 HINDOSTAN. date ten of these schools existed, embracing 253 children. The mission at Madras and South India had now become systematized, and was an- nually reported under the following heads, viz.: Madras and its vicinity ; Tranquehar ; Tinnevelly, lying south of Tranquebar, and not far from Cape Comorin ; and Travan- core, which included Cotym, Cochin, and Aleppi ; Cannanore and Tellicherry, on the western side of southern India, and conside- rably north of Jravancore ; and Vizgapa- iam, north of Madras, on the eastern coast. At all these places the usual missionary ope- rations were carried on with zeal and marked success. But it is impossible in so brief a space to notice each of them in the annual progress of the work, and many facts wor- thy of record are omitted, with a simple reference to the Missionary Register, the very ably conducted monthly journal of the Church Missionary Society, and to their an- nual reports. In 1824, a new mission was established in the Xellore district, where the Teloogoo or Gentoo language was vernacular. The rea- sons which determined the Corresponding Committee to occupy this field were, the vast extent of country throughout which the above language was spoken, the limited , efforts hitherto made for the enlightenment of that people, and the circumstance of the Madras printing-press being now furnished with Teloogoo types, so as to give speedy circulation to school books, tracts, and por- tions of the Scriptures, in that language. In 1825, ten years having elapsed since the societjf commenced its labors in Hmdo- gtan, with two Lutheran clergymen, design- ed simply for the charge of the Tranquebar schools, their report presented nine stations, with eleven European missionaries, and one on his passage ; 117 boys' schools and 101 girls' schools, with an aggregate of 4,585 scholars ; five seminaries for the training of natives on a more liberal scale, with a view to their becoming teachers and missionaries among their countrymen ; besides a vast work accomplished through the mission press, congregations gathered, houses of worship erected, &c. During the next ten years there was con- siderable opposition, and even bitter perse- cution, from the natives, especially at Tinne- velly ; yet the mission was at no time essen- tially interrupted. One or two new stations were added during this period, and the spirit of inquiry among the Syrian Christians was greatly increased. In 1838, the mis- sionary at Tinnevelley reported a remarkable case of the effect of the Gospel upon a whole village, which had then lately oc- curred. The Shanar village of Pragasa- pooram, became entirely Christian ; and the people, who had been t«n oi more years un- der instruction, and had made great pro- gress in Christian knowledge, became very anxious to see a Christian church in the vil- lage, which should not only last their life- time, but stand and testify to their children's children, the sincerity of their religious pro- fession. Accordingly a subscription was set on foot among themselves, and the mis- sion added a sum equal to what they could raise, and the object was accomplished. It was in this year that the mission at Aleppie reported an extraordinary effort of the Pa- pacy to establish itself in that place. A large number of priests from Ireland, with their bishop, arrived, and began putting forth every effort by preaching, opening a college, seminary, &c. Although the work at Tinnevelly was con- sidered of a diffusive character, extending to different villages through a wide district, so that nothing more was expected than to see here and there a few embracing the truth ; yet, to the surprise of all, whole villages, as in the case just noticed, were found embrac- ing Christianity. The bishop of Jladras, in 1842, says, "Among many sources of com- fort during myjourney through Tinnevelley, one of the greatest has been a sight, for which, I candidly confess, I was not pre- pared — the sight of whole Christian vil- lages, lie alone who has passed some time in a heathen land, engaged in the work of the ministry, can understand the delight which I felt at finding myself met, wel- comed, and surrounded by crowds of na- tive professing Christians, whose counten- ances spoke a most intelligible welcome." Some idea of the extent of the mission at Tinnevelley may be gathered from the fact, that at this period the field was divided into six districts, each containing from 50 to 90 villages, and each district having a' mission- ary, with from 40 to 70 catechists and school- masters under his superintendence. A very remarkable occurrence is recorded in 1841, in one of the Tinnevelley districts, and should be repeated as an evidence of the divine blessing upon this mission. At a village in the Palamcottah district, south of Tinne- velly, belonging to a respectable Brahmin, a number of families applied to a catechist for instruction. The Brahmin, hearing of it, as- sembled the whole of the villagers, and ad- dressed them as follows : " I hear that some of you have determined to learn the Vedam (Christian religion.) Now, I don't want any divisions and quarrels in my village, nor shall there be two parties here ; therefore, all of 3'ou either remain in a body in your old religion, or else all of you in a body join the new. If you like to embrace Christiani- ty, do so; I will make no opposition. You may turn your temple into a prayer-house if you like, only all be of the same mind ; and if you do not act justly towards me, I niNDOSTAN. 399 shall look to the missionaries to see me righted." The result was. that they all put themselves under Christian instruction, de- molished their idols, and converted their devil temple into a temple of the living God. The evidence that real Christianity prevailed along with these outward forms of it, was most satisfactory, and one proof of this was found in tho constanc}' with which the na- tive Christians bore persecution. In one in- stance, when compelled to flee from their native village, they said to the catechist, " We might escape all these troubles by de- nying Christ, and returning to our former ways, as most of our relations have done ; but we cannot do so ; and as the Lord has said, when they persecute you in this city. Jlee ye into another, we will avail ourselves of his permission." As a further evidence of genuine Christianity' among these con- verts, it is added, that they formed religious and benevolent societies among themselves, thus supporting the widows of catechists. reheving the siclc and indigent of their own number, and sustaining Christian readers, who traveled about making known the Gos- pel. They also established a Church build- ing fund, on the principle that every person in the district capable of working, should give the best day's income of the whole year to the fund, with as much more as they liked. Besides these evidences of the reality of the work of grace among the converts of Tinnevelley, there were many bright exam- ples of Christian faith and hope at the hour of death. Particular instances of conversion and Christian fidelity might also be given, illus- trating the success of the missionaries at the four stations in Travancore. One is that of a Syrian convert, who was reclaimed from a most degraded course of life, and who soon commenced preaching the Gospel with a zeal and boldness seldom witnessed in a na- tive. He went from place to place, and on one occasion as he was preaching, a Syrian became so incensed that he went out, and, procuring a knife, returned and stabbed the preacher (Curiathe) to the heart. Curiathe put up a prayer to God not to lay this sin to the charge of the murderer, and fell down lifeless. In 1844, the mission at Tinnevelly was further subdivided, so as to make eight dis- tricts, each having a faithful missionary. In addition to the seminary in the Palamcottah district, for the superior instruction of pro- mising youths from all the district schools, there was also established this year a nor- mal school, for the instruction of native children in the English language, and upon Christian principles ; and also a normal fe- male school, under the care of two English ladies. Measures were also taken for tho establishment of a printing-press for the use of the mission, thus rendering the mission complete in all its departments. The missionary in one of these districts mentions this year the case of a school girl, who labored unweariedly to bring her father and mother to the mission church. They allowed her to come into their house, with- out persecution, and to pray with them, and after more than a year of such effort, her mother, and then her father, came to hear the missionary, renounced heathenism, and were regular attendants on the preached word. In another Tinnevelly district twenty- five families, all that remained in heathen- ism, gave up their devil temple, and came in a body, and placed themselves under Chris- tian instruction ; thus leaving not one idola- ter in the district. The zeal of the people of these districts to erect substantial houses of worship in their villages, afforded pleas- ing evidence of the progress of the Gospel among them. The one day's earnings which they had formerly contributed did not sat- isfy them, and they made quite large sub- scriptions in money to this object. In re- gard to real spiritual progress, in connection with these wonderful outward developments, the missionaries spoke favorably from time to time, as they saw the converts abounding in labors, in sacrifices, and in efforts to bring their relatives to renounce idolatry and em- brace Christianity. An out-station was commenced this year about 12 miles from Trichoor, a station in Travancore, among a class of heathens called Nayards, the very lowest class of natives, who lived by begging, and were extremely ignorant. Several dwelling houses were erected for them, schools were opened, and within a year as many as sixty of them were under instruction, both in religion and in habits of industry. Madras had not, for several years, received its proportionate share of attention, the in- terest having been concentrated more upon the southern portion of the field, particu- larly Tinnevelley and Travancore. The con- sequence was, that in 1845, thirty years from the commencement of the mission, there were but three congregations in Ma- dras, and these not so large as at an earlier period. An urgent appeal was made for more missionaries, but the society could not respond favorably, as they had no more men to send. Two years later, however, more missionaries arrived, and the mission was much strengthened and revived. The Tinnevelly mission was again subdi- vided in 1845, making 11 districts, with 14 missionary clergymen. The number of per- sons under Christian instruction at this pe- riod, in these eleven districts, amounted to 23,868, and in January 1846, they had in- creased to 30,698. The number of baptized converts was now 12,525. A similar sue- 400 HINDOSTAN. cess attended the labors of the " Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts," occupying in some measure the same field, and of which fraternal mention is made by the missionaries of the Church So- ciety. But while Christianity was thus ad- vancing, and whole villages were demolish- ing their idols and embracing the Gospel, a spirit of violent persecution was rising. In one district, several houses of worship were destroyed, converts were handled with violence, and many were falsely accused ; but in spite of all this, 1402 souls embraced the Christian religion in that very district, within six months. In the latter part of this year C1845) the persecution became more systematic and violent. A mob of more than 3,000 attacked some Christian villages, robbed the people of all their goods, and beat them in the most cruel manner. The destruction of property was great. A civil force at length interfered, and put an end to the disturbance. Some of the con verts were led, through fear, to renounce Christianity, but the great body of them re mained firm, and one of the missionaries wrote, a few months later, "I have often been surprised at the unshaken and uncom promising attachment which, during this trying season, these poor people have mani- fested. They, as well as some of the cate chists, have worked night and day to sup- port the Christian cause, and with an alacri- ty and zeal which have often revived my own. Had it not been for this, I do not know what, at times, I should have done. I know also, that some of them have resist- ed temptations which an English Christian is little prepared to resist, — bribes, and such things." The Bishop of Madras visited the Tinne- velly missions in 1845, and in his report he says, " More than 18,000 souls have renounced idolatry and placed themselves under Chris- tian instruction, since January 1841, when I last visited these missions. Thus, in four years and a half, the Christian community in Tinnevelly has doubled itself — the increase during that period being equal to the total increase of the fifty-four years which pre- ceded it." Many of the chief actors in the persecu- tions were, in the following year, tried and punished, but some escaped altogether ; and it was found that the Christian congrega- tions had some of them considerably di- minished. But this did not hinder others, in great numbers, from coming forward to flu their places. About this time the sub- ject of caste was taken up by the missiona- ries in Tinnevelly, and a declaration was drawn np, condemning it in the severest terms, with a solemn pledge forever to re- nounce it, and to discourage it both byword and example. This protest and pledge every native teacher was required to sign, before he could become a candidate for holy orders. The most diligent attention continued to be bestowed unon the Syrian population, in the Travancore district. While the progress here was slow, compared with that in Tinne- velly, the missionaries still felt justified in saying that there was a shaking among the Syrians — a state of great disorganization in their church, and a general dissatisfaction with their religion and a willingness to re- ceive the truth. Two years later (1851) a missionary remarks, that although the Syri- ans hold many doctrines in common with the Roman Catholics, yet there is this wide essential difference between the two churches, viz. : that the Syrians do not dis- allow the perusal of the Scriptures, and nei- ther do they mutilate the sacred text, like the Roman Catholics, to suit their own in- terpretation ; but the authorized version is acknowledged by them, and they profess to draw their doctrines from thence. Still a year later, the same missionary says, " Some great crisis is probably at hand, with regard to the Syrian church in this place. The whole Sj'rian community is in a most divided state, and many are anxious to be joined to a purer faith." This missionary had widely distributed the word of God among the 12,000 Syrians of his district, when a Romish priest ordered the people to bring all these books to his church, on pain of excommuni- cation ; and, as soon as they were collected they were publicly burnt. Opposition of this nature from the Catholics, was among the most serious hindrances to the progress of the mission among the Syrian people. Slavery is spoken of as prevailing exten- sively in Travancore, the slaves numbering about one-sixth of the whole population. They are an extremely degraded class, being regarded by the higher classes, and even by the laborers, as utterly unclean and pollut- ing. " Their persons are entirely at the dis- posal of their masters, by whom they are bought and sold like cattle, and are often worse treated." Yet even these slaves were often reached, and brought under Christian influences. The intelligence from the Madras and South India missions is to the close of 1852. Much that is of special interest might be added to the foregoing statements, particu- larly in regard to the Tinnevelly and Te- loogoo missions, but it is necessary to omit further details. It has been seen that this branch of the Church of England mission, extending over a period of 48 years, has been conducted on a very broad scale, and upon principles as enlightened and philan- thropic as they have been Christian. For learning, practical wisdom, and sincere and unremitting exertions for the temporal and HINDOSTAN. 401 spiritual elevation of the heathen, the mis- sionaries of tliis society in Southern India have been distinguished, not less, certainly, than those in any other field. The results of these labors appear in a table at the end of the article on the Church of England missions in Hindostan. Bombay. — The Church of England com- menced its mission in Bombay in 1820, under the labors of Rev. Mr Kenney. Although it was not a nevf field, the American Board having had an efScient mission there for eight years, yet Mr. Kenney occupied a sepa- rate and independent station, and had the Mahratta language to learn. After laboring with great zeal and success for five years, his return to England vras rendered necessary by the health of his family, and he was suc- ceeded by Rev. Messrs. Mitchell and Steward. Mr. Kenney had established three schools for boys, with 113 scholars, but no school for girls had yet been opened. Mrs. Steward soon died, and Mr. Steward left for another field. Other laborers succeeded from time to time, but for fifteen years or more the operations of the Church Missionary Society in Bombay and Western India were quite limited. They had however established a mission at Nassuck, 100 miles east of Bom- bay, and at both these places they had opened schools for both boys and girls, and had preached the Gospel to multitudes of people, and the Arch-Deacon of Bombaj' was led to remark that " much precious seed was vege- tating in the hearts of natives, though little appeared externally." For the last few years more visible fruits have appeared, at Bombay and at Nassuck. The latter place has a population of 30,000, and is the resort of numerous pilgrims, and the seat and centre of Brahminism in Western India. Here the missionaries have had to encounter very fierce opposition, the Brahmins having become enraged at the weakened influence of Hindooism on the minds of those who have received instruction in the mission schools, and particularly on account of the relinquishment of caste by two Brahmin youths. The Brahmins even expressed the belief that they should be able to expel the missionaries, who, nevertheless, went steadily on with their labors. Considerable atten- tion was bestowed upon the translation of the Scriptures into Mahratta, and preaching tours were frequently performed into the neighboring towns and villages. In the So- ciety's report for 1852, they say, " The mis- sionaries at Bombay and Nassuck are perse- vering in their patient and faithful labors, though they have hitherto reaped but little fruit, and can scarcely discern its promise. The advantages which have been gained have been chiefly the formation of schools, the translation of the Holy Scriptures and of tracts, and that increased respect and atten- 26 tion to Christian truth which form an impor- tant vantage ground for future operatons." In 1843 mention is made of an Asylum at Nassuck for poor and destitute natives, sup- ported by the alms of the benevolent ; and here the missionaries were accustomed to give instruction to the inmates, some of whom received the Gospel and were bap- tized. The last notice of this mission is in the Church Missionary Piecord for May, 1853, in which the missionaries say, " There are no great achievements to tell of — no brilliant successes to call forth acclamations. Our pages contain nought but the record of humble, patient and persevering labors, car- ried on amid much natural discouragement, but sustained by the gracious assurance that they who are called to do the work of the Lord shall find that their labor is not in vain." The native congregation at Bombay, at this period, numbered 56, of whom 22 were communicants. There was also a divinity class of four students, and a " Money Institution," so called, containing in the English department 230, and ia the Marathi department 175 pupils. The vernacular schools were eighteen in number, eight for- girls and ten for boys, the former containing 362 pupils, and the latter 630. At Nassuck there was one English school, containing 20. boys, four Marathi schools with 272 boys,, and one Hindostanee school with 16 pupils^ At Junin, cast of Bombay about 100 miles,, little had been done, the station having been occupied only a short time. The Sinde mis- sion was commenced as late as 1850, and presents no facts of importance. A com- plete summary of the, six stations of the Church of England mission in Western India, will be found in the statistical table. Calcutta and North India. — The Church Society's mission in Calcutta, was com- menced in 1816, by Rev. Mr. Jetter. Early attention was paid to schools, and to print- ing and circulating religious tracts. Success attended these labors, and in 1824 the num- ber of schools reported was 22, and the number of scholars 500, a large number of whom were females. Great interest was awakened on the subject of female education in India, and a "Ladies' Society" for this purpose was formed, under the patronage of Lady Amherst. At an examination of female schools in February, 1825, out of 323 girls, in eleven schools, 292 came together. They were examined in Watts' Catechism. and the New Testament, to the gratification and surprise of all present. The death of Bishop Heber, in 1827, was an afflictive event to the Calcutta mission. He had been in India but little more than two years, and in that short period had visited almost every station where a Chris- tian church could be assembled, performing not only the higher duties of his olUce, but 102 HINDOSTAN. the more humble and laboriou's duties of an ordinary pastor. He had thus become known to all his clergy and people, in the plains and mountains of Hindostan, in the wilder tracts of Central India, in the stations of Guzerat, the Deccan, and the "Western Coast, in the hills and valleys of Ceylon, and In the southern provinces of India, the scene of his last labors, and henceforth of his dearest memory." The Bishop on coming in from a laborious tour, in which he had confirmed a large number of persons, went to the bath as usual, and in a few moments was found dead beneath the water. The missions at Calcutta were not at any time conducted upon so liberal a scale as in some other places, and yet there is evidence of great fidelity on the part of the mission- aries and teachers, who from time to time were called to labor here. In the report for 1852, the number of native Christians under the missionaries in Calcutta and its neighbor- hood, was stated at 230. Services were held in the mission chapel, both in Bengali and Hindostanee, and preaching to the heathen was regularly kept up, in the vernacular languages, both at out-stations and in the public thoroughfares. Throughout the entire history of this mis- sion, schools of various grades and depart- ments have been maintained. In 1853 the boys' boarding school embraced 28 pupils, and a similar school for girls had 30 pupils. The vernacular schools connected with the mission had an average attendance of 660 boys. At an out-station a little distance from Calcutta, there was, at the above date, a boys' school containing 87 pupils, and also a school for girls with 25 pupils. These were taught not only in books, but in needle- work, cooking, &c. The English school con- tained 350 pupils. The native press in Calcutta has been con- ducted with much energy, though not en- tirely under missionary control. Rev. J. Long, who at the last accounts had a con- nection with this department, writes, " Cal- cutta sends out from native presses, annual- ly, not less than 30,000 volumes in Bengali. Among these are more than twelve news- papers and periodicals. Some forty native presses furnish a supply of intellectual food, much of which is anything but favorable to Christianity. Calcutta is, in this respect, a •very important sphere, and I have given to it as much time as I could spare." At a little earlier period Sir. Long gives a view of Calcutta as a missionary field, which is so comprehensive and satisfactory that parts of it may with propriety be qufted : " In the city is a population of at least 500,000, and within a radius of fifteen miles a population of more than 2,000,000. It is the centre of missionary operations from North ludia^the heart of Bengal. All translations of the Scriptures, rules for their circulating, the translation of tracts, the printing of Christian school books, the machinery of missions, — all are managed by committees in Calcutta, and chiefly by the extra labors of missionaries ; for were it not for the exertions of missionaries, all these committees would languish, or perhaps be- come defunct. Many benevolent European gentlemen in Calcutta, who are brought into connection with the missionaries, have their attention directed to certain branches of missionary work, which they support very liberally." '• Calcutta, as far as regards education, in some respects resembles Cambridge or Ox- ford. Thousands of youths come and lodge in Calcutta for the sole purpose of their edu- cation. Of my scholars — 150 in number — who study the Bible, Home's Evidences of Christianity, Milton, and Natural Philos- ophy, through the medium of the English language, four-fifths merely take lodgings in Calcutta, while their parents live fifty or a hundred miles in the country. Educational labors afibrd a great field here. There are more than 100,000 boys in Calcutta, of whom not more than 10,000 attend school. * * What a scene for missionary labors. Be- sides, it is generally admitted that Calcutta missionaries do twice as much work as those in the country. Their sphere of labor is near them ; they have not to exhaust their ph3'sical energies in traveling, &c. All the labor connected with translations, a native Christian literature, &c., is performed almost entirely by Calcutta missionaries ; and yet the Church Missionary Society has always been weak in Calcutta. The Scotch Mis sionary Society have five laborers, tho London Missionary Society five, the Baptist Missionary Society six, while our Society have only Mr. Sandys and myself I may be mistaken, but I have long been of opinion that Calcutta is the "Waterloo of India, — the depot where the grand battle between Christianity and Hindooisra will be fought. The English language is sweeping away as with the besom of destruction, any linger- ing attachment that may remain to Brah- minism, in the minds of youth, and now is the glorious era to control the storm, and direct the mental energies into the path of salvation." Since the above was written another mis- sionary, Mr. Bost, has arrived in Calcutta. In other respects Mr. Long's remarks apply to the present state of that mission. Benares. — This is a city of great import- ance, and is about 500 miles north-west of Calcutta. The mission here was commenced in 1817, by Rev. Messrs. Morris and Adling- ton, successively schoolmaster, catechist, and preacher ; but of their labors little is recorded. They were succeeded by other HINDOSTAN. 403 laborers, who remained but a short time, and for manjr years there was a great deficiency of systematic effort. Gradually however, a change took place, and for the last ten or fifteen years this has been one of the most important of the Church Society's missions in North India. The mission premises are situated about a mile and a, half sotith-east of the canton- ments, at a village called Sigra. The en- closure contains about five acres of ground. The situation is airy, healthy, and quiet, with three large and one small bungalows (houses), the former designed for the resi- dence of ordained missionaries, and the lat- ter for European schoolmasters. There is another building devoted to the use of Chris- tian orphan boys, who form a very interest- ing part of the mission ; and not far distant is the school establishment for the native girls. In the city of Benares, and connected with the mission, there is a large school for native boys, founded by a native, named Jai Nairain, who left at his death two bunga- lows, the rent of which should apply to its support, and also a large building to be used as a school house and residence. Govern- ment added a liberal monthly donation, and this has been one of the most important in- stitutions connected with the mission. It is called " Jai Nairain's College," and has at present about 500 students, which is as many as the building will accommodate. At the last dates, an enlargement of the prem- ises had been commenced. The Brahmin boys outnumber those of any other caste. The usual schools for boys and girls have been maintained for many years with in- creasing interest. A pleasing fact is men- tioned in the Record for November, 1853, by Mrs. Smith, teacher of the " heathen girls' school," viz. : that during the whole year the school had not been once closed on account of a heathen festival. She had told the girls that she desired their attendance on those days especially, that their minds might not be contaminated by the ceremonies practiced. The native Christian congregation at Benares numbers 314 individuals. The mis- sionaries, of whom there are five, devote much time to itinerating among the sur- rounding towns and villages, and they usually have no lack of hearers and dispu- ters. Birdwan. — At the close of the year 1816, the corresponding committee received a communication from Lieutenant Stewart, stationed at Birdwan, 40 miles above Cal- cutta, proposing an extensive plan of native schools at and near that place. This pro- posal was adopted, and in a short time ten schools were established, one at Birdwan, and the others in places not far distant. Within a year from their commencement there were 1,000 children in these schools, all taught in the Beiigalee language. The number of schools was subsequently in- creased, but disbanded again for the want of means to sustain so many. The present number is ten, and in the last report — 1853 — the missionary says, '" The number of heathen children who enjoy plain education, founded on the Christian religion, is about 500. In these schools you meet the proud Brahmin sitting at the side of, or below, the Sudra, in harmony and love, deriving the same instruction. The fear of having youths taught in mission schools has, in this neighborhood, almost passed away." Particular mention is made in the circular of the Board for October of last year, of the orphan girls' school, with 150 orphans, up- wards of 30 of whom had died while re- ceiving their education, some of them very happily. "This," says the teacher, Mrs. Weitbrecht, " has been one of the most pleasing and encouraging branches of our work in this mission, and has often sustained our spirits when all besides has been dark and trying." Krishnagur. — This station is a little to the north-west of Calcutta, and was commenced in 1831. The work was continued in the usual way, instruction being given in schools, chapels, and by the distribution of the Scriptures and tracts, till 1835, when a bit- ter persecution arose against a sect com- posed partly of Hindoos and partly of ^Mus- sulmans, called " Kurta Bhoja," worship- ers of the Creator. They worshiped one God, had nothing to do with idols, and be- lieved that God would come into the world in human form. They bore persecution with great patience, and the missionary, Mr. Deerr, on visiting them, was convinced of their sincerity, and was led to admire es- pecially the great love and affection which they bore one to another. In 1836, Mr. Deerr renewed his visit, and was received with increased cordiality. He established public worship among them, in which they united with much joy ; and upon this a more rigorous persecution commenced against them. They were treated as out of the pale of heathenism, their caste was gone, and their wives and children were taken from them, and only restored by an order from the magistrate. In 1838, the leading men in ten villages belonging to this sect, avowed their belief in the Gospel, and after instruction, were baptized into the Christian faitli. They straightway confessed Christ before the heathen, and established public worship in their villages. This crea- ted great excitement, and a still more violent opposition was the result. But the truth spread, the Christians were more in earnest, inquirers were multiplied, and the "Word of God prevailed. 404 HINDOSTAN. At the request of the Corresponding Com- mittee, the Bishop of Calcutta made a care- ful and thorough investigation into the facts, and made a written report, from which the following is extracted : "It appears that between fifty-five and sixty villages are thirsting for the waters of life, in a greater or less degree. They stretch to the north and north-east of Krishnagur to the distance of forty or fifty miles, and to the south-west fifteen or twenty. The numbers described as pre- pared for baptism, in various measures of course, is between 3,000 and 3,500. The Arch-Deacon assisted himself at the recep- tion of about 500 souls, including women and children, into the Christian Church, and there seems the fairest prospect, if we can but enter the wide and effectual door in time, that not only these three or four thou- sand, but the whole population of the fifty or sixty villages, may receive the Christian faith. Such a glorious scene has never before been presented to our longing eyes in Ben- gal ; and after making all deductions for overstatements, sanguine hopes, &c., it ap- pears that a mighty work of divine grace is begun, — a work wide and permanent, as we trust, — a work for which our fathers in India, Brown, Buchanan, Martyn, Thomason, and Bps. Corrie, Middleton, and Heber, would have blessed and praised God in the loudest strains of gratitude and joy." Archdeacon Dealtry, who visited the dis- trict, and made very diligent and patient in- vestigations as to the origin and history of the sect, says : " It appears that they have been about sixty years settled on the banks of Jelingha, (a branch of the Ganges). They called themselves ' Kurta Bhoja,' worshipers of the Creator. They had some connection with the sect of Dervishes, supposed to abound in Persia. They had a firm notion of one Supreme Being, rejected with abhor- rence all idolatry, held very slightly if at all by caste, and considered the test of prose- lytism, not eating, but praying to the one true God. They showed an acquaintance generally with the lost estate and sinful na- ture of man, with the incarnation and holy life of Christ, with the atonement, justifica- tion, and sanctification, in their substantial import, and with the necessity of following Christ's example. Jesus Christ was the be- ginning and end of their religion, and prayer to him was the test of discipleship. They had learnt the ten commandments, the Lord's Prayer, the Creed, and Dr. Watts' Catechism. It appeared further, as far as could be ascertained, that they were willing to forsake all for Christ, and endure what- ever persecutions might come upon them." The result was, that the Archdeacon said to the missionaries, " Can any forbid water. that these should not be baptized, who have received the Holy Ghost, in his sanctifying influences, as well as we ?" And upon their unanimous vote, baptism was administered to them in separate companies, and from village to village, to the number of over 1,000. In 1841, the Bishop of Calcutta vis- ited the Krishnagur district in person, and after surveying the villages and conversing with the Christians, he said, " I have not a word to retract on reading over my commu- nications of 1839. Time has only developed and confirmed the statements then made." In 1845, the Papists made an incursion into these Christian villages, under the lead of a Spanish Jesuit Priest, with a view to seduce to Popery the numerous converts from heathenism. They came with large chari- table funds, and secured an extensive piece of ground in the centre of the chief station, with a view to erect thereon a church, dwell- ing house, school, &c. "With much force and justice do the society, in their report, speak of the Church of Rome as " turning aside from the 130 millions of heathen in India, to address its labors to a few recent Christian converts who had been taught and fostered by the care of others, thus seeking to en- large its borders, according to its ancient character, foreshown in the word of God, through the apostasy of Christians rather than through the conversion of the hea- then." For a time the efforts of this Jesuit appeared successful, but after two years it is recorded, that "the priest who had in- truded upon our work and led astray many of our converts to his errors, has been ar- rested in his career, and has evidently failed of his designs. Most of his converts are very anxious to be re-admitted into our communion." Although there were many apostasies from time to time, of those who " did run well," yet a favorable account is given of the stability and Christian consistency of a large number of the professed converts, and in very few instances has there been a more signal display of the grace of God among the heathen, than at Krishnagur. In 1848 the missionaries say, " Seventeen years ago the name of Krishnagur first appeared in the records of our society, as an out-station to Birdwan. This was the first attempt of the missionary to disturb the unbroken heathen- ism of the district. Now, Mr. Cuthbert, one of the missionaries, reports missions and mission work as rooted and settled in the land as firmly as the English people are in India, and more so." Seven stations were occupied, substantial and durable churches, school houses and dwelling houses, had been built, neat and convenient cottages had sprung up in all the Christian villages, and the labors of the missionaries and school teachers were attended with the most grati- HINDOSTAN. 405 fying success. Were there space for it, it would be gratifying to present much more full details of the revival in this district, and of its results ; but the narrative must be closed, with a reference to the Church Mis- sionary Record for 1837, and onward, for a complete history of the work. Chunar. — This station is near Benares, far to the north-west of Calcutta, and its mis- sionary operations date a little earlier than those of I5enares. But it has seldom, if at any time, had more than one missionary, and less has been expended upon it than upon almost any other station of the Church Society, of so long continuance. The most recent report says, " This station cannot be continued much longer on the Society's list, being only occasionally visited by a mission- ary, and the native Christian flock consist- ing of persons connected with the canton- ment, and therefore properly belonging to the ministerial charge of the chaplain of the station." Mirut. — The first missionary to this sta- tion, which is about 32 miles north-east of Delhi, and near the Ganges, arrived in 1815. It was considered an important position, and for fifteen years or more the mission was conducted with ordinary zeal and suc- cess, though the number of laborers was never great. In 1842 the station was left without a missionary, only the Government chaplain being on the ground. In his appeal for help, he says, " There is still a native flock of 32 Christians, without a pastor, and altogether depending on the care of a native reader. The widowed state of the mission is a constant source of grief to the local committee." At the same time the Bishop of Calcutta speaks of this mission as one of the oldest in that part of India, and now in danger of becoming entirely extinct — a mis- sion with all the heavy external apparatus complete — a mission which possesses a mis- sion residence, with alms-houses for native Christians when destitute — a mission in one of the largest stations, and most healthy, in all India, and where almost unlimited funds might be raised if it were vigorously sus- tained. In 1846, after four years' suspen- sion of operations, a missionary. Rev. Mr. Lamb, was provided for this station, and its prospects brightened. During the four years preceding 1850, eleven adults were baptized, and have given satisfactory evidence of sin- cerity. The latest account is contained in the Record for November, 1853, when the congregation of native worshipers num- bered 150, the English school contained about fifty hoys, houses had been built for widows, and the Christian village was ex- tending its limits. Mirui. is memorable as the place where the distinguished native catechist, Anuud Messeeh, was baptized, in 1810, and where he commenced those labors which have been of such signal service to the cause of missions in India. Delhi. — For several years Delhi was the seat of an interesting mission, chiefly under the care of Anund Messeeh, the distin- guished native catechist and reader. He had been for some time a teacher at Mirut, not far distant, and his first visit to Delhi after his conversion appears to have been in 1818, his wife, a .brother and two sisters being there, and some hope of their conver- sion being entertained. While there a re- port was in circulation, that a number of strangers from several villages to the west of Delhi had assembled together, nobody knew why, in a place near the imperial city, and were busily employed in friendly con- versation, and in reading some books in their possession, which induced them to re- nounce their caste, to bind themselves to love and to associate with' one another, and intermarry only among their own sect, and to lead a strict and holy life. Anund imme- diately set off for the place of rendezvous, and found about 500 people, men, women, and children, seated under the shade of the trees, and employed in reading and conver- sation. On further inquiry it turned out that these people belonged to a sect of na- tive Christians, called Saadhs, and that the book they had was the New Testament. Many copies of it were in the possession of the party, some printed, in the Hindostanee tongue, and some written. They professed great love for this book, called it the book of God, and said that the written copies they wrote themselves, having no other means of obtaining a supply. Subsequent investigations led to the discovery, that these poor strangers had existed as a dis- tinct sect for 5 or 6 years, having separated themselves from the authority and control of the Brahmins, both in temporal and spiritual things, being disgusted by their tyranny and extortion, as well as determined to exercise their own judgment more freely in matters of religion. Before this general secession of the Saadhs, the Brahmins, it is said, had hated them, and subjected them to such exorbitant exactions as to cause general misery and discontent. When once the leaven of their discontent began to work, their numbers increased daily, and their tenets continued to spread. The particular tract of country occupied by the Saadhs, lay to the north-west and west of Delhi, some fifty miles. They had five villages, in one of which was found ten copies of the Gospel, which they accounted more precious than gold, and would give any tiling for a larger supply. In his tour among these villages, Annnd Messeeh was received with great reverence, and would have been almost worshiped had he not rebuked such a tendency. At the 406 HINDOSTAN. principal village, the people gathered to- gether every night, for worship, each pray- ing extemporaneously, and blessing and praising the one true God for all his mercies. It was with particular reference to the care and instruction of these people, that Messeeh, about this time, was stationed at Delhi, for there the Saadhs could visit him, and he in turn could visit them at their houses, so that they would be sure of religi- ous instruction. It is supposed that the copies of the Gospel in their possession were those distributed by a missionarjr, Mr. Chamberlain, while on an exploring tour in that quarter. Favorable accounts continued to be received of Anund's labors, until 1827, when he was removed from Delhi to another station, and subsequently to this the intelli- gence respecting the Saadhs is very imper- fect. A full account of them may bo seen in the Missionary Register, for 1818, pp. 17, and 203. Agra. — Incipient missionary labors appear to have been commenced at Agra, some 50 miles south of Delhi, as early as 1815. The mission was for some time under the care of the Rev. Mr. Corrie, chaplain at this station, assisted by a native Christian, Abdool Mes- seeh, whose character and labors are spoken of in terms of high commendation. An in- stitution for orphan children was an object of special care at this place, and in the calamitous famine of 1838, when 300 chil- dren were preserved from starvation by the benevolence of the Christian public, these children were all received by tiie committee of the Orphan Institution, and provided with a home and suitable instruction. Agra has been provided with schools of various grades, and with missionaries, so as to render it one of the most efficient and important of the Church Society in northern India. A new building for the high school, or college, had been completed, in 1853. and 200 boys were under instruction in this institution. This mission has had the advantage of a printing press, and many of the orphan boys have labored in connection with it so as to provide for their own support. Jaunpore. — This was an extension of the Benares mission, effected in 1838. The mis- sionary was soon removed, however, and for four years this station was without a mis- sionary. But the Record for November, 1853, says, " This station has once more a resident missionary, and a small Christian flock, numbering about 30 individuals." Gorruckpore. — This place, at a considerable distance north-west of Calcutta, was visited from Benares in 1823, and a mission was commenced which has been continued to the present time. It has now one missionary, two native congregations, a large English school, orphan schools, and a vernacular school Ehagulpur. — The mission at this place was commenced in 1S50, and at the last ac- counts there had been 41 baptisms. The •hill tribes around this mission are said to have no caste, and no antiquated system of religion, and are regarded therefore as more likely to receive the Gospel freely and at once. Himalaya. — This mission was commenced in 1844. Its labors consisted for a time in the establishment of small village schools, and itinerating among the population of the mountains, but it became a very important mission, and is still so regarded. Being in the mountain regions in the north of Hindo- stan, and among a people little known before, some notice of their character, religion, &c., may be expected. The principal station of the mission is Kot-gurh, situated 7,000 feet above the level of the sea, and 100 miles from the plains of India. It is the key of central Asia, and the granary of all the countries to the north and east. The missionary. Rev. J. D. Prochnow, describes the country, the influence of the Sikh war, and the various means bj' which this vast field had been opened to mission- ary labor ; and then proceeds to give a de- scription of the people themselves. They consist of three classes : " First, the Hill people, who afe all Hin- doos, though their ways of living and of worship are very different from those of the plains. In their rites, they bear a great re- semblance to the Jews of old. They carry their Deotas — wooden chairs dressed up, with human faces fixed to them — on their shoulders, and dance before them in a pecu- liar manner, as the Jews of old before the ark. In their music, their observances of the new moon, fasting, and many other things, they also resemljle the Jews ; but more than any thing else, in their sacrifices to atone the wrath of the Deota, viz. : the sprinkling of blood on the posts and doors of the temple and houses. All this shows that the hill tribes of the Himalaya~'mission at Kot-gurh, are far from being in a savage and entirely uncivilized state. They under- stand all the terms of our religion. I never found the least difliculty in making them, even the women, understand the great truths of the Gospel, if only brought before them in simple language. To the Hindoo moun- tj^ineers, as we have been without assistance, our labors have hitherto been chiefly con- fined." " The second class are the wandering Tar- tars, or the Budhist mountaineers of the higher hills. These people are very peculiar every way, in their habits, religion, language, &c. They come down from the high table- lands by thousands, to spend the winter months in the valleys, all divided into small families, bringing their sheep and goats along HINDOSTAN. 407 with them, together with the produce of their country, — raisins, borax, wool, dried apricots, silk, precious stones, &c. These they dispose of during the winter months, feeding their flocks in the valleys of the rivers, for they would find no food for them in their own country at this season ; and in May all these families move again towards their native hills, with their bags filled with grain. So they avoid the rainy season of the lower hills, and enjoy the fine summer of the higher hills. These wandering tribes alone form a very interesting field of labor. Their religion is Budhism, and there are plenty of monks and nuns among them." " The third class is the Sikhs. They are all of one caste, and are readily influenced by the preaching of the missionaries. Those of them who have been converted to Chris- tianity at Caunpore and Benares are very highly spoken of, as being far superior to the Hindoo converts." As to the success of this mission, Mr. Procknow says, " I must confess with deep humiliation, visible fruits have been few ; but considering all the difficulties which have beset us from our very first beginning until now, I am by no means discouraged. The seed has fallen into good ground ; it will spring up in God's own time." The greatest difBculty in the way of giving success to this, and many other new and important missions, the committee sa}', is the " pau- city of missionary laborers." The Punjaub. — The mission to the Pun- jaub was commenced in 1852, and has two missionaries, assisted by three native cate- chists and readers. Portions of Scripture, books and tracts, in Punjaub, Urdu, and Hindi, have been put into circulation. A school has been commenced, with 50 scholars, half of whom are Sikhs, and the rest Hindoos and Mussulmans. For a fuller account of the Punjaub mission, see Mission- ary Intelligencer for May and November, 1852. TABULAR VIEW. NAMES OF DISTEICTS 9 B n c 3 c Clergy- men. o 1 SI 3 St • 2i f 1 9 W p 13 1 i CD s. o d 1 § OE PEINCIPAL STATIONS, 1853. O m W D SI U ^ H o i 03 O i > a o E g. a 1 .§ p i i g 3 p a' 1 1 B 1 9 o. o Calcutta District, 1816 3 4 1 46 4 65 133 12 42 64 18 613 55 10 1400 1978 Bardwan District, 1817 1 2 17 3 22 47 4 29 33 10 513 50 60 623 Krishnagur District, 1831 8 8 1 1 2 93 8 113 403 6 189 196 49 1759 382 30 40 2181 j^ Bhagulpur, 1850 1 1 1 2 6 19 85 14 49 4 150 28 178 p Benares, 1817 1 6 3 1 34 4 48 96 6 14 20 8 541 60 7 200 808 M Jaunpore, 1831 1 1 1 17 1 20 12 4 6 6 396 11 21 428 ■$' Gorruckpore, 1823 2 1 1 8 10 34 1 10 11 4 265 24 289 Agra, 1813 2 2 4 1 27 2 36 168 2 48 50 10 466 28 27 509 1 Mi rut. 1815 1 2 9 11 55 15 10 25 3 6 92 98 Himalaya, 1844 1 2 6 8 4 71 15 86 Punjaub, 1852 1 2 2 .At Home, 2 2 •S ■ Bombay, 1820 1 3 2 1 17 23 22 1 1 20 1219 214 1483 '3 Nasik, 1832 1 1 2 1 4 12 4 4 e 307 16 823 M ■ Junir and Malligaum, Sinde Mission, 1846 1850 2 1 2 2 2 5 4 3 14 8 8 16 6 168 19 18T ^ At Home, 1 72 72 d Madras, 1815 1 2 2 3 2 13 10 32 209 9 17 26 12 264 276 640 'S Tinnevelly Districts, 1817 1211 1 7 6 4 412 81 522 3357 519 876 1394 286 6203 2758 7963 c . Travancore Dietricta, 1816 6| 8 2 3 116 6 136 1256 185 195 380 76 1776 433 2208 >— 1 Telooeoo, 1841 1 4 2 16 7 29 18 2 8 10 4 113 56 169 OQ ^ At Home, 47 64 6 13 22 14 839 127 1094 5815 809 1363 2272 626 4339 67 ■ Totals, 13776 17873 SoOIETV FOR THE PROPAGATION OF THE Gospel. — This society commenced its ope- rations in Hindostan in 1818, not long after the arrival of Bishop Middleton, the first bishop of Calcutta. He was at this time de- vising a plan for the foundation at Calcutta of a missionary college, but as the Society's funds were pledged to already existing mis- sions in the western world, no resource was left except in vigorous efibrts for the aug- mentation of its income. Accordingly a memorial was presented to the Prince Re- gent, praying that a royal letter, authorizing a general collection, might, as in former reigns, be issued ; and an appeal was made to the public for the means of entering upon that new sphere of labor which the estab- lishment of the Episcopate in India had opened. Bishop's College. — The first great work, therefore, to which the Society, under the advice of the Bishop, gave itself in India, was the foundation of a Missionary College near Calcutta. To this the proceeds of i08 HINDOSTAN. the roj^al letter of 1819, amounting alto- gether to £45,747, were devoted. The col- lege was designed on a scale to meet not merely the present wants of the missions, ,jut such as would be required by a growing church. The plan combined chapel, hall, library, and printing-press ; and the estab- lishment was meant to afford instruction, not only in the sacred and classical languages, but also in the principal languages and dia- lects of India. Accommodation was to be provided for three professors and twenty students. A most eligible site, about four miles below Calcutta, and on the opposite side of the Hoogle}'', was presented by the Honorable East India Company. The original object of the college was the education of native. East Indian, and Euro- pean youth, for the service of the church ; but the college was some years afterwards enlarged for the reception of law students. Another purpose was the translation of the Holy Scriptures and of the Liturgy into the native languages of India. The Kev. W. H. Mill, fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, was appointed the first Principal, and em- barked, in company with Rev. J. H. Alt, of Pembrolve Hall, as Professor, in August, 1820. It was a considerable time, however, before the necessary buildings were com- pleted ; and the actual work of education did not commence till March, 1824, which was after the death of Bishop Middleton, to whom the College owed its foundation, and who had done much more than provide for the erection of the material fabric. He had suggested that a connection should be estab- lished between Bishop's College and the "School for the Orphans of Clergy," in St. John's Wood, which might generally be looked to as a nursery of lads who might afterwards be transplanted to Calcutta, and be there educated for the same ministry as that in which their fathers had served, though it was to be exercised in a far dis- tant land. This suggestion, which met with the cordial and unanimous approval of the Societjr, received also the approbation of the governors of the Clergy Orphan School. Three boys were, with the full consent of their guardians, at once dedicated to the missionary Service. This connection, how- ever, between the Orphan School and the College, was not long continued. As soon as the college began to send out its alumni, missions were established in some of the more important villages to the south of Calcutta. The first ones formed were at Cossipore, Tallygunge, Howrah, and Barri- pilr ; and no sooner had the laborers entered into the harvest than fruit was gathered in. Each year's report contains the account of many baptisms of infants, and not a few conversions of adults. Substantial stone churches, which had been erected at great cost, at Barripur and Mogra Hit, were con- secrated toward the end of 1846 ; and at the same time eighty persons from those two districts were admitted to the rite of con- firmation. The last report which has been received from Calcutta contains the follow- ing gratifying notices : " In the missions of Tallygunge and Barripur the converts con- tinue stedfast, and numerous accessions to the household of faith are taking place, but have ceased to attract persecution or obtain notice." In the circle of Mogra Hclt and Dhanghatta, the congregations have contin- ued steadily to increase, and other adjoining hamlets now contain believers. The mis- sions extend over an area of forty miles north to south, by from twelve to twenty miles east to west. In the summer of 1850, they embraced 113 villages, 26 chapels, 7 schools, 55 readers and schoolmasters, l,l27 communicants, 2459 baptized persons, and 1,215 catechumens. Cawnpore. — The mission of Cawnpore, a large city about 600 miles north-west from Calcutta, with a population of 100,000, and an important military post, was established in 1841. In 1845 the Society, in compliance with the earnest recommendations of the Bishop of Calcutta, voted the sum of £700 for the erection of substantial missionary buildings. The two first missionaries. Rev. Messrs. Perkins and Schleicher, are still on the ground, and besides the ordinary duties of preaching they superintend a school for boys, and an asylum for orphan girls, which has been the means of training several Chris- tian girls for the duties of life, and preparing others to meet an early death. Madras. — -The missions in the south of India, which had originally been founded by Frederic IV., King of Denmark, in 1705, and which had afterwards passed into the hands of the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, were by them consigned to the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel, in 1825. (See p. 328). There were then in the Madias presidency, in connection with that society, only nine missionary stations and seven missionaries — all of them German. The interruption and discouragement of missionary work occasioned by the death, in quick succession, of four bishops of Cal cutta,— Middleton in 1822, Heber in 1826, James in 1829, and Turner in 1831,— tended grievously to retard the progress of the So- ciety's operations in India, and tliough dur ing this period name after name was added to the missionary roll, no remarkable ad- vance was made till after the subdivision of the diocese of Calcutta, by the erection of the See of Madras, in 1835. Even up to that time, the number of missionaries in that part of India had not been raised be- yond nine ; but in 1836 four were added ; and in the following year the total number HINDOSTAN. 409 was sixteen. Bishop Corrie was removed by death, only a little more than a year after his return to Madras as bishop, and again the active direction of the missions of South- ern India was suspended. Since that period, however, they have been abundantly blessed, more especially those in the district of Tin- nevelly. This district had, for missionary purposes, been for a long time dependent on the mission of Tanjore, and all the missions in the South had for manj' years been sus- tained by the interest of the munificent legacy of £10,000, which the devoted Swartz had bequeathed to them. Tinnevelly. — The first resident missionary for Tinnevelly was appointed in 1829 ; a second was sent in 183-1 ; and a third in 1843. It was in the next year, 1844, that the very remarkable movement towards Christianity took place in the mission of Sawyerpuram. Many villages expressed their desire of Christian instruction, and many hundred natives were at once admitted as catechumens. Another mission in which wonderful pro- gress has been made of late years, is Edeyen- koody. For two or three years little appears to have been effected, but from 1844 ' to the present time, the progress of the work has been very observable. The number of per- sons under Christian instruction is 2,054. From 1844 to 1849 inclusive, twenty adults, on an average, were baptized each year. During the year 1850, though the same strict system of examination was maintained. 75 adults were admitted to baptism, of whom 70 were baptized in one day, in the presence of a congregation of 800 native Christians. Another mission,Christianagram,was open- ed about the same time as Sawyerpuram, and in 1849 there were 1,579 persons under Christian instruction. The mission of Nazareth has also been a very flourishing one. At the beginning of 1850. there were 2,292 baptized persons, and 1,563 more under Christian instruction. Much has been done of late to raise the qualifications and increase the efiiciency of the cateohists and native readers. The sem- inaries at Sawyerpuram, Vediapuram, and Vepery, serve for the education of mission- aries, while a school for the boarding and education of native girls has forty-four pupils under instruction. A seminary for theolo- gical students, and such as may be candi- dates for the oflBce of catechist, has been formed at Madras. Bombay. — In the year 1839, a mission was commenced in Bombay, and a substantial chapel and school-houses were erected. — Bach school comprised one department for day scholars and one for boarders. The lat- ter has been made the means of rescuing many orphan and other poor children from destitution. Guzerat. — The mission in the provmoe of Guzerat was first established in 1830, but it met with a sad check in the early death of its first mission-ary. Rev. Mr. Pettinger. Years elapsed before his place was filled, but at length two missionaries were sent to Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat. But subsequent removals weakened the mission, and in 1850 it was transferred to the Bom- bay Diocesan Committee. English Baptist Missionaky Society. — (For an account of the origin of this Society and of its mission to India, see Baptist Mis- sionary fiociety.) In March, 1793, Messrs. Carey and Thomas attended a farewell service of great solemnity at Leicester, and soon afterwards proceeded to Hyde, in the Isle of Wight, and embarked on board a ship for India. The Captain, however, was informed that he must not proceed with ministers who were unlicensed by the East India Company, and he returned to the shore. Mr. Carey hastened to London in the deepest distress, and even Andrew Fuller quailed at the news, and said, "We are all undone." Mr. Thomas was more hopeful and cheerful. The inter- val before the sailing of another vessel was employed in renewed efforts to persuade Mrs. Carey to accompany her husband (she having steadily refused,) and with success. This joyful result indicated to Mr. Carey the design of Providence in their disappoint- ment. In June, 1793, they all embarked in the Kron Princessa Maria, a Danish East India- man, and on the morning of sailing one of them addressed a London minister, saying, " The ship is come, the signal made, the guns are fired, and we are going with a fine fair wind. Farewell, my dear brethren and sis- ters, farewell. May the God of Jacob be ours and yours, by sea and land, for time and eternity. Most affectionately adieu." They had a prosperous voyage of about five months, and arrived in Balasore roads on the 7th of November, and on the 10th went on shore. After the arrival of the missionaries in Bengal, they were much perplexed respecting a place of residence, and after three weeks they proceeded to Bandell, a Portuguese set- tlement about thirty miles from Calcutta. Not finding it expedient to remain long here. Mr. Carey, with only his own family and a native guide, removed to a considerable dis- tance into the interior, and found a resting place and a field of labor at Collahtullah. Here he erected an humble dwelling, and en- tered upon the work of teaching a wild and fierce people, from whom, and from the tigers and other wild animals that roamed through those forests, the rest of the population had fled to a distance. But this proved to be but a temporary field, for another call, which to the mind of Mr. Carey was imperative, 410 HINDOSTAN. invited him to a place called Mudnabatty. about 260 miles north of Calcutta. Owing to unavoidable causes, the investment of money taken out for Mr. Carey's immediate support was lost, and he was left in a strange land with no means of subsistence : added to this was personal illness, the sickness of his family, and the irreligion of the Euro- peans by whom he was surrounded, all which pressed heavily upon his spirits. In this condition, early in 1794, a gentleman who afterwards filled some of the most important stations in the government of India, offered to Messrs. Carey and Thomas the superin- tendence of two indigo factories, which he was about to establish in the vicinity of Malda. This opened the way for the remO' val of all pecuniary difficulties, and also promised the most beneficial results by pla- cing each of the missionaries in the midst of more than a, thousand people to whom they would have access. They therefore ac- cepted the proposal, and Mr. Carey fixed his residence at Mudnabatty, about thirty miles from Malda, and Mr. Thomas settled at Moy- pauldiggy, sixteen miles further north. Soon after reaching his new home Mr. Carey was visited with afliiction, in the death of one of his children. Of this event Mr. (!arey writes, January, 1795 : "When my dear boy died, I could not prevail upon any one to make him a cofiin, though we had carpenters in our own employ : and it was with ditfl- culty that I engaged four Mussulmen to dig a grave for him. We went seven or eight miles for two persons to carry the body to the place of interment, but in vain, and my wife and I had agreed to do it ourselves, when a lad who had lost caste, and our mater (ser- vant), who performed the most servile offices, were induced to relieve us of this most pain- ful service." The four Mussulmen lost caste, and all the people in the village were forbid- den to eat, drink, or smoke with them. On the 1st of November, 1795, the mis- sionaries formed a church at Mudnabatty, consisting of themselves and two English- men. In 1796, Mr. John Fountain was sent out to reinforce the mission. In the early part of 1797, Messrs. Carey and Thomas made an excursion to Bootan, preaching Christ in many places where his name had never before been heard. During the year 1798 a school was established, and a printing- press was set up at Mudnabatty for the print- ing of the Scriptures, the translation of which was nearly completed. In April, 1799, four missionaries, Messrs. Ward, Brunsdon, Grant, and Marshman, sailed for India, where they arrived on the 12th of the following October. They pro- ceeded to Serampore, a village on the banks of the Hoogly, fifteen miles from Calcutta, described by Mr. Grant as "a beautifullittle town, and esteemed the most healthy in all India." It was a Danish settlement, and very much the resort of decayed tradesmen, and gentlemen who had been unsuccessful in business at Calcutta. It contained about 50 English houses, and was inhabited by Danes, English, Scots, Germans, Greeks, Armenians, Irish, Bengalees, and Portuguese. They waited at an inn a few days, expecting the arrival of Mr. Carey, when one of their num- ber, Mr. Grant, suddenly sickened and died. In November, Messrs. Ward and Fountain went to Mudnabatty, to consult with Mr. Carey respecting the removal of the whole mission family to Serampore. The factory at Mudnabatty had declined, and added to this were other considerations of great force, and the removal was determined upon. Mr. Carey arrived at Serampore on the 10th of January, 1800, and was kindly re- ceived by the Governor. They purchased a large house in the middle of the town, situ- ated by the river side, with a large piece of ground walled round, a garden at the bottom and a pool of water in the centre. On the 17th of March, 1800, is recorded at Serampore: "On this memorable day, the first page of the New Testament was com- posed for printing in Bengalee." Immediate- ly upon their settlement at this place, they commenced a system of itineracy, and going out, generally two and two, they preached and held discussions with the natives. On the 24th of April, the missionaries united together as a church, Carey being chosen pastor, and Fountain and Marshman deacons. May 26, they began to print the first sheet of the New Testament; 1700 copies were printed on Patna paper, and 300 on English. A Bengalese school of 40 children was also in operation. In June, this missionary circle were called to a severe affliction in the death of Mr. Fountain. He died at Dinagepore, at the age of thirty-three. About the same time Mr. Thomas fell into a state of temporary insanity, which deprived the mission for a time of his services. On the 22d of Decem- ber, five individuals, four natives and a son of Mr. Carey, appeared for baptism and church communion, and on the 29th Mr. Carey writes, "Yesterday was a day of great joy. I had the happiness to desecrate the Gunga, by baptizing the first Hindoo, Krish- no, and my son Felix." In January, 1801, two other natives were baptized and received to the church. The 7th of February was observed as a day of thanksgiving, it being the day on which they finished the composi- tion of the New Testament, which had occu- pied nine months. About this time, Krishno, self-moved, erected a house for God opposite his own, and Mr. Carey preached in it to about twenty natives. This was the first native place of worship* in Bengal. In the spring of this year, Serampore, HINDGSTAN. 411 which had been under the Danish goTern- ment, quietly passed into the hands of the BnglisVi, without the firing of a gun. Mr. Carey writes, '•Seramporc is in the hands of the English, but we have nothing to fear. I was appointed Bengalee and Sanscrit pro- fessor in the college of Port William, by Lord Wellesley, expressly under the char- acter of a missionary. I have now gone through one term." The year 1801 was mournfully distinguished by the death of two more of the missionaries — Mr. Bruns- don, at the age of 23, and Mr. Thomas, the early coadjutor of Carey. In May, 1802, Rev. John Chamberlain sailed for India, with his wife, by way of America, and reached Serampore on the 27th of January, 1803. He added great strength to the mission, both by his pious zeal and his learning. His progress in ac- quiring the language was so rapid, that in one year he could speak the Bengalee with a facility and accuracy that equaled any of his cotemporaries. The English Baptist Mission in India is now brought down to the early part of 1804, a period of ten years from its commence- ment. During this time, amid many changes, sorrows, and discouragements, the missiona- ries had penetrated the regions of idolatry, and gained a footing for the Gospel by the breaking of caste ; they had obtained a vic- tory almost as great over the language, and had produced the New Testament in Ben- galee ; they had estabUshed a printing-press, by which the translations were capable of in definite multiplication, and by means of which, also, tracts or other works could be put into the most extensive circulation ; they had secured the conversion of many natives, some of whom were becoming valuable helpers in the difiu sion of the Gospel ; they had opened schools for native youth of both sexes ; and finally, they had, by their letters and journals, given a powerful impulse to the spirit of missions at home. In view of these results, and the fact, also, that this mission was prior to any other, either English or American, in India, it will be admitted that a degree of success had been realized far beyond what could have been reasonably anticipated. On the 9th of January, 1804, Mr. Cham- berlain left Serampore to visit Saugur Island, whither thousands were daily flocking to their annual poojah, or festival. He was ac- companied in this important journey by Fe- lix Carey, Krishno, and another convert named Bhyrub. Some details in regard to the island in question will shed light both upon the shocking and degrading customs of the Hindoos, and upon the obstacles which the Gospel had to encounter in that quarter. The island of Gunga Saugur is situated at the extreme point of land where the great western, or holiest branch of the Ganges unites its waters with those of the Indian Ocean; and is so called from the Sanscrit appellation sagor, or sea, and ganga, or river, the latter term being emphatically applied to denote the Ganges, the chief of rivers. The island is a flat, sframpy, and cheerless shore, but it is the scene of one of the most celebrated places of pilgrimage in India. Its peculiar sanctity arises from its situation at the junction, or point of confluence of the Ganges and the ocean, where the purifying virtue of the waters is believed to be mightily increased. Here there is a ruin- ous temple, erected in honor of the great sage of Kapila, the founder of one of the chief schools of Indian philosophy, who is here reverenced as a god. Twice in the year, vast crowds of Hindoos resort to this temple and neighborhood, to perform obse- quies for the good of their deceased ances- tors, and to practice various ablutions in tha waters of such efiicacy. "The reverence with which the Ganges is regarded," says Dr. Duff, "almost exceeds imagination. At the January festival at Gunga Saugur, hun- dreds of mothers were accustomed to throw their unconscious infants into the turbid waters; and they bewailed the sacrifice as lost and the gods unpropitiated, if they com- missioned not the sharks and other monsters of the deep to crush and devour them before their eves." Mr. Chamberlain says, Jan. 13th, 1804, " Words fail to give a true de- scription of this scene. Here an immensely populous city has been raised in a very few days, full of streets, lanes, bazaars, &c., and crowds upon crowds of men, women, and children, high and low, rich and poor, are seen bathing in the water, and worshiping Gunga. The mud and water of this place are esteemed very holy, and are taken hun- dreds of miles on the shoulders of men. The lowest computation of the people here is one lac, or 100,000, and perhaps two lacs is nearer the truth." To these deluded mul- titudes Mr. Chamberlain preached the Gos- pel, and gave books and tracts as opportuni- ties occurred. In the spring of this year Mr. Chamber- lain was stationed at Cutwa, seventy-five miles north of Calcutta. His wife was his only companion in this dark region, and of her he was bereaved in the following No- vember. Fourteen months later he married Mrs. Grant, widow of that lamented mis- sionary. But she also died in a few months, and he was left to mourn under a second be- reavement. But notwithstanding his trials, he pursued his work with unremitting dili- gence. In reviewing his labors, Mr. Cham- berlain says, "It is now five years since Providence fixed my lot here. What can I write of the works of God 1 Milhons of the heathen have heard the glorious report, 412 HINDOSTAN. either from preaching, or from the distribu tion of upwards of one hundred thousand tracts, and many hundreds of the Scrip- tures. Some read the Scriptures, some the tracts, many converse on these things. The leaven is at work, though as yet its opera tions are in silence. At present converts are few." Amid all his other labors Mr. Chamberlain kept an occasional school of about 40 scholars, for whose benefit he had translated Dr. Watts's Catechism and a few hymns. He also made several visits to Ber- hampore, a military station 45 miles from Cutwa, preaching the Gospel to the soldiers ■with so much success that he gathered a church there of twenty-four members. In September, 1809, Mr. Chamberlain was married to his third wife. Miss Underwood, with whom he had been acquainted in Eng- land, and who was one of the first to direct his mind to the missionary service. About this time, by advice of his brethren, he re moved to Agra. On account of his facility in acquiring languages, his acquaintance with the original Scriptures, especially the He- brew, and his tried zeal and experience in the missionary work, they considered him as exceedingly suited to engag-e in a mission where at least two versions of the Scriptures, the Hindoo and the Sikh, would require to be carefully examined and improved. During the five years through which we have followed Mr. Chamberlain, the brethren had been steadily pursuing their work at Serampore and other places. In the early part of 1805, four additional missionaries from England arrived in Bengal, having sailed by way of America. In January of this year a new place of worship was opened at Calcutta, 4,800 rupees having been con- tributed for the purpose. In June following they built a new printing office, with room for three presses and a bindery. During this year fifteen natives were added to the church, and some Europeans. Some idea may be formed of the labors of the indefa- tigable Carey, from a letter of his to a friend in England, in which he says, " You may perhaps wonder that I write no more letters, but when you see what I am engaged in you will cease to wonder. I translate into Bengalee ; and from Sanscrit into Eng- lish. Every proof sheet of the Bengalee and Mahratta Scriptures, the Sanscrit Gram- mar, and the Ramayunee, must go three times at least through my hands. A dic- tionary of the Sanscrit goes once, at least, through my hands. I have written and printed a second edition of my Bengalee grammar, wholly worked over and greatly enlarged, and a Mahratta grammar ; and collected materials for a Mahratta dictionary. Besides this, I preach twice a week, fre- quently thrice, and attend upon collegiate duties. I do cot mention this because I think my work a burthen, — it is a real plea- sure, — but to show that my not writing many letters is not because I neglect my brethren, or wish them to cease writing to me." In the missionary journals of this period particular mention is made of the death of two native converts of distinction, — Petum- ber Shingee, and Krishno Presaud ; and deeply interesting obituary notices are given. In 1806, and onward for two or three years, the missionaries experienced severe trials from the opposition of the Indo- British government, which was determined to conciliate the Hindoos by protecting their idolatrous forms of worship against all inter- ference from the missionaries. Prejudiced and infidel Europeans circulated the most false and injurious reports, and kindled in Britain the fire of hatred to the missionary enter- prise, on the ground that it was fraught with danger to their eastern possessions. Rev. Andrew Fuller was at once looked to as the most suitable person, from his station, talent, and familiarity with the subject, to repel these assaults, and with characteristic zeal and power he met the exigency. His first production was "An Apology for the late Christian Missions to India, in three parts." The first section was issued separately in 1807, and so nearly did its work that the court at the India House dismissed the com- plaints, and refused to interfere with the propagation of Christianity in India. The two other sections followed in quick succes- sion, and so thoroughly silenced the adver- saries of missions, that no effective opposi- tion was ever afterwards made. The Quar- terly Review, in this controversy, rendered valuable assistance to the missionary cause. At the close of 1809, Mr. Ward remarks, in a review of the mission, " that from the year 1788, when Thomas began to converse with the natives in Bengalee, to the end of 1800, when Krishno was baptized, the work of God in Bengal made but little apparent progress. Much preparatory work, how- ever, was performed; but from the time when this, the first native who had ever publicly renounced caste in Bengal, entered the church, the word of the Lord seemed to have a more free course, and was glorified. The church at Serampore had now received 190 members, by the various modes of ad- mission, in its two branches of Serampore and Calcutta. The number baptized in all the churches in 1809, amounted to sixty- seven; two or three only having been sus- pended or excluded. The cost of the chapel at Calcutta, amounting to about 30,000 rupees, was nearly paid ; several na- tive itinerants had been sent forth, and a valuable mission property had been created. Besides the labors of brethren at Outwa, Berhampore, &c., a door of entrance had HINDOSTAN. 413 been opened in Burmah, and important pre- paratory measures undertaken." The state of the translations at this date — 1809 — is given by Mr. "Ward as follows : "In Bengalee, the whole Bible was printed and published in five volumes. In Sanscrit, the New Testament was published, and part of the Pentateuch printed. In Orissa, the New Testament and the practical books were printed and published, and a consider- able part of the prophetical books printed. In liindostanee, the New Testament was printed to the end of Romans. In Mahrat- ta, the New Testament was finished as far as the middle of Acts. In the Sikh language, the New Testament was put to press. Be- sides the progress at press, the greater part of the whole Bible was translated into Hin- dostanee, the New Testament and part of the Pentateuch into the Sikh, the New Tes- tament and nearly all the practical books into the Mahratta ; the New Testament and part of the Pentateuch into the Kurnata and Telinga ; and the blocks for nearly the whole of Matthew were cut and some sheets of the first part thrown off for revision, in Chinese." '' Thus," continues Mr. Ward, "mountains of difficulty, common to first efforts, have been removed ; formidable at- tempts to overturn the work have been rendered abortive ; facilities of the most im- portant nature opened to us ; a number of persons acquainted with the languages have been raised up, and are at their posts ; ac- cess to the people of Bengal, Bootan, Orissa, Burmah, and China, obtained by a knowl- edge of their languages ; the Holy Scrip- tures are distributing or are to be distributed among all these, and other nation«, in their own tongue ; the printing office belonging to the mission contains Sanscrit, Hindostanee, Arabic, Persian, Bengalee, Orissa, Telinga, Sikh, Mahratta, Greek, Hebrew, and Eng- lish types, besides presses, and every other article necessary for printing the sacred vol ume. And now, brethren, has not God completely refuted the notion that all at- tempts to promote the Gospel among the Hindoos are vain ? This happy degree of success, which surprises even us who are on the ground, has been gained within the space of nine years, for it is no more since the baptism of the first Hindoo." In 1810 the missionaries arranged their labors under the specific designation of " The United Missionaries in India," com- prehending the Bengal, the Burman, the Orissa, the Bootan, and the Ilindostan, This afforded a convenient method of keep- ing in distinct view the information they com- municated respecting their diversified opera- tions. The Bengal mission included five stations, Serampore and Calcutta being considered one, Uinagepore and Saddamahl another, Goamalty the third, Cutwa the fourth, and Jessore the fifth. Dinagepore is about 2C0 miles north of Calcutta ; Cutwa 75 miles north north-west ; and Jessore, 60 miles north ; oamalty was soon abandoned for a more eligible station, called English-bazar, in the Poornij'a district. The Burman mission had not yet made any considerable advances, the labors being of a preparatory kind. The same was true of the Orissa and Bootan missions. The Hindostanee mission consisted of two stations, Patna and Agra. The former is a large city, 300 miles north-west of Calcutta, and the latter is reached by a journey of a thousand miles up the Ganges. The mis- sionaries. Chamberlain and Peacock, reached this place in May 1811. Mr. Chamberlain was soon called to great affliction in the death of two daughters, one of whom could read and converse in three languages, and gave decided evidences of piety. A few months later he was called to part with his only remaining child. In 1811 the number of members in all the churches exceeded 300, one-third of whom had been added within little more than a year ; and among these it was said that the proportion of members who were qualified for public labor, was much greater than the average in the British churches. Fifteen years before this time the church in Bengal numbered four members, and it had doubled six times, or once in three years. On the 11th of March, 1812, the mission printing house was entirely destroyed by fire. The building, which was 200 feet long, was a total loss ; and the articles consumed were, upwards 1,400 reams of English paper ; 4,460 pounds of English types ; a double font of Greek, and a small one of Hebrew ; twelve fonts of types in the differ- ent languages of India, among which were a font of Persian, worth 3,000 rupees, a valuable font of Arabic, and a double font of Nagree, containing 1,600 lbs. weight ; all the cases, frames; and other printing uten- sils ; books in various languages, to the amount of 5,000 rupees ; manuscripts to the value of 7,000 rupees, among which were a Sanscrit dictionary, in five folio volumes, and the materials for a Polyglot dictionary of all the languages derived from the Sanscrit. There were burnt also more than fift3r-flve thousand sheets printed oif but not folded, among which were seven sheets, of a thou- sand copies each, of Mr. Martyn's Hindo- stanee New Testament in the Persian char- acter ; five sheets, five thousand each, of the . Tamil New Testament ; four sheets of the Calcutta Bible ' Society's Report, &c. A paper mill, and some presses and materials in a building adjoining the printing office, were saved. The loss amounted to nearly £10,000, no part of which was insured. But 414: HINDOSTAN. they recovered from the ruins the punches and melted metal, and immediately com- menced recasting the type, and in about a fortnight, with the presses they had saved, were able to renew the work of printing in one language. In a month or two the fonts were so far restored that the printing of the Scriptures was resumed on a large scale, and the presses were going day and night. This sudden rising from what seemed an over- whelming misfortune, occasioned the remark in a Calcutta paper, that " zeal and perse- verance are qualities that happily distinguish the character of the missionaries ; their ardor, instead of being repressed, derives a new impulse from diflBculties and misfor- tunes." No sooner did the sad intelligence of the fire at Serampore arrive in England, than the Christian public hastened to repair the loss. '' A strong sensation,'' writes Mr. Fuller, " was felt throughout the kingdom, not only in our own denomination, but among Christians of every name, each vieing with the other to repair the loss." The entire sum required was raised in the short space of fifty days, and even after this contributions continued with unabated lib- erality. But the greatest advantage was the powerful impulse given to the mission, by rendering it more generally known, and producing a simultaneous feeling of interest in all denominations. In October, seven months after the con- flagration, Mr. Carey writes to Mr. Fuller, that though his manuscript of the Sanscrii translation had been destroyed, yet he had re-translated the whole of it. and had begun new translations in the Nepalese ; the Push- too, or that of the AfiFghans ; the Bibloohee, which was spoken on the west shore of the Indus, towards Persia ; and the Maldivo Islands. Mr. Chamberlain had also trans- lated the Gospels into Brij-Bhasha. Such was the surprising courage and energy of these men. At the close of 1812, the general state of the mission was encouraging. A work of grace was proceeding in the 24th regiment, then in the fort at Calcutta, from which eleven had made a public profession of religion during the year. Nearly seventy had been added to the church at Serampore and Cal- cutta during the same time, and nearly every native capable of speaking, itinerated on the Sabbath through the neighboring towns. About this time Mr. (now Dr.) Carey, wrote to Mr. Fuller, that there was a general spirit of inquiry about the Gospel throughout the country, and that Christians, either Europeans or natives, were to be found in every direction. He mentioned five natives of high caste, near Serampore, who had recently been baptized, but who had come to the knowledge of the truth without any communication with the mis- sionaries. The Bibles and tracts with which they had met, had been the instruments of their conversion. Early in 1813, there was a demonstration of hostility from the government, and several of the missionaries were threatened with expulsion. One was actually compelled to leave in haste for England. But the evil was of very limited extent, and the scene of the persecution, Calcutta and the vicinity, " blossomed like the garden of the Lord." In Calcutta there was a congrega- tion of 120 attentive hearers. Thirty had joined the church, and many others were about to do so, from the 24th regiment. In the schools there were 353 boys and 117 girls, making a total of 470. This year Dr. Carey was permitted to rejoice over the conversion of his third son, Jabez, who at once devoted himself to the missionary work ; so that now he had three sons, Felix, William, and Jabez, engaged in preaching the Gospel to the hea- then. In regard to the translations at this time. Dr. Carey writes, " We are engaged in translating the Bible into twenty-one languages, including the Bengalee, which is finished. We have obtained a person to as- sist in the translation of the Scriptures into the Kassai language. This is an independent nation of mountaineers, lying between the eastern border of Bengal and the northern border of the Burman dominions. We have also obtained help for the Sindh and Wuch languages. The country of Sindh lies on the east bank of the Indus, from the sea about 500 miles ; Wuch then continues along the same shore, till it joins the Punjaub. I be- lieve we have now all the languages in that part, except that of Kutch, which I hope will soon be within our reach. We have not yet been able to secure the languages of Nepala, Bootan, Munipoora, and Siam, and about five or six tribes of mountaineers ; besides these I am not acquainted with any language on the continent of India into which the word of God is not under transla- tion." At the public disputation of the students of the college of Fort William, before the Right Honorable Lord Minto, in Sept., 1813, that gentleman after alluding to the literary labors of the missionaries, concludes by say- ing, " I profess a very sincere pleasure in bringing the literary merits of Mr. Marsh- man and the other reverend members of the Serampore mission, to the notice of the pub- lic, and in bearing my testimony to the great and extraordinary labors which con- stancy and energy in their numerous and various occupations, have enabled this modest and respectable community to ac- complish. I am not less gratified by the op- portunity which their literary achievements afford, of expressing my regard for the ex- HINDOSTAN. 415 emplary worth of their lives, and the benefi- cent principle which distinguishes and pre- sides in the various useful establishments which they have formed, and which are con- ducted b}'' themselves." The mission of the English Baptists in India now comprehended ten stations in Bengal ; three in the northern part — Goa- malty or Malda, Dinagepore, and Silhet ; five in the middle — Berhampore, Cutwa, Vans-variya, Serampore, and Calcutta, and two in the south-east — Jessore and Chitta- gong. Employed in these twenty stations there were twelve missionaries who had been sent from Europe, twelve who were Europeans by birth, and thirteen who were descendants of Europeans, and others who conversed in English. Adding to these the native laborers, made the aggregate number sixty-three. They preached in ten lan- guages, and were preparing the Scriptures in many more. Of the number of churches exceeding twenty members, there were eight in all ; and of the smaller churches, thirteen. During this year, 1813, the question of the renewal of the charter of the East In- dia Company came up in England, which gave occasion for the friends of missions to apply for a clause to be inserted in the char ter, tolerating and protecting Christian mis- sionaries. This object called into action the powerful pens of Robert Hall and Andrew Fuller, and the effort was successful, though not to the full extent desired. The j'ear 1814 was saddened by the death of Mr. Fuller. He had been the first officer, the earliest and best advocate, and the main pillar of the Society, for more than twenty- two years, and his loss was deeply felt by the friends of missions in England and in India. During the years 1815, 1816, and 1817, upwards of four hundred persons were in- troduced into the mission churches in India. Adding these to previous accessions, the number of baptized individuals at the differ- ent stations in seventeen years, the first one having been baptized in 1800, amounted to nearly twelve hundred. And besides these, not less than 10,000 children, of all descrip- tions, had been in some way brought under Christian instruction. About this time, the mission was strengthened by a fresh acces- sion of laborers from England, among whom were Mr. William Yates, Eustice Carey, (ne- phew of the venerable doctor,) Mr. Lawson and Messrs. Randall and Penney, with their wives. About eight miles north-west of Calcutta was the military station of Dum Dura. A neat place of worship was erected there, and a distinguished native. Ram Mohun, preached in Bengalee and Hindoo. Success attended this effort, and in the course of 1817 nine were baptized, six natives and three Eng- lish soldiers, and added to the little church, then amounting to fourteen members. The system of itinerating at Cutwa was con- ducted on a large scale. Fourteen natives were employed, some to preach, others to read and distribute the Scriptures. In 1818 was begun the erection of a col- lege at Serampore, on a scale of great mag- nificence. The buildings were designed to cover eight acres of ground, and to cost £10,000. The plan of such a literary insti- tution, however, was deemed by some im- practicable, and its ultimate failure justified their apprehensions. A much better and more approved object was the establishment of a savings' bank at Serampore ; and about the same time the formation of an agricul- tural and horticultural society, which was patronized by the governor-general and most of the opulent natives. The period from 1818 to 1827, although filled up with arduous and successful labors, is marked by no events which appear to re- quire an extended notice. One of the se- verest afflictions to which the mission was called during this time, was the death of Mr. Chamberlain. Having declined in health, he sailed for England with the hope of re- covery, but died on the passage. It was during the period now under no- tice, that a controversy arose between the Serampore mission and the parent society, which resulted in placing the two upon a separate and independent basis. The na- ture and grounds of this separation will be understood from the following "Agreement," which was published March 23, 1827. '■ Several j'ears ago, it was officially an- nounced, that as the missionaries at Seram- pore had been enabled so far to exceed the expectations of their first supporters, as largely to promote the propagation of the Gospel by funds which they had themselves originated, a material change had resulted in relation to the society from which they sprang ; in consequence of which the breth- • ren of that station acted independently in the management of their concerns. Subse- quent experience has shown that the con- tinued operation of the cause alluded to, has occasioned considerable embarrassment in the practical arrangements of the Society and their brethren at Serampore. The means of obviating this difficulty have been seriously considered in a special meeting of the committee assembled to confer with Dr. Marshman on the subject, which has termi- nated in the full conviction that in present circumstances it is most expedient that the Society at home and the missionaries at Se- rampore, should be publicly understood to be two distinct and independent missionary bodies." The simple fact to be gathered from the 416 HINDOSTAN. foregoing statement, is, that the missiona- ries at Serampore, holding and using as they did, in the mission service, a, large amount of property which they had accumulated without the aid of friends at home, refused to render to the parent society a strict ac- count of their pecuniary transactions. — Hence the necessity of a friendly agreement to become two bands. During the next ten years, from 1827 to 1837, the Baptist Society and the Seram- pore mission conducted their operations separately, and they must therefore be kept distinct in the present notices. The stations immediately connected with the Serampore mission at the commence- ment of this period, were, besides Seram- pore itself, the following nine, viz. : Jessore, Dacca, Chittagong, Arracan, Dinagepore, Benares, Allahabad, Futteghur, and Delhi. The three kinds of agency employed in con- nection with these stations were : 1st. Na- tives, through whom it was believed the Gospel would ultimately obtain its greatest difif'usion ; 2d. Asiatics, or those who were born in the country of European parents, at least on one side, and who could be support- ed with about half the sum required for a missionary from England. Of this class were Thompson, Fernandez, Smith, Mackin- tosh, and others. 3d. Europeans, whose knowledge and influence were of the high- est importance, when exerted in connection with bands of three, four, or five Asiatic or native agents. Native schools for the in- struction of boys had now been established about ten years ; and recently the education of female children, hitherto supposed to be impracticable, had been introduced. In Se- rampore there were thirteen schools for girls, four or five at Dacca, and at least three at chittagong. The children included the daughters of Mohammedans as well aa Hin- doos, who received instruction with the greatest readiness and pleasure ; and in all the schools, male and female, the Scriptures • were introduced. Serampore. — At this important post were Drs. Carey and Marshman, J. 0. Marshman, Mack, and Swan. During 1827, eleven per- sons had been received into the church. The college funds maintained 58 students at the close of the same year, and Dr. Carey lectured twice a week as theological profes- sor. The report of the college in 1829 re- ferred to several grounds of encouragement. A charter had been obtained ; the progress of tlie students had been good, and several had entered on the work of imparting a knowledge of the Scriptures to the natives of India. Mr. Ward had raised a fund in Europe and America of about 50,000 rupees, and a library of nearly 5,000 volumes had been collected. It possessed a philosophical apparatus, the largest in the country. In 1829, three new stations were entered upon, viz. : Goamalty, in Assam, 240 miles north-east of Serampore ; Barripore, 31 miles south, and Burisal, 140 miles eastward of Serampore ; thus making twelve stations in connection with Serampore. And it is an interesting fact, that all these stations were occupied by men who were brought to the knowledge of the truth in India itself. In May, 1831. Dr. Carey writes in an affect- ing strain, saying that his race was nearly run, being on the eve of seventy, and much weakened by repeated bilious attacks. He was able, however,to resume his labors again. During this year, seventeen joined the church, fifteen of whom, were natives of Bengal, and five of these were members of the college. In June, 1832, Dr. Carey brought the last edition of his Bengalee Scriptures through the press. In a letter, April, 1833, one of the missionaries says, '• Our venerable Dr. Carey is in excellent health, and takes his turn in all our public exercises. Just forty years ago he admin- istered the Lord's Supper to the church in Leicester, and then started on the morrow to embark for India." The entire Scriptures of the Old and New Testaments had at this time been printed and circulated in seven different languages ; the New Testament had been printed in twenty-three languages more ; the Pentateuch, and other parts of the Old Testament, had been printed and circulated in several languages into which the New Testament had been completed; and portions of the Scriptures had been printed in ten others — making in all forty languages ; so that upwards of 212,000 vol- umes of the Divine word, in forty different languages, had issued from the Serampore press during thirty years. "If," say the missionaries, " we reckon the Chinese popu- lation according to the most moderate compu- tation, at one hundred and fifty millions.these languages embrace the vernacular tongues of two hundred and seventy millions of hn- mortal beings." Besides the Scriptures, many other works had been printed at the Serampore press, such as grammars, diction- aries, histories, tracts, &c., so that literature as well as religion was greatly indebted to those distinguished translators. On the 9th of June, 1834, Dr. Carey, the original mover of this vast work, closed his earthly labors, at the age of 73. In his last will was found this highly characteristic pro- vision : " I direct, that before every other thing, all my lawful debts may be paid ; that my funeral be as plain as possible ; that I may be buried by the side of my second wife, Charlotte Emilia Carey ; and that the following inscription, and nothing more, may be cut on the stone which commemorates her either above or below, as there may be room HINDOSTAN, 417 " William Carey, Born August 17, 1761, died — ' A wretched, poor, and helpless worm, On thy kind arms 1 fall.' " Jess'ore. — During 1827, this station was in a discouraging state, except that the schools for boys were prosperous. In 1828, there were only twenty members in the church, and every one of them were cither suspended or excluded. In 1820, eight were restored, and two added. There were four schools, with an average attendance of 176 scholars. In 1832, three more were added to the church ; but the mission at this place continued to be of secondary importance, except as the centre of extensive itinerant labors. The district was estimated to con- tain about 1,200,000 inhabitants, Mohamme- dans and Hindoos. Dacca. — This station suffered a great loss in 1827, in the death of two of its missiou- ' aries, Mr. D'Cruz and Mr. Leonard. In 1828, the church was reduced to four by re- movals, but others were added from time to time. In 1829, the English congregation, which had almost disappeared, was formed anew. In 1830 there were six native schools, containing between five and six hundred scholars. Widows, as well as other native females, were members of these schools, and permitted to read at public examinations, instead of burning on funeral piles. . This being an important military post, the officers and soldiers benefitted by the labors of the missionaries, and some of them became members of the church. The commander of a native regiment invited preaching in the hall of his own house. Ckittagong, 340 miles east of Calcutta, was occupied by a faithful missionary, Mr. Johannes, who superintended three native female schools, and supported a school him- self of thirty iDoys. There was also a na- tive boys' school of sixty pupils. Mr. Jo- hannes also conducted public worship in Bengalee and English, and preached in the market-places and streets. Another female school was subsequently established, and frequent additions were made to the church. Roman Catholics often attended the English service, and gave good attention to the word, which led the missionary to say, " I have been now twelve years in Chittagong, and never felt that encouragement 1 do now, when I see Roman Catholics searching the Scriptures." Arracan. — The missionary in Arracan was Mr. J. C. Fink, assisted by five native preachers. They occupied a very extensive field, on the east of the Bay of Bengal, and south of Chittagong, among a mixed popu- lation of Mugs, Mohammedans and Bur- mese. Two services in English were main- tained on the Sabbath, and a permanent chapel was opened for the Mug congrega- 2T tion. Natives were from time to time added to the cimrch, and a native Arracanese was ordained as a missionary. He had been an idolatrous priest. Dinagepore. — The church in this place in 1827 numbei-ed ninety-two. In 1828 a few were added, and in 1829 three ^^■hole Mus- sulman families, consisting of seventeen per- sons, renounced their idols and joined the Christian church. Ig;natms Fernandez died in December, 1829. He was a native preach- er of great worth, and had long been the principal supporter of the mission at this place. He was born at Macao in July, 1757, and was therefore 73 years old. He came to Bengal in 1774, and of the flfty-six years which had since passed, he had spent forty- four at Dinagepore. He was the first fruit of this mission, under Carey and Thomas.- As early as 1796, he built a dwelling house at Dinagepore, which he told these mission- aries he intended for the worship of God, and when it was done, he invited them to preach in it, which they did. From that time till his death, 33 years, there was preaching in his house, and he was instru- mental of gathering the largest church in Bengal. Dr. Carey expressed the opinion that his labors were more blessed than those of any other missionary in Northern India., Feeling himself worn down by disease and near his end, he went to Serampore, and died in the presence of his brethren. He was succeeded in the mission by Mr. Hugh Smylie, assisted by Mr. Bareiro, a student of Serampore college. These brethren suf- fered from repeated attacks of fever, and in 1832 were obliged to leave their stations for a considerable time. Benares. — The Society commenced a mis- sion here in 1817, and a church, though never large, had been sustained, and the Gospel regularly preached. In 1830 and onward, the schools were quite prosperous, under the labors of Mr. Smith, and a native preacher, Sivadas. Allahabad. — This was an important sta- tion, being at the junction of the Ganges and Jumna, and the resort of multitudes of pilgrims who come thither to bathe in the sacred waters. Mr. L. Mackintosh was the missionary here in 1827, assisted by a native reader, Gopaul, whokept a promising school in his own house, consisting of about twenty young men. Delhi. — The situation of this place at the confluence of the Ganges and the Jumna, renders it an important field of labor. Gi-eat numbers of pilgrims resort thither to bathe in the sacred waters, affording the missiona- ries opportunity to preach the Gospel to multitudes besides the permanent residents. Mr. J. T. Thompson and a native preacher were laboring here at the period under no tice. Mr. Thompson traveled extensively 418 HINDOSTAN. at certain seasons of the year, distributing the Scriptures in the Vikaneer language, to the west of Delhi ; in the Marwar and the Goozerattee, to the south-west ; in the Na- palee to the Goorlihas, on the east north- east ; in tile Punjabee, on the north-west ; in the Pushtoo, to the Palans and Affghan horse merchants ; and in the language of Cashmere, to the north of Delhi. Mr. Thomp- son makes particular mention of scenes wit- nessed at the Pj'ree, a far-famed bathing spot at the base of a mountain projecting towards the river, where there is room for only two persons to pass abreast. This oc- casions the most lamentable consequences. In 1819, four hundred and thirty persons were crushed to death, owing to a desperate rush of the pilgrims. The assembled multi- tude amounts to two or three thousand ; but once in twelve years, when Jupiter is Aquarius, at the time of the sun entering Aries, the number is not less than a million, and in 1819 it was estimated as high as two Taillion. Mr. Thompson spent much time at this place at the proper seasons, and many listened with apparent seriousness to his (COQTersation and prayers. In 1829, he men- tions having circulated nearly six thousand books, pamphlets, and tracts, in Hindee, Oordoo, Sanscrit, Napalee, Punjabee, Per- Bian, and Arabic. At the Hurdwar annual fair, in 18.30. he distributed, in at least six languages, 2,200 volumes of the Gospels and other books. The word preached to the multitudes was regarded with great atten- tion. The students of the native college of Delhi evinced great anxiety to be furnished with the Scriptures and other works in English, Hindee, and Persian. Mr. Thomp- Bon was much interested in a sect called the Sands, who reject idolatry, and regard the Ganges like any other river. They profess to believe in one invisible God. and are taught that the soul is immortal, but have no temple nor any regular priesthood. This sect is almost 200 years old. Besides the foregoing stations in connec- tion with Serampore, at the time of the separation from tfie Society, a few others of .ess note were formed. These were Dum- Dum, Multra, Barripore, Burisal, Cawnpore, and Assam. During the same period, 1827 to 1837, the parent society conducted its separate opera- tions at Calcutta, Cutwa, Digha, and Mon- ghyn, leaving by far the largest and most important part of the field under the direc- tion of the Serampore brethren. During this period of ten years, efforts were made to unite the two societies, but although they harmonized in their spirit and aims, the di- vision continued. In the spring of 1838, however, the effort at union was renewed, and resulted success- jjUy. The particular agents or means em- ployed in terminating the unhappy contro- versy, need not be specified. All were hap- py at length in a cessation of strife, and in joining as formerly in the glorious work of spreading the Gospel. Dr. Marshman, who had been greatly instrumental in bringing about this happy change, died almost at the moment of the termination of the negotia- tions. The plan of union provided that the trans- lations and all the public property at Seram- pore, should be transferred to Calcutta, which from this time becomes the centre of interest in regard to translations, printing, &c. At the commencement of 1838, the con- gregations in nearly all the chapels in Cal- cutta and its neighborhood were increasing. Mr. Robinson, assisted by Mr. Thomas and four native preachers, occupied the Lai Bazar chapel in Calcutta, which had a church mem- bership of nearly a hundred. In September of this year twelve Hindoos were baptized, eight of whom were in the girls' Christian boarding school, under the superintendence of Mrs. Pearce. In the beginning of 1839, Mr. Penney died of cholera, and in March 1840, Mr. Pearce died of the same disease. The report respecting translations in 1840, embraced the following important particu- lars : An edition of the New Testament in Hindostanee, with marginal references, 1000 copies; another edition of the New Testa- ment in the same language, smaller size, without references, 500 copies. Of this last edition, extra copies of the Gospels and of the Acts were printed, making an aggregate of 9,500 volumes. An edition of the Psalms in Sanscrit verse, 2,500 copies ; the third edition of the New Testament in Bengalee, octavo, 1,500 copies, with 6,000 extra copies of each of the Gospels, 2,000 of the Acts, and 500 of the Gospels and Acts together, making a total of 28,000 volumes ; the fourth edition of the New Testament in Bengalee, royal 12mo., 3000 copies, with 2,000 of Gos- pels and Acts together, making 5000 vol- umes ; an edition of the New Testament in modern Armenian, with numerous marginal references, 6000 copies ; an edition of the Gospel of Matthew in Hindee, Nagree char- acters, 6,000 copies. Besides the foregoing works, which had all been completed, there were in progress 8,000 copies of the New Testament, or parts of it, in Sanscrit, and 8500 copies of the New Tes- tament, or of the Gospels and Acts together, in Hindostanee. All this, the work of the mission press at Calcutta, and most of it within one year, show the vast amount of labor performed in this department, and its importance in diffusing the light of truth over benighted India. Frequent mention is made in the journals of the missionaries, of the "Benevolent In- stitution." It was established in 1809, for HINDOSTAN. 419 the special benefit of the multitudes of chil- dren in the city who were growing up in ignorance and vice, with none to care for them. The institution was not denomina- tional, but was common to all classes of missionaries in Calcutta, though it fell to the lot of this society to have the chief manage- ment of its concerns. For more than twentj^ years it was under the care of Mr. Penney, whose exertions in its behalf were unremit- ting. In 1842 there were 265 Ijoys and 123 girls under instruction, the children of vari- ous sects, as follows, viz. : Roman Catholics 142, Protestants 95, Hindoos 107, Moham- medans 22, Burmese 3, Mugs 5, Armenians 4, Jews 1, GreelvS 1, Chinese 7. In 1843, 90,000 volumes of the Scriptures, in whole or in part, were printed in Sanscrit, Bengali, Ilindostanee, and Hindee languages. From the country stations, during this year, favorable intelligence was received. At Del- hi, M['. Thompson baptized five persons, one of them his own daughter, the rest natives. At Patna a delightful work of grace was in progress three or four months, as the result of which eight persons were baptized, and seve- ral more stood as candidates. At Monghyn four were added to the church by baptism, at Burisal two, at Chittagong six, at Patna eight, &c. In January, 1844, the London Society's missionaries at Calcutta published a state- ment, vindicating their Baptist brethren Against an attack made upon them in the London Patriot, in reference to the Sanscrit version of the Scriptures, to which the Bap- tist translators had devoted themselves with so much zeal. In this vindication, they say that the Sanscrit language is the language of learnmg and religion throughout the whole of Bengal, Bombay, and considerable por- tions of the Madras presidency ; that all Brahmins, except those wholly secularized, as soldiers or merchants, are acquainted with this language, which alone is taught in their colleges aud employed in their religious cere- monials ; that the highest reverence is uni- versally felt for it, and any book written in Sanscrit will always be received with respect, and read with more acceptance tlian if com- posed in any of the vernacular dialects ; that tens of thousands in all sections of the coun- try are fully qualified to read with intelli- gence any ordinary composition in this lan- guage ; that a translation of the Sacred Scrip- tures in Sanscrit was, in the opinion of tlie most competent judges, every way desirable, as furnishing a large Brahminical population with the only version they would probably receive, and as laying a critical foundation and furnishing a classical model for the pre- paration or improvement of vernacular ver- sions; and finally, that they deem it just to their brethren of the Baptist mission to give these assurances, since, so far from sympa- thizing with the writer in the Patriot (who was a former missionary of the London So- ciety in Burmah), they wholly approve of the zealous efforts of their Baptist brethren to secure a version of the sacred Scriptures in the learned language of Hindostan. These testimonials are considered of value, as showing how the Sanscrit language ranks in Hindostan, in the estimation of the most learned and competent men, after almost fifty years of experience, and as illustrating the kind and generous spirit which prevailed among missionaries of difi'erent denomina- tions. The annual report for 1844 gives a pleasing view of the work in most parts of India. In Calcutta there were eight churches, with 454 members, 270 of whom were natives. The baptisms during the year amounted to 32, all natives but three. The number of schools in Calcutta and its neighborhood was 14, and the number of scholars 954. At the various stations in northern India there were 16 churches, and a membership of 465. Also 19 schools, and 673 scholars. During this year, the cholera made fearful ravages, carrying off in two months between forty and fifty thousand people. The missionaries, however, were all mercifully spared. In August of this year, some interesting and valuable statements were made by a Calcutta missionary in regard to the state of society, and the spirit of love and harmony which actuated and pervaded all classes of Uborers. lie saj's, " On the bosom of the Ganges is the shipping of every nation, as may be seen in its streets the natives of every shore. In the city are splendid edifices and mud hovels ; naked children and half naked adults, various and discordant sounds, me- chanics at their employ, venders sitting by their goods, innumerable sledges drawn by oxen, fashionable European carriages, bug- gies, gazees, palankins, grooms running to clear the way, &c. Degradation and idolatrv were around us, destruction and misery walked hand in hand. We passed through the crowded streets, and soon arrived at In- tally, a beautiful residence, as all the dwell- ings of Europeans in Calcutta are. A group of Hindoos, attired in snow white muslin, and with inteUigent countenances, met us as we entered the gates. Their whole contour formed a striking contrast to those we had seen pi'eviously. The explanation is simple : these were Christian Hindoos. As they ut- tered their salams, my eyes filled with tears. Christianity finds man every whei e debased — it blesses and elevates him. Next Sab- bath I expect to be at Serampore, where a Carey and a JIarshman found refuge, not from native violence, but from Englishmen bearing the name of Christians ; where a Martyn, a Brown and a Buchanan, contem- plated India's welfare; where a Chamber- 420 HINDOSTAN. lain, a Judson, and a Newell found Christian hospitality and were refreshed. The spirit that animated them still remains ; we are all one here ; we cannot afford to be jealous — the common foe is too strong ; and the mis- sionaries are bound together neither by creeds nor human ties, but by the fear of God and the love of Jesus." These words are worthy of being engraven on the mem- ory of Christians and Christian ministers every where, differing in name and often ri- valing in interests, but having professedly one spirit and one purpose. During the year ending May 1st, 1845, there had been printed at Calcutta, in San- scrit 2,500 volumes; in Bengali 23,500; in Hindostanee 26,500; in Armenian 2,260; total, 54,760 volumes. These were all vol- umes of the Scriptures in some form, and the distribution kept pace with the publica- tion. The distinguished Doctor Yates was at this date engaged in preparing for the press the Old Testament in Sanscrit, and large portions of it had already been printed. His heart's desire was to finish this work by the close of another year, and to be able to report a complete translation of the whole of the Scriptures into this, the sacred and learned language of the East. But it pleased God in a few months to call this devoted servant to his rest. By the advice of his physicians he sailed for Eng- land, and died on the passage. In November, 1845, Serampore is brought to view again, for the first time since the "union" in 1837. More or less labor had been performed there, but for some reason no reports appeared through the regular channels. Mr. Denham, on taking charge of the station at this time, found a church of 93 members, a good congregation, and many pleasant and saci'ed associations. Re- membering Carey and his coadjutors, he asks, ''"Who can recall the name of Seram- pore without veneration ? On its sages rest- ed a sacred pentecostal flre, and from their hands India and its hundreds of millions re- ceived the regenerating word of life." There were also at this time in Serampore two schools for heathen boys, supported by the Ladies' Benevolent Society of that place, and a third was conducted by a European in the college. Besides these, two female schools were maintained, one for heathen children, and one for children of nominally Christian parents. The number of scholars in the va- rious schools was over 800. There were eight sub-stations around Serampore, at which preaching was regularly maintained, and several other places that were visited periodically. In May, 1846, Mr. Denham speaks of arrangements then in progress for rendering the college buildings available to the interests of the community, and espe- cially for training converted natives of India for missionary service. Years having passed away since the doors of the college were closed, every thing had to be done, even to the obtaining of pupils; but the effort was successful, and this institution, for a long period so vitally connected with the welfare of India, was again in a prosperous condition. The various stations of this society having now assumed a good degree of stability and of uniformity in their progress, it is unne- cessary to notice them further, except as we find them in the last report which has been received, that for 1853. Calcutta. — Under this head is included Calcutta and its neighborhood, embracing eight churches, each of which is worthy of a brief notice. The first four are in the city proper, the others in the suburbs. 1. The Church in Circular Road. This is an English church, with 91 members in communion, and 16 non-resident members. The Sabbath-school contains 63 children. An English pastor, Mr. Leslie, has charge of the church, which supports itself without aid from the mission. 2. Church in Lai Bazar. This is a mixed church, J. Thomas pastor, with three native preachers. Number of members 137; non- resident members, 20. The venerable and distinguished native laborer, Carapeit Ara- toon, continues to render important aid. Five were added to the church by baptism during the year. 3. South Colinga. — A native church, with one English and one native pastor, and a membership of 51. 4. Intally. — A native church, with 46 members. Besides the English pastor, four native preachers are constantly engaged in disseminating the word of life in and around Calcutta. Seven persons were baptized dur- ing the year. 5. Haurah and Salkiya. — A mixed church, with a pastor, T. Morgan, and a native preacher ; and a membership of 20. Two day schools are maintained, having 100 chil- dren in attendance, and a Sabbath-school with 60 scholars. During the year, 4,000 copies of the Scriptures, or portions thereof, were distributed by Mr. Morgan in his itin- erant labors. In his report of these labors, he states some facts of peculiar interest; and being of so recent a date, they set in a strong light the great though' slow progress which the Gospel has made in that quarter since the early labors of Carey and his com- panions. He says, " The desire of the peo- ple to obtain the Scriptures is most intense. Imagine a large market with from one to two thousand people, myself on an elevated spot, hundreds of hands stretched out, and hun- dreds of tongues shouting, ' Sahib, a great thing, holy incarnation, give me a book !' Brahmins and Sudras rolling in the dust to- gether, snatching the books from one another ; HINDOSTAN. 431 respectable people with children in their hands and in their arms, imploring me to put the books into the hands of the little ones ; books all gone, — missionary reeling from the effects of dust, noise, and speaking ; people imploring for more books, and in some places I have been obliged to go to police oiBcos to rest for half an hour. I have seen Brahmin lads in tears because they could not get the books, saying, ' 0, Sahib, I ran when I heard you were here, and now what shall I do V Of a cold, bitter night, I have found men at my boat, from distant places, up to their shoulders in water." Mr. Morgan speaks of another im- portant feature in this work, viz. : that on going to a large town, if he is suspected of being a government agent, the people will not hear him, nor take a book from him ; but no sooner do they learn that he is a missionary, without any connection with the government, than the whole town is at his heels, the most respectable sending for him to their houses, bringing milk to his boat, &c. This mission- ary concludes by saying, that it is evident that the Hindoos are dissatisfied with both their civil and religious institutions, and that while they would regard with horror any attempt on the part of the English Go- vernment to convert them, disinterested efforts they can and do appreciate. 6. Narsigdarchoke and Bishtapore. — A native church of 45 members, two missiona- ries, and five native preachers. 7. Khari. — A native church, with two mis- sionaries and one native preacher, and a membership of 49. A school with 45 chil- dren is maintained. 8. Lakhyantipur. — A native church with 62 members, one missionary, two assistant missionaries, and two native preachers. In direct or indirect connection with this church, there are 74 households, comprising 84 men, 84 women, and 118 children. 9. Dum-J)um. — A native church of 13 members, one missionary, and one native preacher. 10. Malayapur. — A native church of 5 members, a pastor, and two native preachers. The Bengal Association met at this place in January, and although many were detained, the missionary brethren and delegates made up a body of nearly 500. The work of translating and printing the Scriptures has been carried on with the usual activity and zeal during the past year. The translations have been chiefly into San- scrit, Bengali, Hindee, and Hindostanee ; and the number of Scriptures issued from the depository during the year amounted to 34,036 copies. Stations and Churches in Bengal. — Under this head are embraced eight principal sta- tions. 1. Serampore. — There were in the Seram- pore college, in 1853, eleven students, four of whom were natives. Their studies em- braced theology. Christian evidences, mental and moral science, classics, and history. There were at this period two missionaries at the station, Messrs. Denham and Robin- son, and four native preachers. They had preaching stations at eight villages, and the number of church members was 121. The Native Christian Asylum numbered 18 girls, one having recently died in great peace. The two schools for boys contained 327 scholars, and adding to them the schools connected with the college, the whole num- ber of children and youth under the care of the mission would not fall much short of 600. 2. Cutwa. — This station has a missionary, four native preachers, and a church of 35 members. A day schc^ol for girls is sus- tained, and has ten scholars. The copies of Scriptures distributed during the 3'ear amount to 416, and of tracts to 2,780. 3. Jessore. — One missionary, eight native preachers, and 234 church members. There are seven sub-stations connected with this mission. Five boj's' schools are supported, attended by about 400 children ; and one boarding school attended by 14 girls. 4. Dinajpur. — One missionary, one native preacher, and 19 members. There are two day schools attended by 120 children, and a Sabbath-school with lO scholars. In the course of a few months the missionary visited 246 villages, preaching and distribu- ting Scriptures and tracts. 5. Dacca. — Two missionaries, four native preachers, and 36 church members. In va- rious journeys made during the year the missionaries distributed 5,000 tracts, and 4,600 copies of portions of Scripture. They say, " We now want more preachers, for the whole of East Bengal is open ; and on our last journey we often had from 400 to 600 attentive hearers of all ranks and classes." 6. Chittagong. — One missionary, eight na- tive preachers, and 65 members. There are two day schools, attended by 23 boys, and one attended by 13 girls. Eleven persons have been baptized during the year. Says the missionary, "The heathen do not ge- nerally disregard the word now. They listen with readiness and pleasure to the news of salvation, and applications are un- ceasingly made for Scriptures and tracts." 7. Suri. — One missionary, four native preachers, and 37 church members. Five day schools are taught, one English, and the others Bengali. Tlie attendance is about 220 boys and 16 girls. The Sabbath-school contains 20 scholars. 8. Burisal. — This mission has under its care ten sub-stations, and enjoys the labors of two missionaries and ten native preach- ers. The whole number of members is 204. 422 HIXEOSTAN. A variety of schools are supported, not only for boys and girls, but for men and women. TABULAR VIEW. TS No. of Day Sab. O n 5 Members r-l d. jchools school S s 1 §3 Stations. a 'Z a gs a J g rt ID s & a c o P 1 > ■s| 13 ■a s a) .23 rt ^ rt ri O *J Ste H fei ^ftlzil tivals, and the disappearance of the splendor and pomp with which they were formerly cele- brated. Another favorable change at this period was the absence of Europeans^the British resident gentry — from the dixnces given in honor of the goddess Doorga by the more wealthy natives. About this time Eev. Mr. La- oroix commenced a theological class which embraced quite a number of promising young men, and whose course of study consisted in the practical investigation of the Scriptures, systematic theology, the evidences of Chris- tianity, and church history. They also com- posed short sermons, which, after the needful corrections, were preached to the natives in the presence of the missionaries. The annual report of 1843 speaks of the pre- vious year as a most disastrous one in a tem- poral point of view, the south of Calcutta hav- ing been visited by cholera, devastating storms, inundation, and famine. Many members of the Christian congTegations died, the harvests were cut ofi', and distress and despair followed. For five months the rains continued almost without intermission. Still the work of the mission went on with encouraging signs of success. During the succeeding eight or nine years un- ceasing attention was given to preaching, schools, translations of the Scriptures, the pub- lication and distribution of tracts, and itinera- cies through the principal villages. There are at present five stations under the immediate care of the Calcutta mission, one of which includes two native villages, Eammakal-choke and Gungree. The church members at this station number 180, and the children in the vernacular schools 110. Mr. Lacroix, the missionary, has been much em- ployed in conducting through the press a new edition of the Gospels of Matthew, Luke, and John, in Bengalee, for the Calcutta Bible So- ciety ; and in conjunction with Dr. Duff, has superintended the printing of the book of Isaiah, in Bengalese, for the same society. The station of Ballia-Hati, under the care of Mr. Lacroix, has 60 professing Christians, and 171 pupils in the schools. At Cooly Bazar there is a branch missionary society, and a Sab- bath-school and Bible class have recently been established. The most important educational institution is at Bowhanipore, there being in its several departments 803 pupils. At the opening of the year 1850, three college clas.se3 430 HINDOSTAN. were formed, containing "70 students. A juve- nile society and a ladies' society liave con- tributed liberally to tlie funds of tlie mission. The Kishnapore station lias connected with it about 100 native Christians. There are eight missionaries now laboring at the Calcutta star tioDS. Chinsurah. — Rev. Robert May commenced the mission at this place in 1813. So great was his success that in 1816 he had formed 30 schools, with 2,600 children. In 1819 these schools were reported as in a very prosperous state. They were gratuitously supplied with books by the Calcutta school Book Society, who ordered 1000 copies of a Bengalee and English Grammar to be printed at their sole expense. Religions books were also much called for, and extensively circulated. In 1820 a Bengalee chapel was erected, and in 1821 an additional native school was commenced at a village called Khonnian, the expense of which was defrayed by the Rajah of Birdwan. A na- tive female school was also opened in a room of the fort, kindly assigned by the Dutch gov- ernor for the purpose. In 1826, great success attended the preaching of the Gospel to the Europeans at this station, many embraced re- ligion, and a, church of about twenty members was formed. The number of schools support- ed by the Bengal government at this station in 1828, was sixteen, in which over 2,000 boys were in a course of instruction. The mission schools were three in number, and contained 295 boys. Particular mention is made in 1834, of the free school in which English was taught to both native and Portuguese boys ; but the attendance on this school was small, on account of the number of government schools in which English was taught, and the prejudices of the parents against the use of the Bible as a class-book — a prejudice tolerated in the government schools by the exclusion of the Bible. During the three or four succeeding years a spirit of earnest inquiry prevailed among the natives of high caste, some of whom abandoned Hindooism in favor of Christianity, but others were deterred by the most violent persecutions. The report for 1837 says, " The government has established a college for the education of Hindoo youths, in the immediate vicinity of the station, and the applications for admission have been very numerous." Rev. Mr. Mundy, missionary at this station, calls special attention, in 1838, to the fact, that those who become acquainted with the English language are much more favoiably disposed to Christianity than those who are ignorant of it, and expresses the opinion that every college and school in the country might be conducted on Christian principles, without any objection on the part of the natives. But over this ques- tion the missionaries had no direct control, the British government being pledged not to intro- duce Christianity into the schools for instruc- tion in English, nor in any way to interfere with the native religion. The mission schoolg were conducted upon entirely different princi- ples, and the advancement of the pupils in Christian knowledge was very observable from year to year. The female schools, and also the infant school, under the care of Mrs. Mun- dy, were marked by great prosperity, and re- ceived the high commendation of the: Bishop of Calcutta. But this devoted female mis- sionary died in 1842, leaving her husband and the whole mission to mourn an irreparable loss. The next year Mr. Mundy himself was obliged, by ill-health, to abandon the field in which he had labored many years, and to re- turn to England. He was succeeded by Rev. Mr.. Bradbury, from Calcutta, and the preach- ing of the Gospel in Bengalee was sustained as in former years. Great eagerness to obtain and read the Scriptures was evinced, and many young men, educated in the Government col- leges and schools, requested and thankfully re- ceived copies of the Bible. These and other encouraging signs led Mr. Bradbury to believe, in 1845, that this locality, one of the most edu- cated districts in India, would soon enjoy the benefit of an extensive diffusion of divine knowledge. Special divine favor was granted to the Eng- lish female school in 1849, and cheering hopes were entertained of the conversion of several of the pupils. The number in attendance, at the latest date, was 57. The Bengalee school has 100 pupils, employed in the acquisition of general and religious knowledge. The older boys have been conducted through the Gospel of John, and the younger have learnt the First Catechism. There were 70 boys in connection with the English and vernacular school in 1847, but for want of funds this school has been suspended. Preaching to the heathen and the distribution of the Scriptures are con- tinued with encouraging success. Berliampoie. — The operations of the London Missionary Society at this station were com- menced in 1824, by Rev. Mr. Hill, who had been laboring at Calcutta. He met with op- position for a time, but succeeded at length in establishing schools for the children of Hin- doos and Mohammedans. In 1828 a chapel and mission-house were erected, and a female school, under the care of Mrs. Hill and another lady, was in a prosperous condition. In 1831 an orphan asylum for native children was es- tabli.shed, to which native orphans of both sexes were received, under the charge of two native matrons, members of the church. The girls were instructed in reading, sewing, spin- ning, &o. ; and the boys, between school hours, were taught gardening and weaving. In the annual report for 1837, Mr. Hill, in reviewing the work of thirteen years, says, " When I entered the country the jealousy of the government was great. A missionary could not leave Calcutta without special license, and I hud to solicit from the chief secretary HINDOSTAN. 431 permission to live at Berliampore. The na- tives misrepresented my conduct to the civil and military authorities, and my own country- men were hostile to me. Our schools were injured by secret combination and open hos- tility. For some years after my arrival at Berliampore, wherever I preached I was hooted and hissed, and men have even followed me from preaching with clubs to strike me. But things are now different. People are no lon- ger afraid to ask for a tract, nor try to con- ceal it under their clothes to prevent the Brah- mins from tearing it in pieces. The Brahmins themselves are as eager for tracts and Gospels as the other castes, and plead that they are Eralimms as a reason for showing them a pre ference. We now obtain congregations when- ever and wherever we wish. In all principal thoroughfares, crossways, and markets, we never wait five minutes until a congregation assembles. The number of converts from our fellow-countrymen is not small. Of his Ma- jesty's regiments which have been quartered nere, we express with gratitude our belief that all, excepting one, included at their departure those whom the Holy Spirit had, during their residence at the station, sealed unto the day of redemption." In 1838, after nearly IV years of labor under a tropical climate, Mr. Hill found it necessary to seek a residence in his native country, and Rev. Mr. Lessel removed from Calcutta to supply his place. Mr. Hill returned to his field in 1842. In 1843 the mission was visited with affliction, and not a native church mem^ ber, nor a native catechist, nor a child in the asylum or school, escaped the prevailing sick ness. Some died, leaving the most satisfactory evidence of saving conversion. A deeply in- teresting account of the sickness and death of several children, appears in the report for 1847. In January of that year, Mr. and Mrs. Hill removed to Calcutta, where Mrs. Hill soon after died. Mrs. Patterson was also about this time called to her rest, and Mr. Patterson removed to England. These events left almost the whole burden of the mission on Mr. Lessel, who, accompanied by native cate- chists, preached to the heathen, and distributed tracts and scriptures extensively. The pro- fessing Christian community at Berhampore at the present time, comprises about 100 indi- viduals. Impediments to female education, arising from the force of prejudice, the apathy of parents, and other causes, have been very numerous at this station ; but Mrs. Bradbury, wife of one of the missionaries, has succeeded in establishing a girls' school, which contains 23 pupils, 12 of whom are day scholars, chiefly Mohammedans, and 11 boarders, consisting of orphans and the children of native Christians. They are instructed through the medium of the Bengali language, in reading, sewing and knitting, and also in the Scriptures. Five of the sons of native Christians are under the care of Mr. Lessel. Divine service in tne Eng- lish chapel has been conducted regularly every Sabbath evening, by the missionaries alter- nately. In the English boys' school the ave- rage attendance is 30. Benares — Mr. and Mrs. Adam were sent out to this station in 1820. Mr. Adam im- mediately organized a native school, which was so far successful that he opened av.cther the following year. A chapel was opened in 1824, chiefly through the exertions of privates in the artillery. Concerning this station Mi. Adam forcibly remarks, " Benares exhibits, in full operation, some of the worst principles of Hindoo superstition." He describes the people as rich in their own eyes and in need of nothing, as already at the gate of heaven and in no want of aid ; as awfully wicked in their lives, and altogether presenting formida- ble obstacles to missionary labor. In 1826 Rev. Mr. Robertson joined this mission, and in 1827 the native schools, three in number, contained 170 pupils. In all these schools Christian books were taught. A catechism and a Hindawee translation of scriptural les- sons was prepared by Mr. Adam for the use of the schools. He also printed 1,000 copies of his tract on the ten commandments, and soon after prepared another tract entitled " Jesus the Deliverer from the Wrath of bod." In 1831 the mission was strengthened by the arrival of Rev. Wm. Buyers. Mr. Crawford, at this date, had translated the minor prophets, and a consecutive version of the books of the Old Testament had been finished, as far as to the Second Book of Kings. The Psalms, Pro- verbs, and Isaiah, had previously been printed. The work of translation was continued in the following years, and besides the Scriptures, Pil- grim's Progress and other books were trans- lated for the use of the natives. In 1838 the report says: "The obstacles presented by the native language to the diffu- sion of religious and general knowledge havo now almost disappeared, and, after much per- severance in endeavoring to simplify the style of writing and instruction so as to meet the capacities of the people generally, the mission- aries, aided by the Benares Christian School Book Society, have succeeded in correcting much of the false taste formerly prevalent^ — a taste which was so vitiated as to prefer the absurdities of the native literature, clothed in a style of pedantic obscurity, to the plain and intelligible communication of sound and valu- able instruction." During the years 1839 and 1840, a vast number of tracts and copies of the Scriptures were put in circulation by the missionaries ; but a serious obstacle to the success of such labors has been the inability of the people to read, arising partly from the peculiar and widely differing styles of printing. On this subject the missionaries, in 1840, offer the fol- lowing important remarks : " Though Benares 432 HINDOSTAN. is called the Athens of India, it is astonisliing to find how very few of its inhabitants can read. Most of the Brahmins who chant San- scrit slots, do not know the meaning of them. The greatest number of the Mussulman priests who read, or rather chant the Koran, do not understand it. But the great obstacle to edu- cation arises from the variety of characters. The Mohammedans use the Persian character, the Brahmins the Devanagati, the tradesmen the Kayathi, the bankers the Mahajani. On this account few can read any •printed charac- ters, and among these only a small number can read fluently, intelligently, and understanding- ly. Whenever a man takes a tract and reads it fluently, we may be almost sure that he has learned to read in a mission school. In these circumstances the education of the native youth is of tlie first importance. In their report for 1851 the missionaries say that all their labors are performed with a view to increase the prosperity of the native church. " For it we translate the Scriptures and write boolss. We preach the Gospel to the heathen and teach it in our scliools, in the hope that some may be brought into the fold of Christ. Our mission church, assembling at Salem Chapel, consists of twenty native mem- bers." Of the orphan and Christian boys, ten in number, recently under the charge of this mission, five have been removed to Mirzapore, to learn printing. Five of the orphan girls, at the latest accounts, had been married, and maintained an exemplary deportment in their new position. In connection with the mission there are four subordinate schools, containing an aggregate of 170 boys. The Bazar girls' school, under the superintendence of Mrs. Buyers, has an attendance of 33 scholars. All of these schools are represented as in a state of growing efficiency. I he number of pupils in the English free school is 200. Mirzapore. — This is a large and important inland town, about 30 miles south-west of Be- nares, and was occupied by the London Soci- ety in 1838. It was at that time a newly erected city, devoted to trade and commerce ; and Mr. Mather, the first missionary, had to encounter obstacles of a peculiar nature, aris- ing from the commercial character and spirit of the people. Generally speaking, however, the inhabitants were disposed to attend to the preaching of the word, and displayed much candor in judging of the conflicting claims of their own religion and that of the Bible. One of the earliest efforts of Mr. and Mrs. Mather, was the establishment of an orphan school, to which a large number of children wore immediately sent from Agra, where famine had deprived them of their parents. These children themselves were so reduced, that 14 out of 79 who left Agra, died on the way, or soon after their arrival. In 1840, Mi. Mather was joined by j\lr. Glen, who directed his attention to the Mohammedan population. The Gospel was faithfully preached, and both English and native services were regularly maintained. The native church received fre- quent accessions, and some of the converts were of such a character and position as to render their influence of great value to the mis- sion. In 1843 the orphan schools had been increased, and contained 50 boys and 34 girls. But a sad mortality occurred among them about this time, and 17 of the children died. The various departments of this mission have been well sustained, and there are now at the station two missionaries and two assistant mis- sionaries. The church has twenty-five mem- bers, of whom sixteen are natives. The free school has o^er 100 scholars, and the bazar schools, three in number, contain an aggregate of 70 boys. The orphan boys' school aflbrda much encouragement ; and the orphan girls' school, and also the infant school of 12 mem- bers, have been attended with gratifying re- sults. Surat. — The London Missionary Society commenced a station at this place in 1813, and continued it, at times with the most encoura- ging results, until 1845, when, " for weighty reasons," the directors decided to relinquish it. The mission was transferred to the Irish Pres- byterian Missionary Society, whose mission- aries were on the ground, and qualified to sus- tain the responsibilities of the mission. Malii-Kantlia. — The mission at this place, situated in the Guzerat territory, about lOO miles from Surat, was commenced by Eev. Mr. Clarkson, in 1844. The site of tlie mis- sion at first was Baroda, but was changed to Mahi-Kautha, on the banks of the river of that name. The plan of forming a Christian village has been prosecuted, for which purpose GO acres of land has been procured from gov- ernment, on a lease of 30 years, Ibr cultivation by the Christian colonists, and six or seven substantial brick houses have been built. Preaching, schools, the distribution of books, and itinerant labors, have all been entered upon with vigor, and the mission promises the happiest results. A very interesting account of the conversion and baptism of a native, Patadar, will be found in the annual report of the London Missionary Society for 1850. j^^mora.— This station, in Northern India, was entered upon by Eev. J. H. Budden, in 1850. It was originated, and has been chiefly sustained, by the liberality of J. H. Batten, Esq., and Capt. Eamsay, of the East India Company's service, and is at present in a pros- perous condition. Schools have been estab- lished, and regular preaching services are maintained. The following table gives an imperfect view of 'the London Missionary Society's operations in India, owing to the fact that in the more recent reports the number of churches and of communicants is not uniformly given ; and the schools for boys and girls are not always men- HINDOSTAN. 433 tioned separately. There are also many iso- lated facts which could not be conveniently dossed ; but the acoouat given of each mission or station, it is believed, will supply these deficiencies. TABULAB VIEW. STATIONS. h S, a S3 Madras . . . Vizagapatam . Cuddapah . . . Belgaum . . . Bellary . . . . Bangalore . . Mysore . . . . Salem Combaconum . Coimbatoor . Nagercoil . . . Neyoor . . . . Quilon Trevandrum. . Calcutta . . . . Ohinsurah . . . Berhampore. . Bepares . . . . Mirzapore . . . Mahi Kantha . Almora . . . , Totals 1805 1804 1822 1820 1810 1820 1839 1827 1830 1830 1806 1828 1821 1838 1816 1813 1824 1820 1838 1844 1850 47 119 40 34 31 72 59 13 33 35 340 75 13 160 1 7 10 13 77 9 6 4 643 150 9 60 18 1,392 147 30 232 19 22 23 40 200 16 32 23 6 102 93 281 23 1,024 133 34 2,439 10 C07 484 875 149 2C1 162 460 370 112 151 365 971 1,669 1,592 281 163 1,225 100 53 502 84 8,919 Fkee Church or Scotland. — Eev. Alex- ander Duff. D. D., was designated by the Church of Scotland as its first missionary to India, early in the year 1829, and in October of the same year he sailed from Portsmouth in the Lady Holland. In February this noble ship struck on the rocks of a barren island near Cape Town, and almost everything on board, except the passengers, perished. Dr. Duff lost his whole library, consisting of over 800 difierent works, many of them of rare value, besides all his journals, notes, essays, &c., the fruits of many years of research and reflection. He sailed in another ship from the Cape, and in March came near being lost in another gale, and on reaching the mouth of the Ganges the vessel was driven ashore in a hurricane, amid all the horrors of a shipwreck. At length, on the 27th of May, 1830, he reached Calcutta, " more dead than alive." He soon entered upon his favorite scheme, the establishment of a colle- giate institution, in which the Bible, in Eng- lish, should be the principal text book ; and after a year or two of trial, and experiment, the institution was carried into successful opera- tion. The history of this college need not be de- 28 tailed. It has educated, on its peculiar plan, many hundreds of Hindoo young men, and tha happy effects which it has produced are recog- nized with gratitude by nearly all classes throughout the province of Bengal. Native youths of great promise, connected with the institution, have from time to time been con- verted, and having renounced caste and all the forms of Hindooism, they have received bap- tism, and have often become most able and efficient assistants in the missionary work. Of Dr. Duff's labors in Europe and America for the last four years the Christian world is fully aware, and no particulars need be stated. Pour or five other distinguished missionaries have at different periods been sent to Calcutta, one of whom, Eev. D. Sinclair, died a year or two since. There are now, in the- absence of Dr. Duflf, three European missionaries on the ground, assisted by several native converts of distinction. More than a dozen natives aro employed as teachers in the college, having themselves been trained up in it, and become decided proficients in its various studies. Be- sides this institution, a female school is in suo- cessfal operation at Calcutta. 434 HINDOSTAN. The society has a branch station at Chin- snrah, a little distance from Calcutta, where there is also a collegiate institution, on Dr. Duff's plan, in a very flourishing condition. It was opened in 1849, and has from seven to eight hundred pupils, all boys, and these are divided into fourteen classes, according to their age and standing. The first class, of twenty- three, are of the ages of 16 to 23 and upwards, and having been in the institution from its commencement, they are far advanced in their studies. The Old and New Testaments, as in the college at Calcutta, are leading text-books, and are systematically taught for at least one hour each day. The boys in this class, says a late report, " do not believe in idolatry now ; they are full of Bible truth." Still there is no evidence that any of them have been sav- ingly converted. A female school of much promise has been established at Ohinsurah. The Calcutta mission has also branch stations a few miles distant, at Bansberiah and at Oulnah, chiefly for the purposes of education. Madras. — The society established a mission at Madras in 1835, under the labors of Eev. John Anderson, who is still at that station, with five others who have come to his aid. A prominent feature of this mission at this place, as at Calcutta and Chinsurah, is the educa- tional institution, with the Bible for a leading textbook. There are two divisions in the school, the upper or college division being taught by the missionaries and native converts ; and the lower division, both male and female, taught by an educated Bast Indian, with a number of native teachers. There are nearly 600 pupils in the institution, about 150 of whom are females. Besides the institution at Madras there are four branch schools, of which the following are the statistics as furnished in the report for 1853. The figures show the actual attendance : a ^ ■a ■s ■u 'S a a o B o 1 1^ 1^ Madras 2*76 22 203 17 Treplecane . . . 143 32 100 15 Oonjeverane . . . 221 37 66 6 Ohingleput . . . 269 53 6J Nellore 179 26 115 29 Totals . . 1,088 170 545 67 The blessing of God has rested upon these schools, conversions have been frequent, and numbers are in a process of training for the ministry and for teaching. Bombay. — A mission at this place was com- menced in 1828 by the Scottish Missionary Society, but has been for several years ™^6r the care of the Free Church. Kev. John Wil- son, D. D., has been laboring there ever since 1829, and he has been joined from time to time by other brethren. The society has there an important high school, or collegiate institu- tion, as at other places, and at the last accounta there were about 400 pupils in the school. In a letter of recent date Dr. Wilson says, — " We are striving with all our might not only to give large stores of knowledge to our pupils, but to qualify them by the culture of the native lan- guages which we have extensively studied, to communicate that knowledge to their country- men, not only by the living voice, but by the wider working press. We are raising up a body of native authors and translators." Quite a number of the pupils are Romanists, Chal- deans, Arminians, and Protestants ; and Dr. Wilson says, " It is an unspeakable advantage to them, that from the first they deal with the Bible as the word of God." Poonah. — This place is 100 miles S. B. of Bombay, and about 75 miles from the searcoast, and has been emphatically termed " the native land of the Mahrattas." It has a population of about 100,000, and is the largest military station in the Bombay presidency. The Free Church has several missionaries at this place, and besides the public preaching of the Gospel, and lectures on. the evidences of Christianity, several schools, for males and females, are effi- ciently maintained, the total number of pupils being between five and six hundred. iVagpoor.— This place is in the interior of northern Hindostan, several hundred miles N. E. of Bombay, and has a population of over 100,000. The Free Church had there at the latest date^, 1853, two missionaries, a small church, and English and vernacular schools containing about 500 children. During the year embraced in the last report six Hindoos had been baptized, one of whom was a Brah- min. The station at Nagpoor is regarded as a very important one, occupying as it does a vast section of country, where few, if any, Christian influences of a similar kind are brought to bear upon the native mind. But the opposition is sometimes very violent, both from mea in power and from the lower orders of the people. Still the missionaries to ena- bled to continue their labors, and they actually 5oZd during the last year over 5000 tracts. 1 nu.'!!?',"^ brief statements show that the l\?JnT'^}^'^''°''^. '"^ I"'^'^ ^'^ performing denartmfnrnf T* ^P^^ant agency in the aepartment of education, not only by the vast number fif TTnn+l, „fi-.4.i_ , •' "J'.i'ne vd*i number of youth,' of both se^es Vrou^^ht unde their tuition, but especially by the Son ^"d^flienco given to the Bible in aUtheTr schools More full and complete stafe icsTf the schools and churches It these station, would be desirable, but they are not furnS in the missionary journah of the societv Church ov ScoTLANo.-The Established HINDOSTAN. 435 Clmrch of Scotland has three missions in Hin- dostan, viz., at Bombay, Calcutta, and Madras. The mission at Bombay was founded by the Scottish Missionary Society in 1828, and transferred to the Ueneral Assembly in 1835. The general course of the mission has been prosperous. There is now at that station one European missionary, Kev. R. Miller, and two female assistants, supported by the Scottish Ladies' Association. The number of scholars in actual attendance upon the schools, is about 400. In three schools and an orphan asylum there are 100 girls. The Calcutta mission was established in 1830, by missionaries now adhering to the Free Church. It had in 185S, two missionaries, Messrs. John Anderson and James Ogilvie, and 26 native assistants. The number of pupils in the schools was 1305, of whom about 1100 were generally in attendance. One of the na- tive teachers of the " Institution," or high school, had been baptized during the year, but not a single pupil had been withdrawn in con- sequence. " Five years ago," say the mission- aries, " had a teacher been baptized, more than half the pupils would instantly have been re- moved. A few years ago the native newspa- pers were perpetually attacking the Institu- tion, and holding up to reprobation those pa- rents who allowed their children to attend, But this is very seldom done now ; on the con- trary, the importance of this and similar insti- tutions is very generally acknowledged by the native press." At Madias the missionaries, by the last report, 1853, were Messrs. Grant, Sheriff, Black, Walker, and Francis Christian. The number of pupils in the schools had been till quite recently, 400 boys and 200 girls. But the number had been diminished in consequence of a report that some of the children were likely to be baptized, and the number of boys was reduced to 282, wliile the number of girls was increased to 220. At the time of the disruption of the Church of Scotland, all the missionaries then connected with the establishment, adhered to the Free Church. Irish Presbyterian Mission. — 'ITie Irish Presbyterian Church established a mission in Hindostan in 1841. The missionaries were Jas. Glasgow, E. Montgomery, J. A. Speers, Adam Glasgow, and J. McKee. They occupied three stations, viz., Eajkote, Gogo, and Surat, situ- ated in north-western Hindostan, the two for- mer in Guzerat, and the latter on the opposite side of the Gulf of Cambay. Immediately upon entering the field these missionaries were enabled, by the aid of the London Society and the cooperation of government agents, to se- cure ample mission premises, and to erect suit- able buildings. They organized a church of 21 members, and entered upon the usual course of missionary labor, as preaching, schools, &c. They now have four stations, three mis- sionaries, and three native assistants. Ver- nacular services are held on the Sabbath and week-days. There are schools for boys and girls, with an average attendance of 550 scholars. Prayer-meetings are maintained, and there have been several baptisms. General Baptist Missionary Society. — The General Baptists of England commenced their mission in Hindostan in 1822. They chose for their field that part of the country called Orissa, or Ootkul K'hand, supposed to be the ancient country of the Or, or Oriya tribe of Hindoos, and lying between 19° and 23° N. lat. and 84° and 88° E. long. The boundaries of Orissa have been changed at difierent periods, but as now generally under- stood it is a long narrow strip of land, extend- ing from Midnapore in the north to a few miles below Ganjam in the south, and from the shores of the Bay of Bengal in the east to the vast range of mountains in the west, com- prising a tract of about 300 miles in length, and from 20 to 170 miles in breadth. The principal towns in Orissa are Cuttack, Bala- sore, Jajepoor, Pooree, Midnapore, Ganjam, and Berhampore. Cuttack was the first place occupied by this society as a station, and the first missionaries were Rev. Wm. Bampton and Eev. James Peggs, who arrived in Feb. 1822. They were soon joined by Eev. Mr. Lacey and wife. They commenced at once the study of the lan- guage in which they were to make known the Gospel to the benighted Orissans, and in the mean time organized schools, and taught the heathen as they were able. Preaching in English on the Sabbath was practiced from the commencement of the mission, and an in- fant church was soon formed, and three con- venient chapels were fitted up. Thousands of tracts and Gospels were also distributed dur- ing the first year or two. Pooree. — In Sept. 1823, Mr. and Mrs. Bamp- ton removed to Pooree, or Juggernaut, a little to the N. E. of Cuttack. It was one of the strongest holds of Satan in all India, for there the idol Juggernaut had his temple, making the whole region a modern Golgotha, and causing desolation and wo of the most appal- ling nature. The journals of the missionaries at Pooree are filled with the most shocking and hearWckening details of the idolatry, des- titution and wretchedness of the vast multi- tudes who thronged to the temple of Jugger- naut. On one occasion, June, 1825, 250,000 pilgrims were estimated to be in the immedi- ate neighborhood of the temple, a large por- tion of them without shelter, and without de cent food or clothing, and dying off in the most frightful manner, of famine, cholera-mor- bus, and other diseases. Says one of the mis- sionaries, " In every street, corner and open space, in fact wherever you turned your eyes, the dead and dying met your view. At one 436 HINDOSTAN. time I counted upwards of 60 dead acd dying, from the temple down to the lower end of the hospital, omitting the sick that had not much life. At a corner opposite to the hospital, on a spot of ground twelve feet square, I counted ten dead, and five who were sick and nearly dead. This was the case while there were several sets of men in active employ carrying out and burying the dead. Tou will now per- haps reflect, that if the streets were thus crowded, what must the various Golgothas be ? I visited but one, and that was between the town and the principal entrance. I saw things that I shall never forget. The small river there was quite glutted with corpses, and the wind having drifted them together, they formed a, complete mass of putrifying flesh. They also lay upon the ground in heaps, and the dogs and vultures were able to do but little towards consuming them." At a little later date the same writer adds, " Pages would not be sufficient to detail the miseries of the de- luded worshipers of Juggernaut. The poor pilgrims were to be seen in every direction, ' dead and in the agonies of ^death, lying by fives, tens, twenties, and in some instances there were hundreds to be seen. In one place Mr. Lacey counted upwards of 90, and in another Mr. Bampton counted 140. In the hospital I believe I have seen 30 dead at once, and num- bers more in the agonies of death, and even the living using the dead bodies for pillows." It was amid such scenes as these that the missionaries sought to diffiise the knowledge of the true God, and of a pure Christianity,' — a hopeless attempt, except in reliance upon the almighty and regenerating Spirit of God. This dependence was deeply felt ; and in circum- stances fitted most powerfully to impress such a truth, one of the missionaries writes : " The omnipotence of God is to me an encouraging consideration. In the power of God is all my hope. If I had to address any advocates for ministerial power to convert sinners, or for the power of the Gospel apart from Divine influ- ence, I would say, come to Juggernaut ; and if that do not change your minds you are incor- rigible." Again, the same missionary says, " 1 am daily more convinced of the need of the Holy Spirit. I have seen the people confound- ed in their gods ; I have heard them acknowl- edge the infinite superiority of Christ ; I have seen them much affected, yea, in tears, under the preaching of the Gospel ; but alas, what is all this without the Holy Spirit to change their hearts, to enlighten their minds, and to render the word effectual ?" The constant recurrence of such language in the journals of these devoted laborers, shows how scriptural were their views on fundamen- tal points, and how exactly the General Bap- tists accorded in their belief, with the mission- aries of other evangelical societies in the vast field of India. That they should labor with success, even amid the desolations of Jugger- naut, was to be expected, both from their own spirit and the promises of God. Accordingly we find, at the end of four years, that they had gathered schools in Cuttach and Pooree, com- prising 380 boys and 148 girls. Many ot these children were able to read the Gospel with far cility ; and besides the advantage to the child- ren, these schools became chapels for the de- claration of the Gospel to the heathen, like the " school of Tyrannus," in which " Paul dis- puted daily." £alasore.—ln the early part of 1827, the so- ciety established a third mission at Balasore, a town situated about 110 miles S.W. of Calcutta, and containing about 10,000 people. Eev. Mr. Sutton, who had labored some time at Cuttack, was the first missionary at the place. In 1832 the society say in their Report : " Ten years ago our first missionaries opened their heavenly commission in broken accents on the plains of Hindostan ; and there Oriya converts have been gathered to the Saviour, and Hindoos now proclaim the unsearchable riches of Christ. The grand contest between light and darkness in one of the darkest regions of India, has thus commenced. Even in the land of the modern Moloch of the Bast, Satan no longer maintains an unmolested empire." It is a fact entitled to distinct and honorable mention, that a field so dark, the very heart of Satan's empire in Hindostan, and a region that had never been penetrated by a single missionary, was chosen by the General Baptists as their place of toil and conflict. They entered into no man's labors, and counted neither ease nor life dear, that they might preach the Gos- pel to the most benighted and wretched hear then on earth. The report for 1832 mentions the death of Mr. Bampton, one of the first mis- sionaries of the society in India. The same report notices the suspension of missionary ope- rations at Balasore, on account of a deficiency of laborers. The town had then but recently been visited with an inundation, in which about 20,000 persons perished. ' From Pooree Mr. Sutton writes this year : " The opposition in the way of obscene abuse runs very high. Oh, the abominable expres- sions shouted out against me this evening. It would frighten half England to hear them." Persecution was very bitter, especially towards those who exchanged Hindooism for Christi- anity, and of this class there were some very striking instances. To alleviate the trials of ,t '=°"r^^*8 ^id render them helpers of each other, the plan was adopted of settling them together m the vicinity of Cuttack, and form- ing of them a Christian village. Being out- casts whom none would assist, they could thus enjoy sympathy and aid, could assemble con- veniently forworship, and would also form a body of Christians, whose example would be salutary. The place of their assemblao-p wnc: named Christianapoor. By this time several native preachers had HINDOSTAN 437 been raised up, of whom the most distinguish- ed were Qunga Dhor and Kama Chundra ; GuQga especially was regarded as a powerful preacher and an astounding witness against his idolatrous brethren. His illustrations were often exceedingly bold and impressive. For example : when wishing to show how the Gos- pel would spread, he said — " Suppose we were enveloped in complete darkness ; but suppose it was ascertained that there was fire in the house of a certain individual in yonder bazar, some one would soon run and light his lamp from that fire ; others would light their lamps at his, and others again would light their lamps from them, and so on, till the light would spread all over Outtack. Thus it is with the true light of religion. All is thick darkness, but in the padre's (missionary's) house there is fire ; I have lighted my lamp at his fire ; you will light yours from mine, and others again will light theirs from you. Thus the true light will become universal." Of Eama it was also testified : " He is conscien- tious, humble, teachable, and zealous. As a preacher, he is a thunderer. Sometimes he almost makes me tremble ; and the effect on natives, when he feels well and can get a hear- ing, is very powerful." Kama's wife was the earliest object of his solicitude. He con- stantly taught her, and sought to impress upon her the truths of Christianity, and his efforts were blessed. She became a well-informed and decided Christian, and was a great help and comfort to her husband. In this year (1832) the plan was adopted by the brethren at Outtack, of establishing coun- try bungalows and circuits around some cen- tral point, at a considerable distance'from the principal station. They chose Bhogepoor as the centre, a place eight miles from Outtack, surrounded with villages and markets to a great extent. It was the quarter from which most of the converts had come, and where great inquiry was made in regard to Chris- tianity. Prom the commencement of the mission at Outtack, the missionaries labored to promote religion among the European residents, preach- ing twice to them every Sabbath. These efforts were blessed, and many of the govern- ment ofiScers and soldiers became decidedly pious. " At the communion service," says the missionary, " our poor dark native brethren and sisters are ranged round the same table and on the same seats with the civil and mili- tary officers of government." Thus the na- tives were led to see that their rulers acknowl- edged the obligations of Christianity. In 1833 an important object was supposed to be gained for Pooree and foir all India, viz., the abolition of the Pilgrim Tax. Hitherto avarice had been joined to Satanic influence in drawing pilgrims to Juggernaut. All the worldly interests of the most abandoned, im- pure, and depraved people were involved in the worship of this idol. By this craft they had their wealth, and of course they opposed every possible obstacle to the efforts of the missionaries. The sanction which the English government had lent to idol worship was also an insuperable difficulty. But now the govern- ment passed an act, instructing its officers in India to terminate the guilty support of Hin- doo idolatry at Juggernaut and other temples. , The order, however, remained a dead letter, the East India Company refusing to carry out the instructions it had received. As the con- nection of the British government with idola- try is an important topic, and one with which the General Baptists came into closer conflict than any other missionaries, a somewhat full statement of the facts may be desirable. In their report for 1837, the Society say : " It appears that the servants of the Com- pany, even when professedly Christians, are required to attend heathen and Mohammedan festivals for purposes of respect; that in some cases they are required to present offer- ings and do homage to idols ; that the poor na- tives are compelled, without compensation, to attend heathen festivals to draw the idols' cars ; and that European officers exercise so entirely the management and control of vari- ous temples, that no expense can be incurred but under their direction ; and, horrible ! not even the prostitutes connected with the temple can be entertained or discharged with- out their concurrence I And those who thus degrade themselves lower than the managers of a house of ill-fame, are high-minded English gentlemen! To what infamy will not some men stoop through the accursed lust of gold 1 By ihis atrocious system has the British gov- ernment in India been disgraced ; and the Indian empire of Britain has been exposed to the frown of that holy God who abhors idola- try and those who participate in the abomina- tion." Glaring and awful as was the position of Great Britain in this respect, apologies for inaction were found from year to year, till 1840, when the Society record with great joy, that " the wicked Pilgrim Tax, which in its results has tended so greatly to add to the celebrity of Juggernaut, is fit length abolished." Strong hopes were now entertained that the great popularity of Juggernaut would decline, from the loss of one of its main supports ; but these expectations proved fallacious. The Pilgrim Tax had indeed been abolished, but the government, in other forms, still extended its support and patronage to the bloody Mo- loch of the East. From year to year the mis- sionarias remonstrated, and their efforts were seconded by some members of Parliament and of the East India Company ; yet in 1846 the Orissa conference of missionaries had occasion to adopt the following resolutions in regard to this enormous evil : "Resolved, That as a very general opinion is 438 HINDOSTAN. prevalent that the government of India has abandoned its connection with the temple of Juggernaut, we deem it obligatory on us as a missionary conference, assembled in the pro- vince of Orissa, to state that such is not the case. It is indeed true that the government has restored certain lands to the proprietors of the temple, and abolished the Pilgrim Tax ; they have, moreover, ceased to receive the presents and other emoluments connected with the idol : and thus far they have done well ; but the government do still, in fact, though in another form, contribute more largely than before to the support of the idol, inasmuch as they have not only relinquished the lands and other emoluments of the temple from which they formerly received a revenue, but have added an annual donation of 35,000 rupees, and allow the proprietors of the temple to re- ceive all presents and levy any contributions they please on the pilgrims, so that a much larger source of revenue than ever is now open to the rajah and other interested parties. " We do, therefore, consider the continuation of this yearly grant to Juggernaut as most anti-Christian in itself, and an act of partiality towards this idol, which is inconsistent with the neutral position the government professes to sustain towards all systems of religion in India." These facts and statements are brought for- ward in this place in the belief that they may be needed both in England and America to remove the impression that the British govern- ment in India has withdrawn its direct and active support from the worship of Jugger- naut. Such is not the fact. In their report for 1852, the missionaries say, " It is much to be lamented that the government grant in support of this idolatry is not yet withdrawn." At the missionary conference held at Cuttack in the year last named, the brethren protested against this crying evil in the following terms : "Resolved, As the donation to Juggernaut has not been discontinued, and as we have wit^ nessed through another year the wasting and demoralizing effects of the system which it sustains, we are constrained to repeat our solemn and earnest remonstrance against this iniquitous support of idolatry." As it is due to the friends of missions every where that this subject should be understood, and certainly not unjust to the Indo-British government, and as it comes up in no other connection in the present work, the precise responsibilty of the G-overnment in the support of idolatry may be given in another form of statement adopted by the missionaries and an- swering to the facts as still existing. They say : " The rulers of India still continue, by the payment of the large annual grant from the public treasury, to support this wicked sys- tem, (the worship of Juggernaut.) Nor is this all ; a pension amounting to nearly 500 rupees is allowed to a byraggee (public servant or agent) on account of daily food to the idol ; and another sum of 2,666 rupees is paid to another byraggee, that he may distribute the holy food among the starving pilgrims." These astounding facts the Hindoos have the sagacity to turn to their own account. When rebuked for their idolatry by the mis- sionary, they reply, " Why don't you teach your own people to worship Jesus Christ? They mind Juggernaut. They give a large sum of money to support his worship. If Jug- gernaut were not true, would the government give money for his support ? Ask that bab- bler (missionary) why the government gives 35,000 a year to Juggernaut if he be not true." These, say the missionaries, are some of the forms in which the British donation to Jug- gernaut ,is mentioned by the heathen. The fact of its being given is universally known, they say, and only one reason for the bestow- ment is ever mentioned by the idol worshipers, and that is that " Juggernaut is true, and therefore the wise and mighty of the laud con- tribute to his support." The British govern- ment still persists in its open and efBcient pat- ronage of idolatry in its most shocking and degrading form, in defiance of the fact, stated by the missionaries, over and over again, that the government grant is the principal support of Juggernaut, that more human life is sacri- ficed at the shrine of this idol than by the sut- tee and the sword, and that the efforts of the missionaries to enlighten and save the besotted and wretched masses who annually visit Poo- ree, are neutralized and bafiSed by British in- terference. In their report for 1853 the Orissa missionaries protest with the same earnestness as before against this great abomination. They say, " Our mission hag now reached the thirtieth year of its history, and consequently of its contest'with this gigantic evil. During this long period we have seen the ground of controversy continually shifting, but the con- troversy itself continually renewed. In vain have the various objections been met by the most conclusive refutation ; ever and anon some new friend of the idol, oblivious of past arguments or imperfectly acquainted with the real facts of the ease, has come forward with some new caveat." Thus, to this hour, the mis- sionaries and the Christian world are doomed to disappointment, and to the humiliation and grief of seei^ig the most cruel, corrupt, and shocking form of heathen worship known on earth, supported by the money and influence ol an enlightened and Christian nation. It is a singular fact, moreover, that the devoted mis- sionaries of this society have occasion to ar- raign the government as the persevering patron and supporter of idolatry, at the same time that they speak with the highest satisfaction ot its generous and noble eflbrts for the sup- pression of human sacrifices among the mur- derous Khnnds. It is fo be regreiterl that a government which is doing so much to en- HESbOSTAN. 439 conrage Christian missions should he any way involved in the support of Idolatry. For several years past no missionaries have resided permanently at Pooree ; but the mis- sionaries from several stations have uniform- ly visited this place at the annual festivals, for the purpose of distributing tracts and Scrip- tures , among the pilgrims, and instructing them by preaching and conversation wherever hear- ers could be gathered. The Balasore station was continued till 1838, when it was suspended, and has since remained without a missionary. Bcrhampore, the most southern station of the General Baptists in Orissa, has been steadily and eMciently sustained. It is an Important post, and enjoys the labors of two missionaries and their wives. The people are worshipers of a most detestable idol, and of course are in a state of extreme degradation. A proverb of their own says, "As is the king so are the subjects ; as is the god so'are the worshipers." There are three native preachers at this place, in whom the missionaries have great confidence. Two asylums, one for boys and one for girls, are accomplishing great good. They originat- ed in a desire to provide for the children of converted natives, which could not be done except on the mission premises. To these were added such children as were made over to the missionaries, from time to time, by their parents in a season of famine. Some also were picked up in a state of starvation after being abandoned to death. More recently another class were added, viz. ; children rescued from sacrifice among the Khunds, an extremely savage people inhabiting the Goomsur moun- tains in the neighborhood of Berhampore, and who were in the habit of sacrificing great num- bers of children to their stupid and bloody goddess. Through the combined efforts of the government agent, J. P. Prye, Esq., and the missionaries, great numbers of these poor vic- tims have been rescued from the sacrificial knife, and put into the asylums. Mr. Prye has a.lso greatly aided in the establishment of schools among the Khunds themselves, and a rescued Khund, brought up in the asylum, is now superintendent of those schools. It was stated in the report for 1849, that Mr. Prye had been instrumental of rescuing one hundred and six victims from the horrid death to which they were doomed. In the same report the following deeply interesting particulars are given of this before almost unheard of people : " The last full moon had been fixed upon for a very great sacrifice, in anticipation of the agent's arrival, (it is the time for sacrificing through the whole sacrificing country,) but he was happily in the midst of them twelve days before the appointed time, and the fearful waste of human life was mercifully prevented. The torture with which the revolting rite is performed in this part of the Khund country exceeds, if it be possible, the worst that has been heard of anywhere. The victim is sur- rounded by a crowd of half intoxicated K.hunds, and is dragged round some open space, when the savages, with loud shouts, rush on the vic- tim, cutting the living flesh piece-meal from the bones, till nothing remains but the head and bowels, which are left untouched. Death has, by this time, released the unhappy victim from his torture ; the head and bowels are then burnt, and the ashes mixed with grain. The efforts of the government to suppress the abhorred rites of human sacrifice and female infanticide among these barbarous people, and in these hills and jungles, are in a high degree creditable to its character. The revolting rites of sacrifice and female infanticide have prevail- ed from time immemorial in the impenetrable jungles and inaccessible hills of the Khund country. No one can tell where they origi- nated, or compute the frightful waste they have occasioned, but it is estimated that, al- lowing these bloody rites to have prevailed from the commencement of the Christian era, as they were found to prevail when the district was discovered a few years since, on a moder- ate computation the awful aggregate would exceed three millions. We have thought, and talked, and prayed about the Khunds, and God has answered our supplications, though in a way we did not expect. Who can calculate the results of so many being brought under Christian infiuence ? " A late report states that the brethren at Berhampore have succeeded in obtaining a considerable quantity of fertile land, for a new Christian settlement. The experiment of thus providing for the honorable maintenance of the increasing Christian community, promises to be highly successful. A chapel and mission bungalow have been built for this village, chiefly by the liberality of Mr. Prye, and an- other government officer. The precise number in the church and in the schools at Berham- pore is not stated in the recent reports. The report for 1853 contains some deeply interest- ing accounts of the Khund boys and girls in the asylums. Pourteen of these rescued chil- dren were this year baptized, after giving evi- dence of sincere conversion to Christ. They have been, like thousands of others, stolen from their parents in early childhood and sold to the Khunds for sacrifice, and but for the efforts of the missionaries and government agents, their flesh would have been distributed piece-meal in the fields, instead of coming around the Lord's table to commemorate his love. An older girl of this class was married this year to a young man in the asylum, and both went as teachers to their native hills. Pour other young men, who had been rescued and trained in the asylum, also returned to the Khund hills as teachers. During this year. Col. Campbell, the government agent for the suppression of human sacrifices, rescued 120 victims. His account ot the rescue of one pretty little girl is full of tender interest. He uo HESTDOSTAN. had received information by an anonymous letter that a sacrifice was to take place about thirty miles from their encampment. A party were sent to prevent the sacrifice, and by tra- veling all night through the jungle they reach- ed the village mentioned at day-dawn, and found everything ready for the murderous offering. In a short time the people began to assemble, but they were soon surprised by the appearance of the Colonel's party, who made the chief men prisoners, and brought the little victim away. She was ready bound for sacri- fice, and had the detachment been two hours later, would have been cruelly cut to pieces. She had been sold for this horrid death by her own father. The chiefs and head men of the Tillages have now signed an agreement to abandon the inhuman practice. Cuttack, the earliest station of the Society, has been uninterruptedly maintained, and is still prosperous. The mission church numbers 125. There are two asylums for boys and girls, conducted on the same plan as those at Berhampore. The average number in these asylums, as last reported, was 105, of whom 56 were rescued from a bloody death on the hills of Goomsur, Boad, and Chinna Kinedy. Some of the remainder are the orphan children of idolatrous parents, and a large number are the children of native Christians, left fatherless or motherless. Bev. Mr. Sutton and his wife, from Cuttack station, visited the United States about twenty years since, and after laboring much to promote a spirit of Christian missions among their friends, returned again to their chosen field. The two native ministers, of whom mention has already been made, viz., Gunga Dhor and Eama Chundra, have con- tinued to be very I'aithful, and important help- ers to the missionaries. Honorable mention is also made of two other native preachers. An interesting sketch of these four individuals, with fine specimens of their style of preach- ing, will be found in the report of the Society for 1852. Midnapore, a considerable town on the bor- ders of Orissa and Bengal, and about f miles from Calcutta, was determined upon as a sta- tion by the Mission Conference in 1836, and Mr. and Mrs. Brooks subsequently removed to that place. A neat chapel was built, a con- gregation collected, and the first Hindoo con- verts soon gathered in. Means were also found for the extensive distribution of Testa^ ments, and other religious books and tracts. But though the mission promised well, it was determined to remove Mr. Brooks to Calcutta, for the purpose of establishing there a branch mission, and after three or four years Midna- pore was dropped from the Society's reports. Gamjam, situated between the Berhampore and Pooree districts, was occupied by a mis- sionary in 1840. It was once a very import- ant and populous European settlement; but, in (consequence of the rapid growth of Cal- cutta, and the prevalence of the Gamjam fever, so called, but which was probably the plague, it was forsaken by the Europeans, and the na- tive population was much reduced. A.t the time of entering upon the mission here, it was believed to be a healthy place, and prepara- tions were made for permanent labors; but after some two years it was found to be unsafe to remain there, and the station was given up. Khunditta, not a great distance from Poo- ree, and near the great Juggernaut road, is first mentioned as a station in the report for 1840. But no European missionary has yet been stationed there, though the Society has been often and strongly urged to send one. Much good has been accomplished, however, by native laborers, in proof of which many in- teresting facts might be stated. The station is still continued. Piplee, near Pooree, and a place through which nearly all of Juggernaut's pilgrims pass, attracted the special attention of the mission- aries in 1847, and arrangements were soon made for commencing operations there. In 1849 two niissionaries were sent to this sta- tion, and since that time a church of twenty members has been gathered, and quite a num- ber of the natives have embraced Christianity. Deeply interesting statements, in regard to some of the converts, appear in the journals of the brethren at this place. Choga is the only remaining station of the Society in India to be noticed. It is described as a secluded and beautiful spot, six miles from Cuttack, and its history is one of extreme interest. It appears that in 1833 two in- quirers came to Cuttack from one of the vil- lages of Choga, having heard much of Chris- tianity, and listened to the missionaries, both on their journeys and in Cuttack. The Gos- pel had deeply impressed them ; but they felt unwilling to give up all for its sake. The village to which they belonged was one of sixteen exempted from the East India Company's regulaiions, and did not enjoy the benefit of British laws, and therefore tfie con- verts were subject to confiscation, banishment, and every abuse. But they at length sent a message to the Cuttack missionaries to come and see them, and the interview ended in their deciding for Christ. They were baptized, and in a moment lost caste, were stripped of every possession, and persecuted in the bitterest manner. But the missionaries visited the rajah, and persuaded him to allow the converts to remain, if they would build houses outside the heathen village. This gave strength to other inquirers to come out and profess Christianity, and soon quite a number of families were gathered together. The work went on gradu- ally, and in 1843 one of the missionaries, Mr. Lacey, secured a large piece of ground for a Christian village. It was a hill in the middle of a jungly plain, with high mountains on one side, and was the favorite resort of tigers and HmDOStAN. 441 thieves. A missionary, in describing the place, says : " Crowded cities have generally been chosen by missionaries as the scene of their labors ; but here is a secluded mount, far away from the busy haunts of men, where the tiger and the leopard and the bear have remained unmolested for ages, on which the God of mis- sions collects from the rude agriculturists of the district a people for himself. It is cheer- ing, indeed, in the midst of such a dense jun- gle, to see a beautiful chapel and village ; and, as the Sabbath dawns to see the Christians busily preparing on every hand for the solemn services of the sanctuary, and to hear the voice of prayer and praise, from a spot which only a few years since was darkness — dense darkness, the residence of the goddess of thieves." The village church of Choga, in 1853, consisted of sixty-four members, besides eighty-five nominal Christians. They are industrious, strict ob- servers of the Sabbath, and the colony is a source of great satisfaction and encourage- ment to the missionaries. The foregoing statements furnish a compre- hensive view of the General Baptist missions in Hindostan, the most interesting in some respects of any in that vast field of idolatry. But the reports are defective in respect to the details needed for a statistical table, and none can be furnished that would be of value. [The preceding portion of the article on Hindostan was prepared by Eev. E. D. MOOKE.] Free-Will Baptist Missionary Society. — ^The first two missionaries of this Society, Messrs. Noyes and Phillips, with their wives, spent their first six months in India as labor- ers in connection with the English General Baptist missionaries. Mr. Phillips superin- tended their bazar schools at Balasore, and Mr. Noyes was in the English mission school at Cuttack. At the expiration of that time, it was mutually agreed that these brethren should enter a separate field, and Sumhhulpore, the capital of a district of the same name, was selected. It lies on the Mahanadi river, 250 miles above Cuttack, and contains some 15,000 inhabitants. It is the residence of the rajah, and situated in the midst of a populous country. The only European family in the place showed the missionaries every possible kindness, and afforded them much assistance. During the several months spent in building and preparing for a permanent location, the missionaries did what they could in preaching and distributing books. Six starving children were given them, and with them commenced a boarding school system which has been use- ful to the mission. Before they were settled in their new abodes, the missionaries one after another were brought very low by sickness. They were almost destitute of the comforts of life, and their hastily-built houses could not shelter them from the scorching heat. Hav- ing no physician ov nurses, they assisted each other as well as their debility would permit, Mrs. Noyes on one occasion leaving her sick bed to bleed her husband. After burying a child, and narrowly escaping death themselves, they revived so far as to be put on board a boat, and were floated down to Cuttack. Mr. and Mrs. Phillips were called to bury their in- fant child, which she followed in a few days, and was laid in the grave by her desolate hus- band, attended by the six small children who were her scholars. He was immediately taken sick, and when hope had nearly fled, he too was carried on board a boat, being almost unconscious, and was taken to Cuttack. A few weeks' residence at this place, where they received the most kind attentions, restored the health of the invalids ; but it was decided that they ought not to risk their lives by a return to Sumbhulpore. Balasore having been recently vacated by the return to England of Eev. Mr. Goadly, a General Baptist mission- ary who had previously occupied that station, by the advice of the missionaries at Cuttack, Messrs. Noyes and Phillips located there, and commenced their labors in 1841. Balasore is the capital of the district of the same name. It is a small river port situated on the great pilgrim road leading from the northern provin- ces to Pooree, and lies on the river Brundhar balanga, about eight miles from the sea. It contains about 14,000 inhabitants, and about 150 coasting vessels are owned in the place, which are mostly engaged in taking salt to Calcutta. The climate is comparatively cool and healthy. At Balasore the missionaries formed the nucleus of their boarding-schools with the six native children given to them in Sumbhulpore. Others were rescued from death in time of famine, and the number of scholars soon increased to fifty. In 1850 there were seventy-nine merias or Khund children in the two boarding-schools at this station, with a large number of other children who, like themselves, were kidnapped and kept for the purpose of being offered as sacrifices, in accordance with a horrible custom that pre- vails among the Khund tribes. These merias, as their captors call them, were rescued from their intended immolators by some of the offi- cers of the British government, who commit the rescued victims to the missionaries in the country, by whom they are brought up and educated. A considerable number of the res- cued ones have died of cholera, but the survi- vors are doing well. In 1840, Rev. 0. R. Bacheler and wife were located in Balasore, soon after which ill-health compelled Rev. E. Noyes to return to his na- tive land. Mrs. Bacheler left the station for America in 1845, but died a few days after commencing her journey. Rev. R. Cooley and wife. Miss Lovina Crawford, and Rev. B. B. Smith and wife now occupy this station ; but on account of the ill-health of his present wife, Rev. Mr. Bacheler has been compelled to 442- HINDOSTAN. return with, her and their children to this country. All the missionaries of the Society have been obliged sometimes to give medicine to the sick and dying heathen _; but in conse- quence of having studied medicine previously to his going to India, Rev. Mr. Bacheler de- voted more time and attention to this depart- ment of usefulness than could be consistently done by the other brethren of the mission. Through his efforts a dispensary has been established at Balasore, which, during _ ten years past, has been extensively patronized. All applicants for medicine have been supplied as fully as the means furnished would admit, and numerous surgical operations have been performed. In 1850, Mr. Bacheler treated 2,407 cases, besides performing 126 operations in surgery. As the patients were mostly poor, the medicines and services were bestowed gra- tuitously. These labors for the physical com- fort of destitute and suffering idolators were performed at times set apart for such services, so as not to allow the duties of the physician to interfere with those of the missionary.^ On an average he devoted only an hour daily to his patients. He also formed a Medical Class of the native converts, to whom he lectured daily. The students, by taking copious notes of his lectures, were furnished with a compe- tent guide in treating the ordinary diseases of the country, which, if they are studious and industrious, will afford them a comfortable support, and make them respected among their countrymen. Twelve young men have attend- ed this class, six of whom have completed the course of two years' study, and are now useful in their calling. Mr. Bacheler's medical la- bors were considered beneficial to his mission- ary work, as they secured the confidence and esteem of many to whom he could otherwise have had no access. Early in 1840, Eev. Mr. Phillips took a por- tion of the boarding-school and some of the native converts at Balasore, and went with them to Jellasore, where he commenced a new station. Jellasore is situated on the great pilgrim road, previously named in this article, thirty miles north of Balasore, and in the midst of a densely populated country, one hundred and twelve miles from Calcutta. It is rather a collection of villages than a compact town. Nominally the district in which Jellasore is located belongs to the province of Bengal, but its inhabitants are mostly Oriyas, numbering about half a million of souls. There is but one European family within thirty miles of the station, and the missionary has toiled alone more than thirteen years. During this period he buried his second wife, who was eminently prepared for usefulness in the boarding-school. A day school and a boarding-school have been in operation a considerable portion of the time at this station ; and some four years ago a hospital was established there, mostly for the benefit of heathen pilgrims, and large numbers of the sick have received medical aid. The annual number of patients has usually varied from four hundred to five hundred. The hos- pital was erected for the benefit of the poor ; and like the dispensary at Balasore, it has been sustained by subscriptions in India. The natives have given small sums for its support, but the principal contributions were made by- Europeans. Some six months after his arrival in India, in 1844, Eev. J. C. Dow located in Midnapore. It is the capital of a district in the province of Bengal, and contains some 20,000 inhabit- ants, and the district is peopled by about one and a half millions of Bengalis. The town is about seventy-five miles from Calcutta, and the climate is unusually healthy. A short time before Mr. Dow located in Midnapore, the place was vacated by the General Baptist mis- sionaries. Three years of excessive toil broke him down, when he was compelled to return to his native land a confirmed invalid. There are some twenty European families in the town, who would do considerable towards the sup- port of a missionary, were one sent there. Three times has this promising station been occupied by different missionary societies, and as many times has it been abandoned for want of laborers. In 1852, a new interest was commenced at a place called Santipur, which is about six miles from Jellasore, and near several large villages. Two hundred acres of land have been secured, on which a Christian settlement has been commenced, especially for the benefit of the Santals. There is on the lot a small Santal village, and there are others near it. Some thirty or forty acres of the 'land are un- der cultivation, and the rest is covered with jungle or brush wood. The settlement is re- garded as the outer court of the temple, into which Gentiles may be admitted. It is de- signed to afford refuge and protection to inqui- rers, while in their transition state from hea- thenism to Christianity, where the Santals may be secure from the interference and op- pression of the landholders, and native Chris- tians enjoy the fruit of their labors, and wor- ship God unmolested. Though the heathen are permitted to settle on the premises, rules are adopted forbidding all idolatrous practices, enjoining moral duties, the observance of the Sabbath, attendance at worship, &c. A Sabbath-school is held every Lord's-day afternoon, and a day school has been opened for the heathen children, from the adjacent villages and the children belonging to the star tion. It is designed to be in part a farming community, and several of the native Chris- tians are already cultivating small lots for agri- cultural purposes. During his residence in Jellasore, Rev. Mr. Phillips has labored considerably for the bene- fit of the Santals, spending what time he could HINDOSTAN. M3 spare from his other duties, in visiting- their villages, acquiring their language, getting a few of their children into school, and giving the people a written language. Having no colleague he has been able to do but little in this interesting and important work, but what he has done has not been lost. Several of the Santal youth were brought into a school which he established in Jellasore, where they were taught their own language, reduced to system, and written for the first time in a book. But little religious concern was ob- served among them, till 1847, when some of the scholars began to manifest a deep interest in spiritual things. Several of them soon ob- tained a hope in Christ, two of whom promise to be useful to the mission and their country- men, either as preachers or school teachers. Though alone and engaged much of the time in Oriya labors, Mr. Phillips has been enabled to translate the Gospel by Matthew into San- tal, and is now engaged in translating Mark into the same language. He has written a Santal primer of 24 pp. ; a sequel to it of 44 pp. ; and an Introduction to the Santal lan- guage, comprising a grammar, reading lessons, and a vocabulary of nearly five thousand words. It contains 190 pp. He has also written a tract and geography in Oriya. Rev. Mr. Noyes prepared an Oriya tract and Bev. Mr. Bachelor a medical guide, both in Oriya and Bengali. These are the principal works that the missionaries have published. Mrs. Phillips has recently arrived in this country. She left Orissa with her children, partly with a view of educating them here, and partly on account of her ill-health. Her husband de- signs to follow his family in a year or two, and after recruiting himself, return with part of them to his present field. Nothing occurring to prevent it, he will then engage more ear- nestly in the work of translating the Scrip- tures into Santal. Appropriations are ex- pected from the American and Foreign Bible Society to aid him in the effort. The following account of the results of the mission is taken mostly from Eev. 0. R. Bacheler's work; entitled Hindooism and Christianity in Orissa : 1. The Gospel has been preached as exten- sively as two or three missionaries, assisted by four native preachers, could do it in a district inhabited by more than a million souls. A good impression has been made ; the minds of the people have been in a measure prepared for the reception of the Gospel ; and obstacles to the work that at first seemed to be almost insurmountable, have begun to disappear. 2. The Bible, either as a whole or in sepa- rate parts, has been extensively circulated. Good has been done in this way, and also by the extensive scattering of religious tracts among the people, multitudes of whom have read what was put into their hands. 3. Some seventy-five young men, women, and children are receiving a religions educa- tion in the boarding-schools, where several of the most prominent members, preachers, phy- sicians and teachers have been instructed, who will exert an important influence in Orissa's evangelization. 4. Pour native preachers have been raised up, who are qualified for extensive usefulness in this great work. 5. Two churches have been organized, both numbering some forty-five members, gathered from the darkness and degradation of heathen- ism. Some who were converted at the stations have left and united with other churches, and others have been removed to their heavenly rest. TABULAB VIEW. STATIONS. o h n 1° Alisslonarics and Assistant Missionaries. i Scholars. Ministers. Lay Teachers and others. Boarding. Day. 1 i 1 i 1 American. "A i 1 1 1 1 •i 1 Obissa. Sumbhulpore * . . Balasore Jellasore Midnapore * . . . . Santipur Totals .... 1836 1837 1840 1844 1852 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 30 17 36 8 29 60 13 115 13 13 3 1 3 47 44 29 73 151 ' Unoccupied. Eev. E. Hutchins. *44 EINDOSTAN. American Presbyterian Missions. — The missions of the Presbyterian Board in India were commeneed in 1833. The first missionaries were the Rev. Messrs. William Reed and John 0. Lowrie, and "their wives, who arrived at Calcutta in October of that year. They were sent out by the Western Foreign Missionary So- ciety, with instructions to select a station in some part of the northern provinces, if this should appear to be expedient, after consulting with Christian friends in that city ; otherwise, they were at liberty to proceed to any other part of India, or of the Eastern world. They were greatly favored in obtaining information and counsel from several gentlemen who were largely acquainted with the country, particu- larly the Rev. William H. Pearce, of the Eng- lish Baptist mission, the Rev. Alexander Dutf, D. D., of the Scotch mission, and Sir Charles Trevelyan, K. 0. B., one of the Secretaries in the political deportment of the government, who had himself resided in the Upper Provinces. As the result of these inquiries, it was con- sidered advisable to proceed, as originally con- templated, to the remote north-western part of the country ; and the city of Lodiana, on the river Sutlej, one of the tributaries of the Indus, was chosen as the station to be first occupied. The principal reasons for choosing the Upper Provinces as their general field of labor, were these : The urgent need of missionaries and teachers in that part of the country ; its being in a great measure unoccupied as missionary ground ; the superior energy of the people, as compared with the inhabitants of the Lower Provinces ; the relation of the north-western parts of India to other Asiatic countries west and north, which suggested the hope that the Gospel might be eventually extended from thence into the heart of Central Asia ; the -vicinity of the Himalaya Mountains, affording places of resort to missionaries whose health might become impaired by the hot climate of the plains. Besides general considerations of this kind, there were some special reasons, arising out of the liberal views concerning the education of the natives, which were held by European gentlemen of influence at some of the north-western cities, and the desire of some of the native chiefs to obtain for their sons the advantages of education in the English lan- guage. As an example of both, Sir Claude Wade, the political agent of the government at Lodiana, had set on foot a school for the in- struction of native youth in English, which was attended by sons and other relatives of certain Sikh Sardars or chiefs, and of the Aftghan exiles then living at Lodiana. This school was afterwards transferred to the mis- sion, and the generous support of its founder was continued until' his official duties called him to a distant part of the country. It is still in successful operation. The missionaries recognized with grateful feelings the hand of Providence, in directing the time of their arrival in India at the precise juncture of circumstances which had turned the attention of Christian observers with spe- cial interest to the north-western provinces. If they had reached India a year sooner, their choice of a field of labor might have been a very different one ; or, if a year later, they would probably have found the ground at Lo- diana already occupied, and that perhaps by some educational institution from which the Christian religion would have been excluded. They also recognized with thankfulness the favor that was shown to them in the eyes of some of the most influential persons in the country ; so that although they had landed at Calcutta, feeling uncertain what their recep- tion might be, they were cordially aided in their work by those who were in positions greatly to promote or to prevent its success ; while nothing could exceed the friendly inter- est in their- mission which was manifested by all the European missionary brethren with whom they became acquainted. Thus, having favor in the sight of God and his people, their missionary field was chosen and their plans of work were laid. , How often do we see that the Lord's thoughts are not our thoughts, neither his ways our ways ! Signally was this shown in the early history of this mission. Only one of the first company of missionaries was permitted to see this carefully and Well chosen field of labor ; two of the others were early called to their rest — Mrs. Lowrie and Mr. Eeed — both by consumption ; and Mrs. Reed had accompanied her husband on the voyage homeward, which he did not live to complete. The remaining member of this company reached the ttation at Lodiana in November, 1834, and entered on his duties ; but a few days afterwards he was taken with dangerous illness. For several weeks the mission seemed likely to become ex- tinct, by his removal from the scenes of this life ; and, on his partial recovery, he was told by his medical attendants that he must not attempt to remain in the hot climate of India. A year longer, however, was spent by him in the charge of a school, preaching, and making journeys and inquiries, to gain information for the use of the mission and the church at home ; thus doing the work of a pioneer. In January, 1836, he left Lodiana, and Calcutta in April, on a visit to this country for health ; but eventually the hope of returning to the, mission was, for the same reason, reluctantly aban- doned. In the mean time, the Rev. Messrs. James Wilson and John Newton, and their wives, had arrived at Lodiana in December, 1835, and entered upon enlarged labors in the ser- vice of Christ. Besides the school and other duties, they took charge of a printing-press in 1836, which has been a valuable auxiliary in the missionary work. The third company of missionaries, the Eev. HINDOSTAN. 445 Messrs. James E. Campbell and James Mc- Ewen, and Messrs. Jesse M. Jamieson, Wil- liam S. Rogers and Joseph Porter, and their wives, reached Calcutta in March, 1836. It ■was Mr. Lowrie's privilege to welcome these brethren on their arrival, and to aid them in preparing for their journey to the Upper Pro- vinces. Their meeting was of deep interest, as may readily be supposed, especially to one who had seen so severe bereavements and so many dark hours in the short history of the mission. It was now apparent that these afiSic- tions were not intended to discourage the sup- porters of the mission, but to teach them their dependence on divine grace alone ; to purify their motives ; to chasten and streng-then their zeal ; and thus at the latter end to do them good, so that by their means God would im- part the greatest blessings to those who were sitting in darkness and the " region and shadow of death." The brethren of this new reinforcement soon proceeded on their journey to Lodiana, but Mr. McEwen was led, by what appeared to be indications of the will of Providence, to stop at Allahabad, a large city at the junction of the Ganges and the Jumna, which has ever since been occupied as a missionary station. Mr. McEwen's labors were crowned with pleas- ing success, and a church was formed in Jan- uary, 1837, with 13 members. Besides preach- ing, he gave a part of his time to the charge of schools, in which he was greatly assisted by his equally devoted wife ; but they were not permitted to continue long in these encourag- ing labors. On account of the loss of health, he was compelled to leave India in 1838 ; and, after serving the cause of Christ as a pastor, in the State of New Tork, he was called to his rest in 1845. On the arrival of the other members of this third company at the end of their journey, in 1836, two new stations were formed. One of these was at Saharunpur, 130 miles south-east from Lodiana ; the other was at Sabathu, 110 miles north-east from the same place, in the lower ranges of the Himalaya Mountains, at an elevation of about 4000 feet above the level of the sea. The unordained brethren of this company were graduates of colleges, in preparation for the work of the ministry. They went out as teachers, but with the expectation of prosecuting their theological studies, and they were afterwards ordained to the sacred office. A church was organized at Lodiana in 1837; and it is remarkable that two of its first three native members have since become valuable laborers in the missionary work ; one as a min- ister of the Gospel, and another as a teacher. This must be viewed as a signal proof of God's favor towards this infant church, and as a hap- py example of the way in which the Gospel is to be more and more extended in heathen countries. The schools at Lodiana, Saharun- pur, and Sabathu, were vigorously carried for- ward, and the brethren were engaged in preach- ing, distributing the sacred Scriptures and re ligious tracts, making journeys to places where large assemblages of natives were collected on festival occasions ; but little more will be at- tempted here than to present a chronological outline of the arrivals of the missionaries, with some of the leading facts in their work, The fourth company of missionaries, consist- ing of Eev. Messrs. H. E. Wilson, Jr., John H. Morrison, and Joseph Caldwell, Mr. James Craig, teacher, and Mr. Eeese Morris, printer, and their wives, arrived at Calcutta in April, 1838. There they met Mr. and Mrs. McEwen, on their return homewards, and were greatly aided by them in making arrangements for their journey. One of their number, however, had already reached the last stage of her pil- grimage ; Mrs. Morrison was taken to her rest before leaving Calcutta, after a brief illness of cholera. Her afSioted companions proceeded to their several stations : Mr. Morrison to Alla- habad, to join the Eev. James Wilson, who had taken charge of the station on Mr. Mc- Ewen's removal ; Mr. Morris to Lodiana ; and Messrs. Caldwell and Craig to Saharunpur. Mr. H. E. Wilson, while proceeding to the station at Lodiana, was led by Providence to stop at Fut- tehgurh, on the Ganges, two hundred miles above Allahabad, a town which had been pointed out by some of the earlier brethren as eligible for a missionary station. Here, with an inter- esting family of orphan children, a part of whom were placed under his care by a pious English physician, and assisted by Gopeenath Nundy, the teacher previously employed in their instruction, Mr. Wilson began important labors, which have been steadily prosecuted ever since, with evident tokens of the favor of Heaven. In February, 1839, the Eev. Messrs. Joseph Warren, John E. Freeman, and James L. Scott, and their wives, arrived at Calcutta, and became connected, the first two with Allar habad, and the last with Puttehgurh. A printing-press was sent out with Mr. AVarren, which, under his efficient superintendence, be- came an invaluable means of promoting the influence of the mission. In November of this year, Mrs. Caldwell, at Saharunpur, was called to her rest. In December of the next year, the Eev. Messrs. John C. Eankiri and William H. McAuley, and their wives ; the Eev. Jos. Owen and Miss Jane Vanderveer, teacher, arrived at Calcutta. Mr. Owen joined the Allahabad Mission, and the rest proceeded to Puttehgurh. In this year, 1840, the work of translating the Sacred Scriptures and preparing other reli- gious books and. tracts, began to be reported as occupying much of the time of some of the missionaries. One of these works was a trans- lation of the Gospel of John from the original Greek into Punjabi, the language of the Sikhs; 446 HINDOSTAN. another was the Confession of Faith of the Presbyterian Church into Hindustani, with the Scripture references at the bottom of the page. In the year 1841, churches were organized at Saharunpur and Puttehgurh, and twenty- seven native members were reported at all the stations. The Eev. Messrs. Levi Janvier and John Wray, and their wives, reached India in Jan- nary, 1842, and were stationed — the former at Lodiana, and the latter at Allahabad. Messrs. Morrison and Caldwell were married. Mrs. Porter was called this year to her rest. Dr. Willis Green reached India in November ; spent a few months at Lodiana ; and returned home, the climate not suiting his health. Churches were organized at Saharunpur and Puttehgurh, and the year was further signal- ized by the organization of three Presbyteries under the instructions of the General Assem- bly, composed of the ministers in each mission, and taking their names, like the missions, from the leading city, or the station first occu- pied, in the bounds of each : Lodiana, Fur- rukhabad, and Allahabad. The brethren at Saharunpur being ecclesiastically related to the General Synod of the Reformed Presbyte- rian Church, were constituted by their Synod into a separate Presbytery. Their relations to the Board as missionaries are the same as those of the other brethren, and the. intercourse between them has been mutually pleasant and beneficial. A part of their support has always been furnished by churches of the Reformed Synod. The year 1843 was marked by the arrival in India of the Eev. John J. Walsh and his wife, who were connected with the Furrukhabad mission ; the death of the second Mrs. Morri- son ; the return to this country of Mr. Rogers and family, on account of Mrs. Rogers's ill- health ; and of Mr. Morrison, also for health ; the forming of a new station at Mynpurie, 40 miles west of Puttehgurh ; the licensure of the native assistants, Golok Nath and Gopeenath Nundy, by the Presbyteries of Lodiana and Furrukhabad ; and the steady advance of the missionary work. The church members re- ported at Allahabad in January were nine Americans, three Europeans, eight East In- dians, and eleven natives ; in all thirty-one. In 1844, Mr. Owen was married. Gopeenath Nundy was ordained. Parts of the Bible, in a revised translation, were printed at Lodiana in Hindustani. A translation of the Koran into the same language, by a Maulavi, with an In- troduction and Notes, refuting its errors, by the Rev. J. Wilson, was published at AUahur bad, marking quite a new era in Mohammedan literature. A larger number of tracts and books were distributed in the Lodiana Mission than during any former year, and all the branches of missionary labor were faithfully carried forward. The number of church mem- bers reported at Puttehgurh this year was twenty-seven, of whom sixteen were natives. The next year witnessed the death of Mr. Craig at Saharunpur, and of Mrs. Jamieson at Sabathu ; the return to this country of Mr. Morris on account of health ; the destruction by fire of the printing-press, book-repository, &c., at Lodiana, causing the loss of about $10,000 worth of property, including upwards of 90,000 copies of parts of the Holy Scrip- tures and of tracts. In general, the labors of the missionaries were continued without change. In November of this year, the first meeting of the Synod of North India was held at Putteh- gurh. Important questions, concerning the kingdom of Christ in India, received the earn- est consideration of its members. In 1846, Mr. Jamieson visited this country, to provide for the education of his motherless children ; Mr. H. R. Wilson and family also returned, on account of Mrs. Wilson's health ; and Miss Vanderveer came home also on ac- count of impaired health ; Mr. Morrison having regained his health, returned to India with his wife ; Mr. Rudolph, a German teacher, and his wife, who had spent some years in India, be- came connected with the Lodiana Mission, and Mr. Rudolph was licensed to preach the Gospel. A new station was formed at Agra ; and a number of the members of the church at Allahabad having removed to that city upon the transfer of the government offices, they were reorganized as a church, with other members, making in all fifteen, under the min- isterial charge of the missionaries. At Put- tegurh, the number of church members re- ported was thirty-four. At Allahabad, a church building, 78 feet by 4.5, was erected ; while, to the communion of the church itself, it was stated that from its commencement seventy-four persons had been admitted, fifty- one of whom were received on the profession of their faith. The Government college at Allahabad was transferred to the mission, and the Christian religion and books became a part of the daily study of the scholars. Early in 1847, the Rev. Messrs. Augustus H. Seeley and David Irving and their wives, and Mr. Robert M. Munnis, licentiate preach- er, arrived at Calcutta, on their way to the Furrukhabad Mission. Mr. Jamieson, on his return to his field of labor, with his wife, reached Calcutta in November. Mr. Camp- bell with his family arrived in this country on a visit, on account of his wife's health. Mr. Rudolph and Golok Nath were ordained as Evangelists by the Presbytery of Lodiana, and Mr. Munnis by the Presbytery of Furruk- habad. A new station was formed at Jalan- dar, in the Punjab, about thirty miles west of Lodiana, which was occupied by the Rev. Go- lok !Nath and a native teacher. Churches were organized at Sabathu and Jalandar. Some new members were admitted to most of the churches ; and the number reported from HINDOSTAN. 447 all the stations, except Agra and Saharunpur, was 107. In January, 1848, the Rev. A. Alexander Hodge and his wife, and the Eev. Charles W. Porman, arrived in India. The former joined the Allahabad, and the latter the Lodiana Mission. In November, Mr. Campbell and his wife reached Calcutta, on their return to Saharunpur, accompanied by the Eev. John S. Woodside and his wife, of the Eeformed Presbyterian Church, destined to the same sta- tion. Mr. Julius P. Ullman, a German teach- er, who had lived for some years in India, be- came connected with the Purrukhabad Mis- sion, and was licensed to preach the Gospel by the Presbytery. Mr. Porter returned to this country on a visit with his motherless children, and Mr. Eankin and his family came home on account of his ill-health. Mrs. Scott was called to her rest while on her return to this country for her health. A new station was formed at Ambala, a city almost equally dis- tant from Lodiana, Saharnnpar, and Sabathu, which was occupied by Mr. Jamieson and a nativj catechist. Some new members were admitted to the churches, and a few were sus- pended from church privileges. The second meeting of the Synod of North India was held at Agra, in December of this year. The minutes of this meeting, and also of the first meeting, are published in the Foreign Mission- ary Chronicle of November, 1849. They will be read in future ages, as well as at the present time, with deep interest. In the next year, Mr. Porter returned, with his wife, to his field of labor ; Mrs. Rudolph and Mrs. Preeman were taken to their rest ; and Messrs. Irving and Wray and their fami- lies returned to this country on account of health. Mr. Ullman received ordination from the Presbytery of Purrukhabad, and John Hari, a native catechist, was licensed to preach the Gospel by the Presbytery of Allahabad. A new station was formed at Labor, the chief city of the Punjab, which was occupied by Messrs. Newton and Porman. A church was organized at Ambala, and a special work of grace was manifested at Puttehgurh, as the result of which thirty-three members were ad- mitted to the communion of the church. The whole number of church members reported this year was 16 . The year 1850 was marked by the arrival in India of the Eev. James H. Orbison, to join the Lodiana Mission ; the Eev. Messrs. David P. Campbell and Eobert S. Pullerton and their wives, to join the Purrukhabad Mis- sion ; and the Eev. Messrs. Lawrence G. Hay and Horatio W. Shaw and their wives, to be connected with the Allahabad Mission ; and by the return to this country of Mr. Hodge and his wile, on account of her health, and of Mr. Freeman, whose health had also become impaired. The number of church members re- ported this year was 209. Messrs. J. Wilson and W. H. McAuIey and their families came home in 1851, on account of health. Mr. Preeman, with his wife, re- turned to his field of labor, and Messrs. Eu- dolph and Ullman were married. The num- ber of church members reported this year was 231. In 1852, Mr. Scott made a visit to this country on account of his children, and Mr. Newton and his family came home on account of his health. The Eev. Eobert E. Williams embarked for India, and arrived at Agra early in the following year. Schools were now established at this city for the education of the children of persons of mixed parentage, Euro- pean and native, who are commonly called East Indians, a class of growing numbers, in- telligence, and influence. The members of the church, according to the report of this year, were 255. The buildings required for their use were purchased, with the aid of very handsome donations from the late lamented Governor of the North-western Provinces, the Hon. J. Thomason, and other English friends. One feature of the missionary cause in India should be mentioned in this connection, as truly grati- fying. Prom the beginning the missionaries have enjoyed the confidence of many of the English residents in that country — civilians, officers in the army, and others. With the best knowledge of the work in progress, they have considered it their privilege to promote it by their sympathy, influence, and very lib- eral gifts ; and thus have they greatly encour- aged the missionary brethren, gratified the friends of missions in this country, and pro- moted the cause of the Redeemer. In 1853, Mr. Scott, with his wife, returned to India ; Mr. Orbison was married ; and Mrs. Seeley and Mr. Porter were called to their rest. The work of the missions continued to be carried forward with fidelity and zeal. The preceding sketch conveys a very inade- quate view of the work of evangelization which our brethren in India have been permitr ted already to accomplish. Besides preaching statedly at their various stations, they are accustomed during the cold months of each year to make journeys into parts of the coun- try not yet occupied, in order to make known the way of life by public discourses, conversa- tion, and the distribution of the Scriptures and other Christian books. To thousands of towns and villages has the Gospel been pub- lished on these tours. They are accustomed also to attend the Melas held at particular times and places. These are assemblages of the natives for religious ceremonies, but are attended by many for purposes of trade or amusement-—so that they may be regarded as a kind of fair. They are held at places ac- counted holy, such as Hardwar, where the Ganges enters the plains, and Allahabad, where the Ganges, the Jumna, and according 448 niNDOSTAN. to the native tradition a third river, invisible, unite their streams. Immense crowds, amount- ing to hundreds of thousands, including many pilgrims and visitors from the most distant parts of the land, attend the more celebrated of these Melas ; and there are numerouB others of leas note, attended by people from the neighboring towns and villages. They afford opportunities for widely disseminating the knowledge of the Gospel. The good influence exerted in this way will not be known until the great day reveals it, but sometimes it is signally displayed. An aged Brahmin had made a pilgrimage from Jubbelpore to attend the Mela at Allahabad, a journey of several hundred miles, to wash away his sins in the Ganges. There he heard a discourse by one of the missionaries, which shook his faith in Hindooism. He returned home without hav- ing had an interview with the missionary, and was led by the perpiasioh of a Qazi to study the Koran ; but he found in Mohammedanism no rest for his troubled mind. Having by some means obtained a portion of the Scrip- tures, he carefully studied its lessons, and taught them to his only daughter. At this point, an English ofRcer became acquainted with him, and found that he had renounced his own religion, and was sincerely seeking a knowledge of the Christian faith in the face of many difficulties. A Hindi Bible for him was requested from one of the missionaries at Agra, and thus his history became known to the missionary brethren. Another means of promoting a knowledge of the Christian religion has been afforded by the press. Numerous tracts and catechisms, in various Hindoo dialects, and some larger works, have been published. The Way of Life, by Dr. Hodge, translated into Hindus- tani ; another work, with a similar title, by a German missionary ; a translation of the Ko- ran into Hindustani, with notes in refutation of its errors ; the Westminster Confession of Faith ; a volume of hymns ; revised editions of the Scriptures, in whole or in part ; a trans- lation of the books of Genesis, Exodus, chap- ters 1-20, and Psalms, and moat of the New Testament, into Punjabi, by Messrs. Newton and Janvier, are among the larger works is- sued by the press. The whole amount of printing at Lodiana and Allahabad from the beginning is over one hundred millions of pages, of which the sacred writings form a large portion. By means of these Christian books a large amount of truth, subversive of idolatry and Mohammedanism, and setting forth the true religion, has been widely diffused. Some striking examples of good which has been done in this way, sometimes in places far remote from the stations of our brethren, have been reported in their letters. Still another important agency has been the schools of the missions. These have been sup- ported from the beginning, it having been con- sidered ^rom the commencement of the work an object of the greatest importance to train up a native ministry ; and the number of scholars has gradually increased until, as stated in the report of 1854, about two thou- sand nine hundred of the native youth are now under instruction. A few of the scholars are in elementary schools, but most of them are in schools of a higher gfade ; and all of them have been brought in greater or less degree under the influence of Christian instruction and example. A large proportion of them have become convinced of the folly, and in some measure of the sin, of idolatry. Many of them are prepared to acknowledge that Chris- tianity is the true religion ; some of them have become the professed followers of our Lord, and a few are laboring in various ways — one as an ordained minister, others as teachers, ca- techists, and Scripture-readers — to bring their countrymen to the knowledge of Jesus Christ as the Saviour of sinners. The preaching of the Gospel in these mis- sions has not been in vain, as the preceding statements have shown. It is with sincere thanksgiving that we can refer to still another and more impressive proof of the blessing of God on the labors of his servants, — the Chris- tian life and the dying testimony of some of the converts, to the power of divine grace. An affecting and beautiful little memoir was pub- lished by Mr. Warren, a few years ago, of Jatni, a member of the church at Allahabad. She was the daughter of a Brahmin, but she became a child of God. In all the relations and events of life, her deportment was exem- plary. And when called at length to pass over Jordan, she was supported by a good hope through grace. Mr. Warren, with ten- der caution, had apprised her of the probable termination of her disease ; and he adds, " I was delighted to find that she had thought of it, and had come to feel willing that God should do with her, as to life just as he pleased. I questioned her closely, and set death and the judgment before her plainly ; but her nerves were firm, her eye clear, and her voice calm and steady ■ ' I know Christ, and can fully and completely trust him in all things. He keeps my mind in perfect peace.' I saw her often, and always found her the same." She was enabled to resign her soul, her husband and her child to the care of her Father in heaven, and at the early age of twenty-two she departed joyfully to be with Christ. Another example hardly less striking was presented in the Christian death of a na- tive catechist at Saharunpur. His missionary friend, Mr. Campbell, who had frequent and most pleasing interviews with him on his death-bed, gives a very interesting account of his religious views and hopes : " I asked him if he was afraid to die ? ' No, sir,' he said, ' I am not now afraid. ... I am now fully recon- ciled to the will of God. I do not wish to live HINDOSTAN. 449 longer in this sinful world.' On being asked where his hopes for salvation were placed, he replied emphatically, ' On Christ alone : he is the only Saviour, and I know he will not dis- appoint my hopes ; ' and then, bursting into tears, he said, ' sir, how much I owe to you ! Tou are the means of leading me to Christ, and of instructing me and saving my soul.' This was so much more than I had expected, it was too much for me, and we both wept toge- ther. At that moment I thought that this was more than enough to compensate me for all the little trials I have ever been called to en- dure as a missionary. I could have changed places with dear Samuel, to enjoy his happi- ness and assurance of hope." Examples like these are precious seals of the favor of Heaven towards the missionary work. — Lowrie's Mann- ed nf Missicms. TABULAR VIEW. MihitiiONS. Names of Stahoss. 1 11 B S i| 2 o S Missionaries & Ass't Missionaries. a 1 S SCHOLAEfl. Ministers. Lay Teachers and others. Boarding. Day. 3 249 159 90 260 396 718 220 168 463 100 120 a 1 1 America^. 1 1 1 Male. Female LODLU?A FCBRUKttABAD... Lodiana Saharunpur 1834 1836 1836 1848 1847 1849 1863 1838 1843 1846 1836 1862 1863 2 2 "2 3 1 4 1 4 4 i 3 2 "2 "2 ■4 1 3 4 1 3 "2 1 '4 2 2 7 2 2 19 24 14 7 8 97 6 46 47 '9 18 18 i6 18 231 160 90 260 395 640 220 118 416 100 120 46 60 30 Delira Futtegurh Mjnpurie AU,AHABAT> Allahabad Futtehpore Total 23 2 21 26 266 27 61 2729 126 2932 Wesleyan Missionary Society. — For many years Dr. Coke had desired to enter India as a missionary field, but the keys of India were in the hands of the East India Company, and they kept them with the same jealous care as they did the keys of their counting-houses. The Doctor had often sounded individuals of the Company, but without effect. The island of Ceylon, not being in the Company's charter, became the object of Dr. Coke's attention with the hope that it might prepare the way for entrance into India. Finding certain gentle- men, high in office, willing to encourage the Gospel in the East, Dr. Coke became satisfied of his call to go, provided he could find six young men of hopeful talents willing to devote their lives to the work. He waited on the late Dr. Buchanan, and consulted him on the subject. And when his intentions became known, five preachers already in the work, expressed their readiness to go. To these were added Benjamin Clough, a local preacher. The conference could not but approve of the plan, as Providence obviously opened the way ; the Doctor being willing if necessary to bear the expense of the outfit, which amounted to above £6000. After the conference of 1813, he assembled the six brethren in London, and pro- cured them a Portuguese tutor, together with a printing-press and types, as one or two of the missionaries understood the art of printing. 29 Their books, clothes and other necessaries, were furnished suitable for a permanent resi- dence in India. Having established them- selves in Ceylon they soon turned their thoughts to the continent of India, where God seemed to be opening their way ; and it was decided that Mr. Lynch, the senior missionary, should proceed to Madras, which he did, Jan. 25, 1817, taking with him letters of introduction from persons of the highest consideration at Colum- l30, to their friends at the presidency, which insured for him a kind reception. His piety and zeal soon endeared him to all -who were interested in the progress of Christianity, and Madras became to him, in a short time, a scene of considerable usefulness. Mr. &• Mrs. Horner arrived in Bombay, in September, 1817, and the day following were kindly received by Sir Evan Nepean, the gov- ernor. On the same day he waited upon the Bishop of Calcutta who expressed his good, opinion of the zeal and conduct of the Wesley- an missionaries in Ceylon, and wished Mr. Horner equal success at Bombay. Mr. Horner immediately applied himself to the study of the Mahratta language under the tuition of a Brah- min. He soon acquired the language; and began to preach to the people : he also gather- ed a school of fifty boys, to whose instruction he devoted himself. In 1819 the English and Malabar school of Mr. Lynch was attended by 450 HINDOSTAN. 150 children, and the Mahratta school of Mr. Horner had 180. In consequence of applica- tion from European residents at Bangalore and Seringupatam, in the presidency of Madras, Mr. Hook and Mr. ^ Mrs. Mowatt were ap- pointed by the missionary committee to proceed to those stations, Mr. Close having been pre- viously directed to assist Mr. Lynch at Madras. On the 19th May, 1820, Mr. and Mrs. Mowatt, and Mr. Hoole embarked at Gravesend, in the Tanjore, a. private trader, in company with Sir Richard Ottely, Chief-justice of Ceylon, Mr. and Mrs. Brownii]g, of the Church of England Missionary Society, and Adam Munhi Eathana and Alexander Derma Rama, two Budhist priests, who had been educated and baptized in England by Dr. Adam Clarke, under the sanction of the Methodist Missionary Commits tee. On the 5th of September, the vessel an- chored off the river, near Batticaloa. The day following having landed some baggage, they weighed anchor, but had not sailed far before they were overtaken by a tremendous storm, in which the vessel was set on fire by lightning, and they escaped with the loss of everything on board. In 1821 both the missionaries were obliged to leave Bombay on account of afflic- tion. But at Madras the brethren were ena- bled to labor with considerable encouragement, where they had then 147 persons united with them in church fellowship, and 4 schools which were well attended, instructions being communi- cated in Tamil and English. In 1823 Seringa- patam was added to the list of stations, Mr. Hoole bemg placed there. So that this year they were regularly established at Madras, where they had four missionaries, at Bangalore, where they had one, at Negapatam, where they had two, and one at Seringapatam; the number of members being 191, composed of English, Por- tuguese, Dutch, and Hindoos. They had erected nine or ten chapels, with as many schools ; one of the chapels and two of the schools being at St. Thomas's Mount. In 1827 the schools had increased to 16, with 542 child- ren, and the church members to 251, but part of this increase of the members had arisen from the number of pious soldiers in regiments which had been just landed in India, on ac- count of the war then raging between the Bri- tish and the Burmese, during which Dr. Judson and his devoted wife were suffering such " fiery trials," at the hands of the latter power. In proportion as the natives began, on conviction, to attach themselves to their societies, the usual trials are narrated by the missionaries. Many of the converts had to endure the keen- est persecution, and all the injuries connected with loss of caste, and expulsion from their families ; but by their faith and patience they showed, that they willingly " counted all things loss for the excellency of the knowledge of Christ Jesus their Lord." In 1830 the number of missionaries was nine ; of schools 25 ; and of scholars 1,000, of whom many were females ; with 314 members in Society. This year Calcutta was added ta the list of stations, with Messrs. Percival and Hodson as the laborers there. They operated chiefly among the Portuguese and Bengalee inhabitants of that city, and soon found a wide and promising field of labor, both among the young and the adult population. Two years afterwards, however, the committee in London considered that this mission had not presented those results which would warrant its continuance. The station was given up, Mr. Percival being sent to Ceylon, and Mr. Hodson to Bangalore. A native ministry was raised up from tho ranks of the local preachers, who cooperated with their European brethren in preaching Christ to their countrymen. The printing-press was, meanwhile, at work, diffusing a Christian literature among the people, and quietly under- mining their systems of falsehood and pollu- tion, which had stood for ages, only to deprave and oppress their wretched adherents. In the year 1837, the Rev. Jonathan Crow- thei- was appointed General Superintendent of the India Missions. He was accompanied by the Rev. Messrs. Best, Jenkins, Male, Griffith, and Pox, and their families. After shipwreck and much suffering, they at length arrived in safety. It is worthy of remark, as an exempli- fication of the advantages derived to the mis- sionary cause from the Theological Institution, founded by the Wesleyans only three years before, that these five missionaries having been students in the Theological Institution, had gained such a knowledge of the Tamil and Canarese languages before their embarkation, that on their arrival in India, four of them immediately commenced preaching to the peo- ple in Tamil. This year several conversions took place among the natives, and they were received into the Church of Christ by public baptism at Madras. One of these cases justi- fies a more extended notice. Arumaga Tarn- hiran was a native of the province of Tanjore, in Southern India, so much celebrated for numerous and splendid temples, and for a pop- ulation inveterately attached to caste and heathen superstitions. He was born of highly respectable parents, and had the advantages of what is esteemed among his countrymen, as a good education. He was zealous above many his equals, in seeking knowledge, but appears never to have been satisfied in the degradation of heathen worship. At a very early age he lost his parents, and became united to the sect of Siya, under a celebrated gooroo, one of his relatives. After making pilgrimages of many thousand miles, he came back to the land of his birth. There he had time for reflection. In those moments when he brought to mind what he had passed through, and how all his companions that had set out with him on those weary pilgrimages had perished, some by fevers, some by wild beasts, and he only left alive, his HTNDOSTAN. 451 B]jii'it was agitated, and he groaned within himself with disquietude of conscience. He conversed with several native Christians, and heard the Gospel from the lips of its ministers. He felt the appeals of Christians against the besotted maxims and usages of a defiling sys- tem of heathenism, whose vain sacrifices and bloody orgies proclaim in every high place that its worship is that of devils, and not of the true God. The conversion of one of his pupils was the means of leading to the first interview between Sambrian and Mr. Carver. His intelligent mind soon opened to convic- tion, and he at once entered upon an investi- gation of the claiijis of Christianity, and the result was his conversion. He soon evidenced his sincerity by sacrificing all for Christ. This aroused the bitterest opposition. Several of his former disciples, assisted by other hea- then, attempted to carry him off by force ; and an appeal had to be made to the protec- tion of the law. In the court-house, before the magistrate, and a multitude of his fellow- countrymen, he "witnessed a good confession." He appeared in the court in his heathen robes for the last time, only that he might be iden- tified there as the head of his order. On that occasion he rose and addressed the magistrate as follows : " Sir, I am a man well known in Madras, having resided in this city since 1824. I was born in the province of Tanjore. I was united when very young to the sect of Siva, in whose robes I appear before you this day. For many years I was engaged in traveling by way of Delhi, and other great cities, to the holy places of the Hindoos. I dwelt three years at Casi in Bengal, thence I traveled along the coast to Madras, by way of Juggernaut. I visited all the holy places in the south of India, and went by Ramiseram to Ceylon, visited Mannar, Colombo, Candy, the holy places called Kat- teragan, on the east side of Ceylon, and re- turned by Batticaloa, Trineomallee, and Jaffna, to the continent. Fifty years of my life have been thus spent. I sought all heathen books, but found nothing for tlie soul. I have taught many hundred disciples, as you know," (for the magistrate knew him well, and congratulated the missionary on having such a convert.) He continued : " I found nothing in heathen books, in heathen temples, in heathen ceremo- nies to satisfy the soul. I met with this minis- ter, (pointing to Mr. Carver,) and he opened to my understanding the way of salvation, the treasures of the Scriptures : they suited my dissatified heart ; I went again and again to the missionary ; I determined to abandon heathenism. By 'heathenism I got money in abundance, and honors. I was worshiped by my disciples ; but my soul sunk back at the blasphemy against the God of whom I had heard. I knew not how to escape from my heathen friends and disciples, who were about me on every side, when this minister, sir. (looking at the magistrate with great respect and firmness,) offered me an asylum, a place in the Mission premises. There, sir, I went of my own free choice, there I was when the heathen made the violent attempt to carry me away by force, there I wish to remain and be baptized in the name of Jesus ; to teach others also of this Saviour, as some little attempt to remedy the evils of having taught so many heathen disciples a false way in time past." The circumstance of one who had occupied so high a station renouncing his honors and emoluments, and subjecting himself to reproach and persecution, for the sake of Christianity, awoke the spirit of inquiry ; and his Poem, in which he contrasted Christianity and heathen- ism, was eagerly inquired after, and exten- sively read. Three editions in a few weeks could not satisfy the demand. Every one wanted a copy ; they were carried far and wide by the natives, sung in the streets, and even read by the children ; until the spirit of the heathen was excited to opposi- tion. The American missionaries at Madras printed an edition of 10,000 copies, besides an edition published by the Madras Eeligious Tract Society. From 80,000 to 100,000 copies were distributed in a few months. The effect produced by the conversion of this distin- guished individual was so great, that a Eu- ropean missionary, who had spent forty years in India, and who was present at his baptism, declared " he had not seen any thing like it be- fore." The missionaries diligently improved the increasing opportunities, which this event had afforded, for prosecuting the work among the natives. In 1838, Goobee, in the Mysore country, was occupied by the Wesleyan missionaries, and Mr. Hodson appointed to that station. In a few months after he was enabled to open a mission in the city of Mysore. In the older stations in India there had been an increase in the number of professing Christians, several of the heathens were baptized, the public ser- vices were well attended, and the schools were in a prosperous condition. About this time the various societies in South India were greatly agitated by the sub- ject of caste; but the universal decision of the missionaries of all denominations was, that this odious distinction should be abolished, so far as the church of Christ was concerned. In this year arrangements were made to establish on the Coromandel coast an institution for training a native ministry, from the operation of which much assistance was expected in ad- vancing the work of God. In 1839, the Eev. Messrs. Arthur, (now one of the General Secretaries of the Wesleyan Missionary Society,) Squarebridge, Garret, and Pope, were sent out to reinforce the Indian Mission, and extend its operations by planting new stations. Mr. Arthur was sent to Goobee and Mr. Squarebridge to assist Mr. Hodson at 4:52 HINDOSTAN. Mysore. A printing-presa was also forwarded to Bangalore, to assist the missionaries to meet the increased demand for Christian books and tracts in the Canarese languages. In 1841, this mission experienced a painful reduction in its strength and efficiency. Mr. Square- bridge died of cholera at Coonghull, Mr. Fox was also called to his reward ; while Mr. Cryer and Mr. Arthur were both obliged to return home on account of the failure of their health ; the committee, however, were enabled during the next year partially to supply the vacancies thus created, by the appointment of Messrs. Hardy and Sanderson. This year a perfect font of Canarese type was prepared in London for the use of the mission. The head- school in Mysore (the capital, with a popula- tion of 70,000,) is patronized and supported by the Rajah, much to the displeasure of many of the Brahmins of his court He has shown much interest in some of the operations of the Mission ; and it may be hoped that this exam- ple of the relaxation of Hindoo bigotry w^U be followed by many of his subjects. In this year, also, the officers of the Second Regiment of Native Infantry erected a chapel at the French Rocks Cantonment, about five miles N. B. of Seringapatam, and presented it, through Mr. Hotison, to the Society. Mr. Crowther having to return home in 1843, the Rev. Joseph Roberts succeeded him. The next year three more missionaries were sent out. The opposition awakened about this time among the Brahmins and others, showed that the missionaries were making a decided im- pression upon the minds of the population, and this was further evident by the progressive in- crease in the number of professing Christians, and in the eagerness with which the people at large availed themselves of the instruction afforded in the Mission schools. The press at Bangalore was meanwhile diligently employed ; the amount of its issues this year in the Cana^ rese, Sanscrit, and English languages was over 843,000 pages ; in the next year it was 922,000 pages ; and in 1851 and 1852 it was nearly two millions of pages in each year ; and over 100,000 of the Canarese people, with more or less regularity, had the Gospel preached to them by the missionaries. In 1849 a Canarese Brahmin of high caste, with several other coU' verts, were baptized in Mysore. After thirty years of devoted labor among the Hindoos, in Ceylon and Continental India, the Rev. Joseph Roberts was called from his work to his eternal rest. Mr. Roberts received his first appointment to the East in the year 1818. His vigor of mind made the acquisition of the languages in which he had to labor a ■ffirk of comparative ease; and his frank and gnerous nature endeared him to his colleagues, and to all classes of the inhabitants of Ceylon, for whose spiritual benefit and salvation he labored for many years with faithfulness and zeoL In 1833 he published a most interesting volume, entitled, " Oriental Illustrations of the Sacred Scriptures," which reached a second edition, and has been very much read and ad- mired, as a remarkable chapter in the history of the human mind, and as throwing light on numerous passages of holy Scripture, which has brought out their meaning with peculiar beauty and force. He also executed somo translations from the Tamil language, which were published by the Oriental Translation Society in London, connected with the Royal Asiatic Society for Great Britain and Ireland, of which society he was a corresponding mem- ber from an early period of his residence in the East. In the year 1843 he succeeded the Rev. Jonathan Crowther as General Superintendent of the Society's Mission in thcv Presidency of Madras. In this vast field he found ample em- ployment for his sanctified energies, and ad- dressed liimself to his work with the utmost zeal and devotion. In preaching the word of God both to Europeans and natives, and in the performance of pastoral duties, he was indefati- gable, as well as in the superintendence of schools for children, and catechuroen classes for young people. Though necessarily engaged in the management of the temporal afiairs of the mission under his direction, he was an ac- tive member of the Committee of the Madras Auxiliary Bible Society, and of its Translation Committee, and of several other religious and charitable associations. In addition to his other engagements, he prepared a lucid and comprehensive "Ti-eatise on Caste, and its bearing on Christianity and Missions," which was published in England a few years ago ; he also contributed to the " Wesleyan Methodist Magazine," and other periodicals, several valu- able essays on Paganism and Popery, and on other subjects connected with the work of mis- sions. The labors and anxieties connected with the important position he held, are sup- posed to have weighed down his frame and shortened his earthly career. He sunk into the grave, exhausted mainly by the toils and conflicts of the missionary life. His excellent widow, Mrs. Roberts, continued in India to render the aid of her valuable experience and services in the superintendence of the native female schools. As an evidence of the impression produced in favor of education upon the minds of the population of Mysore, it may be stated that an urgent petition from that city was presented to the W esleyan ConferenvC, held in Bradford in 1853, requesting the establishment of a firstr class English school among them. This re- markable and interesting document occupied many folios of India paper of a large size, neafly backed with blue ribbon. It was a petition from the Hindoo and Mohammedan inhabitants of the city of Mysore, written in the Canarese language, with an English trans- lation, and signed by 3,340 persons, in nme fflNDOSTAN. 453 different languages. It represented their great desire to have an Eng- lish school for their children, and requested that one might be estab- lished ; stating that, by so doing, " great fame and merit would accrue to their benefactors." If a qualified teacher and half the expenses could be provided by the Conference, the bearer of the document enga- ged on behalf of the natives of My- sore, that they would raise the re- mainder. This accomplished, a monthly grant of thirty pounds would be given by the liberality of the Mysore Commissioner. It was listened to with deep interest and attention by the Conference, and the request granted. Perhaps this is the iirst instance in which an as- sembly of Christian ministers has received a similar petition from such a number of heathens and Mussul- mans, requesting the benefits of edu- cation at their hands, and it re- minds us of the prayer of the Man of Macedonia, " Come over and help us." The money for this interesting object was subscribed, and a valua- ble school apparatus provided and talien to India at the commencement of this year, by Rev. E. J. Hardey. At present. Rev. D. Sanderson is busily employed in London, with Mr. Watts, the type-founder, in pre- paring new fonts of Canarese type, for the use of the printing establish- ment in Bangalore, which will fur- ther increase its efBciency, — already so great, that few provincial ofBces in England send out more beautiful work, either as to typography or binding. The labors of Mr. Gar- rett in that department have been of distinguished value ; and Mr. Sanderson, by able translations of very recondite native works, has done much to secure to the Christian press a command of the literature of the country. The printing establishment in Bangalore was never so efficient, and never promised such extensive use- fulness as at the present. During the year it has issued 59,448 publi- cations. It is impossible by human arithmetic to calculate the real bene- fit which is conferred upon India by this one establishment.— Crow^/t^r's History of Mahodism ; Hook's Mis- sion to Madras; W. Arthur's Re- miniscences of a Mission to the My- sore; The Wesleyan Missionary No- tices, and the Annual Reports.— -'RvY. W. BUTLEK. -- S 2 ^ •i O .(D (£ 1:11 i 3 CO T-1 r- iH mt 1 oo> >o oo (M O cting fc end bol Week-d IM (M CO <0 W (N - -^-5^'^ o ^ ■S-S d CO •saxag O .(Offi ^ x(;oq JO eJBxoqog tO^ rH (O ■a § -SJS •r O -^-ea JO laquinjsi ■Bxooqog -Xbci jo Jaquinjij ■saxog i{ioq JO Bi^ioqog-q'j'Eq g : : S -qug JO Joqinnj^ ■Biooqog-tnuq rH . . ^ H « N -q-Bg JO J3qain|s[ •diqei8qm8pi -*eo CO (N (MCO .rH (MMr^iH u= \a 5 •S^UEIBISSV EH pn^ S81JBnOT8STI5 COCfl iH H iOMi-< rH o ^ ■s33Uii-3miio^3Jj Jaq^o JO Jaqnin^ (OCQ tH (C oa CT(M -cq § hi 1 a 6 s EH 01 P .3 1 .g mn aisg u ^ H-S )^^^^& &k6e rAeiei-^tc T-Icqeort 451 HINDOSTAN. Welsh Calttnistio Methodist Missionary SooiBTY. — This society sent out Rev. Thomas Jones, in November, 1840, who commenced a station at Oherrapunji, in the north-east of Bengal, near Sylhet, among the Kassias, one of the hill tribes. Other missionaries follow- ed, and in 1850 another station was com- menced at Sylhet. In 1852, the number of communicante at the two stations was twenty- eight. Eev. W. Lewis has translated the four Gospels and the Acts into Kassias ; a translation of Matthew, by Mr. Jones, hav- ing been previously printed in the Eoman character. — W. B. American Baptist Mission among the Te- Looooos. — The country of the Teloogoos lies on the western coast of the Bay of Bengal, and stretches nearly 800 miles from the northern part of the Oarnatio to the borders of Orissa. The Teloogoos or Telingas are believed to be descendants of an ancient and once powerful race of India, and though now subject to dif- ferent jurisdictions, they are united by a com- mon language and common traditions as one people. They are generally estimated at up- wards of ten millions in number, of whom three millions dwell within the Northern Cir- cars, or collectorates of the presidency of Ma- dras, while the remaining part are under the rule of the Nizam of Hyderabad, or Golcon- dah. Beyond this region also they are widely scattered over the territory of Southern India, especially in the districts of Tanjore, Mysore, and the city of Madras. The religion of the Teloogoos is Brahminism, and the system of caste is established among them, separating them into classes and ranks, between which in- tercourse is impossible. Each trade or occu- pation is a caste by itself, and its members, with their families and kindred, cannot become connected, nor can they even associate with those belonging to any other. The mission of the American Baptist Mis- sionary Union among this people owes its ori- gin to the representations of Rev. Amos Sut^ ton, of the English General Baptist Mission in Orissa, during his visit to the United States in 1835. The London Missionary Society had stationed its earliest missionaries in India among the Teloogoos, but in consequence of their death and other causes, the whole region had been abandoned. Their missionai'ies and others dwelling in the neighboring countries, had prepared a grammar a,nd dictionary of the language, and had translated the entire Bible, of which the New Testament, and some books of the Old, had been printed in two editions, one at Seramppre and one at Madras. The language was said to possess unusual copious- ness and variety, and the people to be among the most interesting and intelligent to be found in India. On the 22d of September, 1835, Eev. Sa- muel S. Day and his wife, and Rev. E. L. Abbott having been appointed missionaries among these people, sailed for Calcutta in the same ship which bore Rev. Mr. Malcolm, the agent of the Board appointed to visit the mis- sions of the Bast, and Rev. Mr. Sutton, who was returning to Orissa. Mr. Abbott was, on his arrival at Calcutta, transferred to the Karen mission in Burmah, while Mr. and Mrs. Day immediately proceeded to Vizagapatam, where they entered upon the study of the lan- guage, with the aid of the books prepared by the missionaries of former years. After pass- ing several months in acquiring the language and observing the condition of the country and its population, Mr. Day, with the advice of Rev. Mr. Malcom, at length, in March, 1831, fixed his residence at Madras, which, though it was already the seat of more than one mission- ary, yet had none for the large Teloogoo popu- lation of the city and its suburbs. With the aid of a native convert whom he employed, he established three schools, containing about seventy scholars, and assisted as far as he was able, in maintaining public worship in the na- tive language, and also preached in English and distributed tracts and portions of the Scriptures to those of the population who could read. In 1838, a church of sixteen members, English, Eurasian, Hindoo, and Burman, was organized at Madras, and a branch of it, comprising soldiers of an English regiment, was also organized at Bellary. The preaching in English was understood by mul- titudes of the native population, and the mem- bers of the schools soon evinced their desire to acquire the language in preference to any other branch of knowledge— a fact which plainly indicates that the people not unfre- quently attend the missionary schools, merely for the purpose of gaining some worldly ad- vantage. The experience of missionaries in India on this subject is rapidly convincing them that teaching English is not a part o'f their appropriate duty. Mr. Day was obliged to prosecute his mis- sion alone, and was constantly embarrassed for the want of the sympathy and cooperation of an associate ; but tne Board now found themselves exceedingly restricted in funds, and unable to send another missionary to his aid. During the first four years of his residence in the country he had baptized many soldiers of the English regiments and other English resi- dents of the country. He had also baptized several Eurasians and Tamils, but none of the Teloogoos had thus far embraced Christianity. In these circumstances he decided, in the sum- mer of 1839, to seek another station for the mission. He at length fixed upon Nellore, and removed thither, with his family, in Feb- ruary, 1840. Having rented of the govern- ment a lot, and erected a suitable building to serve as a mission-house and a zayat, he immo- diately commenced the daily reading of the Scriptures, and preaching on the Sabbath. A few weeks after his settlement at Nellore, he EINDOSTAN. 455 was joined by Eev. Stephen Yan Husen and Lis wife, who had been appointed to the mis- sion, and in September of the same year he baptized the first Christian convert from the Teioogoos. In a visit which Mr. Day subse- quently made to Madras he found the church which he had left there scattered, and to a great extent, fallen from the faith which its members professed. It was without a pastor, and its members had ceased to meet together, and though others were waiting for baptism, Mr. Day recommended the dissolution of the church and the organization of another at Ar- cott, which should embrace all its living mem- bers and receive the converts who were about to be baptized. The great external hindrances which the missionaries from the beginning encountered among the Tfeloogoos, arose from the system of caste, which holds in its iron bondage all classes of the people in Hindostan. They could not receive the missionary into their dwellings lest they should lose caste. They would allow their children to attend schools for religious instruction, if given by the missionary, or by unconverted native teachers, but not by Chris- tian natives. Children may be sent to the missionary to be taught, but he may not visit them in the families to which they belong. It has been the general practice of mission- aries of the various Christian denominations to translate the Scriptures according to the authorized English version, a practice which requires the transfer of certain words from the original ttreek without translating them. The Baptist missionaries, however, both of England and America, have generally felt obliged to translate these words, especially the word bap- tize, according to their own convictions of its meaning. The adoption of this view by the Board of Managers as a rule for the guidance of its missionaries, gave rise to the action on the part of the American Bible Society, which resulted in the formation of the American and Foreign Bible Society, an institution which was founded and has been supported by ± por- tion of the Baptists of the United States. The copies of • the Scriptures which Messrs. Day and Van Husen distributed in Madras and Nellore had been furnished by the Madras Bible Society, and printed at that city. But this society could not print a translation of the Scriptures made by the Baptist mission- aries without abandoning their principles, and the missionaries, on the other hand, could not adopt any other without disregarding the in- structions of the managers. This embarrass- ment was experienced in all the Baptist mis- sions, and however much a circulation of the Bible in different translations is to be regre1> ed, it yet seems to be an inevitable result of the existing diversity of views in the Christian world. In 1841 Messrs. Day and Van Husen, seeing the necessity of an additional missionary and a printing-press, urged^tho matter in a special communication upon the attention of the Board, but in the condition of the treasury at that time, it was impossible to comply with their request. In 1843 three additional con- verts were baptized, and the number of schools both in the city and the adjoining districts was considerably enlarged. But the health of the missionaries now began to decline, and the mission was soon afterwards crippled, and sub- sequently doomed to an interruption of several years in consequence of the disability and ab- sence of the missionaries. Mrs. Day, whose health first failed, was recruited after a brief absence. Mr. Van Husen was obliged to re- turn to the United States in 1845, and haa never recovered his health. Mr. Day was suddenly stricken down in October of the same year, and was obliged to hasten away when too ill to make any adequate arrangements either for his personal comfort or the contin- uance of the mission. The charge of the pro- perty and the care of the church at Nelloj'e and the schools were all committed to an Eu- rasian assistant, while Mr. Day returned to the United States. In 1848 the Missionary Union, after having long considered the question, finding that Mr. Day had now recovered his health, instructed the Board to reestablish the mission. In October of that year Mr. Day, in company with Eev. Lyman Jewett and Mrs. Jewett, sailed for Cal- cutta as missionaries at Nellore, where they arrived in the following April. The missions had been for more than three years wholly dependent on the care of a native assistant, a care which at best could not but be very inad- equate to its maintenance and progress. The church was scattered but not destroyed, and though some had forsaken their faith, a salutary discipline was productive of the restoration of others. The schools were soon reassembled, public worship resumed, books and tracts dis- tributed, and the whole agency of the mission again put in operation. The missionaries also took an early opportunity to attend several heathen festivals of this country, at which they met thousands of people from various parts of India and preached to them the doctrines of the Gospel. These labors were productive of much inquiry among the people, and of confes- sions which are constantly made to the mis- sionaries, that Brahminism is an imposture and is destined soon to pass away. There have also been several apparent conversions, and two have been baptized ; but the field ocoapied by the mission, it must be admitted, still continues to be one of great promise rath- er than of fruit. The missionaries have work- ed on assiduously beneath the protection of the English government, among a people of unu- sual intelligence, among whom great prepara- tions would appear to have been made for the spread of the Gospel. The enervating heat of the climate haa repeatedly prostrated their 466 HINDOSTAN. energies and obliged them to withdraw for a season to recruit, and at length in June, 1852, Mr. Day was corapelledby ill-health to return to the United States. Mr. and Mrs. Jewett have since been in sole charge of the mission. The latest reports represent them as still pro- secuting their accustomed work, experiencing the greatest kindness and receiving a hearty cooperation from the English residents at Nel- lore, and still more encouraged by tokens of divine approbation in the conversion of several of their pupils and visitors, of whom one has lately been baptized. Statistics of Teloogoo Mission for 1854. — 1 station, 2 missionaries, 2 female assistants, 1 native assistant, 1 church, 9 members, 1 board- ing-school, 13 pupils, 1 day-school, 50 pupils, total, 2 schools, 63 pupils. — Prof. W. Gammell. Basle Missionary Society. — Of the Ger- man missionary societies, that of Basle was the first which established a mission in the East Indies. In 1846 it had, in the province of Canara, on the west coast of Hindostan, and in Bodschagner, north of this, eight stations, of which Mangalore is the oldest. This was founded in 1834. It has, in the city and vicin- ity, several common schools, a high school, and a lithographic establishment. In 1837 and 1839, followed the stations at Dharwar and Hoobly, in the South-Mahratta country ; in 1841, the neighboring village of Bettigherry. There was a prophecy traditional in this place, that, after the fall of the Indian kingdom, a king in the West should send messengers to teach Christianity and do away with caste ; and as such the German missionaries were re- ceived. Malsamoodra was also added in the same year. In 1839, the mission work was carried on with great success, by Gundert, of Wurtemburg. In 1840 and 1842, stations were established at Cannanore and Calicut. The entire number of European laborers em- ployed by the Basle Society at these stations, including eleven women, was thirty-three ; with thirteen native helpers. 2,000 natives, partly adults, partly school-children, were con- nected with the mission. A Basle missionary in Mangalore had translated several books of the New Testament into the Tooloo language, which were lithographed at Mangalore. — Traiulated from tlie German of Wiggers. The following notices of the several stations of this mission will show its present condi- tion. Mangalore. — In 1846 the lithographic press at this station issued 12,775 copies of 16 dif- ferent works in Canarese, Teloogoo, and Ma- layalim. In the year 1847, 39 persons were received into the church by baptism, 29 of whom were adults and 10 children. In the year following, 24 adults and 10 children were baptized, and several were excommunicated. During the years 1849 and 1850, about fifty — adults and children — were baptized ; and a boarding-school for lado-British boys, and an industrial department, were formed. The printing in 1850 amounted to 966,230 pages. Moolky. — At the latest dates, the station at Port Moolky, which was commenced in 1845, had about 50 persons under the immediate instruction of the mission, a small church, and a school into which none but Christian chil- dren were admitted. The missionary, Mr. Amman, preached the Gospel in most of the neighboring villages, and was also engaged in translating the Scriptures, and revising the Tooloo translation of the Testament. Hcmore. — In 1847 there was at this station one missionary, a small congregation, and a school of 45 scholars, but at a later period the missionary had been removed, and no one had taken his place. Dharwar. — In 1849 ten adults and two little girls were admitted into the church. Six of these were Tamulians, a people who up to this time had rarely afforded any encouragement to the missionaries. A later report says, " Several Lingaites seem to be inwardly at- tached to the Gospel, but the fear of man and the charms of the world keep them back from Christ. The thraldom in which the poor Lin- gaites live, under their avaricious aud insolent high priests, four in number, is very galling. They farm their disciples out to certain priests, called priests of thousands, who squeeze from the poor deluded laity all they can get." Hoobly. — The success at this station has not been of the most encouraging nature for the last few years. Heathen hearers have been few on the Sabbath ; and, at times, they have seemed " to shun the word of God in the same measure as they became more acquainted with it," whether from indifference or fear, the mis- sionaries could not tell. Still, the schools have been well attended, and through these the seed has been sown among young and old. Tracts and portions of Scripture were learnt by heart, and the scholars catechized concern- ing them.. Bettigherry. — The adult portion of the pop- ulation at this station and in the villages around have for several years shown much good will to the missionaries. In most houses they have been welcome ; and Hindoo men, when spoken to of their hardness which prevented their receiving the Gospel, have entreated the missionaries to have patience till a better day should come. In 1848 a Linga priest came to the station, from some distance, and after mak- ing careful inquiry into the doctrine preached, he stayed to learn, and subsequently embraced Christianity and was baptized. The event created great sensation at Bettigherry and elsewhere. He became a zealous laborer, and has traveled much with the missionaries in their tours through the neighboring country. Another priest joined them in 1849, and tra- veled with them several months. A respecta- ble widow also joined them, was baptized, and subsequently married to the priest first named. HTNDOSTAN. 457 The people seem persuaded that the new teach- ers are their best friends, and they come in con- siderable numbers to hear the Gospel. The schools are in good condition. Malasamoodra. — A poor house and hospital were erected in 1846, by contributions from friends in Poorah. In June of this year, on a morning appointed for the purpose, several prominent men, natives, entered the temple of Doorga, and broke the idol and his seat in pieces and cast them into the street. This caused considerable excitement, but it soon subsided, and the idol temple was converted into a school-house, where the Scriptures were daily read, and prayer offered to the living God. Since that period the brethren have met with serious discouragements, but have continued to labor with some success, espe- cially in the schools. Catery. — This station, on the Neilgherry Hills, has been attended with considerable success. In 1850 a native broke off the inve- terate habit of opium eating, burnt his charm books, and withstood strong temptations to those works of darkness so profitable among the superstitions inhabitants of the Neilgher- ries. He attended the school with little child- ren, though a man of advanced age, because he longed to be able to read the word of God. He was soon to be baptized, as the first fruit of the mission at this place. The missionaries have visited the greater part of the several hundred villages scattered over the Neilgher- ries, and have become personally acquainted with a large number of the people. Some of them have a Tamil New Testament, which without being able to read, they worship morn- ing and evening. Others, from an indefinite belief in the power of Christ, have received his name among the rest of the gods, and would not think that anything could prosper without the invocation of his name. Cananore. — During the years 184'7 and 1848 the people at this place were visited with cho- lera and small pox, which proved fatal to many, and severely taxed the time and strength of the missionaries in attending upon the sick and dying. The schools were much inter- rupted, but have since come together as usual. Several have been converted, and the mission- aries record the happy deaths of two or three native converts within the last few years. Tellicherry. — The number of persons bap- tized at this station in 1846 was 22. A print- ing-press was set up during that year, from which was issued 2150 different works. In 1848 this mission shared largely in the special divine influences which visited the region, and many of the boys and girls in the schools were " shaken out of slumber and death," and have since been baptized. At the out-stations also several " found grace and life." Compara^ tively few, however, show signs of real spirit- ual life. The Brahmins, who are few, and the Nairs, a spirited class of people, keep at a dis- ^nce from the missionary. The I'lers are more accessible, but are altogether taken up with the cares of the world. The Mussnlmen hate the Gospel, and show their hatred when- ever they have an opportunity. Chombala. — A mission was commenced at this place in 1849, since which time a church of 20 or 30 members has been gathered, and a chapel has been built. Micha, a native, hav- ing been converted, his wife ran av/ay from him with her children, but returned after a few months. " Micha's father, an old drunk- ard, was driven to his house by want. At first he only laughed and mocked at the Gos- pel, but after some time, to the astonishment of all, his mind seemed changed. The very ex- pression of his countenance was altered. He has been baptized, with Micha's wife and children. Calicut. — In respect to the care of the poor- house, which in 1846 was committed to the missionaries, they say, " There are about 150 inmates, for whom every Saturday a service is held by one of the catechists. Such an assem- bly of crippled, lame, blind, leprous, sunk in the utmost ignorance and apathy, and who on a kind word of exhortation generally have nothing to say but ' What can I do ? It is the Lord's will ; thus it is written on my skull ;' is a melancholy sight." In the autumn of 1847, 18 were received into the church at this station. In January, 1848, six adults and four girls belonging to the girls' institution were baptized ; and in June a weaver with his family, three persons in all, and in November a Tamil family of four persons, were baptized. In January, 1849, a Nair family, together with two youths, two women, and two child- ren, were received into the church. About this time Mrs. Huber, wife of the missionary, commenced an English day school for Indo- British girls, and it has prospered remarkably, in spite of the opposition of the Eomish priest. Three Parsee girls joined the school soon after it was opened. Dacca. — A mission was commenced at this place in 184'?, and a school and a small con- gregation of 12 or 14 baptized heathen was gathered by an English chaplain. Others were subsequently added ; but the work became embarrassed by the want of local funds, and in 1850 the station was given up. Dagapoor. — In 1848, six men, two women and five children of natives were baptized at this place. Before the rite was administered to them, the inquirers had to undergo a severe persecution from their pagan countrymen, but they remained firm in their profession of faith in the Saviour. On ' Good Friday,' 1849, 19 Christian natives sat down for the first time to the celebration of the Lord's Supper. " On the first of April Mr. Bion, with his fellow- laborers, opened a school. On Sunday fifty or sixty Hindoos and Mohammedans attended divine service, of whom not a few were visibly 4:5b HINDOSTAN. affected." The missionaries received the most pressing invitations from places at variofll distances, to visit them. Comilla. — A missionary, Mr. Bost, with his catechist, reached this place on Christmas day, 1847, and immediately commenced preaching the Gospel, which roused the opposition of the enemy. On assuming a more retired activity in his own house, he found himself surrounded by crowds of visitors, who desired to hear the word of God. The higher castes asked for schools for their children. But embarrass- ments overtook the mission, and it was several years since discontinued. Two of the foregoing stations having been discontinued, leaves thirteen now in actual existence, besides which there are 19 or 20 out-stations. In 1851 " Inspector Josenhans " visited the India missions of the Basle Missionary Society, and his report was of a highly gratifying nar ture. He found that about 1400 persons had been gathered into Christian congregations ; and in one village, containing several hundred souls, only three persons continued heathen Christian colonies had been established in three places, and were regarded with peculiar inte- rest. The inspector says, " The religious life of the new converts is by no means so weak as many are disposed to think." On the whole, he expressed his astonishment that so much had been accomplished by the mission within a period of 18 years, for he found the work much more difficult than Christians at home had supposed it to be. Even he who had been familiar with the operations and trials of his brethren, had not appreciated the difiBcul- ties of the enterprise till he had the advantages of a personal inspection. TABULAE VIEW. ■S a c n m H s •s s lS STATIONS. □ a <1 n «! 43 ■J3 a ^ — a •i, 6 cK a Canarese Mission. 1834 1846 1846 7 1 b 3 138 26 2 190 6 Moolky Honore So. Mahratia Mission. Dbarwar 1837 1839 1841 1841 Si 2 1 2 26 2 2 3 6 7 8 1 412 330 321 18 Hoobly Bettigherry Malatalim Mission, 1841 1889 1849 184i! 'i 2 1 2 8 3 2 3 202 26 23 84 220 387 68 336 Calicut Neilgherrt. Catery 1H4« 4 1 7 SI Bengal. Dayapoor , 1847 2 1 28 28 487 24 2368 The preceding table will give some idea of the field occupied by this Society, and the ex- tent of its labors, though imperfect, as the omis- sions indicate. It is based on the reports for 18.^0. A report for 1852 supplies some of the deficiencies, and swells the number of commu- nicants to 780, a large number having been added to the churches ' during the preceding two years. The total number in the congrega- tions is stated at 1699, 200 having been added during 1851. The whole number of laborers from Europe, including the wives of mission- aries, is 45. The expenditures of the mission for the year last reported, amounted to 64,893 rupees, a considerable portion of which was contributed by the friends of missions in India. Beklin Missionary Society. — The Berlin Society for Evangelizing the Heathen, estab- lished in November, 1843, a station at Ghazi- pur, a city of 50,000 inhabitants, on the Ganges, with four missionaries, who, in Feb. 1844, having acquainted themselves with the Hindoo and Urdu languages, made their first ef- forts at public preaching. Leipsic Missionary Society. — The Luthe- ran Missionary Society at Leipsic has, by the report for 1853, eight stations in Southern Hindostan. The following table exhibits the state of their missions at the above date. TABULAE VIEW. stations. Tranquebar Tirumenjanam.. Vorreiar Mayaveram Madras Puducottah Trichinopoly . , , Tanjore Totals 6 2116 36 68 66 3712162 890 * Including Europeans. North German Missionary Society. — This society, which had two stations, one in the Teloogoo country. Eastern Hindostan, and one in the Neilgherries, was obliged, in consequence of diminished receipts, to suspend operations in the autumn of 1850, and the mission was transferred to the Evangelical Lutheran Church in the United States. Since that time the responsibility of the mission has been assumed by the Bremen Union, and the committee of this society find themselves sus- tained by the sympathy and cooperation of many warm friends of missions in Northern Germany. The station in Eastern Hindostan is Bajamundry, and that in the Neilgherries ia HINDOSTAN. 459 Ootacamund. No recent statistics have been furnished respecting either of these stations. Gossnee's Missionary Society. — Gossner's missionaries, with no preparatory education , except that of the common schools, and accus- tomed to manual labor, appeared ia 1838, on the middle Ganges, and joined in close fellow- ship with the English preacher Stael, who was laboring unconnected with any missionary or- ganization. They came to Patna on the 29th January, 1839, aud divided themselves among the stations, Hadsohipur, Muzaffipur, Chuprah, and Ribbelgandsch. Hence they visited Pat- na, Monghyr and Dinapore. A small colony settled at Dardschilling, on the boundaries of Nepaul. Another expedition went from Bom- bay to Jubblepoor, in the interior of India. Partly through death, partly through its mem- bers becoming connected with other societies, Gossner's society met with considerable losses, and the attempt was scarcely more successful than that of the Moravians in India, many years previous. — Wiggers. GENERAL TABULAR VIEW. Baptist Missionary Society (English) London Missionary Society . . . American Board Church Missionary Society . . . Wesleyan Missionary Society . . . Soc. for Prop. Gospel in For. Parts General Baptist Missionary Society Church of Scotland Free Church of Scotland .... American Presbyterian Board . . Basle Missionary Society .... American Baptist Union .... Free-Will Baptist Society .... Welsh Calvinistic Methodists . . . Irish Presbyterian Church .... Berlin Missionary Society .... Leipsic Missionary Society . . . Totals 'I 1793 1804 1812 1813 1817 1818 1822 1828 1829 1834 1834 1835 1836 1840 1841 1843 .2 178 35 47 26 83 17 48 5 7 18 23 26 2 8 2 5 4 6 357 85 133 106 1002 21 166 10 3 4 28 28 3 7 67 1663 1,412 1,024 541 5,815 428 4,629 255 266 487 9 47 28 2,152 17,093 43 44 127 526 20 24 2 787 2,345 8,919 3,800 17,873 1,183 5,500 2,932 2,375 7,030 2,900 2,358 63 151 21 890 58,340 The preceding table has been made out from the materials furnished by the foregoing state- ments. Oa some points the information is quite deficient ; the number of stations in con- nection with some of the societies is not fully reported. The number of native assistants is fully reported by few, and some societies re- port the wives of missionaries as assistants, and others do not report them at all. The number of organized churches and of schools is deficient in many of them. But the number of missionaries, communicants, and scholars, is pretty generally reported. It is to be re- gretted, however, that in such full and valu- able reports as are furnished by the Wesleyang, they do not distinguish between ordained mis- sionaries and assistants. In judging of the comparative success of different societies, some regard must be had to the degree of strictness practised in the admission of converts to church privileges. There is a diflFerence, also, in the mode of counting stations. In some ac- counts, only the central stations are given, and others are reckoned as out-stations. But with all its deficiencies, this table speaks, in language not to be mistaken, of the results of missionary labor in India. Present State and Future Prospects op THE Missionary work in India. — The fol- lowing letter from the Venerable Dr. Scud- DER to the author, will give the impressions of one on the ground, who has witnessed the changes which have been going on for the last quarter of a century. We doubt not it will be read with deep interest. Madras, April 6, 1854. My Dear Brother : — Tour letter of Janu- ary 1, reached me last month. India, as a field of missionary labor, is very different from what it was a few years ago — very different from what it wa§ when even the venerable Dr. Carey reached it. He^as you know, was not allowed i60 HINDOSTAK. to commence his operations anywhere -within the dominions of the East India Company. It was on this account that he went to Seram- pore, where he resided until his death. Now the missionary may enter any part of India. Within the last few years, other changes of a very important nature have also taken place. This is witnessed, 1. I?i the educational department. "The Marquis of Hastings's government forms the brightest page in the history of In- dian improvement, after a long chapter of dark and dismal proceedings. It gave that impulse to the cause of civilization, of which we are now reaping the benefits. When he first came to India in 1813, he found the press in the hands of a censor, who struck out whatever he pleased. He found that every attempt to impart knowledge to the people, and to give them the means of mental or social elevation had not only been neglected, but discouraged that the British empire in India was considered stable, in exact proportion to the ignorance of the inhabitants. The only educational effort made in the reign of his predecessor was a pro- posal by Lord Minto to set up two or three colleges to teach the Sanscrit language, and the sciences of the Shasters, and the morality of Hindooism ; but not the remotest idea was ever entertained of unlocking to the natives the treasures of the English language, or dis- seminating knowledge through their own tongue. This system Lord Hastings was the first to break through. He gave every encour- agement, private and public, to the establish- ment of schools and colleges. Under his aus- pices, the Calcutta School Society, the School Book Society, the Hindoo College and other institutions sprung into being. He also abo- lished the censorship of the press, with the full knowledge that the general feeling among the directors and proprietors, at the India house, was against any relaxation of the restrictions on the press. That he met with opposition to his views in India, will appear from the follow- ing circumstance : An article appeared in the quarterly series of the Friend of India, on the burning of widows, in which the propriety of abolishing this rite was advocated with a de- gree of temper and moderation suited to the circumstances of the times ; but which gave Buch offence to Mr. Adams, afterwards our temporary Governor-General, that he took it to the council chamber, and insisted on the suppression of the work, which Lord Hastings positively refused to sanction." " After the censorship of the press had been taken off, the Court of Directors showed their opposition to what Lord Hastings had done, by the prepara';ion of a dispatch, directing the imposition of the censorship again, which, how- ever, George Canning nobly refused to sanc- tion." I just alluded to the opposition which was formerly made by the India gtivermnent to the education of the natives. The reverse of this now obtains. So anxious are they to confer this benefit upon them, that they have offered to contribute their money for the -support of those schools which are taught by missionaries, and of course in which Christianity is taught. When speaking of the Marquis of Hastings, I referred you to Mr. Adams, who thought that the Friend of India should be suppressed, because it had ventured to suggest the propri- ety of abolishing the burning of widows on the funeral pile. By contrasting his conduct with that of Lord Bentick and Lord Hardinge, we shall at once see how much the views of the politicians of India have, in a short period, been changed for the better. Lord Bentick abolished the suttee throughout the British possessions of India, and Lord Hardinge made great exertions to have it abolished in the do- minions of the native princes, not under British jurisdiction. And his labors were attended with great success. He returned to England, six or seven years ago, crowned with many worldly honors. But he has other honors — honors of a higher nature than these. He went home with the satisfaction of having les- sened, in no small degree, the horrors of hear thenism, in regions embracing a population of not less than twenty millions. This will ap- pear from the following notice : " The Calcutta Gazette contains a proclamation by Maha Rajah Golaub Singh, prohibiting inianticide, suttee, and slavery throughout his territories, forming the remotest Hindoo principality of India. The Governor-General, as will be seen, directs his thanks to be conveyed to a long list — twenty-three in number — of potentates, who during the last three years, have cordially entered into the views of the British govern- ment, in suppressing such practices. Those edicts are estimated to affect not less than twenty millions of human creatures." Such innovations as Lord Hardinge has been instrumental in making on the sacred customs of the Hindoos among the independ- ent governments of India, will be the means of pulling many a stone from that fabric, which they have in times past considered to be as stable as the heavens. Under such circum- stances, the missionary may go forth and lar bor among them with a much better prospect of success than he would otherwise obtain. As I before remarked, Lord Hardinge left the country six or seven years ago. He left it much too soon for India's good. Had he re- mained his full time, to say nothing of any- thing else, the burning of widows would per- haps now be unknown here. Previously to his leaving, however, he left his protest against the conduct of those powers which had not abolished the rite — a protest which may issue in great good. It is as follows : " The Gover- nor-general abstains on this occasion from pro- minently noticing those states in which these barbarous usages are still observed, as he con- HINDOSTAN. 461 fidently expects, at no distant day, to hear of the complete renunciation of them in eyery state in alliance with, or under the protection 'of the paramount power of India." 2. Infanticide has been very extensively sup- pressed. You can scarcely imagine to what a frightful extent this crime has prevailed. Among the Nairs in Mulwa, in Oude, and the northern provinces, it is impossible to calcu- late what numbers of infants have, in the times which have gone by, been put to death. A gentleman of the Bengal service was sent by the government through the northern and in- dependent kingdoms to find oat the number. In the proviaces through which he passed the principal chiefs acknowledged that they had murdered many of their children, and that they knew their neighbors had destroyed many of theirs, and that this rite was rooted in the affections of the people. In one village there were fifty-one boys but only fourteen girls. In a second, sixty-six boys and only fourteen girls. In a third, seventy-nine boys and only twelve girls. In a fourth, ten boys and only two girls. In a fifth, fifty-eight boys and only four girls. In a sixth, twenty-two boys and no girls. As you are aware, the Punjaub has lately been brought under British rule. Since this event took place, the fact has been brought to light that lofanticide has been practiced ex- tensively there. In the latter part of the year 1851 " Major Lake found it to prevail in the district of which he had charge. Soon after- wards it was found to prevail in Umballa, Pe- rozepore, JuUundur, Hooshearpore, Lahore, Mooltan, Jhelum, and Leia districts. It is not, however, practiced by all of the inhabits ants. It is confined principally to the Bedees and the Kajpoots, among whom the custom is one of immemorial antiquity. The Khetrees, however, and even some of the Mohammedan tribes maintain the practice ; and the higher the rank the more certain are the female branches of destruction. It is believed also by the most experienced officers to have in- fected all classes in a greater or less degree. All over the Punjaub there is a disproportion in the number of female births not to be ac- ■ counted for by ordinary causes; and in cer- tain districts this disproportion rises to such a height, as almost to imply the extinction of the female race." The subject came under the notice of our present Governor-general, Earl Dalhousie, several months ago, and if this prac- tice has not yet been put down, as it has been put down in other places, it must soon come to an end. 3. One of the most appalling religious sects which ever appeared i,n any country, has been nearly, if not entirely, destroyed. Allow me to give you a short description of this sect, from a work, which now lies before me. Scat^ tered throughout India there is a lawless set of men whose profession it is to get their food by murder. They are called Phansiagars, or Thugs : they owe their origin and laws to the bloody goddess Karle : they say that she di- rected them to become murderers and plunder- ers : they are called Phansiagars, from the name of the instrument which they use when they murder people. Phansiagar means a strangle, and they use a phansi, or noose, which they throw over the necks of those whom they intend to plunder, and strangle them. These Phansiagars are composed of all castes, Hin- doos, Mohammedans, Pariahs, and Chandellars. This arises from the circumstance that they never destroy the children of those whom they rob and murder. These children they take care of, and bring them up to their own hor- rible mode of life. They always murder those whom they rob, acting upon the maxim, ' that dead men tell no tales.' A gang of these rob- bers varies from a dozen to sixty or seventy persons. These divide into small parties. Those whom they murder are travelers whom they happen to meet on the road. Sometimes two or three of a gang will take up theh sta- tion in a choultry, or place where the traveler stops, and while he sleeps they rouse him from his sleep, and cast the noose over his head and kill him. It takes two persons to kill a man. Oue casts the noose over his head, and imme- diately tightens it with all his strength ; the other strilies him on the joint of the knees aa he rises, which causes him to fall backwards. After he has fallen they kick him on the tem- ples till he dies, which is usually in a minute. They never commit a murder until they have taken every precaution not to be found out. They will follow a traveler for weeks, if neces- sary, before they destroy him. After they have murdered him, they gash the body all over and bury it. They gash it that it may not swell and cause cracks to take place in the ground, which might cause the jackalls to dig down to the body, and thus expose their guilt. If a dog accompanies the person, they always kill it, lest the faithful creature should lead to the discovery of his master. They think it to be a very good act to give a part of the plun- der, which they get when they murder a per- son, to their goddess. If they fail to put him to death according to their rules, they suppose that they have made her angry, and they make offerings to her, that she may be appeased. Thus, their religion teaches tliem to commit the blackest of crimes. The reason why this people gash and bury the bodies of those whom they murder, is as follows : They say that the goddess used to save them the trouble of burying the corpses of their victims by eating them, thus screening the murderers from all chance of being found out. Once, after the murder of a traveler, the body was, as usual, left unburied. One of the Phansiagars em- ployed, unguardedly looking behind him, saw the goddess in the act of feasting on it. This made her so angry, that she vowed never again i62 HINDOSTAN. to devour a body slaughtered by tnem, they having by this one act of curiosity forfeited her favor. However, as an equivalent for withdrawing her patronage, she plucked one of the fangs from her celestial jaw, and gave it to them, saying that they might use it as a pickaxe, which would never wear out. She then opened her side, and pulled out one of her ribs, which she gave them for a knife, whose edge nothing could blunt. Having done this she stooped down, and tore off the hem of her garment, which she gave them for a noose, declaring that it would never fail to strangle any person about whose throat it might be cast. She, moreover, commanded them to gash and bury the bodies of those whom they destroyed. The Phansiagars bring up their children to their own profession. To learn this the boy is placed under the care of a tutor. Sometimes his father is his teacher. By him he is taught that it is just as proper to murder a man as it is to kill a snake which lies in his path, and would bite him as he passes. He is not per- mitted at first to see the murders, but merely a dead body ; his mind being gradually pre- pared for the sight. After this, the dreadful secret of his trade is, by degrees, told him. When he expresses a wish to be engaged in this horrid business, they tell him all about it. In the mean time, he is allowed a small part of the plunder, in order that his desire to com- mit these murders may be increased, as it is only by murder that the plunder is obtained. He is allowed fi-om time to time to assist in some things while the murder is taking place ; or is allowed to be present to see how the busi- ness is managed. It is not, however, until he becomes a man that he is permitted to apply the noose. To attain this privilege, he usually devotes eight or ten years. Before he can commit a murder, his tutor must present him with a noose. This sets him loose upon the world, as a licensed murderer. When the tutor is about to give him the noose, he takes him apart, and solemnly enjoins it upon him to use it with skill, as it is to be the means of his earning his food, and as his safety will depend upon the skill with which it is used. After he receives it, he tries his skill in strangling a person, the first opportunity that occurs. By the course of education which the Phan- siagars undergo, they become so fond of their dreadful occupation, that nothing can induce them to quit it. Some who have been employed in the East India Company's service have shown this, by returning to their business when an opportunity offered of successful enterprise. When the Phansiagars become old, they do not quit the service ; but act as watchers, and decoy the traveler, by some false tale of dis- tress, into some distant place, where he is mur- dered. Women are sometimes admitted to the soci- ety of these plunderers, and on some occasion's are allowed to apply the noose. They select a handsome girl, and place her in a convenient spot, where, by her beauty, or by a false . story of distress, she may decoy some unsus- pecting traveler, and be the means of his de- struction. Should he be on horseback, she will induce him to take her up behind him, after which, when an opportunity offers, she throws the noose over his bead, leaps from the horse, drags him to the ground and strangles him. Some time since, it happened that a horseman of Ooorg, in the Madras Presidency, was passing by a spot where one of these in- teresting-looking girls was stationed. She told him a piteous story of having been robbed, and badly treated, and begged him to assist her. Feeling sorry for her, he offered to take her up behind him on his horse, and thus assist her a few miles on her journey. She expressed much gratitude for his kindness, and mounted. Soon afterwards, she suddenly passed a noose over his head, and, drawing it with all her might, endeavored to pull him from his saddle. At this moment a number of Phansiagars started from the neighboring thicket and sur- rounded him. The murderess then slipped from the horse ; but the Ooorg striking his heels into the horse's side, it threw out its hind legs with great violence, and struck the girl to the ground, who immediately let go the cord. He then drew his sword, and cutting his way through the robbers, effected his escape. He wounded two of them severely. These men were shortly afterwards taken, and, through their means, twelve others fell into the hands of the judicial officers of the king of Coorg, including the girl who attempted the murder. They were all put to death. 4. A stop has been put, in a good degree, to the Meriah sacrifices in the extensive hill- tracts of Orissa. It was not until the military operations of the British took place in Upper and Lower Goomsoor, in 1836 and 1837, that the cruel rite of immolating human beings in these places was brought to light, and it waa not until that time that the first victims des- tined for sacrifice were taken from them. Captain Millar was the honored instrument in rescuing them. They were twelve in number. His services were acknowledged in the follow- ing manner by the Madras Government: " Captain Millar will realize in his own mind an ample reward for his most commendable conduct, in having rescued twelve victims destined for those horrible sacrifices, as the gratifying reflection of having been the means of saving so many human beings from a cruel and untimely death cannot fail, at all times, to be a source of genuine happiness to him. The discretion, however, with which he con- tinued to effect his humane purpose, is entitled to the warmest and most unqualified approbor tion of government." In the year 1838, Captain Campbell rescued a much larger number. He writes, " I have HINDOSTAN. i63 been most fortunate in my late expedition among the wild Khunds of Goomsoor, and have rescued no less than one hundred and three children of various ages, who were intended for' sacrifice by these barbarians. The chil- dren are now at head-quarters, and form a most interesting group ; happy such of them as were aware of their situation, in having escaped the fate which awaited them." I am acquainted with Captain Mac Viccar, who is one of the British agents " for the sup- pression of human sacrifices and female infan- ticide in the hill tracts of Orissa." I learned from him that the whole number of victims who had been rescued, up to the time when I saw him, from those hill tracts, amounted to more than 1,900. Of these, no less than 500 were rescued by himself and his assistant. Cap- tain Prye, in the course of a few months. Since my interview with Captain MacViccar, which was in the year 1851, other victims have been rescued. There are various tribes inhabiting the ex- tensive hill districts to which I have been al- luding, and their manner of offering up these sacrifices have been various also. Let me give you a few quotations from a little book before me, to show how the Khunds were in the habit of offering up their victims. " When the day which has been appointed for the sacrifice ar- rives, the Khunds assemble from all parts of the country, dressed in their finery ; some with bear skins thrown over their shoulders ; others with the tails of peacocks flowing behind them, and the long, winding feather of the jungle- cock waving over their heads. Thus decked, they dance, leap, rejoice, beat drums, and play on an instrument not unlike in sound to the highland-pipe. In the afternoon, the priest with the aid of an assistant proceeds to fasten a man or a woman, or a boy or a girl to a post which has been firmly fixed in the ground. Around this post stand hundreds of those Khunds with knives in their hands. At an appointed signal they rush upon the poor creature and try who can cut the first piece of flesh from his bones. Great value is attached to the first morsel cut out from his body, as it is supposed to possess greater virtues. This is buried in the earth before sunset." In Guddapore a different sacrifice precedes this. A trench, seven feet long, is dug, over which a human body is suspended alive, by the neck and feet, which are fastened with ropes to stakes firmly fixed in the ground, at each end of the excavation, so that to prevent strangulation he is compelled to support him- self with his hands over each side of his grave. The presiding priest, after performing various ceremonies in honor of their goddess, takes an axe and inflicts six cuts, at equal distances from the feet to the back of the neck, repeat- ing the numbers. One, two, three, and so forth, Rondi, Rendi, Mungee, Nalge, Chingi, Sajgi, and at the seventh. Argi, cuts off his head. The body falls into into the pit and is covered" with earth. Captain Mac Viccar gave me an account ot other districts, where these sacrifices are per- formed in a different manner. " Some destroy their victims by heavy blows from the metal bangles, which they purchase at the fairs, and wear on these occasions. If the poor creature is not killed by two or three of these heavy blows inflicted on his head, they strangle him with a cleft bamboo, which they slip over his neck. Others destroy their victims by placing them on the ground, bound hand and feet, with their faces downward, and by throwing large stones violently on the back of their necks, until life becomes extinct. " In Patna the people do not use much of the flesh of their victims, frequently none at all. In some districts they cut out the liver, in others the lungs, and after chopping them up in small pieces, bury them. It is customary among some tribes to draw a cup full of blood from the body, and each family takes a little of it and sprinkles it on the floor of their houses. While doing this they implore bless- ings on their households and on their fields." The victims whom the Khunds sacrifice are generally bought or stolen from the low coun- try, and sold to them. Sometimes they escape from their owners and thus are saved from death. After the arrival of the British troops in the Khund country, a female found her way to the collector's camp with fetters on her legs. She had escaped from those who had charge of her, and said that she had been sold by her own brother for the purpose of being sacrificed. I will mention the case of another individual who escaped from the Khunds, and this case is the more interesting from the circumstance that he has gone back to the hills to assist in establishing and superintending schools. His name is Joy Sing. He had witnessed one of these sacrifices by stealth. He had seen a child put in the cleft of a small tree which had been split for the purpose. He had seen how the child was held fast in that position, by the split parts of the tree having closed upon its body ; and while it was thus secured, he had seen the flesh cut from its bones. We shall not therefore wonder that he was filled with horror at the thought of meeting such a doom. Neither shall we wonder at his deter- mination to make the very last possible effort to free himself from the hands of his intended murderers. The effort was made, but it was, at first, unsuccessful. After traveling for two days through the jungle, he was recaptured by his owners and put in irons. His courage however did not fail. He determined to make another attempt to escape, though he could only crawl along, in consequence of the irons on his legs. Thus fettered, he traveled for two days and two nights, and when he had just reached the foot of the mountains, he again espied those who were in pursuit of him. Pro. 464 HINDOSTAN. videntially Captain Millar, of whom I have already spoken, had encamped near the place where he was. To this encampment he hasten- ed with all the speed which he could command, scarcely daring to look behind him, and happi- ly he reached it in safety. On his arrival he endeavored to make known his tale of woe by his looks and his tears, and those looks and tears spoke a language which this officer could not misunderstand. His irons were taken off and he was once more free. Of the children rescued from the Khunds and others, many have been sent by the Bri- tish Government to missionary schools. Con- nected with a station, where a very dear fellow- laborer of mine — the Rev. Mr. Wilkinson — resides, a station about ten miles distant from the first range of mountains inhabited by the Khunds, there are two schools, one for the boys and the other for the girls who have been rescued from this wretched people. Though not altogether in place, I cannot conclude without mentioning an interesting case or two of children in connection with the subject which is now before us. A few years ago, a number of these rescued victims arrived at the gate of the Mission house, on their way to the sea-coast. The children of the schools went out to see them. Belonging to the female school there was a lit^ tie girl, who thought that she recognized her brother among the strangers. In a few min- utes she was seen coming forward, leading him by the hand, and was heard exclaiming with joy, " I have found my brother." Mr. Wilkin- son said to her, " How do you know that he is your brother? Perhaps you are mistaken." " no, papa," said she, " 1 am not mistaken. I thought, when I saw him at the gate, that he looked just like a little brother I had when I was taken from my home, only he was smaller. So I said to myself, if he is my brother he will know his own name. So I called out Pod ! Pod ! and he lifted up his head and came running to my arms." And this sister wept over her little brother, and kissed him, and at last catching him up, she bore him away to her school-room. The Rev. Mr. Sutton relates the case of two brothers who met under similar circumstances. They had both been sold at diDerent times to the Khunds, for sacrifices, by their unnatural uncle. Among the victims formerly rescued from the Khunds, there was a very awkward lad, who was called David. Great pains were taken to instruct him, but he was so stupid that all efforts appeared to be useless. At last he was devoted to the work of sweeping the premises of the Mission house. " At this time," says Mr. Sutton, " our school was very full, and many of the young natives had been converted. AH at once a ray of intelligence seemed to break upon the mind of poor Da- vid. He seemed suddenly to be possessed of new faculties. AH were astonished at his un- derstanding and his answers. He now applied himself so diligently, and was profited so much by the instruction afforded, that he was subse- quently received into the church. Soon after- wards he was taken into the printing-office, and as he made rapid advances in his new business, he was made a compositor. While thus engaged, and amazing us all by his sud- den proficiency, there appeared on his skin numerous white spots — the first indications of leprosy, a very common and also a very fatal disease in India. We sent him to the hospital, and every care was taken of him ; but each of the white spots became a putrid ulcer, and his limbs were much eaten away. Nothing could arrest the progress of his malady, or save his life, and as there was danger that he might communicate his disease to others, by coming in contact with them, the doctor directed that he should, be kept by himself. A tent was provided for him, from which he would creep at service time to the door of the meeting- room and join in the service. A more inter- ested listener I never beheld. One day I went with my wife to pay him a visit. He was stretched on his mat. His Testament was close to his side. His hymn book was in his hand, and we saw that his attention had been rivited on the following verses : "Of all that decks the field or bower. Thou art the fairest, sweetest flower -, Then, blessed Jesus, let not me In thy kind heart forgotten be . '* Day after day youth's joys decay. Death waits to seize the tremblmg prey ; Then, blessed Jesus, let not me In thy kind heart forgotten be." When we left his tent, my wife said to mo with great emphasis and emotion, " There lies an heir of glory, for though like Lazarus he is full of sores, like Lazarus also, he is rich in assured hope." I could not but concur in the remark. Soon after this the spirit of this afflicted but happy youth took its flight, as we have every reason to believe, to the bosom of his Saviour, rescued by the British from the hands of the cruel Khunds, and rescued from eternal tor- ment in consequence of his having been sold to them for the purpose of being sacrificed. 5. The law which declares that a, native shall forfeit his paternal inheritance by becom- ing a Christian, has been abrogated. This was a most formidable obstacle to the spread of Christianity in this land, and I need hardly add that this abrogation is a very powerful blow to Hindooism. 6. Caste, the greatest obstacle to the spread of Christianity in India, has in some degree been put down. The government do not ac- knowledge it in the army. The Pariahs and the Brahmins are made to stand side by side when employed on duty. The government also disregard it in their educational institutions. HOME MISSIONS. 465 7. In the courts tlie practice of swearing is in some places changed, the Bible being sub- stituted for the water of the Ganges : or the witnesses make only a declaration that they will speak the truth. I need hardly add that all such changes are undermining the faith of this people. I have now mentioned a few things to show you that India is in a much better condition for the promotion of missionary labor than it was when you and I commenced life ; and if we further take into consideration the patronage and the support which missionaries receive in their work from the British government, what greater encouragements can Christians at home need to make this land a prominent field for their esertions ? This latter consideration should not be overlooked. I have again and again said that if we were not under the pro tection of this government, our lives would not be safe — humanly speaking — for an hour. But I have said enough. that the misery and dying groans of the 130,000,000 of India might arrest the attention of the young men of our churches in America, and constrain them to flee to their help before it shall be too late ! Is it not enough that so many myriads have already taken up their abode in hell for- ever ? Very sincerely, J. Scudder. HITIAA- : A station of 'the London Mis- sionary Society, on Tahiti, South Seas. HOBART TOWN : A station of the Wes- leyan Missionary Society in New Zealand. The town is delightfully situated upon two hills, between which there runs a fine stream of water from the heights of Table Mountain, which towers above it. HOLAPOOB : The capital of an indepen- dent state in Southern Hindostan, with a pop- ulation of 550,000. It is 130 miles south of Ahmednuggur, and GO miles south of Satara. It was occupied as a station of the American Board in 1852, no missionary labor having ever before been performed there. HOME MISSIONS : This term is applied to the work of preaching the Gospel in the destitute portions of our own country, planting new churches in places where the people are not able to do it themselves, and aiding feeble churches to sustain the preaching of the Gos- pel. And this work is increasing in interest and magnitude as our territory is expanding, and the destitute classes of our population are multiplying by the immigration of hordes of ignorant and unevangelized foreigners. Not only the papists of Europe, but even the hea^ then from Asia, are coming to our sliores ; and if we do not wish to see the pagoda as well as the cfithedral established among us, we must meet the case by the most vigorous applica- tion of the means of grace to our whole popu- lation. It is a significant Providence that is casting upon our shores these unevangelized multitudes, just at the time when we have arrived at such national maturity and strength 30 as to be able to bear them, and when we not only have the means of giving them the Gos- pel, but are considering how we may most easily and successfully send it to all nations. " It was about three-quarters of a century after the landing of the Pilgrims at Plymouth before anything answering to our present idea of Home Missions was attempted, or in fact needed. Churches were all the while slowly colonizing, as new settlements were rising; but always through a self-sustaining process. In the most piissionary aspect of the work, it was the bestowraent of a minister upon a new congregation, by some older church that had furnished itself with two. In this way an ap- plication was answered that came to Boston in 1642, from "certain well disposed people in the upper and newly settled parts of Virginia, bewailing their sad condition for want of the means of salvation, and earnestly entreating a, supply of faithful ministers, whom, upon expe- rience of their gifts and godliness, they might call to office." The request was read on " lec- ture day " in Boston ; and after long consulta- tion and prayer, it seemed good to the elders of the churches to recommend two of their number, Eev. Messrs. Knolls of Watertown and Thompson of Braintree — each of which had a teaching colleague — to go on this mis- sion ; and they were accordingly dismissed by their people, and went.* " A nearer approach to Home Missions was made about the year 1695, when several of the 98 churches then in Massachusetts were found to be destitute of the stated means of grace and unable to procure them ; — a circumstance not more distressing to the vacant churches themselves, than it was appalling to the guar- dians of the Commonwealth. In the archives of the State are to be found about 50 applicar tions from feeble parishes, presented to the Legislature between 1695 and 1711 ; and a record of as many appropriations, amounting in all to nearly £1,000, for their relief in sus- taining the ministry. This plan, of course, could not continue. " The Society forFropagating theOospel among the Indians and others in North America, was founded in 1787, and has the honor of being the oldest incorporated missionary society in the United States. A number of gentlemen, residing in Boston and its vicinity, that year received a commission from the ' Society in Scotland for Promoting Christian Knowledge,' to superintend funds which they had devoted to the purpose of Christianizing the Indians in this country. ' This Board of Commissioners, emulous to cooperate with their foreign breth- ren in a cause so benevolent and honorable to the Christian character, not only as their agents, but also as principals, by raising funds in America for the like purpose, formed them- selves into a Society similar to that in Scot- * Wiatbjop'H Jouxnal, Vol. n. p. 78. 4:66 HOME MISSIONS. land,' and obtained an act of incorporation. At their request the Legislature also granted a brief for a contribution in all the Congrega- tional churches throughout the State, — wbich, however, yielded but $1,561. A larger sum was soon after obtained by private subscrip- tion among the members of the Society. In about 16 years the fund had increased to $23,417, and yielded an annual income of 551,145 ; — which, since that time, has been ex- pended partly among the Indians in different sections of New England and New York, and partly in new settlements, furnishing mission- aries and Bibles, and supporting charity schools. " The Connecticut Missionary Society, though not instituted till 1798, " may be said to have existed in fact, though not in form, from 1792 ;" for the General Association, which at first composed the Society, obtained permission that year from the Legislature to raise funds for missionary purposes. Indeed, several mis- sionaries are known to have gone into Ver- mont and Western New York under the par tronage of that body as early as 1788. And there is traditional authority for believing that the ' grain of mustard seed ' from which this fruitful tree has grown, was a donation of three dollars, which a poor but pious woman put into her pastor's hand for a missionary use. Not knowing through what channel to appropriate the gift so as to answer the donor's purpose, he took it with him to the General Association, and sought counsel of his breth- ren ; which resulted in this missionary move- ment, whose original object was, ' to Chris- tianize the heathen in North America, and to support and promote Christian knowledge in the new settlements within the United States.' " Tlie Berkhire and Columbia Missionary So- ciety was organized in 1798 for the purpose of ' propagating- the Gospel in the new settle- ments, and among heathen nations.' Its first name was ' The Congregational Missionary Society originated in the counties of Berkshire (Mass.) and Columbia (N. Y.) :' and for a few years it received about an equal share of patronage from each State. Subsequently most of the New York members became asso- ciated with other organizations. When this Society assumed an auxiliary relation to the Massachusetts Home Missionary Society, it had expended about $13,000 in sustaining, on an average, four missionaries per annum, under a commission for three months each — or one minister through the year — besides a generous distribution of books on the missionary fields, and the establishment of nearly twenty ' cha^ ritable libraries.' " Tlie New Hampshire Missionary Society was instituted in 1801, for the purpose of ' sending missionaries to destitute towns, parishes and societies within this State, and on the borders of the same.' Provision was also made for the distribution of religious books. It is now auxiliary to the American Home Missionary Society ; and besides supplying the necessities within its own bounds, takes part each year in the work of evangelizing the West. " T!ie Hampshire Missionary Society was insti- tuted at Northampton, Mass., in 1802, whose ' object and business,' as stated in the Consti- tution, is ' to promote the preaching and pro- pagation of the Gospel of Jesus Christ among the inhabitants of the new settlements of the United States, and the aboriginal nations of the continent.' At first the Society covered the ' Old County of Hampshire,' from which Hampden and Franklin counties have since been separated, and now sustain their own cha- ritable associations. By obtaining from be- nevolent individuals ' promissory notes with good securities,' a permanent fund was early created, which has since been increased by legacies. The income from this fund, together with the annual collections, usually amounts to several thousand dollars a year ; which is paid in part to the American Home Mission- ary Society, and in part to the Massachusetts Home Missionary Society, agreeably to the terms on which its present auxiliary connection is based. Previously to 1827, its independent disbursements amounted to $33,000 for mis- sionary service, and about $10,000 in the pur- chase and distribution of Bibles and other re- ligious books. Its missionaries labored chiefly in Western New York and in Maine, from four to six men being under commission from three to six months each, on an average, per annum. " The Massachusetts Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, was instituted in 1803, ' for the benevolent purpose of promoting evangelical truth and piety ; in the first place, by a charitable distribution of religious books and tracts among poor and pious Christians, and also among the inhabitants of new towns and plantations ; and secondly, by supporting charity schools and pious missionaries in places where the means of religious instruction are sparingly enjoyed.' The first distribution of books was made in 1804. The first mis- sionary was employed in 1811 ; and during the subsequent ten or fifteen years the resources of the Society, amounting sometimes to $2,000 per annum, were expended in circulating books and in helping partially supplied churches to a permanent ministry. These labors were be stowed in various parts of New England, but more especially in New Hampshire. As its original objects are now reached through the Home Missionary and Tract Societies, its present income is small, and is expended in supplying destitute Sabbath-schools with li- braries. " The Rhode Island Home Missionary Society arose about the same time ; the Blaine Mission- ary Society in 1807 ; and the Vermont Domestic Missionary Society in 1818 ; — all of tciem hav- ing similar objects, and all now sustaining an HOME MISSIONS. 467 auxiliary relation to tlie Amekican Home Mis- siONAEY Society. " J'he Massachusetts Missionary Society was formed in Boston, May 28, 1799 ; the original object of which was, ' to diffuse the Gospel amoug the heathen, as well as other people, in the remote parts of our country, where Christ is seldom or never preached.' But, having subsequently become strictly a domestic mis- sionary society, the name was (in 1844) chang- ed to the Massachusetts Home Missionary Society. " Tlie Domestic Missionary Society of Massa- chusetts Proper was formed by the G-eneral As- sociation in 1818, to operate exclusively within the State of Massachusetts. On the formation of the American Home Missionary Society, in 1826, these societies united, and became aux- iliary to the American Society, confining their operations to Massachusetts. At this time, one of them had 25 missionaries, mostly in Maine, and the other about the same number in Massachusetts."* Tlie Presbyterian Church in the United States has been a missionary body from its organizar tion, in 1706, to the present time. For the first ten years of its existence, its operations were conducted by the original Presbytery of Philadelphia, under whose direction such min- isters as could be had went out into the waste places, making known the Gospel. In 1717 the oversight of the missionary work was transferred to the Synod of Philadelphia, and after 24 years of labor, in the year 1741, the oversight was given to the Synods of Phila- delphia and New York united, and remained with these bodies until the formation of the General Assembly, in 1789. The business of domestic missions was con- ducted by the General Assembly, as a body, from 1789 to 1802, but the work having be- come extended, and increasing yearly, the as- sembly appointed a "standing committee of missions," and that committee made its first annual report in May, 1803. In 1816, the style of this committee was changed for that of " The Board of Missions," which name it still retains. "The Board, therefore, is no new creation, but the old standing committee of missions, under a new name, and with en- larged membership and powers." The Board now consists of 60 ministers and 36 laymen, elected for four years, and ' arranged in four classes, one of which goes out each year, when a new class is elected. And the reason for the election of so large a body, and those scatter- ed over the United States, is to secure a quo- ram for business at the annual meetings of the General Assembly, which are held in various sections of the union ; and besides this, the field is so large, that it is found necessary to have two executive committees, one located in Philadelphia and the other in Louisville, and the oversight of the several states is divided between them. The work of church extension « Bev. J. S. ClatSe. is also committed to this Board. The tollow- ing summary of a single year's work will serve as a fair specimen of what has been accom- plished through its instrumentality : — In the year ending May 1, 1853, the number of churches and missionary stations supplied, was 838 : organized within the year, 32 churches : admissions to the churches on examination, 1643 ; on certificate, 1287 ; total, 2930. Total number in communion in these churches, 19,966. The number of Sabbath-schools in these con- gregations, 432 ; scholars, 19,123 ; baptisms, 1876 ; houses of worship erected or finished, 45. The total amount of money paid out as the cost of all these operations for the year, was about sixty-eight thousand dollars. The following extracts, from the report of the Board for 1854, give an interesting view of the progress of the work : — " In 1828, the year of the re-organization of the Board, there were but 31 missionaries, and an income of $2,400 only. " In 1830, two years after, there were 198 missionaries and an income of $12,632. In 1840, two years after the division of the Church, and when the parts were fairly separated, there were 256 missionaries, and an income of $40,734. In 1850, the number of missionaries was 570, and the receipts were $67,654 19. This year, 1854, the number of missionaries re- ported is 523, and the receipts were $75,207 80. " Let us now glance at the expansion of our Church, which has been mainly effected by missionary labor. We will begin with 1828. the year of the re-organization of the Board. Synods. P'bt'riea. Ministers. Ch'ches. Members 1828, 16, 90, 1,285, 1,968, 146,8U8. 1830, 19, 98, 1,491, 2,168, 173,329. 1840, 17, 96, 1,616, 1,673, 126,683. 1850, 23, 127, 1,926, 2,595, 207,264 1863, 28, 143, 2,139, 2,879, 219,263. " In this brief reference to the fruits of mis- sionary labor, as seen in the increase of Church- es, and Presbyteries, and Synods, we have said nothing of the thousands of religious volumes and tracts distributed by our missionaries throughout our country, the tens of thousands of children gathered by them into Sabbath- schools, the numerous Bible and catechetical classes they have formed, the thousands of tem- perance societies they have organized, the nu- merous parochial schools, academies, and colleges they have founded, nor of the various other in- strumentalities which they have set in motion, and which are silently, but effectively producing a harvest of immeasurable good." The following table is worthy of study. It tells its own story, as to the self-sacrificing spirit of our Home Missionaries ; and it is probably a fair specimen of the whole. Table showing the returns of 342 missionar ries, laboring in 29 States and territories, of amounts paid them by both people and Board, and average salary in each State : amounts paid in each State by the Board, and general 468 HOME MISSIONS, average salary as paid by the people and the Board, and by the Board alone for the year 1853-4 |s ■iS' 1' P _ 6 ■■S a . ■^ ^ STATES AND M;^ S|1 ■as TERRITORIES. t^s 0}^ ■Kir; gSfl ss o g j|OQ P^ ISS ¥ ^s« 1 Alabama 2 i S820 2,460 S410 613 200 700 3. California 4. Connecticut 1 600 600 300 1 600 600 6. Dist. of Columbia. 300 7. Florida 2 6 83 89 15 8 1,260 1,543 11,846 15,101 6,391 2,780 625 309 369 387 859 348 660 568 9. Illinois 4,663 10, Indiana 4,860 2,500 12. Kentucky 1,320 13. Louisiana 1 650 661 250 14. Maryland 12 6,977 498 2,160 5 2,392 478 1,100 16. Minnesota 1 600 600 600 17. Mississippi 1 625 625 175 10 17 3,920 6,395 393 376 1,780 19. New Jersey 2,725 20. New York 83 15,361 465 6,010 21. North Carolina.... 8 2,936 367 1,025 22. Oiiio 32 2 10,484 826 328 413 3,083 23. Oregon 600 24. Pennsylvania 67 22,653 397 7,078 25. South Carolina.... 1 276 276 76 6 12 24 11 1,882 6,265 10,322 3,726 376 622 430 839 750 27. Texas 2,760 8,490 28. Virginia 29. Wisconsin No. of Misg. reported, 2,430 342 $137,666 $61,832 Average salary of missionaries (from all sources) $403. Average salary of missionaries paid by the Board, $152. American Home Missionary Society. — A de- sire having arisen for a more general coopera- tion, in the prosecution of Domestic Missions, on the part of several denominations which harmonized in doctrinal views, preliminary meetings were held in Boston for consultation ; and on the 13th of March, 1826, a circular was issued by the Executive Committee of the United Domestic Missionary Society of New York, inviting a meeting of the friends of the cause, which took place in the Brick Church, New York, May 10, 1826, when the society was formed, and a constitution adopted. At its next anniversary, the United Domestic Missionary Society was dissolved, and its life members and life directors became life members and life directors of the new so- ciety ; and subsequently, the several State so- cieties of the New England States became auxiliary to the American Home Missionary Society, on the principle of first supplying the wants of their own States, and paying over to the American Society their surplus funds, their missionaries being commissioned by the parent society. This society is composed of life members, who have become such by the payment of $30, who now number nearly 8000. Its first presi- dent was Hon. Stephen Van Ee.isselaer, of Albany, N. Y., and its first secretary, Rev. Absalom Peters. Its affairs are managed by an Executive Committee of 14 members, clergymen and laymen, all located in the city of New York. Summary. — The society has existed for twenty-eight years. The total amount of re- ceipts, for this time, is $2,728,363 71. The total number of missionaries employed, is about 5,400. The total number of years of labor, is 15,7o6. The total number of preaching stations is about 4,000. The total number of churches that have become self-supporting through this society's aid, is nearly 1,000. The total of addi- tions to the churches, is 126,705. Interesting and important facts and compari- sons. — When the society concluded its first year, 120 out of its 169 missionaries for that period, or nearly three-fourths, had been employ- ed in the single State of New York, and only thirty-three, or about one-flfth in the Mississippi Valley. The largest item in its receipts was less than $6,000, which included all the contri- butions of auxiliary and allied associations. Its foremost contributor was the " Geneva Agency," which furnished the sum of $2313 36. When the society concluded its twenty- eighth year, 153, or little more than one- seventh of its missionaries had been employed during the year, in the State of New York, while 530 out of 1047 (or more than one-half), had labored at the West. Its foremost contri- butor, the Auxiliary Society of Massachusetts, alone,raised more than $46,000 (or $6,000 more than twice the whole income of the national- Society in 1827,) of which over $38,000 went for the benefit of the new settlements. The first year, 110 years of labor were performed ; in the twenty-eighth year, 870 years. The number of Sabbath-school scholars now con- nected with its churches, amounts to more than 65,000. In its last year, 65 houses of worship were built by congregations receiving its aid ; 49 repaired or improved, while 88 remain in process of erection, and 20 churches have built parsonages. The society needs about 200 new missionaries, annually. The direction of the society's growth is shown in the following table : had 16 missionaries : in 1854, 110 " " 43 " " 105 II II 28 " " 76 II II 87 " " 66 In 1827 Ohio had 16 " " Indiana " 3 (( a Illinois " 2 " " Missouri *' 3 11 11 Michigan u 4 " 1836 , Wisconsin " 1 11 a Iowa " 2 ^l^^.l":}" 2 been At the same time its labors have also much extended in the older States. Benefit to particular States and Sections. — It is estimated that one-half of the churches in New England have received mission- ary aid — most of them from this society, thrpugh its auxiliaries ; and in Maine and Ver- HOME MISSIONS. 469 mont, three-fourtJis of the churches ; m Central and Western New York, Jive-sixths, and in the states north-west of the Ohio river, out of 1,200, all but about 50, or eleven-twelfths. The operations of this society from year to year, its regular increase of means and- labors, with the results, will all bo seen in the follow- ing TABULAB VIEW. Society's Years. Receipts. Expenditures .gg.|-2 •s 3^ las ^1 11 a Q . (3 . V |i3o i ^1 ^6 m 1^ 1—1826-27 $18,140.76 $13,984.17 169 68 196 no not rep not rep $127 $ 83 2—1827-28 20,035.78 17,849.22 201 89 244 133 1,000 306 134 89 3-1828-29 26,997.31 26,814.96 304 169 401 186 1,678 423 144 88 4—1829-30 33,929.44 42,429.50 392 166 500 274 1,959 572 155 108 5—1830-31 48,124.73 47,247.60 463 164 577 294 2,532 700 160 102 6—1831-32 49,422.12 52,808.39 509 158 745 361 6,126 783 146 104 7—1832-33 68,627.17 66,277.96 606 209 801 417 4,284 1,148 159 109 8—1833-34 78,911.44 80,015.76 676 200 899 463 2,736 Pupils. 172 118 9—1834^35 88,863.22 83,394.28 719 204 1,050 490 3,300 52,000 170 116 10—1835-36 101,565.15 92,188.94 755 249 1,000 545 3,750 65,000 169 122 11—1836-37 85,701.59 99,529.72 810 232 1,025 554 3,752 80,000 180 123 12—1837-38 86,522.45 85,066.26 684 123 840 438 3,376 67,000 194 124 13—1838-39 82,564.63 82,655,64 665 201 794 473 3,920 58,500 175 124 14- 1839-40 78,345.20 78,533,89 680 194 842 486 4,750 60,000 162 115 15—1840-41 85,413.34 84,864.06 690 178 862 501 4,618 54,100 169 123 16—1841-42 92,463.64 94,300.14 791 248 987 594 5,514 64,300 159 119 17—1842-43 99,812.24 98,215.11 848 225 1,047 657 8,223 68,400 149 116 18—1843-44 101,904.99 104,276.47 907 237 1,245 665 7,693 60,300 157 115 19—1844^5 121,946.28 118,360.12 943 209 1,285 736 4,929 60,000 160 126 20—1845-46 125,124.70 126,193.15 971 223 1,453 760 5,311 76,700 166 130 21—1846-47 116,617.94 119,170.40 972 189 1,470 713 4,400 73,000 167 123 22—1847-48 140,197.10 139,233.34 1,006 205 1,447 773 5,020 77,000 180 138 23—1848^9 145,925.91 143,771.67 1,019 192 1,510 808 5,550 83,500 178 141 24—1849-50 157,160 78 145,456,09 1,032 205 1,575 812 6,C82 75,000 179 141 25—1850-51 150,940.25 153,817.90 1,065 211 1,820 853 6,678 70,000 180 144 26—1851-52 160,062.25 162,831.14 1,065 204 1,948 862 6,820 66,500 189 153 27—1852-53 171,734.24 174,439.24 1,087 213 2,160 878 6,079 72,500 199 160 28—1853-54 191,209.07 184,025.76 1,047 167 2,140 870 6,025 65,400 212 171 Remarks. — The influence of this society, how- ever, can hardly be estimated in figures, and is not easily described in words. Its missionaries are not merely pastors and preachers, they are founders of schools, colleges, and theological seminaries. They labor not merely in the pul- pit, the conference-room, and by the bed-side of the sick and the dying ; but they are abroad in the world, laying the foundations of the country's future, through labors, specific, and direct, as well as in the general influences of their sacred calling, and of the religious insti- tutions that they buil'd. Methodist Home Missions. — The Methodist Home Missions in the United States are those sustained by the Methodist Episcopal Church, the Methodist E. Church Sovih, and the Pro- testant Methodist Church. The mode of opera- tion in raising and appropriating funds for Domestic Missions is so much alike in each of these churches, that one description will do for all. There is no separate Home Missionary Fund in any of these bodies. What they raise for missions, is raised without any par- ticular designation. But out of the whole sum subscribed by the church, a certain proportion is set apart for the support of Home Missions. In the month of November of each year, the General Missionary Committee, the Board of Managers, and the Bishops of the Methodist E. Church, meet together in New-York, in order to make the appropriations for missions for the ensuing year. This committee, after having disposed of the foreign missions, takes up the domestic missions. First, the miusions to the Germans in the United States and Ter- ritories are taken up by the conferences, and considered one by one, and the amount neces- sary for each conference set down ; then the missions to the foreign population other than German are taken up and considered, and the amount necessary set down ; then the domestic 470 HOME MISSIONS. English Missions in each annual conference are taken up, and the amount necessary to enable each annual conference to carry on its own domestic missions is determined, and set down to each conference. This committee deter- mines the amount for which each bishop may draw for the domestic missions of those con- ferences over which he sliall preside, and he cannot draw on the treasurer for more than this amount. The Book of Dkcipline (Part III. ch. iv.) prescribes the plan for raising the funds thus appropriated. The leading provisions are : (1) Each conference has an auxiliary to the parent society ; (2) Every church within the bounds of that conference is to have a mis- sionary committee, to aid in carrying into effect the disciplinary measures for the support of missions ; (3) In each church suitable mis- sionary collectors are appointed to solicit sub- scriptions ; (4) One Sabbath in the year is given to the advocacy of this cause, when a public collection is usually taken up ; (5) A transcript return of all subscriptions of fifty cents and upwards, is to be reported at Con- ference for insertion in the Annual Report of the Conference Missionary Societies. The moneys appropriated for domestic mis- sions are placed to the credit of the confer- ences, severally, which have charge of these missions. In each of the annual conferences there is a mission committee, appointed at each session, whose duty it is, in conjunction with the bishop presiding, to make the estimate for each mission under the care of the conference ; and the estimates must be kept within the credit allowed to the conference for its mis- sions, and, further, must receive the sanction of the bishop presiding. Thus, it wiU be seen that each conference is responsible for the use made of the money placed to its credit for the support of the missions under its care. The conference missionary committee for estimating for the support of the missions under its care, can obtain all information of the condition and prospects of each of their missions, and hence make just estimates ; and when these estimates are made, they are brought to the notice of the bishop in council with all the pre- siding elders, so that the bishop has an oppor- tunity of thoroughly understanding each case, and thus is "nabled to give or withhold his sanction. When the estimates are approved by the bishop, he draws on the treasurer at New York for the same, in quarterly drafts, in favor of each presiding elder, for the amount estimated for the missions in his district, and under his direction. In the expenditure of the moneys appropriated for these missions, the Board of Managers at New York are in no way responsible ; but each conference and the bishop presiding are resppnsible for the specific appropriations made to the missions under its care. The Domestic Missions of the M. E. Church are (1) : Missions to those who speak the Eng- lish language in the destitute, or new por- tions of the country; (ii) To/o?-e!g-ners who Uave settled together in various portions of the country, and in particular quarters of our cities ; (3) Besides these they have also an interesing mission to New Mexico. Of these, the missions to the Gei'maiis are the most nu- merous and successful ; but they have also missions to the Swedes, Danes, Norwegians, Welsh, and French. The missions to people who speak the Eng- lish language are instituted by the bishop and council of presiding elders of each conference, within whose bounds such mission fields lie ; and the appropriations for the same are rfe ported to the conference for its approbation. As these English domestic missions become strong, they cease to be missions, and become self-supporting churches, and in their turn con- tribute to sustain other new or promising fields of labor. The missions to the foreign populations which have settled in the country, and still speak their own language, sprung up among these people spontaneously. Individuals were converted under the ordinary ministration of the Gospel, and they fcegan to declare to their countrymen what they had experienced. The work among the Germans began about seven- teen years ago. Now there are 160 mission- aries and 11,000 members, with numerous Sun- day-schools, and a few day-schools. These missions in the United States have reacted on Germany, and produced the Foreign German Missions. Then there are the Scandinavian Missions to the Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes. Of these people the Swedes are the most numerous in this country, and the missions are more exten- sive among them. The Norwegians also have received the Gospel gladly, and have carried it back to Norway ; and have thus laid the foundation of a mission there. The centre of the missions to the Sclavonic people from the north-west of Europe, is in New York, where they all land. The Bethel-ship, John Wesley, in the North Eiver, is the place where, upon landing, they hear for the first time the simple, spiritual preaching of the Gospel of Christ. These missions took form nine years ago, in the city of New York, under the labors of the Bev. 0. G Hedstrom. Besides these, there are missions to the Welsh and French immigrants, as will appear in the table. Oregon and California have hitherto been placed among foreign missions, owing to their distance, the peculiarities of their population, and their dependence upon the Missionary Society. It has pleased God to give the Methodist Episcopal Church the earliest, and, as yet, the widest and strongest occupancy of these new countries. Hitherto this body have prosecuted these missions vigorously and suc- cessfully. They have sent a large proportion HOME MISSIONS. 471 of their best men into these missions ; and the last General Conference judged it best to grant their request to be organized each into a regu- lar independent annual conference. From the time of their meeting, in the spring of 1853, under the presidency of Bishop Ames, they took their places among their sister conferences. The mission to New Mexico was commenced about five years ago, by the Eev. E. Z. Nich- olson. It was for a while suspended, but has been again renewed. Santa F'e is its central position. Mr. Nicholson is the superintendent, having for his assistants, the Rev. Messrs. W. Hansen and Benigno Cardenas. Mr. Hansen is the fruit of the Swedish mission in New Tork, and being able to preach in Spanish, had long desired to go to Mexico as a mission- ary. Benigno Cardenas had been an intelli- gent and well-edacated Eoman Catholic priest of much influence at Santa Fe, and a preacher of considerable eloquence. During Mr. Nich- olson's previous residence in that city, Cardenas had freely conversed with him upon the errors of the Church of Kome, and the nature of evangelical religion. He afterwards left Mex- ico and visited Eome, and returned by way of London, where he called upon the Eev. Mr. Rule, who had long been a Wesleyan mission- ary in Spain. There he remained for several weeks, and his mind and heart underwent such a change, that he renounced popery for ever, and cordially embraced the Gospel of Christ. He then offered himself to the Missionary So- ciety of the Methodist Episcopal Church, as a missionary for his native Mexico, where he is now zealously and usefully employed. The Methodist E. Church, Sodth, ha« missions in the United States : — (1) In the destitute portions of their regular work ; (2) Among the people of color ; (3) Among the German emigrants; and (4) In California. But these missions are so like those we have described, that we need only thus enumerate them and refer to the annexed table for full information. The mode of raising the money is also the same as that given above. Tlie Methodist Protestant Church has 99 missions in the destitute portions of their regu- lar work ; they have no others. The following tables contain the results. Some of the statistics are for 1853, but most of them for the present year. We have made the tables as complete as we could, some of the Reports being quite defective. METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHUEOH. MisaioNa J 493 53 5 12 3 1 1 g -a ^1 i i i 1 1 i 6 i (2 if English Domestic Missions . German Domestic Missions Swedish and Norwegian . . Welsh Mission 505 160 13 12 4 3 80 I 33 2 35,830 11,000 526 427 43 6839 271 27 9 27 132 8 2 42 $2,885.08 142 132.90 French Mission New Mexican Mission . . Totals 567 697 89 35 47,826 7173 142 42 $3159.98 METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHDECH SOUTH. English Domestic Missions- Missions among the Slaves ■ German Missions California Mission Totals 350 262 66,146 12' 26,176 38,844 589 637 .a o .o o 3i» 6413 17,244 217 It is now thirty-five years since the Metho- dist E. Church began her domestic missionary operations. At the end of the year Missions. Missionaries. Members, 1829 there were 37 30 9,639 1839 " " 140 164 18,700 1849 " " 260 276 29,124 1864 " " 668 698 47,881 The entire expenditure during this period has been about $1,000,000.— Rev. W.Butlek. American Baptist Home Missionary Society. — At a meeting of the Baptist Missionary Society of Massachusetts, held in Boston, in November, 1832, the spiritual destitution of many of the new states, and especially of the Mississippi Valley, having been made a subject of consideration, it was resolved to take mea^ sures for the awakening of interest and system- atic effort, throughout the Baptist community, in behalf of domestic missions. Resolutions were passed, recommending the formation of a General Home Mission Society, and appoints ing Rev. Jonathan Going, of Worcester, Mass., an agent on the part of the Massachusetts So- ciety, for the accomplishment of this plan. In New Tork and Philadelphia the proposal was favorably received. A provisional executive Committee was elected in New York city, by 472 HOME MISSIONS. wliom measures were taken, initiatory to a convention of members of the denomination from ail parts of the union, for the purpose of forming an organization. This convention was held in the Baptist church, in Mulberry-street, New York, on the 27th of April, 1832 ; four- teen of the states and one territory being re- presented by delegates. The American Bap- tist Home Missionary Society was formed, a constitution adopted, and Hon. Heman Lin- coln, of Massachusetts was elected president. The plan of operations adopted by the exe- cutive committee proposes : First, to obtain and disseminate information respecting the mo- ral condition of the country — especially the Mississippi Valley. Secmd, to excite the entire Baptist community to systematic, liberal, and vigorous action, in -support of missionary ef- fort. Third, to establish state agencies, em- ploying and sending to destitute regions, min- isters of suitable qualifications. Fourth, the collection of the necessary funds. It was proposed to raise 310,000 the first year. The receipts amounted, however, to but $7,586 73, which was expended in the support of 59 missionaries and agents, some of whom labored only during a part of the year. Twen- ty-two were appointed by the Kentucky Bap- tist Convention, a separate and preexisting organization. Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio and Michigan chiefly formed the field of the first year's operations. The receipts of the so- ciety, in 1836, had risen to $16,910 ; 115 mis- sionaries and agents had been employed dur- ing the year, in fourteen states, two terri- tories and two provinces. In 1838, 317 mis- sionaries were employed during the year. The annual receipts varied from 1838 to 1841, from $10,000 to $20,000. In 1841, 82 agents and missionaries were commissioned, who occupied 300 stations, preached 10,922 ser- mons, traveling 73,451 miles. The auxiliary Baptist societies employed 233 laborers, mak- ing a total of 315. The society now began to receive, from the churches aided, new and active auxiliaries, " who will continue to repay, with large inte- rest, the debt of gratitude, until their charac- ter of debtors will be lost in that of benefac- tors. At the annual meeting in 1842, it was resolved to commence a mission to the Jews in North America, provided sufficient funds should be specifically contributed for its sup- port. The receipts, for this year, including those of auxiliaries, rose to $57,154 72. Total number of missionaries, 367. During the ten years of the society's existence, from 1832, to 1842, great results had been effected through its instrumentality, in Kentucky, Missouri, In- diana, and Michigan. Previous to 1832, there were in those states but 955 Baptist churches, 484 ministers — ten only being pastors. There was an anti-missionary spirit prevalent among the ministers and churches, and scarce- ly anything was contributed for benevolent objects. In 1842, there were in the same states, 1689 churches, with 772 ministers, of whom 99 were pastors. The anti-missionary spirit had greatly decreased, and $6,245 had been then contributed for benevolent purposes. In 1832, there was but one (Baptist) scientific and theological institution ; in 1842 several had been established. During the ten years, 756 missionaries had been employed by the society, generally west of tlie Alleghanies ; 732 destitute churches and stations had been supplied ; 10,990 persons baptized, 401 churches organized, 142 ministers ordained. During the decade, from 1842 to 1852, the society extended its operations to Florida, Arkansas, Iowa, and Wisconsin, and greatly increased its labors in the Mississippi Valley. In the year 1845, a controversy upon the sub- ject of domestic slavery, which had existed in the society for some years, reached its crisis, and produced a separation. A missionary body was then organized in the slaveholding states, which has since received the support of the majority of southern Baptists. Since then, the operations of the society, with two exceptions, have been directed to the ftee states and territories ouly. Prom 1842 to 1852, 877 ministers were employed, 9,468 per- sons baptized, 354 churches organized, 246 ministers ordained. In mission fields, 105 houses of worship had been built, and $18,845; 57 contributed to benevolent objects ; 65 of the churches once aided, were sustaining the Gospel themselves. In 1852, three mission- aries were sent to Oregon and California ; one to an Indian tribe in New Mexico : a Chip- pewa' to his countrymen. In 1854, the execu- tive Board resolved to take measures for the establishment of a church edifice fund. The society, from its commencement, has had in its employ 175G missionaries and agen^g. They have in the field at present, 184. The entire amount of their receipts, from the be- ginning, is $430,170. Prom New York State, $160,039 of this sum. Receipts for the fiscal year, ending 31st March, 1854, $62,730 26. During the past 22 years, the missionaries of the society have baptized 22,814 persons, organized 911 churches, ordained 466 minis- tors ; and the people among whom they have labored have built, and in most cases paid for, 178 houses of worship. About 200,000 chil- dren have been gathered into Sabbath-schools ; and the Gospel has been preached in fourteen different languages. Por the past year, the missionaries report the baptism of 1,322 per- sons, the organization of 67 churches, the ordi- nation of 30 ministers : 46 church edifices have been built, or are in progress of erection. About 163 have been baptized from the Cath- olics and Lutherans. Southern Baptist Board of Domestic Missions. — In 1845, owing to controversy arising from the discussion of slaveholding, a large number of the Southern Baptist churches withdrew HOME MISSIONS. 473 ffom the American Baptist Home Missionary Society, and a Board of Domestic Missions was formed, in connection with the Southern Baptist Convention. The receipts of this Board, for 1852, amounted to $10,939 15 ; for 1853, to $13,074 17. During 1853, 66 mis- sionaries and agents were commissioned by this Board, a large number of whom have labored in the rapidly growing cities on the southern Mississippi and Atlantic seaboard. The reports are imperfect ; 217 stations have been supplied, 5,958 sermons and addresses delivered, 1,521 prayer and other religious meetings attended, 642 persons have been bap- tized, 881 added by letter, 763 converted, not baptized — makiug 1,786 substantial additions to the strength of our cause, in place of 1,109 last year. 65,182 miles have been traveled, 8,712 religious visits made ; 59 Sabbath- schools and Bible classes, 218 teachers, and 2,105 pupils are reported. These latter statis- tics are, however, exceedingly deficient. 17 meeting-houses are reported^ commenced, 13 finished ; 21 churches have been constituted, 24 ministers and 34 deacons ordained ; 8 are preparing for the ministry. What is doing by this Board, is as nothing to what is being carried on for domestic mis- sions by the denomination, through other chan- nels. The General Association of Baptists in Virginia, proposed to raise and expend $10,000 in domestic missions during the year 1853. Nor does this include the whole of what is done in that State, a single association raising some $3,000 or §4,000 more. In most, if not all, of the states of the South and South-west, associations are carrying on, independently of any State organization, a system of missions within their own borders. Board of Domestic Missions of the Protestant Episcojial Church. — For a history of the organ- ization and constitution of this Board, toge- ther wich its annual and aggregate receipts, see Episcopal Board of Missions. The account is given in that place, rather than this, because of the intimate connection between the foreign and domestic boards. The Board now have under their charge 105 churches or stations, 13 of which are vacant. They have in their employ 92 missionaries, and 8 missionary bishops. These missionaries are distributed as follows : in Maine, 2 ; New Hampshire, 3 ; Delaware, 2 ; Florida, 1 ; Alabama, 7 ; Lou- isiana, 1 ; Mississippi, 5 ; Tennessee, 4 ; Ken- tucky, 3 ; Indiana, 9 ; Illinois, 11 ; Michigan, 9 ; Wisconsin, 11 ; Iowa, 9 ; Minnesota, 3 ; Missouri, 3 ; Arkansas, 1 ; Texas, 6 ; Indian Mission, 1 ; California, 1 (bishop) ; Oregon, 3. The amount of donations received for the financial year ending Sept. 30, 1853, was $23,856 : and from Oct. 1, 1853, to Aug. 15, 1854, $36,327. The aggregate amount of do- nations from the beginning is $626,751. But a new department of domestic missions is opening up before the Episcopal Board of Missions. Rev. B. W. Syle, of the Episcopal Mission in China, having returned on account of his health, had his attention turned to the Chinese in this country. After much search- ing and inquiry, he discovered about 70 Chinar jnen in New York, most of them in a destitute condition. He called a meeting of them at the vestry-room of old St. George's Church, where he continued to instruct from forty to fifty, who came regularly for some time, every Thursday morning and Sunday afternoon. After some time, a meeting was called, and measures were taken to raise funds to make temporary provision for their wants. Twenty- two of them were sent to California and four to China. The remainder were all provided with employment suited to their ability, by which they could earn a living, except six, who desired an education, and these are placed under the instruction of a theological student, to make trial of their capacities, and in the mean time are provided with a support. The sixteen, who are provided with employment, are located at Gowanus, near Greenwood Cem- etery. They attend one of the neighboring churches in the morning, and Mr Syle preaches to them in the afternoon. In a com- munication in the " Spirit of Missions," in which these facts are detailed, Mr. Syle says : " Our connection with the Chinese is becoming daily more intimate and inevitable. The emi- gration from Canton has been so large ihat old ships not considered seaworthy have been bought up at enormous prices, to meet the demand for passages. The now indispensable guano is put on board our ships at the Chinoha Islands by Chinese laborers, and what unutter- able sufferings are they not made to undergo in the operation ! The labor on the Isthmus railroad is largely performed by Chinese. In Kentucky, the Chinese coolies are said to be employed at certain iron mills on the Cumber- land River, near Eddyville. Tearstores, owned and kept by Chinamen, are to be found at Boston, Albany, and other places ; not to mention that Chinese are to be seen in the tearStores of this city, and at Cincinnati, Day- ton, Indianapolis, and elsewhere. Chinese cooks and stewards on board our ships are now quite frequently to be met with." The fact that God is sending the heathen to us, as well as requiring us to go to them, ought to be a matter of gratulation and thanksgiv- ing ; and it certainly calls loudly upon us to seek their evangelization. Board of Missions of the Reformed Protestant Dutch Church. — This Board has been in exist- ence twenty-two years. Its receipts for the year ending May 1, 1854, were $15,257. The following summary of results will show what the Board is doing : 1. In nineteen out of twenty-seven classes, one or more churches or missionary stations have been aided during a part or the whole of the year. 474 HONGKONG— HOTTENTOTS. 2. Sixty-nine pastors and missionaries have received aid during a part or the whole of the year. 3. Eighty churches and missionary stations have been aided from its funds. 4. Thirteen new churches and missionary stations have been established and assisted. 5. Eight churches have been organized, to which appropriations have been made. 6. Twelve new houses of worship have been built by congregations aided by the Board. 7. Three have ceased to ask aid of the Board, and several others give notice that they will not need any aid beyond the present year. 8. Four hundred and fifty-nine persons have been received, on confession of their faith in Christ, into the churches aided. 9. Four hundred and sixty-six have been received on certificate from other churches. 10. Eighty-three Sabbath-schools have been in operation during the year ; besides many Bible and catechetical classes, both in and out of the schools. 11. Four thousand two hundred children and youth have been taught in those the truths which are able to make them wise unto salva- tion. 12. Nine hundred and thirty-four dollars have been contributed, by the churches and missionary stations aided, to the funds of the Board. 13. Three thousand six hundred and seventeen dollars have been contributed by them for other benevolent objects. 14. One hundred and ninety-three out of three hundred and forty-two of the churches have contributed to the cause of Domestic Missions. 15. One hundred and forty-nine out of three hundred and forty4wo of the churches hava given nothing. The last report states that the Domestic Missionary efforts of this Board have aided in establishing a majority of the Dutch churches in the country. The churches aided are repre- sented to be in a good condition. Special efforts are made in behalf of the Dutch and German emigrants. American Missionary Association. — This So- ciety has a Home Department, with 90 mis- sionaries and 108 churches. GENERAL TABULAE VIEW. 1 o„ s| 11 i, oi SOCIETIES. 1i 3 ^ II 1 A Aggregate of •< ■fss C5-2 |3 |ll |l receipts. Years. Presbyterian Board . . . 38 838 523 32 45 2,930 $75,207 Am. Homo Miss. Society . 28 4,000 1,047 65 6,025 191,209 $2,728,363 Methodist Episcopal Church 35 567* 697 1,000,000 Meth. Epis. Church South . 350* 262 Am. Bap. Home Miss. Soo. 22 184 67 46 1,332 62,730 430,170 Southern Baptist Board 9 217 60 21 1,786 13,074 Episcopal Board .... 34 105 92 36,327 626,751 Reformed Dutch Board . . 22 80 69 8 12 925 15,257 American Missionary Asso. ^ 108 90 6,266 3,024 128 168 12,998 $393,804 »4,785,284 « Number of mlsBions. ProbaMy preaching places many times greater. HONGKONG : A flourishing English set- tlement, on an island about 40 miles east of Macao. (See China.) HONORB : A station of the Basle Mis- sionary Society, in the province of Honore, Hindostan. Pop. 4000. HOOBLT : A station of the Basle Mis- sionary Society, in the Mahratta country, India. HONOLULU : The chief city of the Sand- wich Islands, and the seat of government. It is situated in a fertile plain, which extends 9 or 10 miles along the southern coast of Oahu, and about two miles inward to the base of the mountains. A rich alluvial soil, two or three feet deep, covers a layer of fine volcanic ashes and cinders, extending to the depth of 14 to 16 feet. These ashes rest on a stratum of cal careous rock. The harbor is considered the best in the whole group, and most frequented by shipping. It contains two large churches, established by the missionaries. HOPEDALB : A station of the Moravi- ans in Labrador. HOTTENTOTS: A family of affiliated tribes in South Africa, formerly inhabiting the territory embraced in the English colony of the Cape of Good Hope, comprising the Coranas, Namaquas, and Bushmen, as well as the tribes on the coast. The Hottentot is of a yellowish brown, high cheek bones, spread out above, and contracted to a very narrow chin ; nose remarkably flat ; eyes, chestnut color ; hair grows in small tufts. HUMAN SACEIFICES. 475 and does not cover the whole head. The star ture of the Hottentot is very short, about four feet six inches being the medium size for the men, and four feet for the women. I'heir his- tory and origin are involved in obscurity. They resemble none of the Kaffre tribes, and are equally distinct from the Negro race. Mr. Mofi'at thinks they more nearly resemble the Chinese than any other people. All these tribes possess the same physical characteristics, the same manners and customs, and their lan- guage is so nearly identical that they readily understand each other. Mr. MofiFat thinks that the difference between the Hottentots and Bushmen is to be accounted for by the fact that the former, residing in towns, are improved by intercourse with each other ; while the la1> ter, being scattered over thinly inhabited dis- tricts, having little intercourse with each other, lead an exposed and half famished life, and degenerate rather than improve. The lan- guage of the Hottentots is as singular as their persons. Its pronunciation has been compared to the clucking of the turkey. Character. — Dr. Philip gives a very favora- ble view of the native character of the Hot- tentots. He says, when the Portuguese first visited the Cape of Good Hope, they found the inhabitants rich in cattle, and living in a com- fortable manner. It was said that they were remarkable for the excellence of their morals, and that the records of the colony during the first 50 years, unite in praising the virtues of the Hottentots, so that they were distinguished by the appellation of The Good Men. It is said that, during the whole of that period, the natives had never been detected in stealing from a colonist. But the injuries inflicted on them, for 150 years, during which they have been driven from the most fertile portions of their country, and deprived of their indepen- dence, he says must have exerted upon them a deteriorating influence. Mr. Barrow says that Hottentots are capable of strong attachments, are grateful for kindness shown, and honest and truthful. They live together in kraals or villages, and have their cattle in common. Rev. J. J. Freeman estimates the present num- ber of the Hottentot tribes at 150,000. Religion. — Like the Kaffres, the Hottentots have no religion, except a gross, undefined su- perstition. Dr. Philip says of them, "I have never been able to discover, from my inter- course with the natives, or from any other source, that this nation had ever attained any distinct notion of a Supreme Being, or that an idea of a future state had at any period pre- vailed among them." Rev. Mr. Moffat and Rev. Mr. Schmelen also testify to the same fact, and quote the conversations of the natives and the declarations of the converts, to con- firm their statements. Tet, Dr. Philip says they were not entirely without moral restraints. — Freeman's Tour in South Africa ; Moffat's South Africa; Philip's Researches ; McCulloch's Geography. (For missions to the Hottentots, see Africa, Southern.) HUAHINE : One of the Society Islands, on which is a mission of the London Mission- ary Society. HUMAN SACRIFICES : The prevalence of human sacrifices among the heathen, from the earliest periods of history, is a fact of mo- mentous interest. It shows, first, a sense of the need of an offering for sin, of the highest value that the human mind can conceive ; and second, false notions of the character of God, in supposing that he would be pleased with one man, in consequence of his imbruing his hands in another's blood. It shows, also, the ferocious character of their gods, who are thus represented as feasting upon human gore. We said the practice had prevailed from the remot- est ages. The ancient Egyptians, the Cretans, the Arabians, brought human blood to their altars. The people of Duma sacrificed every year a child, and buried it under an altar. The Persians buried their sacrificial victims alive. Amestris, the wife of Xerxes, entomb- ed twelves persons alive, under ground, /or the good of her soul. The Cyprians, the Rhodians, the Phoenicians, the people of Chios, Lesbos, Tenedos, all had human sacrifices. The king of Moab offered up his eldest son, his successor to the kingdom, on the wall, when the king of Edom was fighting against his capital. When an enemy was at the gates of Carthage, 200 children of the most distinguished citizens were offered up to appease the sanguinary dei- ties and avert the danger. The natives of Taurie Chersonesus offered up to Diana every stranger whom chance threw on their coasts. The Pelasgi, in a time of scarcity, vowed that they would give a tenth of all that should be born to them for a sacrifice, in order to procure plenty. Aristomenes, the Messenian, oflered up 300 noble Lacedemonians, and among them the king of Sparta, at the altar of Jupiter, at Ithome. The Spartan boys were whipped in the sight of their parents, before the altar of Diana Orthia, with such severity that they often died under the torture. Every Grecian state made it a rule, before they marched toward an enemy, to seek a blessing on their expedition, by the sacrifice of human victims. The Romans likewise offered human sacrifices, by public authority. Caius Marius offered up his own daughter, to procure success in a bat- tle against the Cimbri. Augustus Csesar offered up on the Ides of March, after the sur- render of Persia, three hundred chosen per- sons, at an altar dedicated to the manes of his uncle Julius. The Gauls and the Germans were so devoted to this shocking custom, that no business of any moment was transacted by them without being prefaced by the blood of men. They were offered up to various gods, particularly to Hesus, Taranis, and Sbantates, whose altars were far removed from the com- mon resort of men, being generally sit-^led 476 HUMAN SACEIFICES. in the depth of woods, that the gloom might add to the horror of the operation, and give a reverence to the proceeding. There were many places set apart for this purpose all over Germany, but especially in the woods of Ardu- enna, and the greater Hercurian forest, a wild that extended over thirty days' journey in length. These places were held in great ven- eration, and only approached at particular seasons. These practices prevailed among all the peo- ple of the North of Europe, and even among our Baxon ancestors. Their chief gods were Thor and Woden, whom they thought they could never sufficiently glut with blood. Of these sacrifices, none were esteemed so auspi- cious and salutary as a sacrifice of the prince of the country. When the lot foil to the king to die, it was received with universal acclama- tions of joy. In a time of famine the lot fell upon King Domalde, who was put to death. Olans Triliger, another prince, was burnt alive to Woden. Plarold, the son of Gunild, slew two of his sons to obtain a storm of wind to destroy the ships of his enemy. Another king sacrificed nine sons, to prolong his own life. In Mexico, in the courts of a single temple, there were found 136,000 skulls, the remains of those who had been slain in sacrifice. The manner in which the victims were slaughtered was various, but generally, it was attended with the utmost cruelty. A native Hindoo artist engraved a cut to represent a practice of our forefathers, which is thus described in a Bengalee paper, published by a society of natives, the followers of Bam Mohun Eoy, who professed to have forsaken Hindoo idol- atry. After describing human sacrifices, as they have existed in various countries, they say : " Tet even all these frightful enormities appear less surprising to us, when we hear of the hor- rors practiced in their religious rites, by the ancestors even of the present race of our English rulers. Among them, on the com- mencement of a war, or when some great chieftain was attacked with disease, or when any other calamity affecting the public oc- curred, the Druids, who were the priests of their religion, in order to secure the favor of their gods, presented them with offerings of human victims, attended with circumstances of peculiar cruelty and horror. There was one special atrocity, the recital of which makes the heart tremble. They constructed an enor- mous figure, resembling a man of gigantic star ture, formed of dried plant stems, or wicker- work, in the hollow interior of which were placed, as in a cage, numerous criminals, fast bound, to prevent their escape. Or if these could not be had in sufficient numbers to fill the capacious cavities of this terrible image, the deficiency was made up of uncflFending vic- tims. Surrounding the whole with straw and dry wood, they then set fire to the whole, thus murderously consuming at once, hundreds of living men, women and children." The editor of the London Missionary Mar gazine says : " The instance here described, is a correct specimen of the superstitions of ancient Britain. When we hear of these horrid practices as existing among heathen na- tions, our feelings are instinctively shocked, and we seem to regard them as sunk too low almost for the reach of the Gospel ; but when we reflect that no pagan or barbarous nation that ever existed has exceeded in those cruel- ties our own ancestors, and reflect that the Gospel reached them, and that we are now reaping its blessed fruits, how ought the reflec- tion to stir us up to send the same Gospel to those who dwell in similar dark places, which are full of similar habitations of cruelty ! For human sacrifices still exist." In the native provinces of India, beyond the reach of the British government, human victims are offered up to appease the anger of their gods. Dr. Scudder writes, in 1848, that four persons had then recently been offered up as sacrifices by the Khunds of Goomsoor, which forms the north-western extremity of the northern Cir- cars. The following description of these cruel rites was published in a Madras paper, in 1838:— "Miria Pooja, or human sacrifice, takes place in Goomsoor once a year, in one or other of the confederate districts in succession. The victims are stolen from the low country, or brought from some other distant part, and sold to those districts where the sacrifices are offer- ed ; if children, they are kept until they attain a proper age. " When the appointed day arrives, the Khunds (inhabitants of the hill country) as- semble from all parts of the country, dressed in their finery, some with bear-skins thrown over their shoulders, others with the tails of peacocks flowing behind them, and the long winding feather of the jungle-cock waving on their heads. Thus decked out, they dance, leap, and revel, beating-drums, and playing on an instrument not unlike in sound to the High- land pipe. Soon after noon the Jani, or pre- siding priest, with the aid of his assistants, fast- enstheunfortunate victim to astrongpost, firmly fixed into the ground, and then standing erect, the living sacrifice suffers the unutterable tor- ture of having the flesh cut off from his bones in small pieces by the knives of the savage crowd who rush on him and contend with each other for a portion of the gory and quivering substance. Great value is attached to the first morsel thus severed from the victim's body, for it is supposed to possess superior virtues, and a proportionate eagerness is evinced to acquire it. " Women are sacrificed as well as men. A female found her way into the collector's camp, at Patrirgia, with fetters on her limbs, who related that she had been sold by her brother HUMAN SACRIFICES. 477 , " The Khunds are in the habit of sacrificing children annually at sowing time, in a most cruel manner, for the purpose of propitiating the demon of their worship, and of securing, as they suppose, a good harvest by the blood of their victims. " In January, just before the turmeric shrub is planted, the Khunds make the sacrifice alluded to. They select, as their victims, male child- ren who are devoted from infancy to this pur- pose, and are sold to the chiefs of the different villages. When the ground is ready, the vic- tim is led forth, bound to bamboos for the better security, and taken into the open plain. The cultivators assemble, and at the supposed auspicious moment, commence the dreadful carnage by hacking with knives the body of the truly pitiable creature ; each cutting off a part as quickly as possible, and hastening with it to the field whose fertility is the object to be secured. The blood, in which the Khunds imagine the virtue of the spell to subsist, is then made, by pressure of the hand, to fall in drops upon the soil ; and the flesh, not yet cold, is cast into the same ground. In hewing the body great care is taken not to touch a vital part, for should death occur before the blood is dropped on the field, the charm, according to the notions of the people, would be lost. " Some of the Khunds, on being expostu- lated with, asked what else they could do, as they should have no crops if they neglected to perform this ceremony." Doct. Spry, in his " Modern India," gives an account of a tribe in the Nagpore kingdom, who not only sacrifice human beings, but feast upon the sacrifice. The practice of offering human sacrifices has prevailed to some extent among the North American Indians. In 1838 a sacrifice of this kind was made by the Pawnee Loups, in con- sequence of the prevalence of the small-pox. Toung feipales are the victims selected. After various preliminary rites and ceremonies, she is disrobed, and one half of her person painted red and the other black ; the feet and hands being extended, the right wrist and ankle are tied to an upright piece of timber, and the left wrist and ankle to another, and she is thus suspended on a scaffold. At intervals, various ceremonies are performed. The young njen and boys, each having provided a haniiful of arrows, about a foot long, made of the stems of a species of tall grass that grows on the prairies, now advance, and shoot these arrows into the breast and other parts of the unfor- tunate sufferer. The arrows enter just enough to adhere, and the breast is literally filled with them ; but they do not destroy life. An old man now comes forward and shoots an iron-pointed arrow through the vitals. The chest is now cut open, and the heart taken out and burned. The smoke that rises from this fire is con- sidered a most potent medicine, and their im- plements of war, hunting, and agriculture are passed through it, to insure success in their use. The flesh is now wantonly slashed off with knives, and thrown to be devoured by the dogs, but the skeleton remains suspended till it decays and falls. ^ The custom prevails among most of the un- evangelized tribes of Southern and Western Africa, and is attended with shocking bar- barities. Mr. Hutchinson gives the following account of a sacrifice offered by the king of Ashantee, to secure the assistance of the fetish in an approaching war : " The bones of the king's mother and sisters were taken out of their coffins, and washed with rum and water, wiped with silks, rolled in gold dust, and wrapped in strings of rock-gold, aggry beads, and other costly materials. Those against whom the king had any complaints were then sent for, and immolated as they entered, that their blood might ' water the graves ' of the royal dead. During the whole night the king's executioners traversed the streets, and dragged away to execution all whom they met. The next morning, desolation seemed to reign over the capital, and none appeared - in the market but the king and his attendants. At the close of the day the sacrifice was renewed. The bones were removed to the sacred tomb, preceded by the victims in chains, and followed by a splendid procession. When the procession returned the next day to the market-place, the king's horns sounded the death-knell, and the work of sacrifice commenced. The king sat with a goblet of palm-wine in his hand, and every time the executioners cut off a head, he imitated a dancing motion in the air." In the neighboring kingdom of Dahomey, the barbarous monarch paves the approaches to his residence and ornaments the battle- ments of his palace with the skulls of his vic- tims ; and the wide-spreading branches of the gigantic fetish-tree at Badagry are laden with human carcases and limbs, which have been offered in sacrifice. The same rite was generally prevalent in the islands of the Pacific, before the introduc- tion of Christianity, and the mode much like that practiced in Africa. It still prevails among the Pagans in those islands. Capt. Wilkes, of the United States Exploring Expe- dition, thus describes the practice, as it still exists in the Feejee Islands : " The victims are usually taken from a distant tribe, either by war or by negociation; and, after being fattened for the purpose, they are bound in a sitting posture, and placed in the oven and roasted alive ; after which the body is taken out, the face painted black, and carried to the temple, where it is offered to the gods. The Peejees being cannibals, it is then cut up and dis- tributed, to be eaten by the people !" Surely, " the dark places of the earth are full of the habitations of cruelty !" It appears, from the foregoing, that the hor- rid practice of offering human sacrifices to 478 IDOL— INANDA. gain the favor of blood-thirsty deities has been almost universal, except where the religion of the Bible prevails, and that we owe our de- liverance from it to the introduction of the Gospel among our ancestors. What obliga- tions, then, must rest upon us to send the G-os- pel to .those who are still groaning under the cruelties of paganism. — Pamphlet by Mr. Peggs, late missionary to Orissa ; London Missionary Magazine for My, 1846 ; Beecham's Ashantee and the Gold Coast ; United States Exploring Expedition, Vol. III. p. 97. IDOL : A statue or image of some false god, to whom divine honors are paid, altars and temples erected, and sacrifices offered. The idol or image, of whatever material it consists, is, by certain ceremonies, called conseora- tiou, converted into a god. While under the artificer's hands, it is a mere statue. Three things were necessary among the ancients to change the image into a god : proper orna- mente, consecration, and ovation. The orna- ments were various, and wholly designed to blind the eyes of the ignorant and stupid mul- titude, who are chiefly taken with show and pageantry. Then followed the consecration and ovation, which by the Romans were per- formed with great solemnity. — Rees' Cyclope- dia. IDOLATRY : The worship of idols, or the act of ascribing to things and persons, pro- perties which are peculiar to God alone. The principal sources of idolatry seem to be the ex- travagant veneration for creatures and beings, from which benefits accrue to men. The first objects of idolatrous worship are thought to have been the sun, moon and stars. Soon after the flood we find idolatry greatly prevail- ing in the world. In process of time noted patriots or deceased kings, animals, plants, stones, and whatever people took a fancy to, were idolized. The Egyptians worshiped pied bulls, snipes, leeks, onions, and many other equally insignificant objects. The Greeks had about 30,000 gods. The Apostle Paul traces idolatry to its true source, the corruption of the human heart : '• As they did not like to retain God in their knowledge, God gave them over to a repro- bate mind, to do those things which are not convenient." And this statement is corrobo- rated by the discoveries of Layard, among the ruins of Nineveh : — " They show, in conformity with the tenor of Scripture, that the earliest ages were not, as many think, barbarous ages ; but that the race of men, originally enlightened from a di- vine source, had, at first, a high degree of gen- eral knowledge which they gradually lost through their defection to idolatry. It has been demonstrated by these excavations, not only that a high state of the arts existed in Nineveh a thousand years before Christ, but also, that in the earliest ages of thot city, dating but a few centuries from the flood, their sculp- tures were the best. In this remarkable result, the Egyptian and Assyrian antiquities also agree. " It is also proved, contrary to the general impression, that idolatry was introduced when men had a better knowledge of the true God than afterwards prevailed ; that it did not grow up as a religion of nature, by the inef- fectual attempts of men to find the true God. But it was introduced as an expedient of men in order to obscure what knowledge of God they possessed, because they did not like to retain God in their knowledge. This is shown in the fact, that the earliest representations of God found in these sculptures are the best, and immeasurably exceed every thing of the kind existing in after ages ; especially in their ap- proach to the true idea of God. So that idol- atry cams in not for want of light, but by an abuse of light. Men, knowing God, and yet not willing to glorify him as God, became vain in their imaginations, and their foolish heart was darkened." And the description which Paul gives in the first chapter of Romans, of the debasing influ- ence of idolatry upon the heathen of his day, is a just description of its effects in every age and in every portion of the world. The wor- ship of inferior objects tends to debase, as the worship of the true God tends'to exalt the hu- man mind. Nor is the baptized idolatry of the church of Rome essentially better than that of pagans. The learned men profess, in- deed, to worship, not the images and pictures, but through them the objects they represent, or the Supreme Being through them, as medi- ators ; and so do the learned among the hea- then. But it cannot be expected, that the masses, whom they keep designedly in igno- rance, will make this distinction. And even though this distinction were made, the worship of God in this manner is expressly forbidden in the second commandment ; hence the Ro- manists leave out this command from the de- calogue. The idolatry of the heathen is everywhere connected with superstitions the most debas- ing, and rites the most cruel. IFAFA : Station of the American Board among the Zulus in South Africa, near Port Natal. IFUMI : Station of the American Board among the Zulus, in South Africa, near Port Natal. IGBOHO : A station of the Southern Bap- tist Convention in West Africa, 180 miles north of Abbeokuta. IGGIBIGHA: Station of the United Scotch Presbyterian Church, in Kaffraria, South Africa. IKAI : Station of the American Board at the Gaboon, West Africa. INANDA : Station of the American Board among the Zulus, in South Africa, near Port Natal. INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 479 INDIAN-WALK : A station of the Bap- tist Missionary Society in Trinidad, W. I. INDIANS : See North American Indians. INDIA : See Hindostan. INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO : Tliis vast extent of islands, wliicli tradition reports to be the remains of a sunli continent, forms, as it were, a bridge to that remote part of the world, Australia, and from thence again up north- ward to China. Its exterior crescent form begins with the Andaman and Nicobar is- lands ; then come two of the great Sunda islands, Sumatra and Java, which are followed by the lesser Sunda islands. Up northward of these are the Moluccas, to which belong also the islands of Banda, Amboyna, and Ternate. These are followed by the Philippines, and lastly by Formosa. Within this curve of islands are embosomed the two other great Sunda islands of Borneo and Celebes. The whole of these islands together, comprising an area of 170,000 square miles, contain about 20,000,000 of human beings, of all grades of color and stature. The most ancient appear to be the Papoos, who are the only inhabitants of the Andaman Islands, but who are found farther eastward as a people driven into the forests, mountains, and defiles, and are not found again as a leading population till we reach New Guinea. They are some of the most degenerate of the whole human race. They were supplanted more immediately by the Malays, who, having many centuries ago emigrated from India beyond the Ganges, have become a mysteriously heterogeneous people, by mixture with Papoos, Hindoos, Arabs, Chinese, Siamese, and even with Europeans. The shores have of late years been more and more covered with Chinese emigrants, who threaten the same fate to the Malays which they have inflicted upon the Papoos. The re- ligions here are as various as the nations, and tribes, and languages. Here we may still meet with aboriginal sorcery, together with the divine worship paid to mountains, rocks, woods, storms, volcanoes ; then with Brah- minism and Buddhism, the Chinese worship of ancestors exalted into demigods, the Moham- medan delusions, and the saint^worship of the Komish communion. The worship of God in spirit and in truth has hitherto been to these wretched nations a thing unknown ; and what has been attempted for these forty or fifty years past by about 70 or 80 missionaries, is as yet but little more than a beginning of what remains to be done. 1. The Nicobar and Andaman Islands. — South of Burmah Proper, and nearest to it, are the Andaman Islands, for whose wild in- habitants, the Papoos, nothing has hitherto been done. Below them are the Nicobars, which are also called Sambilang, or the Nine Islands, with a Malay population, who are of a tawny complexion, short stature, and strong- limbed, without any modesty, or any know- ledge of any other superior Being except the evil spirit. HerS the Danish Government, in 1756, attempted to establish a mercantile set- tlement ; and two years afterwards, at the re- quest of that Government, some missionaries of the United Brethren's church set out on their way thither. After an eight years' so- journ at Tranquebar, they came at length, in 1759, to the island of Nancawery. But scarce- ly ever had any mission to encounter so many privations and hardships of every kind, while the inhabitants continued quite unimpressible. Besides which, the climate was so deadly, that new comers were perpetually swept away after a very short interval. Yet the mission was not wholly abandoned till 1787, after eleven missionaries had been buried in Nancawery, and thirteen others had died from the injurious effects of the country after they had left it, while none of them had seen there any fruit of their labors. 2. Sumatra. — This, first of the Sunda Islands, which is almost bisected by the equator, is 1200 miles in length, and 200 in breadth. Its western shore, facing the Indian Ocean, is rugged and steep, and rises onward inland into a mass of mountains pervading the length of the island. Their highest summit is 13,000 feet. Here are brooks and rivers of no great length ; but, on the eastern side, where the de- scent is gradual to the low land, there are nu- merous river-vales, which abound with most luxuriant vegetation, but whose exhalations cause a deadly fever to Europeans. Eavenous animals of all kinds are abundant here. The inhabitants, who are estimated at 7,000,000, are Malays ; and are considered as the most bigoted and fierce abettors of the Mohamme- dan delusion. A remarkable, though less known people, are the Batta tribes in the north of the island ; as are also the Kampungs in the south of the mountainous interior. The Battas devour the flesh of persons who have been executed. When the Portuguese arrived, which was in 1511, the Malays had their prin- cipal force in the peninsula of Malacca ; and the sultans of Atshin, at the north point of Sumatra, attacked the intruding Portuguese at seven different times within the period of 130 years. But, in 1664, the Dutch took the city of Palembang, in the south ; and during very many wars they went on enlarging their dominions, while the English also in the west formed settlements at Bencoolen and Tapa- nooly. These English settlements have been consigned to the Dutch since 1825. The English Baptists had previously com- menced several missions in Sumatra ; first, at Bencoolen, in 1820, in the vicinity of which is Port Marlborough ; then at Padang, above 312 miles further north, in 1821 ; and lastly, in 1822, at the Batta village of Sebolga, in the vicinity of Tapanooly. But the mission was broken up in consequence of the exchange of governors ; for it could not act with sufS- 480 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. cient freedom under the narrow-tiearted Dutch, who, moreover, had drawn upon themselves the hatred of the Malays, so that war, conflagra- tion, and pillage, were perpetually on the in- crease. The missionary Burton likewise found it necessary to withdraw from Sebolga, be- cause fanatical Malays, called Padrees, were approaching the place with fury, to compel th:jse Battas to embrace Mohammedanism. Besides the Baptist missionaries, there were also others from Holland, who from time to time attempted to establish themselves at Pa- dang and Palembang ; but their society, it seems, wanted the means for carrying anything i"nto effect at those places. Lastly, in the year 1833, the American Board of Missions sent out Messrs. Munson and Lyman to make a tour of inquiry through the island. These missionaries pushed their way from Tapanooly through dtep ravines and defiles, primeval for- ests, and over steep and precipitous rocks and mountains ; but were at last cruelly butchered by the insensate Battas near the village of Sacca. The missionary Ennis likewise, who, in 1837, ventured into the interior from Pa- dang, had much difficulty to escape from the perils and dangers of the country, the attacks of wild beasts, and of the savage inhabitants. Since that time there has been nothing further attempted for the mission in Sumatra itself; and the Baptist missionary "Ward, who remains at Padang, can do little more than circulate copies of the Scriptures and tracts, on account of the extreme je '^Onronp ^ f SyTphReef GangesI? Crespo Y !Mh3jico situaji g aTypinsan tBuiigalow o Js, ■jjjuJciang J\rchbis lOp JSojaj^iijCLls. (Span:' UJi) "Vole; ngls. .iG-ar^X Jl&irsJiaBIs 20 ! ^A— -,, ^GuyliTc. Jlcpierm ^av-ira. 10 ^^ Ji'IangsT. t<^JLscertsion ROTiTJE ISJOES ""^agfinJl „ „ " Sariguar Trmom^ Swuu:n. "TlOtlL a Cn Fi ll an T. SJfosiiJ)a7t7c olXalcy onJ, .V ■•'*• t , CoroTalL 'SansoraZZ. • c ^ !» %^jMactichzie Is. •Philip L,. ^^^^^ TFiZsonJs,'. "^^fc,^" O X, r JVimrvT. 2Jrawt sJianffe #3 " '* ^ fcTiani Sanffuif Mblnci Tbican/j 10 20 J^amotxickTs . 'MbrUock A. " ^^'"^^ MJintevardcls, \ I S I ^ Jtvperryls. ^ . -p "Utilanl. ,^„, Cove A flann'tpie r. ^ t5 TVITT. T. „ STttts.t: SqaOyjr. ^^1' M •JSltio vcr ^N\JVcTwJi'elaiiil nbnima -Vj, '^j. -Pw cldin;i Ui /J''l,l EJxles '^■^^^^^ j/,r,T. WcUs Sfioal ,Gaarialcajaar n,, f.Christovul "N'iteniU °Jes7isT. .5^ ''■Diana. -^yji^Tiish 1 ilalGrciliD La <^'^^'^ -' ^ ■/Ftmdf, ■ora.T. ■* ' tucost ^ 33roaa Sa. itjO LalO 50 -7_. 1.60 L__ INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 481 manner by the Chinese, whom he visited from house to house. His dwelling was, indeed, accidentally destroyed by fire, with all his stock of books and furniture ; but this circum- stance only served to awaken an increased in- terest among the Christians at Batavia, and missionary buildings and schools were soon erected, together with a chapel. In 1821, the missionary Medhurst came from Penang to assist him ; and the zeal and activity of this missionary were evinced in a particularly laud- able manner. He composed a number of tracts, preached at four different places, espe- cially in the village of Depoc, read the Scrip- tures and other books aloud in public places, and stirred up much desire for salvation among the Chinese, by his familiar intercourse and journeys. As the government allowed him entire liberty to preach and distribute books, he frequently took very considerable journeys in Java and the neighboring islands. Many Chinese and Malays were baptized ; and the ground was becoming more and more decidedly prepared for a still richer harvest. Greater difficulties were thrown in the way of the Baptist missionaries, who likewise arrived in 1813, and labored more immediately for the benefit of the Malays. Robinson, it is true, soon got together one congregation, and another at Batavia, and at Weltevreden, in its neighborhood ; but the Dutch mode of govern- ment was not favorable to the desirable work- ing of a Malay mission. As he had so many and various obstacles put in his way, he re- paired, in 1821, to Bencoolen, in Sumatra. Trowt meanwhile had come to Samarang, where he was made very useful, and set him- self to learn the Cawee language, which is the ancient and original language of Java, and is still spoken in the islaud of Balee. But he died in 1816. The missionary Bruckner had joined him in that year ; as this missionary, however, could not see much fruit of his labors at Samarang, he removed in 1823 to Salatiga, in the higher ground of the interior, and from that place his letters communicated more cheerful reports. But a dreadful insurrection against the Dutch, in the kingdom of Yudshy- akerta, obliged him to return to Samarang. Here the Dutch refused him permission to print his translation of the Scriptures in the vernacular tongue, as weU as to circulate copies of it, after it had been printed at Sin- gapore in 1831. Even Medhurst's applica- tions to the government for that purpose were rejected. " Let the Javanese," it was said, " remain as they are ; we do not think it a good thing to have them more learned and knowing." On the other hand, there were only the more tracts put to press, which were eagerly called for, in the hospitals, prisons, and markets. The Netherlands Missionary Society has two stations on this island, viz., Depok and Soora- baya. Of the former, very little is known, ex- 31 cept that Mr. Wentink, after labormg there 15 years, has been obliged by ill-health to retire, and has been succeeded by another mis- sionary. At Soorabaya a great work of evan- gelization among the Mohammedan population has been prosecuted for many years by a Ger- man watchmaker, Emede, and his daughter. The first fruits of their efforts were baptized in Dec. 1843, viz., 18 men and 12 women. In Dec. 1848, at a village 50 miles from Soora- baya, 56 natives, young and old, were bap- tized, after having been instructed in Chris- tianity by Paul, a native evangelist. In March, 1849, 21 persons were baptized at a neighboring village ; and, at the close of 1849, there were under the care of the mis- sionary, Mr. Jellesma, 347 adult Christians, or baptized persons, and 183 children. He has taken six Javanese youths into his own house,, in order to bring them up as catechists among their own countrymen. 4. The Lessee Sunda Islands. — These come next to Java, eastward, in succession, and reach to the Straits of Ombay, beyond which commence the islands of Timor, which in a wider sense have been reckoned as part of the Moluccas. The most important of these Sunda Islands are Bal^e, with about 1,000,000 of inhabitants, who adhere to Hindooism, and, agreeably to it, bury widows with their hus- bands ; Lomboc, which is also called Sasac, with 180,000 inhabitants, who are mostly Mo- hammedans, and are subject to the Baleenese ; Soombava, 200 miles in length, with 800,000 inhabitants, probably like the Baleenese ; also, Sandalwood Island, which is but little known ; and Plores, 250 miles in length, which once was in the possession of the Portuguese. In not one of these islands has any mission as yet been established, though most of them appear to be very promising fields for the purpose. It is true that in the island of Balee, Mr. Med- hurst, in 1831, met with a very unfriendly re- ception. The rajah even forbade him to hold any conferences with the inhabitants, and threatened to poison those who should apply to him for medicine ; and when Mr. Medhurst complained of these restrictions, he was an- swered, " No one sent for you hither ; if you do not like it, go away to the place you came from." But the missionary Ennis, when he arrived there, found things quite altered, with- in less than seven years afterwards ; he was permitted to speak freely upon spiritual sub- jects, was esteemed, and kindly treated, and was frequently even requested to remain there. 5. Borneo. — This is the third great Sunda Island, and is called by the natives Broonai. It is 1000 miles in length, and 750 in breadth, but hitherto is known only on the coasts. It appears formed out of several smaller islands by alluvial soil, which is especially evident on the western side, where all is level inland for several days' journey. In the interior, and on the eastern coast, there are lofty chains of ■482 TNTiTAN ARCHIPELAGO. mountains, which contain diamonds, gold and inferior metals, in abundance ; and from whose heights very many rivers descend in cataracts and waterfalls. These mountains form the boundary between the Mohammedan Malays of the coast country and the pagan Dyaks of the interior and upper country. The former, who are about a million, are well instructed in their false faith, a,s well as adroit and fanati- cal in defending it ; they follow agriculture, traffic, and mining, and especially the cruel trade of piracy. The Dyaks, of whom there are several millions, are behind no nation in barbarism and rude ignorance. The nearest tribe^. who are mostly subject to Mohamme- dan chieftains, are indeed good tempered and social, but, at the same time, stupid and cow- ardly ; but those of the interior find their de- light only in war and murder. Their constant aim is to strike off the heads of their real or supposed enemies ; and to this every stranger is exposed without ceremony. In many of their provinces, no one is allowed to marry that cannot show a certain number of human heads that he has recently struck off. The grave of the chief must be fenced round with human heads ; and the possession of many human skulls constitutes the chief ornament and glory of families. An offering of human skulls is with them the surest safeguard against the evil spirits, to whom they attribute all diseases. Little is known of the rest of their religion. Not less lawless are the settlers called Bug- ies, from the island of Celebes, who are about 30,000. The most quiet inhabitants are the Chinese, who work in the mines, and who amount to about 300,000. Magellan's com- panions were the first Europeans that entered the island ; this was* in 1521 ; but the subse- quent Portuguese settlements failed. In the year 16'13, the Dutch founded a factory at JPontianak in the west ; and their domains on the south coast have become considerably en- larged since the year 1812. They have now preponderant influence upon both coasts, though the native princes have still much power, and the Dyaks remain almost entirely independent. In the east, the sultan of Ootee is the most authoritative despot ; and in the north, the sultan of Broonai. Rhenish Missionary Socibtt. — In 1835, the Rhenish Missionary Society sent Barnstein and Beyer to Borneo. Barnstein, who had learned the Malay at Java, brought with him Lucas Monton, a converted Celebese. They landed at Bandschermassing. Monton was re- ceived by a Chinese acquaintance, fn whose house he could read his books to an audience of Chinese, Malays, and Arabs. Monton preached here in public to a large crowd until evening. The Chinese received the Gospel with many favorable manifestations. Soon after landing, Barnstein made a jour- ney to the Dajak country, with Monton. Prom the chief in Gohong they received a friendly invitation, and entered into a treaty with him. Conforming to the custom of the country, they allowed incisions to be made on their right shoulders, and tasted of a draught with which the blood thence flowing was mixed. When the Dyaks heard of Christ, they appeared like a people awakened from a long sleep, and con- tinually heard the word with joy. At the mis- sionaries' departure, one of the chiefs said to them, " My brethren, do not fear to remain with us. We will do you no harm, and if any one molests you, you shall be defended with our hearts' blood. God and this assembly bear witness that this is true." And all the people cried out in corroboration, " Baalak I" Amen. Returning to Bandschermassing every one was filled with wonder to hear that the Dyaks in the south-east were asking for a religion, as they had none themselves, and would not em- brace Islamism. The Malays in the city, moreover, assembled themselves for the reading of the New Testament. In 1836, the mission was strengthened by the arrival of three new Rhenish missionaries, who all had cause to be rejoiced at the success of their labors. Some Dyaks went in troops to a Chinese temple, where one of them destroyed, with repeated blows, an idol erected there, with the words, " These gods must perish." They demolished the hear then temples and schools. The Chinese and Dyaks were won over. A chief of the latter expressed his sentiments in these words, " This writing has touched my heart. It has taken possession of it." Stations were established at Palingkau, Sungei Bintang, Gohong, Men- tangei, and Patey. Many Dyaks were freed from slavery by the efforts of the missionaries ; and every missionary has a little household gathered around him, consisting of liberated debtors, who had fallen so deeply in debt that they had pledged life and limb to their credi- tors, and had become their property. The following table shows the present condition of the mission : STATIONS. 1 a 1 a si O D 1* ^1 'a a 6»- Ban dschermas sing 1836 1840 1839 1851 1861 30,000 6,000 4,600 2,000 2,000 10 29 40 13 7 20 6 V Totals 43,600 08 40 American Board. — The first missionaries of the Board to Borneo were Rev. Messrs. Elihu Doty, Elbert Nevius, and William Yonngblood, with their wives, and Miss Azuba C. Condit, teacher. Mr. Doty arrived at Sam- INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 483 bas, June 17, 1839 ; and Mr. Tonngblood ar- rived at Pontianak about the end of the follow- ing November. Mr. Nevius reached Pontiar nak at a little later period. Sambas is on a river of that name, in the western part of the island, described as a " noble stream, in width nearly a mile, and in depth sufficient for vessels of large burden. Its borders are skirted with an unbroken jungle and forest, without the appearance of a single habitation or trace of human culture to enliven the scene." The Sam- bas river afforded facilities for reaching the scattered Dyak population, but besides this the place held out no strong inducements for a permanent location. Pontianak, in the west part of the island, further south, was regarded as a more desirable station, having a larger population than any other place on the coast, and being the entrance point, by a navigable river, to large settlements of Chinese and Dyaks in the interior. The Dyaks, as seen at home, are described as mild and gentle, and given to hospitality. They will beg, but will rarely steal, though clothes and other articles be ever so much ex- posed. But when they exchange their domestic habits for those of the warrior, their greatest delight seems to be to revel in blood, and their greatest honor to ornament their dwellings with human heads, which are the trophies of their inhuman barbarity. Mr. Doty, in a tour through that part of the province of which Sambas is the seat of government, distributed 600 tracts and volumes, including several copies of the New Testament, and found that many thousand volumes might be distributed during such a tour. Until the arrival of the missionaries, the inhabitants of western Borneo had been, in a religious point of view, almost wholly unknown They found there, as in many other parts of the Archipelago, a variety of races, the princi- pal of which were the Chinese, Arabs, Malays, and Bugles, all of foreign origin ; and the Dyaks, who were believed to be the aboriginal race. The Malays, Arabs, and Bugles, were found to be all Mohammedans. The chief difficulties of prosecuting missionary labor among these people were, the variety of lan- guages, the interference of petty chiefs and priests, the levity and ignorance of the people, and especially the difficulty of reaching the inhabitants, whose houses were generally built upon posts, on the banks of the river ; or on rafts or logs, which rose and fell with the water, and were accessible only by boats. The report of the Board for 1842 mentions the removal of Mr. Nevius to Singapore, on account of ill-health, and the arrival of Eev. Messrs. Thomson and Pohlman. The mission was now concentrated chiefly in the district of Pontianak, where a Malay school of about 15 scholars, half girls, was established, and a reg- ular preaching service maintained in Chinese and Malay. But the mission was exceedingly annoyed and embarrassed by the Dutch government in Netherlands India. The missionaries were required to spend their first year at Batavia, in the island of Java, which was regarded by the Board as " unreasonable and of no good tendency;" and even on reaching Borneo their labors would be restricted to the sea-coast. None but native Dutch missionaries were allowed to penetrate the interior of the island, and to obtain such was difficult. In this state of things the Board, in connection with the missionary Board of the Eeformed Dutch Church, sent an agent. Rev. Isaac Ferris, D.D., to the government at Holland, with a view, if possible, to get these restrictions removed. The agent was kindly received, but was inform- ed that the exclusion of all foreigners from the interior of their possessions in the Indian Ar- chipelago, was a principle of settled state policy, and that so far as the civil policy of the gov- ernment was concerned, the members of the Eeformed Dutch Church and the missionaries from the same must be regarded as foreigners. Dr. Ferris was, however, assured by the min- ister for the colonies, that all proper means should be taken for bringing their government to the adoption of a more liberal policy. The report of Dr. Ferris, on his return, rather encouraged the Board to continue ita labors in Borneo, and a mission was commenc- ed among the Dyaks, at Karangan, about eight miles south of Landak, and 140 from Pontianak. Messrs. Tonngblood and Thom- son took charge of this mission in September, 1842, and erected a house on the banks of the Karangan. In their journal of this year they make the following interesting statements re- specting the Dyak people, concerning whom so little had been previously known : " We are fully satisfied that there is nothing to prevent us from settling, with our families, immediately in the midst of these interesting people, and teaching them without reserve the principles of the doctrine of Christ. They are mild, inofiensive, and docile in their disposi- tions. In our opinion there would be no more danger from them, in ordinary times, than from the most civilized people in the world. They almost universally expressed the utmost willing- ness, if not strongest desire, to receive teachers < and some at least of their rulers professed to entertain the same feelings. As to the coun- try, we hope it will appear from the journal to be such as no one need disdain to inhabit." In the spring of 1844 Messrs. Doty and Pohl- man removed to China, leaving Pontianak without a missionary. Mr. Toungblood sub- sequently removed to that place, leaving Messrs. Thomson and Steele at Karangan. Mrs. Thomson died in December of this year, soon after following a daughter to the grave. The brethren at Karangan say at this period, " These are truly small things, but instead of faintrheartedness that we see no greater results. 484 INDIAN AECHIPELAGO. ■we ask yon to join us in most fervent praise to God for the changes we have witnessed, and that each day brings advancement." Alluding to their school they say : " We cannot paint to you the intelligence and the affectionate confidence of these little ones, their delight in obtaining new and elevating ideas, their unself- ish rivalry for an approving word or smile from the teacher they have learnt to love. The number of boys has seldom been more than seven ; the number of girls has been larger, and they have received instruction in needle- work and vocal music, in addition to the les- sons in spelling, reading, and writing." A very discouraging feature in the condition of the Dyaks, was found to be their degrading subjection to the Malays. It is described as " a despotism the most absolute, and yet the most irrational perhaps ever invented." Hence the Dyaks were unspeakably and increasingly wretched, and without any stimulus to rise or to attempt the improvement of their condition. Their ignorance was profound, especially on subjects connected with the soul and a future world, and, in their journal of 1845, the mis- sionaries " could see no signs of moral improve- ment." In 1847 Mr. Thomson and Mr. Toungbiood, were both compelled to seek the restoration of their health by a cessation of labor, and a temporary absence from Borneo. They sailed for Singapore, at which place Mr. Thomson was seized with hemorrhage of the lungs ; but after a little delay he proceeded to Geneva, and thence to Berne, at which place he died. Mr. Toungbiood returned to Borneo with his wife, but in such feeble health as to forbid the expectation of their long continuance on the island. Mr. Steele was also in feeble health, and in 1849 he returned to the United States. Both he and Mr, Toungbiood had intended to resume their labors, and earnestly desired to do so, but neither of them were able to return ; and neither did the Eeformed Dutch Church find any ministers willing to enter into this field, and it was left without a missionary. In their report for 1852 the Prudential Com- mittee say : — " It is indeed a hard ground to cultivate, though not more so than some others where success has at length come. The com- • mittee cannot believe that the missionary labors and sacrifices that have been expended on Borneo will be in vain. The existence, character, necessities, and claims of a largo heathen people in that great island, have been kept a long time before the attention of our American churches, and the seed thus sown may one day result in a rich harvest." Since the above date, no laborers have been sent to Borneo, and it remains to be seen whether that mission will be resumed. 6. Celebes. — This name was given by the Portuguese to the fourth great Sunda island, called by the natives Nigre-Orang-Bugies, country of the Bugles people, a lofty island. with four far-stretching peninsulas, whose nat- ural beauties are as striking as those in Java. The three millions of inhabitants are divided into Bugles and Macassars. The former are the most cultivated islanders of this Archipel- ago ; they are found in all the harbors of these seas; they are also the most formidable pirates. The latter are a coarse and clumsy race of men, who inhabit the west of the island. Both are at present strict Mussulmans, and are subject to sultans, who, however, are very dependent on the lesser rajahs. Originally they were pagans ; but, in 1512, their king having resolved to embrace another religion, invited to his capital two Mollahs and two Jesuits. The Mollahs arrived first ; and soon was Mohammedanism imposed upon the inhab- itants, especially in the kingdom of Bonee. About the year 1656, the Dutch landed in the island of Bootong, in hostility against the Macassars, and, since 1677, the Macassars and Bugies have remained subject to the Dutch, notwithstanding they have made, from time to time, the most savage insurrections, to throT^ off the yoke of their masters. Netherlands Missionary Society. — In the north of Celebes, in the 18th century, a large number of natives who had not embraced Islamism, were baptized by a native of Holland. After long neglect, the mission work was renewed here by the Netherlands Society. Three mis- sionaries went from Amboyna to Meuado, who were followed in 1822 by Miiller, and in 1825 to 1839, by Hillendoorn. They found that many, of all classes, wished for baptism ; among these the chief, Tondano. In Amu- rang the church numbers 1,000 souls, and the schools 115 scholars. A churcli of 550 was gathered at Tanowanka. At Menado, 260 heathen were baptized in one year. In conse- quence of these successes, Midel and Schwartz were sent by the society as co-laborers, who endeavored to introduce the Malay into the schools, as a, common medium of communica- tion. The number of Christians, old and new, in Manahasse, amounted in 1832 to 5,000. with 20 schools, which latter number is now increased to 56. The creed learned by the school-children in Malay, was the means of converting many heathen. People who had passed their years in reckless debauchery, cheerfully begun to lead orderly and Christian lives. An aged priest, who, by his craftiness, had led whole villages astray, besought his people to embrace "Christianity, which had brought rest to his own soul. The chief seats of the Christian communities in Celebes, are at Menado, Kema, Tondano, Langowang, Toniohou, and Amurang. In Langowang, Schwartz, after 11 years of hard labor, saw the first fruits of his faithfulness, in the bap- tism of 30 persons. Since 1837, the mission has had a printing-press, in order to print school-books and tracts. In Macassar, also, in the south, there is a preacher of the OospeL INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 485 On the neighboring island of Bonoa, he found Christians, who had so far backslidden as to engage with the heathen in the practice of cutting off the heads of human victims. On other islands, he was compelled to silence by laughter and derision. In Ternate, where Jung- michel was stationed, there were, in 1819, 700 Christians in a population of 5000. Since 1821 he has paid frequent visits to the San- geer islands, where Christianity appears to be at a low ebb. The Society has in this island eight sta- tions. The station at Tondano has one mission- ary, Mr. Riedel, who baptized * in the year 1847, 356 adults and 270 children, all natives. In 1848 he baptized 440 adults and 223 chi) dren. In 16 schools in his district he ha\ 768 boys and 514 girls. In 1849 he succeeded in building a chapel and school-house, by the assistance and contributions of the native Christians. At the Langowang station the missionary is Mr. Schwartz, who baptized, in 1848, 958 adults and 382 children, and numbered in the 15 schools under his charge 1182 boys and 423 girls. In February 1849, he wrote — " In near- ly every one of the 26 villages in my district, a desire for instruction in Christianity mani- fests itself with young and old, so that I and my assistant and the schoolmasters are hardly able to satisfy all their wishes. The number of Chris- tians on my list at the close of 1848, was 2951, and those who attended preaching in my seven congregations on the Sabbath numbered 1500. At Amurung Mr. Herrmann baptized, in 1847, 195 adults and 57 children ; and in the following year 321 adults and 177 children. He had 23 schools, with 1261 boys and 661 girls, and eight places of public worship, to which he devoted more or less attention. In February, 1849, he wrote — " My present sphere of labor includes 75 very far scattered villages, with 23,000 souls. I usually preach on Sun- days at two different places, in the Alfoor lan- guage. Tomokon is another station, where Mr. "Wil- ken has several congregations, and 16 schools, containing 1415 boys and 242 girls. Menado, a principal town, on the northern extremity of the island, enjoys the labors of a faithful missionary, who has charge of Dutch and Malay congregations, and also of five schools, attended by 230 boys and 130 girls. Tanavangho was occupied in 1849 by Mr. Bossert, who found there more than 500 nom- inal Christians, but who were very far from the real life of God. But he says, " Besides Tanavangho I have seven other villages com- mitted to my charge, one of which gives me very much hope : it is Tately, where there is a * Baptism, with this Society, is not admission to the Church, but is administered to those who nominaUy embrace Christianity, and are subsequently received to Church fellowship, if found worthy. very good school and a good teacher. Some 30 or 40 have received baptism, and as many more who are receiving instruction desire baptism." Kema is a new station, where the missionary in 1848 baptized 299 adults and 83 children. His 12 schools contain 747 boys and 107 girls. The station at Koomdemboy was recently commenced by Mr. Ulfers, who describes that part of the island as " most picturesque, hilly, woody, and abounding with springs of excel- lent water." He lives there, in the centre of a missionary circuit, comprising 25 villages, with about 9,000 inhabitants, all living on high mountains or in deep valleys. He has 9 schools under his care. 7. The Moluccas. — In a wider sense, all the islands situated between New Guinea and Ce- lebes are termed the Moluccas, or Spice Islands ; and thus there belon_g to them — 1. the Timor Islands in the south, Timor, Rotty, Simao, Dao, and others. 2. The Banda Is- lands, which next form a group of ten small isles, about which, in an extensive bend, are situated to the south-west the islands of Wet- ter, Eoma, Kissor, Letty, Damm, Moa, and others ; and to the south-east, Timorlaut, with its surrounding isles ; and eastward, as far as towards New Guinea, the Aroo Islands. 3. The Amboyna Islands, Amboyna, Ceram, Booro, and others. 4. The proper Moluccas, or Ternatas, with the islands Jilolo, Morty, Ternate, Tidor, Moteer, Machian, Bachian, and others. Lastly. 5. The Sangeer Islands, which form the chain of passage to the north Philippine Islands. All these islands, toge- ther, are splendidly adorned and gifted, and are particularly rich in spices of every kind ; many of them, also, have active volcanos. But the intercourse of their population with civil- ized countries, is considerably less than in the rest of this vast Archipelago, and they seldom see a European vessel. The natives consist partly of untractable and proud Malays, and partly of savage aborigines, called Alfoors, or Papoos, governed by their own rajahs. In the year 1621, the Portuguese took possession of these islands. Mohammedanism had been forced upon the latter hardly forty years be- fore. The chief Portuguese settlement was in Ternate ; but their cruelty and barbarity made them to be so hated by the natives, that these oppressed people at length threw them- selves into the arms of the Hollanders, who, in 1617, first expelled the Portuguese from Am- boyna, and then extended their conquests far- ther and farther. Another sphere of missionary labor has been formed in and around the island of Timor, whither the Dutch missionary Lebrun came, in 1819. He settled at Cupang, the seat of the Dutch government, on the south coast of Timor. The north coast about Dilly belongs to the Portuguese. For twenty years there had been no Christian minister among the na- 486 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. tivea there, who profess Christianity. "With 80 much the greater eagerness did they now crowd to the missionary's preaching ; and in the very first year, ninety pagans were admit- ted to the church, which already consisted of 3,000 professed Christians. Moreover, the rajah of Eotty submitted himself to Christ crucified; and, in 1823, Lebrun baptized in Little Timor, Kissor, Letty, and Moa, four hundred and ninety-six persons. The Friendly Society which he established, was subscribed to even by some of the pagan princes. He everywhere formed schools, and to the remote churches he addressed pastoral letters, after the manner of the apostles, of the good effect of which there are very pleasing testimonies. A few years before his death, which took place in 1829, eight missionaries more arrived, who distributed themselves among various stations, and made it one part of their business to estab- lish more fundamentally in Christianity the churches and congregations that had been gained to it. The islands of Timor, Babaw, and Eotty, as also Kissor, Letty, Moa, Boma, Wetter, and others, are places wheie they are continually visiting and laboring. Their work, indeed, is often exceedingly harassing and fatiguing ; and though the missionary Bar, of Basle, who, in 1825, was stationed in Kissor, and at present in Amboyna, was soon enabled to baptize 1,500 of the 5,000 inhabit- ants, yet he has to this day, amidst his un- speakably troublesome and wearisome occupa- tions, had one of the most diiBcult of posts to maintain. But the persevering patience of the messenger of peace is never unaccompa- nied by some blessed benefit or other. In the proper Moluccas there is but little as yet done, except what, since 1819, the missionary Jung- miohel has been effecting in Ternate. Since 1821, he has also periodically visited the San- geer islands, 150 miles north-west of Celebes ; but has found only extremely ignorant Chris- tians and bad schools at those places. In 1850 it was reported that the , natives of Amboyna, being all nominal Christians, it was no longer regarded as a field for mission- ary labor. Harookoo, in the same neighbor- hood, is also inhabited by nominal Christians, over whose different congregations and schools a missionary, Mr.Luyke, is placed as pastor and overseer. Timor has two stations, viz. : Koo- pang and Babow, at which there are four mis- sionaries, the two last having been sent out in 1849. They have in charge various congrega- tions and schools, concerning which no recent reports have been made. 8. The Philippine Islands. — Of these islands, which contain about three millions of inhabitants, we shall say but little, as they are no theatre of Protestant missions. The fa- mous circumnavigator, Magellan, began here his conversions with cannon-ball, in 1521. This he did, especially in the island of Zeboo, where, after a cannonade, 800 Dyaks, or Al- foors, were immediately baptized. He, how- ever, and his officers fell a sacrifice to this zeal, and Zeboo fell away again from Christianity. The Spaniards and Portuguese soon contend- ed for possession of these islands ; and the former got the mastery. Zeboo, in 1564, re- ceived a sanguinary chastisement for its apos- tasy ; and as fast as the conquests proceeded, did the Romish religion everywhere take root, as Augustinian monks, Franciscans, and Do- minicans, zealously prosecuted the work of their missions. W. Hoffman, in his " Geo- graphy," says : " Here is the paradise of the monks. Here vegetate one thousand monks, Augustinians, Dominicans, and Franciscans, in luxuriant and luxurious monasteries ; four provincials command them ; one thousand two hundred parishes are occupied by them. The temporal government, the instruction, and the whole activity of the inhabitants are all under their heavy hand. The pious idleness of their festivals and processions is excessive ; the poorer, but without knowing it, are the native secular ecclesiastics in their three thousand parishes. The titular archbishop of Manilla, who resides at Madrid, together with the bi- shops of New Segovia, Zeboo, and New Cace- res, are at the head of them. 9. The Island of Formosa. — This island, which is also called Thaiwan, is between the Philippines and the Chinese coast; and the greater part of it is subject to the emperor of China. Hither, in 1631, was sent by the Dutch government, the preacher Junius, who, with much labor acquired the language of the country, and at the period of his death had collected a Protestant church of five thousand nine hundred adults. But the light was soon extinguished, through perpetual wars with pi- rates, and the subsequent reduction of the island by the emperor of China ; and proba- bly at the present day scarcely a single trace of those fair beginnings can be found. [The early history of the missions noticed in the foregoing article, has been taken from " A Manual of Christian Missions," by Eev. C. Barth, D.D., principal of the Basle Mission- arylnstitution, and Wigger's History of Missions, in German. The later portions have been ga- thered from various sources.] INFANTICIDE : The practice of destroy- ing infants soon after their birth. That a practice so revolting to humanity should ever prevail, in any country, seems almost incredi- ble. One characteristic of heathenism, how- ever, as given by the Apostle Paul, is that of being " without natural affection ;" and, al- though there are exceptions, yet, as a general rule, selfishness, in the heathen mind, rises above every other principle. And hence, in all ages, infanticide has been a prevalent cus- tom of the heathen. It was a law of the an- cient Spartans that only promising children should be reared. They were submitted to the examinatioo of certain persons, and if weak or INFANTICIDE, 487 deformed, they were thrown into a cavern. T'he exposure of children was a practice com- monly sanctioned by the ancients. Gimelli Oareri states that, in the Philippine Islands, children born with imperfections, were put into a hollow cave, and buried alive. In the Sandwich Islands, it was estimated by the for- eigners who went first among them, that two- thirds of the infants that were born, were de-,_ stroyed by their own parents. The sickness or deformity of the child, or the trouble of taking care of it, was a sufficient excuse for its destruction. Mothers would cast their children into a hole dug in the earth, and cov- ering them up, would trample upon them with their feet, and thus stifle their cries. The wri- ter of this a,rticle has seen a native of the Sandwich Islands, who was buried alive by his mother, and rescued from the grave aud reared by the missionaries. Some of the con- verted native women have confessed to the missionaries, with tears in their eyes, that they had killed all their children. In the Georgian and Society Islands, infan- ticide prevailed to an incredible extent. It is stated by one of the missionaries, that on a certain occasion he inquired of three women who were sitting together, how many children they had destroyed. " One replied with a fal- tering voice, ' I have destroyed nine.' The sec- ond, with eyes suifused with tears, said, ' I have destroyed seven,' — and the third informed him she had destroyed Jive." To such an extent was this cruel and unnatural practice carried, that it is the opinion of the missionaries that two-thirds of the children were murdered by their own parents. There are several tribes in India, in which the custom has long prevailed of destroying the female children. The British Government have exerted themselves to put an end to the practice, and to some extent have succeeded. Infanticide also prevails in China. A mis- sionary was conversing with a Chinaman, who was away from home ; and inquiring for his family, the man said he had three sons and one daughter ; he had had another daughter, but " did not bring her up." " Not bring her up," said the missionary ; " what did you do with her ?" " I smothered her," he replied. When expostulated with for murdering his own child, he said, " It is very common in China. We put the female children out of the way, to save the trouble of bringing them up. Some people 'have smothered five or six daughters !" Mr. Barrow computes, from authentic data, that not less than 9,000 children are exposed in the streets of Peking every year, and as many more in the provinces. He states that it is part of the duty of the police to carry away in carts, every morning, those that have been exposed at night, some of whom are yet alive ; but they are all carried to a pit, with- out the walls, and buried promiscuously. Here the Koman Catholic missionaries attend, se- lecting the most lively for future proselytes and administering baptism to others before they die. The practice is connived at by the government. The people in some parts of India, particu- larly in Orissa and the eastern part of Bengal, frequently offer their children to the goddess Gunga, by drowning them in the river. In the northern districts of Bengal, if an infant is sickly, it is hung up in a basket on the branch of a tree, to be destroyed by the ants or birds of prey. In Japan, mothers, on finding them- selves too poor to bring up their children, do not scruple to suffocate them at Ihe breast. In Greenland, where a mother died leaving an infant, the latter was buried with her. The South American women on the river Oronoko are said frequently to destroy their daughters, to save them the hardships and sufferings to which they are exposed. The Bushmen in Africa take no great care of their children. They kill them without remorse when they are ill-shaped, or when they are in want of food ; and when obliged to fly from their enemies, they will cast them aside, strangle, smother, or bury them alive ; and, to save themselves, they will throw them to the lions, which prac- tice has greatly increased the desire of the lion, for human flesh. In Madagascar, the fate of the infant depends on the calculation of lucky and unlucky days. If, judging from the time of birth, its destiny is concluded to be malevo- lent, it is put to death by suffocation. A poor woman called on a missionary, and acknow- ledged that four out of five of her children had been destroyed in this way. Where the des- tiny may possibly be averted, one plan adopted for the purpose is, to place the infant at the entrance of a cattle-fold, and then to drive in the cattle. If the child is not destroyed, its fate is declared to be averted ; but, if tram- pled on and killed, the contrary is manifest. Infanticide has also prevailed among the North American Indians. Prom time immemorial, the Choctaws had considered it no crime, un- til they received Christianity. A young man would take a wife, and having no means of supporting her, would soon leave her. The woman, seeing herself deserted, would say, the child has no father to provide it a blanket ; it had better be dead than alive. Sometimes the mother digs a grave and buries it alive, soon after it is born. Sometimes she puts it to death by stamping on it with her feet. But after the establishment of a mission among them, they passed a law against this crime. We are amazed in contemplating the utter extinction of parental affection, which ages of heathenism has thus effected ; but what shall be said of the worse than heathen, among the lower classes in England, who murder their own children for the sake of obtaining the burial fee from some mutual benefit society to which they belong I Human nature is the same every where, when unaffected by the Gos- 488 BIPARANI— JEWS. pel ; and even in a Christian land, those who treat it with utter contempt or neglect, often fall, if possible, even below the heathen. — Edinhvrgh Encyclopedia ; Rees' Cyclopedia ; Pegg's Great Moral Evils in India ; Narrative of Fersecutiovs in Madagascar, p. 61 ; Dibble's Sandwich Islands ; Miss. Her., Vol. XIX., p. 9. IRISH PEESBYTERIAN MISSIONS: The General Assembly of the Irish Pres- byterian Church maintain both Home and Foreign Missions. The former have been very successful among the Roman OathoUcs of Ireland. They have a Foreign Mission in Western India, with four sta- tions. They have Jewish missions at Hambui-g, Bcjnn, and Damascus, and colo- nial mibsions in British North America, Australia, Van Dieman's Land, and New Zealand. All these missions are prosecuted witli energy and zeal. ISLE OF FRANCE : See Mauritius. ITAFAMASI : A station of the Ameri- can Board among the Zulus in South Africa, near Port Natal. JEWS, MISSIONS TO: Coeval with the establishment of Christian missions among the heathen, spring up in the church the spirit of missions to the Jews. The voice that, com- ing across the lapse of centuries, struck upon the ear and thrilled the heart of Christendom, " Go ye into all the world and preach the Gos- pel," called attention to the moral condition and wants of God's ancient people, Israel, scattered among all nations. There was a feeling, that if the Gospel was to be preached among all nations, it ought, as in the apostles' days, to begin at Jerusalem. There was also a firm belief that " the Gospel was the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth, to the Jew first ; " and that God had not cast away this people from the covenant of redemp- tion in a way that they could not be saved by grace, " for even at this present time also there was a remnant, according to the election of grace." Whatever may be the theories ad- vanced by many, respecting the future of the Jewish people, it is a prophetic and providen- tial fact that they have been kept distinct from all other nations from the time of the Abrahamic call to the present hour. During the former part of their history, they were dis- tinguished as the people of God ; during the latter part they have been distinguished as the special objects of Jehovah's indignation. In this respect, their relation to Christianity and all other forms of religion is peculiar. While all other tribes and nations, springing from whatever source, have come upon the stage of the world, passed through scenes of prosperity and adversity, socially and morally, having a common history and fate, the Jewish people remain always the same, both in religious and social adversity. They are alone, dwelling in the valley of weeping ; a proverb among the nations with whom they sojourn, but to whom they never assimilate. As, in ancient days, iii respect to the covenant of redemption, the whole world was divided into two classes, " Jews and Gentiles," so it is now, only the order of the relation is reversed. The " Ammi " are now the " Lo-ammi," and the " Lo-Ammi " are the " Ammi." Divine Providence has kept up the distinction, and an enlightened Christian consciousness always recognizes it. In order to a comprehensive view of a work of Christian missions among the Jews, a briet review of the rise and progress, and decline of Christianity among them, is necessary. Chris- tianity began at Jerusalem. The story tha» Jesus of Nazareth, on the cross expiating the sins of the people, was the long-promised Mes- siah of the fathers, kings, and prophets, con- tained the truth essential to their salvation. It was told and reported in their hearing. It lodged in their hearts, and pricked their con- sciences. The Spirit was poured out from on high, and brought them to embrace the truth. On the day of Pentecost, three thousand were converted. A few days after, five thousand more were converted. The work thus begun continued until the converts were numbered by multitudes of men and women, and great companies of priests. The apostles to the cir- cumcision were as successful in preaching and making proselytes to Christianity throughout the world, as were the apostles to the uncir- cumcision. There was no difference during the first century. The leaders and teachers of the early church never supposed that Jews were not as hopeful subjects of grace as Gen- tiles, notwithstanding the "judicial curse of blindness " was resting upon them. In every province of the Roman empire, and in all known countries out of the empire, Jewish Christian churches were established. At the close of the second century, there were no less than forty-four Jewish Christian congregations at Rome. The third century witnessed the triumph of nominal Christianity over the ter ritory of the Roman empire. The state espoused the church, and promised to be her protector and defender. The Roman govern- ment, after subduing the adjacent states and kingdoms, reduced them to provinces, and caused them, by the extension of its laws, man- ners, and customs, to assimilate to the empire. The Jewish people alone remained unaffected. In the midst of the Roman empire, they con- tinued to be a distinct people, and bitter despisers of both church and state. The state, now a Christian government, attempted to exterminate this obstinate enemy by force of arms; while the church, sympathizing with her liege lord, imitated his example by exclud- ing the Jews from the spiritual mercies and graces of Christianity. Every effort at length was abandoned to evangelize the Jews. The council of Elvira forbade all familiar inter- course with the Jews by Christians, under pain of excommunioatloD from the churcV JEWS. 489 Finally, a decree was passed, forbidding a Jew to enter a Christian church. Thus, as through corruption, Christianity ceased to be propa- gated among the heathen, so, by wicked decrees, it was not allowed to be extended to the Jews. But, happily, the age of Christian missions to the unevangelized came. The Jews were not altogether forgotten. The spirit of Jewish missions first manifest- ed itself in the national Synod of the Low- countries. The subject engaged the serious attention of the synods of Dordrecht, Delft, and Leyden, which were held 1676, '7, and '8. The founders of these synods devised a scheme for promoting the conversion of the Jews in their own country. Many Israelites and among them some distinguished scholars, embraced Christianity. Prom this date conversions among the Jews were frequent. To promote the work societies were formed by interested Christians. In 1728 the Callmburg Institution was established at Halle, which had for its chief object the conversion of the Jews, by means of tracts, Hebrew Scriptures, and mis- sionaries. The Moravian brethren, about the year 1764, had their attention turned to the spiritual welfare of the Jews. Some of their most distinguished men, for example, Leonard Dober, Count Zinzendorf, and David KirkhofF, did all in their power to further this object. In 1736, 400 Jews were admitted into the evan- gelical church at Darmstadt. In 1739, 100 Jews embraced the Gospel in the Grand Duchy of Hesse. The infidel revolution in Europe in 1789 put an end to all like efforts to evangelize the Jews. After these brief notices we arrive at the period of modern missions to the Jews. Numbers of the Jews. — In exact fulfilment of the Scriptures the Jews are sojourners among all nations. And so little is known respecting them, in many countries, that no reliable esti mate can be obtained of their numbers. The Jewish population of the whole world, as far as it is known with approximate certainty, is 14,000,000. They are distributed as follows : In the Mohammedan countries in Europe, Asia, and Africa . . . 3,000,000 China 60,000 Bussian Empire 1,200,000 Poland 1,000,000 Prussia Proper 150,000 Austria 453,000 German States 138,000 Holland 66,000 Prance 81,000 Italy 200,000 England 30,000 Ionian Isles 7,000 Danish States 15,000 Sweden 1,700 Switzerland 1,900 Gibraltar 4,000 Ehenish Provinces 250,000 Gallicia ^. . 200,000 West Indies North and South America . . . Add to the above the Beni-Israel among the Hindoos, found in the year 1822, and reported by the agent of the London Jews Soci- ety, Mr. Largon, about . . . 13,500 200,000 6,928,900 Whole number 14,000,000 The Jews that are accessible to missionary operations are distributed as follows : — Great Britain, 30,000 ; France, 81,000 ; Italy, 200,- 000 ; Austria, 453,000 ; the Ehenish Provinces, 250,000 ; Silesia, 50,000 ; East and West Prussia, 26,000 ; Prussia Proper, 150,000 ; Danish States, 15,000; Poland, 1,000,000; Holland, 66,000 ; Palestine, 19,000 ; Bagdad, 100,000 ; Smyrna, 15,000 ; Salonica, 35,000 ; Russia, 1,000,000 ; United States, 100,000 ; miscellaneous, 1,000,000. In all about 6,000,- 000. Present Social State. — The social state of the Jews has not changed since their dispersion. The same feeling in the various governments where they sojourn, that excluded them from civil privileges during the sway of the Eoman Empire, still exists in the old world, excluding them from any participation in political mat- ters not only, but depriving them of many privileges enjoyed by all others. In Russia, Turkey, Austria, Italy, and Switzerland, they are not at all regarded as citizens, but as aliens that are to be rigidly watched, and that may be at any time sacrificed, personally or pecu- niarily, for the benefit of those governments. Tie Russians draft their young men at an earlier age and in a larger proportion to their numbers, than their own legitimate subjects, and make it a crime worthy of death for them to leave the country. Austria, when it suits her purposes, extorts enormous taxes from them, oftentimes reducing them to the stages of utter destitution. Rome confines them to filthy and almost uninhabitable quarters, locks them in at nightfall, and inflicts death upon any one of them that ventures to mingle with Romans. Switzerland has but lately banished them from her cantons. -Among the Turks it is no crime to kill a Jew. In Prussia, Prance, and Eng- land, although as Jews they cannot participate in the first offices of these governments, still by the force of their genius, and the power of their money, one may occasionally rise to po- litical distinction. In England, the most lib- eral and lenient government in Europe towards them, a controversy has been for many years pending upon the propriety and constitution- ality of admitting Jews elect to seats in par- liament. In no country of Europe have the Jews been emancipated from the political thraldom into which they were thrown by the Roman power. In Asia, they generally live in exclusion and have no desire to be received i90 JEWS. as citizens. In the United States there are presented no barriers to their political aspira- tions, and the consequence is many Jewish names are found on the rolls of both the upper and lower houses of Congress. Also in some of the free governments of the West India islands Jews have a prominent voice in their legislative bodies. The principal occupation of the Jews is trade and traffic. From their political relation to the governments, their condition is made one of instability and change. They do not become agriculturists, nor deal largely in real estate. Having no government to protect them, they have endeavored to secure that which forms a very good substitute, viz., money. Their investments are made in banks and in public or government stocks. So that, whenever the decree goes forth for them to seek a new home, their possessions are imme- diately, as by magic, turned to gold to accom- pany and solace them on their pilgrimage. Intellectual Position. — The intellectual posi- tion of the Jews ranks high. They are the great thinkers for the masses of Europe. The following eloquent passage, from a dis- course on the " Present Eelation of Israel to the World," may serve to meet all historic de- mands in a sketch like this : " The European continental press is mainly in Jewish hands ; every department of periodical literature swarms with Jewish laborers. The news- paper press is under their control, and the cor- respondence is mainly conducted by them. Tak- ing a step higher, there we find them again. We ask for knowledge of the mysteries of the starry heavens, and the children of Israel be- come our instructors. The Herschols and the Aragos are the leaders of that lofty band of celestial travelers that journey among the stars. We cry for light upon the mysteries of revelation, and the children of Israel open the pearly gates of day, and light flows around us. Jahu, Hengstenberg, Tholuck, Krummacher, and a host of others, furnish us with biblical criticism, didactic theology, and general sacred literature. We ask for a key to unlock a diar lect of Moses and the prophets, and a Hebrew takes one from his drawer. Gesenius gives us our lexicon, and Nordheimer our grammar. We would have the dark chasm in early Church History filled up, and a bridge thrown across it, in order that we may pass safely from inspired to uninspired history ; the chil- dren of Israel furnish the materials and cover the chasm. Neander furnishes us with our incomparable Christian Church History, and Da Costa with a history of the Jews. What need I add more ? These facts show that the Hebrew intellect is exerting a powerful influ- ence upon the secular and sacred literature of the age." Religious Condition.— 1h& religious condi- tion of the Jews may be viewed in relation to Judaism and Christianitj;. In their relation to Judaism they may be divided into four classes : 1. A considerable number of the olisr Jews are strict Talmudists. They are so, however, less from conviction than because they per- ceive the necessary consequences of deserting the old foundations. The link which, binds them to Talroudism is purely of a negative character. They adhere to it not, from love to that system, but from dread of a worse. If they leave traditionary ground, they know of no evidence strong enough to arrest them on this side of infidelity. Their state, therefore, may be summed up in this aphorism, that some- thing is better than nothing, and authority is better than no ground at all. 2. A second class of Jews having thrown off the Talmud, endeavor, perhaps vainly, yet earnestly, to find a resting-place in the Old Testament. Having left their old moorings,, they endeavor to let down their anchor there ; and, if it fixed, nothing would please them more. But, missing the right interpretation of the Old Testament, they can get no sure bottom. They are thus driven along, whether they will or not, by the spirit of the times. 3. A third class, far more numerous than the other two, whose reverence for authority being entirely destroyed, have thrown off the Talmud, and whose moral sense having be- come darkened and debased, have cast off the Old Testament too. The link which binds the first class to the Talmud, and that which at- taches the heart of the second to the Bible, being broken, they have sunk down into avowed infidelity. It is to be observed, however, that all who may be reckoned fairly among this class do not occupy exactly the same position. With many, their infidelity is a mere nega- tion. Their understandings being emanci- pated, they can receive nothing without evi dence ; their hearts being callous, they do not inquire after it. Still, if it were presented, they would be open to conviction. Another party, and it is one which is daily increasing, places itself in the position of direct and active antagonism. They would, gladly banish all systems of belief out of the world. They re- gard them all alike as imposing fetters on the understanding, and an unnecessary restraint on the inclinations of the heart. They are, for the most part, proud; high-minded, neither reverencing God, nor regarding man. 4. A fourth class is found a stage lower down than all the preceding ones. The last mentioned, though having given up all idea of revelation, stand at least on deistical ground. But this goes further, and treads the dreary wastes of pantheism. Of course, in dealing with such, one must take up a question antece- dent even to the inspiration of Scripture, viz., the existence and personality of Him whose revelation it professes to be. It is difficult ix} compute the number belonging to this classi There is reason to believe that it is already large ; and, without any doubt, it is continu- ally receiving new accessions. JEWS. 491 In their relation to Christianity, they may be divided into three classes : 1. A very large proportion of the Jews view Christianity in the aspect of the double apostasy of Popery and infidelity, or Ration- alism. They see in the one an idolatrous wor- ship ; in the other, a, denial of its very being. There is something abhorrent to their mind in the former, and nothing attractive to it in the latter. A Christianity that presents itself as a mitigated form of heathen idolatry, can never win the regards of a Jew ; nor can it be expected that a Christianity which requires to be pared and pruned of its chief doctrines by its own .supporters, should gain his confidence or engage his affections. So far, therefore, as Christianity is identified in his mind with either of these apostate systems, it is necessa- rily rejected by him. He regards it either as a vail thrown over the grosser features of hea- thenism, or as a thin partition wall, employed for a season to conceal the infidelity of the heart, till circumstances permit its removal and the free profession of the inward senti- ments. Popery has been so long and so wide- ly prevalent, and infidelity has acquired in re- cent times so fearful an ascendancy, that we need not wonder if mpst of the notions float- ing about in Jewish society regarding Chris- tianity, have been drawn from the one or the other of these two sources. The natural effect is the formation of the large class of which I now speak, who, whatever they may think of their own position, consider that of Christians as equally, if not more untenable. They are not animated, however, with any special hatred of Christianity, nor do they show themselves actively hostile. 2. A second class, who have come into closer contact with the Christian system, or with true Christians, exhibits a difference of senti- ment, corresponding to the difference of their situation. Their views are very indistinct, nor do they know well what passes in their own minds. The idea, however, seems to have started in many of them that possibly in Chris- tianity is to be found the solution of their own difficulties, and that Christianity is the termi- nating point of the present movement. Those who shrink back with horror from the thought of infidelity, feel the necessity of some form of positive belief to rest upon. To return to the Talmud is out of the question. The Old Testament, if they reject the Christian inter- pretation, is also untenable. Christianity, therefore, presents itself as the only and last refuge. 3. The third and last party to be mentioned entertain very different feelings towards Chris- tianity from the other two. They manifest towards it the greatest hostility, and persecute it with the utmost rancor. The chief weapon which they can at present command is the tongue ; but the venom with which they poi- son its arrows shows sufficiently the disposition of their hearts, and what they would be in- clined to do if they had more power. They re- gard Christianity, whether as a system or aa embodied in the persons of its professors, aa their natural enemy. They consider it as the one great obstacle to the leveling process which they are attempting to carry out in society. They, declare they will not rest till it is rooted out of the earth. Reasotis for distinct Missions to the Jews. — The reasons for establishing distinct missions to the Jews are various, and upon examination they will be found to be the same in some respects now that were acted upon by the apostles. (1) As they were Israelites then to whom pertained the adoption, and the glory, and the covenants, and the giving of the law, and the service of Cod, and the promises ; so are they now. (2) They are a separate peo- ple, and those among whom they dwell would have no more relation to them than though they did not exist. (3) As in our Saviour's times it was necessary to begin at Moses and all the prophets, and expound unto them in the Scriptures the things concerning Christ, so it is now. In order to this, the missionary must not only be thoroughly versed in the Hebrew Scriptures, but in Eabbinical litera- ture in all its departments. Having proved that the Messiah of the ancient Scriptures is Jesus of Nazareth, the way opens for preach- ing repentance and faith. (4) There were, at the time of the establishment of modern mis- sions among, the Jews, no adequate means or agencies for meeting the religious wants of the Jews. There was also a very prevalent senti- ment that all efforts made for their conversion would prove abortive ; and hence, on this ground, if no other, the church declined to entertain the subject of Jewish missions, and did not deem it expedient to project any mear sures for a work of the kind. For these and like reasons, separate missions to the Jews were needed and established. The London Society for promoting Christian- ity among the Jews. — This Society was formal- ly organized in the year 1809. The " object of the Society was to relieve the temporal distress of the Jews, as well as to promote their spiritual welfare." The fundamental principle on which it was founded, was by means of temporal relief to gain access to the poor. In order to furnish employment to converts, a printing-press was established in 1811, which yet continues in operation. The Episcopal Jews' chapel for Christian worship, and schools, were opened in 1813. Up to this time there had been made 79 proselytes from among the Jews in London. In the year 1818, the first foreign missionary to the Jews was sent abroad to Poland — an enterprise that has been eminently successfal from the first. In contemplating the wants of the field, this Society was convinced that little could be done towards the conversion of the Jews with- 492 JEWS. out missionaries and editions of the Bible and other boolis adapted to their religious state. Accordingly, in 1821, a seminary tor the in- struction of missionaries to the Jews was opened, and shortly afterwards an edition of the Hebrew Scriptures was published. Sub- sequently, the Scriptures were issued in Judeo- Polish for the Polish Jews, and in Syriac for the Chasidim and Cabalistic Jews. In 1840, the Hebrew College was established for the instruction of missionary candidates in the branches of learning requisite to promote the efficieucy of their missions. Prom this college have gone forth many converted Israelites as missionaries, not only in connection with the London Society, but also other societies. This Society has at the present time 31 mis- sion stations in Holland, Frankfort-on-the- Maine, Poland, Jerusalem, Pozen, Rhine Dis- trict, Strasburg, Prance, Kouigsburg, Danzig, Smyrna, North Africa, London, Berlin, Prus- sia, Coustantipole, Safet, Beyrut, Sweden, Bagdad, Bucharest, Salonica, Breslau, Jassy, Adrianople. The number of missionaries is 78. Of this number, 59 ajpe converted Israel- ites. Since the year 1820, there have been distributed among the Jews by the agents and missionaries of this Society — Hebrew Old Testament copies, 61,620 ; Hebrew portions of Old Testament, 167,034; Hebrew New Testaments, 55,745 ; Hebrew prayers of the Church of England, 4,471 ; tracts and publi- cations of diverse languages, 1,039,665. The Society has 20 schools, in which there have been taught since the year 1827, children of Hebrew parentage, 9,244. Since the Socie- ty's organization, there have been ordained under its auspices, 50 clergymen who were converted Israelites, the majority of whom are now laboring as stated pastors over Christian congregations. It is almost impossible to state with approximate certainty the number of conversions that have been made in con- nection with this Society. The Society avows its object to be not to baptize Jews, but to promote Christianity among them ; and hence a return of baptisms can form no criterion of the number really converted, for the Jews are generally but temporary residents in the towns where they receive instruction, while only a small proportion of those instructed by the missionary are baptized by him, and the vast majority of the proselytes connect themselves with the Christian Church, unreported by the missionary. The following is the most authen- tic estimate we have seen of converts through missionary efforts. In Germany, during the last 20 years, 5,000 ; Eussia, 3,000 ; London, 2,000 ; in other countries of Europe, 1,500 ; making, through the operations of the London Society, either directly or indirectly, 11,500. It should be remembered here, for the benefit of certain classes of American readers, that the London Society has always been com- posed of the evangelical strength of the Church of England. There are found among its principal managers the following names : Burgess, Eyder, Wilberforce, Simeon, Basil Wood, Saunders, Hawtrey, Way, Marsh, Grim- shawe, Bickersteth, Stewart, Cunningham, McCaul, McNeile. Consequently the mission- aries of the Society have been selected gener- ally with a strict regard to their evangelical views and piety. The manner of conducting the work of missions may be seen by the fol- lowing extract. Speaking of Poland, where there are two millions of Jews of the most or- thodox stamp, a writer says : " A great work was thus begun in Poland in 1821. Public preaching, private discussions, dailj' conversa- tion respecting the character and coming of the Messiah, and the fulfilment of the prophe- cies in him ; the circulation of the Hebrew Scriptures, and the Scriptures in the Judeo- Polish dialect. All these means are owned and blessed of God among the numerous descend- ants of Abraham in that country." Again, "A great extent of the kingdom of Poland has been traversed every year, and the sound of the Gospel has penetrated into almost every nook and corner of the land, and the seed thus sown has taken root in the hearts of many Israel- ites." The annual income of this Society is about $150,000. The London Society is by priority of exist- ence, and in the magnitude of its operations, the leading Jewish mission society of Christen- dom. It takes rank among the great mission- ary enterprises of the day among the heathen, and is equally successful under the influence of the Divine Spirit in bringing souls to Christ. The British Society for the Propagation of the Gospel among tlie Jews. — This Society is located in London and is mainly composed of the various denominations of dissenting churches in Eng- land, and supported by them. It was founded in 1842. Its object is to propagate the Gos- pel among the Jews by means of missionaries and colporteurs, who are directed to preach, teach, and visit the Jews, and distribute Bibles, books, and tracts among them. Its first en- deavors were among the Jews resident in Great Britain, with a population of 30,000. Subse- quently it extended its operations to foreign parts. The society has now in its employ 24 missionaries, mostly converted Jews, located in the following places, besides the different localities in England, at Tunis, in Northern Africa, at Gibraltar, at one of the gates of the Holy Land, at Frankfort, in Paris, in Lyons, in Wurtemburg, and in Breslau. It supports one female agent, who has under her charge 60 Jewesses, whom she instructs in the Sacred Scriptures. For about seven years the society sustained a Hebrew Mission College, to pre- pare young men for the missionary work among the Jews. Eleven of the graduates, converted Jews, are now missionaries of the society, while others have become missionaries of other so- cieties. JEWS. 493 The number of converts made through the operations of the society is 100. Its annual income is about $20,000, the larger proportion of which is the fruit of female piety and devot- edness. Missions to the Jews of the Free Church of Scotland, and other Presbyterian bodies in Great Britain. — The mission to the Jews of the Free Church of Scotland is not conducted by a vol- untary society, but is one of the departments of the general missionary work in which that church is engaged. It was originated before the division took place in the Church of Scot> land. A deputation was sent to the East to make inquiry into the religious condition of the Jews, in 1839. The result was the estab- lishment of Jewish Missions at Pesth, Hun- gary, and Jassy Moldavia. In 1841 the Presby- terian church in the north of Ireland establish- ed a mission at Damascus, and about the same time the English Presbyterian Synod located one at Corfu. At the time of the memorable disruption, it was found that those clergymen that left the established church were the friends of Jewish missions, whose majority was so large that the missions already established easily . passed over into the hands of the Free Church. About this time, a great revival among the Jews took place at Pesth. Hundreds, and many Jews of distinction, were converted to Christianity. This mission was interrupted by the revolution in Hungary, and nearly annihi- lated by the despotic decrees of the Austrian government. The established missionary sta- tions and number of missionaries are as fol- lows : Pesth, a teacher and a school of 300 scholars ; Breslau, one missionary and wife aid- ed by Jewish converts. Constantinople, three male and three female missionaries, one female teacher, a colporteur, and four Jewish teachers, in all eleven laborers. Amsterdam, two mission- aries, four teachers in the college, with 16 scholars. The number of converts is not known. The income of the church devoted to this branch of missionary labor was in 1854 about $36,000. The Scottish Society for the Conversion of Is- rael. — This society is composed of different denominations. It was organized in 1845. Mission stations were established at Hamburg, Altona, and Algiers. The number of mission- aries is two. A number of Jews have been converted. Besides these general efforts, many local so- cieties have, from time to time, been insti- tuted on the Continent of Europe, for the con- version of the Jews. Amekican Missions to the Jews. — The at- tention of American Christians has also been attracted to the Jews, and many efforts have been put forth with varied success. In 1832, Eev. W. J. SchaufBer settled in Constantino- ple. He had been preceded by Dr. "Wolfe ; but little or nothing was accomplished by him. Mr. Schauffler labored alone, with extremely limited means. His efforts were mainly do- voted to the preparation of an edition of tho Scriptures (O.T.) in Hebrew-Spanish, and Hebrew. In this he was aided by the Ameri- can Bible Society. He also publisliod an edi- tion of the Psalms, and two editions of tho Pentateuch, in the same language. These publications he distributed among the Jews. He is now engaged in printing, under the aus- pices of the A. B. C. P. M., a Hebrew, and Hebrew-Spanish Lexicon, to accompany the Old Testament. Besides aiding Mr. SchaufHer, the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions have sent two missionaries to the Jews at Salonica and Constantinople. The Reformed Presbyterian Church in the United States has sent two missionaries to tha Jews at Salonica and Damascus. The Camp- bellite Baptists have a mission station at Jeru- salem. The Presbyterian Board of Foreign Missions has under its care three missionarioa to the Jews in Baltimore, Md. and New York. The labors of these missionaries are divided between Germans and Jews. Two places of worship have been opened, which are frequented on Sunday, by a promiscuous congregation of German population. A few individuals have been baptized by one of the missionaries. The American Society for Meliorating the Condition of the Jews. — This society was organ- ized in 1820. Its fundamental idea was, the temporal relief of persecuted converts from abroad. It aimed to afford an asylum for such Jews, as believing in the Christian reli- gion, dared not profess their faith for fear of persecution from their kindred. From repre- sentations made to them, the whole American Christian community became deeply interested in the persecuted converts in Europe. Con- siderable sums of money wore raised, which were devoted to the purchase and furnishing of an establishment for this purpose. But either because there were no converts disposed or because no provision was made to enable them to emigrate, no colony of converts wag ever fully organized, for want of subjects. To realize the idea started with, a number of dif- ferent experiments were tried, all of which proved abortive. It was in 1849 that a purely missionary work among the Jews in the United States was projected on a grand scale. Although the society had employed mission- aries to the Jews previously, yet its purposes were not well defined, nor its plans matured until this time. The society retaining its bap- tized title, so changed its constitution as to admit of a grand missionary enterprize among the Jews. The field upon examination ia found to be an extensive one, at the present time. In 1851 there were found on the syna- gogues' rolls, in the United States, according to a Jewish publication, 60,000 males, from thirteen years and upward. The number of females being about equal to that of the males, 494 JACOBITES— JASSORE. not including any under thirteen years, would make the religions portion of the Jewish po- pulation in the country, 120,000. Add to this the thousands of Jews that are traveling through the country, and those who have not entered their names on the rolls, together with all the children under thirteen, and we shall have a Jewish population of 150,000 souls. The society aims to accomplish its work by the distribution of the Scriptures in Hebrew, German and French ; of tracts suitable to their religious state ; and books which have a bearing upon the question of the Messiahship of Jesus of Nazareth. The character of the society's operations is that of an itinerancy. It baptizes no converts, but prepares them for that ordinance, and leaves the responsibility of a public profession of faith with pastors of churches ; hence the society can never know the amount of fruits resulting from the culti- vation of this field. During the year 1854, the society supported 10 regular missionaries and 7 colporteurs, who labored among the Jews in forty cities and large towns in different parts of the country. It also delegated an agent to Palestine, on a mission of inquiry as to what could be done there in agriculture among the Jews, with a view to reach them with the Gospel. During this same year, 29 converts were reported as the results of the society's labors. The in- come of the society for the same year was about $14,500. The whole number of con- verts reported as the results of the missionary operations of the society since 1849, were 59 Jews. GENERAL SDMMART. Number of Jews in the world, *' " now comprising a missionary field, " of Missionary stations, . " " Missionaries, about " " Missionaries, converted about " " Conyerted Jews, clergymen, (be- sides) ..... " " Hebrew children taught in Mis- sion schools, .... " " Converts during the last 50 years, " " " now in the church (in 1854) Amount expended on all the Mission stations, Proportion of converts to the whole population, " converts to Jews, that are acces- sible, *' clergymen to the number of con- verts, , . . , , 1 to 60 Rev. B. R. McGregor. JACOBITES: A sect of Christians in Syria and Mesopotamia, so called either from Jacob, a Syrian, who lived in the reign of the emperor Mauritius, or from one Jacob, a monk, who flourished in the year 550. They are of two sects, one following the rites of the Latin church, and the other continuing separate from Rome. There is also a division among the latter, who have two rival patriarchs. They number about thirty or forty thousand families in Syria and Mesopotamia. They hold but one nature in Christ. With respect to purgatory and prayers for the dead, they Jews. 14,000,000 6,000,000 116 200 .200 12,000 20,000 16,000 $160,000 1 to 700 1 to 333 hold with the Greeks and other Eastern Chris- tians. They use unleavened bread at the euchar rist, reject confession, and practice circumcision before baptism. — (See Copts.) JACKMEL : A town in Hayti, contain- ing a population of about 10,000, surrounded by a district containing 60,000 more. A sta- tion of the Baptist Missionary Society. JAFFA : "The ancient Joppa. It is the principal port of Judea, and the only point of communication which David and Solomon had with the Mediterranean. It is a station of the London Jews' Society. JAFFNA : A seaport town, near the north- ern extremity of the island of Ceylon, capital of the district of Jaffiiapatam. Population about 8000. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. JAIPUR : A city in Upper Assam, and formerly a station of the American Baptist Mission. JAINS : A remarkable sect, scattered throughout India, but nowhere comparatively numerous, except in South Canara, where Jain temples still remain in a state of tolerable per- fection. Their temples are of two sorts : one covered with a roof, named Biuity ; the other, an open area, called Betta, which signifies a hill. In the Betta temples, the only image of a saint is that of Gornuta Roya, said, when on earth, to have been a powerful king. The word Jain signifies a person who has renounced the ordinary modes of thinking and living among mankind. The Jains assert that they have preserved the true and primitive religion ; and say that the Brahmins have swerved from all the ancient religious maxims of their an- cestors ; and that, laying aside the venerable traditions of their masters, they have substi- tuted in the place a monstrous combination. The Vedas, the eighteen Puranas, the Tri- murti, the Avataras of Vishnu, the Lingam, the worship of the cow and other animals, and of sensible objects, the sacrifice of the Yojna, are all rejected by the Jains, who hold them to be a mass of abominations, innovations, and corruptions of the true primitive religion. The Jains are frequently confounded with the wor- shipers of Buddha ; and their tenets have cer- tainly, in many points, a strong resemblance to those taught in Ava by the adherents of Buddha. — Hook's Year Book of Missions. JALNA : A city of Hindostan, 120 miles N.W. of Ahmednuggur, and 300 miles from Bombay. It is situated in the territories of the Nizam, or Mohammedan prince, who has nominally an independent government over a territory of 95,000 square miles. It was oc- cupied as a station of the American Board in 1837 ; and belongs to the Ahmednuggur mis- sion. JAMAICA : See West Indies. JASSORE : A town on the Ganges, 62 miles N. .of Calcutta. The English Baptists commenced a mission here in 1800. JAUNPUE— KADATCHAPOEAM. 493 JAUNPUE : The capital of a district of the same name, in Northern Hindostan, about 40 miles north-west of Benares. It is a star don of the Church Missionary Society. JAVA : See Indian Archipelago. JERUSALEM: See Oriental Christians, Jews. JBEEMIB : A station of the Wesleyans, in Hayti. JESSOEE : Capital of a district of the same name, 62 miles N. B. of Calcutta. A station of the Baptist Missionary Society. JESUITS : The Society of Jesus, one of the most celebrated monastic orders of the Romish Church, founded in the year 1540, by Ignatius Loyola. — (See Church of Rome and Europe.) JILOLO : One of the Molucca Islands in the Indian Archipelago. JOONEER : A town in the province of Arungabad, Hindostan, about 48 miles from Poona. The fort has seven gates of masonry, one within the other, and contains the ruins of many Mohammedan tombs and Hindoo exca- vations. About a mile south of Jooneer, are numerous excavations and cave temples, the sculptures of which prove them to be of Jain origin. JUGGERNAUT : A celebrated place of Hindoo worship, in the district of Cuttack, on the sea-coast of Orissa. It stands close to the sea-shore, a few miles north-east of the Chil- ka lake, and immediately adjacent to the town of Pursottom. The town and temple are sur rounded with low sand-hills, and the surround- ing country is very sterile. The idol is a carved block of wood, with a frightful visage, painted black, with a distended mouth of a bloody color. On festival days, the throne of the idol is placed upon a stupendous movable tower, 60 feet high, resting on wheels, which indent the ground deeply as they turn slowly under the ponderous machine. He is accom- panied with two other idols, his brother Bala- ram, and his sister Shubudra, of a white and yellow color, each on a separate tower, and eitting upon thrones of nearly an equal height. Attached to the principal tower are six ropes, of the length and size of a ship's cable, by which the people draw it along. The prieste and attendants are stationed around the throne, on the car ; and occasionally address the worshipers in libidinous songs and ges- tures. Both the walls of the temple and the sides of the car are covered with the most in- decent emblems, in large and durable sculp- ture. Obscenity and blood are the character- istics of the idol's worship. As the tower moves along, devotees, throwing themselves under its wheels, are crushed to death ; and euch acts are hailed by the acclamations of the multitude, as the most acceptable sac- rifices. The scenes which occur at the tem- ple Tis acts of worship, are too indecent to be described. A number of sacred bulls are kept in > the place, and fed with vege- tables from the hands of the pilgrims. In the temple, also, is preserved what is regarded aa a bone of Krishna, considered a most sacred relic. The temple of Juggernaut is esteemed the most sacred of all the religious establish- ments of the Hindoos ; and the concourse of pilgrims by which it is annually visited is immense, particularly in March, when the Dole Jattrah takes place, and in July, when the Euth Jattrah is celebrated. Dr. Carey was of the opinion that, at the lowest calcula- tion, 1,200,000 attend every year, of whom an incredible portion die by the way, from want, fatigue, or disease. At 50 miles distance, the approach to the spot is known by the quantity of human bones which are strewed by the way. Mr. Sterling, in his " Account of Orissa," gives the following description of the grand procession of the idol : " On the appointed day, after various prayers and ceremonies, the images are brought from their throne to the outside of the Lion-gate, not with decency and reverence, but a cord being fastened round their necks, they are dragged by the priests down the steps and through the mud, while others keep their figures erect, and help their movements by shoving from behind, in the most indifferent and unceremonious manner. Thus the monstrous idols go, rocking and pitching along, through the crowd, until they reach the cars, which they are made to ascend by a similar process, up an inclined platform, reaching from the stage of the machine to the ground. On the other hand, a powerful senti- ment of religious enthusiasm pervades the admiring multitude of pilgrims, when the im- ages first make their appearance through the ga,te. They welcome them with shouts and cries ; and when the monster Juggernaut, the most hideous of all, is dragged forth, the last in order, the air is rent with acclamations. After the images have been safely lodged in their vehicles, a box is brought forth, contain- ing the golden or gilded feet, hands, and ears, of the great idol, which are fixed on the proper parts with due ceremony, and a scarlet scarf is carefully arranged round the lower part of the body, or pedestal. The joy and shouts of the crowd, on the first movement of the cars, the creaking sound of the wheels, as these ponder- ous machines roll along, the clatter of hun- dreds of harsh-sounding instruments, and the general appearance of such an immense mass of human beings, produce an astounding CEIcCTJ. JU-JU, or JEW- JEW : A charm ; a fe- tish. (_See Africa, West.) JUN IN : In Western India, about 70 miles east of Bombay. It has 3,000 houses, and about 25,000 inhabitants, and is a station of the Church Missionary Society. KADATCHAPOEAM : A station of the Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly district, India. 4:96 KAPFRARIA— KAILTJA. K AFFRARIA, or Eaffreland, extends from the Keiskamma river, (toe Kei, aocordiug to the late arrangement,) which separates it from Cape Colony, to an undefined line somewhere on the south of Delagoa Bay. Its extent is not exactly ascertained. Its western boundary is supposed to be near the source of the Orange river, which flows through a vast extent of country into the Atlantic Ocean, and the Ma- poota, which empties itself into Delagoa Bay. KAFPRES : The appellation of Kaffre, which signifies unbeliever, was originally given, by the Moorish navigators of the Indian Ocean to the inhabitants of the south-eastern coast of Africa, and was borrowed from them by the Portuguese. Afterwards, when the Dutch colonists came in contact with the most south- ern tribe of the Kaffres, the Koosas or Amako- sa, the Moorish name was given to them ex- clusively ; and in this restricted sense it is gen- erally used by the Dutch and English colo- nists. It is, however, well ascertained that not only the tribes commonly called Kaffres, but the Tambookies, Mambookies, Zulus, Dama- ras, the inhabitants of Delagoa Bay, Mozam- bique, and the numerous Bechuana tribes, who occupy the interior of the continent to an ex- tent yet uuexplored, are but subdivisions of one great family, allied in language, customs, and mode of life. The Bechuana dialect, which prevails universally among the interior tribes, so far as they have been visited, varies but slightly from that of the Damaras, and of the natives of Delagoa Bay ; and the Amakosa is a dialect of the same language. The natives of the Comoro Islands and the aboriginal tribes of Madagascar also speak a dialect intimately allied to those of Kaffraria and Mozambique. This word is variously spelled, Kaffre, Kaffir, Kafir, and Caffre. Which is the more proper it is not easy to determine. We have followed the Encyclopedia Britannica, on the ground that such a standard work would be most likely to fix and settle the orthography. Government. — The ancient government of the Kaffre tribes is feudal : an aristocracy of chiefs, acknowledging the supremacy of the sovereign, but except on extraordinary occar sions, acting independently of him. Bach tribe is divided into kraals or hamlets, each of which has its petty chief. The general chief is the sovereign of the nation, and in a council of chiefs is very powerful, and is looked upon by all the nobles and people with unbounded respect. The People. — In personal appearance, the Kaffres are a remarkably fine race of men. Their noble figures and power of limb ; their lofty stature and graceful deportment, have drawn the attention and excited the admira- tion of travelers. Their color is dark brown, mixed with a warmer tint of yellow. Their hair is black and woolly, but not the woolli- ness of the Negro. Their faces approach the European model. They wear no clothing but a cloak of skin. In disposition, they are cheer- ful, frank, good-natured, and intelligent. They are a pastoral people, and their flocks and herds constitute their chief car3. Religious and Moral Condition. — The Kaffres have no national religion. They have onl^ a few unmeaning rites and superstitions, which may be the ruins of some forgotten creed. They practice circumcision, abhor swine's flesh and fish, and have a reverential fear of serpents, which may suggest their eastern ori- gin. Mr. Moffat states that there is, with them, an entire absence of theological ideas. The venerable Dr. Vanderkemp, the first mis- sionary among them, says, " If by religion we mean reverence for God, or the external action by which that reverence is expressed, I never could perceive that they had any religion, nor any idea of the existence of God." This he said with reference to them as a nation, for indi- viduals among them had some notions of God, which they had acquired from those who had associated with white people. And, as proof of this, he said they had no word in their lan- guage to express the idea of a Supreme Being. Mr. Moffat adds his testimony to the same fact, of which he says he became convinced in oppo- sition to his preconceived and cherished opin- ions, both by the declarations of the untutored natives themselves, and the accounts given by the native Christians of their former state, to illustrate which he relates a number of inte- resting conversations and anecdotes. But, although they appear to possess no just spirit- ual ideas, or to have any true conception of a future state, u, belief in witchcraft holds the same terrible sway over them as in other Afri- can tribes. So deplorably does this supersti- tious dread of the sorcerer's art prevail among them that they never attribute the death of their people to natural causes. If a Kaffre should die of extreme old age, they would attri- bute his death to witchcraft, and wreak their vengeance on some poor innocent creature as the witch. But in those portions of their country which have come under British autho- rity, these cruelties have been suppressed by law. Polygamy is also universal among the Kaffre tribes. The various tribes of the Kaffre family are estimated by Rev. J. J. Freeman, Secretary of the London Missionary Society, at 2,000,000, spread from the eastern frontier of Cape Colo- ny to beyond Delagoa Bay, and theu across the whole continent, without break, to the Atlantic, in latitude 20°. — Condafs Dictionary of Geography; Wrongs of the Kaffre Nation, by Justus ; A Tour in South Africa, by Rev. J. J. Freeman; Moffat's Southern Africa; Philip's Researches in Southern Africa. (For Missions among the Kaffres, see Africa, Southern.) KAHUKU : A station of the American Board on the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. KAILUA : The first station occupied by the American Board at the Sandwich Islands, KAITOTEHE— EHAEPUT. 497 situated about the centre of the eastern coast of Hawaii. KAITOTEHB : A station of the Church Missionary Society in New Zealand. KAIKOHI : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand. KAIPARA : A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society on the western coast of New Zealand, celebrated for a large muscle, measuring 11 to 13 inches, found there in great abundance. KAITAT : The most northern station of the Church Missionary Society in New Zea- land. It lies under a fine wooded range of hills, having on the east a vast plain, with a, dark forest in the middle, extending to the flat, marshy estuary of the Awarua river, ending in the Sandy Bay ; to the northward a bright line of sand marks the district of Muriwenua, which reaches to the North Cape : on the westward the wooded range of Maungu Tanew- ha bridges the whole inland country between Kaitai and Waimate. KALUAAHA : A station of the Amer- ican Board on the island of Molokai. KALIFF : See Caiijf. KAMA STONE : A station of the Wes- leyans in South Africa, near Buffalo's Vleij. KAMBEL : A Burman village near Ran- goon and an out-station of the Am. Baptist Mission at Rangoon. KANTHA : A Karen village in the dis- trict of Tavoy, Burmah, and an out-station of Am. Baptist Mission at Tavoy. KANEOHE : A station of the American Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. KANDY: In Ceylon, about 90 miles N. E. of Colombo. It is surrounded' by hills and mountains, and was anciently the capital of an independent kingdom of the same name. The town itself has about 3000 people, but in the neighboring highlands there is a population of 200,000. It is a station of the Church and Baptist Societies. KAPITI : An island of New J^aland, in Cook's straits, whose chief sent his sons 500 miles for a missionary. The whole island had embraced Christianity, by the labors of one native, who had gone there of his own accord. KAEAIvGAN: Formerly a station of the American Board in Borneo. KARENS : An interesting race of abori- ginal inhabitants of the mountainous regions of the southern and eastern portions of Bur- mah Proper, and all parts of the Tenasserim provinces, extending into the western portions of Siam, and thence northward among the Shyans. It is impossible to form a satisfac- tory estimate of their numbers. In the pro- vince of Tavoy a British census makes the number 2500. Around Maulmain and Ran- goon there are perhaps 20,000 more. In Siam and Laos, there are probably 10,000, making in all, about 30,000. They are a quiet and intelligent people, living by agriculture, | i2 and their government is patriarchal. They have received the Gospel with great readiness, and among them the missions of the American Baptists have met with wonderful success. (See Burmah.) KAT RIVER : A district in South Africa, on the borders of Kaffraria, where the Lon- don Missionary Society have a station at Philipton, with 13 oul^stations on Kat River, and four in Tambookee land. The population consists chiefly of liberated Hottentots, living in 50 or 60 locations. KAUAI : One of the Sandwich Islands group, about 75 miles north-west of Oahu. It is 46 miles in length and 23 in breadth, moun- tainous, and of romantic appearance. K AUKAUA : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand. It stands on a plain immediately adjoining a mountain. The Kaukaua district extends from Opotiki in the Bay of Plenty to Waipiro in Open Bay. KAU : A district in the south of the island of Hawaii, where is a station of the American Board. KAWHIA : A station of the Wesleyana on the west coast of New Zealand. KEALAKEKU A : A station of the Amer- ican Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the north-west coast of Hawaii. KEALIA : A station of the American Board on Hawaii, Sandwich Islands. KEISKAMMA: A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society in Kafireland, South Africa. KEMEES : A tribe inhabiting the moun- tains of Burmah, in many of their habits re- sembling the Karens. KEMMENDINE : A Karen village near Rangoon ; a station of the American Baptist Mission at Rangoon. KENT : Town of liberated Africans, in th« parish of St. Edward, at Cape Shilling, Sier- ra Leone, West Africa, about 40 miles south of Freetown — station of the Church Mission- ary Society. KERIKERI: A station of the Church Missionary Society in New Zealand. KH AMIESBERG : A station of the Wes- leyan Missionary Society in Little Namaqua- land. South Africa. KHAMTIS : One of the races occupying the country of A.=!sam, to whom the missionac ries of the American Baptist Missionary Union have preached. KHAN : In Asia, a governor, a prince, a king. Also, an inn. KHARI : A station of the Bantist Mis- sionary Society in Bengal. KHARPUT : Prospectively a station of the American Board among the Armenians! It is in Northern Mesopotamia, on an extend^ ed, well-cultivated, and beautiful plain, having a delighti'ul climate ; 366 villages on the plain, with an Armenian population, including that of the city, of at least 100,000 souls. 4&8 KHUNDITA— LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. KHUNDITA : A station of the General Baptists in Orissa, about 200 miles south from Calcutta. It is surrounded by populous villages, and not far from the large town of Jageepore. KING WILLIAM'S TOWN : A station of the London ilissionary Society, on the Buf- falo river. South Africa. KING WILL'S TOWN : A station of the American Presbyterian Board in West Africa. KINGSTON : 'Che capital of the Island of St. Vincent, W. I., and a station of the Wes- leyau Missionary Society. Pop. 8,000. It is situated on the south-west side of the island, and stretches along the sea-shore, the moun- tains gradually rising behind in the form of an amphitheatre, to a considerable height. KIOSK : In Turkey, a summer-house. KIRKWOOD : Station of the United Scotch Presbyterian Church in Tambookit- land. South Africa, on the river Ixhouse. KISSOR : One of the Banda Islands, a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- pelago. KISSET : Town of liberated Africans, and station of the Church Missionary Society, in the Biver District, Sierra Leone, West Africa, about three miles east of Freetown, on the Sierra river. KLAAS VOOK'S RIVER : A station of the London Missionary Society in Little Na- maqualand. South Africa. KNAPP'S HOPE: A station of the London Missionary Society, among the Kaf fres in South Africa. KOHALA : A station of the American Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the north- east coast of Hawaii. KOKFONTEIN : A station of the Rhen- ish Missionary Society in Little Namaqua, South Africa. KOIjOA : A station of the American Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the island of Kaui. KOLOBENG : The most inland station of the London Missionary Society, in South Africa, situated on the southern borders of the Kalahari desert, 200 miles N. E. by N. from Kuruman. K0MMAG6AS : A station of the Rhen- ish Missionary Society in South Africa, in the north-west corner of Cape Colony. KOTGIIUR: A station of the Church Missionary Society, the capital of a chiefship of the same name, in Himmalaya, India, be- tween the Sutlej and Jumna, on a declivity of the Whartoo Mountain, near the left bank of the Sutlej, at an elevation of 6,634 feet above the level of the sea, on the high road to Thibet. The language of the inhabitants is the same as that of the hilly parts of the Sutlej, KRAAL : A small village in Africa, con- sisting of a few native huts. ifRISHNAGUR: A station of the Church Missionary Society, a little to the north-west of Calcutta. KRISHNAPORE: A station of the Church Missionary Society in Hindostan. KRUSFONTEIN : An out-station of the London Missionary Society in South Africa, situated on a dry and barren piece of land, near the Gamtoos river. KULANGSU, or KOOLANGSOO : A small island near the city of Amoy, China, oc- cupied as a station by the Presbyterian Board. KUMASI, KOOMASSIE, or COOMAS- SIE : The capital of Ashantee. Population, 15,000. A station of the Wesleyan Mission- ary Society. KUMISS : An intoxicating liquor distilled from mare's milk, in use among the Tartars. KURUMAN : A station of the London Missionary Society in Sputh Africa, 630 miles north-east of Cape Town, among the Bechu- anas. KYOUK PHYOO : A town in Arracan, on Ramree Island, where the mission of the American Baptist Missionary Union in Arrar can was first planted. LABRADOR AND GREENLAND : These two countries are grouped together in one article on account of the connection of the missions, particularly those of the United Brethren, which may be considered as in fact but one mission. Greenland. — Greenland is the remotest tract of land in the north, lying between Eiu'ope and America, and is divided into East and West Greenland. The eastern coast ia almost inaccessible, but on the western coast the Danes have erected several factories, for the purpose of carrying on the whale fishery. The want of large timber is in some measure compensated by the drift-wood, which floats in great quantities into the bays and islands, and serves the Europeans for fuel, and the natives for building their houses, tents, and boats. The population of Greenland is estimated at 6,000 ; 150 or 200 of whom are Europeans. They are a remarkably docile and harmless people, and the missionaries have not had to encounter among them any fixed forms of superstition or idolatry. The climate in this country is intensely cold, sometimes so severe that beer, and even brandy, freeze in a room heated by a stove, and yet it ia a remarkable fact, that the bays and the water between the islands are seldom frozen for any length of time, and sometimes they remain open during the whole winter. This is of great advantage to the Greenlanders, as their principal subsistence is derived from fishing. The summer seldom lasts above four months, and even then it frequently snows, and the frost never leaves the ground entirely, as the rays of the sun seldom penetrate above a foot below the surface. Yet the heat in summer is said by the missionaries to be as great as ii any part of England or Germany, though nf LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 499 shorter duration. There is scarce any night in summer, as the sun does not remain more than two or three hours below the horizon, and from the tops of the mountains his beams are reflected even at midnight, so that a person seated in a room may read and write without the aid of a candle. And, though the winter nights are proportionably long, yet the dark- ness is considerably lessened by the stronger light of the moon, the prevalence of the aurora boreahs, and by reflections from the ice and snow. The natives are of a tawny hue and low stature, with very dark or black eyes, and strong, flowing hair. They are clad the whole year round in fur dresses, made of the skins of seals and reindeer, very neatly sewed by the women. Their dwellings are of two kinds : first, tents, which are covered with seal-skins and constitute their summer habitations ; sec- ondly, winter houses, constructed of large stones, the wails being a yard in thickness, and the crevices filled up with earth and sods. The roof is of wood, covered first with sods, and the whole overspread with skins. The inside breadth of such a house is generally 12 feet, but its length varies from 24 to 72 feet, according to the number of inmates. Four, or even ten, families live together in a house, the apartments being separated from each other by screens, made of skins. In every apartment a lamp is kept constantly burning, which lights and heats it, and serves also for cooking. There is not a great regard for cleanliness, and the smell of the train-oil is offensive, but the contentment of the Ureen- landers amid their poverty, and the order and stillness observed among those who dwell to- gether, excite the admiration of Europeans. Notwithstanding the rigors of the climate and the sterility of the soil, the missionaries have succeeded in laying out gardens, in which they grow lettuce, cabbages, radishes, turnips, and a lew other vegetables. However, as they cannot be sown before June, and killing frosts commence again in September, they remain small, but have a fine flavor. Oats aud barley spring up very fast, but never come to matu- rity. The missionaries have introduced the breeding of sheep and goats, though hay is difficult to obtain, as it comes only from the valleys. btveral kinds of animals and fish are ser- viceable to Europeans and natives, both for traffic and food, such as reindeer, hares, foxes, white bears, different descriptions of winged game, aud a great variety of fishes, especially herrings, which, in the beginning of summer, come into the bays in such shoals, that whole boats can be filled with them in a few hours. But the seal is the most important to the Greenlanders, as it furnishes a principal article of food, and also serves for clothing, bedding, covering for boats, tents, and houses, oil lor their lamps, implements for fishing and hunt- ing, and also serves as a medium of traSio, instead of money. MISSIONS. To Hans Egede, a Danish missionary, belongs the honorable title of " Apostle of Greenland " and most cheerfully is this title conceded to him by the Moravian brethren. It was in the year 1721 that this excellent man exchanged his comfortable parsonage at Vogen, in Nor- way, for the bleak, desolate island of Kangek, near the mouth of Baal's river, on the contig- uous mainland, at Goodhab, on the western coast, where he exerted himself with patient and unwearied zeal, for the conversion of the Greenlanders to the faith of Christ. Through ten weary years, with very little apparent suc- cess, he persevered in his labors ; but it ap- peared as if the mission must be abandoned, when a new era began to dawn upon benighted Greenland. In 1831, two baptiz(d Greenland- ers, who had been taken to Denmark by some colonists, gave much interesting information relative to the state of the nation to which they belonged, and the comparative failure of the mission. This being reported to the con- gregation at Herrnhut, a young brother, named Matthew Stach, felt an impulse which he could not resist, to offer himself as a missionary to the Greenland race. His offer was accepted ; and the brethren Christian Stach, cousin of Matthew, and Christian David, the veteran emigrant from Moravia, both common work- ingmen, were commissioned to accompany him. On the 19th of January, 1733, these brethren set out on foot for Copenhagen, a dis- tance of about 500 miles. N'othing can more ' strikingly exhibit the zeal of these devoted servants of Christ, and their truly apostolic spirit, than the manner in which they entered upon their great work. 'J'hey literally obeyed the injunction, " Take nothing for your journey." " There was no need," says one of them, " of much time or ex- pense in our equipment. The congregation consisted chiefly of poor exiles, who hud not much to give, and we ourselves had nothing but the clothes on our backs. We had been used to make shift with little, and did not trou- ble our heads how we should get to Greenland, or how we should live there. The day before our departure a friend in Venice sent a dona- tion, and part of this we received for our jour- ney to Copenhagen. Now we considered our- selves richly provided for, and therefore would take nothing of any one on the road, believing that he who had procured us something for our journey at the very critical moment, would also supply us with everything requisite for accomplishing our purpose, whenever it should be needful." On arriving at Copenhagen they wore kind- ly received by many li-iends ; but their design appeared romantic and ncreasonable, especially as the Dani'-ii mission to Greenland was in a 600 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. low state, and the government was inclined to ■withdraw its colonists altogether. In this state of things a residence on the coast of Greenland was regarded as highly dangerous, both on ac- count of exposure to the cruelty of the natives, and the liability of being left without any reg- ular supply of provisions from Europe. These reports however did not dispirit the mission- aries, who on being asked by Count Pless, " How they intended to maintain themselves in Greenland," answered, " By the labor of our hands, and God's blessing," adding, " that they ■would build a house and cultivate a piece of land, and not be burdensome to any." On being told by the Count that there was no timber fit for building in that country, they said, " If this is the case we will dig a hole in the earth and live there." Astonished at their ardor in the cause in which they had embarked, the Count replied, " No ; you shall not be driv- en to that extremity ; take timber with you and build a house ; accept of these fifty dollars for that purpose." They then committed their cause to Him who orders all things, and on the 10th of April, 1733, they sailed from Copenhagen, and on the 20th of the next mouth they reached the place of their destination, having had a safe and speedy passage. They soon fixed upon a place, to which they afterwards gave the name of New Herrnhut. and here they kneeled down and invoked the blessing of God on themselves and their under taking. Their first labor was to erect a small hut, as a shelter against the inclemency of the climate. A few days after they laid the foun- dations of their proper dwelling, for which they had brought the timber with them from Copen^ hagen. The season was remarkably in ■their favor, the ice and snow having melted a month sooner than usual. Besides their own house they built one after the Greenland manner, for the accommodation of such of the natives as might be induced to come to them for instruc- tion. During the first year of their residence in Greenland the small-pox prevailed to a fright- ful extent, during which the brethren exerted themselves much for the relief of the sick and dying, till at length they were violently attack- ed themselves, and nearly lost the use of their limbs. Having thus passed their first year, they were strengthened naa encouraaeu m 1 1 o4. by the arrival of two oreinren, ueck and Boenish, who came in the character of assist- ants. They now resolved to pursue their work with redoubled ardor, and applied themselves to the study of the language with unremitting dili- gence. Unused though they were to grammars of any kind, they soon conquered the greatest difficulties, so as to be able to hold a short conversation with the natives. They also ob- tained some copies of pieces which Mr. Bgede, the Danish missionary, had translated, such as the Ten Commandments, the Apostles' Creed, and the Lord's Prayer, and embraced every opportunity of reading these to the Greenland ers, with instructions wited to make an im- pression on their hearts, .^y these means they conciliated the esteem of the .'itives, who often visited them, though not withvoit asking for some article that struck their fancy, showing that they were actuated by selfish motives. In 1735 some ships arrived from Europe, but without bringing them supplies of any descrip- tion. They were therefore reduced to great distress, as their whole stock of provisions con- sisted of a barrel and a half of oatmeal. They had been less successful than usual in hunting and fishing, and on attempting to buy seals of the natives, the most exorbitant prices were asked, and in some cases they refused to sell at all. But in the spring of 1736 an unexpected fupply of provisions was sent to them from Holland, and by a person from whom no aid had ever been solicited. The same individual promised them other supplies for the ensuing season. In July, 1736, some Danish ships arrived, bringing with them the mother of Matthew Stacb, a widow about forty-five years of age, with her two daughters, Eosina and Anna, the former twenty-two, and the latter twelve years of age. Their domestic affairs were now con- fided to female hands ; and the two younger being desirous of acting as missionaries among their own sex, applied themselves sedulously and successfully to the study of the Greenland language. Their temporal circumstances were now more comfortable, but they were severely tried with the character and conduct of the savages, who seldom visited them except in quest of victuals, and who were strongly averse to religious con- versation. If a missionary remained with them more than one night, they employed every means to draw him into their dissolute prac- tices, and, failing in this, they endeavored to provoke him by mimicking his reading, pray- ing, and singing, or by interrupting these exer- cises with frightful howling and the deafening noise of drums. On some occasions they even pelted the brethren with stones, destroyed their goods, strove to drive their boat out to sea, and even threatened to assassinate them in their tent. In the midst of all these dangers, however, they were mercifully preserved. Thus five years passed away, and the breth- ren witnessed no abiding fruits of their self- denying labor. They had tilled a soil appar- ently unfit for culture, and in tears had sown the seed on hearts apparently as barren as the coast where they had pitched their tents. But now the Lord was about to bless their work in a new and peculiar manner. "In June, 1738," write the missionaries, "many Southlanders,or people from the south of Green- land, visited us. Brother Beck was at this time translating apart of St. Matthew's Gospel The heathen being very curious to know the con- tents of the book, he read a few sentences, and LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 501 after some conversation with them, asked ■whether they had an immortal soul, and where that soul would go after death. Some said, " Up yonder." Others said, " Down to the abyss." Having rectified their notions on this point, he inquired, "Who made heaven and earth, man, and all other things ? " They re- plied that they did not know, nor had they ever heard, but that it must certainly be some great and mighty being. He then gave them an account of the creation of the world, the fall of man, and his recovery by Christ. In speaking of the redemption of man, the Spirit of God enabled Ijim to enlarge with more than usual energy, on the sufferings and death of the Redeemer, and in the most pathetic manner to exhort his hearers to consider the vast ex- pense at which Jesus had ransomed their souls, and no longer reject the mercy offered them in the (jrospel. He then read to them out of the New Testament the history of our Saviour's agony in the garden. Upon this the Lord opened the heart of one of the company, whose name was Kayarnak, who, stepping up to the table in an earnest manner, exclaimed : " How was that ? tell me that once more, for I do desire to be saved.' These words, the like of which had never be- fore been uttered by a (Treenlander, so pene- trated the soul of Mr. Beck, that with great emotion and enlargement of heart, he gave them a general account of the life and death of our Saviour, and of the scheme of salvation through him. In the mean time the other missionaries who had been abroad on business, returned, and with delight joined their fellow-laborers in tes- tifying of the grace of God in the blood of Jesus Christ. Some of the pagans laid their hands on their mouths, which is their usual cus- tom when struck with astonishment. Others, who did not relish the subject, slunk away secretly, but several requested to be taught to pray, and frequently repeated the expressions used by the missionaries, in order to fix them in their memories. In short, they manifested such an earnest and serious concern for their salvation, as the missionaries had never wit- nessed before, and at going away they promis- ed soon to return, and hear more of this sub- ject. They also promised to tell it to their countrymen. The impression made on Kayarnak was not transient, for the word had taken deep root in his heart. He frequently visited the missionaries, and at length took up his resi- dence with them. He told them that he often felt a monition in his heart to pray, and when they spoke to' him he was often so much affect- ed, that the tears rolled down his cheeks. Considering the general stupidity of the Greenlanders, the missionaries were not a lit- tle surprised at the quickness with which he comprehended every thing which they told him, and at the retention of his memory. He manifested very strong attachment to them, and a constant desire for farther instruction. By means of his conversion, those who lived in the same tent wLtJi him were brought under conviction. Thus before the end of the month three large families came with all their pro- perty, and pitched their tents near the dwell- ing of the missionaries, " in order," as they said, " to hear the joyful news of man's re- demption." They all appeared much affected, and even some who had formerly opposed the word, declared that they would now believe, and winter with the missionaries. Most of them, however, soon went away to hunt rein- deer, but Kayarnak refused to accompany them, lest thereby harm should come to his soul. If enticed to go away, he would reply by some short remark, such as " I will stay with my teachers and hear the word of God, which I have once found sweet to my taste." If they railed at him he held his peace, after he had borne his testimony to the truth in a few serious words. At length he prevailed so far on some of his nearest relatives, that they re- solved to return, and even some other families desired leave to settle near the missionaries. Thus, in October, 1738, when the Green- landers left their tents to move into their win- ter houses, above twenty persons took up their abode near the brethren. This induced them to commence morning and evening devotions, with the two families of Kayarnak, and his relation Simek, besides the reading and ex- pounding of the Scriptures on the Lord's day. Five of these persons, who appeared most serious, they selected, as suitable candidates for baptism, and gave them more frequent in- struction in the truths of salvation. The year 1739 was distinguished in the mis- sion, by the baptism of the first Greenland converts. This interesting and solemn service was performed on Sunday, March 29th. The candidates having, before the whole assembly, given a full account of the ground of their hope, and promised to renounce all heathen customs and superstitions, to remain with their teachers, and walk worthily of the Gospel ; were in fervent prayer, and with imposition of hands, commended to the grace of God, and baptized in the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Ghost. The presence of the Great Head of the Church was felt in the most powerful manner during this transac- tion ; the tears flowed in streams from the eyes of those just baptized, and the spectators were so overcome, that they earnestly desired to be made partakers of the same grace. I'he first fruits of the Greenland nation, who by this rite were publicly ingrafted into the Christian church, were Kayarnak, his wife, his son and his daughter. Scarcely a month had elapsed before the joy occasioned by this event was succeeded by a dark cloud. 'The brother-in-law of Kayar- nak, who also resided with the missionaries. 502 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. was murdered by a nortliern bauditti ; and as Kayariiak and his surviving brother-in-law were threatened with the same fate, the for- mer resolved to retire with his family to the south. The missionaries were sorely tried with the loss of these first converts, besides having to bear the reproach, that though they might baptize Greenland pagans, they could never imbue them with Christianity, nor wean them from their roving habits. But they trusted that these events might be over- ruled by the great Head of the Church, for the furtherance of the Gospel ; and so it proved ; for but a phort time had elapsed, when 21 boats filled with Southlanders arrived at the mission station, with the intelligence that they had met with Kayarnak and his family, who had told them many wonderful things of a religious nature, and had directed them to apply to the brethren for more arnple and satisfactory instructions. Soon after this event 9 families of the Greenlanders returned to the vicinity of the missionary settlement. The missionaries thus found occasion for great thankfulness and encouragement ; but amid all their rejoicings they sighed with un- utterable grief over the absence of Kayarnak, and could not venture to cherish the smallest hope of his return. One day, however, while they were attending the nuptial dinner of Frederic Boenish and Anna Stach, he sudden- ly entered their dwelling, after about a year's absence, and on this occasion they had the sat- isfaction to discover that not only had he re- mained steadfast, but that he had brought with him his brother aud his family, to whom he had communicated the glad news of salvation. About the same time several other Greenland- ers took up their abode at New Herrnhut, and gave unquestionable proofs that they were the subjects of serious and deep convictions ; and in spite of the persecution of their coun- trymen, they continued steadfast, and rendered many important services to the missionaries. Early in 1741, Kayarnak was attacked with a pleurisy, which soon put an end to his earth- ly labors. During his illness he exhibited the utmost patience, and appeared alike regardless of worldly concerns and of bodily sufferings. Observing his relatives bathed in tears, he affectionately said, " Why do you weep on my account ? Are you not aware that when be- lievers die they go to Jesus, and become par- takers of everlasting joy ? As I was the first of our nation who was converted by his grace, he has determined that I should be the first to enter into his presence. He knows how to provide for you in my absence, and if you remain faithful to the end, we shall surely meet again, and rejoice for ever before the throne of God and the Lamb." These words completely tranquilized the minds of his wife and brother, who evinced the most pious re- signation to the bereavement which they were called to endure, and solicited the missionaries to bury him aceording to the rites of 't/ Christian religion, which request was complied with, and he was buried amid the most solemn and impressive services. From this time the missionaries found the field of their labors gra^dually extending. Wherever the new converts went in quest of food, they proclaimed the riches of the grace of Christ, and numbers were led to the Mora- vian settlement, anxious to understand those things more fully. One of the baptized Green- landers informed the missionaries that he had found his countrymen, many leagues to the north, so anxious to be instructed in the things of religion, that they urged him to spend a whole night with them in conversation. Kven one of their angekoks, or necromancers, was brought under such serious impressions, that he wept almost incessantly during two days, and asserted that he had dreamed he was in hell, where he witnessed scenes which it would be utterly impossible to describe. When this general awakening began to subside, the ne- cromancers circulated the most absurd and ridiculous stories about the effects of the Chris- tian religion ; but God frustrated these attacks of the enemy, and the company of believers increased ; so that at the close of 1748 no less than 230 Greenlanders resided at New Herrn- hut, of whom 35 had been baptized in the course of that year. In 1747, the brethren erected their first church, the frame and boards of which had been sent them by friends in Europe, and in this house they frequently had the pleasure of addressing congregations of more than 300 persons. At the same time some commodious storehouses were built, both for the brethren and their converts ; and such excellent regular tions were adopted in the settlement, that the believing Greenlanders not only subsisted com- fortably, but were enabled to extend aid to others in times of scarcity. The winter of 1752, and also the winter fol- lowing, were rendered extremely trying by the dreadful intensity of the cold, which made it nearly impossible to obtain food, and threat- ened a general famine ; and to this was added a contagious distemper, introduced by some Dutch vessels. It carried off great numbers of the inhabitants, and no less than 35 of the converts fell victims to this terrible malady. But these trials furnished to the missionaries the most pleasing evidence of the sincerity of the baptized Greenlanders, who sought in every way to relieve the distressed, even when suffering themselves, and who were enabled to meet death with great peace and composure, " knowing in whom they had believed." In 1758, the congregation at New Herrn- hut having become numerous, the niissionaries felt anxious to establish a new settlement, more contiguous to the Southlanders, many of whom had repeatedly solicited them to come and reside in their part of the country. On LABRADOR AND GREENLWTO. 503 hearing of this, Matthew Stach, one of the first founders of the Greenland mission, but who was now in Europe, resolved on resuming his labors in the proposed new field. Accord- ingly, in May, 1758, he set sail with two as- sistant brethren, and arrived at New Hernn- hut in safety. After resting a few wetits, these three brethren, with four Greenland fam- ilies, proceeded in search of a situation for a new settlement ; and after carefully exploring that part of the country to which their atten- tion had been directed, they fixed upon an island about three miles from the main ocean, and at an equal distance from the Danish fac- tory at Fisher's Bay. This spot did not afford such a prospect of the sea as they could desire, but it possessed three advantages of great im- portance, viz., fresh water, which is never entirely frozen over, a secure harbor for their boats, and a strand which remains open the whole year. Here, therefore, they pitched their tents, and called the place Lichteufels. Owing to the scarcity of building materials, they were likely to suffer, if not to perish, for want of shelter, when, by a most remarkable providence, beams suitable for their purpose were drifted on to the shore. In 1760, tlie brethren at Lichtenfels bap- tized the first heathen family at that place, consisting of a man and his wife, with their son and daughter ; and the congregation was now rapidly increasing. The next year they ob- tained a supply of building materials from Europe, and erected a commodious mission house and a spacious church, in which their , numerous hearers could be accommodated. At New Herrnhut, in the mean time, the cause of Christ prospered, and between 30 and 40 persons were annually admitted to the church by baptism. So remarkably had the lives and health of the Moravian brethren been preserved, that the original founders of the mission still labored with undiminished energy and zeal, having been almost 30 years in the field. But in 1763, the mission sustained a severe loss in the death of li'rederick Boenish, who died at the age of 54, after 29 years of toil on the dreary coast of Greenland. In the winter of 1768, an aged angekok (sorcerer,) who had often heard the Gospel, became alarmed about his future state, renounced his mode of life, confessed that he and the other angekoks had deceived the people, and not only exhorted them to repent and turn to God, but sent mes- sengers to the brethren at New Herrnhut with an earnest solicitation that a missionary might be sent to instruct them in the truths of the Gospel. The request was complied with ; and so extensive was the awakening that took place among the natives, that in little more than twelve months two hundred were admitted into the church by baptism, at the two settlements of New Herrnhut and Lichtenfels. In 1773, Christopher Michael Koeuigseer arrived in Greenland as superintendent of the mission in that country. Having received the advantages of a liberal education, he was well qualified to correct the translations of his pre- decessors ; and he added to their little stock a Greenland hymn-book, a catechism, and some other pieces of a devotional nature. In 1774, two of the brethren sailed from Lichtenfels, in order to form a third settlement in the south of Greenland. After a voyage of about six weeks, they arrived at the island of Onartok, where they were surprised to find, at the mouth of a warm spring, a verdant mea- dow, abounding with different kinds of flow- ers. But it was not a good place for obtain- ing provisions, and they fixed upon a spot a little distant, four miles from Lichtenfels, to which they gave the name of Lichtenau. Here they found an extensive field for their exer- tions, and their labors were crowned with the most pleasing success. Even at first consider- able numbers of the heathen fiocked to hear them preach, so that they were frequently obliged to worship in the open air, previous to the erection of a church ; and during the win- ter of 1775 nearly 200 persons took up their abode with them. Many of these were bap- tized at the end of a few months, and in a few years the believing Greenlanders at Lichtenau exceeded in number those at either of the other settlements. In 1782 Greenland was visited by a pesti- lence more fatal than that before noticed, and within a few months the deaths at New Herrn- hut amounted to 180. The disease broke out later at Lichtenfels and Lichtenau, but it was equally fatal. Among the heathen Green- landers the mortality was still more frightful ; so that the country lost by this visitation nearly half its inhabitants. About the same time the directors of the Greenland Trading Company issued a man- date, enjoining that fewer Greenlanders should reside together in settlements. This led to a partial dispersion of the converts, compelling them to fix their abodes ten or twelve miles from the missionaries, by which means they wera deprived of regular instructions. But it was soon resolved that a native assistant should accompany each party, and by this means, and frequent visits from the missionaries, their spiritual wants were in a measure provided for. In 1801, so great had been the success of the missionaries, the people on the western coast of Greenland had nearly all embraced Christianity, and of the women, the last one that remained in heathenism was baptized in January of this year. During many years fol- lowing the above date the general course of things at the settlements was prosperous, al- though great trials were at times endured, both from siclcness and the want of necessary food. Particularly in 1807, the war between Great Britain and Denmark interrupted com- 50i LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. munication, and supplies from Europe were entirely cat off. The utmost distress followed, and many died of hunger. It was not until 1811 that the British government permitted the Danes to send vessels with provisions to Greenland. In a letter, written July 1818, the excellent Mr. Beck, of Lichtenau. says, " Of the great- est part of our congregation, we may say with confidence, that their words and walk give ua great joy and encouragement. Many of the excluded persons have been led, with weeping and supplication, to confess the error of their ways, and to return to the fold ; and those who remain faithful have been preserved in the conviction, that real happiness and rest are only to be found in Jesus." In the same year Mr. Beck wrote another letter, in which were stated the following interesting particu- lars : " The Southlanders, or those Green- landers who reside south of Cape Farewell, though not quite wild, are ignorant of the things of God, and in reality a heathen race. There is another description of heathen who live on this side of Cape Farewell, and fre- quently join our people at the out-stations. These have acquired some knowledge of the truth, and have abandoned their gross heathen- ish practices." The year 182.3 was rendered remarkable, by the printing and circulation of the first com- plete New Testament in the Greenland lan- guage. The translation was completed in 1821, and sent to England, to be printed by the British and Foreign Bible Society. The manuscript was accompanied with a note, saying, " The Society will judge for themselves of the number of copies which will be wanted, when they are informed that the three congre- gations under the care of the brethren in Green- land consist of 1278 persons, viz., .S,59 at New Herrnhut, 331 at Lichtenfels, and 588 at Lich- tenau." In 1824, a new Moravian settlement was formed at the most soutliern extremity of Greenland, at a place called by the mission- aries Predericksthal. Building materials soon arrived, and a house and chapel were put up, and the people seemed anxious for religicis in- struction ; and within a year twelve persons were Admitted as candidates for baptism. A missionary at this place writes, under date Oct. 182.'5, " Fifty persons have returned hither from Lichtenau, and have been joined by about 200 heathen from this neighborhood ; so that there are not far from 250 Greenlanders living here. This is, indeed, a most encouraging be- ginning, and our little chapel is already much too small. On the 19th of Dec. last, forty can- didates were baptized, and during the winter many more were admitted to the same privi- lege. Since our arrival here in June 1824, 104 heathens have been baptized." Having reached the period when the four Moravian settlements in Greenland were in successful operation, their subsequent history * must be noticed more briefly. The charac- teristic zeal and earnest piety of these brethren have never been known to abate, and from year to year they have met with a degree of encouragement njost cheering to their own hearts, and blessed in its results to the people for whose spiritual good they have toiled through more than 120 years. One of the severest trials which these mis- sionaries have had to endure, has been the repeated and long continued interference of the Danish government, forbidding the con- verted Greenlanders to dwell in communities near the Moravian settlements. It has been impossible in these circumstances to watch over and instruct them in a proper manner, for since the converts have increased and spread over a wider surface, the missionaries and their assistants have not been numerous enough to follow them into the various and often distant places, where they have been compelled to reside. Still, it is a remarkable and most gratifying fact, that the converts have generally been steadfast, and that apos- tacies have been of comparatively rare occur- rence. The injurious and dishonorable conduct of the government, to which they are prompted by commercial cupidi-ty and national jealousy, has led the Moravian brethren to consider the importance of raising up native teachers, who, on giving evidence of piety, might act as assist- ant missionaries in the districts to which the converted natives are driven. Accordingly in 1851 a school was established at New Herrnhut, for training native assist ants, and strong hopes are entertained that this will in a measure repair the evils which an unrighteous coarse of legislation has produced. In their journal for 1852, the missionaries em- ploy the following language of hope and cheerfulness : — " However we may deplore the circum- stances referred to, (the dispersion) we will not lose courage nor quit our post, but we will trust in the help of the Lord. Nor will we be too much disheartened by the order lately re- ceived from the Board of Trade, in Denmark, to baptize and receive no more heathen, but to direct them to the Danish mission. This proposition, however indicative of an unfriend- ly spirit, has reference chiefly to Fredericks- thai, the most southern of our stations, since heathen (probably descendants of the ancient Normans) are found in any considerable num- ber, only on the east coast, a coast almost in- accessible to us on account of the ice. EVom that quarter the congregation at Fredericks- thai has hitherto had a considerable increase, while such as came only on a visit, and could not remain, took with them what they had heard, and assisted in spreading the Gospel." In July, 1852, on the occasion of administer- ing the sacrament of the Lord's Supper at LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 505 Lichtonau, so many of the ouWwellers came together for the enjoyment of this sacred sear son, that the number of communicants amount- ed to 237. The present state of the mission, at the four Moravian settlements in Greenland, will ap- pear from the following TABULAR VIEW. SETTLEMENTS. E 1 i S ll II 1 H 3 a 3 ■S u d •§.2 I7a3 17S8 1774 1824 3 3 3 3 20" 161 268 211 423 Lichtenfels 382 103 493 12 842 2001 Labrador. — On the 17th of May, 1752, four Moravian brethren sailed from Lon- don for Labrador, and on their arrival in a fine bay, the same year, they fixed upon a spot which they intended should be the place of their future settlement. But after the lapse of a few weeks the vessel proceeded farther to the northward, with the design of opening a com- mercial intercourse with the natives of the coast ; acd as the Esquimaux were fearful of venturing on board on account of the guns, a company of five mariners went among them in an unarmed boat, accompanied by Christian Erhardt, a member of the Moravian church, who, in his voyages to Greenland had obtained some knowledge of the language, and sup- posed he could make himself understood on the present occasion. But neither Erhardt nor his companions ever returned ; and as the captain had no means of sending in search of them, he made his way back to the mission- aries, whom he had left behind, and requested their assistance in working the ship back to Europe. As the best of his men had been lost, and there was no other method of accom- plishing the voyage, they acceded to his re- quest, and thus the mission was for a time abandoned. In the spring of 1764, Jens Haven, who had previously labored as a missionary in Green- land, sailed from England, with the hope of conveying the blessings of the Gospel to the inhabitants of Labrador. He did not how- ever proceed farther than Newfoundland, though he found there some Esquimaux chiefs, whom he addressed in language which they could perfectly understand. In May, 1765, Jens Haven sailed again for Labrador, taking with him 0. L. Drachart, formerly one of the Danish missionaries in Greenland, and two other brethren. They now penetrated farther into the interior of the country, and on their return to the coast they had an opportunity of addressing several hun- dreds of the natives, who seemed to listen with interest to the truths of the Gospel. As to the doctrine of depravity, however, they thought it might be true in respect to foreign- ers, but not in respect to themselves. No per- manent settlement was made at this time, al- though land was purchased of the natives for that purpose. In 1769, George III. presented lOO.noO acres of land to the Moravian brethren, to aid them in commencing a mission on the coast of Labrador. A society was also formed in England the same year, in furtherance of this object. In May, 1770, the indefatigable Jens Haven, taking with him nine brethren, sailed again for Labrador, further to explore the coast, and if possible fix on a place for a settle- ment. They purchased a piece of land of the natives for that purpose, and returned again to England to make preparations for entering upon their work. Accordinaly in the spring of 1771, a, company of 14 persons, under the direction of Mr. Haven, proceeded to Labra- dor, and took possession of the spot formerly purchased, and gave it the name of Nain. — This place is on the east coast of Labrador, in N. lat. 55°, and is so intensely cold in winter, that rum placed in the open air freezes like water, and rectified spirits in a short time become as thick as oil. The breth- ren at once commenced the erection of a mission-house, the frame and materials for which they had brought with them from Eng- land, and by great exertions it was completed before the setting in of winter. They could, however, obtain but few of the necessaries of life ; and as much delay was experienced in getting supplies from Bnsland, they be?an to look forward to all the distresses of a famine. But in season to prevent this extremity, and at a moment when they had only two pieces of meat and a few berries left, a vessel arrived from England, bringing the needed relief. The conduct of the Esquimaux towards the missionaries was uniformly friendly, from their first arrival. In former times, no European could have passed a night among these sav- ages without hazarding hisi life ; but now the missionaries, regardless of the inclemency of the season, traveled across the ice and snow to visit them in their winter houses, and were hospitably entertained for several days and nights together. These visits were often re- turned ; and in consequence of the friendly in- tercourse thus opened, the natives not only asked the advice of the brethren in all difficult cases, but even chose them as umpires in their disputes, and invariably submitted to their ar- bitration. They were also in a mood to listen with attention to the preaching of the Word, and at times they seemed to be deeply im- pressed ; still they were savages, habituated to the gratification of the most brutal pas.sions,and always ready with some excuse for their sins. 506 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. In n52, a year after the settlement of the mission, a native named Anauke, was induced to attend upon the instructions of the mission- aries, and although he had been a ferocious and desperate character, he was so much impressed that he came and pitched his teut near the mission house. He removed to his winter house after a few months, but his anxiety con- tinued, and he visited the missionaries again, and spent a few days with them, desiring fui'- ther instruction. From this time the brethren heard nothing of him for more than a year, when his wife came to Nain and stated that An- auke had died, calling on the name of the Lord Jesus. From the time that he was seized with his last sickness he prayed fervently, and ex- pressly stated that he had no wish to live, but desired to depart that he might be with Christ. He would not permit one of the necromancers, called Angekoks, to come near him, but com- mitted himself unreservedly into the hands of the great Physician. After his decease, this person was invariably spoken of by the natives as " the man whom the Saviour took to him- self" As many of the heathen residing in the vicinity of Nain appeared remarkably atten^ tive to the Gospel, and expressed the most profound reverence for the name of Jesus, the brethren resolved to select a few of the most serious, and form them into a class of catechu- mens, in order to prepare them for baptism, and ultimately for helpers in the missionary work. At the same time they resolved upon the erection of a chapel, capable of containing some hundreds of persons, as the apartment in the mission house had become too small to contain the congregation. Okkak. — In the summer of 1775 two of the missionaries, Messrs. Haven and Jensen, set out with the design of commencing a new se1> tlement at a place called Okkak, about a hun- dred and fifty miles north of Nain. They found it to be an eligible spot for a mission, being abundantly furnished with wood and fresh water, contiguous to an excellent haven, and surrounded by a numerous population of heathen. They therefore purchased the land of the natives, and in the spring of 1776 the missionaries took up their residence here and began to preach the glad tidings of salvation to the natives. They met with little success at first, but at the end of three years they had baptized 38 of the natives, besides ten others, who, as catechumens, were receiving partiqular instruction. Hopeilale. — In 1782 the brethren proceeded to form a third settlement, at a place called Hope- dale, some distance to the south of Nain. This was the place reconnoitered by Erhardt and his companions in 1852, but who, instead of accomplishing their wishes, were inhumanly murdered by the Indians. For several years the brethren at this place met with little en- couragement, and were inclined to give over the enterjjrise, when at length the word took effect, and Hopedale became the scene of an awakening which extended to the other settle- ments, and constrained the missionaries to ex- claim, " What hath God wrought ? " In 1796 an epidemic broke out in Labrador, and raged for several months with great sever- ity, carrying off a great number of the natives. It was a source of great trial to the brethren, that some of the converts, even under this ca- lamity, resorted to their old heathenish prac- tices for the purpose of averting the disease. Most of them, however, were soon convinced of their folly and sin, and returned to the mis- sionaries with the most humble confessions. The month of December, 1800, was made painfully memorable by the death of a devoted brother at the Hopedale station. Rev. J. W. Reiman. He went out one morning with the design of procuring some fresh provisions, by shooting, and was never afterwards seen or heard of, although immediate and long-contin- ued search was made for him. At the commencement of 1804 the mission- aries at the several stations in Labrador were much disheartened on account of the little suc- cess that attended their labors. It had long been a subject of regret, that the instructions given to the Esquimaux during the winter, when they resided near the settlements, were forgotten during the summer excursions, when they associated with their heathen countrymen, and relapsed into many of their old practices. In the spring of this year, how.ever, the breth- ren were gratified to find that the converts had been preserved from falling into sin and had also made important advances in knowledge and humility. They appeared unusually se- rious, and a peculiar unction attended their conversation and prayers, and many who had before shown only an outward respect for reli- gion were awakened, and led earnestly to in- quire for the way of salvation. The religious interest, or revival, thus commenced at Hope- dale, soon began to manifest itself at Nain, where it was specially promoted by the remark- able conversion of a young man named Siksi- gak ; his wife had been converted, and he had formed the purpose of putting her away and marrying another who was friendly to his superstitions. Arriving at the house of his mother, who had also become a Christian, just at the season of the evening devotion, he was much struck with what he saw and heard, but still nothing could dissuade him from abandon- ing his wife. The next day a special prayer- meeting was held for his conversion, during which his mother besought the Lord in a spirit of great earnestness, for the conversion and salvation of her son. Almost immediately upon this the young man became convinced of the error of his ways, and was subdued under the power of the Gospel. He exhibited an entire change of spirit and conduct, and boldly proclaimed to his companions at Naii. the preciousness of that word which had proved LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 507 the power of God to his soul. Many others were astonished at this change, and led to con- fess their sins with penitential tears. The in- telligence of these things reached Okkak, and proved the means of a similar awakening there. Even many of the Esquimaux who resided far north of Okkak, hoi, who occasionally passed that way, were struck with astonishment at what they saw and heard, and were led to come and settle , near the missionaries. This work of grace continued several years, bringing in many of the children, as well as the adult na- tives. Early in the summer of 1811 two of the mis- sionaries undertook the perilous task of explor- ing the northern coast, with a view to the formation of a settlement in that quarter. They embarked in a two masted shallop, owned by one of the converts, named Jonathan, who, though a chief of his nation at Hopedale, readily engaged in the arduous service. He was a man of superior understanding and great courage, and when his countrymen represented to him the danger of his undertaking, he re- plied, " When I hear people talk about the danger of being killed, I recollect that the love of Jesus induced him to submit to death for us ; and therefore it would be no great matter if we were to lose our lives in his service, should that be his pleasure concerning us." They proceeded with great difficulty and peril, through regions of ice, to the desert regions west of Cape Chudleigh, where they discovered two places suitable for a missionary settlement. One of these was a verdant spot, overgrown with shrubs, near the mouth of a river, to which they gave the name of George's river, in honor of his Britannic majesty ; and the other was sit>- uated in whiit they called Unity Bay, near the estuary of the Koksoak, or Sand river, which is neariy seven hundred miles distant from Ok- kak. They found the land level and dry, wat- ered by several rivulets, and producing a vari- ety of trees, plants, and flowers. The natives in this region had never before seen a Euro- pean, and were at first rather reserved, but after receiving a few trifling presents they be- came familiar, and not only listened attentively to what their visitors had to say, but expressed a strong desire to have them settle there. After exploring the surrounding country sufficiently, the party started on their return, and reached Okkak in October, having been absent about five months, and performed a voyage of between twelve and thirteen hundred milts. No settle- ment, however, has yet been formed in that region. On the 9th of August, 1820, the missionaries at Nain had the satisfaction of seeing the new ship, called the Harmony, come to anchor in their bay, just fifty years after the first vessel arrived there with fourteen brethren and sis- ters on board. They expressed their joy by hoisting two small flags, and a white one on which some of the sisters had formed the num- ber 50 with a red ribbon, and surrounded it with a wreath of laurel. Their small cannons were also discharged and answered by the guns of the ship, and the Esquimaux fired their mus- kets as long as their powder lasted. Some tunes expressive of thanksgiving wore also played on wind instruments, which, altogether, made a suitable impression on the minds of the converts, and gave them some idea of a jubilee rejoicing. The missionaries explained to them the whole thing, aud after listening with pro- found attention they exclaimed, " Yes ; Jesus is worthy of thanks ! Jesus is worthy of thanks, indeed ! " In further noticing this joyful occasion, the missionaries say, "In the public services of the day, a spirit of joy and thanksgiving pre- vailed throughout the whole congregation, and the baptism of two adults tended greatly to solemnize the festival. We praised the Lord with heart and voice for all the wonders he had wrought in behalf of the mission in Lab- rador, during half a century ; in which he had led, preserved, and blessed us abundantly. His mighty arm had protected us in many dangers, and the preaching of his cross had been attended with power and with the demon- stration of his own Spirit, so that many souls had thereby been brought into his kingdom. An account of the commencement of the mis- sion, translated into the Esquimaux language, was communicated to the congregation, and heard with great attention and astonishment. They were indeed surprised at the recital of what had been done for so many years, with a view to their benefit." The jubilee of the mission was also cele- brated in the other settlements with due solem- nity, and many of the Esquimaux afterwards testified that it had been a most important and blessed season to their souls ; as they had been led to consider more seriously than ever before, what great things the Lord had done for them, in making them acquainted with himself and his glorious salvation. About this time, portions of the New Tes- tament were translated and printed in the Es- quimaux language, a work from which very important benefits appear to have resulted. The following particulars have been given, in illustration of the gratitude which was excited in the minds of the natives, by the kind and repeated donations of the British and Foreign Bible Society. " Several of our Esquimaux at Nain, having been informed of the nature and aim of the Bible Society, began, of their own accord, to collect seal's blubber, by way of making up a small contribution towards the expenses of that society. Some brought whole seals, or half a seal, or pieces, according to their ability. Others brought portions of blubber in the name of their children, request- ing, with the most affecting expressions, that their little off'erings might be accepted. Hav- ing been told that in some pa.'ts of the world, 508 LABEADOR AND GREENLAND. converts from among the heathen, who were poorer than they, had cheerfully contributed their mite towards the furtherance of the Gos- pel, they exclaimed, " How long have we heard the pleasant and comfortable words respecting Jesus Christ, our Saviour, and how many books have we received treating of him, and yet we have never known or considered whence they came. We have, indeed, sometimes observed among ourselves, that so many books freely bestowed upon us must cost a great deal some- where ; but we never knew til) now that even poor people have contributed their little sums for our Instruction and comfort. We are in- deed poor, yet we may occasionally bring Eome blubber, that others who are as ignorant as we were formerly, may receive the same Gospel which has been so sweet to our souls, and may thereby be taught to find the way to Jesus." " By these spontaneous declarations," says the missionary, " a great impression was made upon our people. Each would bring something, when they heard how desirous other nations were to hear the word of God ; and they now begged me to send their contribu- tions to those generous friends wlio printed the Scriptures for them, that more heathen might be presented with a book so much more pre- cious than any thing else in the world." A letter written at Naiu, August 10, 1823, says, " Many are the instances which we might adduce as proofs, that the word of the cross is indeed the power of God unto salvation to all them that hear and believe." Having related many striking facts, he added, " During the last winter we perceived with great gratitude the traces of renewed spiritual life among our dear Esquimaux. The schools and daily wor- ship are well attended, the scholars show an eagerness to learn, and at the examination they all afforded us much pleasure. During the last year three adults and seven children were baptized ; five were admitted to the Lord's Supper ; four were received into the congrega- tion, and one departed this life. The number of inhabitants in this settlement at present is 181." Letters of equal encouragement were written from the other settlements during the same year. The number of inhabitants at Okkak, in 1830, was estimated by the missionaries at 385, of whom 314 were members of the con- gregation. The population at Hopedale, at the same date, consisted of 179 persons, of whom .t6 were communicants, 7 candidates for admission to the Lord's table, 21 baptized, but not yet communicants, and 80 children. In 1829, the congregations in Hopedale and Nain were visited by a malignant disorder, which carried off great numbers of the society. In four weeks upwards of 150 lay ill at Nain, and their situation was deplorable indeed. In many of the tents all the families lay in a help- less state, nor could any one give the other so much as a drop of water. " Our greatest com- fort," says a missionary at this time, " was the state of mind of those who departed this lifa They all declared that they rejoiced at the prospect of soon seeing Him, face to face, who, by his sufferings and death, had redeemed them from the power of sin and the fear of the grave." Hebron. — In 1830 a fourth settlement was formed at a place called Hebron, about 90 miles north of Okkak. It is the most northern station on the coast of Labrador. During this year 500 copies of the Psalms were distributed at the several stations. One of the sorest trials which the mission- aries at this period, and subsequently, had to endure, was the influence exerted on the natives by the Southland traders. By mingling in the society of these unprincipled and mercenary men, the converts were many of them seduced into vicious practices, and led far away from the simplicity of the Gospel. Some of them returned again with penitent confessions, but the pernicious example of these traders has had a sensible effect on the missions. In 1837 the brethren completed the revisal of the Esquimaux version of the prophetic Scriptures, and sent it to England for publica- tion. The year 1848 was one of great joy and thanksgiving to the brethren at Hebron ; for, after years of earnest and apparently fruitless effort, they had the satisfaction of seeing the heathen coming to them, one alter another, till, in the course of a few weeks, 81 had found their way to the settlem.ent, raising the num- ber of souls under the care of the brethren at that place to 336. During this year the Es- quimaux version of the book of Proverbs was lorwarded to the Bible Society in England to be printed. Within the last year or two, new explora^ tions have been made in the north of Labrar dor, and considerable bodies of Esquimaux, speaking a language easily understood, have been found. But as yet no settlement has been Ibrmed in that distant and dreary region. In Labrador, as in Greenland, missionary operations have been attended trom the first with peculiar vicissitudes, both of a joyful and a painful nature. This has resulted, in great measure, from the severity of the climate, which at intervals renders it nearly or quite impossible to obtain food, subjecting the peo- ple to all the horrors of famine, to which is superadded often the ravages of pestilence. But it has happened generally at such times, that the missionaries have had stores from Europe, with which in some measure to relieve the natives, and by this means, and a tender and watchful care of the sick and the dying, the brethren have secured the gratitude and confidence of the people, and gained a more ready access to their hearts and consciences. It has ever been and must be a serious draw- back on these missions also, that the congre- LAC-QUI-PARLE— LEW-OHEW. 509 gations are obliged to spend the warm months away from the settlements, in quest of provi- sions for the winter. They are thus deprived of instructions, and subjected to many tempta- tions. But as a mitigation of this evil it is to be gratefully considered, that in their disper- sion the converts often carry the news of a Saviour to the heathen at a distance, and bring in many to the settlements who otherwise never would have heard of a missionary, or of the way of salvation. On the whole, therefore, while the trials of the missionaries have been great and peculiar, the results of missionary labor in those frozen and inhospitable regions have been happy and encouraging to a remarkable degree. The present state of the missions at the four stations in Labrador, is indicated in the fol- lowing' TABULAE VIKW. SETTLEMENTS. "a 1 i 2 i i '3 1 6 1 1 u Nain 1771 1776 1782 1830 4 4 4 3 84 176 69 75 366 Okkak 410 234 347 Totals 16 394 1357 Re T. E D. Mo OEB. LAC-QUI-PARLE : Once a station of the Am. Bdivd ainimg the Sioux Indians. LAGOS : A large, well-built, and populous town, situated on a small island at the mouth of a lagoon in the Bight of Benin, West Africa, about 36 miles east of Badagry. It is accessi- ble to vessels drawing tfen or eleven feet of water, and has a water communication far into the interior, and for hundreds of miles along the coast. It is a great commanding point, from whence Christianity may go forth into the interior. The coast station of the Yoruba mission of the Church Missionary Society has been removed from Badagry to Lagos. LAHAINA : A town on the Island of Maui (S. I.), which is rapidly increasing in commercial importance. In the year 1844, 300 ships visited its harbor. — A station of the American Board. LAHAINALUNA: Upper Lahaina, a sta- tion of the American Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the north-east of Maui. LABOR : The chief city of the Punjaub, Northern India, a station of the Presbyterian Bv^ard. LA POINTE : A station of the American Board among the Ojibwas. LAUNOESTON : A station of the Wes- leyaii Missionary Society in Van Dieman's Land. LEFAASALELEAGA : A station of the London Missionary Society on the island of Savaii, one oC the Samoaa group. LEGUAN : A beautiful island in the mouth of the Essequibo river, coutaiuing 22 sugar estates. A station of the London Mis- sionary Society. LKICESTEB MOUNTAIN : Station of the Church Missionary Society in the Moun- tain District of Sierra Leone, South Africa, about three miles from Freetown. LEKATLONG : Station of the London Missionary Society in South Africa, on the Hart river, among a branch of the Batlapi nation ; one missionary, 300 communicants. LEONE : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society on the island of Tutuila, one of the Samoan group. LEOPOLD : A town of liberated Africans and station of the Church Missionary Society in the parish of St. Peter, Sierra Leone, W. Africa, a little south of Freetown. LEPA : A station of the Loudon Mis- sionary Society, on the island of Upolu, one of the Samoan group. LE'I'TY : One of the Bauda Islands, a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- pelago. LE ULUMAEGA : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society on the island of Upolu, one of the Samoas. LEW-CHEW, or LOO-CHOO : The king- dom of Lew- Chew consists of the island bear- ing this name, the various small islands lying around it, with the entire Madjicosimah group on the south-west, the whole number being 3(). The island of Lew-chew is about 60 miles long and from 12 to 15 wide ; and it is nearly equi- distant from Japan and China. Coral reefs line the shores ; and in some places they seem to have beeu thrown up by volcanic agency, or to have been raised so as to form ledges along the beach. The climate is one of the most delightful and healthy in this region of the world. The vegetation partakes more of the tropics than the adjacent coasts of China. CUies and Villages. — Napa, or Nafn, lies on the river, the mouth of which is known as Naparkiang ; and it stretches inland from the beach for more than a mile, most of the houses being in view from the anchorage. Shui, or Shudi, is the residence of the court, and is prettily situated on the ridge and side of a hill, about three miles from Napa, the two being connected by a broad paved road, in some places elevated above the marsh with great labor. Shui is a well-built town ; and the stream which runs down the hill, adds greatly to its appearance. The waters are collected into pools and tanks for the convenience of the people, and its banks are connected by stone bridges of great durability ; while the houses are scattered along the steep sides, intermixed with ledges of stone and trees in a most pictu- resque manner. The palace is a collection of large buildings, inclosed and defended by a 610 LEW-CHEW. stone wall of great solidity. The bnildings themselves are of an ordinary description ; but the flights of stone steps, the ornamented tri- une gateways, and the paved court-yards, with detached trees and arbors, exhibit some skill. The streets of Napa and Shui are partly macadamized, with open gutters at their sides ; some of them are wide enough for carriages. The road between these two cities is well paved ; but elsewhere the common highways are rough, stony, and painful to the feet ; and they seem to have had no mending since they were made. The markets are held in the squares and corners ol' the streets, and present only a miserable assortment of the commonest necessaries of life. The villages are often prettily situated ; but all of them exhibit proofs of the poverty and oppression of their inhabitants. The People. — In stature the natives of Lew- chew are below their neighbors ; but they are compactly built and well-proportioned. In general the people are healthy, though their countenances indicate the depressing effect of unremitted labor. The serious aspect of the Lew-chewans strikes a visitor as soon as he lands. Groups of women, with children around, are seen along the highways. The wrinkled, grimmed, and care-worn countenances of these poor creatures otfer a melancholy proof of their toil and exposure, and the low pcsition which they hold in society. The color of the Lew-chewans is a pleasing reddish-olive tint, presenting a lighter or dark- er shade, according to exposure. In general however, it is darker than that of the Chinese Products of the Sod. — The greatest part of the population is engaged in agriculture ; and the fields show abundant evidence of the un- ceasing toil bestowed upon them, in which the women take a large share ; but the productions of Lew-chew are less varied than those of China or Japan. Timber and fuel are sup- plied from the forests in the northern part of the island, among which the camphor and tal- low-tree are found. Swellings. — The arrangement of a Lew- chewan dwelling is very simple, it being fitted only for a warm climate, and so open that in the latitude of 26° north it must often prove an indiflerent shelter. The roof is supported by a double row of posts, on its sides, about four feet apart ; and beams extend across to assist in upholding the roof in the centre. These beams and the rows of joists running across, as well as the inner of the two on the outside, are provided with grooves, in which panels slide, so as to form, when closed, the sides of the house and the division of the rooms. The floor is elevated about two feet above the ground ; and it is usually covered with stuffed mats an inch thick, on which are sometimes spread felt carpets. The space between the outside posts forms a porch, sheltered from the rain. In unpleasant weather sashes, covered with oiled or thin paper, are slid along the in- side grooves, imperfectly supplying the place of glass, and furnishing a twilight to the in- mates, who warm themselves with braziers of charcoal. The porch serves many purposes ; and parts of it are partitioned off' in the rear of the houses ; so that the whole establishment is under one roof, and can be thrown into one room. No chairs or tables are seen in the houses, all persons eating and sleeping upon soft mats. A few low stands are used for writing-desks. The mats and felted carpets harbor an abundance of fleas ; and musquitoes annoy the inmates. But houses of the better sort are cleanly. The houses are usually placed within inclo- sures, the walls of which are six or seven feet high, and surmounted with plants, completely concealing the house. The entrance to each yard is usually at the end of a short lane run- ning up from the street; but no passer-by can look within. Dress. — The dress of the Lew-chewans con- sists of loose robes, not unlike night-gowns, lapping over in front, and secured by a girdle. The capacious bosom thus made is usually pretty well filled with a variety of papers, books, and other articles, so as to give the wearer a corpulent appearance. The feet are protected by grass sandals, fastened by a strap passing between the first and second toe. The Women are always modestly dressed. The men wear two hair-pins of brass or wnite copper to secure their hair, which is done up in a coil on the top of the head, with a bow above the coil, through which the large pin is thrust. Much time is daily spent in arranging and oiling this trosseau. One of the pins has an ornamental end, like a flower, nearly an inch broad, which always points forward. The other is not much unlike a skewer, four or five inches long, and thrust in sideways. Females collect their hair in a knot on the side of the head, where the ends are kept from falling over the shoulders by a skewer. All married women tattoo or color the back of their hands and fingers blue. Neither sex wear any head- dress : but official rank is denoted by an oblong flat>topped cap, covered with red, yellow, pur- ple or variegated silk, the last being the badge of the highest. In rainy, or cold weather, an overcoat of thick cotton, forming a comforta- ble defence, is worn by the gentry. Language. — The language of these islanders is a dialect of the Japanese, differing so great/- ly, however, that the people of the two coun- tries cannot very readily understand each other. Tlu Arts of Life. — Workshops are found in various places, occupying favorable positions near the markets ; and as their fronts are open to the street, all the operations of the workmen can easily be seen. 'J'he mechanical arts are at a low point among the Lew-chewans, judg- ing from these shops, in which one sees tools LEW-CHEW. 511 and manipulations strikingly resembling those of the Ciiinese. Religion. — The religion of the Lew-chewans partakes of that of their two neighbors, from whom they have derived most of their civiliza- tion. They have ancestral worship, the ritual of which is mainly taken from the Chinese ; from whom the adoration paid to Confucius is also derived. The temples are numerous. They are among the best structures in the island, affording lodging-places for travelers within their precincts, as well as dwellings for the priests. The latter possess but little influence iu the government ; but they seem to receive a good support from devotees. Government. — The government is a heredi- tary monarchy ; and the political institutions, like those of China, are founded on the writ- ings of Confucius ; who is highly revered here, as well as in Japan, as a wise and safe guide. The kingdom has been under the sway of the princes of Satzuma for more than two centu- ries. The present hereditary sovereign of the kingdom is a minor, about thirteen years old ; and the administration of affairs is nominally in the hands of an ofBcer called " tsung-li kwan," or general superintendent, usually known as the regent, assisted by three others, called " pu-ching," or treasurers, one for each of the prefectures into which the island is divided. No soldiers or arras of any kind are seen in the streets. The power of the govern- ment seems to be maintained by means of a system of espionage, in which the gentry act as policemen, their duty being to mark every thing which is done by the meanest person. The servile fear which the system has caused in the mind of the lowest beggar, rendering him suspicious of bis neighbors and kindred, stands in lieu of the actual presence of the ofiScer. Foreign Policy. — The Lew-chewans, situated between the powerful empires of China and Japan, have consulted their safety by a sys- tem of strict non-intercourse ; and their gentle disposition has led them to exhibit kindness to all who have been- cast on their shores, or have visited their ports, prompted in a measure too by the conviction that kindness had no re- prisals to fear. For a long time they were able to maintain their independence by pay- ing homage to their neighbors ; but, in 1609, the Prince of Satzuma, who rules in the south- western corner of Kiu-siu, compelled their sovereign to go to his capital, Kagosima, and the subjects to pay him tribute and receive his tax-gatherers. — S. Wells Williams, in Missionary Herald for June, 1854, abridged. MISSION. The kind hospitality of the Lew-Chew peo- ple to British and American vessels which touch at their islands, or were wrecked on their coasts, excited a deep interest in their behalf among the officers of Ihe British navy ; | and between February 1843 and Dec, 1845, more than £1,000 were raised for the purpose of sending the Gospel to them, and £700 more in 1846 ; and a Board of Trustees was appoint- ed to manage the affairs of the mission. Dr. Bettelheim, a converted Jew, a physician, and a learned man, with the sanction of the bishop of London, was sent oiit in Sept. 1845, and arrived at Lew-Chew in January, 1846. He was met on board the vessel which con veyed him by a French Catholic missionary, who greeted him with a cordial welcome. Fearing that permission to settle would be de- nied him, he effected a landing with his wife and his effects, by getting into the native boats that came out to visit the ship. The authorities, however, refused to give him leave to remain, pleading poverty and scarcity of food ; and he was requested to give up his de- sign of stopping, and to embark on the vessel that brought him. But this he declined to do, returning a good present for an answer. After the vessel had sailed, he was invited to go and look at a house intended for his residence, but finding it low and d.imp, he de- clined it, and was afterwards shown to the temple, an old, but spacious and pleasantly situated wooden building, which was offered him on condition that the keeper of the idols should reside in the house, the idols being screened off by a sliding partition ; and ho accepted it. But three guard stations, with five men in each, were arranged near the house, under pretence of protection, but really for espionage. For about a year he was able to carry on missionary operations, maintaining a service in his own house with his servants, and preach- ing to the people as he met them in the streets. Crowds gathered around him wherever he raised his humble pulpit, upon a stone, or on the corner of a street, in the market, in the roads and lanes, or elsewhere. Wherever he . halted, there the passers-by stopped, and all the people in the neighborhood came out to hear him. The stalls were idle, sellers and buyers forgot their trade, while apparently en- gaged in a higher business. " I have seen," says Dr. B., " the coolies lay dow^n their bur- dens and quietly listen ; laborers lean their heads on the handles of their rural tools, and rest in pensive attention ; thoroughfares were obstructed, and roads and open places rendered impassable from the masses of the people crowded in the space around me ; none forbid- ding, none driving them away, much less pre- venting their assembling." But suddenly all was changed. It was re- ported that the king was dead ; but Dr. B. thought it was but a, feint to justify the oflicera in changing their course. Immediately all things assumed a new aspect. On the very day which he supposed to be the day of the king's burial, he was assaulted with stones and sticks in the open road, and his life endangered, llig 512 LIBERIA. appeal to the gOFernment was only met by a denial of the assault. Soon after, the people, who used to crowd around him whenever he went into the street, now ran from him : and whenever he passed through a street, all the shops were closed, and the doors and windows of the houses closed. " First there was a bus- tle, a running here and there, a rattling and clapping of shutters, doors, and windows, as if a devil incarnate had come in their way ; green grocers deserted their stalls, laborers ceased their work, and crews left their boats ; women dragged their children in-doors in such haste and fright as made them scream ont when they saw me again far off. Often the noise, confusion, and bewilderment rose to such a pitch that I was not always free from fear my- self, and almost dreaded to walk out." All his appeals to the government were in- effectual. It seemed to be a concerted, sys- tematic movement on the part of the authori- ties to drive him from the country; and the people, being held under an oppressive despot- ism, were compelled to act according to their orders. This course of incessant annoyance was continued, with increasing rigor up to the time of his writing a letter to Rev. Dr. Peter Parker, of China, which was published at Canton in 18.^0, from which this statement is derived. We learn from recent intelligence that Dr. Bettelheira has succeeded in maintaining his position at Lew-Chew ; and a layman, after laboring seven years in London as a city mis- sionary, has been sent to his assistance. The visit of the American squadron has operated favorably ; and the prospects of the mission are brightening. Three persons have received baptism in Napa ; and another is a candidate for the same privilege at Shuy. An appeal has been issued by the committee having charge of this mission, for the men and the means of a speedy enlargement. " The Lord," it is said, " seems to be preparing an open door for entering Japan ;" and " the ma- chinery and materials for a future mission in that kingdom are in preparation at Lew- Chew." LIBP]RIA : A republic on the western coast of Africa. Its civilized population, consisting of free colored people and emancipated slaves from the United States, and their descendants, native Africans rescued trom slave traders, and a few other natives who have become civilized, may be estimated at about 10,000. Its native population, entitled by treaties to protection and the means of civilization, and to all the privileges of citizenship when civilized, are supposed to be two or three hundred thousand. Government — The government consists of a president and vice-president, elected once in two years, a senate and house of representa- tives, chosen by the people, a judiciary, secre- taries of the necessary departments, and other executive officers, appointed by the president and senate. None but persons of color can hold office, hold land, or be citizens. The territory has been purchased, at variops times, by the American Colonization Society, and the emigrants, with few exceptions, sent out at its expense. The government was ad- ministered at first wholly, and afterwards in part, by officers appointed by that Society, till the growth of the colony and the extent of its commercial relations required the establishment of an independent government, which could form commercial treaties with the several powers of Europe. By advice of the Society, there- fore, the colony proclaimed its independence August 24, 1847 ; and the government, under its present constitution, was organized at the commencement of the succeeding year. It has been recognized by the principal nations of Christendom. Education. — The laws of the republic require a free school in every settlement, and pro- vide for raising money to defray the expense. At present, however, the whole educational establishment, including the primary schools required by law, are supported by various mis- sionary societies in the United States, and a full account of them will be given in connec- tion with the several missions. In addition to these the legislature has incorporated a college, and given it a valuable tract of one hundred acres, on the north bank of the St. Paul's, about twelve miles from Monrovia. For its es- tablishment and support, funds are held by the Trustees of Donations for Education in Libe- ria, incorporated by the Legislature of Massar chusetts. The provisions for religious instruction and worship, like those for education, are connected with the several missions, and to a great ex- tent supported by societies in the United States. Extent. — The name Liberia, however, has a wider application. The whole country known by that name extends along the western coast of Africa, from Manna Point, lat. 7° 25' N.. long. 12° 34' W., to the river San Pedro, lat. 4° 44' N., long. 6° 37' W. The entire length of its searooast is about 520 miles. Of this coast about 390 miles, extending from Manna Point on the north-west, to Grand Sesters, belongs to the republic of Liberia. The re- mainder of the coast, extending about 130 miles to the river San Pedro, the extreme eastern boundary, belongs to Maryland in Liberia. Its civilized settlements were planted by the Maryland Colonization Society. Its govern- ment has always been entirely distinct from that of the republic. It has this year, 1854, passed from its colonial state to that of nation- al independence. These two republics intena to unite under one government. In respect to their religious interests, they are already united, and may be considered as one. The territory, having been purchased of numerous small tribes extends inland as far as the rights of the sev ■ LIBERIA. 513 eral. tribes extended; in some places, sixty miles, in others, only fourteen. Prom Grand Cape Mount to Grand Sesters, 286 miles, it averages about forty-five miles in width, and contains 12,870 square miles, or 8,236,800 acres. If the remainder averages twenty miles in width, which is a low estimate, the whole contains 17,270 square miles, or 11,052,800 acres. It is nearly all susceptible of cultiva- tion ; and it is a low estimate of its fertility to say, that every cultivated acre will, on an aver- age, furnish the necessaries of life for one in- habitant. For procuring luxuries or acquiring wealth, they would need other employments, or larger farms. Settled as densely as Sierra Leone, it would contain 1,740,000 inhabitants. Liberia is every where well watered by numerous small streams, but has no very large rivers. Sand-bars at the mouths of the rivers prevent the entrance of large vessels ; and, at about twenty miles from the coast, their navi- gation is obstructed by rapids. Here is the base of the mountain range which divides the waters of the Atlantic from those which flow into the Niger, the great river of Central Africa. From this range, spurs and detached elevations run down betweeu the rivers, in some places quite to the coast, forming, as at Cape Mount and Cape Mesurado, bold pro- montories. According to the best information yet obtained, the summit of this range, beyond which the waters flow eastward and north- eastward into the Niger, cannot be more than 150 or 200 miles from the coast. Harbors. — The coast is deficient in natural harbors ; but in several places, good harbors might probably be consti-ucted at a moderate expense. The whole coast, however, is one continuous roadstead, where, at any season of the year, ships may lie at anchor within a mile or two of the shore, and landing-places for boats occur as often as once in five 6r ten miles. Productions. — The productions are those of other tropical countries. Rice is the principal grain. It is grown on uplands, without irri- gation. Tams, sweet potatoes, cassada, and other esculent roots, are easily raised, as are oranges, bananas, and other tropical fruits. Coffee is indigenous, of several varieties, in- cluding the Mocha, as are also several varieties of cotton. Indigo is a troublesome weed. Another native production is the Malaguette pepper, or " Grains of Paradise," from the abundance of which, the coast was formerly known as " the Grain Coast." Sugar-cane, ginger, and arrow-root, are easily cultivated. Palm-oil is made in large quantities, and cam- wood and ivory are brought from the interior for exportation. The waters furnish fish abun- dantly, and of good quality. The domestic ani- mals for food are bullocks, of small size and fit tie value for the yoke, goats, swine, and poultry. Climate. — The climate is a healthy one for its native population ; as is evident from their well-developed, vigorous forms, their usual free- 33 dom from disease, and the age to which they live. It must, of course, be adapted to the constitutions of their descendants, in propor- tion as they retain the constitutional peculiar- ities of their ancestors. Foreigners, however, from temperate climates, whatever may be their ancestry, must undergo an acclimating fever, within a few weeks after their arrival. To this rule, the exceptions are too few to be of any account. The fever is sometimes vio- lent, and even fatal ; but in most cases, where the constitution was previously unimpaired, it is not severe, and yields readily to judicious treatment ; and in many, it is very slight, not even confining the patient to his house for a single day. "White men never become per- fectly acclimated ; though, with prudence and occasional visits to their native air, they have been able to live and labor usefully for five, ten, and even twenty years. Visitors may avoid the fever by spending their nights on board their ships, half a mile, or even less, from the shore. Native Inhabitants. — Liberia belongs to that division of Africa, called Nigritia by the Latin geographers ; Belad-es-Sadan — that is, the Land of the Blacks — by the Arabs ; and: (juinea by the Portuguese. These names are unknown to the natives, and the last is of un- known origin. It extends eastward across the continent, north of the equator, even into the valley of the Nile. In its inhabitants, the form, features, complexion, and all the charac- teristics of the negro, are most perfectly de- veloped. They appear as slaves on some of the oldest monuments of ancient Egypt. They were carried as slaves across the Great Desert, and sold to the Carthaginians. They have always been hunted and seized as slaves by the Arab, Moorish, and mixed races on the Great Desert and its southern border. After the discovery of the western coast by the Por- tuguese, they were bought and carried as slaves, first to Europe, and afterwards to the West Indies and the American continent. This last calamity, however, has fallen with almost equal weight on the Zingian or Zambezan races,, south of the equator. So far as is known, they have always been divided into numerous small tribes, ignorant of letters, and with but slight knowledge, if any, of some of the sim- plest arts of civilization. A large majority — a well-informed writer supposes five-sixths — of" them are slaves. "Wives are bought, worked as slaves, and sold, according to each man's ability and caprice. Favorite wives, and other slaves, sometimes in great numbers, are killed in sacrifice on the death of a king. Slaves are sometimes killed, to give solemnity to the ratification of a treaty. In some of the tribes, cannibalism is occasionally practised ; but to a less extent, probably, than in some of tha- Zingian tribes farther south. Religion. — See Africa, Western. Discooerij. — The first discovery of this coast 514 LIBERIA. of whieh we have any authetitie account, was made by Picdro de Cintra, in 1462. He was in the employment of the King of Portugal, to whom Pope Martin V. had given all the territories he might discover, from Cape Bo- jador to the East Indies, to be conquered and "recovered to Christ and his church." The natives had never seen ship? before. The few that came off to him, 16 miles beyond Cape Mesurado. in canoes carrying two or three each, were naked, had some wooden darts and small knives, two targets and three bows, rings about their ears and one in the nose, and teeth, which seemed to be human, strung about their necks. It does not appear that he carried away any of them as slaves, though that practice had been followed by most ex- plorers on the west coast of Africa, since it was first commenced by Antonio Gonzales, in 1440. For nearly a century and a half the Portu- guese were masters of this coast. They had forts or trading houses at numerous points, of which Gallinas, Cape Mount, Cape Mesurado, Junk river, Sesters and Sangwin seem to have been the most important. Slave Trade. — The slave trade to the West Indies was commenced in 1503, and encour- aged by edicts of Ferdinand V. of Spain, in 1511, and of Charles V., in 1515. Prom that time forward, procuring slaves from the na- tives and selling them to the Spaniards, was a principal branch of their business. Their in- fluence was so predominant, that before 1600 the Portuguese had become the language in which business was usually transacted, and was generally understood by natives who had dealings with foreigners. The Pope's Orant not recognized. — The Eng- lish and Dutch, being Protestants, cared nothing for the Pope's grant to Portugal ; and the French soon learned to disregard it, claim- ing that they had discovered the coast and traded at Sesters before the Portuguese, and even as early as 1346. The English took the lead. Id 1553, having already made two voy- ages to Morocco, Thomas Windham, though the Portuguese had threatened him and his crew with death, visited the whole coast from the river Sesters to Benin. In 1554, Captain John Lok, with three ships, reached Cape Mesurado, sailed along the coast to Benin, and brought home " certain black slaves," the first, so far as we know, ever seen in England. In 1588, the English "African Company" was incorporated for the more vigorous prose- cution of commerce in this region. The Por- tuguese did what they could, and hired the na^ lives to do what they could, to resist these encroachments. They destroyed the ships of the intruders, and killed or enslaved their crews. But by 1604 they were driven from all their posts, from Cape Mesurado to Cape Palraas ; and a few years later, the Dutch had posses- sion at Cape Mount, and the English at Sierra Leone. The Portuguese, however, did not wholly quit the country. Being driven from the coast, some of them, .with their mulatto descendants, retired inland, and endeavored, with some success, to monopolize the trade be- tween the interior and the coast, and were gra- dually lost by amalgamation with the natives. Portuguese Missions. — Of the missionary labors of the Portuguese while in possession of the coast, we have no particular informa- tion ;' but, as the Pope gave them the country for that purpose ; as they had chapels and priests at all their settlements ; as we have accounts of their efforts and success at Sierra Leone and other places ; and as they are said, when driven from the coast, to have built chapels and tried to make converts in the interior, there can be no doubt that some such labors were performed. From them the na- tives probably first received the idea of a Crea- tor, whose existence they admit, though they never worship him. The word " fetish," by which they designate a consecrated post or any object of their superstitious reverence, is derived from a Portuguese word, signifying a charm, such as witches are supposed to use. From the same source, they may have received the term " devil," which they apply to the dis- guised chief of certain nocturnal orgies. These are the only remnants of their religious influ- ence, which even conjecture can now detect. Character and Influence of Traders — Slave Trade. — The character of the traders to this coast, whether Portuguese, French, English or Dutch, appears to have been, with very few exceptions, of the worst kind. Many of the English and Dutch were " interlopers," trading there in violation of the laws of their own countries, and indeed of all laws whatever. From about 1600, pirates began to mingle with them, and the crews of traders sometimes joined the pirates, and often copied their ex- amples. The slave trade raged with increas- ing violence. Not only were slaves bought of the natives, and wars excited for the pur- pose of making slaves for the market, but negroes were seized indiscriminately and car- ried off, whenever it could be done without too much danger. The custom of "panyaring," that is, alluring an individual tjeyond the reach of protection, and then seizing him or her as a slave, became common ; and the ne- gro trader who was employed to panyar his countryman one day, was sometimes panyared himself the next. From 1688 to 1697, the power of the " buccaneers " in the West In- dies was broken, and they were dispersed. They spread themselves over the whole Atlan- tic and Indian Oceans, and in Western Africa, for about 30 years, were one of the strongest powers. Besides other places, they several times plundered Sierra Leone, which was one of their favorite resorts. They held the bay next south of that cape for seven years, till, in 1730, they were broken up by the French. Meanwhile, the Genoese first, and then the LIBERIA. 515 French, obtained the exclusive privilege of fnraishing negro slavt-s for the Spanish colo- nies. In 1713, the English government, by the famous Assiento treaty, obtained it for the South Sea Company for thirty years. What multitudes were sold, and how profitably, may be judged from the fact, that in 1739 England sold out the remaining four years to Spain for a hundred thousand pounds — nearly half a million dollars. Under such influences, the character and temper of the natives became such that, in 1730, not a single European factory was in operation on the whole coast of what is now Liberia ; traders found it dangerous to go on shore ; and trade was carried on by sailing along the coast, and coming to anchor where the natives, by building a fire, indicated that they had slaves or other articles for sale. This state of things seems to have continued, with little change, to the close of that century. The testimony concerning the character of the slave trade, laid before the British Parliament from 1791 to 1807, showed that in other parts of Africa, slaves were collected and kept for shipment in factories ; but on the " windward coast," where Liberia now is, " every tree was a factory," and ships stopped and traded wher- ever a signal was made. Origin and Htstoi-y of the Colony. — About the year 1770 the celebrated theologian, Eev. Samuel Hopkins of Newport, E. I., began to preach against slavery and the slave trade. April 7, 1773, he called on his neighbor, Eev. Ezra Stiles, afterwards President of Tale Col- lege, for conversation on his design " to make some negro ministers, and send them to Gui- nea." There were two young natives of Africa in his church, whom he wished to educate for that purpose. Mr. Stiles thought there might be some prospect of success if thirty or forty were sent, and a society formed for the pur- pose. They " left the matter to further thought." August 31, 1773, they published a circular, asl0 MOSUL. have been obliged to abandon that station with httle present prospect of occupation be- fore at least next spring. I do not believe that a more promising point was ever tempo- rarily abandoned by missionaries of the Ame- rican Board. It will be supplied with native helpers who -will sustain preaching, but it needs at least three missionaries. The occa- sion of leaving that point has been detailed in letters to the rooms to which j^ou doubtless have access. The station remained half man- ned till the health of Mrs. Dunmore failed, and should Mr. Walker be left alone there a simi- lar result must inevitably ensue. It should be borne in mind that in these interior sta- tions we are cut off from the refreshment of occasional intercourse with travelers, and at Diarbekir there is no consular protection. We need the prayers of Christians that mis- sionaries may be supplied for and protected in Diarbekir. '■ So long as stations are half manned, the work must be expected to languish ; and all Western Asia is half manned. All the mem- bers sympathize, for, whatever maj' be the division into missions, we are one body in Christ. So long as the Armenians are neg- lected and left to perish, while calling to Ame;~ioan Christians for help, we are left un- heard to plead from a greater distance for wants less obvious, requiring a more vigorous exercise of faith. •' The great want at Mosul and for the As- syrian field is a seminary for j'oung men to train up preachers, to awaken mind, to pre- vent the waste of sending to Beirut, where, by the distance from his house, in case a boy turns out ill, the evil is greatly increased. For this we have urged the sending out of additional missionaries. But how shall they get here ?, They have agauntlet to run. When Dr. Lob- dell came, the wants of Aintab were so ex- ceedingly pressing, that a petition and most urgent entreaties were used by the natives to detain him there. We are glad that that rob- bery of our field was not consummated. Had Dr. Lobdell known that the Committee at home would acquiesce in his stay there, he would have remained. I only allude to this to show that the apathy of the American church, in leaving that great Armenian field without any adequate supply of laborers, crip- ples us. We want the attention of American Christians drawn to their suicidal policy of neglecting vast immortal interests, whose mo- mentous issues eternity alone can compute. How many a wealthy family is being ruined, especially in its younger branches, by the hoarded manna ! How many I know person- ally, training up children in the worship of mammon, bowing down to the golden calf ! Alas ! though that manna would be bread of life to many famishing ones here, it comes not ! We want, and must have for the success of our v\ork, the sober, prayerful attention of Chris- tians to the feebleness of their efforts. For want of one more man, in raising the timbers of a house, the joists and beams fell back, and crushed many of those toiling their utmost. Is it wise^is it prudent, to leave a few labor- ers to die with over-work ? " The occupation of Mardin is desirable, ex- ceedingly desirable, provided we have faith. Some Christians seem to think that we are to wait till Satan comes crouching to us, laying down his arms, and offering us the keys of his strongholds. He has been forced to this in some cities of Western Asia ; but shall we leave these other cities till they throw down their battlements and urge us in ? Faith is the great uunt, that the kingdom of heaven may suffer violence and the violent take it by force. We want such a mighty moral move- ment behind us, that we shall feel that we are borne on to new efforts as by some silent gulf- stream flowing from our native land. If America were only enlisted for our success, and following us with eager wishes, as gen- erals and soldiers were followed to the halls of Montezuma, then they would not withhold their reinforcements, nor that best of all gifts, their prayers. " As to the future prospects of our work, my impression is, that if this effort making in Western Asia/a;^ 7iow, a century will not see it renewed under such promising auspices. If it fail, it can only be from the storms of low- ering war, which seems not at all probable, or from the deadness of the American church. Were the American church now to call us back, old Assyrian kings would break the silence of ages and rise like muffled Samuels to reproach ns. The very stones would cry out. " Ultimately, these efforts cannot fail. Un- less God's promises are a fable, — unless Chris- tianity is a delusion, and God himself a being indifferent and neglectful of his creatures, this preaching of his Gospel cannot return void. With rapt anticipation we watch the great changes bursting upon the world — the opening .seals of the vision of the church militant and millenial. The day seems at hand for Moslems to accept Christ. At our dispensary we shun not to point them to the great Physician. They listen with respect to that now, for which our blood would redden these streets, were they what they were twenty years since. Their spirit is broken ; they expect the downfall of their religion. Their expectation upon this point IS in advance of the Christian church. It IS not for mortal man to be wise upon what God has sealed ; but we wait in hope. Hope thrills in our hearts and rises to full assurance. Let the cannons roll on ; let swords gleam and di-ip, and the spears and chariots of war. The King of many crowns is marching forth. We e.xpect the fall of distant Rome ; and that fall will make freemen of her slaves here. Our hearts anticipate glad things. "\Ve rejoice in MOTEER— NATAL. 551 the God of our salvation. With sincere es- teem, your brother iu Christ, " DwiGHT W. Maesh. "Mosul, May 8, 1854." MOTEER : One of the Molucca Islands, in the Indian Archipelago. MOTITO : A station of the French Pro- testants among the Bechuanas of South Af- rica, 9 miles south-west of Old Lattikoo, and about 19 miles from the frontier of the colony. It has five out-stations. Rev. J. Fredoux, the missionary at this station, has married the sec- ond daughter of Rev. Robert Moffat, of the Kuruman. MOUNT COKE : A station of the Wes- leyans in Kaffraria. MOUNT VAUGHAN : A station of the Episcopal Board, at Oape Palmas, West Af- rica. MOUNT ZION : A station of the Amer- ican Board among the Cherokee Indians. MUFTI : The chief of the ecclesiastical order, or primate, of the Mussulman religion. The authority of the mufti is very great in the Ottoman empire ; for even the Sultan himself, if he will preserve any appearance of religion, cannot, without first hearing his opinion, put any person to death, or so much as inflict any corporeal punishment. When the mufti comes into his presence, the grand seignior himself rises up before him. Yet the grand seignior appoints him to office, and the honors paid to him have become little more than form. If the Sultan does not like his decision, he dis- misses him and appoints another. MUSSULMAN : A professor of the re- ligion of Mohammed. MUTTRA : A celebrated city, of great antiquity, situated on the western bank of the Jumna, about 30 miles N.N.E. from Agra, and 80 miles S.S.E. from Delhi. Population, 80,000, of whom about one-eighth are Moham- medans. Mr. Philips, of the English Baptist Mission, removed to this place in 1844. MYNPURIE: A station of the Presbyte- rian Board in Northern India, 40 miles west of Futtehgurh. MYSORE : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society, and capital of a province of the same name, in Southern Hindostan, near the western coast, to the north-west of Ma- dura. It is also occupied by the Wesleyan Missionary Society. NAGBRCOIL : A town in Southern India, in the Travancore district, a little north-west of Cape Comorin. A station of the London Missionary Society. NAGPORB : A large town in the pro- vince of Gundwana, the capital of the Boonsla Mahrattas, lat. 20° 9' N., long. 79° 11' E. It is elevated 4,104 feet above the sea, and in the hot season, has a decided advantage over other stations, thenight being almost invaria- bly cool and pleasant ; and in the winter sea- son, it is so cool as sometimes to produce hoar frost and ice. Population in 182.5, 115,000 A station of the Free Church of Scotland. NAIN : A station of the United Brethren in Labrador. NANKING : The capital of the Kiang su province, and former capital of the Chinese empire, situated on the southern banks of the Yangtsz-kiang, in lat. 32° N., and long. 119° B. (See China.) NAMAQUALAND : See Africa, South- ern. NARSINGDARCHOKE : A station of the Baptist Missionary Society in Bengal. NASSAU : The capital of the island of New Providence, W. I., and the seat of gov- ernment. It is situated on the north side of the island. A station of the Baptist Mission- ary Society, and also of the Society for Pro- pagating the Gospel. NASSUCK : A large town and place of pilgrimage on the Godavery, principally in- habited by Brahmins. Population in 1820, 30,000. Near Nassuck, the, seat and centre of Brahniinism in the Deccan, are extensive Buddhist excavations, which extend round a high conica,l hill, five miles from the town, with many Buddhist figures and inscriptions, with- out the slightest Hindoo vestiges. Church Missionary Society. NATAL : The colony of Natal lies in the S. B. part of the continent of Africa, between the latitudes of 31° 31', and 28° south. It is bounded on the north by the river Tukela, which divides it from the country of the Ama^ Zulu; on the south by the river Umzimkulu, separating it from the territory of the Ama^ ponda ; on the east by the Indian Ocean ; and on the west by the Quathamba range of moun- tains. Its length is about 180 miles, and its width 125 miles. The white population of Natal at present, November 1853, is estimated at 10,000 ; most of whom have immigrated from England since 1845. The colored popu- lation, Zulus (or Zulu Kaffres, as they are some- times called), is about 120,000. Most of them are remnants of tribes which originally occu- pied this territory, but were conquered and dispersed Ijy the tyrant Chaka. When the British established their authority in Na^ tal, multitudes, from all sides, returned to the land of their nativity for protection. Most, however, have come from the country of fhe Amazulu within a few years past, and the number of refugees is increasing. Natal, for several years past, has been in a state of quiet and safety, though apprehensions have been entertained by some that Umpandi, the present King of Amazulu, would invade the colony. These fears, for the most part, are now laid aside ; for Umpandi, with his present force is unable to cope with the Dutch Boers who are settling, without his permission, in the north- era part of his territory. So numerous have been the refugees from his dominion, that it is doubtful whether the tyrannical chief can mua- 552 NATAL. ter more than 50,000 warriors. Ufaku, the king of the Amaponda, is more pacific than most of the Kaffre chiefs, and endeavors to live on good terms with his white neighbors. He is far more powerful than Umpandi, and commands an army of 80,000 fighting men. The natives of Natal are split up into numer- ous petty tribes, each tribe having a chief of its own, who, however, is amenable to British authority. Constant jealousies and animosities exist among these tribes, and nothing but fear of the English Government prevents them from destroying each other. The greater part of the natives in this colony dwell on locations assigned them by trovernment, and over each location is placed a white magistrate, to keep order, to collect the annual tax, which is seven shillings per hut, settle their numerous disputes, &c. When cases presented by the natives are not satisfactorily settled by the magistrates, they have the privilege of appealing to the Lieut. Governor of the colony. Natal Harbor. — The coast is skirted by a dense " bush," or forest of thorn trees, vines, and brambles, and the monotony of the scene is relieved only by the mountains of silvery spray which indicate the mouths of the nu- merous rivers. The only elevated and striking object is the bluff, a rocky promontory, desig- nating the entrance to the port. At its foot is a great sand bar, the dread of all comers to Natal, and the chief barrier to the prosperity of the colony. The people of Natal are exerting themselves to construct a break- water far enough into the sea, not only to break the violence of the waves, but to check the drifting of the sand into the harbor. D'Urban. — An hour's walk or ride from the harbor, in an ox wagon, through the sand, brings one to the only seaport town in this colony, which is called D'Urban, in honor of Sir Benjamin D'Urban. The streets of this town which were laid out by the Dutch at right angles, are wide and convenient for trading with large wagons, but intolerably sandy. Many of the houses are one story high, and made of " wattle and daub " — that is, long sticks woven together between posts and plas- tered with mud. The roofs are thatched with long grass. Some nice brick buildings are now going up, and the appearance of the place is rapidly improving. The Wesleyans, the largest religious society in Natal, have here two houses of worship, one for the whites, and one for the colored population. 'I'he Episcopalians, the Congregationalists, the Baptists, and the Roman Catholics have also their sanctuaries. New churches for the troops are about to be erected, at an expense of £10,- 1100. The people of D'Urban are mostly mer- chants and mechanics. But few among them are wealthy. Some of the oldest residents in the colony, who occupy farms, are agricultur- ists or graziers, possess large herds of cattle, and are in comfortable circumstances. The Natal Bay abounds in fish, with which the market of D'Urban is supplied ; and there is no lack of good beef, pork, mutton, venison, and fowls. D'Urban suffers for the want of good water. All that is suitable for drinking is brought in hogsheads from the Uniqui river, which is about three miles distant, or caught from the roofs of the houses when it rains. The water of the wells is brackish, and induces cutaneous diseases. This deficien- cy of good water, it is supposed, may be rem- edied by turning the Uniqui river across the long flat on which the town is built. The ex- periment will doubtless be made if Natal con- tinues to prosper. D'Urban is a place of great importance, as all the trade with the tribes on the northern borders of Natal passes through it, and most of the trade with the Dutch farmers over the Quathamba Moun- tains, and beyond the Orange river, amount- ing to many thousands of pounds. Two weekly newspapers are published in D'Urban, and are well conducted. There is also a day school for children, supported by government. Intemperance and horse-racing are quite prevalent. Pktermaritzburg. — The town next in import- ance to D'Urban in Natal, is PietermaritK- burg, or Petermauritzburg, as it is sometimes spelled, the capital of the colony. It is about 50 miles from D'Urban, situated in a large valley nearly surrounded by high hills, and presents a beautiful appearance. Its streets, like those of D'Urban, are laid out at right angles, are broad, and shaded on each side by large and beautiful trees. Water, which never fails in the driest season, is conducted through the streets on each side, from which every house may be supplied, and every garden irrigated. The Lieut. Governor of the colo- ny, his Secretary, and other chief officers of Government, have their residence at this place. Extensive barracks have been erected for British soldiers, and part of a regiment is quartered in them. The Episcopalians, Presbyterians, Indepen- dents, Wesleyans and Catholics have their houses of worship. A large and flourishing school is supported by Government. Three papers are published, the "Independent," "Government Gazeteer," and "Witness for the People." The morals of this place are far in advance of those in D'Urban, and for health- fulness of climate and beauty of appearance, it IS not surpassed by any locality in the col- ony. The trade of Pietermaritzburg is principally with the Dutch farmers who come from beyond the Quathamba Mountains, some ten davs' journey with the ox wagon, and exchange their ivory, wheat, and wool for groceries clothing, &c. ' Scenery — Climate — Pro/tpeds nf the Cohnv Natal is preeminent for the beauty of its land- scapes. Along the coast, the surface i? f^l NATAL— NESTORIANS. 553 the most part level ; but inland, at the dis- tance of about 15 miles, rugged in the extrem?. A chain of high table lands extends the whole length of the colony, intersected by numerous rivers which have worn deep chasms to the low country. During June and July (the winter months) the natives burn off the long grass, and the hills and valleys assume a dark and mournful aspect. But in September and October the rain descends copiously, and the whole country is covered, as if by magic, with a carpet of green. The scenery is then truly magnificent. Natal is acknowledged to be one of the healthiest places in Aftica. The tops of the Quathamba Mountains are supposed to afford a cooling medium for the hot winds which come from the interior, and hence Natal is exempt from that debilitating atmosphere which is the scourge of other warm climates. The Natal climate is mild and temperate, the atmosphere delightfully clear, and those noxious vapors which prove so unfavorable to health and longevity at De- lagoa Bay, on the Gaboon and Zanzibar coasts, are here unknown. During the summer, the heat is seldom so great as to render out-of door labor oppressive ; and in winter, it is rarely cold enough to render a fire necessary. It is the united testimony of foreign residents, that this colony is remarkably free from those diseases which are common in their father- lands. In no English colony exist in a greater degree' the elements of prosperity, viz., abun- dance and cheapness of labor, fertility of soil, plenty of food, healthfulness of climate, &c. Natal is yet in its infancy. It is but recently that the tide of immigration has turned to- ■warda its shores. But from what has been already seen of the production of sugar, oot> ton, rice, coifee, indigo, wheat, barley, and corn, of her wool growing districts, and her animal market, it is reasonable to conclude that the increasing exports will give an im- petus to trade and industry, and thus the colony will ere long be filled with Europeans. — Eev. Josiah Tylek, missionary to the Zulus, abridged from the Puritan Recorder. NAVIQATOKS' ISLANDS : See Samoa. NAZAEETH : One of forty native Chris- tian villages, formed in Tinnevelly by the Na- tive Phdanthropic Society, in order to shelter converts from persecution. Also, a station of the Moravians in Jamaica, W. I. NEGAPATAM : A town in the Madras Presidency, and district of Tanjore, the resi- dence of the British collector for the district, situated on the shore of the Bay of Bengal, 162 miles south by east from Madras. The na^ tive town is extensive and irregular, and on its north side there is a remarkable ruin of very massive brick masonry, about 80 feet high, called by mariners the Chinese Pagoda. It is supposed to have been a Jain temple. A sta- tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. NEGOMBO : A town on the west coast of Ceylon, 20 miles north from Colombo. A sta- tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. NEGROES : The term Negro is the Span- ish and Portuguese word for black. The Ne- gro race inhabit that portion of the continent of Africa which commences at the Great Des- ert of Sahara, extending southerly to about 20° of south latitude, and embracing both the eastern and western coasts of the continent. The skin and eyes of thg Negro are black ; hair black and woolly ; skull compressed later- ally and in front ; forehead low, narrow, and slanting ; cheek bones prominent ; jaws nar- row and projecting ; upper front teeth oblique ; chin receding ; eyes prominent ; nose broad, thick, flat ; lips very thick ; palms of the hands and soles of the feet flat ; knees turned in, toes turned out. The stature and physical strength are equal to the European. Many of them have made considerable progress in the useful arts and cultivation. It has been said that no Negro nation ever possessed a literature, or had the ingenuity to invent an alphabet, and until recently this was probably true ; but the missionaries of the Church Missionary Society have discovered a tribe in Western Africa, named Vei, which pos.sess a well-constructed written language, with books, the invention of one of their num- ber still living, which presents u, case as re- markable as that of the invention of the Cher- okee alphabet. Among the Negro race there is a great variety, greater, perhaps, than among any other family. For accounts of the civil, social, and religious condition of the Negro race, and of missions among them, see Western Africa, Gaboon, Fernando Po, ToKUBA, and Liberia. NBLLORE : A station of the Church of England Mission, in the northern part of Cey- lon, about two miles from the town of Jaffna. Also, a large city near the northern extremity of the Carnatic in Bengal — the principal sta^ tion of the Teloogoo Mission of the American Baptist Union. NELSON : A town in New Zealand, situ- ated at the bottom of Tasman's Bay, on the northern shore of the middle island, with a population of 2,100 inhabitants. The town is extremely pretty, situated on a small plain sur- rounded by lofty hills. The climate is delight ful. It is a station of the Church Missionary Society. NENGENENGB : Station of the Ameri- can Board at the Gaboon, West Africa. NESTOBIANS : Nestorius, from whom comes the name Nestorians, was a native of Syria, and a presbyter of the church at Anti- och, " esteemed and celebrated," says Neander, " on account of the rigid austerity of his life and the impressive fervor of his preaching." He was made patriarch of Constantinople, a. d. 428. Possessed of an honest and pious zeal, he was wanting probably in that prudence and moderation by which his zeal should have been 56i NESTORIANS. governed ; and while his intcmperaie efforts to suppress various heresies provoked, his unguard- ed language laid him open to the attacks of some who were jealous of his influence, or as- pired to his position. Cyril of Alexandria became his fierce antagonist, and Nestorius was soon himself accused of heresy ; first, in denying that Mary was the mother of God, and second, in holding that there were two persons as well as two natures in Christ. He denied both the charges, as they were brought against him ; but he was deposed by the third general council at Ephesus, A. D. 431, and was banished first to Arabia, and then to Lybia, and finally died in Upper Egypt. His friends denied the fairness of his trial, and the justice of his condemnation, and his opinions were warmly defended, especially among his coun- trymen in the East. The flourishing school for the education of divines at Bdessa, in Mesopo- tamia, to which many Persian youth resorted, became eminently the seat from which the sect extended into Persia. This school was broken up on account of its Nestorianism by the em- peror Zeno, in 489, but the consequence was only the transfer of the school to Nisibis, where it could fully develop itself under the Persian government, and where for many years, Bar- sumas, a zealous Nestorian, had been bishop. Having now its principal seat in Persia, the sect was fostered by the rivalry existing be- tween the governments of Persia and Constan- tinople, and on the death of the archbishop of Seleucia, a. d. 496, Babasus (or Babacus) a Nestorian, was chosen his successor. He de- clared himself Patriarch of the East, and held a synod, or council, A. d. 499, at which the whole Persian church professed itself as belong- ing to the Nestorian party. Prom A. D. 485 to a. d. 640 the Nestorians were under Persian authority, generally favor- ed, but sometimes persecuted. From 640 to 1257 they were subject to Arabian caliphs. In 1258, on the taking of Bagdad by the grandson of Gengis Khan, the power was trans- ferred to the Tartars. The patriarchs resided at Seleucia until a. d 762, when Bagdad be- coming the capital of the Saracenic empire ; it became also the seat of the patriarchs, who now took the title of patriarch of Babylon and Bagdad. " The Nestorians," says Mosheim, (Eo. Hist., vol. I. p. 93,) " after they had obtained a fixed residence in Persia, and had located the head of their sect at Seleucia, were as successful as they were industrious in disseminating their doctrines in the countries lying without the Eoman empire. It appears from unquestion- able documents, still existing, that there were numerous societies in all parts of Persia, in Ji.dia, in Armenia, in Arabia, in Syria, and in (ii.cr cointries, under the jurisdiction of the ],utriarch of Seleucia during this (the 6th) cen- tury." Of the 7th century he says, (Eo. Hist., vol. I. p. 499,) " The Christian religion was, in this century, difilised beyond its former bounds, both in the eastern and western countries, lii the east, the Nestorians, with incredible industry and perseverance, labored to propa- gate it from Persia, Syria, and India, among the barbarous and savage nations inhabiting the deserts and the remotest shores of A sia. In particular, the vast empire of China was en- lightened, by their zeal and industry, with the light of Christianity." At this time, from the 5th to the 9th cen- tury, the Nestorians had schools, some of which were quite celebrated, designed especially, though not exclusively, for the education of ecclesiastics. " Previous to the overthrow of the caliphs, the Nestorians had become widely extended. They occupied, almost to the ex- clusion of other Christian sects, the region which forms the modern kingdom of Persia, in all parts of which they had churches. They were numerous in Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Arabia. They had churches in Syria and in the island of Cyprus. They had churches among the mountains of Malabar in India. They had numerous churches in the vast re- gions of Tartary, from the Caspian sea to Mount Imaus, and beyond, through the greater part of what is now known as Chinese Tartary, and even in China itself. The names of twen- ty-five metropolitan sees are on record, which of course embraced a far greater number of bishoprics, and still more numerous societies or churches." But at this time Christianity, as exhibited in the lives of its professors, had lost not a little of its purity and its power ; and even if we suppose the Nestorians to have been more correct in doctrine and more Christian in life than other sects, there can be no reason to be- lieve that they published the pure Gospel, or that they exhibited, generally, the light of a holy life. Of the tenth century Mosheim says, " All are agreed that in this century the state of Christianity was everywhere most wretched, on account of the amazing ignorance) and the consequent superstition and debased morals of the age, and also from other causes." Early in the eleventh century a Mogul prince, in Cathay, (the northern part of China) was converted to Christianity by the Nestorians, and perhaps, taking the name of John upon his baptism, he was called Presbyter John, or Prester John. Under this name his successors became widely known and celebrated. The last of this race of Christian kings— Christian, with their sub- jects, in name, doubtless much more than in reality— was slain by Gengis Khan, about the year 1202. Gengis, who had a Christian wife, the daughter of Prester John, and several of his successors, appear in some measure to have favored the Christians, of whom numerous bodies were still scattered over all northern Asia and China. In the mean time, however, Mohammedanism had been gaining not only in Persia, but upon all the countries west of NESTORIANS. 555 Mount Imaus where the Nestorians commenced their missionary labors. After the descendants of Gengis had extended their conquests, and a branch of the family had overthrown the Arar bian caliph and destroyed Bagdad, one of them became a Mohammedan and engaged in a bit- ter persecution of the Christians. About the close of the fourteenth century the sword of Tamerlain completed the overthrow of the western Tartar churches, and Nestorian Chris- tianity was fully crushed in the principal seat of its life and power. A little earlier than this, in 1369, the descendants of Gengis Khan ■were expelled from China by a revolt of the native Chinese ; about the same time Romish missionaries were banished, and the Nestorians, though permitted to remain, suffered under inauspicious circumstances, and their numbers gradually diminished. Still a metropolitan ■was sent to China in 1490, and some bishops in l502. But when papal missions were resum- ed in China, in the sixteenth century, the missionaries stated that they could find no distinct traces of Christianity in the empire. Thus the Nestorian church, once so extended, ■whose missions in Central Asia were continued from an early period to the sixteenth century, has been crushed at its centre, by Mohamme- dan power, and has gradually died out in more distant regions, in great measure, doubtless, be- cause of its want of true Christian vitality. For three centuries past it has been shut out mostly from the Christian world, and degraded in its political, social, intellectual, and moral condi- tion. During this period defections have taken place from time to time, growing out of dissentions among themselves and the efforts of the Jesuits, and a considerable part of the Nestorians have submitted to the Pope of Rome. These are governed by a patriarch appointed by the Pope, and constitute what is called the Chaldean church. The orthodox Nestorians, if this title may be thus used, are reduced to a moderate number, perhaps 80,000, about 40,000 inhabiting the plain of Oroomiah, in the ■western part of Persia, and about the same number the Koordish mountains between Persia and Turkey. Their patriarch. Mar Shimon, resides in the mountains. The mountain districts inhabited by the Nestorians of Koordistan are exceedingly wild and rugged ; in some cases almost inaccessible. Having but small patches of arable land the people subsist mostly from their flocks, and are miserably poor. In the rudeness, ■wildness, and boldness of their character they resemble their Koordish neighbors. The city of Oroomiah, the ancient Theharma, the reputed birth-place ofZoroaster, is situated on a beautiful, fertile plain, about 40 miles in length, and in its broadest portion 20 miles ' ■wide. The staple productions of this plain are wheat, rice, cotton, tobacco, and the vine. It abounds also in a great variety of fruits, and has naturally one of the finest climates ; yet artificial causes, particularly the means used to irrigate the fields and gardens, pro- ducing not only a great amount of evaporar tion, but numerous pools of stagnant water, make it unhealthy, particularly to foreigners. The city contains a population of about 25,000, of whom less than 1000 are Nestorians, bat the Nestorians are numerous in the vil- lages of the plain, and most of them are em- ployed in the cultivation of the soil. The number of this people on the plain, Mr. Per- kins gave in 1843 as between thirty and forty thousand. These " partake much, in their manners, of the suavity and urbanity of the Persian character. By the side of their rude countrymen from the mountains, though ori- ginally from the same stock, they appear like antipodes." As Christians, up to the time when mission- ary operations were commenced among them, a few years since, the Nestorians, though they might have a name to live, wore dead. Their religious belief and practices were more sim- ple and scriptural than those of other Oriental Christian sects. They abhorred all image worship, auricular confession, the doctrine of purgatory, and many other corrupt dogmas and practices of the Papal and Greek churches. Though not free from errors and superstitions, their doctrinal tenets were generally correct, and the Scriptures were fully acknowledged as of supreme authority. But " the life and power of Christianity had departed. Scarcely a symp- tom of spiritual vitality remained." They clung with great tenacity to the forms of their reli- gion. Many of them would rather die than violate their periodical fasts, which are very numerous, covering nearly half the whole year. Yet, even their most intelligent ecclesiastics seemed to have hardly any idea of the mean- ing of regeneration. Lying and profaneness seemed universal, and intemperance existed to a fearful extent. " Education was at an ebb almost as low as vital religion. None but their ecclesiastics could read at all, and but very few of them could do more than merely repeat their devotions in an unknown tongue, while neither they nor their hearers knew any thing of the meaning." There was among them little if any thing that could be called preaching ; their public services consisting of chanting the Scriptures and their prayers in ancient Syriac, a language which but few of the priests, and none of the people, under- stand. Very little attempt had been made to reduce the vernacular language of the Nesto- rians to writing, .and the printing-press .was unknown among them. What few books they had, and they were very few, were manuscripte in the ancient Syriac, a dead language. The canons of the Nestorian church require celibacy in all the episcopal orders of the clergy, I. e. all from the bishop up ; low^er orders may marry. They reckon nine ecclesiastical orders, viz., sub-deacon, reader, deacon, priest, arch- 556 NESTOEIANS. deacon, bishop, metropolitan, catholokos, and patriarch ; but two or three of these are now little more than nominal. Monasteries and convents do not exist among them. "They have no relics such as are common in the Church of Eome," says Mr. Badger [Nestorians and tlwir Ritual, Vol. II. p. 136), yet "they believe the remains of the martyrs and saints to be endowed with supernatural virtues ;" and they invoke the virgin and the saints, asking for their prayers to Christ. They have no pictures or images in their churches, and are much opposed to the use of them. The only symbol among them is a plain Greek cross, ■which they venerate highly. The sign of the cross is used in baptism and in prayer ; a cross is engraved over the low entrances of their churches, and kissed by tho.=;e who enter, and the priests carry with them a small silver cross, which is often kissed by the people. — Missionary Herald for August, 1838 ; Br. Grant's Nestorians ; Mosheim and Neander's Church History ; Badger's Nestorians and their Ritual, Vol. II. pp. 132-6. MISSIOIS. Amekican Boaed. — In the spring of 1830, Eev. Messrs. Smith and Dwight, while on an ex- ploring missionary tour, in accordance with in- structions which had been given them by the Prudential Committee of the A. B. C. P. M., visited the Nestorians. They found it not safe to attempt to penetrate the Koordish mountains, but spent a few days at Oroomiah, and became much interested in the condition of the Nesto- rian church, and satisfied that a favorable open- ing for missionary effort was there presented. Their report led to the formation of the mission. In January, 1833, soon after the report was pre- sented to the Prudential Committee, Mr. Justin Perkins, then a tutor iu Amherst College, was appointed to commence the mission. In the instructions given to him the main object of the mission was defined to be to bring about a change which would " enable the Nestorian church, through the grace of God, to exert a commanding influence in the spiritual regener- ation of Asia." Considering the past history of that church, its present state, and the char- acter of the people embraced in it, it was hoped that, brought again to a fuller know! edge of the truth, and to feel the regenerating and sanctifying power of truth attended by the influences of the Spirit, the members of that church would again become, not only them- selves true disciples of Christ and heirs of life, but efBcient laborers in the great work of building up the Eedeemer's kingdom through- out the world. Mr. and Mrs. Perkins sailed from Boston, Sept. 21, 1833. The Committee had not been able as yet to find a physician for the mission, and it was not thought best to delay their de- parture on that account, as Mr. Perkins could, ■while waiting for a colleague at Constantino- ple, avail himself of facilities which he might there find for acquiring' the language of the Nestorians. They reached Constantinople on the 21st of December, and on the 17th of May following, feeling constrained, without waiting longer for associates, to proceed on their way, they sailed for Trebizond, the port on the Black Sea from which their land journey must commence. They left this place on the 16th of June ; but, owing to the incursions of Koordish robbers upon the Turkish fron- tiers, they were much detained and annoyed on their journey, were obliged to take a circuits ous route through Russian provinces, and did not reach Tabreez until the 28th of August. Sir John Campbell, British ambassador at Tabreez, to whom Mr. Perkins had written, stating their detentions and perplexities, sent a courier to meet them, and also a kind of lit- ter borne by mules, for the accommodation of Mrs. Perkins (who had been brought by hard- ships into a critical state of health,) with a supply of provisions. The next day, August 21st, they were also met by Dr. Reach, the physician of the British embassy, whose kind regard for their welfare had brought him about sixty miles, that he might render them assist- ance. As no European resided at Oroomiah it was not thought prudent for Mr. Perkins to pro- ceed there until he should be joined by an asso- ciate, and he resolved to remain at Tabreez. Anxious, however, to be making all possible progress in acquiring the modern Syriac lan- guage, he went to Oroomiah in October, ac- companied by Rev. Mr. Haas of the Basle Mis- sionary Society, who was residing at Tabreez, to procure a teacher. He obtained Mar (bish- op) Tohannan to return with him to Tabreez as his teacher, and the bishop took, as his " servant " and companion, priest Abraham, an intelligent young man, who became from the first one of the most valuable native helpers in the mission. On the 11th of May, 1835, Dr. Grant, leaving a large and lucrative practice, and a circle ot ■ivarm friends at Utica, N. Y., sailed from Bos- ton with his wife to join .this, mission. They reached Tabreez Oct. 15. After resting a few days Dr. Grant proceeded to Oroomiah to make arrangements. Comfortable houses were soon provided, and on the 20th of November, Mr. Perkins arrived with his wife and Mrs. Grant. The first missionaries to the Nestorians had now reached their destination, and their com- ing was greeted by the people with great cor- diality. Dr. Grant's professional character served to secure the favor of the Persian gov- ernor, and the Nestorian bishops and priests at once gave them their cordial co-operation in the prosecution of their missionary labors, regarding them not as rivals, but as coadjutors with them in a necessary work of instruction and improvement among the people. A school was soon projected for educating teachers and NESTORIANS. 567 other native helpers, to be taught by priest Abraham under the supervision of Mr. Perkins. It was commenced on the 18th of Jan., 1836, with seven pupils from the city, and the next day 17 boarding scholars were received from abroad. Among the pupils were three deacons and one priest. It is a singular fact that these new favors conferred upon their Christian sub- jects excited the jealousy of the Mohammedans, who resentfully asked, "Are we to be passed by ?" and to quiet their minds Dr. Grant was obliged to devote a few hours each day to teaching a school of Mussulman boys. In presenting some view of the subsequent history and the success of the mission thus commenced, a topical and not a chronological arrangement will be followed. The subjoined table will show what laborers have been sent from the United States to the mission, who of these laborers have deceased, and who have returned to their native land. Mr. Merrick accompanied Dr. Grant to Tabreez in 1835, to comiBence an experimental mission among the Mohammedans of Persia. He resided some years at Tabreez, but no such promise of use- fulness was found as to warrant the continu- ance of a distinct mission, and in 1841 he re- moved to Oroomiah. In 1845 he returned to the United States. MISSIONARY LABOKERS FKOM THE UNITED STATES WHO HAVE BEEN CONNECTED WITH THE NES- TOKIAN MISSION. p V Rev. Justin Perkins, D.D 1833 Mrs. Charlotte B . Perkins 1833 Asahel Grant, M.D 1835 Mrs. Grant 1836 Rev. James L. Merrick 1335 Rev. Albert L. Halladay 1837 Mrs. HaUaday 183' Rev. William R. Stocking 1837 Mrs. Jerusha E. Stocking 1837 Rev. Willard Jones 1839 Mrs. Jones 1839 Austin H. Wrisht, M.D 1840 Edward Breath (Printer) 1840 Rev. Abel K. Hinsdale 1841 Mrs. Hinsdale 1841 Kev. Colby C. Mitchell 1841 Mrs. Mitchell 1841 Rev. Thomas Laurie 1842 Mrs. Laurie 1842 Rev. David T. Stoddard 1843 Mrs. Stoddard 1848 Miss Fidelia Fisk 1843 Miss Cath'ne E. Myers (Mrs. Wright) 1843 Rev. Joseph G. Cochran. . : 1847 Mrs, Cochran 1847 Miss Mary Su^an Rice 1847 Rev. George W. Coan 1849 Mrs. Coan 1849 Mrs. Sarah A. Breath 1849 Mrs. Sophia D. Stoddard 1861 Rev. Samuel A. Rhea 1861 Miss Martha A. Harris 1851 Rev. Edward H. Crane 1852 Mrs. Crane ; 1852 - 1842 1842 1840 1846 1846 1846 1863 1S63 1845 1846 1847 1843 1843 1841 1846 1848 1841 1841 1843 1848 Object aimed at. — Co'dperation of Ecclesiastics. — From the commencement of the mission there has been reason to hope that pure reli- gion might be revived in the small Nestorian community without seriously disturbing the existing ecclesiastical constitution. The mis- sionaries have not soLight to form a new Chris- tian community, but to bring individuals, both among the ecclesiastics and the common people, to a full and saving knowledge of the truth, hoping that such a change might be brought about by the grace of God as should cause the forsaking of false doctrines, so far as such were held, the laying aside of whatever was super- stitious or unscriptural, and the establishing of a pure church upon existing foundations. It seemed at least best to make the experiment, and to leave the question as to the necessity or propriety of forming new churches to be de- cided by time and providential circumstances. There has been the more reason, and the more encouragement, for pursuing such a course, from the fact that many of the leading ecclesiastics, so far from setting themselves in opposition to the missionaries and to their in- structions, as has been done so generally among the Armenians and the Greeks, have been de- cidedly friendly, and in not a few instances have earnestly cooperated in every effort to elevate and evangelize the people. The four bishops on the plain, Mar Yohannan, Mar Elias, Mar Joseph, and Mar Gabriel, exhibited friend- liness, and a disposition to favor the objects of the mission from the first, and the missionaries early made it an object of special attention to instruct and benefit these and other ecclesias- tics. The four bishops named were placed in the relation of boarding pupils to the mission, and for several years the three first received daily instruction in a theological or Bible class, forming, with some priests and other promising young men, the first class in the seminary. They were also soon employed as native help- ers to the mission, and as early as 1841 Mr. Perkins speaks of some of the ecclesiastics as " enlightened, and we trust really pious." " They not only allow us to preach in their churches, but urge us to do so ; and are for- ward themselves in every good word and work." It is an important fact that through the schools which have been established, almost the entire education of ecclesiastics is now in the hands of the missionaries. British and Russian protection — Kindness of British officials. — The kindness of Sir John Campbell to Mr. Perkins has been already mentioned. In 1835, at the suggestion of the Bt. Hon. Henry Ellis, British Ambassador tc Persia, the missionaries asked and obtained from him English protection, and the ambas- sador and his suite ever extended to them all possible kindness. When the English embassy was withdrawn from Persia, with a prospect of war in 1839, the missionaries applied for protection to the Eussian consul-general at 558 NESTOEIANS. Tabreez, who cheerfully gave them passports, and took other measures to insure their safety, and for many years Bussian protection was extended to them. In 1851, at the suggestion of Mr. Stevens, British Consul at Tabreez, Bri- tish protection was again solicited, and at once granted. The many instances in which Mr. Stevens has manifested the kindest interest in the welfare of the missionaries, and has ren- dered them assistance, can here only be alluded to, but are worthy of most grateful notice, as are also the self-sacrificing and earnest efforts made in behalf of suffering native helpers of the mission daring recent difficulties in the mountains, by Col. Williams, British Oommis- Bioner for settling the boundary between Tur- key and Persia. Persian officers, also, have often manifested much readiness to afford pro- tection and prevent violence and wrong from opposing ecclesiastics, Jesuit or Nestorian, as also at times from rude and abusive Moham- medans. The Press — Translating. — When the mis- sionaries commenced their labors at Oroomiah they at once felt the want of a press and a printer. Very few books were to be found among the people, and these were in a lan- guage not understood. Excepting the Psalms, the mission had discovered in 1838 but one copy of the Old Testament Scriptures, and that was in three or four separate volumes, the property of different individuals. The British and Foreign Bible Society had printed the Gospels in the Nestorian character, but scarcely more than one copy of the Acts and of the Epistles could be found, and none of the Book of Revelations in that character. Much delay, however, was experienced in finding a printer. At last, on the 21st of July, 1840, Mr. Breath sailed from Boston, taking with him an iron press, constructed of so many pieces that it could be transported on horse- back from Trebizond to Oroomiah. He reached Oroomiah, Nov. 17th, and the press was im- mediately put in operation, exciting great in- terest among both Nestorians and Mohamme- dans. 1,600 volumes, and 3,600 tracts, amount- ing in all to 510,400 pages, were reported as having been printed in 1841. In 1843 a new font of type, cut and cast expressly for the mission, modeled after the best Syriao manu- scripts, was forwarded from the United States. The printing, up to the close of the year 1850, had amounted to 6,228,200 pages. Probably more than 2,000,000 of pages have been print- ed since that time. On the 15th of February, 1836, the mis- sionaries commenced the great work of trans- lating the Bible into the modern Syriao, the spoken language of the Nestorians. In 1846 an edition of the New Testament, with the an- cient and the modern Syriac in parallel co- lumns, was carried through the press. Near the close of 1852, the whole Bible was printed in a language which the people could under- stand. The Old Testament has been printed like the New, with the ancient and modern languages in parallel columns, and thus the living and life-giving Word of God is going abroad among the people in an attractive form, and " in their own tongue wherein they were born," though a few years since, that was not a written language. Banyan's Pilgrim's Pro- gress also, Baxter's Saint's Kest, and other valuable religious books are given to the peo- ple. For the last three or four years a month- ly paper, " The Eays of Light," has been pub- lished, containing a great amount and variety of valuable reading matter. Thus a literature has been already created for the Nestorians. Small, indeed, as yet, if we except the Bible, which alone is not small ; but of immense va- lue, and steadily increasing. Schools. — In the mean time the schools estab- lished have been raising up a community, of readers. Mention has already been made ol the opening of a seminary for the education of native teachers and preachers, on the 18th of January, 1836. The next Sabbath the pu- pils requested permission to attend the English worship of the mission, and this they continued to do with much interest. For some years this seminary was, of course, in an incipient state, giving instruction only in the elements of knowledge ; but it had from the first, dear cons, and priests, and bishops among the pu- pils, and was gradually rising in its character as a literary institution. There were 50 pupils in 1838. Early in 1841 the school was re- organized and improved ; the qualifications for admission were raised ; the primary depart- ment was excluded, and a better system of instruction was introduced. The two teachers were " deacons from the mountains," and were " among the best scholars of the nation." The number of pupils was thus for a time dimin- ished, but soon increased to more than the for- mer number. In 1845 it was again entirely re-organized, with the design to " reduce its numljers, make the instruction more systematic and thorough, and exert a stronger religious influence over the pupils ;" and in 1846 it was removed from Oroomiah to Seir, the health retreat of the mission. It has exerted a great influence for good, and has been highly esteem- ed by the people — the desire to obtain admis- sion having been often very great. In 1852, the report gives 40 as the number of students '' of whom 30 are hopefully pious." Eegular instruction in theology is now given to the most advanced class. One of the pupils " is designed to succeed the present bishop of the largest diocese in Oroomiah ; several are from mountain districts, and one from Bootan, in the extreme western part of the field." In March, 1838, a female boarding-school was commenced in the mission premises. A few girls had previously been in the seminarv, and in some village schools, already commenc- ed, but the idea of female education was NESTORIANS. 559 strange to the Nestorians, and until about this time the missionaries had not ventured to commence a school exclusively for girls, fear- ing it might excite prejcdice. Now the Nes- torians had become acquainted with them, had learned to confide in them, and seemed fully prepared to sustain such a measure. The ec- clesiastics connected with their families, were active in recommending it, and the mission- aries at once looked upon this female school, in which there were some 16 girls, as one of the most hopeful departments of their work. Since 1843, this school has been under the care of Miss Fidelia Fisk, from Shelburn, Mass., who has shown herself eminently fitted for the place, and has been eminently useful in it. Miss Rice, from Lincoln, Mass., has been for several years associated with Miss Fisk. Though a few years since, it was a, novelty, and considered as disgraceful to teach Nesto- rian females ; now, " an examination of this female seminary draws together all the princi- pal men and women of the Nestorian commu- nity, who sit and listen with unwearied interest for two days together." There were 42 pupils in 1852, and Mr. Stoddard " doubts whether he ever attended an examination of greater e.xcellence " than that of this institution. Both this and the male seminary have been repeatedly favored with large measures of the special influences of the Holy Spirit. The first village free school of which notice is found in connection with the mission, was commenced about August, 1836, at Ada, the residence of Mar Yoosuph (Joseph) about 15 miles from the city. Three months after it was commenced, Mr. Perkins visited it, and says : " It now numbers about 40 children, and is as well regulated as any school I ever visited." It was attended by girls as well as boys — " a great novelty among the Nesto- rians." This school, and others which began now to be formed, were collected, and taught by those who had been under the instruction of the missionaries in the seminary. In 1837 there were three free schools. In 1841 there were 17, in 16 different villages. The number rapidly increased, and in 1843 there were 40 schools in 36 villages, with 635 male and 128 female pupils, and 56 teachers, of whom 22 were priests .and 26 deacons. In June, 1844, it was judged best, from Circumstances grow- ing out of the opposition of the patriarch to the mission, and other difficulties, to dismiss all the schools, but they were again commenc- ed in October, 1845, in compliance with the earnest wishes of both ecclesiastics and peo- ple. The character of these village free schools has been improving ; the Bible is the prominent text book, and their inflaence is great and most happy. In April, 1851, Mr. Stocking, who had then the superintendence of the schools, reported 45 schools, with 871 pu- pils, of whom 203 were females. The teach- ers, with but few exceptions, had been mem- bers of the seminary ; many of them wore hopefully pious, and all were regarded aa evangelical in sentiment. In June, 1853, the number of schools had increased to 78. About the first of January, 1840, a regular school was commenced for Mussulman boys, aad soon numbered 10 promising boys and young men as pupils, but it does not seem to have been long sustained. Preaching — Native Helpers. — The preach- ing service on the mission premises at Oroomi- ah, on the Sabbath, was attended by the pu- pils of the two seminaries, from the commence- ment of these institutions. The missionaries had preached also extensively in their village schools, during the week, but they were taken quite by surprise, when in February, 1838, Mar Tohannan. requested Mr. Perkins to go into their church every Sabbath and feast days, and preach the G-ospel to the people, stating, that he and other priests had often spoken on the subject, and unanimously desir- ed that he would do so. The invitation was complied with, at first with some reluctance, as they had not supposed that ecclesiastics and people were yet ready for such a measure. — (^Perkins' " Residence in Persia," p. 333.) A regular Sabbath service by the mission- aries, in a Nestorian church, in Oroomiah, does not appear, however, to have been com- menced until March, 1840. (^Missionary He- rald, 1840, p. 493.) At this time, to meet the wishes of such as could not find seats at the mission house, inquiry was made for a private house, in which they might hold a service. But deacons, and priests, and three bishops, who were consulted, all insisted that the ser- vice should be in the church. There would be no jealousy, they said. " Do you think," ask- ed Mar Yohannan, " that we do not know lambs from wolves V The missionaries had before preached at times in different churches in the city and villages, at the request of the officiating bishop or priest ; but now this work seemed fairly commenced, and calls for preach- ing multipled. Within a short time those who were able to use the language, preached usually three times each on the Sabbath, to as many different congregations, in villages, some miles apart. There were 7 regular preaching stations before the close of the year. A great door for usefulness was thus opened, and it has not been closed. The missionaries have entire access to the people on the plain, preaching in their churches, wherever they can go. But the Gospel is now preached among the people not by the missionaries only. When the mission was commenced, the ecclesiastica were not preachers, and their public religious services were not preaching services. But bishops and priests have been pupils in the schools, and bishops and priests have felt the force of truth, — have become new creatures in Christ Jesus, and are now, in some cases, zeal- ous and impressive preachers. And some 560 NBSTOKIANS. young men who have been educated at the Beminary, and have become apparently devoted Christians, have been ordained by the bishops of their church, aad arc thus fully introduced into the work of the ministry. In 1844, five intelligent native preachers aided the mission- aries iu maintaining " preaching, more or less, at a score of places." The patriarch has at times opposed, and some of the bishops, in 1837, prohibited the pious helpers of the mis- sion from preaching in their dioceses ; but, to a great exteut, the whole field is, and has been, open to them, and among them are some who make extensive tours, not ouly on the plain, but in the mountain districts, as zealous and able evangelists. At a meeting of the mis- sion, in September, 1851, a plan was devised, by which it was hoped the Gospel would soon be carried to all the Nestorians of Persia. Tor the month ending January 16, 1852, there were reported 29 places where there had been at least one preaching service each Sabbath, and in several of these places two or three ser- vices. In 13 other villages there had been preaching once or ofteuer within the mouth. Seven of the native helpers of the mission are now regularly employed as preachers, and others, though they have other employment, preach every Sabbath, and at other times. " The line of demarcation between an evange- lically reformed church and a mere dead Chris- tianity, is becoming more and more distinct." Mar Yohaunan boldly discards many customs of the church, and seems disposed, as do the native helpers of the mission and those who have been educated in the schools, to go on with the work of reformation. Opposition from Papists and the Patriarch. — The missionaries have not prosecuted their work without meeting with obstacles and trials, as well as with encouragements. Jesu- its and others of the Eomish church, whose missionaries have so often, for many centuries, tried to induce the Nestorians to come under allegiance to tlie pope, were not idle after the American missionaries commenced their labors. In 1837, a Roman Catholic bishop, from Sal- mas, came to Oroomiah, professing to have a large sum of money to aid Nestorians who would join his church. Other emissaries of Eome followed, and earnest efforts were made to undermine the influence of the mission, and secure among the people the ascendancy of popery. Such, however, were the folly and rashness of the proceedings of French J esuits among the Armenians of Isfahan and Tabreez, that, in 1842, they were expelled from Persia, and au order was passed by the government, prohibiting all proselyting from one Christian sect to another. Remaining quiet for a while, some of the Jesuits soon made their way to the province of Oroomiah, and recommenced their proselyting career among the Nestorians, with even greater zeal and assurance than they had before used, resorting to the most uupriu- cipled and hazardous expedients, which led to their second expulsion. The French govera- ment sent an envoy to Persia to obtain per- mission for them to return. Failing in this, every effort was made to procure the banish- ment of the American missionaries, on the ground that they, too, were violating the law, in making proselytes. It seemed necessary that Messrs. Perkins and Stocking should go to Teheran, in November, 1844, to counteract the influence which was exerted ; and, for a considerable time, much solicitude was felt ; but, aided by the kind offices of the Russian ambassador, the missionaries and their friends satisfied the government that the charges against them were not true, and they were permitted to remain. In 1851, an edict of toleration was promulgated by the Persian government, granting equal protection to all Christian subjects, and permitting them to change their religion or denomination at their pleasure. Of course, the Papists are again active, and will do what they can. It is as- cribed by the people to the influence of the mission, that their efforts have been, as yet, so unsuccessful, and, as they have now truth, and light, and piety, to meet, it is not to be sup- posed that they can now do what they might once have done. The Nestorian patriarch. Mar Shimon, re- siding in a region almost wholly inaccessible, had never been visited by any of the mission- aries until Dr. Grant penetrated the mountain districts in 1839. He was cordially received, and was, for more than a month, the guest of the patriarch, who then urged that schools and missionary labor should be commenced in the mountains. Up to this time, the Nestori- ans of Koordistan had been, in their mountain fastnesses, as they were called, independent ; but in 1843, determined hostilities were com- menced against them by Koordish chiefs, en- couraged by the Turks, which resulted, after some months of terrible warfare, in their en- tire subjugation. The patriarch fled to Mosul, and some of his brothers escaped to Oroomiah. Here, in necessitous circumstances, they threw themselves upon the hospitality of the mission- aries, and when the hospitality afforded was more limited than were their desires, and they were informed that no more could be done for them, they attempted to coerce by opposition. In the mean time, an influence hostile to the mission -had been successfully exerted on the patriarch himself at Mosul, and he sustained his brothers in their course. By such influ- ences, some of the higher ecclesiastics at Oroo- miah were led also into more or less decided opposition, for a time. In June, 1844, it was thought best, in view of the difSculties thus brought about, to dismiss all the village schools. As the male seminary needed re-or- ganization, the necessity for dismissing this also was not so much regretted ; but when, in the course of the summer, it became necessarv. NESTORIANS. 561 as was then supposed, to disband the female seminary, " the -tears and sobs of the pupils told, more expressively than language could have done, the bitterness of their hearts." The missionaries could not restrain their tears, and the stoutest Nestorians who were standing by were melted. Both seminaries were, how- ever, soon reopened. Ecclesiastics and others, who were for a time led to oppose by the par triarch and his family, were again cooperating with the mission with apparent cordiality in October of this year, (1844,) and not long after, the brothers of the patriarch were them- selves apparently wishing to regain their standing with the missionaries. In June, 1847, the patriarch, distrusting the motives of the Turkish government, by which he had been invited to visit Constantinople, fled from Mosul to Oroomiah. Two of his brothers then there. Deacon Isaac and Deacon Dunka, had now been. Deacon Isaac especially, for two years, apparently decided friends of the mission, and for some months the patriarch himself put on the appearance of friendliness ; but in April, 1848, he took the stand of open and decided opposition. ISTot satisfied to use persuasion only, and not content with ecclesi- astical interdicts, he employed the most abusive language towards the pious Nestorians, threat- ening imprisonment and the bastinado. His servants and Koords, instigated by him, re- sorted to violence ; and some of the pious native helpers of the mission were cruelly abused. During these troubles, Mr. Stevens, the British consul at Tabreez, exerted himself in the most efficient manner for the protection of the mission. Through his influence mainly, the Persian government interfered decidedly, in September, to put a stop to the violence of the patriarch and his most active instruments. In these difficulties, the prominent Nestorian ecclesiastics did not hesitate to oppose the course of their own patriarch, the head of their church, giving their sympathy and cO' operation to the mission. In 1849 the patri- arch returned to the mountains. There he has remained, sometimes making professions of friendship ; but instigating, probably, to the opposition which has been made to recent efforts to plant a permanent missionary station in the mountain district of Gawar. His influ- ence, especially with the Nestorians of the plain, has been greatly diminished, as the influ- ence of the truth has increased among the people. Revivals. — In January, 1844, this mission was favored with some tokens of the special presence of the Holy Spirit. A few, mostly young men of promise, who had long been members of the seminary, or in some way con- nected with the mission, gave cheering evi- dtece that they had passed from death to life. In the summer of 1845 there was an interest- ing state of religious feeling at Geog Tapa, the largest Nestorian village on the plain, which 36 has since been greatly favored. The first great revival, however, commenced in Jan- uary, 1846. The first instances of hopeful conversion were in the female seminary, but in a short time, many in both seminaries were inquiring what they should do to be saved. The feeling became general and very deep, continuing for many months in the seminaries and extending to many not connected with these institutions. John and Moses, two young men, native helpers of the mission, labored with deep interest and much solicitude among the people of Geog Tapa, of which place it was said in March, by Dr. Perkins, " a great work in the conversion of souls is in progress." Not far from 50 persons in this village, besides pupils in the two seminaries from the village, were hopeful subjects of renewing grace during the progress of this- work. In the two seminaries there were believed to be also now about 50 truly pious youth, many of whom manifested great interest in efforts for the conversion of others. In the village of Seir, where the male seminary was located, there was much interest, and within a few months it was stated that hopefully pious persons were to be found in not less than eleven villages on the' plain. The work ex- tended also, in some measure, to the mountain districts. Deacon Guergis, " an untamed mountaineer," came to visit his daughter, who had become hopefully a Christian in the female seminary, and was soon himself bowing with penitence and faith, before the cross of Christ- Returning to his mountain home, he exerted at once a most happy influence. Others from the mountains were hopefully converted at Oroomiah, and during the year several excur- sions were made in mountain districts, by members of the mission and native helpers ; especially " the young evangelist, John," who made extensive missionary tours, with happy results. Thus did light break in soon after tha difficulties with the papists and with the brothers of the patriarch; "whose powerful influences from without and from within had combined to embarrass, and, if possible, to destroy tha mission." Eight months after the commence- ment of this work, not less than 150 hopeful converts in all wera reckoned, including seve- ral ecclesiastics. Early in 1847, the female seminary again experienced a work of grace, when it was hoped that 9 others of the pupils were " born again." Again, in 1849, follow- ing the night of darkness occasioned by the bitter opposition of the patriarch in 1848, a precious revival was experienced, commencing, as in 1846, in the two seminaries in January, and extending, as then, to Geog Tapa and many other Nestoi'ian villages. During this work. Mar Tohannan and Deacon Isaac, the friendly brother of the patriarch before men- tioned, were both, it was hoped, truly born of God. Another work of grace was enjoyed in 1850, commencing, as before, in the seminaries 562 NESTORIANS. and extending itself abroad. Though not as powerful as the revival of the previous year, it had all the marks of a true work of the Spirit, and quite a number, before impenitent, were hopefully renewed, while Christians were greatly quickened. In 1851, also, there were indications of the special presence of the Spirit at about the same period ; and in March, 1853, Dr. Perkins speaks of a " pre- cious refreshing from the presence of the Lord, •which has been in delightful progress in our male seminary, and in the village of Seir, dur- ing most of the past month." Few modern missions have been more favored with such tokens of God's presence, than this mission to the Nestorians. A few years since, none could be found among the people who gave evidence of piety ; now, hundreds are heirs of the grace of life. Efforts for the Mountain Nestorians. — In 1837 the Prudential Committee of the Ameri- can Board said, in their annual report, " The Committee look with great interest to the day when a branch of this mission shall exist among the independent Nestorians. Among these fierce mountaineers the life of the mis- sionary miglit be in some peril, but sanctified by grace they would make excellent soldiers of the cross." It having become obvious that Dr. Grant could not endure the climate of Oroomiah, instructions were sent to him to commence, if possible, a station on the western side of the Koordish mountains, in the hope that from there access might be gained to the mountains themselves. These instructions he received in Feb. 1839, about one month after he had been called to bury his wife. His own wish was to attempt to enter the mountains from Persia ; but overruled in this he started on the first of April for ErzrCim, where he ex- pected to meet Mr. Homes, of the Armenian mission, who was to be his temporary associ- ate. Learning that Mr. Homes would not meet him at Krzrum, he went to Constantino- ple, and there finding that Mr. H. could not at oijce be spared from that station, with cha- racteristic energy he proceeded alone to Meso- potamia, it being understood that he should remain at or near Diarbekir until his associate should join him. He reached Diarbekir May 30, and " found the public mind in a state of suspense and expectation, like the calm which precedes an overwhelming storm." The Turk- ish army had been defeated by the Koords, who were now in a state of commotion, and a reign of violence and anarchy at once com- menced. He was joined by Mr. Homes on the 3d of July, and they proceeded together to Mardin. Here they were in great danger, and once very narrowly escaped with their lives, during a popular tumult. Finding themselves beset with dangers, and learning also that there were no Nestorians on the west side of the mountains, as there seemed hardly any hope of doing good in that vicinity, alter remaining two months, Mr. Homes escaped in disguise to Diarbekir, and returned to Constantinople. Dr. Grant resolved to spare no effort to obtain access to the mountain tribes, and proceeded to Mosul, 200 miles distant on the Tigris, where he arrived Sept. 20. Here he found the conn- try more quiet. On the 7th of October he left the city, and in a few days was in the heart of the mountain region of Central Koordistan. Riding a hardy mule, and when even a mule could not traverse the steep and broken moun- tains, going on foot, he visited the Nestorians, by whom he was cordially received ; spent a month with the patriarch, and proceeded through the country of the Hakary Koords, by way of Salmas, to Oroomiah, where he arrived on the 7th of December. He was now pre- pared to urge the immediate commencement of missionary effort in the mountains, and re- gretted exceedingly that he could not at once enter upon labors there. In May, 1840, he again crossed the mountains with his little son, four years of age, accompanied by Mar Y ohan- nan and Mar Yoosuph, on his way to the United States. He reached Boston Oct. 3. January 18, 1841, Eev. Messrs. Hinsdale and Mitchell, with their wives, sailed from Boston for the field among the then indepen- dent Nestorians. Dr. Grant followed on the 1st of April, hoping to overtake them. Learn- ing at Constantinople that they would proba- bly be detained at Aleppo by the disturbed state of the country on the route which they had designed to take, he determined to go by way of Trebizond and Erzrum. From Erz- rflm he went to Van, and from there took the shortest route to the country of the Nestori- ans, and on the 8th of July he was at Jular merk, the residence of the patriarch, by whom he was again cordially received. Messrs. Hinsdale and Mitchell left Aleppo on the 28th of May, to go by way of Diarbekir and Mar- din to Mosul. On the journey, which was too late in the season for traversing the hot plains of Mesopotamia, Mr. Mitchell was attacked with a fever and died on the 27th of June. Mrs. Mitchell, overcome by fatigue and grief, also died on the 12th of July, a few days after reaching Mosul. Mr. and Mrs. Hinsdale both suffered much from fatigue, watching, and ex- posure, and greatly needed assistance. Dr. Grant, hearing of these trying circumstances, hastened to Mosul, where his arrival, on the 25th of August, was most seasonable, as Mr. Hinsdale was then suffering from a dangerous relapse of fever. In the spring of 1842, hostilities having arisen between the Turks and the Koords of Amadieh, it was not safe to attempt going into the mountains. Dr. Grant however passed to Oroomiah by way of Bavendoose. Mr. Stocking started to go with him from Oroo- miah to the mountains, but was taken sick at Salmas, on the way, and obliged to return. Dr. Grant, however, having obtained assurance NESTORIANS. 563 of protection from the Hakary cliiefs, the con- tideiice of one of whom, Nooroolah Bey, he had gained three years before, for the fourth time determined to traverse the wild fastnesses of Koordistan, without a missionary associate, but accompanied by Mar Toosuph. Finding the patriarch at an encampment of one of the maleics of Tyary, where he had taken refuge, on a mountain summit overlooking the Zab, they descended together to Ashita, where arrange- ments were made for a missionary station. The war on the west side of the mountains being ended, Mr. Hinsdale left Mosul the last of September, and arrived at Ashita in ten days, where he was welcomed by the people with all cordiality. In November he returned to "Mosul, and was soon taken sick of typhus fever. Dr. Grant came to his relief, but on the 26th of December he rested from his labors. Mr. and Mrs. Laurie left the United States for this mission July 29th, 1842, and reached Mosul November 11th. Eemaining at Mosul for the winter, in April, 1843, Messrs. Laurie and Grant went to the new station at Ashita, where it was hoped a mission-house would be in readiness for the removal of the females in June. A school was opened, with 20 pupils, and the patriarch seemed as cordial as ever. Mr. Laurie's impressions in regard to the field as one for present cultivation, were not, how- ever, altogether favorable. About this time it became obvious that the Turkish government was not willing that mea- sures should just then be taken to elevate the mountain Nestorians, as they wished to bring them under subjection to the Sultan. At least they were not willing to grant firmans, en- gaging the protection of the government, to other laborers who were on their way to the field, if they were going as missionaries to this people. A storm was gathering which soon burst upon the poor Nestorians with terrible effect. The Koords commenced hostilities in June. Dr. Grant fearlessly visited the hostile chiefs, Bader Khan Bey of the Buhtan Koords, and Nooroolah Bey, or Noor Ali Bey, of the Hakary Koords, who made no secret of their designs, but promised protection to the mission property at Ashita. The scenes which now commenced, and continued with intervals of comparative quiet for several months, were fearful in the extreme. Thousands of the Nes- torians, men, women and children, were mas- sacred, often with horrible tortures ; others were taken to a terrible captivity, and others fled. Their villages were utterly, destroyed, and what remained of the people in central Koordistan were entirely subdued, and reduced to a state of yet deeper poverty and wretched- ness than they had known before. The devoted Dr. Grant, who had so often gone, as few men could have done with impu- nity, and gaining favor, among wild mountain- eers and savage Koords, was now about to rest from his labors. He died at Mosul, on the 24th of April, 1844. Mrs. Laurie had pre- ceded him to the grave, in Dec. 1843. Doctor Azariah Smith joined the company at Mosul, in March, 1844, and the following summer Messrs. Laurie and Smith once more explored the mountain district of Tyary, looking upon a scene of painful desolation. The Prudential Committee, in view of all the discouraging circumstances of the case, now forwarded defi- nite instructions to discontinue this branch of the Nestorian mission, and in October the three who remained of the missionary company left Mosul ; Dr. Smith and Mrs. Hinsdale to join the mission to the Armenians, and Mr. Laurie, the Syrian mission. Good had been done at Mosul, and in 1849 missionary opera- tions were resumed there, under favorable cir- cumstances, but not with special reference to the Nestorians. That city is now the centre of what is called the Assyrian mission. (See 3Iosid.) In May, 1846, Dr. Wright, from Oroomiah, visited Bader Khan Bey, at the request of the emir himself, who wished the benefit of his professional services. He was accompanied by Mr. Breath and the Nestorian deacon Tamu. They found the Nestorians in the districts which had been ravaged, again slowly collect- ing flocks and herds and resuming the cultiva- tion of the soil ; but another scene of slaughter and rapine from the Koords soon followed, re- ducing them again to deep destitution. At length, in 1847, the Turks conquered the Koords and garrisoned the mountains, subjects ing both Koords and Nestorians to taxation. Repeated excursions have been made during the past few years, to some of the mountain districts, by the missionaries at Oroomiah, and more frequently and more extensively by some of the devoted Nestorian helpers of the mis- sion, some of whom are natives of these dis- tricts. In 1851, a station was taken by Messrs. Coan and Rhea, with three native help- ers, in the district of Gawar, among the moun- tains, about 70 miles N. W. from Oroomiah. Much opposition has been experienced, and unwearied efforts have been made to drive them away, instigated, doubtless, by those high in office in the Nestorian church, with the patriarch at their head, and too willingly joined in by the local Turkish authorities. Deacon Tamu, one of the native helpers, upon an utterly groundless charge of murder, was seized in July, 1852, and kept a prisoner at Van, until Septemlser, 1853. His Christian deportment during all his trials, is worthy of great praise. The station has been maintain- ed with increasing promise of usefulness ; and in the autumn of 1853, Messrs. Coan and Rhea made a preaching tour among the Nes- torians of Koordistan, going to Mosul, and visiting Ashita, the place where a station was commenced in 1843. They urge that effort should now be again commenced, without de- lay, on the west side of the mountains, by at 664 NESTORIANS. least two missionaries, believing tliat the field is now open, and that if it be not occupied, the enemy, from Eome, will sow tares. — See Perkins' " Residence in Persia ;" Grant's " Nestorians, or the Lost Tribes;" Laurie's " Dr. Grant and the Mountain Nestmians ;" The Reports of the A. B. 0. F. M., and the 31is- sionary Herald. — Eet. I. E. Worcester. TABULAR VIEW. STATIONS AND OUT-STATIONS. T. p 6 2 8 I 1 ■I 10 1 11 si s 7 2 1 1 11 '^ 10 2 12 •r; ■§ 2 80 1 2 76 78 •p. GeogTapa in.w Totals... 1038 PRESENT STATE AND FUTURE PROSPECTS OF THE MISSION. LETTER FROM REV. DR. PERKINS. Oroomiah, May 16, 1854. My dear Sir : — Your favor of January 1 was received a few days ago. I had before seen notices of your contemplated enterprise, and rejoiced in view of it. The work you propose is exceedingly desirable and import- ant, and judging from the fruits of your pen, which I have from time to time been so much favored as to receive, through our common friends, Mr. and Mrs. , I am happy in the belief that this great undertaking is fortu- nate in having fallen into your hands. With all my heart, I wish you the fullest success. Tou request me to give you a sketch of the present aspect of our field and mission. This I will now briefly do with pleasure ; but owing to the pressure of missionary duties, it must be very brief; which, however, is the less to be regretted, as our Eeports to the Prudential Committee of our Board, to which you doubt- less have access, have at all times been ample. Our mission Press has given to the Nesto- rians the entire Bible, in both the ancient and modern Syriac ; and an edition of the New Testament, in the modern language only, is just completed. Into this language, which, as you will recollect, was first reduced to writing by our mission, we have also introduced many valuable books besides the Holy Scriptures, as Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress, Baxter's Saint's Eest, the Dairyman's Daughter, the Young Cottager, the Shepherd of Salisbury Plain, and other tracts, and many school books ; and we are now printing a third edi- tion of our hymn book, the first edition of which consisted of only four hymns, attached to a small spelling book, while the present edi- tion contains about two hundred hymns. Our monthly periodical, entitled " The Rays of Light," holds steadily on its way, having en- tered on its fifth year. It is an exceedingly interesting auxiliary in our schools and among the people, each monthly number embracing a spice of matter in the various departments of religion, education, science, missionary intelli- gence, juvenile instruction, miscellanies, and poetry. It is impossible for any statement or descrip- tion to convey an adequate impression of the blessed influence of the press among this peo- ple, in whose vernacular tongue, twenty-one years ago, not a syllable of printed or written matter existed. Passing from the press to our schools, we meet with corresponding phenomena. Where but a single small school existed, and that not worthy of the name, when our mission was commenced, we have had more than seventy village schools in operation, during the past winter ; differing, of course, in the compara- tive competency and fidelity of their teachers, and corresponding progress of the pupils, but all contributing to multiply readers of the Holy Scriptures and other good books, and operating as important centres of evangelical light and influence. Among our most interesting and promising labors are those of our male and female semi- naries — the former under the care of Messrs. Stoddard and Cochran, and the latter under the care of Misses Fisk and Eioe. I do not believe these two institutions of learning are surpassed, in the order, industry, and improve- ment of the pupils, and especially in their re- ligious training, by any seminaries on the face of the globe. They each contain about forty- five pupils, the present year, the most of whom are hopefully pious. The male seminary is soon to graduate a class of twenty, the largest class that has ever left it at one time. The in- fluence of the pious pupils and graduates of both these seminaries, on their people, is alike blessed and incalculable. During the few past years, Sabbath-schools have been multipled among the Nestorians, and with very happy efi'ect. In these schools many adults have learned to read, and thus been qualified to go right to the fountain of God's word, for themselves, and draw from thence the waters of salvation. Here, as else- where, the Sabbath-school is found to be a very efficient and precious instrumentality in the diffusion of Scripture knowledge, and in preparing the minds and hearts of men for the saving work of the Holy Spirit. Last in order of means employed, but first in importance, I may mention the preaching of the Gospel. Under all the pressure of our other arduous labors, we endeavor to keep fresh in mind the cardinal truth in the work of missions, that it hath pleased God, by the fool- ishness of preaching, to save them that be- lieve. 'The clerical members of our mission, unless sick, or otherwise providentially pre- vented, preach at least twice on the Sabbath, NESTOEIANS. 565 or conduct religious services, tantamount to preacliing, either at the stations or abroad among the villages, and more or less during the week. And we have now many able and faithful Nestorian fellow-laborers, from Mar Yohannan and Mar Elias, down to graduates of our seminary, engaged in the same way, some of them itinerating, and others at out- stations. And few are the Nestorians in Per- sia who do not thus have the Gospel brought to their villages, if not to their doors, at fre- quent intervals, a great many of them every Sabbath, and hundreds every day. The pious Nestorians are also doing some- thing in the line of missionary effort. For several successive years they have united with us in sending Nestorian missionaries to the district of Bootan, on the river Tigris, about 300 miles westward from Oroomiah. To give a missionary character to this ancient church, once so celebrated for its missionary efforts, has ever been the strong desire of our hearts ; and it possesses good materials for that pur- pose. r«ut while Paul may plant and Apollos water, it is Gfod who giveth the increase. Tou have doubtless been made familiar with the unspeakably precious revivals with which our tield has been graciously visited in former years. The present year, the Lord has again mercifully visited this missionary vine. The recent work of grace here has been more quiet in its progress than some previous revivals ; but I believe not less pure and pervading in its influence, nor less hopeful in its results. A precious harvest has thus been gathered, the present year, in our two seminaries, in the large village of Geog Tapa, and to some ex- tent in smaller villages. This refreshing from the presence of the Lord is the more interesting at this time, from the ominous political aspects that lower in these Eastern lands. We have in this visita^ tion a most comforting pledge that God has not forgotten to be gracious to our Zion, and that he will not forsake his missionary ser- vants and the holy cause in which they are engaged, " though the earth be removed, and the mountains be carried into the midst of the sea." Under the operation of these various mis- sionary means, and especially under the re- peated showers of heavenly grace with which our field has been visited, it would be strange if evangelical light and truth were not making rapid progress among the Nestorians. Such is the fact ; and the result is that the pious, and many of the enlightened who are not pious, are casting off the senseless and unscrip- tural doctrines and practices with which their worship had been more or less encumbered, and rapidly verging ■ toward the Gospel stand- ard. Hitherto we have, as you are aware, la- bored in the Nestorian church without " let or hindrance." How long we shall continue thus to labor in the church, we still leave for the Lord to decide, ever endeavoring carefully to watch and implicitly to follow the guidance of his hand. The members of our mission are all severely worked. It cannot be otherwise ; but eight in number, as we are, with the great amount of labor we have constantly on our hands, in the departments of preparing matter for the press, printing, education, and preaching the Gospel. We need more reapers, and the har- vest must suffer for the want of them, especial- ly as the vigor of youth and manhood is departing from some of us. Among the obstacles to the progress of the Gospel here, the efforts of the wily French Papists to lead astray the Nestorians should be mentioned as the most serious. No means are too low or too iniquitous for them to adopt ; and among an ignorant and corrupt people, it would be strange if such moans and motives, constantly pursued, and shamelessly and dog- gedly urged on their mercenary feelings, in their low state of morals, did not meet with a measure of success. In view of the corrupt- ing and destructive, efforts of these unprinci- pled emissaries of Eome, we often feel like uniting our cry with that of the witnesses under the altar, " Lord, how long ?" Our mission station in the wild Koordish mountains is manfully occupied by Messrs. Rhea and Crane. They greatly need the ser- vices and the influence of a physician in that self-denying field. Their labors are gradually becoming more and more extended in those dark regions, and we have every reason to hope that the day is not distant when the handful of corn thus lodged in the top of the mountains shall shake like Lebanon ; the light there kindled, mingling with that rising from the plain, and both unitedly blazing upward and onward to aid in the illumination of be- nighted Central Asia. I have alluded to the warlike aspects in eastern lands. As yet, Persia perseveres in refusing to declare war against Turkey, though long and strongly urged to do so ; and we hope that, in the good provid^ce of God, the Shah will continue to maintain this neu- tral ground. Should there be a rupture be- tween Turkey and Persia, our position would of course be disturbed, and more or less un- safe, near as we are situated to the boundary of these two empires, and that boundary in- fested with hordes of bloody Koords. But it is always safe to trust in the Lord. We know that the cause of missions is infinitely dearer to him than it can be to us, and we will trust that He who rides on the whirlwind will direct the storm. I am, dear sir, with much respect, very truly yours, J. Peekins. NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SO- CIETY : The Netherlands Missionary Society was established in December, ] 797, at Rotter- dam, through, the instrumentality of Dr. Van- 566 NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SOCIETY. der Kemp. This remarkable man, after his appointment by the Loudon Missionary Society to South Africa, visited his native country to settle his affairs. There he translated into Dutch and published an address of the direc- tors of the London Missionary Society to the religious people of Holland, which led eventu- ally to the establishment of the " Netherlands Missionary Society." The founders of the soci- ety having been principally ministers and inhabitants of Eotterdam, the chief seat of the Netherlands Missionary Society has re- mained at that place. The members of the society belong principally to the established church, which is Presbyterian in its form of government, and Calvinistic in its doctrine. Those ministers who have imbibed Neologiau sentiments, take scarcely any interest in it, nor in anything connected with missionary work, thereby confirming the often-made ob- servation, that the orthodox, evangelical faith is that which alone produces true and disinter- ested love to God and zeal for his glory, and prompts men to exert themselves actively and perseveringly in promoting the spiritual and eternal welfare of their fellow-creatures. The General Synod, however, of the Dutch Church has no control over the missionaries nor over the funds collected for missionary undertak- ings. But all the missionaries sent out by the society are examined and ordained at the Hague by a committee of ministers appointed for that purpose by the General Synod from among its members. The parish churches are everywhere freely granted for missionary meet- ings and other missionary purposes. The so- ciety is supported by regular monthly and annual subscriptions, and by donations and legacies ; but no list of subscribers is ever published. The principal supporters of the society belong to the poorer and middle class- es ; few of the great and wealthy being found willing to assist the good cause. A body of directors, both lay and clerical, is annually chosen from among the subscribers, who man- age the affairs of the society. _ Wherever there are clergymen members of the society, t^e monthly prayer-meeting on the first Monday of the month is publicly and regularly held in the parish churches. In some places it is very well attended, 1,000 and even 2,000 sometimes being present in the large towns. The directors publish monthly a report of the most interesting missionary events which have come to their knowledge during the month, which is always read at the meeting, the ofBciating minister interspersing it with suitable remarks. The annual general meeting takes place in July, and is held in the Cathedral Church of Eotterdam, which can accommodate between three and four thousand people, and is gener- ally filled on the occasion. Pious laymen and clergymen from almost every part of Holland attend. A report of the proceedings of the year is read and a missionary sermon preached ; but speeches are never made. The society has its foreign secretary, who corresponds with the missionaries on official topics. But, in addition to this, every one of the leading directors chooses one of the mis- sionaries he may like best, and becomes his particular and regular correspondent, and also his advocate and that of his station at the Board. This arrangement has proved very useful to the Netherlands Missionary Society, and most advantageous both to the directors and the missionaries. The society has a col- lege of its own, at Eotterdam, for the instruc- tion, theological and scientific, of the candidates for the missionary work. Of these, the small- est proportion generally are Dutch, whilst the greater number are Germans and Swiss. At first the funds of the society were too small to admit of its sending missionaries to foreign lands, and that it might not be idle, various plans were formed and carried into execution for doing good at home, especially by the pub- lication and distribution of religious books, the establishment of Sunday-schools, visiting pri- sons and hospitals, and assisting some congre- gations to sustain ministers. In such courses of labor the society went on till the year 1800, when they began to hope they might enter on the field toward which their eye was originally turned. In a short time their funds increased rapidly. Numbers of young men also ofii^red their ser- vices as missionaries, several of whom after having gone through a proper course of instruc- tion, were ready to occupy any field that might be pointed out to them in the heathen world. The political circumstances of the country, the subjugation of Holland by France with the con- sequent loss of its colonies, rendered it imprac- ticable for the directors to send these young men abroad themselves ; they therefore entered into a friendly agreement with the London Missionary Society, which engaged to send them forth under its auspices, and selected first South Africa as the most suitable sphere for them, owing chiefly to their being acquainted with the Dutch, which language is generally » understood and spoken by the Hottentots and other tribes. For many years afterwards, nearly all the missionaries whom the London Missionary Society sent to that part of the world, were young men they had obtained from Holland. In 1804 the London Missionary Society sent Messrs. Vos, Erhardt, and Palm, three mission- aries transferred to them by the Netherlands Missionary Society, to the island of Ceylon, encouraged by the accounts they had received of the vast numbers of natives who professed themselves Christians, but who were now in a great measure destitute of religious instruction. The first-named of these missionaries was greatly thwarted in his efforts among the natives by the English government, instigated it is said by the NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 567 Dutoli consistory of tue island whom he had offended by his faithfulness and zeal. In consequence, he was soon compelled to leave the country. Messrs. Palm and Erhardt con- tinued at Ceylon until their death, which hap- pened several years ago, and were successfully employed in the superintendence of schools and the pastoral care of two churches to which they had been appoiated by government. It does not seem that they were able to accomplish much among the heathen. About the year 1812, the directors of the Nethei'lands Missionary Society, anxious to exert themselves for the benefit of the former Dutch settlements in the Bast, transferred again for that purpose three missionaries to the Lon- don Missionary Society ; for Holland being as yet under French rule, and Java and the Bast^ ern Islands being occupied by the British, it was not practicable for the Netherlands Soci- ety then to undertake that mission directly. These three missionaries were superior men and thoroughly qualified for their work. They were the Rev. Messrs. Kam, Supper, and Bruck- ner. These brethren were at the outset of their career exposed to considerable difBculties and dangers ; for the French government hav- ing strictly prohibited their leaving the country for England, they were compelled 'to assume the attire of ti-aveling mechanics, and in this disguise, succeeded, after having had many narrow escapes from the French gendarmes,, to reach Christiana in Norway, from whence they embarked for London. This place they left for Java in the commencement of 1813. On their arrival at Batavia they separated, Mr. Supper having been appointed to that capital, Mr. Bruckner to Samarang, and Mr. Kam to the Molucca islands. Mr. Supper died not long after his arrival, and Mr. Bruckner, (who is still living and actively employed in the translation of the Scriptures and other missionary duties,) joined the Baptist Mission- ary Society. Mr. Kam fixed his residence at Amboyna. and met there what his heart so greatly longed for — a most extensive field of labor. There are in the Eastern Archipelago thousands of Malay native converts who embraced Chris- tianity during the dominion and by the exer- tions of the old Dutch East India Company. In propagating Christianity in those parts, there is nothing which the Dutch aimed more at than to furnish the inhabitants with the Holy Scriptures. As early as 1733, the whole Bible in Malay and several parts of the sacred writings in other dialects of the East, were translated and published by order, and at the expense of the Dutch government, and widely disseminated throughout the islands. It is true, however, that the best means to promote the- conversion of the natives, were not always used, nor the best motives always held out, neither was sufficient caution always exercised in receiving candidates into the church. In 1814, Holland having resumed its inde- pendence, and received back its colonies, the directors of the Netherlands Missionary Soci- ety deemed it time to pursue operations for the future, directly, and without the interven- tion of other societies. They placed their Missionary Seminary upon a more regular foot- ing, and in 1819 sent out five young men trained in it to join Mr. Kam, who meanwhile had been appointed by the Netherlands Mis- sionary Society one of its foreign directors. These young men, after having obtained some knowledge of the native language at Amboyna, were placed in various islands, as Celebes, Ceram, Teruate, Banda and Timor, and have been since from time to time reinforced by fresh arrivals of laborers from Holland, the Netherlands Society viewing at present that part of the world as its principal sphere of action. In July, 1833, the zealous missionary Kam died, at the age of sixty-three years, from over exertion, occasioned by an extensive mission- ary tour he had made. He was a most active and devoted servant of the Lord. Until his death, he continued twice or thrice in the year, in a small brig of his own, which he managed himself with the assistance of a few native lascars, to travel in that burning clime for several months together, from island to island, exposed to storms and dangers of vari- ous kinds. On such occasions, he often added to his duties of a preacher of the Gospel those of a peace-maker among the native tribes, and was the means of preventing much bloodshed. As Schwartz had been on the continent of In- dia by the British government, so was he fre- quently employed by the Netherlands govern- ment in allaying disturbances and quelling rising rebellions among their Malay subjects, in which endeavors he seldom failed. His judicious views of things, good temper, perfect integrity, and the holiness of his life, rendered him greatly respected by the chiefs of the Eastr ern Islands, and made the humble missionary a far more successful instrument in maintain- ing peace among them, than large bodies of troops could ever have been. The Netherlands Society twenty-five or thir- ty years ago, made an attempt to contribute to the evangelization of the Chinese, and sent out the celebrated Mr. Gutzlaff and some other missionaries, for that express purpose. In the year 1822, the Netherlands Society sent a missionary (the Kev. Mr. Vix,) to the Dutch colony of Surinam, in Guiana, who has labored there ever since (not without fruity among the negro slave population. His church amounts to about 700 members. The society has another missionary in the West Indies, stationed at the island of Curaqao, who is em- ployed much like Mr. Vix. In 1820, the late Dr. Vos, being on a visit to Holland, called the attention of the director to the destitute state of the Hindoos in a spir- itual point of view, upon which they resolvedl 5G8 NEVIS— NEW BRUNSWICK. oa commencing two missions in tliese parts, one at Cliinsurah in Bengal, and the other at Pulicat on the coast of Coromandel, both of which places belonged then to the Dutch government. Eev. A. F. Lacroix was appointed to the for- mer, and the Rev. Mr. Kindlinger, a most pious and devoted man, who, up to his twenty-fourth year had been a bigoted Roman Catholic, to the latter. Dr. Vos and G. Herklots, Esq., of Chiusurah, had, previous to their departure from Holland, been elected foreign directors of the society. Mr. Kindlinger oh his arrival at the station, had great difficulties to contend with on ac- count of the exceedingly degraded state of the native Christians, great numbers of whom he met at Pulicat and the vicinity. These had embraced Christianity through the instrumen- tality of the old Grerman missionaries who had preceded Schwartz and had been more than a quarter of a century without teachers and with- out instraction. By patient endeavors, how- ever, he succeeded ia course of time in collect- ing a numerous and regular congregation, es- tablished several schools, and spent much of his time in preaching to the heathen. In 1823, he was joined by two other laborers from Hol- land, the Rev. Messi-s. Irion and Winckler, the former of whom remained with him at Pulicat, and the latter was stationed at Sadras, a small Dutch settlement near the seven pagodas be- tween Madras and Pondicherry. In 1825, the Dutch settlements on the conti- nent of India having been ceded to the British government in exchange for its possessions on the island of Sumatra, the directors of the Netherlands Society informed their mission- aries that circumstances would not permit them to continue their missions in those settle- ments, and left them free either to proceed to the Eastern Archipelago to join their brethren there — or, if they preferred, to connect them- selves with any one of the English societies laboring in India. All four, having already at the expense of much time and labor, attain- ed a knowledge of the native languages and the native customs and habits, felt unwilling to relinquish so great an advantage, and there- fore deemed it their duty to accept of the lat- ter proposal ; in consequence of which Messrs. Kindlinger and Winckler joined the Church Missionary Society. Mr. Irion joined the Society for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign Paris ; and Mr. Lacroix connected himself with the London Missionary Society, which made an end to the Dutch mission in these parts. The receipts of the Society for 1850 were about $37,000. The institution for training missionaries at Rotterdam is continued. At that time, the Society had 17 stations in the Indian jS.rchipelago, manned by 19 missionaries, besides having furnished a large number of missionaries for other societies. NEVIS : A small, bat beautiful and fer- tile island in the "West Indies. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. NEW-BARMEN : A station of the Rhen- ish Missionary Society in South Africa, 200 miles north-east of Scheppmansdorf. NEWASSB : A station of the American Board in Hindostan, connected with the Ah- mednuggur mission. NEW-HEBRIDES : A group of islands in Western Polynesia, or Australasia, where the London Missionary Society have eight star tions. Erromanga, one of this group, is the place of the tragical death of the martyr mis- sionary, Williams. Population, 150,000. NEWERA BLLA:^ A station of th& Gospel Propagation Society in Ceylon. NBWVILLB : A Karen village, in the northern part of Maulmain province, in Bur- mah, and an out-station of the Maulmain Karen Mission of the American Baptist Union. NBW-RABBAV : Station of the Church Missionary Society among the Wonicas, in East Africa, situated on the coast, a short dis tance W.N.W. of Mombas. NEW-AMSTERDAM : The capital of Berbice, situated 50 miles up the Berbice river. It is a pleasant town, intersected with canals, and a considerable portion of ground attached to each house. It is. occupied by the Society for Propagating the Gospel. NEW-HBRRNHUT : The first station occupied by the Moravians in Greenland. Also, a station of the same on the island of St. Thomas, W. L NEW-HOLLAND : See Australia. NEW-PROVIDENCE : One of the Ba- hama Islands, about 25 miles long and nine broad, and considerably in advance of the other islands in cultivation. Wesleyan Mis- sionary Society. ^ NEW-BRUNSWICK : One of the pro- vinces of British America. The latest census was taken in 1851. The population was at that time 193,800 ; but no religious statistics are given in this important public document, and there are no denominational records, from which the numbers, character, and condition of the Christian community can be accurately ascertained. The following items have been collected from documents under date of 1854 The number of Catholic clergy is almost the same as in Nova Scotia, and the circumstances would appear to indicate that the proportion of Catholics to Protestants in New Brunswick must be greater than in Nova Scotia. Ckwch of England. — 1 bishop, 1 archdea- con, and 5 clergymen. Church of Scotland. — 1 synod, 2 presbyteries, 8 ministers, 11 congregations, and several mis- sionary stations. Reformed Presbyterian Church of Ireland. 2 ministers and 1 missionary. fl'csleyan Methodists. — 30 ministers, 22 con- gregations, and 2 supernumeraries, besides 3 i4 H B3 |. I ^4 II^IAfl !3 NEW-ZEALAND. 569 ministers employed as principal and teachers of Sackville Academy. Baptists. — 2 associations, 52 ministers, and 7 licentiates. Free Christian Baptists. — 16 ministers and 2 missionaries. CoagregationaliMs. — 3 ministers. Rev. J. Bayne. NEW-ZEALAND : Two extensive and beautiful islands in the Southern Pacific, stretching from latitude 34° 30' to 4*70 20' south, and from 167° to 178° east longitude, being nearly 900 miles long and over 700 broad ; together with a small one to the south, called Stewarts Island. New-Zealand is distinguished for its rich and varied scenery, and for every thing which naturally strikes the eye as beau- tiful or sublime. Some of the mountains in the northern island rise more than 14,000 feet above the level of the sea ; their sides covered with forest timber ; their summits girt with clouds or capped with snow ; and their whole appearance strikingly rich and grand. The country is remarkably hilly and broken, the hills being studded with caves, deep, dark, and frightful. New-Zealand has several large and noble lakes. The Thames is the principal river ; the others being mostly insignificant streams. The forests are so extensive and so dense, that no sound from without disturbs the traveler ; and yet no beasts of prey infest these retreats to put him in fear. New-Zealand has a number of harbors, which are visited for supplies by a vast number of whaling vessels. The northern island is divided into fourteen districts, viz. : Kaitaia, Bay of Islands, Thames, Tauranga, Eotorua, Bay of Plenty, East Cape, Poverty Bay, Wairoa, Entry Island, Taranake, Waikato, Kaipara, and Hokianga. Climate. — The climate of New-Zealand is Temperate, salubrious, and congenial to Euro- pean constitutions. North of the Thames snows are unknown, and frosts are off the ground by nine o'clock in the morning. Dur- ing six months of the year, the country is ex- posed to heavy gales of wind and tremendous falls of rain. The spring and autumn are de- lightfully temperate. Spring commences the middle of August, summer in December, au- tumn in March, and winter in July. Soil and Productions. — These islands afford almost every variety of soil, which produces wheat, barley, maize, beans, peas, and various grasses in abundance. . Most of the trees are evergreens, and vegetation is scarcely ever sus- pended. Inhabitants. — When first discovered, the New-Zealanders were a savage and barbarous people. When a child was born, it was wrap- ped in a coarse cloth, and laid in a verandah to sleep ; and in a few hours, the mother pur- sued her ordinary work in the field. The child suffered much ; and if its mother did not fur- nish it nourishment enough, it must perish. Large holes were slit in the ear, and a stick, half an inch in diameter, thrust through. When five days old, the child was carried to a stream of water, and either dipped or sprinkled, and a name given to it ; and a priest mum- bled a prayer, the purport of which was said to be, an address to some unknown spirit, pray- ing that he may so influence the child that he may become cruel, brave, warlike, troublesome, adulterous, murderous, a liar, a thief, disobe- dient, in a word, guilty of every crime. After this, small pebbles, about the size of a pin's head, were thrust down its throat, to make its heart callous, hard, and incapable of pity. The ceremony was concluded with a feaist. The system of tahu, or consecration, com- mon to the Pacific isles, nowhere prevailed to a greater extent than at New-Zealand. (See Tabu.) With the New-Zealander, superstition took the place of medical skill. When a person had a pain in the back, he would lie down and get another to jump over him and tread on him to remove the pain. A wound was bruised with a stone, and afterwards held over the smoke. In internal acute diseases the patient sent for a priest, lay down, and died. Dreams and omens were much regarded, and had great influence over their conduct. On important occasions, when several tribes were going to war, an oracle was consulted, by set- ting up sticks to represent the different tribes, and watching the wind to see which way the sticks would fall, in order to determine which party would be victorious. But the person performing the ceremony, by a little juggling, could determine the question as he pleased. The belief in witchcraft, also, almost univer- sally prevailed, and was productive of all the suspicion, cruelty, and injustice which generally accompany it among a barbarous and super- stitious people. Polygamy was allowed to any extent ; being the fruitfal source of jeal- ousy, strife, and murder. Marriages were generally confined within the tribe. The peo- ple were affectionate, but desperate and re- vengeful when roused to anger. For an un- civilized people, they were industrious. Their food consisted of a variety of vegetables, and some kinds of animal food. They were war- like, and ate their enemies killed in war ; and prisoners who were not killed and eaten were reduced to slavery. The heads of their ene- mies were preserved as trophies of victory. They formerly preserved the heads of their friends,'and kept them with religious strictness. Tattooing was practised, and was made a much more painful operation than in the other Pacific Isles. The operation was performed with a small rough chisel, with which an in- cision was made by a blow with a mallet, the chisel being first dipped in coloring matter made of the root of flax, burnt to charcoal, and mixed with water, the stain of which is indelible. The flax is cultivated extensively in New Zealand, of which they make gar 570 NEW-ZEALAND. ments, nets, and lines. The houses of the befr ter class were snug and warm, ornamented with carved work. They were built of bul- rushes, lined with the leaves of the palm tree, neatly platted together. They were about 16 by 10 feet, and four or five feet high. The entrance was by a low sliding door, and there was one window 9 by 6 inches, with a sliding shutter. Their houses were without furniture, and their cooking utensils a few stones. Their villages were scattered over a large plot of ground without any order or arrangement. Religion. — The New-Zealanders, though re- markably superstitious, had no gods that they worshiped, nor anything to represent a being whom they called god. They imagined that it was a great spirit (Atua) who thundered ; but all their thoughts of him were those of fear and dread. Sickness, they supposed, was brought on by him, coming in the form of a lizard, entering the side, and preying on the vitals. Hence they used incantations over the sick, threatening to kill and eat their deity, or to burn him to a cinder, unless he should come out. Their idea of Wiro, the evil spirit, was more in accordance with the Scriptural idea of the Evil One. They believed in a fu- ture state ; but their ideas of it were vague and sensual ; and as they supposed all the functions of life were there performed, slaves were killed upon the death of a chief, that they might follow and attend upon him ; and widows often put themselves to death that they might accompany their departed hus- bands. MISSION. Church Missionary Society. — The atten- tion of the Church Missionary Society was di- rected to New-Zealand, by Eev. Saml. Marsden, senior chaplain to the colony of New South Wales, and they sent out three missionaries to labor under the direction of Mr. Marsden, who arrived at New-Zealand towards the close of 1814, and commenced a station at Rangihona, on the N. W. side of the Bay of Islands. But for a long time they were treated with taunts and jeers and threatenings, while their message was neither understood nor regarded, and they were subjected to great privations, from want of shelter, food and companions. But an influ- ential chief named Hongi, visiting England and returning _ loaded with presents, the mission- aries rose in the estimation of the natives, and were beloved and protected by the chiefs. The station was afterwards removed to Ta^ puna, on the other side of the hill ; and on the arrival of a reinforcement, another station was commenced at Kerikeri, near which was a large native village, occupied by Hongi and his people. But it was with great difficulty that they could form a school, or secure at- tendance on public worship. When the Sab- bath bell caught their ears, they would run away, and employ themselves in fishing, or some of their native sports. Sometimes they would come into the chapel dressed in the most fantastic style, and at other times, nar ked ; and in the middle of the service they would start up with the cry, " That's a lie 1 that's a lie ! Let us all go." Another station was commenced at Paihia, in 1823, on the south side of the Bay of Islands, where the people were in an exceeding- ly wild and uncontrollable state. The mission was reinforced from to time, and a schooner was built to ply between the mission and Port Jackson, in order to furnish supplies. She was lost in 1828, but another was built, and launched in May, 1830, called The Messenger. Schools were commenced at Paihia, in 1823, and at the same time the missionaries began to visit the natives in the neighborhood, for religions instruction. In 1824, those instruc- tions were blessed to the conversion of the chief Waitangi, who was baptized under the name of Christian Bangi ; and by June 1831, 20 adults were baptized at this station, with 10 children. For 15 years the natives had steadily refused to allow any one to reside near their villages, in the interior. But having become convinc- ed that the missionaries were their friends, in 1830 a station was commenced at Waimate, the centre of a large district in the interior, to which roads have been out by the natives to their residences, for thirty-five miles, and chapels have been erected in most of the nu- merous villages in this district, capable of holding 150 to 200 persons, in which services are regularly held on the Sabbath, by assistant missionaries, and they are occasionally visited by the resident clergyman ; schools have also been established in these villages, with the sanction of the chiefs. Pour schools are in operation at Waimate. In January, 1834, a settlement was formed at Kaitai, at the earnest solicitation of the chiefs and people of the Barawa tribes, in the vicinity of the North Cape ; and another subsequently at Puriri, south of the Bay of Islands. Although the missionaries labored at these stations under great discouragements, for many years, yet after mastering the language and acquiring the confidence of the natives, the usual results of the introduction of the Gospel into pagan lands began to be seen. One of them, Bev. Mr. Tate, in speaking of this change in 1835, says, " Instead of the noisy merriment, the blustering excitement to mischief, which used to prevail on the Sab- bath, all is peace. Sabbath-schools in many of the native villages are established, and regularly carried on ; work of every descrip- tion is laid aside ; Christian worship is punc- tually attended ; and the day as strictly re- garded as in any well-regulated village in England. In this, I am speaking of the Oliria- NEW-ZEALAND. 571 tianized villages in the interior ; not of those in connection with the shipping ; in which, as the sailors on that day have frequently liberty to go .on shore, the holy day is made a season of far greater iniquity than any other." A report of the Waimate station for 1832, stated that the chapel was every Sabbath crowded to excess ; that the natives rejoiced at the approach of every Sabbath ; and that the preached word had its effect upon many of the hearers. On the 4th of May, 1834, just before embarking for New South Wales, to superin- tend the printing of some translations, Mr. Yate baptized four chiefs, and several other persons ; and on the 8th of June, he baptized 38 adults, the greater portion of them chiefs. They had been candidates for many months. The next Sabbath they were admitted to the communion. Mr. Yate gives an account of the deaths of several heathens, who met death in darkness and horror of mind, one of them, a chief, declaring, with his last breath, that he was " going to hell ;" and a number of native Chris- tians, who had died in peace and comfort, in the faith of the Gospel. He also publishes a number of letters, which he received from the converts, which were full of affection and pious feeling, expressive of a deep insight into their own hearts, and a simple faith in Christ. At this stage in the progress of the mis- sion, the natives manifested a strong desire for knowledge ; and though their facilities for in- struction were small, yet a great many of them had learned to read. And, captives from distant tribes, having been sold into slavery, had attended the mission-schools ; and by some means gaining their liberty, they had carried the knowledge thus acquired to their distant homes, and taught it to their friends. A great change had been effected by the Gospel in the domestic character of those who had embraced it. Polygamy was diminish- ing, and husbands and wives did not quarrel as formerly. The inhuman practices of former times were being suppressed. It was once the custom for the relations of a chief to kill one or more slaves at his death, to wait upon him in the world of spirits ; but, when the great chief Hongi died, not one was slain. The tabus and other superstitions, also, were falling into disuse. And industry, regularity, and a desire to make improvements in their land, their habits and customs, were on the increase among the great body of the people. Mr. Yate gives the following speech of a chief to his people, who seems to have caught a correct idea of the power and influence of the Gospel : " What," he inquired, " what are these missionaries come to dwell with us for ? They are come to break in two our clubs, to blunt the points of our spears, to draw the bullets from our muskets, and to make this tribe and that tribe to love one another, and sit as brothers and friends. Then let us give our hearts to listening, and we shall dwell in peace." The following incident shows how the leaven works when it once finds its way to the heathen mind : Two of the missionaries, as they were traveling to a new and distant part of the island, rested on the Sabbath, and collected an assembly of natives to hear the Gospel. They commenced by singing a hymn ; and, to their astonishment, the whole congregation joined with them. The responses also were correctly given. They afterwards found throe boys who had lived for some time in the mission family, who had acted as their teachers. In December, 1837, a Boman Catholic bishop and two priests landed in New-Zear laud, and located themselves in the midst of the Wesleyan mission. Thus it is that the Church of Kome follows the track of Pro- testant missionaries, like an evil spirit, to counteract the good work. In 1839, they had eight priests and two catechists ; but one chief is represented as having become more deeply attached to the missionaries, being dis- gusted with what he had seen and heard of the Papists. In January, 1839, the Bishop of Australia visited the mission ; and in a letter to the committee, he bears the following testimony to the character of the missionaries, and the re- sults of their labors : " I must offer a very sincere and willing testimony to their main- taining a conversation such as becomes the Gospel of Christ. Their habits of life are devotional. They are not puffed up with self- estimation, but appear willing to learn as well as apt to teach. And among themselves they appear to be drawn together by a spirit of harmony, prompted by that Spirit of which love, gentleness, and goodness are the most de- lightful fruits. " At every station which I personally visit- ed, the converts were so numerous as to bear a considerable proportion to the entire popula- tion ; and I was informed that the same was true at other places. In most of the native villages in which the missionaries have a foot- ing, there is a building set apart for religious worship. In these buildings generally, but sometimes in the open air, the Christian classes were assembled before me. The gray-haired man and aged woman took their places to read and undergo examination among their descend- ants of the second and third generations. The chief and the slave stood side by side, with the same holy volume in their hands, and ex- erted their endeavors each to surpass the other in returning proper answers." The bishop states that the native population is rapidly diminishing, even more so than dur- ing their savage warfare — a fact for which he is at a loss to account. The activity of the natives in teaching their countrymen, and in building places of worship, forms an important feature of this mission. Mr. Williams states, June 3, 1839, that on his visit to the East Cape, he found throe na- 572 NEW-ZEALAND. tive teachers actively engaged, and that the degree of attention paid to them by the na^ tives generally was astonishing. At one place they found a chapel, 60 by 28 feet, which had been erected by the natives, and a congrega- tion of 500 assembled in it on the Lord's day. At another place, where no missionary had ever been, they found the natives assembling for Christian worship, in a regular and order- ly manner. The following account of a native prayer- meeting, is related by Mr. Brown, in a letter dated July 21, 1838 : " After evening service I found that a few natives had met to hold a prayer-meeting. They commenced by sing- ing a hymn. A native then engaged in prayer. That was followed by reading a chap- ter. Another hymn was sung; and after an address by a native, the meeting was closed by another extemporaneous prayer." In relation to general improvement, it is stated that at this time (1839) the missionar ries had introduced among these savages agri- culture and gardening ; the use of the spade, the plow, and the mill ; cattle, sheep, and horses ; built houses and chapels ; cut roads through forests ; built bridges, &c., changing a country from a wild and savage state to a condition of incipient civilization. In all the 14 districts of the island, Christian congre- gations had been gathered, with an aggre- gate attendance on public worship of 8,760, and 233 communicants ; and the entire Scrip- tures had, been translated and printed in the native tongue. But so rapid was the in- crease of interest, that in a letter dated May 5, 1840, Rev. W. Williams says that the popula- tion as a body professed Christianity ; that the number attending public worship had increased to 27,000 ; that the baptisms could not be less than 2,000 ; and the number of communicants during this short period had more than dou- bled. In 1841, the British Government made New- Zealand an independent colony, and appointed Captain Hobson Governor. In September, 1840, Mr. "Williams gives a most encouraging view of the state of things in the Eastern District. He says his parish extends two degrees and a half; that almost all the people are inquiring after the truth ; and that more than 8,000 assemble regularly for worship. In 1841, New-Zealand was erected into an Episcopal see ; and Eev. G. A. Selwyn, D.D., was consecrated bishop at Lambeth, England. In June of the same year, the first mission- ary meeting in New-Zealand was held at Kai- taia, attended by 500 natives and a number of Europeans. The resolutions were each moved by a European and seconded by a native. Several of the native addresses were appropri- ate and striking. The amouht of the contri- bution taken on the occasion was £46 5s. The good work in the Eastern District pro- gressed so rapidly, that in July, 1841, the communicants had increased in that district alone to 878, among whom were included a large proportion of the leading chiefs. , The whole fabric of the old superstitions was gone, the idols cast away, weapons of war laid aside, and petty quarrels settled by arbitration. In the Western District, in September, 1839, two young chiefs traveled 500 miles with a re- quest for missionaries from their father, a noted chief and warrior at Kapiti, an island in Cook's Straits. To the astonishment of the missionaries, it was found that they could read well ; and from their statements it appeared that, in many villages, the Lord's day was ob- served, public worship regularly held, and great .numbers wore anxious for instruction ; and all this was the result of the labors of one native, named Matahau, who had gone there of his own accord, and was actively engaged in diffusing a knowledge of the Gospel. The zeal of the native converts for the con- version of their countrymen has been remark- able. In many parts of the country where the missionaries have journeyed over ground never before trodden by Europeans, they have been astonished to find chapels built, some of the natives able to read, and many in the habit of assembling for worship. Mr. Ashwell says that in a tour of 400 miles, in every village he found some one who could read, and in all but one of them he found the Testament. In their report for 1843, the committee say, " The blessing of God continues to be vouch- safed in a marked degree to the labors of the missionaries and native teachers, and the cir- culation of the Scriptures. Within the last four years, the number of natives who have embraced Christianity has increased from 2,000 to 35,000." And although they do not speak confidently of the saving conversion of the great mass of them, yet they say there is every reason to entertain the hope that not a few of this multitude have truly embraced the Gos- pel. War and cannibalism had almost, if not entirely, ceased ; ancient superstitions had been forsaken ; and many were making rapid progress in spiritual knowledge. Dr. Sinclair, surgeon of the British Navy, who visited New- Zealand at the end of 1841, gives the follow- ing testimony : " By means of the well-directed labors of the missionaries, the natives have become ex- emplary Christians, and now show an intellec- tual capacity which strikes with surprise every one who goes among them. Perhaps no peo- ple in the history of mankind has been so completely changed, in their religious and moral condition, as these natives have been, in such a short time, and more particularly by such a small number of men, and by such peaceful means. Frequently have I heard a Christian native, when asked to buy or sell on the Lord's day, or break any other" command- ment, make the decided answer, ' No — me mis- NEW-ZEALAND. 573 sionar ;' and that when the temptations were great." The new bishop arrived at Auckland, May 30, 1842, where he was received with demon- strations of joy by the inhabitants. And, in his letters to the society, he confirms the state- ments already made respecting the progress of the Uospel. The committee say, in 1844, that they can speak with increased confidence of the extent to which the Gospel has spread among the natives of New-Zealand, and the essential change which it has produced in all their moral habits. The message of salvation had been conveyed to nearly, or quite, all the settlements on the northern island ; and in many places unvisitcd by the missionaries, the Gospel was read and public worship main- tained. War had almost entirely ceased ; and where it had occurred lately, it had been car- ried on in a very mitigated form. Theft and murder were of rare occurrence. The bishop states that, among the Christian natives, he had met with the most pleasing instances of the natural expression of the deep and earnest feelings of religion. The bishop rented the mission farm at Waimate, and commenced a collegiate estab- lishment for the training of candidates for the ministry. The following incident, related by Eev. C. P. Davis, and which occurred in 1844, shows, in a very striking manner, the power of the Gospel to tame the most savage tribes. He entered a village belonging to two Christian chiefs, Perika and Noa, and found them sur- rounded by their armed followers, engaged in prayer, expecting an attack from Eipa, a chief who had made an unjust demand of them, with which they refused to comply. They had a white flag raised over their heads, as a token of their desire for peace. Mr. Davis went out to meet Eipa and his party, whom he found naked and their faces painted red, listening to addresses urging them to vengeance and slaughter. Noa walked between the two par- ties, telling the enemy that they were acting contrary to the word of God ; and that, while his party were not afraid of them, they were restrained by the fear of God. Eipa and his party were but 20, while the Christian party were 100. After many speeches on both sides, one of Eipa's men, in brandishing his hatchet, accidentally hit Noa's head. As soon as his men saw the blood flowing, every man's musket was leveled. In another moment Eipa's whole party would have fallen ; but the wounded chief sprang forward, and exclaimed, " If you kill Eipa, I will die with him ; " and then throwing his own body as a shield over Eipa, saved him from destruction. Peace was then made between the two parties, and there was great rejoicing. " Some years ago," says Mr. Davis, " the very sight of blood would have been a signal for a dreadful slaughter." In the year 1845, the mission was seriously interrupted by a collision between some of the natives in the northern district and the British forces, which led to a serious war for some time, some of the natives ranging themselves on one side and some on the other, and thus threatening a general civil war. Some of the stations in the northern district were broken up and destroyed. But the natives engaged in this outbreak, though not generally prol'essing Christianity, were very far from manifesting the savage cruelty which formerly character ized their warfare. In a number of engage- ments, the natives were victorious ; but the governor states that, in these circumstances, European troops would not have behaved bef> ter, or shown less vindictiveness. I'heir for- bearance towards European settlers, especially the missionaries, was remarkable. Yet, the effects of the war upon missionary operations, and upon the religious condition of the Chris- tian natives, were lamentable in the extreme. Such was the demoralizing influence of the example of the British soldiers at Waimate upon the natives with whofli they came in contact, that some of them had given up even attending upon Christian ordinances, and others had shown great lukewarm ness. And, in many instances, those Christian nati.ves who took part with the heathen against the Eng- lish, relapsed into heathenism. However, Eev. 0. Hadfield, under date of March 8, 1847, writes : " I certainly have a much stronger conviction of the reality of the hold that religion has upon the professing na- tives, since the late disturbances, than I had previously. Last winter, while war was going on in the neighborhood. Governor Gray visited Waikanae on the Lord's Day, and attended the native church and school. It was con- ducted by a native catechist, Levi Te Ahu, a man who has conducted himself invariably in the most Christian manner, ever since his conversion, seven years ago. On his return to Wellington, the governor came to me, and ex- pressed himself as altogether astonished that such a change could have taken place in a barbarous people in so short a time. I belieVe that Christianity is extending itself in New Zealand." At a missionary meeting of native teachers, held at Wanganui the day after Christmas, four of them offered themselves as missionaries to a heathen tribe at war with the English. On the 6th of February, 1847, they set out on their mission. Knowing that it was at the risk of their lives, they went directly to the hostile chiefs, preached to them the Gospel, and endeavored to dissuade them from their warfare ; but on their way to the third, they were waylaid and murdered. Eev. Mr. Taylor soon after vicited the tribe by whom this mur- der was committed, and had an interview with the chief. After a number of addresses on both sides, an agreement was made between Mr. Taylor, in behalf of the tribe to whom the 6T4 NEW-ZEALAND. murdered men belonged, and the cliief of tlie tribe to whom the murderers belonged, that they should make peace with each other ; Mr. T. assuring the latter that, as the former were Christians, they would not seek revenge. But he found some difficulty in restraining the Christian tribes, they were so indignant at the baseness of the act. Two other native teach- ers offered to go on a mission to the .same tribe. One of thera being dissuaded by his friends, replied : " What if a canoe be upset at sea ? Will it hinder all other canoes from going to sea for fishing, lest they likewise should be upset ? I shall go to Taupo, because the object is good — to make peace." He did go, with his associate, and they were well re- ceived. In 1849. an institution was commenced by Eev. Mr. Burrows at the Waimate station, for training up native teachers. The institution opened with five pupils, and the hope was en- tertained that it would prove a great blessing to the mission. To show the Tapid growth of Christianity in these islands, we give the following table, showing the number of communicants in the eastern district, from the year 1S40, when the church consisted entirely of natives who came from the Bay of Islands, principally as teachers. 1840 . . . 29 1845 . . 1484 1841 . . . 133 1846 . . 1668 1842 . . . 451 1847 . . 1960 1843 . . . 675 1848 . . 2054 1844 . . . 946 1849 . . 2893 Here we have illustrated the fact seen in al- most all missionary history, that while during the first years of a mission the results are scarcely perceptible, and the prospects discour- aging, yet, when the Gospel fairly gets a lodg- ment in the minds of a people, however des- perate their case might seem, its progress will be rapid and powerful. After 20 years' labor in New-Zealand, the number of communicants reported was but 8, and they were all at one station ; but here is an increase in ten years, in one district, from 29 to 2,893 ! The Committee, in the report for 1852, state that the native population of New-Zealand is estimated at from 80,000 to 120,000; that more than three-fourths of these are Protestant Christians, and that those connected with Ro- manists do not exceed 5,000. The rest refuse to join any Christian party, though they have laid aside, for the most part, their heathen prac- tices. The number of natives connected with the missions of this society may be estimated at 50,000, and of communicants between 5,000 and 6,000. And every one who is admitted to the Lord's table undergoes a strict examinar tion, in presence of their native teachers and neighbors. riince the appointment of the Bishop of New- Zealand, the mission has been put under the direction of a Central New-Zealand Commit- tee, with the bishop at its head. The Church Missionary Becord for October, 1853, contains the following general view of this mission. On the 8th of August, 1822, Eev. William Williams, now Archdeacon of New-Zealand, received his instructions, on his departure for the mission. On the 6th of Au- gust, 1853, the archdeacon's son, Eev. Leonard Williams, received the instructions of the com- mittee on his departure for the same mission. The instructions delivered Aug. 8, 1822, ex- pressly stated that there was not a single Chris- tian convert among the natives of New-Zea- land. At the present moment, the remnant of heathenism among them is so small as not to interfere with their being pronounced a Chris- tian people. A corresponding influence has been exerted on their native character. Can- nibalism is extinct, and the sanguinary spirit that gladly availed itself of every pretext to break forth in deeds of blood is laid. The New-Zealanders have exchanged the spear and club for the plowshare and the reaping- hook ; and tribes which once wasted the dis- tricts of their neighbors, are diligently em- ployed in cultivating their own. Christian Sabbaths and Christian ordinances are gene- rally observed over the island, and this national profession is inclusive of a large proportion of genuine godliness. If it be asked by what means this change has been accomplished, we answer, by the preaching and teaching of " Jesus Christ and him crucified ;" and God's promised blessing on the same. The work has been a rapid one. Fifteen years back, the main portion of the island was lying in un- broken heathenism. The following statement, taken from a recent number of the " Australian and New-Zealand Gazette," shows what has been done in a single district : " Fourteen years ago the natives of Otaki were among the most dreaded classes of New- Zealand. Their leaders were Eauperaha and Eangihaiata, par excellence the two most blood- thirsty men in the whole islands ; men whose whole lives were literally spent in shedding blood, and as literally in drinking it, for both were determined cannibals, and gloried in what is now the shame of their followers. " Mark th,e scene at Otaki at this day. The natives have built a church 80 feet long, 36 feet wide, and 40 feet high. Its principal beam they dragged 12 miles from the depth of their forests, the choicest tree therein. The pillars were brought from the same spot, and with the same amount of labor. The church is lighted with lanced-shaped windows, four of which occupy the east end. The railing of the communion table is elaborately carved by the natives, and those who know what their skill in carving is will bear us out in saying that the tabernacle work of many Bn EnglJM NEW-ZEALAND. 575 church is greatly inferior to that of the native church at Otaki. For the ground on which the church stands, the natives are indebted to the former cannibal, Te Eauperaha, who died a Christian. " On the south side of the church stands the school, equally substantial with the church itself, and larger than the school in Welling- ton. The instruction here given is equal to that given in country places in England ; in one respect superior, for the natives are taught music, of which they are exceedingly fond, " looking forward to the music lesson as a regular treat." Their teacher may not be a Costa, but he is a native who has become sufficiently skilled in the art, as taught at the Bishop's College, to become the instructor of others. " But the native boys are widely scattered ; and, therefore, on the west side of the church, stands a boarding-house for the boys attending the school. The dining-hall — native work too — is 50 feet by 25, and 15 feet high. The building contains dormitories for 100 children, who will be received in this establishment, educated, clothed and fed. On the north side of the church will stand a similar building for native girls. The cost of this was defrayed by the natives, who have also erected the whole, with the assistance of an English carpenter. " The school possesses a valuable estate, given by the old cannibal chiefs. Of this estate 60 acres are cleared and thoroughly drained ; 20 acres are cropped with wheat, and another portion with potatoes. The establishment already numbers 70 head of cattle, four iron plows, and four teams of oxen ; the lads being the plowmen. Portions of the estate are let to other natives, who pay their rent in pro- duce, and pasture on the estate 200 head of cattle, and 70 horses. The cost of all the buildings is between £5,000 and £6,000, of which the government has, at different times, contributed £2,000 ; the remainder, as well as materials and labor, has been found by the natives themselves. " One of the most enterprising patrons of this establishment is the former savage Eangi- haiata himself, who has survived Te Eauperaha, his partner in the wholesale slaughter of hip species. What this slaughter was may be judged by one instance. Where the Canter- bury settlement now stands, 30 years ago stood a large pah, peopled by a numerous and happy population. An English ruffian, for hire, car- ried the above chiefs and their forces in the hold of his vessel to the present Lyttelton. On the pretence of trade the natives were thrown off their guard and became an easy prey to Te Eauperaha and his followers, who did not leave a man alive. The women were carried into slavery or eaten. " On the voyage back the ship's coppers were used for cooking human joints, the people being slain on board as they were wanted. The ruffian commander of the English vessel admitted this. Yet from those very chiefs mentioned as the leaders of this fearfal slaugh- ter, and from their followers, have sprung the Otaki church and schools. " Many of our readers will remember Pira- hawau, long the guest of Mr. Halswell, at Ken- sington. "That man was, when a youth, one of the perpetrators of the horrible massacre we have just spoken of. He was, while with Mr. Halswell, educated at the British and Foreign School, through the influence of Dr. Hodgkin, and is now a pioneer of civilization in the re- sponsible post of chief of the native police in the Wellington district. The above progress of civilization among savages is unparalleled in history ; but those savages far surpass all others in intellectual character. Despite the former cruelties of the race toward each other, it would be difficult to find a New-Zealander of the superior caste — for there are two dis- tinct races — upon whose features it is not un- mistakably stamped that he is one of ' nature's gentlemen.' The inferior caste are the abori- gines of the islands, who have little in common with their superiors beyond their cunning at a bargain." The following table gives the statistics of the mission, as they appeared in the report of the society for 1853 : NAMES OF MISSION- ABY DISTKICIS. j 1 g 1 i a) a 1 3 Lay Teachers and other Helpers. '3 p a a 8 S i 1 ■a 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 'a 1 § 1 1 European. Native, 1 1 <0 Northern District Middle District . Eastern District . Western District . Totals .... 1814 1834 1839 1839 3 9 5 4 4 10 4 3 1 4 2 2 1 30 53 134 215 8 624 1247 3534 1622 136 391 423 124 8 87 18 89 43 380 1.55 287 5,357 2,080 21 21 7 3 432 8 7027 1074 33 89 43 S80 155 7,624 676 NEW-ZEALAND. Society foe Propagating the Gospel in FoEEiGN Parts. — This Society's first mission- ary to New-Zealand was sent out in 1839. Eight are now maintained by an annual grant of £1,000, placed at the disposal of the bishop. Since the appointment of the bishop, the soci- ety has paid £7,000 to meet an equal amount given by the New-Zealand Company for the permanent endowment of the church. This grant has been the means of endowing three chaplains in perpetuity. Wesleyan Missionary Society. — In the year 1819, the "Wesleyan Missionary Society had a young man (Mr. Sarmwl Leigh) station- ed at New South Wales. Having suffered in his health, he was advised bv Mr. Marsden to visit New-Zealand, which he did. He became acquainted with the missionaries, who had been introduced by Mr. Marsden ; saw the natives, and witnessed many horrible scenes ol' cannibalism ; and was so affected with the ap- pearance of things as to cherish an ardent desire to commence a Wesleyan mission in the country. The excellent brethren of the Church of England supported and encouraged him in his project. He returned home to England ; obtained the sanction and authority of the executive committee ; and in 1821 re- turned with Mrs. Leigh for New-Zealand. At the request of one of the most influential chiefs, Mr. Leigh determined to fix his resi- dence at Mercury Bay, near the river Thames, but this design was frustrated by the outbreak of a war, in consequence of which, he and his excellent wife were under the necessity of re- maining for some time at the Church Mission- ary settlement, where they employed them- selves in acquiring the language and instruct- ing the natives, as they had opportunity. Mr. Leigh's simplicity, courage and hardi- hood eminently fitted him for the work to which he was called ; but mere natural resources would have utterly failed in such scenes. He had faith in his Divine Master, and in his gra- cious declaration, " Lo, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the world." And this was his strength and stay when human forti- tude and endurance would have utterly failed him. He dared their pointed muskets ; stood undaunted while clubs were sometimes whirled around his head and spears were thrust close by his side, and felt that he only lived from hour to hour, as sustained by the invisible pow- er of God. He mingled with the people in their villages and huts ; bartered with them for animal food, having been four months with- out any ; conversed with them in the most fa- miliar manner, and endeavored to win their confidence as well as sound the depth of their superstitions. At length he was joined by the brethren Turner and White, and the whole mission party proceeded to Wangaroa, on the north-east coast, and north of the Bay of Islands, where they were received with ap- parent kindness by the chief, George. This G eorge was a very notorious person. In the year 1809 he had cut off the crew and passen- gers of the " Boyd," a fine ship of five hun- dred tons burden ; on which occasion, at least seventy persons were murdered and feasted upon by the blood-thirsty savages, and the ship was burnt down to the water's edge. From this time George had a lurking fear of the Europeans, though for selfish purposes he wished to have traffic with them, even to the extent of encouraging, in some degree, their settlement in the country. But the vague idea of a possible retribution overtaking him, made him distrustful, overbearing, and violent; and the missionaries, while endeavoring to erect their temporary dwelling by the aid of hired native labor, were subjected to end- less trouble and annoyance. He came and drove the natives away ; used ill-language to Mr. Turner ; threatened to level the house to the ground, and said it was bis ; but all this turbulence was to obtain some gift or gratuity. Afterwards three spades were forcibly taken away by some of his people. Others came in canoes, with fencing timber for sale, which Mr. Turner bought of them, making payment in various articles of hardware, though almost be- wildered by their violence and vociferation. Another of the chiefs brought a pig for which he had previously received payment ; but he demanded to be paid again. Mr. Turner did not yield at first, but afterwards gave him an iron pot, which he coveted, when he claimed another article also. This was refused, and he fell into a violent passion, dashed the pot to pieces, followed Mr. Turner, who was leaving him, and with all the rage of a fiend pointed his musket twice to shoot him, but was re- strained by an invisible hand. However, he pushed Mr. Turner very roughly about, until Mr. Hobbs, the assistant missionary came up. He charged them with the design of making the Nevv-Zealanders slaves ; and said, the only thing they gave him was Karakia (" prayers,") upon which he poured the greatest contempt. He did not want to hear about Christ ; he wanted muskets, powder, tomahawks, tobacco, and the like. He then went back to the house, and threatened to kill Mrs. Turner and the ser- vants ; saying, he would serve the whole mis- sion family as his people had served the crew of the " Boyd." The maid screamed with ter- ror, but Mrs. Turner preserved her composure; and when the excited savage had taken seve- ral articles from the mission store, she took them back from him with calm resolution, and felt her mind kept in peace, being stayed on God. After a while the storm ceased, but such scenes often occurred during their first month's residence at Wangaroa. One morn- ing the missionaries heard that the heads of an adjacent tribe had killed one of their own slaves, and were preparing to eat the body. Mr. Turner went down to the place, and found the chiefs sitting round the fire, and ajiiiarcntly NEW-ZEALAND. 5TT glad to see him. After the usual salute he went towards the fire, and found to his horror a human being laid at length, and roasting be- tween two logs. He told them that his heart was very sore at such a sight ; and as guilt and shame were evidently depicted on their coun- tenances, he made use of the opportunity se- verely to rebuke this enormity, warning them of the just judgments of Almighty G-od. The natives, who disliked toil, could not be induced, even in their most friendly moods, to build a school-house ; and therefore the mis- sionaries were content for a while, in their fine climate, to collect the people and their children in the open air, and there teach them letters, catechisms, prayers, and hymns. Nor were their efforts fruitless; for many of the New-Zealanders have dated their first impres sions from these primitive exercises. Towards the end of 1824 the mission premises were pretty well completed. They stood upon a jutting point of land on the south side of a beautiful vale, through which ran a flue ser- pentine river of fresh water, before emptying itself beyond into a safe and commodious har- bor. The vale was bounded by hills and mountains of almost every size and form, gen- erally covered with excellent pines, many of which were from 60 to 100 feet to the lowest branch, and from three to six feet in diameter. The soil of the valley was exceedingly rich. The missionaries, having purchased the land, had built a good wooden house, with brick chimney — the bricks having been made on the premises, and the lime obtained by cal- cining cockle-shells. They cleared about three acres of ground, enclosed it with a log fence, sowed it with wheat and barley, and likewise set out a good garden with vegetables and fruit trees : all these were for the mission families. Besides this the missionaries had, with their own hands, at two of the principal villages, raised buildings to the honor and service of God, and for the purposes of his worship. By this time the natives began to listen with at- tention ; the children were learning to read in their own language ; and Mrs. Turner's girls began to make progress in needle-work. The little settlement was visited by Messrs. Bennet 2nd Tyerman, the deputation of the London Missionary Society, by whom the brethren were greatly cheered. The missionaries had been instrumental in quelling an outbreak of jealousy on the part of the natives in their ship, while she was lying off the shore, and thereby saving their lives. Prospects of use- fulness seemed to be opening in a very pleas- Ino- manner, when, all at once, a dark cloud gathered around them. A fresh scries of na- tive outbreaks took place, which ended in the total destruction of the mission premises and property ; and the suspension for a while of the mission itself. About this time an English ship, the Mer- cury, had been taken and plundered by the 37 natives of the Bay of Islands, which was after- wards rescued and conducted out to sea by two of the missionaries. The natives were apprehensive of retribution from other English vessels, and this made them jealous of the mis- sionaries. The chief, George, was now dan- gerously ill, and likely to die. His father had been killed in the affair of the Boyd ; and it was reported that George had requested the natives of Hokianga, in case of his death, to come and strip the Wangaroa Wesleyan mis- sionaries of every thing they possessed, if not to kill them, as utu, or " payment," for the death of his father, for which he said he had never received satisfaction. The death of a chief is a day of reckoning, when all the quarrels of his life have to be avenged. These sources of uneasiness made the more wicked natives very overbearing and annoying. They broke over the mission fence and committed petty de- predations on the property ; and on being rea^ soned with, proceeded to acts of violence against Mr. Turner and his assistants, assaulting him with spears, and menacing his life. Bat God protected him. The Church missionaries evinced the live- liest sympathy with their Wesleyan brethren ; and with true Christian love, the Eev. Messrs. Williams and Kemp came over, and urged that at least Mrs. Turner and the little ones should be removed to one of their settlements for a season. They were removed accord- ingly to Mr. Kemp's, at Kerikeri, where they received every kindness and attention ; but nothing could induce Mr. Turner and his fel- low-laborers to forsake their posts. For a time their circumstances were most critical ; but they endured hardness as good soldiers, ' and repaid evil with good ; till at length the old chief, George, sunk under his malady, and. died. The people upon whom had devolved the task of exacting satisfaction for the death of his father, according to his last will, assem- bled to deliberate, and for that purpose ap- proached the mission premises ; but, after they had spent some time in mutual conference, they agreed to accept the blood of a bird as a sufficient compensation. One of the party then jumped over into the mission premises, bore off a duck, and killed it as a sacrifice to the manes of the chief's father. Mrs. Turner and the children now returned to Wangaroa, and it was hoped all would be well ; but very soon far worse troubles arose. The valley of Wangaroa was suddenly invaded by Shungee,. one of the most sanguinary New-Zealand chieftains. On the 4th of January, 1827,, while the mission family were engaged in do- mestic worship, they received intelligence of his approach. For several days all was alarm' and confusion. Canoes began to drop down the river, bearing the natives to the various scenes of conflict. Early on the morning of the 10th a party of natives were descried by the servant, approaching the mission-house 578 NEW-ZEALAND. The missionaries had hardly time to put on their clothes, when twenty savages, armed with muskets, spears, hatchets, &c., entered the mission-ground, and were proceeding to- wards the house. It was demanded of them what they wanted. Oro, the chief, said, " We are come to make a fight ; your chief has fled, your people have left the place, you will be stripped of all your property before noon ; therefore instantly begone." At the same time he gave orders to his party to commence the work of spoliation. They fired several guns as a signal, and others came and joined them. Mr. Turner began to prepare for quitting the place, though he lingered to the last ex- tremity, from his reluctance to leave a spot upon which he had bestowed so much labor and care. The native youths who had been under the instruction of the missionaries were much alarmed, and urged a speedy departure, begging that they might be allowed to accom- pany the family. At 6 o'clock in the morn- ing, when all hope of remaining in safety was extinct, the sorrowful and affrighted household began to move, saving scarcely anything from ■the wreck but the clothes they wore, and a change oi; two for the children. The company, apart from the native young people, consisted of Mi:, and Mrs. Turner, three children, the youngest of whom Vas an infant five weeks old ; Luke Wade, the assistant, and his wife ; Mr. Hobbs, and Miss Davis, a young lady from the .Church settlement of Paihia, who liad come to spend a few weeks on a visit. Their flight was most perilous, through scrub and fern, drenched with heavy dew, and obliged to ford the river with the helpless children in their arms. Behind were blood- thirsty savages, who were only restrained from murder by their selfish fears ; and all around were hovering hostile parties, who, from vari- ous motives, were quite ready to exterminate, in this time of excitement, the mission house- hold ; but, looking to God for help and deliv- erance, the fugitives directed their steps to- ward Kerikeri, the nearest Church settlement. As they went on they were met by one of their own principal men, and also a very friendly old chief, ware Nui, from the Bay of Islands. To the latter Mr. Turner made his appeal for help and protection, to which he immediately responded, aud all the group moved on under his guidance. Twice more they crossed the river, and on turning a sharp bend of the channel, all at once they came upon a formid- able body of fighting natives from the Hokian- ga, orderly, compact, and ready for action, variously armed, but chiefly with muskets and bayonets. They were headed by several chiefs, the principal of whom was Patuone, long known to be most friendly to Europeans. He caught a glance of the missionaries, and loudly called upon his people to stop. He then in- vited them to sit down, and came with several of his principal companions and rubbed noses with the fugitives in token of friendship and good-will. After some words of explanation between the several chiefs, they formed a guard around the mission party, and then commanded the armed band to march forward to the other side of the river ; thus another peril was passed. The travelers then plunged into the woods. Soon after they were met by a party from Paihia, consisting of the Rev- H. Williams, Messrs. Davis, Richey, and a dozen natives. The Apostle Paul at " the Appii Porum and the Three Taverns," could hardly have more fervently thanked Q-od and gladly taken courage, than the Wesleyan mis- sionaries here. Prom these excellent persons, and at Kerikeri, where they soon arrived, they received every kindness that sympathy and Christian brotherhood could suggest. On Thursday, Jan. 17, they removed to the Paihia settlement, where they remained until the cap- tain of the ship " Rosanna," hearing of the disasters of the mission party, most kindly offered them a passage to Sydney ; and thus they removed to the colony, and for a while the mission was suspended. While they were sheltered at Paihia, the Hokianga party, whom they had met on the lOth, proceeded to Wan- garoa, came in conflict with the plunderers at the mission-house, who belonged to Shungee's people, drove them away with savage fury, and seized upon the remainder of the booty themselves ; burned the house and barn, with the wheat crop in straw, to ashes ; killed the cattle, goats, and poultry ; and, worst of all, the body of Mrs. Turner's infant child, which had died and been buried there, they dug up for the purpose of obtaining the blanket or wrapper in which they supposed the tender babe had been buried, and left the cherished remains of this little one to moulder on the sur- face amid the other monuments of this sad and desolating outbreak. Patuone, the chief who interposed on be- half of Mr. Turner's family, and shielded them from native violence as they fled from Wan- garoa, seems never to have been easy at the removal of the Wesleyan missionaries. To- wards the latter end of the year 1827, he ear- nestly invited them to return ; and they, not wishing to entertain the thought of finally abandoning the country, very willingly accep1> ed the invitation ; and in January, 1828, we find them establishsd at Mangungu, on the river Hokianga, in Patuone's district. This locality was selected in mutual council with the Church missionaries, and purchased and paid for to the satisfaction of the natives. The soil was suitable for the production of such articles as were needed ; and a vessel of 500 tons might lie opposite within 100 yards of the premises. So far this mission had been one of sorrow and discouragement. Ten years of hard toil and danger had been passed through, and much money expended, and yet up to the year NEW ZEALAJSTD. 579 1830, there seemed to be no visible results, But the faith of the missionaries was unshak- en, and they were resolved to persevere. We noiv come to a turn of affairs. The Gospel day began to dawn, and the glorioiis light has been brightening ever since. During the year just mentioned, the natives had narrowly watched the brethren, keenly scrutinized their temper and conduct, and become convinced that they were real friends, who only sought to do them good. They now began to hear in- struction with great attention, and to renounce their superstitions. One of the missionaries writes. May 26th, 1834 : " On the preceding "Sabbath the native chapel was crowded to ex- cess, and great numbers had to sit outside, all panting for the Word of Life. Such was the desire to get there in the evening, that they almost trampled on each other, and some of them had come in canoes from places forty miles distant, and anxiety for salvation ap- peared to possess a great proportion of this in- teresting multitude. Their earnest singing, prayers, attention to their classes, and other ordinances of religion, left no doubt on the minds of the missionaries as to their sincerity. In reverential behavior in the house of God they were a pattern even to Europeans ; al- most every Saturday some eminent stranger would arrive, in order to be ready for worship on the Sabbath, and would there profess his attachment to Christianity ; wherever mission- aries went on errands of mercy to the sur- rounding villages, the natives were all ready to receive them ; and it was manifest that a glorious work was breaking forth in New- Zealand." Several chiefs and other natives had declar- ed in favor of Christianity. Tawai and Miti, the former one of the most celebrated and suc- cessful warriors in the land, with some old gray-headed cannibals, were sitting " at the feet of Jesus," anxious to learn and ready to do the will of God. Various alterations had now taken place in the mission establishment. Mr. Hobbs had been removed by the com- mittee for a while, to the Friendly Islands, to strengthen the work there. But Mr. Whitely and Mr. Wallis, with their wives, had been sent out to New-Zealand to join in occupying those gracious openings which now seemed so numerous and promising ; and these were joined in 1836 by Mr. N. Turner, who return- ed from Van Dieman's land to the scene of his former labors and sufferings. In 1836 and 1837, Mr. and Mrs. Woon and Mr. and Mrs. Buller were respectively appointed. A print- ing-press was employed, under the manage- ment of Mr. Woon, in supplying the mission with books for circulation. At this time native teachers were extensive- ly employed, so far as their gifts and graces qualified them for the work, initiating mission- ary operations in the interior and along the coast. They were visited by the brethren at the head stations of Mangxmga, Newark and Kaipara, as often as possible, and were thus more fully instructed in the way of the Lord. No less than five deputations came to Man- gunga and Kaipara, from the south, to request missionaries, bearing tidings that the natives had already built themselves several chapels, and begun regularly to assemble and worship God, according to their best knowledge. In 1839, an attempt was made to pass through the British Parliament a measure for the colonization of New-Zealand. The mis sionaries of the Ohurch and Wesleyan Mis- sionary Societies, believing that some of the provisions in this measure would compromise the character of England, by violating the in- dependence of the New-Zealanders, and prove detrimental to the labors of the missionaries, earnestly entreated the committees of those societies to petition the Parliament against that bill. In 1840, the Wesleyan Society sent six ad- ditional missionaries to New-Zealand, in the missionary ship Triton, to strengthen the older stations, and to answer some of those calls for new stations. The Rev. John Bumby was one of this rein- forcement. Having been eminently useful in home circuits, he offered himself for the mis- sionary work ; and in March, 1839, landed in New-Zealand, where he labored with great zeal, diligence and enterprise, until June 26, 1840, when he was drowned by the upsetting of a canoe in the Bay of Thames. His mis- sionary career was short, but laborious and self-denying. He was the first Wesleyan min- ister whose life had fallen a sacrifice in the New-Zealand mission. When the New-Zealand mission was com- menced at Wangaroa, there was no written or printed book in that language. In a compar- atively short period, however, the missionaries were able to hold conversations with the peo- ple, and to form schools for the instruction of the children ; and they were cheered by the effects of their labors soon becoming apparent among both young and old. In 1842, the fol- lowing works had issued from the mission press : 5,000 Scripture lessons ; 3,000 copies of an elementary school-book ; 6,700 cate- chisms, and prayers and hymns. At this 'pe- riod, the missionaries occupied 13 stations ; there were 3,259 persons in church-fellowship, and 4,000 children in the schools. The Brit- ish and Foreign Bible Society had also sent out 15,000 copies of the New-Zealand Testa- ment from England. However, neither the liberality of friends at home, nor the labors of the mission press, could keep pace with the progress of the natives, and the increasing de- mand for teachers and books. The natives were also rapidly adopting the manners and habits of civilized life. Many of the chiefs appeared dressed like gentlemen, and sup- ported the character by their behavior. 580 NEW-ZEALAM). About the middle of 1842, the Rev. Dr. Selwyn arrived as Bishop of New-Zealand. As he was known to possess " High Church principles," the missionaries, especially the Wesleyans, foreboded evil from the possible rise of new controversies in the infant commu- nity. These forebodings were too soon real- ized ; for the bishop began to teach and en- force the doctrines of baptismal regeneration and apostolical succession, as understood and explained by the High Church party ; thereby casting discredit upon all ministers not epis- copally ordained, and by implication denying the validity especially of the pastoral acts of the Wesleyan missionaries. This was a seri- ous hindrance to the work of God. The mis- sionaries of the Wesleyan Society and the Church brethren had labored together hither- to, in the utmost harmony and love ; and it was with the greatest reluctance that the Wes- leyan missionaries were compelled to act on the defensive, against the hostility of that church which the bishop represented. The Great Head of the Church had put his seal upon their labors, and they could turn to thousands of converted New-Zealanders, res- cued from cannibalism and sin, and say, " Ye are our epistles." As the Wesleyan flock was disturbed and scattered by these dissensions, the Rev. H. H. Hanson Turton, at Taranaki, deemed it his duty to address a spirited, yet Christian remonstrance to Dr. Selwyn on the subject, in three letters, published some time afterward in one of the country newspapers. There was no great amount of sympathy with this exolusivism, however, in the colony gen- erally ; and as mutual difficulties multiplied. Dr. Selwyn acquired juster views of the Wes- leyan cause, and these ill-judged and divisive proceedings were gradually abated ; not, how- ever, without Weakening that blessed bond of attachment and respect which had formerly united both societies. On the 30th of March 1842, the Rev. John Waterlumse, of Hobart Town, the General Su- perintendent, was summoned to his eternal rest. His last sickness was brought on by exposure to the heavy rains of Van Dieman's Land ; but his death was eminently edifying and triumphant. In Kaipara, two circumstances of a most gratifying character have lately transpired, both illustrating the value of Christian missions. On occasion of the distressing shipwreck of a vessel belonging to the French navy, nearly 200 persons were cast naked and destitute upon the shores of New-Zealand, about thirty miles to the north of Kaipara Heads. They con- structed temporary huts upon the beach, and sent out a party in quest of help, which, after two days, fell in with a few natives from Okaro, who received them kindly, and encour- aged them to send for the main body of sufferers to refresh themselves at the Christian village. Accordingly they came, and received from a people, who a few years before would have murdered and perhaps eaten them, a kind and Christian welcome. The Union Jack wa.» hoisted on the approach of the party, and the houses, the blankets, and the provisions of the natives were placed at their service for about ten days, until arrangements could be made for their removal. For this hospitality they neither asked nor desired a recompense : but the Lieutenant-Governor of New-Zealand, knowing how largely their winter stores had been encroached upon by this unexpected de- mand, gave them his high commendation, and a handsome present likewise. It is hoped and believed that the unfortunate Frenchmen wouldt carry with them to Tahiti a practical lesson of the value of Protestant missionary labors. Nor is it only for the bodies of their fellow- men that these newly reclaimed savages have learned to care. Concern for their own souls has taught them the value of the souls of others ; and their own experience of Gospel blessings has made them solicitous for the evangelization of the world. Few missionary documents possess a higher interest for the thoughtful mind than a narrative forwarded by Mr. BuUers, of a missionary meeting held at this place. About 300 natives were as- sembled. The Lord's Supper was celebrated on the Lord's day, and a love-feast on Tuesday morning concluded the services. Monday was occupied by the missionary meeting, at which 16 native speakers bore their testimony to the value of the Gospel, and urged on their breth- ren the duty and privilege of contributing to the Missionary Society. A collection of £13 bore witness that they did not plead in vain. But the true value of the meeting must not be estimated by the collection. The strong sense, the cogent arguments, the clear perception of Christian duty, the union of purpose, and the grateful acknowledgment of their obligations to British Christians, which marked the pro- ceedings of the meeting, gave to it a high im- portance, both as a trophy of the past and a pledge of the future. In 1845 and 1846, the gracious spirit of awakening that spread over all the Wesleyan stations m the South Sea, visited also the stations in New-Zealand ; and a great exten- sion of the Redeemer's kingdom was the con- sequence. The Wesleyan Institution for train- ing a native ministry was established in 1844, making the second of these institutions in New-Zealand. And about the same time, a college and seminary were also established at Auckland, the capital, for the purpose of edu- cating the children of the missionaries who are stationed in Australia, New-Zealand, and the islands of the South Sea. Neat and commodious chapels were raised in all the peopled localities around the princi- pal stations, and thus those stations became circuits, as in England ; native young men, in great numbers, as soon as their piety and in- NEW-ZEALAND. 681 TABtJI,AR VTEW. Suipnxoui 'diqe s^u'BpaQ'^l.V JO "o^J Silt •saxag qijoq JO SJ-Btoqag -S-VQ JO laqumi^ •Biooiiog "soxag moq JO sjBX0T[03-qi'Bq -qog JO -loqun^iq; •siooqog-q^'Bq -qBg JO jaqmnj^ •diqsj.8qra3jii JQJ iBijj. np Bjoqniapj qoauiiQ paiutejooypn'B Tpij' JO joqmTijj 1 I. ea o S So n as M ee (J o •BJUBJSISSV puie sou'eaoisstK S90'BIJ-Soitl013ai(J aaqq,o JO jaqmii^ JO jaqran^ -iOmCO'*iOOC)»>C-l!Mt' 'NOOOooooooTtHcqotooio C^00iO10T*T-liHC00S-*Omi-lr-lC0 CCOOOOOOOOOOOCOOCOUSN (N ■* CO (N (N (H C4 ua N Ol M W OOOOOOOC - C-l O c -# i-t i-l fH (M r-l CI iH i-i . o 00 1- eo t- tji 3 O CO C 3 lO O r ■I OJ CO r 3 r-00 c -1 lis CO c -iO^ClaJCliOiO'*W3COr-ICO -DICI iOCOOiO«0'**C^«!lsta- tioDs, 7 missionaries, 8 female assistants, 9 native preachers and assistants, 14 churches, 1,371 church-members, 4 boarding-schools, 136 pupils; 2 day-schools, 74 pupils; total 6 schools, and 210 pupils. — Prof. W. Gammell. Missionary Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church. — This Society was led by a very peculiar providence to undertake the missionary work among the Indians. John Steward, a free colored man, who was born and bred in Powhattan county, Va., was converted, and became a member of the Methodist Bpisco- pal Church. Though of slender education, yet he became deeply impressed with a conviction that it was his duty to call sinners to repent- ance ; and, at the same time, his mind appear- ed to be drawn somewhere in a north-west direction, he hardly knew where, among a people to whom he was a stranger. So strong were his convictions on this subject, that, though unauthorized by any body of Chris- tians, he arose, forsook all, and went alone and unprotected ; crossed the Muskingum river, directing his way sometimes through a wilder- ness without any road ; nor did he suffer him- self to be diverted from his purpose, though many with whom he fell in company by the way endeavored to dissuade him from it, until he arrived at Pipe Town, on Sandusky river, where a tribe of the Delaware Indians resided. He was conducted to one of the Indian cabins, and seated. Finding, however, that they understood but little of his language, he could attract but little attention by his conversation. They were moreover preparing for one of their dances, and did not like to be diverted from it by the arrival of a stranger, but commenced their barbarous exercises with such energy and violence, that poor Steward thought they were about to kill him. Finding, however, that his fears were groundless, as soon as they desisted from their dance, he pulled out his hymn-book and commenced singing. Profound silence reigned in the a.ssembly while Steward pro- ceeded with the hymn. And when he ceased, one said, in English, " Sing more." He com- plied, and then asked if they could furnish 592 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. him with an interpreter ; when an old Delar ware, named Lyons, was produced, and Stew- ard delivered to them a discourse on the sub- ject of religion, to which they listened with attention ; and, at the close of it, they pre- pared for their guest an entertainment, after which, he retired to rest. Thinking he had discharged his duty here, it was his intention to visit some friends in Tennessee. In the morning the people wished him to remain another day ; but a secret im- pulse seemed to urge him to proceed still fur- ther to the north-west ; and so, disregarding his own inclinations to visit his friends, and the solicitations of the people, he traveled on to the house of the United States sub-agent of Indian Affairs, at Upper Sandusky. At first suspecting Steward to be a runaway slave, Mr. Walker questioned him very closely. But Steward related to him his first experience of the grace of Ood, his subsequent impres- sions, and the way in which he had performed his jourucy and come among them. The art- less and unaffected manner in which he nar- rated the dealings of God with him, soon re- moved the scruples from "Walker's mind, and he gave him encouragement, directed him to the house of Jonathan Pointer, a colored man, who had been taken prisoner in his youth by the Wyandots, and who had learned to speak their language with ease and fluency. When Jonathan learned the object of Steward's visit, he endeavored to dissuade him from his enter- prise, telling him he need not attempt to do that which many great and learned men had failed in accomplishing before him ; Steward, however, would not be diverted from his pur- pose without a thorough trial, and the same day, with the reluctant consent of Jonathan, he attended a feast with him. A large num- ber of Indians were assembled, and the feast and dance'were conducted as usual, with great mirth and hilarity. Permission being granted at the close of the amusements. Steward, by the aid of Jonathan, as interpreter, delivered a dis- course on the subject of Christianity ; dwell- ing principally on its experimental effects upon the heart and life. They listened with pro- found attention, and then gave them their hand in token of hospitality to a stranger.. He made an appointment for a meeting the next day, at the house of Jonathan, but how surprised and disappointed was he to find, in- stead of a large assembly, only one old woman. Not disheartened, however, at this. Steward imitating the conduct of his Master at Ja- cob's well, preached the Gospel as faithfully as if there had been hundreds present to hear him. The next day his congregation was in- creased by the addition of one old man, and these two soon became converts. The next day being Sabbath, 8 or 10 assem- bled in the council-house, who seemed much affected under his sermon, and a work of grace commenced, which terminated in the conver- sion of many. This was in the month of No- vember, 1816. Steward continued his labors, visiting the families from cabin to cabin, talk- ing, singing, and praying with them, and preaching to them on the Sabbaths, in the council-house. Very soon large crowds flock- ed to the meetings, and such was the deep con- cern manifested, that for a season they almost entirely neglected their secular affairs. This gave occasion for the mercenary traders re- siding among them to speak reproachfully of Steward, and accuse him of being instru- mental of starving the Indians, by preventing them from hunting. But it was very manifest tl'at the true reason of their opposition was, that " their craft was in danger." Yet, al- though they threatened him with , imprison- ment, he persisted in his preaching. One of his greatest difficulties was with his interpre- ter. Being unaffected with the truth, though he interpreted faithfully whatever Steward delivered, he would often add, " so he says ; but I do not know whether it is so or not, nor do I care ; all my mind is to interpret faith- fully what he says. You must not think that I care whether you believe it or not." The word, however, took effect, and at length Jonathan himself, -nncked and thoughtless as he had been, yielded to the power of truth, and was afterwards apparently hearty in the work. The greater part of the Wyandots had been under the instruction of some Roman Catholic missionaries ; they had embraced the Eoman Catholic religion, and had become attached to its superstitions and unscriptural ceremonies, without any visible reformation of manners, or any saving influence of Divine grace upon their hearts. These things added to the diffi- culties with which Steward had to contend. While the heathen party were offended at having the religion of their fathers called in question, those who had become attached to the idle ceremonies of the Church of Rome felt themselves abused by being told that the worship paid to the Virgin Mary and to saints and angels was rank idolatry. Truth, however, triumphed over all opposition, and gained the ascendancy in the hearts of some of these savages. The following circumstance contributed not a little in its results, to confirm the wav- ering faith of such as doubted of Steward's sincerity, as well as to confound many of his open enemies :— When he so boldly denounced the peculiarities of the Church of Rome, and taught doctrines so different from what they had been taught by the Romish priests, they concluded that there must be a discrepancy between his Bible and that used by the priests. To decide this cjuestion, it was by mutual agreement submitted to Mr. Walker, the sub- agent, lie accordingly appointed a day for the examination. Steward and the chiefs appear- ed before him. Many being present of both NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 593 parties, and all deeply interested in the issue, a profound silence reigned in the assembly. Mr. Walker carefully examined the Bible and hymn book used by Steward, while all eyes were fixed upon him. The Christian party gazing with intense interest, hoping for a re- sult favorable to their desires, and the others no less anxious to be confirmed in their op- position to Steward and his party. At length the examination closed. Mr. Walker inform- ed the assembly that the only difference be- tween the Bible used by Steward and the one used by the Roman priests was, that the former was in the English language, and the latter was in the Latin ; and as to the hymn- book, he informed them that the hymns it contained were all good, the subjects having been taken from the Bible, and that they breathed the spirit of religion. His decision therefore was, that the Bible was genuine, and the hymns good. On hearing this deci- sion, the countenances of the Christian party instantly lighted up with joy, and their very souls exulted in God their Saviour, while the opposers stood abashed. During the whole transaction Steward sat calm and tranquil, fixing his eye upon the assembly with an af- fectionate regard, as if fully conscious that truth and innocence would triumph. Being foiled in this unrighteous attempt to interrupt the progress of the work of reforma- tion, they next objected to Steward that he had no authority from any body of Christians to preach. To this Mr. Walker replied by asking them whether he had ever performed the rite of matrimony or of baptism. Being answered in the negative, he told them that there was no law, either of God or man, vio- lated, as any one had a right to talk about religion, and try to persuade others to embrace it. He then dismissed the assembly, who " had great reasoning among themselves con- cerning these things." Steward, however, was permitted to prosecute his labors with but lit^ tie opposition for about three months, when he proposed leaving them for a season, and gave them a farewell discourse in the council- house, when such was their attachment to him, there was a universal weeping. Promis- ing to return to them " when the corn should shoot," he made a journey to Marietta. Dur- ing his absence they continued their meetings for singing, prayer, and exhortation, and re- ligion prospered, so that on his return at the appointed time he was hailed by the Chris- tian party with cordiality and great joy. Steward, in trying to introduce Christianity, had to encounter the usual difficulties with these people — their idolatry, their traditional customs, their belief in witches, their scatter- ed and migratory condition, their wars, their ignorance, and their prejudices against the white man. He felt them most sensibly among the Wyandots. He, however, persevered in his work, and God blessed his labors. But 38 though a number of them had received the Gospel, strong efforts were made by the Pagan and Popish parties to oppose the work. Yet, confiding in God and in the goodness of his cause, he persevered in his labors. It was some time, however, before opposition ceased. Two chiefs especially, Mononcue and Bloody Eyes, manifested particular opposition to the Gospel. With a view to obviate the objec- tions against him, for want of proper authority to preach the Gospel, after laboring among them for two years with considerable success, assisted occasionally by a colored man from Mad Elver Circuit, and by Moses Hinckle, Jr., Steward obtained a license as a local preacher at a quarterly conference held at Urbana in March, 1S19, and was appointed a missionary to Upper Sandusky. His excessive labors, together with the numerous privations he was called to suffer, with his fastings and watch- ings, had in the year 1821 induced various afflictions of body, and no doubt laid the foun- dation of his premature death. With a view to afford hira aid in his work, several local preachers volunteered their services, and were instrumental of much good. At the Ohio Conference, held in Cincinnati, August 7, 1819,. the Eev. James B. Finley was appointed to the Lebanon District, which included the San- dusky mission, of which he took the over- sight. On the 13th and 14th of November, at a quarterly meeting held for the Mad Elver Cir- cuit, 42 miles from Upper Sandusky, about 60 of the natives, among whom were four of the chiefs, Between-the-logs, Mmioncue, Hicks, and. Scuteash, attended with their families, together with two interpreters, Jonathan Pointer and Armstrong, both of whom were happy in the love of God. It seems notwithstanding the former opposition of two of these chiefs to the Gospel of Jesus Christ, that through the pa- tient and indefatigable labors of Steward and those who assisted him in the work, they .had yielded to the power of truth and grace, and were now heartily engaged in building up the good cause. Between-the-logs was one of the chief councilors of the nation — a man of strong powers of mind, and of great eloquence and influence. Mm\oncue was grave, dignified, de- liberate in counsel, with a charming voice, and a commanding eloquence. The others, though somewhat inferior to these, were much respect- ed by their people and compeers. The con- version of such men to the Christian cause could not^but have a most happy influence in favor of the mission. The mission was continued as a regular ap- pointment, and increased in prosperity ; many of the chiefs embraced religion ; several of them subsequently became preachers, and la- bored with great zeal and success among their brethren. A mission-school was established in the Wyandot Eeserve, mainly supported by the general government, which in its treaty 594: NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. with the tribe reserved a certain portion of land for this purpose. Some time during the year 1820, reports had reached a portion of the Wyandot tribe who were living near Fort Maiden, in Canada, of the great change wrought among their brethren in Sandusky. They were visited by two native preachers, who made known to them, " in their own tongue, the wonderful work of God." Several were converted, and a mission was subsequently established among them. The labors of John Sunday, a converted native, were of great service in this good work. The missions in Canada, however, were all conveyed to the Canada Conference in 1828. In 1826, being a period of about ten years after the commencement of the mission, 303 had become members of the church. In the mission school there were 77 scholars acquiring a knowledge of the English language, and being instructed in the useful arts. In 1830, a branch was added to this mission, composed of Wyandots and Shawnees, on the Huron river, in Michigan, and continued to prosper for several years. An interesting revival of religion was enjoyed by the Wyandots during the fall of 1837, and .many were added to the church. From this time to the period when the Wyandot nation determined to sell their lands to the general government, and remove beyond the Mississippi, nothing occurred of any special interest. Preachers were regularly sent, and mission schools were sustained. By the treaty, all the missionary improvements which had been made were appraised and paid for by the government, the avails of which were to go into the treasury of the Missionary Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church. They accordingly removed to their new home in the west, many of them carrying their religion with them. After the separation of the southern conferences from the Methodist .Episcopal Church, and the organization of a separate and distinct ecclesiastical connection, the Wyandots falling within the range of that jurisdiction, they were supplied with preachers i,by the Church South. The next mission was established in 1822, among the Creek Indians, entitled the Asbury ■mission. This tribe resided in the bounds of the 'States of J/afiama and Georgia. Another mission was commenced among the Mohawk on j •^ ■^ •saxag q»oq JO MUlotlog-innq o o CO -qBg JO aaqnitiK ■siooqog-qiliq ^ iH -qsg JO Jaqranfj •diqyaoqraaj^ o o joj iBiJi no """ ""* ■saoqiuan qojniio w o pajipajooy pne s s o o fin_3 JO laqnltlj^ *"* of 1 1l o l-l I-( >3 ■* CO CO o1 £ p- ho ZH iH JO jaqran^i 03 OR ATION [TS. ^ a g ^ E ^ 6 S pg« e 5 g o 1 li £ 1 S C 4 '3 C l* ^ C: w a rich country ; the missionary has not tan f; lit, us the white man's religion ; no teacher lias been sent us, nor school- house built for us<. We are poor. We have no kind great fathers or mothers to protect us ; wc are worse than our forefathers were many years ago. Our forests were full of wild animals — deer, bear, beaver, &c. ; but the white man came and in- duced us to kill off all our furs. He brought his steamboats and large nets, and drove the fish from our shores. We are poor, and we are becoming more so every year. Now we want you to say to the big black coats that we ask them to help us. We want them very much. We want our sons and daughters to understand paper, and to learn to work. Tell them that we live in a very large country, and that there are a great many of us. Tell them about this place, that it lies between Huron and Superior ; that the land is good ; that we raise potatoes, oats, turnips, &c., and all sell for a great price ; but that the Indian knows little about making gardens. Tell them we ask for a school like the cne some of us saw at Alnwick, when we went to Moneyaung (Montreal) three years ago. We are willing to give some of the best of our land for a farm, and assist in building the houses ; but we must have white man to teach us the way." — Authorities : Wesleyan Missionary Notices and Annual Reports. — W. Butler. American Board. — At the anniversary of the American Board, in Sept. 1816, measures were reported preparatory to the establish- ment of a mission among the Cherokee In- dians, located chiefly within the bounds of the State of Georgia. In January, 1817, Key. Mr. Kingsbury arrived at Chkkamauga, in the Cherokee nation, and commenced prepar rations for an establishment there. In Mlarch following he was joined by the Eev. Messrs. Hall and Williams, with their wives. Before the close of the year they were joined by other missionaries, and the name of the station was changed to Brainerd, in honor of that devoted missionary. This place is situated one mile N. of the 35th parallel of latitude, and seven miles S. B. of the Tennessee river ; consequents ly in that part of the Cherokee country, which falls within the limits of Tennessee. It is about 250 miles from Augusta, Ga. At the close of about a year they had a mission-house, a school-house, and 45 acres of cultivated land. Forty-seven Cherokee children were under a successful course of instruction. In 1818, a mission was commenced among the Choctaws, by the Eev. Messrs. Kingsbury and Williams, from the Brainerd station. The place selected for the station was called Eliot, situated within the bounds of the State of Mississippi, near the Yazoo river, and 400 miles W. S. W. of the Brainerd station, in the Cherokee nation. In August of that year they felled the first tree on the mission ground, and in the! following April they had erected eleven 602 NORTH AMEKICAN INDIANS. log dwellings, a mill-house, stable, store-house, and several outbuildings. They had also clear- ed 35 acres of good land, and enclosed it with a substantial fence, besides enclosing gardens and yards for cattle, and constructing several roads and bridges. In this work they were assisted by the Choctaws, who had never be- fore been instructed in any such arts. Mean- while they had preaching every Sabbath, at- tended by a number of natives, and some half- breeds, and negroes. During this year some, preliminary steps were taken towards estab- lishing a mission among that portion of the Cherokee nation who had removed to the Arkansas, on the west side of the Mississippi river, and also among the Chickasaws, whose country lay partly between that of the Chero- kees and Choctaws. The report of the Board for 1820 speaks of the conversion of several natives among the Cherokees at Brainerd, and of the gathering of a church of 20 members, including 3 or 4 negroes. Particular mention is made of Catharine Brown and her brother David, two Cherokee converts of great promise. Having occasion to visit their father, who was sick, David read and ex- plained to him the Bible, and maintained family worship, and also conversed freely with their friends and neighbors, warning them to flee from the wrath to come. Several were thus led to inquire for the way of truth. The station at Eliot, among the Choctaws, is reported this year, 1820, after an existence of two years, as having eight commodious log- cabins, a mill-house, and a blacksmith's and joiner's shop ; a lumber-house, granary, and stable ; more than two hundred neat cattle, teams of oxen, and horses ; wagons, carts, plows, and other implements of husbandry, sufficient for a large plantation. The imports ance of these things to a tribe entirely savage, till the missionaries went among them, and without the least knowledge of agriculture, will be readily understood. They had also a school of seventy or eighty youths, male and female, taught in the elementary branches, and in agriculture and domestic labor. It was a most encouraging fact, that the Choctaw chiefs, from the first, manifested the most friendly disposition towards the mission. They contributed for the support of the mission- school $2,000 a year for sixteen years, from each of the three districts of their nation, making $6,000 a year, or a total of $96,000. This large sum was their proportion of the proceeds of land sold to the United States government. Such a gift, freely made, shows a surprising appreciation of the importance of education, among a people, till lately, ignorant of every thing but the simple arts of fishing and hunting. In January, 1821 , Dr. Elizur Butler, phy- sician, and Rev. William Potter, arrived at Brainerd, as missionaries among the Chero- kees. The mission had been extended, and was to embrace 3 ou1>stations, viz., Taloneney, Chatooga, and Creekpath. In connection with Creekpath is mentioned one of the most remarkable displays of Divine grace which the history of missions affords, viz. : the con- version of the erjtire family of Mr. John Brown, consisting of eight persons. The con- version of Catharine and David Brown, and their visit to their sick father, have already been mentioned. The father was converted, and subsequently the mother, a son's wife, and three sisters of Catharine. Thus a whole fa- mily emerged in a short time from pagan darkness into the light of the glorious Gospel. The Choctaw mission was strengthened during this year, by the arrival of several ad- ditional laborers. Besides the station at Eliot, three others, viz , at Mayhewj 100 miles east from Eliot, the Six Towns, and the French Camps, were commenced. Eev. Dr. Worces- ter, corresponding secretary of the Board, died this year, while on a visit to the Choctaw missions. In 1822 there were 218 Cherokee children in the school at Brainerd, rapidly improving in their studies, and in various departments of industry. The oldest class of girls sustained, it was said, a better examination than most girls of the same age who have attended school constantly from their early years. Several of the most promising scholars had become pious, and others were anxiously inquiring the way of salvation. Bev. Mr. Butrick, of the Cherokee mission, reported this year, 1822, considerable progress in the acquisition of the language. He found it " very artificial and complicated, evincing, beyond a doubt, that it was once spoken by a highly-cultivated people." Mr. B. had made translations into Cherokee of several portions of the Scriptures, a summary of Christian doc trines and duties, and several hymns for pub- lic worship. The report for 1823 shows an extension of the Cherokee mission ; three new stations having been occupied, viz., Hightower, 80 miles S. S. E. from Brainerd ; Willstown, 50 miles S. W. from Brainerd ; and Haweis, 60 miles south from Brainerd. In connection with the Creekpath station, is noticed this year the death of Catharine Brown. She had been an ornament to religion since joining the church in 1818, and died a happy death. An impor- tant and solemn transaction occurred this year — the admission to the church of four brothers, named Sanders, their mother, the wives of two of the brothers, and one sister. These having been baptized, proceeded to dedicate their household to God in the same ordinance, to the number of 21, some of them adults. Says Mr. Hall, one of the missionaries, " It was a melting scene ; scarcely was a dry eye in the house. It was not without exertion that some kept from weeping aK>ud. The aged mother and the rest of the family appeared deeply af- NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 603 fected." Two or three other members of this family were soon afterwards converted. Many iaterestiag facts are stated this year, 1823, by the missionaries among the Ohoc- taws. In the school at Eliot were about 40 children, the greater part of whom could read the Bible and write a legible hand. Some were expert in translating from English into Choctaw, and from Choctaw into Euglish ; others had made considerable progress in arithmetic and in drawing maps. JVIessrs. By- ington and Wright had made some progress in reducing to form the elements of the Choctaw lauguage, assisted by Mr. David Polsom, who liad spent four years at the Foreign Mission School at Cornwall, Ct. They had agreed upon an alphabet, and assigned the powers of the vowels, marks of accent, &o. To adopt a uniform mode of spelling was extremely diffi- cult, owing to the variations of speaking among the natives, who used various letters interchangeably, as b for m, and m for b, &c. Some thousands of words, however, had been collected, and Mr. Byington had acquired some facility in speaking " this strange lan- guage." The Mayhew station experienced a severe bereavement this year, in the death of Mrs. Kiugsbury. She was a woman of rare quail fications, and a devoted missionary. She had left a father's house, abounding with all the comforts of a New England homjj, for the su- perintendence of a large missiou'femily, among the ignorant and neglected children of the forest ; yet she never once regretted her deci- gion. On her death she only lamented that she had not done more for Christ. The station called French Camps, received this year the name of Bethel. It is about 60 miles S. W. from Mayhew, and the same dis- tance S. E. from Eliot. Another Choctaw star tion was commenced about this time at a place called Emmaus, 140 miles S. B. from Mayhew, near the line which separates Missis- sippi from Alabama, and not far from the white settlements of the south. Another sta- tion was commenced at Tok-e-na Chu-ka-ma, 115 miles S. W. from Mayhew, and 120 miles N. W. from Mobile. Two important laws were passed by the Choctaw nation during the year 1823 ; one was for the suppression of intemperance, and the other related to infanticide. For a long time the Choctaws had carried on a great trade in whisky. Those who could, paid mo- ney for it, others gave cattle, clothes, blankets, guns, and every species of property. Their love of whisky exceeded all bounds, and there were white people from the States, un- principled and vile enough to furnish it to them. The consequence was, poverty, wretch- edness, quarreling- and murder filled the country. The law passed by the chiefs near- ly suppressed this great evil. The inhuman practice of infanticide had ex- isted among the Choctaws from time immemo- rial, though this fact was not known till the missionaries went among them. A father or mother, to get rid of the trouble or support of an infant, would kill it by burying it alive, stamp- ing on its breast, strangling it, or knocking it on the head. This horrid custom the chiefs, enlightened by missionary efforts, put an end to by very stringent laws. The first punish- ment under the new law was that of a woman who had killed her infant by knocking it on the head with a pine knot. She was tied to a tree and whipped till she fainted ; and her hus- band, who instigated the deed, was punished in the same manner. Supposed witchcraft was another cause of much suffering to this people. They experi- enced imaginary terrors from the apprehension that evil spirits exerted a supernatural power to do them harm,; and besides this, application was often made to a conjurer that he would designate a witch, and for some paltry fee he would fix upon some person, generally a wo- man, as the cause of the calamity complained of. The devoted object was then hunted down and slain, or obtained safety by flight. But this evil disappeared as the light of the Gospel increased. The mission among the Cherokees on the Arkansas was now in successful operation. The seat of the mission was at a place called Dwight, on the Illinois Creek, about four miles north of the Arkansas, and nearly 500 miles, following the coui-se of the stream, from the junction of this river with the Mississippi. There were at this station, in 1823, two mis- sionaries, two teachers, and one mechanic. It may be proper to state here the reason why some of the Cherokee tribe were found on the other side of the Mississippi. In the first place some of them wandered thither for the purpose of hunting. Afterwards, as they grew more numerous, a treaty was made with the United States, by which these Indians ex- changed their lands in Greorgia and Tennessee, for lands on the Arkansas river. This led to a considerable migration, so that nearly one- third of the Cherokee tribe removed to a place 700 miles west of the place of their nativity. They were composed chiefly of that portion of the Cherokees who were least inclined to look with a favorable eye upon missions, schools, and civilization, so that the prejudices to be encountered among them were peculiarly strong. A school was, however, established, and gradually the jealousy of the Indians gave way, and they rejoiced in the education of their children. As the system of education included manual labor at agriculture, or the mecha- nic arts, many objections were raised ou this ground,- but the great utility of such arts was at length seen, and opposition died away. From the very commencement of missionary labors among the North American Indians, doubts were very extensively entertained as to G04: NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. the possibility of their conversion, or even civ- ilization. Tliey were looked upon as wild men, savages, incorrigibly addicted to hunting, fish- ing, and wars among themselves, and the at- tempt to make them an agricultural, sober, and Christian people, was regarded by many good men as hopeless. The common remark was, " The Indian will be, an Indian in spite of all that can be done for him." This deep pre- judice, however, gradually gave way before the facts which were circulated through the reports of the Board and other publications. In their journal for 1823, the missionaries, alluding to the prevailing impression, say, " We think it would be impossible to show any substantial reasons for thinking that the aborigines of America are in a more hopeless state than the inhabitants of Asia or Africa. That such a belief is erroneous is incontrovertibly manifest, from the labors of Eliot, the Mayhews, Brain- erd, and the United Brethren." In noticing these remarks the Board say, " Beyond all reasonable doubt, divine truth is as likely to be efficacious upon the heart of a Cherokee, who has arrived at mature age, as upon any other man who has grown up in ignorance and sin." The above facts are important as showing the peculiar embarrassments of the Board in its early efforts among the Indian tribes of this country. Missions to the Islander and the Hindoo might be successful, but not those to the red man of the forest. But the Board and its missionaries had more faith, and pur- sued their object with a steady purpose. The Cherokee mission in 1823 and 1824 was marked by a steady progress, and the Board were led to remark, in their review, that the Oherokees were " making advances in civ- ilization and a well regulated society. The dwellings are made more comfortable from year to year, regular industry is more pursued, laws are enacted and executed which restrain from immorality and secure a respect for civil government, and a desire for acquiring an education is becoming more prevalent." The Choctaw mission was enlarged this year by the occupancy of several new stations, Mr. Byington, Mr. Wright, and some other members of the mission, were giving special attention to the language, in order that they might communicate religious inairuction to those who could not understand English. Whisky drinking had been very much dimin- ished, and the whoop of a drunken Indian had not been heard for some months. This change had been effected in great measure by the laws of the Choctaws themselves. A dreadful mortality prevailed among this people during 1823 and 1824, and 2,000 are supposed to have died in 18 months, which was about ene-tenth of the whole population. The prevalent dis- ease was the measles. The mission among the Cherokees of the Arkansas was more systematic and regular in its operations than the others, owing to the fact of its having but one station, that at Dwight, The school contained 60 scholars, and the mis- sionaries say, " The number might be increased to 100 or 150 within a few days, if we would open our doors for their reception. But our limited resources forbid our enlarging the num- ber." In their report this year the Board say, " As the missionaries become more acquainted with the state of this tribe, especially by hold ing intercourse with the more aged, and mak- ing inquiries respecting former times, they are convinced that anciently the people had the knowledge of the true G-od ; but a long period must have elapsed since the glory departed from them. In many instances the adult na- tives have never heard of the immortality of the soul. In others they entertain a vague notion that the good and the bad go to difi'er- ent places in the future world. But how it is possible for a bad man to become good they do not know. Indeed they have no clear idea of what goodness or badness is, no just views of sin, no idea of forgiveness, no conception of a holy God or a universal Providence." A highly favorable mention is made this year of Mr. John Brown, a Choctaw who joined the Foreign Mission School at Corn- wall in 1820, and subsequently spent two years at Andover, making at both places very rapid progress in his studies. After lecturing to crowded audiences in the principal cities of the north on the condition of his nation, and spending a season at Washington, he returned to his . countrymen and to his father's house, near Dwight, where he was received with much kindness and attention. As the missions among the various tribes of Indians begin to assume at this period a more distinct and important, as well as complicated character, in the reports and journals, and as the number requiring notice is from time to time increased, a separate and continued ac- count of each down to the present time will, it is thought, be a matter of convenience to the reader, and this method will be hereafter adopted. In pursuance of this plan, we take up, as first in the order of time. The Mission among the Cherokees. — The pro- gress of the work from its commencement, in January, 1817, down to 1824, has already been briefly sketched. At the period last named, we find the mission to the Cherokees in the Southern States occupying seven sta- tions, viz., Brainerd, Carmel, Oreekpath, High- tower, Willstown, Haweis, and Candy's Creek. The geographical position of Brainerd, High- tower, Willstown, and Haweis, has already been designated. Carmel is within the char- tered limits of Georgia, 62 miles from Prain- ard, and 46 miles north-west of the Chatahoo- chee river. Creekpath is' within the State of Alabama, four miles south of the Tennessee river ; Hightower is in Georgia, 35 miles S.S.W. of Carmel ; Willstown is in Alabama, NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 605 10 miles from the western line of Georgia, and Candy's Creek is in Tennessee, 25 miles N.B. of Brainerd. The number of laborers at these seven stations at this period (1824,) including missionaries, teachers, farmers, me- chanics, and the wives of these several classes, amounted to 30. The number of scholars in the mission schools among the Cherokees was less at this period than in some former years, partly be- cause more discrimination was used in taking children into families. The good done was at no time greater. It was in this year that the missionaries, and the churches under their care at Brainerd, Oarmel, Hightower, and Willstown, were re- ceived into the Union Presbytery of East Tennessee. It was expected that this would naturally increase the interest felt in missions by the ministers and churches in the adjacent new settlements. Another event of importance to the mission and to the whole Cherokee nation, was the invention of a form of alphabetical writing by George Guess. He was a Cherokee, and could neither speak nor read English, yet he became acquainted with a leading principle of the English language, viz., that marks or cha- racters can be made the symbols of sound, and he conceived the notion that he could express all the syllables of the Cherokee language by separate characters. On collecting all the syllables which, after long study and trial, he could recall to memory, he found the number to be 82. In order to express these, he took the letters of our alphabet for a part of them, and various modifications of our letters, with some characters of his own invention, for the rest. With these symbols he set about writr ing letters : and very soon a correspondence was actually maintained between him and his countrymen beyond the Mississippi, 500 miles apart. This soon became a matter of great interest, and young Cherokees traveled great distances to be instructed in this new and easy method of writing and reading. In three days they were able to commence letter writ- ing, and return home to their native villages prepared to teach others. Subsequently, either Guess or some other person, discovered four other syllables, making all the known syllables of the Cherokee language 86. It is a curious fact that all syllables in Cherokee end with vowels. The same is true of the lan- guage of the islanders of the Pacific Ocean. But in the Choctaw language syllables often end with consonants. The mission among the Cherokees of the Arkansas has, as already noticed, only the sta- tion at Dwight, which is near the Arkansas river, about 200 miles from its mouth in a direct line, and 500 miles by the course of the river. There were at this place, in 1824, 12 white persons, including two missionaries, a teacher, a steward, a farmer, and a mechanic, and their wives. There was a school for boys, and one for girls, which were making very en- couraging progress, and the missionaries ex- pressed the opinion that many of the pupils would not suffer by a comparison with scholars of their age in any of the states. These chil- dren were but a little while before wandering in the forest, totally without mental and moral cultivation. In 1825, Eev. Samuel A. "Worcester and his wife joined the mission at Brainerd, and, at the same time, two farmers, with their wives and a female teacher, went out to be employed at different stations. The schools at Brainerd were, in a iine condition. As evidence of ca- pacity in the Indian youth, it was stated that a boy, ten years old, who had been in school less than five months, not having previously learned the English alphabet, was spelling in words of three syllables, and had never missed but a single word. To master in so short a time a foreign language, and one so arbitrary in its mode of spelling, indicates very unusual quickness and strength of mind. The educa- tion of females was found to be of great assist- ance in the work of civilization. At the Willstown station, an important moral refor- mation had taken place. When the first mis- sionary came there, in 1823, the intemperate use of ardent spirits was almost universal ; but, now, intoxicating liquor was entirely dis- used by a great majority of the people, and riotous assemblages were unknown. The knowledge of Guess's alphabet was in- creasing, and many adults who had never learnt the English letters, and never would, it was thought, would immediately read the New Testament, if printed and written in this char- acter. As an evidence of the progress of civ- ilization, the trial by jury was introduced this year, and conducted with great solemnity. The national council also appropriated money for the establishment of a printiug-press, with English and Cherokee types, and for laying the foundation of a public school. In aid of these objects, Mr. Ellas Boudinot visited the northern states, and received liberal patron- age. As the Cherokees occupied portions of sev- eral states, and the question of boundaries and titles was one of great importance, the secre- taries took occasion this year to state, in their report, that the Indian titles wore in no way affijcted by the limits of different states, whe- ther fixed by the states themselves, or by Con- gress. The national authorities had uniformly admitted that the tribes of Indians in North America had a perfect right to the soil of their ancestors, now in their own occupancy, unless that right had been voluntarily relin- quished for a good consideration. " When we speak, therefore, of Indian territory, as lying in the State of Tennessee, or in the State of Georgia, it is not intended that the Indians there residing are subject to the laws of the 606 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. whites, or that the running of a! line througli their country, or marljing it upon a map, has any efibet to impair their claims, or dispossess them of their patrimonial inheritance. The only way in which this inheritance can be alienated, is by treaties fairly and honorably made, and with the full assent of the present owners." These remarks will enable the read- er to judge, not only of the rights of the In- dians, but of the manner in which those rights were subsequently treated by the national gov- ernment. It may be added, that large tracts had already been sold by treaties, to the Uni- ted States, and the territories which remained to the Cherokees contained about 12,000 square miles, or 8,000,000 acres. About two- thirds of this country lay in the north-west corner of Georgia, one-fifth in the north-east part of Alabama, one-tenth in the south-east part of Tennessee, and a small portion in the south-west corner of North Carolina. The Cherokee population was supposed, in 1825, to be about 14,000. They had already made great advances in learning, and in agriculture and mechanic arts. The national council met annually for the exercise of legislative func- tions, and government was administered ac- cording to the usages of civilized countries. A regular constitution, however, had not been adopted, and in the summer of 1826 a council was held, and a committee appointed to draft a constitution. Measures were also taken this year at Boston, to prepare types in the pecu- liar character invented by Guess, and to pro- vide a printing-press for the nation. In the autumn of 1827, Mr. David Greene was appointed to visit all the missionary sta- tions among the Indians in the south-western and western parts of the United States, which service he performed, — traveling 6,000 miles, inspecting 30 stations, and reaching Boston in July, 1828. His report, so far as it related to the Cherokees, authorized the statement, that nearly all the adult population, and in the tribe at large more than half, were actually capable of reading their own language, a fact almost incredible, but for the facilities afforded by the alphabet of Guess. There was a won- derful improvement, also, in regard to houses, dress, style of living, industry, &c. ; the men being found upon well-cultivated farms, and the women spinning and weaving cotton, and providing garments of their own manufacture. More than 500 children had been taught in the mission schools, and 160 communicants belonged to the churches of the seven stations. This was justly considered by the Board and the missionaries very great and encouraging progress to have been made in ten years, and it ought to have silenced forever the objection that the Indians could not be civilized and Christianized. Earely, if ever, has missionary labor been productive of greater results, within the same period, in any heathen country. In 1828, Mr. Worcester occupied a new sta- tion at New Bchota, not far from Brainerd and devoted himself chiefly to the translation of the Scriptures, and the preparation of reli- gious books and tracts. A printing-press had been put in operation at this place, at the ex- pense of the Cherokees. Among the Cherokees of the Arkansas, dur- ing the few years just noticed, operations were continued with general success. At Dwight a house of worship had been erected, and there wag no family in which some were not hope- fully pious. Within 25 miles of this place there was a population of 1,200, not including the whites, and stated preaching was main- tained in various neighborhoods among these people. Schools were sustained, and the progress made in education, husbandry, &c., was similar to that among the Cherokees in the southern states. A United States agent, Major Duval, residing near Dwight, declared to the corresponding secretary, that a single school for girls at that place, had done more to improve the condition of the Indians, than all the sums of money expended by the gov- ernment, in furnishing them with implements of husbandry, and annual distributions of clothing. In 1829, we find the Cherokees possessed of a regularly organized civil government, and of a written language, unlike any other that ever existed, and yet complete, by the use of which adults could learn to read their native tongue in ten, five, and even three days ; and this lan- guage the invention of an uninstruoted Cher- okee ! For a considerable time this mission had attracted special attention, both because it was the first mission of the Board to the American Indians, and because of the success which' had attended it. But now the eyes of America and of many people in Europe began to be directed with new interest to this tribe, on account of the measures which were in contemplation for their removal. The Chero- kees themselves began to be in great fear and anxiety lest they should be driven from the lands received from their fathers, and con- strained to migrate to a country for which they had no attachment, and which, in their view, would be only a resting-place for a few years, when they would be again driven off, dispersed, and destroyed. In September of this year the nation was deprived of one of its most useful and valued men, Mr. David Brown. He became pious in 1820, acquired his education at the north, and traveled much in the United States, receiving everywhere the esteem and afifection of the people. He had been much engaged in public business, but at the time of his last illness was studying with a view to preach the Gospel. He was the fifth member of the same family who had died in the triumphs of the Christian faith. In 1830, we find the Cherokee nation in an increasingly troubled and distracted state A NORTH AMEEldAN INDIANS. 607 treaty for their removal had already been formed between the United States government and leading men of the tribe, in opposition, however, to a large majority of the Ohero- kees. The subject was engrossing the atten- tion of Congress and of the nation, and it seemed a fitting time for the secretaries to re- cord publicly their views of the subject, as it related to the Cherokees ; and accordingly, in their report of this year, they said, " What- ever may be thought of some questions rela1> ing to this matter, the following points are indisputable, viz., that treaties in existence between the United States and the Cherokee nation guarantee the inviolability of the Cher- okee territory and of the Cherokee govern- ment ; that the words in which these engage- ments are expressed are perfectly plain, not admitting of doubt or cavil ; and that these words express what was the real meaning of the parties at the time, and what was under- stood to be the meaning by both parties for more than forty years. It is true, also, that the Cherokees conceive themselves to have a perfect right to their own country, and that they are unwilling to leave it. The few who have consented to emigrate, have done so from the apprehension that all would be compelled to remove, and that those who remained lon- gest would be in the most unfavorable circum- stances." In March of the same year, Mr. Worcester wrote a letter on the subject of the advancement of the Cherokees in civilization, and their feelings with regard to a removal, and addressed it to a member of the Cherokee deputation at Washington. It was printed by the Senate, and appended to a report from the War Department. It gave a fair and candid ac- count of the actual condition of the Cherokees, and may be found in the Herald of May, 1830. Amid all these disturbances, public religious meetings were held at all the stations as usual, and the schools and printing-press were kept in operation. At the beginning of 1831 there were eight churches, embracing in all 219 members, at the stations occupied by this mission, of whom 167 were Cherokees, and the remainder were of African descent, or white persons residing in the nation. The number of scholars in all the schools was 1.50, which was less than usual, the school at Brain- erd having been broken up by the burning of their school-house. A Cherokee Sunday-school Union had been organized, embracing six Bchools, eight teachers, and 113 scholars. During the year, the mission had also printed 1,400 copies of the Cherokee hymn-book, 1,000 copies of the Gospel of Matthew, and 3,000 copies of a tract of twelve pages, con- sisting of extracts from the Old and New Testaments. These had all been prepared by Mr. Worcester, assisted by Ellas Boudinot, who was at the same time editor of a well- conducted and useful paper, called the " Cher- okee Phceuix." At the period just named, fourteen years from the commencement of the mission, tho" secretaries could say, " The mass of the peo- ple, in their dress, houses, furniture, agricultu- ral implements, manner of cultivating the soil, raising stock, providing for their families, and in their estimate of the value of an edu- cation, will not suffer by a comparison with the whites in the surrounding settlements. The mass of the people have externally em- braced the Christian religion. Intemperance, the bane of the Indian as well as the white man, has been checked ; the laws of the na- tion rigorously exclude intoxicating liquors from all public assemblies ; and numerous so- cieties for the promotion of temperance havo been organized." But in spite of these im- provements and these laws, the secretaries were obliged to add, in their report for 1831, that " the nation has been made to experience nearly all the political and domestic evils with which, for two or three years, they had been threatened. Their government has been nearly prostrated ; their council has been forbidden to assemble ; their laws have been declared null and void, and their magistrates prohibited, under severe penalties, from enforcing them ; intoxicating liquors have been introduced with- out restraint ; their country has been traversed by armed troops ; their property has been plundered, their persons arrested and imprison- ed ; the land which they know is theirs by im- memorial possession, and which has been guar- anteed to them by numerous and perfectly ex- plicit treaties, has been claimed by others, and surveyed, and they themselves threatened with immediate ejectment. These and other vexa- tions and sufferings to which they have been subjected, have filled the nation with anxiety and alarm." In this condition of discourage- ment, and almost of despair, some, as was to be expected, gave themselves up to idleness and intemperance, and ceased to cultivate fields and erect buildings, not knowing who should possess them. The future was all dark, for if they could not hold their present country they could be secure of no resting-place, however it might be secured to them by solemn treaties. The Board had already addressed a memorial to Congress on this subject, the preparation of which was the last official act of the Corres- ponding Secretary, Rev. Dr. Cornelius. It was referred to the Committee on Indian Affairs, but was not knowi) to produce any important results. In addition to all the other embarrassments thrown in the way of the mission, and the dis- tresses caused to the Cherokees, the missiona- ries themselves began, in 1831, to be arrested and imprisoned. Id January of this year, the missionaries at Carmel, Hightower, Haweis, and New Echota, the four stations lying within the territory claimed by G-eorgia, were served with copies of a law, then just passed, declar- ing, in substance, that all white men found. 608 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. within the State after the hrst of the following March, without having taken an oath of alle- giance to the State, would be imprisoned in the penitentiary at hard labor, for a term ' of not less than four years. But there were important and obvious reasons why the mis- sionaries should not abandon the field ; and they could not take the prescribed oath with- out an admission that Georgia was right. They therefore concluded to remain at their poste and abide the consequences. They were unmolested till the 12th of March, when a detachment of the Georgia guard, consist- ing of twenty-six armed and mounted men, proceeded to each of the four stations named, and arrested three of the missionaries, viz., Messrs. Proctor, Worcester, and Thompson. The fourth, Mr. Buttrick, was absent. They were taken to the head-quarters of the guard, where they employed legal counsel, and were set free by the judge of the Superior Court of Gwinnet county, on the ground that they were under the patronage of the United States government, and were in such a sense its agents that the laws of Georgia did not apply to them. They therefore returned to their stations, anticipating no further troubles of this nature. A correspondence was now held between the Governor of Georgia and the President of the United States, the result of which was a state- ment by the president, that he did not consider the missionaries as being in any sense agents of the government. Upon this the mission aries received letters, informing them of their exposure, and giving them ten days to remove out of the State or take the required oath. Messrs. Buttrick, Proctor and Thompsoji thought it expedient to remove with their fa- milies. Dr. Butler was arrested, but released on account of sickness in his family, upon a promise that he would deliver himself up at the proper time. Mr. Thompson, who continued to visit his station at Hightower, was subse- quently arrested and treated in the most brutal manner. Though seriously ill, and offering to furnish himself a horse, he was compelled to walk, and when he could walk no longer he was thrust into a most offensive and uncomfort- able wagon. At one time he was chained. After being locked up in jail awhile he was dismissed, and told to go where he pleased, but no provision was made for his return. A month later, Mr. Worcester and Dr. Butler were again arrested, and subjected to cruelties and indignities such as savages themselves would scarcely inflict upon their captives. The shocking and painful details of the treatment which they received from the military, both on the march and in the filthy and wretched prison into which they were thrust, are given at length in a letter written by Mr. Worces- ter, and published in the annual report for 1831. They were finally taken out of the hands of the military, and released, on giving bonds to appear at the superior court of Gwin- net county, in September. On the 2.'5th of that month they were tried, and Mr. Worces- ter and Dr. Butler, with eight other white men, one a missionary of the Methodist Epis- copal church, were sentenced to four yeara hard labor in the penitentiary. On arriving at the door of the prison they were all of- fered a, pardon and release, on condition of their removing from the State, or taking the oath of allegiance to the laws of Georgia, and all but two of them accepted of these humiliating terms. Mr. Worcester and Dr. Butler, believing that obedience to such laws would be treason against God, conceded no- thing, and were committed to the penitentiary. Measures were taken to bring the matter before the Supreme Court of the United States, and a writ of error having been gran1> ed by the justices of that court, the case was brought up and ably argued, in February 1832, by Messrs. Wirt and Sergeant in behalf of the plaintiffs in error. The decision was pro- nounced by ChietJustioe Marshall, on the 3d of the following March. It reviewed the whole subject of Indian titles, the treaties which had been made with the Indians, and the recent laws of Georgia, which extended the jurisdiction of the State over the Chero- kee country, and these laws were pronounced repugnant to the Constitution, to treaties, and to the laws of the United States. The man- date of the Court was immediately issued, reversing and annulling the judgment of the Superior Court of Georgia, and ordering that all proceedings on the indictment against the prisoner.^ do forever cease, and that the prisoners be, and hereby are dismissed therefrom. But the Superior Court of Georgia refused to obey the mandate, or to discharge the pris- oners. A memorial to the President of the United States was prepared by the counsel for the prisoners, praying him to interpose his authority for enforcing the decision of the Court. Upon consultation, however, it was thought inexpedient to present the memorial ; neither was it thought advisable to prosecute the -case by a second appeal to the Supreme Court ; for it was well understood, that though that Court would sustain its own decision, the President, (Andrew Jackson) was not inclined to enforce it, and therefore the result would be doubtful. Further, the missionaries had the assurance of an unconditional release, provi- ded they would desist from the attempt to obtain that release by a military enforcement of the decision of the Supreme Court. This assurance came not from any solicitations on their part. They made " no solicitation, no overture, no compromise." But they were often and earnestly solicited by persons in the confi- dence of the Governor of Georgia, to desist from the prosecution, and assured that if they did so, they should not long remain in prison. Even after they had given notice, as they did at NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 609 one time, of their intention to move the Supreme Court for a further process, they were waited up- on by two members elect of Congress, whose names are given, and told officially, that they had conversed with the Governor od the subject, and Ijnew his views, and that they might regard it as certain, if they withdrew the suit, that they would be discharged without any concession, or condition, or even an applica- tion to the Governor. These repeated pledges induced the prisoners, by their counsel, to drop all further proceedings, and on the 14th of January, 1833, the keeper of the penitentiary received a proclamation from the Governor of the State, directing him to set Messrs. Wor- cester and Butler at liberty. This he commu- nicated to them forthwith, and discharged them. They immediately returned to the sta- tions which they had respectively occupied in the Cherokee country, and resumed their mis- sionary labors. The reasons which determined the conduct of these brethren from first to last, were sta- ted by them with great clearness and force, and published in the report of the Board for 1833. In the same report may be found the decision and mandate of the Supreme Court ; the reply of the Court of Georgia ; the memorial of the Board, praying for the protection of the missionaries, and several other important documents relating to this subject. During the year and four months that Messrs. Worcester and Butler were in prison, they were permitted daily to read the Scrip- tures, and pray with the prisoners confined in the same building ; and during the last six months or more, Mr. Worcester preached once every Sabbath to all the prisoners. A spirit of inquiry was awakeaed, and many, it is be- lieved, were savingly benefitted. It is painful in the extreme to dwell upon such facts as have been recorded in the preced- ing pages ; and it seems scarcely credible that they could have occurred in a country like Ours, and in an enlightened Christian State. It is not surprising that missionaries should occasionally fare thus at the hands of benight- ed Brahmins, or proud Mussulmans, but that in the United States, and within 25 years, they should have been dragged from their fields of labor by an armed soldiery, and treat- ed like felons ; under laws, too, enacted for the very purpose of extinguishing Indian claims, and getting possession of their lands, in violation of treaties and of the Constitution, and all this persisted in against the decision of the highest judicial tribunal in the land, — this is surprising and deeply humiliating ; and it forms a chapter in our country's history, which, for naked injustice, mercenary aims, and bold contempt of national faith and honor, is scarcely equaled by any of the public wrongs and oppressions laid to her charge. During the period of these troubles there 39 was no regular instruction at the four stations within the hmits of Georgia, and at the other stations the work was prosecuted under great disadvantages. Previous to the release of Messrs. Worcester and Butler, the whole Chero- kee country, lying within the chartered limits of Georgia, had been surveyed and divided into lots of 140 acres each, and distributed by lot- tery among the citizens of that State. The laws of Georgia had begun to be enforced, counties had been organizedj courts held, and magistrates and civil officers appointed. In this state of things, the Cherokces were divi- ded on the question of ceding their lands by treaty to the United States ; but whether they did so or not, it had become evident to all that they must remove,' either peaceably or under a despotism which they could not resist. In the beginning of 1834, the number of white settlers on the Indian lands was estimated to- outnumber the Indians themselves, and no art was left untried by the whites to draw them into intemperance and every kind of debauch- ery. The depression of morals was deplorable,, and yet not so general as might have been ex- pected. Most of the influential men of the nation manifested much firmness and dignity of character, and remained the steadfast friends of the mission, and of the intellectual and moral improvement of these people. After repeated negotiations and conferences between the Indians and the government at Washington, the details of which it is unneces- sary to give here, a treaty was at length agreed upon, Dec. 1835, by which the Cherokees ceded the whole of the country which they occupied, and consented to be removed to a territory west of the Mississippi within two' years. For their lands, improvements, build- ings, &c., they were to receive $500,000, and $650,000 to defray the expenses of their re- moval, and of sustaining them one year after their arrival at their new homes. This treaty was negotiated with the representatives of a party or section of the Indians, and against it Mr. Ross and his friends protested in all the stages of its progress, as being unsatisfactory in its provisions, made contrary to the will of the nation, and with persons wholly unau- thorized to transact such business. All at- tempts to annul or improve it, however, failed,, and nothing remained but its rigid enforce- ment. The time allowed the Indians to remain ex- pired on the 23d of May, 1838, and immedi- ately after that day the military commenced their operations. Families were taken ii-om their houses and farms, leaving their furniture,, fields and flocks as they were, unprotected, to be possessed by they knew not whom, and were marched under strong guards to camps selected to be their starting places for a distant, and to them a strange land. In June nearly the whole tribe had been taken from their houses to the camps, and some thousands were started 610 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. off on their dreary inarch westward. Owing, however, to the extreme heat of the season, emigration was soon suspended, and the great body of the Indians remained till the coming autumn. On the Sabbath, Aug. 19, the Lord's Supper was administered for the last time by the mis- sionaries, to as many as could be collected at Braiuerd ; and early in October the Cherokee people bid a mournful and reluctant adieu to the country of which they had long and strenu- ously, but in vain, been endeavoring to retain possession. They were divided into fourteen companies, embracing nearly 16,000 persons. Their route lay through the States of Tennessee, Kentucky, Illinois, Slissouri, and Arkansas, a distance of six or seven hundred miles, and all the companies but one made this journey by land, consuming from three and a half to five and a half months on the way. Dwelling, as they had, within the narrow limits of encamp- ments for four months before starting, and sheltered only by tents on the way, and much of the time without adequate food or clothing, it is not wonderful that great suffering and mortality were experienced among them. Ac- cording to the most carelul estimates, there was an average of from 13 to 15 deaths a day from the time they started, and by the time the last company had readied its destination, be- tween 4,000 and 5,000 persons had died, or more than one-fourth of the whole population in the space of ten months. This, it was admitted by the friends of the Cherokees and of the mission, resulted from the nature of the case, and not from any unnecessary exposure or bad treatment on the part of those who were employed in carrying the deplorable measure into effect. The dissensions which prevailed among the Cherokees before their removal were not less annoying in their new home. In June, 1839, after the close of a council during which there had been much party heat, Major Eidgo, his son, John Ridge, and Etias Boudinot, were assassinated. They had taken a leading part in the treaty of Dec. 1835, and fell victims to the enmity awakened by that measure in the minds of the opposing party. Omitting, for want of space, the details of re-settlement, and the ro-organization of the mission, we find them, in 1840, occupying four stations, viz., Dwight, Fairfield, Park Hill, a,nd Honey Creek. Dwight, as already ex- plained, is a few miles north of the Arkansas river, about 500 miles from its junction with the Mississippi, or 200 miles in a straight line. This had been the centre of missionary opera- tions for several years among the Cherokees who early removed to that country. The other stations were at no great distance from this, and there were in this field, in 1840, five mis- sionaries, one physician, three male and fifteen female assistants, two native preachers, and one native printer, making a total of 27. Among the missionaries were Messrs. Worces- ter and Butler, and several others who had labored in the old Cherokee country. In 1841, when full returns began to be re- ceived, there were five churches, and over 200 communicants. There were also five schools, embracing 225 pupils. The school fund of the Cherokees was sufficient to support teachers and furnish books, stationery, &c., for eleven public schools, and the system was ready to go into operation as soon as teachers could be procured. A mission press was in operation at Park Hill, and a Cherokee almanac, an edition of Cherokee laws, and the epistles of John, had been printed. Large meetings had been held for the promotion of temperance, and about 1,000 of the Cherokees were living in conformity to the temperance pledge. The amount of printing executed at the mission press in 1843, was reported to be 140,000 pages. The congregation at Fairfield erect- ed this year a large and convenient house of worship, the old one having become too small. In 1844 the mission press executed, in the Cherokee language, the following works, viz. : Acts of the Apostles, 5000 copies ; Gospel of Matthew, 5000 copies ; Select Passages of Scripture, 5000 copies ; Evils of Intoxicating Drinks, 5000 ; a tract. Poor Sarah, 5000 ; Christian Almanac, 1000 ; making a total of 26,000 copies, and of 1,586,000 pages. Be- sides this, over 50,000 pages of various works were executed in the Choctaw language. During the years 1846, 184'7, and 1848, no very marked changes were reported. Party strifes continued, and outrages on property and life were prevalent, but they were not of such a nature as to interrupt missionary labor at either of the stations. The general sentiment of the people was against the sale of intoxicat- ing liquor, and some 3000 persons were en- rolled as members of total abstinence societies. The cause of education also has an upward tendency, and two high schools, one for boys and one for girls, were established, and the necessary buildings erected, at an expense of fifteen or twenty thousand dollars each, all which was defrayed by the Cherokees them- selves. The structure of their alphabet afford- ed great facilities in the acquisition of knowl- edge, and the name of George Guess will ever be held in grateful remembrance by the friends of Cherokee learning. In 1850 there were scattered over the terri- tory occupied by the Cherokees, 22 free public schools, besides a boarding-school at Dwight, three day schools, and the two high schools. I Ihe communicants numbered 209, and the pnnting for the year amounted to 1,354,000 pages. _ The latest period to which definite informar tion has been received is 1853, and from the reports of that date the following table is com- piled : NORTH AMTDRTCAN INDIAJIS. 611 A ^ ^ 43 d « 5s II f? STATIONS. .3 ^ g 3 ■3 ■s-s s fi s. a «< s 6 h Dwight 3 4R 25 Lees' Creek 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 8 69 60 42 41 46 Park HiU 38 Honey Creek Totals 6 10 4 237 149 In concluding this notice of the Clierokees, it seems desirable to add the following edito- rial passage, from the " Herald " of Sept. 1854 : " The prospects of the Cherokees seem to have brightened, in certain directions within the past year. The committee employed Rev. Marcus Palmer, M. D., formerly a missionary of the Board among these Indians, to act as an itinerant during the winter and spring ; and he says, in closing his labors, ' The Cherokee nation is increasing fast in numbers, wealth, intelligence, and civilization. The public po- litical mind is settled and calmed. The intem- perance and frequent murders which now take place, are the effects of the storm which years since went by. The causes being removed, the evils are evidently subsiding, and a better state of things seems to be coming over the people.' It must be confessed, however, that some clouds still darken the horizon of this interesting peo- ple. A powerful revival of religion is greatly needed. If the influences of the Holy Spirit shall be much looger withheld, the Christian will have great occasion for solicitude and fear." Chodaws. — The events of this mission, from its commencement in 1818 to 1824, have been sufficiently noticed. The Choctaws occupied the central part of Mississippi, extending en- tirely across the State, and numbering about 20,000. The nine stations occupied by the mission were considerably dispersed, and were supplied with missionaries, teachers, and farm- ers, to such an extent as to carry the blessings of religion, education, and the arts of agricul- ture, to nearly all the people. In 1837 a highly favorable report was made of the schools. That at Eliot had 38 native pupils, many of whom were studying geogra- phy, arithmetic, and book-keeping, besides at- tending to writing and composition. Some of them could answer 400 questions on the maps of various countries, and could describe the boundaries of the sereral States. A similar progress had been made in all the schools. In the spring of this year there was considerable religious interest at Mayhew, as the fruits of which nine persons were admitted to the church in June. The whole number of chil- dren instructed in the Eliot school, from its commpncement to 1828, was 185. In the Sabbath-school at Eliot this year, 7,732 verses of Scripture and of hymns were committed to memory by the boys, and 2,688 by the girls. Great improvements had been made within four or five years in the cultivation of land and the manner of living. The introduction of whisky was, however, a great impediment to civilization, leading to many vices, and often to violence and bloodshed. In 1829, the chief of one large district re- solved to suspend the laws forbidding the im- portation of whisky for two moons, and to drink himself and permit others to drink with- out restraint. For this abuse of power he was removed from office, and a man appointed in his place who favored the cause of morality and religion. During this year there was a more general attention to religion among the Choctaws than at any former period. The three chiefs of the nation took a very active part in favoring religious inquiry, and in seve- ral instances meetings of three or four days' continuance were held at convenient places in the wilderness. Many hundreds manifested great anxiety to be instructed, and to become experimentally acquainted with the Gospel, and fifty or sixty native converts were added to the churches. It was regarded as a won- derful display of divine power and grace, and was a subject of praise and joy both to the missionaries and to the churches, which had aided them in their work. At the same time school-books and hymn-books, which had been printed in Boston, in the Choctaw language, were furnishing the elements of knowledge to as many as were prepared to receive and use them. In each of the three districts into which the nation was divided, intemperance received a powerful check, the laws against whisky were rigidly enforced, the people were better clothed, the lands were better tilled, and in every respect the improvement was very striking. In the early part of 1830, the Choctaws be- gan to be seriously disturbed with the ques- tion of their removal to a country west of the Mississippi. In March of that year a treaty was made between the Choctaw nation and the government ; but it was not ratified, and was of no effect. In the following September, a deputation from the government visited the Choctaws, and tried to persuade them to sell their country, and remove across the Missis- sippi river. The Choctaws, in council, ap- pointed a committee of sixty, twenty from each district, to consider the subject and make a reply, and their report was unanimously against making any treaty. Their report was approved by the whole body of the nation assembled ; and, supposing that the matter was at an end, most of them returned to their homes. The next day the commissioners for the government assembled the few who re- mained, and by various threats and promises induced them to sign the treaty. Whec it 612 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. was known by the people that their country was sold, it produced a general feeling of in- dignation. A large majority of the captains and warriors were strongly opposed to it, and the chiefs who were instrumental in forming the treaty were turned out of office, and others elected in their places. By the treaty the Ohoctaws ceded to the United States all their lands east of the Mis- sissippi, and agreed to be removed to lands provided for them west of the Arkansas ter- ritory ; one-half as soon as the fall of 1832, and the remainder in one year from that date, at the expense of the government ; food to be furnished to them on the way, and for one year after their arrival. Ko provision was made in the treaty for refunding 'any part of the money expended by the Board, in establishing and sustaining the mission, amounting, since its commencement, to more than $60,000, besides the labors of some 30 missionaries and assist- ants, for 12 years. Besides, the missionaries of the Board were expressly forbidden by the commissioners, in writing, to be present at the treaty ground, though the presence of all other persons was allowed. The treaty was ratified at Washington, and its effects were sadly visi- ble on the Choctaw nation, producing, as among the Cherokees, distress and desponden- cy among some ; idleness and intemperance among others; and extensive divisions and confusion in all the affairs of the nation. The influence of this state of things on reli- gious meetings, schools, agriculture, and all the means used for the improvement of the people was disastrous. Many had been received to the churches as the fruit of the late revival, and the whole number of communicants in the spring of 1831, was estimated at 360, and the number of baptized children at 244. The number of scholars in all the schools was about 235 ; of these, 144 were boys and 91 were girls ; 112 were full blood Choctaws, and 109 were mix- ed ; 86 read in the New Testament, and 75 in any English book ; 37 used only Choctaw books, and 165 both Choctaw and English ; 74 studied geography, 63 arithmetic ; 148 wrote ; 16 composed in Choctaw, 49 in Eng- lish, and 24 in both languages. Besides these, a large number of adults were taught to read their own language with ease, and many of them learnt to write. The Choc- taw Sunday-school Union embraced 6 schools, 20 teachers and 180 scholars, of whom 7 had been recently received into the church. The Gospels of Luke and of John had been trans- lated by Mr. Wright ; a work on Scripture history had been prepared by Mr. Williams, and printed, and other works were in a state of forwardness. The missionaries at this pe- riod were Kev. Cyrus Kingsbury and Rev. Cy- rus Byington, assisted by 4 farmers, 2 teachers, 3 catechists, and the wives of the missionaries and others. Such was the general state of the mission at the time of the treaty. Such was the degree of elevation and forwardness which had been secured by the thirteen years of missionary la- bor which had been bestowed upon the Choc- taw nation ; enough certainly to warrant the belief that another such time of service in that field, could it have been uninterrupted, would have rendered that people in a high degree in- telligent, civilized and Christianized. The spring of 1832 found a large body of the Ohoctaws on the other side of the Mississippi. They had been removed, through forests and swamps of 500 miles, during a winter of great severity, and great suflfering had been endured ; men and women, the old and the young, the decrepid and the sick, were all included in this melancholy exodus from the homes and improvements which they had cherished ; and multitudes of them were poor- ly clothed and fed ; bare-footed ; without shel- ter, and in this condition often overtaken by snow-storms in the dreary forests of that re- gion. In crossing the swamps of the Missis- sippi large numbers, with their horses, were surrounded by the rising waters, from which there was no possibility of escape. The cap- tain of a steamboat who rescued one corapauy of Choctaws who had been six days in this pe- rilous condition, said that he saw at least a hundred horses standing, frozen dead in the mud. Before the spring of 1833 the Choctaw nation had all been removed to their new homes, if homes these children of the forest could be said to have on earth. In their report for 1833, the Board say, "Definite information respecting the number of the Choctaws who have become settled in their new country has not been received. It is probably between 10,000 and 14,000. The number of the whole tribe before their remov- al commenced, was estimated at 18,000 or 20,000. They generally appear to be satisfied with their new country, and are laboring with a good degree of vigor to prepare for them- selves fields and comfortable residences, and manifest considerable industry and public spi- rit, though they have obviously suffered in their habits and moral character by their ex- posures to temptation while preparing to re- move, and while on their long and hazardous journey." The new territory occupied by the Choc- taws is situated between the Arkansas and Red rivers, west of the State of Arkansas, with Texas on the south, and the Seminoles and Cherokees on the north. As several of the missionaries removed with the Indians, they began at an early day to locate the missions, and in 1834 there were five stations, viz. : AVheelock, Bcthabara, Clear Creek, Bok Tuk- lo, and Cedron. These stations were all near Red river, or Little river, a northern branch, and not far from the south-western corner ot Arkansas. The missionaries were Rev. Messrs. NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 613 .Kingsbury and Byington, Alfred Wright, Loring S. Williams, aad H. E. Wilson, the latter also a physician. There were three churehes ; one at Wheelock, one at Bathabara, and one at Bok Tuklo. The first had 71 mem- bers, 60 of whom were professors of religion be- fore their removal ; the second had 113 mem- bers, and the third 23. The missionaries preached as much as their impaired health would allow, and there was some serious in- quiry and a few hopeful conversions. Six or eight schools for instruction in the Choctaw language were either opened or ready to go into operation, but they were entirely inter- rupted by the sickness which broke out in the preceding autumn, and prevailed to a fearful extent. In some populous neighborhoods one in every fifteen died, and not a child under a year old was left. " The wretchedness of the people, without suitable food, or medicine, or jursiug, was heart-rending, and altogether be- yond description." In the summer 'and au- tumn of 1834, sickness also prevailed to an ajarming extent, and the schools were suspend- ed, and the mission families were almost wholly taken up with the care of the sick and the dy- ing. It was estimated that one in ten of the members of the churches, many of them pro- mising young persons, were hurried to the grave. In the autumn of 1835, Eagle Town and Fine Ridge were added to the sta^ tions, and occupied by Messrs. Byington and Kingsbury. Each station had a school and a competent teacher, and the whole number of pupils was 365. A new church was formed in 1836, and the total membership was 225. Several tracts in the Choctaw language were printed, amounting, in all, to 30,500 pages. From this period to 1840, no very important changes occurred in the mission. Prom May 1840 to May 1841, 85 persons were admitted to the churches, more by far than during any preceding year since the re- moval of the Choctaws. The whole number of members was now 314. The cause of tem- perance had made considerable progress, and in one district 300 were reported as having signed the temperance pledge. In 1842, one of the missionaries, who was with the Choc- taws before their removal, wrote, — " I do not hesitate to say that there never has been, since I have been acquainted with this people, a season of so much interest as the present. Their crops were never better ; there never was more peace and friendship ; there never was less sickness ; and drunkenness has decreased a hundred per cent, at least." In 1843 there was an accession of more than a hundred to the churches, the total membership amounting to 459. The religious interest continued, and in 1844 one of the missionaries writes, — " In no year since the Choctaws came to this coun- try, have we been permitted to witness greater displays of the power and grace of God in the salvation of sinners." Nearly 100 were received by profession this year, and the mem- bership increased to 546. Between 80 and 90 were added in 1845, and in 1846 the large niimber of 218 were received, making the num- ber of members 769. Daring this long season of spiritual refreshing, increased attention was paid to education, and to the printing of the Scriptures and religious tracts. The four Gos- pels had been printed, and 3,000 copies put in circulation, besides other portions of the New Testament. The existence of slavery both among the Choctaws and Cherokees had been a fact well understood for many years, and the relation of the missionaries and the mission churches to this evil, had been a matter of increasing solicitude to the friends of these missions. In 1848, Rev. Mr. Treat, Secretary of the Board, visited these nations for the special purpose of ascertaining the facts on this subject. His inquiries related to the origin of slavery among these tribes, its character, the number of slaves, their treatment, laws relating to slavery, effects of slavery, the influence of Christianity upon it, and its prospective termination. In his re- port to the Board, at its meeting in Boston, Sept. 1848, he not only presented a full and clear statement on the above points, but also, in regard to the policy of the missions, the preaching of the Gospel in reference to slavery, the instruction of slaveholding converts, the admission of slaveholders to the church, the treatment of slaveholders in the church, and the employment of slave labor. This report, drawn up with exceeding clearness and force, was published in the Herald of October 1848, together with an important correspondence between Mr. Treat and the Choctaw and Cher- okee missionaries on the same subject. Prom these documents it appeared, that in the Cherokee churches there were 24 slave- holders, and in the Choctaw churches 38, and that the number of slaves held by them was considerably over one hundred. It also ap- peared that the missionaries themselves em- ployed slave labor in the cultivation of land, sometimes hiring slaves, at other times buying them, " with their own consent, and with the understanding that they should be allowed to work out the purchase money, and then be IVee." Por the reasons assigned by the mission aries in defence of this practice, and their feel- ings in regard to it, the reader is referred to the report as above. Both the Cherokee and Choctaw nations had made stringent laws for the protection of slavery, the Choctaws especially, enacting in 1846, that any missionary or preacher, who should be found " to take an active part in favoring the principles and notions of the most fatal and destructive doctrines of abo- litionism," should be compelled to ieave the nation, and forever stay out of it ; and they also enacted, that to teach a slave to read, write, or sing, without the consent of the owner. 614 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. should bo sufficient to conyiot a person of abo- lition principles. Having made the needed investigations, through its Secretary, in regard to the question of slavery in these churches, and ascertained the views of the missionaries ; and having dis- tinctly stated the principles that would govern its own action, the Board continued its support of the Choctaw and Cherokee missions, in the belief that divine Providence would indicate from year to year such further measures as ought to be adopted relative to this delicate and difficult subject. During each year since the foregoing trans- actions, there have been accessions to the Choc- taw churches, and diligent attention has been given to the schools, and to the printing of the Scriptures and of tracts. But these labors and their results have been of so uniform a charac- ter as not to require an extended notice, ex- cept as they relate to the present condition of the mission. The Herald for January 1854 reported 129 admissions to the churches dur- ing the preceding year, and commended the Choctaw government for its zeal in executing its temperance laws. A " high institution of learning " had recently been established by a Choctaw council, the course of study to be such as is usually taught in the best female institutions in the United States. In the Herald for Sept. 1854, mention is made of much seriousness at some of the stations, and a few conversions. In the same number Mr. Kingsbury writes, " In all the region of coun- try where I labor, there is very little drinking ; nor is there any other open vice, except that a portion of the community do not regard the Sabbath." Stockbridge Wheelock Mount Zion Pine Ridge Good Water Good Land Mayhew Mount Pleasant . Six Town Bennington Totals. = •3 141 266 100 360 86 70 61 84 BOAKDING SCHOOLS. Good Water Pine Ridge Norwalk . . . Wheelock , . Stockbridge Totals ■3 Id -^ •S 1^ o " 1^ !■ 1 .Sfi 8 47 24 6 lu 40 Id .■) b •M S4 10 8 42 .31 10 41 l.-il ul 41 ■.'.6 170 The foregoing tables exhibit with tolerable accuracy the present state of the Choctaw mission churches and schools. At the meeting of the Board In September last, the Prudential Committee reported a state of things in the Choctaw nation, which seemed to call for special action. It appeared that the Choctaw Council had recently enacted a law, prohibiting the instruction of slaves, or the children of slaves, at any school or academy, by any person connected therewith ; and also directing the expulsion from the nation of all such persons, missionaries or teachers, as should be found violating this statute. This was simply re-affirming the old law of 1846, before referred to, which, however, had so far remained a dead letter that the missionaries had continued to teach slaves and their child- ren without interruption. The fresh promul- gation of such a law indicated a determination to enforce its requisitions, and the Prudential Committee decided that the Board could not conscientiously maintain its connection with the Choctaw schools upon such conditions. This decision was approved by the missiona- ries, and was in exact accordance with the principles laid down in the well-known letter of Mr. Treat, in 1848. See the Herald for October of that year. The subject, on being brought before the Board at Hartford, was referred to a commit- tee, who reported resolutions which, after an animated and protracted discussion, were adopted in the following form : " Resolved, That the Board acknowledge, with gratitude to God, the wisdom and fidelity with which, so far as appears from the docu- ments which have been submitted to them, the Prudential Committee are advising and direcf^ ing the missionaries among the Choctaws, in conformity with the principles presented by them in their correspondence with those mis- sionaries, reported to the Board in 1848. " Resolved, That the decision of the Pruden- tial Committee, with the concurrence of the missionaries, not to conduct the boarding- schools in the Choctaw nation, in conformity with the principles prescribed by the recent legislation of the Choctaw Council, meets the cordial approbation of the Board. " Resolved, That the commission given by Christ to his disciples, to go and teach all na- tions and to preach the Gospel to every crea^ tiire, which is the warrant of Christian mis- sions, is to be respected and obeyed in all the operations and by all the missionaries of the Board ; and that while our missionaries among the Choctaws are allowed in fact to preach the Gospel to all persons, of whatever com- plexion or condition, as they have opportunity, and to preach it in all its applications to hu- man character and duty, they are to continue patiently in the work." These resolutions were understood and in- tended as a full endorsement by the Board of NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 615 the principles of the letter just referred to, and upon which the Committee had been acting for six years, on their own responsibility. But recent events seemed to demand that the Board, in its corporate capacity, should assume this responsibility, and this- it did, in the form of the above resolutions, which were adopted by nearly a unanimous vote. At the period of closing this article it re- mains a doubtful question, whether the mis- sionaries will be allowed to preach the Gospel among the Choctaws in the full and unqualified manner required in the last of these resolutions, or whether, being forbidden to do this, they will retire from the field. Usages. — The mission among the Osage In- dians was commenced in 1820, by a Presbyte- rian body, called the " United Foreign Mis- sionary Society." At that period the Osage tribe consisted of two divisions, located at a considerable distance from each other, the one called the Osages of the Neosho, and the other the Osages of Missouri. The former dwelt upon the Neosho, or Grand river, a northern branch of the Arkansas, west of Missouri ; and the latter occupied a territory in Missouri, 150 miles farther north. The first station occupied by the above named society was at Union, among the Osages of the Neosho, on the west side of that river, and about 20 miles from its mouth. In 1823 a farming settlement was formed at Hopefield, four miles from Union, the design of which was to teach the Osages the arts and advan- tages of agriculture. Many families settled at this place, and the labor of the farrii was car- ried on with much courage and zeal ; but a threatened war with other tribes alarmed them, and some of them fled to Union for protection. A year or two later the place was nearly ruined by an inundation, which swept away all their crops, houses, fences, and every movable thing. At Union, meanwhile, a school was gatheted, very small at first, but increasing, till in 1826 it numbered 50 scholars. Among the Osages of Missouri two stations were formed, one at Harmony, near the west- ern line of Missouri, on a branch of the Osage river ; and one at Neosho, 60 miles from Har- mony. Some progress was made in teaching the Indians, and especially in training them to agricultural habits. But they were a migra^ tory tribe, accustomed to long hunting expe- ditions, and not stationary more than four or five months in the year, so that it was extremely difficult to do them good. In June, 1826, a union was formed between the American Board and the United Foreign Missionary Society, and from that period the Board shared in the responsibility of the Osage mission. But the peculiar habits of the Osages, and their frequent intercourse with white tra- ders, who exerted upon them a most corrupt- ing influence, nearly bafBed all attempts to benefit them either in a spiritual or temporal respect. The difficulty was further increased by treaties formed at different times with the United States, by which the Osages ceded large portions of their territory, and were finally removed to a considerable distance farther west, and north of the Cherokee country. The old stations were thus broken up, and the Osage mission was abandoned. In view of this result the Board say, in their report for 1836: " A retrospect of the history of this mission cannot be taken without awakening many pain- ful emotions. Very few, if any of the adults of the tribe have been induced to exchange their savage and migratory habits for a civil- ized and industrious life ; or to substitute the Christian doctrines and practice for their ridi- culous and absurd superstitions ; nor do they seem to have been in any way benefitted as to their character and condition. The number of youths educated in their schools has been comparatively small, and of this small number few have given evidence that the Gospel, un- der whose daily influence they sat for years, has been to them the power of God unto sal- vation ; while many have returned to their friends and former manner of life, and become as filthy and debased as those who never en- joyed such advantages ; and not a few others have been enticed away to sink into the low- est depths of pollution and misery. The amount of funds expended on the mission has been great ; and so also has been the number of laborers who have engaged in promoting it. Not a few of these, after going through a course of arduous service, have gone down to the grave, the victims of disease and hardship ; others, worn down by toil, and disheartened by opposing difficulties, have retired from the field with broken constitutions ; while the remnant, after having labored with much fidelity and patience nearly 15 years, have felt themselves compelled to abandon the work, leaving the Osages, with scarcely an exception, more mis- erable and hopeless, both as to condition and character, than they were when the mippion was commenced among them." Notwithstanding this most deplorable and discouraging result, circumstances encouraged the hope, in some minds, that something might be done to benefit the Osages, and during the following year, measures were adopted for re- establishing the mission. It seemed probable that the tribe would be permitted to remain upon their new territory, and many of them, particularly those who had been connected with the agricultural establishment at Hope- dale, manifested a disposition to abandon the chase and cultivate the soil. Funds were also expected from the sale of the old mission buildings and improvements, and the govern- ment, agreeably to treaty, had furnished those Osag* who wished to engage in agriculture, with farming implements, and aid in procuring stock. Under these circumstances, Mr. Ee- 616 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. qua, who had labored much with this tribe, visited their towns, in the autumn of 1836, and selected a spot for a large agricultural colony, on the western branch of the Neosho. He had made considerable progress in preparing the requisite buildings and other improvements, and a preacher and school-teacher were expect ed to join him as soon as circumstances would permit. But during the following summer, a portion of the tribe began to manifest their hostility to the enterprise, the cattle belonging to the station were killed, and other property seized ; the settlers themselves were threatened and assaulted, and the chiefs justified these savage acts. The annoyance became so great that neither usefulness nor safety could be hoped for, and Mr. Eequa removed his effects and left the Osage country. No mission has since been attempted among them. Chickasaws. — The Chickasaw Indians origin- ally occupied the northern portion of the State of Mississippi, and numbered about 3,000. The first mission among them was commenced by the Synod of South Carolina and Georgia, in 1821 ; but was transferred to the Board, in December, 1827. The number of stations at the time of the transfer was four, viz. : Mon- roe, Tokshish, Martyn, and Caney Creek. In 1827 there was an interesting revival at Munroe, and it extended to the whole country round, and continued many months. " People came thirty or forty miles to inquire what these things meant, and some of the most hope- less, stubborn sinners, were the first subjects of the work." Six were admitted to the church at Munroe this year ; and in 1829 seventeen were admitted to the church at Tokshish, and 25 children of believing parents were baptized. Schools were taught at three of the stations, the number of scholars varying from 20 to 30. Most of these children learned to read and write, and many of them became acquainted with geography and history, besides acquiring a knowledge of the English language. During the years 1828 and 1829, a great reformation took place among the Chickasaws, in regard to the use of Intoxicating liquors. The leading men discountenanced and nearly prevented the sale of whisky, and one of the missionaries remarked that he had not seen an intoxicated Indian fOr a year and a half. For two or three years previous to 1830, the people had been agitated with the question of selling their lands to the United States, and removing to a region west of the Mississippi. The State of Mississippi extended its own laws over the Indians, which broke the force of their temperance and other laws, and intemper- ance with its associated vices prevailed through the nation " like an overwhelming tide." In the fall of 1830, a treaty was concluded with the Chickasaws, by which they agreed to sell their land and remove west of the Mississippi, provided a country could bo found for them with which they should be pleased. A delegation was sent to explore the new country, and on their return they reported in favor of a tract of land lying between the Sabine and Red rivers, in the province of Texas. But this report was never acted upon, and the treaty was not rati- fied. The Indians, th^efore, still remained in suspense, and in great despondency, the State laws beginning to operate severely upon them, and their intercourse with the whites leading them into temptation and moral debasement. This state of things greatly interrupted mis- sionary labor, and yet there was considerable seriousness in the churches, and some who had been excommunicated returned, and gave evi- dence of sincere repentance. Two of the schools were maintained with an average of 25 or 30 scholars. In October, 1832, a new treaty was formed by which the lands of the Chickasaws were to be sold in the same manner as the public lands of the United States, and the proceeds paid over to them, out of which they were to pur- chase a new country and remove themselves ; provided however, that if they could find no new country that suited them, they might re- main permanently on one-third of the territory held by them, they being subject to the laws of the State of Mississippi. But they must not remain settled together, on one compact third of their country, but must be dispersed over the whole of it. This arrangement greatly aggravated the troubles of the Indians ; foi white intruders kept pressing upon them from all quarters, harrassing them by vexatious law- suits and depredations upon their property, and introducing large quantities of liquor, which was sold often at an enormous price. " No less than 300 gallons of these liquors were brought into the single neighborhood of Tokshish, within a period of three months, where a grocery for the sale of them had been erected, near the house of God." The more intelligent Indians complained and remonstrat- ed without effect. Some of the missionaries lingered on the ground, endeavoring, against every disadvan- tage, to keep up the churches and schools, until 1834, when the mission was abandoned. It had been provided in the treaty, that the Indians might sell the reservations upon which they remained, and this fact attracted the at- tention of purchasers, who entered the country with money and whisky, and exerted a most corrupting and ruinous influence throughout the whole extent of the Indian settlements. They were at first tempted with strong drink, ca,rried to every man's door ; and then excited with the hope of making large gains by selling their lands ; and when they received their pay- ments, with characteristic improvidence, they gave themselves up to idleness, gambling and intoxication. They were thus rendered unfit to receive instruction, and all hope of doing them essential and permanent good was at an end. The Chickasaws never removed in a NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. (117 body to a new territory, but have either min- gled with other tribes west of the Mississippi, or wasted avvay under the State laws that were extended over them. Creeh. — ^Tfte Board sustained a mission among the Creek ladians from 1832 to 1836. That portion of the tribe to which these labors were directed, was located at that time iu the territory west of Arkansas, on both sides of the Arkansas river. Their number was about 2,500. A much larger portion of this tribe, some 18,000, resided on lands owned by them in the State of Alabama, but with these the Board had no connection. The first and only missionaries which the Board at any time had among the Greek Indi- ans, were John Flemming and his wife, and R. L. Dodge, physician. Mr. Flemming de- voted himself with great zeal to the study of the Creek language, which no one had ever before attempted to reduce to writing. He found it an exceedingly embarrassing work, on account of the numerous and difficult combina- tions of consonants ; but, with the aid of an interpreter, he prepared an elementary book in the language, containing also select portions of Scripture, amounting to 100 pages, of which 500 copies were printed. A few hymns were also prepared, to be sung at meetings. It was found difficult, however, from the first, to interest the Creeks in matters of reli- gion, or of education. They were generally indifterent or hostile to the missionaries and their operations, and the difficulty was in- creased by the efforts of the government to dispossess them of their lands, and remove them farther west. It was judged, also, that their jealousy was awakened by the presence among them of the missionaries of two other religious denominations, viz., the Baptist and the Methodist. The number attending reli- gious meetings was at all times small, and it was not found practicable to maintain a school of any promise within their territory. In the autumn of 1836, a number of the Indians, including some of their chief men, for- warded a petition to the United States' agent, in their neighborhood, requesting that the mis- sionaries and teachers of all denominations might be removed from their territory. The petition was instigated by white men residing in the vicinity of the Creeks, and was accom- panied by injurious and slanderous charges, and, without affording the missionaries any opportunity to examine or repel the allega- tions, they were all directed immediately to leave the Creek country. As the Creeks of Alabama had, a little be- fore this, been removed to their new country, west of Arkansas, composing, with those al- ready there, a body of from 15,000 to 20,000, it was hoped that the mission might be re- sumed among them with better prospects of success, as soon as missionaries could be ob- tained ; but, for reasons satisfactory to the Board, no attempt of this kind has ever been made. Ottawas. — The Ottawa Indians, for whose benefit a mission was commenced in 1822, oc- cupied five small reservations in the north-west- ern part of Ohio. They were but a remnant of the tribe, and numbered only aboat 800 ; and they were found in a very poor and de- graded state, their great vice being an exces- sive fondness for ardent spirits. The mission was commenced at the above date, by the Western Missionary Society, and was transferred by them to the United For- eign Missionary Society. The station was at Maumee, about 30 miles from the mouth of the Maumee river, which empties into thu upper end of Lake Brie. The care of the mis- sion was subsequently assumed by the Ameri- can Board, and was brought to a close in 1833. A school was established at Maumee, which in 1828 had YO pupils, about 40 of whom re- mained long enough to make useful acquisi- tions. Seven of them became hopefully pious, and persevered in their Christian course. A good farm was opened at the station, and was put under good cultivation. The missionary, Mr. Van Tassel, was untiring in his labors, but he was unacquainted with the Ottawa dia- lect, which no missionary had ever acquired, and as he could find no good interpreter, he could do little in the way of preaching. In 1830, a small church, formed several years pre- vious, but much scattered, the Lord's Supper not having been administered for six years, was gathered and strengthened, and much se- riousness prevailed. Daring this year Mr. Van Tassel had so far mastered the Ottawa language as to prepare translations of the Lord's prayer and the ten commandments, and also a few hymns and spelling lessons, which were printed at Hudson, Ohio. It was hoped that some of the Indians would now learn to read their own language. About this time, however, they were induced to sell their lands lying in the State of Ohio, amounting to about 50,000 acres ; but most of them absolutely refused to accept of lands offered them by the United States, west of the Mississippi, or to be removed to that country. They were thus left without lands and with- out a home, surrounded by white settlers and exposed to every species of temptation, and in the worst possible condition to be benefitted by missionary labors. Their only prospect seemed to be an unsettled, wandering life, till they should waste away and disappear. Their mission was therefore discontinued. The number of pupils connected with the boarding school at Maumee, during the ten years of its existence, was about 90. Nearly half of these acquired an education sufficient for the ordinary business of life. The church, which was formed in 1823, had 26 members at the time the mission was disbanded, including the mission family. The congregations on the 618 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. Sabbath, during tho last year, averaged about 80, and much seriousness prevailed, both among the Indians and the white settlers, and fifteen or twenty persons gave evidence of a change of heart. It was never practicable, however, to form a temperance society among the Otta- was, and the intemperate and quarrelsome ha- bits which generally prevailed among them, were the occasion of much suffering, and a hin- drance to all efforts for bettering their con- dition. Ojibwas. — ^The Ojibwa Indians, called also Chippeways, are located near the south-west shore of Lake Superior, and about the head waters of the Mississippi river. The mission among them wag commenced in 1830, at the soli- citation of gentlemen connected with the Amer- ican Pur Oompany; who spent most of the year at their trading posts in that quarter, and who were well acquainted with Indians in that re- gion. During the first year the only peraon employed was Mr. Frederic Ayer, a teacher and catechist; bat in 1831 the Board seat out Eev. Messrs. Hall and Boutwell, and the next year they were joined by another company, consisting of a mechanic and a teacher, with their wives, and two female teachers. They had now four stations, viz.. La Pointe, Yellow Lake, Sandy Lake, and Leech Lake. The first of these places is on an island in a large bay, near the south-west part of Lake Superior, and was a place of resort for large numbers of Indians, besides about 200 who re- sided there. Yellow Lake is 150 or 200 miles south-west of La Pointe, and was, in 1832, the residence of nearly 400 Indians. Sandy Lake station, near the Mississippi river, had about 300 Indians residing near it ; and Leech Lake, which communicated with the Mississippi by one of its western tributaries, had an Indian population of 700. Each of these stations was near the post of one of the American fur traders ; and though the number of Indians was not large, other bands, scattered over that vast region, were constantly passing and re- passing, and often remaining a considerable time for the purposes of traffic. The circumstances supposed to favor this mission, were the friendly disposition of most of the men engaged in the fur trade ; the loca- tion of the country, remote from the influence of unprincipled white men ; and the determin- ation of the agent and traders of the American Pur Company that no intoxicating liquors should be used in trade with the Indians. The principal obstacles to be encountered were the migratory and warlike character of the In- dians ; the diBBculty of supporting missionary families in a region so remote and dreary ; and the opposition of a few French Catholics from Canada, engaged in the fur trade. Schools were opened at an early period of the mission at three of the stations, and the number of pupils in them all in 1834 was b3- tween 40 and 50. A church was organized at La Pointe in the summer of 1833, consisting of 12 persons, including the mission families. In July 1834, Mr. Ely, of the Sandy Ijake station, removed to Fon da Lac, at the west- ern extremity of Lake Superior, as affording a more promising field of permanent missionai-y labor. The missionaries had made so much progress in the acquisition of the Ojibwa lan- guage in 1835, as to prepare for the press quite a number of books, among which were a spelling-book, Gallandet's Picture Reading and Defining Book, a selection of Stories, a treatiss on Natural History, and a book of hymns. In 1836 the Yellow Lake station was re- moved fifty miles south-west, to Pokegu- ma Lake, where the soil was better, and fish and game more abundant. During this year there was an increased interest in hearing the Grospel read and preached, and some of the Indians manifested an anxious concern for their salvation. Two Indians, a man and his wife, were hopefully converted, and received to the church. In 1837 the church at La Pointe numbered nine, exclusive of the mission family, and a new church of three adult Indians and the mission family, was organized. The schools were all in successful operation, and quite a numbar of Ojibwas had- learned to read well, both in their own language and in English. An increasing desire was manifested, especially about Pokeguma, to cultivate the soil, and several Indians erected houses, with aid from the mission, and raised good crops of potatoes. It was found that the migratory habits of the Ojibwas resulted more from ignorance and poverty, than from any real attachment to an unsettled hunter life. They knew not how to enclose and cultivate farms, neither could they obtain agricultural implements, seeds, and furniture for dwellings, without aid. With suitable assistance they seemed capable of being brought up to civilized life, and to a condition of intelligence and comfort. In 1838, the mission family at Leech Lake removed to Pokeguma, a change which it was thought would give greater efficiency to the mission. At this place there were si.x or eight hopeful conversions during the year, and the Sabbath was strictly observed by all the fa- milies residing near the mission. The (Jospel of John aad the Acts of the Apostles were printed this year, and the Gospel of Matthew was prepared for the press. In the autumn of the preceding year the Ojibwiis concluded a treaty with the United States Government, by which they ceded a large tract from the south- ern portion of their country, the line beginning at the 46th parallel of latitude on the Missis- sippi river, and extending through upper Lake St. Croix to Lake Superior. The Indians were to remove from all the country south of the line, whenever the president of the United States should direct. The station at Poke- guma was within the ceded territory ; and those Indians who had just begun to lead a settled NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 619 and agricultural life, were in trouble and sus- pense, anxiously inquiring what would become of their houses and cultivated fields, if the pre- sident should order their removal. In 1839, one of the missionaries, after stal^ iug some encouraging facts, adds, " The mass of the tribe, however, manifest very little de- sire to improve their condition, wretched as it is. Few are desirous to learn anything of the Bible, and most of them seem to have the im- pression that the white man's religion is not made for them. They say they are ,a distinct race, and the Great Spirit designed they should be distinct. They live differently, and go to a different place when they die." With these views they could not be supposed to regard the objects for which the missionaries were labor- ing, as anything very desirable. The vicinity of Fon du Lac was deserted by the Indians in 1840 ; and as there was no prospect that they would again make it a place of resort, the station was discontinued. Pokeguma and La Pointe were now the only remaining stations, and the missionary force consisted of two missionaries, three catechists and teachers, and five female assistants. The printing in Ojibwa, this year, embraced the epistles of John and James, making 30 pages ; a tract on the Atonement, 20 pages ; Peter Parley's Geography, 139 pages, of which 500 copies were printed, making an aggregate of 94,000 pages ; and the whole amount printed in the language was 707,000 pages, and 21,000 volumes. Most of this printing was done in New England. For several years a hostile feeling had ex- isted between the Ojibwas and their neigh- bors, the Sioux, and frequent acts of savage violence had been perpetrated. In the early part of 841, the Sioux made an attack upon the Christian Indians of Pokeguma, in de- scribing which one of the missionaries says: " War has desolated Pokeguma. On the morning of the 24th of May, more than 100 Sioux fell upon our quiet settlement, and in two short hours made it a scene of war and death. The enemy bore away the scalps of two interesting girls, one a scholar of our school. They did not molest us, or injure any of our property." Immediately after this outbreak, the Ojibwas all fled from Pokeg- uma. In August, 1842, the mission was strength- ened by the arrival of Messrs. Wheeler and James, with their wives, and Miss Spooner. Mr. and Mrs. James, however, were obliged, by the impaired state of her health, to re- turn to their friends, after being in the field about a month. In October, 1842, the superintendent of In- dian Affairs in the north-west, Robert Stuart, Esq., met the Ojibwas at La Pointe, and ne- gotiated a treaty with them, by which they ceded to the United States the whole of their lands lying on the south and south-west of Lake Superior, and extending 'westerly to the sources of the Mississippi river, except some reservations, embracing a large tract about Pon du Lac, and another about Sandy Lake. It was not expected, however, that the Indiana would be dispossessed for many years, or that any portion of the country would be occupied by white settlers, except the mineral districts on the southern shore of Lake Superior. By the terms of this treaty, annuities in moneys goods, provisions, &c., were to be granted to the tribe, amounting to $25,000 a year, for 25 years ; also $2,000 annually for schools ; also $5,000 for the purchase of stock, agricul- tural utensils, &c. ; $75,000 for liquidating their debts to the traders; 'and $13,000 for gifts to the half-breeds — amounting, with the annuities, to $768,000. Blacksmiths, carpen- ters, and farmers were also to be furnished. Between 3,000 and 4,000 Indians, including all the most influential and intelligent chiefs, were assembled at La Pointe on the occasion of this treaty, and the whole transaction was charac- terized by uprightness and fair dealing on the part of the commissioner, and fully understood and approved by the Indians. Much was done to encourage the missionaries in their labors. Religious meetings were held nearly every day during the two or three weeks of the sitting of the council, no business was transacted on the Sabbath, and many of the Indians, influ- enced by the example of the commissioner, listened to the word of God, who had seldom if ever heard it before. By this treaty it was stipulated that the intercourse law, forbidding the introduction of intoxicating liquors into the Indian country, should be continued in force over the ceded territory. In the spring of 1843, the Indians who were driven from Pokeguma by the hostile incur- sions of the Sioux, and who had remained dis- persed nearly two years, reassembled at that place, and were joined by several families from other bands. Here they fortified themselves, and commenced their agricultural labors with more diligence and energy than they had ever before manifested. They also paid good at- tention to public worship on the Sabbath, and the members of the church were much quick- ened. At the same time the Holy Spirit de- scended upon the mission families at La Pointe, and some of the Indians gave evidence of hav- ing been savingly renewed. During this year also the amount of reading matter in the Ojib- wa language was much increased by the printing of the whole New Testament, the Peep of Day, and an enlarged collection of hymns, making in all 2,500 copies, and 910,000 pages. This printings was done at the expense of the Amer- ican Tract and Bible Societies, and of the American Board. An experiment of a year or two convinced the missionaries that it would be impracticable to maintain the station at Pokeguma with a reasonable hope of success, and it was given 620 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. up. A little subsequent to this, a degree of uncertainty was thrown around the prospects of the Ojibwas by the conversion of Wiscon- sin territory into a State. A portion of the tribe fell within the chartered limits of that State, and what disposition would be made of them was uncertain. The tide of emigration was constantly rolling in upon them, and they were in constant expectation that the presi- dent would give the order for their removal. But notwithstanding these dark prospects, which for a series of years hung over the Choctaws and the mission among them, they have been preserved, though some of them have removed a little further to the north and west, and the mission has not been without some visible fruits from year to year. For the last two or three years only two sta- tions have been maintained, viz., at Bad River and Crow Wing. The latter, west of the Mississippi, and near its northern extremity, was given up on account of the war between the Ojibwas and the Dakotas, tlie constant in- troduction of ardent spirits, and the small num- ber of Ojibwas residing in that quarter. The former, on Lake Superior, was favorably no- ticed in the Herald for September, 1854, the missionary, Mr. Wheeler, saying, " The past year has been one of progress among our peo- ple. They were never more quiet, friendly, industrious, or temperate, and they were never more disposed to listen to truth. Our meet- ings upon the Sabbath have been well attend- ed. Never before have so many Indians come BO regularly to our religious services, and lis- tened so attentively to the preached word. A number of Indians, including three Indian chiefs, have identified themselves with the Christian party, and call themselves praying Indians. I have seen but one Indian drunk at Bad River for more than a year. A school is maintained of about 50 pupils. The Indi- ans the past year have planted more than ever before, and have a prospect of a good crop." The station was soon to be reinforced, and hopes were entertained that much might yet be done for the temporal and spiritual good of the Ojibwas ; but events of a discouraging nature have occurred, and at the late meeting of the Board in Hartford, notice was given of the entire suspension of the mission. Dakotas. — The American Board commenced a mission among the Dakotas or Sioux in the summer of 1835. The tribe, as then estimate ed, was one of the most powerful on the conti nent, embracing about 25,000 Indians, who wandered, for hunting and fishing purposes, through the extensive country lying between the 43d and 49th degrees of north latitude, and extending from the Mississippi to the Mis- souri rivers. The first missionaries were the Rev. Thomas S. Williamson and Jedediah D. Stevens, with their wives ; Alexander Huggens, farmer, and his wife ; and Sarah Poage and Lucy 0. Ste- vens, assistants. They selected for their sta- tions Lake Harriet and Lac qui Parle, the former five or six miles west of Fort Snelling, which is on the west bank of the Mississippi; near its junction with the St. Peters, and about forty miles below the Falls of St. Anthony ; and the latter on the St. Peters river, about 200 miles above its junction with the Missis- sippi, or 400 following the course of the river in a north-westerly direction from Lake Har- riet. Mr. Williams, who was also a physician, and Mr. Huggens and Miss Poage, remained at Lake Harriet ; while the rest of the com- pany proceeded to Lao qui Parle. The first few years were chiefly occupied in preparing suitable buildings for the mission families and school, and in the study of the Dakota and French languages, the latter being thought important in order to communicate instruction to the mixed French and Indian population found at the trading posts and other places in that region. The Dakota language was found to be peculiarly destitute of a large class of words which were indispensable in giving in- struction on moral and religious subjects. As illustrations. Dr. Williamson found that in Dakota a " good heart " meant simply joy, and a " bad heart " grief A " hard heart " stood for courage. Giving religious instruction in such a language was a slow process. But the word was not without effect ; and in 1838 churches had been formed at both the stations, that at Lao qui Parle having received in all 16 members, and that at Lake Harriet a smaller number. The school at the former station had about 40 pupils, and that at the latter 10 or 15. The tribe suflTered severely from the pre- valence of the small-pox in the autumn of 1837, and great numbers died in some localities. Famine also prevailed to some extent, and the Ojibwas were making frequent incursions into the Dakota territory, destroying or stealing horses and cattle, and often murdering the peo- ple. These causes, altogether, operated to' discourage the people and retard the mission ; yet the missionaries were mastering the Ian guage, and drew increasing numbers within the sound of the Gospel. Portions of the Scriptures were also translated, including the Gospel of Mark, and selections from other Gos- pels and the Acts, and from the Old Testament, amounting in all to 107,500 pages. In 1840, the Indians near Lake Harriet all fled, through fear of their Ojibwa neighbors, and the mission at that place was suspended. At Lac qui Parle more progress was made this year than in any preceding year. Three preaching services were held each Sabbath, two in Dakota and one in English, and the hearers varied from 40 to 80. Four Indian women were admitted to the church, and 16 children of the church members were baptized. A Sabbath-school was opened early m the year, which soon increased to over 30 pupils ; and in the day-school there was an average of NORTH AMEKICAN INDIANS. 621 30 or 40 scholars, and a total of 112. Prints ing was also done to the amount of 173,000 pages. In ] 842, a house of worship was erected at Lao qui Parle, with the aid of some of the Indians. The monthly concert was held in the Dakota language, attended by 40 or 50 Indians. It was estimated that 200 Indians had attended the school, more or less, and that about 100 had learned to read intelligently. A new station was occupied in 1843 at Tra- vers des Sioux, at the head of boat navigation on the St. Peters, about 75 miles from its junction with the Mississippi. In 1846 and 1847, two other stations were occupied, one called Kaposia, on the west bank of the Missis- eippi, a little below the St. Peters, and the other Xapedan, on the St. Peters, 30 miles from Port Snelling. To these places mission- aries and teachers were sent, at the earnest solicitation of the Indians themselves, and it was the first time that the Dakotas had ever shown such an appreciation of missionary in- struction and aid. The Indians residing around the stations generally refrained from the use of ardent spirits, and manifested an increasing inclination to till the soil. About the same time invitations came from several other Indi- an villages, requesting that religious teachers might come and reside among them ; but there were none to send. In the autumn of 1848, the committee, wish- ing to make full proof of the Dakota mission, sent out two more missionaries and their wives, and new stations were formed at Prairieville and Red Wing, making six in all, one having been given up. There were now 8 missiona- ries in this field, and 5 male and 14 female assistants. The report for 1850 presented the following statistics, which, as they are more full than any of a later date, are presented here : STATIONS. SCHOOIS. CHURCHES. 1 ■s 1 d a s 1 s "3 6 a; 1 .9 1 1 a 1 •3 o 1 d ll i -a .s d i 1 d a d s 1 n3 1 M S '3 1 1 2 e 1 a o Qj a Lac qui Parle . H 16 70 6 20 50 2 1 20 7 1 4 2 ;^8 Travers des Sioux 1 fi 1 Prairieville. . . ^ 3 Oak Grove . . . 1 3 7 1 2 fi Kaposia .... 12 5 24 5 12 6 3 1 8 8 1 17 Eed Wing . . . Totals .... 12 30i 6 27 50 144 32 1 57 6 3 31 2 32 2 5 5 54 11 In July, 1851, treaties were entered into be- tween the Dakota Indians and the U. S. Government, by which the Indians ceded a large portion of their territory, only reserving a tract about 150 miles long and 20 wide, in the valley of the St. Peters. But the treaty in this form was not ratified, the Senate refusing to confirm the reservation, and merely permit- ting the Dakotas to remain upon it during the pleasure of the president To these modi- fied terms the assent of the Indians was subse- quently obtained, and in 1853 they removed on to the reservation. As all the stations but one lay within the ceded territory, they were for- saken of Indians, and of course given up. The Herald, for September, 1854, notices the exist ence of but two stations. Yellow Medicine and New Hope, so that from the six flourishing stations above mentioned, the mission was sud- denly reduced to a very restricted condition, thus furnishing another instance of theharrass- ing and disastrous cfiects of the government policy, in driving the Indians from their lands, and compelling them to feel that they have no resting place, and no security for any spot of earth they may dwell upon, whether held by permission or under the most solemn treaty stipulations. To conduct missions successfully among a people subject to such removals, liv- ing in constant dread of government force, or treachery, and rendered suspicious of the mo- tives of white men, has been found extremely difficult, and often impossible ; and hence the frequent abandonment of Indian missions, after vast expenditures of labor and money upon them and the sacrifice of many precious lives in efforts to sustain them. As the Dakotas hold the territory they are upon at the pleasure of the president, the order for their removal to some other uncertain abode may be looked for at any time, and, therefore, great uncertainty attends the mis- sion among them, both as to its usefulness and permanency. 622 NORTH AMETIICAN INDIANS. Abenaquis. — This band of Indians is settled at St. Francis, in Lower Canada, on the south side of Lake St. Peters, about 60 miles below Montreal. Their missionary and teacher, Pe- ter Paul Osunkhirhine, is a native of this tribe, and received a good English education at Hanover, N. H., where he became hopefully pious. He afterwards returned home, with the hope of doing good to his people. Finding it impracticable to teach them the English lan- guage, he prepared an elementary book in their own language, embracing a translation of passages of Scripture, and some other useful pieces. This book, with a small religious tract, was printed at the expense of the Board in 1830. With these he returned again to his people, and having obtained the appointment of schoolmaster from the Canadian govern- ment, he opened a school, at the same time holding meetings on the Sabbath, and endea- voring, in other ways, to enlighten their be- nighted minds. Many children and youth at- tended his school, and even some adults learned to read his books. Some who listened to his religious instructions became serious and hope- fully pious. This awakened the opposition ofe the papists, who complained of him to the gov- ernment, for interfering with the religion of the Indians, and he was forbidden to hold meetings, or in any manner to meddle with their religious concerns. With this injunc- tion he could not conscientiously comply, and he was, therefore, much persecuted, and de- prived of his salary from the government. He then applied to the Committee of the Board, for such an annual allowance as would furnish him the means of subsistence, and enable him to continue his labors among his people. This was granted, and he has persevered in his self- denying and important work to the present time. Osunkhirhine was licensed to preach in Jan- uary, 1836, by the Champlain Presbytery, and in the following June, he was ordained as an evangelist to his native tribe. Upon this, the opposition of the papal community was much embittered, and efforts were made to get him removed from the reservation, but the governor refused to interfere. When he commenced his labors, the whole tribe were ignorant and bigoted papists. In 1837, more than 30 per- sons attended his preaching, all of whom had renounced the Romish church, in spite of the most bitter persecution. Prom five to twenty children were gathered into a school, accord- ing as the people were at home or on their hunting grounds, and three persons, including the wile of Osunkhirhine, had joined the Pro- testant church. In 1840, the church members had increased to 27, and a prosperous school of 23 pupils was in operation. In the winter of 1841, President Lord, of Dartmouth College, visited Osunkhirhine at St. Francis, and in a subsequent statement, he remarked : " The church now consists oi^ 29 members, out of 300 souls, the number of the tribe now resident at St. Francis. Osunkhir- hine's labors are steady, and well adapted to the condition of the people. His wife, a full- blooded Indian, is remarkably interesting — a model. I beg to commend the mission. Its importance. I think, cannot be too highly ap- preciated. Its relation to the French popular tion gives it its greatest importance. Ihere is hardly any other light between Montreal and Quebec. The despised church at St. Francis is his witness along the great river." In 1843, it was reported : " Five Indians have been received to the church on profession during the last year, and the whole number received since Mr. Osunkhirhine commenced his labors, is 46, 41 of whom still survive, and are members in good standing. The papal priests are active, as heretofore, in opposing the progress of spiritual religion among the Indians." In 1845 it was recorded r " Sixty- six Indians, all converted from Romanism, and hopefully renewed by the Spirit of God, have been received to tke church." The opposition of the papal priests availed little. In 1846 it was estimated that one-third of the 300 com- posing the Abenaquis tribe, had become Pro- testants, through the labors of this judicious and devoted native missionary. In June, 1851, Mr. Treat, one of the secre- taries of the Board, was directed to visit the Abenaquis tribe, which he found composing " an irregularly-built village on the right bank of the St. Francis, four miles from the St. Lawrence. The population of the tribe is three or four hundred, and in their general appearance and habits of life, they compare well with the Canadians around them. Mr. Osunkhirhine has a plain but comfortable church, erected partly at the expense of the Board, in which he holds three services on the Sabbath, and three meetings during the week." The latest intelligence from this mission is to January, 1854. The missionary continues to labor with his usual fidelity, having been at his post more than twenty years, and, though contending still against papal influence, and often tried by the delinquency of the converts, he has a reasonable prospect of continuance and usefulness. Pawnees. — The Pawnee tribe, at the com- mencement of the mission among them, in 1835, was divided into four bands ; Pawnee Republicans, Pawnee Peeks, Pawnee Loups, and Grand Pawnees, — amounting in all to between 6,000 and 7,000 persons. They occu- pied an extensive territory on both sides of the Platte river, in Nebraska. The first mis- sionary company consisted of Rev. John Dun- bar, missionary, Benedict Satterlee, physician and catechist, and Samuel Allis, assistant. Owing to the wandering habits of these Indi- ans, little could be done for several years in the way of systematic labor. Their head-quar- I ters were at Bellevue, the seat of the govern- NORTH. AMEEIOAN INDIANS. 623 merit agency, and Messrs. Dunbar and Satter- lee. generally? accompanied large bands of In- dians in their long hunting excursions, with a view both to acquire the language and to give instruction, as opportunity was afforded. Mr. Satterlee died on one of these tours, in a some- what mysterious manner. In 1840, these four bands appeared strongly inclined to abandon the hunter life, and settle in villages for the cultivation of the soil. The tract of country selected for this purpose was located on Council and Plumb creeks, on the Doi;th side of Loup Fork, which empties into Platte river. To this place the missionary families removed in the spring of 1841. The government, agreeably to certain treaty pro- visions, had furnished the Indians with large numbers of oxen, plows, &c., and they had begun to plow and sow their farms with great zeal and satisfaction. In this early stage of their progress they were destined to a terrible onset from a neigh- boring hostile tribe. Early on a morning in June, 1843, a strong party of Sioux came upon one ofthe Pawnee villages by surprise, when a course of fighting and plunder ensued which lasted till mid-day, and resulted in killing 67 Pawnees, wounding twenty others, seizing 200 horses, and burning 20 out of 41 lodges of which the village was composed. The value of property lost was estimated at $8,000 or ^10,000. The Indians of this village were scattered among the other bands, being fearful of another attack should they attempt to re- build the village ; and in all the villages agri- cultural labor was greatly retarded by the con- stant fear of hostile tribes. Meanwhile the missionary brethren and sisters, amid many agitating scenes, prosecuted their labors with patience and hope ; and especially had they, in 1846, accomplished an important work, in the translation of the Gospel of Mark into the Pawnee language. In 1847 the missionaries, in view of the frequent assaults made upon the Pawnees, and the danger to which their own lives were ex- posed, withdrew from the field, and the mission has not since been resumed. Oregon Indians. — After several exploring expeditions among the Indians west of the Eocky Mountains, the Board entered upon a mission there in the autumn of 1836. Their attention was directed to three tribes, embrac- ing the Kayuses, among whom was the Waii- latpu station ; the Nez Perses, among whom were the Clear Water and Kamiah stations ; and the Flat Heads, in whose neighborhood was the Tshimakaiu station. These stations ■were provided with suitable laborers, so that in 1840 the whole force consisted of four mis- Bionaries, one physician, two male and six fe- male assistants. They were not only kindly , received, but the Indians showed the utmost eagerness to receive instruction ; and other tribes, hearing that teachers had come into the \ country, sent pressing messages requesting tha' one or more might be sent to dwell among them. The three tribes above named were anxious also to engage in agriculture, and hundreds of families settled near the mission stations, and cultivated the ground so assiduously that in fe little time they had produced enough for their comfortable subsistence. Their desire for re- ligious instruction exceeded anything ever be- fore met with among the North American In- dians. " Among the Nez Perses," says the report for 1840, "the congregation had in- creased from such a number as could be accom- modated in a small school house, to between one and two thousand, many coming from the adjacent bands. All seemed eager for religious instruction, and it was believed that the Spirit of the Lord was working on the hearts of many. As many as 2,000 made a public confession of sin, and promised to serve God. Doubtless many did this with a very imperfect idea of what was involved in it, though not a few were thought to give evidence of saving con- version." A similar religious interest was manifested among the Kayuses. About this time the mission received, as a donation from the Sandwich Island churches, a small printing-press, with the requisite type and furniture, with paper, &c., all estimated at about $450. From the same source they re- ceived the year before $80 in money, and ten bushels of salt. The press was immediately set up at Clear Water, and employed to print an elementary school book of twenty pages. The Indians were highly gratified with a book in their own language, and new interest was found to be imparted to the schools. In 1841 a second book was prepared and printed in the Nez Perses language, and 800 'copies printed, making 41,600 pages. A saw mill and grist mill were also put in operation at Clear Water, and a grain mill at Waiilatpu, all of which afforded valuable aid to the mission families, and encouraged a settled life among the In- dians. For the three or four succeeding years the mission was attended with great apparent suc- cess, not, however, without some serious defec- tions among the Indians, and at times abusive treatment from the younger and more savage portion of the tribes. In the autumn of 1847, however, a scene oc- curred at the Waiilatpu station, among the Kayuses, of the mpst tragical and distressing character. Owing to the prevalence and ex- treme fatality of the measles and dysentery, a portion of the Indians became jealous of the toissionaries, and especially of Dr. Whitman, who was stationed at Waiilatpu, supposing that if they would they might use their super- natural powers to stay the dreadful malady. Some even pretended that Dr. W. was giving them poison, in order to destroy their lives. They therefore determined on revenge, and on 624 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. the 29th of Nov., 1847, they fell upon the Waiilatpu station, and most cruelly massacred Dr. Whitman, his wife, and twelve other per- sons. Of the latter, several were emigrants from the States, and one was an assistant mis- sionary. The details of this tragical affair are of a most heart-rending nature. They are fully given in the " Herald " for July, 1848, by Mr. Spalding, one of the missionaries, with an account of his own wonderful escape. About fifty women and children, who were taken and held as captives, were redeemed through the agency of Mr. Ogden, chief factor of the Hud- Eon Bay Company, after having suffered every abuse and indignity for nearly a month. In addition to the above-mentioned cause for this outrage, it was believed to have been pro- moted in some measure by the Eomish priestS; from St. Louis, who had come into that region, and who had been active in opposing the Pro- testant missionaries. This suspicion was strengthened by the fact that several children of the murderers were baptized by one of these priests, while yet the hands of their parents were wet with the blood of their victims. It was also known that the Catholic priest last named was in the company of an Ind ian who was pursuing Mr. Spalding with a loaded pistol, with a view to murder him. Prom these and other circumstances it is not difficult to deter- mine the relation and agency of Komish priests to this scene — one of the most savage and ap- paling to be met with in all the annals of mis- sionary adventure. Within a short time after the massacre, all the stations were abandoned, it not being con- sidered safe for the mission families to remain. Some of the missionaries continued to labor in Oregon, among the whites, but no mission has since been attempted among the Indian tribes. Indians in New Ywk. — The Indians in New York are remnants of the " Six Tribes," and reside at the four following places, viz. . Tusca- rora, about 4 miles east of Niagara river ; Seneca, 4 miles from Buffalo ; Cattaraugus, 30 miles south of Buffalo, and Alleghany, also in western New Tork. The missions at these places were transferred by the United Poreign Missionary Society to the Board, in 1826. In 1827, Mr. John Eliot, a young man from Maine, entered upon his labors among the Tus- caroras, where he found a population of 240 Indians, a church of 15 members ; a mission house and farm worth $1,800, and a school, which he immediately re-organized, with 30 scholars. In 1831, a revival of religion was enjoyed at this place, and the ohuroh was in- creased to 56 members. At this period for the first time, the sanctity and obligations of the marriage relation were acknowledged by these Indians, and 21 children were baptized. The people also began more strictly to regard the Sabbatli, and to be more temperate and industrious. At Seneca, a boarding-school was in operar tion, which, in 1828, embraced 70 pupils ; also a church of 49 members. In 1829, a new house of worship was dedicated, the money for which, — $1,700, had been subscribed by the chiefs and young men of the tribe. During this year, also, the Gospel of Luke, the Sermon on the Mount, and about thirty hymns were printed in the Seneca language. A revival of religion was enjoyed at this station in 1831. At Cattaraugus, there was special attention to religion in 1827, and a church of 12 mem- bers was organized. Por several subsequent years there was much attention to rel igion at this place. The station at Alleghany had enjoyed the services of a teacher several years, but had been without a missionary till 1829, when Mr. William Hall was ordained to that work. In 1843, the whole number of Indians resid- ing in Western New York, was estimated at 3,000, about three-fourths of whom were Sene- cas, and the remainder Tuscaroras, Onondagas, Cayugas, Oneidas, and Mohawks, remnants of the once powerful Six Nations. They occu- pied five reservations, embracing about 110,000 acres. A treaty had, a little before this, been concluded, by which a portion of their lands were ceded to the United States, and this sub- ject caused much complaint and trouble. The whole number of church members at this time was 234, of whom 49 were at Tuscar rora, 20 at Seneca, 51 at Cattaraugus, and 114 at Alleghany. The number of pupils in the schools at these stations was estimated at 200. The mission press at Seneca was em- ployed in printing various small works, and in 1845, more than 52,000 pages were executed. In respect to agriculture and the comforts of life, great good had been effected among the the Indians. One of the missionaries reported in 1848, " three times as much productive labor as there was in 1832, and five times aa much provision obtained." Of late years some changes have occurred, and the mission has been reported under two separate heads, viz., the Seneca mission, and the Tuscarora mission. The Seneca mission has 4 stations, 4 missionaries, 15 female as- sistant missionaries, and one native assistants In the two churches there are 169 memliers, and in the 10 schools there are 310 pupils. The Tuscarora mission has one station, one out-station, one missionary, four female assist- ant missionaries, and two native helpers. The church has 96 members ; and the schools, ot which there are two, have 70 scholai-s. Under the labors of the missionaries, these Indians have advanced to a high state of civ- ilization, and, in respect to industrial, social, and moral habits, they show a degree of im- provement rarely excelled by those who have been raised from a savage state. MoKAviAN Missions to North Amekicak Indians. — The labors of the Moravian breth NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 625 ren among the Indians of IS ortli America were commenced as early as 1735. Their attention was first directed to the Greek nation, but their labors were soon interrupted by hostilities be- tween the English and the Spaniards. Subse- quently, during the 18th century, they estab- lished missions at various points in the south- ern and middle States, and they often had the pleasure of seeing the Indians embracing the truth, and even of witnessing some signal tri- umphs of the Gospel ; but they were frequent ly compelled to abandon interesting fields, by hostilities among neighboring tribes, and espe- cially by the adverse events of the English and French war, and the war of the revolution. To follow them in the varied results of their >. labors through this long period, would require more space than can be allowed in the present work. Within the present century the Moravians have had missions among the Delawares, the Chippeways, the Creeks, the Cherokees, and some smaller tribes, whom they have followed in their voluntary or forced removals, quit- ting their posts only when their continued labors became fruitless or impossible. At the present time their missions are con- fined to two tribes : the Delawares, on the Kansas river, where they have more than 350 Indians under religious instruction, and the Cherokees, in their new western home, where they have two stations, and about 120 com- municants. The returns from these missions are very incomplete, rendering it impossible to give full statistics, or to state what are their present prospects and means of usefulness. OttuRCH Missionary Society. — The only mission which the Church of England has had among the North American Indians is that among the Esquimaux, on Bed river, south of Lake Winnipeg and north of Minne- sota. It was commenced in 1822 by Rev. J. West, the Hudson Bay Company's chaplain, on Red river. In the course of a year or two, a school-house and church were erected, and considerable progress was made towards bring- ing the Indians under instruction. In 1823 Eev. D. T. Jones sailed from England for the purpose of strengthening this mission, and in 1825 he was joined by the Rev. W. Cochran. The progress of the mission at this date had been such, that the school-house and church were too small, and new and more'commodious ones were erected. In 1832 there were 3 sta^ tions, with each a church, and a total of 143 communicants. The number attending public worship was 800, and the number gathered into schools was 330. At the present time, as nearly as can be as- certained from the incomplete returns, there are connected with the Rod river mission 10 stations, 8 missionaries, 12 assistants, 8 ot whom are natives, 1733 attendants on public worship, 507 communicants, 22 schools, and 724 pupils. The missionaries have acquired 40 the Indian language, so as to preach in it, and they have translated portions of the New Tes- tament, the church catechism, the marriage service, and the communion and baptismal services. The language of these Indians, de- nominated the Cree language, is said by the missionaries to bear a strong affinity to the Greek. In the department of agriculture, consider- able progress has been made. The Indians build very comfortable houses, raise large patches of barley, wheat, potatoes, &o., and enjoy much of social order and comfort. With- in a short time Moose Lake has been occupied as a station, under the labors of a pious Indian who reads the New Testament well, and has the entire confidence of the missionaries. — Rev. B. D. MooRB. Episcopal Board. — A mission was com- menced at Green Bay, by the Missionary So- ciety of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States, in 1825, under the superin- tendence of Rev. Mr. Nash, which was sus- pended in 1827. In 1829, it was renewed, under the superintendence of Rev. R. P. Codle,. by whom it was continued, under many em- barrassments and difficulties, till 1837, when, treaties were entered into between the United States and many of the north-western tribes of Indians for their removal west of the Missis- sippi. The unsettled condition of the tribes around the mission, consequent upon these treaties, and their subsequent removal, led to the discontinuance of the mission. The results of this mission are thus stated : About 270 In- dian children enjoyed the benefits of the school, some of whom have died in the faith of Christ,, and the comfortable assurance of a blessed hereafter. Some are now adorning the doc- trine of God our Saviour by a life of consistent piety. Some time after the breaking up of this mission, Bishop Kemper, accompanied by Rev.. Mr. Gregory, embraced a number of tribes in a circuit, in a visit to the scattered members of his diocese ; and on the 2d of December,. 1838, he consecrated a church at Duck Creek, erected by the Oneidas with a portion of the funds received from Government ; and in 1839, Rev. Solomon Davis had charge of the church., The department of Indian Missions was subse- quently transferred to the Domestic Commit- tee; who proposed a plan for an Indian dio- cese, with a missionary bishop, and considerar ble effort was made to raise money to endow the bishopric ; but as yet, the object has not been accomplished. A mission has, however, been commenced among the Chickasaws, and an appropriation has been made by the United States Government toward sustaining a school under the direction of the mission. American Missionary Association. — Ojib- wa Mission. — This mission comprises four sta- tions, located at Red Lake, Cass Lake, Belle Prairie and St. Josephs, Minnesota Territory ■ C26 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS— NOVA SCOTIA. the first three on the head waters of the Mis- sissippi river, and the last on the North Red river, where it enters the British possessions. This is the only mission in all that region of country. It was commenced under the patron- age of the Western Evangelical Missionary Society, in 1843, and afterwards transferred to the American Missionary Association. The Ojibwa (or Chippeway) Indians compose one of the largest tribes in the United States, num- bering some 30,000. They are divided into small" bands of from 200 to 500 souls ; the bands each having its own home, hunting- ground and chief, all located from 25 to 100 miles apart. At three of these stations, boarding-schools are established, and the scholars are required to engage in some kind of manual labor a por- tion of each day. Churches containing native converts have been formed at Red Lake and Cass Lake. The other stations have been commenced within the last two years. When this mission commenced, the Indians had no domestic animals, except dogs, and no agricultural implements. They raised nothing, but depended for subsistence on hunting and fishing, wild rice and sugar ; and, being in a poor country for game, they often suffered with hunger, and sometimes resorted to the use of human flesh to satisfy it. Now some of these bands supply themselves abundantly with food. and have to spare for their starving neighbor? of other bands. For this improvement they are indebted to the instruction and example of the missionaries, and the aid received from them in plowing their lands. — Rev. G. Whipple. ( NAMK OF STATION. .2 a ■in 1.9 1. .a 1 S a •g a "• :l fa II w 6 A c/j.jn 1843 1946 1 1 3 2 1 4 3 9. 1 1 1 10 2 * 20 12 7 Cass T.^ke Belle Prairie 1852 1 1 * # 2 7 10 3 12 39 « Not reported. American Indian Mission Association. — This society, the seat of whose operations is in Louisville, Ky., have four missions, located among the Choctaws, Creeks, Weas, Pianke- shaws, Miamies, and Putawatamies ; with six stations and eight out-stations ; 28 missiona- ries and assistants ; 21 churches, with 1300 communicants ; 126 baptisms during the year ; and 165 pupils in schools. This society repre- sents a portion of the Baptist denomination in the south-west. GENEKAL TABtlLAK VIEW. SOCIETIES. Presbyterian Board American Baptist Union Methodist B. Church North and South Wegleyaii Missionary Society .... American Boardf American Missionary Association . . Church Missionary Society Moravians American Indian Missionary Association Totals ^' 1835 1817 1819 1828 1818 1843 1822 11 10 44 24 4 10 4 6 113 28^ 150 55 i(;3 3 9 28 15 64 14 21 57 96 1,371 5,359 2,003 1,669 12 507 1,300 12,:17 67 5K 211 1884 74 718 39 724 165 4331 * Includes assistants. f Statistics for 1853. (See Appendix, p. 784) NOVA SCOTIA -. The province of Nova Scotia is situated on the eastern side of the continent of North America, between north latitude 43° 25' and 47°, and between west longitude 43° 40' and 66° 25'. It is one of the provinces of British North America. It was first colonized by the French, by whom it was called Acadie, or Acadia. It -vyas finally ceded by France to Great Britain in 1713. Its principal natural divisions are Nova Scotia 18,600 square miles ; its population 276,117, according to the census of 1851. The reli- gious parties, when ranged under the two gen- eral divisions of Protestants and Catholics, stand thus : Protestants, 206,483 ; Roman Catholics, 69,634. Of the Protestant churches, the more prominent are the Established Church of England and Ireland ; the Presbyterian Church ; the Associate Baptist ; the Wesleyan Methodist ; the Congregational ; and the Evan- Proper and Cape Breton. Its area is about gelical Lutheran. 'The religious statistics given NOVA SCOTIA. 627 in this article are to be understood as those of 1854, except where it is otherwise stated. The Ohuroh of England is recognized by the ancient laws of the province as the Estab- lished Church. This legal recognition was ef- fected in 1758, but though various civil enact ments, as to the limits of parishes, appointment of_ church-wardens and vestrymen, were ob- tained thereby, nothing beyond the mere name of an establishment has for many years existed. The permanent endowment of Windsor Col- lege, under the exclusive control of this church, has been discontinued by the state ; so that, in effect, the only privilege which remains of a distinctive nature, is that the bishop retains ex-officio a seat in the legislative council of the province. There is much probability that this offensive distinction will soon be removed, and that then the name, as well as the privileges of an establishment, will be erased from the civil statute book. The number of adherents to this church in 1851 was 36,482. The list of clergy for 1854 contains one bishop, one arch- deacon, 65 ordained ministers, and two travel- ing missionaries. These are located in 40 dif- ferent towns and settlements. Pour of the clergy are connected with Windsor College, and three with Halifax Grammar School : two are retired from service, and one is an agent for the Colonial Church and School Society. Until recently, large annual remit- tances for the support of the clergy and col- lege professors, had been received from the British Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, and even, it is under- stc jd, from grants of the Imperial Parliament of Great Britain and Ireland. The foreign aid is now greatly curtailed, and will, it is ex- pected, in the course of a few years, altogether cease. The effect of this change of policy has been far from disastrous. A large portion of the wealth of the province is found within the pale of this church, and nothing is wanting to secure permanent and growing prosperity but the prudent management of its internal re- sources. Already this has been tested in the large endowment secured by subscription for Windsor College, (£10,000^ and in the efforts made to sustain in thorougn efficiency the Di- ocesan Society and the Foreign District of the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. Presbyterian Church. — Under this head are grouped the adherents of three distinct churches, who, though holding the same stand- ards, are yet quite independent in church gov- ernment, if not really antagonistic in feeling and pursuit. Their source of dispute, or rather, ground of separation, depends entirely upon their respective origin. They have all descended from the Presbyterian Churches of Scotland, and hold the distinctive principles of what are there denominated, Kirk, Free Church, and United Presbyterian. The o\^- estriargest, and most influential of these bodies in Kova Scotia is that which arose from the two secession churches, Burgher and Anti- burgher. A union was happily effected be- tween the adherents of these, and of all the Presbyterians then in Nova Scotia, in the year 1817. Only one Presbyterian minister remained aloof, and he was personally favor- able, while his congregation being originally independent, was unfavorable to this union. The first Presbyterian missionaries arrived in Nova Scotia in 1766, but no permanent loca- tion was made before 1771. The first presbytery was formed in 1786, under the designation of Presbytery of Truro. Nine years afterwards, another was formed in Pictou, and so designated. At the period of the union above referred to, there were three presbyteries, comprising in all 19 ordained ministers, and 25 congregations. The great difficulty all along experienced by this church, has been the difficulty of obtaining an ade- quate supply of ministers. At first, and for many years, the only source of supply was the parent churches in Scotland, and the missionary spirit there and then exist- ing was not so ardent as to overcome, with suf- ficient readiness and frequency, the terrors of a climate generally reputed, though falsely, as vibrating -between the extremes of heat and cold. In 1816 a society was formed to pro- cure the establishment of an academy for the training of native youth, for the ministry and other learned professions. The basis proposed was sufficiently liberal to unite all dissenting bodies, and the means of support was to be en- dowment by the State. This effort was for a time apparently successful, but never so much so as to acquire the character of permanency. Ultimately it became a bone of contention, in- troduced bitter animosity and religious hate into the surrounding community, and became a watchword for political party, so as to form an effectual hindrance to ecclesiastical union on the part of the different Presbyterian bodies. Eventually all connection with this institution was abandoned by the Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia, and then it became a matter of dire necessity with that church to provide and maintain an educational institute out of her own resources. Several years, however, elapsed before this step was taken. In 1848 measures were initiated with a view to the erection of a theological seminary, as prepara- tory to the Divinity Hall. A professor of philosophy was appointed, who for a time took charge of the literary classes, as well as logic, and natural and moral philosophy. At pre- sent, 1854, there are two professors in the se- minary, one having charge of the classes in languages, mathematics, and natural philoso- phy ; the other logic and moral philosophy, with other branches. In the Divinity Hall there are two professors, to one is committed biblical literature, to the other theology, sys- tematic and pastoral. The literary and phi- losophical classes have an annual session of 628 NOTA SCOTIA. six months, and students are required to attend three years in order to complete their curricu- lum. The Divinity Hall remains in session six weeks, and the course of study extends over four years ; but as the Hall meets annu- ally, immediately after tie seminary, the entire course for students of divinity does not exceed six years. A fixed standard of qualification for entrance to the seminary has been estab- lished, such as can be acquired at the general schools and academies of the province, and special provision is made to admit students who have received part of their training else- where to such a standing in the seminary or hall as their acquirements may be found, on examination, to entitle them. I'he Synod of the Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia meets annually on the last Tues- day of June, and is the final court of judica- ture — there being no ecclesiastical connection with the Church in Scotland, either in regard to pecuniary support or spiritual control. It has now (in 1854) under its inspection three presbyteries in Nova Scotia and one in Prince Edward's Island. The presbytery of Pictou includes 15 congregations ; of these 14 enjoy a settled ministry, and one of these a collegiate charge. There are various mission stations within the bounds of this presbytery which will soon be able to support, as they now re- quire, the labors of a separate minister. One member of this presbytery is located in Mera- michi, New Brunswick, and is the only or- dained minister of this connection now settled in that province. The presbytery of Tours in- cludes seven congregations, and at present all are supplied with a settled ministry. Several mission stations are in course of preparation for the same position, and one of these is in New Brunswick. The presbytery of Halifax has within its bounds seven congregations. Six are now under a stated pastorate. Mis- sion stations are thus numerous and promising. The presbytery of Prince Edward's Island con- tains seven congregations, six ministers, and several mission stations. In each of these presbyteries there are congregations whose local extent, number of adherents, pecuniary resources, and prospect of increase are calling aloud for division and subdivision : but the supply of ministers is yet too scanty to admit of compliance with a policy that would soon double and redouble the efBciency and spirit- ual prosperity of the best portion of the Church. At present there are but three ordained pro- bationers, one retired minister who takes occa- sional appointments, and four licentiates. The business of the synod, during the^ interval of its meetings, is conducted by fo'ur distinct boards, one for the Home Mission supply, dis- tributing supply of probationers according to the wants of the several presbyteries, and as- sisting such stations with the means of occa- siona,l supplies, under the direction of the pres- byteries in whose bounds these are pla,ced ; a second board, for the superintendence of the Foreign Missionary operations of the church ; a third, for the superintendence of the seminary and hall, and a fourth for legally receiving and appropriating the moneys of the church which may be entrusted to their care. the following statistics will afford some idea of the pecuniary resources and numerical strength of the P. 0. N. S. : ordained minis- ters, 38 ; licentiates, 4 ; self-sustaining congre- gations, 34 ; home mission stations, 6 ; supple- mented congregations, 3 ; foreign mission sta- tions, 1 ; adhering population, according to census (1851,) 28,767 in Nova Scotia ; the population in Prince Edward Island not cor- rectly ascertained, but not under 4,000, and in New Brunswick 1,000. If to all this we add 2,000 for the church at Aneiteum, New Heb- rides, we have a gross amount of adherents, 35,767 souls, who are depending for spiritual oversight on the church. 31 congregations return 5,369 communicants, 276 accessions. According to the statistical tables and finan- cial returns for 1854, the average salary paid to each minister is ^ supposed to be nearly £130 currency, or £104 sterling. This would yield a retijrn in round \ n- -qq a q Dumbers of j- • . . . , Home Mission receipts during same year.. 258 2 2^ Foreign " " " " " .. 433 16 2 Synod Fund " " " .. 81 2 1% Seminary Fund " " " .. 328 3>i Miscellaneous purposes, not strictly 1 „ .,,. „ ,, denominational /•••• '''*"* '* " Total raised during year 1854 £8,005 7 9>i currency, or £6,404 6 3 sterling. Additional funds under the care of the Educar tional Board : Theological Professorship, funded intere't. . . £581 11 10 Various funds, bequests, &c., " '* ... 1,500 4 6 Total £2,081 16 4 currency, or £1.665 9 1 sterling. Church of Scotland. — In order of date the Church of Scotland is the next branch of the Presbyterian Church in Nova Scotia. For a long period very painful and injuri- ous animosity existed between this body and the Presbyterian church of Nova Scotia. Shortly after the union of all the Presbyterians in the province, in 1817, the strife commenced and raged so long as the state-paid academy of Pictou remained as a source of dispute. Happily this has been removed, and the very unseemly and destructive feuds which it en- gendered, have to a great extent disappeared, and feelings of friendship are now being che- rished by ministers and people. This church has all along depended for pecuniary support and ministerial supply on the parent church in Scotland. In 1824, the Glasgow Colonial So- ciety was organized (in Scotland) with a view to supply the Presbyterian population of the colonies with ministers of the Church of Scot- land. At the disruption which took place 5n NOVA SCOTIA. 629 May, 1843, not fewer than 8 ministers left tlie synod of Nova Scotia to fill up the breaches at home. In 1844, this synod divided, a ma- jority declaring in favor of the Free Church, and assuming the designation " Synod of No- va Scotia, adhering to the Westminster stand- ards." For several years a large proportion of the_ congregations that had been deserted by their ministers, remained vacant, but latterly these have been to a considerable extent sup- plied by new accessions from Scotland. The synod now (1854) consists of 4 presbyteries. There are, however, in all, but 9 ordained min- isters, and 1 ordained missionary, and 4 cate- chists. While the adhering population in Nova Scotia alone was, in 1851, 18,867. It will thus be seen that a very great deficiency of pastoral oversight still exists. The greater number of those ministers now in the field are supported by the Home Church, so that this church, as a whole, is far from self-sustain- ing. Free Ghdech or Synod of Nova Scotia, ADHEEISQ to THE WESTMINSTER STANDARDS. This body was formed in 1844, and consists of the same number of presbyteries as the body from which it was separated. It includes a ministry, however, of 24, of whom 19 are located in Nova Scotia, and 3 in Prince Ed- ward's Island, one in Newfoundland, and one in Bermuda, W. I. The adhering population in Nova Scotia, in 1851, was found to number 25,820. A Free Church College for the lower provinces of British North America is located at Halifax, N. S., having 2 professors. Also an academy, with a rector and 2 masters, which is designed to prepare for the college. Hitherto the supply and support of ministers in this connection has greatly depended on the resources of the Free Church of Scotland ; but from the above institution, in connexion with a Theological Hall, the native youth have been trained, so that the first year's students have advanced so far as to be licensed and located in the different vacancies and mission stations during the present year. Beformed Presbyterian Church. — Three congregations and 3 ministers. Adhering po- pulation not accurately known. Associated Baptist Churches. — The earli- est efforts of this religious connection in Nova Scotia is nearly contemporaneous with those of the Presbyterian Church. It has 54 settled ininisters, with an adhering population of 42,243. This population, however, includes several distinct Baptist communities, whose ministry amounts to 17 elders and 3 ministers. The Associated Baptist Church is divided into 3 associations : Western, Central, and Eastern. The Baptist Convention of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and Prince Edward Island, meets annually. In Nova Scotia their educational institutions are located, consisting of a college and academy. The college has now 3 profes- sors, and connected with it is a theological in- stitute, with 2 professors, who also hold chairs in the college. The academy has two teach- ers, a principal and master, with an assistant. Some years ago this church sent a missionary to the foreign field, but at present they do not appear to have any one. They have, however, a missionary to the Acadian French in Nova Scotia. Wesleyan Methodist Church. — Mission- aries from this body visited North America as early as 1769. In 1786, missions were commenc- ed in Nova Scotia. By the last census (1851) it has an adhering population of 23,596, and in 1854, 31 ordained ministers. This list of min- isters includes, however, 1 chairman and gene- ral superintendent, 1 editor of a denominational newspaper, and 4 supernumeraries. The semi- nary under the care of this body, is situated on the borders of the two provinces. New Bruns- wick and Nova Scotia, and this suits in its locality the wants of both denominational dis- tricts. It has a principal, who is also one of the professors, and a second professor ; a clas- sical and French tutor and English teacher ; also a chaplain, treasurer, and steward. The students are boarded within the institution, and recently a large addition has been made, with a view to accommodate females with suit- able board and education. Conqreqational OB Independent Church. — The origin of this church in Nova Scotia was quite as early as others already described, but its progress has been very limited. It has but 6 ministers and 2,639 adherents. A col- lege with 2 professors, 1 of whom acts as president, is placed under the sanction and control of the Congregational Union of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick. Evangelical Lutheran Church. — This is the only other religious body in Nova Scotia worthy of distinct notice. Its adherents are chiefly of German extraction, and number 4087. Besides the denominational efforts of each of these evangelical bodies, they severally unite in general schemes of benevolence and*. Christian philanthropy. The Nova Scotia" Bible Society, and other auxiliaries .of the British and Foreign Bible Society enlist the sympathies of all but the Baptists, and are very generally supported. The Halifax Naval and Military Bible Society is in like manner dependent upon the Christian public, gene- rally. The Micmac Missionary Society, while its principal agent and missionary is Baptist, meets with the countenance and support of all classes. The Nova Scotia Sabbath Alliance consists of the leading ministers and members of all the leading Protestant denominations in Halifax. — Rev. J. Baynb, of Pidou. NOWGONG : A station of the American Baptist Union in Assam. NULLOOR : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society, in the Tinnevelly district, India. 630 OAHU— OLD CALABAR. OAHU : One of the principal of the Sand- wich Islands group. It is 25 miles "W. N. W. of Molokai, the most romantic and fer- tile of the Whole group, and the residence of the King, and seat of government. It is about 48 miles long and 23 wide. The Am- erican Board have seven stations on this Island. OCEANICA : A term somewhat indefi- nitely applied to the islands of the Pacific Ocean. (See South Sea Islands anA Indian ^chipelago.) JIBWAS : A tribe of North American Indians, inhabiting the shores of Lakes Supe- rior and Huron. (See North American In- dians.) OKKAH : A station of the Moravians in Labrador. OLD TOWN : Station of the United Pres- byterian Synod of Scotland, at the Old Cal- abar, West Africa. OLD CALABAR: Old Calabar lies in the Bight of Biafra, near the sixth degree of north latitude, and between the eighth and ninth degrees of east longitude. The coast there runs east and west. Standing oppo- site the Old Calabar frith, you look directly north. On your right hand are the Came- roon mountains, rising to the height of 13,000 feet ; and further to the right, at the distance of sixty miles, is the elevated and beautiful island of Fernando Po ; and on your left is an extensive level district, over which a dense mist is often seen resting : — that is the long-sought Delta of the Niger, a vast morass, extending 200 miles along the sea shore, and upwards of 250 miles inland, channeled by numerous streams — the mouths of that celebrated river, covered with man- grove and palm-oil trees, and inhabited by fierce and savage tribes, many of whom are cannibals. Sail up the Old Calabar frith, a distance of fifty miles, and you see two large rivers flowing into it. The one on your left hand is the Cross river, so called be- cause it was supposed to communicate with the Niger, and to be one of its mouths ; but it was explored by Captain Becroft, in 1842, a distance of 175 miles, and was found to be an independent stream, more than a mile in breadth, with a depth of from six to seven fathoms, flowing from the east — a region yet unexplored by Europeans — and having its banks studded with towns and villages. En- ter the river on your right hand, which is the Old Calabar river, fully three-fourths of a mile in width, and after ascending it about eight miles, and passing a jutting head-land, you see upon the right bank a cluster of towns. These are Duke Town, Henshaw Town, Old Town, and seven miles up the river, on the left bank. Creek Town, the principal towns of Old Calabar, and the seat of the mi.-ision of the United Presbyterian Synod of Scotland. (See Africa, Western.) These towns, with the country villages, con- tain a population of 60,000 or 70,000, subject to the sway of the King of Old Calabar, and are accessible to missionaries. Each town has its king or headman ; but the chief au- thority is vested in Ej'o Honesty, of Creek Town. The population is divided into two classes, freemen and slaves — the latter being the great majority. These are either em- ployed on the provision grounds, which are at some distance from the towns, or in the operations of trade. The freemen are all en- gaged in trade, and are mainly dependent upon it for their support and influence. Even the king, who has no revenue from his subjects, carries on trade to a great extent, is of active business habits, keeps regular ac- counts, and owes all his power to the weight of his character, and the wealth which he has acquired from trading. The slaves are generally treated with kindness ; and there seems to be a process of internal emancipa- tion, the children of the third generation generally becoming free. It is a happy cir- cumstance that persons have ceased to be ex- ported as slaves from this district for a con- siderable number of years. That horrid traffic is totally suppressed in the Bight of Biafra. This result is to be ascribed to the beneficial influence of a growing trade, and to the treaties made with the chiefs by the British Government. The trade which is carried on at Old Calabar, is chiefly in palm- oil. The palm-oil is brought from the inte- rior, and is exchanged for British goods. The humanizing influence of legitimate com.-, . merce is becoming every year more obvious. Not only has it enlarged the views of the people, and to a certain degree improved their manners ; enabled them to have com- fortable houses, and to furnish them, in many instances, with costly articles of Eu- ropean manufacture ; but it has taught them that it is for their interest to live at peace with their neighbors. The mode of government at Old Calabar is, in the case of freemen, by common con- sultation and agreement, they meet to- gether in the pateer-house, talk over the matter, and no measure can become law that has not a majority of votes. The great dif- ficulty which they feel is to keep in subjec- tion their numerous slaves. This seems to be managed chiefly by the aid of supersti- tion. They have a secret institution, called Egbo, much resembling the Oro of the Yor- ubas, (See Yoruba). Religion. — They believe in the existence of God and of the devil, in a future state, and in the immortality of the soul; but their ideas on these subjects are' dim and confused, and have, by the wickedness of the heart, and the malignant teaching of Satan, been framed into a sjstem of super- stition, dark, cruel, and sanguinary. They ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS. 631 regard one day of the week as a Sabbath, they all practise circumcision, on festival days they sprinkle the blood of the Egbo goat, and they make a covenant of friend- ship betvreen parties that were at variance, by putting on them the blood of a slain goat, mixed with certain ingredients ; things which indicate the remains of the patriarchal religion. Their personal worship, so far as it has been ascertained, may be divided into two parts ; that which is observed within the house, and that which takes place in the court-yard. The worship within the house consists in adoring a human skull, stuck upon the top of a stick, around the handle of which a bunch of feathers is tied. This dis- gusting object — their domestic idol — is said to exist in every house in Old Calabar. The worship in the court-yard is of this kind : in the middle of the yard there is a bason of water placed at the foot of a small tree, which is planted for the purpose. This bason is never emptied of its contents, but is once a week filled with a fresh supply of water ; and on the day when this is done, the second day of the week, called God's day, they " offer a fowl, or some other small thing of that sort, which is tied by the foot to the tree," and then they " pray to Basi Ebum, the great God. but without confession of sin, and solely for temporal benefits." Witch- craft exerts the same terrible influence here as in other parts of Western Africa. But the most desolating and sanguinary of all their customs is the practice of sacrific- ing human victims, for the benefit of deceased persons of rank. This horrid custom arises from the belief that the future world cor- responds to the present— that the same wants are felt, the same relationships sus- tained, and the same pursuits followed ; and therefore, that the station and happiness of a person (Jepend upon the number of follow- ers and slaves that are killed and sent after him. The effect of this belief is, that in pro- portion to the dignity of the departed, the rank and power of the survivors, and the warmth of affection which they cherish for the deceased, is the number of victims that are seized and immolated. Acquaintances also testify their respect for the dead, and sympathy with the sorrowing relations, by destroying a few of their slaves. The agents in this wholesale system of murder are the nearest relations of the deceased, who evince their affection and their grief, by exerting themselves to catch by force, by stratagem, and by all manner of ways, and to destroy as many of their fellow creatures as they can. It is a season of terror. The slaves, from whose ranks the victims are usually taken, flee to the bush for shelter, the doors of the houses are fastened, and every one is afraid to go abroad. And when it is con- sidered that the fuueral ceremonies continue for four months, and that at the beginning and especially at the close of this perTod, when the grand carnival, or make-devil, as they call it, takes place, great exertions are made to obtain victims, it will at once be obvious that this is a practice which spreads terror and mourning through every part of the community. It prevails in the greater part of western Central Africa, and is drenching the land with blood. OLENDEBENK : Station of the Ameri can Board at the Gaboon, West Africa. OODOOVILLE : A populous parish of Ceylon, in the district of Jaffiia, 5 miles north of Jaffnapatam. It stands on an ex- tensive plain, covered with groves of pal- myra, cocoa-nut, and other fruit trees, in which are many villages of natives, and, for- merly, many idol temples. The American Board have a station with a female boarding school here. OODOOPITTY: (Valverty) A station of the American Board in Jaffna, Ceylon. OORFA : A prospective station of the American Board among the Armenians : the ancient Edessa, as is commonly supposed, and also the Er of the Chaldees. the birth- place of the patriarch Abraham : has a pop- ulation of 7,000 Armenians and 4,000 Syrians. OOTAGAMUND: A health station, on the Neilgherry Hills, Southern India. OPOTIKI : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand, situated on a plain, at the entrance of the river, on the south-east side of the Bay of Plenty. Pop- ulation about 1,300. ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS, MISSIONS TO : For accounts of missions at present ex- isting, among the decayed churches of the East, see Armenians, Nestorians, Greece, Sy- ria, Mosul, Egypt. Although it does not en- ter into the plan of this work to notice exten- sively those missions, which have been prose- cuted for a time, and then given up, yet there have been operations of this kind in the East which deserve some notice. Among these is the mission of the Church Missionary So- ciety to Abyssinia, for which see Abyssinia. There are, also, several missions of recent origin, which may be noticed more appro- priately in a general article than under geo- graphical heads. And there are certain gene- ral principles, which apply to all these mis- sions, which may be properly noticed in a general article. The appointment of a mis- sionary bishop to Jerusalem, by the govern- ments of Great Britain and Prussia, had re- ference not only to the Jews, but to Oriental Christians ; hut we have no sources of in- formation which will enable us to give a connected history of his operations. The present incumbent, Bishop Gobat, the worthy pioneer of the Abyssinian mission, will use his position to the best advantage for the furtherance of evangelical labors among all 632 ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS. classes of the people. The Church Mission- ary Society have a mission at Jerusalem consisting of two ordained missionaries, one European lay secretary, and one native teach- er. This mission was designed especially, though not exclusively, to provide for the instruction of Abyssinian pilgrims, Bishop Gobat having been requested, both by the king and the Abuna of Abyssinia, to take charge of the Abyssinian convent at that place. (See Jfrica East.) The report of that society for 1853, states that "The expe- rience of another year has confirmed the committee in the wisdom of the course hith- erto pursued by their missionaries, in making an open protest against the errors of the Oriental churches, and in receiving under Christian instruction all who desire to bear and embrace the truth of the Gospel. Events render it each year more diflScult for such inquirers to continue in communion with their own church. They have now political liberty to enrol themselves on the civil regis- ter of the local pachas as Protesiants ; and having done so, they claim the assistance and protection of the Protestant churches, and there appears no just ground on which that claim can be refused. The committee have great satisfaction in adding, that the American Episcopal Church, at the late anni- versary of their Board of Foreign Missions, announced their entire adherence to these views, after sixteen years' experience in mis- sionary operations at Constantinople, upon the opposite principle of co-operation with the heads of the Oriental churches." The mission at Constantinople, here al- luded to, was commenced by the Rev. J. J. Robertson, D. D., and Rev. Horatio South- gate, under the direction of the Episcopal Board of Missions, in 1839. It was designed principally as a mission to the Greek Church ; in the words of the annual report, " placing our church in a position to be known and recognized as a branch of the same Catholic Church, and a friend. It is sought that its missionaries should, if possible, be received and sauctioned as the representative of their church ; that a friendly intercourse should be maintained, and every cause of needless offence be avoided. The Greek Church is to be approached as an Episcopal Church, and its integrity preserved." In connection with this mission, it was designed also to establish a mission in Meso- potamia, among the Jacobite Christians. Mr. Southgate had made an exploring tour in that region, and Mardin was selected as the site of the mission. In 1842, the Committee having determined to discontinue the Constantinople mission, and concentrate their efforts upon Mesopo- tamia, directed Mr. Southgate to remove as Boon as practicable, either to Mardin or Mo- sul, and appointed two new missionaries to the same field. But Mr. Southgate viewing his appointment as limited to Constantinople, declined to accept the appointment to Meso- potamia. At the meeting of the Board in 1843, the committee were directed to continue the mission at Constantinople, and re-appoint Mr. Southgate as missionary. One of the missionaries appointed to Mesopotamia, Rev. Mr. Taylor, on reaching Constantinople, changed his views as to his field of labor, and wished to remain at Constantinople; but the committee refused to alter arrange- ments which they considered definitely set- tled. Mr. Southgate, after his return to Constantinople, requested either that he might be permitted to return to the United States and present the cause to the churches, or else that a colleague be sent him, with authority to commence labor among the Ar- menians, and that $2,000 mission funds should be allowed for the coming year, both which the committee declined, chiefly for want of means. But this decision was over- ruled by the Board ; and the committee were requested, so soon as funds could be raised for the purpose, to establish a mission to the Armenians, and also to grant Mr. Southgate permission to visit the IJnited States for the purpose which he had proposed. In conse- quence of which the Mesopotamia mission was discontinued, and the whole operations concentrated upon Constantinople. Soon after the adjournment of the Board, Mr. Southgate returned to the United States ; and at the triennial session, his plans were submitted to the Board, and resolutions were passed, recommending to the general con- vention the appointment of a bishop, appro- priating for the mission to the Eastern churches $5,000 per annum, and directing the addition of two missionaries to the sta- tion. In accordance with this recommenda- tion, Mr. Southgate was elected bishop, and consecrated in October, 1844, as Missionary Bishop of the Protestant Episcopal Church of the United States, in the dominions and dependencies of the Sultan of Turkey ; and considerable sums of money were raised to sustain the mission. But the funds raised specifically for this mission not being suflB- cient to meet Bishop Southgate's views of what was needed to carry on the mission, and the committee not deeming it expedient to appropriate the amount requested by him from the general funds of the Board, Bishop Southgate returned with his family to this country, Nov. 6, 1849. On, his arrival, the committee " came unanimously to the con- clusion that the removal of the missionary bishop with his family, had closed the mis- sion in Turkey." At the triennial meeting of the Board in 1851, a reoolution was passed, requesting the foreign committee to " renew the mission ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS. 633 to the decayed churches in Asia Minor, in the manner they shall deem most likely to accomplish the best results." In obe- dience to this resolution, the subject was committed to Rev. Messrs. G. T. Bedell and T. S. Winston, who made an elaborate report, which was unanimously adopted by the committee. This report goes into an examination of the two methods of conduct- ing missions to these churches: (1) "at- tempting their reformation through agencies and means approved by their ecclesiastical authorities, with the hope that the ecclesias- tics would first become enlightened, and be chief instruments in promoting the general result ;" and (2) seeking the same object "by the usual means of diffusing a saving knowledge of the Gospel among those who are ignorant of it, or ' decaj'ed ' in the ap- preciation of its truth." In regard to the first of these, they say, " The foreign committee have entertained but one view on the subject. Although at the earnest representations of the mission- ary, they acquiesced in the trial of the ex- periment, yet from the first, tliey have con- sidered it inadequate and impracticable. The experience of the church," they continue, " has proved that a reformation cannot be effectual while confined to the clergy ; that of the two classes, the laity are the most easily affected, and must be the instruments of moving the clergy ; and that ecclesiastics, as a body, very slowly acquiesce in a move- ment to which self-interest and cherished prejudices are so much opposed." The committee proceed to review the his- tory of the experiment at Constantinople, made for 16 years, at an expenditure of ^45,000, and come to the conclusion that it has produced no practical results, beyond the translation of the Prayer Book, and a few other translations, the benefits of which if any are yet to be seen. They say, also, that an experiment upon similar principles was carried on by the Church Missionary Society from 1815 to 1846, with a similar result; and quote the following language from the report of that society : " The So- ciety's chief failures have been in its attempts to establish missions among the ancient but lapsed churches of the Bast. The hope which was cherished, that the light of Di- vine truth might be rekindled with compa- rative ease among them, and through their agency be transmitted to their heathen and Mohammedan neighbors, has failed. Twice were the missionaries of the society driven out of the different districts of Abyssinia. (See Abyssinia and Africa East.) They were compelled, also, to withdraw from Asia Minor, through the jealousy of the Greek Church, as soon as their labors began to ex- ercise a spiritual influence upon their schol- ars in their mission schools. And the So- ciety's establishment at Malta was relin- quished, after a trial of 25 years, as there appeared no results suflScient to justify its continuance. The Society also attempted, for several years, to cooperate with the ec- clesiastical authorities of the S3'"rian Christian, Church upon the Malabar coast of South In- dia, in educational measures for the revival of that ancient church; but the attempts have failed." The committee also quote Bishop Gobat, and Archdeacon Pratt, of Madras, in corroboration of these views, and remark : " We are forced to the conclu- sion, that the effort to produce a restoration of those churches, by acting through their ecclesiastical authorities, or only in harmony with them, and by their approbation, will, in all probability, prove, as it has always proved, a failure ; and therefore, that, in re- newing the mission to these churches, the plan heretofore pursued must be abandoned." At the annual meeting of the Board to which this report was made, it was resolved, "That the subject of Eastern Missions be still left in the discretion of the foreign com- mittee, in accordance with the resolution adopted at the last triennial meeting." Nazareth. — The Church Missionary So- ciety have a station at Nazareth, under the care of Rev. F. A. Klein, who reports some movement among the people towards re- formation. The congregation consists of 180 to 200. Jerusalem. — Bishop Gobat, in his last communication, says, "During the course of last year, a goodly number of families and individuals have joined our church, although only 13 or 14 communicants are with us. But all meet every Lord's day, and two or three times during the week to hear the word of God read and expounded, and to pray together, with the help of the Arabic version of the Liturgy." Nablous. — Bishop Gobat says the good work is progressing here. A few Protes- tants meet on the Lord's day and in the week, for reading the word of God and pra3rer. Syra. — The Church Missionary Society have a station at SjTa, in charge of Rev. F. A. Hildner. He has a school of 284 pupils, mostly girls. He holds service on Sundays in English and German, and some of the people seem to be under the influence of di- vine grace. Smyrna. — Here, also, the Church Mission- ary Society have a station, under the direc- tion of Rev. J. T. Wolters, and a Greek catechist. In his report for 1852, Mr, Wol- ters says, "There are a few Greeks among us, who have, I trust, been brought from darkness to light." Blalta Protestant College. — A Protestant college is maintained at Malta, of which the 634 ORISSA. eport of the Churcli Missionary Society for 1853 speaks as being in a state of growing prosperity. It comprises a soliool for youth, and a class of adults under training for na- tive teachers. It contains 80 well-behaved boys and youths, from various countries, and of different complexions — Abyssinians, Sy- rians and Persians, Moslems and Jews. Copts and Greeks, Nestorians and Papists, are here living in the atmosphere of the pure word of God, of which some appear to have ex- perienced the power during their stay here. "Bishop Gobat, speaking of a visit which he recently made to the institution, says: "I could not refrain from tears of gratitude, when I saw them all devoutly kneeling, while an Italian, who but a few years ago was a blind Papist, or one who was formerly a blaspheming Jew, &c., was offering up a prayer to Gad, in the name of Jesus Christ, full of life and unction, for the outpouring of the Spirit of God upon Israel, Italy, Turkey, &c., each putting a peculiar emphasis upon the country or the people with whom, by nature and former habits, he was more particularly connected." Great hopes are entertained of this institution for furnishing missionary laborers in the East. TABULAR VIEW. a o E 1 C sfl "c o o m MISSIONS. _o d 1 i Pi o s Fi H o "s^ o fe S" ^ t- C n? iS *« 6 2; ^' fi IZi 3 I Palestine, 18S1 9. 2 1 1 fl 2 m 12 77 Greece, la^s 1 1 1 fi .S 18 2()B 284 Asia Minor, 1831 1 1 1 4 4 2 8 6 6 83 278 361 ORISSA: A province of India, situated near the head of the Bay of Bengal, on its north-western shore, a short distance south- west from Calcutta: bounded on the north by Bengal, east by the Bay of Bengal, south by the country of the Teloogoos, and west by Nagopore. It is irregularly shaped, about three hundred miles long, and two hundred and forty wide. Its population is estimated at about three millions. It is supposed that the province was anciently much larger than it is now, and that its sovereigns formerly sustained a rank much above that of most Hindoo rajahs, and that it was numbered among the most powerful of the ancient In- dian sovereignties. It was subjected in part by the Mohammedans about 400 years ago, and remained in an unsettled state till 1743. At that time it was overrun by the Mahrat- tas, who continued their plundering depreda- tions till 1803. when they were expelled by the English. Since that period, the British have held absolute sway over the previously long distracted country, and quiet has mostly prevailed. Compared with the misrule and oppression of the former reigning powers, the policy of the present government is lib- eral, and the political condition of the people is so much improved that most of them are better satisfied with their state than their predecessors were with the rule of the na- tive princes. Orissa is divided into three civil districts, viz. : Pooroe in the south. Cut- tack in the centre, and Balasore on the north. The sea-coast, which is the eastern part of the province, is level and far more populous than the central and western di- visions, which are mountainous and covered in many places with primeval forests, inhab- ited by wild beasts, or men almost as un- tamed and rude as they. The climate, soil, productions, animals, insects, birds, reptiles, and flsh of Orissa are similar to those of Bengal and other adjacent portions of Hin- dostan lying near the Tropic of Cancer. The villages, houses, food, clothing, dress, litera- ture, and trades of the Oriyas are also much like those of the Bengalis and the people of other large portions of India. The population of Orissa consists of Hin- doos, Mohammedans, Santals, and Bhumi- jahs, the Hindoos constituting far the larger number. The districts of Pooree and Cut- tack are occupied by the English General Baptist missionaries, the district of Balasore being the site of the Freewill Baptist mis- sion. This district lies on the west side of the Bay of Bengal. It is about eighty miles long, and on an average thirty or forty miles wide, and contains about 500,000 inhabitants. On its northern boundary lies a considerable tract belonging to the province of Bengal, which is inhabited by Oriyas. On the west are several tributary states governed by na- tive princes, which are peopled by Oriyas, Santals, &c. These are as numerous as the inhabitants of the district of Balasore, so that there are about one million souls (Je- peudent on this Society for religious light and influence. From its liability to inunda- tion, the country is not much inhabited for three or four miles inland from the sea. Be- yond this low tract the plains are sufflcientl}' elevated for security, and are highly culti- vated and densely populated. Farther in- land the country becomes mountainous, covered in part by forests, where are found the scattered villages of the Oriyas, Santals, and Bhumijas. "There are," says Rev. 0. R. Bacheler, who has resided several years in the town of Balasore, " three ver- nacular languages spoken by the inhabitants of the Balp-sore district. 1. The Oriya, one of the Hindoo family of languages, derived principally from the Sanscrit. This is spoken by the greater part of the Hindoo population. OROOMIAH. 6J5 2. The Hindostanee, derived principally from the Arahio and Persian, and spnken by the Mohammedans. 3. The Santal, with which may be classed the Bhumija, they both being dialects of the same language." The Oriya contains many religious and literary works, some translated from the Sanscrit, and others original. Most of the religious books are poetical, and some of them possess a great degree of literary merit. Some of these works are very large, the Puranas alone consisting of 1,600,000 lines ! The religion of the Hindoos in Oris- sa, like their manners and customs, is similar to that of multitudes of others of their race. Caste in all its ruinous forms bears almost unlimited sway in the province. They wor- ship the same gods and observe the same rites of most other Hindoos, and are equally ignorant and superstitious. The religious opinions and customs of the Mohammedans are based on the Koran, though somewhat modified by a long contact with heathenism. They are great bigots, and are probably more immoral and vicious than the Hindoos. The Santals it is supposed were the abo- rigines of the country, but were driven to the mountainous regions by the Hindoos, by whom they were conquered in some re- mote period. They invariably live in the hilly jungle. They subsist mostly by selling wood, coal, and leaves to their neighbors ; but they cultivate the soil to some extent, In religion, language, manners and customs, they are very different from the Hindoos, and are much less influenced b}- caste. The sun is the chief object of their worship, which they believe is God, and to which they sacrifice goats and chickens, at the same time repeating a prayer composed for such occasions. The departed spirits of their fathers are sometimes adored, and they are accustomed to worship their bullocks annually. This is done out of gratitude to the animals for bearing burdens during the year. These people are without a regular priesthood, temples, and a systematic re- ligion. The master of a family oflBciates as its priest, performing the customary rites either in the house or under a tree. The Santals say their race originated from two ducks' eggs ; but their more immediate origin is attributed to a drunken and incest- uous intercourse, something like that of Lot with his daughters. Strong drinks, music and dancing are among their favorite enjoy- ments. They are, however, a mild and inof- fensive people. Unlike the Hindoos, they do not bum their dead, but bury them. Their complexion is nearly as dark as that of the Africans, but their hair is straight. A few oral songs and traditions constitute their literature, but they have no written language except that recently furnished by a mission- ary of the Freewill Baptist Society, and which none but a few who have betin taught in the mission school can read. The lan- guage sounds very sweet and musical when spoken, and is remarkably regular, consider- ing it has never been cultivated. As might be expected, it is very barren in theological terms. The women mingle with the men in their labors and recreations, seem to be on an equality with them, and are divested of the squeamishness of the Hindoo females. At the age of sixteen or seventeen years the Santals usually marry. The ceremony is very simple and performed as follows : The man puts some paint on the bride's head, and she in return confesses herself his wife by putting oil on his head. The Bhumijas are next in importance to the Santals, They are described by Rev. Mr. Bacheler as " a similar people, occupy- ing the same portion of the district, speak- ing a language strongly resembling the San- tal, and, in most particulars, differing little from them. They are considerably less nu- merous than the former, and it is probable that missionary effort among them also would be eminently successful, could they be brought under religious influence. There are small portions of other tribes scattered among those already mentioned, but they are not sufficiently numerous to render a par- ticular description necessary." " The complexion of these different races varies from a dark copper color to black. Those whose occujiation is mostly within doors are rather lighter than those more ex- posed. The hill tribes are darker than the people of the plains. The hair is straight and black, and worn long both by men and women. The eyes are black, the lips thin, nose prominent, foreheads elevated, the in- tellectual faculties predominating. They have an intellectual cast of countenance, and are rather good-looking than otherwise." OROOMIAH : A city of Persia, the an- cient Thebanna, the reputed birth-place of Zoroaster, situated on a beautiful fertile plain, the seat of the Mission of the Ameri- can Board to the Nestorians. On this plain there are about 300 villages, inhabited chiefly by Nestorians, of whom there are about 20,000 in Oroomiah, (See Nestorians.) OSHUNGA: Station of the American Board in West Africa, at the mouth of the Gaboon river. OTAWAO : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society, near the Waipa river, in New Zealand. OTAHEITE : Same as Tahiti. (See South Sea Islands.) OZYUNGA : A station of the American Board at the mputh of the Gaboon river, West Africa. PAARL: Station of the London Mission- ary Society, in South Africa, 85 miles north- east of Cape Town. (3.36 PACALTSDORP— PAKSEEISM. PACALTSDORP : Station of the London Missionary Society in South Africa, 245 miles east of Cape Town. PAGO-PAGO : A station of the London Missionary Society, on the Island of Tutuila, one of the Samoan group. PAGAN : A heathen, a Gentile, an idola- tor. This word was originally applied to the inhabitants of the country, who adhered to idolatry after Christianity had been re- ceived by the cities. So heathen signifies the inhabitants of a heath or woods, and Kaffre, in Arabic, signifies the inhabitants of a liut or cottage, and one that does not re- ceive Mohammedanism. PAGODA : A house of idols. In India, a temple in which idols are Worshiped. It is likewise applied to an image of some sup- posed deity. Also a gold or silver coin cur- rent in Hindostan, varying in value from •$1.75 to $2. PAIHIA : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand, on the south side of the Bay of Islands. PALLAM : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in India. PALAMOOTTAH: A station of the Church Missionary Society in the TinnevoUy District, India. PALANKEEN, or PALANQUIN: A cov- ered carriage used in India, China, &c., borne on the shoulders of men, and in which a, single person is conveyed from place to place. PANNEIVILEI : A station of the Church Missionary Society in India. PANTURA : A village at the mouth of a river of the same name, in Ceylon, a station of the Church Missionary Society. PANTHEISM: The doctrine that the Universe is God. PANEIVADALI: A station of the Church Missionary Society, India. PANDITERIPO : A parish in the Jaffna district of Ceylon, 9 miles north-west of Jaffnapatam, where is a station of the Am- erican Board. PAPENO : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society on Tahiti, in the Southern Pacific. PAPAOA: A station of the London Mis- sionary Society on the Island of Tahiti, in the Southern Pacific. PAPEETE: A station of the London Missionary Society on the Island of Tahiti, in the South Sea. PAPARA ; A station of the London Mis- sionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. PAPEURIRI : A station of the London Missionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea, PAPETOAI: A station of the London Missionary Society on Eimeo, South Sea. PARK HILL : A station of the American Board among the Cherokee Indians. PARAMARIBO : A considerable town. situated at the mouth of the Surinam river. Population 18,000 or 20,000. A station of the Moravians. PARSEEISM: The Parsees area some- what numerous and influential sect in Hin- dostan, especially in the western part of the country, and also in Persia. In Bombay and vicinity they are estimated at about 75,000. Their sacred writings, or scriptures, are con- tained in the Zand-Avasta, or Zand Word, which, however, the missionaries have never found in a collected form in the hands of the Parsees, The Zand-Avasta consists of seve- ral parts, as the Vandidad, which professes to report the result of an interview of Zo- roaster, the alleged founder of the sect, with Hormazd, the supreme object of wor- ship, the Yacna and Vispard, which are in- terspersed with the Vandidad, and recited along with it during the celebration of the most extended service ; the Khurdah Avasta, or minor liturgy ; the Yacts, and other de- tached pieces. The Zand-Avasta is ascribed to Zoroaster, who is said to have lived about 500 years before Christ; but the testimonies of the ancients respecting the epoch of Zoroaster are very conflicting ; and besides, there is no proof of even the existence of the Zand writings till long after the above period, and much less is there evidence that they were written by such a person. Learned Euro- peans of every shade of belief agree in pro- nouncing the Zand-Avasta a spurious work. Sir Wm. Jones, the " prince arid pioneer of modern orientaUsts," says it contains noth- ing which corresponds with the character of a philosopher and a legislator, and adds, that " either Zoroaster had not common sense, or he did not write the book which is attribu- ted to him." Not only is it believed to be a spurious work, but a production of com- paratively modern times, and probably of Persian origin. According to the Zand-Avasta there are two deities, Hormazd and Ahiram, the for- mer the author of good, and the latter tho author of evil, but both of these are regard- ed as derived beings, coetaneously produced by Time. Writers on this subject have traced a striking resemblance between this theory and that of the ancient Manicheans, who also ascribed good and evil to two distinct crea- tors, corresponding somewhat in name to those of the Parsees, and hence it is believed that the latter derived their notions, in part at least, from that heretical sect. The Parsees are idolators, worshiping not merely the good and evil deities, but almost every thing that is named in heaven and earth. The learned Dr. Wilson, long a mis- sionary of the Church of Scotland at Bom- bay, makes a literal translation of one sec- tion of the Parsee scriptures, in which the devotee is taught to say, "I worship Hor- PAKSEEISM. 637 mazd, the pure, master of purity. I wor- ship Zoroaster, the pure, master of purity. I worship the whole body of Hormazd. I worship ail the long existences (the beings which are to exist 12,000 years.) I worship all the pure celestial and terrestrial Izads (angels.) I worship all the fountains of water, flowing and stationary. 1 worship all the trees, and the trunks, and lofty branches, and fruit. I worship the whole earth. I worship the whole heaven. I wor- ship all the stars, the moon, and the sun. I worship the primeval lights. I worship all the anim.als, both aquatic and terrene. I worship all the mountains, the purely plea- surable. I worship all the fires." These are a few from the long catalogue of objects, animate and inanimate, which the Parsees are taught to worship. These ob- jects are so jumbled together and confound- ed as to produce the utmost distraction and degradation in the mind of the worshiper. "Thus," Dr. Wilson remarks, "he at one moment calls upon Hormazd, at the next upon his own ghost ; at one moment on an archangel, at the next on a sturdy bull ; at one time on the brilliant sun, the next on a blazing fire ; at one moment on a lofty and stupendous mountain, the next on a darksome cave ; at one moment on the ocean, at the next on a well or spring, &c." Not only are all distinctions among the different objects of worship referred to in the liturgical and doctrinal works of the Parsees levelled, by being confounded together in the most strange and unnatural associations, but the same result is brought about by the fact that all the different objects of worship of what- ever nature, have applied to them the same terms expressive of respect, of worship, of supplication, praise, exaltation, reverence, glory, and benediction. It has been clearly ascertained that the terms and objects of worship which have been given as specimens, are used by the Parsees, not to express civil, but rehgious respect and honor, and further, that they are used not with levity and indi- ference, but in the most solemn forms of de- votion which they possess. Another singular fact is, that the service of the inferior objects occupies more space in the books of the Par- sees, than that of the more exalted and com- manding objects. It appears therefore that the Parsees, worshiping as they do " gods many and lords many," are polytheists in the most literal and degrading sense. It must be evident from the number and character of the objects worshiped by the Parsees, that their ideas of personal respon- sibility and guilt, of the method of salvation, and of a future state, cannot be even an ap- proximation to the scripture doctrine on these subjects. They do, indeed, like all idolaters, believe in something called guilt, and in some method of expiation ; but how low and corrupting is that belief, and how shocking and disgusting the services and sacrifices offered for the soul. The teachings of the Zand-Avasta on these sub- jects occupy a large space, and cannot he quoted here, but they are alluded to with sufBcient distinctness by Dr. Wilson, when he says, " The religious war with, and re- lentless destruction of vermin ; the mending of holes formed in the earth, through which the devils are supposed to emerge from hell j the feeding of the hungry flame with grease and fat and sweet smelling odors ; the mut- tering and sputtering of prayers and praises in an unknown tongue, to every object that exists ; the disposal of corpses so as to pol- lute the atmosphere rather than the earth ; the solemn funeral of bones and hair and nails ; the drinking and sipping of cow's urine at morn and eve as if it were the very elixir of immortality ; the scrubbing and rubbing of the body with various ablutions for the expulsion of devils ; the frightening and driving awaj' of demons by noises ; the introduction of dogs to survey the bodies o< the deceased and to prognosticate and guard them from the assaults of Satan ; and many other practices said to be enjoined by divine authority and to be good and virtuous ac- tions, do not certainly commend themselves to the reason of many of those witli whom tyrant custom compels their observance." The earth, flre, water, dogs, and some other objects are deemed peculiarly sacred ; and hence the severe penalties attached to the pollution or injury of either of these ob- jects. Thus, for instance, a person who strikes a water dog is treated to 10,000 stripes ; and he must by way of atonement carry 10,000 bundles of dry and the same quantity of soft wood, to the fires of Hor- mazd. He must furnish 10,000 barsams (trees), and 10,000 zors of pure hom (a kind of tree) and its juice. He must kill 10,000 reptiles that creep on their bellies, 10,000 reptiles in the form of a dog, 10,000 turtles, 10,000 land frogs, 10,000 water frogs, 10,000 ants which drag the grain, 10,000 stinging ants, 10,000 blood suckers, and 10,000 sting- ing flies ; and he must take out 10,000 im- pure stones from the ground. And these are only a part of the penalty. So numerous and confused are the rites, ceremonies, superstitions, and penal regula- tions of the Parsees, that to illustrate them all would require a volume. They are in general but little acquainted with their sa- cred writings, except by tradition and as in- ferred from actual observances, though some of them are quite intelligent, and able to de- fend their system with a show of learning and ingenuity. An American missionary at Bombay says of the Parsees, " They yield in energy and influence to none. They are more ready than any other class to adopt 638 PAStTMALIE— PILGRIMAGE. European customs and opinions, and not a few of tiiem speal^: and write the English language with facility. They have several fine temples in Bombay, and at the time of sunrise and sunset they may he seen reading and repeating their prayers, and addressing their worship to the sun and to the sea. But they are much less of a religious people than the Hindoos. They are indeed zealous for their religion, but are most ignorant of what it really is, and their zeal apparently arises rather from a sectional, national feeling, than from their being imbued with any re- ligious principle. They pride themselves on being Parsees, and they are ready to defend Parseeism, whatever it may be. Among them are found the bitterest opponents of Christianity, who are familiar with the prin- cipal writings of opposers, and who manifest no little zeal in disseminating their infidel views. Much use is made of the press for this purpose." — Rev. E. D. Moore. PARIS PROTESTANT MISSIONARY SOCIETY: This society was formed in 1822, under the title of "Soci^te des Missions Evangeliques de Paris." A meeting was held for the purpose at the house of S. V. S. "Wilder, Esq., an American merchant, then residing in Paris, which was attended by the presidents of the Reformed and Lutheran Consistories ; by other pastors, with lay members of the two churches ; by various foreign Protestants, then in Paris, among whom were Rev. Daniel Wilson, Rev. S. S. Wilson, and Rev. .Jonas King, and hy Messrs. Cook and -Croggon, Wesleyan missionaries then in France. One object of the So- ciety was declared to be, to enlighten the public mind, through the press, as to the character and importance of the different missions of Protestant Christians among the heathen ; and another, to establish an insti- tution for young persons recommended by the different missionary societies, to whom it might be necessary to study some of the Oriental languages. Rev. Jonas King, being then in Paris, and having received an invitation from Rev. Mr. Pisk, after the death of his associate. Rev. Mr. jParsons, to join him in the mission to the Holy Land, the new society assumed, for a given period, his support. The committee issued an address, setting forth the object of the society, and soliciting contributions. They also established the Monthly Concert of Prayer. Subsequently, this society directed all its efforts to Southern Africa, where their mis- sions have been very energetically and suc- cessfully prosecuted to the present time. They have thirteen stations, among several different tribes, with fourteen missionaries, and a large number of native assistants, and about thirteen hundred communicants. (See Soulhern Africa.) PASUMALTE : A station of the Madura mission in Southern Hindostaiij under the care of the American Board. PASHA : In the Turkish dominions, a viceroy, governor, or commander. PASHALIC : The jurisdiction of a Pasha. PATNA: a city of much importance in the presidency of Bengal, on the south side of the Ganges, about 300 miles north-west of Calcutta. The population is estimated at nearly 400,000. Within the walls, the city is not more than a mile and a half in length by three-fourths of a mile in breadth ; but its suburbs extend nine miles along the banks of the river, and two miles inland. The English Baptists commenced a mission here in 1811. PATEA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand. PATRIARCH : In the Oriental churches, a dignitary superior to the order of arch- bishops. PATRIARCHATE: The office or juris- diction of a patriarch. PAUMOTU : A group, consisting of a large number of low, small islands, in the South Pacific, between 17" and 23° S. lati- tude, and 139° and 145° W. longitude. They have been called by several names, as The Labyrinth, Pearl Islands, Pallisee Is- lands, Dangerous Archipelago. PEDANG; A Dutch settlement on the west coast of Sumatra. Camphor, benzoin, and pepper, and a considerable quantity of gold from the interior are collected here, and sent to Batavia. It is a station of the Baptist Missionary Society. PEELTON: Station of the London Mis- sionary Society, among the Kaffres in South Africa, destroyed by the Kaft're war. PEHIAKUR A : A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society, on the north-west side of Waikato harbor. New Zealand. PEKING : The Northern Capital of China, the residence of the imperial court, situated in the Chihli province, in lat. 39° 54' N., and long. 116° 27' E. (See China.) PELLA : A station of the Rhenish Mission- ary Society, in Little Namaqua, South Africa. PERIACOOLUM: A station of the Ameri- can Board, belonging to the Madras mission, in Southern Hindostan. PHILIPOLIS: Station of the London Missionary Society, in South Africa, among the Bosjesmans, on the north side of Cradock River, with out-stations. PHILIPTON: The principal station of the London Missionary Society, on Kat River, South Africa. PIETERMAURITZBURG : A Dutch set- tlement, near Port Natal, Southern Africa. PILGRIMAGE : A journey to some place deemed sacred, undertaken with supersti- tious veneration for the place or the relics or other sacred things which it contains. PINE EIDGE— PRESUrTERIAN BOARD. 639 PINE RTDGE; A station of the Ameri- can Board among the Ohootaw Indians. PIPLEE : A short distance from Pooree, in Hindostan, and near the coast of the Bay of Bengal, a place through which most of the pilgrims pass in their annual .journeys to the great Juggernaut festival. The Gene- ral Baptists of England established a mission there in 1847. PIRIE: Station of the Free Church of Scotland in South Africa, about 20 miles East of Burnshill. PLAATBERG ; A station of the "Wesley- ans in the Natal District, South Africa. POINT PEDRO : The northernmost ex- tremity of Ceylon, in lat. 9° 48' N., and long. 80° 7' E. A station of the Wesleyans. POINT VENUS : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society , on Tahiti. POLYNESIA: The Many Isles; a name vaguely applied to numerous groups of Is- lands in the Pacific Ocean. (See Sandwich Islands, South Sea Islands, &c.) PONTIANAK: A Dutch possession on the west coast of Borneo, 12 miles from the mouth of the Pontiana river, for some time a station of the American Board. POOHACOOTEE : A large village, about 50 miles north-east from Madura, within the territory of the Tondiman rajah. The sta- tion was transferred to the American Board in 1845, by the Indian Church Missionary Society of Madras. POOTHACOTTAH : A town of Southern Hindostan, 65 miles north-east from Madura. Population, 10,000. The mission of the American Board at Madras had a station here, but transferred it to Madura in 1845. In 1848 it was relinquished, owing to its distance, and the inconvenience of superin- tending it. POONAH: A city in the province of Arungabad, until 1818 the capital of the Mahratta empire, about 30 miles east of the Ghauts, 100 from Bombay, and 75 from the nearest sea-coast. A station of the Free Church of Scotland. POOREE : A station of the General Bap- tists in Orissa. PORT ANTONIO : A station of the Wes- leyans in Jamaica, W. I. PORT-AU-PLATT : A station of the Wesleyans in Hayti. PORT MORANT: A station of the Wes- leyans in Jamaica, W. I. PORT NATAL : (D'Urban,) the principal port of the Natal District, South Africa. PORT REPUBLICAN : A station of the Wesleyans in Hayti. PORT OP SPAIN: A station of the United Secession Church in Trinidad. PORT ELIZABETH : Station of the Lon- don and Wesleyan Missionary Societies in Algoa Bay, South Africa. The London Mis- siooary Societv's labors at this station are chiefly directed to the Fingoes, a considera- ble portion of this tribe having been for years settled at this place. There is also an English congregation and a Sabbath-school. PORT LOKKOH: A native town in the Timneh country, about 40 miles from the colony of Sierra Leone, West Africa. In point of population and geographical location, it is a highly important position. It is the thoroughfare of that part of the country, and is visited by the natives of various countries to the eastward. This is the site of the mission of the Church Missionary Society to the Timneh country. PORT LOUIS : A station of the London Missionary Society, on the north-western side of the Island of Mauritius, or the Isle of France. It is the principal town and capital of the Island, and contains a large propor- tion of the whole population. Its population is largely Roman Catholic, and, of course, the missionary work meets with much oppo- sition. (See Mauritius.) PRATTVILLE : A station of the Church Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MIS- SIONS. — The foreign missionary work was commenced by the Presbyterian Church in the United States at an early date. The Society for propagating Christian knowledge in Scotland, which was formed in 1709, es- tablished a Board of correspondents in New York, in 1741, who appointed the Rev. Aza- riah Horton, a member of the Presbytery of New York, to labor as a missionary among the Indians on Long Island.* His labors extended through two or three years, though the precise limit is not now known. The second foreign missionary of the Presby- terian Church was the justly celebrated Da- vid Brainerd. He was licensed to preach by an association of Congregational minis- ters, assembled at Danbury, Conn., July 29, 1742, and spent about a year at an Indian settlement not very far from Albany. On June 12, 1744, he was ordained by the Pres- bytery of New York, then meeting at New- ark, N. J., and immediately commenced his labors at the forks of the Delaware, on the Susquehannah, and at Cross-weeks, near the centre of New Jersey. After the death of David Brainerd, in October, 1747, he was succeeded by his brother, the Rev. John Brainerd, a member of the same Presby- tery, who labored faithfully and successfully among the Indians for many years. These three first missionaries to the heathen tribes in this land, under the direction of the Pres- byterian Church, maintained a correspond- ence with the parent Society in Scotland, and derived a portion of their support from that country. Both Mr. Horton and David * See Green's Hiat. Sketch, page 37, and Rev, A. Ilor- ton'8 Narrative, from .Tune, 1T42, to March, 1743, m Prince's Christian Jlistory, VoL L 640 PKESBTTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. Brainerd received something lilce two hun- dred dollars a year from this source. But John Brainerd was supported principally, if not wholly, by contributions in the Presbyterian churches here. In 1763, the S3'nod of New York ordered a collection to be made in all their churches for the sup- port of Indian missions, allowing Mr. Brain- erd a salary of thirty pounds, giving the same amount for the support of schools, and voting sixty-five pounds for the support of the Rev. Sampson Occum, a native Indian, a member of the Presbytery of Suffolk, on Long Island, and at that time a missionary among the Oneida Indians.* Three years alter this, in 1766, the Rev. Charles Beatty and the Rev. George Duffield performed a mission, under the appointment of the Synod of New York, to the Indians on the Mus- kingum river in Ohio ; and their report was so favorable that the Synod appointed two others to labor in the same region. But troubles arising between the Indians and the frontier inhabitants, this mission was relin- quished. After the death of Mr. John Brainerd, in 1780, so man}' changes had oc- curred among the Indians in consequence of the revolutionary war, and other causes, that the foreign missionary work was to a con- siderable degree abandoned for several years. It had been prosecuted by the Presbyterian Church from the year 1741 to 1780, a period of nearly 40 years, during which time at least six faithful ministers had labored in the field, besides schoolmasters, and some other helpers. In the year 1796, the for- eign missionary work was resumed in the formation of the "New York Missionary Society." This body was independent of any presbyterial supervision, though it is believed to have consisted principally of members of the Presbyterian Church. A considerable amount of funds was collected, and three Indian missions were established, viz. : among the Chiokasaws, the Tuscaroras, and the Senecas. In the following year, 1797, the " Northern Missionary Society " was instituted. This, like its predecessor, was an independent body, though composed in part of Presbyterians. By this Society, missions to the Indian tribes were prosecuted for several years. But in the year 1800, the General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church took up the work of foreign missions in a sys- tematic manner. They appointed the Rev. Mr. Chapman as a missionary on the north- western frontier of the State of New York, with reference to the wants of both the white inhabitants and the Indian tribes ; and in the year 1802, the General Assembly's standing committee on missions addressed a circular to all the Presbyteries under their care, urging collections for the support of missions, * Green's Sketch, page 44. and making inquiries for suitable candidates to be emploj^ed. In the next year, 1803. a suitable person was found. The Rev. Gideon Blackburn offered himself for the work and a mission was established among the Cher- okee Indians, then residing within tho chartered limits of the State of Georgia, where Mr. Blackburn prosecuted his mis- sionary labors with zeal, activity, and devotedness, for eight years, when his health failed, and he was constrained to leave his post. The standing committee of the General Assembly intended to have prosecuted this mission, but did not succeed in finding a man to supply the place of Mr. Blackburn, and subsequently the Rev. Mr. Kingsbury, acting under the American Board, established himself in the Cherokee country, and a flourishing mission was built up. Missions among the Indians were prose- cuted by the General Assembl}"" in various directions from 1805 to 1818, and with some encouraging results ; but in 1818, measures were taken to unite the efforts of the Pres- byterian, Reformed Dutch, and Associate Reformed Churches, by forming one inde- pendent Society, and a new body was accord- ingly formed, called " The United Foreign Missionary Society." This Society was in active operation some six or seven years, and all the existing missionary interests in the Presbyterian Church were merged in it. In the year 1826, it had under its care nine missions, embracing 60 male and female mis- sionaries, 250 children and youth under in- struction, and more than 40 native converts to the faith and hope of the Gospel.* About that time the whole work was transferred tu the American Board, and the United Foreign Missionary Society ceased its operations. It was regretted by many Presbyterians that the church of their preference should not prosecute foreign missions under their own distinctive name, and this feeling be- came at length so deep that in the month of November, 1831, the Synod of Pittsburgh formed the "Western Foreign Missionary Society." This Society was intended to unite the efforts, not of that Synod alone, but the efforts of all others who might choose to unite with them. Operations were immediately commenced and prose- cuted by this Society, with varied success, for six years, when, in June. 1837, a Board of Foreign Missions was established by the General Assembly, to which the Western Foreign Missionary Society subsequently transferred all their missions and funds. — Rev. J. Greenleaf. The following interesting account of the manner in which this Board is organized, and the principles upon which its operations are conducted, is taken from Mr. Lowric'a " Manual of Missions :" * Greoa'B Sitetch, page 69. PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. 641 This Board consists of sixty ministers, and as many laymen, whose term of oflSce is four years. Its members are appointed by the General Assembly, one-fourth part each year. To them is " intrusted, with such di- rections as may from time to time be given, the superintendence of the foreign missionary operations of the Presbyterian Church in the United States of America ;" and they are required to "malie annually to the Gen- eral Assembly a report of their proceedings ; and submit for its approval such plans and measures as ma}^ be deemed useful and ne- cessary." The Board is, therefore, simply a Standing Committee of the General Assem- bly, and the title of Committee would have more clearly indicated its relations to that venerable court. For convenience in holding certain real estate and in the transaction of some kinds of business, a charter has been obtained for the Board under a general law of the State of New York, with the same title precisely as designated by the General Assembly, " Tke Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church in the United States of America." This charter is not a close but an open one, and the members of the incorporated body are the same persons, and no others, who are appointed as mem- bers of the Board by the General Assembly. The Board appoints annually an Executive Committee and the Executive OfBoers. On these devolves the immediate charge of the missionary work. Weekly meetings are held by the Committee, at which everj' thing re- lating to the interests of the missionary cause at home and abroad may be brought under consideration. The selection of mis- sionary fields, the appointment of mission- aries, the kinds of labor in each country and at each station, the measures suitable for promoting an interest in the missionary work among the churches at home, receive continued and careful attention. Most of these are matters of deep importance. They require the exercise of enlarged views and the most sober judgment. A general ac- quaintance with the missionary field, and with the history of missions, and a particu- lar knowledge of the missionary work under the charge of the Board, are required for the proper decision of questions that occur from time to time. An application for funds to build a missionary chapel, or a request for appointment as a missionary or teacher, may easily bring under consideration the whole subject of the best method of expending missionary funds, in view both of the exi- gences of the various missions and the amount of moneys at the disposal of the Committee. The appointment of missionaries is one of the most important of these duties. In making appointments the Committee must rely very much on recommendations of pas- tors, instructors, and ethers. They are anxious to send forth only those who have been called to this work by the Head of the Church. As a part of the evidence of this divine call, they must take into consideration the qualifications of the applicant. His rep- utation for piety, prudence, and zeal, his talents and scholarship, his health and its adaptation to particular climates, are all mat- ters of great moment. Qualifications of a superior class are greatly to be desired ; but men of respectable talents, with good judg- ment and habits of industry and energy, all under the control of humble, loving, and de- voted piety, may be very useful in most mis- sionary fields. It may well be doubted whether it is expedient to send out men whose qualifications are not fully equal ta the average attainments of the ministers of the churches in this country. A rule was- adopted by the Board, at the request of the- Executive Committee, that no ordained min- ister should be sent to a foreign field, with- out the recommendation of his Presbytery.. This places the responsibility of deciding on the qualifications of missionaries, to a. large- degree, on the Presbyteries ; and it should go far to secure the right kind of men. But the nature of the work itself, and the sacri- fices which it involves, will always furnish presumptive evidence that the brethren whO' offer as volunteers to engage in it are men- worthy of confidence and honor. The missionaries become members of the- Presbyteries which have been organized in their respective fields of labor, and all eccle- siastical matters are transacted as is usual in these church courts. With these, the- Committee do not interfere, unless by Chris- tian counsel at the request of the missiona- ries. Financial and other business matters are transacted with the missionaries, not as Presbyteries, but as missions or sub-commit- tees ; and as a general rule it is expedient to leave local details as far as possible in their hands. The general supervision must, from the nature of the case, be reserved to the Committee. This is particularly neces- sary in the expenditure of the funds devoted to missionary purposes. Estimates are sent up. embracing the various kinds of work in each mission — the sum desired for the sup- port of missionaries and native assistants, for building churches, chapels, or school- houses, for schools, for the press, &c., being separately stated. In forming these esti- mates, the missions proceed upon the ex- penses of the preceding year as a basis, with such enlargement or diminution as may be called for by their circumstances and pros- pects. With estimates from all the missions before them, the Committee then apportion to each such part of the probable receipts of the Board as the wants of each mission ap- pear to require. The probable income to €42 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. be thus apportioned is itself a matter of es- timate, founded upon the income of the pre- ceding year, and the hope of enlarged con- tributions b_v the churches to this cause. In the proper fulfilment of their trust in these financial matters, the Committee are called to exercise their maturest judgment. Errors or mistakes here would involve the whole Work in serious difficulties. Were expendi- tures to be authorized without a strict regard to the probable means of payment, a debt would soon be created, embarrassing alike to friends at home and to the missionaries abroad. On the other hand, it is no easy matter to withhold aid which is urgently solicited, and which the churches are so well able to give. The arrangements of the Board for the re- ceipt and expenditure of the funds commit- ted to its charge for the missionary work, are thoroughly business-like and satisfactory. Every donation, though as small in amount as the widow's two mites, can be traced in its course from the time it leaves its donor's hands, and for every dollar expended a sat- isfactory exhibit can be shown — all being on record in books kept for the purpose. Vouch- ers are preserved for all moneys expended. It is believed that nothing has been at any time lost through want of uprightness or fidelity. Errors of judgment there may have been, and a consequent injudicious ex- penditure of money in some cases. To ac- knowledge this is but to concede that the Executive Committee and Officers are far from being infallible in judgment. But it is no small thing to be able to say, that in twenty years, out of an expenditure amount- ing altogethsr to more than a million and a half of dollars, nothing has been lost through want of fidelity on the part of those who were charged with its disbursement. The further merit of economy in the administra- tion of the funds of the Board may be justly claimed, and is shown, among other ways, by the low per centage of cost for executive services. In the transmission of moneys for the sup- port of the missionary work abroad, differ- ent methods are adopted for missions in different countries. To the missions among the Indian tribes, a large amount of ■' sup- plies" — various articles of clothing, grocer- ies, books, &c., — are forwarded. These can be purchased at much lower rates in our cities than in the Indian country. For articles purchased in the neighborhood of these mis- sionary stations, payments are commonly made by drafts drawn by the Treasurer or Superintendent of the mission on the Trea- surer in New York. In the African missions, particularly at Oorisco, money is less conve- nient than some kinds of merchandise, and accordingly supphes are sentfrom this coun- try. To the missions in India, Siam, and China, supplies are seldom sent, and only when ordered ; and money is remitted, com- monly by letters of credit. The Treasurer goes down into Wall street, and engages a letter of credit for, say, five hundred pounds sterling ; on which letter, bills of exchange may be drawn, payable in London at four or six months after sight. This letter of credit is forwarded to the Treasurer of the mission, and bills are sold by him at the prevailing rates. The purchaser sends the bill to Lon- don, where it arrives in some five or six months after the time when It was obtained in Wall street, and four or six months must still elapse, after it is presented for accept- ance by the parties on whom it is drawn, be- fore it becomes payable by the Treasurer of the Board, making altogether ten or twelve months from its date in New York. As the Board must in due time pay this draft, it has been the good practice of the Committee to authorize, at the time of engaging the letter of credit, the investment upon ample securi- ties of money bearing interest, so as to be in no danger of not being prepared to take it up when it becomes due. In this way, not only is safety secured, but the interest gained in the meantime on the money invested serves to reduce the cost of the bill, or, in other words, to diminish, the expense of re- mitting funds to the missions. When the fluctuations of commerce, war, or any other cause render it difficult to sell bills of ex- change in India or China, it then becomes necessary to send out silver. This must be bought, sometimes at a premium, and it is subject to expense for freight and insurance, while on the voyage it is earning no interest ; so that this kind of remittance is seldom a desirable one. The "business of the Board is transacted mainly in the city of New York. This city has become the chief foreign port of the country, and possesses many advantages for sending forth missionaries, remitting funds, and foreign correspondence. No other city in this country affords equal facilities for these purposes. The decision to establish the business head-quarters of the Board in this city was therefore a measure of obvious propriety. Almost the only drawback to the desirableness of this location grows out of the great cost of living in New York. This renders a somewhat large outlay necessary for the salaries of the Executive Officers. The amount paid by the Board, however, has thus far at no time equalled the actual ex- penses incurred by them for their support. The missions of the Board are eight in number, viz. : to North American Indians ; Western Africa; India; Siam; China; Jews; and Papal Europe. The following summary viev) will exhibit the progress and present condition of these missions, as they appear in the Report for 1854: PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. 613 MISSIONS. INDIAN TRIBES : Choctaws Creeks Chickasaws- Seminoles _. lowAS AND Sacs Otoes and Omahas-. Chippewas and Ottawas AFRICA: Liberia— Kroo People Near the Equator,. INDIA: lODIANA- FtJRBrrKHABAD- Agra Allahabad - SI AM: CHINA. Canton NiNGPO Shanghai Chinese in California. JEWS: ROMANISTS: Names or Stations. Spencer Academy-. Kowetah _ TaJlaliassee Wapanucka _ . Boggy Depot __ Little River, or Oak-ridge Iowa __. Bellevue Grand TraverBe _. Little Traverse Middle VUlage Total of Indian Missions, Monrovia Kentucky Sinoe Settra Kroo, Coriflco Total of African Missions Lodiana Saharunpur.. Sabathu Ambala Jalandar Labor Debra Futtebgnrh-. Mynpurie — Allababad— Futtebpore- Banda Total of India Missions, Bangkok Canton Ningpo — Sbanghai — San Francisco - Total of Cbina Missions, New York — Philadelphia- Baltimore Stations in France-. Belgium, &c Buenos Ayres GhJneral Total- Missionaries and Ass't Missionaries. ; g Minist'rs Lay Teacberi and others. 1846 1842 1849 1849 1862 1848 1836 1846 1838 1862 1853 1842 1850 1847 1841 1860 1834 1886 1836 1848 1847 1849 1863 1838 1843 1846 1836 1862 1863 1840 1846 1844 1860 1862 1846 1860 1850 1844 1863 Ameri- can. 2 I 26 I 79 32 Scholsire. Board'ng Day. 612 I 368 310|3002 166 3836 For offices, the liberality of a, few friends, in addition to the collection.5 made in some of the churches in 1842, has provided the Mission House, in Centre street. The place at first occupied as an office was a room in the Brick Church Chapel, in partnership ■with another benevolent institution. This was soon found to be quite too confined a place, and two rooms were taken on the third floor of a building at the corner of Broadway and Murray street. The growing business of the Board and the inconvenience of these rooms led to another change, and a part of a house was rented in City Ilall Place, where the office was held for some years. These rooms, however, were not well suited to the use of the Board ; and the plan of renting an office was found to be ex- pensive, and attended with the risk of change and other serious inconveniences. It is therefore a most happy thing that a house conveniently situated, well lighted, suffi- ciently large, and planned for its special use, is now owned by the Board. Its offices are rent-free, and are better suited to its pur- poses than rented rooms at almost any cost. In the Mission House, besides the Trea- surer's and Secretaries' offices, there are apartments for packing and storing goods to be sent to the missions. These occupy the basement story. When several missionary families arc about to sail, their trunks, GU PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. boxes, parcels, articles of furniture, &c., fill up these apartments, often to an uncomfort- able degree ; and both the economy and the convenience of these rooms become quite apparent. To rent suitable places for such purposes, when missionaries are preparing to embark, would always be attended with much expense, and might often be found im- practicable. The rooms devoted to the Museum, in the third story, contain a rare variety of idol gods and goddesses, from India, Siam, China, Africa, and other heathen countries, besides numerous other objects of interest. This collection is gradually increasing in extent and value, and is worthy of attention by the friends of missions. Visitors are admitted at any time, on application to the olBcers or clerks in the House. A large room is occupied by the Library. The books here collected number about 2000 volumes, mostly relating directly or indi- rectly to the work of missons. They in- clude numerous translations of the Sacred Scriptures, Dictionaries and Grammars of foreign languages. Reports and periodicals of missionary institutions, in bound volumes, memoirs of missionaries, works on the In- dians, on Africa, India, China, &c. They form a collection of very considerable value, and one which should be gradually enlarged. A number of works by Chinese authors occupy a recess in the same room. This is probably the only library of the kind in this country. It consists of about 1000 vol- umes, of which 400 are but one work, " The Twenty-Four Histories ;" and another work, "A Universal Encyclopsedia," with maps, diagrams, and sketches, extends to 120 vol- umes. '■ The Five Classics" number 104 volumes, and a second series, under a simi- lar title, contains 22 volumes. These are all in octavo, as are works on botany, descrip- tions of particular districts, accounts of kings and emperors, dictionaries, &c., be- sides some works of smaller size. The whole collection gives a striking view of the extent of Chinese literature, and makes one sigh over the strange language which ren- ders its stores inaccessible to most readers. Yet for reference these volumes may prove of great service. They were collected by the late lamented Mr. Olyphant, a merchant in the China trade, for some years a most valued member of the Executive Committee ; and by his characteristic liberality they oc- cupy a place in the Mission House Library. In other rooms are kept the bound vol- umes of letters received at the missionary ofBce. These are arranged according to date. All from correspondents in this country are classified under Domestic, and those from the missionaries are placed under the head of the Jlissions. Thus, the volume labeled, " Domestic — January to June, 1853," in- cludes the home letters received in those months ; and the volumes labeled, " India Letters, Lodiana, 1847-51," contains the let- ters from the Lodiana Mission in that time. Each volume has an index, making reference easy. There are upwards of sixty of these thick volumes, and each year steadily in- creases the number. In addition to these are many volumes consisting exclusively of letters relating to the Missionary Chronicle, formerly published, and to the Foreign Mis- sionary. The copies of letters sent from the office fill several volumes more. And the Treasurer's books of account, of various kinds, form still another class, second to none in their importance. A copy of every letter with remittances of money to the mis- sions, and every letter containing resnittances from the churches or individuals to the trea- sury, will be found among these volumes. The Receipts of the Board, and of the Western Foreign Missionary Society, (de- ducting the grants of the Bible and Tract Societies, and the appropriations of the U. S. Government for Indian schools,) from the commencement of their operations to the present time, as it appears from the fol- lowing table, present a gratifying view of the growth of the missionary spirit from year to year. The financial year of the Board terminates the first of May. pi ri833. $6,431 f^S 1834, . . 16,296 gffi< 1835, 17,677 S ■ 1836, . 19,123 m 1837, fl838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, 22,832 . 44,748 56.150 . 54;425 62,344 , 58,924 t 1843, 54,760 o 1844, . 66,674 1845, 72,117 1- 1846, . 76,395 § 1847, 82739 1 1848, . 89^165 1849, 96,294 1850, . 104.665 1851, 108,'o44 1852, . 1853, . 117,882 122:028 .1854, . . 140;502 Total, $1,490,795 PRESB- ?TBRIA N OHl FRCH OF N SCOTIA, BOARD OF MISSIONS: This Board was first organized on the 11th July, 1844, in consequence of an overture on the subject of Foreign Missions by the Presby- tery of Prince Edward Island. The move- ment in Presbytery is understood to have originated with Rev. John Geddie, who after- wards became the first missionary under the PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH OF NOVA SCOTIA. 6i:> direction of the Board. Its ni'^m'bers are subject to the annual appointment of synod, but for the most part the same individuals are re-appointed. At present, it consists of eight clergymen and four laymen ; the Rev. David Roy, New Glasgow, N. S., being Con- vener, and Rev. James Bayne, Pictou, N. S., Recording and Corresponding Secretary. The Board meet as often as business re- quires, at the call of the Convener, or their own adjournment. The Secretary is instruct- ed to correspond once in three months, and at other times, as circumstances require. A monthly periodical, called " The Missionary Register," is issued under the care of the Board, with a special view to disseminate missionary intelligence. An annual report of proceedings is laid before the synod, and the minutes of the various meetings, during each year, countersigned by the IModerator. The following synodical instructions were given to the Board at its first formation : (1) That the Board be authorized to receive the cooperation of the several ministers of the church in making an appeal to all the congregations of the body relative to the object of their appointment, and in counten- ancing and aiding an agency, if it be deemed proper that one should be employed. (2) That the Board do apply to such sources of information as they may deem requisite for the purpose of ascertaining the most elegible field for their missionary operations, expenses of outfit, passage, annual salary, &o. (3' That when funds adequate to maintain a missionary abroad shall be guaranteed by the several congregations of the church, and the Board shall feel themselves prepared to negociate with candidates for such mission- ary employment, proposals shall be made to obtain offers from qualified persons willing to volunteer their services for this purpose, (4) That in treating with candidates, care- ful attention be paid to their personal re- ligion, doctrinal views, and missionary spirit. Agreeably to these instructions the Board took immediate steps to appeal for support, and as far as possible obtain a guarantee of annual contribution to a, specific amount from the Church at large. The result of this appeal was that a yearly contribution of £200 currency, was considered as an amount that might confidently be depended upon. It had been ascertained that £70 sterling, or £84 currency, was sufBcient for the support of one missionary in Polynesia, and this field was selected as the least expensive and most healthful. September 26, 1845, the Board met for the purpose of receiving ten- ders of service from duly qualified persons, when the Rev. John Geddie, of Cavendish and New London, Prince Edward Island, offered and was accepted. From the favor- able aspect of continued and enlarged pecu- niary support, the Board felt encouraged to appoint a catechist as companion and assist- ant to Mr. Goddio. This was happily ac- complished so that the divine example of sending out the disciples two by two was followed to the letter. Mr. Isaac Archibald, a native of Nova Scotia who had received a liberal education, though not sufiicient to warrant his immediate licensure and ordina- tion as a missionary in full standing, was unanimously accepted, and duly appointed. In the mean time Mr. Geddie, who was in a few weeks loosed from his congregation, visited the various congregations in his presbytery with a view to deepen their interest in the mission, by a series of farewell services. The same course was pursued during the earlier part of the following year throughout the presbyteries of Nova Scotia, and was found to produce a very happy effect. Mr. Geddie devoted some months to the study of medi- cine and also to the art of printing, with a view to their future practice on the field of foreign service. It was found very difficult to select the particular island on which Mr. Geddie should commence operations, as it was not known which would be most acces- sible to missionary effort. New Caledonia was chiefly thought of, but Mr. G. was not bound by any decision of the Board to adopt it, unless circumstances were found favorable. The New Hebrides group had been surveyed by the martyr missionary Williams, for the special occupation of the parent church, (United Presbyterian, or as it was then called the United Secession Church of Scotland,) and at their expense. It was felt to be exceedingly appropriate that the Church in Nova Scotia should adopt as their field what the Church at homo could not enter upon at that time. This arrange- ment proved afterwards to be quite advan- tageous, and was accordingly adopted. Messrs. Geddie and Archibald, with their wives and children, after a series of farewell services in Pictou, Onslow, and Halifax, left Nova Scotia Nov. 30, 1846. After a brief sojourn in the United States, at Newbury- port, where they were very kindly entreated by the friends of the missionary enterprize, they sailed for the Sandwich Islands, being there also entertained, with Christian wel- come, and sent on their way with the pray- ers and offerings of the churches. They found a safe and prosperous voyage to the Samoan group, which is occupied by the agents of the London Missionary Society, with whom they spent a considerable period, receiving the benefit of their experience as to the manners and customs and language of the tribe whose evangelization was considered most suitable to the resources of the newly arrived missionaries. After due deliberation the island of Aneiteum, New Hebrides, was selected for permanent location. In July, 1848, the mission families were conveyed 646 PRIMITIVE METHODISTS— RANGOON. thither and entered immediately upon their allotted duties. Mr. Isaac Archibald re- signed his connection with the mission in 1850. Since that period the Board have had one missionary and a few native teachers under their charge. Very urgent appeals have been made for additional assistance, but up to the present year, (1854,) no favorable answer has been returned, such as warrants the expectation of immediate aid. One young man of ardent missionary spirit, is now in course of training, and will be sent out by the John Williams on her outvrard voyage next year. Two additional mission- aries are wanted, and if found, duly qualified, would be sent immediately. The funds on hand have always been adequate to the wants of the mission, and exhibit now a more flourishing condition than they have ever presented. After defraying the neces sary expenses for the year there will be a balance on hand of nearly £500. There is no reason to fear that the resources of the Church are quite equal to the maintenance of four missionaries. At first, the salary of the ordained missionary was £70 sterling, but in 1850 it was raised to an equality with the scale adopted by the London Missionary Society, viz., £100 sterling, and £5 sterling for each child. In addition to this, one of the children has been for some years at Walthanstow, England, along with the chil dren of the missionaries of that Society. The expense for his education amounts to £15 sterling ,per annum, and with extras does not exceed £20. The entire amount contributed to this mission since 1846 probably exceeds, but may be stated at, £3,000 currency or £2,400 sterling. The amount for the past year re ceived by the Treasurer is £424 currency, or £339 sterling in money, and nearly £300 in mission goods. At present the Board has but one mission, and one missionary, with several native teachers, on Aueiteum and Fo- tenna, New Hebrides. The church in Dec, 1851, contained 24 members and is situ- ated at Aniligauhat, Aneiteum. There is every probability that the number of con- verts greatly exceeds this amount now. By the latest date, Oct. 1853, it appears that the entire island, with its 3,000 inhabitants, has abandoned heathenish practices, and that the district which had last given up its idols is now exceedingly anxious to have Christian instruction. (See South Sea Islands.) — Rev. J. Bayne, of Pictou, N. S. PRIMITIVE METHODIST FOREIGN MISSIONARY SOCIETY: The Primitive Methodists, (or "Ranters," as they are sometimes called,) are a body of simple- hearted and devoted Christians which a.rose in England in 1810. In 1853, they reported 508 ministers, 108,926 members. Finding themselves gaining strength, they organized a foreign missionary society in March 1844, adopting Canada, New Zealand and Australia as their fields of labor. The Rev. J. Long, and J. Wilson were the first missionaries they sent to Australia. Since that time they have strengthened this mission, and God has honored them with considerable prosperity. Their stations in Australia are Adelaide, Mount Barker, Burra Burra, Sydney, Mor- peth, Melbourne, and Geelong. The number of missionaries is seven, and of members under their care 535. The total number of their foreign missionaries throughout the world, is 23 ; of whom 13 are in Canada, 7 in Australia, and 3 in New Zealand. The whole number of members in their stations is 2,374— W. B. PROSPECT PENN : A station of the London Missionary Society in Jamaica, West Indies. PROTESTANT EPISCOPAL CHURCH, MISSIONS OF : (See Episcopal Board of Missions.) PUEN : A station of the London Mission- ary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. PUNA : A district on the western coast of the Island of Hawaii, forming, in connec- tion with Hilo, the Parish of Rev. Mr. Coan, formerly a missionary of the American Board, now pastor of the native church in Hilo and Puna, by whom he is supported. QUILON: A seaport town, in Southern India, of considerable note in former times, said to have been built A. D. 825. A station of the London Missionary Society. RAGGED ISLAND : One of the Baha- mas ; a station of the Baptist Missionary Society. RAIATEA: One of the Society Islands, having a mission of the London Missionary Society. RAiVAVAI : One of the Austral Islands, and a station of the London Missionarj' So- ciety. RAJKOTE : A station of the Irish Pres- byterian mission in India, on the Gulf of Cambay, opposite to Surat. RAJMUNDRY : A town in the Northern Ciroars, India, — a station of the Hamburgh North German Missionary Society. RAJAH, or RAJA : In India, a prince. Some of the Rajahs are said to be independ- ent princes, and others are tributary to the Mogul. RAMREE : The capital of a district of the same name, 117 miles south from Arraoan town: A station of the American Baptist Union. RANGOON : The principal seaport of the Burman dominions, situated on the north bank of the Rangoon branch of the Irrawady. Its extent along the river is about a mile, and its breadth about 650 yards. It is en- closed by a stockade of teak timber and planks from ten to twelve feet high, having RHENISH MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 641 two gates on the northern face, and one on each of the others. Pop. 40,000 to 50,000. RANGIHONA: The first station occu- pied by the Church Missionary Society in New Zealand, on the north-east side of the Bay of Islands. RAROTONGA: The largest of the Hcr- vey Islands group, in the South Pacific, where is a mission of the London Mission- ary Society. RED RIVER : The Red River falls into Lake Winnipeg. The settlement on this river is about 50 miles in extent. Popula- tion in 1843, 5,143, of whom 2,798 were Ro- man Catholics, and 2,345 Protestants. The Church Missionary Society have several stations in this settlement. REGENT'S TOWN: A town of liberated Africans, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, 5 miles south south-east from Cape Town, in a valley near the heights of the Sierra Leone mountains. Its situation is romantic and healthy. No less than 8 mountains, covered with evergreen forests, rear their heads and form a chain around the settlement. Streams descend from the various clifls, and form a large brook, which runs through the middle of the town. On the banks is a meadow for the cattle belonging to the settlement, which is always green. In 1813, this spot, then un- inhabited, was set apart for the reception of negroes delivered from slave ships by the English cruisers. In 1816, their number was 1,100, from 22 different tribes, barbarous to an astonishing degree. (See Western Africa, Church Missionary Society.) REHOBOTH: A station of the Rhenish Missionary Society, at the hot springs, in Namaqualand, South Africa. REWA : The second place in rank and influence in the Feejee Islands. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. RHENISH MISSIONARY SOCIETY: The following account of the Rhenish Mis- sionary Society was given by Rev. L. Van Rohden, Assistant Inspector of the Barmen Missionary Seminary, in the " Evangelical Christendom" for Jan. 1851 : " The Rhenish Missionary Society was founded in the year 1828. Three associations, those of Elberfeld, Barmen and Cologne, united in the autumn of the above year, that they might, with common powers, send out missionaries to the heathen world. The above three associa- tions were soon joined by others, in the Rhenish provinces and in Westphalia, having the same objects in view. The associations thus combined, which, up to the present time, have been joined by about fifty other small and large associations in Western and Middle Germany, bear altogether the name of the Rhenish Missionary Society. The associations have appointed a committee, or, as we call it, ''a deputation," consisting of twelve individuals, the whole residing either in Elberfeld or Barmen, who have the man- agement of its affairs in their hands. They hold, for this purpose, regular meetings once a month, or oftener, in the mission-house. A part of the correspondence is conducted by the members of the deputation themselves ; but the principal part of ,|;he business de- volves on the inspector of the mission-hous*. Once a year, or even oftener, the deputation summons delegates from all the combined associations to a general assembly at Bar- men ; lays before them a report of their proceedings ; and adopts such resolutions as may appear to be necessai-y for the exten- sion and furtherance of the work. The gen- eral assembly decides by a majority of votes. "When the Rhenish Missionary Scciety met in the autumn of 1828, one of the asso- ciations composing it, viz., that of Barmen, had already for three years established a mission seminary ; and had published also the Barmen Missionary Gazette, of which 20,000 copies were in circulation. The mis- sion seminary had at the first for its object to give young mechanics the necessary in- struction to qualify them for going out as missionary assistants to the heathen. But soon this plan was enlarged so far, that the young men should be educated with a view of becoming actual missionaries, who should pass their theological examination here, and should be ordained to go out as ministers to the heathen ; only by way of exception are they sent out without being ordained as catechists, or even as assistants and mechan- ics. The Rhenish Missionary Society under- took, immediately after its foundation, the direction of the Barmen mission seminary. The Inspector and the pupils were placed under its control. The first was a perma- nent member of the deputation. Dr. Richter was then the Inspector ; and he remained so till the spring of 1847, when he suddenly died. He was assisted by his brother W. Richter, who died about two years before him. His place was filled by the writer of these lines, L. Von Rohden, and that of In- spector by C. Wallman since 1848. " The Rhenish Missionary Society supports twenty-five stations, with several more out- stations, in three different parts of the mis- sion-field ; viz.. in South-eastern Africa, in Borneo, and in China. It has sent out fifty missionaries, who are, for the most part, married, and of whom seven have already died. The yearly income amounts to from 28,000 to 32,000 Prussian thalers, or from £3,150 to £.3,600. It possesses a mission- house, in which the pupils are educated, ten at a time, and a small congregation and mis- sion-chapel, near the mission-house, in which public worship is conducted by the pupils exclusively, under the direction of the In- spector. Once a year missionary meetings are held in all the congregations connected 648 EIMATARA— SANDWICH ISLANDS. with the society, which have assumed the character of public festivals. Once a month missionary prayer meetings are held. Every fortnight there appears a report of the labors of our missionaries ; and once a year a genera] report is published." Thus stood the affairs of the Society in •851. It has just entered its twenty-sixth year. It now has twenty-five auxiliaries in Khenish Prussia, and thirteen in Westphalia ; and many of these embrace other " special and local unions." Nor is this all. Thuringia furnishes four auxiliaries ; Nassau, Hesse Darmstadt, &o., three ; and there is one in the United States. In 1850, its receipts had risen to 39,000 thalers. Within the twenty- five years, more than 500,000 thalers have been expended for the spread of the Gospel. As the result of its efforts in behalf of the heathen, the Rhenish Missionary Society can point to more than five thousand persons who have received baptism, and to eighteen hundred communicants. RIMATARA: One of the smallest of the Austral Islands, and a station of the Lon- don Missionary Society. ROB BEN ISLAND: Hospital for Lepers, off Table Bay, South Africa, occupied as a station by tlie United Brethren, removed from Hemel-en-Aarde. EOOKBOOKAH : A station of the Ame- rican Episcopal Board in West Africa, about 25 miles east of Cape Palmas, beyond the limits of the Colony, being the capital of the Bahboo tribe. ROCK TOWN : Station of the United Presbyterian Synod of Scotland, near the mouth of the Old Calabar, West Africa. ROCKTOWN: A station of the American Episcopal Missionary Society in West Africa, south-west of Cape Palmas. ROMA: One of the Banda Islands, a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- pelaso. ROTORUA : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in New Zealand, on the Ro- torua Lake, lat. 38° 40' S. and longitude 176" E. ROTTY : One of the Molucca Islands, in the Indian Archipelago. ROYAPOORUM: A station of the Ame- rican Board, belonging to the Madras mis- sion, in Eastern Hindostan. RURUTU : A small island, of the Aus- tral group, and a station of the London Mis- sionary Society. SABATHA : A station of the Presbyterian Board in Northern India, 110 miles north- east from Lodiana, in the lower ranges of the Himalaya mountains, at an elevation of about 4,000 feet above the sea. SAFET ■ A town, formerly of consider- able note, situated on a hill overloolting the western coast of the Lake of Tiberias, 65 miles west of Damascus. It formerly con- tained seven .Jewish synagogues, and a sort of university for the education of Jewish rabbis. In the year 1759, the place was nearly destroyed by an earthquake. It is now a poor place. The Jews are much op- pressed. The London Jews' Society have a st"fl 1"T On mpt*p SAFOTULOFAI : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society, on the Island of Savaii, one of the Samoas. It is a large and important place. Population about 1,000. SAHARANPUR : A town in the province of Delhi, Northern India, 90 miles north- east from the city of Delhi, and 130 south- east from Lodiana. Its elevation above the sea is 1,073 feet. It is a large town, and many of the houses are built of brick. The Presbyterian Board (American) have a sta- tion here. SALULUA : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society, on the Island of Savaii, one of the Samoan group. SALEM : Chief town of a district of the same name, in the province of Mysore, India : a station of the London Missionary Society. Also, a station of the Wesleyau Missionary Society in South Africa, and of the United Brethren in Surinam. SALUAFATA : A station of the London Missionary Society, on the Island of Upolu. SALONJCA : {See Tkessalonica.) SAMANA: A station of the Wesleyan Society in Hayti. SAMARANG: A town and seaport on the north coast of the Island of Java, near the mouth of a river of the savne name, 240 miles east south-east from Batavia. Popu- lation about 20,000. A station of the Bap- tist Missionary Society. SAMOA : A group of Islands in the South Pacific, between 10" and 20° S. lat. and 169" and 174" W. longitude, sometimes called Navigators' Islands, 8 in number, viz., Man- ua, Orosenga, Ofu, Tutuila, Upolu, Manono, Aborima, and Savaii. Population, 160.000. The London Missionary Society have a mis- sion here. (See South Sea Islands.) SANDOWAY : A station of the Ameri- can Baptist Union in Arracan. SANGEER ISLANDS: A group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archipelago. SANDALWOOD ISLAND : One of the lesser Sunda Islands, in the Indian Archi- pelago. SANDWICH ISLANDS : The Sandwich Islands, situated in the North Pacific Ocean about 20° N. lat. and 160° W. lono- were discovered by Capt. Cook in 177^8.' They consist of a group of twelve volcanic islands, (three or four of which are merely uninhabited rocks.) standing quite by them- selves, and of very considerable commercial importance. Hawaii is the largest, but Oahii, more central in the group, and hav- ing a good harbor, is the seat of government SANDWICH ISLANDS. 640 and the commercial centre. The islands are estimated to contain something more than 6,000 square miles. The face of the country is greatly diversified with hills and plains, secluded valleys, deep ravines, lofty moun- tains, and craters of immense volcanoes. In the elevated interior of the Islands the cli- mate is cool. Rains are frequent in the in- terior and on the windward side, and vege- tation in many parts luxuriant; but the low lands of the leeward side of the islands are mostly dry and barren. The native inhab- itants belong to the same race with those of most of the more easterly islands in the Pa- cific. Population. — The population was esti- mated by Capt. Cook at 400,000; an esti- mate, doubtless, greatly too large ; though, from various causes, the people have been rapidly wasting away since his visit. About 1840, a census not fully to be relied upon, showed the population to be not far from 108,000. Social, Bloral, and Religious Condition of tlte People. — Before missionary operations commenced, the people were, if not in the lowest state of barbarism in which men are ever found, yet certainly in a very low state of intellectual, social, and moral de- basement. "With no written language, with no comfortable dwellings, with very little clothing, with the family constitution in ruins, unmitigated licentiousness universal, and every vile passion indulged without re- straint ; the people " a nation of drunkards," with no laws or courts of justice. " Society was a dead sea of pollution, and many ships visiting the islands were floating exhibitions of Sodom and Gomorrah." The government was wholly arbitrary ; the kings and chiefs were considered owners of the soil, and the people were slaves, with their property and their lives subject to the will of those above them. The people of all ranks were much under the influence of superstitious fears, and their religion, in connection with the cruel rites of idol worship, was in a great measure a tabu system ; i. e., a system of re- ligious prohibitions and consecrations, which had extended itself very widely, and had be- come exceedingly burdensome under the di- rection of priests and kings who used the fiystem to accomplish their own purposes. MISSION. American Board. — Just as American Christians were beginning to direct their at- tention to the work of Christianizing hea- then nations, two youths from the Sandwich Islands, Opukahaia (Obookiah) and Hopu, came in an American vessel to the United States. They came from " a boys' notion," but the hand of God was in it. Landing at New York in 1809, they accompanied the captain of the vessel to New Haven, Conn., and soon attracted the notice and Christian sympathy of some of the students of Yale College, who began to give them instruction. In 1816, they, with several others from the Sandwich Islands, and others from various portions of the heathen world, were gathered into a "mission school" at Cornwall, Conn. Opukahaia, having become hopefully a Chris- tian, expressed deep sympathy for his hea- then relations and nation, and a strong wish that they might be evangelized. He, how- ever, was not permitted to engage personally in the work of preaching to them the Gospel, as he ardently desired to do. He died in Feb., 1818, before arrangements were made for sending a mission to the Islands. But he had not lived in vain. Extensive interest had been awakened, and it had become ob- vious that Christian missionaries would soon be sent to his kindred according to the flesh. In the summer of 1819, Hiram Bingham and Asa Thurston, students in the theologi- cal seminary at Andover, offered themselves to the American Board for this service. They were ordained at Goslien, Conn., Sept. 19. Others offered themselves as assistant missionaries ; a mission church was organized in the vestry of Park Street church, Boston, Oct. 15th. The public instructions of the Prudential Committee were given by the Secretary, Rev. Dr. "Worcester, at Park Street, the same evening, and oil the 23d of the same month, (Oct. 1819,) the company sailed from Boston in the Brig Thaddeus, Capt. Blanchard. Besides the two ordained mis- sionaries and their wives, there were, as members of the mission, Mr. Daniel Cham- berlain, farmer, Dr. Thomas Holman, physi- cian, Mr. Samuel Whitney, mechanic and teacher, Mr. Samuel Ruggles, cateohist, and Mr. Elisha Loomis, printer and teacher, with their wives, and John Honoree, Thomas Ho- pu, and "William Tennooe, natives of the Is- lands who had been educated at Cornwall ; in all, 17. George Tamoree, a son of one of the Island chiefs, who had also been educated at Cornwall, returned in the same vessel, but not as a member of the mission. It may be stated here that some of these natives of the Islands did not render all that assistance which it was hoped would be derived from them in the operations of the mission. They exhibited neither the intelligence nor the sta- bility of character needed in teachers. Hopu, however, acquired the epithet of "the faith- ful," and Honoree appears to have been la- borious and useful ; but Tennooe rapidly fell into the immoral practices of his countrymen, and was excluded from the church in 1820. The mission was also yet more deeply pained by the unchristian conduct of Dr. Holman, who was excommunicated in January, 1821. In the instructions given to this band of missionaries, who were going, emphatically, to one of the " dark places of the earth," 050 SASD'iv:c:: islands. they were directed "to aim at nothing short of covering those islands with fruitful fields and pleasant dwellings, and schools and churches, and raising up the whole people to an ele- vated state of Christian civilization;" "to introduce, and get into extended operation and influence among them, the arts, institu- tions and usages of civilized life and soci- ety ;" but, " above all, to convert them from their idolatries, superstitions and vices, to the living God." They were going to do a great work, and God, who had prepared the way for their being sent, was also preparing the way for their reception and for their success. Preparation for the Mission at the Islands. — One of the most important of that series of events by which the Sandwich Islands were prepared to be a field of most success- ful missionary operations, was the subjuga- tion of the different islands about the com- mencement of the present century, and the union of all under one government. Several distinct petty kingdoms had previously pre- sented a scene of uninterrupted jealousy, contention, and savage warfare ; but now Kamehameha, of Hawaii, a man of great phy- sical strength and mental energy, and of man}' excellent qualities as a ruler, had sub- dued all the other kingdoms. There was one government only. What was permitted in one island would be likely to be permitted in all, and any changes which might take place in customs, religion, or laws, would readily become universal changes. Capt. Vancouver, who visited the Islands several times, in 1792, '93, and '94, gave the king much good advice, as well as some val- uable presents ; and before leaving, is re- ported to have said to him: ''There is a God above in heaven, and if you desire to wor- ship him, when I return to England I will entreat his majesty to appoint for you a clergyman ; and when he comes you must renounce your tabu system, which is false, — there are no earthly deities." Kamehameha died May 8, 1819, a few months before the missionaries sailed from Boston. On his death-bed, he requested an American, who was present, to tell him about the religion of the Bible and the Christian's God. He obtained, however, no information, and died without the knowledge which he sought, leav- ing his son, Liholiho, Kamehameha II., to succeed him. Almost immediately, under Liholiho, an- other event occurred, of great importance in the way of preparation for the Gospel : — the renunciation of the tabu system and the old idolatry. Kamehameha is said to have spo- ken to his chiefs, during his last sickness, of throwing oS the restraints of tabu when he should recover. The testimony of foreigners residing at the islands had been often given against the system. They had also some- times allured the people to acts which were violations of tabu, and as no harm had fol- lowed, — as the gods did not punish by death or in any other way, — the force of supersti- tious fears were lessened. The restrictions of tabu were unnumbered, and often of the most oppressive character, bearing, in many things, as heavily upon the chiefs as upon the common people, so that many motives would urge to its violation. The chiefs pre- sent at the death of the king are said to have requested Kaahumanu, the one of his wives who was specially looked to for direc- tion, to suffer that occasion to be taken for disregarding all former ceremonies, and re- nouncing tabu. Kaahumanu however, did not consent, but the license and intemperance which followed the king's death, helped the matter forward. That very day, many of the common people and a few chiefs ate, males and females together, a thing prohibit- ed on pain of death, and a few days after, most of the female chiefs partook of pro- hibitsd food. Superstitious fears were grad- ually swept away. Kaahumanu advised the king, on the day of his coronation : " Let us henceforth disregard the restraints of tabu," and within a short time, the dissolute Liho- liho, first in the midst of drunken revels, ate, drank, and smoked with female chiefs. The people raised the cry, "The king has violated tabu, there is no longer any re- straint." Some, however, still resisted. One chief, encouraged by the priests, raised the standard of rebellion in support of the old idolatry ; but he was subdued, — " the army with idols was weak, the army with- out idols was victorious," — and the work was done ; the islands were without a reli- gion, waiting for God's law. The people demolished the temples of the false gods that had enthralled them, and treated their idols with contempt, throwing some into the sea, and some into the fire. God had brought about events before the missionaries reached the Islands, which they could hardly have supposed it possible that they should witness until after years of toil. Arrival and reception of the missionaries ; first stations and labors. — The missionaries welcomed their first view of the mountains of Hawaii on the 30th of March, 1820, and entered the harbor of Kailua on the 4th of April, only a short time after the decisive battle which had subdued the party support- ing idolatry, and near the scene of that bat- tle. They had already received intelligence, from some of tlie ship's company who had landed with a boat, of the surprising and encouraging revolution which had been ef- fected ; but how they would be received they could not tell. Tlie missionary company were introduced to the king, (who was then at Kailua, with many of the chiefs,) gave him the presents and the letter from the SANDWICH ISLANDS. 651 Secretary of the Board, which were designed for his father, and requested permission to remain and establish themselves as teachers, on different islands. They were received with respect ; but an answer to their pro- posal was not given until after a discussion of several days. One diflBculty was that Vancouver had encouraged Kamehameha to look for teachers from England, and thoy doubted whether they ought to receive those who were from another country ; but John Young, an Englishman residing at the islands, and who had been recommended to their confidence by Vancouver, assured them that missionaries from America were the same as missionaries from England. On the 8th of April, permission was given for them all to remain one year at Kailua. They, however, thought it better that a part of their number should go to Oahu, and on the 11th the king consented to this. On the 12th, Mr. Thurs- ton, Dr. Holman, Tennooe, and Hopu were landed at Kailua, and the Thaddeus sailed with the rest of the company for Honolulu, on Oahu. Early in May the Thaddeus sailed for Kauai, to return George Tamoree to his father, and Messrs. Whitney and Ruggles ac- companied him. The old chief received his son with great joy and urged the missionary laborers who were with him to remain. After spending some weeks, and satisfying themselves that a favorable opening was presented there, they returned to Honolulu to consult with their brethren, and in July were stationed at Kauai. Thus three sta- tions were commenced by the first band of laborers, on three of the largest islands, Hawaii the most south-easterly, Kauai the most north-westerly, and Oahu, central, and commercially the most important of the group. After establishing themselves in thatched native huts of a single room, without floor, ceiling or fixtures, and with simple openings for doors and windows, one of the first ef- forts of the missionaries was to collect schools, composed both oi children and adults. The king, the chiefs, and the mem- bers of their families were the first pupils. As the native language had never been re- duced to writing, instruction was of neces- sity confined to the English, and the difficul- ties were great. Much interest however was awakened among the learners, though with most it soon abated. "Within three months, the king could read, and within six months several of the chiefs could both read and write. In November of this year the mis- sion reported 4 distinct schools with 90 pupils, of different ages and rank. Religious services of different kinds, and Sabbath schools were also at once established, and within a few months some of the missiona- aries were addressing the people on religious subjects in their own language, imperfectly used of course. After residing about three months at Kailua, Mr. Thurston preached a formal sermon to the royal family, using Hopu as an interpreter, from the words, " I have a message from God unto thee." His little audience kneeled in prayer before Je- hovah. Obstacles. — Wonderfully as God had pre- pared the way before tlje missionaries, it yet could not be otherwise than that they should find themselves compassed with difficulties and met by many and sore trials in their ef- forts to evangelize a people so degraded. There was the difBculty of communicating with the people, and when the language was learned so as to be spoken, there was still the want of a written language, and of books ; and there was the poverty of the language, especially its want of terms which would express correctly the sentiments and doctrines of a pure religion. But far more than all this there was the intellectual and the moral debasement of the people, which they themselves well termed their '■ dark- heartedness." When the missionaries first looked upon the degradation and barbarism of the half naked, lewd, and chattering sav- ages as they came about the ship in their canoes, some turned away from the sight with shrinking and with tears, and others were ready to ask, " Can these be human beings ? can they be civilized and Christian- ized 1 and can we take up our abode for life with such a people ?" But as if the character and the condition of the natives did not present obstacles enough to the successful prosecution of the holy work for which these Christian laborers had come, foreign residents at the islands, from Christian lands, must bring in also, not only all their vices, but their decided oppo- sition. Most of the foreigners then at the island, were sailors of the "baser sort," some of whom had been put on shore by masters of vessels, and some were deserters. Such men, removed from all the restraints of , a Christian land and shut out almost entirely from the observation of the virtuous, lived in open and unblushing vice, as vile as the heathen about them, and much more capable of successfully opposing missionary effort. There were some foreigners of a better class, among traders and commercial agents, from whom the missionaries received, more or less, both of kind attention and of encouragement " in their work ; but for many years, the great body both of foreign residents, and of sea- faring men visiting the islands, exerted a most pernicious influence, and were a source of constant and most painful trial to the Christian laborers. Nearly all the foreigners at Kailua, when the missionaries first arrived, used their influence lo induce the king and chiefs to send them away, asserting, among other things, that they would soon make war 652 SANDWICH ISLANDS. upon them and take away their lands. Here the presence of missionary ladies was found to be of great service. " If they had come to make war would they have brought their delicate wives V said the chiefs. Foiled in their efforts to prevent the landing of the missionaries, they looked forward to the end of the year for which they had obtained per- mission to remain, hoping then to secure their banishment. But in this also they were wholly unsuccessful. Before the year expired the chiefs had become satisfied in ■regard to the character and the objects of their teachers, and instead of sending them away were requesting them to send for more. Reinforcements. — To sustain and carry for- ward the effort to Christianize the islands, additional laborers have been sent from time to time. The table below will show at one view the number of laborers of different clas^ses who have gone from the United States (not including natives of the islands) and the date of their arrival at the islands. In regard to female helpers the table is not quite full, 76 in all having been sent, nine of whom went out unmarried. *« ■s OD St ^ ■g-s ■rs ■s s an ■§■1 || °A |S Sm 1820 8 4 7 182.3 5 2 7 1828 4 2 10 1831 3 1 4 1832 8 2 9 1833 2 1 2 1835 1 2 6 1837 6 10 17 1841 3 1 4 1842 2 1 2 1844 4 3 1848 2 1 1849 1 1 42 27 72 Of the laymen sent, seven have been phy- sicians, and two have been employed specially in managing the secular affairs of the mis- sion. In April, 1822, Rev. Wm. Ellis, an English missionary at the Society Islands, came to Honolulu with Messrs. Tyerman and Benuet, designing to go from there to estab- lish a mission at the Marquesas Islands. Prevented from going as he had expected to do, and finding that he could be very useful at the Sandwich Islands in connection with the American missionaries, ho was induced to remain, and cooperated with affectionate harmony in the labors of the mission until obliged by the illness of Mrs. Ellis, to leave for England in the autumn of 1824. Position and influence of the Chiefs. — In order to understand correctly many of the facts connected with the history of this mis- sion, the relative position of the chiefs and the common people must be borne in mind. The inhabitants of the Islands were " chiefs and slaves," with a wide distance between the two classes. The king was supreme, and his word was law, not only in civil, but in religious and all other matters ; and the chiefs also were regarded by the people generally with superstitious reverence and awe, as something more than mortal. They were accustomed, not to suggest and advise, but to direct ; and their wishes, or advice, had all the force of a command. The peo- ple were accustomed to obey, and to look to the chiefs for direction. Hence, in the esti- mation of both chiefs and people, if any change was to be introduced in laws, cus- toms, or religion, the chiefs must take the lead. When the missionaries came, the king and chiefs were not willing that the common fCeople should be taught to read till they had first learned, and when some of the lower chiefs and the common people began to think favorably of the new religion, they consider- ed it out of place for them first to make any public profession ; they must wait " for the king to turn." From this state of things there resulted a kind of necessity for paying much attention to the higher classes, endea- voring to secure from them attention to schools and preaching, and such a sanctioning of the instruction given as would at least be regarded by the people as permitting them to follow it. From the same cause, when chiefs of the highest rank did express their wish that the people would learn to read, or would attend on preaching, the wish was at once regarded ; when they desired the peo- ple to build school-houses, or houses of wor- ship, it was done without hesitation, and when they publicly professed their faith in Christ, thousands of the people would read- ily have done the same at once. It was not easy to keep church and state distinct, where civil and religious matters had always been united, and not always easy for either chiefs or people to perceive the difference between permitting a suitable religious liberty, and suffering an entirely unsuitable disobedience to civil rulers. In this connection it should be distinctly stated, to the honor of both the missionaries and the chiefs, that discipline in the churches has been administered with impartiality. In 1835 a sister of the king was excommuni- cated, and one of the older missionaries writes in 1847 : '' High chiefs have been dis- ciplined as abundantly as any class of mem- bers in our churches, and they are vastly more docile under discipline than crooked elders, deacons, and gentlemen of high stand- ing in the .United States." First Four Years of Missionary Labor. — The reception which the missionaries met a,t the islands, the first stations taken, and the first efforts to reach the people, have been mentioned. The royal family left Kailua, SAJSfDWICH ISLANDS. 653 Hawaii, towards the close of the year 1820, and early in 1821 went to Honolulu, on Oahu. Such was now the state of things at Kailua that the mission family was no longer con- sidered safe at that place, and they also re- moved to Honolulu in Dec, 1820, and Ha- waii was left without missionary lahor until Nov., 1823, when Kailua was again occupied, and the next year two other stations were taken on the island. The interest at first felt by chiefs and others in learning to read in English, somewhat abated as the novelty wore awa}', and in Dec, 1821, there were but about 65 pupils. In the mean time, the missionaries had given themselves diligently to the difficult task of learning the native language and reducing it to writing, and on the first Jlonday in January, 1822, the first sheet was printed in the Hawaiian language containing the first eight pages of a Ha- waiian spelling-book. (Owing to the ex- treme difficulty of ascertaining the exact sounds of a language never before written, and the best modes of expressing such sounds, six months elapsed before the second sheet was struck off.) This introduction of printing awakened much interest, and gave at once a new im- pulse to schools. Several of the chiefs un- dertook in earnest to learn to read and write their own language. The king resumed his studies in August, and on the 16th of the month he wrote a letter, in a fair, legible hand, to one of the chiefs of the Society Islands. Kaahumanu and others of the highest chiefs followed the example of the king, and in September, the number of per- sons under instruction was estimated at 500. Religious instruction began to be given to much better advantage. The spelling-book contained easy but important sentences of Christian truth. The missionaries could in some measure dispense with the aid of in- terpreters in preaching. Mr. Ellis, who had joined them, could readily make himself un- derstood in the Hawaiian tongue, and some natives of the Society Islands who had ac- companied him, could very soon pray and converse with the Sandwich Islanders .in their own language. Many of the people listened with interest to the Gospel, but "waited for the king to turn." The conduct of the king, Liholiho, was one of the greatest obstacles with which the missionaries were called to contend. He was friendly to the mission, had sometimes applied himself with characteristic energy to learning to read and write ; advised others to learn ; regretted that he had not more perseverance ; and showed no resentment when reproved by the missionaries for his vices. But he was young, reckless and profligate ; was naturally daring, and when partially intoxicated was ready for any ad- venture ; and a portion of the foreign resi- dents, taking advantage of his weaknesses, made assiduous and persevering efforts to keep him from the influence of the Gospel. Even in the place of worship, means were used to divert his thoughts ; and to prevent his attendance on preaching, he was more than once artfully seduced into intoxication, against his own deliberate resolutions. While some foreigners thus endeavored to seduce the king, and many complained that the preaching, which was regularly main- tained, was too severe against sin and sin- ners, others approved the preaching and sus- tained the preachers. Chiefly at the ex- pense of foreign residents, a grass house of worship was erected at Honolulu, in 1821, 54 feet by 22, and calculated to hold 200 hearers. On the 15th of September, it was publicly dedicated to the service of God. The missionaries were much encouraged and aided in their work in 1832, by the visil of Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet, who had been sent by the London Missionary Soci- ety to visit their missions in the Pacifi". They came with Captain Kent, who had ia charge a small schooner as a, present from the king of Great Britain to the king of the Sandwich Islands, and their testimony in favor of the missionaries, as well as the tes- timony of natives of the Society Islands who were with them, as to the happy results of missionary labor in those islands, was of great service. It was specially of service, and providentially timely, from the fact that foreigners, among other efforts to prevent the success of the missionaries, and, if possi- ble, to secure their banishment, had en- deavored to persuade the king and chiefs that the English government would be dis- pleased if they tolerated the residence of American teachers. Here now were men from England, coming at the same time with the ship which Vancouver had long before encouraged Kamehameha to look for as a present from the king of England, strongly commending the missionaries to the confi- dence of the king, and urging attention to their instructions. The falsehood and base- ness of the opposers was made clear. The commander of a Russian exploring squadron had previously, in Dec. 1821, heartily com- mended the missionaries, sending from him- self and his officers a generous donation to aid them in their work. In August, 1822, the first Christian mai-- riage, that of Thomas Hopu, took place at the islands ; and in October, 1823, two chiefs of high rank, at their own request, were publicly, at the house of God, on the Sab- bath, " like the people of Jesus Christ, joined together as man and wife." The first Chris- tian burial was that of a son of Mr. Bing- ham, Jan. 1,9th, 1823. The services were attended by the king and his principal chiefs. A few days after, a relative of Liholiho, G54 SANDWICH ISLANDS. ■whom lie called sister, died at Honolulu, and at his request her funeral was conducted with similar Christian services. In Febru- ary of this year, the chiefs held a consulta- tion respecting the Christian Sabbath, and a crier was sent around at Honolulu, proclaim- ing a law enjoining its observance. May 31, 1823, a station was taken at La- haina, on the island of Maui, at the request of Keopuolani, the mother of the king, and the highest chief of the islands, who was going to that place to reside. "She inter- ested herself as a mother in seeing the mis- sionaries comfortably located," and exerted her great influence to induce the people to respect them, and listen to their instructions. A house of worship " of ordinary structure and frail material" was soon erected there, and dedicated on the 24th of August ; and in Dec, a house was dedicated also at Kai- lua, where labors had now been resumed. Keopuolani was the first native baptized at the Islands. She lived but a few months after the station was taken at Lahaina, in which she felt so deep an interest. Previ- ous to her last sickness, she had given evi- dence of conversion; during that sickness the evidence constantly brightened, and at her request she received baptism a short time before her death, which occurred on the 1 6th of September. She had given strict injunctions that no heathen customs should follow her death or attend her funeral, and her injunctions were in good measure regard- ed ; though, but a short time before, the death of such a chief would have been fol- lowed, not only by horrid rites, but by a scene of universal licentiousness and pillage. It was expected now. Many natives fled to the mountains, and foreigners prepared to take refuge on board the ships, advising the missionaries to do the same. "But not a human victim was slaughtered ; not a hamlet wad burned, not a house was pillaged." Thus had the mother of the king given her testi- mony and the influence of her example, in life and in death, in favor of the missionary work, and thus was it made apparent that already much good had been accomplished. Regency of Kaahumanu. — On the 27th of November, 1823, the king embarked for England, prompted, probably, more by curi- osity and a restless, roving disposition, than by any better motive. He was accompanied by his favorite wife, several chiefs, and a Frenchman named John Bives. They reach- ed London in May, 1824, received some at- tention from statesmen, and visited places of amusement, but saw little of religious society. Within a few weeks, the king and queen wore both attacked with measles, and both died in July. Before sailing, Liholiho had nominated his young brother as his successor, in case he should not return, and left the government in the hands of Kaahumanu, the favorite wife of the conqueror Kamehameha, and by his appointment the prime minister of Liho- liho. Kaahumanu was a woman of much energy, decision, and strength of character ; and though haughty and disdainful, and sometimes tyrannical and cruel, was in many respects well fitted for the emergency in which she was placed. Her prime minis- ter, not associate regent, was Kalanimoku. At this time she stood entirely aloof from religious influence, and looked down upon the missionaries with contempt; but she soon gave evidence of a great change of char- acter, and in December, 1825, she became a member of the church, with several other persons of rank. Six months before, she, with others, had made a public declaration of faith in Christ and desire to join his peo- ple. From the time of her hopeful conver- sion, this remarkable woman became warm in her attachment to the missionaries ; and in the administration of the government she manifested a strong desire to promote the good of the people. In a female prayer- meeting at Honolulu, she expressed her feel- ings with earnestness and tears. Nor was she content to speak alone. While giving strict attention to all the affairs of govern- ment, she began at once the work of " visit- ing every island of the group, and almost every village of each island ; encouraging schools, introducing improvements, and ex- horting the people to forsake their many vices, and cleave to the pure religion which had been brought to their shores." The effect was very great. Not the king, indeed, but the regent, had turned. Liholiho had issued his proclamation against various crimes and vices, and in favor of the Sabbath, with little effect comparatively, for his example did not show him to be sincere. Kaahumanu gave to her proclamations and instructions the force of her own consistent example, and made it evident that she was deeply in ear- nest. A great change among the people was the immediate result, at least in outward de- portment, and the way was in some measure prepared for a true reformation of character. The regent was not alone among the chiefs in such efforts to do good. Several others, of much influence, were already, hopefully, true Christians, and still others gave their support to the labors of the mission. In- deed, as early as April, 1824, just as the printing of 3,000 copies of elementary les- sons in reading and spelling was finished, the principal chiefs had called a meeting of the people of Oahu, to proclaim, in a formal manner, their united resolution to receive instruction themselves, to observe the Sab- bath, worship God, and obey his law, and to promote true knowledge among the peo- ple. After a public examination of the schools, Kaahumanu felocted some of the SANDWICH ISLANDS. C55 most forward of the pupils to teach in other districts, and before the end of the year 1824, 50 natives were thus employed as teachers, and at least 2,000 persons were said to have learned to read ; but both the teach- ing and the learning were, of course, in most cases, of a very imperfect kind. This was the commencement of a kind of native school system which rapidly extended it- self, and continued in operation without very much change, for eight or ten years. Na- tive houses were built for the purpose by direction of the chiefs, and large numbers of the people, a great majority being adults, were collected in what were called schools, and taught to read, and in many instances to write their own language, by native teach- ers who themselves knew, in most instances, " this much, no more." But defective as these schools were, they were much better than nothing, and they were all that could then be had. In 1831 there were reported 1100 schools, with near 53,000 learners, at least one-third of whom could read with a good degree of ease, many could write, and a few had some knowledge of arithmetic. Kapiolani. — Mention should here be made of another " honorable woman" — Kapiolani, of the island of Hawaii. A woman of high rank and of great influence, she united with the church about the same time with Kaa- humanu, and, like her, made it her great busi- ness to induce the people to attend to the instructions, of the missionaries. Like her, she made frequent extensive tours among the people, exhorting them to forsake their sins, and destroying every vestige of idolatry. She became, also, a pattern to the people in civilization. " She built a large framed house, enclosed a yard, and cultivated flow- ers, and in her dress, manners, and mode of living appeared more like a Christian lady than any other high-born native of her day." In December, 1824, that she might more effectually destroy from among the people any remaining fear of old divinities, she de- termined to visit the great crater of Kilaua, the reputed residence of Pele. The whole mountain was a dreaded place. Its fire and smoke, its frequent mutterings, and occa- sional desolating eruptions, served to keep alive the superstitious dread. Clinging even to the feet of their chief, the people besought her, with tears, not to go. Before reaching the crater, she was met by a pretended priestess, wild with rage, who warned her to desist. But her purpose was fixed. With calm dignity rebuking the pretensions of the prophetess, she had her soon hum- bled and calm, saying that the god had left her, and she could not answer. Accompa- nied by one of the missionaries^ and b}' some trembling native attendants, she descended into the crater, and standing upon a ledge 500 feet below the top, with the lake of mol- ten flre before her, she cast stones into the fiery gulf, ate the sacred berries consecrated to Pele, and called upon one of her attend- ants to offer prayer and praise to the one true God. The rock did not open under her feet ; the hissing and bellowing gases did not destroy her, and the boiling lava did not rise to consume her. The people felt that Pele was powerless, and Jehovah was God. Visit of the British frigate Blonde, Lord Byron. — While the influence of honored chiefs, whose hearts God had touched, was thus doing much to turn the tide of feeling in favor of Christianity, another event oc- curred, of much importance, tending to the same result. The frigate Blonde, command- ed by Lord Byron, which had been sent from England with the remains of Liholiho and the queen, and with the few survivors of tftie natives who had attended them, reached Honolulu on the 7th of May, 1824. At first there was a burst of tumultuous feeling, but the strength of heathenism was broken, and Christian services took the place of cruel pagan rites. In the evening, the crowd at- tended at the chapel, to engage in religious services. At the close of the meeting, Baki, the chief of highest rank who had returned from England, made some report of what he had seen in a Christian country : of the in- fluence of the Christian religion, as he sup- posed, in giving so much wealth and power, and of what the king of England had said, urging that the people should attend to the instructions of the missionaries. Lord By- ron, during his stay of two months at the islands, showed himself the decided friend of the mission, thus adding the weight of his influence to increase the favor with which the Gospel and the American teachers were beginning now to be received. On the 6th of June a council of the chiefs was held, to fix the succession in a formal manner. Lord Byron attended, and aided by his ad- vice. Everything was conducted in an ami- cable and Christian manner, the rightful claims of Kamikeaouli, the J'oung brother of Liholiho, about nine years of age, were fully admitted, and it was resolved to acknow- ledge and sustain him. Kaahumanu was still to act as regent during his j-outh, and he was to be put, for a time, under the in- struction of the missionaries. It was gen- erally felt by the chiefs and the people that here was a triumph of the Gospel of peace, since, had it not been for the influence of the Gospel, that mere boy could never have been king. Various circumstances thus combined to give strength to the religious influence of the regent. The Spirit of God, which had changed the hearts of chiefs, was present also with the people, and some from time to time gave pleasing evidence of a saving change. The mission having been reinforced, C56 SANDWICH ISLANDS. more stations had been taken ; more houses of worship were erected, and large numbers attended upon preaching, while schools of some sort, were established at almost every village throughout the group of islands. " Things as they were in the days of Kaa- humanu," has long been a phrase well under- stood at the islands. Opposition from foreigners — Whale Ship Daniel. — But all was not bright. "Well would it have been if all foreign vessels had exerted as good an influence as the Blonde and her commander. But the commanders and the crews of merchant vessels, and sometimes also of vessels belonging to the navies of the United States and of Great Britain, as well as of France, have disgraced themselves, while they have thrown the most serious obstacles in the way of mis- sionary effort at these as well as at other is- lands. On the 3d of Oct. 1825, the English whale ship Daniel, Capt. Buckle, came to anchor at Lahaina. The crew soon found that a change had taken place since their former visit to the islands. A law of the chiefs had gone into operation, forbidding females to visit ships for immoral purposes ; and instead of the throng of native females which they had expected to see, not one ap- proached the vessel. Suspecting the cause, they cursed the missionaries, and clenching their fists, declared that they would have re- venge ; and in spite of missionaries, and chiefs, and laws, they would ^ have the liber- ties of former j^ears. On the evening of the 5th some of the crew came to the house of Mr. Richards, the missionary, insisting that he should exert his influence to have the law repealed, and threatening destruction to his property, his life, and his family if he re- fused. He firmly told them that he would die rather than give any countenance to such vile demands, and his wife, in feeble health, and with her helpless little children around her, assured them of her readiness to share the fate of her husband in such a cause. The men at last withdrew, and the house was guarded through the night by natives. The next day Mr. Richards wrote to the com- manders of some American vessels, who took no notice of his letter. He wrote also to Capt. Buckle, asking him to control his men, but he replied that the men were all on shore determined not to return without wo- men, and Mr. Richards had better give his consent, when all would be quiet. On the next day the men again landed, and, having a black flag and armed with knives, they presented themselves before the mission- house to the number of about forty, de- manding, with oaths and execrations, that Mr. Richards should not resist their purpose. The chiefs, who had exercised all forbear- ance, and bad at first sent natives armed only with clubs to defend the mission family, satisfied that milder measures would not answer, at length called out a company of two hundred men armed with muskets and spears. The mob was compelled to retire, the law was sustained, and quiet restored. From Lahaina the ship went to Honolulu, where, aided by American sailors, the crew engaged in similar outrages. Schooner Dolphin. — The crews of whalo ships were not to be left alone in the unen- viable notoriety secured by such proceed- ings. The armed schooner Dolphin, of the United States navy. Lieutenant Peroival commander, came to Honolulu Jan. 14th, 1826, when the law against females visiting ships had been in operation about three months. The ten commandments also had been translated and printed in the Hawaiian language, and the chiefs had adopted them as a basis of law and government. The mis- sionaries had been instructed, as are all mis- sionaries of the Board, to abstain from inter- meddling with the affairs of civil govern- ment, that they might give rulers no occa- sion for jealousy, and unreasonable men no grounds for finding fault, and they had so abstained. It was obvious however that the religious instruction which they had im- parted had given the chiefs new views of right and duty, and had in this way led to the enacting of such laws ; and foreigners who did themselves intermeddle, in the most objectionable way, accused the missionaries of intermeddling and dictating laws, which were to them offensive. Even the English and American consuls violently opposed some of the new laws, recommending a code which should prohibit nothing but murder, treason and theft. They even went to tlie young king and told him that the regent and chiefs had no right to make laws, but that the right belonged to him alone. When the Dolphin arrived, her commander at once manifested his sympathy for those who were thus endeavoring to prevent improvement in the morals of the people, and in the laws ; at least any improvement which should in- terfere with their vices. He expressed his disapprobation of the law which kept females from going to the ships for purposes of in- famy, and insisted upon the release of four prostitutes then in custody for a violation of the law. Imputing its existence to the in- fluence of the missionaries, he threatened violence against their houses and their per- sons if it were not repealed. The chiefs be- came alarmed, and repeatedly inquired of the missionaries what would be the duty of the people in case such threats were put in exe- cution. They were assured that the com- mander would not venture to injure them, as he was responsible to the United States Government, and when they still pressed the inquiry, " What shall we do in case your houses are attacked ?" they were exhorted SANDWICH ISLANDS. 65T in no case to resort to violence in their de- fence. On the afternoon of the Sabbath, Feb. 26, when Mr. Bingham and several of the chiefs were collected for religious -worship around the sick bed of the minister, Kalan- imoku, six or seven sailors from the Dolphin, armed with knives and clubs, entered the room and demanded the repeal of the law, threatening to tear down the house if it were not repealed. After a scene of confusion, during which they broke all the windows in the front of the house, they were con- strained to retire, when they directed their course towards the house of Mr. Bingham The missionary, alarmed for his family, at tempted to reach his house before them by another way, but fell into ' their hands and very narrowly escaped with his life, rescued by the natives. The same evening, Lieut. Percival, instead of restraining his crew, or apologizing for the outrage, called on the chiefs, and declared that the prohibition should come off ; that he was determined not to leave the islands till the law was repealed. Kalanimoku was confined by sickness, some of the chiefs yielded to fear, and a conni- vance at a breach of the law was the result. " In the dusk of the evening ot" the next day, a boat with females passed along the harbor, and a shout arose among the shipping at the glorious victory that had been achieved." The Dolphin remained at the islands about four months, and lef*^ a most disastrous in- fluence behind, when at last, she sailed. The law was broken down for a time ; the flood- gates of vice were opened ; and irreligion and immorality had gained strength and boldness which could not be overcome at once. Similar scenes of violence and out- rage were enacted by the crews of English and American whale ships at Lahaina in Oct. 1826. A mob of such sailors went to the house of Mr. Richards with the declared intention of taking his life. He was not at home, and his house was guarded by the na- tives ; but for some days thej^ filled the place with violence, pillaging the tents of the na- tives and destroying their property. Here, however, females were not obtained. The Governor was absent, and the place was in the charge of a female chief, who directed the women to flee with her to the mountains, which they did ; all the females from a town of 4,000 native inhabitants, fleeing from the violence and lust of sailors from Christian lands ! Such are the sailors, and such the foreign residents at the Sandwich Islands, by whom so many basely false and slander- ous reports against the missionaries have been put in circulation. United States Sloop of War Peacock — Vindication of the Missionaries. — We gladly turn from such scenes to look at the honor- able conduct of a more honorable commander in the navy of our country. Within the 42 same month in which these scenes were en- acted at Lahaina, the United States sloop of war Peacock, Oapt. T. H. C. Jones, arrived at Honolulu, where it remained till January 1827. Hsaring of the proceedings of Lieut. Percival, and hearing also the many slander- ous reports against the missionaries, Oapt. Jones kept himself uncommitted, until he should be able to judge from a knowledge of the facts. About this time the mission- aries published a circular, stating the course they had pursued, and some of the good re- sults of their labors, denying the charges brought against them, and challenging inves- tigation. Opposing foreign residents, laying hold of the word '• challenge," called a meeting at which Oapt. Jones and the other oflScers of the Peacock were to be present, and a hearing was to be had. Without de- tailing the proceedings of the meeting, we- quote Oapt. Jones' own opinion of the case as he subsequently gave it to the public : — " I own, I trembled for the cause of Chris- tianity, and for the poor benighted islanders, when I saw, on the one hand the British Consul backed by the most wealthy and hitherto influential residents and ship- masters in formidable array, and prepared as: I supposed, to testify against some half a dozen meek and humble servants of the Lord, calmly seated on the other, ready and anxious to be tried by their bitterest ene- mies, who on this occasion occupied the quadruple station of judge, jury, witness, and prosecutor. Thus situated, what could the friends of the mission hope for or ex- pect 1 But what, in reality, was the result of this portentous meeting, which was to overthrow the mission, and uproot the seeds of civilization and Christianity so extensively and prosperously sown by them in every di- rection, while in their stead, heathenism and! idolatry were to ride triumphantly through, all coming time 1 Such was the object, and such were the hopes of many of the foreign residents at the Sandwich Islands in 1826. What, I again ask, was the result of this great trial 1 The most perfect, full, complete, and triumphant victory for the missionaries that could have been asked by their most de- voted friends. Not one jot or tittle — not one iota derogatory to their character as men, as ministers of the Gospel of the strictest order, or as missionaries — could be made ta appear by the united efforts of all conspired against them." Further Outrages. — In Oct., 1827, the crew of the English whale ship John Palmer, Oapt. Clark, at Lahaina, enticed several base women on board. '^loapili, the Governor of the island, demanded that they should be given up, but the Captain evaded and ridi- culed the demand, and when the Governor detained him on shore insisting that it should be complied with, he sent directions to his SANDWICH ISLANDS. crew to fire upon the town if he should not be released within an hour. He soon promised however that the women should be sent on shore if the Governor would release him, and he was released accordingly, but be- fore the crew had learned this fact they dis- charged five cannon balls, all in the direc- tion of Mr. Richard's house. The next day the Captain sailed for Honolulu, basely dis- regarding his promise to send the women on shore. At that time Capt. Buckle, of the Daniel, was again at Honolulu. The report of his conduct at Lahaina two years before had been sent to the United States and ex- tensively published, and the published ac- count had just returned to the islands. The excitement was intense. There were other captains and crews, and there were foreign residents at Honolulu, with the British Consul at their head, who sympa- thized with Capt. B. Deeds which hereto- fore they had supposed they could commit at these far off islands in darkness, were being brought to the light. The privilege of wallowing in all pollution there, and return- ing with untarnished reputations to their homes, they were likely to lose. Complaints were bitter and threatenings were loud. Some who had before sustained the mission- aries now thought Mr. Richards had done wrong in reporting the outrage. Even Boki and John Young took this ground. Kaahu- manu was for a time perplexed and troubled. She sent for the principal chiefs at Lahaina, and Mr. Richards, to repair to Honolulu, and called a Council to consider whether it would be right to give up Mr. Richards to the for- eigners, or whether it was their duty to pro- tect him. Before any decision was reached, meeting a shrewd man of the common peo- ple in whom she had confidence, David Malo, Kaahumanu asked him, " What can we do for our teacher ? for even Mr. Young and Boki say he was very guilty in writing to America." After a few remarks, David asked, " In what country is it the practice to condemn the man who gives true inform- ation of crimes committed, and let the crim- inal go uncensured and unpunished ?" " No where," she replied, and her resolution and that of the chiefs was soon taken. Mr. Richards had done no wrong ; he had told only what they all knew 1o be true, and they would protect him. The British Consul and his party saw that they were defeated, and when Mr. Richards was sent for to meet them before the Council they hastily with- drew. Letter from the President of the United States. — Before turning entirely from this kind of foreign opposition, allusion must be made to some other facts. Every effort was made to prevent the enacting and the en- forcement of wholesome laws. Especially did many foreign residents and visitors pre- tend to be themselves exempt from all obli- gation to obey the laws, and threaten the chiefs with the vengeance of their respective governments if they should be punished for violating them. The government was how- ever gradually gaining strength and confi- dence, and in 1829 a proclamation was is- sued declaring that the laws of the country forbade murder, theft, licentiousness, retail- ing ardent spirits, Sabbath-breaking and gam- bling ; and that these laws were in force equally against all residents at the islands, both foreign and native. On the 14th of October, just one week after this proclama- tion was issued, the American sloop of war Vincennes arrived at Honolulu. Her com- mander, Capt. Finch, brought presents, and a letter to the king from the President of the United States. That letter, after con- gratulating the king on the progress of civil- ization and religion in his dominions, and re- commending " earnest attention to the true religion of the Christian's Bible," proceeded to say : " The President also anxiously hopes that peace, and kindness, and justice will prevail between your people and those citi- zens of the United States who visit your is- land, and that the regulations of your gov- vernment will be such as to enforce them upon all. Our citizens who violate your laws, or interfere with your regulations violate at the same time their duty to their own government and country, and merit cen- sure and punishment." The letter also ex- pressed entire confidence in the missionaries, and bespoke protection and favor for them and for other American citizens who con- ducted with propriety. Nothing could have been more opportune. A kind Providence had sent this decided sanction by a foreign power of the course they were pursuing just at the time when it was most needed to strengthen the hands of the chiefs. Papal Missionaries— French Outrages. — It has been mentioned that John Rives, a French adventurer, left the Islands with Liholiho when he went to England. From England, Rives went to Prance, and pretend- ing to be the owner of large estates at the Island, and to have great influence with the king, he applied for priests to establish a Catholic mission. In 1826, John Alexius Augustine Bachelot was appointed, by the Pope, Apostolic Prefect of the Sandwich Islands. He arrived at Honolulu, July 7, 1827, with two other Romish priests and ! four laymen. Disregarding the law which required foreigners to obtain permission be- fore landing, the priests and thulr company landed privately. They were ordered to leave, and the captain of the vessel was told that as he had landed foreigners without per- mission, he must take them away. He, how- ever, took his departure, leaving them on shore, where they never obtained permission SANDWICH ISLANDS. 659 to reside, but remained in disregard of law. Boki, governor of Oahu, was disposed to court the favor of foreigners, and was, as early as this, manifesting some disposition to resist, or at least disregard the authority of the Regent. The priests immediately con- nected themselves particularly with his party, but even he never gave them permission to remain, which, indeed, he had no authority to do. They soon opened a chapel, and it was at once reported that they worshiped images. The young king went to see for himself, and, as he thought, found the report correct. The chiefs feared their old religion, which they knew to be bad in all its tendency, was about to be revived. English captains told them of the influence of the Papal reli- gion and Papal priests in Europe, and pre- dicted that they would work evil there if they were suffered to remain. They and their adherents continued Jo identify them- selves with the party of Boki, whose career was one of intemperance, prodigality, and at last rebellion. Collecting armed men and ammunition in different places, he threatened the life of the Regent and a revolution in the government. Fortunately, in December, 1839, he embarked on a wild expedition in search of sandal wood, and was lost at sea ; but his wife Liliha, whom he had left as governor of Oahu, continued to head the disorderly party until in 1831, when a con- spiracy seemed fast ripening, and she was de- posed from her office. In the mean time, there was mach trouble with the Papists. The priests countenanced and encouraged, in their adherents, various violations of the laws, until the natives were forbidden to attend their services, and some were punished for doing so. At length, in April, 1831, the chiefs passed a formal order, requiring these priests, whom they regarded as abettors of rebellion and promoters of vice and distur- bance, and who were residing there without authority, to leave the islands. They had borne with them almost four years, and could bear no longer. The priests, however, re- sorted to various expedients to evade obe- dience to the order, and in December the government fitted out one of its own vessels and sent them to California, with orders to the captain to "land them safe on shore, with every thing belonging to them, where they might subsist." The banishment of these priests, as well as preceding and sub- sequent proceedings against the Catholics, has often been attributed to the agency of the American missionaries ; bnt both the missionaries themselves and the Sandwich Islands government have always denied the charge, and there is ample evidence that the missionaries have decidedly discountenanced any thing which could be regarded as inter- fering with religious liberty. In September, 1836, another Papal priest came to the Islands. He was forbidden to remain ; but aided by the English Consul, who claimed a residence for him as a British subject, he evaded repeated orders to leave. In March, 1837, two of the banished priests, M. Bachelot and Mr. Short, returned from California. They designed to land secretly and conceal themselves for a time ; but they wore recognized and ordered to return on board the vessel. Refusing obedience, after much delay they were put on board by the police, where they remained, in the harbor. On the 8th of July, a British, and on the 10th, a French ship of war came into port. The captains of these vessels interfering, -an arrangement was made by which the priests were to be allowed to remain on shore until they should have opportunity to go to some other civilized country ; but in the mean time they were not to be allowed to proselyte. On the 24th of July, the French captain negotia- ted a treaty with the king, in which it was stipulated that the French should "go and come freely" at the Islands, "and enjoy the same advantages which subjects of the most favored nation enjoy." Tb's, of course, did not secure the right of teaching a prohibited religion. In October, Mr. Short left the is- lands, and in November, M. Bachelot also left, with another priest who had recently arrived, and had been refused permission to remain. On the 18th December, the govern- ment issued an ordinance forbidding the teaching " of the Pope's religion," and an- nouncing that no teacher of that religion would be allowed to reside at the islands. Some persecution of Romanists followed ; but in June, 1829, under the influence of Mr. Richards, who, at their earnest request, had become the political teacher of the king and chiefs, the king issued orders that no further punishments should be inflicted upon ad- herents of the Romish faith. About three weeks after this order was given, on the 9th of July, the French frigate L'Artemise, Capt. Laplace, came to Honolulu. A full account of the proceedings which fol- lowed cannot be given here. The captain immediately issued a manifesto, stating that he had been sent out to put an end to the ill-treatment which the French had received at the islands, and demanding, among other things, " that the Catholic worship should be declared free ;" "that a site for a Catholic Church should be given by the Government at Honolulu," and that $20,000 should be deposited with him, b}^ the king, as a guaran- tee of his future conduct towards France. These " equitable conditions " must be com- plied with, and the treaty which accompanied the manifesto must be signed at once, or he should make immediate war upon the islands. Offering protection, in case of hostilities, to English and American residents, he expressly excepted the "Protestant clergy." As the 660 SANDWICH ISLANDS. king was absent, he consented to wait for his return until the 15th, before commencing hostilities. The king not returning, the $20,000 was sent on board by the governor of Oahu, on the 13th, and the treaty was signed by the governor and the Premier. On the 16th, the king returned, and was compelled, almost at once, to sign it himself. The most offensive articles were the fourth and sixth: the fourth providing that no Frenchman accused of crime should be tried except by a jury composed of foreign resi- dents proposed by the French Consul ; and the 6th declaring that French merchandize, " and particularly wines and brandy," cannot be prohibited, and shall not pay a duty higher than five per cent., ad valorum. A law had just before been enacted to promote tem- perance, which excluded distilled spirits and imposed a heavy duty on wines. This was now eifectually repealed ; the French Consul at once engaged largely in the sale of intoxi- cating drinks, and intemperance rapidly in- creased. Of course, numbers of Papal priests soon arrived, and located themselves on dif- ferent islands of the group. It was not, however, to the advantage of Romanism that it was thus forced upon the people, and that in connection with brandy. The same word in the native language, says Mr. Hunt, now means a Frenchman, a Papist, and brandy. The priests have continued their efforts to the present time with varying suc- cess, sometimes interfering seriously with the efforts of the Protestant missionaries and of the government for the elevation of the peo- ple, especially opposing the school laws, and interfering with efforts to promote general education ; but by no means gaining the con- fidence of the better and more intelligent classes of the community. For several years their influence does not seem to have been increasing, but rather diminishing. In 1852, of 436 common schools, supported by the government, 92 were Papal, with 2,174 pupils. In September, 1842, the French sloop of war Embusoade visited Honolulu, the captain making most arrogant demands, designed to secure the more free use of French intoxi- cating liquors, and still greater facilities for propagating the Papal faith. Providentially, the king had recently sent a delegation to the court of France, to adjust all difficulties, so that he could with good reason decline negotiations with the commander, aad that without giving him a pretext for offering violence. In 1846, treaties were negotiated both with England and France, by which the government of the islands was allowed to impose any duties on wines and spirituous liquors which should not be so high as " ab- solutely to prohibit " their introduction. A duty of five dollars a gallon was imposed, against which the French Consul protested. In August, 1849, Admiral Tromelin came to Honolulu, and misled, as is believed, by M. Dillon, who had been there as Consul since February, 1848, made demands upon the government utterly unreasonable and unjust, having reference in great measure, as usual, to French spirits and the Romanists. As these demands were not complied with, he took possession of the fort, the custom house and the government of&ces by aa armed force, seized the king's yacht, which he sent away as a prize, dismantled the fort, and destroyed the aruis, powder, &c. The government abstained from all forcible re- sistance ; but the representatives of Great Britain and of the United States made a formal protest against the ungenerous pro- ceeding. To complete the series of such outrages on the part of the French, in De- cember, 1850, M. Perrin came to Honolulu as Commissioner of the French Republic, presenting demands, which were mostly a reiteration of thdse made the year before, and prepared, it is supposed, again to use force. But in the kind providence of Grod, — not by any previous arrangement or direction from home, — the United States ship Vandalia, Captain Gardner, came into port at the most critical point of the negotiation, and the im- pression that this vessel would resist any acts of violence if appealed to by the native go- vernment doubtless led the commissioner to moderate his demands, and the islands were saved, perhaps, from.such a French protector- ate as has been forced upon some other is- lands in the Pacific Ocean. Having thus presented a connected view of difficulties thrown in the way of the Ohristiauization of the islands by unprinci- pled foreigners, of the forced introduction of Roman Catholics, and the aggressions of the French, it is time to return to the days of Kaahumanu, and consider more directly the progress and results of the missionary work. Results of the first ten years of missionary labor. — A few brief statements in regard to the state of the mission, and results which had been already reached in 1830, will show that the first ten years of labor by the American missionaries had accomplished very much, over which they, and all friends of their work, might well rejoice. Not only had the language of the islands been reduced to writing, but two printing-presses were in operation at Honolulu, at which 387,000 cop- ies in a,ll, of twenty-two distinct books in the native tongue, had been printed, amount- ing to 10,287,800 pages. A large edition of the Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and John, had also been printed in the United States for the mission, swelling the whole number of pages in the Hawaiian language to 13,632,800. Most of these pages were portions of the Scriptures, or other strictly e,vangelical and most important matter. Nine hundred na- SANDWICH ISLANDS. 661 five schools, for teacMng the people to read, were in operation, and about 45,000 scholars, about 21,000 readers, and more than 3,000 writers, were reported. The government had adopted the moral law of God as the basis of its future administration, and recog- nized the Christian religion as the religion of the nation. Most of the higher chiefs and rulers were members of the church of Christ. Special laws against the grosser vices, and also against retailing ardent spirits. Sabbath breaking, and gambling, had been enacted and were enforced, and the Christian law of marriage was the law of the laud. Decent houses for public worship had been erected by the chiefs and people in very many villages. Those at the several mission stations were large : one at Kailua, 180 feet by 78, and one at Honolulu, 196 by 63. At Lahaina, the church was of stone, 98 feet long and 62 broad, with galleries ; " the most substantial and noble structure in Polynesia." It would seat 3000 persons after the native manner. The other churches were all thatched build- ings. In these houses large congregations assembled from Sabbath to Sabbath, or when the missionary could attend, to listen to the preaching of the Gospel. Churches had been gathered at different stations, to which there had been admitted 185 native members at the close of the year 1829. There were now connected with the mis- sion, 11 ordained missionaries with 3 male and 16 female associate laborers from the United States. Six stations were occupied, three on Hawaii, one on Maui, one on Oahu, and one on Kauai. A third reinforcement was about to join the mission. Death of Kaahumanu. — Reaction against Religion.— In 1827, the mission mourned the death of Kalaniraoku, the prime-miuister of Kaahumanu, often spoken of as joint regent with her, whom foreigners called Pitt, and whom the natives regarded as the " iron cable" of their country. He gave satisfac- tory evidence of preparation for a better world. On the 5th of June, 1832, Kaahu- manu also " fell asleep," and " the mission and nation mourned as for a mother." She had nominated Kinau or Kaahumanu II., a pious daughter of Kamehameha I., to be her successor, as regent, and had given affection- ate and earnest parting counsels to the young king. For a time sad reverses fol- lowed her death. Kinau, though a consistent Christian, had neither the dignity, the strength of character, nor the influence of Kaahumanu, and the king, inclined to dissi- pation and led on by vicious foreigners, broke over all restraints. Others followed his example. Many schools were deserted ; teachers relapsed into vice ; congregations on the Sabbath were reduced ; some churches were burned ; in a few places hea- then rites were revived, and opposing foreigners predicted that the missionaries would soon be banished. Early in 1833, the king assembled the chiefs and people at Hon- olulu, and declared the regency at an end. It had been said that he would remove Kinau from all authority, and appoint Liliha, the unprincipled wife of Boki, as his premier. This was hoped for and expected by the dis- solute, but when the time came he shrunk from such a step and named Kinau. When asked bj"^ his companions why he had not done as he intended, his significant reply was, " Very strong is the kingdom of God." The reverse had long been expected hy the missionaries, for religion had been too pop- ular, and sustained too much by the in- fluence of the chiefs ; but the crisis was al- ready passed when the king named Kinau as his principal agent, and the reaction in favor of vice and idolatry was but temporary and more apparent than real. Progress. — Schools. — Additions continued to be made to the mission churches from year to year, and that great care was exer- cised in receiving members must be obvious from the fact, taken in connection with the character of the people, that in 1835, of the whole number who had been received from the beginning (864) only 13 had been ex- communicated, and that though the year of reaction had passed. The character of the first native schools at the islands has been already spoken of The missionaries soon felt the great import- ance of raising the qualifications of teachers, and as early as 1830 commenced schools in various places for this purpose, which were instructed by themselves, or by females from the United States. In 1831, a seminary was commenced at Lahainaluna (Upper Lahaina) for the education of teachers and other helpers in the missionary work. The school was first opened in a mere shed made of poles and grass, but under the direction of the teacher, Jlr. Andrews, the scholars, most of whom were adults, soon began the erec- tion of a stone house, which was covered with a thatched roof in 1832. The school prospered, and its importance became more and more obvious. Another teacher was as- sociated with Mr. Andrews in 1834, and about the same time a large permanent building was commenced. In 1836 the school became more distinctively a boarding school for unmarried lads, and it has now, for many years, been regarded as one of the most important of the means in operation for supplying the Sandwich Islands with educated teachers and an educated native ministry, " sending out streams of the best influence to every part of the nation." In 1849, the support of this seminary was as- sumed by the government of the islands. A female seminary was commenced at Wailuku, on Maui, in 1837, and a boarding 663 SANDWICH ISLANDS. school for boys, at Hilo, on Hawaii, in 1839, for both of which commodious buildings have been erected. Quite a number of other boarding and high schools of similar charac- ter, some for boys and some for girls, have been in operation at the islands, accomplish- ing much good. In 1839, a family school for young chiefs was opened at Honolulu, which has been attended with much success. The expenses of this institution have been paid by the government for the last ten years. A school for the education of the children of the missionaries was commenced at Punahau, on Oahu, in 1841, which has recently re- ceived a charter from the government as a 30llegiate institution. By these various seminaries and select schools much has been done to bring forward native teachers, who are in good measure fitted for their work, and the character of the schools has greatly improved. The government of the island has assumed the support and superintend- ence of the common schools. In 1840, laws were enacted requiring parents to send their children to school, and providing for the erection of school houses, and the support of native teachers. These laws have since been revised, and increased efficiency has been given to the school system. In 1846, Mr. Richards was appointed minister of public instruction, and after his death, Mr. Arm- strong, who had been long connected with the mission, was induced, by the earnest so- licitation of the government, to take the same office. In no country probably are the children more universally collected into schools. The government expends near $50,000 annually for purposes of education ; of which between $25,000 and $30,000 is for the support of common schools. The Press — Churches — Great Revival. — The first newspaper ever issued at the is- lands was printed in February, 1834, at the Lahainaluna Seminary, " The Hawaiian Luminary." This was designed especially for the members of the seminary, but a semi-monthly paper designed for general circulation, " The Hawaiian Teacher," was commenced soon after at Honolulu, and in 1836, 3,000 copies were circulated. In 184V, five periodicals were published at the islands. Several printing-presses and a bindery are now in operation, and most of the workmen are natives. From the commencement, near 200,000,000 of pages have been printed at the mission presses. " Besides the Bible and a hymn-book, no mean library has been translated and composed, consisting of re- ligious, scientific and literary books of vari- ous kinds." As early as 1836, it began to be manifest that the churches were fully recovering from the depressing influence of the reaction which followed the death of Kaahumanu. At most of the stations there were tokens of the special presence of the Holy Spirit. In June, 1837, there were 15 churches on the islands, with 1,049 members in good stand- ing, and during the remainder of the year admissions were numerous. The churches were gaining strength and influence ; there was increasing preparation of mind among the people at large to listen to preaching, and to feel the force of truth, and about the close of the year it seemed obvious that the time had come for greater triumphs of the Gospel than had yet been witnessed. The labors of the missionaries, particularly in the way of preaching, were increased, as in- creasing feeling among the people called for more effort, and at the general meeting of the mission in June, 1848, it was found that religion had been revived at every station ; about 5,000 persons giving evidence of truo conversion, had been added to the churohe.'s since the last meeting, about 2,400 then stood propounded for admission, and many others were giving evidence of a change of heart. The work continued, — a great work of the Spirit of God, — and during the next twelve months more than 10,000 persons were added to the number of the professing followers of Christ. In June, 1840, there were 19 churches, with 18,451 members in regular standing. To suppose that all those who had been brought during the progress of this " great awakening" to give, for a time, satisfactory evidence of a saving change, would continue to give such evidence, would be to expect far more from the ignorant and degraded na- tives of these islands than is ever realized in the most enlightened Christian nations. In most cases the missionaries were very cau- tious, and candidates for church fellowship were kept many months on probation. Some indeed, were probably too cautious ; but some others erred upon the other extreme, and at some stations there began to be ex- perienced, in 1839, something of the reaction which usually follows high excitement. It is remarkable, however, that, if we except one church to which the additions were very nu- merous, it has been found necessary to ex- clude so few of the thousands who were re- ceived as the fruits of this revival. It is also remarkable that no year has passed from that time to this, during which there have not been large additions to the churches, on profession ; very few years in which the number thus added has not considerably ex- ceeded 1,000. Up to June, 1853, the whole number of those who had been admitted to the churches, on examination, from the origin of the mission, was 38,544. Of these 11,782 had deceased. The number then in regular standing was 22,236, more than one-fourth part of the whole population of the islands. Benevolence. — From the very commence- ment of the mission the chiefs and people SANDWICH ISLANDS. 6G3 have been accustomed to make efforts to provide houses of vi^orship and school houses, and sometimes also for other purposes ; and as the churches have increased, as civiliza tion has advanced, and the people have begun to rise from their utter poverty, their benev- olent efforts have greatly increased. With the great revival in 1838 and '39 there came an increase of effort worthy of notice. At the general meeting in 1839, mention was made of four large stone churches in pro- cess of erection at as many different sta- tions.. Contributions in money to the amount of more than 8,000 were reported, mostly for building churches and school houses. Four churches had contributed towards the sup port of their missionary pastors. In 1844, the subject of fully supporting their own pastors began to be agitated, and at least two of the churches resolved to undertake the work at once. Contributions to different benevolent societies commenced early, and have been greatly increased. In 1851, the whole amount of contributions reported for different objects was .§21,211, of which §5,608 was for the support of pastors, and $2,838 for the American Board of Commis- sioners for Foreign Missions. In 1852, con tributions to the Hawaiian Missionary So ciety, now an independent body, amounted to $4,981 ; and contributions to all objects exceeded $24,000. May it not be said that " their deep poverty" hath " abounded unto the riches of their liberality ?" The importance of raising up a native min- istry for the churches has long been felt by the missionaries, and has been urged upon their attention by the officers of the Amer- ican Board. But they have lieen cautious, fearing to "lay hands suddenly" on those who might not prove "faithful men." In 1842, there were but two regularly licensed native preachers, with one other, who, though not yet licensed, was entirely devoted to the work of preaching. A very considerable number, however, were employed in different villages, as a subordinate class of religious teachers. The first instance of the ordina- tion of a native as the pastor of one of the churches, occurred in December, 1849. In 1850, two others were ordained ; there were five other full}' licensed native preachers, and quite a number who had a qualified li- cense to preach at out-stations. Civilization — Government — Laws. — The Christianization of the Hawaiians has ad- vanced more rapidly than their civilization and refinement, and school education more rapidly than a knowledge of the mechanic arts. Those, however, who saw the islanders as they were in 1820, see now an advance in civilization which is truly wonderful ; and Christianity and comnion schools have laid the foundation for a raipid advance in future. In 1838, the king aivfl chiefs having endea- vored in vain to procure from the United States some suitable person of legal attain- ments to become their adviser, requested Mr. Richards to become their teacher in the science of government and laws, their chap- lain, and their interpreter in intercourse with foreigners. He and his brethren thought it his duty to comply with the request. Up to this time, the government was an absolute despotism. The chiefs were still the sole proprietors of the soil, and the people were virtually their slaves, though some laws had been published, and the administration of the government had been greatly meliorated. In 1839, the first code of written laws was published, prepared wholly by a native. In 1840, a constitution was adopted, and a new code of laws soon took the place of the first. Of their own accord, a king and chiefs, who were absolute hereditary despots, had now set limits to their own power, and given con- stitutional liberty to their subjects, for their good. In 1846, the different departments of the general government were fully organ- ized, and the organization of the judiciary soon followed. The legislative power is vested in a house of nobles, mostly heredi- tary, and a house of representatives, elected by the people. Substantial court houses and prisons are being erected in different districts. Honolulu has its " noble custom house." its "costly court house," and its '■ splendid and convenient market house." Roads and bridges are in process of construc- tion in every part of the islands, for building which the people are all taxed. And most important of all, perhaps, the people are rapidly becoming owners of the soil they cultivate, a commission having been ap- pointed several years since to investigate claims and give titles, which " are not to be disturbed or questioned," and which "are intended to be as perfect and independent titles to the soil as are enjoyed by the citi- zens of any country in the world." The laws are not a dead letter. Very soon after they were first published, a high chief murdered his wife. It was at once predicted that justice would not reach one of such rank ; but, to the surprise of foreign- ers and .the astonishment of the common people, the chief was hung. Mr. Lee, the present chief-justice of the Islands, testifies that now " in no part of the world are life and property more safe." Yet, a few years since, this was a nation of thieves, robbers, and murderers. Seizure of the Islands by Lord George Paulet — Independence acknowledged. — Re- cord must be made of one more gross act of aggression upon the rights of the Sandwich Is- lands government and people. In February, 1843, Her Brittanic Majesty's ship Carysfort came to Honolulu. The commander. Lord George Paulet, at once opened a correspond- 654: SANDWICH ISLANDS. ence with the king, conducted, on his part, in a style of shameless insolence, in which, pretending to seek protection for British subjects, and to support the position of Mr. Simpson, to whom Mr. Charlton, now going to England, had delegated the functions of British Consul, he made demands which could not be complied with, under threat of an immediate bombardment of the town. The king, having no alternative, surrendered the government of the Islands, provisionally, to Lord Paulet, at the same time protesting against the justice of his demands, and ap- pealing to the British Government, to which he had already sent ministers, for redress. A commission vras appointed for the provisional administration of the government, which pro- ceeded at once to abrogate some of the most important laws, and, among others, that against fornication. The government was in the hands of this commission for five months, and they were months, at Honolulu, of vice and sorrow. In July, 1843, Rear- Admiral Thomas, commander-in-chief of the British forces in the Pacific, having learned what had been done, came to Honolulu, and at once restored the sovereignty to the king. The English government, also, on learning the proceedings of Lord Paulet, promptly disavowed having authorized them, or giving them any sanction. Previous to these transactions, the king had sent Mr. Richards and Haahlio, as com- missioners, with full powers, to the United States and different European governments. They secured an acknowledgment of the independence of the Islands by the United States, Great Britain, France, and Belgium. As has been previously mentioned, impor- tant treaties were negotiated with England and France in 1846, and in 1850 the United States government entered into a treaty with the Islands on a more liberal scale than any which the Hawaiian government had been before aisle to negotiate with leading Chris- tian nations. Decrease of Population.— It is a painful fact that the native population of these Is- lands is still diminishing. The reasons for this are perhaps in part inexplicable, or at least not now understood ; but doubtless a vitiated national constitution, the fearful consequence of disease introduced by the vices of foreign visitors, long before the in- troduction of Christianity, has been a promi- nent cause. For many years, deaths were many, and births few. Other causes are to be found in the fact that there is neither suf- ficient intelligence, nor sufficient preparation in the way of home comforts, among the people, to enable them to contend success- fully with contagious and epidemic, or other violent diseases now from time to time introduced from abroad. In 1848-9, measles and whooping cough, followed by diarrhoea and influenza, passed over the Islands with fearful fatality, carrying away about one- twelfth part of the whole people. A census taken in 1850, showed the population to be only about 84,000. Recently, the small-pox has proved very fatal in some districts, but its ravages have not been like those of the measles. (See Report, 1849, p. 187.) The Mission dissolved. — The missions of the American Board, as other foreign mis- sions, are never regarded as permanent insti- tutions. They are established and conducted with reference to a definite end ; to plant the institutions of the Gospel, and to Christianize the people, and prepare them to support, them- selves, Christian institutions. The Hawaiian nation has been Christianized. Much remains to be accomplished for the more full civiliza- tion of the people, and to bring them to a high- er state of intellectual and social as well as re- ligious cultivation ; but it is a Christian peo- ple. One-fourth part of the whole people are members of Protestant Christian church- es ; and the first article of the national con- stitution, adopted by the chiefs in 1840, de- clares that all the laws of the Islands shall be in consistency with God's law. In July, 1848, the Prudential Committee of the American Board addressed a long communication to the mission, designed to bring about changes in the constitution of the mission, and its ultimate separation from the Board ; and thus a change in the mode of affording needed assistance to the native churches, and to educational institutions adapted to the changed circumstances of the people, while yet the continued residence of the missionaries and of their families at the islandis should be secured. In accordance with propositions made, some of the mis- sionaries very soon took a release from their full connection with the Board ; others have from time to time been doing the same, and at the meeting of the mission in May, 1853, the transition was completed, and the mis- sion was merged in the Christian community of the Islands. Its organization as a mis- sion, under the direction of the Board, was dissolved. Much assistance must doubtless be ren- dered, still, to this new and poor Christian community ; but the churches at the Islands are put forward to the leading position, and are to take the leading responsibility in sup- porting the Gospel institutions. It is ex- pected that they will erect their own church edifices, and support native pastors ; and aid furnished in the support of foreign pastors, — when this is necessary, — will be given on the Home Missionary plan of making up de- ficiencies, after the churches have done, in- dividually, what they can. The Hawaiian Jlissionary Society has become an indepen- dent body, but will act to some extent as a disbursing agent for the board. Various SANDWICH ISLANDS. other benevolent societies have been organ- ized at the Islands, j^et the pecuniary means for accomplishing what is done for the newer sections of our own land by Education, Col- lege, Tract, and other benevolent iiastitutions, must obviously be furnished in good measure Btill from the United States. Substantially, the appropriate work of a Foreign Jlissionary Society at the Sandwich Islands has been done. A new nation has been born into the family of Christian na- tions. To bring about this " intellectual, moral, religious, and social new creation of the Hawaiian nation," the American Board has expended $817,383 ; the American Bible Society, $1-11,500 ; and the American Tract Society, $23,800: in all, $882,683:— less than it costs to build one line-of-battle STATISTICS OF THE ship, year. and keep it in service for a single The number of laborers, male and female, sent to the Sandwich Islands by the Board, is 145 : — 42 ministers, 7 ph3rsicians, 20 lay helpers, and 76 females. Of these, 27 minis- ters, 3 physicians, 9 of the other lay helpers, and 42 females, are now at the Islands. SUMMARY. Foreign pastors and preachers, 24 N.-xtive pastors, 4 Mioisters supported on the Home Missionary plan, and reckoned among the missionaries or the Board 13 Ministers supported wholly through the Board 3 Ministers not supported through the Board - 8 "Laymen supported wholly or in part through the Board 3 Laymen not supported through the Board 6 Females supported wholly or in part through the Board - 24 Females not supported through the Board 14 CHURCHES — 1853. STATIONS. K h' S 1 1 i, Pi >> >> % 1 1 ■6 .1 1 gg ^ 3 >j It -0 1 TJ 1 1 to -^ m 1 1 ^1 ^ a1 J~l «i T3 & T^ % "4 bl. ^^ ^ 0) Sift +^ ^bi .2 -S s Ei FlS ^2. O 5 ^ ^ a o ^ n 1 1 P 1— I o % a 10,614 604 442 31 686 68 4,386 129 46 6,742 125 3,620 100 6,208 469 99 43 1136 58 1,836 64 100 2,096 58 1,387 90 1,863 629 23 31 312 54 734 31 12 R 1,038 20 899 47 2,770 299 273 624 685 27 5 1,730 132 2,028 46 3,018 Uo 112 18 8SB 8 662 20 1 1,009 60 1,181 30 1,488 64 7 284 16 607 21 H 1 944 23 484 26 693 1 7 9 511 38 45 990 19 74 3 3 11 9 4 13 35 ?, 768 38 23 9, 122 1,224 355 42 2 268 T 609 17 8 2 690 24 1,236 37 3,404 679 331 46 351 19 759 65 41 2,589 36 768 128 2,267 694 :ffl 61 381 30 860 47 1,179 16 683 107 1,981 66 329 /^^ 445 25 34 012 10 678 52 369 14 6 4 3 3 394 22 63 16 15 22 8 676 700 42 660 93 4 86 4 107 a 5 496 21 186 17 382 146 22 6 53 2 137 « 291 13 . 183 14 663 94 124 1 92 2 167 2 486 27 264 42 38,5441 3792 1880 2865492 307 11,782 499 103 224 22,236 676 13,387 1 934| iHilo and Puna- Waimea Kohala Kailua Kealakekua Kau fHana -; Wailuku 5 < Lahainaluna )^ Lahaina [Kaanapali MOLOKAI Tlonolulu, 1st Honolulu, 2d Ewa -- Waianiie Waialna Kahuka Kaneuhe Waiuli Koloa Waimea Total in churches reported, Teachers sent to the Marquesas Islands. — Some account of what has been done at the Sandwich Islands in connection with the mission to Micronesia, will be found in the account of the " Micronesian Mission ;" but Bome notice should be taken here of a mis- sion to the Marquesas Islands. In March, 1853, Matunui, the principal chief of Fatu- hiva, one of the southern islands of the Marquesas group, came in a whale-ship to Lahaina. accompanied by a son-in-law, who was a native of the Sandwich Islands. He had come thousands of miles to obtain mis- sionaries to teach him and his people the word of God. Desiring a white missionary if he could be had, he would yet greatly pre- fer Hawaiian teachers to none, and was aflfectingly urgent to obtain those who would return with him at an early day. "We have," said he, " nothing but war, war, war — fear, trouble, and poverty. "We are tired of living so, and wish to be as you are here." The case awakened much interest among the churches ; Hawaiian pastors and teachers offered themselves for the service ; the peo- ple were willing contributors to provide for their outfit and support, and on the 16th of June, two native pastors and two deacons, with their wives, sailed for the Marquesas, in a brig chartered for the purpose, at an expense of $2,000. They were accompanied by Rev. R. W. Parker, who would give them advice and assistance in commencing their work, and then return to the Sandwich Islands. They reached Fatuhiva, (usually called Magdalena on the charts,) on the 26th of August, and were " received with much joy by the natives." Only five days after their arrival, a French brig, which had sailed from Tahiti wliile they were detained at that 666 SANDWICH ISLANDS. island, anchored in the harbor, and a Catho lie priest landed. The captain of the brig, and the priest, in a long interview with Man tunui and other chiefs, claimed the islands as the possessions of the French, and de- manded that the Protestant teachers should be sent back to the Sandwich Islands. The chiefs, however, insisted that the land was theirs, and that the Protestants must re- main ; they wanted them, and not the Pa- pists. After a few days, the brig left, taking the priest, but leaving two Hawaiian Catho- lic teachers, with the promise that in a few months a French priest would come to re- main. The Protestant missionaries were soon established in a house belonging to Matunui, and engaged in their work. Papal, and probably French, opposition is to be ex- pected ; but it may be hoped that God has good things in store for a mission commenced under circumstances so remarkable. — See Reports and Publications of the American Board J Jarvis's, Dibble's, and Bingham's Histories, and Hunt's •' Past and Present of the Sandwich Islands. — Rev. I. R. Wor- cester. American Missionary Association. — Rev. Mr. Green, who was originally a mis- sionary of the Board, has been, for a num- ber of years, connected with the American Missionary Association. He has under his care two churches, one at Makawao, and the other at Keokea. the latter having a native pastor, David Malo. Mr. Green has also three or four native helpers. The whole number of members in these churches is 750, residing at various places within an ex- tensive district, and having a number of different places of meeting. The Committee say, in their last report : " The indications of progress are very encouraging. More than one hundred and eighty members have been added to the church in Mr. Green's field. The interest of his people in behalf of the conversion of the world and the re- lief of the enslaved is maintained, and, in general, the members of the church, are dili- gent and attentive readers of the Bible." Present Condition and Future Prospects of the Missionary Work in the Sandwich Islands— Letter from Rev. Titus Coan.~The following letter, addressed to the author, by the pastor of the largest church in the world, giving his impressions of the state of things in this most remarkable field, can- not fail of being read with deep interest : HiLo, Hawaii, April 17, 1854. My Dear Brother : — You ask my impres- sions concerning the present condition and fu- ture prospects of the missionary work at the Sandwich Islands. It is impossible to do jus- tice to the subject in one brief letter ; but allow me to say, that I believe the Gospel has efiected a signal triumph on these shores. Savagism has fled before it, never to return. Idola- try, in its grossest forms, has fallen, never to rise again. Ignorance and superstition have fled apace before its rising light. Not that the people are remarkable for intelligence and wisdom ; but they have made progress. They are not where they were 35 years ago. Most of them can read and write, and what is more, their minds have been impercepti- bly expanded by the silent and constant in- flux of ideas from a world opening and mov- ing around them. Like the man ascending the mountain, their horizon is extending at every step. The comforts and improvements of civilization are multiplying here. All men with eyes can see this, and all men of candor confess it. Social relations are bet- ter understood, and social obligations more faithfully discharged than in former days. Not that we are perfect, or near it ; but we can report progress. The nation has expe- rienced a great civil revolution, a political emancipation, and this without rebellion and without blood. Calmly, silently, but with the energy of light, the Gospel has under- mined, overthrown, and melted the ancient despotism, and the temple of freedom is now rising on its ruins. Instead of the ca- pricious, the selfish, the irresponsible, the crushing will of despots, we now have con- stitutional laws, the elective franchise re- cognized, prerogatives limited, rights defined, and life, limb, liberty, character, and the fruits of physical and mental toil protected. External morality is also more generally practiced here than in most nations, or per- haps, any nation. No where on earth are life and property more secure. No where may the people sleep with open doors, by the wayside, or in the forests, with more safety than here. No where may the travel- er with more impunity encamp where night overtakes him, lay his purse by his side, hang his watch on a tree, and commit himself to sleep. Natives often hang calabashes of food, fish, clothing, and other things on the limb of a tree by the wayside, and leave them thus for days or weeks, until they re- turn from an excursion. Open crimes are of rare occurrence here. They increase, how- ever, as a certain class of white men are in- troduced. As to " pure and undefiled religion" among the people, we would speak with modesty. God only knows the heart. Our enemies say that in this, as in all good, we have signally failed. "We are sure that the word of God has not been without effect — that it has not returned void — that those who have sown in tears have not reaped in sadness — that those who have fought with spiritual weapons have not beat the air. It is our joy, and a part of our reward, to be- lieve that many of the poor sons and daugh- ters of Hawaii have been prepared unto glory ; that they now sing with the re SANDWICH ISLANDS— SAVA<3E I&LAND. 667 deemed in heaven ; and that many now with us are following in the steps of those who through faith and patience, now inherit the promises. This we believe, because God's word and the fruits we see, warrant such confidence. How many, or what proportion of our church members are the true seed of Abraham, we do not even conjecture. This we leave for the disclosures of the final day. That all of our converts are weak and child- like, we confess ; while at the same time we feel that many of them are better than our- selves. We do not boast that in any one thing we have attained or are perfect, but we follow after. "We are toiling up the hill, and we may say, with all our defects — and they are many — that no savage tribe ever went so fast and so far, in 35 years, as the Hawaiians. And the Gospel is the efficient cause. Not that we overlook or undervalue collateral agencies. These have been many. One class of facts has had a happy influence in helping to elevate and to bless this peo- ple, while another class has been decidedly antagonistical. For whatever good has been done, let God he praised. As to the future prospects of our islands, what shall we say ? Here, of course, our knowledge is at fault. Our missionary ope- rations are now in a transition state. As in other respects, so also in this, old things are passing away, and all things are becoming new. The islands are adopted into the great fraternity of Christian nations. Henceforth we are no longer to be known as foreign missionaries. Many of us are already receiving our full support from the churches over whom we are pastors. Others receive support in part, the lack being supplied from foreign sources. For years to come we may need to call on the A. B. C. F. M., and on the Bible and Tract Societies, for special grants to aid us in our work. But these aids will be collateral. We are organizing inde- pendent institutions in the land. Our churches are settling their pastors, obtaining charters, etc. We have our Missionary, Bible, Tract, and other benevolent Societies, to draw out, collect, and scatter over many waters the beneficence of our churches. Already the relative amount of those chari- ties does not sufi'er by comparison, with the gifts of more favored lands. In a word, we consider the Church of Christ as planted here, as having taken root, and as bearing fruit. And as Christ said to his disciples, that their " fruit should remain" so we say of these children of the kingdom. We are sure that the Redeemer has a church here, that it is founded on " The Rock," and that " the gates of hell shall not prevail against it." But in saying this we do not affirm the perpetuity of the Hawaiian race. This may, and probably will, become extinct. The natives are few, and in physical, mental, and moral power, feeble. Amidst the march of men, the rush and the surges of a moving world, they may be overwhelmed and lost. Fleets of merchantmen, whalemen, and war- ships, are scattering thousands of our vigor- ous young men to all the winds of heaven. Foreigners are pouring in upon us from every point of the compass. Amalgamation is fast taking place — new forms of disease have swept off thousands to the tomb. The base passions of many vile and reckless seamen, like the consuming fires of hell, are destroy- ing many in our sea-ports who should have become the mothers and matrons of a rising race. The English language is being learned by many and coveted by most — and all things combining, indicate the absorption or extinction of the Havvaiians as a distinct race, at no distant day. Let it be so — still the islands will have a people, and God will have a Church here. A crisis may be at hand which will try n*n's souls. We shall need the prayers, the sympathies, the coun- sels, and the alms of the Church in older lands. The cause of education must be sus- tained here. We must have a college. We must have teachers and evangelical ministers — men of wise heads and holy hearts. Men of self-denial, patience, zeal, discretion, ' and broad philanthropy. Our work is not done. Probably our responsibilities were never so great as at the present hour. All things grow around us, and we need great faith, firmness, and wisdom, lest all good be swept away by the currents of passion and of worldly and civil policy. Our joy and our triumph are, that " The Lord reigns," and his kingdom is safe. In Christian love, Your friend and brother, Titus Coan. SAPAPALII: A station of the London Missionary Society, on the island of Savaii, one of the Samoan group. SARON : A station of the Rhenish Mis- sionary Society in South Africa, nearTulbagh. S AS AC : One of the Lesser Sunda Islands, in the Indian Archipelago. SATTAUKOOLAM : A station of tho Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly District, Hindostan. S ATARA : a city of Hindostan, and a sta- tion of the Am.. Board. It is 170 miles S. E. of Bombay, and 50 miles from the western coast. It is 2,320 miles above the level of the sea, and its position is singularly beau- tiful. The population of the city is 32,000. It was occupied as a station of the Bombay mission till 1848, when it became a distinct mission. SAVAII : One of the Samoan Islands, on which the London Missionary Society have four stations. SAVAGE ISLAND : One of the Friendly Islands, situated about 130 miles from Kep- pel's Island. It is a cinde'r island, produced 6G8 SCHiSFFMAINNSDOBF— SEAMEN. by volcanic action. It is a remote island, the landing dangerous. The London Mis- sionary Society have a station here, in charge of native teachers. It has six chapels, one of which is wholly built from the bread-fruit tree. SCHEPPMANNSDORF : A station of the Rhenish Missionary Society in Namaqualand, South Africa, at Whale Bay. SEAMEN : The subjects of inquiry here are three, viz. : 1. The number of persons employed. 2. The origin and progress of missionary efforts among them. 3. The re- sults. — In ascertaining the number of per- sons employed in connection with navigation both on the sea and on the interior waters, there will necessarily be a degree of uncer- tamty, as a part of it cannot be known with precision, there being no documents in exist- ence to point it out, and an estimate is all that we can obtain. But in other cases there are authentic documents, on which we may safely rely. This is the fact in relation to British and American seamen. From the latest document which could be consulted, it is found that there are about 30,000 regis- tered vessels in Great Britain, the measured burthen of which is about 3,000,000 of tons. These vessels are manned by about 170,000 sailors. To these there should be added about 40,000, who are always in port look- ing for ships, and between 50,000 and 60,000 engaged in the fisheries, and nearly 40,000 more in the Royal navy, making in all of British sailors about 300,000. The number of American seamen is correctly stated in the last annual reports made to Congress by the Secretary of the Treasury, and by the Secretary of the Navy. They are as follows : The measured burthen of American vessels in the foreign trade is 3,230,590 tons, and the number of their crews is 117,043. The measured burthen of vessels in the coasting trade is 2,008,021 tons, and the estimated number of men in them is about one hundred thousand. This is an estimate based on the tonnage. It includes the vessels on the lakes and rivers in the western country, steamers as well as sail vessels. The mea- sured burthen of the vessels engaged in the fisheries is 175,205 tons, carrying about 22,000 men, making in all of American sea- men in the foreign and coasting trade, and the fisheries, 239,000 souls. And when we add to these not far from ten thousand sea- men in our national vessels, we shall have a total of not less than two hundred and fifty thousand men in American vessels for whose salvation we should labor. The seamen of Russia, Sweden, Denmark, the Dutch and German States, of France, Spain, and Por- tugal, are probably nearly or quite double the number found in Gr^at Britain and America. Looking now up the Mediterra- nean on the African coast, and away to the eastern Archipelago, and thence to Turkey and the Grecian Islands, we shall en- counter a multitude of seafaring men ; and then looking across the Atlantic to the South American coast, both on its eastern and western shores, we shall find multitudes more, not yet counted, to be added to those already estimated. And when we turn east- ward again, and passing the Cape of Good Hope, stretch away toward India, and China, and the eastern Islands, an almost innumer- able multitude of seafaring men are found thronging the native vessels which fill those seas. Putting the wholetogether, not much short of three millions of men will be found floating upon the waters for whose salvation" every effort should be made. We turn now, 2. To the origin and progress of mission- ary efforts among seamen. — The first effort known to have been made to benefit seamen as a distinct class of men, took place in Lon- don, in the year 1814. and under the follow- ing circumstances : At an evening meeting, a stranger was observed to enter the assem- bly, and to sit weeping bitterly during the sermon. When the service was closed, a pious man, who had observed him. followed him out, and asked him who he was. He said he was a sailor, belonging to a collier vessel, which then lay among others in the Thames. On farther inquiry it was ascer- tained that there were a few other seamen belonging to those vessels who were also se- rious minded men, and who were accustom- ed to meet together occasionally and pray. A few pious men from the shore sought op- portunity to visit those vessels, and hold prayer-meetings on board, until it became a common thing, and as an appropriate name, they called them " Bethel meetings," and a flag was prepared to designate the vessel where the meeting was held, which they de- nominated the " Bethel Flag." It was a piece of blue bunting, bearing the word '' Bethel" in white letters, having over it a star, and under it a dove bearing an olive branch. After about two years, preaching was added, either on ship board, or in a chapel near the water, and the commence- ment of this was at London and New York, at about the same time, yet without any concert of action. It was in the year 1816, when the Rev. Ward Stafford was laboring in New York as a city missionary, and car- rying the Gospel to the destitute as he could find them. In prosecuting this work he placed his eye on the sailors, some thousands of whom were visiting the port of New York every year, and procuring a school room, he commenced preaching to them. The Mariner's Church in New York grew out of this effort. In 1818, a similar meeting was opened in Boston, by the Rev. Dr. Jenks. and in the following year, 1819, the Rev! Mr. Eastburn commenced a meeting for sea- SEAMEN— SBTTRA KKOO. 669 men in Philadelphia. Efforts of the same kind have been made in other places, and regular meetings have been established in Portland, Baltimore, Richmond, Charleston, Savannah, Mobile, and New Orleans. In some of the larger ports, different denomina- tions have embarked in the cause, and are carrying on the work, each under their own flag, but harmoniously as against a common enemy. Thus in Great Britain and the United States, all the large ports are provi- ded with mariners' churches, and the work of promoting religion among seamen is very judiciously carried on, under the patronage of local societies. About the year 1831, an advance was made in this work by extending it to the inland waters, and after various efforts to establish Bethel meetings at some of the more im- portant places on the line of the canals, rivers, and lakes of the western country, a large meeting was held at Syracuse, N. Y., Aug. 11, 1833, which resulted in the forma- tion of the " Boatmen's Friend Society." Several local societies had been previously formed, which, to some extent, were now merged in this. After a year or two of rather declining operations, a convention of the friends of the cause was held at Buffalo, in June, 1836, when the " American Bethel Society" was formed, which took charge of most, if not all of the Bethel operations on the western waters. The friends of seamen in the United States having seen the permanent establish- ment of mariners' churches in most of the large ports on the Atlantic coast, and having labored successfully in this department for about ten years, began to consider the con dition of seamen in foreign ports, and the importance of providing the preaching of the Gospel for them there. This led to the establishment of the " American Seamen's Friend Society," in 1827, the grand object of which is to provide and sustain chaplains for seamen in every large foreign port, where an open door can be found. In the prosecu- tion of this work that society has stationed chaplains at Canton, Havre, Marseilles, Smyrna, Cronstadt, Stockholm, Gottenburg, Rio Janeiro, Sandwich Islands, San Francis- co, Havana, and some other smaller ports, most of which remain to the present time. The friends of seamen in Great Britain, through a general organization styled " The British and Foreign Sailors' Society," has accomplished much for the benefit of seamen in their own ports, though, as yet, but little abroad. Such is a brief outline of the origin and progress of the missionary efforts among sailors up to the present day. These efforts have involved a large outlay of money, but the precise amount cannot be stated. "We turn to consider, 3. The results of these efforts. — We have no means of counting the number of pious seamen, were we so disposed. They are scattered in almost every vessel that floats upon the ocean ; but as a general remark, proved by many facts, we feel safe in the assertion that the character of seamen, as a whole, is greatly' improved since Bethel ef- forts were commenced, and many vessels are now found where the Sabbath is strictly ob- served, and daily prayer is njaintained ; things almost unknown in former days. Tem- perance has gained ground among sailors, since the efforts for their benefit commenced, quite as fast if not faster than among lands- men. Forty years ago it was thought wholly impracticable to manage a vessel without ardent spirits, and merchants woujd almost as soon have thought of sending their ships to sea without bread as without rum. But that day has passed, and a large propor- tion of vessels are now manned on temperance principles, and '' no rum," is put forward to a prominent place on the shipping paper. Marine temperance societies are common in every port, bearing the names of many thou- sands of pledged men, both oflBcers and common sailors. The immediate and very natural result of temperance in seamen is frugality, and a careful saving of their hard earnings ; and an investigation of the various Seamen's Savings Banks, which are founded in every large port, shows us that immense sums have been there deposited by sailors for use in future Ufe. We have thus briefly hinted at the several subjects of inquiry re- specting seamen. The details may be found in the twenty-five annual reports of the Am- erican Seamen's Friend Society ; the annual reports of the American Bethel Society ; the twenty-five volumes of the Sailors' Maga- zine ; the annual reports of the Secretary of the Treasury, relating to commerce ; the an- nual reports of the Secretary of the Navy ; the annual reports of the British and Foreign Sailors' Society ; " Britannia," by the Rev. John Harris ; the " Retrospect," by Rev. R. Marks ; publications of Rev. G. C. Smith. Rev. William Scoresby, and others. — RevI J. Geeenleaf. SEIR: A village near Oroomiah, Persia, where the seminaries of the mission of the American Board are located. SERAMPORE : Formerly a Danish settle- ment, in the province of Bengal, situated on the west side of the Hooghly river, about 12 miles above Calcutta. Population 15,000. For many j'ears, the principal station of the English Baptists in Bengal. SEROOR : In Hindostan, 28 miles south- west from Ahmednuggur. Pop. 6,500. Be- came a station of the American Board in 1841. SETTRA KROO : A station of the Am- erican Presbyterian General Assembly's Board on the western coast of Africa, about halfway between Cape Palmos and Monrovia. 670 SEVAGUNGA— SIAM. SEVAGFNGA : A station of the Ameri- can Board in Southern Hindostan, 25 miles east of Madura, and connected with that mission. SEYCHELLES : A cluster of small is- lands, which lie nearly north from Madagas- car. They are high and rocky, and little fit- ted for any culture except cotton. Popula- tion 4,000. They are famous for the produc- tion of a palm not known in any other part of the world. A station of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. SHALONG POINT : A station of the American Bqard in Micronesia, on Taman Island, a small island in the mouth of Me- talim Harbor, Ascension Island. SHANGHAI : A city in China, in latitude 31° 10' north and longitude 121° 30' east, on the Wosung river, about 14 miles from its mouth. (See China.) SHAWANOB : A town in the Indian Ter- ritory, and the seat of a mission of the Am- erican Baptist Union for the Shawanoe and sheikh': (pronounced Shehh or Shuhh) means literally an old man, but besides being used in that sense it is also employed as a prefix to the names of respectable heads of families like our "Mr." Somewhat like our M. A. it is applied to schoolmasters and learned men. It is also the title of the heads of the Mohammedan sects as the Hhanafees, Mali- kees, &c. But among the Bedaween it de- notes the head of the tribe, and where seve- ral Sheikhs unite together for greater secu- rity, they 'choose a chief from among them- selves who is called Sheikh el k'bir or Sheikh el Shoyukh. Sheikh el Islam is one of the titles of the Grand Mufti of Constantinople, who is the President of the College of the Ulema, or professors of Mohammedan Law. Shiekh is also the name of one of the orders of priesthood among the Yezidees. and has a like religious meaning among the Druzes. SHILOH : Station of the United Brethren in South Africa, on the Klipplaat river, among the Tambookies and Hottentots., SHWAYDOUNG: A town in Burmah near Prome, and the seat of the Prome mis- sion of the American Baptist Union. It is one of the principal centres of Burman edu- cation and religion, and has been styled the " Oxford of Burmah." SHWAYGYEEN: A city in Southern Burmah, at the junction of the Shvsraygyeen and Sitang rivers. It is the seat of amission of the American Baptist Union. SIAM : Siam is a long, narrow country, lying between Burmah and Cochin-China, and extending from the Gulf of Siam to the borders of China. It is watered by several rivers and by numerous canals ; and as the soil is generally quite fertile, it is capable of; supporting a large population. Having been distracted by wars, however, until within comparatively a modern period, the actual number of inhabitants is estimated at not more than from 3,000,000 to 5,000,000. Of these some hundred thousands are Chinese, and there are many Peguans, Burmese, Shans, &c. This diversity among the inhab- itants imparts the greater interest to Siam as a sphere of missionarj' labor. Some races may be reached here who cannot be visited in their own lands. Numerous Chinese, for instance, from the island of Hainan, are now living in Bangkok, who keep up a constant intercourse with their own country ; and through whom a Christian influence might readily be exerted on the 1,500,000 inhabi- tants of that island. In Siam the inhabitants live chiefly on the banks of rivers and canals, — a circumstance worthy of being noted, as it renders them easily accessible by missionaries in boats — the common mode of traveling. The princi- pal city is Bangkok, of which the population is estimated at 300,000 ; it is situated on the Meinam, about twenty-five miles from its mouth. The people of this country are hardly inferior in civilization to other nations of South-eastern Asia. They carry on vari ous kinds of industrial occupation. Many are able to read, and schools are commonly connected with the wots, or places devoted to temples and idolatrous worship, where edu- cation is given without charge by some of the priests ; yet the knowledge thus acquired by the youth is little more than that of the simplest kind. Government. — The government of this country is a despotism. The king is chosen, however, on some basis of hereditary de- scent, by the principal nobles, which must give them influence in the administration of public aflitirs. In no other country in the East, and probably in no country in any part of the world, is the influence of the king more controlling over alt the opinions and conduct of his subjects ; the servility of all classes is most abject, and is fitly shown by the prostration, with the face to the ground, of even the chief men when they appear la the royal presence. Religion. — -The religion of the Siamese is Budhism, which may be characterized as a kind of atheistical idolatry ; for Budh, in his most common form, Gotama, is not sup- posed to take any concern in the affairs of men. (See Budhism.) It is one of the rea- sons for regarding Siam with special interest as a missionary field, that it is the head- quarters of this widelj'-spread system of false religion, so far as this bad preeminence can be assigned to any country. It is a re- ligion held here In great honor. The king is its subject ; the revenues of the kingdom are to a large extent devoted to the wats. the support of priests, processions in honor of Gotama, and other religious ceremonies. SI AM. 671 If Budh were dethroned in this country, his downfall would doubtless be felt in other parts of Asia. MISSIONS. Pbesbtterian Board. — The mission es- tablished by the Board in Siam was resoWed upon in 1839. It was formed at first with reference to the Chinese rather than to the Siamese. The door into China was not then open, and missionary societies adopted the policy of supporting stations among the large numbers of Chinese emigrants who were found in the neighboring countries. The Rev. Robert "W. Orr, one of the first missionaries to the Chinese, whose station was at Singapore, made a visit to Siam in the autumn of 1838 ; and upon his favorable report it was deemed expedient to form a branch of the Chinese mission at Bangkok, and also a mission to the Siamese at the same place. The Rev. "William P. Buell and his wife, appointed to the latter mission, arrived at Bangkok in August, 1840. A physician and his wife were appointed to this field of labor in 1841, and a minister and his wife in 1843. They were led, however, to proceed to China instead of Siam, so that Mr. Buell was not joined by any associate. After learning the language, he was able to preach the Gospel and distribute the Holy Scriptures and other religious books, ex- plaining them to the people. He was en- couraged in his work ; but in 1844 he was compelled to return to this country by the state of his wife's health. In jMarch, 1847, the Rev. Stephen Mattoon and his wife, and Samuel R. House, M. D., licentiate preacher, arrived at Bangkok ; and in April, 1849, they were joined by the Rev. Stephen Bush and his wife. These brethren found ample employment in preaching and distributing the Scriptures and religious tracts. The medical labors of Dr. House were of the greatest benefit to large num- bers of patients ; while they brought many persons within the reach of the Gospel, whose attention could not otherwise have been gained ; and they also tended to con- ciliate the confidence and good-will of per- sons of all classes towards the missionaries. The year 1850 was marked by vigorous "abors in preaching and tract distribution in Bangkok ; by missionary tours to several distant parts of the country, which were made without hindrance, and afforded many opportunities of publishing the Gospel ; by the printing at the press of another mission in Bangkok of 422.000 pages of books of Scripture history ; and by faithful and suc- cessful medico-missionary practice. This year was also marked by a singular exigency in the history of the mission, which for months threatened its existence. The missionaries had lived in houses for- merly occupied by missionaries of the Ame- rican Board. On relinquishing Siam as a field of labor, the American Board trans- ferred these houses to the American Associ- ation, and it became necessary for the breth- ren to seek other places of abode. After long search and many disappointments, they found it impossible either to purchase or rent new quarters. The increasing bigo- try of the king was the obstacle in their way. He did not openly oppose their wishes, but it was soon understood among his abject people that he was unfriendly to foreign teachers ; and no man was willing to sell or lease real estate to those who at any hour might be ordered out of the kingdom. The strange issue was apparently reached, that Christian missionaries must withdraw from a heathen land, where their life and liberty were still safe, and where their labors might be carried forward in many ways, solely for the want of houses in which to live ! The question had been viewed in every aspect ; referred home to the Executive Committee ; reconsidered after obtaining the sanction of the Committee, given fully, but with deep regret, to their removal to some new field of labor — and still the necessity for this re- moval appeared to be unavoidable. Towards the .end of the year matters grew worse. The teachers of the missionaries were arrested and thrown into prison, their Siamese servants left them or were taken away, and none of the people dared to hold intercourse with them on religious subjects. In the mean time prayer was offered without ceasing on their behalf, and in answer to the requests of his people, God interposed for the help of his servants, — but in a way not expected by them. The king was attacked with disease in January, 1851 ; and, though he had the prospect of many years of life, he was cut down by death in April. His successor, the present king, had much intercourse with the missionaries before his accession to the throne, and he has since shown himself to be their friend. The diffi- culty about a site for mission premises was soon removed ; suitable houses have been erected, and the work of the mission can now be prosecuted with greater freedom than at any former period. The little company of missionaries have since been called to meet with trials of a different kind — to see their number dimin- ished, instead of being increased. Mrs. Bush was removed by death in July, 1851. Her last days were full of Christian peace and joy, and her associates could say, that " in the full possession of all her faculties, without one cloud to separate between her and a present Saviour, she went down into the Jordan of death, singing Hallelujah, in the triumph of victory. The Siamese have lost in her a faithful, praying friend ; the mission, an exemplary fellow-laborer ; 672 SIAM. and her bereaved husband, an affectionate and beloved companion." The healtli of Mr. Bush afterwards gave way, and it be- came necessary for him to return to this country, in 1853, for his recovery. He has not yet become sufficiently restored to re- turn to his field of labor. With the single exception of the embar- rassment growing out of their small number, the missionaries have reason to be much en- couraged in their work and its prospects. They are permitted to preach the Gospel in stated services and by the way-side ; and the Word has not been preached in vain. Besides the testimony thereby held forth for God and against idols, and the secret con- victions and impressions of many hearers, which may yet result in the open confession of Christ before men, two hopeful converts have been admitted to the church. They are both Chinese, and one of them is a native of Hainan. Their walk and conversation are exemplary,' and both of them are engaged in efforts to make the Gospel known unto their own people. Some progress has been made in giving the Scriptures to the Siamese in their own tongue. The New Testament and the books of Genesis and Exodus have been translated by the missionaries of other Boards ; but the translation will require re- vision, and it may be expedient to make al- together a new translation. Mr. Mattoon's biblical scholarship and his knowledge of Siamese will enable him to perform good service in this work. Schools have been opened on the mission premises, and a small number of boarding-scholars are under daily Christian instruction. It seems to be not unlikely that a Christian element may be largely introduced into the education of Siamese youth. The distribution of the Scriptures in Bangkok and in the interior is going forward, and many of the people are not only able to read and willing to receive Christian books, but give a cordial welcome to the missionary, and have many inquiries to make about this new religion. Mrs. Mat- toon and the wives of the other missionaries have been requested by the King to give in- struction in English to some of the female members of his family ; and they can in this way bring before persons of the highest rank — in Eastern countries commonly secluded from intercourse with foreigners^the all- important lessons of the Gospel of Christ. These engagements are still in progress, and may result in the greatest good to some of the ladies of the royal family, and by their means to many others in high and low sta- tions. One of their pupils, a princess of amiable disposition, who had given pleasing attention to the instructions of the mission- ary teachers, was suddenly removed by death. Her serious interest in listening to the story of the cross would lead us to hope that her trust in her last hour may have been placed in Jesus. In connection with this brief sketch of missionary labors, the character of the pre- sent King of Siam should be taken into con- sideration. He is a Budhist in his religious profession ; and he is an absolute monarch. He might on any day banish every mission- ary from his kingdom. The Church must ever remember that her dependence is not on the kings of the earth, but on the God of heaven. This being deeply felt, it is still allowable to survey things future in the light of present providences. Now he who, con- trary to human expectation, has been ele- vated to the throne of Siam, possesses a con- siderable degree of Christian knowledge. He is a much more enlightened and liberal man than his predecessor. He has learnt the English language. He has paid some atten- tion to the history of our country, probably led to this by his acquaintance with Ameri- can missionaries, and he is a warm admirer of Washington. He is disposed to adopt tho improvements of western civilization. Ho has under consideration the opening of a ship-canal to connect the Gulf of Siam with the Bay of Bengal — a measure which would prove greatly favorable to commerce be- tween India and China, and would bring his hitherto secluded country out upon one of the highways of the world. He is surround- ed by the priests of Budh, but Christia-n ministers are living at his capital, and their wives are giving lessons of Christian truth in his palace. Reasons of state policy may commend Budhism to his pride, but the Spirit of God may easily constrain his heart to bow unto Him who is the King of kings and the Lord of lords. The influence .of the king and court in Siam, is almost unbounded, especially in religious matters. If the king should embrace Christianity, a large part of his subjects would follow his example. They are in some degree prepared for this,, by their acquaintance with the general truths of the Christian religion ; the circulation of the Scriptures and Christian books, and other labors of the missionaries, have been the means / of widely disseminating a knowledge of the Gospel. It is, therefore, in the power of one man, not only to make his own reign an era in the history of his country, but to lead his people from the wat to the church — from a miserable paganism to the profession of Christianity ; and if the Spirit of the Lord were poured out from on high, we might soon see in Siam " a nation born in a day." " The king's heart is in the hand of the Lord ; as the rivers of water, heturneth it whitherso- ever he will." — Lowrie's Manual of Missions. American Baptist Mission is Siam. — This mission was originally designed in part for the native Siamese, and in part for the Chinese who are found in Siam in great num- SIAM. 673 berg, and who, until within a recent period, were wholly inaccessible in their own coun- try. It was commenced in March 1833, by Rev. J. T. Jones, formerly of the mission in Burmah, who with Mrs. Jones at that time established his residence at Bangkok, the capital of the kingdom. The city had at former periods been visited by Rev. Mr. Gutzlaff, of the Basle Missionary Society, Rev. Mr. Abeel, of the American Board, and quite recently by Rev. Mr. Trumlin, of the London Missionary Society. They had, how- ever, all abandoned the attempt to plant a mission there, and the latter on his depart- ture had written to the missionaries in Bur- mah, urging them to send one of their num- ber to Siam. It was by the appointment of his brethren of the Burman mission, that Mr. Jones first settled at Bangkok, and com- menced his labors among the several races composing its diversified population, the most numerous of whom were the Chinese. He was courteously received by the public personages to whom he became known, and in a little time his house became the resort of considerable numbers of Chinese, Bur- mans, and Peguans. He found the Chinese by far the most amiable and inquisitive, but he understood neither their language, nor the Siamese, and was in consequence obliged to confine his teachings and conver- sations to the Burman tongue, which, how- ever, seems to have been comprehended by others than the Burman population. He baptized his first five converts in December, 1833. They were all Chinese, two of whom had been instructed by Messrs. Gutzlafi' and Abeel. One of them was immediately ap- pointed an assistant in the mission, to take charge of a school for Chinese boys, and to conduct public worship in Chinese on the Sabbath. In 1835, Mr. Jones had acquired sufficient familiarity with the language to warrant his attempting a translation of the Scriptures. He soon completed the Gospel of Matthew, and a Catechism of the New Testament, both of which he carried to Singa- pore to be printed by the press of the mis- sion of the American Board established there. When Mr. Jones removed from Rangoon to Bangkok, it was without the knowledge of the Board of Managers. They, however, were already directing their attention to that country, and not only approved the steps taken by Mr. Jones, by the advice of his associates in Burmah, but deter- mined immediately to send additional mis- sionaries to be united with him. Accord- ingly, Rev. William Dean, and Mrs. Dean, were appointed by the Board in the summer of 1834, and sailing in the following September, arrived at Singapore in February, 1835, while Mr. Jones was still there engaged in printing the Gospel of Matthew. Both the mission- aries remained here for several months for 43 the purpose of studying the Chinese lan- guage ; here Mrs. Dean, a few weeks after her arrival, was suddenly summoned away by death. Mr. Dean accompanied Mr. Jones to Bangkok in June, 1835, and they com- menced together the labors of the mission ; the former more particularly among the Chinese, and -the latter among the Siamese. In December of the same year, three other Chinamen were baptized. But so strong was the appetite for opium, and so general its use among the Chinese, that several of those who had been baptized were unable to withstand the temptation, and fell away from the faith which they professed. In March, 1836, Mr. Jones had completed the translation of the Acts of the Apostles, and went a second time to Singapore to obtain fonts of type both in Siamese and Chinese, to be used with a press which had been for- warded from America, and which was expect ed soon to arrive. It was while he was absent on this excursion that there arrived at Singa^ pore. Rev. Messrs. Davenport, Reed, and Shuck, with their wives, together with the expected press, and the necessary materials for printing. Messrs. Davenport and Reed soon went with Mr. Jones to Bangkok, the former to be attached as preacher and print- er to the Siamese, and the latter to be con- nected with Mr. Dean in the Chinese de- partment of the mission. Mr. Shuck re- mained for the present in Singapore, with the intention of establishing himself ulti- mately either at Macao or at Canton. A printing house was immediately built at Bangkok, together with a substantial brick building for a store-house, and the press was. set into immediate operation under the direc- tion of Mr. Davenport, in printing books and tracts both in Siamese and Chinese. Mr. Dean occupied a floating house on the river, and employed himself in conversing with visitors and on Sundays in preaching to a congrega- tion varying from thirty to fifty Chinese, while Mr. Jones was occupied with translating the Scriptures into Siamese, preparing tracts and visiting the wats or places of worship for the purpose of scattering the knowledge of the Gospel among the people. The ladies of the mission also were employed in teach- ing such pupils as could be induced to attend their instructions. The children, however, were in many instances forbidden by their parents to attend the schools, lest by so doing their value would be diminished in case their parents should wish to sell them as slaves. In 1834, the mission was visited by Rev. Dr. Malcom, and its members, together with those converts who still remained faithfu*, were organized into a church. Three oth© t were added soon afterwards, and the labt s of the mission, particularly among the Chi- nese, continued to progress, until they were en SIAM. sadly interrupted by a series of bereavements which for a time paralyzed its energies. Mr. Reed was taken away by death, in August, 1837 ; Mrs. Dsan had already fallen a victim to a fever ; Jlr. Dean was now obliged to withdraw for a period, in order to recruit his failing health ; and early in 1838, Mrs. Jones, a missionary of great excellence, closed her valuable life at Bangkok. The printing arrangements proved very defective on account of the imperfection of the type, and a type-foundry was established in the summer of 1838, and at the same time a second press was added to the property of the mission. By these means the books of the New Testament, which Mr. Jones was rapidly translating, were printed in great numbers, and with these a multitude of tracts and other works prepared for circulation among the people. In June, 1839, Rev. Messrs. Slafter and Goddard, arrived at Singapore, as a rein- forcement of the mission in Siam. Mr. Slaf- ter brought with him an additional press, and went almost immediately to Bangkok, where he became associated with Mr. Jones in the Siamese department of the mission. He speedily acquired the language, and gave great promise of usefulness, but in 1841 he fell a victim to disease before he had begun his labors as a preacher. Mr. Goddard, who was appointed to the Chinese department, remained at Singapore studying the language, until October, 1840, when he repaired to Bangkok and entered upon the duties of his post as an associate of Sir. Dean. In 1843, Mr. Chandler, a machinist and type founder connected with the mission at Maulmain, went to reside at Bangkok. He became the principal manager of the printing establish- ment, and immediately interested himself in introducing among the people a knowledge of the mechanic arts. Prince Momfanoi in- vited him to aid in building several kinds of machinery after American models, and evinced such deference for his Christian principles that he directed his laborers to abstain from work on Sunday. Much inci- dental good was thus accomplished, though it of course fell far short of the great objects for which the mission was established. Notwithstanding the fact that the mission- aries in Siam have encountered none of the hindrances usually interposed by the govern- ments of oriental nations, it is also true that they have been encouraged by comparatively few religious fruits among the native Siamese. They have translated the books. of the New Testament, and some of the Old, into the language of the country. They have printed and circulated very widely among the people copies of the Scriptures and of religious tracts. They have introduced the mechanic arts, and have won the favor of several of the princes and noblemen of the country, but they have not thus far succeeded in per- suading the people to accept the Gospel. The native race of Siam is said to be com- paratively stupid and less civilized than those of the neighboring countries. They have the Gospel, but they do not embrace it. They acknowledge the superiority of Christ's re- ligion, but they still remain indifierent to it. Messrs. Jones and Chandler, with the interruptions of occasional absence, were for many years the principal laborers in this department of the mission. The former, though repeatedly prostrated by ill-health, on account of which he twice returned to the United States, died at Bangkok, September 13, 1851. He had been a missionary up- wards of twenty years, and had passed eighteen years in Siam. He had acquired the language to a degree of unusual perfec- tion, and had won the respect and confi- dence of the king and the leading public per- sonages of the country. He had written many tracts and books in the Siamese lan- guage, and had translated the entire New Testament and parts of the Old Testament, the former of which he had just revised for the third time. These contributions to the literature of Siam will remain forever, as memorials of his well-spent and most labor- ious life. In 1849 the Siamese department of the mission was strengthened by the arrival at Bangkok of Rev. Samuel G. Smith, who since the death of Mr. Jones has been the only missionary whose work was preaching the Gospel. Mrs. Jones and Miss Morse conduct schools and render such other as- sistance as may be in their power, while Mr. Chandler has lately returned from a visit to the United States, better supplied than ever before with the means of printing, both in Siamese and in Chinese. A few native Siamese have been converted to Christianity, and have been admitted to the Chinese church, but as has been already intimated, the spiritual results of this dep.irtraent of the mission, after the lapse of twenty years, in which it has not only encountered no op- position, but has been received with decided favor from the Government, appear thus far to be unusually small. It may be, however, that these have been only years of toilsome preparation, and a period of sowing the seed which shall yet spring up and yield an abun- dant harvest. The Chinese department of the mission at Bangkok, however, has from the beginning been attended with far more encouraging re- sults. It was established at a period when the Gospel was shut out from the countless population of Chinese, and was designed to accomplish for her wandering traffickers and the emigrants from her shores what could not be done for her people at heme. The only church at Bangkok has been composed. SIAM. with few exceptions, of converted Chinamen, who at first learned the Scriptures through the Siamese translations of Mr. Jones. From 1840, to the removal of Mr. Dean to China in 1842, the mission was managed principally by Rev. Messrs. Dean and God- dard, and the former engaged in preparing books and tracts and the latter in translating the Scriptures, and both in preaching to the people. In 1840, the members of the church were nine in number, and each year has wit- nessed a gradual increase, until in 1853 they were thirty-five. In January, 1851, the mis- sion suffered a severe loss in the destruction of its buildings, and the entire property which they contained, together with many of the personal effects of the missionaries, the whole amounting to not less than $12,000 to $15,000, a calamity from which it has not even yet fully recovered. It has already been stated that Mr. Shuck with his family settled at Macao, a port under the jurisdiction of the Portugese, in 1836, also for the purpose of laboring as a missionary among the Chinese. He found thera, as at Bangkok, entirely accessible to the preaching of the Gospel. In 1841, Rev. Issachar J. Roberts, who had been residing for some time at Macao under the direction of a missionary society in the Western States, became associated with Mr. Shuck under the patronage of the American Bap- tist Jlissionary Union. Two or three Chinese converts have been baptized at this station, religious books and tracts have been circula- ted very widely among the multitudes of Chinese who frequent this mart of oriental commerce, and the missionaries were looking with the fondest hopes on the prospect that was opening before them, when in 1841 their labors for a time were wholly interrupted by the breaking out of the war between Great Britain and China, and the blockade of the port of Macao. This was continued till August 1842, when a treaty of perpetual amity was concluded, by which the island of Hongkong, at the mouth of Canton river, was ceded to England, and the five ports of Canton, Amoy, Fuhchau, Ningpo and Shang- hai were opened to the commerce of Great Britain and the residence of foreigners. This most important event altered the rela- tions of this ancient people to the rest of the human race, and effectually severed the bar- riers which have hitherto prevented the in- troduction of the Gospel to the country. So soon as the treaty was published, Messrs. Shuck and Roberts from Macao, and Mr. Dean from Bangkok, removed to China and took up their residence at Hongkong ; Messrs. Dean and Shuck at the new town of Victoria, and Mr. Roberts in another part of the island at Chek-chu. Mr. Goddard remained at Bangkok prosecuting his accus- tomed labors among the Chinese population of that city till 1848, when he went to join the mission in China. Meanwhile at Bangkok both departments of the mission were committed to the care of the Siamese missionaries. Two out-sta- tions were established, one at Teng-kia-chu, and one at Bang-chang, both of which were placed under the charge of native assistants. In 1851, Rev. W. Ashmore and Mrs. 'Ash- more arrived at Bangkok as missionaries to the Chinese. Mr. Ashmore has now ac- quired the language, and is prosecuting those labors to which he was appointed. The latest reports of the mission bear witness to a somewhat more gratifying progress in both its departments. The Siamese mission- aries had before been often invited to the palace of the king for the purpose of aiding the monarch and some members of the royal family in the study of English and the me- chanic arts, and much incidental conversa- tion had been held respecting the doctrines of the Gospel. These interviews, while they have been latterly declined by the mis- sionaries, when proposed for the former ob- jects, have become more frequent for the latter object, and have led to the establish- ment of a regular system of biblical instruc- tion at the palace. The two ladies of this department of the mission. Miss Morse and Mrs. Smith, formerly Mrs. Jones, are also constantly engaged in similar teaching either at the mission school or in private. The most friendly relations are still maintained with the government, and even the Budhist priests themselves in Siam, appear less per- tinacious in their opposition to the new re- ligion than in other countries in which Budh- ism prevails. The Chinese church, which is still the only one belonging to the mission, numbers at present only twenty-six mem- bers, nine having removed to China. In ad- dition to this, and several Siamese who have been baptized, but live away from Bangkok, there were at recent dates eight additional converts who were about to be baptized. These are all Siamese. In February, 1854, Rev. R. Telford and Mr. G. H. Chandler, the printer, with their wives, sailed from the United States for Siam ; Mr. Chandler hav- ing been home on a visit for the benefit of his health, and the improvement of his ar- rangements for printing. Mr. Telford is ap- pointed to the Chinese department of the mission. When they arrive at their stations the two departments will be nearly equally supplied, though neither will possess a mis- sionary force at all adequate to the work which may be advantageously undertaken. The prospects of the mission — though pros- pects are often illusory — are thought to be more encouraging than at any former period. The mission is organized in one station at Bangkok, and four out-stations in the towns of the neighboring country. It embraces in 676 SIBSAGAR— SIEKRA LJilONE. the Siamese department Eev. S. G. Smith and Mr. G. H. Chandler, with their wives, and Miss Morse a teacher, and in the Chi- nese department Rev. Messrs. Ashmore and Telford and their \^ives, and four native as- sistants who are employed in both depart- ments. STATISTICS FOR 1854. 1 station, 4 out-stations, 4 missionaries, 5 female assistants; 9 missionaries and as- sistants ; 4 native preachers and assistants ; 1 church, 35 members ; 2 boarding schools, 21 pupils ; 2 day-schools, 20 pupils ; total of schools 4, and 41 pupils. — W. Gammell. American Board. — Messrs. Abeel and Tomlin spent some time in Bangkok in 1831, and again Mr. Abeel in 1832. Messrs. Robin- son and Johnson, with their wives, arrived July 23, 1834, and Doctor and Mrs. Bradley on the 18th of July, 1835, with a printing- press, and Siamese type. Mr. Caswell after- wards joined the mission. The missionary work was prosecuted here by the Board until 1848 ; but without any marked results. That year, in consequence of a change of sentiment on the part of Doctor Bradley and Mr. Caswell, a separation took place between them and the Board. And, on the matter coming up at the meeting of the Board, the discontinuance of the mission was recom- mended, and the Prudential Committee after- wards took action accord ingly . Messrs. Brad- ley and Caswell were afterwards received under the care of the American Missionary Association, and the mission premises were transferred to that body. For a full account of the causes which led to these results, the reader is referred to the report of the Board and of the Association for 1848. American Missionary Association. — In October, 1849, the Association ^ent out Doc- tor Bradley, Rev. L. B. Lane, M. D., Prof J. Silsby, with their wives, who in due time arrived at Bangkok, and entered upon the missionary service. In 1853, the executive committee authorized the opening of a new station in Siam, and they speak hopefully of the future prospects of the mission. The present missionary force is two ordained mis- sionaries, with their wives. SIBSAGOR : A town in Assam, — one of the stations of the Assam mission of the Am. Baptist Union. , SIBERIA : See Tartary and Siberia. SIERRA LEONE: A colonial establish- ment of Great Britain, on the west coast of Africa, consisting of a peninsula about 25 miles in length, north and south, washed by the Atlantic on the north-west and south, and partly bounded on the east by a bay formed by the Sierra Leone river. The population, consisting chiefly of liberated slaves, amounted, in 1847, to 41,735. Free- town, the capital, has 10,580 inhabitants. The peninsula consists principally of a range of conical mountains, from 2000 to 3000 feet in height, surrounded by a belt of level ground, from one to five miles in breadth. The location, for Europeans or Americans, is unhealthy, though not more so than the French and Portuguese settlements in other parts of Western Africa. The chief charac- teristic is its extreme humidity. More rain fell there in two days of August, 1838, than in Britain throughout the entire year. This colony was founded in 1787. About 1200 free negroes, who, having joined the royal standard in the war of the American Revolution, took refuge, at the termination of the contest, in Nova Scotia, were conveyed to Sierra Leone, in 1792. To these were added the Maroons from .Jamaica : and since the legal abolition of the slave trade, the negroes taken in the captured vessels, and liberated, have been carried to the solony. The constant influx of these poor heathen Africans has materially tended to retard the improvement of the colony. A large pro- portion, however, are enjoying the means of moral and religious instruction, under the direction of the missionaries of the Church and other missionary Societies. (See Africa, Western, under the heads of Church Mission- ary Society, and Wesleyan Missionary So- ciety.) Many of the colored people brought from Nova Scotia had there been converted, under the labors of missionaries who were associated with Lady Huntingdon. For more than sixty years they have existed as a distinct religious body, under the name of the " Connection of the Countess of Hunting- don." Simple faith and earnest prayerful- ness have distinguished them from the be- ginning, and sustained them under many and heavy trials. They have now forty-eight preachers and exhorters, and more than fifteen hundred members in church fellow- ship ; they have also eleven chapels and several schools. Aid has seldom been re- ceived by them from any quarter. They have all along maintained a steadfast devo- tion to the welfare of their countrymen. Their attention has been directed to .several localities in and around the colony where the people have no Christian teachers, and seve- ral tribes have invited them to send them teachers. By means of some assistance from England, they have sent out two ministers and several teachers, and it is expected that others will speedily follow them. Rev. E. J. Pierce, in a letter dated Jan- uary 11, 1854, states that Rev. E. Jones, principal of a seminary for the education of young men for the ministry, has 16 students, who read Hebrew quite as well as the ave- rage of students in the senior class in our own theological seminaries. They also read the Greek Testament, and seemed to under- stand the structure of the language. SOCIETY FOR THE PROPAGATION OF THE GOSPEL. 677 Freetown is the chief city of Sierra Leone ; in which the "Wesleyana have 17 chap- els, 1 out-station for preaching, 5 missiona- ries and assistants, 4 catechists, 27 day- school teachers, 71 Sunday-school teachers, 67 local preachers, 4,213 church members, 256 on trial, 12 Sunday-schools, 665 scholars, 11 day-schools, 1400 day-scholars; 2,005 scholars in all; number of attendants on public worship, 7,534. The Baptists have 2 churches. SIMLA: A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society among the hills, between the Sutlej and Jumna, situated near Saba- thoo, and elevated 7,200 feet above the level of the sea. It is a sanatorium for invalids from the plains of India, a retreat for the civil and military ofBcers, and a place of fashionable resort. The number of English houses is about 200. The country around it contains a numerous population. SIMAO: One of the Molucca Islands, in the Indian Archipelago. SINGAPORE: A small island at the southern extremity of the Malay peninsula, including the town of the same name. In 1836, it contained a population of 29,984, of whom 13,749 were Chinese settlers, and 9,632 Malays. The town of Singapore is situated on the south side of the island. Its central part is occupied with the dweUings of the merchants, and the military canton- ments. The Malay quarter is at the east, and the principal Chinese commercial quar- ter at the west extremity. The junks from China bring annually a large number of Chi- nese settlers. Most of the artizans, laborers, agriculturists, and shopkeepers, are Chinese. Singapore was occupied, for a number of years before the opening of the Five Ports, as a Chinese mission, by a number of differ- ent societies ; but the missions there have never been very productive. SINDE : A station of the Church Mission- ary Society, a little east of Bombay. SINMAH : A town in the south of Arra- can, on the confines of Burmah ; an out-sta- tion of the Bassein mission of the American Baptist Union. SMYRNA : The principal city of Asiatic Turkey. Of the cities of the seven churches addressed in the Apocalypse, Smyrna alone can be regarded as still flourishing. The modern town, which has long been the em- porium of the Levant, contains a mixed popu- lation of about 120,000. It is a station of the mission of the Am. Board to the Arme- nians ; also of the Church Missionary Societv. SOCIETY FOR THE PROPAGATION OP THE GOSPEL IN FOREIGN PARTS : This Society received its charter from King "William III., in 1701 ; its two great objects being, " to provide for the ministrations of the Church of England in the British Colo- nies, and to propagate the Gospel among the native inhabitants of those countries. The principal efforts of this Society, however, have been directed to the British colonists, rather than to the conversion of the heathen in general ; and therefore it assumes more the character of a Home than Foreign Mis- sionary enterprise. Yet, the Society have not been backward to embrace opportunities of preaching the Gospel to the heathen. Though occasional assistance in books and money was given to Jamaica, Antigua, New- foundland, and other islands, for fourscore years, the great field of the Society's mis- sionary labor was the continent of North America. Shortly after , the establishment of the Society, missions were founded in Massachusetts, Connecticut, Rhode Island, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and the Carolinas ; and the ministers who were sent to take charge of them were the only ministers of the Church of England in vast districts. Among other missionaries of the Society, the celebrated John Wesley received an appointment and allowance, in 1735, as its first missionary in Georgia. It subse- quently extended its operations, and now has missionaries in Canada, Nova Scotia, Newfoundland, the West Indies, the East Indies, South Africa, Seychelles, Australia, Tasmania, and New-Zealand. The whole number of missionaries now maintained by the Society, in whole or in part, is 491. Be- sides this, it supports 300 Divinity students, catechists, and schoolmasters. The follow- ing table shows the location of the mission- aries : DIOCESE. KovA Scotia-, Frederickton- QUEBEO- — -< — Montreal Toronto. Rupert's Land- Nova Scotia Cape Breton Pnnce "Edward's Island New Brunswick Canada East Canada West Hudson's B'y Territory Newfoundland iNewfoundland Labrador— Jamaica-. Bermudas-, Jamaica.— Bahamas--. Barbadoes— Aktigua G-UIANA Calcutta — Madras Bombay Colombo Cape Town-. Sidney Nbwcastlb- Melbodrne- Adblaide-— New Zealand. Tasmania Tristan d'Achoka- — Bengal Madras . Bombay Ceylon Cape of G-ood Hope— - St. Heiena - Nf^w South Wales New North Wales Port Philip South Australia Western Australia New -Zealand Van Dieman's Land-— Missionariea- o s 63 40 26 42 121 1 17 3 14 4 1 1 491 678 SOCIETY ISLANDS— SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. Of this number, 74, in Canada West, are supported from the interest of the Clergy Reserve Fund, and 16, in Nova Scotia, by a Parliamentary grant. The following state- ment shows the aggregate receipts in periods of twenty years, the average annual receipts, the receipts of 1849 and 1850, and the gene- ral aggregate from the beginning : Av'ge ann. rec'pts. 1769 to 1788, £82,299 £4,114 1789 " 1808, 75,616 3,780 1809 « 1828, 386,749 19,337 1829 " 1848, 1,018,888 50,944 1849 67,489 1850 62,365 Grand Total, 1,693,406 These sums have been realized by annual subscriptions, donations, legacies, collections, dividends, Royal Letters far collections in churches, and Parliamentary grants. SOCIETY ISLANDS: A group of Is- lands in the Southern Pacific, embracing Huahine, Raiatea, Tahaa, Borabora, Maurua, Tubal, Moupiha, and Fenuaura, having a population of 10,000. SOUTHERN BAPTIST CONVENTION, Board or Missions: The Southern Baptist Convention was organized in 1845, in conse- quence of disagreement between the north- ern and southern portions of the Baptist churches on the subject of slavery, when a separate Board of Missions was constituted for the south. It held its first annual meet- ing at Richmond, Va., June 10, 1846, on which occasion its two first missionaries were designated to China. It now has a mission to China, with three stations ; and a mission to Liberia, with thirteen stations. It has also projected a mission to Central Africa, the ground of which has been sur- veyed by one of its missionaries. The whole amount received by the Board, as appears from its biennial reports, is .$118,262 22, being an annual average of .$14,782 77. SOUTH SEA ISLANDS: The islands which lie in the Pacific Ocean, south of the Equator, from their prominence in the mis- sionary operations of the present century, have become generally known as The South Sea Islands. Under this designation, we shall include, in this article, the following groups, being the field of operations in the South Sea, occupied by the London Mission- ary Society, viz. : the Georgian, Society, Aus- tral, Hervey, Navigators'' or Samoa, Pearly and Marquesas Islands ; and the Friendly and Feejee Islands, by the Wesleyan Mission- ary Society. The Georgian Islands are situated in the South Pacific Ocean between 17° and 18° south latitude, and 149° and 153° west lon- gitude. The group contains six islands. Tahiti, Eimeo, Tabiiaenanu, or Sir Charles Sander's Island, Tetuaroa, Matea, and 3Ice- tia. Tahiti is the largest of these islands, and sometimes gives name to the whole group. Tahiti was visited by Captain Cook, and from him received the name of Otaheite, but Tahiti is the name given to it by the natives. It consists of two peninsulas united by an isthmus. The largest is nearly circular, and about 20 miles in diameter. The smaller one is oval, about 16 miles long, and 8 broad. The circumference of the whole is- land is 108 miles. The interior is mountain- ous, but is surrounded by a border from 2 to 3 miles wide, of low, rich, level land, which extends from the base of the mountains to the sea. The population of Tahiti is esti- mated at about 10,000. Eimeo, or, as it is called by the natives, Moorea, is situated about 2° west of Tahiti. It is about 25 miles in circumference. The other islands though equally elevated are of smaller extent. The Society Islands include Huahine, Raiatea, Tahaa, Borabora, Maurua, TubaL Moupiha, and Fenuaura. The population of this group is supposed to be about 10,000. The Austral Islands are Raivavai, or High Island, Tubuai, Rurutu, Rimatara, and Rapa. They are situated between 22° 27' and 27° 36' south latitude, and 144° 11' and 150° 47' west longitude. The population is about 1,000. Raivavai is one of the most important is- lands of this group. It is about 20 miles in circumference, mountainous in the centre, but has considerable low land. Rapa is the most southerly of the Austral Islands. The mountains are craggy, and picturesque, and the land generally fertile. Tubuai is a small island about 12 miles in circumference and thinly peopled. Rurutu and Ramatara are small, and but little is known of either of them. The Hervey Islands are situated be- tween 19° and 21° south latitude, and 156° and 161° west longitude, and contain a pop- ulation of 16,000 or 18,000. The largest and most important island of the group is Raro- tonga. This beautiful island remained un- known until 1823. It was then discovered by the Rev. Mr. Williams, an English mis- sionary. It is a mass of mountains, many of which are high, and remarkably romantic. The island is about 30 miles in circumference, and has several good harbors for boats. Its population is about 7,000. Mangaia is 20 or 25 miles in circumfer- ence, and contains between 2,000 and 3,000 inhabitants. Atiu is about 20 miles in circumference, hilly, but not mountainous. It is a very ver- dant island, and contains nearly 2,000 inhab- itants. Aitutaki is 18 miles in circumference, and SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 679 has a population of about 2,000. The land- scapes on this island are rich and variegated. Mauke is a small, low island, discovered by Messrs. Williams and Bourne in 1823. Its former population was considerable, but when discovered it was so much reduced by repeated wars that it numbered only 300. Mitiaro is a still smaller island lying 20 miles north-west of Mauke. It has also been nearly depopulated by famine and wars, so that it contains not more than 100 inhabi- tants. Hervet/s Island is the one from which the group takes its name, which was given by Captain Cook, in honor of Captain Hervey. The Navigators' or Samoa Islands are situated between 10° and 20° south latitude, and 169° and 174° west longitude, and con- sist of eight islands, 3Ianua, Orosenga, Ofu, Tutuila, Upolu, Manono, Aborima, and Savaii. Manua is a small and almost uninhabi- ted island, circular in form, and so elevated as to be visible at a distance of 40 or 50 miles. Ovbsenga and Ofu are two small islands, separated from each other by a narrow chan- nel. Tutuila is about 50 miles west of Orosenga, It is from 80 to 100 miles in circumference. Upolu is between 150 and 200 miles in circumference. The mountains on this is land are very high, and covered with verdure to their summits. Manono is about 5 miles in circumference, add is attached to Upolu by a coral reef Aborima, is a small island about 2 miles m circumference, situated half way between Manono and Savaii. It received its name, which signifies the hollow of the hand, from its shape. It is supposed to be the crater of an extinct volcano. Savaii, the largest island of the group, is about 250 miles in circumference. The mountains are very high, and visible at a distance of 600 or 700 miles. With the ex- ception of the Sandwich Islands, this group is the largest and most populous of the nu- merous clusters in the Paciflc at which mis- sions have been commenced. Its population is estimated at 160,000. The Paumotu, or Pearl Islands, are sit- uated between 17° and 23° south latitude, and 139° and 145° west longitude. The group consists of a large number of small, low islands. They have been called by differ- ent names, as, the Labyrinth, the Pearl Is- lands, Paumotu, the Palliser Islands, and the Dangerous Archipelago. Some of the islands have received the name of Orescent, Bow, Harp, and Chain, which have been regarded as indicative of their shape. The population is 3,000 or 4,000. The Marquesas Islands are situated about 7° or 8° north of the Pearl Islands, and extend from 7° to 10° south latitude, and from 138° to 140° west longitude. They consist of two clusters. The southern clus- ter contains five islands. They were called Marquesas by Alvaro Mendano, a Spanish navigator, in honor of his patron. Marques Mendoza, viceroy of Peru. The northern group also, consists of five islands, and as it is distinct from the other cluster, it has sometimes been called by another name. Both groups, however, are usually designa- ted by the common name Marquesas. The geographical extent of the united groups is inferior to that of the Georgian and Society Islands, but the population is supposed to be much greater. Most of the South Sea Islands are sur- rounded, at a distance of from one to two miles from the shore, by a coral reef, or belt of coral rock, several yards in width. Against this reef the waves of the Pacific are constantly dashing, and being impeded in their course, rise from 10 to 14 feet above the surface of the reef, and thus form a beau- tiful liquid arch. From the outer edge, the reefs shelve away underneath into deep hol- lows. In landing from canoes, when the sea is high, there is danger of upsetting, and being forced by the violence of the waves into these awful caverns, from which escape would be impossible. The water within the reef is placid and transparent, and at the bottom may be seen coral of every shape and color, among which fishes of various hues and sizes are constantly sporting. In most of these reefs there is an opening large enough to admit vessels, through which a stream of water enters the ocean. The climate, though hotter than that of Europe, is more temperate than in those parts of South America whose latitude is the same. Though the distance of the groups from the equator is, on an average, only 17°, they are surrounded by avast ex- panse of water, and enjoy almost daily a re- freshing land and sea breeze. Still, the heat in the low lands is constant, and often ex- cessive. The changes, on the other hand, are neither sudden nor violent, and the warmth of the climate, though debilitating to Eu- ropeans, occasions no inconvenience to the natives. The islands are for the most part hilly, often mountainous, and on some of them the mountains rise to an immense height. The sides of the mountains are covered with ver- dure, and at their bases are spread fertile and luxuriant valleys. It would be difficult for the strongest imagination to conceive an earthly paradise more lovely than is to be found in some portions of the South Seals- lands. Freed from the usual power of the tropical heat, and fanned by the soft breezes of a perpetual spring, these delightful regions present to the eye extensive , a STATIONS. > . a 1 1 ii i» e^ i^ 1 t Savah : 1 Lafaasaleleaga 1 21! 260 14 Mat-autu ■ 1 170 32 16 457 Sapapalii 1 280 33 1 33 Salalua J 1 20 14'/ 46 320 Upolu : "1 8 Apia ii iio 13 300 Fasitootai 9 42 14 8 229 Malua 69 2 123 Ulemoega. .,,. .. ,. 32 Taluafata 53 218 Talealili 77 Lepa (1848) ... J 34 220 668 1 2 9 64 10 8 460 TUTCILA : 1 Pago-Pago .... y ii 2i2 6 7 400 Leone ) 20 286 476 Manua: 1 120 15 143 2141 ]63 66 SfiSO 45 Several stations, where churches existed be- fore the war, are not mentioned in the latest reports, and probably have been broken up ; and some of the stations noticed above have a number of out>stations. Near Lepa, for in- stance, there are 40 villages, with a population of 15,000. It is impracticable, from the im- perfect returns, to ascertain the number of native teachers, or to distinguish between teachers and preachers. The number is un- doubtedly much larger than appears in the table. So also in regard to the schools, many of the stations only reporting the number of scholars, not of schools. Aiistrat Islmidi.- — In 1821, a fatal epidemic prevailed at Rurutu, and Auura, a young chief, with some of his companions, fled from the island, and remained for some time at Tubuai,, about 100 miles distant. On their return they were drifted about for 3 weeks, and after the loss of some of their crew, they landed at Maurua, the most westerly of the Society Is- lands. Here they were shown the demolished temples, prostrate altars, and broken idols, and informed that the inhabitants of these islands had become worshipers of Jehovah, the one living and true God. They immedi- ately determined to proceed to Borabora, to see the missionaries, and from this place they went to Baiatea. They were filled with won- der at what they saw. On the Sabbath they were conducted to the chapel, and beheld with astonishment the as- sembled multitude. The songs of praise in which the people joined, and the sermon from one of the missionaries, excited the deepest in- terest in their minds. They were at once con- vinced of the superiority of the Christian re- ligion, and desired to be instructed in the knowledge of the true God. They became pupils in the school, and soon learned to read and spell correctly. Auura was exceedingly, diligent in learning, and made very rapid pro- gress. In a little more than three months he was able to read and write well, and had com- mitted to memory the greater part of the cate- chism. Having publicly renounced their idols and professed themselves worshipers of Jehovah, the strangers became anxious to re- turn to their own island, that they might carry to their countrymen the knowledge of the true God and of his Son Jesus Christ. An oppor- tunity occurring for them to go in a vessel bound for England, Auura and his friends- were delighted with the prospect of returning to their country, but they objected to going to- their " land of darkness without a light in their hand." Hastening to the missionaries, the chief earnestly requested them to send in- structers to his native land. On assembling the people and inquiring who among them would go, two of the native deacons, Maha- mene and Puna, came forward and said, " Here are we ; send us." Every member of the church at Eaiatea brought something as a roe SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. testimony of his affeclion, which they presents ed to the teachers. The missionaries supplied them with elementary books and a few copies of the Gospel in the Tahitian language, from which their own does not essentially differ. Thus equipped, the Eaiatean Christians em- barked on the 5th of July, 1821, with Auura and his friends, and on the third day after their departure arrived at Burutu, where Auura was welcomed by the remnant of his countrymen. The tidings of his return soon spread through the island, and the whole popu- lation came to offer their congratulations. On the night of his arrival, Auura convoyed his own idol on board the ship in which he had returned, and on the following day convened a meeting of his countrymen. The little band of Christians entered the assembly, and Auura demanding attention, informed them of the incidents of his voyage, and the islands he had visited, and of the knowledge he had obtained respecting the true God, the destiny of man, and the means of happiness in a future state. He declared that the god whom they worship- ed was the foundation of all deceit, that their idols were mere images, and their priests im- postors. He therefore proposed to his country- men to follow his example by renouncing their false religion, and adopting that which would lead to immortality. The priests opposed this startling proposition, but the king and chiefs replied, " We will receive the word of life ; we will burn the evij spirits ; let every thing made by our hands as an object of worship be totally charred in the fire." An aged man, who had listened to Auura with deep interest, arose and said, " Behold you say, Auura, that we have souls ; till now, we never knew that man possessed a soul." The chief then introduced the two missionaries from Raiatea; stated their object in coming to Rurutu, and recommended .them" to the kind attentions of the people. The missionaries then briefly ad dressed the meeting, and concluded by recom- mending to the chiefs to provide an entertain- ment the next day of a number of kinds of food which were considered as sacred, and of which it was thought a female could not par- take without instaat death. The feast was accordingly prepared, and Auura, his wife and friends, with the Raiatean Christians, unitedly partook of the sacred food. The chiefs and people stood around, expecting to see those who had thus openly violated the law of the gods, either fall into convulsions or expire in agony. But when they saw that no harm be- fel them, they simultaneously exclaimed, " The priests have deceived us," and hastening to their temples, they hurled the idols from the places they had so long occupied, burnt to the ground their sacred buildings, and then pro- ceeded to the demolition of every marae in the island. In October, 1822, the island was visited by Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet, who found the results of a little more than one year's exertion surprising. Many had learned to read, and some to write. The teachers had erected neat plastered dwellings for themselves, and under their direction the people had built a chapel eighty feet long and thirty-six feet wide. The railing around the table, in front of the pulpit and by the side of the stairs, was composed of the handles of warriors' spears. " The people here," says a missionary, " learn war no more, but all submitting to the Prince of Peace, have cast away their instruments of cruelty with their idols." In 1823, Rurutu was visited by Mr. "Wil- liams. He found that the industry and im- provement of the people had been progressive. " Many of the chiefs were dressed in European clothing, and all were attired in the most de- cent and becoming manner. In the house of God, no congregation could have behaved with more propriety Not a vestige of idola- try was to be seen, not a god was to bo found in the island." In 1825, the Falcon, a large American ship, commanded by Captain Chase, was wrecked at Rurutu. The chief officer and crew remained some time on the island, and the captain on his departure left the following testimony with the native teachers : " The natives gave us all the assistance in their power, from the time the ship struck to the present moment. The first day, while landing the things from the ship, they were put into the hands of the na- tives, and not a single article of clothing was taken from any man belonging to the ship, though they had it in their power to have plundered us of every thing. Since I have lived on shore, myself, officers, and people have received the kindest treatment from the natives, for which I shall ever be thankful." Captain Chase afterwards rewarded the na- tives for their assistance, by giving them a portion of the oil. They immediately formed a native missionary society, and contributed a considerable part of the oil in aid of the funds of the Parent Society. It was afterwards sold for £66, and the proceeds sent to the Society in London. In 1829, this island was again visited by Mr. Williams, who found that the people, although their teachers had left them, continued to ob- serve all their religious services, and that Auura ■ officiated as minister. During the previous year, they had contributed to the Missionary Society "750 bamboos of cocoanuf^oil. They earnestly requested that another teacher might be sent them, saying that " one-handed people were very good, but that two-handed people were much better." On the return of Auura to his native island, he found there a number of the inhabitants of Rimatara. _ These followed the example of the Rurutuans in destroying their idols and receiv- ing Christian instruction. They shortly after- ward sailed for their own island, and induced SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 707 many of their countrymen to abandon their idols and embrace Christianity. In June, 1822, two native Christians were sent from Borabora, to instruct the inhabitants of Eimatara in reading, writing, and the first elements of religion. These teachers labored with so much diligence and success that, when the island was visited by Mr. Williams in Oc- tober, 1828, the inhabitants had renounced their idols, and were living in harmony with their teachers. A chapel had been erected for the worship of the true God, which was opened during Mr. Williams's visit. The fe- males were neatly dressed in white native cloth, with bonnets which the teachers' wives had taught them to make. The entire population were receiving instruction, and the school for children contained one hundred and thirty scholars. In 182,'), Eimatara was visited by Mr. Bourne, who was delighted with the ap- pearance of the station, and in 1819, Pomare, king of Tahiti, left a man on the island of Baivavai, who, though ignorant and immoral himself, undertook to teach the people ; and in 1821, when visited by Oapt. Henry, they had made such improvement of this poor instruc- tion that the renunciation of idolatry had be- come general throughout the land ; and he says of them, " The very quiet, devout, and orderly manner in which they conducted them- selves, not only in church but during the Sab- bath, excited my highest admiration. They sent a request for suitable teachers, and in 1822, three native missionaries were sent from Eimeo. In 1826, a Christian church was formed among this people, and sixteen persons, after examination, were admitted to its privi- leges. The inhabitants of the neighboring island of Tubuai, hearing that the people of Eurutu and other islands had renounced their idols and embraced Christianity, sent a deputation to Tahiti, requesting teachers and books. Two native teachers, with a supply of useful arti- cles, embarked, in June, 1822, for the island of Tubuai, accompanied by Mr. Nott. On arriv- ing at Tubuai, they found the whole population engaged in war and on the eve of a battle. They went immediately to the king, acquainted him with the design of their visit, and re- quested that hostilities might be suspended. The king expressed a willingness to accede to their proposal, provided the consent of the op- posing party could be obtained. A chief having been despatched with a message of peace,~his proposal was accepted, and the next morning, the two parties met, and peace was concluded. The chiefs then embraced each other, and the warriors, perceiving the recon- ciliation of their leaders, dropped their imple- ments of war, and rushing into each other's arms, presented a scene of joy, far different from the conflict in which they expected to be engaged. The next day, the inhabitants of Tubuai were invited to attend public worship, when Mr. Nott delivered the first Christian dis- course to which they had ever listened. In 1826, when this island was visited by Mr. Da- vies, the profession of Christianity had become general throughout the island, and the chiefs and people were assisting the teachers in erecting comfortable dwellings, and a substantial house for public worship. In the year 1825, Rapa was visited by a vessel from Tahiti, which on its return carried two of the inhabitants to that island, who were astonished and delighted at the strange objects presented to their notice. Having attended the schools and places of public worship, and learned the alphabet, they soon after returned to their own island, accompanied by two Tahi- tians, to whom the inhabitants became so much attached, that they were invited by the chiefs and people to reside among them permanently. In January, 1826, two Tahitian teachers with their wives, accompanied by a schoolmaster and a mechanic, sailed from Tahiti for Eapa. They carried with them not only spelling-books and copies of the Tahitian translation of the Scriptures, but also a variety of useful tools, seeds, and-plants, together with timber for a chapel. Mr. Davies, one of the senior mission- aries at Tahiti, accompanied the teachers to their new station. The chiefs received them with every mark of respect, and promised them protection and aid. On the first Sabbath after their arrival, Mr. Davies preached in the Tahi- tian language to a number of the natives, who seemed impressed with the services. This island was visited in 1829 by two missionaries, who found that four chapels, in which religious instruction was statedly given, had been erected at different stations. The people manifested an increasing interest in religious things, and their improvement exceeded the expectations of their visiters. TABDLAK VIBW. Raivavai Tubuai Rurutu Rimatara Totals Church Members. Additions re- ported the last year. 40 36 • 36 47 11 19 7 169 87 The work has continued to be carried on by native agency alone, except the occasional vis- its of missionaries ; and, owing to their remote situation, it is seldom that any intelligence is received from the mission. Mr. Eodgerson visited Eaivavai and Tubuai in 1838, and Mr. Orsmond, Eurutu and Eimatara, in 1839 ; when they observed many signs of improve- ment. In May and June, 1846, they were again visited by Mr. Barff, of Huahine, who was greatly encouraged by what he witnessed. f08 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. Peace and purity prevailed among tlie native believers ; and the native agents were faithful and zealous in their work, and their labors ap- peared to have been crowned with the divine blessing. The population of these islands is email, probably not exceeding 1,000. Paumotu or Pearl Islands. — In the early part of the reigu of Pomare II., king of Tahiti, many of the inhabitants of the Paumotu or Pearl Islands fled to the Georgian Islands for security daring a war. They were protected and hospitably entertained by Pomare, and when the Tahitians renounced idolatry, they also cast away the idols they had brought with them, and placed themselves under the instruc- tion of the missionaries. In 1827, they re- turned to their own islands, and immediately after their arrival, Moorea, one of the number, who had learned to read and had been hope- fully converted, began to instruct his country- men. He met with such success, that with the exception of the inhabitants of one district, the whole population agreed to renounce heathenism. Moorea was subsequently charged with having deceived his countrymen, in the accounts he had given of the change at Tahiti, and, to save his life, was obliged to leave the island. But when the people afterwards be- came convinced that they had accused him falsely, they burnt their idols and demolished their temples. Several hundreds of them soon after sailed to Tahiti, a distance of three hun- dred miles, for the purpose of obtaining books and receiving instruction, and, before they left the island, several of them were admitted to Christian fellowship. Early in the year 1822, Moorea and Teraa, another Christian native, were publicly set apart as teachers, and soon after sailed for Anaa, or Chain Island. Shortly afterwards, a canoe from this island arrived at Tahiti, bringing the pleasing intelli- gence that the inhabitants were willing to re- ceive Christianity ; that war, cannibalism, and idolatry had ceased, and that a place of wor- ship was building in evei-y district. Two other native teachers were afterwards sent to these islands. Mr. Orsmond visited Chain Island in 1839 ; where he ad ings six times a day. We could not speak five minutes before all were in tears, and numbers prostrated before the Lord, absorbed in deep concern about salvation. Frequently their words were, ' Praise the Lord ! I never knew Jesus until now, now I do know him, he has taken away all my sins ; I love Jesus Kalaise.' Some were so filled with joy that they could not contain themselves, but cried out for ' hearts to praise the Lord.' This has not been like the dew descending upon the tender herb, but as the spring-tide, or as the overflowing of some mighty river ; all the mounds of sin have been swept away ; the Lord has bowed the whole island to his sway. We have to hold tM'o prayer meetings daily. We have ascertained that the total number in society, is 3066 : and the number converted, for the most part, with- in the past six weeks, is 2262." "In the morning," says Mr. Tucker, of the Habai Islands, " we repaired to the house of prayer as soon as it was light. The Lord made ' the place of his feet glorious,' the stout-hearted began to tremble, there was a mighty shaking among the dry bones. As soon as service be- gan, the cries of the people commenced — what a solemn but joyful sight to behold ! One thous- and or more individuals bowed before the Lord, weeping at the feet of Jesus, and praying in agony of soul ! I never saw such distress, never heard such cries for mercy, or such con- fessions of sin before. These things were uni- versal, from the greatest chiefs in the land to the meanest individuals, and of both sexes, old and young. The Lord heard the sighing of the prisoners, he bound up many a broken-hearted sinner in that meeting, and proclaimed liberty to many a captive. We were engaged nearly the whole day in this blessed work. I attended four services and witnessed hundreds of precious souls made happy by a sense of the Saviour's love, on that day and the preceding evening. We have not yet received an account from all the islands of those who have obtained peace with God during this revival, but from the num- ber already brought in by the leaders, we be- lieve that upwards of 2000 were converted to God in the course of a fortnight." — Miss. No- tices, Vol. VIII., p. 149. Not the least remarkable of the converts was Taufaahau, the king both of the Habai and Vavau Islands, and who, at his baptism, was called George, while his queen was named Charlotte. They both adorned their Christian profession, and M'cre truly zealous, devoted per- sons. They both met classes and superintended schools. The king is a very excellent local preacher, and never sought to be preferred be- fore others, but went wherever he was sent, fulfilling his appointments with the greatest cheerfulness. Mr. Tucker, having one day in the course of conversation, stated his views on the, subject of slavery, and mentioned the emancipation of the negroes in the West In- dies, he (King George,) said several of his ser- vants were slaves, having been given to him by his father and other chiefs ; but that he would liberate them that very day. In the evening, he accordingly called them all together and set them at liberty. The scene was very afiecting. He told them of the many evils which were practised among them during the reign of heathenism, and spoke of the love and mercy of God, in sending the Gospel to them with all its attendant blessings. He told them how much he loved them, and then said, " You are no longer slaves : you are your own masters, and may go and reside where you please." SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 717 They all burst into tears and wept aloud ; the king himself and his queen could not refrain from tears. Two of them begged to be allow- ed to live and die with him ; but he would not consent to their remaining as slaves. " If you wish," said he, " to reside a little longer with us, well ; if you desire to go and dwell in any other island, just please yourselves." — Miss. Not. Vol. yill. p. 315, 31T, 320. The missionaries were indebted to the king for the erection of >., very large chapel in Habai. It was 110 feet by 45 inside, and was expected to be capable of holding all the in- habitants of the island. It was probably the largest and most elegant building ever erected in the Friendly Islands, and was a fine monu- ment of the zeal and good taste of the king. It was built in little more than two months, and for several weeks there were about a thou- sand people engaged in the work. Most of the chiefs were employed in plaiting kafa or cinet, while the common people did the heavier work. The pillars and other timber used in the frame work were brought from other islands. The labor was regularly divided among the inhabitants of the whole group, and each party tried to excel the others in their workmanship. As they had no nails the timbers were fastened with kafa, made of the fibres of the cocoaruut husks, and dyed black, red, and other colors. These colors they in- terweave with almost mathematical accuracy, which makes their work appear to great ad- vantage. The king gave several beautifully carved spears which were left to him by his predecessors, and had often been used in war, to be converted into rails for the communion- table, and two beautifully carved clubs, which were formerly worshiped as gods, were now fixed at the bottom of the pulpit^stairs. At the opening of the chapel, the natives assembled in great numbers from all the islands, on many of which the sick and aged only were left. On this occasion, the king delivered a very appropriate sermon from Solomon's prayer at the dedication of the temple. King George is one of nature's noblemen : he is six feet four inches high, well made, with an intelli- gent and benevolent countenance. Commander Wilkes, of the " United States' Exploring Expedition," describes his late re- ception by the Friendly Islanders in terras of great interest. He says, " On the morning of the 24th, I landed at Nukualofa with all the officers that could be spared from other duties. We were received on the beach by Mr. Tucker, one of the missionaries, and were at once sur- rounded by a large number of natives. It was impossible not to be struck with the great difference between these people and those we had left in New-Zealand ; nothing of the mo- rose and savage appearance, so remarkable there, was seen. Here all was cheerfulness and gayety'; all appeared well fed, and well formed, with full faces and muscles. The number of children particularly attracted our notice, in striking contrast with the New-Zealand group, where but a few were seen. We wait- ed some minutes for King George. When he made his appearance, I could not but admire him ; he is upwards of six feet in height, ex- tremely well proportioned and athletic ; his limbs are rounded and full ; his features regu- lar and manly, with a fine open countenance, and sensible face ; all which were seen to the greatest advantage. He at once attracted all eyes ; for, on approaching, every movement showed that he was in the habit of command- ing those about him. With unassuming dig- nity he quietly took his scat." King George is now about fifty years old. He was converted during the great revival in Tonga, in July and August, 1834. He suc- ceeded to the sovereignty of all the islands in 1845. He has thrown the whole weight of his influence in favor of Christianity. Mr. Lawry says, " What God declares to be wrong, he causes to be refrained from, or punished when done ; but religion, in all its operations, he leaves, where God leaves it, between God and the conscience." In February, 1835, Mr. Peter Turner, accom- panied by some of the natives, sailed from Vavau for Niua^Tubu-tabu, or Keppel's Island, about 170 miles distant. After the arrival of Mr. Turner, a work similar to that which had lately occurred in the Habai and Yavau Islands, commenced here. Mr. Turner remain- ed on the island between three and four months. He baptized 514 adults and 200 children, united the former into a Methodist Society, and married 240 persons, while in the schools there were 557 scholars, male and female, old and young. He now left them under the care of the native teachers. Mr. Thomas, on a sub- sequent visit to the islands of Niua-Tubu-tabu and Niuo-fo-ou, baptized 778 adults and 403 children, forming, with those previously bap- tized, the greater part of the population. In 1836, auxiliary Missionary Societies were formed in the islands of Habai and Vavau. Great numbers of the natives were present at the meetings for their formation, and their speeches were deeply interesting. The con- trasts which they drew between their past and present condition, were affecting. The sub- scribers were very numerous, and included per- sbns of all ages, and of all ranks, from the king down to the poorest of the people. In the absence of a circulating medium, their con- tributions consisted chiefly of articles of native manufacture. The most valuable of these were fine mats, which many of the chiefs presented. A few gave pigs, many gave native cloth, some native fish-hooks, others oils, yams, ar- row-root, tortoise-shell, baskets, ornaments, &c. The king was particularly zealous in carrying on these auxiliary societies, and on one occasion he and his queen gave a dona- tion of ten sovereigns, which had been received 718 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. by King George as a present from the captain of an Bnglisfi war ship. In March, 1839, King George promufgated, in a large assembly of the chiefs and people, a code of laws, which had been drawn up for their government, and appointed judges to hear and decide all cases of complaint which might arise among them. No one, whether chief or private person, was now to take the law into his own hand ; but must bring every matter of importance before the judges. It is evident, from the character of this code, that the missionaries had some hand in its formar tion. And, although it may not be free from defects, yet its adoption was an important step in the progress of civilization, laying the foundation for the security of life and property, and for the future improvement and happiness of the people. In Tongataboo, Christianity had made much less progress than in Habai and Vavan Islands. There heathenism had all along maintained itself in vigor, particularly in the district of Hihifo, ■where the missionaries originally settled, but which, after two or three years, they left in consequence of the opposition they encoun- tered. Tonga was, in fact, the centre of the superstition of the Friendly Isles. Its very name, Tongataboo, or Tonga, the holy or con- secrated, would seem to mark it out as a strong- hold of the ancient religion. Though many of the natives, particularly at Nukualofa, em- braced Christianity, yet there were thousands throughout the island who clung to idolatry, and from time to time they manifested deter- mined hostility to the Christians. In June, 1840, the heathen chiefs of Tonga broke out in rebellion. Capt. Croker, of the British ship Favorite, happening to arrive just at this time, united the force under his com- mand to that of King George, in the hope of bringing the quarrel to a speedy conclusion. But he, with two of his ofiBcers, were killed, and the first lieutenant and 19 men danger- ously wounded. By this unfortunate occur- rence the mission was broken up for a time, but was resumed again at the restoration of peace. Of late years, Christianity has greatly ex- tended itself in the Friendly Islands, notwith- standing the opposition of heathenism and popery. Quite lately the character and actions of the Christian kmg of these islands has at- tracted considerable public attention. Tonga, the principal island, has been again the scene of a rebellion, instigated by a few chiefs who still adhere to heathenism. The 'rebels were aided by Eomish priests, who, for some years, have had a settlement on the island. An ec- clesiastic, said to be a bishop, was prominent in the quarrel, and went in search of a French ship of war to chastise King George. Fears were excited that there might be a repetition, in the Friendly Isles, of those acts of despoti'; tyranny practiced by the same power in Tahiti a few years ago. In the interval many prayers were offered up to God in behalf of King George and his people. During the bishop's absence, the British war ship Calliope, com- manded by Sir E. Home, came into the harbor of Tonga. Meanwhile King George's efforts for suppressing the rebellion were successful ; the rebels surrendered, and were magnani- mously pardoned, and the war was brought to a happy termination. The king by his for- bearance and generosity, in the hour of tri- umph, and by the practical wisdom of other parts of his conduct, has eminently adorned his Christian profession. The chiefs of the fort called Houmd, having first notified their intention to submit, a day was appointed to receive this submission ; and as the custom of the nation is to destroy the vanquished, the missionaries thought it right to be present at the ceremony, that they might intercede for the captives, if needful. But their good offices were not required. The king caused it to be proclaimed that he did not intend to take from these chiefs either their lives, their dig- nity, or their lands, but that he " freely for- gave them for the sake of lotu alone." The clemency of Christianity, which thus shone so conspicuously in the king's conduct towards the. rebels is the more marked when we re- member that they had barbarously murdered some of his own relatives, among the many victims that fell into their hands. His con- duct on this occasion won the hearts and alle- giance of even his bitterest enemies. The pardoned chiefs returned from the assembly to the king's house, and that same night re- nounced their heathenism, and at the family altar of King George, for the first time in their lives, they bowed their knees to the Lord Je- .sus Christ. More than 100 persons followed their example when Mr. West visited the fort a few days afterward. On the 16th of August the remaining fortress surrendered, and was destroyed ; and mercy again triumphed in sav- ing the lives of the vanquished. "The Komish priests who had persisted in remaining in it to the last, notwithstanding the remonstrances addressed to them both by the king and Sir E. Home, escaped without injury, and their pro- perty was saved from destruction by the per- sonal exertions of the king and the baronet, who went through the midst of burning houses and falling trees to save their goods. Thus did Providence guard this worthy king, and reward his Christian courage and consistency and mercy. Sir E. Home was surprised and delighted, and afterwards said to one of the missionaries, " I saw the noble and Chris- tian conduct of King George. He can only be compared to Alfred the Great, of blessed memory. He is worthy of being called a king. He is the greatest man in these seas." These events took place in August, 18.'i2. In November, Sir E. Home returned in the Calliope to the Friendly Isles, that he might SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 719 learn the result of the visit of the French ship of war. He seemed very anxious that no harm should happen to the Friendly Island- ers or the king. His visit was an occasion of much joy to all parties. However, the French ship had not arrived. But on the 12th of No- vember, two days after Sir B. Home left Ton- ga, the Moselle made her appearance. Her commander. Captain Belland, was commis- sioned by the Popish governor of Tahiti to inquire into certain complaints lodged against King George by the captain of a French whaler, the Grustave of Havre-de-Grace, and also by the Romish priests residing in Tonga. The king obeyed the summons of the captain, and went on board the Moselle, taking with him his state paper box, in which he had copies of all his correspondence, especially that with the Romish priests. This correspondence he laid before the captain, who viewed the king and his papers with astonishment. At the close of their long interview, which lasted five hours, and throughout which the king con- ducted himself with the greatest Christian propriety, the French captain expressed him- self entirely satisfied, and stated to the king that " the French government, through him, acknowledged George as king of the Friendly Islands ; and that the only condition he would impose was that, if any Frenchman chose to reside in his dominions, he should be protect- ed, so long as he obeyed the laws ; and that if any of the king's subjects chose to become Roman Catholics they should be allowed to do so." To these conditions the king agreed, and the dreaded French war ship took her de- parture, the captain declaring that he " had seen and conversed with many chiefs in the South Seas, but that he had not seen one to be compared in knowledge and ability, in courage and dignity, to George, the king of the Friendly Islands." And thus this man, who 29 years ago was a savage, noted through the South Seas for his bravery and fierceness of disposition, has be- come " a wonder unto many" — a monument of the enlightening and transforming power of the Gospel of Christ. In 1844, he lost his peace, and became a " backslider in heart ;" but it was only for a short time. Publicly, at a love feast, he penitently acknowledged his fall, and immediately found peace anew, and ever since he has maintained a walk conform- able to the Gospel. The war, thus brought to a close, had an unfavorable influence on the mission ; but much is hoped for from the moral influence of the events connected with its termination. In the month of October a great council was held, at which all the ruling chiefs were pres- ent, and many important regulations were enacted. The following extracts will speak for themselves : " The system of tabu is abol- ished. All slaves are hereby set at liberty ; and no man is to keep a slave or other person in bondage. All persons are to dress modestly and becomingly. All crime will be punished ; and the laws already printed are to bo en- forced throughout the land. All children are to be sent to school, for on this depends the future welfare of our nation." In no other mission of the Wesleyans has so large a number of native preachers been raised up to proclaim the Gospel to their country- men as in this mission. Nearly 500 of the Friendly Islanders are regularly licensed to preach. In this great result, the institution for training a native ministry has exerted an important influence, and was early brought into operation. The printing-press also is worked with great efficiency, and so is also their system of day schools, in which are nearly 8,000 children. Altogether this mission is worthy to stand by the side of that to the Sandwich Isles, as a witness before the world of what the religion of the cross can effect, even among a savage people, in the short space of thirty years. The Rev. Robert Young, the deputation lately sent from London to visit these mis- sions, has juist returned, and in his report bears the most delightful testimony to what the religion of Christ has done for this peo- ple. Among other things he says : " With the exception of about 50 persons, the en- tire population have embraced Christianity. It is true they have not all felt its saving power, yet they have all been more or less benefited by its influence, and some thousands of. them have experienced its transforming power, and are now, by the grace of God, adorning the doctrine of God their Saviour. There were many things that delighted me during my visit to that interesting land. I was pleased with the reverence of the people for the Lord's day. On that day nothing is heard or seen infringing upon its sacred right. If people are beheld coming from their habi- tations, it is that they may go to the house of the Lord and inquire in his holy temple. If a canoe is seen in the offing, it is conveying a local preacher to his appointment on some distant island, that he i^ay preach Jesus to the people. If noises occasionally fall upon the ear, they are not those of revelry and strife, but songs of praise and earnest prayer to the God of heaven. I was also delighted with the attention of the people to famih/ worship. That duty is strictly attended to, there being very few families throughout the length and breadth of these islands bearing the Christian name where they have not a domestic altar on which is presented the morning and evening sacrifice. I was also pleased with their profi- ciency in learning. Not less than 8,000 of them can read the sacred Scriptures, and 5,000 can write their own language, and some of them very elegantly. I examined several of our schools ; and many of the pupils, in addition to reading and writing, had acquired 720 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. a very respectable knowledge of geography, arithmetic, natural history, and some other branches of learning. A few of them were even making attempts to master astronomy. I had also the pleasure of examining the stu- dents of our normal institution, and was greatly delighted with their proficiency. " Though as a nation they are, after all, but in a transition state, yet, in point of truthful- ness, and honesty, and hospitality, and tem- perance, and chastity, they might be placed in most advantageous contrast with the refined and polite nations of the civilized world. King G-eorge is a most decided and exemplary Christian. I had the privilege of being with him for nearly two months, and during that Eeriod I never heard a foolish word drop from is lips, nor did I ever see anything in his spirit or deportment inconsistent with the most entire devotedness as a disciple of the Lord Jesus Christ. He is a local preacher, and I heard him preach in Feejee a most in- teresting, powerful, and effective sermon. On his arrival in Sydney, to which place he ac- companied Mr. Young, he attended a mission- ary meeting. It appears that some years ago he gave to Mr. Eabone, a missionary in the Friendly Islands, an idol god which he and his family had been accustomed to worship. That idol god had been preserved by Mr. Eabone, who being at the mission in Sydney, showed this to the king, and requested him to take it with him to the meeting. King George did so, and on the platform he held up the idol and said, ' This is the thing which I and my family were accustomed to worship.' Then holding up first one hand and then the other, each of which was minus two joints of the little finger, he said, ' My father out off these fingers and offered them in sacrifice to this very thing.' But the king had been amply revenged upon his idol gods. On his embracing Christianity, he had them all collected, and, to the indescri- bable alarm of his people, he hanged the whole fraternity of them in his kitchen, and left them dangling in evidence of their ina- bility to save themselves or those who had put their trust in them." Feejee Islands. — The Feejee Group is situated about 360 miles north-west of the Friendly Islands, between lat. 15° 30' and 19° 30', and long. 177° and 178° W. It comprises 150 islands, about 100 of which are inhabited. The remaining islands are occasionally resorted to by the natives for the purpose of fishing, and taking the bidie-de-mer, or sea-slug. There are also numerous reefs and shoals. Two are large islands, stretching north-east and south-west, nearly throughout the whole extent of the group ; and are supposed to be each about 300 miles in circumference. This group of islands comprises seven districts, and is under as many principal chiefs. All the minor chiefs, on the different islands, are more or less connected or subject to one of these, and aa the one party or the other prevails in war, they change mas- ters. War is the constant occupation of the na- tives and engrosses all their time and thoughts. The introduction of fire arms brought about a great change of power. This happened in the year 1809. A brig was wrecked on the reef off Nairai, which had both guns and powder on board. The crew, in order to preserve their lives, showed the natives the use of the new in- strument. They joined the Mbau people, in- structed them in the use of the musket, and assisted them in their wars. The people are divided into a number of tribes independent of, and often hostile to, each other. In each tribe great and marked distinc- tions of rank exist. The classes, which are readily distinguished, are as follows : — 1, kings ; 2, chiefs ; 3, warriors ; 4, matanivanua, liter- ally " Byes of the land." They are the king's messengers ; 5, slaves, (haisi.) The last have nominally little influence. The climate of the different sides of the islands may, as in all the Polynesian islands, be distinguished as wet or dry, the windward side being subject to showers, while to the leeward it is remarkably dry, and the droughts are of long continuance. The difference of temperar ture is, however, small. Earthquakes are not unfrequent, generally occurring, in the month of February. Several shocks are often felt in a single night. By observing the plants whose flowers succeed each other, the natives are guided in their agricultural occupations. Next to war, agriculture is the most gene- ral occupation of this people. To this they pay much attention, and have a great number of esculent fruits and roots, which they cultivate, in addition to many spontaneous productions of the soil. The population of these islands has been es- timated at 300,000. This computation, how- ever, proceeds upon the supposition that the interior of the islands is thickly inhabited, which seems very doubtful. It is probable that the number may be about 200,000. The Feejeans are generally above the middle height, and exhibit a great variety of figure. The chiefs are tall, well-made, and muscular, while the lower orders are meagre, from labo- rious service and scanty nourishment. Their complexion, in general, is between that of the black and copper-colored races, although in- stances of both extremes are to be met with, indicating a descent from two different stocks. They are inferior to the natives of Tonga in beauty of person. In the Tonguese there is a native grace combined with fine forms, and an expression and carriage as if educated ; while there is an air of power and independence in the Feejeeans, that makes them claim attention. They at once strike one as peculiar, and, unlike other Polynesian natives, they have a great deal of activity both of mind and body, which may be ascribed, in some measure, to their con- stant wars, and the necessity of their being SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. T21 continually on the alert to prevent surprise. They are much more intelligent than those of other parts of Polynesia, and express them- Belves with great clearness and force. They excel the inhabitants of Tonga in ingenuity, as appears from their clubs and spears, which are carved in a very masterly manner, neatly form- ed, and ponderous ; cloth beautifully checkered ; variegated mats ; earthen pots ; wicker-work baskets, and other articles ; all of which have a cast of superiority in the execution. The faces of the greater number are long, with a large mouth, good and well-set teeth, and-a well formed nose. Instances, however, are by no means rare, of narrow and high fore- heads, flat noses, and thick lips, with a broad, short chin. Still, they have nothing about them of the negro type. Their eyes are gener- ally fine, being black and penetrating. The expression of their countenances is usually rest- less and watchful ; they are observing and quick in their movements. Their hair is some- what curly and rather disposed to be woolly. Their whole external character, viewed gener- ally, is fierce and warlike, rather than brave and noble. For an account of their cannibal pro- pensities, see Cannibals. A feast frequently takes place among the chiefs, to which each is required to bring a pig. On these occasions, Tanoa, king of Mbau, from pride and ostentation, always furnishes a human body. A whale's tooth is about the price they put on a human life, even when the party slain is a person of rank. This is viewed by the re- latives of the victim as a sufficient compensar tion. It is, therefore, not to be expected, that a people who set so little value upon the lives of their own countrymen should much regard those of foreigners. Hence the necessity, while holding intercourse with them, to be continually guarded against their murderous designs, which they are always meditating for the sake of the property about the person, or to obtain the body for food. Several instances are related of crews of vessels visiting the islands, having been put to death and eaten. The pantkeon of the Feejeeans contains many deities. " Many of the natives," says Mr. Hunt, in his Memoirs of Mr. Cross, " believe in the existence of a deity called Ov'e, who is con- sidered the maker of all men ; yet diflerent parts of the group ascribe their origin to other gods. A certain female deity is said to have created the Vewa people ; and yet if a child is born malformed it is attributed to an over- sight of Ove." The god most generally known next to Ove is Ndengei. He is worshiped in the form of a large serpent, alleged to dwell in a district under the authority of Mbau, which is called Nakauvandra, and is situated near the western end of Viti-Levu. To this deity they believe that the spirit goes immediately after death for purification, or to receive sentence. All spirits, however, are not believed to be permitted to reach the judgment seat of Nden- 46 gei ; for, upon the road it is supposed that an enormous giant, armed with a large axe, stands constantly on the watch. With this weapon he endeavors to wound all who attempt to pass him. Those who are wounded dare not present themselves to Ndengei, and are obliged to wander about in the mountains. Whether the spirit be wounded or not, depends not upon the conduct in life ; but they ascribe an escape from a blow to good luck. They have four classes of gods besides their malicious deities. The occasions on which the priests are re- quired to officiate are usually the following : to implore good crops of yams and taro ; on going to battle ; for propitious voyages ; for rain ; for storms, to drive boats and ships- ashore, in order that the natives may plunder them ; and for the destruction of their enemies. Their belief in a future state, guided by no- just notions of religious or moral obligation, is the source of jnany abhorrent practices ; among- which are the custom of putting their parents, to death when they are advanced in years, sui- cide, the immolation of wives at the funeral of their husbands, and human sacrifices. (See Human Sacrifices.) Mbau, the metropolis and imperial city of Feejee, is situated on a small island about two- miles in circumference. It contains nearly one thousand inhabitants, most of whom are chiefs. The houses are of a very superior description. In October, 1835, Rev. Wm. Cross and D. CargiU proceeded from Vavau, one of the Friendly Islands, to Lakemba, one of the Fee- jee Islands. It was but a small island, being only about 22 miles in circumference, and did not contain above 1000 inhabitants. With a view of ascertaining the disposition of the chiefs and people, it was agreed that the two missionaries should go ashore in the boat. As they approached the beach, many of the natives were running hither and thither on the sand ; and as they drew near the landing-place, nearly 200 men were standing at the distance of about 100 feet from it, some armed with muskets,, others with bayonets fastened to long sticks,, some with clubs and spears, others with bow» and arrows, their faces painted some jet black, others red, some after one fashion, others after another. This was rather a formidable array. However, being told that the chief wished to know who they were, and what they wanted, the missionaries went on to his house, a large- building within a fortress, nearly a mile from the shore. Having had their object explained to him, he appeared friendly, gave them a piece of laud on which to live, and built a tem- porary dwelling for each of their families. The missionaries soon began to preach to the natives, and in a few months they baptized a number of them, some of whom had previ- ously obtained a knowledge of divine truth in the Friendly Islands. The Gospel silently made its way among the people ; and every week one or more turned their backs upoB 722 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. idolatry. A desire to embrace tlie new reli- gion prevailed among many of the inhabitants of Lakemba ; but they were afraid openly to declare themselves, as the chief, notwithstand- ing his first profession, threatened and perse- cuted those who first embraced it. He himself was only a tributary chief, and appeared un- willing to take any step in favor of Christian- ity until he knew the mind of the more power- ful chiefs of Peejee. " When Tanao," said he, referring to one of the most renowned chiefs, " leads the way, I and all my people will em- brace the new religion." In the course of a few years, the missioniir lies, with the aid of native teachers and preach- ers, some of whom came from the Vavau Islands, introduced the Gospel into various other islands of the Peejee Group, beside La- kemba, as Eewa, Vewa, Bua, Naudy, and some Others of less importance. Though in some instances they had many difficulties to contend with, yet, generally speaking, they met with a favorable reception from the chiefs and people. Their motives, however, for this kind reception of the missionaries were very various, and, in some instances, altogether of a secular character. But the missionaries labored- on, trying to enter every open door, and sow " the seed of the kingdom " even on Feejeean soil. Nor did they toil in vain. In 1845 and the following year, there was a religious movement in the island of Vewa, which extended also to others of the islands, similar to that at the Friendly Islands, already described. " Busi- ness, sleep, and food," says Mr. Hunt, in de- seribing it, " were almost entirely laid aside. We were at length obliged almost to force some of the new converts to take something for the sustenance of the body. Some of the cases were the most remarkable I have ever heard of ; yet only such as one might expect the conversion of such dreadful murderers and cannibals would be. If such men manifested nothing more than ordinary feelings when they repent, one would suspect they were not fully convinced of sin. They literally roared for hours, through the disquietude of their souls. This frequently terminated in faintmg from exhaustion, which was the only respite some of them had till they found peace. They no sooner recovered their consciousness than they prayed themselves first into an agony, and then again into a state of entire insensibility. The results of this work of grace have been most happy. The preaching of the word has been attended with more power than before the revival. Many who were careless and use- less have become sincere and devoted to God. The experience of most has been much im- proved, and many have become by adoption and regeneration the sons of God." Says Mr. Watsford, " The people, old and young, chiefs and common people, were broken- hearted before the Lord. The cries for mercy disowned every other sound, and the struggling and roaring for deliverance eviiiced inde- scribable agony and bitterness of spirit. They felt themselves great sinners, and their repent- ance was deep and genuine. The joy of those who were pardoned was as great as their dis- tress had been. At some of our meetings the feeling was overpowering, and the people fell before the Lord, and were unable to stand, be- cause of the glory." Perhaps the most remark- able instance of the mercy of Heaven which this revival witnessed, was the conversion of a chief, whose name was Varin. He had long acted as the human butcher of Sera, called " the Napoleon of Peejee." He was a man of a dreadful character. Bat by the faithful warnings and instruction of the missionaries his guilty conscience was aroused, and hia haughty looks were humbled ; and now, like another Paul, he is preaching " the faith he once labored to destroy." The missionaries continued to pursue their work in the midst of dangers, and scenes of blood and cruelty, which make the flesh creep at the bare recital, and were cheered to find that the Gospel was, even in Peejee, " the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth." God wonderfully protected them from every evil, and the little flocks which they have gathered have grown in grace, and in numbers far beyond the most sanguine antici- pations of those who projected the mission. Mr. Young, who has just returned from Peejee, bears the following testimony to the state of things : " After visiting Lakemba and Vewa, I proceeded to £au, the capital of the country, and doubtless the deepest hell upon earth. Here I was shown six hovels in which 18 hu- man beings had recently been cooked, in order to provide a feast for some distinguished stranger, and the remains of that horrid repast were still to be seen. I next went to one of the. temples, at the door of which was a large stone, against which the heads of the victims had been dashed, previous to their being pre- sented in the temple, and that stone still boro the marks of blood. I saw— but I pause. There are scenes of wickedness in that country that cannot be told. There are forms of can- nibalism and developments of depravity that can never be made known. No traveler, whatever may be his character, could have the hardihood to put on record what he wit nessed in that region of the shadow of death. I went to see Sakembow, the king of Peejee. He received me with great politeness, and got up and handed me a chair; and his queen knowing I was from England, at once made me a comfortable cup of tea— a thing hardly expected in the palace of a cannibal king. Before I left. King George (of Vavau) arrived at the palace, and I requested him to deal faithfully with Sakembow's conscience, and I believe he attended to my request, and did it with good effect, and I hope the fruit of that visit will be found after many days. SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 723 Snipnpn] 'diqs 4-is4 S a ™h « ■B8K9g H^oq JO si«xoqog -Sv(X JO jgqcanj^ •spoqog -X-Bfj JO jaqoin^ ■S8xag moq^ JO SJ«ioqos-q;'Bq -q'Bg JO jaqran^ ■spoqog-qj^q -q-Bg JO jeqniTijij ■diqsjaqraaiii •SJaqraeji qoanqQ Tinj JO jaqmnjj 55 "^ 9 1 of *' « # « « T-( # 10 >a r» i-i 03 c^ pn-B eeu'BnoisfcTre « N « ■gao'By-Satqo'GaJd jai[!^o p jaqiun^ •siad'Bqa JO jaqonn^ 00 o> o» e W |S g jg -* <* CO M T-t 3 ^ 00 01 o» skirts of the city of Gloucester to hire one ; and while waiting for the man, he was greatly disturbed by a troop of wretched, noisy boys, who interrupted him while conversing with the man's wife. He anxiously inquired the cause of those children being thus miserably neg- lected and depraved. ' sir,' said the woman, ' if you were here on a Sunday, you would pity them indeed. They are then much more nu- merous, and a hundred times worse — it is a very hell upon earth. We cannot read our Bible in peace for them.' It was this affecting an- swer which moved every feeling within him. He immediately asked, ' Can nothing be done for these poor children ? Is there any body near that will take them to school on a Sun- day ?' He was answered there was a person who kept a school in the lane who perhaps might do it. At this important moment, while revolving the matter in his mind, the word ' TKY ' was so powerfully impressed on his mind as to decide him at once to action. He went and entered into treaty with the school-mistress to take a number of these poor destitute children. Here was the first Sabbath- school Britain ever saw. " When two years had elapsed after the commencement of the first school, on retiring to rest one evening, Mr. Eaikes began to con- sider that his schools had now been fully tried, and that it was time for the public good that they should be made generally known. On this, instead of going to bed, he directly wrote a paragraph and had it inserted in his news- paper, the Gloucester Journal, Nov. 3, 1783, in which he described the good effects of the Sunday-schools already in operation, and re- commended their extension over the country. This paragraph was copied into many other papers, and in consequence he had applications from all parts of the empire ; an answer to which he published in his paper. The result was, that the dormant zeal of many was called into action, and the establishment of theiie schools proceeded throughout the nation with the rapidity of lightning. " Sept. 7, 1785, a society for the support and encouragement of Sunday-schools in the diflfer- ent counties of England was formed in Lon- don. This society engaged the cooperation of the Bishops of Salisbury and Landaff, the Deans of Canterbury and Lincoln, and other distinguished persons, and was the nieans of greatly advancing the cause. " Before his death, which took place in 1811 , Mr. Eaikes had accounts of the establishment of similar schools in various parts of the coun- try, embracing no less than 300,000 children. Well might he say, ' I can never pass by the spot where the word tkt came so powerfully into my mind, without lifting up my hands and heart to heaven, i/n gratitude to God, for having put such a thought into my heart.' "■ The schools were at first conducted by hired teachers, who were paid thirty-three cents a Sabbath. This entailed a load of pecuniary difiSoulty upon the plan. The Sunday-school society alone expended, during the first 16 years of its existence, no less than £4,000 ster- ling in the salaries of teachers. Gratuitous instruction was an astonishing improvement upon the system, laying a solid basis tor its efficiency, and ensuring its success. The exact time when this was first introduced was not known, nor where it commenced ; but about the year 1800 this plan became very general. The institution of Sunday-schools was now become universal throughout England. Every city and every town had warmly espoused the cause ; and on July 13, 1803, the London Sunday-school Union was formed, which gave the cause an additional impulse. Scotland, as early as 1797, entered spiritedly into this good work, enrolling 34 schools that year, and the next year adding 20 more. Wales, at a very early period, entered with eagerness into the scheme, and adorned her romantic and picturesque valleys with nume- rous asylums for the instruction of the poor. And the necessity of supplying these schools with Bibles, suggested the idea and led to the formation of the British and Foreign Bible Society. So great was the progress of Sun- day-schools in Wales, that in three years 177 schools were established, containing more than 8,000 children. The Sunday-school system was introduced 730 SUNDAY-SCHOOLS. into Ireland in 1793 ; but its progress was not rapid until the formation of the Hibernian Sunday-school Society, in Dublin, in 1809. In April, 1815, there were 252 schools, con- taining more than 25,000 children, under the care of this institution. Since that time the number of schools has been greatly augmented. The first adult Sunday-school was planted by Mr. Charles, upon the mountains of Wales, in the gammer of 1811. The first Sunday-school in Asia was estab- lished by the Wesleyan missionaries in Ceylon, Juue 4, 1815, and gained them great favor in the eyes of the people. In the Annual Ee- port of the London Sunday-school Union, May 1, 1818, they give us an account of Sabbath- schools in successful operation in Bordeaux and La Garde, near Montauban, Prance ; also in Holland, in Rotterdam and Zeist ; also in Sidney, Richmond, and seven other places men- tioned in New South Wales, and further cheer- ing accounts from the cause in Ceylon. First Sunday-schools in the United States. — The Sunday-school Repository of August, 1818, states that the first Sunday-school in the city of New York (and it is believed in this country,) was instituted in 1791, and incorpo- rated in 1796. Its object was to instruct chil- dren to read and write, gratuitously, who were unable to go to school during the week ; but their instructions were carried on by means of hired teachers, and their design did not extend to the religious instruction of the scholars. In the Sunday-school Teachers' Magazine for 1824, it is stated that Mr. and Mrs. Bethune had spent part of the years 1801 and 1802 in Great Britain, where they had observed the progress Sunday-schools were then making in that country ; and on their return, they con- versed on the subject with their pious and ex- cellent mother, Mrs. Isabella Graham of New York, who resided with them, and it was deter- mined that as soon as possible they would try to introduce them here. Accordingly, in the autumn of 1803, these three Christian philan- thropists opened the first Sabbath-school in this city, for religious and catechetical instraction, at tlieir own expense, at the house of Mrs. Leech in Mott Street, which was attended by about forty male and female scholars ; and their punctuality of attendance was rewarded on Monday mornings, by frequent donations of tracts, shoes &c., to a considerable amount. Mrs. Graham and Mr. and Mrs. Bethune then established two other Sabbath-schools in other parts of the city ; which they attended every afternoon during the summer, and during the winter between the services of the church, when they brought their provisions with them from their residence in Greenwich, as there was no time to return to dinner. Mrs. Graham opened the first adult school at Greenwich, on the se- cond Sabbath of June, 1814, only about two months before her departm-e from this scene of active benevolence to her nroiaised rest. It was not until 1809, however, that churches or public bodies began to institute and patronize Sabbath-schools in this country. The first school on this plan, was probably one organized August 22, 1809, in the city of Pittsburgh, Pa., which met for the first time, on the first Sabbath of September, in the jury roora^ of the Court House. It was regularly organized under an excellent constitution, and was attend- ed by 240 children and adults. This school was formed without a knowledge of the mode of organization in Europe, and coincided in its principal features with the schools now estab- lished. In 1811 a similar school was established in Philadelphia, under the auspices of the Bev. Robert May, a missionary of the London Mis- sionary Society, who does not appear to have had any knowledge of the school at Pittsburgh. In 1813, a school was established by a gentle- man in Albany, and continued for some time. In the autumn of 1814 a school was establish- ed in Wilmington, Delaware. In April, 1815, schools were commenced in the Northern Liber- ties of Philadelphia, which in a few months contained 500 scholars. In 1816 they began to be generally introduced. The citizens of New York claim the honor of forming the first society for the regular or- ganization and conduct of Sabbath-schools. The first proposition for the formation of the Female Union Society, for the promotion of Sabbath-schools, was made by the benevolent ladies of the several denominations in this city, assembled by public invitation on the 24th of January, 1816. On the 12th of Pebru ary following, the gentlemen of New York, as- sembled by public notice, adopted measures for the formation of a similar society for boys : and on the 26th of that month, the New York Sunday-school Union Society was instituted. Schools were immediately established ; and during the first year, more than 6000 scholars were entered in their schools. Abodt this time Sunday-schools multiplied rapidly all over the United States. In May, 1824, the American Sunday-school Union waa formed in the city of Philadelphia. This So- ciety has been doing, as rapidly as means have been furnished, a great work for our country in exploring its waste places, establishing schools everywhere, and publishing and circulating a juvenile literature of great value and extent. Its operations during the past year embrace the organization of 2,012 new schools, containing not less than 60,000 children, with 8000 volun- tary teachers in them ; besides encouraging ■ and aiding 2,961 other schools, and putting in- to circulation about 50,000 dollars worth of Sunday-school publications. The whole mis- sionary work above referred to, cost $20,071 68 for the work done, or at the rate of .f 36 50 per month ; $284 37k for their expenses ; being, in the aggregate, $1 50 per day, or 75 cents a day less than the wages for which the dressers of brown stone are said to have lately '' struck" SUNDAY-SCHOOLS. 731 in Philadelpliia. This Society has published, and is now circulating a catalogue of 872 bound volumes of choice juvenile reli- gious books, and an assortment of other Sab- bath-school requisites. It also publishes the Smiday-sdmol Journal, a semi-monthly paper for teachers, and the Youths' Pmny Gazette, every other week for scholars. The latter has a circulation of 135,000. The sales during the year ending March, 1854, amounted to $172,041 30, or an average of 1,720,000 18mo volumes of 120 pages each. The General Protestant Episcopal S. S. Union. — Prom the Annual Report of tnis Society, for 1853, it appears that it is quite rapidly increas- ing in means and influence. In 1851, its donar tion and collection list was reported as only $28 15, while in 1853 the amount had run up to $1,375 95. Its list of Sunday-school books numbers about 224 volumes, and receipts from cash sales in the Depository, $20,793 82, This society embraces the denomination in the U. S.', and is located in the city of New York The Sunday-school Union of the Methodist Episcopal Church. — This Society has its head quarters in the Methodist Book Eoom, 200 Mulberry-street, New York. It reported in 1852 in the different states, 9,074 S. Schools ; 98,031 officers and teachers ; 504,679 scholars ; 1,402,010 volumes in libraries ; 7,213 Bible classes ; 45,632 scholars in infant classes ; 100,- .584 S. S. Advocates taken ; 13,242 conver sions; and expenses of schools $69,094 00, Raised for the S. S. Union, $7,258. It has an extensive list of excellent juvenile books and tracts, and is constantly adding valuable works to its catalogue. !Z7ie American Baptist Publication Society reports 103 Sunday-school books on its ca- talogue, while three years ago it had only 28. The society is more largely engaged in pub- lishing and selling books and tracts for gene- ral purposes, and the Sunday-school publicar tions are mingled with other sales. Tlie New England Sabbath-school Union is an organization in connexion with the Bap- tist denomination in New England, and has -.ts centre of operations in the city of Boston. They have issued the past year 30 reprints, 28,000 copies, and 12 new books. They also issue the " Young Reaper," which has a month- ly circulation of 16,000 copies. The entire receipts of the society for the past year were $1,803. It has increased its schools about 50 per cent, within the year, and has encouraging prospects for the future. Tlie Massachusetts Sabbath-school Society is the Sabbath-achool publication society for the Congregational denomination throughout the country. It has received an act of incorporar tion from the Legislature of Massachusetts, and its capital for its publishing operations was raised some years ago by the friends of the cause, in the vicinity of Boston, where it is located. Of late that society has made vigorous and praise-worthy exertions towards extending it» Sabbath-school missionary labors and librariea among the destitute of the West. The ra- pid demand for Sabbath-schools and a whole- some juvenile literature has made the co- operation of this society on an enlarged scale, both timely and grateful to the public. The society has published 658 bound volumes, for the libraries. It has also an extensive series of Scripture questions, of which many hundred thousand copies have been circulated. Its juvenile paper, the " Well-spring," has an extensive circulation, and is, we believe, the only Sabbath-school paper, that is published weekly. From the annual report of 1853, it appears that its sales of books amounted to $23,872 17, the last year, and its donations and legacies were $2,910 95. Every city and almost every county in our States has a Sunday-school Union, but un- fortunately they have lost the habit of report- ing regularly to the parent society, so that it is impossible to give with accuracy the extent of our Sunday-school efforts in the United States. We, however, know the numbers in onr cities and some of the counties, and from these we have made an estimate that approxi- mates as nearly as our resources and judgment enables us to do. The result is, we think, all the Sunday-schools of our country contain at the present time not less than 1,800,000 chil- dren, with a noble army of 200,000 voluntary unpaid teachers and officers. Great Britain includes in her schools, it is estimated, not less than 2,000,000 children, and 200,000 volun- tary teachers — a noble army of 400,000 in these kindred countries, who, with ceaseless energy, are making a vigorous onset upon Sa- tan's kingdom. (Rev. Mr. McClure estimates the children in our Sunday-schools at 3,000,000. See United States.) Mission Schools. — The original Sabbath- school of Robert Raikes was preeminently a Mission school ; and for many years, both in England and this country the Sabbath-school effort was mostly of this character. In both countries the earliest efforts were confined to paid teachers, and the teachers or teachings were not always of a strictly religious charac- ter. Soon, however, the Sabbath-school enter- prise found its home and resting-place among the churches ; and the tendency of things of late years has been to gradually relinquish the mission schools, and remain satisfied with teaching the children of the churches, and such others as could conveniently be brought into company and association with them. Some noble exceptions in different parts of our country ought here to be named, among which stands preeminently the New York Sundoiy- school TJnion, and its enterprising and devoted officers and teachers. Besides some 125 church Sabbath-schools, this Union embraces between 50 and 60 mission schools, with about 732 SURAT— SUTTEE. 1,500 teachers and 10,000 scholars. About one-fourth of these schools were formed in 1853, and their present efforts are designed to increase the number still more rapidly in fu- ture. This union comprises members and churches of 20 different denominations, or shades of denominations, and is well adapted to reach the destitute by its combined influ- ence. About 20 mission schools are also in successful operation in Brooklyn. Some of these schools have been in operation more than thirty years, and they can refer to their well-trained children now standing at the head of the professions. Many are in the Christian ministry, some of whom are mission- aries of the cross, in pagan lands, and one or two are presidents of colleges. Whole neigh- borhoods of the lowe.st classes are every year in a measure purified and elevated by the in- fluence of these mission schools. The personal intercourse of intolligentj refined and Christian teachers and visitors, with even the most pol- luted and criminal, has the happiest effect in restraining, and now and then of saving. The most bitter hostility against the upper classes is thus checked and changed, so that the great book of remembrance alone can reveal how much the privileged classes are indebted to such teachers for the safety of persons and property. The poor emigrant melts into tears of joy as he witnesses the first act of kindness in this strange land, in the approach of the gentle teacher for his children. Said one old man recently, " I thought there was no religion in America until you came and led my chil- dren to the Sunday-school." And said a poor Catholic woman with a bursting heart, " Oh, you Protestants are kinder than the Catholics." There is imperative need everywhere of Chris- tians turning their attention and labors more in the direction of this mission school move- ment. In all our principal cities, and even in our country towns, there are multitudes of chil- dren, whose religious instruction is neglected. Their Sabbaths are spent in idleness and vice, and they are rapidly preparing for their ap- pearance in our criminal courts, gaols and pe- nitentiaries. The Sabbath-school is almost the only instrumentality that can reach them. Its success in reclaiming and saving them has often been tested ; and it must occupy a pro- minent place in any system of measures that may be adopted for the evangelization of our great cities. — R. G. Pakdee, Esq. SURAT : A large and populous town on the south bank of the Tuptee river, 177 miles north of Bombay. It is the head-quarters of a considerable military force, the residence of the British collector, judge, &c., and the chief tribunal for the entire presidency of Bombay. The London Missionary Society had a station at this place from 1813 to 1845. SURI : Capital of the district of Birbhum, in the province of Bengal, 130 miles N.N.W. from Calcutta. Station commenced by the English Baptists in 1818. ■ SURINAM : (See West Indies.) SUTTEE : The name given in India to a woman who immolates herself on the funeral pile of her husband, and denotes that she is considered true and faithful to him. The term is also applied to the horrid rite itself. The origin of the practice is supposed to have been the voluntary sacrifice of a widow, who was inconsolable for the loss of her husband, her affection for the deceased making life a bur- den ; the Brahmins taking advantage of the novelty and admiration it excited to recom- mend the practice as most meritorious and productive of good effect to the souls of the widow, her husband, and the surviving friends, in order to turn it to their own advantage. W. Ewcn, Esq., superintendent of police in the lower provinces of Bengal Presidency, was of the opinion that the widow can rarely be considered voluntary in the sacrifice. Pew widows, he says, would ever think of sacrific- ing themselves, unless overpowered with force and persuasion, very little of either being suf- ficient to overcome the physical or mental powers of Hindoo females. A crowd of hun- gry Brahmins represent to her that, by becom- ing a Suttee, she will remain so many years in heaven, rescue her husband from hell, and purify the family of her father, mother, and husband ; while, on the other hand, disgrace in this life, and continual transmigration into the body of a female animal will be the certain consequence of this refusal. In this state of confusion, a few hours quickly pass, and the widow is burnt before she has had time even to think on the subject The details of this practice have often been given in our missionary periodicals. We need not repeat them here. But the extent to which this abomination has been carried, and the terrible sufferings which it has occasioned, will appear from the fact that, in ten years, from 1815 to 1825, no less than 5,997 widows were thus immolated. For a long time the Suttee was winked at by the British govern- ment in India. Dr. Scudder says that in 1819, when he first went to India, no order had been issued against it. In 1828, a society was formed at Coventry, England, called the Hu- man Sacrifice Abolition Society, the object of which was to effect, by appeals to British hu- manity and justice, the abolition of widow- burning, infanticide, and other superstitious murders in India. In their report for 1834, they state that the Suttee was abolished in the Bengal Presidency in 1829, and in the other Presidencies the following year. In 1848 Dr. Scudder stated that the practice still pre^ vailed in the native States of Meywar, Votah Marwar, Beekaneir, Kishengur, Ulwar, and' BjDondee, a portion of the country larger than New-England. He says Suttees are rooted in the affections of the people ; as an evidence of r A ji I o 1? SYRIA y 4 1 MS5£^-5*- Juneli Bay 19, ,•■'-, ji'S ^ ' '^ ^^Jir,^ ozlySBliamTliinl ASetcS PSijJerhsalda. -iai-a- T,. 'Tih ei-fns /tr-rJon^tprtg ^East -froTii Ci-eeTi^Ticti SWAN RITER— SYKIA. 733 which he states that the Rajah of Ihallawar issued a proclamation denouncing any one who should assist at a widow-burning. He soon after died, and the first victim after his proclamation was his own widow. But he says that, whenever a province is taken possession of by the British government, the Suttee is immediately aholished ; and that government is exerting its influence with the native kings to secure its entire abolition ; in consequence of which some of them are issu- ing their orders against it. — Tlie Suttee's Cry to Britain, by J. Beggs ; Miss. Her., Sept., 1834, p. 347, and March, 1848, p. 90. _ SWAN RIVER : A settlement in Austra- lia, on the river of this name, occupied by the Wesleyan Society. SYDNEY : The capital of Australia. It is situated upon a cove which opens from the spacious basin of Port Jackson. The town is built upon the head of the cove, on a rivulet which falls into it, and in a valley between two opposite ridges. The best houses are of white free-stone, or brick plastered, and have a light, airy appearance. Population about 8,000. It is occupied by the Wesleyans and the Propa- gation Society. SYRIAN CHRISTIANS : Called also St. Thomas's Christians. They inhabit the inte- rior of Malabar and Travancore, in the S.W. part of Hindostan. They extend from N. to S. 150 or 200 miles, and in breadth 40 or 50. Between 50 and tiO churches belong to this ancient branch of the Christian church, which has preserved the Syriac Scriptures, in manu- script, from Christ and the Apostles, and, un- connected with the rest of the Christian world, has stood for ages amid the darkest scenes of wickedness, idolatry, and persecution. The tradition among them is, that the Gospel was planted in Hindostan by the apostle Thomas. Landing at Cranganore, or Chen- galioor, from Aden in Arabia, he was well re- ceived by Masdeus, king of the country, whose son, Zuzan, he baptized, and afterwards or- dained deacon. After continuing some time at Cranganore, he visited the coast of Coro- mandel, and preached the Gospel at Melapoor, and finally at St. Thomas's Mount, near Mad- ras, where he was put to death. His tomb long remained an object of veneration. Dr. Buchanan entertained a decided opinion that we have as good authority to believe that the apostle Thomas died in India, as that the apos- tle Peter died at Rome. That Christians existed in India in the second century, is a fact fully attested. The bishop of India was present and signed his name at the Council of Nice, in 325. The next year, Frumentius was consecrated to that ofBce by Athanasius of Alexandria, and founded many churches in India. In the fifth century, a Christian bishop from Antioch, accompanied by a small colony of Syrians, emigrated to India and settled on the coast of Malabar. The Syrian Christians enjoyed a succession of bishops, appointed by the patriarch of Anti- och, from the beginning of the third century till they were invaded by the Portuguese. They still retain the Liturgy, anciently used in the churches of Syria, and employ in their public worship the language spoken by our Sa- viour in the streets of Jerusalem. The first notices of this people in modern times are found in the Portuguese histories. In 1503, there were upwards of 100 Christian churches on the coast of Malabar. As sooa as the Portuguese were able, they compelled the churches nearest the coast to acknowledge the supremacy of the Pope ; and, in 1599, they burnt all the Syriac and Chaldaic books and records on which they could lay their hands. The churches which were thus sub- dued, are called the Syro-E.oman Christians, and, with the converts from other tribes, form a population ef nearly 150,000. Those in the interior would not submit to Rome ; but after a show of union for a time, fled to the moun- tains in 1653, hid their books, and put them- selves under the protection of the native princes, by whom they have been kept in a state of depression. These are called the Sy- rian Christians. About 10,000 persons, with 53 churches, separated from the Catholics ; but in consequence of the corrupt doctrines and licentious manners of their associates, they have fallen from their former estate, and very few traces of the high character which they once possessed can now be discovered. Their number was estimated in 1825 at about 50,- 000. (See Hindostan.) — Chapin's Missionary Gazetteer. SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND.— Throughout the Old and New Testaments there is a frequent reference to Syria, a coun- try which has been subject first to one conquer- or and then to another, and made the bloody theatre on which ambition and tyranny have displayed their fiercest energies. The Chal- deas, the Persians, the Romans, the Saracens, the Mohammedans, were successively its mas- ters. In 1517, the Sultan of Turkey took pos- session of Syria, and his successors held sway there without interruption till 1832, when Ibrahim Pasha fought his way into the coun- try, and brought it under the dominion of Egypt. In 1841, with the aid of the European powers, Syria was again restored to Turkey, and i[ is still subject to the Sultan, though a dark uncertainty hangs over its future destiny. In the south-west part of Syria, with the Dead Sea and the river Jordan on the right, and the Mediterranean Sea on the left, lies Palestine, or the Holy Land, which has been the scene of those great events which involve the destinies of mankind. Of the present con dition of Syria and Palestine so much has been, said by modern writers, that it is unnecessary to go into particulars here. But as there Is a constant reference in the missionary records to 731 STEIA AND THE HOLT LAND. the leading religious sects which occupy the; country, some statistics on this subject may be i of use to the reader, in the right understanding i of the succeeding pages. From the statements ^ of a missionary, as late as 1840, who had en- 1 joyed unusual facilities for obtaining correct in- formation, the following facts are gathered. _ The population of Syria, including Palestine and Lebanon, does not vary much from one million and a quarter. Of this population, in- cluding the wandering tribes, the following is a tolerably correct division. Moslems 666,000 The Antioch or Orthodox Greeks 240,000 Maronites 180,000 Greek Papists 40,000 Druses 100,000 Jews 30,000 Metewalies, a sect of Moslems 25,000 Ansaireea and Ismayeleea 200 ,000 Armenians and other sects 20,000 The Moslems are spread over the whole country, except Lebanon and the large moun- tainous regions of the Ansaireea, in both which districts they are so few as scarcely to merit attention. The orthodox Greeks extend to every part of Syria and Palestine. The Druses occupy Lebanon, and particularly the southern half of it. The Ansaireea and Ismayeleea oc- cupy the large and fertile region north of Tri- poli, and spread over mountain and plain all the way round the head of the sea to Tarsus and the plain of Adona. The Maronites re- side chiefly in Lebanon, while about 2,000 are found in Aleppo, a few in Damascus, and small communities in other places. The Greek Pa- pists are confined chiefly to Aleppo, Damascus, Beirut, Sidon, and different villages in Leba- , non, and a few in the Haouran. The Arme- nians reside chiefly in Jerusalem and Aleppo. They increase along the southern frontier of Syria. The Jews, who are chiefly Spanish, German, and Polish, are confined mostly to Jerusalem, Hebron, Tiberias, Damascus, and Aleppo. Small communities are found in some of the other cities. Small Arab tribes occupy portions of nearly all the great plains in Syria and Palestine, but chiefly along the eastern frontier and in the Haouran. There is a sect called Tezzidees, worshipers of the devil, but they are few, and occupy the extreme north- east frontier. The Druses. — This sect, though not the most numerous, yet holds a very conspicuous place. They derive their name from Mohammed Eben Ismael, surnamed El Drusi, who came from a foreign country, and became a follower of Hakcm, the supposed founder of the sect in the eleventh century. The Druses acknowl- edge seven law givers : Adam, Noah, Abra^ ham, Moses, Jesus, Mohammed, and Said. They believe in ten incarnations of God, the last and most important being that in the per- son of Hakcm. They call Hakem the creator of heaven and earth, the only God worthy of reverence in heaven, and the only Lord on earth. " He is one, tLe only one, who Knuvpg no consort and no number. He neither begets nor is begotten. He does what he will and as he will. He tears down and builds up. He lifts up and throws down. He says to all things, be ; and they are. He is the begin- ning and the end of all things. He is the be- ginning and the. end, the powerful, the excel- lent, the victorious. I am, he says, the foun- dation of religion, the way, the Lord of the resurrection and the new life, &c." This Har kem, they believe, will appear again in human form, at the judgment, to give to every man according to his desert. The time of his com- ing is pointed out to be when kings rule with unlimited power, and Christians get the supe- riority over the Moslems. At the judgment those who are called Muwahhidin, i. e. Unitar rians, in opposition to Polytheists and Chris- tians, will be rewarded, and all apostates pun- ished. There are two, classes of Druses, viz., the Akkal, or the learned and initiated ; and the Jahal, or the ignorant and uninitiated. The initiated are very strict in regard to food, not eating with strangers ; in regard to mar- riage, not marrying out of their own order ; and in the use of oaths, using only the expres- sion, " I have said it." They form a sort of sacred or aristocratic order, and perform the ceremonies of their religion in secret. From them is taken the imam, the spiritual or eccle- siastical head of the Druses. The uninitiated, comprehending the greater part of the Druses, and even the emir himself, who is not permitted to interfere in matters of religion, are very differ- ent as to religion and religious usages. They make no distinctions of meats, drink wine, marry wives out of their own sect, and wear a variegated dress. They conform to the reli- gion which happens to predominate. With the Mohammedans they are Mohammedans ; with the Christians they are Christians. This conduct is said to be commanded them in their sacred books, in order to conceal the fact that they belong to a particular sect. This class of the Druses are exceedingly ignorant and degraded, knowing but little about God, and still less about the Saviour ; yet they are teach- able, and not being subject to ignorant and bigoted priests, they have been found more ready to receive the Gospel than the nominal Christians of Syria. Missions of the American Boaed. — Eev. Messrs. Levi Parsons and Pliny Fiske, em- barked at Boston, Nov. 3, 1819, for what was then denominated the mission to Palestine, and on the 15th of the following January, they entered the harbor of SmjTna. In December of the same year, Mr. Parsons embarked for Jerusalem, where he arrived in March — the first Protestant missionary who had entered that field with a view of making it the centre of his own evangelical operations. He had, however, scarcely surveyed his field, when dis- ease undermined his constitution, and he em- SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAITO. 735 barked for Alexandria, wliere he died, Febru- ary 10, 1822. la April, 1823, Mr. Piske en- tered Jerusalem, accompanied by Rev. Jonas King. They" spent some time in explorations in and around the holy city, and in excursions to Lebanon and other places, meanwhile dis- tributing Scriptures and tracts, and studying the prevailing language. In November, 1823, Eev. William GoodeU and Eev. Isaac Bird, with their wives, arrived at Beirut. As this city holds a conspicuous place in the history of the Syrian mission, a particular description of it seems desirable. Soon after their arrival the missionaries wrote : " Beirut is pleasantly situated at the foot of Mount Lebanon, on the western side of a large bay, in latitude 33° 49' N. and long. 35° 50' E. It has a fertile soil, and is abundantly fur- nished with good water from springs that flow from the adjacent hills. The houses are built of mud, and of a soft, crumbling stone, and are dark, damp, and inconvenient. The streets are narrow and dirty, and during the winter are seldom dry. They were once paved, in a slov- enly manner with stones of irregular shape, which are now wide apart, and simply furnish stepping stones in rainy weather. I'he filth of the city, together with its dampness in winter and its heat in summer, renders it a very un- desirable place for a family. Ships are forced to lie at anchor at the eastern extremity of the bay, about two miles Irom the city. The port is choked up with sands, and with some of the pillars of granite, which rercain as almost the only relics of the s,ncient ms-gnificence of the place. On the north and north-west Beirut is entirely open to the sea, and at no great dis- tance to the east is Lebanon, which stretches far to the north and to the south. Nearer to the city on the south, is a large and beautiful plain, varied by small hills, covered with olive, palm, orange, lemon, pine, and mulberry trees, and enlivened by numerous cottages. From the terrace of the house we occupy we can count more than 200 of these cottages, scatter- ed here and there among the trees. Besides three large mosques and several smaller ones, the city contains a Roman Catholic, a Maron- ite, a Greek, and a Catholic Greek church." — (See Beirut.) In view of this beginning of Protestant mis- sions in a quarter of the world the most inter- esting and sacred, the Board say in their re- port for ,1824 : " In Jerusalem, the ancient capital of the visible Church, the standard of truth and righteousness has been erected, it is hoped, never more to be permanently removed. Among the mountains of Lebanon, the Gospel has been proclaimed to Druses, Maronites, Sy- rians, and Greeks. Jordan and the Dead Sea have heard the sound, and Bethlehem, Caper- naum, and Nazareth. In that most interest- ing portion of the world, the light of life, after having been for ages quite extinguished, has been rekindled — and by whom ? The mission- aries of the Board — thanks unto our merciful God for the unmerited privilege — have been among the first and principal instruments. A great crowd of witnesses upon earth, and doubtless many more on the heights of the heavenly Zion, contemplate this enterprise." A prominent feature in the mission for the first few years, was the determined and systematic opposition to the circulation of the Bible, made by the Romish church ; and not to the Bible only, but to the preaching of the Gospel, the establishment of schools, and the diffusion of knowledge generally. In spite of the op- position, however, a school was established and continued at Beirut, and the Scriptures were put into the hands of many, notwithstand- ing a proclamation from the Grand Siguier forbidding their distribution. In the fall of 1825, Mr. King left the mission, having engag- ed in it only for a limited period. About the same time a severe loss was sustained in the death of Mr. Fisk. He had been preparing an Arabic and English dictionary, which it was necessary now to commit to other hands. As the missionaries became acquainted with the language of the country, so as to converse with the people freely, and engage in contro- versy with the patriarchs and others, a spirit of religious inquiry was awakened, and the ex- citement became general ; so that the time of Mr. Bird, and often that of Mr. Goodell, was demanded night and day to converse with men and women from different places, who were convinced of the rottenness of their old system, and wished to become acquainted with a more excellent way. As the work went on, the op- position of rulers, both ecclesiastical and civil, became more violent, threatening decrees were fulminated, and in some instances the most cruel forms of persecution were resorted to. Among the objects of this persecution was Asaad Shidiak, who had been Mr. King's teacher in Arabic and Syriac, and who was one of the most intelligent men on Mount Lebanon. He was a Maronite Roman Cath- olic, had been much acquainted with the bishop of Beirut, and with the Maronite patri- arch, and on his showing a strong tendency towards evangelical religion, he was threat- ened with immediate excommunication, if he did not cease from his connection with the " Bible men." To avoid this evil he was ad- vised to retire for a season to Hadet, in the hope that the opposition would subside. In this retirement his mind became still more serious and determined, and on his return to Beirilt he was resolved to risk whatever ob- loquy and violence might come upon him. The suspicion that he was heretical made it necessary for him to give up a marriage con- tract into which he had entered ; and he pre- ferred this sacrifice rather than shut himself out from the means of access to the truth. In January, 1826, the patriarch sent his own brother to call upon Asaad, to urge him to an 736 SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. interview, and though warned by the mission- aries of the dangers to which he would be ex- posed, he complied with the request, and went to the convent of Der Alma, where he met the patriarch, and had many conversations with him. The topics upon which Asaad insisted, were the necessity of a spiritual religion, in distinction from modes and form ; the sufB- ciency of the Scriptures ; and the absurdity of holding the Pope to be infallible. The patri- arch was highly displeased with these bold sen- timents, and uttered, first, cruel threats, and then promised honor, promotion, money, &c. The bishop of Beirut was present at several of the discussions, and threatened Asaad's life in the most angry and violent manner. After an absence of seven weeks, he return- ed to Beirut, and wrote a history of what had transpired. The document was published in the Missionary Herald, and indicated great talents, a sincere love of the truth, and the spirit of a martyr in its defence. As soon as Asaad's mother, brothers, and other relations heard of his return, they flocked around him, and besought him to leave the missionaries. Against the urgent entreaties of the brethren, he accompanied four of his relatives home, in the belief that it would be safe, and that he should do some good by the visit. In about a fortnight some of his relp,tlves took him by force, and carried him to the convent of Der Alma, and delivered him up to the patriarch, by whose order he was removed to Cannobeen, about 50 miles from Beirut. There he suffered imprisonment, chains, stripes, and revilings. To those who delivered him up, he said that if he had not read the Gospel he never should have known how to explain their conduct ; but there he learned that " the brother shall deliver up the brother to death, and a man's foes shall be those of his own household." For several months he was beaten daily, and hav- ing made an unsuccessful attempt to escape, a heavy chain was put around his neck, and the other end fastened to the wall. The common people were encouraged to visit him and spit in his face, and otherwise insult him, with a view to shame him and break his spirit. His mother and one or two of his brothers, finding how cruelly he was treated, relented, and ear- nestly sought his release. One who visited him declared that he had been beaten till his body was of the color of blue cloth. In the midst of his sufferings he wrote a kind letter to the missionaries, but not having an oppor- tunity to send it, the patriarch discovered it, and both he and others beat him severely on this account. For many months intelligence was received of Asaad's condition, and though his sufferings knew no abatement, the hope ■was entertained that his deliverance would in some way be effected. But at length communi- cation was cut off, a dreadful uncertainty hung over his fate, and the sad conclusion was forced upon the missionaries that he had died in the hands of his unrelenting tormentors. Nothing has ever occurred to relieve this painful ap- pt'ehension. The piety and constancy of Asa- ad Shidiak were regarded as very extraordi- nary. His pride of talents and of authorship, his reverence for his former tutors, patrons, and ecclesiastical superiors, and all his previ- ous habits of thinking and acting, were opposed to his joining the missionaries and yielding to the authority of the Scriptures. To these were added the anathemas of the Church, the revilings of friends, the malice of a bigoted and bloody priesthood, and the horrors of » long imprisonment under chains and stripes, till his vigorous frame became one mass of suffering ; while, on the other hand,' deliver- ance, honor, emoluments, all that wealth and power could offer, awaited him in case of his recantation. That under these circumstances Asaad should have adhered with unwavering firmness to the Gospel and the religion of Christ, must certainly be regarded as a sur- prising triumph of Christianity over the natu- ral inclinations of the heart, and over the prin- cipalities and powers of this world. With propriety did the Board ask, " How many are there among ourselves, with all our means of knowledge and all the strength of confirmed religious principle, who could assure them- selves that, in such a fearful controversy, they should stand like Asaad Shidiak, calm and unruffled amid the war of angry passions, de- prived of every earthly support, and looking through tears, yet with a resolute eye, to hear ven as his home, and to Christ as his only de- liverer ?" A brother of this first martyr, Pharez Shidiak, also embraced the truth, and was pursued with the same persecuting spirit, but saved himself from the fate of Asaad by a timely escape to Malta. After the occur- rence of these two cases, the Maronite patri- arch issued a proclamation to be read in all the Maronite churches, strictly forbidding all connection with the missionaries, in the way of buying or selling, borrowing or lending, giv- ing or receiving, attending schools or teaching them, or rendering any service, on pain of the loss of office and the great excommunication. The patriarch admitted that the missionaries were " unwearied in their efforts ;" that they went about " manifesting a zeal in compassion- ating their neighbore ;" that they " opened schools and supplied instructions, all at their own expense," &c. The Greek Catholics man- ifested a similar hostility, though they were less inclined to persecute ; and the Mohamme- dans were ready to pursue every professor of Christianity with inexorable vengeance. Thua it became evident in the early history of the mission, that those who would follow Christ, must be prepared, like the primitive Christians on the same soil, to seal their testimony with their blood. The people might turn from one form of nominal Christianity to another, and embrace the Greek, or Greek Catholic, or SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. Maronite, or Latin faith, without giving oflfence ; but to be Christiana indeed, and take the word of God as their only rule of faith, was to incur the wrath of bishops and patri- archs, and required the spirit of a Christian hero. Along with these violent persecutions came political and warlike agitations, and all the schools which had been organized at Bei- rut, Tripoli, and elsewhere, had to be given. u^. In Alay, 1828, the missionaries removed from Beirut to Malta. Their reasons for this step were the prospect of war, which soon after commenced, the difSculty of holding communication with other places, and the in- security which was felt after the removal of the British consul. After an absence of two years, during which they devoted themselves to the study of the various languages of the east, the missionaries, learning that the English consul had again taken up his resi- dence at Beirat, returned to that place. On entering that city, they were saluted with kindness by the people, but the priests were disturbed, and soon the papal thunders began again to roar in the churches. The mission- ary work proceeded, however, without material interruption, except by the ravages of the plague, which prevailed through Syria, Arme- nia, and Persia, in 1831. In 1832, the mission sustained a severe loss m the death of Gregory Wortabed, an early and distinguished convert, concerning whom full accounts may be found in the Missionary Herald of that and previous dates. The reply of Mr. Bird to the Bishop of Beirut, in 1833, received special attention, and served to awaken a spirit of inquiry among the people. About the same time a press was established in Beirut, to be superintended by the Eev. Eli -Smith, under the general direc- tion of the mission. Syria and the Holy Land were now under the government of the viceroy of Egypt, and embraced the four pashalics of Aleppo, Tripoli, Damascus, and Acre. Beirut, being the prin- cipal port of commerce, was assuming increased importance as a missionary station, while ex- plorations were made in Damascus, Tripoli, Sidon, and other large towns, with a view to the occupancy of new fields. The system of schools was yet in its infancy, the missionaries not having been in circumstances to give to this subject the necessary atteution. la their report for 1834 the Committee of the Board gay, " They are not aware that any material change has taken place in the character and condition of the people at large, in consequence of the establishment of the mission. But the impression is said to have been extensively re- moved, which had been given by the Jesuits in former years, that the Protestants have no re- ligion, no priesthood, no churches, &c. The bigotry, intolerance, unreasonableness, and worldly-mindedness of the papal priests have also been brought to light, by their opposition to the Scriptures and schools, and it is thought 47 that image worship is growing unpopular in the vicinity of Beirut. Among' the inhabitants of that place now living, the missionaries reck- on but four native converts. A fifth hopeful convert is teaching a school at Tripoli. The number admitted to communion from the com- mencement of the mission is seven, not includ- ing the lamented Asaad Shidiak, nor Jacob, a young Armenian, who died giving evidence of repentance and faith in Christ." Correspond- ing with the date of the foregoing, is a joint statement by the missionaries, in which they speak of the insufficiency, in that country at least, of the mere circulation of the Scriptures* Many copies had been distributed from Alep- po to Hebron and Gaza, and after ten or twelve years' use of them, not a single soul had, to their knowledge, been by this means brought to a sense of sin, and converted to God. " Not," they say, " that the word of God has taken no effect ; not that it has done no good ; but we- state a fact, and from it we draw the conclu- sion that other efforts ought to be connected with Bible distribution." The missionaries at Beirut in 1835, were Eli Smith, Isaac Bird. and William M. Thompson, with the wives of the two latter, and Eebecca W. WilHams;. teacher. A class of ten young men were un- der instruction in geography, astronomy, and the English language, and three other schools were taught by natives, the whole number of pupils being 140. Besides these a femala^ school had been opened by the female members of the mission, assisted by the widow of the lamented Gregory Wortabed, and eighteen pu- pils were in attendance. For this school a building had been erected on the mission pre- mises, by the avails of a subscription among foreign residents. The measure met wiWi no opposition. Jerusalem was at this date the centre of a great tumult among the people, the mountain- eers of Palestine having suddenly risen in gene- ral rebellion against the government of Egypt. That government, however, maintained its su- premacy, and the whole country of Syria, un- der the sway of the Pacha of Egypt, was soon disarmed and quiet. In 1836 the Committees, in surveying this field, were able to say, •' Al- most every change opens the door still wider for ipissionary work. Lebanon is completely open. Missionaries can go where tbey please. The Druse population in particular have been rendered accessible to the truth. They are fre- quently seen at the chapel of the mission." At Jerusalem, Mr. Whiting found much encoup- agement in the distribution of books and tracts among the pilgrims who visited the Holy City from all quarters. A school was also in operar tion there, and a few Moslem girls were learn- ing to read and sew. The island of Cyprus having been thoroughly explored, a mission was commenced there in 1836, by Messra Peasp, J. L. Thompson, and Daniel Ladd. The number of Greek Christians on the island wa« 738 STRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. estimated at 70,000, and there did not appear to be any obstacle in the way of spreading the Gospel among them. The death of Mrs. Smith, in consequence of exposures by shipwreck, on her way to Smyrna with her husband, was a serious loss to the mission ; Mr. Smith also lost at the same time, the valuable manuscript of a journal, which he had kept during a tour through the Haouran, and the models of Arabic letters which he had procured for the cutting of a new font of type in that language. The latter he was able afterwards to replace. The printing in 1836, at the Beirut press, all in Ara- bic, was as follows, viz. ; A Hymn Book, 24 pages, 200 copies ; "Watts' Catechism, 16 pages, 1,000 copies ; Elements of Arabic Grammar, 168 pages, 1000 copies ; Dairyman's Daughter, 96 pages, 2000 copies ; making a total of 380,800 pages. Besides this there were struck off from the lithographic press 200 copies of the Arabic alphabet, for the schools ; and 2000 copies of Chrysostom on reading the Holy Scriptures. The year 1838, and a part of the following year were spent by Mr. Smith in an exploring tour with Dr. Eobinson, through Arabia and Syria. The results of these observations are well known to the public. There were 6,642 books and tracts distributed from Beirut sta- tion in 1838, amounting to 490,629 pages. The larger portion of this work was effected by a native employed for the purpose. The people manifested an unexpected eagerness to receive books. The ecclesiastical rulers of every de- gree made fierce opposition, but very many of the people received the books in' open defiance of patriarchs and bishops. It was a highly interesting fact, recorded in 1839, that several papal priests, from different parts of the country, all of them strangers to each other, were so enlightened and so evan- gelical in sentiment, as to become disgusted with popery and anxious to escape from it. This and the preceding year were also signal- ized by an extraordinary religious excitement among the Druses. The extent and effects of this awakening, and the spirit in which it was met by the civil and ecclesiastical powers, forms an exceedingly interesting chapter in the history of the Syrian mission ; but for the par- ticulars reference must be had to the journals of the missionaries published in the Herald. The books and tracts distributed from Beirut during the year 1839, amounted to 3,543. 01 these 103 were Bibles, 264 Teslaments, 419 Psalters, and 2,757 smaller portions of the Scriptures. A large and convenient chapel was built at Bei- rut, in which were held two services in the, Arabic language, one soon after sunrise, the other in the afternoon. Between these services was one in English at the American Consulate, and a Sabbath-school was conducted in the native chapel. The free school contained upwards of 56 Echolars, and the attendance was full and regular throughout the year. The school at Tripoli, already mentioned as under the care of a na- tive, had about 30 scholars. In the autumn of 1840, Beirut was bom- barded by Turkey and her allies, and the mis- sionaries fled, some to Jerusalem, and others to Larnica in Cyprus. The houses and other property of the mission were unharmed. In the summer of 1841, the war having ended in placing the government under Turkish rule, the missionaries returned to Beirut and re- sumed their labors. About the same time a printer from Boston, with an improved font of Arabic type, and Eev.- Eli Smith, who had been spending a little time in America, joined the mission. The whole missionary force at Beirut, on being collected at this period, con- sisted of Messrs. Smith, W. M. Thompson, Nathaniel A. Keyes, Samuel Wolcott, L. Thompson, missionaries, and their wives ; Mr. Van Dyck, physician ; a printer ; and five na- tive assistants. At Jerusalem there were two missionaries, Messrs. Whiting and Sherman, with their wives, and one native assistant ; and at a station on Mount Lebanon, called B'ham- dAn, there was a missionary and a physician. The country, however, was not quiet, for the war that had transferred the government from the dominion of Mohammed Ali to that of the Sultan, was followed by a civil war, in which the Maronites and Druses of Mount Lebanon contended for the ascendancy. It was in fact a war of the Druses against the. Papists, who had provoked it, and ended in the complete triumph of the Druses. In view of this con- stant disturbance and change, Mr. Smith wrote, in January, 1842, " There is an evil, a great evil, in being thus beaten about by these po- litical surges, and we try to avoid them all in our power, and seek the stillest waters we can find. Tet our minds are never free from anxi- ety, looking out for what may come next. And besides this, we are excessively troubled to give our friends at home proper and correct accounts of our labors and prospects. ' One of the brethren, in giving reasons for not writing home more full accounts, remarked that he could not get the world here to stancl still long enough to describe it. So it is — we write home now an account of our labors and pros- pects, with propositions for money and men to do this or that, and before our letter reaches the United States, some revolution has taken place which materially alters our plans, and we want to do something very different from the thing proposed." Four months later Mr. Smith wrote, that the power of the Maronite patriarch, which had always presented the greatest obstacle to missionary labor, appeared to be broken ; that wherever they went they had free access to the Druses, and that an im- pulse had been extensively given in favor of schools. And yet, he adds, " The Turkish au- thorities have taken such a course, that their designs remain wholly unknown ; and what will be the result of the present position of SYEIA AND THE HOLT LAND. 739 tliiQgs -ve feel entirely unable to conjecture.'' In spite ~f these perplexities tea schools were maintained, nine at Beirut and one at Jeru.sa- lem, containing an aggregate of 287 pupils, and the printing during the year 1841 amount- ed to 636,000 pages, half of which were por- tions of the Scriptures. In their report for 1843, the Prudential Committee say, " During the past year a go«d house for a permanent establishment has been obtained at Abeih, a mountain village about 15 miles southward of Beirut, facing the sea, sufficiently elevated to render it a safe and healthy residence the whole year, central with regard to the Druse people, with 1000 or 1500 inhabitants, and villages in all directions around it. The mission has also gained much experience during the few years past, made many favorable acquaintances, dis- semmated mucn evangelical truth, done away no small amount of prejudice, and conquered one of the most diflicult and important lan- guages of the world — the Arabic — spoken by 60,000,000 people, it being the sacred lan- guage of the vast Moslem nation." The sta- tion at Jerusalem was reported this year as having been suspended, tne missionary, Mr. Whiting', having joined Mr. Thompson and Dr. Van Dyck at Abeih. In 1844, soon after the visit of Dr. Anderson and Dr. Hawes to the Syrian mission, the committee say, " Besides the large and rapidly increasing population of Beirilt, Lebanon is terraced and planted from the prol'oundest depths of her numerous valleys up to the dizzy summits of her majestic hills, and more than 200,000 hard-working mountaineei-s reside in her romantic valleys and hamlets. Here the members of the mission may abide, and travel, and teach, and preach, and distribute the word of life ; and here it is the present intention of the committee, in following out the apparent leadings of Providence, to combine and con- centrate the power and resources of the mis- sion. The people are divided into different sects, but they are essentially one race, the Arab, by whatever name called ; with a com- mon language, the Arabic, spoken just as it is written, and the same as in ancient times ; and the manners, customs, and social condition throughout are substantially the same." In connection with these statements of the com- mittee, the report for this year contains a document of extraordinary interest, drawn up by the mission while Drs. Anderson and Hawes were on the ground, which gives a description of the Arabic race, and an impression of the importance of this mission, as being the only one especially to that race, which every one should examine who would fnlly appreciate this mission. We regret that our limits will not allow us to give the document entire. The reader is referred to the report of the Board for 1844, where it may be found in full. At Abeih, two rooms in the house occupied bv .\ii'. L' ' mps-.n .v i\- lura '.'^cd lor a tem- porary chapel, and an Arabic service was kept up twice every Sabbath. Between the services an interesting Sabbatli-school was held. The shyness and reserve of the people wore off as they became acquainted. The ad- verse portions of the Druses and Maronites, both of whom resided in the village, began to consult the missionaries in their mutual diffi- culties, and Mr. Thompson had more friendly intercourse with the Maronite priesthood dur- ing the first summer of his residence at Abeih than during all his previous missionary life. The years 1844 and 1845 were distinguished by a sudden and wonderful Protestant move- ment .at Hasbeiya, a village at the foot of Mount Hermon, containing a population of about 4000, composed of Greek Arabs Maro- nites, Greek Catholics, Jews and Druses. In February, 1844, the brethren of BeirCit were visited by a party of about 50 men of the Greek Arabs of Hasbeiya, who declared their intention to become Protestants, and asked for ministers and teachers. After much conversa^- tion with them, it was agreed that a native assistant should be sent to them, and that if his report of their case was favorable, the mis- sionaries would visit them. The intelligence proved of so interesting a character, that in May, Messrs. Smith and Whiting proceeded to Hasbeiya, when they were convinced that they had been too slow to credit the sincerity of these professed Protestants. They amount- ed to about 150 men, besides women and children, and among them were some of the most respectable men in the village, and a large proportion of enterprizing young men. Some of them had made considerable improve- ment in Christian knowledge, having received many of the works of the mission, both- from Beirut and Jerusalem, and heard much of the character and doctrines of the missionaries. That they were sincere in their determination to adhere to the Protestant faith, and to take the Bible alone for their guide, the missionaries could not doubt. Their separation from the Greek church appeared to be entire, and even the Greeks acknowledged that there was a de- cided improvement in their character ; f\iat the profane had left off swearing ; that the drunkard had abandoned his cups, and that the Lord's day was carefully observed for reli- gious improvement. Schools were established among them, and the field seemed white for the harvest. In June, one month later, ano- ther missionary visited Hasbeiya, and wrote : " The Protestants hold out and increase in numbers. They are increasing in knowledge also ; some of them quite rapidly. The school has 40 or 50 scholars, and we must establish another soon." In July Mr. Whiting wrote : " We cannot but feel much anxiety for thig little band of Protestants,'imperfectly instruct- ed as they are, but up to this time, although very strong efforts have been made to induce t'.iern to return to the Greek church, thev have, 740 STRIA AND THK HOLY LANJD. with very few exceptiona, remained firm in their adherence to the truth." At about the same date, Mr. Smith, in describing their first Sabbath in Hasbeiya, said, " How strange and exciting our circumstances. It seemed almost a dream. Here we were, in this wild corner of Syria, always peculiarly lawless, and now entirely without a government. Before us was a considerable congregation, brought up in the gross and deeply-seated superstitions of the Greek church, but now abandoning, and with a suddenness almost miraculous, all their fasts and feasts, their image and saint worship, and worshiping God with us after the simple forms of Protestantism, yet not a hand was raised to molest us, and we went through our worship with as much quiet and security as if we had been in the heart of New England." It ecr/U Decame evident, however, that this little body of Protestants was to expect no protection from the government, and that their enemies were aware of this, and had de- termined on using violence. In view of the storm which was about to burst upon them, and the fiery trials through which they must pass, the whole company of the Protestants assembled at Mr. Smith's house on a Sabbath evening, for the purpose of entering into a solemn covenant to stand by each other to tfie last. In describing this scene, Mr. Smith says : " The step was entirely of their own sug- gestion, and I knew nothing of it until they had begun to assemble. Being all collected, they drew up a covenant engagement in the following terms : — ' We whose names are here- to subscribed, do covenant together before God and this assembly, and pledge ourselves upon the Holy Gospel, that we will remain leagued together in one faith ; that we will not forsake this faith, nor shall any se- parate us from each other while we are in this world ; and that we will be of one hand and one heart in the worship of (jod, accord- ing to the doctrines of the Gospel. In God is our help.' Bach one took this covenant separately, standing by the table, and laying his hand upon the Bible, as it was read to him. Sixty-eight names were subscribed on the spot, and the next day the number was increased to seventy-six, all adult males. The affecting so- lemnity of this scene I leave you to imagine. I have been many years a missionary, and have witnessed a great variety of heartrthrilling events, but this is one of the last that I shaU forget." In a day or two after this solemn transaction, the persecution broke out with great violence, and to escape the murderous hands of their enemies the Protestants fled to Abeih, as their only place of safety. They remained there till October, when learning that the unfriendly emir had been deposed, and that another governor had been appoint- ed, with express instructions to restore the Pro- testants to their houses ; they returned to Haabeiya. The quiet, however, was of short duration, for by some means the new governor was soon removed, and a son of the former governor appointed in his place, so that the poor Protestants were again at the mercy of their enemies. They were publicly insulted and beaten in the streets ; their houses were attacked and much injured, and no Protestant could appear in the streets without being stoned. It required more courage, faith and love for the truth than these brethren had at- tained, to stand firm in such circumstances, and the result was, say the committee, " That the poor persecuted people, since it had not pleased God yet to give them fully the martyr spirit, yielded the case in despair, and one after another made peace with the authorities of the Greek church." It was believed, however, that they did not fully conform to the rites of the Greek church, but were allowed consider- able liberty ; and one of the Protestants, in writing to the missionaries, in January, 184.5, said, " We meet together and have prayers as often as we have opportunity. Thanks to God, the faith of the brethren increases ; but we are thirsting to hear your prayers and spi- ritual instructions again. Tou are never out of our minds a moment. We pray for grace to wait for that privilege with patience." Thus the door was closed in Hasbeiya for the present, but in circumstances which left a strong conviction that it would be opened again ere long, and that God would yet com- plete the work which he had so signally be- gun. ^ In the spring of 1845, Lebanon was again disturbed with civil war. It was a struggle for political ascendancy between the Maronitea and Druses, and after twenty days' fighting in different sections of the mountains, the Maron- ites were defeated, and driven out of nearly all the Druse quarter of Lebanon. AstheMaro- nites were bigoted adherents of the Eomish church, and the most bitter opponents the missionaries had ever met with in Lebanon, their loss of power at this time had an impor- tant bearing on the mission. In describing this event, Mr. Thompson wrote : " Again the Maronite patriarch has sunk under disappoint ment. He died a few days ago. Moreover, that party in Hasbeiya who opposed us and stoned our people, has been driven out of the place by the Druses, and groat numbers of them killed. The whole combination is com- pletely broken up and dispersed." Mr. Smith, in writing on this subject has the following verystriking comments on the death of the patriarch : — " I cannot conclude without al- luding to the death of the old Maronite patri- arch. What a lesson does that event, in such circumstances teach us ! After having mar- tyred that faithful witness, Asaad Shidiak, caused the Bible often to be burned, had missionaries insulted and stoned, and boasted that he had at last left no place open for them to eater the mountains, he finds him- STRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. 741 self stripped of all his power ; missionaries established permanently in the midst of his flooli, and his own favorite bishop constrained to give orders for their protection ; and floally he sinks himself under his disappointment, and dies. How signally has the blood of the martyred Asaad been avenged upon him, even in this life." At Beirut and Abeih the labors of the mis- sionary brethren had suffered but slight inter- ruptions during the troubles in Mount Lebanon and in Hasbeiya. In 1847, there appeared at Beirut evidence that evangelical principles wore spreading with increased rapidity. Most of those who attended upon the preaching of the missionaries openly avowed their evan- gelical sentiments, in the face of violent oppo- sition. More than fifty young men of the papal church refused to confess for more than a year, and this they regarded as a final renun- ciation of popery. At Abeih, about thirty adults were in attendance on the Arabic ser- vice, and stated prciiChing was maintained in four of the neighboring villages. There was evidence of the special influences of the Holy Spirit on many minds. In April, 1848, a station was commenced at Aleppo, and Messrs. W. A. Benton and J. A. Ford were appointed as missionaries to that place. Mr. Smith, who accompanied the brethren to their station, describes the people as intelligent, social, inquisitive, and not so nmch afraid as elsewhere of changing sects. The Arab Christian population was the largest and most intelligent to be found in any place in Syria. An important event of this year was the formation of a purely native church. Previ- ous to this the native converts had joined the mission church, composed in part of mission- ary families. The petition for a church to be composed only of converted natives, orignated with the natives themselves, and is a document of considerable length and of great interest. (See Annual Eeport for 1848, or Herald for August 1848. The latter contains also the constitution and discipline of the new church.) In November, 1848, a new mission was commenced at Tripoli, and Messrs. David M. Wilson and Horace Foot were stationed at that place. They met with vigorous and de- termined opposition at the outset, and it was with difficulty that they procured houses in the city. At the beginning of the year 1849 there were four common schools in connection with the station at Beirut, and five in connection with that at Abeih, with an aggregate of 210 male and 55 female pupils. There was also a school at Tripoli, containing 20 scholars, and one at Hasbeiya, containing 70 pupils. The printing during the preceding year had amount- ed to 1,010,000 pages, and the total amount printed from the commencement of the mission was 75,765,800 pages. Mr. Smith was pro- ceeding with the translation of the Bible into the Arabic language, aided by Butrus Bistany, one of the native brethren. Special interest was awakened in the beginning of this year by a learned Greek Catholic of Damascus who had become fully convinced of the errors of his church, and had openly declared himself a Protestant. He stated that for about six years his conscience had been troubling him ; that he had embraced infidel views, but by reading books furnished him by the mission- aries, and by conversation with Mr. Smith and others, he had been led to take a decided stand on the subject of religion. An open profes- sion of his sentiments brought on a discussion between him and his patriarch ; and, as Mr. Meshakah, the individual in question, was esteemed the most intelligent native layman in the country, and the patriarch the most learn- ed ecclesiastic, attention from all quarters was directed to this controversy. Mr. Meshakah also immediately prepared a treatise in Arabic, addressed to his countrymen and friends, the object of which was to explain to them the reasons of his secession from the Catholic church, and to set forth proofs of the corrup- tion of the doctrines and practices of that church. This book produced a great sensa/- tion. The printing during the year 1849 amounted to 1,934,000 pages. The mission had two fonts of beautiful Arabic type, of different sizes, cast in Syria, under the supervision of Mr. Hurler, printer for the mission, at Beirut. Up to this time there had been but one mis- sion church — that at Beirut, and the number of members was 27. Ten of these were from the Greek church, four were papal Greeks, four Maronites, five Armenians, three Druses, and one a Jacobite Syrian. In the latter part of 1850 there was an outbreak of Turkish vio- lence at Aleppo, resulting in terrible scenes of violence and blood, and subjecting the nominal Christians to serious disadvantages. (For full accounts of these scenes see Missionary Herald for February and April, 1851.) The report for 1851 includes Hasbeiya among its regular stations. For several years the missionaries had paid frequent visits to that place, and had held frequent correspond- ence with leading men of the Protestant com- munity ; but no missionary had been permar nently stationed there. The time having come, as was believed, for carrying on the work there in a more systematic manner, Messrs. Thomp- son and Van Dyck were designated to that field; and, in July, a church was formed at Hasbeiya, composed of 16 native brethren. The necessary officers were chosen, and Mr. Thompson was requested to act as pastor till one from their own number should be raised up. But it was a church planted in the midst of enemies, and persecution still awaited it. Be- fore the close of 1851 the government ceased to have any control over that region, and anar- 143 STRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. chy set in, robbers infested the roads, and property and life were at the mercy of law- less and marauding bands of people. This con- dition of things continued through most of 1852 and 1853, and of course had a most dis- astrous effect upon the church at Hasbeiya. It was often impossible for the missionaries or the native assistants to visit the people in safety. Nor could the people assemble for worship without danger. At a communion season, in 1853, the Protestants came fully armed, and stacked their guns, and hung their swords in the court of the chapel, forcibly re- minding the missionaries of scenes often wit- nessed in the early planting of churches among the savages of the American wilderness. It was hardly to be expected that the Gospel would achieve many triumphs amid such dis- orders and tumults; and it is even more than could have been anticipated, to hear the mis- sionaries say, as they do, in the Herald for July, 1853, " We are thankful that none of the members of the church have been terrified into submission ; nor indeed have any of the old and established members of the congregation yielded to the pressure. The number who at- tend public worship, however, is sensibly re- duced; and these absorbing social troubles have sadly distracted all minds, and diminish- ed that earnest zeal which has at other times been so encouraging a feature of our work at Hasbeiya." At the last accounts, civil war was again pending, and seemed almost inevitable ; and yet it was evident to those on the ground, that neither war nor persecution could drive the Gospel from Hasbeiya, nor prevent its progress among a people who had begun to be enlight- ened and quickened by its power. The latest intelligence from Beirut is that found in the Herald for August, 1854. The native church has 26 members, 8 having been recently dis- missed and formed into a church at Abeih. " Most of the members," say the missionaries, " give evidence of sincere piety, and are lead- ing upright and useful lives. The church has sent 1,000 piastres to assist the British and Foreign Bible Society in their special effort to furnish a million of New Testaments for China." Mr. Smith was progressing rapidly with the work of translating the Scriptures into Arabic, having completed the Pentateuch, and the New Testament as far as 2 Corinth- ians. As an evidence of the capabilities of the mission press at Beirut the brethren say, " We have been able to print an Algebra, and have now in hand an edition of the Pentateuch, with references, using all the varieties of letters found in Algebras, and reference Bibles in English. The whole has been created since 1835, the fonts of typo all having been made by Mr. Hallock, either in Smyrna or in the United States, after improved models furnished by members of the mission. We have finished printing during the year, a new edition of the Scripture spelling-book ; Dr. Van Dyck's Al- gebra ; a sermon on the second commandment ; an Arabic grammar ; Meshakah on Skepticism, besides some broad sheets ; and we now have in the press, Schneider on Rites and Ceremo- nies, and a new edition of the Psalter, making in all 1,083,000 pages." There had 'been is- sued from the depository during the year 5,008 books and tracts, of which 725 were disposed of in Beirut, 923 were sent to Sidon, 1,073 to the mountain, 242 to Tripoli, 313 to Aleppo, 76 to Mosul, 71 to Damascus, 100 to Jerusa- lem, 20 to Alexandria, and 306 to Bombay. The primary school at Beirut had about 75 pupils. The female seminary was in a pros- perous condition. Some of the studies pur- sued were^ Watts on the Mind ; Church His- tory, in Arabic ; an abridged work on Moral Philosophy ; besides which the girls had read the whole of D'Aubigne's History of the Re- formation, and other history, with Mrs. De Forest in an evening class, the atlas being al- ways open before them. A Sabbath afternoon service, in Arabic, was kept up, the congrega^ tions varying from 60 to 12(5. The excited state of men's minds in regard to political mat- ters and the prevailing wars, had turned away the thoughts of many from spiritual things ; and it was remarked as a serious evil also, that for at least one-third of the year there must be a virtual suspension of labor at Beirut, owing to the absence of the missionaries among the mountains during the hot season. Repeated trials have shown this absence to be necessary. A good report is made of the little church at Abeih, in the Herald for May, 1854. The chapel was kept open during the year, and the average attendance was about 50. There was an increasing demand for free schools among the Druses. Six of these schools were already in operation on the mountains, and in them all a large amount of religious instruction was com- municated. At Aleppo a church had been or- ganized with six members, all of whom gave evi- dence that they were living branches of the true vine. Little had been done for education in Aleppo. They are an ignorant people. Though the largest, wealthiest, and most intelligent community of nominal Christians in Syria, there is not a common school in the city that deserves the name, and scarcely a person com- petent to teach his native tongue correctly. Yet a large and increasing number were intel- lectually convinced of the truth, and many were anxious for evangelical instruction. Some females were concerned for the salvation of their souls. The brethren say, " We feel that we can now work to advantage, having a hold upon the consciences of men." Mr. Thompson, the only missionary stationed at Sidon, reports favorably of that station. In the Herald, May, 1854, he says : "Our chapel has not been closed for a single Sabbath dur- ing the year. Our Protestants carry their faith and zeal wherever they go, and make TABU— TAMLOOE. 743 very successful laborers among their country- men. Our congregations are now fuller than they ever were before, and the attention has been marked and solemn." During the last half of the year, the school in Sidon was quite full. In many places around, there were im- portant openings for schools, but there was a want of competent teachers. Among the places visi&d by Mr. Thompson was Tyre, where he found many anxious to extricate themselves from the yoke of the priesthood, and form a Protestant community. The same was true of Alma, a village higher up in the mountains, where an important individual had become a Protestant, and had sustained him- self against all opposition, though he was en- tirely isolated, and had never seen an Ameri- can missionary. He was led to embrace evan- gelical sentiments, by the perusal of a single book from the press at Beirut, which was sent him by a friend. Acre was also found to present a favorable opening, and a missionary was much needed there. Tripoli is regarded by the missionaries at that station, Messrs. Wilson and Foot, as a promising field of labor, — as much so as any in Syria, although the congregation has hitherto been small, and the school was last year broken up by the Greeks. Besides the regular stations, there are four on1>stations, where considerable labor is per- formed. These are B'hamdun, Bhawara, Kefr- Shima, and Ibel. The Syrian mission, as now constituted, em- braces Beirut, Abeih, Hasbeiya, Sidon, Tripoli, and Aleppo, with the ou(>stations. The mis- sionary force employed consists of 11 mission- aries, 1 physician, 1 printer, 13 female assistant missionaries, 4 native preachers, and 1 native helper. The state of the schools connected with the mission is presented in the following table : STATIONS. Beirdt Abeih Hasbeiya and Sidon Tripoli Aleppo OUT-STATIOWa. B'hamdun Bhawara Kefr-Shima Ibel Totals Rev. E. D. Mooeb. TABU : A term used in the Sandwich Islands, and other islands in the -Pacific, to denote a kind of religious interdiction, uf very powerful and extensive operation. With places and persons that were tabued, all intercourse was prohibited. The term was also used to indicate any thing sacred or devoted. There were tabued or sacred days, when it was death to be found in a canoe. Pork, bananas, cocoa- nuts, and certain kinds of flsh, were_ tabued to women, and it was death for them to eat these articles of food. Another tabu forbade men and women eating together ; so that a man must build an eating-house for himself and another for his wife, and have separate ovens for their food. Anything of which a man made an idol, was tabu to him. If he made his idol of the native apple tree, then the apple tree was tabu to him. Birds, fowls, beasts, fish, and stones, were objects of wor- ship, and whoever made any of these his god, they were tabu for him. So, too, of arti- cles of food, which were em ployed as- offerings to idols ; they were afterwards tabu to the offerer. If a king died, the whole district was tabu, and his heir went to another. TABLE MOUNTAIN : Station of the American Board among the Zulus, in South Africa, near Port Natal. TABOO : A station of the American Episcopal Board in West Africa, about 40 miles to the leeward of Cape Palmaa. TAHAA : One of the Society Islands, and a station of the London Missionary Society. TAHITI : The largest Island of the Geor- gian Group, in the South Seas. T ALUAP ATA : A station of the London Missionary Society, on the Island of Upolu, one of the Samoao group. TALAPOINS : Priests or friars of the Siamese, and other Eastern nations. They re- side in convents, which are square enclosures, in the centre of which stands a temple, and round it the cells of the talapoins, like so many tents in a camp. There are likewise female ta- lapoins, who live iinder the same regulations as the men, and in the same convents. They have likewise nens, or young talapoins, who wait on the old ones, and receive their education from them. Each convent is under the direction of a superior, whom they call a sajicrat. These priests subsist wholly upon the sins and the liber- ality of the people ; for they undergo a course of penance for the iniquities of such as bestow upon them their charitable benevoleuce. They are indulgent and hospitable to strangers ; and there are two lodges on each side of the en- trance to their cells, which are wholly reserved for the accommodation of their guests. They are under au indispensable obligation to live single ; and those who offend against chastity are subject to be burnt at the stake. — Brougliton's Diet. TAMAKTIA . A station of the Wesleyan Society in Kaflraria, South Africa. TAMTAM : A large flat drum used by the Hindoos. TAMLOOK : A town about 35 miles S. W. from Calcutta, head-quarters of an agency for the government manufacture of salt, which 744 TAKTARY AND SIBERIA. is prepared by filtration from the mud of the Hooghly river, and is esteemed of peculiar value by the Hindoos, as being extracted on the banks of the holiest branch of the Gan- ges. It is a, station of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. TAN ANAEI VO : The capital of Madagas- car, former seat of the mission of the Lon- don Missionary Society. It is situated in the interior of the island, in the district of An- kova, the most populous and salubrious part of the country. TANGENA : An ordeal administered in Madagascar to determine the guilt or inno- cence of a person suspected of witchcraft or sorcery. The accused is first made to eat a hearty meal of rice ; after which, three pieces of the skin of a fowl, killed for the occasion, are swallowed ; and then an emetic is admin- istered, consisting bf the tangena nut. If the three pieces are returned from the stomach, the party is declared innocent, and he is led up by his friends to his village with much pomp and ceremony. If the skin is not thrown up, he is declared guilty, and immediately despatched with a club, unless a slave, in which case he is sent to some distant part of the country and sold. They are. however, sometimes thrown into the under-ground rice granaries, and scalded to death with boiling water. This ordeal is likewise often resorted to when persons are accused of other offences, as a trial of guilt or innocence. It is some- times administered to large numbers at the same time. It forms one of the most cruel and destructive of the heathen superstitions. A similar ordeal, though varying in form, is in use generally among the different tribes of West Africa. TANNA : An island of the New Hebrides Group, on which is a station of the London Missionary Society. TAOUISTS : A religious sect among the Chinese. (See China.) TAPUNA : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in the Bay of Islands, New- Zealand. TAQUOHEE : An Indian town among the Cherokees in the Indian Territory ; a star tion of the Cherokee mission of the American Baptist Union. TAETAET AND SIBEEIA : Tartary is the name given to that immense region ex- tending almost entirely across Asia from the Caspian Sea to the Eastern Ocean ; but the name is only partially recognized within these limits. Many parts of it are bordered and even pervaded by chains of mountains ; and large cities, cultivated spots, and fixed socie- ties, here and there occur. It contains also sandy deserts of considerable extent. Still, the predominant characteristic is that of im- mense plains or steppes, covered with herbage more or less abundant, and occupied by wan- dering and pastoral tfibes, whose camps, like moving cities, pass continually to and fro over its surface. The extensive chain of the Altai mountains separates the whole of Mongolia or Eastern Tartary, from Siberia, and another long chain divides it from Thibet. There is also a transverse range of mountains, called the Beloor or Bolor mountains, connecting the western extremities of these two boundary chains together, of a peculiarly lofty and rug- ged character, and affording only two narrow and difficult passes by which to penetrate into Eastern Tartary or Mongolia. A considerar ble number of rivers, descending from these high mountain ranges, traverse the great up- land plain of Independent Tf /tary, but unable, across so many barriers, to reach any of the surrounding oceans, they expand into large interior salt lakes, two of which, the Caspian and Aral, are entitled by their magnitude to the appellation of seas. The irrigation pro- duced by these seas breaks the continuity of the desert, and on their banks are situated the most fertile and populous tracts, and the most powerful states of Western Tartary. Bokhara, or Bucharia, is an extensive table land, very imperfectly explored, but, according to Humboldt, much more fertile than the rest of Tartary. The cotton, the vine, and the mulberry are, in many parts, cultivated. It has also valuable mines of precious stones. The other more northerly table land of Tar- tary, Mongolia, is much more bleak and un- congenial. It yields in its best tracts only pasturage, and includes large expanses of sandy and saline deserts. But that portion usually called Eussian Tartary is almost the only spot, on this widely- extended tract, that has been the scene of mis- sionary labor. It is situated between the Cas- pian and Black Seas, and appears to hold out the advantages of a genial climate, and a tho- roughfare between more populous countries, which render it desirable as a field of mission- ary operations. The province of Orenburgh forms the link between European and Asiatic Euasia. Tar- tars compose its chief population ; but many of them have been trained to regular and in- dustrious habits by the Eussians, in their mines and other works. The country is capa- ble of every kind of culture, but is mostly covered with rich pastures. To the south of the lofty range of the Cau- casian mountains is Georgia, a region pro- fusely gifted both with richness and beauty It is fertilized by numerous mountain streams, and clothed with magnificent forests of beech, ash, chestnut, oak, and pine ; while the ground is covered with vines, growing wild, in vast profusion. In this province are Teflis and Shusha, each having been, at different times, missionary stations. This country has been the seat of continual wars and commotions, and was, about two centuries ago, wrested from Persia by Bussia. Its population, reduc TARTARY AND SIBERIA. Y4o ed by war and other causes, does not much exceed 300,000. The most northern regions of Asia present an almost unbounded expanse of frozen forest desert. Some of the plains of the southern borders of Siberia are covered with pastures ; but, as we proceed to the northern boundaries of the bleak shores of the frozen ocean, human life, with the means of its support, becomes more and more deficient. But those regions abound in animals producing the richest furs ; and the nu- merous rivers furnish abundance of fish, which form the principal part of the food of the scanty, wandering tribes ; and all the western districts of Asiatic Bussia, which border on the Ural mountains, contain valuable mines of gold, silver, copper, and precious stones. Seliuginsk, which for twenty years was a station of the London Missionary Society, for the Tartars of the Boriat-Mongolian race, is a small town on the frontiers of Siberia and Chi- nese Tartary, south-east of Lake Baikal, and was built by the Eussians, to facilitate their route up the river Seliuga, as far as Kiachta, on the Chinese frontier. All the towns of Si- beria are chiefly of Russian origin, and are built to facilitate trade and the collection of revenue. The native inhabitants of these thinly peopled and desolate regions prefer liv- ing a rude and wandering life in tents or mov- able huts. The two leading races among the various tribes inhabiting this immense region, are the Mongols and Turks. The first have complex- ions of a dark yellow tint, broad, square, flat faces, thick lips, and small eyes inclining down- wards, and scanty hair. The Turks are a much handsomer people, with a rich profusion of hair, broad foreheads, and clear ruddy com- plexions. The Circassian females are famed for their great beauty, fine forms, and delicate complexion. The daughters of all above the rank of slaves are exempt from degrading or oppressive labor, and occupy themselves in sewing, embroidery, or plaiting straw. The face is carefully shaded from the sun, their feet are protected by a wooden shoe, and their hands by gloves. Their food consisis chiefly of milk and pastry. But their condition is a sad one ; for their parents invariably sell their daughters to the highest bidder. Georgia, and still more Circassia, have been distinguished for the athletic strength of their men, and the beauty of their women, and hence they have been in great request as domestic slaves all over the Turkish empire. The Tartars do not, like the shepherds of a civilized country, lead their flocks through re- mote and sequestered valleys, and spend their time m peaceful seclusion. They move from place to place, usually in large bodies, for war or plunder. Their government has a strong tendency towards despotism, which is increased by the superstition incident to a barbarous people, whose creeds are accommodated to a system of absolute power. Under the charac ter of Mohammedan muUohs, or Budhist lamasi many of the princes of Asia both preach and rule. In Bokhara, the former sovereign raised himself from a low rank to that high station, solely by his eminence as a muUoh, or Moham- medan doctor, and by his rigid observance of the austerities enjoined in that religion. In those parts of Tartary where Mohammedan- ism prevails, the Koran is enforced, not only as a sacred, but as a civil code. According to its rules, justice is administered and the revenue collected ; and conformably to its pre- cepts, a tenth part of the revenue is bestowed in alms. Nearly the whole territory of Mount Cau- casus, and the country north and west of the Caspian Sea, own the sovereignty of Russia. On the borders of Persia, where the Russiaas must court the natives as their allies against that power, they are obliged to allow the Tar- tars the unrestrained exercise of their national propensities. The vast plains on every side of Asti-achan are continually traversed by Oal- mucks, Nogays, Kubans, and other Tartar tribes, whose internal affairs are administered by khans or rulers, who collect and transmit such scanty tribute as can be drawn from the flocks and herds of their vassals. It is only in the more northern provinces of Oufa and Oren- berg, where cities with a civilized population and extensive mining establishments have been formed, that Russia has been able to mould the people into that uniform subjection which prev-ails in other parts of her European and Asiatic territory. In the mountainous regions of Circassia and Caucasus, the distinctions of birth and rank are observed with all the strictness of highland pride. Under the prince are the nobles, who exercise almost absolute sway over their vas- sals. These are of two kinds, the bondsmen, who cultivate the soil, and the arm'ed retainers, who attend the nobles to the field, either for war or for prey. The life led by the nobles is one constant round of war and feasting, hunt- ing and jollity. On state occasions, they are attired in splendid robes, while their food and furniture are of the most plain and homely de- scription. Their drink is a fermented liquor called koumiss, made from mare's milk, of which they are very fond. It supplies the place of wine, which is prohibited by the Koran. All Tartar tribes are addicted to habits of plun- der ; and if a stranger enters their territory, except under the protection of one of their chiefs, he is sure to be enslaved. The Russians have never yet been able to subdue the Cir- cassians. The most she can do is to hold mil- itary occupation of the leading positions. The kingdoms of Kiva and Bokhara form a kind of oases in the midst of the vast deserts of Turcomani, which is the name given to this whole region as far as the Caspian and the Aral. 746 TAETAEY AND SIBERIA. The population of Tartary, including Mon- golia and Mancliuria, is estimated at about 20,000,000. The immense region of Siberia embraces 5,000,000 square miles, and is com- puted to contain rather more than 5,000,000 inhabitants. This scanty population consists of two distinct portions, the foreign rulers, and the native tribes. The Eussian inhabitants are composed of the unfortunate exiles, who are banished to those desolate wilds for some real or fancied offence against the State, the convicts, who work in the mines, and the offi- cers stationed at the different Eussian towns throughout Siberia, to collect the furs and skins, as tribute or tax to the emperor. There are likewise the dignitaries of the church and the inferior clergy connected with the estab- lishment. Each of the four large provinces, Tobolsk, Tomsk, Irkutsk, and Okkofsk, has its archbishop and patriarch, who reside en- tirely in the towns. Of the native Siberian races, those which occupy the whole of the southern frontier arc of Tartar origin ; and until conquered by Russia, they held supreme sway in Siberia. The people inhabiting the southern and eastern shores of I/ake Baikal are the Buriats, a division of the Mongolians. The authority of Eussia has suppressed the system of plunder which used to prevail among these people. The Samoyedes and Tungusi races inhabit the northern coasts, and these are unlike the Tartars, both in their persons and habits. They lead a wandering life, their sole employment being hunting and fishing. Their dress is composed chiefly of skins. Religion. — All the eastern regions of Tar- tary acknowledge the supremacy of the Grand Lama, and hold the Shaman doctrine, which is a modification of Budhism. The nations in- habiting Western and Independent Tartary are devoted to the Mussulman creed. Under the Budhist system of religion, the various little tribes of eastern Asia have minor lamas, who hold a mixed temporal and spiritual juris- diction over the people, and in Tartary this form of idolatry seems combined with magic and sorcery, and many similar modes of terri- fying and deluding the ignorant wanderers of the desert. Burchan is the name of the Calmuc idols, and most of their gods are supposed to have been spiritual beings, who, after passing through all the different degrees of transmigration, have at last raised themselves to the dignity of the godhead, by great deeds and extreme sufferings. The inhabitants of the Tartar villages near Astrachan are Mohammedans, and there are also many Persians, professing the same faith, residing in this country, for trade. That race of Mongolian Tartars called Bu- riats, inhabiting the southern shores of Lake Baikal, as far as the Chinese frontier, are wor- uhipers of the- Grand Lama ; but they have numerous other objects of worship. Their worship abounds in burdensome and disagree- able ceremonies, but is accompanied with nc sanguinary rites. A portion of the people pro- fess Shamanism, which is supposed to be the most ancient religion of the country. MISSIONS. United Bkethken. — In 1765, five Brethren from Hernhutt in Silesia, were appointed to undertake a mission to the wandering Tartar tribes in Asiatic Eussia, and settled at Sarep- ta, not far from Georgeisk, one of the chief Russian towns, between the Caspian and Black Seas, on the road from St. Petersburg to Per- sia. They ransomed some of the Tartars from slavery, and preached the Gospel to all whose attention they could gain, conforming, in some respects, to the Tartar mode of life. They translated the Gospel and several tracts into Calmuc. They met with very little success, till 1815, when a little flock of Calmuc Tar- tars came out from among their heathen coun trymen, and joined their congregation. In 1823, their congregation had increased to 300. About this time, the emperor refused to grant them permission to baptize their converts, 22 in number, under an old law which forbids the conversion and baptism of the heathen, unless it be done by the Eussian Greek clergy ! But the Emperor Alexander gave them permission to preach and distribute the Scriptures. Very valuable assistance was at this time rendered not only to the Moravian mission, but also to the Scotch and London Society's missions, by the Eussian Bible Society, whose interests the Em- peror and the pious Galatzin warmly promoted. This society was at the expense of printing the Scriptures in modern Euss, Mongolian, and a portion of them in Turkish Tartar, after they had been translated into these languages by the missionaries of these societies. Scottish Missionary Society. — This society commenced a mission in 1802, at Karsass, in Asiatic Eussia. They obtained from the Eus- sian Government, a grant of land consisting of 14,000 acres, with certain immunities attached, and they seem to have obtained greater privi- leges than the Moravians, for liberty was given to their converts to " embrace the religion of the colony, and become members of it." They also had the privilege of giving passports to the members of their congregation to settle In other parts of the empire. In consequence of these privileges, probably, the Scotch mission- ary settlement continued in existence longer than any other missionary establishment in Tartary. Native youths, slaves to the Circas- sians and Cuban Tartars, were redeemed by the Scotch missionaries and placed in schools, where they acquired the Turkish and English languages, the principles of Christianity, and several useful arts. In 1805, a printing-press was sent out to Karass, and the New Testa- ment was printed in Turkish, and tracts in the Tartar language. In 1814, they extended their missionary efforts to Astrachan and Oicnberg; TAETAEY AND SIBERIA. 747 and at the former place, another printing-press ■was established, which printed the Tartar New Testament and other books, which were carried into Persia by the nnmerous merchants trading from that country with Russia. One of their Tartar converts, named John Abercrombie, was for many years printer to the London Mis- eionary Society at Selinginsk. In 1817 they issued 4000 tracts and 5000 Testaments. These found their way, by means of Mohamme- dan merchants and pilgrims, and- even Brah- mins and Jews, to Bagdad, Persia, Bokhara, and even to China. A Tartar prince of the Crimea, called the Sultan of Katagherry, ap- pears to have been the first fruits of their mis- sionary labor. Walter Buchanan, a Circas- sian, was the next. He faithfully served the Scottish or Edinburgh Society, for many years, at Orenburgh, in Eussian Tartary. In 1822, the Scotch colony was joined by several German missionaries, sent out by the Basle Institution, some of whom settled in Tartary, and others proceeded to Teflis and Shusha, in Georgia, to labor among the Arme- nians. In 1823, Mirza Mohammed All, son of a Mohammedan judge, was employed by the mis- sionaries at Astrachan, as a teacher ; and in consequence of the discussions which he had with the missionaries, his faith in Moham- medanism was shaken ; and, after a short time, in the face of the opposition of friends, he cor- dially embraced Christianity. The Greek arch- bishop proposed that he should be admitted into that church by baptism ; but he wrote a petition to the Emperor Alexander, through Prince Galatzin, asking to be allowed to re- ceive baptism from those who had been the instruments of his conversion, which request was instantly granted. He was, therefore, ad mitted to the church, in the presence of Greeks and Turks, Persians and Frenchmen, Germans and Armenians, the service being in English, Turkish, and Persian. But he was afterwards treated with great harshness by the Eussian government of the Caucasus, being compelled, in 1825, to enter the Eussian service, and or- dered to refrain from interfering or coopera^ ting in any missionary work. In consequence of this and other restrictions imposed upon them by the Russian government, both the Scotch and the Moravian Missionary Societies relinquished their missions, though with the greatest regret ; but the settlement at Karass continued to be occupied several years longer. A great revolution also took place about this time in Eussia with regard to the Bible Society. This institution, under the fostering care of the Emperor Alexander, had pursued a distin- guished career, and promised to supply the Word of Life not only to the Eussian popular tion, but to the heathen and Mohammedans. A powerful opposition, however, was raised against it in 1825, the year that Alexander died ; in consequence of which, Prince Galat- zin retired from office, and resigned his station as Minister of Religion. Its secretary, M. Papoil, was put upon his trial in the criminal court, for allowing a book to be published, in which were some reflections considered unfavorable to the doctrine of the Greek church, in relation to the Virgin Mary 1 It had been intended that the missionaries at Astrachan should be employed by the Bible Society to print a new and correct edition of Henry Martyn's Persian New Tes- tament, and the types had been ordered from St. Petersburgh ; but this work was now stopped, and the missionaries were told that their Tar- tar version of the Old Testament would have to be submitted to three archbishops of the Greek church ; so that, when they had com- pleted the translation, it was doubtful whether it would bo allowed to be published. All these causes, together with the growing indifference of the native tribes, combined to cause the Scotch and United Brethren's Societies to withdraw their missionaries iu 1825. London Missionary Society. — This society undercook a mission to Selinginsk, in Siberia, in 1819. When the missionaries had finished the translation of the Gospel of Matthew, the first printed edition was sent to the governor of Irkutsk, to distribute among the Tartars on the shores of Lake Baikal ; but the Calmuc Tartar character being different from that which the Buriat tribes had retained, the books were not generally understood by these people. But two of their nobles were found who could decipher the character, and were able to read and explain its contents. This so astonished the Buriat chiefs and the head lama, that each, among his own people, made -a collection amounting to £550, which they sent to the Eussian Bible Society, begging to have the Gospel of Matthew, and, if possible, other books of the New Testament, translated into their own dialect, and printed in a character which they could read. The two Buriat nobles who had interpreted the former edition, were sent for, and repaired to St. Petersburgh to undertake the work. As they proceeded with their work, they became deeply interested, and frequently came to Eev. Mr. Schmidt to in- quire the meaning of passages. When they had completed the 23d chapter of Matthew, they came to him, and declared that they had resolved to renounce their former superstitions, and embrace the Christian faith. He warned them of the trials they would have to encoun- ter, but they replied : " It is our firm determi- nation to be followers of Jesus, and to share in his reproach, if that be our lot ; though we hope that such trials may not befall us soon, on account of our weakness in the faith." One of them died at Sarepta, in October, 1822. In 1838, the mission is thus mentioned in the Society's report : " Shagdur and Tekshee, two of the native converts, conduct the daily Mongolian worship with much propriety, dur- ing Mr. Stallybross's visit to England. The 748 TASMANIA. giria' school at Khodon makes satisfactory progress. Tlie boys are ten in number. At Ona, Mr. Swan is surrounded by a number of Burial youth, who have been brought under the influence of religion, and whose chief de- sire is to impart to their countrymen the bless- ings they so highly prize." The whole of the Old Testament was translated into Mongolian, and printed ; and some of the Gospels had been printed and circulated. But, in 1841, the mission was suppressed by an order from the Eussian Synod, the reason given being, " that the mission, in relation to that form of Christianity already established in the Russian empire, did not coincide with the views of the church and the government." The missionaries wrote, concerning the aban- donment of this mission : " It is painful to bid adieu to the scenes where we have spent so many years, and to the people of whom, we trust, the first fruits have been gathered unto Christ. They are living evidences that we have not labored in vain, and earnests of the abundant harvests to be expected when the word of God shall have free course, and be glorified in this land. — Missionary Guide Book. We may judge, from these examples, what will be the fate of our missions in Turkey, should Russia succeed in her present crusade. TASMANIA, or VAN DIEMAN'S LAND : An island, lying at the southern extremity of New Holland, between 40° 42' and 43° 43' S. lat. ; and 145° 31' and 148° 22' E. long., reckoned to contain 27,192 square miles. In general it is composed of al- ternate hill and dale, and even the high downs are generally fit for cultivation and pasture. The chief lines, both of mountain and river, run from north to south, through the eastern part of the colony. Table Mountain, the most elevated hill in the island, nearly over- hangs the southern settlement of Hobart Town, rising to the height of 3,936 feet. Al- though the country is productive, and but a small portion of it is occupied by British co- lonists, the aboriginal inhabitants have en- tirely disappeared. In consequence of the in- cessant mutual hostility which subsisted be- tween them and the colonists, the whole of them were hunted out, and removed in the year 1835, to Piiader's Island, in Bass's Straits, where the miserable remnant still reside. They numbered 210, but in 1842, were reduced to 54. There had been only 14 children born in 8 years. MISSION. Wesleyan Missionary Society. — The Wesleyan Missionary Society began opera- tions in Tasmania in the year 1820, at a time when there was but one minister of any per- suasion in the whole island. That year the committee in London directed Mr. Carrosso to proceed from New South Wales and com- mence a mission there ; but he failing to reach the island, and Mr. Horton being then on his way to New South Wales, was directed to re- main in Tasmania. At that period the state of society in the island was most deplorable. The aboriginal inhabitants, greatly reduced in number, wandered about in wretchedness, con- stantly exposed to the hostility of the white settlers. The white population, made up of convicts and settlers, then amounted to about 8,000 persons. And on Mr. Horton's commenc- ing his efforts, he thus describes the moral condition of the place where he was appoint- ed to labor : " Adultery and drunkenness, and blasphemy are sins which prevail to an awful extent among all classes, associated with idleness, dishonesty, malice, quarreling, and misery. Almost every tongue has learned to swear, and among the lower classes every hand to steal. The houses are surrounded by fierce dogs, to guard them against nocturnal depredations ; and yet when thieves are de- tected in the act of plundering, they seldom resist, but scamper off as fast as thoy can. Indeed a vigilant and active police prevents the frequent perpetration of very daring deeds of outrage. Before we arrived, there was only one Protestant minister, a clergyman of the established church, whose labors were al- most wholly confined to Hobart Town, and one Catholic priest, who had been but a few months in the colony. The out-settlements were there- fore left without the public ordinances of reli- gion. Thus Satan enjoyed an undisturbed reign. When we landed in this country, we were not a little surprised and pleased to find a Wesleyan Methodist Society already formed, and a chapel in a state of preparation. There are about 20 who very regularly attend class, and appear to be sincere inquirers ; some of whom have found peace with God." The mission was soon strengthened by ano- ther missionary. The missionaries received every encouragement from the governor of the colony, who showed himself laudably anxioua for the moral benefit of all classes of the popu- lation. In 1827 he applied to the committee for two more missionaries to be sent out ; their passage, together with an annual allowance toward their support, having been voted from the public funds. But the labor in such a mission field as Tas- mania is one of no ordinary difficulty, especi- ally that portion of it employed among the convicts. These unhappy creatures, while suf- fering the punishment of their crimes, retain the vicious habits and daring disregard of the laws of God and man, which have been the occasion of their banishment to those distant lands. And yet among these children of crime and sorrow the missionaries have labored with very considerable success. One of them gives it as his opinion, that out of 50 criminals exe- cuted within six years, many of them had been snatched " as brands from the burning," and shared with " the dying thief" in the kingdom TATT jOING— TENASSEEIM. U9 of a compassionate Saviour. The missionaries gave wliat attention they could to schools, for the education of the young ; bat they had to be held in the evening, and to be taught, at least in part, by the more educated criminals. The prisoners generally seem to have entertained toward the missionaries feelings of respect and affection. This may be partly accounted for from the fact, that usually the only words of kindness which cheered their bitter lot, fell from the lips of these men of God. In 1832, the government requested the appointment of an additional missionary for the new penal set- tlement of Port Arthur, and the Eev. Mr. Butters was sent out to supply that post. At this period the number of members had risen to 163, and 283 children were in the schools. Many of these had been among the most guilty and abandoned of mankind. Many even of the scholars had already been trained and graduated at the school of vice, and had arrived at early maturity in depravity and guilt. In this class of men the colonial gov- ernment had found it necessary to make dis- tinctions ; the most hardened and incorrigible being separated from the rest, and placed under severe discipline in the penal settlements or condemned stations in Tasmania. Among those thus " twice dead," the Wesleyan mis- sionaries were appointed to labor ; and such ■were the results of the Gospel over the hearts and conduct of many of these outcasts, that successive governors of this colony have grate- fully acknowledged the importance of the ser- vices rendered by the missionaries. In 1837, four additional missionaries were sent out to ex- tend its operations. The mission was farther enlarged in 1839, when the statistics stood thus : 9 missionaries ; 570 church members, and 922 scholars. The Eev. John Water- house became central superintendent of the missions in Australia and Polynesia, in 1839. In the discharge of his official duties he per- formed long and perilous journeys, both by sea and land, while visiting the various stations under his care. On one of these journeys in Tasmania he was much exposed to heavy rains, the result of which was a protracted jll- ness, which at length ended his valuable life. The excellent financial measures which he and others introduced into these missions have re- lieved the missionary society from the respon- sibility of their maintenance and now this por- tion of the mission field has become nearly, if not quite, self-supporting. The gold discoveries in Australia have ra- ther retarded the prosperity of this mission dur- ing the past three years. An extensive emi- gration took place, which affected every circuit more or leas. Yet, under all these disadvan- tages, the district has sustained itself during the past year by the help of its own contingent fund ; the missionaries in general report very favorably of the spiritual state of the mem- bers who have remained at home, and encour- age themselves with the hope of future im- provement. — Rev. W. Butler. TABULAR PIEW. ^i ^6 6 r, i UJKNTKAL, "n" i^ B 3 OR PRINCIPAL STATIONS ■^ bt a M CO i OR raRCUITS. St 3.2 p.. •3 a 3 ^ s p- ^„ yj ^ d S w Hobart-Town... n 41 10 351 5B1 1600 New Norfolk... 2 10 <23 124 260 CampbeU-Town. 3 6 2 37 65 250 lifliinceston .... n 2 3S .') ia4 3UI1 IJOO Longford 6 12 6 72 66 460 Westbury 4 4 4- 42 300 Oatlands 7 I 3 2 2e « IbU Totals 39 6 3 114 24 760 1169 4000 TATTOOING : A process of marking the human body with various figures, by stained lines, practiced by the natives of the Pacific islands before the introduction of Christianity among them, and still practiced by the pagan tribes. Until a young man is tattooed, he is considered in his minority. He need not think of marriage, and he is constantly ex- posed to taunts and ridicule, as being poor and of low birth, and as having no right to speak in the society of men. But as soon as he is tattooed, he passes into his majority, and con- siders himself entitled to the respect and pri- vileges of mature years. When a youth, therefore, reaches the age of sixteen, he and his friends are all anxiety that he should be tattooed. He is then on the out-look for the tattooing of some neighboring chief, with whom he may unite. On these occasions, six or a dozen young men may be tattooed at one time ; and for these there may be four or five tattooers employed. Tattooing is a regular profession, just as house-building, and well paid. (See New-Zealand, p. 569.) TAUTIRA : A station of the London Mis- sionarv Society on Tahiti, South Sea. TAUEANGA : A station of the Church Missionary Society in New-Zealand, on the Bay of Plenty. TAVOY : A province and a city in Bur- mah annexed to the possessions of the Bast India Company by the treaty of Yaudaboo in 1826. The city is the seat of a mission of the American Baptist Union. The entire dis- trict has been brought in some degree under the influence of its operations. TELLICHERRY : A station of the Basle Missionary Society, on the Malabar coast, in the western part of Southern Hindostan, 126 miles from Seringapatam. TELOOGOO : A station of the Church Missionary Society in Southern India, on the eastern coast, and some distance north of TENASSEEIM : The name of a large roo TERNATE— TKEBIZOND. river in Burmah, and also applied to the three provinces of Maulmain, Tavoy, and Mergui, annexed to the territory of the British Bast India Company by the treaty of Yaudaboo in 1826. TEKNATE : One of the Molucca Islands, in the Indian Archipelago. THABA BASSIOU: A station of the French Protestants in South Africa, on a branch of the river Kaledon. TIIBOPOLIS : A station of the London Missionary Society in South Africa, 550 miles east of Cape Town. THESSALONIOA, fcalled by the_ Turks Selanik, and by the French Salonka) is situated at the head of the gulf of Salonica (ancient Sinus Thermaicus) a branch of the JJIgean Sea. It is about 175 miles north of Athens and 300 west of Constantinople. It is, as in Paul's day, the chief city of Macedonia, being its main Bea-port, and next to Constantinople, the chief port of European Turkey. It has a population of 60,000 or 70,000, of whom perhaps 15,000 are Turks, 15,000 Greeks, 30,000 Jews (in- cluding 5,000 Mohammedan Jews), and a few thousand Bulgarians, Wallachians, Albanians, &c., &c. In 1849, the A. B. C. F. M. established a mission among the Jews of this city. It con- sisted at first of Messrs. Maynard and Dodd, with their wives, of whom the former died in a few months, and his widow returned to this country. Mr. and Mrs. Dodd were subse- quently joined by Messrs. Parsons and Morgan with their wives. Mrs. Morgan also died in a few months aud Mr. Morgan afterwards mar- ried Mrs. Sutphen, widow of a missionary. The members of the mission suffered much from sickness, especially from fever and ague, which is prevalent in Macedonia ; and at the present (July 1854) they are all absent from their stations : Messrs. Parsons and Morgan in Smyrna, laboring among the Jews there, and Mr. Dodd in America, expecting to return soon. It is hoped that hereafter both stations may be occupied, and that in Thessalonica a more favorable residence may be secured, and better health enjoyed. Thessalonica is the most important literary centre of the Jews in the east, and a foothold there gained will be valuable. The Jews there are peculiarly sociable and accessible to mis- sionary influence. The missionaries have met with encouragement in their work. There have been a few cases of hopeful conversion among Jews and Mussulmans. Many others seem convinced, intellectually, of the truth, though yet unrenewed, and of a still larger circle the prejudices are broken ; their esteem, and sometimes affection, is won, and they lie open to the influence of the truth. The field is hopeful. — Rev. E. M. Dodd. THUGS : (See Hmdostan, Dr. Scudder's Letter.) TIAREI : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. TIDMANTOjST : Out-station to Kat River station, of the London Missionary Society in South Africa, formerly Blinkwater. TIDOR : One of the Molucca Islands, in the Indian Archipelago. TILLIPALLY : A station of the Ameri- can Board in Ceylon, about 10 miles north of Jaffnapatam. TIMOR ; A group of the Molucca Islands in the Indian Archipelago. TIMORLAUT : One of the Banda Islands, a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- pelago. TINNEVELLT : A district in the South- ern Carnatie, South India, and an important field of missionary operations. TIRUMUNGALUM : A station of the Am. Board, about 12 miles S. "W". of Madura, in Southern Hindostan, and belonging to that mission. TIRUPOOVANUM - A station of the Am. Board, in Southern Hindostan, 8 or 10 miles S. B. of Madura, and belonging to that mission. TOBAGO : (See West Indies.) TOKA : One of the New Hebrides, where is a station of the London Missionary So- ciety. TOFGATABOO : One of the Friendly Islands, a station of the Wesleyan Society. TOUNGOO : A large city in Southern Burmah, 100 miles above Shwaygyeen on the Sitang river. It is in territory which was annexed to British Burmah in 1852, and is the seat of a mission for both Burmans and Ka- rens, of the Am. Baptist Union. TRANQUBBAR: A settlement formed by the Danes, on the Coromandel coast, in 1616. It is 145 miles S. by W. from Madras. The town, and a small adjoining territory, were ceded to the Danish crown in 1621, on payment of an annual tribute of 2,000 crowns to the rajah of Tanjore. The Danish govern- ment have recently relinquished Tranquebar ; and the British collector has removed there from Negapatam. This was the scene of the early Danish missions in India. The mission is now supported by the Lutheran Missionary Society at Dresden. TR A VAN CORE: The southern extremity of Hindostan, between 10° and 11° N. lat. It is about 140 miles in length, by 40, the ave- rage breadth. The population is not far from 1,000,000. The principal part of the popular tion consists of Brahmins and Nairs ; there are also many Mohammedans. The missions in Travancore are those of the London Society, the Church Society, and the Church of Scot- land's mission to the Jews. TREBIZOND : A station of the American Board, situated near the south-eastern extre- mity of the Black Sea, and supposed to be the precise spot where Xenoph/m. with his retreat- TREVANDEEAM— TURKEY. rci ing army, first touched the sea. It has about 15,000 inhabitants, 1,250 of whom are Arme- nians. Its chief importance as a missionary station, arises from the fact of its being the principal sea-port of ancient Armenia, and its consequent influence over the proper country of the Armenian race. TREVANDEEAM : A station of the Lon- don Missionary Society, in the Trayancore dis- trict. Southern India, near Cape Comorin. TRICHONOPOLT : A large fortified town, capital of u, district of the same name, situated on the Cavery, 186 miles south-west of Madras. Population, exclusive of troops, estimated at 74,000. Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. TRICHOOR : A large town 50 miles north of Cochin, a station of the Church Missionary Society. TRINCOMALBB : A town on the N. E. coast of Ceylon, 150 miles N. E. of Colombo, having one of the finest harbors in the world. A station of the "Wesleyan Society. TRINIDAD : (See West Indies.) TSHICKSOO: A Karen village in the district of Tavoy, in Burmah, and an out-sta- tion of the Tavoy mission of the American Baptist Union. I'UBUAI : One of the Austral Islands, and a station of the London Missionary Society. _ TULBAGH : Station of the London Mis- sionary Society in South Africa, 75 miles north-east of Cape Town. Also of the Rhen- ish Society. TURANGA: A station of the Church Missionary Society in New-Zealand, situated on Poverty Bay. TURKEY: The dominion of the Grand Turk, or Sultan, extends over territory situated in Asia, Africa, and Europe, and lying be- tween the 20th and 45th degrees of north latitude, the 10th and 47th of east longitude. The countries composing this empire are, for the most part, rich in natural resources, and have been the seats of mighty empires and re- publics, which at various times have exercised a controlling influence on the world's history. The entire territory covers a surface of about 210,000 square miles, including the tributary provinces of Moldavia, Wallachia, Servia, JEgypt, Tripoli and Tunis. Turkey in Europe, by nature formed to be the garden of the world, has become a wilder- ness, from the devastations of war and the op- pressions of government. It is bounded on the east by the Black Sea, the Bosphorus, and the Sea of Marmora ; on the south by the Dardanelles and Archipelago. The climate is, for the most part, temperate ; the surface of the country is varied with mountains and well- watered plains. The unusually large extent of sea-coast, and the number of good harbors, afford every facility for commercial operations. The Danube carries steam navigation into the neart of the country. Constantinople, or Istamboul, including its suburbs, is situated upon both sides of the channel which separates Europe from Asia, numbers about 1,000,000 inhabitants, and commands the Buxine and the Levant. Turkey might long ago have shared the fate of Poland, had the powers of Europe dared to deliver Constantinople, the key city, into the hands of any one of their number. Moldavia, Wallachia, and Servia are tributary principalities, over which the Sultan has now but little power. Turkey in Asia includes the countries be- tween the Sea of Marmora, the Buxine, and Russian Asia, on the north, and Arabia on the south ; between Russian Asia and Persia on the east, and the Mediterranean and Archi- pelago on the west. Within its boundaries lie the Holy City, the ancient seats of power, and fountain-heads of learning, and Turkistan, from whence came the savage tribe who have given their name to a great empire, and iden- tified it with the faith of Mohammed. Many wealthy and thriving cities exist among the old ruins, supported by the Asiatic com- merce which passes to Europe through these countries. Among these are Brusa, Symrna, Trebizond, Brzrum, Bagdad, Tripoli, Damas- cus. Manufactures of steel and cloths are car- ried on prosperously in several towns. Turkey in Africa consists of the tributary countries of Egypt, Tunis, and Tripoli. The universal prevalence of Mohammedanism in these countries tends to preserve the political union with Turkey, the stronghold of their faith. Population. — By the table annexed, it will be seen that, in European Turkey the Mohanv medans, although the dominant race, do not constitute a third part of the population. They hold the fortresses and important towns, but Greeks, Bulgarians, Armenians, &o., form the mass of the population. The European Turks preserve their original character of a military colony : EUROPEAN TUEKEY (kUMELIA.) Thrace 1 ,800, 000 Bulgaria 4,000,000 Moldavia 1,400,000 Wallachia 2,600,000 Bosnia and Herzegowina 1,400,000 Rumelia 2,600,000 Servia 1,000,000 Islands of the Arcliipelago 700,000 16,600,000 ASIATIC TUEKEY (aNADOLU.) Asia Minor 10,700,000 Syria, Mesopotamia and Kurdistan... 4,450,000 Arabia (Mecca, Medina Habesh) 900,000 16,060,000 AFEICAN TUEKEY (oAEB.) Egypt 2,000,000 Tripoli, Fezzan, Tunis 1,800,000 3,800,000 85,350,000 752 TURKEY. Dividing the population iuto races and tribes, tiie result is as follows : RACES OR TRIBES. In Europe. In Asia. In Africa. Total. Ottomans.. 1,100,000 10,700,000 11,800,000 Slavouians. 7,200,000 Rumanians 4,000,000 Arnauts . . . 1,600,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 Armenians. 400,000 2,000,000 2,400,000 70,000 100,000 Tartars.... 230,000 Arabs 900,000 3,800,000 4,700,000 Syrian sand 235,000 236.000 26,000 26,000 Kurfls 1 000,000 1,000,000 Turkomans 90,000 90,000 Totals... 16,600,000 16,060,000 8,800,000 35,360,000 Taking the population according to religious creeds, the result is : CREEDS. Mahom'd'n Greelis and Armenians Eom. Cath. Je\r3 , Totals. In Europe. 3,800,000 11,370,000 260,000 70,000 16,500,000 12,980,000 2,360,000 640,000 100,000 16,060,000 In Africa. 3,800,000 Total. 20,560,000 13,730,000 900,000 170,000 There are now, also, more than 2,000 in ths Protestant community lately organized, and a great number, particularly among the Arme- nians, who have embraced Protestant senti- ments. Protestantism is likely to have a rapid growth, and become an element of great power in the future of Turkey. The Ecdesiastico Politico! Character of the Turkish Government, and its bearing upon the condition of the different Religious Classes of its Subjects. — The Turkish Government is, in spirit, a theocracy. Its legislation is derived from four sources ; the word of God, i. e., the Ko- ran ; the Sunna, word of the prophet, the sen- tences of the four grand Imams, the fathers of Islamism ; and the laws of the reigning sove- reign, representative of the prophet. Moham- med aimed at being the founder of a new state, and the Koran was declared to be, as it now is, the civil and religious code ol the Mussulmans. The Faithful are the proper subjects of the Sul- tan ; his well-beloved children. Unbelievers are his enemies. Unable to carry out the principle of intolerance, the Sultan still recognizes the Mus- sulmans as his more immediate and privileged subjects. lie tolerates and grants privileges to certain incorporated bodies of unbelievers, and recognizes his Christian subjects only as members of some one of the existing Christian communities, in which every individual must be enrolled. Bach of these bodies, excepting the Protestants, has a Patriarch at its head who becomes responsible to the Sultan for the whole. Every trade, moreover, is incorporated under the direction of a committee, who grant licenses to tradesmen, journeymen and appren- tices, and are responsible to the head of their community. In the early years of the Arme- nian mission, this power, in the possession of the patriarch, enabled him to inflict intolerable per- secutions upon the missionary converts. They could not withdraw from the community, with- out rebelling against the civil law of the coun- try. They were finally excommunicated, were unable to obtain licenses to trade, had their property taken from them with no means of recovery, and were only preserved from starva- tion by the cliarity of foreign residents and Mussulmans. On the 15th of November, 1847, after long- continued exertions on the part of Sir Strat- ford Canning, carried forward by Lord Cow- ley, his successor to the British Embassy, an imperial decree was issued, recognizing native Protestants, as constituting a separate and in- dependent community in Turkey. Reforms in the Turkish Body-politic. — For more than three centuries Turkey was the ter- ror of her European neighbors. Her armies were as well disciplined and equipped as those of other nations, while their fanatic devotion to their religion, inseparably united as it wag, with the civil power, and their intense hatred of unbelievers, rendered them almost irresistible. So long as the zeal and valor of individual combatants decided the day, the Turkish ar- mies retained supremacy. But while civiliza- tion was advancing in the surrounding Chris- tian nations, and martial tactics were studied and practised, there was no advance, but rather a retrogression, in Turkey. Toward the latter part of the seventeenth century the Turkish power was at its zenith ; from that time, it be- gan to decline. The Janissaries became alarm- ingly powerful, audacious and overbearing. While there was no progress made in the art of war, the Ottoman people gradually degene- rated, and lost much of their original native valor. Reform was commenced in 1789, by Sultan Selim. Prejudice and ignorance, on the part of his subjects, were obstacles almost insuper- able to the introduction of measures which would tend to place Turkey on a level with her neighbors. An army was formed by Selim on the European plan, and various governmental reforms were introduced. These new measures were considered as sacrilegious by the body oi Mussulman subjects, and a revolt of the Jan- issaries deposed Selim from his throne. Mahmoud, successor of Selim, was disposed to continue the reforms commenced by that monarch, but was, for a long time, kept in check by the Janissaries. At length, on the 14th of June, 1826, they were carried off by a general massacre, and the Sultan was free to pursue his plans of reform. The red cap and trowsers were substituted for the turban and THE S SALOT^IC A> oil SALONIC A a ad TUTUILA— UNITED STATES. 753 loose robes. Women were allowed greater freedom The Christians and Pranks received new privileges and protection. The army was increased, the power of the Pashas limited, fo- reign officers, mechanics and engineers employ- ed, and the navy renovated and enlarged. A medical college Was also instituted, and quaran- tine laws introduced. These reforms were not appreciated nor understood by the people. They were contrary to the genius of Moham- medanism, encountered the stern opposition of the priesthood, and were carried forward with great difficul ty. Their first effect was to weaken the power of the empire, and from a succession of untoward events, it seemed, at the death of Sultan Mahmoud, in 1839, to be on the verge of destruction. His son AbdCil Medjid, ascend- ing the throne at the early age of 17, however persevered in the same line of policy ; and on the 3d November, of that year, the celebrated Hatti Scheriff was proclaimed in GCil Hane, a park within the limits of the Seraglio, to the assembled grandees of the empire, and in the presence of the ambassadors of foreign powers. In this extraordinary document the new sove- reign, unsolicited by his people, but constrain- ed by the necessity of circumstances, limited his own authority, guaranteed to every subject security of life and property, ordained an equal and fair system of taxation, ordered a regular method of drawing the conscription for the army and fixed the period of service ; did away with the confiscation of the property of crimi- nals and visiting punishment on innocent re- latives ; promised better administration of jus- tice, and placed Mohammedans, Christians, Jews, and Pagans, on the same footing, as re- garded civil rights and the law. Changes so great and opposed to Mohammedan feeling and usage, were, of course, but imperfectly execut- ed, and the tanzimat or "new regulations,' can be made a reality only by gradual steps of enforcement The government, however, has entered upon the right path, and under the in^ fluences from abroad which must control it, is moving onward in it. The action taken in be- half of the Protestants, the guarantees given recently to the Western Powers, and the fir mans addressed to the Christian and Jewish communities, are events of the happiest signi- ficance in reference to the cause of civilization, of religious freedom, and of true Christianity in Turkey. TUTUILA : One of the Samoan Islands on which the London Missionary Society have two stations. TUMBOO : A village beautifully situated near the sea, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, about 11 miles from Kent. Church Mission- ary Society. UAW A : A station of the Church Mission- ary Society in New-Zealand, 35 miles north of Turanga. UITBNHAGE: A town and district in South Africa, occupied by the London Mis- 48 sionary Society, and the Society for the Pro- pagation of the Gospel. The district is pas- toral and agricultural, lying chiefly between the Chantoos and Bushman's rivers. In the neighborhood of the town, it is of extreme fer- tility, and has been known to yield from 80 to 90 returns of wheat. The town is regularly built, each house having behind it an allotment of garden ground ; and the water from a spring in the vicinity has been laid along the princi- pal street, furnishing an abundant supply for all. Fruit and vegetables are siitcessfully culr tivated, and sold in market at Port Elizabeth. The interior trade is carried on through Gra- ham's Town. ULAH : A Karen town in the district of Mergui, in Burmah, on the Tenasserim river, an out-station of the Tavoy mission of the Am. Baptist Union. ULEMOEGA : A station of the Londoa Missionary Society on the island of Upolu, one of the Samoan Group. UMLAZI : A station of the American Board in South Africa, 12 miles south-west of Umlazi river, containing 100,000 Zulus. UMPUKANI : A station of the Glasgow African Society, among the Grequas, Basutos, and Mautatees, South Africa. ■ UMSUNDUZI : A station of the Ameri- can Board among the Zulus in South Africa, near Port Natal. UMTWALUMI : A station of the Ameri^ can Board among the Zulus, near Port Natal,, in South Africa. UMVELO : A station of the London Mis- sionary Society in South Africa, formerly called Botman's Kraal. UMVOTI : A station of the American Board in South Africa, about 40 miles north of Port Natal, on the Umvoti river. It is a most delightful site for a mission, well-watered and wooded, with good arable and pasture grounds, so' that several thousands of natives might live within a short distance of the mis- sionary's residence. UPOLU : One of the Samoan Islands, ou which the London Missionary Society have seven stations. USSA : Danish Akra, occupied by the Ger- man Missionary Society. UTUMAOEO : A station of the Londoa Missionary Society on the east side of the island of Eaiatea, situated on an open bay. UYEA : One of the Friendly Islands, the most remote in the district of Habai, occu- pied by the Wesleyans. A Romish bishop, two priests, and an old friar have taken up their residence here, and done much mischief, by kindling up a religious war and setting the people to destroy one another. UNITED STATES : I. Extent of Terri- tory. — In 181 9, the territory belonging to the United States included not less than 2,300,000 square miles. Since then, at different times, another million has been acquired by various 754 ITNITED STATES. treaties. The present area of our " real estate " is about 3,300,000 square milest and there is the prospect of further annexations. Within a single generation, the star-spangled flag has moved southward, from the " still St. Mary's river," on the confines of Georgia, to the Sunken Floridian keys ; and westward to the Eio Bra^ vo, on the farthest Texiau border ; and beyond that, southward and westward still, to the Rio Gila and the Californian gold coast. The bannered eagle, which, till of late, fluttered only on the Atlantic breezes, has sped her flight across the " Father of Waters," and over the rugged sierras or saws of the Eooky Moun- tains, and now hovers in proud supremacy on the gales of the Pacific, and " the stretching out of his wings fiUeth the breadth of the land." Neither the empire of Rome nor even that of Alexander spread so far. The sun is more than two hours and a half in rising to the view of all our people, and bringing morning to the whole land. Before the denizens of San Fran- cisco have eaten their breakfast, their fellow- citizens of Eastport are beginning to think of their dinners. From north to south, " as the wild goose flies," in passing from his summer retreats among the Canadian lakes, to his win- ter quarters on the Mexican Gulf, the poor bird must wing an aerial journey of 1500 miles ere he is safe from the guns of our sportsmen. An indented coast>line, meandering through more than 30,000 miles, affords numerous har- bors for the purposes of commerce ; and these still further favored by even a greater number of miles of inland communication by those natural canals, our noble navigable rivers. Nearly the whole of this vast area is within easy reach of water conveyance. It was said by the cynical Randolph, that Washington is "a city of magnificent dis- tances ;" and, in this respect, our national capital is a fit type of the great country whose political interests centre there. The mind, which can traverse any space with the quick- ness of thought, is bewildered in wandering over this vast domain. And as for the body, there be few indeed, even in our huge " travel- ing community," with its restless ramblings, who have so much as set foot in each one of our States and organized Territories. Out of our country there could be carved 38 such kingdoms as Great Britain, and 16 such em- pires as France. The possession of land has ever been regarded as one of the grand ele- ments of national greatness, wealth, and power. II. Physical Resources. — Of these we can catch but a hasty glimpse. With a country, of which portions are buried for half the year in ice and snow, while other portions have never seen so much as a snow-flake ; — a coun- try where the rivers — those liquid roads of commerce, roll in paths of a thousand miles, — a country affording every variety of climate, yielding in teeming exuberance almost every useful vegetable product, and whose mines of the most valuable metals are beyond exhaus- tion, — a country stored with the endless treas- ures of the forest and- the quarry, — a country endowed with such resources, and fast filling up with a people who know how to find and use them ; — with such a country, and such re- sources, it is impossible we should not heap up riches, and rapidly rise to that eminence of moral and political power, which amplitude of material means secures. Take a few items from the census returns of 1850. The an- nual crop of only one of the cereals, Indian- corn, reached the inconceivable amount of 600,000,000 of bushels ; the yield of wheat was 100,000,000 bushels; that of cotton, 1,000,000,000 of pounds. A very large pro- portion of the soil is of the richest kind; though this is of the less consequence, as, by the help of modern science, and agricultural chemistry, the poorest soils can be made per- manently fertile. As to mineral wealth, we have already ascertained 218,000 square miles of coal-formation, equal to twenty-seven States like Massachusetts. Not less than 1,100 cubic miles of this fuel are deposited beneath the surface of our soil ; and one of these cubic miles, at the present rate of consumption, would last 1,000 years; so that a million of years would not exhaust the stock. Of iron, so far as utility is concerned, the most precious of the metals, there are vast deposits every- where in the Mississippi valley, along the cen- tral axis of the country. Some of them are prodigious. There is a mountain in Missouri 500 feet in height, and miles in circuit, almost wholly composed of iron. The abundance of it is even greater in the region of Lake Supe- rior; and it is also richly, though less pro- fusely, scattered over the Atlantic slope. The lead formations in the groat central vralley oc- cupy 3,000 square miles, annually yielding more than 20,000 tons. The copper deposits in the wide regions of the north-west are still more extensive, affording thousands of tons every year, though the exploration is but just begun I and some of the Southern States are found to be still richer in this metal. To say nothing of silver, zinc, and other metals used in the economy of civilized life, gold is found all along the eastern slope from Texas to Canada, in many places pofitably mined ; while, on our Pacific slope, it is so lavishly difl'used, that there is enough to reward the industry, and, excite the greed, of generations to come. III. Commerce. — The internal traffic is be- yond all computation. Its statistics are too huge to be meddled with. The active transfer of property to and from all portions of the land, and the exchange of values in crude and manufactured articles, employ and reward an inconceivable amount of industry and capital. To say nothing of the traction on common roads, illimitable for extent and ramification and of the freightage on our immense system of railways and canals, the tonnage of the UNITED STATES. 755 steamboats occupied with our inland trade is more than 400,000 tons. Our foreign trade is also conducted upon an enormous scale, employing above 4,000,000 of shipping in the transportation of above 400,000,000 in value of imports and exports. Our sails are courting every breeze that blows, and seeking every shore. Our sinuous coast affords abundance of bays and harbors for these floating bridges and ferries of the sea. The winds and the waves are wafting to us the commodities of the world. Our merchant- princes and maritime adventurers are con- tinually extending the range and magnitude of their enterprizes. IV. Population. — Since the revolution, when it was but little more than 3,000,000, it has swelled, at the last census, in 1850, to more than 23,000,000. At each decennial census, since 1790, it has been found that the increase has been at a rate so surprisingly uniform, that we can safely estimate its increase for future periods. By the year 1875, it will be close upon 50,000,000, and will far exceed 100,000,- 000 by the end of the nineteenth century. Even then, it will not be a densely peopled country, being capable of sustaining a far greater population than that. We have now, on the average, but seven inhabitants to each square mile of territory. In Great Britain, there are 223 to the square mile. If this coun- try becomes only one half as populous, we shall have 350,000,000. As yet, but one-fourteenth part of our land is occupied at all. But the immigration from all parts of the world brings half a million every year to fill the vacant space ; while, in the same time, even a larger number is born upon the soil. Thus, our wide- spread territory is rapidly rescued from the dominion of savage nature, and is replenished with a population intelligent and active, brave and free, full of the republican spirit, glowing with patriotic fire, and waxing bold as to their country's glorious destiny, and the part she is yet to act in propagating among the nations a nobler system of political and social life. V. Public Works. — The old historic empires fell to pieces, like uncemented masses of ma- sonry, by their weight. Their magnificent capitals, the seat of power and the heart of government, could not, with their mightiest throbbings, send out and draw back a quick and healthful circulation through their remoter members. But this fatal difficulty is quite remedied for us, by those modern means of inter-communicat-;on, whereby the pulsing life- blood of our grand confederation is carried in full vigor to the most distant bounds of our sovereignty. Cheap postage keeps up a con- stant ripple along the innumerable mail-routes, whose branching veins run, like a vascular net- work, over the whole body politic. The aggre- gate of mail-service under contract for the pre- sent year is more than 200,000 miles. 24,000 miles of telegraphrwires, like a vital nervous system, with its numerous ganglionic centres, carry instant sensibility to every chief limb and member ; so that all parts of the nation are touched at once by the same sympathies, and excited by the same volitions. 15,000 miles of completed railroad, and as many more in the course of construction, like iron sinews of vast strength and wondrous flexibility, are linking joint with joint ; and, compacting the whole by that which every joint supplieth, are giving to the huge body corporate a ready command over all its movements and resources. On land and water, the steam-power, with hot breath, inflates the lungs with vital energy, and breathes through all the nation an ani- mating principle, which puts vigor into every muscle, and sharpens every sense. For all the practical purposes of locomotion, and inter- course and business interests, and political efficiency and military operation, this country, notwithstanding its recent prodigious annexar tions of territory, is not one-tenth as large as it was thirty years ago. Quick as her growth has been, still more rapid is the diffusion of her working power, and the concentration of her governing capacity. VI. Geographical Position. — The oceans which for ages separated this continent, and hid its existence from the rest of the world, have now become broad and easy highways of intercourse with all nations. Nearly every pagan, papal, and Mohammedan land on the face of the earth may be reached by lines of communication almost direct, drawn from our eastern, western, or southern ports. Along these lines of marine travel immigration is pouring in its thousands and tens of thousands, while our people are passing out by the same lines, scattering themselves everywhere in pros- ecuting all the great material, intellectual, and religious interests of life. Our country pre- sents one front to the civilization of Europe and the degradation of Africa, and another front to the barbaric wealth of Asia and the luxuriant isles of the southern seas, and offers to, mediate among them all. On her north flank, she lifts a mighty arni of warning and menace against the aggressive despotism of Russia ; and on her southern side, she is be- ginning to stretch out a hand of help towards the distracted governments and the sweeping solitudes of the other American continent. The four corners of the heavens seem to be bending towards her, to lift her to the highest sphere of moral and political influence over all the globe. Her very location on the map of the world seems to mark her out as " the glory of all lands," " an eternal excellency, a joy of many generations." Vn. Peculiar character of the people. — Prominent and offensive as its faults may sometimes be, we find in the very genius of the people strong elements of national power and influence in the world. It is said, that the most fertile 9oiIs are made by 756 UNITED STATES. the commixture of earths obtained by the crumbling of different kinds of rock. And the different races of men sending hither their most resolute and venturous spirits, have blend- ed the more active traits of their several nar tionalities in a nev7 and highly energetic and practical type of the human kind. When the beloved Lafayette made his triumphal pro- gress through this country in 1825, he was asked by the governor of Massachusetts, what nation of the old world we most resembled ? The bystanders expected, that in one of his neatly turned compliments he would Hken us to his own " beautiful France ;" but the smil- ing veteran replied : " Sir, the American is an Englishman reinforced ! " To the original Anglo-Saxon stock, with the old British har- dihood and steadiness stimulated by freer scope for activity, there is an in-wrought re-inforce- ment of the more mobile and versatile spirits of other European races. Puritan, Covenant- er, Huguenot, Hollander, and many more, have mixed their firmness, their vivacity, their piety and other active ingredients in our national composition. Our people have a wondrous talent for self-government and social organiza- tion anywhere, and at the shortest notice. So completely is the government the offspring of the public sentiment and will, that if the mat- ter were to be put to the vote to-morrow, not a thousand ballots among millions would be cast in favor of any essential change in the form of government. Such a government has no need of any standing army to maintain it at home, and we have never had one for that purpose. Where, on the face of the earth, is there a form of government so firmly and safely established as ours ? It is wonderful to see the peaceful party revolutions, which, even after the most violent political agitations, are so calmy acquiesced in, at our great periodic elections. The power of the nation is trans- ferred to new hands at. the bidding of a ma- jority of one vote, as quietly as at that of a million. In all the settled parts of the country, the authority of the law and the magistracy is acquiesced in by the native population, with- out a thought of resistance, and without a show of force. All the mobs and popular tu- mults which have occurred in the Atlantic States for the last half century, if taken to- gether, would not equal for violence the famous " no-popery mob," headed by Lord George Gordon, at London, in 1*780. Our nation has proved itself able thus far, by the Divine blessing, to absorb and assimi- late a vast amount of foreign immigration. It abounds in inventive talent, in the faculty of adaptation to circumstances, in practical effi- ciency, and in tireless industry. As such a people advance in wealth and industry, it must roll an enormous weight into the " bar lance of power," among the nations of the earth. The popular voice uttered from this continent, will, ere long, speak in tones of de- cision in the ai bitiament of the great political questions which agitate the world. May it be a voice of truth and love, as well as power ! VIII. Education. — The statistics of this subject are so great as to crowd themselves out of the narrow space that could be afibrded here. We have 160 colleges and theological seminaries, all but 14 of them Protestant ; and with very few exceptions, and these not infi- del, under decidedly evangelical auspices. They have 20,000 students under more than 1,000 professors. In at least 12,of the States, the public school system, which oflfers gratui- tous instruction to every child, is established by law. In many of these States it is all but impossible to find an adult native of either sex who cannot read and write. This system of free schools is constantly rising in efficiency, in importance, and in public estimation. It is spreading into the States contiguous ; and it can hardly be, in course of time, but it will be adopted in all. In the new States of the West there are reservations of the public lands set apart for this object, which will form a most munificent endowment. In the Sunday- schools sustained by different branches of the church, 3,000,000 of children and youth are taught '• the first principles of the oracles of God." It is a most gratifying fact, that this immense array of means for the right training of "young America" is almost wholly ad- ministered by men of high moral feeling, and generally of strong religious principle. But even this mighty enginery for mental discipline will not suffice for the safety of our country, unless true religion shall keep pace with its progress, and guide it to right results. IX. Religion. — The grand idea of full reli- gious liberty is to leave religion entirely to it- self, except so far as it may be necessary to protect it from violence. This idea was early introduced, and in time won complete ascendan- cy. It has now few enemies, unless it may be among the more bigoted part of the adherents to the Romish hierarchy. We have now ra- ther more than 12 Protestants to every Papist, and this majority is ever increasing. The spirit of Popery is so contrary to the spirit of om- people, and of their history and institu- tions, that Romanism would rapidly dry up but for the streams of immigration running over from so-called Catholic Europe. Their best-informed ecclesiastics represent that one- half of all the children born in this country, fall off from their communion. So, too, infi- delity, which has never been very prevalent in this country, has been on the wane ever since the beginning of this century, among the in- born population ; and like Popery, depends mostly for its continuance ou foreign impor- tation. The supporting of religion on the voluntary system has worked well. Never, since the primitive age of the martyrs, has there been an experiment so successful and instructive UNITED STATES. 75r JTotliiug triag the strength of this system more thoroughly than the building of churches to meet the growing wants of the people. And yet the careful estimates of Dr. Baird show that more than 3,000,000 of dollars are ex- pended for this purpose alone in each year. The last census proves that there were then over 36,000 church edifices by actual enumer- ation ; and also that in these there were al- most 14,000,000 of sittings, sufficient, if these buildings were located as the population is, to accommodate nearly two-thirds of it, which is quite as much as could be in attendance at one time. The amount thus voluntarily invested in church-property was over $86,000,000 in 1850 ; and, by this time, can be little, if at all, short of $100,000,000. By careful estimates, it is found that daring the last year above nine millions of dollars were expended in the cur- rent expenses of the churches, such as the sus- tentation of ministers, &c. ; three millions more in the erection of new houses of worship ; and two millions and a half in the various missionary and benevolent operations of all denominations ; making in all a self-imposed tax of not far from fifteen millions of dollars for the support of the Gospel, and the spread of its institutions. So much for leaving the Gospel to its own vital resources, and to the blessing of Him, who gave it to make men liberal and free like Himself. These expendi- tures have not been in vain. God has made them, as we shall see, of great effect in pro- moting the spiritual welfare of the nation Yet, the sum so expended the last year, great a.5 it seems in the aggregate, is not burthen- some by any means. It is but one dollar upon every four hundred of the valuation of im- proved lands, or one quarter of one per cent. It is but one dollar upon every sixty of the valuation of only the agricultural products of the country for the same year. In the first fifty years of this century, the population of the United States increased a little less than fourfold and a half. During the same time, as appears by their several statis- tics, the number of members in the various churches called Evangelical, has increased nearly tenfold. That is to say, the church- membership has increased more than twice as fast as the population. If these rates of in- crease shall continue the same for the next fifty years, the whole adult population of the United States must be included in these churches before the century is ended. Where is there in the world another field which can show such wonderful religious prosperity ? " It is the Lord's doing ; and it is marvelous in our eyes !" X. Pauperism and Crime. — In the year end- ing June 1st, 1850, the whole number who re- ceived aid as paupers in the United States was 135,000. These were less than one in a hun- dred of the free population ; and of these above 68,000, or more than half, were foreigners. The native paupers were not two-fifths of one per cent, in the population. This indicates that there is an abundance of the means of subsistence here ; and that this ought to take away from the inducement to commit crimes against property. The whole number of per- sons convicted of crime during the year above- mentioned, was about 27,000. This is a sad array ; and such a host of culprits may seem to indicate a low standard of morality. But, happily for the reputation of our country, it is, found that 14,000 of these malefactors are foreign-born ; so that there are eight times as many criminals from our foreign, as from our native, population, in proportion to the num- ber of each. Very many of the native criminals are the children of foreign-born parents, and ought to be classed with those who trained them. Our stock, both of paupers and crimi- nals, would be admirably small, were it not for the constant supplies with which we are furnished by the nations of the old world. Most of the European immigrants, (seven- eighths of them.) settle in the free States ; and hence the larger proportion of poverty and crime to be found in those States. The im- migrants are also prone to locate themselves in the large cities of the free North and West, whose alms-houses and jails are almost wholly filled by the imbecility and demoralization of the lower orders of European society. Thus, in one of the largest cities of New Jersey, it was found, last year, that all the inmates of the poor-house were Irish ; and of a larger num- ber who received outrdoor relief, all were foreigners but two. Of 4,000 charged with minor offences before the city police, only 80 were native Americans. The prospects of our large cities would be gloomy indeed, were it not for the moral ener- gy of the resident natives, and their prompt- ness to aid in the execution of the laws. There is also at work among them a vast amount of organized benevolent effort, working with silent and unrecognized power, but with the noblest results, for the relief of the miserable, the instruction of the ignorant, the reclaiming of the profligate, and the prevention of crime. Numerous voluntary associations for these purposes, besides the various churches, are en- gaged in these objects with remarkable wis- dom and zeal ; and the ramifications of their infiuence reach all parts of the mass of suffer- ing, ignorance, and vice. The temperance reform, which began here some 25 or 30 years ago, has wrought its won- ders ; and, ere this, would have won what might be called a complete victory, but for the resistance it meets from the Irish and Germans among us. Already several of the States have adopted and rigorously enforced a system of prohibitory legislation, aiming at the en- tire suppression of the traffic in intoxicating liquors as a beverage. Other States are on the point of adopting the same protective 758 UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS. policy against this prolific source of penury and crime. Among the means by which it has pleased God mainly to sustain the spiritual life and moral health of this great and growing nation, the highest place must be assigned to what are called " revivals nf religion." The numer- ical statistics of these can only be tabled by recording angels, and fully published at the judgment day. But the men among us best qualified to judge of their power, extent, and fruits, do not hesitate to speak of them as the salvation of America. — Rev. A. W. McClure. UNITED BEETHREN'S MISSIONS : Early in the history of the' Moravian Brethren they were baptized with the missionary spirit. Count Zinzeudorf, having resigned his civil dignities and become a minister of the Breth- ren's Church, devoted himself, with his whjole estate, to the diffusion of the Gospel, in con- nection with that church. Having been, through false accusations, banished from Sax- ony, on receiving the elector's order to quit the kingdom, he made the following characteristic remark, which contains the germe of the future missionary history of the Moravian Church : " Now we must collect a Congregation of Pil- grims, and train laborers to oo forth into all THE WORLD, AND PREACH ChRIST AND HIS SAL- VATION." " Viewing the Brethren's Church as a society revived by the Lord, for the special purpose of diffusing the Gospel throughout the world, Zinzendorf considered himself solemnly pledged to see to it, that this, its destination, should be carefully attended to, and, as far as possible, faithfully executed. When banished from Saxony, he saw no other way for obtain- ing the proposed end, than by having, besides his own family, those persons constantly about him who were under preparation for service in the church. These were occasionally joined by missionaries who had returned from pagan countries, and by Brethren, who had come back from their deputations to different parts of Christendom, and who mostly remained with the Count, till they resumed their former employment, or received new appointments. These persons constituted the Congregatim of Pilgrims, which, strictly speaking, was never stationary ; for, whenever the Count changed his place of residence, the greater part of the company followed him. Special attention was paid to the design of their Institution ; and for this purpose, days and even weeks were sometimes occupied in conferences, for deliber- ating on subjects bearing on the enlargement or Christ's kingdom." When the refugees on Count Zinzendorf's estates, sbarcely amounting to 600 persons — where they had themselves just found rest from suffering, and were beginning to btiild a church and habitations, where there had previously been a wilderness, — the missionary spirit was sent down upon them with such constraining influence, that within the short period of ten years, they had sent missionaries to St. Tho- mas and St. Croix in the West Indies, to Greenland, to the Indians in North and South America, to Lapland, to Tartary, to Algiers, to Western Africa, to the Cape of Good Hope, and to Ceylon ; as they did subsequently to others of the West India Islands, to Persia, to Egypt, to Labrador, and to India. In several of these countries, their attempts to Christian- ize and civilize have proved unsuccessful. In some instances the missionaries sent out never reached the places of their destination ; and in others, the political state of the country, to which they went, rendered their immediate re- turn an imperious' duty ; and in several cases, they were compelled to relinquish their benev- olent designs, after years of patient perseve- rance and heroic fortitude, spent in fruitless endeavors to impress the wretched natives with the importance of the Gospel. Going forth as hardy pioneers, who, penetrate the thickest forest, unrestrained by dangers and privations, . their eajlier missionaries submitted to the most painful sacrifices in order to communicate the blessings of the Gospel to the heathen. The missions of the United Brethren in for- eign countries had their origin in a Providen- tial circumstance, which directed the attention of the Brethren to the condition of slaves in the West Indies. Count Zinzendorf being in Copenhagen in 1731, some of his domestics be- came acquainted with a black man named An- thony, who told them of the sufferings of the slaves on the island of St. Thomas, and of their earnest desire to be instructed in the way of salvation. The Count was deeply affected by- the statements of Anthony, and on his return to Herrnhut mentioned them to his congrega^ tion. The zeal of the Brethren was awakened for the conversion of the heathen, and they de- termined, at whatever cost, to send a mission to the slaves, in whose condition they had become' so deeply interested ; and in the following year two brethren sailed for the Danish Islands. And such was their devotion to the work that, having heard that they could not otherwise have access to the slaves, they went with the determination of submitting to be themselves enslaved, that they might have the opportunity of teaching the poor captive Africans the way of deliverance from the bondage of sin and Satan. Although this sacrifice was not re- quired of them, they still maintained them- selves by manual labor, under a tropical sun, employing every opportunity for conversing with the heathen. A similar zeal characterized the first missionaries to Greenland, in 1733. While at Copenhagen, Count Pless, who was much interested for them, asked them how they intended to procure a livelihood in Green- land? Unacquainted with the situation and climate of the country, the missionaries replied, '_' By the labor of our hands, and God's bless- ing ;" adding, that they would build a house, and cultivate a piece of land, not wishing to UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS. 759 be btirdensorae to any one. Being told, there was no wood fit for building in that desolate region, they said : " In that case we will dig a hole in the earth, and lodge there." So suc- cessful has thii mission been, that nearly the whole of the Greenland population i in the neighborhood of the settlements has been con- verted to Christianity. The following short notice of the Doctrine and Constitution of the Moravian Brethren's Church, as far as they affect the missions, may not be misplaced here. It is the constant aim of their missionaries to make known !' Christ and Him crucified." Their motto is : " To humble the sinner, to exalt the Saviour, and to promote holiness." The internal regulations are the same in every mission. Such heathen as from the hear- ing of the Gospel, or the private conversations of the missionaries, are led to serious reflec- tions, and desire their names to be put down, for further instruction, are called new people, and reckoned to the class of catechumens. If they remain steadfast in their resolutions to forsake heathenism, and desire baptism, they are considered as candidates for that ordinance ; and after previous instruction, are baptized. If their conduct proves consistent with their professions, they at length become candidates for the communion, and finally communicants. When the number of converts is very large, assistants are chosen, who have particular dis- tricts assigned them, iji which they visit the people, attend to the poor, the sick and infirm, and are occasionally employed to hold meet>- ings, and to preach at the outposts. The external regulations vary in the differ- ent missions. Among free heathen, as in G-reen- land, North America, South Africa, &o., most of the converts live together in regular settle- ments, and thus enjoy the advantages of vari- ous regulations for promoting their progress in spiritual knowledge, and in civilization, which regulations are impracticable in missions among slaves. ^ Church discipline is exercised without re- spect of persons ; and consists according to the nature of the offence, either in exclusion from the meetings of the baptized, or ia sus- pension from the Lord's Supper, or in total separation from the church. The general superintendence of the missions is vested in the synods of the church. But, as these are convened only occasionally, the el- ders' conference has the oversight of the mis- sion. The missionary service is in the strictest sense, voluntary. Any person desirous of en- gaging in it, makes known his wishes to the directors ; and if, after being informed, of the difficulties and dangers attending the hfe of a missionary, his resolution remains fixed, he is considered a candidate for the service. Should, he eventually feel any reluctance, he is at full liberty either to accept or decline any proposal oi- call, which may be oflered him. The Brethren's Church has no permanent fund for the missions. They are maintained by voluntary contributions collected mostly at stated times in their congregations ; and also by the many female, young men's, and juvenOe missionary societies in the church. Not able, however, to raise ,one half of the sum annually required, friends, and societies in other Chris- tian communities have hitherto been most, liberal in their donations. The Moravians now have 17 settlements and congregations oa:the continent of Europe, with 46 home mission stations. , The aggregate , , number of persons in these congregations is 5,900. They have institutions of learning in , Nisky,-G-nadenbcrg, Gnadenfrey, Neusalz, Neu- wied, Koenigsfold, and Zeyst. There is also a high-school at Nisky, and a college for train- , ing candidates for the ministry at (xnadenfeld. In Great Britain and Ireland, they have 34 settlements and congregations, with six home mission stations in Ireland, and a membership of 5,000. They have institutions for the edu- cation of youth at Pulneck, Gomesal, Mirfield, Ockbrook, Bedford, Tytherton and Gracehill. In the. United States, they have 28 settlements and congregations, with home missionary sta- . tions in Philadelphia, Green Bay, Sturgeon Bay, among the Norwegians, New York, Olney, and Richland. Their, institutions of learning in the United States are at Nazareth, Bethle- hem, Litiz, and Salem. They now have missions in Greenland, La- brador, Danish West India Islands, Jamaica, Antigua, St. Kitts, Barbadoes, Tobago, Suri- nam, South Africa, Australia, and the North American Indians. Missions have been undertaken by the Bre- thren, at various periods, and abandoned as unsuccessful, in Lapland, in Siberia, among the Jews in Amsterdam, among the gypgira ; in , Guinea, in Egypt, in Tranquebar, in Ceylon,' in Persia, in the West Indies, and in South America. The following table exhibits the present state of their missions : Mission aries. s Cm O 1 s S 'a p a i p. 1 i s 1 a to s MISSIONS, i S S 1 Danish W.I. . Greenland N. A. Indians. Surinam South Africa. Jamaica Antigua Barbadoes . . . Labrador St. Kitts Tobago Nicara^a. . .. Australia . . . Totals 8 4 6 8 9 13 9 4 4 4 2 1 1 16 14 9 29 27 18 10 6 17 6 3 3 loS: 10 9 7 26 27 17 9 (5 11 5 i 1 131 10,087 2,064 491 18,831 «,660 13,311 8,021 3,198 1,326 4,046 ;,103 20 70,047 1S82 1882 22io 2210 1733 •■ 1733 693fi 6^35 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1764 1766 1766 1770 1777 1790 1848 1849 760 VALVERTY— WAIROA. The whole number of missionaries employed by the United Brethren, from the commence- ment of their operations, is 1947,-1150 males and 797 females. 643 of these have died in the mission service : 9 of whom have deceased on joarneys made during service, 11 on the journey out, and 2 on the way home ; 22 met with an untimely end, mostly by shipwreck ; one was murdered by the Esquimaux in Lab- rador, and one by the Indians near Gnaden- hiitten, and 10 were shot or burned to death on the Mahoney, in North America. That so small a body of Christians should have accomplished so much missionary labor, is truly wonderful. Yet, the fact does but show what might be done by the whole Pro- testant Church, were they to enter upon the work of evangelizing the world, with the same singleness of purpose and spirit of consecration which have, from the beginning, distinguished this little band of brethren. We have no means of ascertaining the ag- gregate receipts of the United Brethren's Mis- sions from their commencement. We give the income of several years, which will enable the reader to judge of the average receipts : 1848 £12,442 1849 11,043 1860 14,026 1862 13,061 ■ Average for four years, £12,640. The London Association in aid of the Missions of tlie United Brethren, which has existed for thirty-six years, contributes to their funds be- tween £4,U00 and £5,000 annually, which is included in the amounts above stated. Con- sidering the extent of the Brethren's opera- tions, it seems unaccountable that they should be able to maintain them with so small an ex- penditure. They have, however, been con- ducted, so far as practicable, on the self-sus- taining principle. Their missions are " settle- ments," containing farmers and artizans, who live on lands belonging to the mission, and, by their labor, contribute to its support. With so small a body, possessing such slender means, this plan appears to have been a matter of ne- cessity, like that of Paul's laboring with his hands while preaching to the heathen. But, with the wealth now in the possession of the Protestant churches, it must be the height of injustice to send a man to preach the Gospel to the heathen " at his own charges ; " as it is, also, the poorest economy to employ men capa- ble of doing missionary work, in laboring for their own bread. — Holmes's Histori/ of the Mis- sions of the United Brethren ; Moravian Mis- stonary Atlas. VALVERTY (OODOOPITTY) : A sta. tion of the American Board in Ceylon. VAN DIiaiAN'S LAND : See Tasmania. VARAN Y : A station of the American Board in the Jaftha district, Ceylon, a little east of Oodooville. VARTABED : A religious teacher, or doctor of divinity, among the Armeniatis. This degree is conferred with the solemnities of ordination, and those who receive it are appealed to in all religious debates. They preach in the churches, reconcile differences, and exert themselves to maintain the Arme- nian creed. They are supported by the volun- tary contributions of their hearers, and of those who apply to them for the decision of any religious question. VEDAS : The sacred books of the Hin- doos, believed to be revealed by God, and called immortal. They are considered as the fountain of all knowledge, human and divine. They are four in number, the principal part being that which explains the duties of man in methodical arrangement. The fourth book contains a system of divine ordinances.— Ai- atic Researches. VEWA : A small island, about 3 miles in circumference, in the Feejee group, having every variety of hill and dale in miniature. It is nearly covered with bread-fruit trees and eve, a kind of chestnut, the flowers of which have an odor like the violet, that fills the whole island with its fragrance. Population, 150. Wesleyan Missionary Society. VICTORIA : The chief city of Hong- Kong, China, situated in lat. 22° 16' N., and long. 114° 8' B. (See Cfana.) VIZAGAPATAM : A station of the London Missionary Society, situated on the eastern coast of Hiiidostan, in the Northern Circars, about 500 miles south-west of Calcutta, and north-east of Madras about the same dis- WADAGAUM : A town in Hindostan, 30 miles south of Ahmednuggur, — became a station of the American Board in 1845. WADESVILLB : A Karen village, near Tavoy, in Burmah, named for Rev. Dr. Wade, the missionary. It is an ouf>station of the Tavoy Mission of the American Baptist Union. WAQENMAKER VALLEY : See Weir lington. WAIALUA : A station of the American Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. WAIANAE : A station of the American Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. WAIME A : One of the three first stations of the American Board at the Sandwich Islands, situated on the north-west coast of Kaui. Also, an interior station on the island of Hawaii. WAIKANAB : A station of the Church Missionary Society in New-Zealand. WAIOLI: A station of the American Board, in the Sandwich Islands, on the island of Kauai. WAIROA : A station of the Church Mis- sionary Society in New-Zealand, situated on the shore of Hawke Bay. It is a very pretty station, with a beautiful river winding throuo-h an extensive plain, and communicating with" a chain of inland lakes. "WELLINGTON— WEST INDIES. 161 WELLINGTON: Formerly, Wagenmalcer Valley : Station of the Frenoli Protestant Society in South Africa, 30 miles north-east of Cape Town. Inhabitants, 7,000 or 8,000 free negroes, with many descendants of French Huguenot refugees. Also a station of the Church Missionary Society in New-Zealand, having a European population of 2,500. WELSH CALVINISTIC METHODIST FOREIUN MISSIONARY SOCIETY :— The Welsh Calviuistio Methodists arose during the revival of religion in England under Wes- ley and Whitefleld ; chiefly from fhe devoted labors of Howell Harris, Esq., of Trevecca, in Brecknockshire. Having obtained peace with God himself, he began a course of missionary labor in his native Wales, then sunk down in formalism and impiety. He visited from house to house, and preached in the open air to thou- sands, who were drawn by the novelty of the scene and the burning zeal of the preacher. God owned his word, and great numbers began to be aroused to seek after God ; and, when they had obtained, " like precious faith " in Christ Jesus, they joined their efforts to those of their beloved teacher, and thus the work spread like fire among the dry stubble. In a • few years, Mr. Harris had established 300 so- cieties or churches in South Wales. Several clergymen of the Episcopal Church joined themselves to him, and the great work operated like the Reformation in Scotland, or Wesley- anism in England. Mr. Harris and his assO' ciates itinerated through the country, so that in 1742 he had 10 clergymen, and nearly 50 lay preachers helping him. In the mean time. North Wales began to be aroused in a similar manner. The Kev. Thomas Charles of Bala, afterwards one of the founders of the British and Foreign Bible Society, was, towards the close of this century, a prominent instrument in this great work of God. In 1811, the socie- ties formed themselves into an independent con- nection with a polity similar to the English Wes- leyans, but differing from them, as their name imports, in some doctrinal views. In 1853 they had 207 ministers, ^34 local preachers, and 58,577 members. Previous to 1840, the Welsh Calvinistic Me- thodists, operated through the London Mission- ary Society ; but, in May of that year, an as- sociation was formed among them for sending missionaries to the heathen, and in November following, a mission was commenced in the north-east part of Bengal among the Kassias, a hill tribe. Besides this mission, they have a mission station in Brittany, south of Prance — the language of that country being a sister dialect of the Welsh. The Bretons themselves are a branch of the Welsh nation. The Cal- vinistic Methodists have also a mission to the Jews, which is now served by the Rev. John Mills. The General Secretary of this society is the Rev. J. Roberts, 12 Huskisson-st., Liver- pool, England. — Prize Essay Jethro ; Census of Religious Worship in England and Wales, by H. Mann Esq.; and Annual Reports. — Rev. W. Butler. WEST INDIES AND GUIANA : We have connected Guiana with the "West Indies because they are thus connected in missionary operations. The following table, which ex- hibits a list of the West India Islands, with the date of settlement, population, &c., is taken, with some modification, from the " Missionary Guide Book," published in London in 1846. The author of that work gives as his authority as to the population of the British Islands, " Murray's Encyclopedia of Geography." British. Barbadoes St. Christopher's .... Nevis Antigua AngaiUa , Jamaica Virgin Isles Tobago Honduras Montserrat Dominica St. Vincent's Grenada, &c Bahamas Trinidad St. Lucia Bermudas Independent. Hayti or St. Dommgo, Spanish. Cuba Porto .Rico French. Guadaloupe i-iartinique Marigalante Deseada Danish. St. Thomas St. Jan St. Croix Dutch. St. Martin St. Eustatia Saba Curacoa Swedish. St. Bartholomew Totals 1624 1623 1628 1632 1660 1666 1660 1828 1670 1632 1769 1763 1763 1783 1797 1803 1612 1492 1493 1632 1635 16— 16— 1733 120,000 23,492 9,250 33,726 3,080 380,001) 7,731 13,920 4,643 7,119 19,375 26,633 23,642 18,718 43,678 16,320 8,720 830,000 432,000 100,000 114,000 96,413 12,000 900 6,080 2,430 31,387 6,000 20,000 1,600 8,600 8,000 2,377,227 66,000 16,667 9,225 23,350 2,300 256,290 4,318 9,078 2,127 6,126 11,664 18,114 19,009 7,734 17,539 10,328 8,314 600,000 198,000 20,000 112,000 87,207 10,000 600 4,500 2,260 29,164 16,000 ' 7,300 4,000 1,449,582 Tfie Bermudas. — These are a numerous clus- ter of small islands, in the Atlantic Ocean, ex- tending about 45 miles from south-west to north-east, and having their northern point in long. 63° 28' W., and lat. 32° 34' N. St. George's, the principal island, is about sixteen miles long, and three in breadth. The inhab- itants are chiefly engaged in shipping and trade. Bahamas. — The Bahama Islands are the 762 WEST INDIES. most western of the West Indies, extending along the coast of Florida towards Cuba. They are 400 in number, most of them mere rocks. About 14 of them are large ; Bahama, the principal one, being 63 by 9 miles. They enjoy a mild, equable, and delightful climate. The inhabitants are chiefly employed in fishing and wrecking. Jamaica is oval-shaped, 160 miles long by 45 broad. Its scenery is magnificent and delight- ful. ' It is reckoned as one of the most roman- tic and highly diversified countries in the world. The Blue Mountains, an elevated ridge, towering in some places nea.rly 8,000 feet above the sea, run through the island from east to west. Hayti is a very fine island, lying between Jamaica and Porto' Rico, 450 miles long by 110 in width. In the centre rises the lofty range of the Cibao mountains, the highest peak of which is 9,000 feet. These mountains are covered with vegetation nearly to their summits, from which descend numerous streams, that unite in four rivers, which render the plains below exceedingly fertile. This island was settled about the middle of the 16th cen- tury by a daring band of French buccaneers. The French revolution, in 1791, which pro- claimed universal equality, produced a con- test between the white and free colored popu- lation; and while they were contending, the slaves rose and drove out or massacred both classes, and became possessors of the French part of the island. Since that time, the island has been the scene of successive revolutions ; and at the present time, the French part is governed by a black empe- ror, and the Spanish part is an independent republic. St. Thomas lies in lat. 18° 22' N. and long. 64° 50' W., and is 18 miles in circumference, having considerable trade. St. Eustatius consists almost entirely of the sloping sides of one high conical hill, termi- nating in a rocky summit, but it is productive, and cultivated with careJ St. Kitts or St. Christopher's is peculiarly rugged and mountainous, but the plain along the sea shore surpasses in richness and beauty the other islands. Nmis is a small but beautiful and fertile island, consisting of one conical mountain, about 20 miles in circumference. Antigua is about 21 miles in length, nearly the same in breadth, and 50 in circumference. John's Town, the capital, is admired for the agreeableness of its situation and the regula- rity of its buildings, and is a favorite place of resort. Montserrat is about 9 miles in length, and as many in breadth, about twenty miles south- west of Antigua ; a beautiful and pleasant island. Barbadoes is about 22 miles in length, by 14 in breadth ; its rich plantations being diversi- fied with gentle hills, which present a delight- ful landscape. . . , St. Vincent's is a very beautiful island, about 24 miles long and 18 broad, and contains the only active volcano on these islands. It is said to contain small remnants of the aborigi- nal race, mingled with the negroes. Grenada is about 20 miles in length by 10 at its greatest breadth. It is mountainous, abounding with streams and rivulets. Tobago is a small but fertile and beautiful island. The heat of its southerly situation is tempered by breezes from the surrounding ocean, while, at the same time, it appears to be out of the track of those hurricanes which have desolated so many of the other islands. Trinidad is separated from the coast of South America by a strait. It is a fertile island, in extent next to Jamaica. British Guiana lies on the coast of South America, and includes Essequibo, Demerara* and Berbice, or all the maritime tract between the river Coventen, the western limit of Su- rinam and the frontier of Spanish Guiana, at ■ OapQ Nassau. Surinam, on the coast of Guiana, consti- tutes the most important of the Dutch western possessions. They have, of late, made very considerable efforts for improvement, and it is rising in importance. Inhabitants. — When Columbus first discov- ered the New World, he found the whole con- tinent and every island thickly peopled by dif- ferent classes of Indians. But within a few years after the discovery of the West India Islands, these native races had, for the greater part, perished. Millions of them had been swept from the earth or sent to woi-k in the mines of South America, where they sunk into a premature grave, the victims of avarice and cruelty. When the Spaniards found how ra- pidly the aboriginal population perished under- the system of forced labor which they had in- troduced, they resorted to the expedient of im- porting negro slaves from Africa, and their example was sooh followed by the Portuguese, Dutch, French, and English. At the present time, the population of Guiana and the West Indies consists of three descriptions of people : whites, mixed races, and rtegives. The whites, or Europeans, chiefly British, consist partly oi proprietors, superintending the cultivation of their own lands, and partly of agents and overseers. The negroes have always formed by far the largest portion of the population. Since the 1st of August, 1834, they have en- joyed a state of freedom in the British portion of the West Indies. As the negroes are of African origin, we must refer to Africa for a description of their native character and habits. I MISSIONS. Wbsleyan Missionary Society. — Antigua. —Nathaniel Gilbert, Esq., the speaker of the WEST INDIES. Y63 House of Assembly in Antigua, coming to England for the recovery of his health, was led to attend the ministry of Mr. Wesley, which he found to be the power of God to the salvation of his soul. Happy in the enjoy- ment of the Divine favor, and full of holy zeal, he returned to Antigua in the year 1760, where he began to teach Christianity to the African slaves, many of whom, by the bless- ing of God upon his labors, were made the Lord's free men. Nearly 200 persons were united in fellowship under his superintendence. While thus usefully and honorably employed, (tuough encountering bittei; hostility,) he was removed by death, and the flock he had ga^ thered were left " as sheep without a shep- herd," yet they were not finally forsaken. John Baxter, of the royal dock yard at Chat- ham, who had been connected with the Metho- dist society aboilt 12 years, and ■ had also for some time been a, class-leader and a local preacher, was sent out by the government as a shipwright. He collected the remains of the society, and writing to Mr. Wesley under date of April 2d, 1778, he says : "The work that God began by Mr. Gilbert is still remaining. The black people h^ve been kept together by two black women, who have continued praying and meeting with them.. I preached to about 30 on Saturday night and Sunday morning, and in the afternoon to about 400 or 500. The old members desire that I would inform you, that you have many children in Antigua, whom you never saw." For about eight years he continued his la- bors, working in the dockyard for his support. About 2,000 were united together in religious society ; when he was at length relieved by the arrival of missionaries. In 1786, Dr. Coke, having embarked for Nova Scotia with three missionaries, two of whom were destined for North America, and one for the West Indies ; after being tossed about for a long time by the winds and waves, and nearly suffering shipwreck, they were obliged to put in to the West Indies, and were carried directly to Antigua. Land- ing on Christmas day, they met Mr. Baxter, as be was going to conduct public worship. They embraced each other with a joyous sur- prise ; and the Doctor that day occupied Mr. Baxter's pulpit, and administered the Lord's Supper to the people. He remained, about six weeks in the West Indies, and while there had an offer of a salary of £500 to remain in Anti- gua ; but he was too intent upon the spread of Christ's religion in the world, to confine his labors to one place. He visited several of the islands, and having fixed Mr. Warrener at An- tigua, Mr. Clarke at St. Vincent's, and Mr. Hamraet at St. Christopher's, he sailed for the American- continent. Prom this time the Wesleyan mission in the West Indies was car- ried on with increasing success. I'he mission in Antigua appears to have en- 'oyed for many years an almost uninterrupted prosperity. Such was the importance attached to it by the authorities of the island, that in the year 1795, when they dreaded an attack from the French, the missionary was requested to organize a military corps from the members of his society to assist in defending the island. This request was promptly responded to by both the missionary and his people : but hap- pily the French never came. In 1826, this mission met with a most melancholy loss, all the missionaries, with part of their families, 13 in all, having perished at sea. This sad event occurred as the mission party were re- turning from a district meeting, which was held in St. Christopher's. They encountered a storm, and as they were approaching Anti- gua, their vessel was thrown upon the breakers and broken, and they were precipitated into the sea. Some of the party were left clinging to the wreck for two days and nights, but none but Mrs. Jones was saved. In 1839, Eev. Mr. Codman wrote from An- tigua : " The number of members in our so- cieties is now some thousands more than when I came, (1826) and the scholars have more than doubled. Nor must the great number who have died in the Lord be forgotten. I should think, that five or six thousand have left the church militant for the church triumphant. The work is prospering in several islands, es- pecially Antigua. In the island of St. Kitt's the attendance at all our chapels is increased, aad some of them have been enlarged, and new ones built." In the year 1843, a violent earthquake visit- ed the island of Antigua, by which, with scarcely an exception, every edifice constructed of stone was left a heap of ruins. Out of nine Wesleyan meeting houses, only one escaped without serious damage. This sad event, how- ever, did not essentially retard the prosperity of the mission. It has still gone on increasing in numbers and infiuence. In 1853, the num- ber of church members in connection with the Methodist mission on this island, amounted to 2,472.— See Rep. Meth. Miss. Soc. 1853, p. 106. St. Vincent's District. — In January, 1*787, Dr. Coke and three of the Brethren visited St. Vin- cent's ; and Rev. Mr. Clarke remained, encour- aged by the promise of several planters, that their houses should always be open to receive him, and their negroes ever ready to receive his instructions. His congregations were large, and his exertions appeared to be crowned with considerable success, yet he was not without opposition. But for several years it was con- fined to some lawless individuals who on one occasion broke into the chapel, defaced the benches, and stole the Bible and hung it on the public gallows. And at length, the arm of au- thority was itself turned against the mission. In December, 1792, the Assembly, with the view of rooting out the Methodists from the island, passed a law, that no person except the rectors of the parishes should preagh without a •764: WEST INDIES. license ; and that no individual should receive a license until he had resided at least twelve months on the island — a clause admirably cal- culated to banish the Methodists from among them, as their preachers would never consent to lie idle a whole year, in order to have liber- ty of petitioning at the end of that period for a license, which after all, would probably be refused. For the first offence, the culprit was to be punished by a fine of £18, or by impris- onment ; for the second, by such corporeal pun- ishment as the court should think proper ; and by banishment from the island ; and to crown the whole, if he returned from banishment, he incurred the penalty of death ! In justice to the people in general it may be vcell to say that the majority were hostile to the law. But, the next Sabbath after the passage of the law, Mr. Lamb, the missionary, preached as usual. He was apprehended, and on refusing to pay the fine, was thrown into prison. When the period of his imprisonment had expired he was released, but it was a release only to silence or voluntary banishment. He preferred the lat- ter, and retired from St. Vincent's. The law, however, was in force only for a short time, being disallowed by the king, as contrary to the principles of toleration, which were now an established part of the British Constitution. In 1794, Messrs. Thomas Owens and James Alexander were sent to renew the mission. Before this, the members of the Methodist So- ciety amounted- to about 1,000 ; but soon after its passage, they were reduced nearly one half. Many now returned from their wanderings, and the congregations began to increase ; but the spirit of hostilit} was rather smothered than subdued. In March, 1797, a mob, hea-ded by a magistrate, attacked the Methodist chapel, threw down the railings, broke the lamps, pull- ed down the communion rails, and tore the Bible in pieces and scattered them on the ground. About a year after an attempt was made upon the lives of the missionaries. Their house was broken open at the dead of night, and some ruffians armed with cutlasses, entered the sleeping apartments, turned up the bed and searched for them in every corner. Happily the missionaries, anticipating the attack, had taken refuge for the night at the dwelling of a friend. In the year 1841, a young man, who was brought to" a knowledge of the truth through this mission, hearing of the sad mortality at- tending the agents of the Methodist Missionary Society in South Africa, offered himself as a missionary to that land, where he is now ac- tively laboring. Trinidad and Demerara. — During the past few years thousands of immigrants have been introduced into Trinidad and Demerara, from Africa and Hindostan, for whose religious in- struction the Wesleyan Missionary Society has endeavored to make provision. This emigra- tion has had an unfavorable effect on the mis- sion, and preceded as it wag, by a reduction of wages, it led several of the church members to leave, while the newly arrived immigrants from Africa, with few exceptions, only tended to demoralize the people by their heathenish practices. It is very much questioned too, whether the church members from Sierra Leone were much improved in their temporal circumstances, by emigrating to Trinidad ; but it is certain, that there is no comparison be- tween the two countries as to religious advan- tages. In Trinidad the greater number of Wesleyan emigrants from Sierra Leone were placed beyond the reach of their own mission- aries, or any other Protestant ministers ; and were thus exposed to the temptations of joining in the barbarous practices of their heathen countrymen, or of being led astray by the delu- sions of Popery. A review of missionary operations in Deme- rara, during the past thirty years, gives rise to the most grateful recoUecticns. The mission- ary during the first year of labor in that colony, was often denounced as " an execrable wretcli who ought to be put out of the world," and himself and his people frequently suffered per- secution. At a public meeting, held only 20 years since, all the leading persons in the colony unanimously resolved, that the Court of Policy be forthwith petitioned to expel all the mis- sionaries from the colony, and a law be passed prohibiting the admission of missionary preach- ers into the colony for the future. But in 1845, the principles and designs of the missionaries had been so well ascertained and so highly ap- preciated, that all the leading persons in the colony, including the (Jovernor, have cordially and liberally subscribed towards the erection of a new Wesleyan chapel. About the year 1850, various causes exerted an adverse influence on the missions in Deme- rara. Emigration from India, Africa, and Madeira, introduced classes of persons sunk in gross superstition and wickedness. British Guiana witnessed during this year the erec- tion of the swinging-pole ; and human beings have been suspended from it, to the wild ad- miration of the wretchedly deluded Hindoo, and to the agonized mortification of the Chris- tian. Many thousands of the Creole laborers have withdrawn from the cultivation of the estates, and have retreated to the backwoods and river districts above the Pails. This painful state of things has furnished a new motive for effort on the part of the missionaries. " The country," they write, " is becomino- daily more missionary in its character, and" more difiBcult of moral cultivation ; it, therefore commends itself to the truest sympathies of the Committee." An important opportunit for effecting extensive good is pjcsented o'^ this island, by the esse of some thousandq f emigrant coolies. These persons have lat l applied to the missionaries for instruction • their own language ; and Eev. Mr. Bickf '^ WEST INDIES. 765 sent home to the Committee a document drawn up by one of them, Samuel Johnson, who had been baptized, and who felt intensely for the moral and spiritual improvement of his wretch- ed countrymen. This document was accom- panied by a request for a returned East India missionary to labor among them. The Com- mittee immediately sent out a supply of Tamil Scriptures and tracts; and, in 1852, Rev. J. E. S. Williams was sent to labor among them, thus carrying the Gospel to 5,000 heathens. The work of the mission at Georgetown and Essequibo proceeds in an encouraging man- ner, upwards of 60 having been added to the Society, and the congregation enlarged by African emigrants ; 36 of whom have been baptized, and 52 are on the schoolmaster's roll-book. In 1853, the missionary to the coolies visited many of the estates where they were employed, and many of them called on him for instruc- tion ; and he had received much encourage- ment from the interest manifested in his work by official persons and others, in the colony ; but no special results are reported among the coolies. The number of church members in this mis- sion, in 1853, was 4,813. St. Eustabus. — In 1787 Dr. Coke visited this island ; but in consequence of the jealousy of the Dutch government, he was not allowed to preach to the negroes. However, he employed himself in instructing small companies, in the house of a free black, with whom he lodged. In December, 1788, he again visited the island, and notwithstanding persecution, the Method- ist Society numbered, before his departure, no less than 258. He preached once ; but next morning received a message from the governor forbidding it, under severe penalties. He left the island, and afterwards went to Holland to endeavor to secure from the Dutch government the toleration of the Methodists in St. Eusta- tius ; but his application was unsuccessful. In 1810, two Methodist missionaries waited upon the governor of St. Bustatius, which had lately been captured by the British, and obtained liberty from him to establish a mission. They experienced considerable hostility at first, but at length triumphed over all opposition. The king of Holland, to whom the island has been restored, has ordered a grant of 600 guilders annually to be made to the mission. The tranquillity they now enjoy forms a striking contrast to the intolerance of former years. The congregations are large ; and many of the white people, as well as the negroes, hear the Word with great attention. In 1853, the num- ber of church members was 315. Barbadoes.—ln December, 1788, Dr. Coke and Mr. Benjamin Pearce visited Barbadoes ; and, having obtained liberty to instruct the slaves on several plantations, Mr. Pearce re- mained, and commenced his labors with great energy and zeal. But he soon experienced violent opposition on the ground that he was disseminating among the negroes notions in- compatible with their condition as slaves. Repeated attempts were made by the mob to interrupt the meetings for worship, in which they conducted in the most violent and out- rageous manner. Mr. Pearce applied to a magistrate for redress, who heard his state- ment with apparent mdignation at the rioters, issued warrants against several of them, and promised to do him justice, But when the outrage had been clearly proved, the magis- trate gave this extraordinary decision : " The offence was committed against Almighty God : It therefore does not belong to me to panish it !" Mr. Pearce was left, with all his expenses to pay, a prey to a lawless mob, at once the scorn and pity of his foes. This emboldened the rioters, and they again attacked the chapel, and attempted an assault upon Mr. Pearce ; but on his appealing again to the law, the magistrate reprimanded them, and ordered them to pay the expense of the proceedings. But persecution did not cease. Soon after- ward the rioters attacked his dwelling with stones during his absence, and struck his wife with violence. In 1791, he was succeeded by Mr. Lamb, who, on his arrival, found the prejudices of the planters so far dispelled, that he had access to more estates than he was able to visit. Perse- cution had now nearly ceased, but it had given place to a settled contempt for divine things. But in October, 1823, intelligence was received that an insurrection had broken out among the slaves in Jamaica, and the Methodist mis- sionaries were accused of being accessory to it, by teaching sedition under pretence of giv- ing instruction. This intelligence raised a storm of wrath against the mission, and every indignity was heaped on the missionary. A mob assembled and tore down the chapel, and Mr. Shrewsbury's life being in danger, he left the island and went to St. Vincent's. These outrages led to a censure upon the in- habitants of the island from the British House of Commons ; and to relieve themselves of the odium, 94 of the principal men signed a de- claration, expressing their regret at the occur- rence, and their concurrence in the sentiments of the House. But when another missionary, Mr. Raynor, was sent to the island in 1826, placards were posted up on the day of his land- ing, calling upon the mob to tar and feather him, and the president refused him a license to preach. Yet, afterwards, he proceeded in his work without molestation. A new chapel was erected, the prejudice against the Methodists subsided, £,nd a prosperous mission was estab- lished. Virgin Islands.— In January, 1789, Dr. Coke, with other brethren, visited Tortola, and, finding a prospect of usefulness, Mr. Hammet remained and soon collected a large society. On the arrival of other preachers, 766 WEST INDIES. they extended their labors to Spanish Town, and many of the other islets which are scat- tered up and down in that vicinity, and, like solitary rocks, lift up their heads above the waves. To several of these they paid frequent visits in open boats, at the risk of health and life, in order to preach to the few forgotten families who inhabited them. The governor of the island, on a threatened invasion by the French, solicited the superintendent of the mission, Mr. Turner, to place himself at the head of the negroes, as he was unwilling to trust them with arms under the command of any person of less influence. As there was no other means of defending the island, Mr. Tur- ner considered it his duty to comply with the 1-equest. But, happily, the French abandoned their design and withdrew their squadron. In December, 1805, a most brutal outrage was committed on Mr. Brownell, one of the mis- sionaries in Tortola, by a mob, by which he came near losing his life, in revenge for an al- leged publication of his in England, respect- ing the morals of the people of the island. Before the commencement of this mission, every species of wickedness prevailed among the negroes, and among others, a lascivious dance, called camsen, in which all manner of iniquity was practised, and a pretended inter- course was carried on with the spirits of de- parted friends, who directed them to seek re- venge of injuries they (the spirits) had received during life ; and the scene begun in mirth often ended in blood. But, since the Gospel entered, these superstitious practices have been abandoned. The church in Tortola, in 1853, numbered 1,604. Jamaica. — Dr. Coke visited Jamaica in 1789, and was received with such extraordi- nary kindness, as to encourage him to com- mence a mission, and, soon after, Mr. Hammet was appointed to Kingston. But he very soon met with violent opposition and abuse from the white people ; his meetings were dis- turbed, and attempts made to burn and to tear down his chapel ; and when he sought legal redress, the culprits were acquitted against the clearest testimony, and the grand jury declared the missionaries and their chapels to be nui- sances ! The prejudice, however, after a time, subsided, and they were allowed to labor in peace for a number of years. But the storm again burst forth, and raged with greater fury than before. The Legislative Assembly of Jamaica, in 1802, passed an act that no per- son, unless duly qualified by the laws of that island and of Great Britain, should preach or teach in meetings of negroes, or people of color, under the severest penalties. The Methodist ministers, being regularly licensed in England, did not consider themselves endangered by this arbitrary law. Mr. Campbell continued to preach as usual at Kingston, and met with na interruption ; but, on preaching at Morant Bay, he was seized and imprisoned. On his release, he obtained license at Kingston, but, on returning to Morant Bay, he was again persecuted, and believing his usefulness at an end, he left his flock at Kingston in charge of Mr. Fish, and returned to England. But the king of England refused to sanction this in- tolerant law ; and after two years, they were permitted to resume their meetings. But, in 1807, the Common Council of Kingston passed a law of similar import, but of a still more stringent character, which forbade unlicensed preaching or exhorting, and all meetings earlier than six in the morning, or later than sunset in the evening, which completely cut off the slaves from public worship. And, not long after, one of the missionaries was sen- tenced to a month's imprisonment, because a newly-arrived missionary had sung a new tune in meeting! The Legislative Assembly, in the mean time, passed an act equally cruel and intolerant, by which a complete stop was put to the labors of the Methodists in Jamaica. These unrighteous laws coming before the home government, were immediately repudi- ated ; and the king, to prevent the repetition of such shameful proceedings, issued a general order to the governors of the West Indies, commanding them, on no pretence whatever, to give their assent to any law relative to re- ligion, until they had first transmitted a draft of the bill to England, and received the royal assent. This greatly enraged the Assembly, and led to violent proceedings, in consequence of which, the governor (Duke of Manchester) immediately dissolved the assembly. It was not, however, till the month of December, 1815, that the missionaries obtained permis- sion to resume their public labors. Mr. John Shipman obtained a license, and immediately began to preach again in Kingston, after the chapel had been shut, with one short interval, for more than eight years. Other missionaries obtained similar licenses, and, having divided the island into districts, they proceeded in their labors with increased energy and zeal. They now received more invitations -from planters to preach on their estates than they had ever done before. Their congregations greatly increased, and their societies were aug- mented to an extent unknown in any other island. In 1824, the spirit of opposition again broke out, in consequence of the House of Commons having taken some incipient steps towards the extinction of slavery. The missionaries were accused of being agents of the African Insti- tution, and every effort was made to blacken their characters and send them awav from the island. The Assembly again passed a law, which, though it left Eoman Catholic and Jewish teachers at liberty, cut ofi' the Metho- dists from their public duties. Under this act, one of the missionaries was imprisoned ; and, instigated by an inflammatory sermon preached by the rector of the parish. against the Metho- WEST INDIES. '76T dists, a company of militia attacked the resi- dence of the missionaries, and left seven balls in the walls of the house, though none of the inmates were injured. Two others, Messrs. Wliitehouse and Orton, were imprisoned in a filthy cell, at Montego Bay, on a charge of preaching without a license for that parish ; but on being brought before the chief-justice, they were discharged, and the lieutenant-governor. Sir Thomas Keane, dismissed from ofiHce the two magis- trates who had committed them. Another slave act was passed by the Assembly similar to the rejected ones, and approved by the gov- ernor. Earl Belmore, notwithstandiug the in- structions of the king to the contrary ; but it was promptly disallowed by the home govern- ment. In Pecember, 1831, an insurrection broke out on the north side of the island, in the par- ish of St. James's, and quickly extended to Trelawney, Hanover, Westmoreland, St. Eliz- abeth, and partially to Manchester, Porf^ land, and St. Thomas in the east. It does not appear to have been the design of the slaves to take the lives of the white people, their object being simply to obtain their free- dom, which they erroneously supposed had been granted by the king, but was withheld by the local authorities. A violent outcry was now raised against all missionaries, particularly the Baptists and Methodists, as if they had been the cause of it. "Without trial, without evidence, they were proclaimed guilty, and a violent outcry was raised for summai'y mear sures to be taken with them. Some of the missionaries were arrested, but as nothing could be proved against them, they were dis- charged. Immediately after the suppression of the insurrection, associations were formed throughout the island, the object of which was to expel froifl- the country all ministers except those of the established church. The proceedings of these associations were of the most violent character. A mob was raised, the chapel of St. Ann's Bay was destroyed, and the missionaries hung in efBgy, and every indignity offered them. During these persecutions, the societies in various places were left without pastoral care, and the congregations without public worship, the missionaries not being allowed to exercise their ministry. Meanwhile, Earl Mulgrave arrived as governor of the island, and showed his determination to maintain the cause of re- ligious liberty, and to protect the missionaries in ihe enjoyment of their rights and privileges. In January, 1833, 13 months from the com- mencement of the disturbances, a royal pro- clamation was issued in Jamaica for putting down the lawless colonial church unions, and maintaining religious toleration. This was accompanied by a circular, requiring the prompt obedience and cooperation of the, mar gistratfs in enforcing it. It was now decided by the grand court that the toleration laws of England were applicable to Jamaica; yet, notwithstanding this and the governor's pro- clamation, one of the magistrates, on Mr. Greenwood's applying for license according to the provisions of the toleration act, behaved in such a violent manner that Mr. G. was obliged to retire from the court, to save him- self from personal injury. But, in consequence of the energetic course of the governor, the missionaries were, after some time, allowed to carry on their labors without molestation. On Friday, the 1st of August, 1834, slavery was abolished in the West Indies, in conform- ity with an act passed the preceding year by the newly reformed Parliament of Great Bri- tain — a memorable event, mainly brought about by missionary labor and suffering. A graphic description of the inauguration of freedom at the Wesleyan chapel at Kingston is given by Eev. H. Bleby, but our limits will not allow us to give it at length. A sermon was preached the night before, by the mission- ary ; after which the whole assembly knelt in prayer, and remained on their knees till the town clock struck the hour of midnight, when thousands of voices joined in the shout, "Glory be to God! we free! we free!" Free scope was then given to the general outburst of joy ; after which a hymn of praise was sung, a prayer offered, and the crowd dismissed with the ben- ediction. The emancipation of the negroes was quick- ly followed by very important changes. The Sabbath was observed with hallowed strict- ness. Nothing was to be seen on that day but decently-dressed people going to and from their places of worship ; congregations were increased and multiplied ; old chapels were en- larged, and new ones erected. Education was also greatly extended. A great change took place also in the public opinion of Jamaica as to the Methodist missionaries. Formerly no names were too vile, no treatment too bad for them ; even their chapels were shut up or razed to the ground as public nuisances. Tet within five years after the late insurrection, the House of Assembly of Jamaica made a grant of £500 to aid in the erection of a Me- thodist chapel in Kingston ; and in the discus- sion of the subject the highest eulogiums were pronounced on the usefulness of the Wesleyan missionaries. The Common Council of Kings- ton and several of the parochial vestries fol- lowed the example of the Assembly, and made grants for similar purposes. Yet, though at first the prospects of the mission seemed to brighten, after a few years they grew worse. Many of the colored people purchased small lots of land, sometimes in the mountains, built cottages, and cultivated the ground for their living. Many left their old homes and sought employment elsewhere, often at a distance from the house, of God. Many grew worldly-mind- ed, made money the great object of their pur- 768 WEST INDIES. suit, and sought for happiness in earthly things. Some even returned to their vile heathenish practices, which it was hoped they had utterly forgotten. In 1853, the number of church members in connection with the Jamaica mission was 19,478 — a considerable decrease from former years ; for in 1844 they amounted to 26,585. The stations of the missionaries are no longer confined to the chief town, but are to be found in all parts of the island, both in the towns and in the country places. Bermvdas.' — In I'lTD, Mr. John Stephenson commenced a inission on Somer's Islaud where he had to encounter the prejudices of the whites and the heathenish superstitions of the blacks ; the latter of whom he found under the slavish dominion of witchcraft, as it prevails in Africa, and for a description of which, and the bondage under which its vic- tims are held, the reader is referred to the article on Western Africa. It appears that a 'particular species of charm called Obi, was made and sold at these islands, and was sup- posed by the negroes to have great power. It was to a people sunk under such superstitions that Mr. S. came ; but it was not long before the Gospel began to exert its influence. Yet this was no sooner manifested, than the hos- tility of the whites was aroused. Laws were passed similar to those in Jamaica, and Mr. S. was imprisoned six months in the common jail, by which his health was so impaired that he was recalled, and the island was left without a missionary for six years. In April, 1808, Mr. Joshua Marsden proceeded from New Bruns- wick to Bermuda, but found the society gather- ed by Mr. S. dispersed. He obtained permission from the governor to preach, but he met with no very great success. In 1853, the number of church members in connection with the mis- sion in this island amounted to 445. Bahama Islands. — In October, 1800, Mr. William Turton arrived at New Providence, where he obtained permission to preach ; and though a law had previously been enacted, prohibiting the instruction of the slaves, he was attended by considerable congregations, and succeeded in raising a small society. Other missionaries havig afterwards arrived, they extended their labors to Bleuthera, Har- bour Island, Abaco, and others of the Baha- mas On some of these their prospects were highly encouraging ; their congregations were large, attentive, and respectable, and a great reformation followed their labors. But in 1816, the legislature passed an act prohibiting, under severe penalties, meetings for Divine wor- ship earlier than sunrise and later than sunset, thus depriving the slaves of the privilege of attending. Many of the negroes came to the missionaries in tears, lamenting the loss of their religious privileges. It was truly affect- ing on the Sabbath morning to see some of the oldes' members ascending a neighboring hill to see whether the sun was risen, before they durst begin to sing the praises of their Creator. After a few years, however, the le- gislature retraced its steps, and repealed the restrictions which it had laid upon the poor negroes. In 1853, the members of the Me- thodist Society in the Bahama Islands were aa follows : — New Providence, . . . 816 Eleuthera, 804 Harbour Island, . . . 538 Abaco and Andros Island, . . 264 Turk's Island. . . .378 Total, . . 2,800 St. Domingo. — Having been previously in- formed by the secretary of state of the repub- lic of Hayti, that Protestant missionaries would not only be tolerated but welcomed, Messrs. John Brown and James Catts sailed from England for Port-au-Prince, in November, 1816. They soon gathered a numerous con- gregation at the capital, and in the country they were uniformly treated with kindness and respect. The inhabitants, indeed, were ex- tremely ignorant, wicked, and superstitious; yet, in a short time a number of them appear- ed to be impressed with divine things, and were formed into a society. By the govern- ment they were treated with great condescen- sion and kindness. President Boyer mani- fested the greatest readiness to encourage and promote their plans, particularly in regard to the education of youth. Tet, after a residence of about two years in St. Domingo, they were obliged to withdraw from the island, in conse- quence of the tumultuous opposition of the po- pulace. But on their departure. President Boyer not only expressed himself highly satis- fied with their conduct, but transmitted a do- nation of £500 to the society. The constitu- tion of Hayti recognizee^ the church of Rome as the religion of the state, but tolerated all others. It may be questioned, however, whe- ther the principle of toleration was at all un- derstood ; practically, at least, the Methodists enjoyed nothing like religious freedom. The small society that the missionaries had collect- ed were, after their departure, greatly perse- cuted chiefly through the influence of the Ca- tholic priests over the ignorant people, in which, however, they were too much seconded by some persons of high rank. They could only meet by stealth, and in small companies ; and when assembled for worship, they were sometimes assaulted by the populace with stones and other missiles. On one occasion, a number of them were seized by the police, and carried to prison, and on being brought before the chief judge, they were prohibited by him, in the name of the president, from meeting to- gether. " No one," said he, " can hinder you from worshiping God as you please ; but let every one abide at home ; for as often aa you are found assembled you shall be put in WEST INDIES. 769 prison ; and if you unhappily persist, I have re- ceived orders to disperse you everyvphere." Several wished to reply, but he refused to hear them, saying, " It is not from me ; it is not my fault ; these are orders given to me." There is reason to apprehend that these were the orders of President Boyer. Yet the poor ■ people continued to meet. In 1834, John Tin- dall was sent to Hayti ; other missionaries fol- lowed, and settled at Port-au-Prince, Cape Haytien and Samand. Their congregations were generally small, and they had no great encouragement in their labors. There was reason to believe that numbers saw the absurd- ities of the Eomish church, but ignorance, superstition, and vice maintained their domin- ion over the great mass of the population. Notwithstanding the unsettled state of affairs, arising from changes in the government and war with the Spanish part of the island, the principle of religious toleration has made marked progress. In 1853, the number of church members in connexion with the mission in this island amounted to 429. Other missions. — Besides the missions already noticed, the Methodists established others in St. Christophers, Nevis, Grenada, St. Bartho- lomew, St. Thomas, St. Martins, Anguilla, Montserrat, Tobago, and Honduras, the present state of which will be seen in the tabular view. In 1853, the African, Creole, and Asiatic church members in connection with the Wes- leyan missions in the West Indies, amounted to over 48,000 souls ; and other general results of the mission will be seen in the tabular view. , Though in the preceding account of particu- lar missions we have given a few illustrations of the nature and difficulties of missionary labor in the West Indies in the days of slavery, we shall here add, in' conclusion, a remark or two of general application to the whole of these mis- sions. It was a, great disadvantage to the ne- groes, that the Lord's day was assigned them by their masters to cultivate the grounds al- lowed them in lieu of provisions, and that the regular market throughout the West Indies was on that sacred day, when the chief towns exhibited all the noise and bustle of petty com- merce. After breakfast, on one Sabbath, a driver or overseer accompanied the slaves to the negro fields, where they spent the Sabbath toiling all day under a burning sun. On the following Lord's day, they went to market to sell the produce of their grounds and to pur- chase such articles as they were not allowed by their masters, and they closed the day in drink- ing, dancing, and debauchery. Such was a Sabbath in the West Indies. The Christian slaves had to perform the same work as the others, unless, as in some cases, their masters allowed them the Saturdays for that purpose. They went to market in the forenoon, and from thence to the chapel. It was no uncommon thing to see the chapel yard covered with bas- kets while their owners were attending wor- 49 ship. The missionaries did not, however, as was insinuated, excite complaint among the slaves on this subject. They were no doubt grieved at the profanation of the Sabbath, and the beneficial effects of their labors were mate- rially counteracted by it ; but they accommo- dated themselves to the circumstances of the slaves, seized upon the broken fragments of their time, and made the best improvement of them they were able. TABULAE VIEW. PRINCIPAL STATIONS OR CIRCUITS. 'p. be a 3 6 f tention was first directed to this field by a ne- gro, who stated that he had a sister in the island of St. Thomas, who, with many of her enslaved companions, desired to be instructed in the way of salvation, and earnestly implored the God of heaven to send some one who was capable of giving them religiovis instruction. In the hope of being of some service to these be- nighted people, these young men, laymen, of the occupations above named, set out from Herrnhut, in Denmark, with only six dollars each in his pocket, and arrived at St. Thomas on the 13th of December, 1732. The next year two companies, one consisting of 18 and the other of 11 persons, sailed from Europe, many of whom fell victims to the insalubrity of the climate. In 1T36, three persons were baptized. In 1738 a negro named Mingo was baptized, and became a zealous assistant. Through his preaching an awakening took place over the whole island. Bat the planters opposed the work, and persecuted and impris- oned the missionaries. Count Zinzendorf, how- ever, who unexpectedly arrived in the island, procured their liberation. In 1741, 90 persons were baptized at a plantation called New Herrnhut. Princess plantation, in the island of St. Croix, became a permanent station in 1751. A church was erected in Priedensthal, St. Croix, in 1755, and this became the princi- pal station in the Danish islands. The place was destroyed by a hurricane in 1772. Bethany, in the island of St. Jan, was occupied as a sta^ tion in 1754 ; and in 1782, Emmaus, in the same island, became a station. Friedensfield, in St. Oroix, became a missionary settlement in 1805. In 1832, a centenary jubilee was held, and the important and encouraging fact was reported, that during that period 37,000 souls had been baptized in the Danish islands. The year 1848 was rendered memorable by the in- surrection of slaves in St. Croix, and by the emancipation of the negroes in all the Danish isles. In the three Danish islands, St. Thomas, St. Croix, and St. Jan, there are at the present time 8 stations, 35 laborers, 9,398 converfci, of whom 2,892 are communicants. Jamaica. — The Moravian brethren com- menced a mission in this island in 1754, en- couraged by several of the planters, who pre- tcnled them an estate called Carmel. In one year the Sabbath congregation numbered 700 persons, and 26 had been baptized. In 1804, fifty years from the date of the mission, the brethren observe : " Though we cannot exult in an abundant in-gathering of souls, which these fifty years have produced, or even over our present prospects, yet we have suffi- cient cause of gratitude to the Lord for having preserved a seed in Jamaica. From the be- ginning of this mission to the present time, 938 negroes have been baptized." In 1824, a serious insurrection broke out in the island ; and in 1831, another still more general and bloody. To this last outbreak the slaves were provoked, say the missionaries, " by inhuman treatment, instigated also by hearing of the sympathy which their lot had excited in England and its parliament." Much hatred was excited against the missions, and several churches of different denominations were broken up. In 1834, a system of eman- cipation was commenced, but complete liberty was not granted till 1838. " Prom that time," say the brethren, " our mission in Jamaica has prospered greatly. Our six churches were over-crowded. At the church in Fairfield, which contains 800 sittings, above 2,000 per- sons sought admittance. It was therefore ne- cessary to keep two meetings, either at the •same time or in succession. The schools were equally over-crowded. The souls under our care numbered 8,000. New preaching places were established, and many school-houses were erected." In 1842, an institution for training native teachers was established. In 1850, the souls under the care of the mission at the se- I veral stations, was estimated at 13,000. 25 ^ elementary schools were in active operation, ; under the superintendence of the missionaries. The Moravian Church Miscellany for May, 1851, contains a review of the Jamaica mis- sion, representing it as comprising 13 stations, at the west end of the island, each station con- sisting of various buildings — a church, a school- house, and a dwelling-house, with out- offices. With each station a congregation is connected, living within a circle, the diameter of which is, in most cases, about 20 miles. Besides the principal stations, there are 17 school-houses and out station schools, making the number of churches 13, and of schools 30. The number of negroes in connexion with these churches amounted, at the above date, to 13,388, young and old. Many white families i|,lso regularly attended the churches. These statements are not essentially modified by any later returns. Antigua. — The brethren's mission was com- menced in this island in 1756. It originated with the missionaries at St. Thomas, and the first missionary was from that place. Little interest was excited in the minds of the ne- groes, however, till 1761, when a piece of ground was purchased in the town of St. -John's, and a place of worship wa^ erected for 772 WEST INDIES. the negroes. In 1112, a religious awakening spread over the island. A desire for religious instruction was increased among the slaves, and in 1775 the attendants on public worship numbered 2,000, and from 10 to 20 were bap- tized almost every month. The converts were subject to many temptations and troubles, such as famine, sickness, persecution, depreda- tions, and the excitements consequent upon the taliing of the island by the French ; yet the cause was firm and progressive, so that after the restoration of peace, in 1783, 60 adults were received into the church at St. John's, in one day, and in a year 700 were added to the congregations. The missionaries preached on different plantations, and one native assist- ant built a house of worship at his own ex- pense, to seat 400 persons. Many of the planters saw that the effects of the Gospel upon the slaves was highly beneficial, and when any of them were refractory, they sent them to the missionaries for reproof, instead of administering corporeal punishment. But others were decidedlj' hostile, and would punish their slaves severely for attending on the means of grace. One negro was compelled to give his own wife fifty lashes, because she had sought the protection of the local authorities. At another time, an aged female negro was un- mercifully whipped and put in irons, from har tred to her religion, and the next day she was chained to two negroes, and dragged towards the field to work, but died on the way. Amidst these persecutions the church in Antigua re- sembled the burning bush. In spite of oppo- sition, the word of the Lord continued to run and be glorified, and the two congregations, in 1788, numbered more than 6,000 : and so many new doors were opened for preaching the Gospel, that the missionaries were thankful to find useful assistants in many of the converts, who visited the sick, gave advice, and minister- ed in many ways, though they were not employ- ed in preaching. In 1796, a third station was formed ; the names of the three stations being St. John's, Grace Hill, and Grace Bay. In 1810, they commenced a school on the Lanoasterian plan, at St. John's, with 80 scholars, which soon in- creased to 700, who made surprising progress in learning. In 1812, owing to the dryness of the season and the war with America, provi- sions became dear and scarce, and famine and disease prevailed, which carried off more than 200 of the congregation at St. John's. In 1817, the brethren commenced a fourth station, at a place called Newfield, for which the colonial government presented them with ten acres of land, £1,000 towards the erection of buildings, and an annual grant of £300 for their support. Two other stations were added. Cedar Hall, and Mount Joy, and large congregations were collectrd. In 1823, they celebrated the 50th anniversary of the opening of the church at St. John's, when it appeared that there had been baptized and received into the church in that time, 16,099 negroes, young and old. Among a people so ignorant and oppressed, however, some allowance must be made for spurious conversions. In 1826, the mission in Antigua was strengthened by the arrival of several brethren from Europe. The number of slaves receiving instruction at this period, was 14,823. Bible and missionary societies were formed among the negroes in 1832 ; and in 1834, unconditional emancipation was pro- claimed in the island, the negroes being consider- ed suflSciently advanced in knowledge and intel- ligence to render such a measure safe and pro- per. In 1838, Lebanon, the sixth station, was begun, and 1839, Gracefield was commenced in the north. A training school was opened at Cedar Hall, in 1847, but the buildings were destroyed by a hurricane the next year. They have been rebuilt, and the institution is in a flourishing condition. 'J'here are not so many under the instruction of the missionaries in Antigua at the present time aS there were a few years ago, owing chiefly, as is supposed, to the increase of churches of other denomi- nations ; still the number as last reported, amounted to about 8,000. St. Kitt's. — A mission was begun in this island in 1777, at Basseterre. In a year or two a general interest was awakened among the negroes, which continued, with some inter- ruptions, so that in 1790 the Gospel was preached on upwards of 50 plantations. In 1800 tlie number of converts was estimated at about 2,000. A second station, Bethesda, was formed in 1820 ; and in 1832 a third was be- gun at Bethel. Prom this time the activity of other missionary societies increased, and many who had attended the Moravian meetings fell off, and joined congregations nearer and more convenient. Estridge, a fourth station, was commenced in 1845. Barbadoes. — -The Brethren entered upon a mission in this island in 1765. The first con- vert was baptized in 1768 ; but there has been no such general desire for the word of God as in many of the other West India islands. Two stations were established, one at Sharon, in 1794, and one at Mount Tabor, in 1826. In 1831, both these stations were destroyed by a liurricane, and upwards of 4,000 souls perished in the island. These stations were rebuilt in 1832, when the congregations numbered about 1100. A congregation was established at Bridgetown in 1836, and another at Clifton Hill, in 1841, making four stations, which are still occupied with a good degree of success. Tobago. — The Moravians have had a mission in this island since 1787. At several different times it has been suspended, but resumed again, and it still exists, as one of the many proofs of the blessing of God on missionary perseverance. There are two stations, Montgomery and Moriah. Dutch Guiana. — Into this field two of the WEST INDIES 773 Brethren entered in I'ISS. One of their lead- ing objects was to carry the Grospel to the Arawacks, a, numerous Indian tribe in that part of Surinam called Rio de Berbice. Their first station was at Pilg-erhut, on the river Wironje, a tributary of the Berbice. At the end of ten years the mission was favored with the presence and labors of Theophil-us Solomon Schumann, oijlled " the gifted apostle of the Arawacks." By his great talents and " won- derful combination of wisdom and firmness," he was enabled, under God, to triumph over the opposition of the whites, and 300 converts crowned his labors. But in 1757 difficulties of every description, among which were fam- ine and epidemics, thickened around, and almost dispersed this little flock. By removals they sought a more peaceful abode, and much might be related of the heroic perseverance of the Moravian brethren in these primeval for- ests. In 1760 Schumann was called from his labors on earth. The work was continued by other missionaries, though amid appalling diffi- culties and discouragements. Station after station was invaded and burnt by the Bush Negroes, and the converts dispersed, and finally, in 1808, the mission among the South Ameri- can Indians, after existing 70 years,was brought to a close. A mission among the negro slaves in Suri- nam, was commenced in 1735, at Parimaribo as head-quarters. The missionaries went out with licenses for several trades, by which they supported themselves. The first convert in Parimaribo was baptized in 1776, and the first church was erected in 1778. From 1799 to 1816 the colony was a scene of frequent wars between the Dutch and the English, but the mission was at no time entirely interrupted. In 1821 the " Harmouy of the Gospels," was translated into Negro-English, and was heartily welcomed by those who were able to read. In 1828 the brethren opened a new church in Pari- maribo, with a congregation of 2,260. The most respected inhabitants formed a society, which still renders valuable assistance to the mission. In 1830 Berg en Dal, on the Surinam, 90 miles from Parimaribo, was opened as a preaching place. During this year the British and Foreign Bible Society printed the Negro-English New Testament for the Surinam mission. It had pre- viously existed only in manuscript. Several new stations have been formed, but the largest and most important is still at Parimaribo, where the congregation, in 1850, numbered 5,500 souls. The other negroes under the care of the mission are scattered over several hun- dred plantations. The Brethren have also a mission among the Bush, or Free Negroes, on the upper Surinam, a country which can be reached only by dangerous voyages in small canoes up the streams, the navigation of which is rendered extremely perilous by cataracts. The heat is extreme, and the climate fatal to most Europeans. Into this region two of the Brethren penetrated in 176d. One of them died in two months, the other labored 12 years, and was the means of bringing a few souls to accept the Gospel invitation. New Bam bey, a station some miles lower down the river, was established in 1785, for a company of 20 ne- groes. Considerable desire was manifested for several years in the interior of the country, to hear the Gospel, but sickness and death among the missionaries proved a great hindrance to their labors. In 1813 the congregation in New Bambey numbered 50, but there was little vi- tality among them, and the field was relinquish- ed ; it was afterwards resumed, but owing to the death of missionaries, was given up again in 1848. English General Baptists. — Jamaica. — The Baptists entered upon their mission in Ja- maica in 1814. The first station was at Fal- mouth, where a school was opened, and preach- ing commenced on the Sabbath, attended by both negroes and white people. Two more mis- sionaries arrived the next year, and settled at Kingston. Encouraged by early indications of success, the society pressed forward its work, in- creasing the number of laborers and forming new stations, till, at the annual meeting of the missionaries in Falmouth, in April, 1831, the following tabular statement was presented : ba > H 1 S5 as S 1 ■sa B, •^ « N o H Kingstoiij Queen-street 1 23 108 114 29 2,937 " Hanover *' 21 49 67 39 769 YaUahs 47 1 67 103 103 Spanish. Town 45 18 26 43 117 370 136 345 1,036 1,572 Montego Bay Gurney's Mount 3 2 63 64 125 Falmouth 26 26 216 215 886 Anotta Bay 12 17 86 81 610 Charles Town 4 60 64 112 Port Maria 10 '8 104 18 106 18 410 45 Ora Cabesaa Bnie Head 3 33 36 36 Mount Charles 319 Old Harbor 63 166 93 265 Hayes Savanna 3 10 179 172 267 Crooked Spring 6 15 88 78 ■ 723 Port iloyal 9 11 23 21 202 St. Ann's Bay 31 21 62 52 Ocho Rioa 74 16 89 89 Savanna la Mar 's 19 16 83 Fuller's Field 2 2 22 Rio Bueno "i 6 68 80 58 74 128 108 Stewart's Town Lucea — 60 60 60 Totals 14 383 393 1941 1931 10,838 The mission continued to prosper, and the churches had at no time been in a better con- dition than when the act of emancipation was carried into effect, in 1838. Yet, those who were unfriendly to this act, and wished to make its results appear to the worst advan- tage, raised numerous reports against the mis- 774 WEST INDIES. sionaries, and sougM ia every way to embar- rass their operations. This led Sir Lionel Smith to make some explicit statements in their defence. In reply to an address from the Baptist brethren, he said, " On my assum- ing the government of this colony, I strongly expressed my reliance on the whole body of missionaries, in their high integrity of purpose, and in their loyal principles. You more than realized all the benefits I expected from your ministry, by raising the negroes from the men- tal degradation of slavery to the cheering obli- gations of Christianity, and they were thus taught that patient endurance of evil, which has so materially contributed to the general tranquillity. Even with the aid of a vicious and well paid press, both in England and Jamaica, the enemies of your religion have never dared go to the proof of their audacious accusations against you." After alluding to the peaceful working of emancipation, and the disappointment of those who had predicted violence and blood, the governor added, " The admirable conduct of the peasantry in such a crisis, has constituted a proud triumph to the cause of religion ; and those who contributed to enlighten them in their moral duties, through persecutions, insults, and dangers, have deserved the regard and esteem of the good and the just in all Christian countries." This was said after one year of freedom had passed away. The returns made from the respective mission churches in 1839, evinced that the work of God continued to advance in an encouraging degree. A nett increase of 2,617 members had taken place during the preceding year, and the whole number of members was 21,337. There were also over 20,000 inquirers. A large increase was reported in the number of pupils receiving instruction in the schools. The day-schools contained 5,413, the evening- schools 577, and 10117 were taught on the Sabbath, making a total of 16,117 scholars. As a further proof of the rapid growth of those habits and feelings which are the best security for the social welfare of a community, the mis- sionaries had solemnized 1,942 marriages dur- ing the year. In 1841, the number of church members had increased to 27,706. At the association of the Baptist mission churches, held in Kingston, January, 1842, the ministers unanimously resolved, as an appropriate com- memoration at once of the day of freedom and the jubilee of the mission, to detach themselves from the funds of the parent society after the first of August ensuing. From this period, the churches in Jamaica, although continued with no less efBoiency than before, are not formally reported as mission churches. Bahamas. — A mission to the Bahama Islands was commenced by the General Baptists in 1834. The missionaries established themselves at New Providence, and in two years they had extended their labors to Andres Island, Eleu- thera, Exuma, Bum Key, Crooked Island, For- tune's Island, and Turk's Island. Connected with the churches at these places there were 490 members, 217 having been added during the preceding year. This field has been steadily and perseveringly cultivated, and has yielded much precious fruit. In 1850, Mr. Littlewood wrote, " We have six native agents, assisted by their wives, exclusive of 140 Sabbath-school teachers. Their work is divided between 45 churches, 1,475 members, 3,045 attendants on public worship, and 1,226 scholars, the fruit of whose labors is evidenced in the steady acces- sion to our churches, and in the increased knowledge and piety of the people." Mr. Lit- tlewood, speaking of his field of labor, says : " Imagine an expanse of water spread out be- fore you some 500 miles, studded with sea-girt isles, varying from 100 miles by 40, to bare rocks of 100 yards in circumference. Amidst these islands I am continually navigating, where the ocean is frequently as smooth as a mirror, or as often lashed into a foam by the tempest." The members of these churches are represented as, for the most part, very poor, but as humble and consistent Christians. Trinidad. — In 1842 the attention of the So- ciety was directed to this island, only about one-tenth of whose 80,000 -inhabitants are white people. Mr. Cowen, the first mission- ary, described the people as in an awful state of destitution and spiritual ignorance, and nothing to encourage missionary operations except the existing necessity. In 1846 the Secretary of the Society visited Trinidad, at which time the number of evangelical minis- ters on the island was eight, and the attend- ance upon day-schools about one in twenty. The great body of the people were Roman Catholics ; and, by popery and slavery com- bined, the energy of the people had been de- stroyed, and the finer features of the negro character nearly obliterated. The Secretary says," "We have two groups of stations in Trinidad, one of which is in and around the port of Spain, the other about 20 miles to the south, in and around the Savanna Grande. Since 1843 two small chapels of wood have been built near the port of Spain, in one of which a school of 90 scholars is taught. An- other chapel has been built about three miles distant, close to the sea, in the midst of a con- siderable population. About 20 miles north of the port of Spain, Mr. Cowen has three sta- tions, where he labors with much self-denial." In 1850 the missionary wrote with expressions of grief : " What with rum-drinking, supersti- tion, and something like paganism, the cause of the Lord Jesus makes little progress in Trinidad." He added, however, that increas- ed attention was being paid to the cause of education ; that thousands of religious tracts were in circulation, and that during the pre- ceding year more than a thousand copies of the Scriptures had been distributed. The number of communicants, as last reported, was "WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 775 80 ; schools, 8 ; teachers, 12 ; scholars, 181 ; all under tke superintendeDce of one mis- sionary. Honduras. — This island has been the scene of missionary operations by the English Bap- tists since 1822 ; but their labors have been quite restricted, and no very full reports of a recent date have been received. The largest number of communicants reported at any one time was 132 ; schools, 9 ; scholars, 227. Church Missionary Society. — This Soci- ety commenced a mission in the island of An- tigua in 1815, another in Jamaica in 1826, and one in Trinidad in 1836. Later still, a good work has been begun and carried on in British Guiana. In Jamaica, as last reported, the Society had five stations, viz., Siloah, Prattville, Chichester, Rural Hill, and Church Hill. At Siloah the house of worship, which was adapted to seat 850 persons, was crowded with a congregation of about 1,000. The communicants numbered 312. and there were 114 candidates. In two schools there were 218 scholars. The Prattville station liad 279 communicants ; one day-school, with 138 chil- dren, and one Sunday-school, with 230 scholars. At Chichester there was a congregation of 450, of whom 105 were church-members, and 39 candidates. Of the other two stations no definite account is given. Little, if anything, is at present done by the Society in Antigua and Trinidad. In British Guiana considerable attention has been paid to schools, and though the number of scholars is not large, their pro- ficiency is remarkable. The highest class read the Old and New Testaments, and study general and church history, and geography, besides learning hymns, catechism, and por- tions of Scripture. Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. — This Society has missions in Barbar does, Grenada, Tobago, and British Guiana. In Barbadoes they commenced operations as early as 1818, and they have now eight or nine stations, and as many missionaries. Cod- rington College, an important institution of this Society, has been in operation since 1829, and has supplied the West Indian Church with upwards of sixty clergymen. In Grenada the Society has but one missionary ; also one in Tobago. In Esseqnibo, Pomeroon, and De- marara, belonging to British Guiana, there are five or six missionaries. London Missionary Society. — The London Missionary Society commenced a mission in Jamaica in 1834 ; and at later periods it has established missions in Demerara and Berbice. The latest reports received are to 1851, when the Society had in Jamaica 12 chapels or star tions, 8 missionaries, and over 800 commu- nicants. In Demarara there were 7 chapels, 5 missionaries, 4 teachers, 1,000 communicants, and 550 scholars. In all, 19 missionaries, 4,000 communicants, and 3,000 scholars. United Scotch Presbyterian Chuech. — This Church has taken charge of the stations till lately maintained by the Scottish Mission- ary Society. They are in Jamaica and at the following places, viz., Hampden, Lucca, Port Maria, Cornwall, Carron Hall, Green Island, Brownsville, and Eose Hill. Their statistics are not given. — Rev. E. D. Moore. Baptist Free Mission Society. — This So- ciety, which is organized on anti-slavery prin- ciples, and has its seat of operations in Utica, N. Y., has had a mission for a number of years in successful operation in Hayti ; with 1 mis- sionary, 3 female assistants, 1 native pastor, and 4 native teachers. GENERAL TABULAR VIEW. SOCIETIES. i o 3 S B ,^ 6 2 £ 1 Weslevans 79 7 86 19 87 23 6 48,689 18,009* f99 4,000 17,000 3,900 300 18.247 '763 348 3,000 a', COO 513 112,406 59,.59fi EngHsb Baptists Churcli of England London Missionary Soc. . Moravians,, , Scotch Presbyterians., , American Miss. Asso... Totals 256 92,494 26,861 172.001 * Includes the churches not now aided by the Society. WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIE- TY.— Methodism has often been complimented as being " essentially missionary in its charac- ter." This is true in a higher sense than is generally understood. Indeed, the very origin of the system can be traced to a high and devoted missionary spirit. The founder of Methodism was a missionary before he was an evangelical Methodist, having gone forth in 1735 in the service of the Society for Propa- gating the Gospel in Foreign Parts, as a mis- sionary to the North American Indians. His subsequent conversion to God was accom- plished through the honored instrumentality of a Moravian missionary, Peter Boh/er, then on his way to his field of labor among the heathen. And almost prophetic were the words of Wesley, when parted from this de- voted missionary, who had been to him a father in the Gospel : " what a work hath God begun since his coming into England ! Such an one as shall never come to an end till heaven and earth pass away." For over fifty-two 3'ears from that time as an itinerant preacher he nobly acted up to the spirit of his chosen motto : " The World is my Parish." During this period, such " full proof of his ministry " did he make, that he generally delivered two, and frequently, three or four sermons every day ; and traveled about 4,500 miles every year, chiefly on horseback. And so wonder- fully did God own his great missionary plana 776 WESLETAN IflSSIONART SOCIETY. and efforts, that, at his death, the work had spread through all parts of Great Britain and Ireland (where there were 300 itinerants, 1,000 local preachers, and 80,000 members, in the societies,) and also into the Isle of Wight, and the Isle of Man, and the Channel Islands, through the United States, the West Indies, Canada, and Newfoundland. We might almost say that Mr. Wesley's missionary spirit was hereditary. His father, Eev. Samuel Wesley, felt deeply for the hea^ then, and about the beginning of the eight- eenth century we find him in correspondence with one of the English prelates, projecting a mission to Hiudostan on a magnificent scale, and even offering himself to take a part in it as a missionary. Mrs. Susannah Wesley, also, the gifted mother of John Wesley, shared the missionary ardor of her husband. During Mr. Wesley's absence in London, attending the Convocation, she read the journals of the mis- sionaries sent out by the Danish Society to Tranquebar ; and so powerful was the effect produced upon her mind, that she gave herself anew in covenant to G-od, and resolved in fu- ture to be more devoted to his service. She began to labor systematically with her child- ren, and then with her husband's parishioners, assembling them together on the Sabbath eve- nings, during the long months of her husband's absence, and giving them religious instruction ; and pleading, in justification of this unusual step for her as a woman, the example of the Tranquebar missionaries. Much good was accomplished by her eflbrts, and she imbued her children with her own spirit ; and perhaps it may be seen in the light of eternity, that the missionary ardor of the followers of Wesley owes much to the mother of the founder of Methodism. The Contingent Fund, instituted by Mr. John Wesley as early as 1756, was designed by him to be the moans of sustaining the home missions of Methodism in Great Britain and Ireland. But the work soon began to spread beyond the ability of a home mission agency to manage. One step after another led the Methodists onward until they reached the pa- gan world ; and it soon became apparent that a foreign missionary organization was needed to take charge of the spreading work of God. The first mission beyond the limits of Great Britain, undertaken by the early Methodists, was that to the North American colonies. In the minutes for 1769, we find Mr. Wesley ask- ing in the Conference, " Who are willing to go to America as missionaries ?" Two breth- ren immediately rose and offered themselves, Eichard Boardman and Joseph Pilmoor. But there was no foreign missionary fund ; and Mr. Wesley p'-oposed that they should take up a collection among themselves, and £70 were contributed on the spot. This was the first Methodist missionary collection ever made ; and as the whole number of preachers at that time was but 110, and only about half of these usually attended Conference, this collection would probably average nearly $7 each from this company of poor itinerants. Of this sum £20 was appropriated to pay the passage of the missionaries, and the remainder was given them to assist in the erection of the first Me- thodist meeting-house in America. Other mis- sionaries were sent out afterwards, but in a short time this portion of the work assumed the independent position of the Methodist E. Church ; and being able to provide for her own necessities, ceased to be regarded as a mission of the parent community. But the missionary spirit which Mr. Wesley had evoked, soon called into existence opera- tions too extensive for the superintendence of one man, even of Mr. Wesley's versatile pow- ers ; and in this emergency, God sent to his aid Eev. Dr. Coke: The friecdship between these men began Aug. 13, 1776 ; and after traveling through the home work of Metho- dism, and visiting America to oi;ganize the Methodist Episcopal Church, in 1784, Dr. 0. became General Superintendent of Methodist missions. He traveled extensively through Great Britain, making collections for their support, soliciting subscriptions from wealthy individuals, wherever he could gain access, and selecting suitable men for the work. He also maintained a regular correspondence with the missionaries. Prom the time of Mr. Wesley's death, in 1791, to the year 1811, under his active and vigilant superintendence, the mis- sionaries among the Africans in the West In- dies, and those in British North America, were increased from 21 to 43, besides 11 em- ployed in the Irish mission among the neglect- ed papists ; and the members in _ society in these foreign stations were increased from 6,.^25 to 13,382. After the Conference of 1786, Dr. Coke sailed in company with three brethren for Halifax ; but Providence drove the vessel to Antigua. He distributed the missionaries among the islands, and thus began the Wesleyan missions to the West Indies. He returned to England, and spent the next 18 mouths in visiting the principal towns, begging for the missions with unabated zeal ; and at the close of the Conference of 1788, he sailed again with another detachment of mis- sionaries for other islands among the West Indies. He again returned home, and having sent out several more missionaries, he once more started with another band of devoted men for the West Indies, in October, 1790. As the missions multiplied abroad, the Con- ference in England relieved Dr. Coke of a part of his labor, by establishing an annual mis- sionary collection in all their chapels, to sup- port this growing and blessed work. In the next ten years the Doctor paid four more visits to America, to extend and strength- en the work already begun. At the Conference of 1813, though then in his 67th year, he ex- WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. Y77 pressed an earnest desire to proceed to the East Indies to establish a mission there. Eight een times had he crossed the Atlaatic for mis- sionary purposes ; yet his godly ardor was un- aJDated. Some of his brethren attempted to dissuade him from his purpose ; but, after hear- ing their arguments, he burst into tears, and exclaimed, " If you will not let me go, you will 'break my heart !" His brethren withdrew their opposition ; and, accompanied by seven missionaries. Dr. Coke embarked for the east in December, 1813. But on the 3d of May following, his spirit suddenly returned to God : he was found dead in his cabin. Thus ended the life and labors of this estimable man, whose name will ever be remembered in hon- orable association with the history of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. The Wesleyan Home Missions may be con- sidered to have commenced when Mr. Wesley instituted " the Contingent Fund " for their support iu 1756, 98 years ago. The Foreign Missions of Methodism were commenced by Mr. Wesley in 1769, when he sent missionaries to America. In the year 1784 he planted a mission in the Isle of Jersey; and in 1785 he sent out seven missjouaries to establish mis- sions in Nova Scotia, Neiifoundland, and in the Island of Antigtta. The next year he sent additional help to these missions, and also oc- cupied Guernsey. In 1787 he sent mksionaries to St. Vincent's, St. Christopher's, and St. Eusta- tius, and also strengthened the mission in the Norman Isles. In 1788 he appointed five more missionaries for the West Indies. The work continued to spread, and in 1789 Domin- ica, Barbadoes, Saba, Tortola, and Santa Cruz were added to the list of Wesleyan missions. Mr. Wesley sent out two more missionaries the next year to the West Indies, and he added Jamaica to the list of stations, and also ap- pointed a committee of nine preachers to take the management of those missions. This closed Mr. Wesley's connection with the early missions of Methodism. A few months after this Conference he was called to his reward. The statistics of the Wesleyan Foreign Mis- sions at the Conference before his death were as follows : The fields occupied were the Nor- man Isles, Newfonixlland, Nova Scotia, and the West Indies. The number of missionaries was 23, and of members 5848 ; of whom 498 were French, 350 were mulattoes, and 4377 were negroes. The same year that witnessed the death of Wesley, witnessed also the death of the first missionary who fell in the service of this society. Robert Cambdl died of putrid fever in the Island of St. Vincent's. Upon Dr. Coke now devolved the management of the Wesleyan missions. To assist him, however, the Conference appointed a committee of finance and advice, consisting of all the minis- ters of the connection resident for the time being in London, and by them all missionaries sent out were to be examined, and all accounts to be submitted to their inspection, and corre- spondence to be maintained with them. This Conference sent out three more missionaries to the West Indies, and also projected a mission in France, William Mahy being appointed to this latter service the next year. In the " Minutes of the Conference " of 1792 we first find Africa on the list of the Wesleyan missionary stations, Sierra Leone being the part occupied. The Conference of 1793 established a gene ral collection to be made in all their congregar tions for the support of the missions. During the next five or six years, notwithstanding the commotions throughout their connection on account of some questions of discipline, as well as the disturbed condition of the political world. Dr. Coke and the Conference continued their care of the missions already planted, and gave them what enlargement they could. In the minutes for 1796 we find the names of A. Murdoch and W. Patten set down as mission- aries to the Foulah country in Africa, to which service they were solemnly set apart by the Conference. In 1799 the Rev. G. Whitfield ! was appointed treasurer for the Foreign Mis- sions ; and Gibraltar was added to the list of stations. In the minutes for that year occurs the following entry : " We in the fullest man- ner take these missions under our own care, and consider Dr. Coke as our agent." The Conference also requested Dr. C. to draw up a statement of the work of God carried on by their missions, for circulation, and took addi- tional steps to give greater efficiency to their missionary work. At the next Conference a body of rules was compiled for the regulation of the Foreign Missions ; and authority was given to Dr. Coke to send a missionary to Gibraltar, and another to Madras. In 1804 Mr. Hawkshaw was sent to Demerara, in South America. At this time the number of mem- bers in the Foreign Missions was 15,846. The first missionary secretary (Mr. Entwistle) was appointed this year. Dr. Coke being general superintendent, and Mr. Lomas treasurer, each of these ofBcere being amenable to the Mis- sionary Committee, consLsting of all the Lon- don preachers ; so that the whole apparatus necessary for the guidance of the missions took foim as the necessity arose. In 1813 the Conference yielded to Dr. Coke's solicitations for the establishment of a mission in the East. Of the seven missionaries ap- pointed for Asia and South Africa, it was in- tended that three of them should be stationed at Ceylon, one at Java, one at the Cape of Good Hope, and the others to be placed where Dr. Coke might think best and as Providence opened the way. The result will be seen in the history of the Ceylon mission. The Conference of 1814 strongly recom- mended " the immediate establishment of a Methodist Missionary Society in every district where it had not already been done. They 778 WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. also appointed two secretaries for the Foreign Missions, in connection witli tlie General Mis- sionary Committee in London, and designated eight additional missionaries, three to New- foundland, two to Demarara, one to Canada, and two to Australia. The missionary income was ascertained as having amounted this year to £12,177. At Dr. Coke's death, there was no sufficient organization to direct the operations of the dif- ferent missions, and to provide the means of their support and extension. And, when all of a sudden they found themselves deprived of his services, the preachers and people awoke from their supineness and keenly felt the neces- sity of some combined effort to maintain the ground that had been gained. In this state of anxious inquiry, the Rev. Geo. Morley, then superintendent of the Leeds circuit, suggested the formation of a missiouavy society in that town. This was done ; and a new impulse was thus given to the work through- out the connection. Other places, in swift suc- cession, followed the example of Leeds, till the Methodist congregations, from the Land's End to the Tweed, caught the sacred flame. Collectors offered their services in all direc- tions ; the hearts of the people were every- where impressed and opened to the state of the heathen, and the communication of authentic missionary intelligjence ; and money was from year to year poured into the sacred treasury beyond all former precedent. At the same time missionaries have continued willingly to offer themselves even for the most hazardous and difiBcult stations ; and doors of entrance are almost every year opened in the most un- expected quarters. The Wesleyan Missionaries, ministers of the connexion, are 454 in number. They are as- sisted by catechists, local preachers, assistants, superintendents of schools, schoolmasters and schoolmistresses, artizans, &c. ; of whom 698 are employed at a moderate salary, and 8,494 afford their services gratuitously. These mis- sionaries and their assistants are preaching the Gospel, and communicating instruction by schools and otherwise, in 35 different languages : In Europe in the Irish, Welsh, French, Italian, Spanish, German, and Swedish ; in Africa, in the Akra, Yoruba, Grebo, Mandingo, Nama- qua, Kaffi-e, Dutch, Sesuto, and Sechuana ; in Asia, in the Tamil, Portuguese, Singalese, Dutch, Cauarese, Sanscrit, Bengalese, Kassia, Teloogoo, and Chinese ; in Australia and Poly- nesia they use the Maori, the Tongan, and the Peejeeau ; and in America they employ the Spanish, Chippewayan, Mohawk, Ojibwa, Onei- da and Muncey languages. Six or seven of these are used through the medium of inter- preters ; but the rest have all been mastered by the missionaries, and are the medium of in- struction. Many of them have been for the first time reduced to a written form by the mission- aries, who have compiled grammars and dic- tionaries ; and into them all the Holy Scrip- tures are translated, and have been placed in the hands of the people. In addition to over 1,700 day and Sunday- schools, and several farm and industrial-schools, the Wesleyan Missionary Society sustains a few Normal institutions and some seminaries, where a superior education is imparted. These are situated at Colombo, Jaffna, Auckland, Tonga, Mount Coke, and Westmoreland. — Theological institutions, for training a native ministry, are in very efficient operation at Ton- ga, Sierra Leone, Macarthy's Island, Jaffna, Auckland, Graham's Town, and the Peejee Islands. The number of students last year was about 100. The Society's missionary printing establish- ments are doing a noble work. They are lo- cated at Bangalore, (India,) Eaffraria,D'Urban, Plaatburg and Graham's Town, (Africa,) Jaff- na, (Ceylon,) and the Tonga and Peejee Islands. " The Field " in which the Wesleyan mis- sionaries are employed, as already shown, is emphatically " the world." Results. — These have already been stated ; but they will appear more distinctly in the fol- lowing summary, as given in the" report for 1853 : No. of Circuits, 361 Chapels 1,099 Other preaching places, 1,887 Missionaries and Assistants, . . . 465 Subordinate paid agents, .... 698 Do., unpaid, 3,494 Pull and accredited church members, 108,286 Sabbath-schools 868 Sabbath scholars, 54,737 Day schools 795 Day scholars, 42,172 Attendants on public worship, 362,347; of whom 149,802 are Anglo-Saxons, and 212,545 are of other races. Of the church members in these missions, 32,070 are British and Irfsh ; 1,815 are German, French, Swiss, and Spanish ; 1,711, Asiatic ; 4,046, Australian ; 8,971, Po- lynesian ; 53,831, African and Creole ; and 1,980 N. A. Indians. But, besides what appears in these statistics, the Wesleyan missions have set off mature and, large portions of their work in independent positions, whicli no longer appear in the re- ports as missions. Income.— We present below the income of the society in periods of four years, with the annual average of each : From 1814 to 1817 £50,760 averaBe £1" 440 " 1818 " 1821 114,368 '■ "'■' — 1822 1826 1830 1834 1838 1842 1846 1860 1826 143,283 1829 206,256 1833 216,658 1837 316,781 1841 384,644 1845 422,810 1849 442,090 1863 424,390 1864 114,498 28,689 36,820 61,564 64,164 63,942 96,161 105,702 110,522 106,097 Total in 41 years, £2,836,628 WETTER— WITCHCRAi'T. 779 This exhibits a regular growth of the mission- ary fund.increasingat every poriod,from £12,000 to £106,000, and from £12,177 in 1814, to £114,498 in ISH.— Jackson's Centenary of Methodism ; Alder's Wcsleyan Missions ; Coke's Life ; Minutes of Annual Conferences; Notices and Reports. — Eev. W. Butlek. WETTEE : One of the Banda Islands, a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- pelago. WHAMPOA : A city in China, on the Pearl river, 14 miles below Canton, being the anchorage for foreign shipping. (See China.) WILBERFORCE : Town of liberated Africans, in the parish of St. Paul, Sierra Leone, West Africa. Station of the Church Missionary Society. WITCHCRAFT • " The practices of witches ; sorcery ; enchantments ; intercourse with the devil ; power more than natural." — Webster. " A supernatural power, which per- sons were formerly supposed to obtain posses- sion of, by entering into a compact with the devil." — Buck. " The pretended or supposed possession of supernatural power, in conse- quence of an alleged compact made with the devil ; the object of which was either to pro- cure advantages to the persons thus endowed, or their friends, or to do evil to their enemies, That persons supposed to be possessed of super- natural endowments, in consequence of a com- pact made with Satan, or who pretended to such endowments, have existed, is an opinion that has more or less obtained in every age." — Edinburgh Encyclopedia. There certainly can be no question of the fact that persons have existed who were sup- posed to possess, or who pretended to possess, such powers. Whether the witchcraft forbid- den in the Bible was real or pretended, is a question on which learned men are not agreed. The writer last quoted, says : " Before the Christian era, and at that time, the arch-enemy of mankind was, undoubtedly, for wise pur- poses, allowed powers, and held a visible inter- course with our species, which have long been denied him." But, whether the witches and wizards denounced in Scripture, were real or pretended, their strict prohibition will appear to have been equally wise and necessary, when we consider what terrible consequences have always and everywhere followed the delusion. It is important, however, to observe with this writer, that " the modern witch is a consider- ably different personage from any we read of in the Bible." The ancient witches seem to have been somewhat similar to our modern fortune-tellers, for " they made great gain by their divination ;" and we may add, also, like our modern " .dairvoyants" and " spiritual me- diums," and the African /e?zsA?7!cn also, instead of the innocent persons whom they accuse of witchcraft. Witchcraft was universally be- lieved in Europe till the sixteenth century, and even maintained its ground with tolerable firm- ness till the seventeenth. The latest witchcraft phrensy was in New England, in 16G2, when the execution of witches became a calamity more dreadful than the sword or pestilence. The following description of the supposed cha- racter of the modern witch is given by the writer, in the Edinburgh Encyclopedia : " This compact (with the devil) was not reckoned va- lid, until it had been written out with blood taken from the vein of the person who thus resigned his life to the service of Satan. The individual who in this way became a witch, gave up to him soul and body, and at death he necessarily went to the regions of horror and despair. The devil, on his side, guaranteed that the persons who thus sold themselves to him, should want for nothing they desired in this world ; that they should be avenged upon their enemies ; that they should have the pri- vilege of inflicting disease on whomsoever they wished ; and that, in short, their power of doing evil should be very great, if not unlimit- ed. To accomplish this purpose, a familiar spirit, or gnome, was given them by Satan, which was ready to attend them at a call, and was entirely subservient to their will. The witches could assume any shape they chose, and transport themselves through the air with unspeakable rapidity, on a broomstick, or nut- shell, or any such article, for any purpose, par- ticularly to attend meetings of witches, at which the devil himself always presided." The reader need not be reminded how un- scriptural and absurd is the idea of the pos- session of such power by any human being ; but it is easy to see how the belief in the ex- ercise of such power by persons regarded as witches, should produce the terrible effects de- scribed in the witchcraft excitements of the 16th century ; or that a similar idea, in the mind of an ignorant and superstitious heathen, should hold him in such terrible bondage as that described by missionaries and tourists. But it is a noticeable fact, that the belief in witch- craft has always disappeared with the progress of civilization, education, and true religion. The belief in witchcraft, however, is not con- fined to barbarous tribes. Hindostan, which lays some claim to civilization and learning, is overrun by professors of those mystical incan- tations, called Mantras, and of the occult sci- ences generally. The greater part of the cross accidents in life are attributed to this cause. For the first twelve months, a Hindoo mother carefully conceals her child, lest the evil eye should fall upon it. A highly respectable Hindoo landholder at Saugor, named Baboo Bight, refused to sell one of these men a piece of lanil ; whereupon, the man vowed to conjure the Baboo's life away in a year. He fixed himself on a plain near the Baboo's iand, and every night kept up his incantations, the fire blazing away in his earthen pot. After some time, the Baboo became ill, his appetite being gone, and he having become restless and fever- 780 WITCnCKATT— WORLD. ish. ITe affected to treat the man's incanta- tions with contenlpt ; but they were evidently uppermost in his mind. A low, destructive fever insinuated itself into his system, and, before the twelve months were ended, he died,— evidently the result of a superstitious The terrible influence of the belief in witch- craft, among the natives of Southern and Western Africa, are thus described by Rev. John Leighton Wilson, formerly a missionary of the American Board at Gaboon, now one of the Secretaries of the Presbyterian Board ; and the reader will observe how the African idea of the power of witches corresponds with the foregoing description of the opinions, which formerly prevailed in both Old and New Eng- land : " This idea, or belief, is of such long stand- ing, of such constant recurrence, and so inti- mately interwoven with all their actions, their projects, their reasonings, and their specula- tions, that it seems to form an essential part both of their mental and moral constitution. It ascribes to those supposed to possess this mysterious and hateful art, power not only over the health and lives, but over the property and fortunes of all around them. Every event in life, if adverse or calamitous, is ascribed to this malignant agency. Sickness, no matter what its type or how contracted, the loss of property, no matter by what means, or under what circumstances of mismanagement, the disappointment of cherished hopes, however extravagant or unreasonable they may have been ; the loss of friends by death ; are indis- criminately ascribed to some one who is sup- posed to exercise this, mysterious power. A death seldom occurs in one of their villages, which is not atoned for by the life of some one else. Other feelings than those of heart- felt sorrow are awakened by the sound of the death drum. It is the voice of the accuser that sends a thrill of concern to every heart. No one is exempt from the suspicion of having caused that death. To fly from the scene of anticipated danger, is a virtual confession of the charge of guilt. Uprightness of character and benevolence of heart afford no shield. The intimacy of friendship and the endearment of kindred ties, are alike unavailing. Suspicion may fasten upon the son as the cause of his father's death, or upon the mother as the de- stroyer of her own ofi'spring. How the inhabi- tants of Africa can have any repose at all, un- der such a system, is a matter of surprise to all who are familiar with their superstitious creed." — Dmmonologie, by King James VI. ; Baxter's World of Spirits ; Reginald Scot's Discovery of Witchcraft ; Cotton Matlier, Hutchinson, and Hawkins on Witchcraft ; Rees' Cyclopedia ; Edrnburgli Encyclopedia ; Moffat's Southern Africa, and the Journals of Missionaries and Tourists in Africa ; Spry's Modern India. See also, Africa West. WOBLD : We have furnished ample means in this volume for ascertaining the religious condition of the world, y^e give the follow- ing general survey, which presents an approxi- mation to the world's population, and the pro- portion of different religions, and an enumera- tion of Protestant missionaries and their con- verts, as near as it can be obtained from mis- sionary reports, POPULATION. Asia, incluSing Paciflc Isles (see Asia) . . . 762,806,493 Africa (Emycl/ipedia Britarmica) 100,000,000 Europe (see Europe) 262,800,000 America (^Encyclopedia Sritcmnica) 52,800,000 1,167,906,493 All attempt, however, to ascertain the pop- ulation of the globe, are based to a great ex- tent upon conjecture, as comparatively a small portion of it has been determined by actual census. Balbi makes the total population of the earth 736,700,000 ; but, according to later opinions, based on better acquaintance with China, he underrates that kingdom about 200 millions. It is probable, however, as we inti- mated in the article on Asia, that the above estimate of that continent is too high ; and, comparing all the estimates we have seen, we are inclined to regard that which puts the pop- ulation of the globe, in round numbers, at one thousand millions, as probably near the truth. The following estimate, with reference to reli- gious profession, has been based upon that number ; Christians 200,000,000 Jews 14,000,000 MohammedaBS 140,000,000 Heathen Idolaters 646,000,000 1,000,600,000 The following table will show something of what has been done during the last half cen- tury, for the evangelization of this vast multi- tude : COUNTRIES. a 1 s U d •1 a 1-3 Nominal Converts from Heathenism. Asia 671 613 160 256 177 28,372 27.241 49.729 92,494 13,563 84,168 31.547 46.186 26,513 4,331 122,000 60.000 200,000 1,200,000 Africa Pacific Islands West Indies North America. . Totals 1,673 211,389 190,746 1,672,000 This statement, though far from being com- plete, exhibits a band of over 1,600 mission- aries, the results of whoso labors show over 200,000 members of mission churches, with nearly the same number of scholars in Chris- WUDALEY— YOEUBA. Y81 tian schools, and a nominally Christian popu- lation of not less than a million and a half, all redeemed from heathenism in half a century. But this gives but a very imperfect view of the work accomplished. The foundations have been laid deep and broad, for a rapid advance- ment in the next 50 years. These mission- aries are scattered throughout the world. They have established Christian institutions ; reduced barbarous languages to writing ; es- tablished printing-presses ; and translated and printed the Scriptures in almost every language under heaven. Idolatry, Islamism, Eoraanism, and every false religion, are trembling to their foundations. And, whoever lives to the end oC this century, will see the wonderful works of God in the earth. WUDALEY : Forty miles north of Ah- mednuggur, in Hindostan, — became a station of the American Board in 1845. WUPPERTHAL : A station and a inis- sion colony of the Bhenish Missionary Society, in South Africa, near Clanwilliam. TAVILLE : A Karen village in the pro- vince of Tavoy, Burmah ; an out-station of the Tavoy Mission of the American Baptist Union. YOEUBA, or YAERIBA : The Yoruba country is situated some distance inland from the Bight of Benin, between Dohomey on the west, and the Eiver Niger, or Quorra, on the east and north-east, extending far into the interior. This territory once formed one of the most powerful kingdoms in Western Africa, composed of a large number of pro- vinces, having their separate governments, and owning a sort of allegiance to one king. But, about the year 1817 or 1818, a civil war broke out, originating in a quarrel in the market, between persons of different tribes, about a cowrie's worth of pepper, in conse- quence of which man rose against man, town against town, tribe against tribe, the slave- trade helping it on ; till, in a little more than 30 years, the country which travelers describ- ed as everywhere richly and carefully culti- vated, was turned into a barren wilderness, and the people, previously agricultural and trading, mild in their manners, and hospita- ble to traders, became brutal and ferocious, from constant war, revengeful, thirsting for blood, and ready to barter their fellow-men for gold. From the broken fragments of 145 towns of this kingdom, chiefly of the Bgba province, destroyed about 1825, has arisen the city of Abbeokuta, the location of the Yoruba mission of the Church Missionary Society. This city is situated on the bank of the river Ogun, in latitude 7° 8', about 60 miles from Lagos. It stands in the midst of an immense plain, on the two highest of several detached hills, which ascend gradually on the N. E., and terminate in a bold and perpendicular bluff on the N. and S. W., being surmounted by masses of smooth gray granite. On the sloping sides, and around the bases of these two hills, en- closed within a wall and ditch of about 15 miles in length, are the dwellings of 100,000 inhabit- ants. 'J'he fugitives from the desolated vil- lages fled to this spot, then a wilderness, making the great rock Olumo their resting-place, till at length the forests were cleared away, the town arose ; and in 1829, they were joined by Sodeke, a man of great parts, who was chosen their ruler. The town was called Abbeokuta, from " Abbe," under, and " Okuta," a rode, from its situation. But the people of the vari- ous towns united at Abbeokuta, still have each their governor, their judge, their captains of various grades, and their court-house, forming a sort of federal government. But since the death of Sodeke, they have had no general ruler. Every town in the Yoruba country has its market, where trade is carried on in the vari- ous productions of the country. The people are chiefly agricultural, and they cultivate their fields with care and neatness. But they have made considerable advances in the useful arts, having their blacksmiths, tanners and curriers, saddlers, shoemakers, rope-makers, pot- ters, carpenters, architects, tailors, &c. Religicm. — The religion of the Yorubans is a Polytheism, and they believe largely in de- monology and witchcraft, divination, charms, &c. They have no correct idea of the one true Grod, but seek to fill up the void in their minds by creations of the imagination. Dei- ties, endless in variety, are conjured up, each having his own peculiar sphere of action. Thus they have gods of thunder, lightning, air, earth, rocks, trees, water, rivers, brooks, animals, &c. The chief of these are, Savr go, the god of thunder, raised up by their fears, and Ifa, the god of divination, the fruit of their hopes. The worship of the former begins on Thursday night, and is kept up till Friday morning, with noise, drumming, and licentious dances. Ifa, the god of divination, is consulted on every undertaking. Palm nuts are offered, by means of which the oracle is consulted, by a sort of lot. If the response is unfavorable, a sacrifice must be made ; which puts it in the power of the priest to impose burdens on the people. If, for instance, a house is to be built, Ifa must be consulted ; then the demon of the ground must be propitiated ; then fetishes or charms must be brought, to keep away evil spirits ; and thus the iwhole system becomes burdensome and oppressive. Ifa, the country of Eakanda, bordering on the Nile, said to be the birth-place of the prophet Obbalofun, is the head- quarters of their religion. To this prophet, human sacri- fices were offered on going to war. Such an offering was made at Abbeokuta, but a few years ago, and the practice still exists in other towns, though there it is done away through the Influence of Christianity, Commodore 782 YORUBA— ZULUS. Forbes having, in 1851, induced the chiefs to sign a treaty for ever abolishing human sacri- fices. But, of all their superstitions, the Oro, (or as it is called by different tribes, the Egugun, Egun, or Mumbo-Jumbo,) exercises the most powerful influence upon the people. Although the Yorubans have no distinct ideas of a fu- ture state, yet they appear to believe in the immortality of the soul. It is their universal practice to pray to the spirits of their deceased fathers. The Egun is the supposed spirit of a dead man, representing diflerent parties de- ceased, and called up for different purposes. The part is acted by a man in masquerade, clad in the most grotesque manner. The spirit is supposed to dwell in a sacred grove, called Igballo, in which there is a priest ; and whoever wishes to raise the spirit, goes into this grove, and after various mummeries and incantations, the Egun makes his appear- ance. The system of Oro is intimately connected with the government as well as religion. It is a secret society, bound together by solemn oaths, into which no woman is allowed to enter ; and if she witnesses its mysteries, either by accident or design, she is instantly put to death. By this means the women are kept in subjection. When Egun passes through the streets, or Oro takes possession of the town, the women run to the most obscure places, and hide their faces till it has passed. Through the influence of Oro, also, the whole machinery of the government is carried on, and in its name laws are passed, and their penalties exe- cuted ; and in the latter case, the Oro is said to have taken the culprit and eaten him up, and no questions are asked. Mr. Hinderen describes an execution of this kind, the of- fender being one of the wives of the king of Ibadan, in which about 100 of these Eguns, after dancing around the chiefs house, playing with the woman's head, boiled it, and mixed portions of it with their supper, and then car- ried the polished skull about town several days, the whole ceremony lasting a week. Population. — It would be impossible to as- certain the numbers of the Yoruba people ; but there yet remain many large and populous towns, which have escaped the general devas- tation. The Church Missionary Society, in their report for 18.52,, enumerate four towns, within two or three days of Abbeokuta, with an aggregate of 200,000 inhabitants, and to the eastward, the territory of the Ijebus, con- taining 160,000 ; and beyond these, many more, to all of which the door is open for the entrance of the Gospel, which we may hope is destined, at no distant day, to put an end to these dark and cruel superstitions. All these tribes speak the same language, which will fa- cilitate missionary operations. Many of them have embraced Mohammedanism, which shows that tlcy arc rot strongly entrenched in their superstitions. For an account of the Toruba missions, see Africa Western. ZOHAEITES : A sect ot the Jews, who reject the Talmud ind the authority of the rabbles, and follow the book Zohar. They are sprung from one Shabbathai Levi, who in the middle of the 17th century appeared in Smyr- na, as the Messiah. In Germany and Poland they are called Hasidim or " pietists." In Tur- key they go by the name of Dunmehs or " con- verts," because they make an outward profes- sion of Islamism, though they secretly cherish the Jewish faith, and practice Jewish rites. These latter are most numerous in Thessalonica, where the missionaries of the A. B. 0. F. M. have their attention directed to them, and hope that their conversion may be the door to that of the Mussulmans. Their doctrines, founded upon the Kabbala and the book Zohar, are mystical and somewhat allied to Gnosticism. They pro- fess faith in the Trinity, and some of them ac- knowledge Jesus of Nazareth as the Messiah, in a sense. — Rev. B. M. Dodd. ZULUS : A tribe in South Africa, inhabits ing an extensive territory in the vicinity of Port Natal. The country of the Zulus is pre- eminent for the beauty of its landscapes, the fertility of its soil, and the healthiness of its climate. The mountains, not large, are rather tabular than conical in shape ; and when view- ed from the sea, they rise, table above table, as they recede in the distance, having the summit and the sides, with the intervening plains, covered with verdant groves, or thick shrub- bery, or large fields of green grass. The whole picture is diversified, with here and there a river, or a dark and deep ravine, with fields of Indian corn, or gardens of indigenous grain and fruit. Climate. — The climate is one of the most salubrious and agreeable in the world. In the summer it is of course warm. In the winter it is occasionally cool enough to make a fire agreeable. But for the most of the year the climate is such that one could hardly wish it otherwise. The People. — In 1847, the natives within the colony were estimated at from 80,000 to 100,000, and they were continually increasing. The whole number of the tribe is not known, but it must be very large. Physical Appearance. — The corporeal and phrenological appearance of the natives is, in many respects, highly interesting. The de- graded condition and the employments of the women are, indeed, unfavorable to their reach- ing and preserving a proper stature and form. Still, many of these, as well as the men, are very regular in their features, symmetrical in form, of a full chest and commanding stature. The men stand, walk or run very erect, and they have for the most part a high forehead, and an intelligent and expressive countenance. A few feathers upon the head ; a profusion of beads upon the neck and arms, and scmctimca ZULUS— APPENDIX. 783 upon other parts of the body ; a small piece of the skin of some animal about the loins ; and, perhaps, a brass rin^ upon the wrist and a strap covered with hair about the ankles, constitute as much wearing apparel as most of the na- tives are in the habit of using. Dwellings. — Their houses are simple, small and rude ; hemispherical in shape, having a diameter at the base of some eight or ten feet ; being in height, at the centre and apex, only four or five feet ; having but one aperture, and that at the base, about two feet high, and made to answer for doors, windows and chimney. Language. — The language of the Zulus ap- pears to be very simple, and yet highly philo- sophical i-n its structure ; and, with the excep- tion of a few clicks, mellifluent and euphonic. Moral Character. — Polygamy is practiced here to a very great extent. The principal re- straint upon it seems to be the number of cat- tle that a man can acquire to purchase his wives. The marriageable daughter is counted by the father as so many cattle, and disposed of, not on the principle of affection or prefer- ence, but to the highest bidder. From this system come many evils ; so that an utter dis- regard of all the principles of true fidelity among those who are married, and of virtue among those who are not, is as frequent as it is surprising and sinful. It is one of the chief obstacles against which the Gospel has to contend. Lying and deception are as com- mon as the truth. Cases of stealing from each other are frequent. Murder is occasionally committed, and creates but little excitement. Dancing and singing impure songs are univer- sal. Drinking intoxicating beer, taking snuff, and filthy conversation, are daily indulged by all. Almost every thing relating to their man- ner of life is very filthy, and tends to debase and degrade. Redeeming Qualities — Desire of Improvement. — They are a brave and spirited, though not a revengeful people. None of their number have ever been kidnapped and reduced to sla- very. Perhaps no nation in South Africa has ever exhibited so much skill in military affairs, and so much desire to rule as Chaka and Drn- gaan and their people ; and the natives around Port Natal are their immediate descendants. They are a social people, fond of company and conversation. When a woman begins to harvest, she calls all her neighbors to help her. In many things they exhibit skill, particu- larly in making baskets and mats, shields and spears. And, with a little instruction, they will turn their hands to a variety of useful em- ployments, to which they are unaccustomed. They are an industrious people. It is not an uncommon thing for a single wife to raise for her husband some 50 or 60 bushels of corn in a year. — Missionary Herald for 1847, pp. 399 to 403 ; Annual Report A. B. C. F. M. 1846, p. 81, and 1850, p. 93. For Mission, see Scutli Africa. APPENDIX. Results op Missionakt Labor among the In- dians — Letter from Rev. Mr. Byington. Stockbridgb, Chootaw Natiox, j June 20, 1854. f My Dear Brother — Tou say in your letter of Jan. 1 : " I should like to receive from you a letter conveying your impressions of the pre- sent state and future prospects of the mission- ary work among the Indians." I must confine myself principally to the Choctaws, to whom I was sent by the American Board in Septem- ber, 1820. My impressions are favorable in regard to our missionary work, especially if laborers of suitable qualifications occupy the field. The blessing of God, I have hoped, would attend our exertions here. I should prefer to give you a few leading facts, rather than to offer bare opinions. The character of the facts I wish to present will show you the state of this nation (1) when existing without the Gospel ; (2) after having come to its knowledge. I wish to put honor on the Gos- pel of our Saviour, whenever it can properly be done. I. The state of this nation without the Gospel. — This embraces the whole period of their ex- istence, so far as we know, till within the mem- ory of many now living. (1) They were with- out God, and had no forms of religious wor- ship, with reference to the true God, or any false God. They were ignorant of the (Jod of the Bible. We had no false system of religion to oppose. (2) They had various superstitions, as a belief in witches, conjurors, rain-makers, " doctors," ghosts, fairies, and the like. They had a belief, to some extent, in an evil spirit or being, and a good one. But all this was dim indeed. (3) The value and immortality of the soul were new subjects to them. Many said, " When I die that is the end of me." How true it is, that God only can instruct us about himself as a Spirit, and about ourselves. (4) The nation were ignorant of many things use- ful to them in this life. How could it be otherwise ? A little tribe, hemmed in at home, for ages, through fear of hostile neighbors ; so- much so, that we find but few words in their language borrowed from other tribes. They had no books, no history, no science, no laws, nothing in writing. A few traditions existed among them. Put your soul in just their po- sition, and what would it be ? Put your body there also. (5) They had many wrong usages, such as that women must perform all the hard labor, that polygamy was right, that children could inherit nothing from their father or mo- ther, that it was a disgrace for a warrior to labor in the field, and right to destroy their own infants. (6) They were not only a nation of idle warriors, but of drunkards. Only one man was named to the early missionary who would not get drunk. Men gloried in being drunk as a proof of manhood. (7) They were 784: APPENDIX. poor indeed, at their homes, in all respects. It was rare to see a man who wore shoes, pan- taloons, or a hat. It was rare to see a house with a bed, table, or chairs, or to find at any place good farming or mechanic tools, a good house or farm. Formerly there were no fences. (8) They had no literature, but a branding-iron for calves and colts, and pieces of cane slit up and tied in bundles, usc»d in calling assemblies. Bach piece numbered a sleep. One was to be drawn out and thrown away on each morning, till there was but one, which marked the day of meeting. The chiefs could do nothing more in calling councils. They had songs at dances, and for the sick. However, the words which were sung were few. (9) The murderer was executed without a trial. He and his friends looked for none. He made no attempt to es- cape. He would not disgrace himself or fam- ily by being a coward on such an occasion. He dressed and adorned himself, painting his face and breast, singing, dancing, and whoop- ing, to show his bravery, and would point to the place where the ball should enter his heart. He was not sorry he bad killed a man. Nor were the warriors of his family sorry, if he only died like a brave. His grave was dug, and he lay down in it to see if it would fit his body. (10) They were exposed to diseases, such as the measles and small pox, and knew not how to treat them. They were wasting away. Many were killed as witches, being accused of causing death by their arts. (11) They had no regular form of government, no written constitution or laws. The chief's brave called councils, which often proved to be times and places of great drunkenness. I will stop here, and ask from what region, above or below, is any ray of light seen beam- ing on these benighted men ? It is not neces- sary to say there was then no Sabbath, no church, no Christian school, and no followers of the Saviour, among all the Choctaws at that time. One colored man, a native of Af- rica, who professed to be a disciple of the Lord, was found after a while by the missionaries. Now, here is one of the bays in the great Dead Sea which sin has formed on earth. We en- tered it with the Bible. I must now speak of the nation in its state, II. After having come to a knowledge of the Bible. — These evils have been gradually pass- ing away, not entirely ; many still remain, and there is much for us to do, that we may bear onward, to a better consummation, the bless- ings already received, as well as gain those which are still promised. The improvements made are, (1) The nation now knows the only living and true God. He is acknowledged in various ways, in their General Council, in their courts, as well as in schools, families and churches, and in regard to his Sabbath. (2) Their cruel and base superstitions are passing away. They have formed laws on these sub- jects. (3) The soul of man, its worth, its nar ture, are now widely known. (4) Knowledge has greatly increased, through the schools, books, newspapers, the post-office, and the direct instructions of the different missionaries and other agencies. (5) The warriors have gone to work. They clear land and fence it, and cultivate the same with -horses and oxen. This is a new era for the women, who still help in the field and in other places. It is now a disgrace to lead an indolent life. Marriage between one man and one woman is regulated by law. The descent of property is secured to children. Infanticide is punished. (6) The nation, as you know, have lived under the pro- visions of what is called the " Maine law '' for about 30 years. (7) The comforts of life have increased a hundred fold, in food and raiment, house and home. A legal fence must be ten rails high. (8) They have a large number of books in their own tongue, and many men and women can read and write well in the.English language. They have educated chiefs, judges, and ministers of the Gospel. (9) for murder and other crimes there are special legal enact- ments. Trial by jury is the right of such per- sons. (10) They also have acquired much knowledge about diseases and their most hope- ful and approved remedies, and such as are known to Americans. " Indian " doctoring was no better than Indian farming, when they planted corn without a fence, and without re- garding " rows." (11) They have a regular written constitution, and a national legislative body which enacts laws. There is a judiciary and an executive body. They have large pro- visions for the education of their sons and daughters, as the reports in the Missionary Rooms will abundantly show. We have now nine ministers in our Indian Presbytery, and 13 churches under its care. The members amount to 1,275, and the contributions from these churches, as reported at the last meeting of Presbytery, amounted during a period of ■about 20 months, to $2,431. The Methodist, the Baptist, and the Cumberland Presbyterian brethren all have churches in this nation, and are all doing good in their various fields of labor. Tou must make your own inferences from these facts, of what the blessed Gospel may be hoped to accomplish, even when preach- ed by very imperfect men to "Indians." — Enough is said to show what a people we found when we brought the Gospel here, and what is the nature of its influence on the red man's heart and life. These facts I deem worthy of record, that the infidel may be silent till he can exhibit an example of greater and better suc- cess, through other books in which he believes, that political men may not attempt to legislate the Indian from the earth, because he will not become wise, and that the Church may go on in this blessed w;ork, till it is finished on earth, and the fruits gathered in heaven. Ever yours, Cykus Btingtov IIDEX OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS ABBZOKUTA, , Abenaistrlct, Ahmednuggur, Seroor, Kolapoor, Madura, Map of Southern India and Ceylon, Madras, .... Arcot, .... Tabular View, Church Missionary Society — Madras, Abdool Messech, , . , Syrian Christians, . Names of Missionary Districts, . Wonderful movement in the Tinnevelly Bombay, .... Map of Bengal, Calcutta and North India, Benares, .... Birdwan, Krishnagur, Chunar, Mirut, Agra, Jaunpore, Gorruckpore, Bhagulpur, Hi- malaya, The PuDJaub — Tabular View, Society for the Propaffotion of the Gosp^^ Bishop's College, . . Cawnpore, Madras, Tinnevelly, Bombay, English Baptist Missionary Society, Notices of Stations, Tabular View, London Missionary Society^ Vizigapatam, Madras, Cuddapab, Belgaum, .... Bellai-y, Bangalore, . Mysore, Salem, Combaconum, Coimbatoor, S. Travancore, . Calcutta, .... Chinsurah, Berhampore, . Benares, .... Mirzapore, Surat, Mabi-Kantha, Almora, Tabular View, Free Church of Scotland, . Madras, Bombay, Poonah, Nagpoor, Calcutta, .... Irish Presbyterian Mission, General Baptist Missionary Society , Cuttack, Pooree, Balasor«, .... British support of Idolatry, Free Will Baptist Missionary Society^ Tabular View, American Presbyterian Missions, Map of Northern India, Organization of a church at Lodiana, Tabular View, Wesleyan Missionary Society, Tabular View, Welsh CaZvinistic Methodist Missionary Society^ American Baptist Mission among the Teloogoos, Basle Missionary Society, . Tabular View, » . Berlin and Leipsic Missionary Societies^ JlTorth German Missionary Society, Gossner's Missionary Society, General Tabular View, Letter from Rev. Dr. Scudder, Holapoor, .... HOME MISSIONS, Early Home Mission efforts. Home Missionary Societies in New England, Home Missions of the Presbyterian Church, Average salaries of home missionaries, American Home Missionary Society, Tabular View of receipts, expenditures, labors and results, ... . . Methodist Home Missions, .... Tabular Views, ..... American Baptist Home Missionary Society, Board Domestic Missions Protestant Episcopal Church, ...... Board of Missions Reformed Dutch Church, General Tabular View, .... Honolulu, ...... Hottentots, ...... Huabine, ...... Human Sacrifices, ..... Idol, Idolatry, ...... Indians, ....... INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO Nicobar and Andaman Islands, Sumatra, . Java, Map, . . . . * . Lesser Sunda Islands, .... 891 894 . 396 89T, 400 898 893 401 401 401 402 403 405 406 . 407 . 407 . 407 . 408 . 409 . 409 417, 422 . 422 . 423 . 422 . 424 . 425 , 426 Borneo, Celebes, The Moluccas, Philippine Islands, Formosa, INFANTICIDE, . Among the ancients, In the Pacific Isles, In India and China, JEWS, Missions to, Number of. In Abyssinia, . Present social state, Intellectual position. Religious condition. Reasons for distinct niisslons to, London Jews* Society, British Society, Missions of Presbyterians ia Great Scottish Jews' Society, American Missions to Jews, American Society, General Summary, , Jacobites, . , Jaffa, Jaffna, . . Jaipur, . . , Jains, . . , Jain a, Jassore, . . , Jaunpur, Jesuits, . . , Jooneer, 427 1 Juggernaut, , . 42S j Juju or Jewjew, . 429 430 431 432 433 433 434 435 435 435 435 436 437 441 443 444 444 445 449 449 453 454 454 456 453 453 453 459 459 459 465 465 465 466 467 463 46S 469 469 471 471 473 473 474 474 474 475 475 478 582 479 479 480 481 Britain, Kaff'-aria, , KAFFRES, Government, People^Religions Kandy, . Karens, . Kat River, Kauai, Kharput, . Khundita, Kingston, Kiosk, Kissor, Kissey, . Kolobeng, Kraal, Krishnagur, Kumasi, Kuruman, Kumiss, . Kyouk Phyoo, LABRADOR AND GREENLAND^ Geographical Position, Climate, Ac, Map, . . . . ! Description of the natives, . 'M.is.siom— Danish Mission In Greenland, 3Iora/oian Mission, Discouragements, . First Conversion, , Tabular View, Labrador, .... Tabular View, Lagos, ..... Lahaina, , . . . , Lahainaluna, . . . \ Labor, . .... LEW CHEW, or Loo Choo, Cities and Villages, . The People— Products— Dwellings— Dress— Lan- guage— Arts, Religion— Government— Foreign Policy, Mission of Dr. Battelheim, . LIBERIA— Government, Education, Extent, Map of Liberia, . " , Harbors— Productions — Native Inhabitants— Dis- covery, The Pope's grant not recognized, Portuguese Missions, . Character and influence of the slave-trade, Origin and History of the Colony, Missions in Liberiaj . Lodiana, .... LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY, Origin and History, . Missionaries and Churches, , Translations, . Macao .... PAOB 481 434 , 485 , 486 . 486 486 436 487 487 438 490 490 491 491 493 . 494 . 494 . 494 . 494 . 494 . 494 . 494 . 495 . 495 . 495 . 495 . 495 . 496 . 496 and Moral Condition, 496 497 201, 497 . 497 . 497 . 497 . 498 . 493 . 498 .< 493 . 493 . 498 493 498 493 493 493 499 499 499 500 501 505 505 509 509 509 509 509 509 509 510 511 511 512 513 51S 514 514 514 515 616 513 518 518 519 519 620 790 INDEX. 520 620 621 521 521 522 625 527 528, 629 528 MADAGASCAR, Population, Gorernment, .... Religion and Morals, Mission — London Missionary Society ^ Results of fifteen years' labor, Commencement of persecution, . Breaking up of the Mission, Martyrdom of Rasalama, and violent persecu- tion of others, Continued violence and bloodshed, Escape of a party of converts. Great awakening, and conversion of the Queen's son, ....-• Brightening Prospects, .... MADEIRA, Geographical Description, Government, Ac, }Ak&\oh— Scotch Free Church, Commencement of a work of grace, under the labors of Dr. Kalley, .... Beginning of Persecution — Imprisonment of Dr. Kalley, ..... Departure of Dr. Kalley — ^his return with. Mr. Hewitson, ...... Violent proceedings against the converts, . Mr. Hewitson leaves the Island, Peril and escape of Dr. Kalley, Escape of Converts to Trinidad, Ordination of Mi*. Da Sllva, .... Madras, ..... Madura, ....... Malta, ....... Martaban, Marsovan, ..... Maronites, ...... MARQUESAS ISLANDS Mission to, . . . . * Maui, ....... MAURITIUS, or Isle of France, Mission of the London Missionary Society, *■ , Methodist Episcopal Church, Missions of Mexico, ....... MICRONBSIA—Situation, Extent, Population, Pro- ductions, ...... Mission of the American Board, MINISTERIAL EDUCATION, Tabular View of the number of ministers fromNew England colleges, arranged in periods of 10 years, from 1540 to 1350 .... Decrease of candidates for the ministry, . 542-543 View of the religious state of the country as to the co:nparative number of churches and ministers. Education Societies, . Mirut, .... Mirzapore, MISSIONARY SOCIETY METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH, . Tabular Views, MOHAMMEDANS— In AbyB3inia» Id Turkey, In the world, . Molokai, .... Mollah, .... Mombas, Monrovia, MoQtserrat, Monophysites, , MOSUL— History of Mission, . Letter from Rev. Mr. Marsh, Mufti, . ... Muttra, .... Mynpurie, Mysore, .... Nagpore, Nanking, .... Nassau, .... Nassuck, .... Natal, .... Natal Harbor, D'Urban, Petermaritzburg, Scenery, Climate, Negapatam, Negroes, . Nelloi'e, .... NESTORIANS, . Map of the country of the Nestorians, Nestorius and his followers, . Missionary character of the Nestorians, . 554^555 Their doctrines and character at the commence- ment of missionary operations among them, 555 Mission of the American Board, . . . 556 Tabular View of missionaries, . . 657 Object aimed at- -cooperation of ecclesiastics, 657 British and Rns-tJan proteciion, 641 557 VASV The Press, Translating, iSchoolfl, . . . 558 Preaching, Native Helpers, , . . 559 Opposition, ...... 560 Revivals, ...... 561 Efforts for the Mountain Nestorians, . . 663 Tabular View, ..... 564 Letter from Rev. Dr. Perkins, . . . 564 Netherlands Missionary Society, . . . 565 New Hebrides, ,...'.. 568 New Brunswick, ..... 668 NEW ZEALAND, 569 Map of New Zealand and Tasmania, . . 569 Climate, soil and productions, inhabitants, . 569 Tattooing, . . . . . .569 Religion, . . . . . .570 Missions— (7 A'wrcA Missionary Society^ . . 570 Discouragements, ..... 570 Success, ...... 571 Native prayer meetings, general improvement, . 572 Power of the Gospel to tame savage tribes, . 573 Rapid growth of Christianity, . . , 574 Tabular View, . . . . .575 Society for Propagating the Goapelf . . 576 Wesleyan Missionary Society ^ , . . 576 Tabular View, . . . . .5,81 General Tabular View, .... 6*81 Nicomedia, ...... 5S2 Ningpo, . . , . . . .582 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS, . . .582 Missions — Presbyterian Boards . . . 582 Map of Indian Territory, .... 582 Tabular View, . . . . .585 Am. Bap. Miss. Union, .... 685 Statistics for 1854, .... 591 Miss. Sac, Meth. Epis. Chv/rch, . . . 591 Mission begun by a colored man, , . . 691 Remarkable Success, .... 592 Missions among the Creeks, Snakes, Yellow- heads, Cherokees, .... 594 Among the Choctaws, Putawatomies, Oneidas, Shawnees, Kansas, Iroquois and Kikapoos, . 695 Tabular View, . . . . .597 Wesleyan Missionary Society, . . , 598 Tabular View, . . . . .601 American Board, . . . , .601 General history of early Indian missions , . 601 Mission to the Cherokees, .... 604 Invention of Cherokee Alphabet, . , . 605 Trouble with the authorities of Georgia, . . 607 Arrest, trial, and imprisonment of Messrs. Wor- cester and Butler, , . . 608 Removal of the Indians, .... 609 Choctaws, ...... 611 Tabular View, . . . . .614 Slavery and action of the Board thereon, 618, 614 Osages, ...... 615 Chickasaw, ...... 616 Creeks, Ottawas, ..... 617 Ojibwas, . . . . . .618 Dakotas, . . ... . .620 Tabular Views, . . . . .621 Abenaquis, Pawnees, .... 622 Oregon Indians, ..... 633 Indians in New York, .... 624 Moraman Missions, .... 624 Church Missionary Society, , . . 625 Episcopal Board, ..... 625 American Missionary Association^ . , 625 Tabular View, ..... 626 General Tabular View, . . . 626 Letter from Rev. C. Byiogton, . , . 733 NOVA SCOTIA— Boundaries and extent, . . 626 Church of England in N. S., . . , . 627 Presbyterian Church, .... 627 Church of Scotland, ..... 628 Free Church of N. S. . , , . . 629 Reformed Pres. Church, . . , .629 Baptist Churches ... . 629 Wesleyan Methodists, .... 629 Evangelical Lutherans, .... 929 Oahu, 630 Oceanica, •...,. 630 Ojibwas, ' 630 Old Calabar, . .... 630 OodooTille, . , , , . .631 Oo''fa, . . . . . . .631 ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS MISSIONS TO . . 631 Bishop Gobat and Church Missionary Society, . 631 Mode of conducting missions to decayed churches in the East, . ... 682 INDEX. T91 Bishop Southgate, .... Nazareth, Jerusalem, Nablous, Syra, Sm/rna, Malta Prot. College, . ORISSA, Population — Santals and BhunujaSi Oroomiah, .... Pagan^ ..... Pagoda, ..... Parseeism, The Zand* Avasta— Idolatry of the Parsees, Paris Protestant Missionary Society, . Pasha, Patna, Patriarch, Paumotu, Pedang, . Peking, . Pilgrimage, Polynesia, Pontianak, Poonah, . Port Elizabeth, Port Lokkoh, Port Louis, PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS, . Mode of Organization, .... Mode of transacting business, Tabular View of its Missions, . , . Mission House, ..... Yearly Receipts, ..... Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia Board of Mis- sions, ....... Primitire Methodist Foreign Missionary Society, Puna, ....... Rajah, . .*.... Rangoon, ...... Rarotonga, ...... Regent's Town, ...... Rhenish Missionary Society, .... Safet, ....... Saharanpur, ...... Samarang, ...... SANDWICH ISLANDS— Geographical Description and Map, ...... Population — Social, moral and religious condition, MissiOK — American Boards Preparation at the Islands, Arrival and recep- tion of the missionaries, Obstacles, ...... Reinforcements, Position and influence of chiefs, four years' missionary labor, Regency of Eaahumanu, .... Kapiolani — Visit of Lord Byron, Opposition from foreigners, WhaleshJp, Dolphin, U. S. Sloop Peacock, Vindication of missionaries- further outrages, ..... Letter from the President of the United States, Papal Missionaries, ..... Results of first ten years* missionary labor. Death of Raahumanu, reaction, progress, schools, The Press — Churches — Great Revival — Benevo- lence, ...... Civilization — Government — Laws — Seizure of the Islands by Lord Paulet — ^Independence acknow- ledged, ...... Decrease of population. The Mission dissolved. Summary and Statistics, .... Teachers sent to the Marquesas Islands, . American Missionary Association, . Letter from Rev. Titus Coan, Satara, ....... SEAMEN — Numbers, Origin and progress of missions to, . . Results, . .... Serampore, Seir, ..... Seroor, .... . . Settra Kroo, ...... Sevaguoga, .... Seychelles, .... Shanghai, ... Sheikh, ....... SIAM — Government, Religion, Missions — Presbyterian Boards . ATnerican Baptist Mission^ American Board and America^n Missionary AsHOciationy ..... Sierra Leone, ...... Singapore, ...... Smyrna, . . • . 684 685 635 636 636 686 683 633 638 688 638 638 639 639 639 639 639 689 639 641 642 643 643 644 644 646 646 646 646 647 647 647 648 643 648 643 649 649 650 651 SOCIETY FOR PROPAGATING THE GOSPEL IN FOREIGN PARTS, Average and total receipts in 81 years, Society Islands, .... Southern Baptist Convention, . SOUTH SEA ISLANDS— Geographical Description, Map of Southern Pacific, Productions, . Inhabitants, Language, General Characteristics, Tattooing, Dress, . Mental Capacity, Marriage, Moral Character, The Arts, .... Wars, Government, Religion, Missions — London Missionary Society f Georgian Islands, Tabular View, Society Islands, Tabular View, Hervey Islands, Tabular View, Samoan or Navigator's Islands, Tabular View, .... Austral Islands, . . Tabular View, Paumotu or Pearl Islands, . . Marquesas Islands New Hebrides — Mr. Williams's last voyage and death, ...... Pres. Gh. ofNo^a Scotia — Mission to New Hebri- des, ..... Description of the Island of Aneiteum, Origin and History of the mission, . Tabular View of Western Polynesia, Wesleyan Missionary Society ^ Friendly Islands, . Feejee Islands, Tabular View, Temperance, .... General Tabular View, SOUTH AMERICA— BrazU, . Missions, .... Sunday Schools, . . . Surat, ..... Suttee, ..... Sydney, ..... Syrian Christians, , SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND, Map of part of Syria, Population — Numbers of different sects, Druses, .... Missions of the American Board^ . Wonderful movement at Hasbeiya Tabular View, Tabu, Talapoins, Tamtam, Tamlook, Tananarivo, Tangena, Taouists, ..... 260. TARTARY AND SIBERIA, Geographical Description, Popul atio n — Religion, Missions— United Brethren, Scottish Miss. Soo. . London Missionary Society^ TASMANIA, or Van Dieman's Land, . Map, ..... Mission of the Wesleyan Miss. Soo. Tabular View, Tattooing, Tavoy, Tenasserim. THESSALONIOA, Map of Thugs, . Tinnevelly, Toungoo, Travancore, Trebizond, TURKEY, Boundaries and extent, Turkey in Europe, Turkey in Asia. Turkey in Africa, Population tables, by countries. Population tables by races and creeds, Ecclesiastico-Political Government, Reforms, .... Ditenhage, UNITED STATRS—Kxtent of Territory, 677 678 678 678 678 678 680 681 682 683 688 693 693 697 697 701 701 705 705 7nr 708 708 710 710 711 713 713 714 720 723 724 725 726 727 T29 732 732 733 733 783 733 734 734 734 739 745 743 743 743 743 744 744 744 744 744 746 746 74T 743 569 748 749 749 749 749 750 751 461 750 750 750 750 751 761 751 751 751 751 752 752 752 753 753 792 INDEX. PAGK Physical resources, Commerce, . . . 754 Tabular View, .... TAGS . 769 Population, Public Works, Geographical position, 755 Moravian Mis^ifmiy .... . 771 PecuJiar character of people, . , , . 755 English Baptist iifissMma— Tabular View, . 773 Education, Reiigion, ..... 756 Church, Missionary Society^ . 775 Pauperism and Crime, Temperance Reform, . 757 Soc.for the Prop, of the Gospel, . . 775 ONITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS, . . .768 London Missionary Soeieiy, . 775 Tabular View, 759 General Tabular View, . 775 London Association in aid of, . . . 760 WESLEVAN MISSIONARY SOCIETT, . 775 rartabed, 760 Results, Income, .... . 773 Fedas 760 WITOHOEAFT, . 779 Cizagapatam, . . . . . .760 WORLD— Population— Eeligiona Sects— Table of Weiiington, . . . . . .761 Missions, ..... . 780 ffelsh CalTinistio Methodist Foreign Missionary TORUBA . 781 Society 761 Map of, ..... . 781 WEST INDIES 761 Geography, Religion, . 781 Table of population, . . . . .761 Population, ..... . 782 Description of the Islands, . . . 761-762 Zoharites, ..... . 782 Maps 760,763,764,771 ZULUS— Climate, People, . 782 ilissiosa~Weslei/an MlsHoTiary Sooieti/, . 762 Dwellings, language, moral character. . 783 INDEX TO THE MAPS. A .IcA 6outh of the Equator, A3 ica, Southern, Africa, West, , , Cape Palmaa, . Sherbro and Mendi, , Armenia and Part of Asia Mini Vicinity of Constantinople, Aintab and Vicinity, , Australia, Bormah, Siam, &c., . China, Part of, . Fuhchau, India, Missionary Map of, Western India, Southern India vid Ceylon, Bengal, 10 22 68 9T 104 119 125 140 164 198 244 250 ST8 Northern India, ..... 444 Indian Archipelago and Western Faciflo IsleB, , 48C Labrador and Greenland, .... 498 Liberia, ....,,. 512 Nestorians, Country of, .... 553 New Zealand, ...... 569 North American Indians, Territory of, , , 583 Sandwich Islands, ..... 648 South Sea Islands, .... 678 Syria, Part of, 733 Tasmania, ••.... 669 West India Islands — Jamaica, . . , 760 St. Kitts, Antigua, and Mosquito Coast, . . 763 Tobago and Barbadoea, .... 764 St. Thomas, St. Jan, St. Croix, Surinam, , , 771 Yoruba, .....,, 781 iiivi-nHiif